Project Manual

PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
PEACHTREE INDUSTRIAL BLVD. & SUGARLOAF PKWY.

DULUTH, GA 30097
FITCH #:320103821
Prepared by
AAD:FITCH, INC
16435 N. Scottsdale Rd.
Suite 195
Scottsdale, AZ 85254
TEL.: (480) 998-4200
FAX: (480) 998-7223
Specification Date: 05-29-2015
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
PEACHTREE INDUSTRIAL BLVD. & SUGARLOAF PKWY.

DULUTH, GA 30097
FITCH #:320103821
Prepared by
AAD:FITCH, INC
16435 N. Scottsdale Rd.
Suite 195
TEL.: (480) 998-4200
FAX: (480) 998-7223
Specification Date: 05-29-2015
6/2/15
ARCHITECT SEAL
Division 1, 02361, 02821, Division 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11
SPROUTS FARMERS MARKET

DULUTH
CITY
GA
STATE
6/2/15
SIGNATURE
Architect of Record
Company Name: AAD:Fitch, Inc.
Individual's Name: Blair S. Leach
Address: 16435 N. Scottsdale Road, Suite 195
Tel.: 480-998-4200
Fax: 480-998-7223
Email: blair.leach@fitch.com
DATE
SPROUTS FARMERS MARKET #522

Peachtree Industrial Blvd. & Sugarloaf Pkwy.
Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
CVR
TOC
DIR
LDS
COVER SHEET
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROJECT DIRECTORY
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS
NUMBER OF PAGES
1
4
3
2
DIVISION 0
00010
00020
00030
00100
00150
INVITATION TO BID
SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS
ADMINISTRATIVE REQS-FORMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
1
4
45
1
11
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01100
01210
01220
01230
01310
01320
01322
01330
01400
01420
01500
01600
01631
01700
01731
01770
SUMMARY OF WORK
ALLOWANCES
UNIT PRICES
SUBSTITUTIONS
PROJECT MEETINGS AND COORDINATION
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
ABBREVIATIONS
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
LIST OF OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS
CLEANING
CUTTING AND PATCHING
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
6
2
1
2
4
3
2
7
6
6
4
4
3
3
3
8
DIVISION 02 CIVIL SITE WORK

02020
02230
02260
02300
02305
02361
02400
02510
02530
Updated 05/18/15
EROSION & SEDIMENT CONTROL

SITE PREPARATION AND GRADING
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
EARTHWORK
TRENCH EXCAVATION & BACKFILL
TERMITE CONTROL
AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
WATER DISTRIBUTION
SANITARY SEWER
3
4
2
6
4
4
3
7
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION
DIVISION 02 CIVIL SITE WORK (continued)
02585
02630
02741
02745
02751
02770
02813
02821
02870
02920
TRAFFIC CONTROL
STORM DRAINAGE
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
PAVEMENT MARKINGS & REMOVAL
CONCRETE PAVEMENT, CURB & SIDEWALK
ASPHALT SEAL COAT
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
CHAIN-LINK FENCING
SITE FURNISHINGS
LANDSCAPING
NUMBER OF PAGES
3
7
4
2
5
3
8
3
4
11
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03300
03304
03360
03363
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
INTEGRAL COLOR CONCRETE
SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES
SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES (ALTERNATE)
13
14
9
9
DIVISION 04 MASONRY
04220
04810
04811
ARCHITECTURAL STONE VENEER

CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT ASSEMBLIES
FACE BRICK
7
12
6
DIVISION 05 METALS
05120
05210
05310
05400
05500
05515
STRUCTURAL STEEL
STEEL JOISTS
STEEL DECK (Roof Deck)
HEAVY GAUGE FRAMING
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS
LADDERS
6
3
4
4
7
5
DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTIC

06100
06200
06402
06611
ROUGH CARPENTRY
FINISH CARPENTRY
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOPS
5
4
5
4
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07115
07200
07214
07241
07411
07540
Updated 05/18/15
MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING - TREMCO

MISCELLANEOUS BUILDING INSULATION
FOAMED IN PLACE MASONRY WALL INSULATION
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM - CLASS PB
STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS
TPO ROOFING SYSTEM
4
5
3
4
3
8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION
DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE (continued)
07620
07720
07920
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

ROOFING ACCESSORIES
CAULKING, SEALANTS AND JOINT CLOSURES
NUMBER OF PAGES
4
3
7
DIVISION 08 DOORS AND WINDOWS

08110
08111
08210
08310
08311
08331
08411
08461
08620
08710
08800
08870
INTERIOR STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
WOOD DOORS
IMPACT DOORS AND FRAMES
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS
ALUMINUM DOORS, FRAMES AND WINDOWS
SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
UNIT SKYLIGHTS
FINISH HARDWARE
GLASS AND GLAZING
WINDOW FILM
3
5
4
3
3
6
6
5
4
6
6
6
DIVISION 09 FINISHES
09215
09220
09221
09250
09305
09310
09512
09720
09831
09911
09963
LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING

STUCCO
WESTERN ONE KOTE SYNTHETIC STUCCO
GYPSUM WALL BOARD ASSEMBLIES
THIN-SET MORTAR (INTERIOR)
CERAMIC AND QUARRY TILE (INTERIOR)
ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT LAY-IN (NON-RATED)
PREFINISHED FRP PANELS
EPOXY COATINGS (CERAMIC CARPET)
PAINTING
SPECIAL COATINGS (ELASTOMERIC)
5
5
5
11
3
8
5
4
5
13
6
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
10155
10265
10802
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PROTECTIVE BUMPER SYSTEM AND WALL/CORNER GUARDS
TOILET ACCESSORIES
5
3
4
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT
11160
DOCK FACILITIES
DIVISION 12 NOT USED

DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13915
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
10
DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT USED

Updated 05/18/15
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL
15010
15030
15050
15055
15100
15135
15140
15190
15200
15250
15400
15411
15412
15420
15440
15453
15460
15488
15782
15834
15850
15857
15885
15891
15895
15910
15932
15971
15990
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

ELECTRICAL COORDINATION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
VALVES
METERS AND GAUGES
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
MECHANICAL VIBRATION ISOLATION
MECHANICAL INSULATION
SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT
WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
MECHANICALLY JOINED PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS
DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PLUMBING PUMPS
WATER HEATERS
NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
AIR CURTAINS
FANS
DESICCANT WHEEL UNITS
AIR CLEANING
METAL DUCTWORK
COMMERICAL KITCHEN HOODS
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
17
2
6
8
6
3
4
6
8
7
10
13
4
9
6
15
4
7
8
4
4
8
2
15
6
8
3
6
6
DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL
16010
16050
16055
16072
16075
16140
16170
16180
16421
16425
16450
16511
16521
16720
16740
16745
16900
Updated 05/18/15
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
WIRING DEVICES
GROUNDING AND BONDING
EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS
PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRIC UTILITY SERVICE
POWER DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT (600V)
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
INTERIOR LIGHTING
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
PROVISIONS FOR TELEPHONE
PROVISIONS FOR DATA
BUILDING SYSTEMS CONTOL
15
24
5
6
6
9
9
2
2
6
10
9
7
2
2
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
APPENDIX 'A'
SOILS REPORT
APPENDIX 'B'
REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS
END TABLE OF CONTENTS
Updated 05/18/15
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
This page intentionally left blank
Updated 05/18/15
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PROJECT DIRECTORY
LANDLORD / DEVELOPER:
FUQUA DEVELOPMENT LLC

11 Piedmont Center
Atlanta, GA 30305
Attn:
Bill Aiken
Tel.:
(409) 907-1709
Email:
TENANT / OWNER:

5455 East High Street, Suite 111
Phoenix, AZ 85054
Attn:
Joe Leslie
Tel.:
(480) 814-8016
Fax:
(480) 385-2354
Email: joeleslie@sprouts.com
ARCHITECT:
AAD:FITCH, INC
16435 N. Scottsdale Rd., Suite 195
Attn:
Dale Zapata
Tel.:
(480) 998-4200
Fax:
(480) 998-7223
Email: dale.zapata@fitch.com
CONSULTANTS:
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER:
A.V. SCHWAN & ASSOCIATES, INC.

6000 East Thomas Road, Suite 1
Attn:
Mo Kateeb
Tel.:
(602) 265-4331
Fax:
(480) 663-1788
Email: mkateeb@avschwan.com
PLUMBING ENGINEER:
HENDERSON ENGINEERS, INC.

5343 North 16th Street, Suite 460
Phoenix, AZ 85016
Attn:
Kelly Hyde
Tel.:
(602) 336-5231
Fax:
(602) 336-5201
Email: kelly.hyde@hei-eng.com
ELECTRICAL / MECHANICAL
ENGINEER:

5343 North 16th Street, Suite 460
Phoenix, AZ 85016
Attn:
Kelly Hyde
Tel.:
(602) 336-5231
Fax:
(602) 336-5201
Email: kelly.hyde@hei-eng.com
PROJECT DIRECTORY
DIR-1

ADDRESS
CITY, STATE
PROJECT #:
REFRIGERATION ENGINEER:
HILL PHOENIX
221 South Berry Street
Brea, CA 92821
Attn:
Scott Smith
Tel.:
(714) 555-5555
Fax:
(555) 555-5555
Email: scott.smith@hillphoenix.com
GOVERNMENTAL AGENCIES:
MUNICIPALITY:
CITY OF DULUTH
3167 Main Street
Duluth, GA 30096
Tel.:
(770) 476-1790
Fax:
(770) 814-3008
WATER & SEWER:
WATER RESOURCES DEPARTMENT

684 Winder Highway
Lawrenceville, GA 30045
Tel.:
(678) 376-6906
FIRE DEPARTMENT:
GWINNETT COUNTY FIRE MARSHALL

408 Hurricane Shoals NE
Attn:
Fire Marshall
Tel.:
(678) 518-4980
Fax:
(678) 518-4901
Email: firemarshal@gwinnettcounty.com
HEALTH DEPARTMENT:
GWINNETT COUNTY DEPT. OF PLANNING/DEVELOPMENT

455 Grayson Highway #600
Tel.:
(770) 963-5132
Fax:
(770) 339-4282
ELECTRIC:
Jackson
EMC
GEORGIA POWER COMPANY
11675 Willis Road, Building 1
Alpharetta, GA 30009
Tel.:
(888) 660-5890
Contact: www.georgiapower.com
GAS:
GEORIGA NATURAL GAS

P.O. Box 440667
Kennesaw, GA 30160-9512
Tel.:
(888) 442-7288 x.4035
Contact: Rod Robbins
customerservice@gng.com
TELEPHONE:
AT & T
Tel.:
(800) 288-2020
Contact: www.att.com
PROJECT DIRECTORY
DIR-2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821

SHEET NUMBER
SHEET NAME
GENERAL
T1.0
EX1.0
TITLE SHEET
EXIT PLAN
SITE
ARCHITECTURAL
SD1.0
SD1.1
SD2.1
ARCHITECTURAL
F1.0
F1.1
F1.2
A1.0
A1.1
A2.0
A3.0
A4.0
A5.0
A5.1
A5.2
A5.3
A5.4
A6.0
A6.1
A6.2
A6.3
A6.4
A6.5
A7.0
A7.1
A7.2
A7.3
A7.4
A7.5
A8.0
SITE PLAN (REFERENCE)

HARDSCAPE, DOCK PLANS AND SITE DETAILS
SITE DETAILS
FIXTURE PLAN - SCHEME 1F DATED 3-23-15

ENLARGED FIXTURE PLANS DIRECT BUY VENDORS AND
PROVIDERS
FIXTURE SCHEDULE
FLOOR PLAN
FLOOR FINISH PLAN
REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
ROOF PLAN
EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS
BUILDING SECTIONS
WALL SECTIONS
WALL SECTIONS
WALL SECTIONS
WALL SECTIONS
MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS
ROOM FINISH AND DOOR SCHEDULE AND NOTES
INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS
ENLARGED DCOR ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS
ENLARGED DCOR ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS
DCOR DETAILS
INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & ENLARGED RESTROOM PLANS
MILLWORK DETAILS

LDS - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
STRUCTURAL
S1.0
S1.1
S2.0
S3.0
S3.1
S4.0
S5.0
S5.1
GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES

TYPICAL DETAILS
FOUNDATION PLAN
ROOF FRAMING PLAN
TOWER ROOF & CANOPY FRAMING PLAN
FOUNDATION DETAILS
FRAMING DETAILS
WALL SECTIONS
ELECTRICAL
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6A
E6B
E6C
E7
E8
E9
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS, LEGENDS AND NOTES

ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN
ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS PLAN
ELECTRICAL REFRIGERATION PLAN
ELECTRICAL ROOF POWER PLAN
ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE DIAGRAM
ELECTRICAL POWERWALL EMS DIAGRAMS
ELECTRICAL POWERWALL EMS DIAGRAMS
PANELBOARD SCHEDULES
LIGHTING AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES
ENERGY CALCULATIONS LIGHTING
MECHANICAL
AC0
AC1
AC2
AC3
AC4
AC5
AC5.1
AC5.2
AC6
AC7
MECHANICAL NOTES AND SYMBOLS

MECHANICAL SCHEDULES
MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN
MECHANICAL ROOF PLAN
MECHANICAL DETAILS
MECHANICAL HOOD SCHEDULES AND DETAILS
DUCT WRAP DETAILS AND ICC-ES REPORT
MECHANICAL COMPLIANCE
FIRE PROTECTION
FA1
FA2
FIRE ALARM GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS, AND SEQUENCE OF

OPERATIONS
FIRE ALARM FLOOR PLAN

LDS - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PLUMBING
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
REFRIGERATION
RS.0
R1.0
R2.0
R2.1
R2.2
R3.0
R4.0
R5.0
R5.1
R6.0
R7.0
PLUMBING SCHEDULES, NOTES AND SYMBOLS

PLUMBING WASTE & VENT FLOOR PLAN
PLUMBING WATER & GAS FLOOR PLAN
PLUMBING ROOF PLAN
PLUMBING DETAILS
PLUMBING RISER DIAGRAMS
(FOR REFERENCE ONLY)
REFRIGERATION SCHEDULE DX
FIXTURE / ELECTRICAL PLAN
PLUMBING PLAN
REFRIGERATION / PIPING PLAN
REFRIGERATION CONTROL DIAGRAM
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
WIRING DIAGRAMS
CASE DETAILS
CASE SECTIONS AND COIL DETAILS
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT PLAN
EMS CPC EINSTEIN DETAILS
END OF LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

LDS - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 01230 SUBSTITUTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
1.3
Substitution: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the
Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to
accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products,
materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.
The cost or credit for each substitution is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to
incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
PROCEDURES
A.
B.
C.
1.4
Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the
substitution into Project.
1.
Include as part of each substitution, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items
incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of substitution.
Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the
status of each substitution. Indicate if substitutions have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later
consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to substitutions.
Execute accepted substitutions under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
Substitutions typically are not permitted unless approved during bid process by addendum. If a
substitution is required (Contractor to provide justification statement), it must be of equal or greater
quality than the product it replaces. At no time will Owner pay additional costs associated with the
aforementioned substitution.
When a specific manufacturer, trade name or material is specified, or indicated, it is to establish a
standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. If the General Contractor desires
to use a manufacturer, trade name or material other than that specified, he shall request approval of
such substitution, in writing to the Architect. Requests for substitutions shall be in the hands of the
Architect no later than seven (7) days prior to the stated date of bidding as identified in the Contract
Documents. Items found acceptable for bidding will be approved by a duly authorized Addendum issued
by the Architect. Substitutions will only be considered if they are prepared on a copy of the "Substitution
Request Form" attached and submitted completely executed seven (7) days prior to bid.
Submittals for approval of substitute manufacturer, trade name or materials shall contain sufficient
information, descriptive brochures, drawings, samples or other data as is necessary to provide direct
comparison to the specified products. Each submittal shall be well marked and identified as to the type
and kind of items being submitted for approval. It is the sole responsibility for the Bidder to submit
complete descriptive and technical information so that the Architect can make proper appraisal. Lack of
proper information will be sufficient cause for rejection. References to catalogs that the Architect may or
may not have will not be accepted. Contractor shall provide a detailed schedule of proposed
substitutions (as listed in 3.1 of this Section), and provide with each substitution the Substitution Request
Form. Form shall be completely filled out by Contractor.
SUBSTITUTIONS
01230 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.5
Interferences: Substitutions shall not be offered unless a thorough check is made of all related items and
interferences, revised arrangements and other changes that may result. Prepare drawings of revised
equipment and piping arrangements caused by substitutions. Such drawings shall be equal in quality to
Contract Drawings. The cost of supplying drawings shall be included by the General Contractor in his
estimate of proposed substituted materials.
Responsibility: A General Contractor offering a substitution shall accept responsibility for its effect on the
work of all trades, including any possible delays in completion time of Project. All costs of changes in the
work of other trades and Drawings, etc., affected by inclusion of General Contractor requested
substitutions shall be paid by the General Contractor requesting approval of such substitution.
If alternate manufacturers, trade names or materials are not so approved for the Base Bid the General
Contractor may, at his option, offer alternate manufacturers, trade names or materials at the time of
bidding. This offer shall be on the General Contractor's letterhead and shall state the type of substitution
in detail together with net addition to or deduction from the Base Bid.
Award of the Contract in accordance with Contract Documents requires that the specified manufacturers,
trade names or materials and equipment shall be furnished and installed.
Unless specifically submitted and approved in accordance with above, substitutions will not be allowed.
MATERIAL REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
Where material is specified solely by reference to Standard Specifications, the General Contractor shall,
if requested by the Architect, submit to the Architect, for his approval, data on all such material proposed
to be incorporated into the work of the Contract listing the name and address of vendor, the
manufacturer or producer, and the trade or brand names of such materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

A.
See Section 00030 for Substitution Request Form. This form is to be used during the bidding process
only. No substitutions will be reviewed after contract is awarded except for special extenuating
circumstances as approved by the Owner or the Architect to submit.
END OF SECTION 01230
SUBSTITUTIONS
01230 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 01310 PROJECT MEETINGS AND COORDINATION

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Coordination Drawings.
2.
Project meetings.
COORDINATION
A.
B.
C.
1.3
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to

ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations,
included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and
operation.
1.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation
of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own
installation.
2.
Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for
coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.
1.
Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is
required.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with
other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly
progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Preparation of Contractors Construction Schedule.
2.
Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
3.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
4.
Progress meetings.
5.
Preinstallation conferences.
6.
Startup and adjustment of systems.
7.
Project closeout activities.
PROJECT MEETINGS
A.
B.
General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at project site, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of
date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.
2.
Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3.
Minutes: Contractor to record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the
meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within five days of the
meeting.
Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a
time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than two (2) weeks after start of construction.
Preconstruction conference to be held at project site or another convenient location. Conduct the
meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and
its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the
01310 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar Project and authorized to conclude
matters relating to the Work.
2.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a.
Tentative construction schedule.
b.
Phasing.
c.
Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
d.
Designation of key personnel and their duties.
e.
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
f.
Procedures for requests for interpretations (RFls).
g.
Procedures for testing and inspecting.
h.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
i.
Distribution of the Contract Documents.
j.
Submittal procedures.
k.
Preparation of Record Documents.
l.
Use of the premises.
m.
Owner's occupancy requirements.
n.
Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
o.
Construction waste management.
p.
Parking availability.
q.
Office, work, and storage areas.
r.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
s.
First aid.
t.
Security.
u.
Progress cleaning.
v.
Working hours.
3.
Minutes: Contractor to record discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute meeting minutes to
everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect with-in 5 days of the meeting.
Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a pre-installation conference at project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1.
Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by
the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have
preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.
2.
Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity
under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a.
The Contract Documents.
b.
Options.
c.
Related requests for interpretations (RFIs).
d.
Related Change Orders.
e.
Purchases.
f.
Deliveries.
g.
Submittals.
h.
Review of mockups.
i.
Possible conflicts.
j.
Compatibility problems.
k.
Time Schedules.
l.
Weather limitations.
m.
Manufacturers written recommendations.
n.
Warranty requirements.
o.
Compatibility of materials.
p.
Acceptability of substrates.
q.
Temporary facilities and controls.
r.
Space and access limitations.
s.
Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
t.
Testing and inspecting requirements.
01310 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
D.
u.
Installation procedures.
v.
Coordination with other work.
w.
Required performance results.
x.
Protection of adjacent work.
y.
Protection of construction and personnel
3.
Contractor to record and distribute minutes of significant conference discussions, agreements, and
disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.
4.
Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate
whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene
the conference at earliest feasible date.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with
preparation of payment requests.
1.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor,
supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or
performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the
conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items
of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of
Project.
a.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine
whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to
Contractors Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be
expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule
revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed
within the Contract Time.
b.
Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
i.
Interface requirements.
ii.
Sequence of operations.
iii.
Status of submittals.
iv.
Deliveries.
v.
Off-site fabrication.
vi.
Access.
vii.
Site utilization.
viii. Temporary facilities and controls.
ix.
Work hours.
x.
Hazards and risks.
xi.
Progress cleaning.
xii.
Quality and work standards.
xiii. Status of correction of deficient items.
xiv. Field Observations.
xv.
Requests for Interpretations (RFIs)
xvi. Status of proposal requests.
xvii. Status of Change Orders.
xviii. Documentation of information for payment requests.
3.
Minutes: Contractor to record and distribute the meeting minutes to Owner, Architect, and all other
attendees of the meeting.
4.
Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have
been present.
a.
Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting
where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule
concurrently with the report of each meeting.

01310 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821

PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

01310 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1.
Contractors Construction Schedule.
2.
Submittals Schedule.
3.
Daily Field Condition reports.
4.
Field condition reports.
See Division 1 for preparing Contractor's Construction Schedule.
See Division 0 for submitting the Schedule of Values.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
1.3
Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and
controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and
resources.
1.
Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early
start and finish times.
2.
Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3.
Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network
Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that
establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
Major Area: A separate building, or a similar significant construction element.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Submittals Schedule: Submit an electronic file or three (3) physical copies of schedule to the Owner
fourteen (14) calendar days following the contract award, arranged in chronological order by dates
required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
1.
Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
2.
Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Final
Completion.
1.
Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early
completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows
in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1.
Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner.
Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not
limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.
Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission,
prepare a time-impact analysis to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project
schedule.
Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
1.
Scheduled date for first submittal.
2.
Specification Section number and title.
3.
Submittal category (action or informational).
4.
Name of subcontractor.
UPDATED: JULY 8, 2013

01320 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
G.
H.
I.
J.
1.4
5.
Description of the Work covered.
6.
Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval
The contractor shall submit to the Owner within fourteen (14) calendar days following the contract award
a graphic representation of the proposed construction schedule. This chart shall be as detailed as is
practical and " shall show:
1.
the project name
2.
the contractor's name,
3.
the date of submittal,
4.
each major term of work,
5.
the proposed start date, duration, and completion date of each item of work,
6.
the actual start date, duration and completion date of each item of work.
7.
Application for Payment will not be processed until proposed construction schedule is submitted to
the Owner
This chart shall be updated monthly and an electronic file or three (3) physical copies shall be submitted
along with the Contractor's Application for Payment Any automated schedule system currently used and
containing the above information, shall be acceptable.
Daily Construction Reports: Submit an electronic file or two (2) copies at weekly intervals.
Field Condition Reports: Submit an electronic file or two (2) copies at time of discovery of differing
conditions.
COORDINATION
A.
B.
Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction
activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts,
Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.
1.
Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved.
2.
Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in
proper sequence.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
REPORTS
A.
B.
Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording events at Project site, including
the following:
1.
Contractors name.
2.
Project location.
3.
Describe the work in progress for the day.
4.
List of subcontractors.
5.
Number of workmen (by trade) employed on the project that day.
6.
High and low temperatures and general weather conditions (include morning and mid-day
temperatures, cloud cover, wind conditions and precipitation).
7.
Accidents.
8.
Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
9.
Meter readings and similar recordings.
10. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
11. Services connected and disconnected.
12. Equipment or system tests and startups
The contractor shall submit to the Owner at the end of each week Daily Progress Reports for each day of
that week. A report shall be submitted for each day of the contract duration even if no work is performed.
Copies of reports shall be maintained on the site by the Project Superintendent.

01320 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the
Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for information (RFI) (to the
Owner). Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for
changing the Contract Documents.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTORS CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE UPDATES

A.
B.
Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual
construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress
meeting.
1.
Revise schedule immediately after each meeting, or other activity, where revisions have been
recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.
2.
Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to,
changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3.
As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and
inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule
responsibility.
1.
Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2.
When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same
locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the
Work, and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.

01320 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 01322 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1.
Preconstruction digital photographs.
2.
Construction photographs
Construction photographs are required in addition to all other written documentation and drawings, and
in no way replace standard written documentation on this project.
See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting digital media (CD-ROM) as Project Record
Documents at Project closeout.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Construction Photographs: Photographs are to be taken weekly and sent electronically to Owner the
same day they are taken
1.
Identification: Provide a file name/label of each image with the following information:
a.
Name of Project
b.
Date photograph was taken if not date stamped by camera.
c.
Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation
or story of construction.
d.
Unique sequential identifier.
2.
Digital Images: Submit a complete set of digital high resolution image electronic files as a Project
Record Document on CD-ROM at project closeout. Identify electronic media with date and
locations that photographs were taken. Submit images that have same aspect ratio as the sensor,
uncropped.
USAGE RIGHTS
A.
All photographs become the property of the Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA
A.
Digital Images: Provide images in uncompressed JPG format, produced by a digital camera with
minimum sensor size of 6.0 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 6 megapixels.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A.
B.
C.
Key Plan: Submit for Architect's approval, a key plan of Project site and buildings with notation of
vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of
construction. Include same label information as corresponding set of photographs.
General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field and that are in focus, to clearly
show the Work. Photographs with dark, blurry, or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted, and are to be
retaken as soon as possible.
Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without
alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.
UPDATED: JUNE 8, 2012
01322 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.
2.
D.
E.
F.
Date and Time: Include date and time in filename for each image.
Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images on CD-ROM in the field office at Project site,
available at all times for reference. Identify images same as for those submitted to Architect.
Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of excavation, demolition. construction, take color,
digital photographs of Project site and surrounding properties including existing items to remain during
construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect.
1.
Take photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work.
2.
Take photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical
conditions at start of construction.
Construction Photographs: Take weekly digital photographs per the key plan and as directed by Architect
or Owner.
Additional Photographs: Architect may issue requests for additional photographs, in addition to
construction photographs specified. Additional photographs will be provided at no cost to the Owner.
1.
Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
Special events planned at Project site.
b.
Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses.
c.
Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site.
d.
Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work.
e.
Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance.
f.
Owner's request for special publicity photographs
01322 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.2
This Section outlines, in general, as a convenience to the General Contractor, submittals required before
commencing construction or during the course of construction of the Project. This Section is
complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions and nothing herein
shall be considered to waive any requirements of the General Conditions or Supplementary General
Conditions.
See Section 01600 for provisions concerning submittals of Product Data.
See Section 00030 for administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings,
Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
See Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Submitting schedules and reports,
including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.
See Division 1 section "Quality Control Requirements" and individual specification sections for submitting
test and inspection reports and for mockup requirements.
See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for Submitting warranties.
See Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
The contractor shall execute and submit to the Architect with such promptness to cause no delay in his
own work or in the work of others, shop drawings, or setting drawings, or product data, or samples, or
Conformance Submittals required for the Work. The Architect shall review the shop drawings, or product
data, or samples, or setting drawings with reasonable promptness. The contractor shall make any
corrections required and if necessary, resubmit shop drawings, or product data, or samples, or setting
drawings for the Architects approval. Shop drawings, settings drawings or other action submittals
required for this work are delineated in the specifications.
The General Contractor will be held responsible for any delay in progress of the work due to his failure to
observe these requirements. Time for completion of the Contract for Construction will not be extended
on account of his failure to promptly submit shop drawings, product data and samples.
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COST BREAKDOWN
A.
B.
C.
1.3
Within fourteen (14) calendar days of execution and delivery of the contract for construction and before
the first partial payment is made, the General Contractor shall deliver to the Architect and Owner a
Construction Progress Schedule in a bar chart form satisfactory to the Architect and Owner, showing the
proposed dates of commencement and completion of each of the various subdivisions of the work
required under the Construction Documents.
Submit an itemized breakdown of the costs of the various subdivisions of the work on AlA Document
G702 and G703 for the purpose of evaluating the work completed for each monthly payment. Each
monthly Payment Request shall be submitted in the same form with all data required by the form
completed.
Submit all documents/data to Owner/Architect required by this Specification Manual within thirty (30)
calendar days after signing contract for construction or issuance of a work order.
PROGRESS REPORT
A.
Submit monthly an updated Progress Report indicating work completed during the preceding month and
indicate any revisions to the Construction Progress Schedule. Submit three (3) copies with the Request
for Payment or an electronic (full color) copy can be sent to Owner and Architect for review and approval.
01330 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.4
PROGRESS CHARTS
A.
1.5
Each month the General Contractor shall submit three (3) copies of a graphic progress chart. Adjust the
progress chart each month to graphically exhibit the status of each phase of the work, corrected to show
any differentials in starting and completion dates included in the original chart. Submit three (3) copies
with the Request for Payment.
SHOP DRAWING LOG
A.
B.
1.6
Each month the General Contractor shall submit copies of the shop drawing log to Owner Construction
Manager for review.
The example contained in Section 00030 is to be used as a record shop drawing and sample log which
is to be routed as directed and be kept current and available on site.
DAILY REPORTS
A.
1.7
The General Contractor shall maintain a written daily log at the job site, with copies provided to the
Owner, submitted weekly. Report to include but not necessarily limited to the following:
1.
Classification and number of workmen.
2.
Governmental Authorities at the site.
3.
Notification 48 hours prior to concrete pours.
4.
Description of work accomplished.
5.
Climatic conditions.
SHOP DRAWING, SAMPLE REQUEST FOR INFORMATION LOGS
A.
1.8
The attached Shop Drawing, Sample and RFI Logs located in Section 00030 are to be maintained and
routed.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
1.9
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action.
Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
A.
B.
C.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction

activities.
1.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and
related activities that require sequential activity.
2.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing
will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
a.
Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other
submittals until related submittals are received.
Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related
construction activities.
Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals (of rejected
submittals or revise and resubmit submittals), as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's
receipt of submittal.
1.
Initial Review: Allow ten (10) working days (unless otherwise noted) for initial review of each
submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with Subsequent submittals is required. Architect will
advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
01330 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
a.
If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.
Resubmittal Review: Allow ten (10) working days for review of each resubmittal.
No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals
enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
Electronic (full color) submittals are accepted in lieu of actual physical submittals. Architect may require
a physical submittal for review or approval.
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each physical submittal for identification.
1.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2.
Provide a space approximately 4 x 5 on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review
and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
3.
Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a.
Project name.
b.
Date.
c.
Name and address of Architect.
d.
Name and address of Contractor.
e.
Name and address of subcontractor.
f.
Name and address of supplier.
g.
Name of manufacturer.
h.
Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
i.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
j.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k.
Other necessary identification
Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents
on submittals.
Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect
observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final
submittal.
Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit
each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals without review or discard
submittals received from sources other than Contractor.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators,
installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction
activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect or Engineer
of Record.
Shop drawing review by Architect will be general. It shall not relieve the General Contractor of
responsibility for accuracy of such shop drawings, nor proper fitting, construction of work, furnishing of
materials or work required by Contract Documents and not indicated on shop drawings. Shop drawing
approval shall not be construed as approving departures from Contract Documents.
Deliver no material to the building site prior to receipt of Architects written approval. Furnish materials
equal in every respect to approved samples and execute work in conformity therewith.
The approval or acceptance of samples will not preclude the rejection of any material upon the discovery
of defects in same prior to the final acceptance of the completed work.
After a material has been approved, no change in brand or make will be permitted unless satisfactory
written evidence is presented to, and approved by, the Architect that the manufacturer cannot make
scheduled delivery of approved material, or that material delivered has been rejected and substitution of
suitable material is an urgent necessity or that other conditions are apparent which indicate approval of
such substitute materials to be in best interest of Owner.
The right is reserved to require submission of samples of any material or any material lists whether or not
specifically specified in the Specifications.
2.
3.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
01330 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
Electronic (full color) submittals are accepted in lieu of actual physical submittals. Follow procedures for
physical submittal in an electronic review process, however only one copy is required.
Number of Copies: Submit six (6) copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return
four (4) copies minimum to the Contractor. Mark up and retain the remaining returned copies as a Project
Record Document.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of
product or equipment.
1.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not
suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2.
When product data, consisting of manufacturers printed literature is required to be submitted to
Architect, it shall be submitted in original form. Any fading type of reproduction will not be
accepted. A minimum of six (6) each is required.
3.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
4.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
b.
Manufacturer's product specifications.
c.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
e.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
f.
Printed performance curves.
g.
Operational range diagrams.
h.
Compliance with specified referenced standards.
i.
Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop
Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1.
Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
Dimensions
b.
Identification of products
c.
Fabrication and installation drawings
d.
Roughing-in and setting diagrams
e.
Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring
f.
Shopwork manufacturing instructions
g.
Templates and patterns
h.
Schedules
i.
Notation of coordination requirements.
j.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement
2.
Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
3.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings
on sheets at least 8-1/2 x 11 (215 x 280 mm) but no larger than 30 x 40 (750 x 1000 mm).
Samples: Submit physical samples of materials for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture of the actual
component to be delivered and installed.
1.
Comply with requirements in Division 1, Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups.
2.
Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories, manufacturers
color charts, etc., together in one submittal package.
3.
Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a.
Generic description of Sample.
b.
Product name and name of manufacturer.
c.
Sample source.
d.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section
01330 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
4.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
2.2
Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same
material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical
with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations
expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or
fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used
materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for
independent testing and inspection.
a.
Number of Samples: Submit three (3) sets of Samples. Architect will retain one (1) Sample
set; remainder will be returned.
5.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control
comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine
final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary
indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location.
Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation.
Application for Payment Comply with requirements specified in Division 0.
Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 0.
Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of
the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1.
Number of Copies: Submit one (1) electronic copy or six (6) copies of each submittal, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.
Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity
responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or
other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
3.
Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality
Requirements.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation.
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or
person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of
architects and owners, and other information specified.
Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with
requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and
Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by
manufacturer for this specific Project.
Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing
experience where required.
Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard
form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract
Documents.
Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by
01330 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a

qualified testing agency.
Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of
product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard
form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or
after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal
maintenance of products and equipment.
Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and
design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and
other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable.
Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's
recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include
name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service
representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1.
Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
2.
Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if
not, what corrective action was taken.
3.
Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies
with requirements.
Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or
bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of
deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect.
1.
Architect will not review submittals that include MSDS and will return them for resubmittal.
Certification Reports: Prepare written reports for systems that are to be certified.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTORS REVIEW
A.
B.
C.
D.
Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and
field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect or Engineer.
By approving and submitting shop drawings, product data and samples, the contractor represents that he
has determined and verified all materials, field measurements, and field construction criteria related
thereto, or will do so, and that he has checked and coordinated the information contained within such
submittals with the requirements of the work and the contract documents.
The contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the
contract documents by the Architect or Engineer's approval of shop drawings, product data or samples
unless the contractor has specifically informed the Architect or Engineer in writing of such deviation at
the time of submission and the Architect or Engineer has given written approval to the specific deviation.
The contractor shall not be relieved from responsibility from errors or omissions in the shop drawings,
product data or samples by the Architect's or Engineer's approval thereof.
The contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted shop drawings, product data or
samples, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect or Engineer on previous submittals.
01330 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
3.2
No portion of the work requiring submission of a shop drawing, product data or sample shall be
commenced until the submittal has been approved by the Architect or Engineer. All such portions of the
work shall be in accordance with approved submittals.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and
location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's
approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for
compliance with the Contract Documents.
The General Contractor shall prepare composite drawings and installation layouts, when required to
solve tight field conditions. Such drawings shall consist of dimensioned plans and elevations, and must
give complete information particularly as to size and location of sleeves, inserts, attachments, openings,
conduits, ducts, boxes, structural interferences, etc. These composite drawings and installation layouts
shall be coordinated in the field by the General Contractor and his Subcontractors for proper relationship
to the work of other trades based on field conditions and shall be checked and approved by them before
submission to the Architect for his final review. The General Contractor shall have competent technical
personnel readily available for such coordinating and checking, as well as for supervision of field
installation of work as per the drawing and installation layouts, which have been previously determined
by him to be correct and carry the Architects review stamp.
Submission of shop drawings (in either original submission or when resubmitted with corrections)
constitute evidence that the General Contractor has checked all information thereon, and that he accepts
and is willing to perform the work as shown in a workmanlike manner and in accordance with best
standard practice. No claim for an addition to the Contract sum shall be based on work shown on shop
drawings, unless such claim is noted in General Contractors Transmittal Form accompanying the shop
drawings.
Cost of any damages in construction due to improper checking and coordination by the General
Contractor shall be paid for by him, and the General Contractor shall be responsible for all additional
costs, including coordination.
Review of shop drawings and schedules shall not relieve the General Contractor from responsibility for
any violation indicated on such drawings or schedules of local, county, state or federal laws, rules,
ordinances or rules and regulations of commissions, boards or other authorities or utilities having
jurisdiction.
ARCHITECTS OR ENGINEERS ACTION
A.
B.
3.3
General: Architect or Engineer will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp
and will return them without action.
Action Submittals: Architect or Engineer will review each submittal, make marks to indicted corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect or Engineer will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
1.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.
DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE
A.
The contractor shall maintain, for the Architect or Owner, at the construction site one record copy of all
drawings, specifications, addenda, change orders and other modifications, in good order and marked
currently to record all changes during construction. This set will also include shop drawings, product data
and samples. This set shall be available to the Architect, Engineer or Owner during the course of the
work and shall be delivered to the Owner by the contractor upon completion of the work.
01330 - 7

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract
Document requirements.
1.
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality assurance
and control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
2.
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality assurance and quality control services required by
Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Quality Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution
of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will
comply with requirements.
Quality Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution
of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction
comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by
Architect.
Site Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site, with a minimum panel size of
8-0 x 8-0. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction,
coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by
which the Work will be judged.
Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify
performance characteristics.
Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified
criteria.
Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency
qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product
performance and compliance with industry standards.
Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill,
factory, or shop.
Field Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the
Work and for completed Work engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory
shall mean the same as testing agency.
Installer/Applicator/Erector.
Testing Agency: An entity, i.e., Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee,
Subcontractor, or Sub sub-contractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including
installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1.
Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be
performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as
"carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to trades people of
the corresponding generic name.

01400 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
K.
1.3
Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum
of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements
indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
1.4
General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or
conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent
requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect
for a decision before proceeding.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the
minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or
quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these
requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of
requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.5
Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection
of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1.
Date of issue.
2.
Project title and number.
3.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
8.
Complete test or inspection data.
9.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract
Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting.
Mockups: For a typical wall panel assembly. See Section 1.5 herein.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments,
judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards
and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required;
individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar
in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction
with a record of successful in-service performance.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.

01400 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
1.6
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this
Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity
to produce required units.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in
jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind
indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly,
or products that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be
performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy
qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1.
Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the
Work.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and
capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E548; and with
additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having
jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1.
NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2.
NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NISI's National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer
who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are
similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
Site Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of
construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for
the completed Work.
1.
Build full size mockups in location and of size indicated (minimum 8-0 x 8-0 if not indicated), or
as directed by Architect.
2.
Panel shall show a typical full size wall panel assembly, consisting of all exterior finishing materials
required for this particular project, including appropriate colors, fasteners, surface textures and
showing material compatibility per Architects approval.
3.
Notify Architect no less than seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
4.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
5.
Obtain Architects approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
6.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the
completed Work.
7.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in
individual Sections in Divisions 2 through 16.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
B.
Owner Responsibilities: Where quality control services are indicated as Owners responsibility, Owner
will engage a qualified Testing Agency to perform these services.
1.
Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies
engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.
2.
Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed
to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor
Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise
indicated, provide quality control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Perform quality control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether
specified or not.
1.
Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to
perform these quality control services.
01400 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
a.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.7
Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by
Owner.
2.
Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or
inspecting will be performed.
3.
Where quality control services are indicated as Contractors responsibility, submit a certified written
report, in duplicate, of each quality control service.
4.
Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are
Contractors responsibility.
5.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they
so direct.
Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory authorized service representative to
inspect field assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report
results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures.
Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that
replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties.
Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1.
Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work
during performance of its services.
2.
Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which on-site tests are
conducted.
3.
Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4.
Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service through Contractor.
5.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or
accept any portion of the Work.
6.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality
control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in
advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:
1.
Access to the Work.
2.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting.
Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4.
Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5.
Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6.
Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency.
7.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality assurance and quality
control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction
to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A.
Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency or special inspector as required
by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:
1.
Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality control procedures and
reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
2.
Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work
during performance of its services.
01400 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.8
Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality control service to
Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes
a list of unresolved deficiencies.
Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work
complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Retesting and re-inspecting corrected work.
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

A.
B.
C.
D.
1.9
The respective Sections of these Specifications contain detailed requirements for materials testing and
inspections to be performed by an approved testing laboratory. Where job site testing occurs, the
Architect shall be informed immediately of deviations from specified criteria.
An independent testing laboratory services will be selected by the Owner to inspect and test the
materials and methods of construction for compliance with the Construction Contract.
The Tenant and/or Owner does not guarantee test results but agrees to use the results of these tests for
determining Contract compliance.
When the results show that the work does not meet the full requirements of the Contract Documents, the
General Contractor shall pay for retesting corrected materials or workmanship until satisfactory test
results are obtained without increasing the Contract Sum.
PAYMENT FOR SERVICES
A.
1.10
A.
B.
1.11
A.
B.
C.
D.
Payment for services will be by the General Contractor, directly to the Testing Laboratory and/or
inspection agency. Note: Additional requirements and clarifications may occur within the representative
sections.
LAB QUALIFICATIONS
Testing Laboratory: Shall be independent and meet the basic requirements of ASTM E329 - Standard of
Recommended Practice for Inspections and Testing Agencies for Concrete and Steel as used in
Construction, approved by the Architect, and shall submit to the Architect a copy of the report of
inspection of their facilities made by the Materials Reference Laboratory of the NBS during the most
recent tour of such inspections, and also shall submit a memorandum stating steps taken to remedy any
deficiencies reported by this inspection.
Testing Machines: Shall be calibrated at intervals not exceeding 12 months by devices of accuracy
traceable to the NBS.
AUTHORITIES AND DUTIES OF THE LABORATORY
The laboratory will not be authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release any requirement of the
specifications, nor to approve or accept any portion of the work. When it appears that the material
furnished or work performed by the General Contractor fails to fulfill specification requirements, the
laboratory will promptly notify all parties of such deficiencies.
Copies of all laboratory test and inspection reports will be issued directly to the General Contractor, the
Architect, the Structural Engineer and Owner's construction manager.
Report test results in writing to the Architect, Engineer and the General Contractor on the same day that
tests are made. Reports of compressive strength test shall contain the proper identification name and
number, date of concrete placement, name of contractor, name of concrete supplier and truck number,
name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure,
design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials. Compressive breaking
strength and type of break for both 7 day tests and 28 day tests.
Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional test of in-place concrete when test results
indicate the specific concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure,
01400 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
E.
1.12
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.13
A.
1.14
A.
as directed by the Architect. The testing service shall conduct test to determine adequacy of concrete by
cored cylinders and complying with ASTM C42 or by other methods as directed.
The Owner reserves the right to perform tests in addition to the ones mentioned herein.
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Aggregate Tests: Check the proposed aggregate in accordance with ASTM C33. (Perform only if new or
suspect).
Mix Design: Check the proposed mixes for proportions, water-cement ration and slump in accordance
with ACI 613 and 318 and with PDA T 12. (Omit if established design is used). Minimum number of tests
should be one for each 5,000 cubic yards of material.
Slump Tests: Take at the beginning of each day's pouring operations and whenever water adjustments
or noticeable change of slump occurs, ASTM C143.
Sampling: Make 4 standard test cylinders at the beginning of each pour and 4 additional cylinders for
each additional 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof. Take extra samples at any noticeable change in the
makeup of the concrete. Perform all Sampling in compliance with ASTM C172.
Testing: Cure cylinders in accordance with ASTM C31. Test one (1) cylinder at 7 days for compression
to ASTM C39 and two (2) at 28 days and one for hold.
Soils testing (where not previously tested within one year or surface or subsurface change has
occurred).
Civil staking and PAD certification.
FOUNDATIONS
Check excavations for correct depth into bearing strata as per boring test results.
REQUIRED SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
As required by local governmental authorities.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A.
B.
C.
D.
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged
construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification
Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams
that are as invisible as possible.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for
quality control services.
This Section outlines requirements covering testing laboratory services and inspection required during
the course of construction of the Project. This Section is complementary to the General Conditions and
Supplementary General Conditions and nothing herein shall be considered to waive any requirements of
the General Conditions or Supplementary General Conditions.

01400 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 01420 ABBREVIATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
1.2
General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
"Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and
requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the
Contract.
"Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized,"
"selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed.
"Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in
Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled,"
and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated.
"Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction,
and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the
Work.
"Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and
similar operations.
"Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling,
erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and
similar operations.
"Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
"Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is
shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is
to be built.
Limits of Construction / Limits of Contract: Identifies the area of work within the project site, as
indicated on the Drawings.
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,
applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly
into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract
Documents by reference.
Publication Dates: Comply with latest edition of standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents,
unless otherwise indicated.
Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry
standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the
Contract Documents.
1.
Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies
directly from publication source.
Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are
used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the
standards and regulations in the following list
ADAAG
CFR
CRD
FED-STD
FS
FTMS
UFAS
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

Code of Federal Regulations
Handbook for Concrete and Cement
Federal Standard (See FS)
Federal Specification
Federal Test Method Standard (See FS)
Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards
ABBREVIATIONS
01420 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.3
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A.
Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
AA
AAADM
AABC
AAMA
AASHTO
ABMA
ABPA
ACI
ACPA
AFPA
AF&PA
AGA
AGC
AHA
AHC
AI
AIA
AIA
AIEE
AISC
AISI
AITC
ALCA
ALSC
AMCA
ANSI
APA
APA
API
ARI
ARMA
ASCE
ASHRAE
ASME
ASSE
ASTM
AWCI
AWI
AWPA
AWS
AWSC
AWWA
BHMA
BIA
BIA
BICSI
BOCA
CABO
Aluminum Association, Inc. (The)

American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers
Associated Air Balance Council
American Architectural Manufacturers Association
American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials
American Bearing Manufacturers Association
Acoustical and Board Products Association
ACI International (American Concrete Institute)
American Concrete Pipe Association
American Forest & Paper Association (See AF&PA)
American Forest & Paper Association
American Gas Association
Associated General Contractors of America (The)
American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA)
Architectural Hardware Consultant
Asphalt Institute
American Institute of Architects (The)
American Insurance Association
American Institute of Electrical Engineers
American Institute of Steel Construction
American Iron and Steel Institute
American Institute of Timber Construction
Associated Landscape Contractors of America
American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
American National Standards Institute
APA - The Engineered Wood Association
Architectural Precast Association
American Petroleum Institute
Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association
American Society of Civil Engineers
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
ASME International (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International)
American Society of Sanitary Engineering
ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials International)
AWCI International (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International)
Architectural Woodwork Institute
American Wood-Preservers' Association
American Welding Society
American Welding Society Code
American Water Works Association
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
Brick Industry Association (The)
Brick Institute of America
BICSI
BOCA International, Inc. (See ICC)
Council of American Building Officials (See ICC)
ABBREVIATIONS
01420 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
CCFSS
CDA
CGA
CIMA
CISCA
CISPI
CLFMI
CPA
CPPA
CRA
CRSI
CS
CSA
CSI
CTI
DHI
EIA
EIMA
EJCDC
EJMA
ESD
FCI
FGMA
FIA
FM
FMG
FS
FSA
FSC
FTI
GA
GANA
GRI
GS
GSI
HI
HI
HMMA
HPVA
HPW
IAPMO
IAS
IBC
ICBO
ICBO ES
ICC
ICC-ES
ICEA
ICRI
IEC
IECC
IEEE
IESNA
IFC
Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures

Copper Development Association Inc.
Compressed Gas Association
Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association
Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
Composite Panel Association
Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association
California Redwood Association
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
Commercial Standards
CSA International (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services)
Construction Specifications Institute (The)
Cooling Technology Institute (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute)
Door and Hardware Institute
Electronic Industries Alliance
EIFS Industry Members Association
Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.
ESD Association
Fluid Controls Institute
Flat Glass Marketing Institute
Factory Insurance Association
Factory Mutual System (See FMG)
FM Global (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System)
Federal Specifications
Fluid Sealing Association
Forest Stewardship Council
Facing Tile Institute
Gypsum Association
Glass Association of North America
Geosynthetic Research Institute (See GSI)
Green Seal
Geosynthetic Institute
Hydraulic Institute
Hydronics Institute
Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (See NAAMM)
Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
International Approval Services (See CSA)
International Building Code
International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC)
ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (See ICC-ES
International Code Council, Inc.
ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.
International Electrotechnical Commission
International Energy Conservation Code
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The)
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
International Fire Code
ABBREVIATIONS
01420 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
IGCC
IGMA
ILI
IMC
ISO
ISSFA
KCMA
LIA
LMA
LPI
MAG
MBMA
MFMA
MHIA
MIA
MIA
MLMA
MPI
NAAMM
NADCA
NAIMA
NBC
NBFU
NBGQA
NBHA
NBS
NCMA
NCPI
NCTA
NEBB
NEC
NECA
NeLMA
NEMA
NETA
NFPA
NFPA
NGA
NHLA
NKCA
NLGA
NMWIA
NRCA
NRMCA
NSSGA
NTMA
NTRMA
NWMA
NWWDA
PCA
PCI
PDCA
PDI
PEI
Insulating Glass Certification Council

Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The)
Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.
International Mechanical Code
International Organization for Standardization
International Solid Surface Fabricators Association
Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association
Lead Industries Association
Laminating Materials Association
Lightning Protection Institute
Maricopa Association of Governments
Metal Building Manufacturers Association
Metal Framing Manufacturers Association
Material Handling Industry of America (MH)
Marble Institute of America
Masonry Institute of America
Metal Lath Manufacturers Association
Master Painters Institute
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
National Air Duct Cleaners Association
North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (The)
National Building Code
National Board of Fire Underwriters
National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.
National Builders Hardware Association
National Bureau of Standards
National Concrete Masonry Association
National Clay Pipe Institute
National Cable & Telecommunications Association
National Environmental Balancing Bureau
National Electrical Code
National Electrical Contractors Association
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
InterNational Electrical Testing Association
National Fire Protections Association
National Forest Products Association
National Glass Association
National Hardwood Lumber Association
National Kitchen Cabinet Association
National Lumber Grades Authority
National Mineral Wool Insulation Association
National Roofing Contractors Association
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association
National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc.
National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association (See RTI)
National Woodwork Manufacturers Association
National Wood Window and Door Association (See WDMA)
Portland Cement Association
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
Painting & Decorating Contractors of America
Plumbing & Drainage Institute
Porcelain Enamel Institute
ABBREVIATIONS
01420 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PGI
PS
PTI
RCSC
RFCI
RTI
PVC Geomembrane Institute

Product Standards
Post-Tensioning Institute
Research Council on Structural Connections
Resilient Floor Covering Institute
Roof Tile Institute (Formerly: NTRMA - National Tile Roofing Manufacturers
Association)
SAE
SAE International
SBCCI
Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (See ICC)
SDI
Steel Deck Institute
SDI
Steel Door Institute
SGCC
Safety Glazing Certification Council
SIGMA
Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (See IGMA)
SJI
Steel Joist Institute
SMA
Screen Manufacturers Association
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association
SMPTE
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers
SPFA
Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the
Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division)
SPIB
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The)
SPI/SPFD Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. (The) Spray Polyurethane Foam Division (See
SPFA)
SPRI
SPRI (Single Ply Roofing Institute)
SSBC
Southern Standard Building Code
SSINA
Specialty Steel Industry of North America
SSPC
The Society for Protective Coatings
SSPC
Steel Structures Painting Council
STI
Steel Tank Institute
SWI
Steel Window Institute
SWRI
Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute
TCA
Tile Council of America, Inc.
TIA/EIA
Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance
TIMA
Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association
TMS
The Masonry Society
TPI
Truss Plate Institute, Inc.
UBC
Uniform Building Code
UL
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UNI
Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association
USDA
United States Department of Agriculture
USGBC
U.S. Green Building Council
USITT
United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.
USPS
United States Postal Service
VI
Vermiculite Institute
WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association
WCLA
West Coast Lumbermans Association
WCLIB
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WDMA
Window & Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood
Window and Door Association)
WI
Woodwork Institute (Formerly WIC - Woodwork Institute of California)
WIA
Woodwork Institute of Arizona
WIC
Woodwork Institute of California (See WI)
WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association
ABBREVIATIONS
01420 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
WPOA
WSRCA
WWPA
B.
Western Plumbing Officials Association

Western States Roofing Contractors Association
Western Wood Products Association
Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
CE
CPSC
DOC
DOE
EPA
FAA
FDA
GSA
HUD
LBL
NCHRP
NIST
OSHA
PBS
PHS
RUS
SD
TRB
USDA
USPS
Army Corps of Engineers

Consumer Product Safety Commission
Department of Commerce
Department of Energy
Environmental Protection Agency
Federal Aviation Administration
Food and Drug Administration
General Services Administration
Department of Housing and Urban Development
Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory
National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB)
National Institute of Standards and Technology
Occupational Safety & Health Administration
Public Building Service (See GSA)
Office of Public Health and Science
Rural Utilities Service (See USDA)
State Department
Transportation Research Board
Department of Agriculture
Postal Service

ABBREVIATIONS
01420 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.2
All labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to furnish, erect and maintain construction
facilities and temporary controls and perform temporary work required in the performance of the Contract
for Construction, including those indicated and specified. This Section is complementary to the General
Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions and nothing herein shall be considered to waive any
requirements of the General Conditions or Supplementary General Conditions.
The General Contractor shall verify with the Owner the storage areas allocated to the General Contractor
for the work, and he shall limit his storage and office operations to the defined areas.
MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL
A.
1.3
Maintain construction facilities and temporary controls in a proper, safe operating and sanitary condition
for the duration of the Contract for Construction. Upon completion of the Construction Contract work, the
General Contractor shall remove all construction facilities and temporary controls from the premises.
UTILITIES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.4
Provide temporary adequate light and power supply for construction, making all necessary arrangements
with serving utility and paying all expenses in connection therewith. Temporary lighting illumination level
shall be adequate to permit workmen to properly perform their work.
Temporary electric shall be 200 Amp. Minimum.
Provide temporary adequate water supply for construction, making all necessary arrangements with
serving utility and paying all expenses in conjunction therewith.
All utilities, temporary and permanent, shall be paid for by the General Contractor until 10 days prior to
store opening or upon receipt of Certificate of Substantial Completion (or equivalent), whichever occurs
first. Receipted bills setting forth that charges have been paid in full shall accompany Application for
Final Payment.
Supply adequate cool, pure drinking water with individual drinking cups or sanitary bubbler fountain for
the use of employees on the project. The quality of the drinking water shall meet the standards for
public water supplies of the County Health Department.
TELEPHONE
A.
1.5
The General Contractor shall provide and pay for installation and all local service charges involved, for
the duration of the Contract for job telephone (or cell phone), internet service, computer and
printer/scanner.
TOILET FACILITIES
A.
1.6
Provide proper sanitary and adequate toilet facilities for the use of all workmen employed on the Project,
located where directed, and enforce their use by all personnel on the project. Enclose and weatherproof
toilets and keep in a sanitary condition at all times.
HEATING
A.
Should it become necessary to do any work in the building, such as plastering, cement work, painting,
etc., at times when the temperature is below 40 deg F (painting 60 deg F), the General Contractor shall
provide temporary heat (non-storage type) for such length of time as deemed necessary by the Architect
for the protection of the work. Pay all expenses for temporary apparatus, its installation, proper

01500 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
1.7
maintenance and operation and for fuel. Damage or deterioration caused by insufficient heat or
ventilation shall be repaired or replaced by the General Contractor.
Should temporary heat be required after permanent heating system is installed and operating, this unit
may be used; however, the General Contractor shall pay all fuel costs and be responsible for proper
operation of unit.
FIRE PROTECTION
A.
B.
C.
1.8
Access roads for fire department equipment shall be installed per requirements of authorities of
jurisdiction.
Provide adequate fire extinguishers on the premises during the course of construction, of the type and
sizes recommended by the NFPA to control fires resulting from the particular work being performed.
Instruct employees in their use. Place extinguishers in the immediate vicinity of the work being
performed, ready for instant use. In the use of especially hazardous type of equipment, such as
acetylene torches, welding equipment, tar pots, kettles, etc., no work shall be commenced or equipment
used unless fire extinguishers of an approved type and capacity are placed in the working area and
available for immediate use by the workmen using the above-mentioned equipment.
Fire extinguishers shall be maintained throughout all accessible areas. Provide one approved 2-1/2
gallon "foam type extinguisher in the construction shed and also in the space where paint or oil, etc., is
stored. Other special features of hazard shall be provided with special extinguisher protection as may be
warranted.
TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES, BARRIERS, FENCES AND ACCESS ROADS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.9
Provide and maintain all governmental required access roads and fire roads per local jurisdiction
requirements.
Provide and maintain all fences, barricades, lights, shoring and other protective structures or devices
necessary for the safety of workmen, equipment, the public and property as required by state or
municipal laws and regulations, and local ordinances, laws and other requirements of the county, state,
and other authorities having jurisdiction with regard to safety precautions, operation and fire hazards.
Provide and maintain pumping facilities including power for keeping the site, excavations and structure
free from accumulations of water at all times, whether from underground seepage, rainfall, drainage or
broken lines.
Maintain provisions for closing and locking the building at such time as possible to do so.
Protect all door openings when so required with temporary batten doors, and cover windows and
openings with suitable materials when weather or job conditions require.
Protect all elements of construction from any danger of damage from wind, rain, dust, frost, freezing
temperatures, or other infiltration of weather.
Protect all openings from debris (drains, pipes, etc.).
Provide and maintain as required all temporary access roads to and on site. Remove such roads, if not
incorporated into finished construction, prior to finish surfacing or landscaping.
SCAFFOLD, STAGING, ETC.
A.
The work under each Section of these specifications shall include providing, installing, and maintaining
all scaffold, staging, trestles, and planking necessary for the work under each Section in strict conformity
with applicable laws and ordinances, and maintenance of same so as not to interfere with or obstruct the
work of other trades. Additionally, the work under each Section of these Specifications shall include
providing all forms of protection necessary to preserve the work of other trades free from damage. These
provisions shall be considered as though repeated under each separate Section of these Specifications.

01500 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.10
A.
B.
1.11
A.
B.
1.12
A.
1.13
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

Existing or newly planted vegetation, shrubs, trees, sidewalks, paving, etc., on the site, shall, unless
directly affected by the work of this Contract, be protected against damage of any kind. No diesel or
gasoline engine shall be allowed to pass over the feeder root system within the drip line unless approved
by the Owner. Work, storage and traffic areas shall be restricted to those areas immediately adjacent to
the building.
Damage of any kind caused by the work of this contract shall be made good before final acceptance of
the Project. The General Contractor shall provide water and protection barricades as required to
maintain all trees, plants, shrubs, existing site improvements, etc., designated to remain.
SECURITY
Provide such watchmen's service as necessary to protect Owner's interest during the progress of
construction of the building.
The Architect and the Owner do not assume any responsibility, at any time, for the protection of the
building and premises or for loss of materials, from the time that the Contract operations have
commenced until the final acceptance of the work by the Architect and Owner. If watchman service is
deemed necessary by the General Contractor, such protection shall be provided and paid for by the
General Contractor.
NOISE AND DUST CONTROL
Exercise all possible care to control excessive noise and dust during the construction to keep these
problems to a minimum. Traffic or construction areas shall be sprinkled with water or chemicals as
required and in accordance with applicable governmental requirements.
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION (PM TO EDIT)
The General Contractor shall provide a project sign as defined herewith.
No sign will be permitted on this project except the project sign, identifying captions over offices, certain
directional signs and warning signs required for safety and protection. The General Contractor shall take
all necessary steps to prevent installation of unauthorized signs, and should any appear, the General
Contractor shall cause them to be removed immediately and repair and repaint all damage caused
thereby without additional cost to the Owner.
Project sign shall be provided as shown on construction drawings and is to be erected within 15 days of
Contract award, and shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
1.
Name of Project: Another New Sprouts Farmers Market Store Opening Soon.
2.
Name of Owner/Developer: Fuqua Development LLC, 11 Piedmont Center, Atlanta, GA 30305
Tel.: (409) 907-1709.
3.
Name of Architect: AAD:FITCH, Inc., Scottsdale, AZ, Tel.: (480) 998-4200.
4.
Name of Contractor: TBD.
Locate the project sign as directed. Coordinate with the site developer to assure visibility.
All fees and permit costs shall be borne by the General Contractor for signs.
Project sign shall be removed and all areas repaired when permanent signs are in place and operational.

01500 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.14
A.
B.
1.15
A.
FIELD OFFICE, STORAGE ENCLOSURES

Provide and maintain a weather tight office for the use of the Architect, Owner Representative and
General Contractor. This office shall be provided with windows which operate, doors with locks, tables,
benches, racks for Drawings, electric lights, telephone, and shall be air conditioned and heated.
General Contractor shall provide all storage enclosures required for his operations.
PARKING
Limit parking by construction personnel to the area designated by the Owner.


01500 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.2
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in
Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special
warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
All requirements and procedures covering material and equipment to be utilized in the Project work. This
Section is complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions and nothing
herein shall be considered to waive any requirements of the General Conditions or Supplementary
General Conditions.
See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout.
See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
All deliveries and work shall be coordinated with other sections.
Related sections:
1.
00030, Administrative Requirements / Forms.
2.
01230, Substitutions.
3.
01330, Submittal Procedures.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
1.3
Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from
previously purchased stock. The term product includes the terms material, equipment," "system," and
terms of similar intent.
1.
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model
number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is
current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2.
New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility.
Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.
3.
Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or
where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function,
dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that
equal or exceed those of specified product.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those
required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and
accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to
establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical
properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of
other named manufacturers.
FACILITY AND EQUIPMENT
A.
1.4
The General Contractor shall provide, install, maintain and operate a complete and adequate facility for
the handling, execution, disposal and distribution of all material and equipment required for the proper
and timely performance of all work connected with the Contract for Construction.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A.
Deliver all manufactured materials in the original packages, containers or bundles (with the seals
unbroken) bearing the name or identification mark of the manufacturer.
01600 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.5
Deliver fabrications in as large assemblies as practicable, and where specified to be shop primed or
shop finished, they shall be packaged or crated as required to preserve such priming or finish intact and
free from abrasion.
Store all materials in such manner as necessary to properly protect same from damage. Materials or
equipment damaged by handling, weather, dirt or from any other cause will not be acceptable.
Store material so as to cause no obstructions, stored off sidewalks, roadways and underground services.
The General Contractor shall be responsible for protecting all material and equipment furnished under
the Contract.
When any room in the project is used as a shop or store room, the General Contractor shall be
responsible for any repairs, patching or cleaning necessary due to such use. Location of such storage
space shall be subject to approval of the Architect.
WORKMANSHIP
A.
B.
C.
1.6
Where not more specifically described in any of the various Sections of these Specifications,
workmanship shall conform to all of the methods and operations of best standards and accepted
practices of the trade or trades involved, and shall include all items of fabrication, construction or
installation regularly furnished or required for completion (including any finish, and for successful
operation as intended).
All work shall be executed by mechanics skilled in their respective lines of work.
When completed, all parts shall have been durably and substantially built and shall present a neat,
workmanlike appearance.
SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS
A.
B.
1.7
Substitutions typically are not permitted unless approved during bid process by addendum. If a
substitution is required (Contractor to provide justification statement), it must be of equal or greater
quality than the product it replaces. At no time will Owner pay additional costs associated with the
aforementioned substitution.
See Section 00030 for material substitution requirements and Substitution Request Form.
MATERIAL REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
1.8
Where material is specified solely by reference to Standard Specifications, the General Contractor shall,
if requested by the Architect, submit to the Architect, for his approval, data on all such material proposed
to be incorporated into the work of the Contract listing the name and address of vendor, the
manufacturer or producer, and the trade or brand names of such materials.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
B.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do
not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
2.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either
to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready
for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly
executed.
2.
Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written
document using appropriate form properly executed.
01600 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.
C.
1.9
Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
See Warranty schedule in Part 2 of this section.
SUBMITTAL TIME
A.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Sections "Submittal Procedures", and "Closeout
Procedures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A.
B.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are
undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. Provide products
complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and
indicated use and effect.
1.
Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified,
provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar
situations on other projects.
2.
Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
3.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected Architect will make selection.
4.
Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Architect's.
5.
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish
"salient characteristics" of products.
Product Selection Procedures:
1.
Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named
product that complies with requirements.
2.
Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a
product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
3.
Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers,
provide one of the products listed that comply with requirements.
4.
Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers names, provide a product by
one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.
5.
Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with
requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 Comparable Products article for consideration of
an unnamed product.
6.
Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by
one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements.
Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" article for consideration of an unnamed
product.
7.
Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements
on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system.
Comply with provisions in Section 01230 "Substitutions for consideration of an unnamed product
or system.
8.
Basis-of-Design Product: Where specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers,
provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.
Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are
based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" article for
consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers.
01600 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
9.
10.
11.
2.2
Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample,

select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's
decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified
requirements, comply with provisions in Section 01230, "Substitutions for proposal of product.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from
manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with
other specified requirements.
a.
Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture
from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.
b.
Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures"
or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's
product line that includes both standard and premium items.
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A.
2.3
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the conditions of
Section 01230, Substitutions, and the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not
satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
1.
Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results,
and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability,
visual effect and specific features and requirements indicated.
3.
Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names
and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5.
Samples, if requested.
WARRANTY SCHEDULE
A.
For the list of warranties required by the work identified in the Contract Documents, see Section 00030.
Subcontractor shall provide a fully executed warranty document to the Owner at the point of Substantial
Completion.
01600 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 01631 LIST OF OWNER-FURNISHED ITEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Refer to Construction Drawings for complete list of Owner-furnished items.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
LIST OF OWNER-FURNISHED ITEMS

01631-1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
LIST OF OWNER-FURNISHED ITEMS

01631-1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 01700 CLEANING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This section outlines requirements for cleaning of the project work. This section is complementary to the
General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions and nothing herein shall be considered to
waive any requirements of the General conditions or Supplementary General Conditions, or additional
requirements within this specification.
REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A.
Safety and Insurance Standards: Maintain project in accordance with the following safety and insurance
standards.
1.
State Industrial Commission.
2.
OSHA.
3.
Fire Protection: Store volatile waste in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily.
4.
Pollution Control: Conduct cleanup and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and
anti-pollution laws. Burning or burying of rubbish and waste material on the project site is not
permitted. Disposal of volatile fluid waste (such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner) in storm or
sanitary sewer systems or in streams or waterways is not permitted.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
CLEANING MATERIAL
A.
Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned. Use cleaning
materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
DURING CONSTRUCTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
During the construction period, the material to be used in the work shall be kept in an orderly manner,
neatly stacked or piled.
Clean up frequently (at least daily) all refuse, rubbish, scrap materials and debris caused by operations,
to the end that at all times the site of the work shall present a neat, orderly and workmanlike appearance.
Sprinkle dusty debris with water.
Provide for the disposal of all waste products, trash, debris etc., and make necessary arrangements for
legal disposal of same off the site. Never throw rubbish from windows or other parts of building. Lower
waste materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible.
Remove all surplus material, false-work, temporary structures including foundations thereof, plant of any
description and debris of every nature resulting from operations and put the site in a neat, orderly
condition.
Vacuum clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting and continue vacuum cleaning
on an as-needed basis until building is ready for acceptance.
Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will
not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
General Contractor shall provide trash gondolas or containers for use by all trades.
General Contractor may bill trades proportionately for trash gondola use at no additional cost to the
Owner or his vendors.
CLEANING
01700 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
3.2
Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.
2.
Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is
expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3.
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark
containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper
execution of the Work.
1.
Remove liquid spills promptly.
2.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work
area, as appropriate.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of
manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended.
If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to
health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste
materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials
already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or
deterioration at Substantial Completion.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the
remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability
without damaging effects.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction
completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure
during the construction period.
FINAL CLEANING
A.
B.
Use experienced workmen or professional cleaners for final cleaning.

Besides general broom cleaning, do following special cleaning for all trades at completion of work.
1.
Remove putty stains from glass and mirrors; wash, polish same, inside and outside. Exercise care
not to scratch glass.
2.
Remove marks, stains, fingerprints, other soil, dirt from painted decorated or stained work
3.
Clean, polish and wax woodwork.
4.
Clean and polish hardware for removal of stains, dust, dirt, paint and the like.
5.
Remove spots, soil, paint from tile and similar work; wash same.
6.
Clean fixtures, equipment, remove stains, paint, dirt, dust.
7.
Remove temporary floor protections.
8.
Clean and damp mop and wax all tile and sheet vinyl floors.
9.
Remove all temporary protections at the site.
10. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels.
11. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes, to a dirt-free condition, free of dust,
stains, films and similar noticeable distracting substances. Except as otherwise indicated, avoid
disturbance of natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to original
reflective condition.
12. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment clean, including elevator equipment and
similar equipment: remove excess lubrication and other substances.
13. Remove debris and surface dust from limited-access spaces including roofs, plenums, shafts,
trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics and similar spaces.
CLEANING
01700 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.3
All existing improvements, inside or outside the property, which are disturbed, damaged or destroyed by
the work under the Contract, shall be restored to the condition in which they originally were or to the
satisfaction of the Architect.
Clean project site yard and grounds, including landscape development areas, of littler and foreign
substances. Sweep paved areas to a broom-clean condition; remove stains, petrochemical spills and
other foreign deposits.
Rake grounds which are neither planted nor paved, to a smooth, even-textured surface.
Pest Control: The General Contractor shall engage an experienced exterminator to make a final
inspection of project, and to rid project of rodents, insects and other pests and to pay all costs for same.
Removal of Protection: Except as otherwise indicated or requested by Architect, remove temporary
protection devices and facilities which were installed during course of the work to protect previously
completed work during remainder of construction period.
Where extra materials of value as determined by Owner remain after completion of associated work,
they shall become the property of Owner.
Between substantial completion and final acceptance General Contractor to maintain the store in a state
of cleanliness.
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
B.
3.4
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.
1.
Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with
matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without
visible evidence of repair.
Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot
be repaired.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
CLEANING
01700 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.2
This Section specifies the procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to all cutting, fitting or
patching that may be required to complete the work or to make its several parts fit together properly.
Contractor shall not damage or endanger any portion of the work or the work of the Owner or any
separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering any work, or by excavation. The
contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner or any separate contractor except with
the written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor. The contractor shall not unreasonably
withhold from the Owner or any separate contractor his consent to cutting or otherwise altering the work.
Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. All work shall be coordinated with other sections.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.3
Submittals shall be provided in accordance with Sections 01330, and 01600.

Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least ten (10) days before
the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following
information.
1.
Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they
cannot be avoided.
2.
Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural
elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other
significant visual elements.
3.
Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.
4.
Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
5.
Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that will
be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long service will be
disrupted.
6.
Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural
elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with
original structure.
7.
Owner Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching.
Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their loadcarrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner
that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or results in increased maintenance or
decreased operational life or safety.
Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a
manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform
as intended, or results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of
cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in
a manner that would, in Owner or Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove
and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

01731 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.
1.4
If possible, retain original installer or fabricator to cut and patch exposed Work listed below. If it is
impossible to engage original Installer or fabricator, engage another recognized, experienced, and
specialized firm.
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during
cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.

Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials
that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will
match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be
performed.
1.
Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including
compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
2.
Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
B.
3.3
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide
protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting
and patching operations.
PERFORMANCE
A.
B.
General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at
the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other
construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining
construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original
Installer's written recommendations.
1.
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and
chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum
disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2.
Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3.
Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core
drill.
01731 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
4.
C.
Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where
required by cutting and patching operations.
5.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed.
Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or
other foreign matter after cutting.
6.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following
performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide
materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
1.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate
integrity of installation.
2.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into
retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.
3.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into
another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of
uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and
replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
4.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface
of uniform appearance.
5.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.

01731 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.2
This Section includes all administrative and procedural requirements for submittal of pertinent data
relating to closing out the Project upon completion of the project work. Detailed instructions elsewhere in
these Specifications may require that certain items listed herein be submitted prior to Substantial
Completion of the Project.
This Section is complementary to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions and
nothing herein shall be considered to waive any requirements of the General Conditions or
Supplementary General Conditions.
FINAL PAYMENT
A.
1.3
Receipt/review and acceptance of all items specified in this Section is a prerequisite for final payment.
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
General Contractor shall provide Record Drawings (at his cost) as-built plans reproduced from the
construction set which shall clearly show all differences between the Contract for Construction as drawn
and all as installed work, as well as work added to the Contract for Construction which is not shown on
the Drawings.
General Contractor shall maintain a set of Record Drawings at the job site and shall, within twenty (20)
days after substantial completion of the project, provide the Architect with record drawings for review.
These shall be kept legible and current and shall be available for inspection at all times by the Architect.
Show all changes in the Contract work, or work added, on these Record Drawings in a contrasting color,
including work changed by Addendum or Bulletin.
In showing changes in the work, or added work, use the same legends as were used on the Drawings.
Indicate exact locations by dimensions and exact elevations given in job datum, by depth. Give
dimensions from a permanent point. Give elevations to sewer and storm drainage lines to the invert
elevation. Incorporate all accepted Architectural ASI and PR information as well as all other field
changes into the record drawings.
Mechanical and Electrical Record Drawings shall indicate exact routing of all piping, duct work, power
and control wiring, etc., location and function of all controls and whether manual or automatic and normal
amperage readings for all motors taken at the equipment under normal load conditions.
Record Drawings shall contain the names, addresses and phone number of the Subcontractors and shall
be signed by the General Contractor on the front cover.
Architect shall review the Record Drawings and he shall be the sole judge of the acceptability of these
drawings.
Upon substantial completion of the work:
1.
Submit a copy of the record drawings to the Architect for review and approval.
2.
The General Contractor shall upon receipt of notice of review and approval of the Record Drawings
from the Architect, deliver two (2) copies of electronic digital data storage format, i.e., CD-ROM of
the record drawings to the Owner.
3.
The General Contractor shall upon receipt of notice of review and approval of the Record
Specifications from the Architect, deliver two (2) copies of electronic digital data storage format
(can be included on the CD with the record drawings), i.e., CD-ROM of the specification to the
Owner.
UPDATED: APRIL 9, 2015
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.4
CLOSEOUT MANUAL
A.
Upon completion of the Project the General Contractor shall submit to the Architect one (1) complete ring
bound 8-1/2" x 11" (fold larger sheets) copy of the approved closeout manual (commercial quality with
plastic covers) to the Architect for review and approval. The General Contractor shall upon receipt of
notice of review and approval of the Record Closeout Manual from the Architect, deliver two (2) copies of
electronic digital data storage format (can be included on the CD with the record drawings), i.e., CDROM of the closeout manual to the Owner. The closeout manual shall each include all information in
accordance with the following outline:
1.
TABLE OF CONTENTS: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence, provide the following information:
a.
LIST OF SUBCONTRACORS/SUPPLIERS
i.
Provide the Trade, Name, Address, Phone #, and Contact person for each
subcontractor and/or supplier for the project.
b.
PUNCHLIST: Copy of Owner's signed list.
c.
CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY: Document issued by local governmental authority
certifying that the building complies with the provisions of applicable statutes and
regulations, and permitting occupancy for the designated use.
d.
RECORDED NOTICE OF COMPLETION: Document issued by local government authority
certifying that the building is complete and all regulation and permitting requirements have
been accepted. This form is to be provided to Owner prior to grand opening.
e.
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: signed by Owner, General Contractor,
and Architect.
f.
GENERAL CONTRACTOR WARRANTY: The General Contractor shall warranty all work to
the Owner for a period of two (2) years from date of Certificate of Substantial Completion
unless specified for a longer period. In the case of work performed by a Subcontractor, the
General Contractor shall warranty the work to and in favor of the Owner.
i.
General Contractor shall submit written guarantee to the Owner stating that all work
has been performed in accordance with the drawings and specifications (and
authorized change orders, if any). General Contractor shall also guarantee all work
against defects due to faulty workmanship or materials and shall agree that during the
guarantee period he shall make all repairs necessitated by reason of faulty
workmanship or materials promptly and at no cost to the Owner.
g.
GENERAL CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE.
h.
SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER WARRANTIES
i.
In addition, each subcontractor shall warranty their work for a period of 2 years unless
otherwise noted, after date of Certificate of Substantial Completion and repair work
that proves to be defective in workmanship and/or materials due to above work
without expense whatsoever to the Owner. Included, but are not necessarily limited to
the following.
ii.
Provide warranties for all subcontractors/manufacturers as indicated in Section 00030.
i.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL LIST (Spare Parts)
i.
See Paragraph 1.10 herein.
j.
SYSTEMS SECTIONS:
i.
FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS SECTION -Equipment list including the following items
for every piece of material and equipment supplied by the fire sprinkler systems
subcontractor.
(a) Subcontractor Name, Address, Phone #; After Hours Phone # and contact.
(b) Name, model and manufacturer.
(c)
Complete parts drawings and list.
(d) Local supply for parts or replacement with addresses and telephone numbers.
(e) Local service organizations for equipment with address and 24 hour telephone
numbers.
(f)
All tags, inspection slips, etc., removed from equipment as shipped from the
factory.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
(g)
(h)
B.
1.5
All approved shop drawings and/or submittals.

Maintenance instructions with schedule of frequency of lubrication, cleaning,
adjusting, replacing etc
(i)
Prior to store turnover, Sprinkler Contractor shall provide an Obstruction
Investigation Review and Report for Sprouts as part of their Closeout
Procedures
2.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS SECTION: Equipment list including the following items for every piece of
material and equipment supplied by the Mechanical Subcontractor.
a.
Subcontractor Name, Address, Phone #, After Hours Phone # and contact.
b.
Name, model and manufacturer.
c.
d.
Local supply for parts or replacement with addresses and telephone numbers.
e.
Local service organizations for equipment with address and 24 hour telephone numbers.
f.
g.
Maintenance instructions with schedule of frequency of lubrication, cleaning, adjusting,
replacing, etc.
h.
Motor compressor warranty.
i.
EMS closeout documents
3.
PLUMBING SYSTEMS SECTION: Equipment including the following items for every piece of
material and equipment supplied by the Plumbing Systems Subcontractor.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
replacing, etc
4.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION: Equipment list including the following items for every piece of
material and equipment supplied by the Electrical Systems Subcontractor.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
replacing, etc.
Submittal requirements.
1.
Assemble warranties, bonds, service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the
respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors.
2.
Number of original signed copies required: three (3) each. Information shall include:
a.
General Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
SEMI-FINAL AND FINAL INSPECTIONS
A.
B.
Closeout is hereby defined to include general requirements near end of contract time, in preparation for
final acceptance, final payment, normal termination of contract, occupancy by Owner and similar actions
evidencing completion of the work. Specific requirements for individual units of work are specific
throughout this specification. Time of closeout is directly related to "Substantial Completion.
When General Contractor is of the opinion that the Project is Substantially Complete, he shall send to the
Architect a written statement that the Project is Substantially Complete (naming a date) and shall request
a semi-final inspection by the Architect to determine the status of completion. Such notice shall be given
at least three (3) days before the requested inspection date.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.6
PREREQUISITES FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
1.7
Prior to requesting Architect's inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion, complete the
following and list known exceptions in request.
In progress payment request, coincident with or first following date claimed, show either 100%
completion for portion of work claimed as "Substantially Complete", or list incomplete items, value of
incompletion, and reasons for being incomplete.
Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these contract documents.
Submit statement showing accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
Advise Sprouts and Architect of pending insurance changeover requirements.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance agreements, final certifications one copy for
review of each required manual, and similar documents.
Obtain and submit releases enabling Tenant's full and unrestricted use of the work and access to
services and utilities, including (where required) occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials, and similar physical items to Sprouts.
Make final changeover of locks and transmit keys to Authorized Sprouts, and advise Authorized Sprouts
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
Complete start-up testing of systems, and instructions of Sprouts' operating/maintenance personnel.
Discontinue (or change-over) and remove from project site temporary facilities and services, along with
construction tools and facilities, mock-ups, and similar events.
Complete final clean up requirements, including touch-up painting of marred surfaces.
Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes.
If the Architect finds that the Project is Substantially Complete, he will prepare a Certificate of Substantial
Completion, AlA Document G704, 2000, for the approval and acceptance of the General Contractor and
the Owner, attaching thereto a list or "Punch List" of items to be completed or corrected.
If the Architect does not concur in the General Contractor's claim of Substantial Completion, he will so
notify the General Contractor, and thereafter the General Contractor shall initiate a new request for
(semifinal) inspection. Additional Inspections will be at the General Contractor's expense.
As the General Contractor completes the "Punch List" of uncompleted or uncorrected items, he shall
submit to the Architect and Sprouts for their review.
Record Drawings / Closeout Manuals to be submitted by General Contractor completed and initialed.
PREREQUISITES FOR FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A.
Prior to requesting Architect's final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, as
required by General Conditions, complete the following and list known exceptions (if any) in request:
1.
Submit final payment request with final releases and supporting documentation not previously
submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations
where required.
2.
Submit updated final statement, accounting for additional (final) changes to Contract Sum for
Sprouts' review twenty (20) days after store turnover.
3.
Submit final statement that has been reviewed and approved by Sprouts no later than twenty (20)
days after store opening.
4.
Submit certified copy of Architect's/Engineer's final punch-list of itemized work to be completed or
corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance,
endorsed and dated by Architect/Engineer.
5.
Submit final meter readings for utilities, measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of time
of substantial completion or when Tenant took possession of and responsibility for corresponding
elements of the work (where applicable).
6.
Revise and submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements, as well as final warranties, guarantees, and maintenance agreements.
7.
Submit completed maintenance stock sign-off sheet.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
S
1.8
8.
Final Health Department Approval (where applicable).
General Contractor shall call for final inspection after all construction has been completed, electric and/or
gas is on, all equipment is operational and establishment has been thoroughly cleaned. Receive Health
Department approval prior to store opening, where required.
Provide CD-ROM to Owner containing a complete set of progress photographs at project closeout.
RE-INSPECTION PROCEDURE
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.9
Upon receipt of General Contractor's request for final inspection and that the work has been completed,
including punch-list items resulting from earlier inspections, and excepting incomplete items delayed
because of acceptable circumstances, (subject to Owner and Architect approval), Architect will re-inspect
work.
If the Project is complete and all "Punch List" items are completed and corrected, the Architect will issue
a final "Certificate of Payment".
After completion of the procedures outlined above the General Contractor shall submit his final
application for payment in accordance with the Agreement, the General Conditions and Supplementary
General Conditions.
If, because of acts or omissions of the General Contractor, the Architect is required to conduct more than
one final inspection of the Project to review the "Punch List", he will charge the Owner for the additional
services required and such costs will be deducted from the money still due the General Contractor.
FINAL CHECKOUT OF STRUCTURE AND EQUIPMENT WITH OWNER
A.
B.
1.10
A.
Arrange for each installer of work requiring continuing maintenance or operation, to meet with Owner
personnel, at the project site, to provide basic instructions by manufacturer's representatives where
installers are not expert in the required procedures. Review maintenance manuals, record
documentation, tools, spare parts, and materials, lubricants, fuels, identification system, control
sequences, hazards, cleaning and similar procedures and facilities. For operational equipment,
demonstrate start-up, shutdown, emergency operations, noise and vibration adjustments, safety,
economy/efficiency adjustments, energy effectiveness, and similar operations. Review maintenance and
operations in relations with applicable warranties, agreements to maintain, bonds, and similar continuing
commitments.
Retention funds will not be paid until project closeout.
SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
The General Contractor shall deliver to Owner the spare parts, extra stock and maintenance materials
listed below, and the General Contractor shall complete the maintenance stock sign-off check list and
provide to Owner Representative. Materials shall be neatly packaged and identified.
SECTION
ITEM
RECEIVED
09500 Acoustical Treatment
1 box (min) White
___________________________
1 box (min) Vinyl Faces
___________________________
1 full gallon of each:

Paint Color
___________________________
Paint Color
___________________________
Paint Color
___________________________
Paint Color
___________________________
09900 Paint
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
13915 - Automatic Sprinkler Sys.
1 head wrench
___________________________
1 cabinet (large enough to hold ___________________________

all heads)
B.
2 each type of head:

A. Recessed (interior)
___________________________
B. Recessed (exterior)
___________________________
C. Upward Pendant (interior)
___________________________
D. Upward Pendant (exterior)
___________________________
E. Other as indicated
___________________________
15000 Plumbing
2 Plumbing Valve Charts

(Highlight all water valves
On Sheets P-1 & P1-1
___________________________
15202 Air Distribution
1 complete change of all filter

Media
___________________________
General Contractor has delivered all spare parts and maintenance materials as defined above in a
satisfactory condition and has reviewed the maintenance procedures with the Construction Manager and
Owner's Representative.
This document is to be included in the closeout package and be fully executed.
____________________________________________
Tenant / Owner Construction Manager
_________________________
Date
____________________________________________
Landlord / Developer Representative
_________________________
Date
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
I/We, the undersigned, propose to do all the work necessary for the construction of subject project as set forth in the
Drawings and Project Manual (bid documents) titled:
Sprouts Farmers Market Store, Peachtree Industrial Blvd. & Sugarloaf Pkwy., Duluth, GA 30097
As prepared by: ADD:Fitch, Inc., 16435 N. Scottsdale Road, Suite 195, Scottsdale, AZ 85254
Project Closeout Checklist

2 CD-ROM Each To Contain:
Not
Completed
Not
Approved
Completed
Remarks
Table of Contents
Certificate of Occupancy
Recorded Notice of Completion
Certificate of Substantial Completion: Signed Copy
Final Meter Reading Statement: As Of Date of
Substantial Completion
General Contractor Certificate of Insurance
General Contractor Warranty
Punchlist: Copy of Owner Signed List
List of Subcontractors: Including Phone Numbers
Lien Waivers From Subcontractors: Verified With
Owner
Camera footage of sanitary and grease waste piping
and grease interceptor on separate DVD
Warranty Section: All warranties are 2 years unless noted otherwise (see section 00030)
Site Work
Site Utilities Wet
Site Utilities Dry
Soil Poisoning / Termite Treatment - 5 years
Landscaping 1 year plants & irrigation
Fencing
Concrete Formwork
Concrete Reinforcement
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Asphalt Paving
Masonry
Structural Metal
Miscellaneous Metals
Rough Carpentry
Finish Carpentry
Standing Seam Metal Roofing
Bldg Membrane Roofing 20 years NDL
Building Insulation
Sheet Metal Work
Caulking and Sealants 5 years
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Aluminum Doors and Frames
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 7

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
Warranty Section (continued):

Wood Doors - Life of Install
Solid Surface Countertops - 5 years
Finish Hardware
Skylights - 5 years
Glass and Glazing
Gypsum Wallboard and Framing
Plaster / Stucco - 5 years
E.I.F.S. 5 years
Acoustical Treatment
Resilient Flooring
Elastomeric Coatings
Painting
Toilet Accessories
Air Conditioning - 2 years plus 5 years
Compressor Warranty
Energy Management 1 year parts
Plumbing
Electrical
Fire Protection
Fire Alarm
Material:
Maintenance Material List (Spare Parts)
Drawings of Record:
As-Builts: Electronic Digital Data (PDF/TIFF)
All Field Changes Incorporated
Specification
Sewer Invert Elevations Indicated
Exact Routing with Locations of Ductwork
Exact Routing with Locations of Electrical
Conduit
Exact Routing with Locations of Water
Lines
Exact Routing with Locations of Waste
Water Lines
Location and Function of all Controls
Amperage of all Motors
ASIs and PRs Incorporated
Cover Sheet Updated to Include:
G.C. Signature and Date
All Subcontractor Contact Information
DATE:
_______________________________
CONTRACTOR: _______________________________
BY:
_______________________________
TITLE:
_______________________________
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 8

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 02020 - EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
INTENT
A.
B.
1.2
The main concern associated with erosion on a construction site is the movement of sediment off site
and its impact on water quality. It is the Owners intent that the Contractor install and maintain sufficient
erosion control practices to retain sediment within the boundaries of the site in addition to complying with
regulatory authorities having jurisdiction and local erosion and sedimentation control laws and
ordinances. All erosion and sediment control methods and devices used shall conform to the latest
requirements imposed by federal, state and local authorities. The Contractor shall be responsible for
repair of any damage caused and shall be financially responsible for any penalties imposed.
It shall be the Contractors responsibility to review the erosion and sediment control drawings that have
been included in the site construction drawings, prepared by the engineer, prior to implementation.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Work under this section shall include but not be limited to, installation and maintenance of both
temporary and permanent soil erosion control measures, slope protection and stabilization measures,
protection of all surface water and property both on and off site. This work shall include all labor,
materials, and equipment necessary to meet all applicable requirements and as specified in the contract
documents.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
1.4
All applicable standards and requirements of all regulatory authorities having jurisdiction, including local
Soil and Water Conservation district agencies.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Soil erosion and sediment control measures shall be implemented in accordance with the requirements
and procedures outlined in this specification, contract drawings and documents, state standards or
guidelines for soil erosion and sediment control, and all regulatory authorities having jurisdiction. Where
conflict between requirements exist, the more restrictive rules shall govern.
The Contractor shall provide all temporary control measures shown on the drawings, or as directed by
the Owner, Owner's representative, or soil conservation district for the duration of the contract. Erosion
and sediment control drawings are intended to be a guide to address the stages of work shown.
Additional measures not specified on the drawings may be necessary and shall be implemented to
address intermediary stages of work and any conditions that may develop during construction at no cost
to the Owner.
Temporary control provisions shall be coordinated with permanent erosion control features to the extent
practical to assure economical, effective and continuous erosion and sediment control throughout the
construction and post-construction period.
Soil erosion and sediment control measures shall at all times be satisfactory to the Owner's
Representative. Owners Representative will inform the Contractor of unsatisfactory construction
procedures and operations if observed. If the unsatisfactory construction procedures and operations are
not responded to and corrected within 48 hours, the Owner's Representative may suspend the
performance of any or all other construction until the unsatisfactory condition has been corrected. Such
suspension shall not be the basis of any claim by the Contractor for additional compensation nor for an
extension of time to complete the work. Any complaints, fines, etc. relating to ineffective erosion control,
shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall inspect all soil erosion and sediment control measures at least at the beginning and
end of each day to ascertain that all devices are functioning properly during construction. Maintenance
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
02020 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
F.
1.5
of all soil erosion and sediment control measures on the project site shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor until final stabilization is complete, and until the permanent soil erosion controls are
established and in proper working condition.
The Contractor shall protect adjacent properties and watercourses from soil erosion and sediment
damage throughout construction.
SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION
A.
The approved construction sequence, as permitted/approved shall be adhered to during the execution of
work under this section. All soil erosion and sediment control measures shall be installed in accordance
with the phasing sequence shown on the contract documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Contractor shall provide all materials necessary to perform the work.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
The Contractor shall comply with and implement the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan.
Review the soil erosion and sediment control drawings as they apply to current site conditions. Any
deviation from the drawings must be submitted for approval to the site engineer in writing at least 72
hours prior to commencing that work.
Notify authority having jurisdiction, in writing at least 72 hours (or sooner if required by local regulations)
prior to initial land disturbance.
All Phase I soil sediment and erosion control devices shall be in place prior to any land disturbing
activity, in their proper sequence, and maintained until permanent protection is established.
The limit of the area of any earthwork operations in progress shall be commensurate with the
Contractor's capability and progress in keeping the finished grading, mulching, seeding and other such
permanent control measures current and in accordance with the accepted schedule for construction
phasing. Should seasonal limitations make such coordination unrealistic, as determined by the Owner's
Representative, temporary erosion control measures shall be provided immediately by the Contractor at
no expense to the Owner.
Temporary erosion control measures shall be used to correct conditions which develop during
construction that are needed prior to installation of permanent control features, or that are temporarily
needed to control erosion that develops during normal construction practices, but are not associated with
permanent control features on the project.
The Contractor shall incorporate all permanent erosion control features (stabilization) into the project at
the earliest practical time to minimize the need for temporary controls.
A temporary construction entrance pad shall be installed and maintained at any point where construction
vehicles enter a public right-or-way, street or parking area. The pad shall be used to eliminate mud from
the construction area onto public right-of-way. The pad shall be constructed as shown on the drawings.
Any mud or debris tracked on streets shall be cleaned up immediately.
Any disturbed or stockpiled areas that will be left exposed more than 14 days or less according to State
NPDES General Stormwater Permits shall immediately receive temporary or permanent seeding.
Mulch/straw shall be used if the season prevents the establishment of a temporary cover. Disturbed
areas shall be limed and fertilized prior to temporary seeding.

02020 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
Permanent vegetation shall be established as specified on all exposed areas within 14 days or less
according to State NPDES General Stormwater Permits after final grading. Mulch as necessary for seed
protection and establishment. Lime and fertilize seedbed prior to permanent seeding.
Slopes shall be permanently seeded and mulched as the excavation or fill proceeds to the extent
possible. Slopes that erode easily shall be temporarily seeded and mulched. Any slopes steeper than
3:1 or steeper or as indicated on drawings shall be protected with stabilization fabric per specifications.
All storm drainage outlets must be stabilized, as specified, before the discharge points become
operational. Equip all inlets with inlet protection immediately upon construction.
Discharge from de-watering operations for the excavated areas shall not be directed to surface waters
without first properly removing the suspended sediment through filtration and/or settlement. The
Contractor shall obtain any required permits associated with dewatering activities.
The quantity of silt fence to be installed will be affected by the actual conditions that occur during the
construction of the project. Silt fence shall be installed at locations shown on the drawings and any
additional locations necessary for proper sediment control. The Contractor shall maintain the silt fence
until the project is stabilized and shall remove and dispose of the silt fence and silt accumulations when
1/3 the height of the fence is reached.
A 6 thick stone base laydown area shall be constructed on grade as located on the drawings or as
directed by the Owner. When the job nears completion, this stone may be incorporated into the
pavement section provided it is left in place and that any overlying contaminated material has been
removed.
Soil erosion and sediment control shall include but not be limited to the approved measures. The
Contractor shall be responsible for providing all additional measures that may be necessary to
accomplish the intent of the drawings.
Comply with all other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

02020 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 02230 SITE PREPARATION AND GRADING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to
complete the site preparation and grading and related items as indicated or specified herein or as
indicated on the drawings.
Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete all site
preparation and grading work, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with local codes and
standards, or as specified herein. This work shall include but not be limited to grading, removing,
moistening, compacting, filling, cutting and protecting.
Site Investigation:
1.
Bidders are expected to visit the site to form their own conclusions as to the character of
the site preparation and grading work.
2.
Verify survey data. Stake out all work and verify as to location and elevation. Carefully maintain all
bench marks, monuments, and other referenced points; if disturbed or destroyed, replace as
directed.
Geotechnical Report:
1.
Neither the Owner nor Architect guarantees the accuracy of the report nor the continuity of the soil
conditions indicated at boring locations. Bidders are fully responsible for interpretations or
conclusions they draw from the geotechnical report.
Finished Grade:
1.
"Finished Grade" as used herein, refers to the required final grade elevation indicated. If the
finished grades indicated by spot elevations conflict with those indicated by contours, the spot
elevations will apply.
2.
Unless otherwise indicated, give project site areas outside of building uniform slopes between
points for which finished grades are indicated or between such points and existing established
grade except provide vertical curves or roundings at abrupt changes in slopes.
All work shall be coordinated with other sections.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
Submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 01330.

Shop drawings shall clearly show layout, designation, number, type, location and materials required.
Material certificates for each type of product indicated. Include statements of material properties
indicating compliance with requirements, standards, and type designations within standards. Include
material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.
Field quality control test and inspection reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
Installer Qualifications: Experience in performing work of this section, specializing in installation of work
similar to that required for this project, employing workers who are skilled in this area of work, and whose
projects have a record of successful in-service performance.
Certification: Product certificates signed by manufacturer, certifying materials comply with specified
performance characteristics, criteria, and physical requirements.
Testing: As required by the latest industry codes and standards.
1.
Provide testing as specified herein.
2.
See Section 01400 for provisions covering required testing and payment for testing.
Tolerances shall conform to industry codes and standards, except as otherwise noted.

02230 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.
1.5
Locate storage, stacks or bins to protect material from heavy and unnecessary traffic.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.6
Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities during site-clearing operations.
1.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without
permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises
where indicated.
Utility Locator Service: Notify locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.
Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures
are in place.
MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A.
Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared materials
shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1
SOILS MATERIALS (Fill)

A.
B.
The existing native soils (where approved by geotechnical report) are suitable for use as engineered fill
material below building and paved areas providing that all vegetation and debris is removed.
Imported fill materials shall be free of vegetation and debris. The gradation of imported engineering fill
material is determined by ASTM C136, and shall be within the following limits.
Sieve Size
(Square Openings)
6"
No. 200
C.
D.
Percent Passing
By Dry Weight
100
50 Max
The material shall have a plasticity index of no more than 10 when tested by ASTM D4318 and as
required by Soils Report.
Obtain approval to borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil materials are not available on-site.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
SITE PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
All site preparation shall be in accordance with the recommendations in the geotechnical report.
Strip and remove all structural remnants, existing fill, vegetation, debris, loose soil, etc., from the building
site. Thoroughly clean and widen depressions as necessary to accommodate compaction equipment.
Grade pad to a tolerance of plus or minus 0.1' of the specified pad elevation. Pad certification is to
consist of spot elevations taken on a grid of 50'-0 centers across the entire building pad. All spot
elevations are to be within 0.1' of the specified pad elevation.
Remove soils beneath footing and provide engineered fill as indicated in the Geotechnical Report.
02230 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
E.
F.
3.2
Scarify, moisten and compact exposed subgrade in the excavations to depth of 6". Fill material needed
to raise and level the building site shall be imported fills, or clean on-site soils.
At paved areas scarify, moisten or dry as required, and compact the existing surface soils to a 12" depth
prior to placement of fill or pavement materials.
SUBGRADE
A.
B.
C.
3.3
Prepare subgrade at all building areas to proper elevation to receive under-slab fill specified in Section
02300.
Prepare subgrade at all paved areas to proper elevation to receive base course materials specified
under another Section of these Specifications. Construct subgrade in fill layers not more than 8" in
depth, each layer being thoroughly consolidated by soaking with water and rolling with a power roller
having a weight of at least 250 pounds per inch width of tire.
Perform all grading required to bring the entire project area to the underside of the respective surfacing
as determined by the finished grades.
COMPACTION
A.
B.
Compact as per geotechnical report or as noted below if not indicated.

Compaction of fills and foundation soils shall be in horizontal lifts not exceeding 8" in thickness.
Compact to the percent of maximum density at optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM
D698, as follows:
Subgrade soil*
Sub-base fill*
Below footing elevation
Above footing elevation
C.
3.4
95%
95%
95%
95%
*Compaction of soils shall be accomplished with a moisture content between optimum minus 3% and
optimum plus 3%.
GRADING
A.
3.5
After construction and final clean-up of exterior, and removal of all debris, grade building site to slopes
and elevations directed. Leave graded areas raked smooth. Remove excess material from the site and
legally dispose of.
PROTECTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.6
Protect all newly graded areas from traffic and erosion.

Keep areas free of trash and debris.
Repair and establish grades in any areas settled, rutted or eroded.
Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.
Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1.
Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A.
B.
C.
Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of
soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, as required.
Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until
permanent vegetation has been established.
Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.
02230 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.7
TREE PROTECTION
A.
B.
C.
3.8
Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing.
Remove fence when construction is complete.
Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated.
Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations,
in a manner approved by Architect.
UTILITIES
A.
B.
3.9
Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed as indicated on the
drawings.
1.
Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted
under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services
according to requirements indicated:
1.
Notify Architect not less than five days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A.
3.10
A.
B.
C.
3.11
A.
3.12
A.
Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further
excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1.
Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8", and compact each layer to
a density equal to adjacent original ground.
TOPSOIL STRIPPING
Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying
subsoil or other waste materials.
Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and
shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
SITE IMPROVEMENTS
Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new
construction.
DISPOSAL
Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and
waste materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
1.
Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other non-recyclable materials.
Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities.

02230 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 02260 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.3
Design, furnish, install, monitor and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of
supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and superimposed and
construction loads.
1.
Provide professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility, including
preparation of Shops Drawings and a comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Shop Drawings for Information: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional
engineer for excavation support and protection systems.
1.
Include Shop Drawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
PROFESSIONAL CONDITIONS
A.
Survey adjacent structures and improvements, employing a qualified professional engineer of land
surveyor; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks
and record existing elevations.
1.
During installation of excavation support and protection systems, regularly resurvey benchmarks,
maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for comparison with original
elevations and positions. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations or positions occur or if
cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
General: Provide materials that are either new or in serviceable condition.

Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M, ASTM A690/A690M or ASTM A992/A992M.
Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A328/A328M, ASTM A572/A572M or ASTM A690/A690M, with continuous
interlocks.
Wood Lagging: Lumber, mixed hardwood, nominal rough thickness of 4".
Cast-in-Place Concrete: ACI 301, of compressive strength required for application.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, deformed.

02260 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during
excavation support and protection system operations.
Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets,
walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress and for as long as
excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage or other evidence of movement to ensure
that excavation support and protection systems remain stable.
Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities cause by installing excavation support and protection
systems.
REMOVAL AND REPAIRS
A.
B.
Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to
support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing
underlying soils or damaging structures, pavements, facilities and utilities.
1.
Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 48" below overlying
construction and abandon remainder.
2.
Repair or replace, as approved by Architect, adjacent work damaged or displaced by removing
excavation support and protection systems.
Leave excavation support and protection systems permanently in place.

02260 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.2
This Section includes the following:

1.
Preparing sub-grades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns and grasses, and exterior
plants.
2.
Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3.
Drainage course for slabs-on-grade.
4.
Sub-base course for concrete walks and pavements.
5.
Sub-base and base course for asphalt paving.
6.
Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.
All work relating to this Section must be approved by the Soils Engineer prior to start of excavation
including but not limited to: excavation, sub-grade, soil material storage, backfill, moisture control,
grading, and drainage. All work shall conform to attached soils report in Appendix A.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.

1.
Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support
sides of pipe.
2.
Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
Base Course: Course placed between the sub-base course and hot-mix asphalt paving.
Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated sub-grade in a trench before laying pipe.
Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
Revise heading in first paragraph below to read "Capillary Water Barrier" or a similar title if required.
Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore
water.
Excavation: Removal of material encountered above sub-grade elevations and to lines and dimensions
indicated.
1.
Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below sub-grade elevations or beyond indicated
lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement
material will be paid for according to Contract provisions changes in the Work.
2.
Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below sub-grade elevations or beyond indicated lines and
dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work
directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.
Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and
electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground
surface.
Sub-base Course: Course placed between the sub-grade and base course for hot-mix asphalt
pavement, or course placed between the sub-grade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement
concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
Sub-grade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill
immediately below sub-base, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within
buildings.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.3
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to
requirements indicated.
All work shall be performed in accordance with local codes and standards, the specifications herein, or
as indicated on the drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
2.2
General: Provide borrow soil materials from other areas on site when sufficient satisfactory soil materials
are not available from excavations.
Revise two paragraphs and associated subparagraph below and identify soil materials according to
geotechnical engineer's written recommendations. Revise soil groups and size of stone to suit Project.
Add liquid limit and plasticity index if further qualifying satisfactory soil groups. Most soils are classified
according to ASTM D2487. Heavy civil or highway projects may use AASHTO M 145.
Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM
AASHTO M 145 Soil Classification Groups A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3, or a combination of these groups;
free of rock or gravel larger than 2 in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and
other deleterious matter.
Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to
ASTM D2487, A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7 according to AASHTO M 145, or a combination of
these groups.
Terms, descriptions, and gradations of granular soil materials in paragraphs below are examples only.
Revise to comply with local practices and to suit Project. For example, granular materials may be
referenced by state or local highway designations rather than by ASTM classifications.
Sub-base Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone,
and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940; with at least 90% passing a 1-1/2 sieve and not more than
12% passing a No. 200 sieve.
Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940; with at least 95% passing a 1-1/2 sieve and not more than 8%
passing a No. 200 sieve.
Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940; with at least 90% passing a 1-1/2 sieve and not more than 12%
Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940; except with 100% passing a 1 sieve and not more than 8%
Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed, crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel;
ASTM D448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100% passing a 1-1/2 sieve and 0% to 5%
ACCESSORIES
A.
Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and
identifying underground utilities, 6 wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the
utility.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
3.2
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
Preparation of sub-grade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris,
obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 2 Section "Site
Preparation and Grading.
Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 2 Section "Site
Preparation and Grading," during earthwork operations.
EXCAVATION
A.
3.3
Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and
subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials,
and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock
excavation or removal of obstructions.
1.
If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock,
replace with satisfactory soil materials.
EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A.
3.4
Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1. If applicable,
extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for
installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1.
Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by
hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and
grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A.
3.5
Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.
EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A.
B.
C.
D.
Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit.
Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless
1.
Clearance: 12 each side of pipe or conduit.
Revise paragraph and subparagraph below to suit Project, requirements of authorities having jurisdiction,
type of pipe or conduit, and manufacturer's installation requirements.
Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes
and conduit. Shape sub-grade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and
for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.
1.
Excavate trenches 6 deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material, 4
deeper elsewhere, to allow for bedding course.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.6
SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A.
B.
3.7
Proof-roll sub-grade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to
identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated sub-grades.
Reconstruct sub-grades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.
UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A.
3.8
Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete
foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day
compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect.
1.
Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect.
STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A.
3.9
Stockpile, borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place,
grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1.
Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining
trees.
UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.10
A.
B.
3.11
A.
Place backfill on sub-grades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to
provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of
conduits.
Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill
with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-inPlace Concrete.
Provide 4 thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 below surface of
roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 of
concrete before backfilling or placing roadway sub-base.
Place and compact initial backfill of sub-base material free of particles larger than 1 in any dimension, to
a height of 12 over the utility pipe or conduit.
Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final sub-grade elevation.
Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 below finished grade, except 6 below sub-grade under
pavements and slabs.
SOIL FILL
Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material
will bond with existing material.
Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1.
Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
2.
Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3.
Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
4.
Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
5.
Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
Uniformly moisten or aerate sub-grade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction
to within 2% of optimum moisture content.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.
2.
3.12
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.13
A.
B.
C.
3.14
A.
B.
3.15
A.
B.
Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds
optimum moisture content by 2% and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.
COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 in loose depth for material compacted by
heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 in loose depth for material compacted by handoperated tampers.
Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly
along the full length of each structure.
Select option in paragraph below based on ASTM test method required. Replace the term "unit weight"
with "density" if preferred.
Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according
to ASTM D698 and ASTM D1557:
1.
Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and re-compact top 12 of existing
sub-grade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95%.
2.
Under walkways, scarify and re-compact top 6 below sub-grade and compact each layer of backfill
or fill soil material at 95%.
3.
Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and re-compact top 6 below sub-grade and compact each
layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92%.
4.
For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95%.
GRADING
General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with
compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1.
Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1.
2.
Walks: Plus or minus 1.
3.
Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2.
Grading inside Building Lines: Finish sub-grade to a tolerance of when tested with a 10-0
straightedge.
SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
Place sub-base and base course on sub-grades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
On prepared sub-grade, place sub-base and base course under pavements and walks as follows:
1.
Shape sub-base and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
2.
Compact sub-base and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross
sections, and thickness to not less than 95% of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D698
and ASTM D1557.
DRAINAGE COURSE
Place drainage course on sub-grades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
On prepared sub-grade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-ongrade as follows:
1.
Place drainage course that exceeds 6 in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no
compacted layer more than 6 thick or less than 3 thick.
2.
Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than
95% of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D698.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.16
A.
B.
C.
3.17
A.
B.
C.
3.18
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to
perform field quality-control testing.
Revise testing in paragraph below to suit Project or delete if not applicable.
1.
Allow testing agency to inspect and test sub-grades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
2.
Revise paragraph below to suit Project or delete if not applicable. If retaining, add other field tests,
such as California bearing ratio of sub-grades, sub-bases, and bases for paving, if required.
3.
Footing Sub-grade: At footing sub-grades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed
to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of sub-grade with tested sub-grade when approved
by Architect.
Revise first paragraph below to suit Project.
1.
Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D1556, ASTM D2167,
ASTM D2922, and ASTM D2937, as applicable.
2.
When testing agency reports that sub-grades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required;
re-compact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
PROTECTION
Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris.
Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces
become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction
operations or weather conditions.
Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with
additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1.
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and
eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and
debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 02305 - TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.2
Work under this section shall include, but not be limited to excavating trenches for the installation of
storm drains and utilities, backfilling trench with bedding material as specified and finish filling trenches
with suitable material to proposed subgrade, compacting subgrade, bedding, and backfill materials, and
compliance with all environmental and health and safety regulations.
This work shall include all labor and materials and equipment necessary to meet all applicable
requirements as specified in the contract documents.
REFERENCE SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3
Section 02300 - Earthwork

Section 02510 - Water Distribution
Section 02530 - Sanitary Sewer
Section 02630 - Storm Drainage
Section 02813 - Landscape Irrigation
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
B.
C.
1.4
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Latest Edition

1.
D 422
Method for Particle Size Analysis
2.
D 698
Test of Moisture Density Relations of Soils - Standard Proctor Method
3.
D 1557
Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using 10-lb (4.5 Kg) Hammer and
18" (457 mm) Drop (Modified Proctor)
4.
D 2216
Laboratory Determination of Moisture Content of Soil
5.
D 2321
Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewer/Gravity-Flow Applications
6.
D 2922
Tests for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow
Depth)
7.
D 3017
Test for Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods
(Shallow Depth)
8.
D 4318
Test for Plastic Limit, Liquid Limit, & Plasticity Index of Soils
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) latest edition
1.
T 88
Mechanical Analysis of Soils
2.
M 43
Standard Sizes of Coarse Aggregate for Highway
National Electric Code
1.
NEC 300-5
2.
NEC 710-36
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
1.5
Accurately record actual locations of all subsurface utilities, structures and obstructions encountered.
Accurately record any as-built variation from the construction drawings and specifications. The
Contractor shall provide as-built drawings within 30 days of project completion.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
A geotechnical engineer, selected and paid by the Owner, shall be retained to perform construction
inspection and testing on backfilling operations as stated herein. This inspection will not relieve the
Contractor from his responsibility to complete the work in accordance with the drawings and
specifications.
TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
02305 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Removal/Relocation of Existing Utilities: The contractor shall be responsible for removal and/or
relocation of existing utilities, whether shown or not shown on the drawings, at locations where conflicts
occur with proposed utility improvements at no additional cost to the owner.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
The Contractor shall contact all utility companies and identify any requirements. Contractor shall provide
written confirmation of the status of all utility construction to the Owner at the time of the preconstruction
conference or no later than 30 days following the project possession date.
Submit a sample of each type of offsite fill and/or bedding material that is to be used in backfilling in
accordance with Section 02300 - Earthwork.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
Backfill material shall be as specified on trenching and bedding details and approved by the Owner
and/or the geotechnical engineer.
Bedding Material: Bedding material shall be as specified on trenching and bedding details and/or shall
conform to local code. If a conflict exists the more stringent shall apply.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Set all lines, elevations, and grades for utility and drainage system work and maintain for the duration of
work. Provide careful maintenance of benchmarks, property corners, monuments, or other reference
points.
Protect and maintain in operating condition, existing utilities encountered during utility installation. Repair
any damage to surface or subsurface improvements shown on Drawings.
Verify location, size, elevation, and other pertinent data required to make connections between existing
utilities, drainage systems, and proposed construction indicated on Drawings. Coordinate all building
utility connection locations and elevations with architectural drawings. Contractor shall comply with all
local codes and regulations.
Install dewatering systems that will be required to construct the proposed utilities to the design
elevations. Water pumped out of excavations shall be disposed of on-site, and will not be discharged
directly to the municipal storm drainage system or surface waters.
Where the foundation material is found to be of poor supporting value or of rock, the Owners engineer
may make minor adjustments in the location of the pipe to provide a more suitable foundation. Where
this is not practical, the foundation shall be conditioned by removing the existing foundation material by
undercutting to the depth as directed by the geotechnical engineer and backfilling with either a suitable
local material secured from unclassified excavation or borrow excavation at the nearest accessible
location along the project, or foundation conditioning material consisting of crushed stone or gravel or a
combination of sand and crushed stone or gravel approved by geotechnical engineer as being suitable
for the purpose intended. The selection of the type of backfill material to be used for foundation
conditioning will be made by the geotechnical engineer.

02305 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.2
TRENCH EXCAVATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
3.3
Contact regulatory authorities having jurisdiction and utility companies before excavation begins. Dig
trenches at proper width and depth for laying pipe, conduit, or cable and in accordance with utility
company and/or manufacturer requirements. Cut trench banks for safety and remove stones as
necessary to avoid point-bearing.
All trench excavation side walls shall be sloped, shored, sheeted, braced or otherwise supported by
means of sufficient strength to protect the workmen within them in accordance with the applicable rules
and regulations established for construction by the Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA), and by regulatory authorities having jurisdiction, codes and ordinances.
All trench width requirements for pipe, conduit, or cable shall be the minimum practical width that will
allow for proper compaction of trench backfill, complying with trenching and bedding details, and satisfy
all safety utility company regulations.
Provide uniform bearing and support for each section of pipe at every point along the entire length,
except where necessary to excavate for bell holes, pipe joints, or other required connections. Dig bell
holes and depressions for joints after trench bottom has been graded. Dig no deeper, longer, or wider
than needed to make the joint connection properly.
During excavation, stockpile excavated material suitable for backfilling in an orderly manner far enough
from the trench to avoid overloading and slides.
Remove excavated materials from the site which are not suitable for backfill.
Any abandoned structures utilities or debris discovered during excavation shall be removed and
disposed of, or capped.
Utility alignments have been designed to avoid expected obstructions wherever possible. If unanticipated
significant obstructions are encountered during utility installation work immediately notify the Owner.
Prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations by temporary grading or other
methods, as necessary. Remove accumulated water in trenches or other excavations by pumping or
other acceptable methods. Discharge water only to approved sediment control BMPs.
Utility installation shall meet the following minimum pipe installation depths, or applicable codes and
ordinances, measured from finished grade.
1.
Water Mains: 42" to top of pipe barrel or 12" below the frost line (established by the regulatory
authorities having jurisdiction ), whichever is deeper, or as specified on the plans;
2.
Sanitary Sewer: Elevations, and grades as indicated on drawings (36" minimum);
3.
Storm Sewer: Elevations, and grades as shown on drawings (24" minimum);
4.
Electrical Conduits: 24" to top of secondary service conduits, 36" minimum to the top of primary
service conduits, or as required by NEC 300-5, NEC 710-36 codes, or the regulatory authorities
having jurisdiction, and utility company requirements, whichever is deeper;
5.
Telephone Conduits: 24" to top of conduit, or as required by the regulatory authorities having
jurisdiction and utility company, whichever is deeper; and,
6.
Landscape Irrigation Piping: See Section 02813.
LATERALS
A.
3.4
All utilities intended to connect to services within any building will be extended to within 5'-0" of the
building limits in the direction and at elevations to connect at those geometrical locations indicated or
inferred on the drawings. All utility ends will be plugged and marked by a 2" x 4" piece of wood
extending from the utility invert to 4'-0" above final grade.
PIPE BEDDING
A.
Accurately cut trenches for pipe or conduit to designated line and grade 4" below the bottom of the pipe,
to width as specified previously.

02305 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
3.5
Over excavate wet or unstable soil, if encountered, from trench bottom as necessary to provide a
suitable base for continuous and trench bottom. Compact trench bottoms a minimum of 92% of the
maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557, Modified Proctor Test.
Place bedding material as specified on trenching and bedding details as shown on drawings.
BACKFILLING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
The fill around the pipe shall be placed and compacted in accordance with the trenching and bedding
details shown on the drawings, and shall be placed in layers not to exceed 8" loose unless otherwise
approved by the geotechnical engineer. The geotechnical engineer shall approve all backfill material.
Select material shall be used as specified by trenching and bedding details and where required by the
geotechnical engineer.
Care shall be taken during backfill and compaction operations to maintain alignment and prevent
damage to the joints. The backfill shall be kept free from stones, frozen lumps, chunks of highly plastic
clay, or other objectionable material.
All pipe backfill areas shall be graded and maintained in such a condition that erosion or saturation will
not damage the pipe bed or backfill.
Heavy equipment shall not be operated over any pipe until it has been properly backfilled with a
minimum 2'-0" of cover. Where any part of the required cover is above the proposed finish grade, the
Contractor shall place, maintain, and finally remove such material at no cost to the Owner. Pipe which
becomes misaligned, shows excessive settlement, or has been otherwise damaged by the Contractor's
operations shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet,
frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. Should these conditions exist, the areas should be removed,
replaced and recompacted as per Section 02300, Earthwork.

02305 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 02361 TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
All labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete all work involved in poisoning the soil
below all slab-on-grade construction to provide a chemical barrier to protect the buildings and contents
against attack by subterranean termites.
Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide the quantity
required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed
for each specific use, according to products EPA-Registered Label.
All areas of construction involving soil contact (such as removal of concrete or excavation around
buildings) shall be treated with termiticide in accordance with these specifications and EPA
requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
1.3
EPA: Environmental Protection Agency

PCO: Pest control operator
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
B.
1.4
Applicator shall be licensed by the State Structural Pest Control Board.

The chemical being used shall be registered with, and be approved by, the production and marketing
administration of the EPA.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the EPA-Registered Label.
Product Certificates.
Soil Treatment Application Report - After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for
Owner's record information, including the following:
1.
Date and Time of Application.
2.
Moisture content of soil before application.
3.
Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide.
4.
Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
5.
Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used.
6.
Areas of application.
7.
Water source for application.
Upon completion of soil poisoning, and as a condition of final acceptance, submit to the Owner a written
guarantee providing that:
1.
The application and formula was made at the concentration rates and methods in compliance with
the EPA and the manufacturers recommendations.
2.
The effectiveness of the treatment is guaranteed for a term of five (5) years without any additional
cost to the Owner.
3.
Any evidence of subterranean termite activity and/or damage to the structure resulting from such
activity within the guarantee period will be treated and/or repaired at no cost to the Owner.
4.
The guarantee shall be fully transferable to other owners at no charge.
UPDATED: NOVEMBER 15, 2011
TERMITE CONTROL
02361 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.6
Chemical analysis tests shall be made of materials used on the basis of one test for each 10,000 SF of
treated area. Samples and test may be taken of both concentrates and the dilute materials as being
applied. See Section 01400 for provisions covering payment for testings.
Applicator Qualifications: A PCO who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is
experienced and has completed termite control treatment similar to that indicated for this Project and
whose work has a record of successful in-service performance
Applicator Qualifications: A PCO who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is an
experienced installer who employs workers trained and approved by bait station system manufacturer to
install manufacturer's products.
Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides, and label with a Federal registration
number, to comply with EPA regulations and authorities having jurisdiction.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do
not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with EPA-Registered Label requirements and
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
COORDINATION
A.
1.8
Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, and grading and concreting operations.
Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs, before construction.
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.9
General Warranty: The warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner
may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
Warranty: Written warranty for five years from date of Certificate of Occupancy, signed by applicator and
Contractor certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent
infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during
warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
A.
Continuing Service: Provide a proposal for continuing service, including monitoring, inspection, and
retreatment for occurrences of termite activity, from applicator to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly
(or other period) continuing service agreement, starting on the date of Certificate of Occupancy. State
services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SOIL TREATMENT
A.
Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent,
and formulated to prevent termite infestation. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to
plants. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide
concentration allowed for each specific use, according to the product's EPA-Registered Label.
TERMITE CONTROL
02361 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a.
BASF Corporation.
b.
Bayer Corporation.
c.
Dow AgroSciences.
d.
FMC Corporation.
e.
Syngenta
f.
AMVAC Chemical Corporation
Materials:
1.
Termiticide to be equal to BASF, Termidor SC.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for
moisture content of the soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, and other
conditions affecting performance of termite control. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with
manufacturer's written instructions for preparing substrate. Remove all extraneous sources of wood
cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and
construction waste wood from soil and around foundations.
Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease
treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except
previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides are to be applied before placing
compacted fill under slabs if recommended by termiticide manufacturer.
To avoid surface flow of the toxicant from the application site, treatment shall not be made when soil or
fill is excessively wet. Apply only after all preparation for slab sub-base placement has been completed.
Concrete slab sub-base is native or engineered soil below the installed compacted granular base and
vapor barrier (4" +/-) materials directly under the concrete.
Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with
APPLICATION, GENERAL
A.
3.4
General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with
manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.
APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT
A.
Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required
for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide,
according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and
vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction.
Distribute treatment evenly.
1.
Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction, including
footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before
concrete footings and slabs are placed.
TERMITE CONTROL
02361 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.5
Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls,
along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating
the slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; also along the entire
outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings.
3.
Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations as previously indicated. Treat adjacent
areas including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment
only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground.
4.
Masonry: Treat voids.
5.
Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated.
Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.
Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-supported
slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions.
Post warning signs in areas of application.
Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or
other construction activities following application.
Dispose of all containers and mixtures in accordance with manufacturers recommendations, Local,
State, and Federal Regulations.
INSPECTION
A.
B.
Apply no material without 72 hour notification to the Owner Representative so he may be present during
application.
Apply treatment material during normal working hours in order to be subject to inspection. Permit
inspector to sample any and all material used, and to verify the rate of application and volumes.
TERMITE CONTROL
02361 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 02400 - AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
The work covered by this section consists of the construction of a stone base composed of an approved
aggregate material, placed on parking lot areas, outside storage areas, driveways, beneath proposed
building slabs, and/or other identified areas, shaped to conform to the grades as provided on the contract
drawings. The Contractor shall comply with any provisions of all applicable state and local regulatory
authorities having jurisdiction, codes, regulations, and standards.
REFERENCE SECTIONS
A.
1.3
Section 02300 - Earthwork

REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
B.
1.4
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

1.
T88
Particle Size Analysis of Soils
American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1.
D1557
Modified Proctor Test
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
1.5
The Contractor shall provide at least one supervisory person who shall be present at all times during
execution of the work and who is thoroughly familiar with the type of work being performed and its best
methods for completion. This person shall have the authority to act on behalf of the Contractor.
A geotechnical engineer familiar with the requirements of the geotechnical engineering study, selected
and paid by the Owner, will be retained to perform construction inspection on site based on density
testing, visual observation, and judgment. This inspection will not relieve the Contractor from his
responsibility to complete the work in accordance with the drawings and specifications.
One compaction test per 2000 square yards for each lift, shall be performed within the pavement area.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
At least two weeks in advance of imported aggregate use, the Contractor shall submit the following
laboratory test data, in conformance with the specified DOT aggregate materials:
1.
Particle Size Analysis: AASHTO T88; and
2.
Density: Modified Proctor Test (ASTM D1557)
Submit the name of aggregate base course material supplier and specific type and source of each
material, including relevant DOT compaction or specifications. Any change in source or aggregate base
course type throughout the job requires approval of the Owner and the geotechnical engineer.
The geotechnical engineer shall prepare field reports that indicate compaction test location, elevation
data, testing results and acceptability. The Owner and Contractor shall be provided with copies of
reports within 24 hours of time test was performed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
All aggregate materials shall meet the state department of transportation specifications for gradation and
other specified material requirements.
02400 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
Recycled Concrete Aggregate may be approved by the Owner for use in lieu of aggregate base course
under the following conditions:
1.
The gradation, plasticity, soundness, and abrasion requirements of the material shall meet the
governing department of transportation specifications for recycled concrete aggregate or aggregate
base course;
2.
The Contractor shall be required to submit a sieve analyses to the Owner for review and approval;
3.
The recycled concrete aggregate shall not contain foreign materials, which includes reinforcing
steel, wood, and other friable material; and,
4.
The Contractor shall obtain all required permits and report recycled materials usage as required by
the regulatory authorities having jurisdiction.
The Owner reserves the right to not approve usage of recycled concrete aggregate, for both pavement
base structure and building pad construction. Approval shall be granted on a project by project basis.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PLACEMENT OF AGGREGATE BASE MATERIAL

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.2
The subgrade shall be shaped to conform to the grades shown on the drawings and shall meet the
requirements of Article 3.06, Section 02300, Earthwork, including completion of the Building Pad/Limits
and Paved Area Certification forms.
The aggregate material shall be placed in a uniform loose depth and without segregation. All stone base
delivered to the site shall be spread and rolled by the end of each day.
Where the required compacted thickness of base is 8" or less, the base material may be spread and
compacted in one layer. Where the required compacted thickness is more than 8", the base material
shall be spread and compacted in 2 or more approximately equal layers. The minimum compacted
thickness of any one layer shall be 4".
Each layer of material shall have been sampled, tested, compacted, and approved prior to placing
succeeding layers of base material or pavement.
No base material shall be placed on frozen subgrade or base.
The Contractor shall utilize methods of handling, hauling, and placing which will minimize segregation
and contamination. Aggregate which is contaminated with foreign materials shall be removed and
replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
COMPACTION OF AGGREGATE BASE MATERIAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
Each stone layer/lift shall be maintained to the required cross section during compaction and each layer
be compacted to the required density prior to placing the next layer.
Each layer of the base shall be compacted to a density equal to at least 98% of Modified Proctor density
(ASTM D1557).
The base material shall be compacted at a moisture content which is approximately that required to
produce the maximum density, as determined by the geotechnical engineer and approved by the Owner.
The Contractor shall dry or add moisture to the material when required to provide a uniformly compacted
and acceptable base.
The final layer of base material shall be shaped to conform to the lines, grades, and typical sections as
shown on the drawings or established by the engineer. When completed, the base course shall be
smooth, hard, dense, unyielding, and well bonded.
All stoned areas shall be proofrolled in accordance with Article 3.06, Section 02300, Earthwork.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
The thickness of the base course shall be within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/2" of the required
thickness as specified on the drawings for building pad and pavement areas.
02400 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
D.
The elevation of the base course, within the building limits, shall be within a tolerance of 0 to minus 1/2".
All other areas shall be within a tolerance of +/- 0.10'-0".
The Contractor shall be required to repair any areas which do not comply with this specification. Any
repairs required shall be at no cost to the Owner, and shall meet these specifications.
The developer and/or Contractor shall provide Sprouts Building Pad/Limits and Paved Area(s)
Certification forms for stone base, which are located at the end of Section 02300, Earthwork.

02400 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 02510 - WATER DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.2
This Section includes water-distribution piping and related appurtenances from tapping of main to:
1.
Within 5'-0" of outside the building limits for domestic and irrigation water service; and,
2.
1'-0" above finished floor elevation for fire service mains.
3.
Supply and discharge piping, including connections, to fire protection water tank if shown on plans.
All work shall conform to the requirements of the local water authority, fire marshal, any other regulatory
authorities having jurisdiction, or this specification, whichever is more stringent.
REFERENCE SECTIONS
A.
1.3
Section 02305 Trench Excavation and Backfill

REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Factory Mutual (FM)

1.
Approval Guide
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
1.
Fire Protection Equipment Directory
2.
UL 1285
Pipe and Couplings, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), for Underground Fire Service
3.
UL 262
Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service
4.
UL 246
Hydrants for Fire-Protection Service
National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)
1.
NSF 14
Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials
2.
NSF 61
Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
1.
NFPA 70
2.
NFPA 24
Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and their Appurtenances
3.
NFPA 1963 Screw Threads and Gaskets for Fire Hose Connections (revision of ANSI/NFPA
1963-1993)
4.
NFPA 13
Installation of Sprinkler Systems (latest edition)
American Water Works Association (AWWA)
1.
C151
Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water (revision of ANSI/AWWA
C151/A21.51-91)
2.
C104
Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water
3.
C150
Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe
4.
C110
Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3" through 48" (75mm through 1200mm), for
Water and Other Liquids
5.
C153
Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3" through 24" (76mm through 610mm) and 54"
through 64" (1,400mm through 1,600mm), for Water Service
6.
C900
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4" through 12" for Water Distribution
7.
C500
Gate Valves for Water and Sewage Systems
8.
C111
Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings
9.
C550
Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants
10. C509
Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service
11. M44
Distribution Valves: Selection, Installation, Field Testing, and Maintenance
12. C800
Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings
13. C702
Cold Water Meters - Compound Type
14. C502
Hydrants, Dry Barrel Fire
15. M41
Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
WATER DISTRIBUTION
02510 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
16.
17.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.4
C600
C605
Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances

Water Treatment - Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Pressure
Pipe and Fittings for Water
18. M23
PVC Pipe: Design and Installation
19. M17
Fire Hydrants: Installation, Field Testing, and Maintenance
20. C651
Disinfecting Water Mains
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1.
B88
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
2.
B813
Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering Applications of
Copper and Copper Alloy Tube
3.
B32
Standard Specification for Solder Metal
4.
D2241
Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR
Series)
5.
D3139
Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible
Elastomeric Seals
6.
F645
Standard Guide for Selection, Design, and Installation of Thermoplastic Water
Pressure Piping Systems
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
1.
B16.18
Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings R(1994)
2.
B16.22
Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS)
1.
SP-60
Connecting Flange Joint Between Tapping Sleeves and Tapping Valves
Copper Development Association (CDA)
1.
Copper Tube Handbook
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.5
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of the regulatory authorities having jurisdiction;
including tapping of water mains, backflow prevention, installation, testing, and disinfection. Comply with
standards of the regulatory authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-service piping,
including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: UL listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article
100, by a testing agency acceptable to the regulatory authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
Comply with FM's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire-service-main
products.
NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 13 and NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and
valve and hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression.
NSF Compliance: Comply with NSF 14 for plastic potable-water-service piping. Comply with NSF 61 for
materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic water.
Comply with requirements of Section 02305 Trench Excavation and Backfill.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
1.
Notify the Owner not less than 2 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions; and,
2.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without written permission from the Owner.
occur with proposed water line improvements at no additional cost to the Owner.
WATER DISTRIBUTION
02510 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.6
COORDINATION AND FEES

A.
B.
C.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and payment of all tap and construction permit fees
associated with this section.
The Contractor shall provide and install domestic and irrigation water lines, meters, and appurtenances
as shown on the drawings to within 5'-0" of building limits, including, but not limited to, any taps, meters,
vault, and backflow prevention. If Contractors work terminates at a connection point where work by
others is complete, Contractor shall make the connection. If future connections will be required by others,
Contractor shall install plugging and marking apparatus as necessary to protect his work.
The Contractor shall provide and install fire service water lines, meters, and appurtenances as shown on
drawings to 1'-0" above finished floor elevation, including, but not limited to any taps, meters, backflow
prevention, hydrants, and free standing fire department connections. If Contractors work terminates at a
connection point where work by others is complete, Contractor shall make the connection. If future
connections will be required by others, Contractor shall install plugging and marking apparatus as
necessary to protect his work.
PART 2 MATERIALS AND APPLICATION

2.1
PIPE AND FITTINGS, APPLICATION

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.2
Ductile-Iron Pipe, NPS 3" or larger:

1.
Ductile iron pipe shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C151, class 350, and shall have a
cement-mortar lining of standard thickness in accordance with AWWA C104; pipe thickness shall
be in accordance with AWWA C150; pipe shall have push-on joints in accordance with AWWA
C110. Additional fittings shall be mechanical-joint ductile-iron compact fittings in accordance with
AWWA C153 or standard size in accordance with AWWA C110.
Soft Copper Tubing, NPS 3" or smaller:
1.
Tubing shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM B88, Type K, annealed temper. Fittings
shall be in accordance with ASME B16.18, for cast-copper-alloy, solder joint pressure fitting, or
ASME B16.22 for wrought-copper, and copper-alloy, solder joint pressure fitting type. Soldering flux
shall be in accordance with ASTM B813, water-flushable type. Solder filler metal shall be in
accordance with ASTM B 32, lead-free type with 0.20% maximum lead content.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, NPS 4" to NPS 12":
1.
PVC pipe shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C900, Class 150, DR 18. Pipe joints shall be
elastomeric joints only. Sleeve couplings are not permitted except as necessary for repairs during
testing, or connections to existing mains. Comply with UL 1285 for fire-service mains. Fittings shall
be mechanical-joint ductile-iron compact fittings in accordance with AWWA C153 or standard size
in accordance with AWWA C110.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe NPS 2" to NPS 3":
1.
Pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2241, SDR 21, with elastomeric joints
conforming to ASTM D3139. Pipe jointing shall be by elastomeric joints only. Sleeve couplings are
not permitted except as necessary for repairs during testing, or connections to existing mains.
Fittings shall be PVC fabricated fittings with elastomeric gaskets, or ductile iron compact fittings
conforming to AWWA C153 with elastomeric gaskets.
VALVES
A.
Cast-Iron, Gate Valves:

1.
Nonrising-Stem, Metal-Seated Gate Valves: AWWA C500, UL 262, FM-approved, gray- or ductileiron body and bonnet; with cast-iron or bronze double-disc gate, bronze gate rings, bronze stem,
and stem nut.
a.
Minimum Working Pressure: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
b.
End Connections: Mechanical joint, per (AWWA C 111).
WATER DISTRIBUTION
02510 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
D.
2.3
c.
Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.
d.
Nut: 2" square, complying with AWWA C500.
2.
Nonrising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves: AWWA C509, UL 262, FM-approved, gray- or
ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem,
and stem nut.
a.
Minimum Working Pressure: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
b.
End Connections: Mechanical joint, per ANSI A21.11 (AWWA C111).
c.
Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.
d.
Nut: 2" square, complying with AWWA C500.
Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies: Conform to the requirements of MSS SP-60. Tapping sleeves may be castiron, ductile-iron or stainless-steel, two-piece bolted sleeve with flanged outlet for new branch
connection..
Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section, adjustable
extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, lid with lettering "WATER," bottom section with
base of size to fit over valve, and approximately 5" diameter barrel. Provide a 2-0" x 2'-0" x 6 concrete
apron around all valve boxes in asphalt pavement areas.
Operating Wrenches: Steel tee-handle, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and 2" square
socket matching valve operating nut, placed in sprinkler room.
CORPORATION VALVES AND CURB STOPS
A.
B.
C.
2.4
Service-Saddle Assemblies: Comply with AWWA C800.

Corporation Valve: Comply with AWWA C800, bronze body, threaded inlet and outlet matching service
piping material.
Curb Stops: Comply with AWWA C800, bronze body, with inlet and outlet matching service piping
material.
POST INDICATOR VALVES
A.
2.5
Post indicator valves shall be UL listed and FM approved.

WATER METERS
A.
B.
C.
2.6
2" Service Meters: AWWA C702, compound-type, bronze main case. Register flow in gallons.
Fire Service Meters: AWWA C703, bronze case. Register flow in gallons. Use fire service meters only
when required by the regulatory authorities having jurisdiction code.
Water Meter Boxes: Cast-iron body and cover (H2O rated) with lettering "WATER METER" in cover; and
slotted, open-bottom base section of length to fit over service piping. Use only when required by the
utility authority. Provide a 2-0" x 2-0" x 6 concrete apron around all valve boxes in asphalt pavement
areas.
BACKFLOW-PREVENTION DEVICES
A.
Comply with regulatory authorities having jurisdiction requirements. Maximum pressure loss for a double
detector check valve shall be 5 psi @ 2250 gpm and maximum pressure loss for a RPZ shall be 12 psi
@ 2250 gpm.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
TRENCHING
A.
Comply with requirements of Section 02305, Trench Excavation and Backfill.

WATER DISTRIBUTION
02510 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.2
VALVES
A.
B.
3.3
General Application: Use mechanical joint valves for NPS 2" and larger underground installation. Use
threaded or flanged-end valves for installation in vaults.
Provide 2-0" x 2-0" x 6 concrete apron around all valve boxes in asphalt pavement areas.
PIPE AND FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
3.4
Water-Main Connection: Verify with regulatory authorities having jurisdiction that size of tap and location
shown on drawings is acceptable. Make tap conforming to requirements of regulatory authorities having
jurisdiction and Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) standards.
Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation.
Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.
Install copper tube and fittings in accordance with Copper Development Association (CDA) "Copper
Tube Handbook."
Install PVC pipe in accordance with AWWA C605 M23 and ASTM F 645.
All piping shall be installed with a minimum of 42" of cover, or 12" below level of max frost penetration, or
as required by regulatory authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is deeper. If pipe is installed in a cut
section prior to completion of grading operations, pipe shall be installed so that minimum required cover
will exist upon completion of grading operations.
Terminate water piping as required per above Article 1.06.
Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use
restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports. See thrust block
details on drawings.
Pipe Bedding: Pipe bedding material shall be as specified on trenching and bedding details as shown on
drawings. No pipe shall be laid resting on a rock, blocking or unyielding objects.
Location with Sewers: Separate trenches shall be provided for water lines and sewer lines, with lines
separated by a minimum of 10'-0" horizontally. Water mains that cross sewers shall have a minimum
vertical separation of 18".
All piping shall be installed and verified to be level. This shall apply to piping in the horizontal and
vertical positions.
ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION
A.
3.5
Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include
anchorages for the following piping systems:
1.
Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA C600;
2.
Gasketed-Joint, PVC Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M23;
3.
Fire-Service-Main Piping: According to NFPA 24; and,
4.
Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed
ferrous anchorage devices.
BACKFLOW-PREVENTER INSTALLATION
A.
B.
3.6
Comply with regulatory authorities having jurisdiction, including water authority requirements.
Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust blocks have hardened
sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only
potable water.
WATER DISTRIBUTION
02510 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
3.7
Hydrostatic Tests:
1.
The Contractor shall test all pipe lines and appurtenances with water at test pressure of 200 psi or
50 psi in excess of the system working pressure, whichever is greater. Test pressure must be
maintained for at least 2 hours. All leakage apparent after testing must be repaired immediately.
The work will not be finally accepted until leakage shall be as follows:
a.
The amount of leakage at the joints shall not exceed 2 quarts per hour per 100 gaskets or
joints, irrespective of pipe diameter.
b.
The amount of leakage specified above shall be permitted to be increased by 1 fluid ounce
per 1" valve diameter per hour for each metal seated valve isolating the test section.
c.
If dry barrel hydrants are tested with the main valve open so the hydrants are under
pressure, an additional 5 fluid ounces per minute shall be permitted for each hydrant.
d.
The amount of leakage in buried piping shall be measured at the specified test pressure by
pumping from a calibrated container.
2.
Fire Water System tests shall be in full conformity with the requirements of all applicable codes,
NFPA standards, and other authorities having jurisdiction.
a.
All new underground mains and lead-ins shall be flushed thoroughly before connection is
made to internal system piping. The site utility subcontractor shall be responsible for
disposal of the test water drained from the test outlets.
b.
The trench shall be backfilled between joints before testing to prevent movement of pipe.
c.
Test shall be made by the site utility subcontractor in the presence of the regulatory authority
having jurisdiction and/or the Owners representative.
d.
After the fire service underground main and lead-in have been installed by the site utility
subcontractor and are ready for use, the site utility subcontractor shall furnish 2 completed
copies of the Contractors Material and Test Certificate for Private Fire Service Mains form
to the General Contractor. Prior to attachment of any pipe or equipment to the lead-in
located in the sprinkler room, the sprinkler subcontractor shall obtain a copy of the
completed form from the General Contractor.
e.
The site utility subcontractor shall prepare reports of testing activities and submit 2 copies to
the General Contractor.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.8
Install continuous underground detectable warning tape in accordance with Section 02300 Earthwork,
or a 14-gauge solid copper tracer wire prior to backfilling of trench for underground PVC water-service
piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping.
CLEANING AND FLUSHING
A.
Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows:

1.
Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before use;
2.
Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is
not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in NFPA 24 for flushing
of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points
of outlet;
3.
Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by regulatory authorities having jurisdiction or, if
method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA
C651 or as described below; and,
a.
Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of
chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours.
b.
Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution
containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.
c.
After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water
coming from system.
WATER DISTRIBUTION
02510 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
d.
4.
5.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if
biological examination shows evidence of contamination.
The site utility subcontractor shall prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities and submit
2 copies to the General Contractor.
All fire protection underground mains shall be flushed per the flow rates listed below:
No Fire Pump or Water Storage Tank

8" pipe
10" pipe
12" pipe
1,560 gpm
2,440 gpm
3,520 gpm
Underground and lead-in fire protection mains shall be flushed through fire hydrants at dead ends
of the underground piping system or through aboveground flushing outlets which are accessible,
will allow water to drain to a safe location and will provide the required flow listed above. Flush
underground mains until water is clear. Continue to flush for five minutes after water is clear.
Utilize approved waterflow measuring devices to verify that the required waterflow is achieved.
WATER DISTRIBUTION
02510 - 7

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 02530 - SANITARY SEWER

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.2
This section includes sanitary sewer piping and related appurtenances from connection to main to within
5'-0" of outside the building limits.
All work shall conform to the requirements of the local sewer authority and any other regulatory
authorities having jurisdiction, or this specification, whichever is more stringent.
REFERENCE SECTIONS
A.
1.3

REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.

1.
A746
Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe
2.
D3034
Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and
Fittings
3.
F477
Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe
4.
F679
Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity
Sewer Pipe and Fittings
5.
C476
Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry
6.
C443
Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe,
Using Rubber Gaskets
7.
C923
Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete
Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals
8.
D2321
Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers
and Other Gravity-Flow Applications
9.
C478
Standard Specifications for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
10. C969
Standard Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of Installed
Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines
American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE)
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1.
318
Building Code Requirements for Structural Plain Concrete
National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)
1.
C110
Water and Other Liquids (revision of ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10-93)
2.
C111
Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings C153 - Ductile-Iron
Compact Fittings, 3" through 24" (76mm through 610mm) and 54" through 64"
(1,400mm through 1,600mm), for Water Service (revision of ANSI/AWWA
C153/A21.53-94)
3.
C600
Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances (revision of
ANSI/AWWA C600-93)
4.
C150
ANSI Standard for Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe
5.
C151
ANSI Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe
6.
C153
ANSI Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe Compact Fittings
Federal Specifications
1.
SS-S-00210 Sealing Compound Preformed Plastic for Pipe Joints
SANITARY SEWER
02530 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
H.
1.4
Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association

1.
UNI-B-6
Low-Pressure Air Testing of Installed Sewer Pipe
A.
B.
1.5
Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure-Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system test pressure.

Force-Main Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
1.6
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of the regulatory authorities having jurisdiction;
including tapping of sewer mains, installation, and testing.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
Comply with requirements of Section 02305, Trench Excavation and Backfill
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
1.7
1.
Notify the Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions; and,
2.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without written permission from the Owner.
occur with proposed sanitary sewer improvements at no additional cost to the Owner.
COORDINATION AND FEES
A.
B.
Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and payment of all tap and construction permit fees
associated with this section.
Contractor shall install all sewer lines and appurtenances as shown on the drawings to within 5'-0" of
building limits. This shall include any taps, pumps, tanks, etc. If Contractors work terminates at a
connection point where work by others is complete, Contractor shall make the connection. If future
connections will be required by others, Contractor shall install plugging and marking apparatus as
necessary to protect, identify and locate his work
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
2.2
PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: 12" and smaller: ASTM D3034, SDR 35, elastomeric gasket joints per
ASTM F477 and ASTM D3212.
PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: 15" and larger: ASTM F679, SDR 35, Type T-1, elastomeric gasket joints
per ASTM F477 and ASTM D3212.
Ductile-Iron Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A746, AWWA C110, AWWA C111, AWWA C150, AWWA
C151, AWWA C153, for push on joints.
MANHOLES
A.
Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with
provision for rubber gasketed joints, and pipe boots.
1.
Inside diameter: 48" minimum, unless otherwise indicated;
SANITARY SEWER
02530 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.
B.
C.
2.3
Base Section: 8" minimum thickness for floor slab and 5" minimum thickness for walls and base
riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor;
3.
Riser Sections: 5" minimum thickness;
4.
Top Section: Eccentric-cone type, unless otherwise indicated;
5.
Gaskets: ASTM C443, rubber (When required by local authority having jurisdiction);
6.
Steps: 16" on centers, ASTM C478, for all structures over 3'-6" in height;
7.
Pipe Connectors: ASTM C923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section;
and,
8.
Joints of the manhole sections shall be of the tongue and groove type, filled with an approved
preformed butyl rubber base, sealing compound, conforming to Federal Specifications SS-S210A,
Type 1, Rope form.
Standard manhole frames and covers: shall conform to the standard detail of the regulatory authorities
having jurisdiction for the project (if applicable). Otherwise, manhole frames and covers to be Neenah
Foundary Co. No. R-1642 or Vulcan Foundary Inc. No. V-1357.
All sanitary sewer manhole covers shall have the word SANITARY SEWER cast on the top in letters 2"
high.
CONCRETE
A.
2.4
General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, 4,000 psi.

CLEANOUTS
A.
Cleanouts shall be provided on sewer service laterals at no more than 100-0" on centers. Exterior
cleanout plug shall be US Foundry cover USF 7621 or equal. Each cleanout plug shall be level with
adjacent grade and provided with a 2-0" x 2-0" x 6 thick concrete apron.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 02305 Trench Excavation and Backfill.
Identification: Materials and their installation are specified in Section 02300 Earthwork . Arrange for
installing green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground structures.
1.
Use warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping; and,
2.
Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures.
Piping Applications: Include watertight joints.
Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of
invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings
according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation
requirements.
Use manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections,
unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
Install gravity-flow piping to within 5'-0" of the building, at the building's sanitary drains, of sizes and in
locations indicated. Terminate piping as indicated.
Install piping at slope shown on the drawings. If no slope is shown, minimum slope shall be 1% for 6"
diameter pipes and 0.5% for 8" diameter pipes.
Install piping with 36" minimum cover.
Pipe Joint Construction and Installation: Join and install pipe and fittings according to installations
indicated.
1.
PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: Install according to ASTM D2321; and,
2.
Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this application. Use
couplings that are compatible with and that fit both systems' materials and dimensions.
SANITARY SEWER
02530 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
J.
K.
L.
3.2
Manhole Installation: Install complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.

1.
Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet; and,
2.
Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements.
Protect existing piping and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap
connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.
Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses.
1.
Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops; and,
2.
Flush piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected debris.
A.
B.
Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect
after approximately 24" of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.
1.
Defects requiring correction include the following:
a.
Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
b.
Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size
not less than 95% of pipe diameter.
c.
Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d.
Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
e.
Exfiltration: Water leakage from piping.
2.
Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within
allowances specified.
3.
Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for
leaks and defects.
1.
Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval;
2.
Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction;
3.
Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance
notice;
4.
Submit separate reports for each test to general contractor within 2 days of test;
5.
If authorities having jurisdiction do not have published procedures, perform tests as follows:
a.
Sanitary Sewerage: Perform hydrostatic test.
i.
Allowable leakage is maximum of 50 gal. per 1" of nominal pipe size per mile of pipe,
during 24-hour period.
ii.
Close openings in system and fill with water.
iii.
Purge air and refill with water.
iv.
Disconnect water supply.
v.
Test and inspect joints for leaks.
vi.
Option: Test ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600, Section "Hydrostatic
Testing." Use test pressure of at least 10 psig.
b.
Sanitary Sewerage: Perform air test according to UNI-B-6.
i.
Manholes: Perform hydraulic test according to ASTM C969;
ii.
Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired; and,
iii.
Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within
allowances specified.
SANITARY SEWER
02530 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 02585 - TRAFFIC CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
INTENT
A.
1.2
During any time the normal function of a roadway is suspended, temporary traffic control planning must
provide for continuity of function: movement of traffic, pedestrians, access to property/utilities, etc.
Effective temporary traffic control must provide for the safety of workers, road users, and pedestrians. It
is essential that concern for traffic safety, worker safety and efficiency of traffic movement form an
integral element of every temporary traffic control zone, from planning through completion of work
activity.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Work under this section shall consist of the planning for and the implementation of maintenance and
protection of vehicular and/or pedestrian traffic during construction. Maintenance and protection of traffic
includes furnishing, assembling, placing and relocating traffic control devices, including temporary
pavement striping and markings, and removing all devices when they are no longer required. All traffic
control shall be in accordance with the latest MUTCD.
REFERENCE SECTIONS
A.
1.4
Section 02745 Pavement Markings and Removal

REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
B.
1.5
Standard Specifications of the State Department of Transportation.

Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), Part VI Standards and Guides for Traffic Control
for Streets and Highway Construction, Maintenance Utility and Incident Management Operation, latest
edition.
SUBMITTALS
A.
If a traffic control drawing has been included in the drawings by the engineer, it shall be the Contractors
responsibility to review the drawing prior to implementation. Any proposed changes to the drawing shall
be submitted for approval. The proposal submitted by the Contractor shall be thoroughly planned and
scheduled, and any potentially unsafe condition shall be minimized such that motorists, pedestrians and
workers are protected at all times. The proposal shall be approved before the Contractor begins work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIAL
A.
Contractor shall provide all materials necessary to perform the work including but not limited to:
Breakaway Barricades, Construction Signs, Reflectorized Drums, Floodlights for Nighttime Operations,
Illuminated Flashing Arrows/Warning Lights, Pre-cast Concrete Construction Barrier, Traffic Cones,
Traffic Directors, Flaggers, Variable Message Signs, Temporary Crash Cushions or Sand Barrel Impact
Attenuating Devices, Traffic Control Trucks with Mounted Crash Cushions, Temporary Traffic Marking
Tape or Paint, or any other markings required or specified by the regulatory authority having jurisdiction.
TRAFFIC CONTROL
02585 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
3.2
Traffic control devices must be in good condition. Traffic control devices, other than those shown on the
drawings shall conform to the MUTCD and authorities having jurisdiction.
Prior to beginning construction, traffic control devices shall be in place. Traffic control devices shall be
kept clean and maintained in good condition until no longer required for the project, at which time they
shall be removed from the project area.
When the construction involves improvement of an existing roadway, the roadway shall be kept open to
traffic unless otherwise approved or shown on the drawings.
The portion of the roadway that is opened to traffic shall adequately accommodate the vehicular traffic.
Temporary approaches, crossings, intersections and access to roadways, businesses, residences,
parking lots, schools, police and fire stations, hydrants, hospitals, dumpsters, mailboxes, etc., shall be
provided and maintained in a safe condition, and if necessary, signs shall be provided.
Any damage to the newly constructed or existing pavements within the limit of the project or adjacent to
the project that was caused by the Contractors operations shall be repaired at the Contractors expense.
Any restriction of required traffic lane widths or diversion of traffic at any time is subject to approval of
authorities having jurisdiction.
Except as necessary during the actual working hour as approved, equipment, materials, personnel or
vehicles shall not occupy any travel way, shoulder, median or sidewalk area within 30'-0" of the project
limit that is open to traffic.
Work which closes or alters the use of existing roadways shall not be undertaken until adequate
temporary or permanent provisions for traffic control have been approved and installed.
Where it is necessary for pedestrians to cross or walk within the limits of the project, temporary
sidewalks and/or handicapped ramps shall be provided, maintained, and removed.
The Contractor shall perform daily inspections, including weekends and holidays, including inspections at
night, and take all corrective action to ensure compliance with the traffic control plan and other approved
standards. The duties shall include, but shall not be limited to, the responsibility for ensuring the
following:
1.
Setup and removal of all traffic control devices in accordance with the contract documents;
2.
Correction of deficiencies of traffic control devices within 2 hours of discovery or notification by the
engineer;
3.
Repositioning traffic control devices displaced by traffic or construction equipment;
4.
Covering or uncovering any conflicting signs or signals as appropriate;
5.
Repairing or replacing damaged traffic control devices;
6.
Replacing batteries, light bulbs, control panels, and other electrical components;
7.
Keeping all traffic control devices clean;
8.
Adding fuel and oil to power units for traffic control devices;
9.
Properly storing and packing equipment and vehicles so as not to create a traffic hazard;
10. Properly storing traffic control devices when not in use; and,
11. Eliminating, covering, or protecting all excavations or drop-offs greater than 2" deep or sloped with
a 6:1 escape ramp with densely graded aggregate base course during non-working periods, or as
required by the regulatory authority having jurisdiction.
NIGHTTIME OPERATION
A.
All operations that are performed during the non-daylight hours shall be properly illuminated to allow for
the complete performance and inspection of the work. Lighting systems shall be positioned such that
they do not cause glare to drivers or any nearby homes. When necessary, the lighting systems shall
include screening to minimize glare. When required, all lighting plans shall be approved by authorities
having jurisdiction.
TRAFFIC CONTROL
02585 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.3
DETOURS AND LANE CLOSURES

A.
3.4
Approval and consent of the regulating authority having jurisdiction shall first be obtained before
rerouting traffic. All necessary arrangements shall be made with such authorities regarding the
establishment, maintenance, and repair of such detours, the regulation and direction of traffic thereon,
and signing. Adequate directional and detour signs, acceptable to the local authorities having
jurisdiction, shall be furnished and erected at the locations in such sequence where such authorities may
direct, prior to the start of construction.
TRAFFIC DIRECTORS
A.
B.
3.5
Trained flaggers shall wear a fluorescent orange reflectorized garment when controlling traffic. Trained
flaggers shall be equipped with STOP/SLOW paddles, and shall follow the procedures stipulated for
flaggers in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD).
Police Officers shall be provided, when required. Contact the local municipal police department (48
hours) prior to any operation which necessitates a policed traffic director.
TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND TAPES
A.
3.6
See Section 02745 - Pavement Markings and Removal.

ADVANCE WARNING SIGNS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
The placement of signs shall be adjusted if they create interference in a sidewalk area or driveways,
other existing signs, trees or reduced visibility due to horizontal and vertical curvature of the roadway.
Upon installing the signs, the signs should be examined at night to determine if specular glare is
apparent, and if so, the sign shall be adjusted/aligned by shimming the sign.
Sign faces shall be so positioned in relation to a line normal to the adjacent edge of traveled way that the
sign face is rotated about its edge, nearest the traveled way, through an angle of 5 deg, in the direction
of travel.
All sign faces and support surfaces shall be cleaned of all foreign matter.
When blasting operations are within 1,000'-0" of a travelway, the Contractor shall provide the temporary
warning signs as required by the regulatory authority having jurisdiction.
TRAFFIC CONTROL
02585 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 02630 - STORM DRAINAGE

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Work under this section shall consist of providing all labor, plant facilities, materials, tools, equipment,
shop drawings and supervision necessary and required to install all of the storm drainage facilities,
including piping, fittings, structures, bedding, and backfilling, as specified in accordance with the contract
documents.
REFERENCE SECTIONS
A.
1.3

REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
B.
C.
American Society For Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1.
A185
Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
2.
A615
Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
3.
A760
Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic-Coated, for Sewers and Drains
4.
A798
Installation of Corrugated-Steel Pipe for Sewers and Other Applications
5.
A929
Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process for Corrugated Steel Pipe
6.
C76
Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe
7.
C443
Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets
8.
C478
Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
9.
C913
Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater Structures
10. C1479
Installation of Reinforced Concrete Pipe
11. C990-01A
Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed
Flexible Joint Sealants
12. D1056
Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber
13. D2321
Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewer/Gravity-Flow Applications
14. D3034
Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings
15. D3212
Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Elastomeric Seals
16. F477
Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe
17. F794
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on
Controlled Inside Diameter
18. F949
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe With a Smooth Interior & Fittings
19. F2418
Polypropylene (PP) Corrugated Wall Stormwater Collection Chambers
1.
M36
Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic-Coated, for Sewers and Drains
2.
M198
Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer & Culvert Pipe Using Flexible Watertight Gaskets
3.
M252
Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Tubing
4.
M274
Aluminum-Coated (Type 2), for Corrugated Steel Pipe
5.
M288
Geotextile Specification for Highway Applications
6.
M294
Corrugated Polyehtylene Pipe.
7.
M36
Metallic Coated Corrugated Steel Culverts and Underdrains
8.
M43
Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction
9.
M190
Bituminous Coated Corrugated Metal Culvert Pipe and Pipe Arches
10. M199
Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
11. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Sections 3 & 12.
1.
C110
Water and Other Liquids (revision of ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10-93)
STORM DRAINAGE
02630 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
D.
1.4
2.
C111
Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings
3.
C151
Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water
1.
301
Structural Concrete for Buildings, Specifications for
2.
318
Building Code Requirements for Structural Plain Concrete
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
1.5
Accurately record as-built locations of pipe runs, connections, catch basins, cleanouts, top elevations
and invert elevations.
Identify and describe unexpected variations of subsurface conditions and location of any utilities
encountered.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
All costs related to reinspection due to failures shall be paid for by the Contractor at no additional
expense to the Owner. Owner reserves the right to direct any inspection that is deemed necessary.
Contractor shall provide free access to site for inspection activities.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
occur with proposed storm drainage improvements at no additional cost to the owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPES, CHAMBERS AND FITTINGS

A.
B.
C.
D.
Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP)

1.
ASTM C76, Class III unless otherwise noted on drawings; and,
2.
Butyl mastic sealant shall meet the requirements of ASTM C990-01a for silt-tight designations or
rubber gaskets meeting the material and joint configuration requirements of ASTM C443 for
watertight designations.
High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE) Smooth Interior
1.
Pipe and fittings shall conform to AASHTO M252 and M294;
2.
Rubber gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477 with joints conforming to AASHTO
M294, silt-tight or watertight designations; and,
3.
Maximum permitted diameter of 48".
Aluminized Steel Type 2 Corrugated Steel Pipe (CMP)
1.
Pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM A929 or AASHTO M274;
2.
The minimum gage for pipe materials shall be 16 gauge for diameters of 10" to 24", 14 gage for
diameters of 30" to 48", 12 gage for diameters of 54" to 96" and 10 gage for diameters of 102" and
larger, but not less than the gage otherwise indicated on the drawings;
3.
Each pipe shall be clearly marked to show class or gauge, date of manufacture, and name or
trademark of the manufacturer;
4.
Joints for corrugated metal pipe, pipe arches and fittings shall be minimum 10 wide outside collars
or coupling bands of aluminized steel angles riveted near the ends and bolted through angles to
draw the bands tight for silt-tight designations. Additionally, a 7 wide x 3/8 thick one piece
continuous neoprene gasket per ASTM D1056 shall be provided at watertight designations.
Aluminized Steel Type 2 Spiral Ribbed Pipe (Type IR)
1.
Pipe shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M274 or ASTM A929 and AASHTO M36 or ASTM
A760 with 3/4"x 3/4"x 7-1/2" continuous ribs such as Ultra Flo by Contech or approved equal;
STORM DRAINAGE
02630 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.2
2.
Maximum permitted diameter of 48"; and
3.
Shall meet the requirements stated in Article 2.01 C (2-4) above.
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC)
1.
Pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM D3034, SDR 35; and,
2.
Rubber gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477 with joints conforming to ASTM D3212.
Corrugated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
1.
Pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM F949 and F794;
2.
Rubber gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477 with joints conforming to ASTM D3212;
and,
3.
Approved Manufacture: Contech A2000, 1001 Grove Street, Middletown, OH 45044, (336) 8542177.
Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP)
1.
Pipe shall meet the requirements of AWWA C151; and,
2.
Fittings shall meet the requirements of AWWA C110 with rubber gaskets conforming to AWWA
C111.
Subdrains
1.
Shall be perforated PVC or HDPE; and,
2.
Installation shall be in accordance with the details and at the locations shown on the drawings.
Stormwater Collection Chambers
1.
Chambers shall meet the requirements of ASTM F2418 and meet the safety factors recommended
by Section 12.12 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. Loads for design shall be
calculated in accordance with Section 3 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
2.
The chamber manufacturer shall provide design data in accordance with ASTM F2418.
3.
Installation shall be in accordance with the details shown on the drawings.
4.
Chamber rows shall provide continuous, unobstructed internal space with no internal support
panels in order to provide ease of access for inspection and maintenance functions.
5.
All stormwater chamber systems shall incorporate designated chamber rows enclosed in geotextile
fabric for sediment capture and maintenance. The fabric shall be located as per the manufacturers
details and shall be as follows:
a.
Fabric between the chamber bottom and the stone foundation shall be AASHTO M288 Class
1 Woven for stabilization and filtration.
b.
Fabric between the top of the chamber and the embedment stone shall be AASHTO M288
Class 2 Non-woven for separation.
DRAINAGE STRUCTURES, DROP INLETS, CATCH BASINS, MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES
(All structures shall be precast unless otherwise approved by the Owner)
A.
B.
C.
Structures:
1.
Precast Concrete Drainage Structures;
a.
Heavy-duty traffic rated (H20) conforming to ASTM C478 or ASTM C913.
2.
Cast In-Place Concrete Drainage Structures;
a.
Heavy-duty traffic rated in accordance with Department of Transportation Standards.
3.
Solid concrete Brick Masonry;
a.
Heavy-duty traffic rated in accordance with Department of Transportation Standards
Cast Iron Frames, Hoods, and Grates per details shown on drawings. If available provide hood with
stencil or casting Dump no waste drains to waterways or equal. Provide local casting if required.
Provide 6" thick rectangular concrete apron, with 18" minimum width measured from the edge of
structure frame to the end of concrete apron, around all structure frames in asphalt pavement areas.
Provide saw cuts from each corner of the concrete apron to the frame of structure.
Steps
1.
Shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M199 for design, materials, and dimensions;
2.
Built into the walls of all structures over 3'-6" in height; and,
3.
Steps shall be 16" o.c. with lowest step being no more than 16" from the bottom.
STORM DRAINAGE
02630 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
D.
2.3
Reinforcement
1.
Deformed reinforcing bars, grade 40 or 60, meeting the requirements of ASTM A615; and,
2.
Wire fabric meeting the requirements of ASTM A185.
CLEANOUTS AND PLUGS
A.
B.
2.4
Installation shall be in accordance with the details and at locations shown on the drawings.
All Cleanouts shall have a 2-0" x 2-0" x 6 thick concrete apron.
MISCELLANEOUS
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.5
Headwall: Construction shall be in accordance with details shown on drawings and concrete shall be in
accordance with Article 2.06 of this section.
Stone Rip-Rap: Meeting State DOT specifications, and unless noted otherwise on drawings, shall have
a median stone size of 6". All rip-rap shall be installed over a medium weight non-woven geotextile
fabric.
Concrete Lined Channels: Construction shall be in accordance with details shown on drawings and
concrete shall be in accordance with Article 2.06 of this section.
Flared-End Sections: Meeting State DOT specifications unless otherwise noted on drawings.
BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIAL
A.
2.6
Where the foundation material is found to be of poor supporting value or of rock, the Owner may make
minor adjustments in the location of the pipe to provide a more suitable foundation. Where this is not
practical, the foundation shall be conditioned by removing the existing foundation material by
undercutting to the depth as directed by the geotechnical engineer and backfilling with either a suitable
local material secured from unclassified excavation or borrow excavation at the nearest accessible
location along the project, or foundation conditioning material consisting of crushed stone or gravel or a
combination of sand and crushed stone or gravel approved by geotechnical engineer as being suitable
for the purpose intended. The selection of the type of backfill material to be used for foundation
conditioning will be made by the geotechnical engineer.
CONCRETE
A.
B.
No concrete or masonry shall be placed when the temperature is below 40 deg F, or when indications
are for lower temperatures within 24 hours, unless protection of concrete and masonry is approved by
the Owner. Damage to the structure because of freezing shall be corrected by the Contractor at his own
expense, to the satisfaction of the Owner.
Concrete shall conform to ACI 301 and applicable referenced specifications and shall have a 28 day
compressive strength of 4,000 psi.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
B.
The Contractor shall install all drainage structures, pipe and chambers in the locations shown on the
drawings and/or as approved by the Owner. Pipe shall be of the type and sizes specified on the
drawings and shall be laid accurately to line and grade. Structures shall be accurately located and
properly oriented.
Excavation and Backfill The provisions in Section 02305, Trench Excavation and Backfill shall govern
all work under this Section.
STORM DRAINAGE
02630 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.2
Storage and Handling of Pipe All pipe shall be protected against impact, shock and free fall, and only
equipment of sufficient capacity and proper design shall be used in the handling of the pipe. Storage of
pipe on the job shall be in accordance with the pipe manufacturers recommendations.
Damage to Pipe or Chambers
1.
Pipe or chambers which are defective from any cause, including damage caused by handling, and
determined by the Owner as unrepairable, shall be unacceptable for installation and shall be
replaced at no cost to the Owner and as directed by the Owner; and,
2.
Pipe or chambers that are damaged or disturbed through any cause prior to acceptance of the
work, shall be repaired realigned or replaced as directed by the Owner, at the Contractors
expense.
Manholes, catch basins and drain inlets shall be constructed as soon as the pipe laying reaches the
location of the structures. Should the Contractor continue his pipe laying without making provisions for
completion of the structures, the Owner shall have the authority to stop the pipe laying operations until
the structure is completed.
Any structure, which is mislocated or oriented improperly, shall be removed and re-built in its proper
location, alignment and orientation at the Contractors expense.
BEDDING
A.
3.3
Bedding material shall be as specified by trenching and bedding details as shown on drawings.
PIPE AND CHAMBER INSTALLATION
A.
B.
3.4
Comply with Section 02305, Trench Excavation and Backfill

Laying Pipe and Chambers
1.
Unloading and Handling: All pipes and chambers shall be unloaded and handled with reasonable
care. Pipes and chambers shall not be rolled or dragged over gravel or rock during handling. The
Contractor shall take necessary precautions to ensure the method used in lifting or placing the pipe
or chambers does not induce stress fatigue in the pipe or chamber and the lifting device used
uniformly distributes the weight of the pipe or chamber along its axis or circumference;
2.
Each length of pipe or chamber shall be inspected for defects and cracks before carefully lowered
into the trench. Any damaged or any pipe that has had its grade disturbed after laying shall be
removed and replaced. Bituminous coated pipe shall be handled with special care and repair of
damaged coating shall conform with AASHTO M190;
3.
Lay pipe on prepared foundation starting at the downgrade end according to line and grade with
the necessary drainage structures, fittings, bends and appurtenances as shown on the drawings.
Pipes with bell/spigot connections shall be laid with the bell or groove ends upgrade with the spigot
or tongue fully inserted. Lap joint pipes shall be laid with the inside circumferential laps pointing
downstream and with the longitudinal laps at the side or quarter points. Reinforced concrete pipe
shall be installed in accordance with ASTM C1479. Corrugated metal/steel pipe and arch pipe
shall be installed in accordance with ASTM A798. HDPE pipes shall be installed in accordance
with pipe manufactures installation guidelines for heavy duty drainage applications and ASTM
D2321; and,
4.
Pipe sections shall be firmly joined together with appropriate gaskets or bands.
5.
Install chambers in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Rows of chambers shall be
laid out using spacers or appropriate measurements and markings to ensure proper spacing
between rows as specified by the manufacturer.
DROP INLET, CATCH BASIN, MANHOLE AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION
A.
Precast Drainage Structures

1.
Structure units shall be assembled in accordance with the manufacturers instructions to form a
sound structural unit.
STORM DRAINAGE
02630 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.5
Cast in Place Drainage Structures

1.
Structures shall be installed in accordance with the details or referenced specifications shown on
the drawings; and
2.
Concrete shall comply with requirements of Article 2.06 of this section.
Solid Concrete Brick Masonry Structures
1.
Structures shall be installed in accordance with the details or referenced specifications shown on
the drawings;
2.
Only solid masonry units shall be utilized;
3.
Minimum wall thickness shall be 8"; and,
4.
Minimum bottom slab thickness shall be 6" and extended a minimum of 6" outside the structure.
Fittings and Connections
1.
Pipe connections shall be made so that the pipe does not project 3" beyond the inside wall of the
drainage structure, and shall be grouted as necessary to make smooth and uniform surfaces on the
inside of the structure. Boxes to have bottoms filled with concrete to provide a bench between pipe
inverts.
Frames, Grates and Hoods
1.
Shall be set to grade in accordance with the drawings;
2.
Firmly embedded in mortar approximately 1" thick and aligned to fit the top section of the structure;
and,
3.
Brick set in mortar used to adjust the frame to finished grade shall be limited to no more than four
courses for precast structures and have a minimum wall thickness of 8".
Interface with Existing Facilities
1.
Compliance with Facility Owner Requirements: Connections made into existing drainage facilities
shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Owner of the facility. The
Contractor will be required to comply with all such requirements, including securing of all required
permits, and paying the costs thereof. The cost of making the connections in accordance with the
requirements of the Owner of the existing facility shall be included in the Contract Sum; and,
2.
Requirements: The Contractor shall make all required connections of the proposed drainage
facilities into existing drainage facilities, where and as shown on the Drawings and/or as approved
by the Owner.
CONSTRUCTION OF THE PUBLIC RIGHT OF WAY
A.
3.6
Construction within the public right-of-way shall conform to all requirements of the regulatory authority
MODIFICATIONS OF EXISTING STRUCTURES
A.
B.
3.7
General: The Contractor shall alter, reconstruct and/or convert existing structures where and as shown
on the drawings, and/or as approved by the Owner. In general, alterations shall be performed with the
same type of material used in the original construction unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or
approved by the Owner.
Damage to Existing Installations: The Contractor shall exercise extreme care during such alteration,
reconstruction and/or conversions so as not to damage any portions of the structure and/or pipe shown
to remain. Any such damage shall be repaired by the Contractor at his own expense and to the
satisfaction of the Owner.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318 and ACI 350R.
STORM DRAINAGE
02630 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.8
PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A.
B.
3.9
The Contractor shall maintain all pipe and chamber installations and drainage structures in a condition
such that they will function continuously and shall be kept clean of silt, debris and other foreign matter
until the project is accepted.
The Contractor shall use the erosion control and sedimentation prevention techniques necessary to
ensure that construction sediments do not reach the stormwater chamber system.
FINAL INSPECTION
A.
Upon completion of the work and before final acceptance by the Owner, the entire drainage system shall
be subject to a final inspection in the presence of the Owner and/or Site Engineer. The work shall not be
considered as complete until all requirements for line, grade, cleanliness, and workmanship have been
completed.
STORM DRAINAGE
02630 - 7

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 02741 - HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes hot-mix asphalt paving, patching and overlay.

REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
B.
C.
1.3

1.
M140
Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Nineteenth Edition; Revised Per
Interim Specifications - Specifications - 1999 R(1998)
2.
M226
Standard Specification for Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement 19th Edition R(1996)
3.
T245
Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures
Using Marshall Apparatus Nineteenth Edition; ASTM D1559-76
1.
D1559
Test Method for Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall
Apparatus.
2.
D2041
Standard Test Method for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of
Bituminous Paving Mixtures
3.
D2171
Standard Test Method for Viscosity of Asphalts by Vacuum Capillary Viscometer
(RAP Asphalt Mixes)
Asphalt Institute (AI)
1.
MS-2
Mix Design Method for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot Mix Types
2.
MS-22
Principles of Construction of Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement, Addendum
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.4
Job Mix Designs: Contractor shall submit a mix design using either the Marshall Stability or
Superpave Mix Design Submittal Forms, included in this specification, for each pavement course
proposed for construction for the Owners review and approval 45 days prior to schedule production and
lay down of the mix.
Marshall Stability design mix submittals shall include type/name of mix, gradation analysis, grade of
asphalt cement, Marshall Stability in pounds flow, effective asphalt content in percent (%), and
corresponding copies of governing State Department of Transportation (DOT) material specifications or
regulatory authorities having jurisdiction for each proposed material.
Superpave design mix submittals may be submitted in lieu of a Marshall Stability design mix, meeting
the specifications of the governing State Department of Transportation or regulatory authorities having
jurisdiction.
Material Certificates: Contractor shall submit certificates stating that asphalt mix to be supplied complies
with the specifications of the governing State Department of Transportation (DOT) or regulatory authority
having jurisdiction, as well as copies the regulatory specifications corresponding to the asphalt mix
formula and material. The certificates shall be signed by the asphalt mix producer and the Contractor.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be registered with and approved by authorities having
jurisdiction and the DOT of the state in which Project is located.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable standards and requirements of the regulatory
authority having jurisdiction and State DOT for asphalt paving work.
Asphalt-Paving Publication: Comply with Asphalt Institute Manual MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix
Asphalt Pavements," unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
02741 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental/Weather Limitations: Do not apply or produce asphalt materials if the underlying course is
wet or excessively damp, the subgrade or base course is frozen, during rainy weather, or if the air
temperature, measured in the shade away from artificial heat at the location of the paving operations,
does not meet the following requirements:
1.
Tack Coat and Prime Coat: Minimum ambient temperature in the shade has been 40 deg F for at
least 12 hours, immediately prior to application;
2.
Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 35 deg F and rising at time of placement;
3.
Asphalt Binder (Intermediate) Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at the
time of placement; and,
4.
Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature is above 50 deg F at time of placement for
1" lift or 40 deg F for all lifts greater than 1" in depth.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ASPHALT MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Asphalt Cement The type and grade of asphalt cement for the paving mixture shall comply with the
applicable requirements of AASHTO Specification M226, Table 2, and meet governing DOT
specifications.
Prime Coat - emulsified asphalt applications shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M140, and the
governing DOT specifications.
Tack Coat - emulsified asphalt applications shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M140 and meet
governing DOT specifications.
Hot Mix Asphalt Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, the design mix shall have the minimum
stability base on 50-blow Marshall Mix Design in accordance with AASHTO T245 or ASTM D1559.
Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) May be utilized as approved by the Owner. No more than 25%
(total mixture) of RAP material shall be utilized in proposed mixes and shall meet the governing State
Department of Transportation specifications. The origin of the RAP material shall be clearly identified to
the Owner prior to approval, including the RAP percentage identified in the pavement mix design
submittal. RAP material shall be free of contamination, including dirt, debris, concrete, clean stone, etc.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
COLD MILLING
A.
B.
C.
D.
Milling of existing asphalt pavement shall be at the depth and location as indicated on the Construction
Drawings or as directed by the Owner.
The milled surface shall be reasonably smooth and free of excessive scarification marks, gouges, ridges,
continuous grooves, or other damage. The milled pavement surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all
loose aggregate particles, dust, and other objectionable material by the use of power brooms, power
blowers, power vacuums or other means.
The Contractor shall coordinate the adjustment of manholes, meter boxes, drainage inlets, and valve
boxes with the milling operation.
All milled material shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of off-site or used in
conformance with Section 02300, Earthwork, or for utilization as Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement, in
conformance with the specification provided above, as approved by the Owner.

02741 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.2
PATCHING
A.
B.
C.
3.3
Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound
base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12" into adjacent sound pavement, unless
otherwise indicated or directed by the Owner. Re-compact existing unbound-aggregate base course to
form new subgrade.
Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt paving at
a rate of 0.05 gal/sy.
Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix, and while it is still hot, compact flush
with adjacent surface.
SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.4
Proofroll stone base in conformance with Article 3.06, Section 02300 Earthwork, immediately prior to
paving.
Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate
surfaces. Ensure that prepared substrate surface is ready to receive paving. Sweep loose granular
particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not dislodge or disturb aggregate
embedded in compacted surface of base course.
Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 gal./sy.
1.
Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving; and,
2.
Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove
spillages and clean affected surfaces.
3.
Adequate traffic control shall be provided to prohibit traffic from traversing applied area.
Prime Coat: Apply uniformly to non-asphalt surfaces when specified on the drawings at a rate of .20
gal/sy.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.5
Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix
by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each
course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.
Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F and maximum temperature of 325 deg F.
Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in asphaltpaving mat.
Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10'-0" wide unless infill or edge strips of a lesser width
are required. Joint patterns shall be constructed parallel to traffic flow.
Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove
excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix;
use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
COMPACTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside
edge.
Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and
smoothness. Correct lay-down and rolling operations to comply with requirements.
Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt
is still hot enough to achieve specified density.
Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.
Protection: After final rolling, erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until pavement has cooled
and hardened.
Density: Compare density of in-place material against laboratory specimen of same mixture, subjected
to 50 blows of a Standard Marshall hammer on each side of specimen. Minimum acceptable density of
in-place material shall be:
02741 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.
2.
3.6
Density: 95% of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D2041 for binder
(intermediate) and surface courses.
Density: 92% of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D2041 for base
courses.
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A.
B.
C.
3.7
Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances:
1.
Base Course: 1/4";
2.
Binder (Intermediate) Course: 1/4"; and,
3.
Surface Course: 1/8".
Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following
tolerances as determined by using a 10'-0" straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved
areas:
1.
Base Course: 1/2";
2.
Binder (Intermediate) Course: 1/4"; and,
3.
Surface Course: 1/8".
Contractors duties relating to testing include:
1.
Notify Owner 72 hours prior to asphalt paving;
2.
Notifying laboratory of conditions requiring testing; and,
3.
Coordinate with laboratory for field testing.
DISPOSAL
A.
3.8
Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated or milled materials from Project site and
legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests, inspections, and to prepare test reports. Testing agency shall be paid by the Owner.
The Owner shall pay for and have testing agency take two 4" diameter cores per 5,000 sq. yds. of
intermediate course, at locations selected by Owner, for thickness tests. Contractor shall repair holes
resulting from coring to match existing paving. The Owner reserves the right to take additional testing
and should these tests show insufficient thickness, all areas shall be remediated as prescribed by the
Owner.
The Owner shall provide on-site nuclear density testing at random locations during paving operations for
all proposed asphalt courses.
The Contractor may be required to remove and replace hot-mix asphalt where test results or
measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements, at not cost to the Owner.
Cleaning of asphalt paving equipment and tools is not permitted on site.

02741 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 02745 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND REMOVAL

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This section includes specifications for proposed temporary and permanent pavement markings,
including pavement marking removal.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a
minimum ambient or surface temperature of 50 deg F not exceeding 90 deg F and relative humidity at a
maximum of 85%.
Surface Preparation: The surface shall be clean and free of dirt, grease, oil, or other contaminants which
could interfere with adhesion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Temporary and Permanent Pavement-Marking Paint:

1.
Sherwin Williams Setfast Non- leaded Chlorinated Rubber - White on asphalt (TM5126), yellow
on concrete (TM5127), or as indicated on the drawing(s) is preferred.
2.
Sherwin Williams Setfast Acrylic Waterborne Traffic Marking Paint White on asphalt
(TM2160), yellow on concrete (TM2161), or as indicated on the drawing(s).
3.
Valspar Enterprise Latex Traffic Marking Paint White on asphalt (#2540), yellow on concrete
(#2541), or as indicated on the drawing(s).
4.
PPG (Pittsburgh Paints) SPEEDHIDE Traffic and Zone Marking Flat Latex White on
asphalt (11-23), yellow on concrete, or as indicated on the drawing(s).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKINGS

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
Allow new asphalt paving to age a minimum of 48 hours before painting. New concrete pavement shall
age a minimum of 30 days before painting, unless otherwise approved by the Owner.
Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust prior to application.
Apply paint material at manufacturers recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15
mils and dry film thickness of 7.5 mils (each coat).
Paint shall be applied in 2 coats to a clean, dry surface using template or a striping machine. Stripes
shall be of uniform width of 4" wide, unless otherwise noted on the drawing(s). Other markings shall be
provided as on the construction drawings.
TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKINGS
A.
B.
Temporary paint shall be applied in accordance with permanent pavement marking specifications.
However, only 1 coat of paint shall be required to a clean, dry surface using template or a striping
machine. The Contractor may also propose to utilize temporary/removable pavement marking tape, as
Markings shall be applied using butyl adhesive pads or paint to clean dry pavement surfaces which are
free of cracking, checking, spalling, or failure of underlying base material.
UPDATED: FEBRUARY 3, 2012
PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND REMOVAL

02745 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
D.
3.3
When required, removable marking tape or pavement marking paint shall be applied on clean dry
surfaces at designated locations. Tape that has become damaged and is no longer serviceable shall be
replaced without additional compensation.
All temporary markings and striping shall be removed when no longer required. Any pavement area that
has been determined to be damaged as a result of the removal operation shall be repaired at no cost to
the Owner.
PAVEMENT MARKING REMOVAL
A.
Existing pavement marking lines and symbols shall be removed as to not materially or structurally
damage the surface or texture of the pavement. A motorized abrasive device shall be utilized to remove
existing markings. The Contractor shall repair any damage to the pavement at no expense to the Owner.
The pavement surface shall be left in a condition that will not mislead or misdirect customers or
motorists. Pavement marking removal within public rights of way shall be completed in accordance with
the regulatory authority having jurisdiction and the specifications.
PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND REMOVAL

02745 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 02751 - CONCRETE PAVEMENT, CURB AND SIDEWALK

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.2
This Section includes all portland concrete pavement outside the building limits, including but not limited
to:
1.
Driveways and roadways
2.
Parking lots
3.
Curbs and gutters
4.
Sidewalks
For concrete located within the building limits: refer to Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
B.
C.
American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM)

1.
A82
Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
2.
A185
Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement
3.
A615/A615M Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
4.
C33
Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
5.
C94
Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
6.
C150
Standard Specification for Portland Cement
7.
C171
Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
8.
C260
Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
9.
C309
Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete
10. C494/C494M Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
11. C979
Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete
12. C1116
Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete and Shotcrete
13. D1751
Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and
Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)
14. D1752
Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint
Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
15. D3405
Standard Specification for Joint Sealants, Hot-Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt
Pavements
16. D5249
Standard Specification for Backer Material for Use with Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint
Sealants in Portland-Cement Concrete and Asphalt Joints
17. D5893
Standard Specification for Cold Applied, Single Component, Chemically Curing
Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements
1.
301R-99
Specifications for Structural Concrete
2.
304R
Placing and Handling Concrete, etc.
3.
309R-96
Guide for Consolidating of Concrete
4.
330.1
Standard Specifications for Plain Concrete Parking Lots
5.
330R-92
Guide for Design & Construction of Concrete Parking Lots
6.
211.1R-91
Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass
Concrete
1.
M182
Standard Specifications for Burlap Cloth made from Jute for Kenaf
2.
M153
Standard Specifications for Preformed Sponge Rubber & Cork Expansion Joint Filler
CONCRETE PAVEMENT, CURB AND SIDEWALK
02751 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Mix Design: For each concrete mix indicated (see attached form).
Material certificates and test reports.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
2.2
The type of steel reinforcement shall be as shown on the drawings.

1.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, 6" x 6" #10 mesh fabricated from steel wire into flat
sheets;
2.
Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 40, deformed;
3.
Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A82, as drawn; and,
4.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
steel reinforcement. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's Manual of Standard Practice.
5.
Diamond Dowels: 1/4 x 4-1/2 Diamond Dowels by PNA.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.3
Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, II or III.

Aggregate: ASTM C33. Combined aggregate gradation for concrete pavement and other designated
concrete shall be 8% - 18% for large top size aggregates (1-1/2) or 8% - 22% for smaller top size
aggregates (1 or 3/4) retained on each sieve below the top size and above the No. 100 sieve.
Concrete pavements shall have a maximum aggregate size of 1-1/2.
Water/Ready Mix Concrete: ASTM C94.
Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 % water-soluble chloride ions by
mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures, as follows:
1.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260;
2.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A;
3.
Water-Reducing and High-Range Admixture: ASTM C494, Type F;
4.
Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494, Type E; and,
5.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D.
Fly Ash: The use of fly ash, slag and bottom ash is prohibited.
Calcium Chloride: The use of calcium chloride or admixtures containing more than 0.05% chloride ions is
prohibited.
Curing Materials:
1.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry;
2.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet;
3.
Water: Potable;
4.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to
fresh concrete;
5.
Clear Solvent-Borne Liquid-Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B;
6.
Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B;
7.
White Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 2, Class B.
CONCRETE MIXES AND MIXING
A.
Concrete Mixes: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1R-91 and ACI 304, with the
following properties:
1.
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4,000 psi;
2.
Slump Limit: maximum of 5" at time of placement for pavement, 2" maximum for curb and sidewalk;
02751 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
D.
2.4
3.
Air Content: 5% to 8% for pavement, curb and sidewalk.
Coloring Agent: When required, add coloring agent to mix according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1.
Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or
ASTM D1752, cork or self-expanding cork; and,
2.
Coloring Agent: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing
admixtures; color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116.
Project-Site Mixing: On-site mixing must be approved by the Owner. Comply with requirements and
measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94. Mix concrete
materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.
JOINTS, FILLERS AND SEALANTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Joint-Sealant Backer Materials: ASTM D5249, Non-Staining, compatible with joint substrates, sealants,
primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by joint sealant manufacturer
based on field experience and laboratory testing.
Joint Sealant: Non-priming, pourable self-leveling silicone sealant for concrete and asphalt.
1.
Cold-Applied Joint Sealant ASTM D5893, self leveling silicone sealant. Crafco Inc. Roadwaver
Silicone-SL; Dow Corning 888, or 890-SL; Sonneborn Sonomeric 1 Sealant; Tremco Vulkem
45; and,
2.
Hot-Applied Joint Sealant: ASTM D3405, Polymeric sealant. Crafco Inc. ROADSAVER 22; W.R.
Meadows, Inc. SEALTIGHT HI-SPEC.
Joint Fillers: Resilient pre-molded bituminous impregnated fiberboard units complying with
ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, ASSHTO M 153, Type I: or ASTM D 1752, cork or selfexpanding cork.
Exterior Concrete Sealant: Sonneborn Kure-N-Seal 30 exterior acrylic sealer, or Euclid Super RezSeal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
Surface Preparation: Proofroll prepared subbase, per Section 02300 - Earthwork and remove loose
material from surface.
Forms: Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to
required lines, grades, and elevations.
1.
Maintain sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuance of work so that forms remain in place a
minimum of 24 hours after concrete placement;
2.
Forms shall be cleaned and casted with form release agent thoroughly after each use and before
concrete is placed; and,
3.
Flexible or curved forms shall be used on curves. Forms shall be of full depth of the concrete and
of a strength when staked, sufficient to resist the presence of the concrete and the loads resulting
from the finish operations without springing, setting or losing their shape.
Reinforcement: Accurately position and support reinforcement, and secure against displacement. Set
wire ties with ends directly into concrete.
1.
Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable; lap at least one full mesh, and lace
splices with wire; and,
2.
Support reinforcing steel on wire chairs to ensure that wire stays mid-depth of sidewalk section
during concrete pour.
Joints: Construct pre-molded expansion and contraction joints, tied construction joints, control joints,
thickened edge expansion joints, isolation joints, and construction joints, straight with face perpendicular
to concrete surface. Construct transverse joints perpendicular to centerline unless otherwise detailed.
02751 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.
E.
F.
G.
3.2
Expansion joints and Contraction joints: Pre-molded as indicated on the drawings;

a.
Provide joint filler for the entire depth of the slab section and not less than 1" below finished
surface so as to allow for joint sealer.
b.
Provide thickened edge expansion joint as indicated on the drawings.
c.
Provide 1/2" contraction joints for curb and gutter at 10'-0" on center.
d.
Provide 1/2" expansion joints for curb and gutter and sidewalk at 100'-0" on center.
2.
Tied construction joints: As indicated on drawings;
3.
Control joints: Depth shall be equal to 1/4 of the concrete thickness or 1", whichever is deeper.
For sidewalks, control joint spacing shall be equal to the sidewalk width. For concrete pavement,
control joint spacing shall be placed as shown on the drawings, no greater than 30 times the slab
thickness on center either way;
a.
Form tooled joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with recommended tool and
finishing edges with jointer.
b.
Form sawed joints using powered saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamondrimmed blades. Cut joints into hardened concrete within 24 hours of the concrete placement
and as soon as surface will not be torn, abraded, or otherwise damaged by cutting action.
Concrete Placement: Comply with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting,
and placing concrete. Place concrete in a continuous operation within planned joints or sections.
1.
Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed;
2.
Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding,
or tamping according to recommendations in ACI 309R;
3.
Screed and initial-float concrete surfaces with darby or bull float before excess moisture or bleed
water appears on the surface;
4.
Protect concrete from cold or hot weather during mixing, placing, and curing; and,
5.
All concrete walks and aprons shall be a minimum of 4" thick as shown on the drawings, with a
turned down edge as detailed.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions exist. Apply according
to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but
before float finishing.
Pavement Tolerances: Comply with tolerances in ACI 330.1, Specification for Plain Concrete Parking
Lots.
FINISHES AND CURING
A.
B.
C.
3.3
All exterior concrete shall receive a medium broom finish.

Curing: Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface. Cure concrete by one or a combination of the following methods:
1.
Moisture cure concrete by water, continuous fog spray, continuously wet absorptive cover, or by
moisture-retaining-cover curing. Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days; and,
2.
Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours
after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
All exterior concrete surface shall receive one coat of exterior sealer.
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
B.
C.
Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet
requirements in this Section.
Protect concrete from damage. Provide adequate traffic control to prevent traffic from pavement for at
least 14 days after placement.
Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep
concrete pavement not more than 2 days before date scheduled for substantial completion inspections.

02751 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94

requirements for production facilities and equipment.
ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301R-99 and ACI330R-92, unless modified by the requirements of
the Contract Documents.
The owner shall provide and pay for testing services. A slump test and air test shall be performed for
each load delivered. Four standard test cylinders shall be taken for each 55 cubic yards of concrete or
each days pour, whichever is more frequent. Two cylinders shall be broken at 7 days and two cylinders
shall be broken at 28 days.

02751 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 02770 - ASPHALT SEAL COAT

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Work under this section shall include repairing pavement cracks, cleaning and preparing the pavement
surface, mixing the pavement sealer, and applying the asphalt pavement sealer over existing bituminous
pavement surfaces.
REFERENCED SECTIONS
A.
1.3
Section 02745 - Pavement Markings and Removal.

REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
1.4
American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM)

1.
D140
Standard Practice for Sampling of Bituminous Materials
2.
D449
Asphalt Used in Damp-proofing and Waterproofing, Type II and III
3.
D2939
Standard Test Methods Emulsion Bitumens Use as Protective Coatings
4.
D3405
Joint Sealant Hot-Applied for Concrete and Asphalt Pavement
5.
D3320
Emulsified Coal Tar Pitch (Mineral Colloid Type)
6.
D3910
Design, Testing and Construction of Slurry Seal
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Material Certificates: Submit materials certificate to the Owners engineer which is signed by the
Contractor, certifying that materials comply with, or exceed, the requirements herein.
Seal Coat design shall be as per the requirement of the regulatory authority having jurisdiction or as
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
SealMaster Polymer Modified Coal Tar Sealer (PMCTS) at the following specifications:
1.
SealMaster Specification
a.
Material Material shall be homogenous and show no separation or coagulation that cannot
be overcome by moderate stirring.
b.
Non Volatiles 40%
c.
Ash Non Volatiles 35 40%
d.
Solubility of Non Volatiles in CS2% - 20 min.
e.
Specific Gravity 25C 1.18 MIN.
f.
Drying Time 8 hr. MAX. (Typically less than 60 min.)
g.
Adhesion & Resistance to Water No Penetration or Loss of Adhesion
h.
Resistance to Heat No Blistering or Sagging
i.
Flexibility No Cracking or Flaking
j.
Resistance to Impact No Chipping, Flaking or Cracking
k.
Resistance to Volatilization 10% Loss in Weight Max.
l.
Wet Film Continuity Smooth, Nongranular Free from course particles
SealMaster Polymer Modified MasterSeal (PMM) to be used in AK, CA, AZ and NM ONLY at the
following specifications;
1.
SealMaster Specification
ASPHALT SEAL COAT
02770 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
a.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.2
Material Material shall be homogenous and show no separation or coagulation that cannot
be overcome by moderate stirring.
b.
Non-Volatile, 43 47%
c.
Ash of Non-Volatile, 42 52%
d.
Specific Gravity 25oc 1.15 1.25
e.
Drying Time 8hrs. MAX.
f.
Adhesion & Resistance to Water No Penetration or Loss of Adhesion
g.
Resistance to Heat No Blistering or Sagging
h.
Flexibility No Cracking or Flaking
i.
Resistance to Impact No Chipping, Flaking or Cracking
Note: Only materials meeting the above specifications will be accepted. Certificate of
Compliance from the refined coal tar manufacturer is required prior to application.
Oil Spot Treatment: SealMaster PetroSeal or prep seal oil spot primer as specified by the manufacturer
for pavement sealer.
Water
Aggregate or sand as required and specified by the manufacturer
Polymer Additive (optional)
Fortifier
1.
Water based epoxy-latex additive, designed as a fortifier for refined coal tar emulsions to increase
resistance to power steering marks, fuel and chemical effects to assist in fast drying of the coating
is acceptable.
2.
Thickeners only are not permitted.
EQUIPMENT
A.
B.
C.
2.3
Self-propelled squeegee equipment shall have a least 2 squeegee or brush devices (one behind the
other) to assure adequate distribution and penetration of sealer into the bituminous pavement.
Equipment shall have continuous agitation or mixing capabilities to maintain homogenous consistency of
pavement sealer mixture throughout the application process.
Pressurized spray application equipment shall be capable of spraying pavement sealer with sand added.
Equipment shall have continuous agitation or mixing capabilities to maintain homogenous consistency of
pavement sealer mixture throughout the application process.
Hand squeegee and brushes shall be acceptable only in areas where practicality prohibits the use of
mechanized equipment.
MIX DESIGNS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Sealer concentrate 100 Gallon

Silica Sand 400 Meeting 40 to 60 fineness rating (AFS).
1.
Black Beauty Slag Sand (w/ comparable sieve rating) may be substituted when silica sand is not
available.
Water Specified material does not require onsite dilution
Fortifier 3%
Curing agents on high traffic areas (when applicable).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Apply pavement sealer when ambient temperature is 50 deg F and rising for a period of 24 hours after
application. Do not apply when temperature is expected to drop below 50 deg F in a 24-hour period. Do
not apply if rain is imminent within 8 hours.
ASPHALT SEAL COAT
02770 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
3.2
Do not apply pavement sealer when ambient temperature is 90 deg F and above without first cooling the
surface with a fine mist of water (fogging). The fogging should only dampen the surface without causing
puddling.
Between September 15 and May 1, check the specifications and requirements of the State Department
of Transportation WEATHER LIMITATIONS on the permitted dates of applying the seal coats.
SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.3
Surface must be free from dirt, dust and includes grass along the edges. Remove and dispose of any
loose and unsuitable materials, dirt, and debris from pavement surface by power blower or mechanical
sweeping equipment.
Surface hairline cracks up to 1/2" must be filled with crack filler; cracks larger than 1/2" must be cleaned
and filled with elastomeric emulsion crack filler.
When using a high performance crack sealant, please note on your proposal.
Potholes, alligator areas, and similar surface defects must be cut out and repairs made.
Treat all grease, oil and gasoline spots with compatible primer of the manufactured coating. In hot
weather, the surface should be fogged with water prior to sealing.
Prior to spreading pavement sealer, paint all existing white paint stripes with black paint.
Contractor to dispose of all cans, bags and leftover materials off-site.
APPLICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Mix pavement sealer in accordance with the manufacturers procedure to a uniform consistency before
using. For each coat, the sealant shall be diluted with clean potable water while agitating. The percent of
water to be added will be as per the manufacturer specification based on the asphalt surface quality, and
the type of traffic it will experience. When the rubberized mixture has thickened, add sand or aggregate
slowly to the mixing tank. Mix thoroughly before and slowly during the application.
1.
First coat on all parking areas at a rate of .13 gallons per square yard/coat. At no time are total
coats to exceed 0.51 gallons per square yard. The first coat may be applied by hand squeegee,
self propelled squeegee equipment or pressurized spray equipment. Hand Squeegee or self
propelled squeegee equipment is preferred.
2.
Second coat on all parking areas at a rate of .13 gallons per square yard/coat. At no time are total
coats to exceed 0.51 gallons per square yard. The second coat must be applied with pressurized
spray equipment.
Allow a minimum of 24 hours of curing time before allowing traffic over treated surface or application of
traffic marking paint. Use of solvent borne paint shall not be permitted.
Lines, stencils, and markings shall be repainted in original size & location, unless otherwise directed by
the Owner, in accordance with Section 02745 Pavement Markings and Removal.
It is the Contractors responsibility to check local zoning codes & regulations.
All seal coat and re-striping projects must be performed during available time periods (usually at night)
that DO NOT interfere with normal store operations. Applications must be staged to provide customers
free access to Sprouts the following business day.
ASPHALT SEAL COAT

02770 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 02813 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.2
This Section specifies the following: Pipe and fittings, valves, sprinkler heads and accessories, and
Irrigation control system.
Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to all cutting, fitting or
patching that may be required to complete the work or to make its several parts fit together properly.
Contractor shall not damage or endanger any portion of the work or the work of the Owner or any
separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering any work, or by excavation. The
contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner or any separate contractor except with
the written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor. The contractor shall not unreasonably
withhold from the Owner or any separate contractor his consent to cutting or otherwise altering the work.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
B.
C.
1.3
American Society of Testing and Materials.

1.
ANSI/ASTM D2282 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic pipe (SDR-PR).
2.
ANSI/ASTM D2564 Solvent Cement for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
3.
ASTM B32 Solder Metal.
4.
ASTM B42 Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes.
5.
ASTM B88 Seamless Copper Water Tube.
6.
ASTM D1784 Rigid and Chlorinated Polyvinyl Compounds.
7.
ATSM D2235 Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile - Butadiene - Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and
Fittings.
8.
ASTM D2466 Polyvinyl Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
9.
ASTM D2467 Polyvinyl Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
FS O-F-506 Flux, Soldering; Paste and Liquid.
NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

1.
All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest rules and regulations of safety
order of Division of Industrial Safety; the Uniform Building Code and other applicable laws and
regulations, including any regulatory authorities having jurisdiction, and Plumbing Codes.
2.
Should the contract documents be at variance with the aforementioned rules and regulations, notify
the Owner for instructions before proceeding with work affected.
Testing:
1.
Preliminary inspection of completed installation will be made prior to backfilling of trenches and
during hydrostatic testing.
2.
Final inspection shall be made in conjunction with the final inspection of lawn, shrub and tree
planting.
Permits and Inspections:
1.
Any permits for the installation or construction of any work included under this contract, which are
required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be obtained and paid
for by the Contractor, each at the proper time.
2.
The Contractor shall also arrange for and pay all costs in connection with any inspection and
examination required by these authorities.
02813 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

Shop drawing or irrigation system design, including but not limited to piping, sprinkler heads, valves,
wiring, and controls, if not provided in drawings.
The drawings shall include a layout of the entire development including any adjacent right-of-ways, which
are required to be irrigated. The drawings shall be drawn at a minimum scale of 1" = 50'-0", with any
necessary details drawn at an appropriate larger scale.
The drawings and specifications shall show the following as a minimum:
1.
Static pressure (psi) and gallons per minute (gpm) upon which the design is based.
2.
Complete layout of the system indicating placement of all piping, controls, control boxes, valves,
required sleeves, etc.
3.
All pipe sizes, materials, class ratings.
4.
All manufacturers and model numbers.
5.
Design calculations for each zone.
6.
Specifications for each type of sprinkler head showing nozzle, spray pattern, radius, gpm/head,
operation psi, size, etc.
7.
Detailed installation requirements must be provided for all irrigation system components.
8.
A comprehensive written specification must accompany the drawings.
9.
All design, drawings, specifications and materials must be approved by the Owner prior to the start
of any installation of the irrigation system.
Contractor shall furnish 2 manufacturer's service manual to the Owner. Manuals may be loose-leaf and
shall contain complete exploded drawings of all equipment installed showing components and catalog
numbers together with the manufacturer's name and address.
Substitutions shall be requested in accordance with Sections 01230 and 01600.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
All material to be incorporated in this system shall be new and without flaws or defects and of quality and
performance as specified and meeting the requirements of this system.
Backflow Preventer: Shall conform to local authorities having jurisdiction, which shall be incorporated into
the irrigation system.
Pipe: All piping shall be from virgin parent material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free
from visible cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, deleterious wrinkles and dents. All pipe shall be
National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved.
Piping on pressure side of irrigation control valves.
1.
Shall be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) 1120 with a minimum Class rating of 200, sized to maintain a
flow velocity of less than 5'-0" per second approved.
2.
Type I, Grade I, Pressure Rated Pipe.
3.
Materials shall meet the requirements set forth in ASTM D-1784.
4.
Outside diameter of pipe shall be the same size as iron pipe.
5.
Pipe shall be marked at intervals (not to exceed 5'-0") with the following information:
Manufacturer's name or trade mark, nominal pipe size, schedule, PVC type and grade (i.e., PVC
1120), SDR rating class, working pressure at 73 deg F and NSF approval.
6.
PVC Type I shall not be threaded.
7.
When connection is plastic to metal, male adapters shall be hand tightened, plus one turn with a
strap wrench.
Piping on non-pressure side of irrigation control valves shall be one of the following:
1.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): 1120 with a minimum class rating of 200 psi, NSF approved, sized to
maintain a flow velocity of less than 5'-0" per second. Piping for Sleeving: High impact type pipe,
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 2110, minimum Schedule 40.
02813 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
Solvent for PVC Pipe shall be #705 Gray NSF approved.

Fittings: For Solvent-Weld PVC Pipe:
1.
Schedule 40 or 80, Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), Type 1, to meet ASTM D2466-7 and D-2467-73 NSF
approved.
2.
Threaded PVC nipples shall be Schedule 80.
Shut-off Valves: Up to 3" size: 125 pound bronze construction, non-rising stem type, sized to line.
Valve Boxes: To be injected-molded of polyesters and fibrous inorganic temperature resistant
components. Box and lid to be green.
Manual Drain Valve: shall be manual angle valve.
Sprinkler Heads: All sprinkler heads shall be pop-up type heads. Acceptable manufactures listed below.
1.
Toro, Riverside, CA, Tel.: (714) 688-9221
2.
RainBird, Glendora, CA, Tel.: (818) 963-9311
3.
Hunter, San Marcos, CA, Tel.: (619) 744-7461
Drip System: If required, shall be of the same manufacturer as the sprinkler head.
Automatic Controller: A fully automatic controller manufactured by Toro, RainBird, Hunter, Weather
Matic, Hardic/Irritrol or Rainmaster. Controller must have the following features.
1.
Master on/off switch that permits system shutdown with programming maintained.
2.
Independent station programming.
3.
Independent station timing.
4.
Manual operation option.
5.
Variable day cycle.
6.
Battery Powered Models NOT permitted.
Rain Shut-Off Devices: Shall be provided on each project. Install per manufacturer's specifications.
Acceptable models and manufacturer's listed below:
1.
PMC, Rain-Sence.
2.
RainBird, Rain-Check.
3.
WCS, Rainguard.
4.
Weather Matic, Rain-Stat.
Electric Conduit and Fittings:
1.
Underground plastic conduit: Class III, FS W-C1094.
Control Wires:
1.
Wire: Solid copper wire, U.L. Approved for direct burial in ground. Minimum gauge: #14 UF (#12
UF for runs over 2,000 LF) common ground wire shall be white.
Splicing Materials:
1.
Splicing Materials: 3M Direct Bury (DBY) splice kits by 3M Corporation, Austin, TX, Tel.: (512) 9845667 or 'Snip-Snap' connector by Imperial, Lenexa, KS, Tel.: (913) 469-5700.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
The Irrigation Contractor shall carefully schedule his work with the Landscape Contractor and all other
site developments.
Sleeves are required wherever piping or electrical wires are placed under paved surfaces. Install
sleeves prior to commencement of paving.
No consideration will be given to any design changes. Should any changes be deemed necessary after
award of contract, for proper installation and operation of the system, the Owner shall negotiate such
changes.
Lay out work as accurately as possible to the submitted shop drawings.
Full and complete coverage with 100% overlap is required. Contractor shall make any necessary minor
adjustments to layout as required to achieve full coverage of irrigated areas at no additional cost to the
Owner.
02813 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
F.
G.
H.
3.2
Where piping is shown on drawings to be under paved areas but running parallel and adjacent to planted
areas, the intent is to install piping in planted areas. Do not install directly over another line in same
trench.
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to establish the location of all sprinkler heads in order to assure
proper coverage of all areas. In no case shall spacing of sprinkler head exceed distances shown on the
drawings and/or those specified. Pipe sizes shall conform to those shown on the drawings. No
substitutions of smaller pipe sizes will be permitted, but substitutions of larger sizes may be approved. All
pipe damaged or rejected because of defects shall be removed from the site at the time of said rejection,
at no additional cost to the Owner.
Install irrigation system after completion of site grading, the irrigation system shall be installed and
completely operational three days prior to the installation of any planting operations.
TRENCHING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.3
Perform all excavations as required for installation of work included under this Section, including shoring
of earth banks, if necessary. Restore all surfaces, existing underground installation, etc., damaged or cut
as a result of the excavations, to their original condition.
Should utilities not shown on the drawings be found during excavations, Contractor shall promptly notify
the Owner for instructions as to further action. Failure to do so will make the Contractor liable for any and
all damage thereto arising from his operations subsequent to discovery of such utilities. Indicate such
utility crossings on the record drawings promptly.
Trenches shall be open, vertical sided construction wide enough to provide free working space around
work installed and to provide ample space for backfilling and compacting.
When 2 pipes are to be placed in the same trench, a 6" space is to be maintained between pipes. The
Contractor shall not install 2 pipes with one directly above the other.
Backfill and compaction shall be in accordance with Section 02305, Trench Excavation and Backfill.
Depth of trenches shall be sufficient or provide a minimum cover above the top of the pipe as follows or
as shown on drawing if greater.
1.
12" over non-pressure lateral lines.
2.
18" over non-pressure lateral lines under paving.
3.
18" over control wires.
4.
18" over sprinkler main line.
5.
24" over sprinkler main line under paving.
All laterals and mainline shall be sufficiently sloped to provide positive drainage through drain valves.
The Contractor shall be held responsible for any damages caused by these operations and shall
immediately repair or replace damaged parts.
PIPE LINE ASSEMBLY
A.
B.
General:
1.
Install pipes and fittings in accordance with manufacturers latest printed instructions.
2.
Clean all pipes and fitting of dirt, scales and moisture before assembly.
3.
All pipe, fittings and valves, etc., shall be carefully placed in the trenches. Interior of pipes shall be
kept free from dirt and debris and when pipe laying is not in progress, open ends of pipe shall be
closed by approved means.
4.
All lateral connections to the mainline as well as all other connections shall be made to the side of
the mainline pipe. No connections to the top of the line shall be allowed.
Solvent-Weld Joints for PVC Pipes:
1.
Use solvents and methods by pipe and solvent manufacturers.
2.
Cure joint a minimum of one hour before applying any external stress on the piping and at least 24
hours before placing the joint under water pressure, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer.
02813 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
D.
E.
3.4
Threaded Joints for PVC Pipes:

1.
Use Teflon tape on all treaded PVC fittings.
2.
Use strap-type friction wrench only. Do not use metal-jawed wrench.
3.
When connection is plastic to metal, male adapters shall be used. The male adapter shall be hand
tightened, plus 1 turn with a strap wrench.
Laying of Pipe:
1.
Pipes shall be bedded in at least 2" of finely divided material with no rocks or clods over 1"
diameter to provide a uniform bearing.
2.
Pipe shall be snaked from side to side of trench bottom to allow for expansion and contraction. 1'0" additional per 100'-0" of pipe is the minimum allowance for snaking.
3.
Do not lay PVC pipe when there is water in the trench.
4.
Plastic pipe shall be cut with PVC pipe cutters or hacksaw, or in a manner so as to ensure a square
cut. Burrs at cut ends shall be removed prior to installation so that a smooth unobstructed flow will
be obtained.
5.
All plastic to plastic joints will be solvent-weld joints or slip seal joints. All plastic pipe and fittings
shall be installed as outlined and instructed by the pipe manufacturer and it shall be the
Contractor's responsibility to make arrangements with the pipe manufacturer for any field
assistance that may be necessary. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the correct
installation.
PVC Sleeves and Electrical Conduit.
1.
All PVC sleeves shall be a minimum of twice (2x) the diameter of the pipe to be sleeved.
2.
All PVC control wire conduit shall be of sufficient size to hold the required quantity of control and
common wires. Electrical wires are not to be placed in the same sleeve with water pipes.
SHUT-OFF VALVES
A.
B.
3.5
Shall be located in the following locations:

1.
After backflow preventer and prior to main supply loop.
2.
Between mainline and each remote control valves.
3.
To be located within planting and lawn areas.
All shut-off valves shall be located in valve boxes.
IRRIGATION CONTROL VALVES
A.
B.
C.
3.6
Install control valves in valve boxes grouping together where practical. Place no closer than 12" to walk
edges, buildings and walls.
Pressure regulating remote control valves shall be adjusted so that the most remote sprinkler heads
operate at the pressure specified.
Valves shall be installed as shown in details and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the
specifications.
VALVE BOXES
A.
3.7
Valve boxes shall be set flush with finish grade in lawn areas and 1/2" above finish grade in ground cover
and shrub bed areas.
SPRINKLER HEADS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
All sprinkler heads within a zone shall have matched precipitation rates.
All heads operating on one valve (zone) shall do so at the same pressure.
All heads shall be pop-up type heads. Permanent shrub risers are not permitted.
Do not mix different types of heads with in zone.
Shrub beds and lawn areas are to be on separate valves (zones).
02813 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
F.
G.
H.
3.8
Place part-circle pop-up sprinkler heads 6" from edge of adjacent walks, curbs and mowing bands, or
paved areas at time of installation.
All sprinkler nozzles shall be adjusted for the proper radius and direction of spray pattern. Make
adjustments where possible to prevent overspraying into walks, pavement or buildings.
Sprinkler heads shall be set perpendicular to finished grade unless otherwise designated on the
drawings.
DRAIN VALVES
A.
B.
C.
3.9
All laterals shall be provided with manual drain valves.

The mainline shall be drained with manual drain valves.
Drain valves are to be provided at sufficient intervals to provide complete drainage of all piping.
AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.10
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
The automatic controller shall be installed at the approximate location shown on the irrigation drawings.
Controller shall be wall mounted in a locking box. Suitable power supply will be supplied by the Electrical
Subcontractor.
All regulatory authorities having jurisdiction and other applicable codes shall take precedence in
connecting the 110-volt electrical service to the controller.
Install per regulatory authority having jurisdiction code, manufacturer's latest printed instructions, and as
detailed.
Connect remote control valves to controller in sequence to correspond with station setting beginning with
1,2,3, etc.
Affix controller name (i.e., 'Controller A') on inside of controller cabinet door with letters minimum of 1"
high. Affix a non-fading copy of irrigation diagram to cabinet door below controller name. Irrigation
diagram to be sealed between two sheets of 20 mil (minimum) plastic. Irrigation diagram shall be a
reduced copy of the as-built drawing and shall show clearly all valves operated by the Controller,
showing station number, valve size and type of planting irrigated.
CONTROL WIRING
All electrical equipment and wiring shall comply with regulatory authorities having jurisdiction and be
installed by those skilled and licensed in the trade.
Wiring shall occupy the same trench and shall be installed along the same route as pressure supply or
lateral lines wherever possible, and shall have a minimum of an 18" cover.
Control wires shall be installed to the side of the main line whenever possible. Placement over pipes is
not permitted.
Where more than one (1) wire is placed in a trench, the wiring shall be taped together at intervals of
10'-0".
An expansion curl shall be provided within 3'-0" of each wire connection and at least every 100'-0" of
wire length on runs of more than 100'-0" in length. Expansion curls shall be formed by wrapping at least
5 turns of wire around a 1" diameter pipe, then withdrawing pipe.
Control wire splices at remote control valves to be crimped and scaled with specified splicing materials.
Line splices will be allowed only on runs of more than 500'-0" and they must be located in 10" round
splice boxes, which are green in color. The connector shall be 3M DBY splice kit by 3M Corporation, or
'Snip-Snap' connector by Imperial. Use one splice per connector sealing packs.
The main line shall have 2 spare wires installed its entire length and to the automatic controller. Label
each end 'spare wire'.
02813 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.11
A.
3.12
A.
B.
C.
3.13
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
CLOSING OF PIPE AND FLUSHING OF LINES

All testing shall be done under the supervision of the Owner or Owner's Representative. Submit written
requests for inspections to the Owner at least 3 days prior to anticipated inspection date.
1.
Thoroughly flush out all water lines under a full head of water before installing heads, valves, quick
couplers assemblies, etc. Maintain flushing for a minimum of three minutes at the valve located
furthest from water supply.
2.
After flushing, cap or plug all openings to prevent entrance of materials that would obstruct the pipe
or clog heads. Leave in place until removal is necessary for completion of installation.
3.
Test as specified below:
a.
Upon completion of testing, complete assembly and adjust sprinkler heads for proper
distribution.
b.
All sprinkler heads and quick coupling valves shall be set perpendicular to finished grades
unless otherwise designated on the drawings, or otherwise specified. Sprinkler heads
adjacent to existing walls, curbs and other paved areas, shall be set to grade. Sprinkler
heads, which are to be installed in lawn areas where the turf has not yet been established,
shall be set 1" above the proposed finish grade. Heads installed in this manner will be
lowered to grade when the turf is sufficiently established to allow walking on it without
appreciable destruction. Such lowering of heads shall be done by this Contractor as part of
the original contract with no additional cost to the Owner.
TESTING
Make hydrostatic tests when welded PVC joints have cured as per manufacturer's instructions.
Pressurized Mains:
1.
Completely install mains, isolation valves and control valves. Do not install laterals.
2.
Open all isolation valves.
3.
Fill all lines with water and shut off at meter.
4.
Pressurize the main with air to 100 psi. Monitor gauge for pressure loss for four (4) hours.
5.
Leave lines and fittings exposed throughout testing period.
6.
Leaks resulting from tests shall be repaired and tests repeated until the system passes.
7.
Test all isolation valves for leakage.
Non-Pressure Laterals:
1.
Test piping after laterals and risers are installed and system is fully operational. Leave trenches
open to detect possible leaks.
INSPECTION
The Contractor shall maintain proper facilities and provide safe access for inspection to all parts of the
work.
Irrigation inspection shall consist of a minimum of:
1.
Mainline pressure test.
2.
Coverage test.
3.
Final irrigation inspection.
If the laws, ordinances or any public authority require any work to be specifically tested or approved, the
Contractor shall give the Owner 3 days notice of its readiness for inspection.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for notifying the Owner where and when such work is in
readiness for testing.
If any work should be covered up without approval of the Owner it must be uncovered, if required, for
examination at Contractor's expense.
No inspection will commence without 'Record' drawings and without completing previously noted
corrections, or without preparing the system for inspection.
02813 - 7

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.14
A.
B.
C.
BACKFILL AND COMPACTING

After system is operating and required tests and inspections have been made, backfill excavations and
trenches.
Backfill for all trenches, regardless of the type of pipe covered, shall be compacted to the requirements
of Section 02230.
Within all planting and lawn areas the existing 4"layer of topsoil shall be restored to its original condition
and finish grade. After backfilling, the Contractor shall dispose of surplus earth offsite.
02813 - 8

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 02821 CHAIN-LINK FENCING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all chain link fencing and gate assemblies including installation
of posts, mesh, rails, gates, concrete, hardware, and accessories required to provide a complete and
fully functional fencing system.
Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to furnish, transport, and
install all chain link fencing and gate work, as indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein. This
work shall include but not be limited to design, fabrication, and associated welding, cutting, fitting, and
concreting.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.3
Submittals shall be provided in accordance with sections 01330, and 01600.

Product Data: For each type of material and product indicated.
Shop drawings shall include a plan of the installation together with all details of fence components,
elevations, plans, and construction details.
Samples for review in accordance with Sections 01330 and 01600.
Welding Certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Chain link fencing shall meet the minimum quality standards of the CLFMI and shall bear the quality seal
of the Institute.
Installation of fencing shall conform to ASTM F567.
Manufacturers shall meet the industry standards and codes for the materials identified on the Drawings
and in the Specifications herein.
Manufacturers instructions for installation shall be delivered and stored with the materials.
Warranty:
1.
Manufacturers Warranty: Submit, for Owners acceptance, manufacturers standard warranty
document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturers warranty is in addition to, and
not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.
2.
Warranty Period: two (2) years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.
3.
Additional requirements for product warranties are included in Section 01600.
CHAIN-LINK FENCING
02821 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.4

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Transport and handle all materials in such a manner as to prevent damage.

Locate storage piles, stacks, or bins to avoid or protect material from heavy and unnecessary traffic.
Deliver all packaged materials in original, unopened, undamaged containers, with identification labels
intact, and bearing the name of the manufacturer and brand.
Ordering: Comply with manufacturers ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid
construction delays.
Store and protect materials from exposure to harmful weather conditions, and at temperature and
humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. Some materials may need to be stored in protected
enclosures, and handled by methods which avoid exposure to moisture. Store moisture-sensitive
materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location. Additional requirements for product delivery,
storage and handling are in Section 01600.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
Fabric shall be 2" mesh, No. 9 gauge, basic open hearth steel conforming to ASTM A392, Class II, hot
dipped galvanized after fabrication to a minimum of 2.0 oz. of zinc per SF of uncoated wire surface. Top
and bottom of fabric shall have twisted and barbed salvages.
Intermediate posts shall be 2-1/2" O.D., 3.65 lbs. per lineal foot. All end, corner and pull posts shall be
3" O.D. standard pipe weighing 5.79 lbs. per lineal foot. Set 36" in concrete or secured to weld plate at
truck dock. All pipe members to conform to ASTM F1083
Gate posts shall be sized as follows:
Gate Leaf
To 6-0
To 10-0
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Post O.D.
3
4
Lbs. Per Foot

5.79
9.11
Top and bottom rail shall be 1-5/8" O.D. standard weight pipe weighing 2.27 lbs. per lineal foot provided
with couplings approximately every 20-0. Couplings to be outside sleeve type at least 6" long. Provide
bottom rail pipe at guard rail type fencing. Bottom tension wire may be used in lieu of pipe rail at site or
landscaping type fencing.
All posts and other appurtenances shall be hot dipped galvanized with a minimum zinc coating of 2.0 oz.
per SF of surface and shall conform to ASTM F626.
Intermediate and end post tops shall be one piece, 14 gauge. Equip all posts with caps.
Furnish all terminal posts with horizontal braces of the same material as top rail.
Gates: Fabricate gate perimeter frames of 1.90" O.D. tubular members. Provide additional horizontal
and vertical members to ensure proper gate operation and for attachment of fabric, hardware and
accessories. Assemble gate frames by welding or fittings and rivets for rigid connections. Use same
fabric as for fence, unless otherwise indicated. Install fabric with stretcher bars at vertical edges, and tie
at top and bottom edges. Attach stretcher bars to gate frame at not more than 15" O.C. Attach
hardware with rivets or by other means which will provide security against removal or breakage. Provide
diagonal cross-bracing consisting of 3/8" diameter adjustable length truss rods on gates where
necessary to provide frame rigidity without sag or twist.
Gate Hardware: Provide the following hardware and accessories for each gate.
Hinges: Pressed steel or malleable iron to suite gate size, non-lift-off-type, offset to permit 180 deg gate
opening. Provide one pair of hinges for each leaf.
Latch: Forked type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate. Provide padlock
eye as integral part of latch.
CHAIN-LINK FENCING
02821 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
L.
M.
N.
Keeper: Provide keeper for all vehicle gates, which automatically engages the gate leaf and holds it in
the open position until manually released.
Tension wire shall be 7 gauge galvanized coil spring wire conforming to ASTM A817.
Concrete for post encasement shall conform to requirements specified under Section 03300 of these
Specifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Do not begin prior to completion of final grading. Drill holes for post footings in firm, undisturbed or
compacted soil. Holes shall have a diameter equal to 4 times the diameter of the post. Excavate hole
depths approximately 3" deeper than post bottom, with bottom of posts set not less than 36" below
surface when in firm, undisturbed soil. Excavate deeper as required for adequate support in soft and
loose soils, and for posts with heavy lateral loads. Place concrete around posts in a continuous pour, tap
for consolidation. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and hold in position during placement
and finishing operations. Trowel finish tops of footings, and slope or dome to direct water away from
posts. Extend footings for gate posts to the underside of bottom hinge. Set keepers, stops, sleeves and
other accessories into concrete as required. Posts shall be 10-0 maximum o.c. unless otherwise noted.
Evenly space posts in the line of the fence.
Install top rail to pass through intermediate post tops & form a continuous brace from end to end of each
stretch of fence. Fasten top rail to terminal posts using heavy pressed steel connections.
Brace Assemblies: Install braces so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension. At
corners run braces in both directions.
Tension Wire: Install tension wires before stretching fabric and tie to each post with ties or clips.
Fabric: Leave approximately 2" between finish grade and bottom salvage, except where bottom of fabric
extends into concrete. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails and tension wires. Install fabric on security
side of fence and anchor to framework so that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released.
Connect fabric to line posts with 6 gauge wire clips every 14 to top rail with 9 gauge wires every 24 to
terminal, corner, and gate posts by using 1/4" x 3/4" tension bars tied to the posts every 14" and 11
gauge 1" wide steel bands and 3/8" diameter bolts and nuts.
Use U-shaped clip or wire, securely fastened around pipe to which attached, clasping pipe and fabric
firmly. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing.
Gates: Install gates plumb, level and secure for full opening without interference. Install ground-set items
in concrete as recommended by the fence manufacturer. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and
lubricate where necessary.
Fasteners: Install nuts for tension band and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite fabric side.
CHAIN-LINK FENCING
02821 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 02870 SITE FURNISHINGS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.2
This Section includes the procurement and installation of Bicycle Racks, Trash and Ash receptacles, and
Mailboxes.
install all site furnishing work as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein, and in accordance with
local codes and standards. This work includes but is not limited to furnishing and installing bicycle racks,
mailboxes, trash receptacle, grout, concrete, reinforcing anchors, attachment to other installations, and
miscellaneous items as required to provide a complete and secure installation.
Related Sections: Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installation of pipe sleeves and
installation of anchor bolts in cast in concrete slabs.
Products furnished, but not installed under this Section include pipe sleeves and anchor bolts to be cast
in concrete footings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.3
Submittals shall be provided in accordance with Sections 01330 and 01600.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include construction details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes, field-assembly requirements, and installation
details.
Shop Drawings shall clearly show layout, designations, dimensions, locations, colors, style, quantities,
accessories, and materials. Include elevations, sections plans, details, hardware (schedule, type,
function, quantities, and locations) fasteners, surface finish, anchors, installation details, and
attachments to other work.
1.
Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer if
applicable.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below.
1.
Size: Not less than 6" long linear components and 4" square sheet components.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.4
Installation of all products in this specification shall conform to ADA requirements and local codes and
standards.
Manufacturer's instructions for installation shall be delivered and stored with the materials.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of site through one source from a single manufacturer.
Warranty: Manufacturer's shall provide a warranty for materials for a period of two (2) years,
commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.
Repair: All warranties shall repair and/or replace of any part of the premises or equipment required as a
result of defects in materials or damage caused during construction. Repair/replacement shall be
performed to the satisfaction of the Owner/Owner's Representative at the Contractor's expense.
A.
B.

UPDATED: OCTOBER 15, 2014
SITE FURNISHINGS
02870 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
D.
E.
intact and bearing the name of the manufacturer and brand.
Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1.
Bicycle Racks as manufactured by Madrax, 2700 Laura Lane, Middletown, WI, 53562, Tel.:
(800) 448-7931, Fax: (602) 831-7623. Provided and installed by General Contractor.
a.
Model number HW238-5-IG-P.
b.
Color: Black.
2.
Trash Receptacles
a.
For Build-To-Suit type projects the General Contractor shall provide and install units to
match the Developers specification for the Retail Center. If no such specification exists, the
General Contractor shall provide and install the unit specified below.
b.
For T.I. projects, the unit specified below will be provided by Sprouts and shall be installed
by the General Contractor.
i.
As manufactured by Rubbermaid, Purchased through Grainger, Inc., 7775 E.
Baseline Rd., Gilbert, AZ 85233 Tel.: (480) 308-7980.
ii.
Model number 3THU4
iii.
Color: Brown.
iv.
Finish: Powder Coat.
v.
Lid: Brown.
3.
Bench
a.
b.
i.
As manufactured by National Cart Co., (800) 455-3802, www.nationalcart.com
ii.
Model number 8020005 (PL-PB-72)
4.
Cigarette Waste Collector
a.
For Build-To-Suite type projects the General Contractor shall provide and install units to
b.
i.
As manufactured by Rubbermaid, Purchased through Grainger, Inc., 7775 E.
Baseline Rd., Gilbert, AZ 85233 Tel.: (480) 308-7980.
ii.
Model number 2750 Groundkeeper
iii.
Color: Black
SITE FURNISHINGS
02870 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
5.
2.2
Outdoor Table/Bench 46 round, portable/surface mount

a.
b.
i.
As manufactured by Wabash Valley
ii.
Model: SY110P with MC104 mounting plate covers (4)
SY111P 3 legs (handicap accessible) with MC103 mounting plate covers
(3)
iii.
Color: Green from Manufacturers standard colors.
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.3
Steel: Free from surface blemished and complying with the following:
3.
Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.
4.
Steel Pipe: Standard-weight steel pipe complying with ASTM A53, or electric-resistance-welded
pipe complying with ASTM A135.
5.
Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A500.
6.
Mechanical Tubing: Cold-rolled, electric-resistance-welded carbon or alloy steel tubing complying
with ASTM A513, or steel tubing fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A569/A569M and
complying with dimensional tolerances in ASTM A500; zinc coated internally and externally.
Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant-coated
materials, commercial quality, vandal and theft resistant, concealed and capped. Provide as required for
site furnishings' assembly, mounting and secure attachment.
3.
Antitheft Hold-Down Brackets: For securing site and street furnishings to substrate; two per unit,
minimum embed: 3".
Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled
expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create pourable anchoring,
patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure
without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended in writing by
manufacturer for exterior applications.
Galvanizing: Where indicated for steel and iron components, provide the following protective zinc coating
applied to components after fabrication:
3.
Zinc-Coated Tubing: External, zinc with organic overcoat, consisting of a minimum of 0.9 oz/sq. ft.
of zinc after welding, a chromate conversion coating, and a clear, polymer film. Internal, same as
external or consisting of 81%, not less than 0.3-mil-thick, zinc pigmented coating.
4.
Hot-Dip Galvanizing: According to ASTM A123/A123M, ASTM A153/A153M, or ASTM
A924/A924M.
FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
Metal Components: Form to required shapes and sizes with true, consistent curves, lines, and angles.
Separate metals from dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic action.
Welded Connections: Weld connections continuously. Weld solid members with full-length, fullpenetration welds and hollow members with full-circumference welds. At exposed connections, finish
surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness or unevenness shows after finishing and welded surface
matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
Pipe and Tubes: Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform
curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of member
throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of
handrail and railing components.
Factory Assembly: Assemble components in the factory to the greatest extent possible to minimize field
assembly. Clearly mark units for assembly in the field.
SITE FURNISHINGS
02870 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.4
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
B.
2.5
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if
they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are
not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
STEEL AND GALVANIZED STEEL FINISHES
A.
Bakes-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester-TGIC, powder-coat finish

complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, including pretreatment,
application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for correct and
level finish grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
Notify Owner/Owner's Representative in writing within 48 hours of unsatisfactory condition/defects which
could be detrimental to the Contractor's work.
Verify dimensions and coordinate work in this section with the work of other trades.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions, unless more stringent requirements are
indicated. Complete field assembly of site and street furnishings, where required.
Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been completed.
Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored, positioned at locations indicated on
Drawings, as specified herein, and per local codes and standards.
1.
Vandal-proof bolts as approved by Owner's Representative.
2.
Paint all hardware to match specified furnishings.
Pipe Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts
have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with anchoring cement,
mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, with top
smoothed and shaped to shed water.
CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
After completing site and street furnishing installation, inspect components and premises.
Remove spots, dirt, and debris.
Repair damaged finishes to match original finish or replace component/premises at the discretion of the
Owner/Owner's Representative.
SITE FURNISHINGS
02870 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 02920 LANDSCAPING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
The Contractor shall furnish all materials and perform all work in accordance with these specifications,
drawings, and instructions provided by the Owner, so that the intended vegetative cover, plants, trees,
etc., flourish beyond the time limits set by their guarantee.
The work shall include everything shown on the drawings and required by the specifications and
everything to which in the judgment of the Owner is incidental to what is shown on the drawings or
required by the specifications.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
American National Standards for Tree Care Operations, ANSI A300. American National Standards
Institute, 11 West 42nd Street, New York, NY 10036.
American Standard for Nursery Stock, ANSI Z60.1. American Nursery Landscape Association, 1250
Eye Street NW, Suite 500, Washington, DC 20005.
Hortus Third, The Staff of the L.H. Bailey Hortorium. 1976. MacMillian Publishing Co., New York.
All standards shall include the latest additions and amendments as of the date of advertisement for bids.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
All work completed and materials furnished and installed shall be of the best quality and shall be in strict
accordance with the intention of the drawings, specifications and samples. The Contractor shall
cooperate with the Owner so that no error or discrepancy in the drawings or specifications shall cause
defective or inappropriate materials to be used or poor workmanship to be allowed and so that the work
may proceed in the most efficient and effective manner. If there is a discrepancy between the graphic
count of plants and the drawing list count of plants on the landscape drawing, the graphic count shall
govern.
Work must be carried out only during weather conditions favorable to landscape construction and to the
health and welfare of plants.
Before commencing work, all trees and shrubs which are to be saved must be protected from damage by
the placement of fencing flagged for visibility or some other suitable protective procedure approved by
the Owner. No work may begin until this requirement is fulfilled.
In order to avoid damage to roots, bark or lower branches, no truck or other equipment shall be driven or
parked within the drip line of any tree, unless the tree overspreads a paved way..
The Contractor shall use any and all precautionary measures when performing work around trees, walks,
pavements, utilities, and any other features either existing or previously installed under this contract.
The Contractor shall adjust depth of earthwork and topsoil when working immediately adjacent to any of
the aforementioned features in order to prevent disturbing tree roots, undermining walks and pavements,
and damage in general to any existing or newly incorporated item.
Plants transported to the project in open vehicles shall be covered with tarpaulins or other suitable
covers securely fastened to the body of the vehicle to prevent injury to the plants. Closed vehicles shall
be adequately ventilated to prevent overheating of the plants. Evidence of inadequate protection
following digging, carelessness while in transit, or improper handling or storage shall be cause for
rejection. All plants shall be kept moist, fresh, and protected. Such protection shall encompass the entire
period during which the plants are in transit, being handled, or are in temporary storage.
LANDSCAPING
02920 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
H.
I.
J.
1.4
Where excavating, fill, or grading is required within the drip line of trees that are to remain, the work shall
be performed as follows:
1.
TRENCHING: When trenching occurs around trees to remain, the tree roots shall not be cut but the
trench shall be tunneled under or around the roots by careful hand digging and without injury to the
roots.
2.
RAISING GRADES: When the existing grade at tree is below the new finished grade, and fill not
exceeding 12" is required, clean, washed gravel graded from 1" to 2" in size shall be placed directly
around the tree trunk. The gravel shall extend out from trunk on all sides a minimum of 4-0" and
finish approximately 2" above the finished grade at tree. Install gravel before any earth fill is placed.
New earth fill shall not be left in contact with the trunks of any trees requiring fill. Where fill
exceeding 16" is required, a dry laid tree well shall be constructed around the trunk of the tree. The
tree well shall extend out from the trunk on all sides a minimum of 3-0" and to 3" above finish
grade. Coarse grade rock shall be placed directly around the tree well extending out to the drip line
of the tree. Clean, washed gravel graded from 1" to 2" in size shall be placed directly over the
coarse rock to a depth of 3". Approved backfill material shall be placed directly over the washed
gravel to desired finished grade.
3.
LOWERING GRADES: Existing trees in areas where the new finished grade is to be lowered shall
have regrading work done by hand to elevation as indicated. Roots shall be preserved at the new
grade to the extent possible and covered with topsoil.
4.
Trees marked for preservation that are located more than 6" above proposed grades shall stand on
broad rounded mounds and be graded smoothly into the lower level.
The Owner reserves the right to inspect and reject plants at any time and at any place.
The Owner shall have the final approval for acceptance of the landscaping.
QUALITY OF PLANTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Plants shall in all cases conform to requirements of the American Standard for Nursery Stock latest
versions of rules and grading adopted by the American Association of Nurserymen, Inc., but upgraded to
meet the additional requirements herein. All names and descriptions shall be as defined in Hortus Third.
Unless specifically noted otherwise, all plants shall be of selected specimen quality, exceptionally heavy,
symmetrical, tightly knit, so trained or favored in their development and appearance as to be superior in
form, number of branches, compactness and symmetry. All plants shall have a normal habit or sound,
healthy, vigorous plants with well-developed root system.
Plants shall be free of disease, insect pests, eggs or larvae.
Plants shall not be pruned before delivery.
Trees with abrasion of the bark, sunscalds, disfiguring knots or fresh cuts of limbs over 1-1/4", which
have not completely calloused, shall be rejected.
All plants shall be typical of their species or variety and shall have a normal habit of growth and be
legibly tagged with the proper name. All plants shall have been grown under climatic conditions similar to
those in the locality of the site of the project under construction or have been acclimated to such
condition for at least 2 years. Unless otherwise approved, plants shall have been grown at a latitude not
more than 200 miles north or south of the latitude of the project unless the provenance of the plant can
be documented to be compatible with the latitude and cold hardiness zone of the planting location.
The root system of each shall be well provided with fibrous roots. All parts shall be sound, healthy,
vigorous, well branched and densely foliated when in leaf.
All plants designated ball and burlap (B&B) must be moved with the root systems as solid units with balls
of earth firmly wrapped with burlap. The diameter and depth of the balls of earth must be sufficient to
encompass the fibrous root feeding systems necessary for the healthy development of the plant. No
plant shall be accepted when the ball of earth surrounding its roots has been badly cracked or broken
preparatory to or during the process of planting. The balls shall remain intact during all operations. All
plants that cannot be planted at once must be heeled-in by setting in the ground and covering the balls
with soil or mulch and then watering. Balls shall be firmly wrapped with non-synthetic, rottable burlap and
secured with nails and heavy, non-synthetic rottable twine. If treated burlap is used, all twine is to be cut
from around trunk and all burlap is to be removed.
LANDSCAPING
02920 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
I.
J.
K.
1.5
The trunk of each tree shall be a single trunk growing from a single unmutilated crown of roots unless a
multistem tree is specified. No part of the trunk shall be conspicuously crooked as compared with
normal trees of the same variety.
Plants grown in containers shall be of appropriate size for the container as specified in the most recent
edition of the American Standard for Nursery Stock and be free of circling roots on the exterior and
interior of the root ball. Container plants shall have been grown in the container long enough to have
established roots through the growing medium. Single stemmed or thin plants shall not be accepted.
The side branches must be generous, well twigged, and the plant as a whole well branched to the
ground. The plants must be in moist condition, free from dead wood, bruises or other root or branch
injuries.
PLANT SIZES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.6
Plants shall be measured when branches are in their normal position.

Shrubs shall meet the requirements for spread, height or container size stated in the plant list. The
measurements are to be taken from the ground level to the average height of the shrub and not to the
longest branch. Height and spread dimensions specified refer to the main body of the trees (measured
from the crown of the roots to the tip of the top branch) shall be not less than the minimum size
designated.
Caliper measurements shall be taken at a point on the trunk 6" (150mm) above natural ground line for
trees up to and including 4" (100mm) in caliper, and at a point 12" (300mm) above the natural ground
line for trees exceeding 4" (100mm) in caliper.
If a range of size is given, no plant shall be less than the minimum size, and not less than 50% of the
plants shall be as large as the upper half of the range specified.
The measurements specified are the minimum size acceptable and, where pruning is required, are the
measurements after pruning.
MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS BEFORE APPROVAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.7
Plant care shall begin immediately after each plant is satisfactorily installed and shall continue
throughout the life of the contract until final acceptance of the project.
Care shall include, but not be limited to, replacing mulch that has been displaced by erosion or other
means, repairing and reshaping water rings or saucers, maintaining stakes and guys as originally
installed, watering when needed or directed, and performing any other work required to keep the plants
in a healthy condition.
Contractor shall remove and replace all dead, defective and/or rejected plants as required before final
acceptance.
Grassed areas damaged during the process of the work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, who
shall restore the disturbed areas to a condition satisfactory to the Owner. This may include filling to
grade, fertilizing, seeding and mulching.
ONE YEAR GUARANTEE
A.
B.
C.
D.
Plants shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after final acceptance by the Owner.
The condition of all new plant materials is the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be approved by
the Owner.
Until final approval, any replacement of plant materials that may be necessary shall be at the expense of
the Contractor.
In addition to other standard provisions, the Contractor's bid amount shall also provide for the following:
1.
Maintenance necessary during establishment period (when required by the Owner).
2.
Replacement in kind of all plant materials not in a healthy growing condition or that have died back
to the crown or beyond normal pruning limits.
LANDSCAPING
02920 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.
The Contractor shall also be responsible for any damage caused by his operations and shall
dispose of all rubbish and excess soil as directed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
TOP SOIL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.2
Work Included - Place topsoil in areas designated on the drawings or as specified herein.
Areas - All exterior ground within the limit of contract, except surfaces occupied and except areas
indicated to be undisturbed, shall be topsoiled.
Preparation - Disk, drag, harrow or hand rake subgrade to a depth of 3" to provide bond for topsoil.
Topsoil, which must be transported across finished walks, shall be delivered in such a manner that no
damage will be done to the walks. The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of such damage.
Placement of Topsoil - Before placing topsoil, rake subsoil surface clear of stones larger than 1-1/2",
debris, and roots. Compact topsoil to form a layer with minimum depth of 4" in lawn areas and 12" in
shrub beds. Topsoil shall be placed so that after final settlement there will be good drainage (and
conforming to elevations shown on drawings). Contractor is to maintain surfaces and place any
additional topsoil necessary to replace that which may have eroded before acceptance.
Topsoil: Natural, friable, fertile, fine loamy soil possessing the characteristics of representative topsoils
in the vicinity which produces a heavy growth; free from subsoil, objectionable weeds, litter, sods, stiff
clay, stones larger than 1" in diameter, stumps, roots, trash, toxic substances, or any other material
which may be harmful to plant growth or hinder planting operations. Contractor is to verify amount
stockpiled and supply any additional as needed.
1.
Topsoil shall contain not less than 6% nor more than 20% organic matter as determined by the wet
combustion method (chronic acid reduction); topsoil shall have a pH value of not less than 5.5 nor
more than 7.0.
2.
Topsoil shall meet the following mechanical analysis:
Size of Screen
% of Soil Retained
% of Soil Passing
0.025mm
0
100
0.006mm
3
97
No. 100
40-60
40-60
a.
Imported topsoil in which more than 60% of the material passing a No. 100 sieve (clayey)
shall be rejected. All percentages are to be based on the dry weight of the samples.
3.
Laboratory tests of the topsoil shall be performed by a certified testing laboratory, and shall perform
tests for the following.
a.
Sieve particle size analysis and gradient of mineral content.
b.
Chemical analysis of the following:
i.
pH and buffer Ph.
ii.
percent of organic content.
iii.
nutrient levels of phosphorus, potassium magnesium, manganese, iron, zinc and
calcium.
iv.
soluble salt.
v.
cation exchange capacity (CEC).
c.
Recommended fertilizer and rate of application for low and medium level nutrient soils.
FERTILIZER
A.
Fertilizer shall be delivered to the site, mixed as specified, in the original unopened standard size bags
showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Store fertilizer in a weatherproof place and in such
a manner that it shall be kept dry and its effectiveness shall not be impaired.
LANDSCAPING
02920 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
2.3
Percentages of nitrogen, phosphorus and potash shall be based on laboratory test recommendations.
For the purpose of bidding, assume 10% nitrogen, 6% phosphorus and 4% potash by weight. At least
50% of the total nitrogen shall contain no less than 3% water-insoluble nitrogen. At least 60% of the
nitrogen content shall be derived from super-phosphate containing not less than 18% phosphoric acid or
bone meal containing 25% - 30% phosphoric acid and 2% - 3% nitrogen. Potash shall be derived from
muriate of potash containing 55% - 60% potash.
Grass or sodded areas shall have fertilizer applied according to soil text report or as specified on the
drawings.
SOIL AMENDMENT
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.4
Peat moss shall be used for planting soil mixture only.

Organic matter. Leaf mater and yard waste composted sufficiently to break down all woody fibers,
seeds, and leaf structures, and free of toxic and non-organic matter. Organic matter shall be
commercially prepared compost.
Coarse sand. Shall be clean, sharp, natural sands free of limestone, shale and slate particles, ASTM
C33 fine aggregate with a Fines Modulus Index of 2.75 or greater.
Lime. Lime shall be ground palletized, or pulverized lime manufactured to meet agricultural standards
and contain a maximum of 60% oxide.
Peat moss shall not be used as mulch, except on ground cover.
STAKING MATERIAL
A.
B.
C.
2.5
Stakes shall be 2" x 2" x 8'-0"pressure treated wood. 3 stakes per tree.
Wire tree staking shall be pliable No. 12 galvanized soft steel wire.
Hose shall be two-ply fiber-bearing rubber garden hose, not less than 3/4" diameter, black or green, and
of suitable length.
WATERING
A.
2.6
Owner will provide water, if available on-site, however if water is not available the Contractor shall furnish
all necessary water. The Contractor shall furnish hose and other watering equipment.
LAWN SEED
A.
2.7
Lawn seed mixture shall be fresh, clean new crop seed. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner the
dealer's guaranteed statement of the composition of the mixture and the percentage of purity and
germination of each variety.
WEED MAT
A.
2.8
Lay 10 mil sheets of Easy Gardner Weed Block, Dewitt Weed Barrier or approved 10 mil equivalent
by the Owner. The weed mat shall be placed under all planting areas not to be seeded, or as directed
on drawings. The mat shall be covered with mulch and secured in place by a soil anchor.
EDGING
A.
2.9
Edging shall be 1/8" x 4" interlocking aluminum edge, staked with metal stakes sufficiently to hold in
place.
STONE MULCH
A.
B.
Install stone mulch as per drawings, details and specifications.

The size and color of the stone mulch should be as per the drawings placed to a depth of 3".
LANDSCAPING
02920 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
D.
2.10
A.
B.
2.11
A.
B.
2.12
A.
B.
Adjust grades allowing for thickness of mulch by cutting or filling. Assure 2% pitch away from building.
Rake surface smooth and even and roll or tamp so that subgrade is uniformly firm.
Lay 6 mil sheets of "Visqueen" type polyethylene, on the compacted subgrade before placing stone,
minimum overlap shall be 6". Perforate sheeting in plant beds before placing stone.
SOD
Sod shall be a species recommended by an experienced local A.N.A.-certified nursery. Sod to be
strongly rooted, weed-disease and pest free and uniform in thickness.
All slopes greater than 3:1 shall be pegged to hold sod in place.
EROSION CONTROL BLANKET/FABRIC NETTING
Contractor shall provide and install erosion control blankets on all slopes greater than 3:1 and at other
locations where indicated on the drawings. Blankets shall be "Curlex II" by American Excelsior
Company, S150 by North American Green or "Landlok CS2" by Synthetic Industries, or as specified on
plans.
The area to be covered shall be properly prepared, fertilized, and seeded before blanket is applied. In
ditches, the blanket shall be applied in the direction of the flow of water, butted snugly at ends and side
and stapled. On slopes, the blankets shall be applied vertically to the slope. Ends shall be anchored and
sides lapped and stapled. Staple to manufacturer's recommendations.
TREE WRAP
Breathably synthetic fabric tree wrap. White in color, delivered in 75 mm (3") wide rolls. Specifically
manufactured for tree wrapping. Tree wrap shall be Breathable Fabric Tree Wrap as manufactured by
Dewitt Company, Inc. Sikeston, MO or approved equal.
Tree wrap shall be secured to the trunk using biodegradable tape suitable for nursery use and which is
expected to degrade in sunlight in less than TWO (2) years after installation.
PART 3 PLANTING PROCEDURES AND EXECUTION

3.1
DIGGING AND HANDLING

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
Bareroot material shall not be dug or installed after bud break or before dormancy. Bare rooted shrubs
shall be dug with adequate fibrous roots. Roots of these plants shall be covered with a uniformly thick
coating of mud by being puddled immediately after they are dug, or packed in moist straw, or moss.
Balled and burlapped plants shall be dug with firm natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth
to include most of the fibrous roots.
Roots or balls of all plants shall be adequately protected at all times from the sun and from drying winds.
All balled and burlapped plants which cannot be planted immediately upon delivery shall be set on the
ground and shall be well protected with soil, wet moss or other acceptable material. Bare rooted plants,
which cannot be planted immediately, shall be heeled-in upon delivery. All shall be kept moist.
Bundles of plants shall be opened and the plants separated before the roots are covered. Care shall be
taken to prevent air pockets among the roots. During planting operations, bare roots shall be covered
with canvas, hay or other suitable material. No plant shall be bound with wire or rope at any time so as to
damage the bark or break the branches.
TREES AND SHRUB PLANTING OPERATIONS
A.
Planting shall be done within acceptable seasons for the region, climatic condition and type of nursery
stock. Planting operations shall be performed at a steady rate of work unless weather conditions make it
impossible to work. No plant material shall be planted in frozen ground.
LANDSCAPING
02920 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
The Contractor shall provide sufficient tools and equipment required to carry out the planting operation.
All plants too large for two men to lift in and out of holes shall be placed with a sling. Do not rock trees in
holes to raise. Lift plants only from the bottom of the root balls or with belts or lifting harnesses of
sufficient width not to damage root balls. Do not lift trees by the trunk.
For soil mix for plant holes, see Article 2.01, Topsoil.
If rock or other underground obstructions are encountered, the Owner may require plant pits to be
relocated, the pits enlarged or the plants deleted from the contract.
Locations containing unsuitable subsoil shall be treated in one of the following manners:
1.
Where unsuitability within the construction site is deemed by the Owner to be due to excessive
compaction caused by heavy equipment or by the presence of boards, mortar, concrete or other
construction materials in subgrade, and where the natural subsoil is other than AASHTO
classification of A6 or 7, the Contractor shall loosen such areas with spikes, discs, or other means
to loosen the soil to a condition acceptable by the Owner. The Contractor shall also remove all
debris and objectionable material. Soil should be loosened to a minimal depth of 12" with additional
loosening as required to obtain adequate drainage. Contractor may introduce peat moss, sand, or
organic matter into the subsoil to obtain adequate drainage should he so desire. All such remedial
measures shall be considered as incidental to the work and no extra payment shall be made for
this part of the work.
2.
Where subgrade is deemed by the Owner to be unsuitable because the natural subsoil falls into an
AASHTO classification of A6 or 7 and contains moisture in excess of 30%, then such a condition
shall be rendered suitable by installation of a subdrainage system or by other means described
elsewhere in these specifications. Where such conditions have not been known or revealed prior to
planting time and where they have not been recognized in the preparation of drawings and
specifications, then the Owner shall issue a change order to install the proper remedial measures,
all of which shall be in addition to the contract sum.
Adjustments in locations and outlines shall be made as directed. In the event that pits or areas for
planting are prepared and backfilled with topsoil to grade prior to commencement of lawn operations,
they shall be so marked that when the work of planting proceeds, they can be readily located. In case
underground obstructions such as ledges or utilities are encountered, location shall be changed under
the direction of the Owner without charge.
Holes for trees shall be at least 2-0" greater in diameter than the spread of the root system and exactly to
the depth of the root ball. Slope the sides of the excavation at a 45 deg angle up and away from the
bottom of the excavation. Holes for shrubs and vines shall be at least 12" greater in diameter than the
spread of the root system and at exactly to the depth of the root system.
Backfill mix for tree holes and shrub beds shall include ground limestone if soil tests indicate it is needed,
and commercial fertilizer at the rate of 3 pounds for trees up to 3" in caliper, 1 pound per 1" in caliper for
larger trees, 6 ounces for small shrubs and 8 ounces for each shrub 4-0" or over. Ground limestone
shall be omitted for acid soil plants. Limestone and fertilizer shall be thoroughly mixed with the topsoil
before backfilling.
The plants shall be planted in the center of the holes and at the same depth as they previously grew.
Topsoil shall be backfilled in layers of not more than 8" and each layer watered sufficiently to settle
before the next layer is put in place. Topsoil shall be tamped under edges of balled plants. Enough
topsoil shall be used to bring the surfaces to finish grade when settled.
1.
A saucer shall be provided around each plant or as shown on the drawings.
2.
Plants shall be soaked with water twice within the first 24 hours of time of planting. Water shall be
applied with low pressure so as to soak in thoroughly without dislodging the topsoil.
3.
Approved weed mat shall be placed under all areas to be covered with mulch. Secure weed mat in
place with a soil anchor, then cover with mulch as directed.
4.
A 3" layer, after settlement, of mulch shall be applied directly on top of weed mat to the entire area
of each saucer or planting bed. Mulch shall be applied within 24 hours of planting.
LANDSCAPING
02920 - 7

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
K.
L.
3.3
Staking and Guying shall be completed only when necessary for specific conditions encountered and
with the approval of the Owner.
1.
Poor quality trees with cracked, wet, or loose root balls, poorly developed trunk-to-crown ratios, or
undersized root balls shall be rejected if they require staking.
2.
Where required, stakes and guys will be installed immediately upon planting, and shall be removed
at the end of the first growing season.
Wrapping. Wrap the trunk of any tree only when necessary for the specific conditions. Wrapping may
be required for thin-barked species, where reflective surfaces affect newly planted trees or when
orientation of planted tree cannot be matched with orientation at the nursery.
1.
Wrapping material shall be applied from the base of the tree to the first branch.
2.
All wrapping material shall be removed no later than the end of the year after planting.
MAINTENANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.4
Maintenance shall begin immediately after planting. Plants shall be watered, mulched, weeded, pruned,
sprayed, fertilized, cultivated, and otherwise maintained and protected until 45 days after final
acceptance. Settled plants shall be reset to proper grade and position, planting saucer restored and
dead material removed. Stakes and wires shall be tightened and repaired. Defective work shall be
corrected as soon as possible after it becomes apparent and weather and season permit.
If a substantial number of plants are weak or dead at the time of inspection, acceptance shall not be
granted and the Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of all plants shall be extended until
replacements are made.
All replacements shall be plants of the same kind and size specified on the plant list. They shall be
furnished and planted as specified above at no cost to the Owner.
At the end of the Establishment Period, inspection shall be made again. Any plant required under this
contract that is dead or unsatisfactory to the Owner shall be removed from the site. These shall be
replaced during the next planting season at no cost to the Owner.
SEEDING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Area - All exterior ground within the limit of contract, except surfaces occupied by buildings and
structures and paving, except areas indicated to be undisturbed, shall be seeded or planted as shown on
drawings.
1.
Furnish topsoil, finish grading, prepare seedbed, seed and maintain areas as indicated on the
drawings.
Seed Bed Preparation - Grade areas to finish grades, filling as needed or removing surplus dirt to create
a smooth, uniform grade as indicated on grading drawings. All lawn areas shall slope to drain. Where no
grades are shown, areas shall have a smooth and continual grade between existing or fixed controls
(such as walks, curbs, catch basin, elevational steps or building) and elevations shown on drawings.
Roll, scarify, rake and level as necessary to obtain true, even lawn surfaces. Loosen soil to a depth of 6"
in lawn areas by approved method of scarification and grade to remove ridges and depressions. Remove
stones or foreign matter over 2" in diameter from the top 2" of soil. Float lawn areas to approximately
finish grades.
Seed beds should be permitted to settle or should be firmed by rolling before seeding occurs.
Seeding shall not be performed in windy weather.
Seeding shall be done in two (2) directions at right angles to each other.
Lawn areas shall be seeded by sowing evenly with an approved mechanical seeder at the rate indicated
on the drawings. Culti-packer or approved similar equipment may be used to cover the seed and to form
the seedbed in one operation. In areas inaccessible to culti-packer, the seeded ground shall be lightly
raked with flexible rakes and rolled with a water ballast roller. After rolling, seeded areas are to be lightly
mulched with wheat straw.
Lawns shall be maintained by the Contractor for at least 30 days after sodding and 60 days after
seeding, or as long as is necessary to establish 85% uniform coverage of the specified grasses, or until
substantial completion of the project or until final acceptance of lawns, whichever is later.
LANDSCAPING
02920 - 8

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
3.5
In the event that lawn operations are completed too late in the Fall for adequate germination and/or
growth, maintenance shall continue into the following growing season or until a uniform stand of the
specified grasses has been established.
Water seeded areas twice the first week to a minimum depth of 6" with a fine spray and once per week
thereafter as necessary to supplement natural rain to the equivalent of 1" or to a 6" depth.
The surface layer of soil for seeded areas must be kept moist during the germination period. After first
cutting, water as specified above.
Make weekly inspections to determine the moisture content of the soil and adjust the watering schedule
established by the irrigation system installer to fit conditions.
After grass growth has started, all areas or parts of areas, which fail to show a uniform stand of grass for
any reason whatsoever shall be reseeded in accordance with the drawings, and as specified herein.
Such areas and parts of areas shall be reseeded repeatedly until all areas are covered with a
satisfactory growth of grass at no additional cost to the Owner.
Watering shall be done in such a manner and as frequently as is deemed necessary by the Owner to
assure continued growth of healthy grass. All areas of the site shall be watered in such a way as to
prevent erosion due to excessive quantities applied over small areas and to avoid damage to the finished
surface due to the watering equipment.
Owner will provide water, if available on-site, however if water is not available the Contractor shall
provide all necessary water. The Contractor shall furnish his own portable tanks, pumps, hose, pipe,
connections, nozzles, and any other equipment required to transport the water and apply it to the seeded
areas in an approved manner.
Mowing of the seeded areas shall be initiated when the grass has attained a height of 1-1/2" to 2".
Grass height shall be maintained between 2-1/2" to 3" at subsequent cuttings depending on the time of
year. Not more than 1/3 of the grass leaf shall be removed at any cutting and cutting shall not occur
more than 10 days apart.
When a large volume of cut grass exists, it shall be removed to prevent destruction of the underlying turf.
If weeds or other undesirable vegetation threaten to smother the planted species, such vegetation shall
be mowed or, in the case of weeds, shall be uprooted, raked and removed from the area by methods
Protect seeded area against trespassing while the grass is germinating. Furnish and install fences,
signs, barriers or any other necessary temporary protective devices. Damage resulting from trespass,
erosion, washout, settlement or other causes shall be repaired by the Contractor at his expense.
Remove all fences, signs, barriers or other temporary protective devices after final acceptance.
SOD
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Area - Shall be as noted on the drawings or a 3'-0" wide strip shall be sodded along walks, roadways,
and parking areas to prevent washing and erosion.
Sod Bed Preparation - Grade areas to finish grade, filling as needed and removing surplus dirt, stones,
debris, etc. and floating areas to a smooth, uniform grade as indicated on grading drawings. All lawn
areas are to slope to drain.
Always lay sod across slope and tightly together so as to make a solid area.
Roll or firmly but lightly tamp with suitable wooden or metal tamper all new sod sufficiently to set or press
sod into underlying soil.
After sodding has been completed, clean up and thoroughly moisten by sprinkler newly sodded areas.
LANDSCAPING
02920 - 9

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PART 4 - MAINTENANCE CONTRACT (When required by the Owner).

4.1
GENERAL LANDSCAPING
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.2
Contractor shall provide the Owner with a written proposal due no later than the established possession
date for landscape maintenance from an experienced local A.N.A. certified nursery business capable of
performing the work outlined herein. The proposal shall be for a period of 1 year and be renewable in 1
year increments. Maintenance shall begin at final acceptance of construction. The maintenance
contract work shall not void the guarantee of the plant material for the first year after acceptance by the
Owner. Replacement of dead plant material shall be covered under the warrantee of the original
installation, final approval and acceptance of the landscaping and irrigation by the Owner.
Landscape maintenance shall include all necessary watering, cultivation, weeding, pruning, wound
dressing, disease and insect pest control, protective spraying, straightening plants which lean or sag,
adjustments of plants which settle or are planted too low, mowing of turf areas, replacement of mulch
that has been displaced by erosion or other means, repairing and reshaping of water rings or saucers,
re-placement of mulch that has been displaced by erosion or subsidence, and the reseeding or
replanting of those areas affected. Removal of all rubbish, waste, tools, and equipment used in the
execution of the contract at the end of each work day, and any other procedure consistent with good
horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all plant material are
also part of this maintenance contract.
During the first year of the maintenance contract, any replacement of plant material shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
Landscape Maintenance Contractor shall purchase and maintain Contractor's general liability insurance
in the amounts of $1,000,000. Certification of such insurance shall be filed with the Owner prior to the
commencement of the work.
WATERING
A.
B.
C.
4.3
The irrigation system, if installed on the site, shall be used by the maintenance Contractor for the
watering program, but any failure of the system does not eliminate the Contractor's responsibility of
maintaining the desired level of moisture necessary to maintain vigorous, healthy growth.
The quantity of water applied at one time shall be sufficient to penetrate the soil to a depth necessary to
sustain healthy plant growth.
On-site water shall be furnished by the Owner. The Contractor shall furnish hose and other watering
equipment.
WEEDING
A.
4.4
Maintenance Contractor shall keep all planting areas free from weeds and undesirable grasses by a
method and by materials approved by the A.N.A.
DISEASE AND INSECT PEST CONTROL
A.
4.5
Inspect all plant material at least once a month to locate any disease or insect pest infestations. Upon
the discovery of any disease or insect pest infestation, identify, or have identified, the nature or species
of the infestation. A method of control in accordance with common A.N.A. standards shall be
immediately implemented.
Application of disease or insect control shall be by licensed
pesticide/insecticide applicator.
FERTILIZING
A.
Maintenance Contractor is to fertilize plant material on a regularly scheduled program to fit the
requirements of the plant material to maintain vigorous and healthy plant growth.
LANDSCAPING
02920 - 10

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
4.6
PRUNING AND REPAIR

A.
4.7
The amount of pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove dead or injured twigs and
branches and to compensate for the loss of roots as a result of transplanting operation and/or to maintain
safety in vehicular use areas. Pruning shall be done in such a manner as to not change the natural habit
or shape of the plant. All cuts shall be made flush, leaving no stubs.
MOWING
A.
4.8
Mow all grass areas at regular intervals to keep the grass height from exceeding 3". Mow grass areas in
such a manner as to prevent clippings from blowing on paved areas, and sidewalks. Cleanup after
mowing shall include sweeping or blowing of paved areas and sidewalks to clear them from mowing
debris.
CLEAN UP
A.
4.9
During the course of maintenance planting, excess and waste materials shall be continuously and
promptly removed at the end of each work day.
MAINTENANCE REPORT AND SCHEDULE OF ACTIVITIES
A.
4.10
A.
4.11
A.
B.
Landscape Maintenance Contractor shall provide a schedule for store management that details his
planned maintenance activities including any subcontractors.
MAINTENANCE CONTRACT
These terms and conditions herein outlined shall be attached and made a part of a maintenance contract
with the Owner.
TERMINATION OF THE MAINTENANCE CONTRACT
If the Owner fails to make payment for a period of 90 days without written clarification, the maintenance
Contractor may, upon 12 additional days' written notice to the Owner, terminate the contract and recover
from the Owner, payment for all work executed and for any proven loss sustained upon any materials,
equipment, or tools, including reasonable profit and damages applicable to the maintenance contract.
If the maintenance Contractor defaults or persistently fails or neglects to carry out the work in
accordance with the maintenance contract, the Owner, after 12 days' written notice to the maintenance
Contractor, and without prejudice to any other remedy they may have, may make good such deficiencies
and deduct the cost thereof, including compensation for additional services made necessary thereby,
from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor, or at their option, may terminate the contract.
LANDSCAPING
02920 - 11

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.2
This Section specifies cast-in-place concrete and related items, including formwork, steel reinforcement,
concrete materials, mixture design, joints, templates, anchors, cutting and patching, placement
procedures, sealants, and finishes.
Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to design, furnish,
deliver and install all concrete work as indicated on the drawings, in accordance with local codes and
standards, or as specified herein. This work includes but is not limited to all slabs, footings, retaining
walls, beams, forming, shoring, bracing, welding, bending, form removal, finishing, cleaning, and related
work.
Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
All work shall be coordinated with other Sections including but not limited to:
1.
Section 02221, Demolition and Repair.
2.
Section 02300, "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
3.
Section 02361, Termite Control.
4.
Section 02870, Site Furnishings.
5.
Section 03304, "Integral Color Concrete."
6.
Section 03360, "Special Concrete Floor Finishes."
7.
Section 07920, Caulking, Sealant, and Joint Closures.
8.
Appendix A Soils Report.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
1.
Within 20 calendar days after the General Contractor has received the Notice to Proceed, the
following shall be submitted:
a.
Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this section.
b.
Manufacturers specifications, test data, and all other data required to show compliance with
the specification and drawing requirements.
c.
Manufacturers printed recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the
Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejection actual installation procedures used
in the work.
2.
Submit special concrete finishes describing products and level of finish to be provided. Include
stain, dye, and MSDS for project. Provide concrete finish mockup per Construction Managers
request.
Design Mixtures:
1.
Submit mix design for each class of concrete to the Architect for review.
2.
Review of mix design by the Architect will in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for
the performance of the concrete.
Shop Drawings for steel reinforcement and formwork:
1.
Shop drawings shall show all bending and assembly diagrams, bent bar diagrams, bar schedules,
stirrup spacings, splicings, laps, dimensions, shapes, details, sections, elevations, and
accessories.
2.
Include all special reinforcement required, and openings through concrete structures.
3.
Prior to fabrication, contractor shall submit certified mill test reports for each grade of steel to be
used, for review by the Architect.
4.
Contractor shall submit five copies of manufacturers specifications and installation instructions for
all proprietary materials and reinforcement accessories.
Material test reports and certificates.
03300 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
1.3
Welding certificates.
Substitutions shall be requested in accordance with Sections 01230, and 01600 of this Specification.
LEED Submittals: For Credit EQ 4.2, manufacturers' product data for paints and coatings, including
printed statement of VOC content and chemical components.
Building Square Footage Certification Plan from surveyor shall be submitted by General Contractor prior
to erection of walls above floor slab elevation. See Division 1, Section 01100, Paragraph 1.16 for Area
Certification Plan requirements.
Refer to Division 1 for payment provisions for testing.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in measuring, mixing, and delivery of ready-mixed

concrete products.
1.
The firm must comply with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment;
except that time in mixer after water has been added at batch plant is limited to 1-1/2 hours.
2.
Contractor shall use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in necessary crafts, and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and methods needed for proper performance of the work in this section.
Contractor shall comply with the codes and standards including but not limited to:
1.
ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete, Sections 1 through 5, and Section 7, "Lightweight
Concrete.
2.
ACI 302, Standard Practice for Concrete Floors and Slab Construction.
3.
ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.
4.
ACI 304, Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete.
5.
ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
6.
AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel.
7.
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, Manual of Standard Practice and Placing Reinforcing Bars.
Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
Job-mixed concrete shall be subject to Architects review of design, mixing and handling procedures.
Fly ash testing: Concrete test submittals must be reviewed and approved prior to the installation of any
concrete, and should not indicate the presence of fly ash, unless aggregate contains high alkaloid
content.
1.
Obtain samples in accordance with ASTM C172. Mold and cure specimens shall be in accordance
with ASTM C31.
2.
Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C39. Report all test results to the Architect where
deviations from Specifications occur on the same day as the tests are made.
The design, engineering and construction of the formwork shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
1.
Shoring and reshoring for slabs, beams and walls shall be designed by a registered Structural
Engineer.
2.
Design the formwork in accordance with the loads and lateral pressures outlined in ACI-347, Part
3, paragraph 1.2.
3.
Design formwork for wind loads as required by local codes, and as indicated on the drawings.
4.
Protect all materials before, during, and after installation, and protect work and materials of all other
trades. In the event of damage, immediately make replacements and repair to the approval of the
Architect, and at no additional cost to the Owner.
Concrete slabs shall be washed and scrubbed two (2) weeks after pour, and a 10-0 long straight edge
shall be utilized for an on-site inspection by Owner Construction Manager to determine compliance with
finish specification. (This inspection shall occur a second time prior to the installation of floor covering or
sealer.)
1.
Prior to any floor coverings, finishes, or sealers being placed on the slab, the slab must be
acceptable to Owner in compliance with, but not limited to, the specifications contained herein,
regarding stains, abrasions, gouging, marring, etc.
2.
Any slab portion that is determined by the Owner as unacceptable or defective shall be removed
and replaced immediately in accordance with the requirements of section 3.10 herein.
03300 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.
H.
1.4
Concrete sealer manufacturer shall certify acceptability of applicator of sealer products and
required grinding and polishing. Provide letter of Certification from concrete finish manufacturer
stating that the installer is a certified applicator of special concrete finishes, and is familiar with
proper procedures and installation requirements required by the manufacturer.
4.
Contractor shall follow guidelines and procedures for compliance with certain USGBC LEED
program requirements to achieve credits for certification. Provide required submittals, products,
installation methods, measurements, and documentation of prerequisites.
Warranty:
1.
2.
Warranty Period: two (2) years commencing on Date of Certificate of Occupancy.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.5
Transport and handle all materials in such a manner as to prevent damage. Dumping on the ground is
not permitted.
Furnish temporary protection for all exposed corners and edges.
humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.
1.
Some materials may need to be stored in protected enclosures, and handled by methods which
avoid exposure to moisture.
2.
Store moisture-sensitive materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.
3.
Additional requirements for product delivery, storage and handling are in Section 01600.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
Cold Weather Requirements: Comply with Cold Weather Concreting requirements contained in ACI 306.
Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather concreting requirements contained in ACI 305.
Comply with concrete sealant manufacturers written instructions for substrate temperature and moisture
content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting topping
performance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL FORMWORK
A.
B.
1.
Engineer.
2.
Design the formwork in accordance with the loads and lateral pressures outlined in ACI-347.
3.
4.
Contractor shall provide forms for all concrete, except that which is authorized to be placed directly
against earth in trenches.
03300 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.2
Contractor shall provide positive means of adjustment of formwork and shoring to prevent excessive
deflection or misalignment during concrete placement.
General formwork (concealed concrete) shall be constructed of plywood or approved patented formwork
systems with plywood facings with as large a face dimension as possible.
Exposed concrete formwork shall be constructed of medium density overlaid form panel.
Formwork accessories shall be Burke Concrete Accessories, Inc.
1.
Snap ties shall be Burke Architectural Snap Ties. Spreader cones on ties shall not exceed 1 in
diameter.
2.
Form coating requirements shall be determined by the form system being used. Form coating shall
be compatible with the finishes used on concrete surfaces.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Contractor shall furnish and install all labor, materials, equipment and services as required herein to
provide a complete concrete reinforcing system including but not limited to bars, wire fabric, ties, and
supports.
Work in this section also includes furnishing and installation of all vertical reinforcing steel in masonry
walls, and all bond beam steel.
All reinforcement shall be delivered to the project site bundled, tagged, and marked to facilitate sorting
and placing.
1.
Tags shall indicate bar sizes, lengths, grade, and other information corresponding to markings
shown on placement diagrams.
2.
Transport and store reinforcement at the site off the ground and in a manner to prevent damage to
the materials.
Reinforcing Bars shall be provided as follows:
1.
ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, deformed.
2.
ASTM A615, Grade 40 as noted on the drawings only.
3.
ASTM A706 weldable rebar.
4.
Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A775/A775M, epoxy coated, with less than 2% damaged
coating in each 12 bar length.
Concrete reinforcement fabrication tolerances shall be as follows:
1.
Sheared length: Plus 1, Minus 1.
2.
All other bends: Plus 1, Minus 1.
Concrete reinforcement placing tolerances shall be as follows:
1.
Depth D, in flexural members, walls and columns where D is 24 or less: 1/4 .
2.
Depth D, in flexural members, walls and columns where D is more than 24: 1/2" .
3.
Longitudinal location of bends and ends of bars: 2 , except that specified concrete cover at ends
of members shall not be reduced.
Welded wire reinforcement:
1.
Plain-steel welded wire reinforcement, ASTM A185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into
flat sheets.
2.
Deformed-steel welded wire reinforcement: ASTM A497, flat sheet.
3.
Epoxy-coated welded wire reinforcement: ASTM A884/A884M, Class A coated, type 1.
All reinforcing steel shall be of new billet stock, deformed carbon steel bars.
Tie wire shall be annealed steel wire not lighter than 16-gauge, complying with ASTM A82.
Welded wire fabric shall be electrically welded wire fabric of cold-drawn wire (70,000 psi yield point) of
gauge and mesh indicated, conforming to ASTM A 185. Material shall have carbon content between
0.10% and 0.30%, and be welded with low hydrogen rods only.
Welding rods shall be of E-70 series low hydrogen conforming to AWS A-5.1.
Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices suitable for
spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place.
1.
Use wire bar-type supports complying with PS 7. Wood, brick, and other materials are not
acceptable for this application.
2.
Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice.
03300 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.
2.3
Metal chairs shall be galvanized or plastic tipped for all exposed concrete. If fiberboard forms are
used, provide chairs with runners to avoid joist loading or puncture.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.4
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source,
throughout Project:
1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II, alkali content not to exceed 0.6%. Use only one brand of
approved cement throughout the project unless use of more than one approved brand is
acceptable to Architect.
a.
Fly Ash: (If permitted to be used) ASTM C618, Class F.
Aggregates:
1.
Coarse Aggregate shall meet the requirements of ASTM C33, Table II, size 57.
2.
Normal weight Aggregates shall meet the requirements of ASTM C33, uniformly graded, not
exceeding 1-1/2 nominal size.
3.
Fine Aggregate shall meet the requirements of ASTM C33.
4.
Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C330, 3/4 nominal maximum aggregate size.
Water: potable complying with ASTM C94.
Air-Entraining Admixture shall comply with ASTM C260.
Use of Chemical Admixtures is allowed only with prior approval from Architect. As allowed, provide
admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1% water-soluble chloride ions by mass
of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures
containing calcium chloride.
1.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A.
2.
Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type B.
3.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type D.
4.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F.
5.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type G.
6.
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C1017/C1017M, Type II.
7.
Non-slip Admixture shall be Frictex NS as manufactured by Sonneborn Chemical Corporation.
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
2.5
Sub-slab vapor retarder shall be as required by ASTM E 1745, Class C minimum, and as follows:
1.
100% virgin material: Polyethylene or approved equal
2.
Permeance of 0.01 or less per ASTM F 1249
3.
Puncture resistant as required by ASTM D 1709
4.
Non-biodegradable as required by ASTM E 154
5.
Thickness: 15 mils
6.
Provide all accessory materials required by the manufacturer for complete, proper installation.
CURING MATERIALS
A.
B.
Hardening / Sealing Agent

1.
RetroPlate 99 manufactured by Advanced Floor Products, Inc
2.
Performance Criteria:
a.
Abrasion Resistance: ASTM C779 Up to 400% increase in abrasion resistance.
b.
Impact Strength: ASTM C805 Up to 21% increase impact strength.
c.
Ultraviolet Light and Water Spray: ASTM G23-81 No adverse effect to ultraviolet and water
spray.
d.
Reflectivity: Up to 30% increase and water spray.
Water: Potable.
03300 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.6
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.7
Concrete accessories shall be as manufactured by Gateway Engineering Co., Superior Concrete

Accessory Company, or Burke Concrete Accessories.
Keyed Kold Joint shall be 24-Gauge or as approved by the Architect and manufactured by Burke or
Jahn.
Control joints (optional to Sawcut Joint) shall be Sealtight Speed-E-Joint with pull free top section.
Provide 1-1/2 at slabs up to 6 thickness, and 2 at slabs 6 and thicker.
Leveling compound shall be as recommended by Ardex to be used in areas of floor covering only.
Non-shrink grout shall be Embeco premixed as manufactured by Master Builders Company, Burke
Grouting Compound, 5 Star Grout. Grout shall have 28-day compressive strength of not less than 7500
psi conforming to ASTM C827.
Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips shall be as required by ASTM D1752, type I or II preformed,
non-extruded, resilient type. ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
Semi rigid joint filler shall be Euclid, EUCO QWIKjoint 200.
Floor crack filler shall be non-metallic, non-shrink, waterproof filler having a minimum compressive
strength of 4000 psi.
Handicapped ramp color shall be as indicated on drawings or required by local jurisdiction.
CONCRETE MIXTURES
A.
B.
2.8
Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory
trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1.
Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated on the drawings or structural calculations.
2.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 to 0.50.
3.
Slump Limit: Maximum slump 3-1/2" for slabs not on grade, 4 for all other concrete, plus or minus
1.
4.
Air Content: 3%, plus or minus 1% at point of delivery for 1-1/2 nominal maximum aggregate size.
5.
Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3%.
CONCRETE MIXING
A.
B.
C.
D.
Design concrete mixes in accordance with ACI-211 to obtain a 28-day comprehensive strength as
scheduled for the various building elements.
Use of water reducing admixture is not permitted in concrete for slabs on grade, unless approved by the
Architect.
Proportion concrete for minimum slump of 3 and maximum slump of 4.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C94/C94M and
ASTM C1116, and furnish batch ticket information.
1.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2
hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to
60 minutes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
FORMWORK
A.
B.
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 to support vertical, lateral,
static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such
loads.
Remove all debris and foreign material from the forms, and repair or replace damaged areas, prior to
assembly.
03300 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.2
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and
position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
1.
Formwork shall be constructed in a substantial manner, true to line and sufficiently tight to prevent
leakage of cement paste.
2.
Coat and contact surfaces of forms with a form coating compound before reinforcement is placed.
Thin form-coating compound only as recommended by the form-coating manufacturer. Prevent
excess accumulation of form coating or contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh
concrete will be placed. Apply coating in compliance with manufacturers instructions.
3.
Construct shoring and centering to prevent perceptible deflection. Brace and double wedge on
bearing blocks and mudsills to distribute the construction loads evenly and safely. Keep wedges
tight during concrete placement and until shoring is removed.
4.
Do not construct formwork more than 1'-0" above a construction joint at the side from which the
concrete will be placed.
5.
Wet the wood forms and masonry units in contact with concrete.
6.
No wood other than built-in-bucks or nailing blocks will be permitted to remain permanently inside
the forms.
7.
Provide blockouts in concrete as indicated on the drawings or as required for mechanical,
plumbing, electrical or other work.
8.
Provide slab slopes and concrete drainage trenches as indicated on the Drawings. Slopes on
slabs and in trenches shall be uniform and pitched to drain.
Provide temporary openings at the base of forms and all other points to facilitate cleaning and inspection
before the concrete is placed. After forms have been cleaned and inspected, close openings to prevent
leakage of grout.
See Architectural drawings for chamfers and reveals. Where none is shown, provide 1/2 vinyl bead in
all exposed angles to form a slightly rounded corner.
Form removal shall be performed in a manner to insure the complete safety and integrity of the structure.
Supports or forms should not be disturbed until the concrete has hardened, and acquired sufficient
strength to safely sustain its own weight and any additional load occurring during construction.
1.
Form removal shall conform to the following minimum time schedule:
a.
Wall forms: Not less than three (3) days after placing the concrete.
2.
Refer to Section 3.9 herein for curing procedures when forms are removed in less than seven (7)
days.
EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
B.
3.3
Contractor shall coordinate the necessary trades as required to provide the sleeves, bolts, anchors,
holes, etc., to be built in.
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is
attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1.
Install all bucks, nailing blocks, inserts, and anchors, in the precise position required.
2.
Form all grooves, seats, reglets, etc., as required to receive the material and equipment indicated.
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
B.
Install, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and per manufacturer's
written instructions. Place sheets in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.
Seal vapor retarder completely around all pipes and conduits. Thoroughly inspect vapor retarder
immediately prior to placing base material (AB) and repair all punctures and tears. All laps shall be 6"
minimum taped full perimeter.
03300 - 7

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.4
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" and ACI 318 for placing reinforcing steel.
1.
Place the steel in accordance with the drawings and schedules, and secure in position to prevent
displacement during placing of concrete. In earth trenches, provide concrete block supports; on
formwork, provide approved metal or plastic chair and spacer supports. Secure with ties against
displacement within the tolerances specified herein.
2.
Adjust bar placement as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits, or
embedded items. Such adjustment is subject to approval of the Architect.
3.
Lap splices a minimum of 32 bar diameters unless otherwise noted. Splices shall be subject to the
approval of the Architect.
4.
Bars shall be continuous insofar as practicable. Dowels shall be of sufficient length to develop the
strength of the bar. Secure dowels in the forms prior to placing the concrete.
5.
Use flat sheets of wire mesh reinforcing and cut to the required size and lay reasonably flat in
place. In slabs-on-grade and in non-composite concrete topping, lap 2 minimum between outer
most cross wires on each sheet. Elsewhere, lap one wire spacing plus 2 minimum between outer
most cross wires on each sheet. Wire securely to each other and to the adjoining reinforcement.
Chair mesh in place to its proper depth in concrete.
6.
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing
concrete.
Fabricate and place steel reinforcing in accordance with requirements of ACI 117.
Shop fabricated reinforcing bars shall conform to the required shapes and dimensions, with fabrication
tolerances complying with ACI 117. In case of fabricating errors, do not rebend or straighten
reinforcement in a manner that will injure or weaken the material.
Bend bars cold and shop fabricate insofar as practible. Bends for stirrups and ties shall have radii on the
inside of the bar not less than one bar diameter. Bends for all other bars shall have radii on the inside of
the bar not less than the values listed below:
Bar Size
Minimum Radii
#3, #4 or #5
#6, #7 or #8
#9, #10 or #11
2-1/2 Bar Diameters

3 Bar Diameters
4 Bar Diameters
Reinforcement shall be free of excessive mill scale, excessive rust, oil or other deleterious material
harmful to bonding qualities.
Reinforcement with any of the following defects will not be permitted in the work:
1.
Bar lengths, depths, and bends exceeding the specified fabrication tolerances.
2.
Bends or kinks not indicated on the Drawings or final Shop Drawings.
3.
Bars with reduced cross section due to excessive rusting or other cause.
Welding of reinforcing steel shall comply with the requirements of AWS D1.4, Structural Welding CodesReinforcing Steel for field welding.
Prior to field welding, determine the weldability of the reinforcing bars by a laboratory chemical analysis
of the steel. Only steel conforming to the chemical requirements specified in AWS D1.4 may be welded.
03300 - 8

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.5
JOINTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.6
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
Submit proposed locations of all construction joints and control joints, and obtain Architects approval
prior to construction. In the event that additional reinforcing is required at some of these joints, labor and
materials to install additional reinforcing shall be provided by contractor at no additional cost to the
Owner.
All reinforcing shall be continuous through construction joints and control joints. Provide shear keys as
detailed on the drawings.
At all exterior slabs-on-grade, provide a 1/2 wide expansion joint wherever slabs abut vertical elements
whether indicated on the drawings or not. Provide expansive heavy traffic grade waterproof sealant at all
exterior joints.
Construction Joints/Control joints:
1.
Place constructions joints and control joints as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.
2.
See Drawings for locations of constructions joints and control joints in slabs-on-grade and in
topping pours.
3.
Install all joints so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated, or
as approved by Architect.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade:
1.
Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct
contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:
a.
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each
edge of joint to a radius of 1/8. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface
finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
b.
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive
or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not
tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random
contraction cracks.
Comply with recommendations of ACI 302 for use of joint fillers as applicable to materials, application,
and conditions indicated.
1.
Joints must be clean and dry. All oil, dirt, debris, paint, and any other material that may be a bond
breaker must be removed from the joint surfaces. Follow manufacturers written instructions for
installation of individual materials for each application.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with
vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as
indicated.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
B.
C.
D.
Contractor shall comply with the recommendations of ACI-304 for measuring, mixing, transporting, and
placing concrete, except as follows:
1.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with the requirements of ACI-306, Cold Weather Concreting.
2.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with the requirements of ACI-305, Hot Weather Concreting.
Before placing concrete, clean all of the equipment involved. Remove all concrete laitance, loose
materials, rust, mill scale, and other material which may reduce bonding with the reinforcing steel.
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of all formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items are
complete, and that required inspections have been performed.
Convey the concrete from the mixer to the place of final deposit by methods which will prevent
segregation of aggregate or loss of material.
1.
Place concrete at such a rate that the concrete is at all times plastic, and to insure a practically
continuous flow of concrete.
2.
Concrete not in place 1-1/2 hours after the water has been added at batch plant may be rejected by
the Architect.
03300 - 9

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.7
Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness.
4.
If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as required.
Place the concrete as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to re-handling or
flowing. Do not deposit concrete that has partially hardened or been re-tempered.
Vapor retarder shall be placed under all interior slabs on grade. Lap all joints in vapor retarder 6. Place
vapor retarder on compacted sub-grade, which shall be prepared per recommendations of the Soils
Report, and then provide minimum 4 base material (AB) over vapor retarder.
Thoroughly compact all concrete by suitable means during the placing, and work around the
reinforcement and embedded items to allow proper placement of concrete into the corners of the forms.
1.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI-301.
2.
Use vibrators to aid in the placement of the concrete, operated by experienced personnel.
3.
Design forms to withstand the action of the vibrators.
4.
Keep at least one spare operating vibrator on the job at all times during the concrete operations.
Do not place concrete during rain unless adequate protection has been provided.
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES (Walls, Beams, Soffits, Columns, etc.)
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
After forms are removed, fill tie rod holes, correct honeycomb spots, remove fins, and clean and finish
damaged surfaces. Wipe off excess mortar and rub to match adjoining surfaces.
When excessive honeycombing is revealed, remove the defective material immediately after stripping
forms to a depth of 3/4 to 1. Cut edge of area perpendicular to surface to avoid weathered edges.
Saturate with water for several inches beyond cutout, and brush-in a grout consisting of equal parts
Portland cement and sand. Follow immediately with the patching mortar. Leave the patch slightly higher
than the surrounding surface. After an hour or two, finish flush with the adjoining surface. Wipe and rub
patch to match adjoining surfaces. Keep patches moist for 7 days.
Patching mortar shall consist of the same materials and proportions as the original concrete, except that
the coarse aggregate shall be omitted. When color match is required, adjust mixture to produce a
finished color to match the adjoining concrete surfaces.
Cracks caused by expansion, shrinkage and the like, that occur in natural color concrete up through final
acceptance of building, shall be carefully patched with floor stone, epoxy grouting mortar, or other
method acceptable to the Architect.
Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated:
1.
Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and
rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not
apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.
2.
Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to
coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand
with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts
determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into
voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep
surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.
3.
Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part portland cement
and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement
in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces.
Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent
to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces.
Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless
03300 - 10

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.8
FINISHING (FLATWORK) Floors and slabs

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
All concrete finishing work shall comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding,
restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Place screeds on legs and pads, rather
than allowing stakes and pins to puncture the vapor retarder.
Tolerances for finished slab surfaces shall be class A. Refer to drawings for finish locations.
Seal interior building slabs where indicated on Drawing finish schedule.
1.
Do not wet concrete surfaces.
2.
Move the concrete into place with square tipped shovels, screed and compact with a light tamp,
except do not tamp topping and slabs not on grade. Saw screed and float surface to bring fines
to the top.
3.
When concrete surface has hardened sufficiently so that excess fines will not be brought to the
surface, trowel the slab with a steel trowel to provide a smooth surface, free of pinholes or other
imperfections. A type of mechanical trowel with rotating blades approved by the Architect may be
used for this operation.
4.
After the surface has hardened sufficiently to ring under a trowel, trowel again with a steel trowel to
a sealed, hardened, burnished surface free of excess concrete pour cuts, sprawls, cracks, warps,
trowel marks, skips, rolled fines, tooling and ridging.
5.
Concrete slabs scheduled to receive ceramic tile, concrete topping or similar finishes shall have a
screeded finish but true and even to plane, with no sharp projections or ridges.
6.
Use a small radius edger on all edges of exposed work. Use a deep cutting scoring tool to provide
scoring as indicated on the drawings.
7.
Refer to drawings for tactile warning details.
8.
It is mandatory that the slab be leveled with the straight edge by the General Contractor 2 weeks
after the slab is poured, maximum tolerance of 1/8 over 10-0 and a maximum of the entire floor of
1/4. The General Contractor shall coordinate this event with the Owners representative so that he
may be present. The floor slab shall be ground smooth and level no earlier than 2 days prior to
installation of the floor covering. Grinding shall only occur at areas of floor coverings such as
V.C.T., rubber sheet goods, vinyl sheet goods, etc. After the slab is ground, a second check shall
be performed by the General Contractor to verify compliance to the tolerances specified in the floor
finish section. See Section 1.3, Quality Assurance.
9.
Sawcutting of flatwork shall be coordinated with locations shown on the contract documents, and
shall occur at the time when concrete has sufficiently stiffened as to prevent raveling, pulling of
aggregate, and to provide equipment support.
10. Broom Finish:
a.
Exterior flatwork to receive broom finish shall be installed as indicated on the drawings and
as specified herein.
b.
This shall include concrete platforms, steps, ramps, may include surfaces subject to light foot
traffic, and elsewhere as indicated.
c.
Exterior truck ramps shall receive a heavy broom finish.
Non-slip surfaces such as stair treads or ramps where concrete is exposed, as indicated on the drawings
and in the specifications herein, shall receive an abrasive aggregate applied uniformly at the rate of no
less than 25 lbs per 100 SF, and as recommended by the manufacturers instructions.
Exposed Aggregate:
1.
Textured concrete shall be exposed aggregate comprised of river run 1/4 to 1/2" aggregate size in
the locations indicated on the drawings.
Scratch Finish:
1.
While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied.
2.
Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce profile amplitude of 1/4" in 1 direction.
3.
Apply scratch finish to surfaces in the locations indicated on the drawings.
Float Finish:
1.
Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to
power driven floats.
2.
Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
03300 - 11

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.
H.
I.
3.9
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
4.
Apply float finish to surfaces in the locations indicated on the drawings.
Trowel Finish:
1.
After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven
trowel.
2.
Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in
texture and appearance.
3.
Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
4.
Apply a trowel finish to surfaces in the locations indicated on the drawings.
5.
Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled,
freestanding, 10'-0" long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed anywhere on the surface
does not exceed the requirements of ACI 302.
Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish:
1.
Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces in the locations indicated on the drawings.
2.
While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
3.
Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces.
CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Curing of all concrete surfaces shall be as follows:

1.
Apply specified curing materials to fresh concrete surfaces after final troweling, when surface water
glaze has disappeared.
2.
Application is to be in strict compliance with manufacturers recommendations, specifically
manufacturers precautions and coverage rates.
3.
Protect all finished concrete surfaces from damage caused by construction equipment, materials,
or methods.
4.
During the curing period, protect the concrete from damaging mechanical disturbance; particularly
load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive vibrations.
5.
Adjust finish schedules when rain and other inclement weather may affect the drying of site
concrete.
6.
When moisture sensitive floor coverings are to be installed, refer to ACI 302.1R-96.
Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply
with applicable ACI requirements for hot and cold weather protection during curing.
Protect all finished surfaces from stains, abrasions, etching, discoloration, gouging, scratches, and
marring. Protect surfaces and edges by leaving forms in place, by providing temporary covers, diapers,
plastic, etc., to avoid marring gouging, etc. Protect all concrete from rain, flowing water, or mechanical
injury.
Protect floor slabs from the dropping of plaster, paint, dirt, and other marring by covering with
polyethylene plastic sheet, well lapped, and sealed. Maintain covering in good condition until danger of
damage is passed.
Equipment diapering is to be provided to protect slabs from the dripping of oils, acid, rust marks, etc.
If evaporation rate in first paragraph below is exceeded, ACI 305R states that plastic shrinkage cracking
is probable. See manufacturers literature or ACI 305R for estimated moisture-loss chart relating relative
humidity, air and concrete temperature, and wind velocity to rate of evaporation.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. before and during finishing operations. Apply
according to manufacturers written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying
concrete, but before float finishing.
Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven (7) days.
2.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing
concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12", and sealed by
03300 - 12

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
I.
3.10
waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or
tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
After curing, allow sufficient time for drying.
CONCRETE SEALING
A. Apply 2 coats of RetroGuard at the rate of 1,200 - 1,500 ft/gal. Dilute RetroGuard to a 50-50 mix
with water prior to application using low pressure sprayer.
B. Concrete must be cured a minimum of 21 days or as directed by the manufacturer before application
of RetroPlate can begin. Application is to take place at least 10 days prior to racking and other instore accessory installation, thus providing a complete, uninhibited concrete slab for application.
1.
Only a certified applicator shall apply RetroPlate 99. Applicable procedures must be followed
as recommended by the product manufacturer.
2.
Achieve waterproofing, hardening, dust-proofing, and abrasion resistance of the surface
without changing the natural appearance of the concrete, except for the color and sheen.
3.11
A.
3.12
A.
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

All floors which are not within the tolerances specified in the contract documents shall be corrected by
one of the following methods:
1.
Removal and replacement of the defective slab is the only allowed solution at areas of exposed
concrete. Removal shall be from score to score.
2.
Limited grinding of the surface of the concrete to bring it into compliance with specified tolerances.
This is allowed at concrete slab areas only with Architect approval.
3.
Refer to Section 02221, Demolition and Repair for cutting and patching, and other work
requirements.
Testing and Inspecting: Concrete tests and inspections shall be made by an approved independent
testing laboratory at the direction of the Architect. Approximately one test shall be made for each 50
cubic yards of each class of concrete when placed in large continuous pours. At least one test shall be
made of pours less than 50 cubic yards.
1.
Testing Services: Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301.
2.
Tests shall be made for 7 day and 28 day strength. Mold 4 cylinders for each test; 1 for 7-day test,
2 for 28-day test and 1 for hold.
03300 - 13

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 03304 INTEGRAL COLOR CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.2
Drawings and General provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, shall apply to this Section.
This Section specifies integral color concrete and related items, including formwork, steel reinforcement,
concrete materials, mixture design, joints, templates, anchors, cutting and patching, placement
procedures, sealants, and finishes.
deliver and install all concrete work as indicated on the drawings, in accordance with local codes and
standards, or as specified herein. This work includes but is not limited to all work as specified in Section
03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete and related work.
All work shall be coordinated with other Sections including but not limited to:
1.
Section 01310, "Project Meetings and Coordination".
2.
Section 02221, "Demolition and Repair".
3.
Section 02300, "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
4.
Section 02361, Termite Control.
5.
Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
6.
Section 03360, "Special Concrete Floor Finishes." (RetroPlate - RetroGuard)
7.
Section 03363, "Special Concrete Floor Finishes." (DiamondQuest Consolideck LS)
8.
Section 07920, Caulking, Sealant, and Joint Closures.
9.
Appendix A - Soils Report
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
Integral Colored Concrete: A cast-in-place monolithic concrete mix that is delivered and placed
containing a specified color throughout.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1.
ACI 117 "Tolerance for Concrete Construction and Materials."
2.
ACI 211.1 "Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass
Concrete."
3.
ACI 212 "Guide for Use of Admixtures in Concrete."
4.
ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings."
5.
ACI 302.1R "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction."
6.
ACI 304R "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete."
7.
ACI 305R "Hot Weather Concreting."
8.
ACI 306R "Cold Weather Concreting."
9.
ACI 308 "Standard Practice for Curing Concrete."
10. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
11. AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel.
12. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, Manual of Standard Practice and Placing Reinforcing Bars.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1.
ASTM C33 "Specification for Concrete Aggregates."
2.
ASTM C94 "Specification for Ready-Mix Concrete."
3.
ASTM C150 "Specification for Portland Cement."
4.
ASTM C171 "Specification for Sheet Materials for Concrete Curing."
5.
ASTM C494 "Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete."

03304 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
6.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
1.5
ASTM E1155 "Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness using the FNumber System" - Dipstick Test, FF-50 / FL-40.

There shall be no Substitutions.
Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
1.
a.
b.
Manufacturers specifications, test data, and all other data required to show compliance with
the specification and drawing requirements.
c.
Color Chips / Sample of color as specified, to be approved by Architect and Sprouts'
Representative.
d.
in the work.
2.
Submit special concrete finishes describing products and level of finish to be provided. Include
stain, dye, and MSDS for project.
a.
Provide mockup per Sprouts Representative's request and these specifications.
Design Mixtures:
1.
Submit mix design including historical or trial mixture test data in accordance with ACI 211.1 and
aggregate test reports for integral colored concrete to the Architect for review.
2.
This design mix data shall include all admixtures to be used in the integral colored concrete.
3.
Review of mix design by the Architect will in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for
the performance of the concrete.
Shop Drawings for steel reinforcement and formwork:
1.
Shop drawings shall show all bending and assembly diagrams, bent bar diagrams, bar schedules,
stirrup spacing, splicing, laps, dimensions, shapes, details, sections, elevations, and accessories.
2.
Include all special reinforcement required, and openings through concrete structures.
3.
Prior to fabrication, contractor shall submit certified mill test reports for each grade of steel to be
used, for review by the Architect.
4.
Contractor shall submit five copies of manufacturers specifications and installation instructions for
all proprietary materials and reinforcement accessories.
Delivery Tickets:
1.
Contractor shall submit copies of delivery tickets to Sprouts' Representative and to the Architect as
specified.
Material test reports and certificates:
1.
From a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of materials,
and admixtures with requirements indicated, for all materials utilized in the integral colored
concrete.
2.
Refer to Division 1 for payment provisions for Testing.
Welding certificates, as required for cast-in-place concrete.
Contractor shall submit copies of the Minutes of the "Pre-Installation Conference" meeting for the integral
colored concrete flooring to Architect and Sprouts' Representative.
Refer to Division 1 for payment provisions for testing.
QUALITY ASSURANCE

03304 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Source Limitations: Contractor shall obtain each type, or class, of cementitious material of the same
brand from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture
(including color pigmentation admixture) from the same manufacturer.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in measuring, mixing, and delivery of ready-mixed
concrete products for colored concrete.
1.
The firm must comply with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment;
except that time in mixer after water has been added at batch plant is limited to 1-1/2 hours.
2.
Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association's
Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities.
3.
Manufacturer shall have provided integral colored concrete on a minimum of three similar projects.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed integral colored concrete work
similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for this project on a minimum of three (3) separate
projects, and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service
performance.
1.
Contractor shall use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in necessary crafts, and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and methods needed for proper performance of the work in this section.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to the Authorities Having
Jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 to conduct the testing indicated, as
documented according to ASTM E548.
1.
Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade
1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.
Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct a Pre-Installation Conference at Project site per Section 01310
Project Meetings and Coordination and as noted below.
1.
Attendees shall include a representative of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place
concrete, including but not necessarily limited to the following persons: Project Manager,
Contractor's Superintendent, Ready-Mix Concrete Producer, Concrete Subcontractor, Color
Supplier, Special Concrete Floor Finishes Subcontractor, Testing Agency, Sprouts' Representative
and Architect.
2.
Agenda shall contain the following subjects:
a.
Subgrade Review
b.
Concrete Review, including Mix Design, Quality Control, Delivery and Placement
c.
Environmental conditions, including ambient temperatures, material temperatures, lighting
requirements.
d.
Pour Schedules, including finishing procedures, timing of saw cuts and control joints,
sealing, joint filling procedures, mock up floor slab.
e.
Curing procedures
f.
Protection of finished product during on-going construction
g.
Punch list of final concrete installation shall be issued by General Contractor prior to
installation of Sprouts' fixtures.
3.
Minutes of the conference / meeting shall be recorded, typed and printed by the Contractor and
distributed by him to all Parties in attendance and to those as directed by Sprouts' Representative,
within five (5) days of the meeting. The minutes shall include a statement by the Concrete SubContractor, Color Supplier and Admixture Manufacturer indicating that the proposed mix design
and placement procedures will produce the concrete quality required by those specifications.
On-Site Mock Up: Contractor shall provide for the installation of an on-site mock up / test pour of colored
concrete one (1) month prior to pouring the finished concrete floor slab at Ground Up stores or within the
first two (2) weeks of a T.I. store, and after the Pre-Installation Conference and any resolution of any
outstanding issues from the conference.
1.
Test pour shall consist of a 12'-0" x 12'-0" area in the receiving area at Ground Up stores or
Manager's Office area at T.I. stores, or additional area, as determined by the Sprouts'
Representative.
2.
Test pour shall demonstrate finished surface texture, integral coloring, concrete curing and sealing,
saw cutting, joint sealer, and surface protection.

03304 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.
G.
H.
I.
J.
1.6
Included shall be an area to demonstrate patching and repairing techniques approved for work.
Area shall be 2'-0" x 2'-0" in area.
4.
The test pour shall use the actual materials as specified for the project, and using the approved
construction techniques as specified for the project and conditions.
5.
After review by Sprouts' Representative and Architect of acceptance of visual qualities, Contractor
shall maintain approved test pour as the Standard for the balance of the work / project.
Fly ash testing: Concrete test submittals must be reviewed and approved prior to the installation of any
concrete, and should not indicate the presence of fly ash, unless aggregate contains high alkaloid
content.
1.
Obtain samples in accordance with ASTM C172. Mold and cure specimens shall be in accordance
with ASTM C31.
2.
Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C39. Report all test results to the Architect where
deviations from Specifications occur on the same day as the tests are made.
1.
Engineer.
2.
Design the formwork in accordance with the loads and lateral pressures outlined in ACI 347, Part 3,
paragraph 1.2.
3.
4.
Concrete slabs shall be washed and scrubbed two (2) weeks after pour, and a testing method in
compliance with ASTM E1155, "dipstick test," shall be utilized for an on-site inspection by Sprouts'
Representative to determine compliance with finish specification.
1.
Prior to any floor coverings, special concrete floor finishes, or sealers being placed on the slab, the
slab must be acceptable to Sprouts' Representative in compliance with, but not limited to, the
specifications contained herein, regarding stains, abrasions, gouging, marring, etc.
2.
Any slab portion that is determined by the Sprouts' Representative as unacceptable or defective
shall be removed and replaced immediately in accordance with the requirements contained herein.
3.
required grinding and polishing. Provide Letter of Certification from concrete finish manufacturer
stating that the installer is a certified applicator of special concrete floor finishes, and is familiar with
4.
installation methods, measurements, and documentation of prerequisites.
Warranty:
1.
Manufacturers Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturers standard warranty
2.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
not permitted.

03304 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
F.
1.7
1.
2.
3.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
Cold Weather Requirements: Comply with Cold Weather Concreting requirements contained in ACI 306.
Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather concreting requirements contained in ACI 305.
Comply with concrete sealant manufacturers written instructions for substrate temperature and moisture
content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting topping
performance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL FORMWORK
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.2
The design, engineering and construction of the formwork shall be the responsibility of the Contractor,
and shall be in compliance with Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete, unless otherwise noted.
1.
Contractor shall provide forms for all concrete, except that which is authorized to be placed directly
against earth in trenches.
Contractor shall provide positive means of adjustment of formwork and shoring to prevent excessive
deflection or misalignment during concrete placement.
General formwork (concealed concrete) shall be constructed of plywood or approved patented formwork
systems with plywood facings with as large a face dimension as possible.
Exposed concrete formwork shall be constructed of medium density overlaid form panel.
Formwork accessories shall be Burke Concrete Accessories, Inc.
1.
Snap ties shall be Burke Architectural Snap Ties. Spreader cones on ties shall not exceed 1 in
diameter.
2.
Form coating requirements shall be determined by the form system being used. Form coating shall
be compatible with the finishes used on colored concrete surfaces.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
2.3
Contractor shall furnish and install all labor, materials, equipment and services as required herein to
provide a complete concrete reinforcing system including but not limited to bars, wire fabric, ties, and
supports. All reinforcement shall be in compliance with applicable codes and requirements of ASTM,
ACI and the requirements included under Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source,
throughout Project and shall include, as a minimum those requirements as contained within Section
03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete, and as follows:
1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II, alkali content not to exceed 0.6%. Use only one brand of
approved cement throughout the project.
a.
Integral concrete mix shall strictly comply / adhere to color manufacturer recommendations /
requirements.

03304 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
b.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.4
Maximum slump shall be 4-1/2". Maintain consistent slump on all trucks and pours
throughout the project / work.
c.
Fly Ash: shall not be permitted.
Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete:
1.
Manufacturer: L.M. Scofield Companies
2.
Materials: Chromix Admixture
3.
Color: Barcelona Brown #1017
4.
Contact:
Gina
Aguirre,
Tel.:
(760)
688-8703,
Fax:
(760)
295-8814,
Email:
gina.aguirre@scofield.com
5.
Application shall be in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
Aggregates:
1.
Coarse Aggregate shall meet the requirements of ASTM C330, Table II, size 57.
2.
Normal weight Aggregates shall meet the requirements of ASTM C330, uniformly graded 3/4"
nominal size, not exceeding 1-1/2 nominal size.
3.
Fine Aggregate shall meet the requirements of ASTM C330 (Bleached White Sand only).
4.
Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C330, 3/4 nominal maximum aggregate size.
Water: potable complying with ASTM C94 shall be a part of the ready-mix batch. No additional water
shall be added to the mix at the project site.
Air-Entraining Admixture shall comply with ASTM C260. Maximum total air content shall not exceed 3%
entrapped air.
Use of Chemical Admixtures that increase water bleed off, water bleeding, shall not be used. No
exceptions. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
2.5
Sub-slab vapor retarder shall be as required by ASTM E 1745, Class C minimum, and as follows:
1.
100% virgin material: Polyethylene or approved equal
2.
Permeance of 0.01 or less per ASTM F 1249
3.
Puncture resistant as required by ASTM D 1709
4.
Non-biodegradable as required by ASTM E 154
5.
Thickness: 15 mils
6.
Provide all accessory materials required by the manufacturer for complete, proper installation.
CURING MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.6
A (7) seven day water, Moisture Cure as identified in paragraph 3.8.G.2 is the preferred method for
curing.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover-Curing, Do not use polyethylene film.
Water: Potable.
See Section 03360 Special Concrete Floor Finishes for additional requirements.
FLOOR FINISH MANUFACTURERS:
A.
B.
2.7
Advanced Floor Products, Inc., PO Box 50533, Provo, UT. 84605 Contact: Curtis Turnbull, Tel.: (888)
942-3144, Cell: (801) 358-0249 Email: curtis@retroplatesystem.com
1.
Product: RetroGuard
QuestMark a division of CentiMark Corporation, 12 Grandview Circle, Canonsburg, PA. 15317. Contact:
Jeff Johnson, Tel: (909) 652-9290, Email: jeff.johnson@centimark.com.
2.
Product: Consolideck LS
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Concrete accessories shall be specified elsewhere in Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete, and as
noted herein.

03304 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.8
Polyurea Joint Filler: Rapid curing, self leveling elastomer, installed prior to floor finishing as noted in
Section 03360.
1.
Manufacturer: L&M Construction Chemicals
a.
Materials: "Joint Tite 750" or equal.
b.
Accent Color "A": Custom color to match L.M. Scholfield CS-14 Dark Walnut (Dark Brown).
c.
Contact: Ray Hinesly, Tel.: (602) 329-7035, Cell: (602) 820-8590, Email: rjhinesly@q.com
d.
Application shall be in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and
instructions.
2.
Alternative Manufacturer: Metzger / McGuire Company
a.
Materials: SPAL-PRO RS-88 or equal.
b.
Accent Color "A": Metzger / McGuire "Color Fast" Black Fox.
c.
instructions.
Floor crack filler shall be non-metallic, non-shrink, waterproof filler having a minimum compressive
strength of 4000 psi and shall match the color of the colored concrete.
Neutralizing Agent: Tri-Sodium Phosphate
CONCRETE MIXTURES
A.
B.
2.9
Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory
trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1.
Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated on the drawings or structural calculations (4,000 PSI
minimum after 28 days).
2.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio:
Shall comply with color manufacturer's
recommendations and requirements for compressive strengths as indicated.
3.
Slump Limit: Maximum slump 4-1/2" for concrete work, and shall be consistently maintained
between truck loads and pours.
4.
Air Content: 3%, plus or minus 1% at point of delivery for 3/4 nominal maximum aggregate size.
5.
Air Content: Maximum air contact of troweled finished floors shall not exceed 3%.
CONCRETE MIXING
A.
B.
C.
D.
Design concrete mixes in accordance with ACI-211 to obtain a 28-day comprehensive strength as
scheduled for the various building elements.
Use of water reducing admixture is not permitted in concrete for slabs on grade, unless approved by the
Architect.
Proportion concrete for maximum slump of 4-1/2.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C94/C94M and
ASTM C1116, and furnish a copy of both the batch ticket and batch delivery ticket information to Sprouts'
Representative.
1.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2
hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to
60 minutes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
FORMWORK

03304 - 7

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.2
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 to support vertical, lateral,
static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such
loads.
Remove all debris and foreign material from the forms, and repair or replace damaged areas, prior to
assembly.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and
position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 and Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete.
1.
Do not provide block outs in integral color concrete for Mechanical, Plumbing, Electrical or other
work.
Provide temporary openings at the base of forms and all other points to facilitate cleaning and inspection
before the concrete is placed. After forms have been cleaned and inspected, close openings to prevent
leakage of grout.
See Architectural drawings for chamfers and reveals. Where none are shown, provide 1/2 vinyl bead in
all exposed angles to form a slightly rounded corner.
Form removal shall be performed in a manner to insure the complete safety and integrity of the structure.
Supports or forms should not be disturbed until the concrete has hardened and acquired sufficient
strength to safely sustain its own weight and any additional load occurring during construction.
1.
Form removal shall conform to the following minimum time schedule:
a.
Wall forms: Not less than three (3) days after placing the concrete.
2.
Refer to Section 3.9 herein for curing procedures when forms are removed in less than seven (7)
days.
EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
B.
3.3
Contractor shall coordinate the necessary trades as required to provide the sleeves, bolts, anchors,
holes, etc., to be built in.
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is
attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1.
Install all bucks, nailing blocks, inserts, and anchors, in the precise position required.
2.
Form all grooves, seats, reglets, etc., as required to receive the material and equipment indicated.
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
B.
3.4
Install, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and per manufacturer's
written instructions. Place sheets in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.
Seal vapor retarder completely around all pipes and conduits. Thoroughly inspect vapor retarder
immediately prior to placing base material (AB) and repair all punctures and tears. All laps shall be 6"
minimum taped full perimeter.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
B.
3.5
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" and ACI 318 for placing reinforcing steel
and Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete.
Welding of reinforcing steel shall comply with the requirements of AWS D1.4, Structural Welding CodesReinforcing Steel for field welding and Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete.
JOINTS
A.
B.
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
Submit proposed locations of all construction joints and control joints, and obtain Architects approval
prior to construction. Pouring of concrete shall end at a control joint saw cut line. Pours shall not end in
highly visible areas. In the event that additional reinforcing is required at some of these joints, labor and

03304 - 8

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.6
materials to install additional reinforcing shall be provided by contractor at no additional cost to the
Owner.
All reinforcing shall be continuous through construction joints and control joints. Provide shear keys as
detailed on the drawings.
At all exterior slabs-on-grade, provide a 1/2 wide expansion joint wherever slabs abut vertical elements
whether indicated on the drawings or not. Provide expansive heavy traffic grade waterproof sealant at all
exterior joints.
Construction Joints/Control joints:
1.
Place constructions joints and control joints as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.
Contractor shall not used colored chalk to indicate saw cut lines.
2.
See Drawings and Exhibit "A" (at the end of this section) for locations of constructions joints and
control joints in slabs-on-grade and in topping pours. Sprouts Market Grid Pattern.
3.
Install all joints so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated, or
as approved by Architect.
4.
Special attention shall be paid by Contractor to joints at re-entrant corners, or at other corners
which may require special joints due to structural stresses, or excessive movement.
5.
At construction joints, Contractor shall place protective visqueen material, in a strip that is 4'-0"
wide onto existing / adjacent concrete surface to prevent spillage / damage to adjacent concrete
when new concrete is poured. Any spillage caused by the new concrete shall be removed from
adjacent surfaces immediately or within 2 hours.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade:
1.
Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated on drawings.
Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness.
2.
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with soft cut saw blades. Cut
1/8 wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage
surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks (as soon as possible after
placement).
Comply with recommendations of ACI 302 for use of joint fillers as applicable to materials, application,
and conditions indicated.
1.
Joints must be clean and dry. All oil, dirt, debris, paint, and any other material that may be a bond
breaker must be removed from the joint surfaces. Follow manufacturers written instructions for
installation of individual materials for each application.
2.
Joints shall be filled with Accent Color A as noted in this section, paragraph 2.6.C.
3.
Any deviation from the Sprouts Market grid pattern shall first be approved by Sprouts
representative, in writing prior to proceeding with the work.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with
vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as
indicated.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
General Project Conditions:

1.
Concrete pour for the Sales Floor area is to be one (1) continuous monolithic floor pour, NO COLD
JOINTS.
2.
Concrete pour shall be coordinated with the work of other trades to allow reasonable time to set
sleeves, inserts and other accessories, which must be in position and inspected prior to concrete
placement.
3.
Inspect excavations and prepared subgrade for suitability for concrete placement. No standing
water, organic material, debris or other deleterious materials shall be present.
4.
Building shall be "dried in", under a watertight roof membrane, and permanent lighting must be
installed and operational, or equivalent temporary lighting must be operational. Provision for
temporary lighting shall first be approved by Sprouts' Representative.

03304 - 9

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
5.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.7
All overhead painting of underside of roof deck, ductwork, conduit, and structural framing shall be
completed prior to placement of the colored concrete. Protective tarps are required for any
overhead painting after floor is poured.
6.
Colored concrete shall be placed as late as possible in the construction schedule.
7.
Five (5) days prior to placement of colored concrete, General Contractor shall provide Sprouts'
Representative with written notification.
Contractor shall comply with the recommendations of ACI-304 for measuring, mixing, transporting, and
placing concrete, except as follows:
1.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with the requirements of ACI-306, Cold Weather Concreting.
2.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with the requirements of ACI-305, Hot Weather Concreting.
Before placing concrete, clean all of the equipment involved. Remove all concrete laitance, loose
materials, rust, mill scale, and other material which may increase the probability of discoloration or
staining of the colored concrete.
Convey the concrete from the mixer to the place of final deposit by methods which will prevent
segregation of aggregate or loss of material.
1.
Place concrete at such a rate that the concrete is at all times plastic, and to insure a practically
continuous flow of concrete.
2.
Concrete not in place 1-1/2 hours after the water has been added at batch plant may be rejected by
the Architect.
3.
Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness.
4.
If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as required.
Place the concrete as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to re-handling or
flowing. Do not deposit concrete that has partially hardened or been re-tempered.
Vapor retarder shall be placed under all interior slabs on grade. Lap all joints in vapor retarder 6. Place
vapor retarder on compacted sub-grade, which shall be prepared per recommendations of the Soils
Report, and then provide minimum 4 base material (AB) over vapor retarder.
Thoroughly compact all concrete by suitable means during the placing, and work around the
reinforcement and embedded items to allow proper placement of concrete into the corners of the forms.
Methods shall be consistent with ACI 301 and Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete.
Do not place concrete during rain unless adequate protection has been provided.
FINISHING (FLATWORK) Floors and slabs
A.
B.
C.
D.
All concrete finishing work shall comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding,
restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Place screeds on legs and pads, rather
than allowing stakes and pins to puncture the vapor retarder.
Contractor shall not use water on trowels or equipment during finishing.
Tolerances for finished slab surfaces shall be per ASTM E1155 with a floor flatness of FF = 50, and a
floor levelness of FL = 35.
Seal interior building slabs where indicated on Drawing finish schedule.
1.
Do not wet concrete surfaces.
2.
Move the concrete into place with square tipped shovels, screed and compact with a light tamp,
except do not tamp topping and slabs not on grade. Saw screed and float surface to bring fines
to the top.
3.
When concrete surface has hardened sufficiently so that excess fines will not be brought to the
surface, trowel the slab with a steel trowel to provide a smooth surface, free of pinholes or other
imperfections. A type of mechanical trowel with rotating blades approved by the Architect may be
used for this operation.
4.
After the surface has hardened sufficiently to ring under a trowel, trowel again with a steel trowel to
a sealed, hardened, burnished surface free of excess concrete pour cuts, sprawls, cracks, warps,
trowel marks, skips, rolled fines, tooling and ridging.

03304 - 10

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
5.
E.
F.
G.
3.8
Use a small radius edger on all edges of exposed work. Use a deep cutting scoring tool to provide
scoring.
6.
Sawcutting of flatwork shall be coordinated with locations shown on the contract documents,
Exhibit A (at the end of this section) and shall occur at the time when concrete has sufficiently
stiffened as to prevent raveling, pulling of aggregate, and to provide equipment support.
7.
Sawcutting shall be a dry method, using a "soff cut". All joints shall be vacuumed with heppa
equipped equipment immediately following the "soff cut" process. No wet cuts with water will be
allowed.
Float Finish:
1.
Consolidate surface of colored concrete with power-driven floats or by hand floating with a highway
grade bull float if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats.
2.
Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
3.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
4.
Apply float finish to surfaces in the locations indicated on the drawings.
Trowel Finish:
1.
After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven
trowel.
2.
Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in
texture and appearance with a mottled / burnished finish.
3.
Finished slab surfaces shall be per ASTM E1155 with a floor flatness of FF = 50 and a floor
levelness of FL= 35 and shall not exceed the requirements of ACI 302.
Concrete Sealing: Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to
provide concrete cure, sealer and hardener as specified herein.
1.
Twenty one (21) days or more after placement of colored concrete finished polishing may begin.
2.
NO WATER shall be allowed to contact colored concrete prior to application of cure, sealer and
hardener.
3.
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
4.
Correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of the Work.
5.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
6.
Apply hardener/sealer using only a certified applicator, in strict accordance with the manufacturers
printed recommendations for integral color concrete.
CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A.
B.
C.

1.
If openings for skylights exist over colored concrete areas, shield concrete from direct sunlight for a
minimum of one (1) week to maintain even curing of colored concrete.
2.
Apply specified curing materials to fresh concrete surfaces after final troweling, when surface water
glaze has disappeared.
3.
Application is to be in strict compliance with manufacturers recommendations, specifically
manufacturers precautions and coverage rates.
4.
or methods.
5.
Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply
with applicable ACI requirements for hot and cold weather protection during curing.
marring as follows:
1.
Do not permit traffic on slabs from time of placement until seven (7) days after application of
hardener / densifier.
2.
Do not permit pedestrian traffic across wet curing covers during the curing period.

03304 - 11

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.9
All hydraulic / gas / diesel powered equipment shall be diapered to protect slabs from the dripping
of oils, acid, rust marks, etc.
4.
Tires and wheels on all lifts and equipment being used on colored concrete shall be white or taped
/ covered to prevent marking of slab.
5.
No construction vehicles, lifts, or conveyance vehicles shall be allowed to park on the slab at any
time, no exceptions.
6.
No structural steel or metal fabrications shall be placed or stored on the slab.
7.
Pipe cutting and /or machines that cut piping, or other materials using water or liquid shall not be
allowed on the slab, at any time, no exceptions.
Protect floor slabs from the dropping of plaster, paint, dirt, and other marring by covering with nonmarking kraft paper or polyethylene plastic sheet, well lapped, and sealed. Maintain covering in good
condition until danger of damage is passed. Do not allow tape to come into contact with floor.
If evaporation rate in paragraph "F" below is exceeded, ACI 305R states that plastic shrinkage cracking
is probable. See manufacturers literature or ACI 305R for estimated moisture-loss chart relating relative
humidity, air and concrete temperature, and wind velocity to rate of evaporation.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations.
Apply according to manufacturers written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or
darbying concrete, but before float finishing. Retarder shall be monomolecular film such as E-con by
L&M Construction Chemicals, and may be applied prior to application of penetrating sealer.
Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, in accordance with Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete, or by
one or a combination of the following methods:
1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven (7) days.
2.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing:
a.
Manufacturer: McTrech Group, Inc, 3502 Diversified Drive, Loganville, GA 30052, Tel.:
(866) 913-8307, www.mctechgroup.com.
b.
Apply after sawcutting with manufacturer recommended roller squeegee.
c.
Apply water to underside of material as it is being installed to help prevent air pockets and
wrinkles, or wet surface of concrete with 1/8" water (minimum).
d.
Overlap seams 3" - 6".
e.
Water ultra cure surface at a rate of 46 gallons per 1600 square feet during installation
process.
f.
Provide additional water as necessary during curing process.
g.
Cure for not less than seven (7) days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing
period using cover material.
After curing, allow sufficient time for drying.
Twenty one (21) days or more after placement of colored concrete, install joint filler per manufacturer's
recommendations and instructions. Mechanical / HVAC systems shall be been in operation for as long
as possible prior to installation of joint filler to minimize adhesion failure.
1.
Joints must be clean and dry. All oil, dirt, debris, paint and any other materials that may be a bond
breaker must be removed from the joint surfaces.
2.
Adjacent surfaces shall be treated / protected from spillover and to facilitate clean up in the case of
any spillover onto adjacent surfaces / area.
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A.
All floors which are not within the tolerances specified in the contract documents shall be corrected by
one of the following methods:
1.
Removal and replacement of the defective slab is the only allowed solution at areas of exposed
concrete. Removal shall be from score to score.
2.
Limited grinding of the surface of the concrete to bring it into compliance with specified tolerances.
This is allowed at concrete slab areas only with Sprouts' Representative's approval.
3.
Refer to Section 02221, Demolition and Repair for cutting and patching, and other work
requirements.

03304 - 12

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.10
A.

Testing and Inspecting:
Concrete.
Concrete tests and inspections shall be per Section 03300 Cast-In-Place

03304 - 13

ADDRESS
CITY, STATE
PROJECT #:
INTEGRAL COLORED CONCRETE PATTERN

EXHIBIT A
Note:
Pattern to be continuous throughout sales area
Use joint filler accent color A
(see specification section 03304 paragraph 2.6.C)
Saw cut 24" x 24" diamonds at all columns - do not extend
control joint cuts into diamonds.

03304 - 14

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 03360 SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES

(RetroPlate)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.2
This Section includes diamond polished concrete finishing system where indicated on the drawings.
1.
Concrete floor substrate grinding and polishing to a specified finish and level of sheen.
2.
Applying sealer, hardener and densifier (RetroPlate 99) and performing grinding and polishing to a
specified finish.
3.
Diamond polished concrete floor finish to be installed by Manufacturer's Certified Applicator.
4.
Specified diamond polished concrete floor finish contributes to "LEED" Certified "Green" Buildings.
Related Work:
1.
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete
2.
Section 03304 Integral Color Concrete
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
1.3
American Society for Testing and Materials:

1.
ASTM C779, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces
2.
ASTM G23-81, Ultraviolet Light and Water Spray
3.
ASTM C805, Impact Strength
4.
ASTM C1028, Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic
Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method; 1996.
American Concrete Institute:
1.
ACI 302. 1R-89, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
Other Test:
1.
Reflectivity
MANUFACTURERS
A.
This specification is based on Advanced Floor Products, Inc. floor finish system, installation and
warrantees. Approved Manufacturer:
1.
Advanced Floor Products, Inc., PO Box 50533, Provo, UT. 84605. Contact: Curtis Turnbull, Tel.:
(888) 942-3144, cell: (801) 358-0249 Email: curtis@retroplatesystem.com.
2.
B.
1.4
Approved applicators:
a.
Advanced Floor Products, Inc., PO Box 50533, Provo, UT. 84605. Contact: Curtis Turnbull,
Tel.: (888) 942-3144, cell: (801) 358-0249 Email: curtis@retroplatesystem.com
b.
Curecrete distribution, Inc.: 1203 West Spring Creek Place, Springville, UT 84663, Contact
Jason Korth Tel: (800) 998-5664, Email: jason.korth@ashfordformula.com
c.
IR&C, Inc, PO Box 219, Logan, UT 84323, Tel.: (801) 866-9896, Fax: (877) 434-8824,
Contact: Kirk Neiwert, Cell: (435) 757-8899, Email: irc_inc@yahoo.com
All approved applicators are to meet the warrantees and are to have certified skilled workmen as
indicated in this specification. The specific materials and installation process may vary with each
manufacturer but the color and finish are to match the specification.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.

Substitutions: No substitutions will be accepted.
UPDATED: October 28, 2013

03360 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
D.
E.
1.5
Product Data:
1.
a.
b.
Manufacturers specifications, technical data sheets and test data, on each product to be
used to show compliance with the specification and drawing requirements.
i.
Sealer / Hardener and Polished Concrete Floor Finish schedule indicating locations
and applications by manufacturer's name and produce number.
ii.
Preparation instructions and recommendations.
iii.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
iv.
Maintenance data to include recommended equipment, cleaning procedures and
chemicals.
c.
in the work.
2.
Submit special concrete finishes manufacturers recommended installation procedures; which when
approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation
procedures used on the work.
3.
Submit special concrete finishes technical data sheet giving descriptive data, curing time, and
application requirements.
4.
Submit special concrete finishes manufacturers Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and other
safety requirements.
5.
Test Reports:
1.
Provide certified test reports, prepared by an independent testing laboratory, confirming
compliance with specified performance criteria.
2.
Samples:
1.
Each floor has its own unique appearance when completed. Manufacturers lab samples are
supplied only to show a smooth surface indicative of the gloss, not the mix color or aggregate size,
color or amount of aggregate exposed. The final appearance of a finished floor cannot be
guaranteed to match a sample due to the natural variations in concrete.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Installer Qualifications:
1.
Use a certified installer and adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary craft.
2.
The special concrete finish manufacturer (Advanced Floor Products) shall certify the applicator.
3.
Applicator shall be familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper
performance of work of this Section. Applicator must have availability of proper equipment to
perform work within scope of this project on a timely basis. Applicator should have successfully
performed a minimum of 6 projects of at least 5,000 SF each.
4.
Provide bids from three (3) certified applicators minimum.
Manufacturers Certification:
1.
Provide letter of certification from Advanced Floor Products stating that installer is certified
applicator of special concrete finishes, and is familiar with proper procedures and installation
requirements required by the manufacturer.
2.
Manufacturer:
a.
RetroPlate 99 System as manufactured by Advanced Floor Products, Inc, PO Box 50533,
Provo, UT, 84605, Tel.: (801) 812-3420.
b.
Contact: Curtis Turnbull, Tel.: (888) 942-3144, Cell: (801) 358-0249 Email:
curtis@retroplatesystem.com

03360 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
D.
1.6
Representative to determine compliance with finish specification. (This inspection shall occur a second
time prior to the installation of floor covering or sealer.)
1.
acceptable to Sprouts' Representative in compliance with, but not limited to, the specifications
contained herein, regarding stains, abrasions, gouging, marring, etc.
2.
3.
4.
installation methods, measurements, and documentation of prerequisites
provide concrete sealer/hardener as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.
1.
NO WATER shall be allowed to contact colored concrete prior to application of penetrating sealer.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Prepare the surface, and apply hardener/sealer using only a certified applicator, in strict
accordance with the manufacturers printed recommendations.
MOCK-UP
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.7
Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship.
Mock-up shall be performed at time if pre-installation meeting. Prepare mock-up for Special Concrete
Floor Finish - Level II Waxed Sheen or Level III Mirror Reflective Sheen specified, to include Joint
Sealant, Crack and Spall repair materials in approved colors; using same materials, tools, equipment,
and procedures intended for actual surface preparation and application. Actual installed Special
Concrete Floor Finish will be determined by approved Mock-ups. Exposure of concrete aggregate is
not permitted or allowed.
Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship and Mock-ups are approved by Architect or
Owner's Representative in writing.
Retain mock-ups to establish intended standards by which Special Concrete Floor Finish system will be
judged. Work Mock-ups into remaining work if deemed practical.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A.
Prior to installation of the special concrete floor finish, a pre-application meeting is to be held on-site to
evaluate the floor and how to proceed with the installation of Special Concrete Floor Finish. Require
attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section shall be at least the Contractor, Owner's
Representative, Certified Applicator and Manufacturer's Representative. Review the following:
1.
Environmental requirements.
2.
Review of the entire floor area to identify areas of repair / concrete to be replaced prior to
installation.
3.
Surface preparation.
4.
Application and polished concrete floor finish.
5.
Field quality control.
6.
Cleaning.
7.
Protection of adjacent surfaces and installed systems.
8.
Scheduling and coordination with other work.

03360 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
9.
1.8
Maintenance.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.9
not permitted.
1.
2.
3.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.10
A.
B.
Environmental Requirements:
1.
Comply with manufacturers written instructions for substrate temperature and moisture content,
ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting special concrete floor
finish.
a.
Concrete must have an average Floor Flatness rating of at least 35.
b.
Concrete must have an average Floor Levelness rating of at least 40.
c.
Concrete must be cured a minimum of 21 days or as directed by the manufacturer before
application of RetroPlate can begin.
2.
Application of RetroPlate shall take place minimum of ten (10) days prior to installation of
equipment, racking, or other in-store accessory thus providing a complete, uninhibited concrete
slab for application.
a.
Close areas to traffic during floor application and after application, for a time period
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
b.
The completed RetroPlated slab will be covered to prevent damage by the other trades
during store completion.
3.
Installing Contractor will be responsible for providing disposal of slurry and finish by products in
compliance with all applicable codes.
WARRANTY
See Division 1 for additional warranty requirements.
RetroPlate 99 Sealer / Hardener: Manufacturer's Standard ten (10) year material warranty and Certified
Applicator's ten (10) year labor warranty for Sealer / Hardener, jointly signed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURERS

A.
Hardening / Sealing Agent

1.
RetroPlate 99 manufactured by Advanced Floor Products, Inc
2.
Performance Criteria:
a.
Abrasion Resistance: ASTM C779 Up to 400% increase in abrasion resistance.

03360 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
b.
c.
B.
C.
Impact Strength: ASTM C805 Up to 21% increase impact strength.

Ultraviolet Light and Water Spray: ASTM G23-81 No adverse effect to ultraviolet and water
spray.
d.
Reflectivity: Up to 30% increase and water spray.
Water: Potable.
Diamond Grinding and Polishing Discs
1.
Only grinding and polishing discs distributed by Advanced Floor Products are to be used by
Certified RetroPlate Applicator only.
2.
Contact: For additional information go to www.retroplatesystem.com or Curtis Turnbull at
RetroPlate for list of Certified Applicators and product questions, Tel.: (888) 942-3144, Email:
Curtis@retroplatesystem.com
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
SURFACE CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
Examine substrate, with Owner Representative present, for conditions affecting performance of finish.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
are corrected.
Verify that base slab meets finish and surface profile requirements in Section 03300 Cast-In-Place
Concrete, Section 03304 "Integral Color Concrete" and Project Conditions above.
Prior to application, verify that floor surfaces are free of construction latents.
Product Variations: RetroPlate
1.
The variegated colors and appearance are unique to each concrete surface and depend on the
chemical composition, mix design, porosity, age, texture and color of the concrete substrate.
Mottling and wide variations in color and intensity may occur. If contaminants remain on the
surface, the penetration of the RetroPlate may be blocked. Concrete from different loads or pours,
and in patched areas, may appear significantly different in color from adjacent areas, when treated
with RetroPlate.
SURFACE PREPARATION OF CONCRETE FLOORS
A.
General:
1.
Remove curing, sealing and coating agents, floor coverings, baseboard, and mastic, oil, breaking
compound residue, any and all surface contaminants, wax and grease by mechanically or
chemically removing to remove all surface contaminants and to assure penetration and adhesion of
products into surface. Always apply test patch to determine that means and methods are
compatible and will not affect the outcome of the concretes appearance or contaminant the special
concrete floor finishes specified herein. Verify compatibility with manufacturer of special concrete
floor finishes.
2.
Remove dust and loose material by brushing, sweeping, vacuuming, and blowing with high
pressure air.
3.
Remove paint residue with solvent/stripper provided the stripper does not have an acidic pH.
4.
Remove tire marks, oils, stains, and surface coatings such as bond breaker, acrylic sealers, etc.
that will affect the appearance of the floor using Curecretes CreteStrip. Dilute and apply per
manufacturers recommendations for stain and sealer removal. Detergent scrub to neutralize.
Follow by two clean water rinses to completely flush. Remove and pick up residue with a scrubber.
5.
Take care not to use chemicals or surface preparation methods that will affect the appearance of
the concrete, sealer application or proper bonding of products specified herein, and damage the
concrete floor or adjacent surfaces. Do not seal in any contaminants.
6.
Power scrub and rinse entire floor surface to thoroughly rinse and remove all CreteStrip, soap
residue, or any contaminants. Squeegee dry.

03360 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.3
Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, dirt, dust, visible staining, coatings that will inhibit
penetrating sealer/hardeners, and all other foreign contaminants.
Protect surrounding and adjacent surfaces in manner recommended by Sealer/Hardener or Special
Concrete Floor Finishes manufacturer. Do not contaminant or damage equipment, furniture or adjacent,
surrounding surfaces with equipment, Sealer/Hardener, or any products specified herein. Any damage
that occurs as a result of poor workmanship shall be replaced and/or repaired by the Certified Applicator
and installers.
Special Concrete Floor Finishes: Polish concrete floor surfaces with power disc machine; sequence with
coarse grit to fine abrasive. Utilize manufacturers recommended equipment and polishing diamonds for
installation of specified floor system using RetroPlate Systems seven step diamond polishing process.
Grind protrusions flush with surface. Patch voids, holes and cracks with recommended cementitious
patching compound such as high compressive strength, refer to Section 03300 or 03304 Integral Color
Concrete, that is compatible with Sealer/Hardener and Polished Concrete Floor Finishes as specified
herein.
Joint Sealant, Crack, and Spall Repair: Clean and repair joints, cracks, and concrete spalls as required
by Owners Representative or Architect. Follow manufacturers latest published instructions for proper
surface preparation and recommended use of each material as specified herein and detailed on
drawings. Refer to Section 03304 for Joint Filler requirements.
APPLICATION
A.
B.
This process is a patented, certified applicator system only. The RetroPlate procedures are considered
confidential. RetroPlate requests strict confidentiality with the following information.
The following RetroPlate process for new construction will be followed as listed below:
1.
A concrete grinding machine must be used. Floors should be started using the diamond Grit Metal
or Resin pad determined by applicator depending on the condition of the slab. The remaining
process follows:
a.
Grind floor using 100 grit resin bonded diamonds.
b.
Scrub and rinse floor with clean water.
c.
d.
Scrub and rinse floor. Apply RetroPlate 99 at 200 SF/gallon, scrubbing product into the floor
and allowing product to soak until turning slick. When it becomes slippery, apply water to
RetroPlate 99, and agitate. RetroPlate densifier must be allowed to dwell on the floor for at
least 60 minutes and be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's written
recommendations.
e.
Scrub and clean water rinse floor to remove any dirt or RetroPlate 99 residue. Vacuum and
squeegee dry. Allow no puddles to remain on the floor. Let the floor dry overnight, after
RetroPlate 99 densifier application prior to proceeding to next step.
f.
g.
Double scrub and rinse until water is clear.
h.
Continue the polishing process.
i.
j.
Scrub and clean water rinse floor.
i.
Improve the sheen and remove swirls in finish by continuing the polishing using 1200
grit resin bonded diamonds for a Level II Waxed Sheen.
ii.
Final sheen to for reflective finish is to be done by continuing the polishing using 1500
grit resin bonded diamonds for a Level III Mirror Reflective Sheen.
k.
Apply 2 coats of RetroGuard at the rate of 1,200 - 1,500 ft/gal. Dilute RetroGuard to a 50-50
mix with water prior to application using low pressure sprayer. Burnish between each coat.
l.
Burnish RetroGaurd with high speed 27 inch propane burnisher equipped with diamond
impregnated Twister Pads, matching final grit of Level II and Level III shine installed.
i.
Burnishing Pads: Twister Diamond Pads by Advanced Floor Systems. Contact Curtis,
Tel.: (888) 942-3144.

03360 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
ii.
2.
After concrete grinding, cut control joints. Clean concrete substrate of dirt, chalk,
markings and saw-cut debris.
Finish Requirements
a.
Start any of the floor finish applications in presence of manufacturers technical
representative.
b.
Sealing, hardening and polishing of concrete surface:
i.
Concrete must be in place a minimum of 21 days or as directed by the manufacturer
before application can begin.
c.
Application is to take place at least 10 days prior to racking and other in-store accessory
installation, thus providing a complete, uninhibited concrete slab for application.
d.
Only a certified applicator shall apply RetroPlate 99 and special concrete finishes as
specified herein. Applicable procedures must be followed as recommended by the product
manufacturer and as required to match approved mock-up.
e.
Achieve waterproofing, hardening, dust-proofing, and abrasion resistance of the surface
without changing the natural appearance of the concrete, except for the color and sheen.
f.
Polish to final sheen level as determined by approved mock-up as specified herein.
g.
Special Concrete Floor Finish: Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and
services necessary to provide concrete sealer/hardener as indicated on the Drawings and as
specified herein.
i.
NO WATER shall be allowed to contact colored concrete prior to application of
penetrating sealer.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Notify Architect or
Owner's Representative in writing if job site conditions are unacceptable.
v.
Prepare the surface, and apply RetroPlate 99 Hardener/Sealer and polish concrete
floor finish using only manufacturer's certified applicator, in strict accordance with the
manufacturers printed recommendations.
(1) Concrete must be in place a minimum of 21 days or as directed by the
manufacturer before application may begin.
(2) Application is to take place at least 10 days prior to racking and other in-store
accessory installation, thus providing a complete uninhibited concrete slab for
application.
(3) Applicable procedures shall be followed as recommended by the product
manufacturer and as required to match the test sample.
(4) Achieve waterproofing, hardening, dust proofing, and abrasion resistance of the
surface while imparting a sheen.
vi.
Apply anti-stain sealer / sealant, RetroGuard for immediate stain protection /
resistance as final sealer as directed by manufacturer and / or Owner's
Representative and protect special concrete finished surfaces as directed and
specified herein.
vii.
Polish to Level III 1500 grit sheen.
h.
Achieve waterproofing, hardening, dust proofing, and abrasion resistance of the surface
while imparting a polished, densified sheen.
i.
Coordinate final burnishing of special concrete floor finishes after final cleaning of the slab
just prior to grand store opening.
j.
Final Clean of the RetroPlate System, special concrete floor finishes, just before Sprouts
Grand Opening: Before you start, pick up and remove all nails, screws, pieces of metal,
rocks, any and all sharp angular objects that could scratch and damage RetroPlate's
polished concrete surface. Apply test samples: Prior to beginning, test a few spots with
water. Allow to puddle for 15 minutes minimum before picking up. If surface turns white, the
RetroGuard is not ready for cleaning. (Notify Owners Representative immediately prior to
proceeding.)

03360 - 7

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
i.
ii.
iii.
3.4
Sweep and remove all surface contaminants. Test your ShopVac, or vacuum and
squeegee, in a corner next to the wall to determine if vacuum brushes or apparatus
will scratch or damage RetroPlate's polished surface. If so, it may be best to use a
soft dust mop to push material into a pile and vacuum each pile working small
sections of concrete. Take extra care not to cause any damage. If test area fails,
contact RetroPlate Systems Manufacturers Representative prior to proceeding.
Clean water mop and rinse until mop water is clear. Once, floor is dry to touch and
surface water has evaporated, and no puddles are on the floor proceed to CreteClean
Plus application.
Follow with CreteClean Plus following Manufacturer's recommended procedures for
mixing 1 ounce per gallon of water (no more) and mopping. After mopping utilizing lint
free mops, follow with soft, flexible rubber squeegees (approx. 20"-24") to pull excess
solution off. Have clean, lint free rags readily available to clean your squeegee. Clean
squeegee before reaching out to pick up missed CreteClean Plus residue. This is
important when reaching out with squeegee to pull off excess CreteClean Plus so you
do not leave product unevenly on the floor. You may also pick up drips with a lint free
mop taking care not to leave streaks. Always test to see what works the best. Do not
leave behind any drips or puddles, scratches, and any streaks that will hinder the
outcome of RetroPlate Systems polished, special concrete floor finishes as specified
herein. Perform one complete cleaning and mopping application in a small test area,
preferably hidden from view, to determine if the procedures are getting the required
results and get approval from the Owner's Representative prior to proceeding. The
above mentioned procedures are guidelines and the actual cleaning methods shall be
determined by the installer as necessary to achieve the required results.
PROTECTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
Protect finished work until fully cured in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and as
specified.
1.
or methods.
2.
marring as follows:
1.
Do not permit traffic on slabs from time of placement until three (3) days after application of
hardener / densifier.
2.
Do not permit pedestrian traffic across wet curing covers during the curing period.
3.
All hydraulic / gas / diesel powered equipment shall be diapered to protect slabs from the dripping
of oils, acid, rust marks, etc.
4.
Tires and wheels on all lifts and equipment being used on colored concrete shall be white or taped
/ covered to prevent marking of slab.
5.
No construction vehicles, lifts, or conveyance vehicles shall be allowed to park on the slab at any
time, no exceptions.
6.
No structural steel or metal fabrications shall be placed or stored on the slab.
7.
Pipe cutting and /or machines that cut piping, or other materials using water or liquid shall not be
allowed on the slab, at any time, no exceptions.
Protect floor slabs from the dropping of plaster, paint, dirt, and other marring by covering with kraft paper
or polyethylene plastic sheet, well lapped, and sealed. Maintain covering in good condition until danger
of damage is passed.
1.
Do not apply tape in direct contact with concrete. Tape applied directly to concrete will cause
etching that cannot be removed without damaging the concrete appearance. Maintain covering in
good condition until danger of damage has passed.

03360 - 8

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.5
POLISHED CONCRETE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

A.
B.
C.
D.
Acidic detergents will etch the surface, dull the shine, and compromise the floor over time. Polished
concrete requires a cleaner with higher than neutral PH. CreteClean+ has higher PH than all leading
concrete cleaners.
Daily maintenance: Dust mop, floor with untreated dust mop daily or as needed. If using mops or
autoscrubber, use proper solution or CreteClean+ detergent to restore the RetroPlate shine. Detergent
scrub, neutralize and thoroughly clean water rinse floor after any chemical spill.
Monthly Maintenance: Follow daily maintenance. For a deeper clean, burnishing with a 27" propane
burnisher equipped with a white burnishing pad or Advanced Floor Products twister pad will achieve a
deeper clean.
Annual Maintenance: Follow daily maintenance. To restore original shine if it has faded, apply
RetroGuard as recommended by Advanced Floor Products. Between each coat, follow by burnishing
with a 27" propane burnisher equipped with a hogs hair burnishing pad or an Advanced Floor Products
twister pad may be used to achieve a deeper shine. The appropriate grit shall be used to match Level II
or Level III Special Concrete Floor Finishes installed.

03360 - 9

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 03363 SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES (ALTERNATIVE)

(DiamondQuest)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.2
This Section includes diamond polished concrete finishing system where indicated on the drawings.
1.
Concrete floor substrate grinding and polishing to a specified finish and level of sheen.
2.
Application of concrete densifier, and polishing with various size grit metal-bonded and resinbonded diamonds to the scheduled specified minimum local and overall gloss values. Diamond
polished concrete floor finish to be installed by Manufacturer's Certified Applicator.
3.
Specified diamond polished concrete floor finish contributes to "LEED" Certified "Green" Buildings.
Related Work:
1.
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete
2.
Section 03304 Integral Color Concrete
REFERENCES
A.
1.3
American Society for Testing and Materials:

1.
ASTM C 1028 Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic
Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method.
2.
ASTM D 523 Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.
3.
NFSA - National Floor Safety Institute; Test Method 101A; current edition.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
This specification is based on QuestMark flooring, a division of CentiMark LTD. finish floor system,
installation and warrantees. Approved Manufacturer:
1.
QuestMark a division of CentiMark Corporation, 12 Grandview Circle, Canonsburg, PA. 15317.
Contact: Jeff Johnson, Tel: (909) 652-9290, Email: jeff.johnson@centimark.com.
2.
Approved applicators:
a.
QuestMark a division of CentiMark Corporation, 12 Grandview Circle, Canonsburg, PA.
15317. Contact: Jeff Johnson, Tel: (909) 652-9290, Email: jeff.johnson@centimark.com.
B.
All approved applicators are to meet the warrantees and are to have certified skilled workmen as
indicated in this specification. The specific materials and installation process may vary with each
manufacturer but the color and finish are to match the specification.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.

Substitutions: No substitutions will be accepted.
Product Data:
1.
a.
b.
Manufacturers specifications, technical data sheets and test data, on each product to be
used to show compliance with the specification and drawing requirements.
i.
Sealer / Hardener and Polished Concrete Floor Finish schedule indicating locations
and applications by manufacturer's name and produce number.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Maintenance data to include recommended equipment, cleaning procedures and
chemicals.
UPDATED: July 26, 2013

03363 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
c.
D.
E.
F.
G.
G.
1.5

in the work.
2.
Submit special concrete finishes manufacturers recommended installation procedures; which when
approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation
procedures used on the work.
3.
Submit special concrete finishes technical data sheet giving descriptive data, curing time, and
application requirements.
4.
Submit special concrete finishes manufacturers Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and other
safety requirements.
5.
Test Reports:
1.
Provide certified test reports, prepared by an independent testing laboratory, confirming
compliance with specified performance criteria.
2.
Samples:
1.
Each floor has its own unique appearance when completed. Manufacturers lab samples are
supplied only to show a smooth surface indicative of the gloss, not the mix color or aggregate size,
color or amount of aggregate exposed. The final appearance of a finished floor cannot be
guaranteed to match a sample due to the natural variations in concrete.
Product Data:
1. Provide manufacturer's equipment product data sheets for:
a.
Planetary grinder polishing equipment
b.
Planetary grinder HEPA dust collection equipment
c.
Hand tool dust collection equipment
e.
High speed propane burnisher
f.
Polyurea pump
g.
Joint cutting saw
2. Manufacturers chemical and product data sheets for:
a.
Specified dye
b.
Liquid reactive surface densifier
c.
Liquid stain guard treatment
d.
Joint filler
e.
Crack and spall repair product
f.
Grout coat, pin hole and small defect surface treatment
Installers Certification:
1. Provide list of 5 projects performed with last three years of similar type, size and complexity
2. Applicator Qualifications: Submit letter of certification from each of the following manufacturers of
products and equipment specified herein, stating that the applicator is a certified applicator of the
system and is familiar with proper procedures and installation methods as required by the
manufacturer. Submit project names, addresses, contacts and phone numbers for each project.
General Contractor is to validate references and polishers capabilities prior to submitting bid to
Sprouts.
a.
Planetary grinder system
b.
Liquid reactive surface densifier and stain guard treatment
c.
Joint filler, crack and spall repair products
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements:

03363 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
1.6
1. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the Americans with Disabilities
Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAGs) for Buildings and Facilities; Final Guidelines, revisions, and
updates for static coefficient of friction for walkway surfaces.
2. Environmental Requirements: Comply with current Federal and local toxicity and air quality
regulations and with Federal requirements on content of lead, mercury, and other heavy metals. Do
not use solvents in floor polish products that contribute to air pollution or impact food quality.
Representative to determine compliance with finish specification. (This inspection shall occur a second
time prior to the installation of floor covering or sealer.)
1.
acceptable to Sprouts' Representative in compliance with, but not limited to, the specifications
contained herein, regarding stains, abrasions, gouging, marring, etc.
2.
3.
4.
installation methods, measurements, and documentation of prerequisites
provide concrete sealer/hardener as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.
1.
NO WATER shall be allowed to contact colored concrete prior to application of penetrating sealer.
2.
3.
4.
a.
Application is to take place at least 10 days prior to racking and other in-store accessory
installation, thus providing a complete uninhibited concrete slab for application.
b.
Applicable procedures shall be followed as recommended by the product manufacturer and
as required to match the test sample.
c.
Achieve waterproofing, hardening, dust proofing, and abrasion resistance of the surface
while imparting a sheen.
MOCK-UP
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.7
Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship.
Mock-up shall be performed at time if pre-installation meeting. Prepare mock-up for Special Concrete
Floor Finish - Level II Waxed Sheen or Level III Mirror Reflective Sheen specified, to include Joint
Sealant, Crack and Spall repair materials in approved colors; using same materials, tools, equipment,
and procedures intended for actual surface preparation and application. Actual installed Special
Concrete Floor Finish will be determined by approved Mock-ups. Exposure of concrete aggregate is
not permitted or allowed.
Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship and Mock-ups are approved by Architect or
Owner's Representative in writing.
Retain mock-ups to establish intended standards by which Special Concrete Floor Finish system will be
judged. Work Mock-ups into remaining work if deemed practical.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A.
Prior to installation of the special concrete floor finish, a pre-application meeting is to be held on-site to
evaluate the floor and how to proceed with the installation of Special Concrete Floor Finish. Require

03363 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section shall be at least the Contractor, Owner's
Representative, Certified Applicator and Manufacturer's Representative. Review the following:
1.
Environmental requirements.
2.
Review of the entire floor area to identify areas of repair / concrete to be replaced prior to
installation.
3.
Surface preparation.
4.
Application and polished concrete floor finish.
5.
Field quality control.
6.
Cleaning.
7.
Protection of adjacent surfaces and installed systems.
8.
Scheduling and coordination with other work.
9.
Maintenance.
1.8

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.9
not permitted.
1.
2.
3.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.10
A.
B.
1.
Comply with manufacturers written instructions for substrate temperature and moisture content,
ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting special concrete floor
finish.
a.
Concrete must have an average Floor Flatness rating of at least 35.
b.
Concrete must have an average Floor Levelness rating of at least 40.
c.
Concrete must be cured a minimum of 21 days minimum (28 day cure is preferred) or as
directed by the manufacturer before application of finish can begin.
2.
Application of finish shall take place minimum of ten (10) days prior to installation of equipment,
racking, or other in-store accessory thus providing a complete, uninhibited concrete slab for
application.
a.
Close areas to traffic during floor application and after application, for a time period
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
b.
The completed finished slab will be covered to prevent damage by the other trades during
store completion.
3.
Installing Contractor will be responsible for providing disposal of slurry and finish by products in
compliance with all applicable codes.
WARRANTY
See Division 1 for additional warranty requirements.
DiamondQuest by prosoco, Consolideck LS.

03363 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT TO BE USED FOR INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
2.2
Floor Grinder:
1.
Machinery manufacturer will be HTC, SASE.
2.
Type: Multi-orbital, planetary-action, opposing-rotational, 3 or 4 diamond-headed floorgrinders.
3.
Weight: 850 pounds or more.
4.
Grinding Pressure: 600 pounds minimum.
Dust Extraction System and pre-separator for grinding/polishing: Heavy-duty industrial HEPA filtration
vacuum system, suitable for extracting and containing large quantities of fine concrete dust (minimum
350 CFM air flow) in conjunction with manufacturer recommended pre-separator:
1.
HTC 86D
2.
Pullman-Ermator T8600
3.
SASE Bull 1250
4.
Approved equal
Diamond Tooling for Coating Removal, Initial Grinding, and Preparing Floor for Polishing
1.
Metal Bonded Diamonds
a.
Grit Size: 40, 80, and 150.
Diamond Tooling for Polishing Concrete:
1.
Resin Bonded, Phenolic Diamonds
a.
Grit Size: Transitional diamond equal to Raptor L3 by VMC, 100, 200, 400, 800 and 1500 or
equivalent.
Grinding / Polishing Pads for Edges
1. Grit Size: 80, 100, 120, 200, 400, 800, 1500 and 3000.
Hand Grinder with dust extraction attachment and pads.
Joint cutting saw with dust extraction attachment
1. Hump Back, by Joe Due
2. Dust Buggy, by US Saws
3. The Mongoose, by Engrave-a-Crete
High speed propane burnisher
1. Minimum 27 inch head generating pad speeds of 1,500 RPM or higher.
Diamond Impregnated Burnisher Pads
1. Twister Diamond Cleaning System Pads, by HTC
2. QuestMark Diamond Pads
Applicator Pads and Equipment
1. Professional Mighty Mop 077, by Quickie
2. 24 Microfiber Wet Room Mop, by Rubbermaid
3. Fas-Trak Chemical Application System, by Fas-Trak Industries
4. HummV II, by Tuffy Systems, Inc.
MATERIALS
A.
Penetrating Hardener/Densifier: Clear liquid reactive lithium-silicate based.

1.
Consolideck LS, by Prosoco.
2.
No Substitutions
B.
Joint Filler
1.
Concrete accessories shall be specified elsewhere in Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete, and as
noted herein.
C.

03363 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
D.
C.
Polyurea Joint Filler: Rapid curing, self-leveling elastomer, installed prior to floor finishing as noted in
Section 03360.
1.
Manufacturer: L&M Construction Chemicals
a.
Materials: "Joint Tite 750" or equal.
b.
Accent Color "A": Custom color to match L.M. Scholfield CS-14 Dark Walnut (Dark Brown).
c.
Contact: Ray Hinesly, Tel.: (602) 329-7035, Cell: (602) 820-8590, Email: rjhinesly@q.com
d.
instructions.
2.
Alternative Manufacturer: Metzger / McGuire Company
a.
Materials: SPAL-PRO RS-88 or equal.
b.
Accent Color "A": Metzger / McGuire "Color Fast" Black Fox.
c.
instructions.
Grout Coat
1. 3380 Grout Coating by Questmark Flooring
2. TX3 by Hi-Tech Systems
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
SURFACE CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
Examine substrate, with Owner Representative present, for conditions affecting performance of finish.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
are corrected.
Verify that base slab meets finish and surface profile requirements in Section 03300 Cast-In-Place
Concrete, Section 03304 "Integral Color Concrete" and Project Conditions above.
Prior to application, verify that floor surfaces are free of construction latents.
Product Variations:
1.
The variegated colors and appearance are unique to each concrete surface and depend on the
chemical composition, mix design, porosity, age, texture and color of the concrete substrate.
Mottling and wide variations in color and intensity may occur. If contaminants remain on the
surface, the penetration of the finish may be blocked. Concrete from different loads or pours, and
in patched areas, may appear significantly different in color from adjacent areas, when treated with
finish material.
SURFACE PREPARATION OF CONCRETE FLOORS
A.
General:
1.
Remove curing, sealing and coating agents, floor coverings, baseboard, and mastic, oil, breaking
compound residue, any and all surface contaminants, wax and grease by mechanically or
chemically removing to remove all surface contaminants and to assure penetration and adhesion of
products into surface. Always apply test patch to determine that means and methods are
compatible and will not affect the outcome of the concretes appearance or contaminant the special
concrete floor finishes specified herein. Verify compatibility with manufacturer of special concrete
floor finishes.
2.
Remove dust and loose material by brushing, sweeping, vacuuming, and blowing with high
pressure air.
3.
Remove paint residue with solvent/stripper provided the stripper does not have an acidic pH.
4.
Remove tire marks, oils, stains, and surface coatings such as bond breaker, acrylic sealers, etc.
that will affect the appearance of the floor. Dilute and apply per manufacturers recommendations

03363 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.3
for stain and sealer removal. Detergent scrub to neutralize. Follow by two clean water rinses to
completely flush. Remove and pick up residue with a scrubber.
5.
Take care not to use chemicals or surface preparation methods that will affect the appearance of
the concrete, sealer application or proper bonding of products specified herein, and damage the
concrete floor or adjacent surfaces. Do not seal in any contaminants.
6.
Power scrub and rinse entire floor surface to thoroughly rinse and remove all soap residue, or any
contaminants. Squeegee dry.
Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, dirt, dust, visible staining, coatings that will inhibit
penetrating sealer/hardeners, and all other foreign contaminants.
Protect surrounding and adjacent surfaces in manner recommended by Sealer/Hardener or Special
Concrete Floor Finishes manufacturer. Do not contaminant or damage equipment, furniture or adjacent,
surrounding surfaces with equipment, Sealer/Hardener, or any products specified herein. Any damage
that occurs as a result of poor workmanship shall be replaced and/or repaired by the Certified Applicator
and installers.
Special Concrete Floor Finishes: A concrete grinding machine must be used. Floors should be started
using the diamond Grit Metal or Resin pad determined by applicator depending on the condition of
the slab. Polish concrete floor surfaces with power disc machine; sequence with coarse grit to fine
abrasive. Utilize manufacturers recommended equipment and polishing diamonds for installation of
specified floor system.
Grind protrusions flush with surface. Patch voids, holes and cracks with recommended cementitious
patching compound such as high compressive strength, refer to Section 03300 or 03304 Integral Color
concrete that is compatible with Sealer/Hardener and Polished Concrete Floor Finishes as specified
herein.
Joint Sealant, Crack, and Spall Repair: Clean and repair joints, cracks, and concrete spalls as required
by Owners Representative or Architect. Follow manufacturers latest published instructions for proper
surface preparation and recommended use of each material as specified herein and detailed on
drawings. Refer to Section 03304 for Joint Filler requirements.
APPLICATION
A.
Install polished concrete floor system in accordance with manufacturers instructions at locations
B.
Aggregate Exposure:
1. Fine Aggregate: Mottled salt-and-pepper aggregate exposure.
C.
Polished Concrete Floor System

1. Open Slab Surface:
a.
As required to provide a uniform final polish or removal of existing floor coatings, begin
grinding with 40 or 80-grit metal bond. Bids shall be based on starting initial cut with 40-grit
metal diamonds. Expose coarse concrete aggregate when required to reach lows spots
within floor surface.
b.
Review condition of floor with Sprouts Project Manager. Obtain approval from Sprouts
Project Manager if large coarse aggregate is required to be exposed to remove existing
coatings, floor underlayment or slab deficiencies. Variations to the precise grinding,
densifying, polishing, dying and stain guard application are anticipated, but must be
discussed and approved in writing by the Sprouts Project Manager prior to executing the
work.
c.
For new concrete floors, open-up concrete by grinding with 80-grit metal-bonded.
d.
Progressive edge grinding will be necessary with of all vertical abutments, including
walls, cases, columns, posts and racking systems.
f.
Joint filler and spall repairs shall be flush with surface after grinding and polishing steps.
Additional passes along curled joints may be necessary to remove joint filler chatter.
2. Remove metal-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with progressively finer metal-bonded

03363 - 7

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.
4.
5.
3.4
diamonds, up to metal bond 150-grit.

Floor Polishing: : Floors should be started using the diamond Grit Metal or Resin pad determined by
applicator depending on the condition of the slab.
a.
Remove transitional resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 100-grit resinbonded
diamonds.
b.
Remove 100-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 200-grit resin bonded
diamonds.
c.
diamonds.
d.
diamonds.
e.
diamonds.
Concrete Densifier
a.
In-between all resin bonded steps, apply concrete densifier per manufacturers
directions.
High speed burnish:
a.
After last application of densifier, burnish surface.
b.
Burnish at a slow movement pace using high speed machine with 1500 or 3000 grit
diamond impregnated pads as required to achieve specified gloss requirements. (For
approved pads see section 2.3 J)
c.
Burnish with several passes. Make each progressive pass at 90 degrees from
previous pass.
d.
Burnishing, pad type, and pace of forward movement shall combine to develop a minimum
floor surface temperature of 91-degrees F directly below the burnishing pad as continuously
measured by the operator during installation.

A.
Inspect completed polished concrete floor system with the Contracting Officer, Contractor, and Installer.
B.
Review procedures with Contracting Officer to correct unacceptable areas of completed polished
concrete floor system.
C.
Specular Gloss/Reflectance, ASTM D 523:

1.
Perform polishing and burnishing work necessary to produce a Specified Overall Gloss Value
(SOGV) 40. Minimum Local Gloss Value (MLGV) 30 as measured using a Horiba IG-320 60
Degree Gloss Checker.
2.
Gloss shall be considered as a quantitative value that expresses the degree of reflection when light
hits the concrete floor surface. Gloss measurements will be taken independent of ambient lighting
and will be taken within a sealed measurement window located beneath the test unit.
3.
Collects 12 readings minimum, throw out low and high measurements and average remaining
measurements. Average shall exceed SOGV. No single measurement shall be less than MLGV.
3.5
PROTECTION
A.
Protect completed polished concrete floor system from damage until Substantial Completion.
1.
Do not allow vehicle and pedestrian traffic on unprotected floor.
2.
Do not allow construction materials, equipment, and tools on unprotected floor.
3.
Prohibit parking of vehicles on concrete slab.
4.
If construction equipment must be used for application, diaper components that might drip oil,
hydraulic fluid, or other liquids.
5.
No tire embedments (rocks, nails, screws, etc.) that will scratch or pit slab surface.
6.
Prohibit pipe cutting using pipe cutting machinery on concrete slab.

03363 - 8

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
7.
8.
9.
10.
Prohibit temporary placement and storage of steel members on concrete slab.

Prohibit acids and acidic detergents from contacting concrete surfaces.
Cover concrete floors with drop cloths or use breathable drop cloths during painting. If paint is
spilled on concrete floor, remove paint immediately.
Protect slab surface from standing moisture for 72 hours to prevent re-emulsification of surface
treatment prior to cure
B.
Immediately remove mortar splatter, spilled liquids, oil, grease, paint, coatings, and other surface
contaminants which could adversely affect completed polished concrete floor system.
C.
Repair damaged areas of completed polished concrete floor system to satisfaction of Contracting Officer.

03363 - 9

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 04220 - ARCHITECTURAL STONE VENEER

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
Architectural Stone Veneer
RELATED SECTIONS
Section 04220 - Unit Masonry Assemblies.
REFERENCES
C.
ASTM C 33 - Concrete Aggregates.
D.
ASTM C 90 - Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.
E.
ASTM C 140 - Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units.
F.
ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement.
G.
ASTM C 270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry.
H.
ASTM C 426 - Linear Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Masonry Units.
I.
ASTM C 494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
J.
ASTM C 666 - Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing.
K.
ASTM C 979 - Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete.
L.
ACI 530 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures
1.4
DEFINITIONS
A.
Architectural Stone Veneer : An architectural stone unit manufactured to copy fine grain texture and color
of natural cut stone. Meets ASTM C 90 requirements.
B.
Dry Cast Concrete Products: Manufactured from zero-slump concrete.
C.
Machine Casting Method: Vibratory compaction by machine of earth-moist, zero-slump concrete against
rigid mold until it is densely compacted.
1.5
A.
SUBMITTALS
Comply with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
04220 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including profiles, cross sections, modular unit
lengths, reinforcement (if required), exposed faces, anchors and anchoring method recommendations (if
required), and annotation of architectural stone units, types and location.
D.
Samples: Submit pieces of manufacturer's architectural stone units that represent general range of
texture and color proposed to be furnished for project.
E.
Test Results:
1.
Submit manufacturer's test results from architectural stone units previously made by manufacturer
using materials from same sources proposed for use in project.
G.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications:
1.
Sufficient plant facilities to provide quality, shapes, quantities, and sizes of architectural stone units
required without delaying progress of the Work.
2.
Minimum of 15 years experience in producing masonry units.
3.
Custom Cast Stone Series and Architectural Masonry Veneer Series are to be manufactured from
a similar mix design to match color and texture.
4.
Manufacturer shall have an internal Quality Assurance Testing Program with certified laboratory
technician(s).
B.
Mock-Ups: Provide full-size architectural stone units for use in construction of mock-ups. Approved
mock-ups shall become the standard for appearance and workmanship for project.
1.
1.7
Mock-ups shall not remain as part of the completed Work. At Architect's direction, demolish mockups and remove debris. See drawings for mock-up requirements
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Delivery:
1.
Deliver architectural stone units secured to shipping pallets and protected from damage and
discoloration.
2.
Provide itemized shipping list.
3.
Number each piece individually, as required, to match shop drawings and schedules.
B.
Storage:
1.
Store architectural stone units and installation materials in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
2.
Store architectural stone units on pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers.
3.
Do not double stack pallets.
4.
Ventilate units under covers to prevent condensation.
5.
Prevent contact with dirt and splashing.
C.
Handling:
1.
Protect architectural stone units, including corners and edges, during storage, handling, and
installation to prevent chipping, cracking, staining, or other damage.
2.
Handle long units at center and both ends simultaneously to prevent cracking.
04220 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.
Do not use pry bars or other equipment in a manner that could damage units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURER
Basis of Design: Reading Rock, Inc., 4600 Devitt Drive, Cincinnati, Ohio 45246
Phone (800) 482-6466 Fax (513) 874-2361
Web Site www.readingrock.com e-mail info@readingrock.com
2.3
ARCHITECTURAL STONE VENEER (ARCHITECTURAL MASONRY VENEER SERIES)
A.
Architectural Stone Veneer: RockCasts Architectural Masonry Veneer Series.
B.
Compliance: ASTM C 90.
C.
Casting Method: Machine.
D.
Texture: Slate.
E.
Color: Creme Buff
F.
Units: As indicated on the drawings.
G.
Test Results:
1.
Compressive Strength, ASTM C 140: Typical RockCasts Architectural Masonry Veneer Series
compressive strength range is 3,000 - 5,000 psi at 28 days.
2.
Absorption, ASTM C 140: Typically less than 6 percent at 28 days.
3.
Linear Shrinkage, ASTM C 426: Maximum .065 percent.
4.
Density, ASTM C 140: Typically greater than 120 pounds per cubic foot.
H.
Curing: Cure in enclosed chamber at 95 percent relative humidity and 95 to 120 degrees F for 12 to 18
hours and yard cure for 350 degree-days.
2.4
ARCHITECTURAL STONE VENEER MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or III. White and/or gray as required to match specified color.
B.
Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33, except for gradation. Granite, quartz, or limestone.
C.
Fine Aggregates: ASTM C 33, except for gradation. Manufactured or natural sands.
D.
Pigments: ASTM C 979, except do not use carbon black pigments. Inorganic iron oxide pigments.
E.
Water Reducing, Retarding, and Accelerating Admixtures: ASTM C 494.
F.
Other admixtures: integral water repellents and other chemicals, for which no ASTM Standard exists,
shall be previously established as suitable for use in concrete by proven field performance or through
laboratory testing.
G.
Water: Potable.
2.5
TEXTURE AND COLOR

04220 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
A.
General: Match texture and color of full-size sample on file with Architect.
B.
Texture of Surfaces Exposed to View:

1.
Fine-grained texture similar to natural stone and architectural stone units.
2.
Approximately equal to approved sample when viewed in direct daylight at 10 feet.
C.
Surface Air Voids:

1.
Size: Maximum 1/32 inch.
2.
Density: Less than 3 occurrences per any 1 square inch.
3.
Viewing Conditions: Not obvious under direct daylight at 10 feet.
D.
Finish:
1.
Minor chipping resulting from shipping and delivery shall not be grounds for rejection of units.
2.
Minor chips shall not be obvious under direct daylight at 20 feet, as determined by Architect.
3.
The occurrence of crazing or efflorescence shall not constitute a cause for rejection.
E.
Color Variation:
1.
Viewing Conditions: Compare in direct daylight at 10 feet, between units of similar age, subjected
to similar weathering conditions.
2.6
MORTAR
A.
Mortar: ASTM C 270, Type N
B.
Mortar Materials: As specified in Section 04200.
2.7
ACCESSORIES
A.
Anchors: Non-corrosive type, sized for conditions. Hot-dip galvanized steel
B.
Sealant: As specified in Section 07900.
C.
Cleaner: Prosoco Sure Klean Custom Masonry Cleaner, Prosoco Sure Klean 600 Detergent Prosoco
Sure Klean Vana Trol, Prosoco Light Duty Cleaner * or EaCo Chem NMD-80. If EaCo Chem NMD-80 is
used follow their application process.
* Note: Aggressive cleaners may remove too much of the concrete surface paste making some of the
color to appear to be stripped. Therefore on darker units such as Onyx, Sante Fe and Brownstown a
less aggressive cleaner such as Prosocos Light Duty Cleaner should be used to maintain color.
2.8
A.
2.9
FABRICATION
Shapes: As indicated on drawings.
TOLERANCES
A.
General: Manufacture architectural stone units within tolerances in accordance with ASTM C 90, unless
otherwise specified.
B.
Length, height, width: Do not deviate by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from approved dimensions.
These requirements do not apply to split faced units.

04220 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.10
PRODUCTION QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Mix Designs: Test new and existing mix designs for applicable compressive strength and absorption
compliance before manufacturing architectural stone units.
B.
Plant Production Testing: Tests to be conducted by certified laboratory testing technicians. Test from
specimens selected at random from plant production in accordance with ASTM C 140.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine construction to receive architectural stone units. Notify Architect if construction is not
acceptable. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
B.
Examine architectural stone units before installation. Do not install unacceptable units.
1.
Waste: For various reasons due to shipping, handling or the manufacturing process, a small
amount of RockCasts Architectural Masonry Veneer Series units may have blemishes or chips and
should be used for field cutting for maximum material utilization. When ordering material, please
allow for waste (approximately 2 to 3%) and saw cutting in your estimate.
2.
All RockCast products are shipped on a pallet and have one unfinished side. Textured units are to
be set with the texture face forward and smooth units are stacked face up on the pallet.
3.
RockCasts Architectural Masonry Veneer Series units have an unfinished back, one finished face,
and approximately 40 to 60% of the units have one smooth finished end. Architectural machine
made split and chiseled faced units can be ordered with a matching finished end upon request.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units in conjunction with masonry, as specified in Section 04810.
B.
Pull units from multiple cubes during installation to minimize variation in color and help with natural
blending.
C.
Cut units using motor-driven masonry saws. Finished ends should be turned to the visible side and the
saw cut turned to the inside of the mortar joint to hide exposed aggregates and saw marks.
D.
Do not use pry bars or other equipment in a manner that could damage units.
E.
Fill dowel holes and anchor slots completely with mortar or non-shrink grout.
F.
Use Type N mortar (ASTM C 270), unless specified otherwise.
G.
Per ACI 530.1, it is not necessary, nor recommended, to wet the units prior to installation.
H.
Set units in full bed of mortar, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
I.
Fill vertical joints with mortar.
J.
Make joints 3/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
K.
Tuck point mortar joints to slight concave profile (unless specified otherwise).

04220 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
L.
Remove excess mortar immediately.
M.
Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
N.
Cover wainscot for protection with plastic, felt paper or other approved products.
O.
Cover freshly installed masonry products as required to assist with the curing process.
P.
Sealant Joints:
1.
As specified in Section 07900.
2.
Prime ends of units, insert properly sized backing rod, and install sealant.
3.
Provide sealant joints at following locations:
a.
Joints at relieving angles.
b.
Control and expansion joints.
c.
As indicated on the drawings.
3.3
A.
3.4
TOLERANCES
Installation Tolerances:
1.
Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 5 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet or more.
2.
Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 5 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 3/8 inch maximum.
3.
Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch or 1/4 of nominal joint width,
whichever is greater.
4.
Variation in Plane Between Adjacent Surfaces: Do not exceed 1/8-inch difference between planes
of adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units.
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed units after mortar is thoroughly set and cured.
B.
Perform test of cleaner on small area of 4 x 4 on each type and color and receive approval by Architect
before full cleaning. Let test area dry 4 to 5 days before inspection. Keep test area for future
comparison.
C.
Clean units by wetting down the surface first, before using the specified cleaner (as specified in Section
2.7.C). Brush on cleaner, let dwell for 2 to 3 minutes. Reapply cleaner, scrub surface with masonry
brush and rinse off thoroughly. Areas with heavy soiling use a wood block or non-metallic scraper.
D.
Apply cleaner to units in accordance with cleaner manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Do not use the following to clean units:

1.
Muriatic acid.
2.
Power washing.
3.
Sandblasting.
4.
Harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage or discolor surfaces.
3.5
REPAIR
A.
Repair chips and other surface damage noticeable when viewed in direct daylight at 20 feet.
B.
Repair with touchup materials provided by manufacturer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Repair methods and results to be approved by Architect.

04220 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.6
A.
3.8
A.
INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

Inspect completed installation in accordance with ACI 530 requirements.
PROTECTION
Protect installed units from splashing, stains, mortar, and other damage.
END OF SECTION

04220 - 7

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821

04220 - 8

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 04810 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of unit masonry assemblies including concrete masonry units
(CMUs), mortar, grout, reinforcement, ties, anchors, lintels, control joints, flashing and sheet metal
materials, insulation, mixing requirements, installation, testing, and finishing.
deliver and install all concrete masonry unit work, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with local
codes and standards, or as specified herein. This work shall include but not be limited to laying masonry
units, grout, mortar, reinforcing, accessories and insulation.
All work shall be coordinated with other sections. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delays.
Related sections:
1.
Section 05500, "Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications"
2.
Section 07200, Miscellaneous Building Insulation
3.
Section 07214, "Foamed in Place Masonry Wall Insulation"
4.
Section 07620, "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"
5.
Section 07920, Caulking, Sealants and Joint Closures
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.3

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Shop Drawings:
1.
For reinforcing steel.
2.
Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
3.
Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of
reinforced walls on drawings.
Mockups: Provide 8'-0" x 8-0" mockups as required by Section 01400.
Samples for review in accordance with Sections 01330 and 01600, for each type and color of masonry
unit, colored mortars, and grouts.
1.
Samples are to be representative of the anticipated color variations in the masonry units.
2.
Submit mortar and grout mix designs furnished by either the supplier or an independent testing
laboratory.
3.
Mortar mix design shall designate material quantities as applicable for field mixing.
indicating compliance with requirements, standards, and type designations within standards.
Include material test reports for masonry units substantiating compliance with requirements. Provide mix
designs for each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
Building Square Footage Certification Plan from surveyor shall be submitted by General Contractor prior
to erection of walls above floor slab elevation. See Division 1, Section 01100, Paragraph 1.16 for Area
Certification Plan requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: It is the intent of this Specification to provide concrete masonry unit work of
Standard quality as defined by the NCMA. Experience in performing work of this section, specializing in
installation of work similar to that required for this project, employing workers who are skilled in this area
of work, and whose projects have a record of successful in-service performance.

04810 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.4
and in the Specifications herein. Concrete masonry units shall be from a single manufacturer, with
uniform texture and color.
Certification: Product certificates signed by manufacturer, certifying that materials comply with specified
Testing: Test mortar and grout in the field as follows:
1.
Laboratory shall make, cure, break and evaluate test specimens.
2.
Specimens for grout shall be made as outlined by governing authorities. Handle specimens for
mortar in accordance with procedures outlined by governing authorities.
3.
Number of tests will be determined by Architect based on total time for construction of masonry
with no less than two (2) tests per week and no less than two (2) tests for each level of masonry
construction (foundation to roof or floor.)
a.
Testing shall be in accordance with the requirements of the local jurisdiction.
4.
See Division 1 for payment provisions for testing.
Tolerances shall conform to ACI 530.1, except as otherwise noted.
Warranty:
1.
2.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.5
Transport and handle all masonry units in such a manner as to prevent chipping and breakage.
Furnish temporary protection for all exposed masonry corners subject to injury.
Deliver all insulating materials in original packages, bearing the name of the manufacturer and brand.
enclosures, and handled by methods which avoid exposure to moisture. Store mortar, grout, and other
moisture-sensitive materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location. Additional requirements
for product delivery, storage and handling are in Section 01600.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Cold Weather Requirements:

1.
Fully protect all masonry units against freezing by a weathertight covering, which will also prevent
accumulation of ice.
a.
Warm units to at least 50 deg F before laying.
b.
When necessary to remove frost or excessive moisture, heat units to a temperature not over
150 deg F.
2.
Do not lay masonry when the temperature of the surrounding atmosphere is below 40 deg F in the
24-hour period after laying, unless adequate protection is provided.
a.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or frost.
b.
Do not build on frozen substrates.
3.
Remove and replace masonry units damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with coldweather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1.
4.
Protect all finished work against freezing for a period of not less than 48 hours by means of
enclosures, artificial heat or other such protective methods as may be required.
04810 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
5.
B.
Carefully cover tops of walls left incomplete at the conclusion of the days work with tarpaulins or
approved roofers felt, securely held in place.
Hot-Weather Requirements:
Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU's)

A.
B.
C.
2.2
Materials: Concrete masonry units shall be manufactured to meet ASTM C90, Grade N requirements for
hollow load bearing concrete masonry units, using lightweight aggregate conforming to ASTM C331, for
either conventional or integral colored units.
1.
Unit moisture content shall not exceed 30% of total absorption.
2.
Units shall be machine made pre-cast concrete units manufactured in accordance with NCMA
Standards.
3.
Units shall have a maximum linear shrinkage not to exceed 0.045 of 1% for a saturated to oven dry
condition.
4.
Units to have a value of Ultimate Compressive Strength equal to 1900 PSI on net area.
5.
Sizes of units to be as indicated on the Drawings.
6.
Provide special shapes (such as bull nose, sill units, pilasters, etc.) where required, and as
indicated on the Drawings. Special shapes may be required for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes,
movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.
7.
All masonry units shall be a minimum of 45 days old prior to delivery to the job site.
8.
Pattern and Texture for Decorative Units:
a.
Standard pattern, standard finish.
b.
Standard pattern, split-face finish.
9.
Pre-faced Concrete Masonry Units: Lightweight concrete units, with smooth resinous facing
complying with ASTM C744.
a.
Size: Manufactured with pre-faced surfaces having 1/16" wide returns of facing to create
1/4" wide mortar joints.
Pre-molded control joint filler for 8 and wider walls shall be one of the following:
1.
Quali-Seal Rubber Control Joint; Hohman and Barnard
2.
Rapid Control Joint; Dur-O-Wal
3.
Block-Tile Control Joint; AA Wire Products Co.
Provide water repellant approved by Architect on all exposed masonry surfaces that do not receive paint,
stucco, or any other overlay.
1.
Application of the water repellant shall not alter the natural texture of the materials.
REINFORCEMENT
A.
Horizontal wall masonry reinforcing shall be fabricated from zinc-coated cold drawn steel wire
conforming to ASTM A82.
1.
Reinforcing shall consist of 2 deformed longitudinal side rods with cross rods butt-welded to side
rods spaced at 16 intervals.
2.
Out to out spacing of side rods shall be approximately 2 less than the nominal thickness of the wall
or wythe.
3.
Rods shall be not less than No. 9 gauge.
4.
Zinc coating shall conform to ASTM A16, Class 1, applied to a weight of not less than 0.4 oz/sq.ft.,
uncoated wire surface.
5.
Furnish joint reinforcement in flat sections 10'-0" to 20'-0" in length.
6.
Use prefabricated or job fabricated corner and tee sections to form continuous reinforcement
around corners and for anchoring abutting walls and partitions.
04810 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
7.
B.
C.
2.3
Re-bar positioners for reinforcing steel shall be AA-239 for vertical steel bars, and AA-238 for
horizontal steel bars, as manufactured by AA Wire Products (a division of Hohmann & Bernard of
Illinois), Chicago, IL.
Reinforcing Bars shall be provided as follows:
1.
Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
2.
ASTM A615, Grade 40 as noted on the drawings only.
3.
ASTM A706 weldable rebar.
Masonry reinforcement fabrication tolerances shall be as follows:
1.
Sheared length: Plus 1, Minus 1.
2.
All other bends: Plus 1, Minus 1.
TIES AND ANCHORS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.4
Materials:
1.
Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A82; with ASTM A153/A153M, Class B-2 coating.
2.
Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel, hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A153/A153M.
3.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.
Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer
but with at least 5/8" cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 deg and extend 2" parallel
to face of veneer.
Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4" wide.
1.
Wire: Fabricate from 1/4" diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal
adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
1.
Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4" diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
2.
Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1" of masonry face, made from
0.188" diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
3.
Connector Section for Concrete: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and
attached to tie section; formed from 0.053" thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.
Partition Top anchors: 0.097" thick metal plate with 3/8" diameter metal rod 6" long welded to plate and
with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from
steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2" wide x 1/4" thick x 24" long, with ends turned up 2" or
with cross pins.
1.
Corrosion Protection: Epoxy coating 0.020" thick.
CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS
A.
B.
2.5
Steel lintels shall be sized as indicated on the Drawings. Minimum bearing 6 at each end.
Weld reinforcing bars to lintel. Stitch weld angles back to back.
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A.
All mortar shall conform to ASTM C270, Type S.

1.
Aggregate for mortar shall conform to ASTM C144, except that no less than 3% or more than 10%
shall pass a No. 100 sieve.
2.
Admixture for mortar shall be a water reducing plasticizing admixture, strearate type water repellent
admixture, introduced at the mixer in a dry powder form.
a.
The material shall give the mortar improved workability, reduce mixing water approximately
20%, a reduction in drying shrinkage, increased bond, reduced permeability, and shall have
minimum bleeding.
b.
The material shall be used at the rate of one pint per 100 lbs of portland cement.
04810 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
c.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.6
The manufacturer, upon request 72 hours in advance, shall make available at no cost, the
services of a qualified full-time filed representative to assure proper use of the admixture.
d.
All mortar on the Project shall incorporate the admixture.
3.
Mortar for concrete unit masonry shall be freshly prepared and uniformly mixed in ratio one part
portland cement, 1/2 part lime, 3-4 parts sand, and shall conform to ASTM C270, Type S.
4.
Mortar mixing: Add sand, cement and mix, then add lime. Mix mortar after all ingredients are
added to mixer for at least five (5) minutes, or until a thoroughly uniform mix is obtained, whichever
period is longer. Adjust consistency of mortar to the satisfaction of the mason, adding as much
water as is compatible with the convenience in using the mortar. If the mortar begins to stiffen from
evaporation of a part of the mixing water, retemper mortar by adding water within basin formed by
mortar, and remixing.
All grout shall conform to ASTM C476, and produce a minimum compressive strength of 2000 PSI at 28
days and determined by the provisions of ASTM C1019.
1.
Materials for grout shall be accurately measured.
a.
When partial batches are mixed, use extreme care in measuring all of the ingredients.
2.
Aggregate for grout shall conform to ASTM D448, coarse aggregate, Size No. 8.
3.
Sand for grout shall conform to ASTM C404, fine aggregate, Size No. 1.
a.
Admixture for grout shall comply with CRD 566-79, Specifications for Grout Fluidifiers.
Application rate shall be 1% by weight of all cementitious material in the mix.
4.
Fine grout shall be composed of one part portland cement, to which may be added 1/10 part
hydrated lime or lime putty, and 2-1/4 to 3 parts sand.
5.
Coarse grout shall be composed of one part portland cement, to which may be added 1/10 part
hydrated lime or lime putty, and 2-1/4 to 3 parts sand, and not more than 2 parts aggregate
(gravel). This grout may only be used in grout spaces in brick masonry 2 or more in horizontal
dimension, and in grout spaces in filled cell construction 4 or more in both horizontal dimensions.
6.
Mix grout after all ingredients are added to mixer.
a.
Mix for a period of at least 5 minutes or until a thoroughly uniform mix has been obtained,
whichever period is longer.
b.
Grout shall have as high a water content as is consistent with placing and workability without
segregation.
7.
All grout shall be stirred or mixed at frequent intervals, to prevent separation of the materials.
Cement for mortar and grout shall be Type II, low alkali portland cement conforming to ASTM C150,
standard gray. All cement shall be from one manufacturer.
Hydrated Lime shall conform to ASTM C207, Type S.
Mortar coloring material shall consist of limeproof inorganic compounds in the proportions recommended
by the manufacturer, but in no case exceeding 15% of the weight of the Portland Cement. At all exposed
locations, color mortar to match the color of the masonry units.
Water shall be potable.
Epoxy Pointing Mortar: ASTM C395, epoxy-resin-based material formulated for use as pointing mortar
for structural-clay tile facing units.
Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C494
/C494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition
indicated.
1.
Acceptable Products:
a.
Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Kick.
b.
Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80.
c.
Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset.
d.
Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Trimix-NCA.
FLASHING MATERIALS
A.
Coordinate/Provide installation of flashing and sheet metal materials as required by Section 07620 of this
Specification and as indicated on the Drawings, including all labor, materials, equipment, and services
necessary to complete the work, and as directed by the Architect.
04810 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.7
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.8
Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up
to 35%; formulated from neoprene urethane or PVC.
Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in
masonry wall. At fire rated walls, provide fire rated joint closures per local codes and Specification
Section 07920 herein. Control joints shall be made from one of the following:
1.
Styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D2000, Designation M2AA-805.
2.
PVC, complying with ASTM D2287, Type PVC-65406.
Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D226, Type I (No. 15
asphalt felt).
Weep/Vent Products: Use the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8" x 1-1/2" x 3-1/2" long.
2.
Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene
copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8" less than depth of outer wythe, in color
selected from manufacturer's standard.
a.
Products:
i.
Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent.
ii.
Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents.
iii.
Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent.
iv.
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent.
v.
Wire-Bond; Cell Vent
INSULATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.9
Foamed in place wall insulation: Refer to specification Section 07214 herein.

Masonry wall loose fill Insulating material shall be either of the following:
1.
Vermiculite loose fill, as manufactured by Zonolite, conforming to ASTM C516, Type II, Grade 4. or
2.
Silicone treated Perlite Loose Fill Insulation, conforming to ASTM C549.
Molded-Polystyrene Insulation Units: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation formed by the expansion of
polystyrene-resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with ASTM C578, Type I. Provide
specially shaped units designed for installing in cores of masonry units.
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C578, Type [IV] [X], closed-cell product extruded with an
integral skin.
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C1289, Type I (aluminum-foil-faced), Class 2 (glass-fiberreinforced).
MASONRY CLEANERS
A.
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout
stains from new masonry without damaging masonry. Use product approved for intended use by cleaner
manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
Do not lay chipped, cracked or otherwise defective units in the wall where exposed to view.
Remove and replace any units that are chipped, cracked, broken or otherwise defective, whether before
or after setting.
Provide proper masonry units for all windows, doors, bond seams, lintels, pilasters, caps, etc., with a
minimum of unit cutting. Where masonry unit cutting is necessary, all cuts shall be neat and regular. Do
all necessary cutting with a power driven carborundum or diamond disc blade saw.
04810 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
3.2
Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required, cut units with motor-driven saws;
provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is
specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.
Wetting of Brick: Concrete masonry units shall be laid dry. Wet brick before laying if initial rate of
absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C67. Allow units to absorb water
so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.
Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:
1.
For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and
control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8" in 10'-0", 1/4" in 20'-0", or 1/2" maximum.
2.
For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level
by more than 1/8" in 10'-0", 1/4" in 20'-0", or 1/2" maximum.
Provide all openings in masonry walls where required or as indicated on the Drawings.
Build in all items as indicated on the Drawings, identified elsewhere in these Specifications, or as
required for a complete job, including but not limited to reinforcing steel, bolts, anchors, nailing block,
door and window frames, pipes, conduits and vents.
Provide temporary bracing for all masonry walls and leave in place until masonry is cured and the roof
diaphragm is secured in place.
High lift grout shall be installed in accordance with applicable codes and standards, and as specified
below.
LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Foundation Preparation:
1.
The foundation on which a reinforced grouted masonry wall will be built must have a clean, smooth
surface with aggregate exposed.
2.
Sand blasting may be necessary if the surface has laitance or other foreign material lodged in the
pores of the foundation surface.
Laying Hollow Cell Masonry Walls:
1.
Provisions as specified under the respective masonry units shall apply to the work specified herein.
Masonry units shall be clean and free from dirt when laid in the wall.
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses
and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-thanhalf-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.
Lay all masonry units in uniform and true courses, level and plumb.
1.
Use full mortar bedding for the first course on the foundation and wherever maximum strength is
required.
2.
Use face shell bedding except where full mortar bedding is required.
3.
Butter vertical head joints well for a thickness equal to the face shell of the unit and push these
joints tight, so that the mortar bonds well to both units.
4.
Solidly fill joints from the face of the unit to the depth of the face shell.
5.
Lay masonry units in the wall to the desired height with joints of uniform thickness.
6.
Lay masonry units in such a way that cracks are not formed at the time the unit is placed in the
wall.
7.
Level, plumb, and straighten before mortar stiffens.
a.
Adjust masonry units to their final position in the wall while the mortar is still soft and plastic
enough to ensure a good bond.
b.
If the position of the unit is shifted after the mortar has stiffened, or bond is broken or cracks
are formed, relay unit in new mortar.
8.
Bond shall be plumb throughout.
Provide 3 courses of solid masonry or grouted hollow masonry units below all steel bearing plates,
beams bearing on masonry walls, or as otherwise required to carry loads onto masonry walls.
Provide solid grout or mortar between webs of masonry face shells for full length of all steel lintels. Lay
face units, soaps, romans, etc., with full head and bed joints.
04810 - 7

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
3.3
Protect masonry against too rapid drying by hosing down thoroughly twice each day for five (5) days,
including Saturday and Sunday, following laying of units. Hosing once each day is sufficient where the
high temperature for the day does not exceed 80 deg F, or where masonry is shaded from direct
sunlight.
Where masonry is scheduled to receive damp proofing, provide parge coat of mortar over all masonry
surfaces. At all inside corners, parge to form cove.
Solid grout all metal door frames in masonry walls as each 2'-0" of masonry is laid.
Where masonry is to enclose conduit or piping, bring it to proper level indicated, and as approved by the
Architect. Do not cover any pipe, conduit chases, or enclosures until advised that work has been
inspected and tested. Build in items specified in this and other Sections of this Specification.
Cold weather requirements: When air temperature is below 40 deg F, provide adequate equipment for
heating the mortar and grout materials. Temperatures of separate materials, including water, shall not
exceed 140 deg F, when placed in the mixer. Maintain mortar and grout between 50 deg F, and 90 deg
F while being used.
Hot weather requirements: Wet mortar board before loading and cover mortar to retard drying when not
being used.
1.
Use all mortar and grout within one hour of initial mixing and use no mortar or grout after it has
begun to set up or after it has become harsh or non-plastic.
Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24" under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and
similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
BONDING
A.
B.
C.
3.4
Bond Pattern shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Where no bond pattern is indicated, lay up wall in a
straight uniform course with regular running bond. Do not use units with less than nominal 4" horizontal
face dimensions at corners or jambs. Open ends shall not be exposed.
Intersecting block bearing walls shall not be tied together in a masonry bond, except at corners.
1.
One wall shall terminate at the face of the other wall with a control joint at that point.
2.
Tie these walls together with a metal tie bar 1/4 x 1-1/4 x 28 long, with a 2 right angle bend at
each end of the bar, and spaced vertically 24 on center.
3.
The bends at the ends of the bars to be embedded in cores filled with mortar or concrete.
4.
At exposed locations, rake out these joints 3/4 deep after the mortar has become quite stiff.
5.
Caulking of these joints is specified elsewhere in these specifications.
Intersecting non-bearing block walls shall be tied with strips of metal lath or 1/4" mesh galvanized
hardware cloth placed across the joint between the two walls.
1.
Place in alternate horizontal block courses.
2.
Rake out and prepare for caulking as specified above.
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.5
Mortar joints shall be straight, clean, and uniform in thickness.

Where masonry units are to receive stucco, plaster, wallboard, or other covering, strike joints flush.
At exposed areas, joints shall be concave tooled as indicated on the Drawings.
Unless otherwise indicated or specified, horizontal and vertical mortar joints shall be a nominal 1/3 thick,
and course vertically to 4 or 8, horizontally to 16.
GROUT
A.
B.
C.
D.
Grout shall be installed in accordance with applicable codes and standards, as indicated on the
Drawings, and as specified herein.
Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1 for cleanouts and for grout placement.
Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist
grout pressure.
Grout locations and maximum pour heights are as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
04810 - 8

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
E.
F.
G.
3.6
Pour no grout unless the masonry wall has been allowed to cure a minimum of three (3) days in hot
weather and five (5) days in cold damp weather.
1.
Grout may be placed by hand bucket, concrete hopper or through a grout pump.
2.
Grout space shall not be wet down prior to placing of grout.
3.
Align cells to be grouted to form unobstructed, continuous vertical spaces within the wall.
4.
Mortar the webs around the cores of all cells to be grouted.
5.
Keep excess mortar from extruding and falling into the grout space. Remove mortar that projects
more than 3/8" into the grout space.
6.
At the foundation, mortar bedding under the first course to be grouted shall be such as to permit
grout to come into direct contact with the foundation or bearing surface.
A grout pour may consist of one or more grout lifts.
1.
Place grout in lifts not exceeding 5'-0" in height.
2.
Use a 3/4" flexible cable vibrator for consolidation of each grout lift immediately after placing.
3.
Between grout pours, a horizontal construction joint shall be formed by stopping all wythes at the
same elevation and with the grout stopping a minimum of 1-1/2" below a mortar joint, except at the
top of the wall.
4.
Where bond beams occur, the grout pour shall be stopped a minimum of 1/2" below the top of the
masonry.
5.
Cleanouts, minimum of 3 x 4, shall be provided at the bottom of all grout pours over 5'-0" in
height.
Use extreme care to prevent any grout or mortar from staining the face of the masonry to be left exposed
or painted.
1.
Grout or mortar which is visible on the face of such masonry shall be immediately removed.
2.
Protect all sills, ledges, offsets, and other projections, from droppings of mortar or grout, and
protect door jambs and corners from damage during construction.
MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Place horizontal reinforcing in first and second bed joints above and below opening, and every 16
vertically throughout remainder of structure.
1.
Continuously reinforce first bed joint immediately above and below openings.
2.
In second bed joint, it shall extend 2'-0" beyond each side of opening.
3.
Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 at splices, and cut and bend at corners.
Place vertical reinforcing and bond beam reinforcing as indicated.
1.
Lap splices in reinforcing not less than 40 bar diameters.
2.
Use re-bar positioners to position reinforcing steel in cells and at all laps in steel bars.
3.
Reinforce all walls vertically as indicated on the Drawings.
4.
Provide vertical reinforcement at all wall ends, corners, intersections and at jambs of openings.
5.
Provide all reinforced bond beams indicated.
6.
Grout barrier below bond beams shall be continuous wire lath.
Space vertical reinforcing in center of grout at center of wall, continuous full height of wall with one #5 at
all corners, intersections, wall ends, jambs, at each side of control joints, and at intervals not to exceed
48 on center unless otherwise noted.
1.
Dowel all vertical reinforcing to foundation with dowels to match vertical wall or column reinforcing.
Reinforcing steel shall be in place and inspected prior to grouting.
1.
Vertical cells to be filled shall have vertical alignment to maintain a continuous cell area.
2.
Fill cells solidly with grout in lifts not to exceed 4'-0" and stop pours 1-1/2 below the top of a course
to form a key at pour points.
3.
Rod grout in vertical spaces immediately after pouring, and again about 5 minutes later.
4.
Grout beams over openings and bond beams in a continuous operation.
5.
Solidly grout in place all bolts, anchors, etc. See this section for high-lift grout requirements.
Install in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior side of walls, 1/2" elsewhere.
Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
04810 - 9

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
G.
H.
3.7
Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
CONTROL JOINTS
A.
3.8
Provide control joints, as indicated on the Drawings and as required by the applicable codes, at all
vertical masonry walls where such walls exceed 40'-0" in length.
1.
In long length of walls, provide joints at a maximum of 30-0o.c. or as indicated.
2.
Do not locate less than 24 from a bearing plate or from a jamb of an opening wider than 48.
3.
Control joints shall be continuous full height of walls.
4.
At bond beams, control joint shall separate both block and grout. However, steel reinforcing shall
be continuous.
5.
Hold control joint fill materials back from finished surfaces.
6.
At fire rated walls, provide fire rated joint closures in accordance with local codes and Section
07920.
MASONRY-CELL INSULATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.9
Plug all holes in the walls through which insulation could escape with permanent materials.
1.
Tightly caulk or otherwise permanently seal electrical outlets, and other apertures for conduits,
pipes, and all other wall openings prior to the installation of the insulation.
Before insulation is poured into the walls, place a temporary statement in each room no more than 20'-0"
o.c. on the interior faces of all walls to be insulated, warning all trades who might subsequently cut into
the wall to use caution to prevent loss of insulation. NOTE: Gummed labels are available from one
processor for this purpose.
At all exterior building unit masonry walls, completely fill ungrouted cells solid with insulating materials.
Pour insulation directly into the wall from the bag or from a hopper placed on the top of the wall. Pours
may be made at any convenient level. The height of any pour shall not exceed 20'-0" or one story height,
whichever is less.
Pour granular insulation into cavities to fill void spaces. Maintain inspection ports to show presence of
insulation at extremities of each pour area. Close the ports after filling has been confirmed. Limit the fall
of insulation to 1 story in height, but not more than 20'-0".
Install molded-polystyrene insulation units into masonry unit cells before laying units.
ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
A.
3.10
A.
Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with
the following:
1.
Provide an open space not less than 1" in width between masonry and structural member, unless
2.
Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to
structure.
3.
Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24" o.c. vertically and 36" o.c. horizontally.
ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS
Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing concrete and masonry backup with seismic masonry-veneer
anchors to comply with the following requirements:
1.
Fasten screw-attached and seismic anchors through sheathing to wall framing and to concrete and
masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners.
2.
Embed tie sections connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide not less
than 1" of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.
3.
Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down.
04810 - 10

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
4.
3.11
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.12
A.
B.
C.
3.13
A.
B.
Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16" o.c. vertically and 32" o.c. horizontally with not
less than 1 anchor for each 3'-6" SF of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12" of openings
and at intervals, not exceeding 36", around perimeter.
FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE AND VENTS

General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other
obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture
flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar
and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing as recommended
by flashing manufacturer.
2.
At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6" into masonry at each end. At heads
and sills, extend flashing 6" at ends and turn up not less than 2" to form end dams.
3.
Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2"
back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge.
4.
Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible
flashing 1/2" back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing
termination.
Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above
embedded flashing and as follows:
1.
Use specified weep/vent products or open head joints to form weep holes.
2.
Space weep holes 24" o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated with loose-fill
insulation.
Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use open head joints to form vents.
1.
Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install through-wall
flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced
masonry elements during construction.
1.
Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated.
Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms
to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
2.
Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to
carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction
Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1.
Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength
to resist grout pressure.
1.
Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum
grout space and maximum pour height.
2.
Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60".
Inspectors: Owner will engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and prepare
reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform inspections.
1.
Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades, sizes, and
locations of reinforcement.
field tests and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports:
04810 - 11

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.14
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.15
A.
Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5,000 SF of wall area or portion thereof.
Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C67.
Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C140.
Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, per ASTM C780. Test mortar for
mortar air content and compressive strength.
Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM C1019.
POINTING AND CLEANING

Point and fill holes and cracks in exposed mortar joints.
1.
Cut out defective mortar joints, refill solidly with mortar, and tool as indicated on the Drawings and
in the Specification herein.
a.
Pre-hydrate mortar for pointing by mixing dry ingredients with only sufficient water to
produce a damp mass of such consistency that it will retain its form when pressed into a ball
with the hands, but will not flow under the trowel.
b.
Allow mortar to stand for a period of not less than one hour, and not more than two (2)
hours, after which, remix with the addition of sufficient water to produce satisfactory
workability.
Pointing mortars shall be identical to adjacent mortar in similar joints, and finish results shall match and
be indistinguishable from original mortar used.
Upon completion of the masonry work, clean all exposed masonry in an approved manner acceptable to
the Architect.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins
and smears before tooling joints.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1.
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison
purposes.
2.
Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner.
3.
Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing
surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
4.
Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20.
5.
Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
6.
Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of
stain on exposed surfaces.
MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated
sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.
1.
Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18" of finished grade.
2.
Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other
masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

04810 - 12

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 04811 FACE BRICK

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specifications apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3
This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:

1.
Face brick
2.
Mortar
3.
Reinforcing
4.
Masonry cleaners
Work in general, includes the following:
1.
Furnishing and installing masonry units, mortar, grout and steel reinforcing.
2.
Building in door frames, lintels, anchors and miscellaneous items as required to receive work of
other Sections.
3.
Furnish scaffolding, hoist and other equipment to complete the masonry as indicated on the
drawings and as specified herein.
See Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for installing anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for
connecting to structural frame.
See Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels installed in unit masonry
assemblies.
See Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in
masonry joints for metal flashing.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.4
Product Data: For each brick unit, accessory, and other manufactured product indicated.
Submit sample of mortar colors and standard gray mortar for approval.
Submit samples of face brick showing shape, dimensions, color and texture. Submit sufficient samples
to identify color range for each type of face brick.
Material Test Reports: For each type of brick unit, mortar, and grout required.
Material Certificates: For each type of brick unit required.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.5
Clay Masonry Units: ASTM C67.

Mortar: For properties per ASTM C270 and UBC Standard 21-16 as applicable.
Grout: For compressive strength per ASTM C1019 and UBC Standard 21-18 as applicable.
Brick Institute of America (BIA) Efflorescence, Prevention and Control Part II, 23A, Rev. (1-00).
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace brick damaged by
frost or by freezing conditions.
Comply with cold-weather construction requirements in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, and Section 2104.3 of the Uniform Building Code where applicable.
Hot-Weather Requirements: When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F (38 deg C), or 90 deg F (32
deg C) with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph (13 km/h), do not spread mortar beds more than 48"
(1200 mm) ahead of masonry. Set brick units within one minute of spreading mortar.
FACE BRICK
04811 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
FACE BRICK
A.
B.
C.
2.2
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the
work include, but are not limited to, the products specified on the drawings.
Brick, General:
1.
Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills and caps
and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces.
2.
Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed
surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.
Face Brick: ASTM C216 UBC Standard 21-1, Grade SW, Type FBS.
1.
Unit Compressive Strength: 3000-psi- (20.7-MPa-) minimum, average net-area compressive
strength.
2.
Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 20 g/30 sq. in. (20 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per
ASTM C67.
3.
Efflorescence: When tested per ASTM C67 and brick is rated "not effloresced."
4.
Surface Coloring: Brick with surface coloring, other than flashed or sand-finished brick, will
withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C67 with no observable difference in the
applied finish when viewed from 10'-0" (3 m).
5.
Size: Manufactured to the following actual dimensions (unless otherwise indicated on drawings):
a.
Size shall be modular 3-5/8" x 7-5/8" x 2-1/4".
MORTAR
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Portland cement, lime and/or prepackaged mortar cements shall be delivered to the site and stored in
unopened bags or other approved containers. These materials shall be stored in dry, weather-tight
sheds or enclosures with elevated floors, which will prevent the inclusion of foreign materials and
damage by water or dampness. Masonry sand shall be delivered and stored in a manner to prevent
inclusion of foreign material herein.
Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207 Type S.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C91 and ASTM C1142.
1.
The mortar cement shall contain Portland cement, hydrated lime, plasticizing admixtures and/or
hydraulic hydrated lime. Mortar cements which contain other materials, including ground
limestone, ground slag, or other cementitious and non-cementitous materials, are not acceptable.
2.
Type S mortar shall be used for all masonry work. Prepackaged mortars shall met the minimum
requirements of:
3.
Instructions for mixing the mortar shall be published and accompany all shipments. The
instructions shall be volumetric measurements and shall be developed to show proper proportions
of sand to one (1) bag of the prepackaged mortar cement with volume of water to produce a flow of
the proper consistency.
4.
The mortar cement shall comply with the following requirements when subjected to 50 cycles of the
freeze-thaw test:
5.
On-the-Job Mortar Cement - Type S Mortar:
6.
Plasticizer per instructions of the manufacturer, the quantity of which is not to exceed 2% by
volume of the cement and lime combination.
Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C144; except for joints less than 1/4" (6.5 mm) thick, use aggregate graded
with 100% passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.
1.
Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone;
of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
FACE BRICK
04811 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Mortar Cement: ASTM C-207 and ASTM C-780.

1.
Products:
a.
National Cement Company, Inc or equal.
Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTMC
494, Type C, and recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition
indicated.
1.
Products:
a.
Euclid Chemical Co.; Accelguard 80.
b.
W.R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Division; Morseled.
c.
Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.; Trimix-NCA.
2.
Admixture: ASTM C260, workability and air entraining admixtures may be used. Admixtures
containing calcium chloride or other ingredients having deleterious effects when in contact with
ferrous metals shall not be permitted.
Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water repellent mortar admixture intended for the use with concrete
masonry units containing integral water repellent by the same manufactured products. Dry block
admixture W.R. Grace & Co. Construction Products Division.
Water: Potable.
Horizontal Joint Reinforcement:
1.
Products:
a.
Dur-O-Wall
b.
Wire Bond
c.
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
d.
Heckmann Building Products
2.
Joint reinforcement shall be hot dip galvanized per ASTM A153, Class B-2, with No. 9 gauge
minimum deformed side rods and No. 9 gauge cross rods complying with ASTM A82. Use heavier
rods if so specified in the drawings. Width of these ladder-type units, except shown otherwise,
shall be manufacturers standard width for wall thickness in which it is to be used.
3.
Reinforcement shall be furnished in flat sections 10 to 20 or more feet in length. Reinforcement
furnished in rolls will not be permitted. Reinforcement shall be lapped not less than 6"; the lap shall
contain at least one cross wire of each piece of reinforcement. Factory formed shapes shall be
provided for corners and intersections.
Ties and Anchors, General:
1.
General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with requirements
for metal and size of this article, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Wire: As follows:
a.
Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A82; with ASTM A153, Class B-2 coating for wire ties
an anchors in exterior walls.
b.
Wire Diameter: 0.1875" (4.8 mm).
3.
Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A36 (ASTM A38M), hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A153,
Class B-1, B-2 or B-3, as applicable to size and form indicated.
4.
Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section a metal anchor
section complying with the following requirements:
a.
Attach with two screws, minimum.
b.
Wire Tie Shape: Rectangular.
c.
Wire Tie Length: As required to extend 1-1/2" (38 mm) into masonry wythe of veneer face.
Cell Vent Weep Hole Ventilator:
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
Dur-O-Wall
b.
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
c.
Heckmann Building Products
2.
Cell Vent Weep Hole Ventilator shall be manufactured from ultraviolet resistant polypropylene and
shall be gray or clear in color. Size shall be 3/8 wide x 2-1/2 high x 3-3/8 long.
FACE BRICK
04811 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.3
BRICK CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
While laying brick, good workmanship and job housekeeping practices shall be used so as to minimize
the need for cleaning the masonry. Protect the base of the wall from mud splashes and mortar
droppings, protect the wall by setting scaffolds so that mortar is not deflected onto the wall, and at the
end of each work day, set the scaffolding boards so that they do not deflect rainfall onto newly laid
masonry.
The bricklaying technique shall be such that mortar does not run down the face of the wall, or smear the
mortar onto the brick face.
After the joints are tooled, brush excess mortar burrs and dust from the face of brick. Do not bag or sack
the wall, but use a bricklayers brush made with medium soft hair.
Final Cleaning- After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed brick by first removing large
particles by hand with wooden scrapers or paddles and non-metallic scrape hoes or chisels before
proceeding as follows:
1.
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for comparison purposes.
2.
Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner.
3.
Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing
thoroughly with clean water. Masonry wall to be pressure washed, not to exceed 1500 psi. Follow
manufacturers instructions. Manufacturers: Pro So Company or Vanitrol.
Split face masonry units must be free of dirt, dust, oil grease, and efflorescence. Efflorescence shall be
removed by dry brushing or by washing with a masonry cleaner followed by through rinsing with water.
Grease and oil shall be removed with solvent or with a lye solution followed be rinsing with water.
Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and
1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. (4 L) of water.
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner:
Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing
mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without
discoloring or damaging brick surfaces. Use product approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer
and manufacturer of brick units being cleaned. Use product prior to installation of aluminum frames.
1.
Products:
a.
Prosoco Inc., Sure Klean No. 600 Detergent.
b.
Prosoco Inc., Sure Klean Vana Trol.
c.
Diedrich Technologies, Inc., 202 New Masonry Detergent.
d.
Diedrich Technologies, Inc., 200 Lime Solvent.
After the walls are cleaned, take necessary precautions to ensure that the other contractors and
subcontractors do not damage or soil the walls. Mud protection around the base of walls shall be left in
place until the final grading work is done.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
Masonry work is to be performed by a masonry contractor under a contract basis. Masonry contractor
shall be member of State Masonry Association in good standing. He is responsible for the performance
of his contract to the General Contractor.
Brick is to be manufactured in one continuous run in order to achieve consistency of color and texture.
The manufacturer must submit to the Owner, certifications of being a quality brick producer for a
minimum period of five (5) years or more. All certifications and masonry submittals are to be approved
by the Owner prior to contract award.
All brick is to be shipped on wooden pallets. Upon delivery to the job site, brick units are to be covered
with 4-mil plastic bags. It is then the responsibility of the purchasing contractor to keep the brick dry and
covered throughout the duration of the masonry work.
At the end of each day, the masonry contractor must cover the freshly laid walls with plastic having an
18 overlap on each side of the wall. The bottom of all walls must also be protected in order to prevent
FACE BRICK
04811 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.2
them from being splashed with mud during a rain. All masonry walls are to remain covered until such
time that permanent caps or the roof system has been attached to the walls.
Furnish scaffolding, hoist and other equipment to complete the masonry as indicated on drawings and as
specified herein.
Cut brick units with motor-driven saws. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing,
unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges
concealed.
Select and arrange units for exposed unit brick to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.
Wetting of Brick: Concrete masonry units shall be laid dry. Wet brick before laying if the initial rate of
absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C67. Allow
units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at the time of laying.
Where brick units are disturbed or must be moved after the mortar has begun to lose its moisture, the
unit and all adjacent mortar shall be removed to reset completely.
LAYING MASONRY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thickness and
for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in bond pattern indicated.
Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections of the
Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
Concrete masonry units shall be dry at time of installation.
All exposed faces of brick shall be solid brick. No exposed brick core holes will be allowed. Joints
adjacent to other materials shall be filled solid with mortar as each course is laid.
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A.
B.
3.4
Lay brick masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill
head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.
All brick joints shall have tooled concave mortar joints, except as otherwise indicated.
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCE
A.
B.
C.
3.5
Variation from plumb:

1.
For lines and surfaces of columns, wall and rises do not exceed 1/4" in 10'-0", 3/8" in a story height
of 20'-0" maximum, nor 1/2" in 40'-0" or more, except for external corners, expansion joints and
other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any story of 20'-0" maximum, nor 1/2" in 40'-0" or
more.
Variation form level:
1.
For grades shown for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous
lines do not exceed 1/4" in any bay or 20'-0" maximum, nor 1/2" in 40'-0" or more.
Units shall be set plumb and true to line, in regular bond and bonded or anchored to adjoining
construction.
MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A.
B.
C.
Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install with a minimum cover of 5/8" (16
mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2" (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6" (150 mm).
Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections.
In concrete masonry of exterior walls, install reinforcing to first and second bed joints (8" apart),
immediately above door lintels and in every second course (16" apart) throughout remainder of masonry
area. In interior partitions install reinforcing in first and second bed joints (8" apart), over door openings,
and in every second course (16" apart) throughout remainder of masonry area.
FACE BRICK
04811 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.6
ANCHORING BRICK
A.
3.7
Anchor brick to concrete masonry back-up as indicated on drawings with ladder-type joint reinforcement
per this section.
LINTELS
A.
3.8
Provide masonry lintels if indicated.

WALL CONTROL JOINTS
A.
3.9
Masonry control joints are to consist of a sealant to match the mortar of the brick.
MASONRY FLASHING
A.
B.
3.10
A.
3.11
A.
Thru-the-wall flashing shall be a 40 mil membrane consisting of 32 mils of pliable, highly-adhesive

rubberized asphalt, completely and integrally bonded to an 8 mil, high density cross-laminated
polyethylene.
Product: Manufactured by W.R. Grace Construction Products (Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing).
Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing
indicated below. Payment for these services will be determined by Division 0 and Division 1.
1.
Testing Frequency: Tests and Evaluations listed in these subparagraphs will be performed during
construction for each 5000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof.
2.
Mortar: Properties will be tested per ASTM C780 UBC Standard 21-16. The test specimen shall
be made in accordance with ASTM C91, Paragraph 18, 19 and 20 and be tested in accordance
with ASMT C91, Paragraphs 22.1 and 22.2 and ASTM C67, Paragraphs 8.1, 8.3 and 8.4.
3.
Grout: Sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C1019 UBC Standard 21-18.
4.
Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be
tested according to ASTM C140.
5.
Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA (National Concrete Masonry
Association) TEK 8-2 applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.
MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
Masonry Waste Disposal: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including broken brick units, waste mortar,
and excess or soil-contaminated sand.
1.
Legally dispose of off Owner's property.
FACE BRICK
04811 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all structural metal framing, including columns, beams, lintels
attached to steel columns, lintels over 200 lbs in weight, masonry bearing plates, connectors, shelf
angles, primer, and grout.
Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to design, fabricate,
deliver, and install all structural metal framing work, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with
local codes and standards, or as specified herein. This work shall include but not be limited to
fabricating, delivering, and erecting structural metal framing, cutting, fitting, welding, cleaning, painting,
providing temporary supports, and removing all temporary steel elements necessary for erection of
structural metal.
1.
Related Sections:
a.
Section 05500, "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels for unit masonry.
b.
Section 07620, "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for furnishing manufactured reglets installed
in masonry joints for metal flashing.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
1.3

Shop Drawings:
1.
For structural metal framing: Base drawings on Construction Documents, and details.
2.
Shop drawings shall clearly show plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work, location, fastening and anchorage details, and materials required.
3.
Submit complete shop fabrication details and erection diagrams. Such shop details and erection
diagrams shall give all pertinent information of construction methods proposed, together with all
required dimensions for the proper fitting for the connection with other work and materials.
4.
Show, in detail, fabrication of all structural metal components included in the Contract.
material test reports, substantiating compliance with requirements.
Mill test reports.
Qualification Data.
Source quality control test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.
Welding: Qualified procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code.
and in the Specifications herein, including but not limited to:
1.
American Institute of Steel Construction
a.
Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Steel for Buildings.
b.
Code of Standard Practice
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.4
c.
Manual of Steel Construction
2.
American Welding Society: Code for Welding in Building Construction AWS D1.0.
3.
Latest edition of each of above governing standards shall apply.
4.
Fabricate in accordance with the AISC Quality Certification Program.
1.
Field tests: Where a welded splice is fabricated in beams or columns, other than those detailed,
the fabricator shall have the splice connection tested using one of the following methods:
a.
magnetic particle
b.
radiographic
c.
ultrasonic
2.
The testing shall be conducted by an independent testing laboratory and a report submitted to the
Architect and Owner Representative.
3.
The costs of this testing shall be borne by the fabricator.
Performance requirements:
1.
Provide assemblies capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions
2.
Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to
be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand ASD-service and LRFD loads
indicated, and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.
3.
Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated, and AISC's "Manual of Steel
Construction, Load and Resistance Factor Design," Volume 2, Part 9.
Warranty:
1.
2.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
not permitted.
Furnish temporary protection for all exposed edges and corners.
Store all steel materials off the ground, and protect materials from corrosion and deterioration. Store
fasteners in a protected location. Clean and lubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before
use.
Protect materials from exposure to harmful weather conditions, and at temperature and humidity
conditions recommended by manufacturer. Some materials may need to be stored in protected
enclosures, and handled by methods which avoid exposure to moisture. Store materials off the ground,
under cover, and in a dry location. Additional requirements for product delivery, storage and handling
are in Section 01600.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
STRUCTURAL STEEL MATERIALS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
2.2
Structural steel shapes, plates and bars shall conform to ASTM A36 (Fy = 36,000 PSI), except A992 ' W'
shapes (Fy=50,000 PSI).
Steel pipe columns shall conform to ASTM A53, Grade B.
Steel tube columns shall conform to ASTM A500, Grade B.
Anchor rods, bolts and nuts and machine bolts shall conform to ASTM A307, unless otherwise indicated.
Welding rods shall conform to AWS A5.0, E70 series, low hydrogen type.
Expansion bolts shall be Hilti anchors with a 360 deg expansion steel wedging action, unless noted
otherwise.
Sections shall be of dimensions, weight and design as indicated, assembled complete at the shop, with
base plates and other detailed materials attached. Furnish 1/4" thick leveling plates at all columns where
base plates are shop fabricated to columns.
All material must be new, of uniform quality, suitable and without defects affecting the strength of service
of the structure.
W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M, ASTM A572/A572M, Grade 50.
Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M, [ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50.
PRIMER
A.
B.
2.3
All metals shall be shop primed per SATM standards unless indicated otherwise.
Metal primer shall conform to FS TT-P-636.
GROUT
A.
2.4
Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout,

noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute
working time.
FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
All workmanship, details of construction, etc., except as otherwise indicated or specified, shall conform
with AISC "Specifications for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings", AISC
"Code of Standard Practice", and applicable building codes.
Shop fabricate and assemble steel to the greatest extent possible prior to delivery to site.
Make connections as indicated or detailed, on the Drawings, and the approved shop and erection
drawings.
Mark materials for field assembly. Arrange fabrication order for most efficient delivery sequence for field
assembly.
All exposed steel shall have smooth, clean surfaces with no identifying trademarks, names, etc.,
exposed to view.
1.
Leave in condition for finish painting.
Machine bolts shall have proper length shanks with no bearing on threaded portions.
Erect all work to the proper lines and levels, plumb and true, and in correct relation to other work.
1.
Secure all parts in a rigid and substantial manner during construction.
Bolted connections shall be as detailed or shall conform to AISC standard bolted connections with
maximum number of 3/4" diameter bolts.
1.
See Framed Beam Connections Table I, II, III, or IV of AISC Manual of Steel Construction.
No slotted holes permitted at steel connections unless approved by Architect.
Where bolt holes in steel members are enlarged to more than 1/16" diameter oversize, provide 3/16" x 21/2" x 2-1/2" plate washers with proper diameter hole.
1.
Weld plate washers to steel members with 1/8" fillet weld all around.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
K.
L.
2.5
Structural Steel: Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic
Design, or Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings", as required.
Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use
automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
WELDING
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.6
Make welds by the electric-arc process.

Welders shall be duly qualified [test passed in the preceding twelve (12) months] for the position in which
they are to weld. Qualifications and specifications for workmanship shall comply with the AWS
requirements "AWS Structural Welding Code-Steel".
Grind all exposed welds smooth.
Where weld size is not indicated, it shall develop full strength of member and connection.
PAINTING - SHOP COAT
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.7
Items of steel and ironwork indicated or specified to be encased in concrete or receive spray fireproofing
shall not be painted.
Clean all steel work by wire brushing, or by other means selected by the fabricator, of loose mill scale,
loose rust, accessible weld slag or, flux deposit, dirt and other foreign matter.
1.
Remove oil and grease deposits by solvent.
After cleaning, give all steel work one coat of metal primer.
1.
Apply primer thoroughly and evenly to dry surfaces, by brush, spray, roller coating, flow coating or
dipping at the selection of the fabricator.
2.
Apply primer at a rate of 350 SF per gallon to provide a wet film of 4.5 mils.
Paint erection marks on painted surfaces.
Touch-up all surfaces where welding, grinding of welds, joints, etc., are done in the field.
Paint shall be thoroughly dry before the members are handled or loaded.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
B.
C.
Comply with testing and inspection requirements of Part 3, Article "Field Quality Control."
Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract
Documents.
In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to
requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
Verify all anchor bolt locations, grouting and elevation of base and setting plates and other material set
by other trades, etc., before commencing work.
Notify the Architect of any work set by others if out of tolerances specified, and do not erect any material
upon such work until it has been corrected satisfactorily.
Starting work implies acceptance of the work of other trades affecting erection of the structural frame.
Final results are the entire responsibility of the Contractor.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.2
ERECTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
3.3
Erect material plumb and level and maintain this condition to completion.
Connect members temporarily and align completely before making permanent connections.
Temporary conditions shall consist of bolts in no less than one-third of the holes and in no case less than
3 bolts in any single connection.
Surfaces in contact shall be thoroughly clean when assembled.
Provide necessary temporary bracing and guying to align the structure properly for permanent
connections, and safely resist all erection, dead load and wind stress.
Take particular care to have the work plumb and level (maximum tolerance 1 to 500 for interior
members, 1 to 1000 for exterior members) before making permanent connections.
1.
Remove bracing and guys only after permanent alignment, and assembly and structure is capable
of completely sustaining design and temporary construction loads.
Examination: Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods,
bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements.
1.
Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges", and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings-Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design, and Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for
Structural Steel Buildings" as applicable.
Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials,
and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and
bearing plates.
1.
Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2.
Weld plate washers to top of base plate.
3.
Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not
remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before
packing with grout.
4.
Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids
remain. Neatly finish exposed surface. Protect grout and allow it to cure. Comply with
manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges."
CONNECTIONS
A.
B.
Machine Bolting:
1.
Fair-up holes with pins to align holes before bolting.
2.
Ream unfair holes to obtain alignment or drill new holes.
3.
Enlargement of holes with drift pins or burning of new holes is not permitted.
4.
Draw bolts up tight after members are aligned and leveled, and set or deform threads to prevent
loosening.
Welding:
1.
Weld by shielded arc method per AWS standard code for arc and gas welding in building
construction.
2.
Submit certification that welders have passed AWS code qualification tests.
3.
Certification must be dated no earlier than three (3) months prior to beginning of project.
4.
Refer to shop drawings for weld size and dimensions.
5.
Close all joints exposed to weathering with continuous 1/8" weather welds.
6.
Grind smooth all exposed welds, but grinding shall not reduce weld strength or required cross
section.
7.
Protect all finish material from damage due to welding.
8.
Remove unsatisfactory welds by chipping or arc air method.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
D.
E.
3.4
Field Painting:
1.
Spot paint all abrasions, field bolts and field welds with same paint used for shop coat.
2.
Remove all temporary guys, bracing and bracing clips and grind flush all burrs remaining, before
painting.
3.
Remove all welding slag, spatter, rust and burnt paint and wire brush clean all welds before touchup.
High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances,
appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.
1.
Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification
for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design, or Load and
Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings" as required for bearing,
adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field
welds.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect
field welds and high-strength bolted connections.
Contractor is responsible for quality control of all materials and workmanship including the workmanship
and materials furnished by subcontractors and suppliers.
Ensure alignments and elevations are correct prior to welding or permanently fastening components
together.
Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification
for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1.
1.
In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the following
inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
a.
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165.
b.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.
Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
c.
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164.
d.
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94.
Remove temporary shoring, bracing, and guy lines.
Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract
Documents.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all structural steel joists, joist girders, joist accessories and
painting.
deliver, and install all structural metal framing work, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with
fabricating, delivering, and erecting structural metal framing, cutting, fitting, welding, cleaning, painting,
providing temporary supports, and removing all temporary steel elements necessary for erection of
structural metal.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.3

Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product indicated.
Shop Drawings: Showing layout, mark, number, type, location, and spacings of joists. Include joining
and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, accessories; splice and connection locations and details; and
attachments to other construction.
1.
Base drawings on Construction Documents, and details.
2.
Shop drawings shall clearly show layout of joists to include mark, type, size, spacing of joists and
bridging, details at all field connections, and materials required.
3.
Submit complete shop fabrication details and erection diagrams. Such shop details and erection
diagrams shall give all pertinent information of construction methods proposed, together with all
required dimensions for the proper fitting for the connection with other work and materials.
4.
Fabrication shall not commence until approval is received from Structural Engineer and Architect.
material test reports, substantiating compliance with requirements.
Mill test reports.
Qualification Data.
Source quality control test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing joists similar to those indicated for this
Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
1.
Manufacturer must be a member of the Steel Joist Institute (SJI) and certified by SJI to
manufacture joists complying with SJI standard specifications and load tables.
1.
Welding: Qualify personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-Steel," and
AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." Qualify procedures per SJI requirements.
All open web steel joists and steel joist girders shall be of the type, size, and spacing as shown in the
drawings and shall comply with the Steel Joist Institute (SJI) "Standard Specifications, Load Tables, and
Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders", latest edition.
STEEL JOISTS
05210 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.4

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
not permitted.
Furnish temporary protection for all exposed edges and corners.
Store all steel materials off the ground, and protect materials from corrosion and deterioration. Store
fasteners in a protected location. Clean and lubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before
use.
Protect materials from exposure to harmful weather conditions, and at temperature and humidity
conditions recommended by manufacturer. Some materials may need to be stored in protected
enclosures, and handled by methods which avoid exposure to moisture. Store materials off the ground,
under cover, and in a dry location. Additional requirements for product delivery, storage and handling
are in Section 01600.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
2.2
Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for chord and web members.
Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307-93, Grade A, carbon-steel, hex-head bolts
and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers; plain, uncoated.
High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbonsteel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers; plain, uncoated.
PRIMER
A.
2.3
All joists, joist girders and bridging members shall be cleaned of foreign matter and loose scale. After
cleaning, these members shall receive one shop coat of gray primer which meets the minimum
performance requirements of one of the following:
1.
The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) 15-68T or,
2.
Federal Specification TT-P-636.
STEEL JOISTS
A.
B.
2.4
Manufacture steel joists according to SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord
members.
Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds, and
methods used in correcting welding work.
JOIST GIRDERS
A.
B.
Manufacture joist girders according to "Standard Specifications for Joist Girders," in SJI's "Specifications,
"with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members.
Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds, and
methods used in correcting welding work.
STEEL JOISTS
05210 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.5
JOIST ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
C.
2.6
Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material,
size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span.
Bridging: Schematically indicated. Detail and fabricate according to SJI's "Specifications." Bridging
shall be located to avoid conflicting with skylights, exhaust fans, and roof top HVAC units.
Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to
complete joist installation.
PAINTING - SHOP COAT
A.
B.
C.
Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and
accessories by hand-tool cleaning or power-tool cleaning per SJI requirements.
Apply 1 shop coat of primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry paint
film not less than 0.5 mil thick.
Touch-Up Painting: After joist installation, field paint bolt heads and nuts and welded areas, abraded or
rusty surfaces on joists and steel supporting members. Wire brush surfaces and clean with solvent
before painting. Use same type paint as used for shop painting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Pre-Erection Survey: Check vertical and horizontal dimensions of all points of support/tie-in, before
erection work proceeds and report discrepancies to Owner. Do not proceed with erection until
corrections have been made, or until compensating adjustments have been agreed upon with Owner.
Also report any other conditions detrimental to proper/timely completion of work.
Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.
Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction
according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in
this Section.
Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with
placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon-steel bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with RCSC's "Allowable Stress Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or
ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements.
Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied.
Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams.
Inspection/Testing: Joists welded in place are subject to inspection/testing. Expense of
removing/replacing any portion of steel joists for testing purposes will be born by Owner if welds are
found to be satisfactory. Replace/remove work found to be defective and provide new acceptable work.
STEEL JOISTS
05210 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK (Roof Deck)

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all metal roof decking assemblies including fabrication of metal
parts, fasteners, accessories, delivery, and installation.
deliver, and install all metal roof deck units, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with local codes
and standards, or as specified herein. This work shall include but not be limited to fabrication of the roof
deck units and miscellaneous steel shapes, welding, fasteners, additional metal reinforcement and
closure pieces, support of other work, cutting and fitting the deck units, accessories, cleaning, priming
and painting.
Some materials identified in the section are National Account items purchased by Owner, received,
stored and installed by General Contractor. Refer to Section 01630 for National Account vendor contact
information.
All work shall be coordinated with other sections. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
1.3

Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Shop drawings shall clearly show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing
channels, pans, cut deck openings, special joints, accessories, and attachments to other
construction. Also show designation, number, type, location and materials required.
2.
Note diaphragm deck welding pattern on shop drawings.
Fabrication shall not commence until approval is received from Owner/Architect.
Product Certificates.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.
No Substitutions on National Account items.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
Steel deck shall be fabricated in accordance with the requirements of Steel Deck Institute (SDI)
Specification, the drawings, and as specified herein.
Panel configurations and method of forming shall be in accordance with SDI Specifications for type and
gauge as indicated on the drawings.
1.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code Sheet Steel."
1.
Sections and properties of metal shall conform to minimum Specifications for the design of "Light
Gauge Cold Formed Steel Structural Members" as published by AISI.
05310 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.4
1.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those
tested for fire resistance per ASTM E119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
2.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
3.
Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
4.
AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to
AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
Testing: As required by industry codes and standards.
Tolerances shall conform to applicable codes and standards, except as otherwise noted.
Warranty:
1.
2.
Warranty Period: Two (2) years commencing on Date of Certificate of Occupancy.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Deliver, store, and handle metal decking and all other materials in such a manner that it will not be
damaged, deformed, or corroded.
Steel deck shall be handled with utmost care to minimize scratching and deformation. Deck units
sustaining irreparable deformation/damage shall be replaced at the discretion of the Owner/Architect.
Exercise special care so as not to damage or overload the decking during the entire construction period.
Do not use metal decking for storage or as a working platform until the sheets have been welded in
position.
Locate materials away from heavy and unnecessary traffic.
If site storage is required, the bundles of deck shall be stored off the ground with one end elevated to
provide drainage, and should be protected against condensation with a ventilated waterproof covering.
Stack decking stored at the site before erection on platforms or pallets, and protect materials from
exposure to harmful weather conditions, and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by
manufacturer.
Some materials may need to be stored in protected enclosures, and handled by methods which avoid
exposure to moisture.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Contractor shall provide products per the National Account vendor. Refer to Section 01630 for vendor
contact information.

05310 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.2
FABRICATION
A.
B.
2.3
General: Fabricate panels to comply with SDI specifications, and as indicated on the drawings.
Form deck units in lengths to span 3 or more support spacings, with flush, telescoped or nested 3" end
laps and interlocking side laps, unless otherwise shown or specified.
STEEL
A.
B.
Steel for Painted Deck: ASTM A611, Grade C.

1.
Depth: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
2.
Gauge: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
3.
Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
4.
Values (minimum):
a.
S per 1'-0" of width - As indicated on Structural Drawings.
b.
I per 1'-0" of width - As indicated on Structural Drawings.
c.
Minimum diaphram shear - As indicated on Structural Drawings.
Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A36, unless otherwise noted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, SDI
requirements, final shop drawings, and as specified herein.
Install deck panels flat, square, and without any warp or deflection.
Cut and fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent
to decking.
Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces as required for strength, and support of other work.
Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for quality, appearance, and methods for welding.
PLACING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.3
Do not start placement of deck units before all supporting members are installed.
Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends bearing on
supporting members and accurately aligned end to end before being permanently fastened.
Lap ends not less than 2".
Do not stretch or contract the side-lap interlocks.
Do not place deck units on concrete supporting structure until concrete has cured properly and is dry.
Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to prevent overloading
of structural members.
Do not use deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured in position.
FASTENING
A.
B.
C.
Permanently fasten deck units to steel supporting members by welds at end laps and at intermediate
supports as indicated.
Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal-arc welding, the appearance
and quality of welds, and the methods used in correcting welding work.
Lock side laps between adjacent deck units at intervals not exceeding 12" O.C. by welding, screws,
button punching, or as shown on structural documents.

05310 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.4
CUTTING AND FITTING

A.
3.5
Cut and fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking.
Provide neat, square, and trim cuts.
REINFORCEMENT AT OPENINGS
A.
3.6
Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as required for strength, continuity of decking
and support of other work, unless otherwise shown.
TOUCH-UP PAINTING
A.
B.
C.
3.7
After decking installation, wire brush, clean and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on the top and
bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members.
Touch-up galvanized surfaces with galvanized repair paint applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
In areas where touch-up painted surfaces are to be exposed, apply the paint to blend into the adjacent
surfaces in a manner that will minimize visual discontinuity in the coatings.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.8
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
Field welds will be subject to inspection.
Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected
work with specified requirements.
REPAIRS
A.
B.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with
galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on all surfaces of primepainted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint.

05310 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 05400 - HEAVY GAUGE FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all heavy gauge (structural steel stud) framing
assemblies including studs, braces, channels, sills, headers, load bearing wall framing, roof framing,
miscellaneous metal parts, primer, paint, and tests.
deliver, and install all heavy gauge framing assembly work, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance
with local codes and standards, or as specified herein. This work shall include but not be limited to
design and fabrication of structural steel studs and associated metal shapes, welding, reinforcement,
support of other work, cutting, fitting, testing, cleaning and painting.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
1.3

Product Data: For each type of structural steel material, accessory, and product indicated.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Shop drawings shall clearly show layout and types of structural steel shapes, designation,
fabrication, quantity, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, type, location, and materials required.
2.
Fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.
Mill and product test reports (or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet
complies with requirements.)
Qualification Data.
Research/evaluation reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.
For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
2.
Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design."
3.
Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."
4.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code Sheet Steel."
Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within
deflection limits and under conditions indicated.
HEAVY GAUGE FRAMING
05400 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
1.4

Warranty:
1.
2.
3.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to
that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E119 by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of
Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General
Provisions."
1.
Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design."
2.
Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturer offering products that may be incorporated into
the work include the following:
1.
Dietrich Industries, Inc.
2.
Unimast, Inc.
3.
Clark Steel Framing Systems
4.
Approved equal.
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Steel sheet shall be fabricated as required by ASTM A1003, Steel Sheet for Cold Formed Framing
Members.
Fabricate steel framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A1003, structural grade, Type H, metallic
coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members, unless otherwise indicated.
Steel shapes and clips: ASTM A36, zinc coated by hot dip process according to ASTM A123.
Structural steel studs shall be sizes as indicated on the Drawings and as Specified herein.
Manufacturers standard C-shaped studs of web depths indicated, punched with stiffened flanges and as
follows:
HEAVY GAUGE FRAMING
05400 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.
2.
3.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
2.3
Steel for load bearing steel studs, runners, and bracing or bridging shall conform to ASTM C955.
Steel for non structural steel framing studs shall conform to ASTM C645.
Studs shall be type as indicated on the drawings, and as manufactured by Metal Stud
Manufacturers Association.
Steel track: Manufacturers standard U-shaped steel track, of web depth indicated.
All structural stud components shall have a shop coat of rust resisting paint conforming to FS TT-P-636.
Anchor bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36 threaded carbon steel hex head bolts with carbon steel nuts and
flat hardened washers, zinc coated by hot dip process according to ASTM A153.
Expansion anchors fabricated from corrosion resistant material capable of handling a load five (5) times
design load, per ASTM E488.
Mechanical fasteners: ASTM C1513, corrosion resistant coated.
Braces shall be 16 gauge with minimum flange width of 1-5/16".
Provide jack studs or channels between bottom track and sill openings:
1.
Between opening and door lintel or headers and top track;
2.
Elsewhere as required to provide adequate support for collateral wall materials.
Provide sills and headers as required for all exterior wall openings.
FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
Saw cut all structural stud components squarely, or on an angle as in bracing, to fit squarely against
abutting members.
1.
Hold members firmly in position until properly fastened.
Attach similar components by welding.
Attach dissimilar stud components by welding, screw attachment, or bolting.
Wire tying will not be permitted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Install cold formed metal framing according to AISIs Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing-General
Provisions, and manufacturers written instructions, unless more stringent requirements are indicated on
the drawings or the specifications herein.
Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections
securely fastened.
1.
Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non plumb walls or warped
surfaces and similar configurations.
2.
Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.
3.
Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure
as indicated.
Install framing members in one-piece lengths.
Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to
those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire
integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secure.
Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame
both sides of joints.
Securely anchor track to floor with 1/2" diameter bolts, at 48" o.c. maximum, or with 1/8" power driven
inserts at 8" o.c. maximum with minimum 2 bolts or inserts per any track sections; provide top track.
Seat studs squarely in the track with the stud web and flanges abutting the track web, plumb or align,
and securely attach to the flanges or web of both the upper and lower tracks by welding flanges to track;
or by 4 sheet metal screws, bolts or rivets, 2 at top and 2 at bottom.
Space studs on centers indicated but in no instance any further than 16" o.c.
Triple up studs with 2 studs full height at all jambs.
HEAVY GAUGE FRAMING
05400 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
3.2
Use butt welds or splices at all but joints in track.

Splices in studs will not be permitted.
All welds shall be fillet, plug, butt or seam.
Provide cold rolled steel channel bridging minimum 1-1/2" deep with 9/16" flange 48" o.c. vertically,
welded at each stud.
Secure headers or lintels by welding, bolts, or rivets as required.
Furnish and install 1/8" x 3" steel strap bracing as indicated on the Drawings.
PAINT
A.
3.3
Touch-up field abrasions and welds in the field after erection using the same materials as shop coat
paint.
PREPARATION
A.
B.
3.4
Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of
foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting
concrete or masonry construction.
Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation
wall or slab at stud or joist locations.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
3.5
Install insulation, specified in Division 7 Section "Miscellaneous Building Insulation," in built-up exterior
framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are
inaccessible on completion of framing work.
Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard
punched openings.
Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum
allowable tolerance variation of 1/8" in 10'-0" and as follows:
1.
Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8" from plan location. Cumulative
error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.6
Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests
and inspections and prepare test reports.
Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.
Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
B.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed coldformed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer
that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
HEAVY GAUGE FRAMING
05400 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all miscellaneous metals and related items.
1.
The extent of miscellaneous metal work is shown on the drawings and includes items fabricated
from iron and steel, shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipe and castings which are not a part of the
structural steel or other metal systems in other sections of these specifications.
2.
These include, but are not limited to the following: Carpenter's ironwork, steel gratings and frames,
steel pipe bollards and guard posts, ladders, ladder cages, platforms, loose bearing plates,
miscellaneous framing and supports, inserts and anchoring devices, miscellaneous steel trim, steel
angle corner guards, steel channel door frames, steel dock angles, steel angle jambs, steel O.H.
door supports, and handrails / guardrails.
deliver, and install all miscellaneous metal items necessary to provide complete assemblies, as indicated
on the Drawings, in accordance with local codes and standards, or as specified herein. This work shall
include but not be limited to fabrication, welding, cutting, fitting, drilling, punching, grout, testing,
reinforcement, support of other work, making and submitting templates for anchors and bolts, cleaning
and painting.
All work shall be coordinated with other sections. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 07720, Roof Accessories
2.
Section 09911, Painting."
Inserts and Anchorages:
1.
Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or built into masonry for the
installation of miscellaneous metal work.
2.
Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage
devices including bolts.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.

Product Data: For each type of material, accessory, and product indicated.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Clearly show layout and types of fabricated shapes, designation, quantity, spacings, sizes,
thicknesses, type, location, and materials required.
2.
Indicate fastening, anchorage type, and other details of installation, accessory items, and
mechanical fasteners if applicable.
3.
Plans and elevations at not less than 1" to 1'-0" scale, and include details of sections and
connections at not less than 3" to 1'-0" scale.
4.
devices.
5.
Fabrication and erection of all assemblies of miscellaneous metal work, which are not completely
shown by the manufacturer's data sheets.
Mill and product test reports.
Qualification Data.
05500 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
J.
K.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
1.4
Comply with the provisions of the applicable codes, standards and specifications, including but not
limited to those indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
1.
AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings,"
including "Commentary of the AISC Specifications".
2.
AISI "Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members".
3.
AWS "Structural Welding Code - Steel".
4.
ASTM A6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piping and
Bars for Structural Use".
5.
ASTM F840, Standard Specification for Ladders, Fixed, Vertical, Steel.
6.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Requirements
7.
State/local Building Codes
8.
Life Safety Code (NFPA 101)
1.
Qualification for welding work. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance
with AWS "Standard Qualifications Procedure."
Structural Performance: Provide assemblies capable of withstanding design loads within limits and
under conditions indicated.
Testing: As required by industry codes and standards.
Field Measurements: Field measurements shall be taken prior to preparation of shop drawings and
fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of the work. However, do not delay job progress;
allow for trimming and fitting wherever the taking of field measurements before.
Warranty:
1.
2.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

Furnish temporary protection for all exposed products and materials.
05500 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
moisture-sensitive materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location. Addition requirements for
product delivery, storage and handling are in Section 01600.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
2.2
Metal surfaces, general:

1.
For the fabrication of miscellaneous metal work which will be exposed to view, use only materials
which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled
trade names and roughness.
2.
Remove such blemishes by grinding or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and
application of surface finishes including zinc coatings.
Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36, or ASTM A572 Grade 50, ASTM A992.
Steel Tubing: (Hot formed, welded or seamless): ASTM A501.
Hot-rolled Carbon Steel Bars: ASTM A108, Grade as selected by fabricator.
Hot-rolled Carbon Steel Sheets and Strips: ASTM A568 and ASTM A1011; pickled and oiled.
Cold-rolled Carbon Steel Sheets: ASTM A1008.
Galvanized Carbon Steel Sheets: ASTM A653, with zinc coating.
Cold-drawn Steel Tubing: ASTM A512, sunk drawn, butt welded, cold-finished and stress-relieved.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, type as selected; Grade A.
1.
Black finish unless galvanizing is required.
2.
Standard weight, Schedule 40, unless otherwise shown or specified.
Non-shrink, nonmetallic grout per ASTM C1107.
FABRICATION: GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Preassemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural
value of joined pieces.
Workmanship:
1.
Use materials of the size and thickness shown, or if not shown, of the required sized and thickness
to produce adequate strength and durability of the finished product for the intended use.
2.
Work to the dimensions of fabrication and support.
3.
Use the type of materials shown or specified for the various components of work.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges.
Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32" unless otherwise shown.
Form bent-metal corners to the smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing the work.
Weld corners and seam continuously and in accordance with the recommendations of AWS.
Grind exposed welds smooth and flush, to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. Remove burrs and
sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and
develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints which are flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
wherever possible.
Use exposed fasteners of the type shown, or if not shown, use Phillips flat head (countersunk) screws or
bolts.
Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure and the progress schedule.
Fabricate as required to provide adequate support for the intended use of the work.
Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work cleanly and accurately.
Use hot-rolled steel bars for work fabricated from bar stock, unless work is indicated to be fabricated
from cold-rolled or cold-finished stock.

05500 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
M.
N.
2.3
Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.
Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to
receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.
Loose Steel Lintels: Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for
openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
LADDERS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.4
Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacing, details and anchorages as required.
Comply with the requirements of ANSI A14.3, except as otherwise shown.
Elevator pit ladders shall be provided in compliance with ASME A17.1.
Provide 1/2" x 2-1/2" continuous structural steel flat bar side rails with eased edges, spaced 18" apart.
Provide 3/4" diameter solid structural steel bar rungs, spaced 12" o.c. maximum, with non-slip surface.
1.
Fit rungs into punched holes in centerline of side rails. Plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail
faces.
2.
Provide non-slip surfaces on the top of each rung, by coating the rung with aluminum oxide
granules set in epoxy resin adhesive.
Alternate Bar rungs: McNichols grating rungs, spaced 12" o.c.
ANCHORS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.5
Thread-type concrete inserts. Galvanized ferrous castings, internally threaded to receive 3/4" diameter
machine bolts; either malleable iron complying with ASTM A47, or cast steel complying with ASTM A27;
hot-dip galvanized in compliance with ASTM A153.
Wedge-type Concrete Inserts: Galvanized box-type ferrous castings, designed to accept 3/4" diameter
bolts having special wedge-shaped heads, either malleable iron complying with ASTM A47 or cast steel
complying with ASTM A27; hot-dipped galvanized in compliance with ASTM A153.
Provide carbon steel bolts having special wedge-shaped heads, nuts, washers and shims; all galvanized
in compliance with ASTM A153, as required to complete the work.
1.
Slotted-type Concrete Inserts: Galvanized 1/8" thick pressed steel plate complying with ASTM
A283.
2.
Box-type welded construction with slot designed to receive 3/4" diameter square head bolt and with
knockout cover.
3.
Hot-dip galvanized in compliance with ASTM A123.
Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shield; FS FF-S-325.
Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type; FS FF-B-588, type, class and style as required.
FASTENERS
A.
2.6
General: Provide galvanized, zinc-coated fasteners complying with ASTM A153 for exterior use or
where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required for the installation
of miscellaneous metal items. Provide bolts, nuts, washers, and shims as needed.
1.
Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307, Grade A, regular hexagon head.
2.
Bolts, hexagon and square: ANSI B-18.2.1.
3.
Bolts, round head: ANSI B-18.5.
4.
Lag Bolts: FS FF-B-561, square head type.
5.
Wood Screws: ANSI B-18.6.1, flat head carbon steel.
6.
Plain Washers: FS FF-W-84, helical spring type carbon steel.
PAINT
A.
Shop paint miscellaneous metal work, except those members or positions of members to be embedded
in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges to be field welded, and galvanized surfaces, unless
05500 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.7
Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before the shop coat of paint is applied.
1.
Clean off heavy rust and loose mill scale in accordance with SSPC SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning",
SSPC SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning, or SSPC SP-7 "Brush-off Blast Cleaning".
2.
Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning".
Apply one shop coat of metal primer paint to fabricated metal items, except apply 2 coats of paint to
surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection.
Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on metal primer paint, applied in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions, and at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2 mils for each
coat.
Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and all exposed surfaces.
Metal Primer Paint: FS TT-P-636.
GALVANIZING
A.
B.
Provide a zinc coating for those items shown or specified to be galvanized, using the hot-dip process
after fabrications.
1.
ASTM A153 for galvanizing of iron and steel hardware.
2.
ASTM A123 for galvanizing of rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars, and strip 1/8"
thick and heavier and for galvanizing of assembly projects.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for re-galvanizing welds in galvanized steel,
complying with military specifications MIL-P-21035 (Ships).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications.
Set metal fabrications accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true.
1.
Fit exposed connections accurately together.
2.
Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded.
3.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
4.
Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to
in-place construction.
5.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, shims, or leveling nuts.
1.
After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack solidly
with non shrink, nonmetallic grout.
Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection.
1.
Painted Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch up paint
with the same material as used for shop painting.
2.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS
A.
Carpentrys Iron Work:

1.
Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other
miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for
anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures.
a.
Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware are specified in Division 6 Sections.
2.
Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required.
05500 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
a.
3.3
Furnish malleable iron washers for head and nuts which bear on wood structural
connections; elsewhere furnish steel washers.
LADDERS
A.
B.
C.
3.4
Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more than 6'-0" o.c.
1.
Use welded or bolted steel brackets, designed for adequate support and anchorage, and to hold
the ladder 6" clear of the wall surface and other obstructing construction.
2.
Extend rails 42" above top rung, and return rails to wall or structure unless other secure handholds
are provided.
3.
If the adjacent structure does not extend above the top rung, gooseneck the extended rails back to
the structure to provide secure ladder access.
Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by welding.
Factory Paint or galvanize exterior ladders and safety cages per Section 2.5 or 2.6 as required herein.
BOLLARDS
A.
B.
3.5
Anchor bollards to existing construction as indicated on the drawings.

1.
Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular
space around bollard solidly with non shrink, nonmetallic grout.
2.
Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for
consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.
Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.
LOOSE BEARING PLATES
A.
B.
3.6
Provide loose bearing plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free
from warps or twists, and of required thickness and bearing area.
Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required.
LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A.
B.
C.
3.7
Provide loose structural steel shape lintels for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions as
shown.
Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit.
Provide not less than 4" bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise shown.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A.
B.
C.
Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of the structural steel framework
as required to complete the work.
Fabricate miscellaneous units to the sizes, shapes and profiles shown, or if not shown, of the required
dimensions to receive adjacent grating, plates, doors or other work to be retained by the framing.
1.
Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars unless otherwise indicated on the
drawings. Use all welded construction, mitered corners, welded brackets; splice plates, and a
minimum number of joints for field connection.
2.
Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items to be anchored to the work.
Equip units with integrally welded anchor straps for casting into concrete or building into masonry
wherever possible.
1.
Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is poured.
2.
Space anchors 24" o.c., and provide minimum anchor units of 1-1/4" x 1/3 x 8" steel straps unless
otherwise indicated on the drawings.

05500 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.8
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.9
Provide shapes and sizes as required for the profiles shown.

Fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and
smooth exposed edges unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
Use concealed field splices wherever possible.
Provide cutouts, fittings and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with
other work.
SHELF ANGLES
A.
B.
C.
3.10
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.11
A.
B.
C.
D.
Provide structural steel shelf angles of sizes shown for attachment to concrete framing.
Provide slotted holes to receive 3/4" bolts, spaced not more than 6" from ends and not more than 24"
o.c., unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, for attachment of shelf angles to cast-inplace concrete.
SECURITY BARS
Provide security bars as indicated on the Drawings, and at all openings through the roof 12" or greater in
any direction, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein.
Fabricate units from 5/8" diameter steel bar 6" on center each way.
All joints and intersections shall be welded.
Provide steel angle frame to suit opening and bolt securely to opening with 3/4" diameter bolts at 24"
centers.
Deform or weld threads to prevent removal of bolts, except for removable hatch above evaporative
condenser and roof access hatch.
GRATINGS
Grating in utility trench shall be McNichols Co. (or equal) electro-pressure welded construction type, with
1" x 1/4" bearing bars spaced at 1-3/16" centers, and 1/2" x 3/16" crossbars spaced at 2" centers.
Wearing surface of bearing bars and of crossbars shall be serrated.
Grating shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication.
Furnish perimeter support angles with welded anchors as detailed.

05500 - 7

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 05515 - LADDERS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTIONS INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
1.2
Aluminum access ladders.

Aluminum ships ladders.
Aluminum cage ladders.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
1.3
Section 05500 Metal Fabrications: Fasteners and installation requirements used to attach ladders to
structure.
Section 14200 Elevators: For pit ladders.
Section 15050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: For electrical grounding of ladders.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.4
AA Aluminum Association.
ASTM B 209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
ASTM B 221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,
Profiles, and Tubes.
OSHA 1910.27 Fixed Ladders.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.5
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.

Product Data: Manufacturers data sheets on each product.ee
Shop Drawings:
1.
Detail fabrication and erection of each ladder indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and
details of metal fabrications and their connections.
2.
Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
3.
Provide reaction loads for each hanger and bracket.
Qualification Data:
1.
Refer to Quality Assurance provisions for submittal requirements evidencing experience,
certifications and resources.
Selection Samples: For each finish specified, two complete sets of color chips representing
manufacturers full range of available colors.
Verification Samples: For each finish specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150mm) square,
represent actual product color.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing aluminum metal ladders similar to those
indicated for this Project.
1.
Record of successful in-service performance.
2.
Sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
3.
Professional engineering competent in design and structural analysis to fabricate ladders in
compliance with industry standards and local codes.
Installer Qualifications: Competent and experienced firm capable of selecting fasteners and installing
ladders to attain designed operational and structural performance.
Product Qualification: Product design shall comply with OSHA 1910.27 minimum standards for ladders.
LADDERS
05515 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
D.
1.6
Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application
workmanship.
1.
Install ladder in area designated by Architect.
2.
Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship and installation are approved by Architect.
3.
Rework mock-up as required to produce acceptable work.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Store products in manufacturers unopened packaging until ready for installation.

PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication.

1.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,
indicate established dimensions on shop drawing submittal and proceed with fabrication.
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.9
Manufacturer has responsibility for an extended Corrective Period for work of this Section for a period of
5 years commencing on the shipment date of the product against all the conditions indicated below, and
when notified in writing from owner, manufacturer shall promptly and without inconvenience and cost to
Owner correct said deficiencies.
1.
Defects in materials and workmanship.
2.
Deterioration of material and surface performance below minimum OSHA standards as certified
by independent third party testing laboratory. Ordinary wear and tear, unusual abuse or neglect
excepted.
3.
Within the warrant period, the manufacturer shall, at its option, repair, replace, or refund the
purchase price of defective ladder.
Manufacturer shall be notified immediately of defective products, and be given a reasonable opportunity
to inspect the goods prior to return. Manufacturer will not assume responsibility, or compensation, for
unauthorized repairs or labor. Manufacturer makes no other warranty, expressed or implied, to the
merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, design, sale, installation, or use, of the ladder; and shall
not be liable for incidental or consequential damages, losses of or expenses, resulting from the use of
ladder products.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish touchup kit for each type and color of paint finish provided.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
C.
Acceptable Manufacturer: OKeeffes, Inc.; 100 N. Hill Drive, Suite 12, Brisbane, CA 94005. Toll Free
Tel: (888) 653-3333. Tel: (415) 824-4900. Fax: (415) 824-5900. Email: info@okeeffes.com. Web:
http://www.okeeffes.com.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with Section 01600.
LADDERS
05515 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.2
APPLICATIONS/SCOPE
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.3
Fixed and Cage Ladder Design:

1.
Safety cages are required on ladders over 24 feet (7315 mm)
2.
Safety cages are required on all ladders in high or hazardous areas.
3.
Landing platforms are required at 50 feet (15,240 mm) above the bottom of the ladder.
4.
Rail and harness fall arrest system as alternate to safety cage and landing platforms shall be a
permissible manufacturers option.
a.
Fixed Ladder Bottom Bracket.
b.
Bottom floor supported bracket.
c.
Bottom wall supported bracket.
d.
Bracket as drawn.
Fixed Access Ladder:
1.
Standard Duty Channel Rail.
a.
Model 500 as manufactured by OKeeffes Inc.
2.
Heavy Duty Tubular Rail.
a.
3.
Tubular Rail Low Parapet Access Ladder with Roof over Rail Extension.
a.
4.
Tubular Rail Low Parapet Access Ladder with Platform and Return.
a.
5.
Tubular rail Low Parapet Access Ladder with Platform.
a.
Model 503A as manufactured by OKeeffes Inc.
6.
Tubular Rail Low Parapet Access Ladder with Walk-through Rail Extension.
a.
Cage Ladder:
1.
Cage Ladder with Roof Hatch Rail Extension.
a.
2.
Cage Ladder with Roofover Rail Extension.
a.
3.
Cage Ladder with High Parapet Access, Platform and Return.
a.
4.
Cage Ladder with High Parapet Access, Platform and No Return.
a.
Model 533A as manufactured by OKeeffes Inc.
5.
Tubular Rail Low Parapet Cage Ladder with Walk-through Extension.
a.
Ship Ladder:
1.
Ships Ladder.
a.
2.
Ship Ladder with Platform.
a.
3.
Ship Ladder with Platform and Return.
a.
Model 522 as manufactured by OKeeffes, Inc.
4.
Ship Ladder with Access to Roof Hatch.
a.
5.
Incline:
a.
60 degree.
b.
75 degree.
c.
As drawn.
FINISHES
A.
Mill finish. As extruded.

LADDERS
05515 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
2.4
Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M10C22A41 Mechanical finish as fabricated.

coating 0.018 mm or thicker.
Paint. Urethane over chemically pretreated substrate.
1.
Fire Red (RAL 2002).
2.
Alert Orange (RAL 2003).
3.
Warning Blue (RAL 5005).
4.
Caution Yellow (RAL 1018).
5.
Safety Green (RAL 6001).
6.
As scheduled on drawings.
Architectural Class I, clear
MATERIALS
A.
B.
2.5
Aluminum Sheet: Alloy 5005-H34 to comply with ASTM B209.

Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy 6063-T6 to comply with ASTM B221.
FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Rungs: Not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in section and 18-3/8 inches (467mm) long, formed from
tubular aluminum extrusions. Squared and deeply serrated on all sides.
1.
Rungs shall withstand a 1,500 pound (454 kg) load without deformation or failure.
Channel Side Rails: Not less than 1/8 inch (3 mm) wall thickness by 3 inches (76 mm) wide.
Heavy Duty Tubular Side Rails: Assembled from two interlocking aluminum extrusions no less than 1/8
inch (3 mm) wall thickness by 3 inches (76 mm) wide. Construction shall be self-locking stainless steel
fasteners, full penetration TIG welds and clean, smooth and burr-free surfaces.
Ship Ladders: Not less than 1-1/4 inches (32mm) high, 4-1/8 inch (105 mm) deep and 2 feet (610 mm)
wide; tread spacing shall be 1 foot (305 mm) on center. Handrails shall be aluminum pipe, not less than
1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter with hemispheric end caps.
Walk-Through Rail and Roof Rail Extension: Not less than 3 feet 6 inches (1067 mm) above the landing
and shall be fitted with deeply serrated, square, tubular grab rails.
Landing Platform: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or greater diameter, tubular aluminum guardrails and decks of
serrated aluminum treads.
Security Doors: Formed 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick aluminum sheet. Security panels shall extend on both
sides, perpendicular to the door face, to within 2 inches (51 mm) of the wall. Security door shall be
furnished with continuous aluminum piano hinge and heavy duty forged steel locking hasps.
Ship Ladder Seismic Bottom Support: Manufacturers standard; two isolation bearings per stringer.
Ladder Safety Post: Retractable hand hold and tie off.
Rail and Harness Fall Arrest System: Supplied where specified as alternate to safety cage and landing
platforms, in accordance with OSHA regulation 1910.27; permanently mounted to ladder rungs and
complete with necessary components.
Safety Cages:
1.
Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with authority having jurisdiction. Assemble by welding.
Spacing of primary hoops, secondary hoops and vertical bars shall not exceed that required by
code.
2.
Safety cage hoops and vertical bars: 3/16 inch (5 mm) by 2 inches (51 mm) aluminum bar.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Coordinate anchorages.
fastener resistance.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and anchorage structural loads for
LADDERS
05515 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
3.2
Do not begin installation until supporting structure is complete and ladder installation will not interfere
with supporting structure work.
If supporting structure is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
supporting work before proceeding.
INSTALLATION
A.
3.3
Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions and in proper relationship with adjacent
construction.
PROTECTION
A.
B.
Protect installed products until completion of project.

Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
LADDERS
05515 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
LADDERS
05515 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all rough carpentry and related items including lumber,
plywood, wood framing and assemblies, backing panels, blocking, furring, supports, miscellaneous
lumber, fasteners, anchors, wood preservative and fire retardant treatment, finishing and painting.
deliver, and install all lumber products and related items required for the work as indicated on the
Drawings, in accordance with local codes and standards, or as specified herein. This work shall include
but not be limited to designing, furnishing, framing, reinforcing, support of other work, pressure treating,
fastening, anchoring, testing, cutting, fitting, cleaning, finishing and painting.
1.
Related Sections:
a.
Section 06200, Finish Carpentry.
b.
Section 06402, Architectural Woodwork."
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.3
Submittals shall be provided in accordance with sections 01330 and 01600.

Product Data: For each type of lumber, anchorage, fastener, wood preservative, fire retardant treatment,
and all other products indicated.
Shop drawings shall clearly show layout, designation, number, type, dimensions, location, fasteners and
materials required.
Furnish the Architect with a certificate of inspection from the mill supplying dimension lumber stating that
the lumber conforms to the grade specified according to standards set by the WWPA.
1.
Each piece of lumber shall have an approved WWPA grade identification stamps as identified in
current edition of Grading Rules for Western Lumber.
2.
Regardless of grade stamp or certification, each piece of lumber in place in the structure shall be of
the original grade specified, or better; grade loss resulting from weathering, handling, storage, resawing, or dividing length, may be cause for rejection.
Samples of treated lumber and wood products with special finishes for review in accordance with
Sections 01330 and 01600.
1.
For dimension lumber specified, to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses.
2.
Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
Research and evaluation Reports, showing compliance with building codes in effect for the project.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
and in the Specifications herein, specifically UL and FM requirements for fire retardants.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
E.
F.
G.
1.4

Warranty:
1.
2.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
1.5
Carefully store all lumber delivered to the site off the ground in a manner to assure proper drainage,
ventilation and protection from the weather.
Keep carpentry materials dry during delivery.
1.
Store lumber and plywood in stacks.
2.
Protect bottom of stacks against contact with damp or wet surfaces.
3.
Protect exposed materials against weather.
4.
Do not store dressed or treated lumber or plywood outdoors.
Store materials for which maximum moisture content is specified, only in areas where relative humidity
has been reduced to a level where specified moisture content can be maintained.
Dumping on the ground is not permitted.
humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. Store mortar, grout, and other moisture-sensitive
GENERAL PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Lumber: Provide lumber in compliance with the "American Softwood Lumber Standard", PS 20, by the
U.S. Department of Commerce.
1.
Nominal sizes are indicated on the drawings or specified herein.
2.
Provide actual sizes complying with the minimum size requirements of PS 20 for the moisture
content specified for each use.
3.
All lumber is to be S-Dry.
Plywood: Provide plywood in accordance with the requirements of the U.S. Product Standard PS 1, for
"Softwood Plywood/Construction and Industrial", except as otherwise specified herein.
1.
Provide plywood of any PS 1 species classification group, except where particular species is
indicated on the Drawings, Specified, or where PS 1 limits groups for particular grade specified.
Coordination: Obtain measurements, verify dimensions shown, and shop drawing details, before
proceeding with carpentry work whenever possible.
Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports, so that attached work will
comply with design requirements.
Fit carpentry work to other work. Scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.
Time delivery and installation of carpentry work to avoid delaying other trades whose work is dependent
on or affected by the carpentry work and to comply with protection and storage requirements.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
G.
Examine all parts of the supporting structure and the conditions under which the carpentry work is to be
installed, and notify the Architect in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.2
Framing Lumber: All framing lumber shall be Douglas Fir values as indicated on the Drawings.
Provide Plywood wood roof deck as indicated on the Drawings.
Plywood: 1/2", 5/8, 3/4", CDX 5-PLY, 48" x 96", or as indicated on the Drawings.
1.
Comply with the requirements of U.S. Product Standard PS 1 for Softwood Plywood/Construction
and Industrial except as otherwise specified herein.
OSB Board may be used on vertical surfaces (applications) only where indicated on the Drawings, and in
accordance with local codes and standards. Refer to applicable Roofing Section for additional
information.
Miscellaneous Lumber: Provide wood for support or attachment of other work such as cant strips, bucks,
nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar members.
1.
Provide lumber of the sizes indicated on the Drawings, or specified, worked to shapes shown, and
as follows:
a.
Moisture Content: 19% maximum for all lumber.
b.
Grade: Provide construction grade boards (WCLIB) or No. 2 or better boards (WWPA).
c.
Concealed plywood: Interior standard grade, interior type.
d.
Backing panels for electrical or telephone equipment: Standard grade interior type plywood
with exterior glue.
ANCHORAGE AND FASTENING MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Select proper type, size, material and finish for each application.
Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in areas of high relative humidity,
provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A153; steel bolts complying with ASTM
A307, Grade A; and steel nuts and washers as required complying with ASTM A 563.
Metal framing anchors shall be made from hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A653
coating designation.
Materials not included in the above categories shall be provided in accordance with the following
requirements:
1.
Nails and Staples: FS FF-N-105
2.
Wood Screws: ANSI B.18.6.1
3.
Bolts, hexagon and square: ANSI B-18-2.1.
4.
Bolts, round head: ANSI B-18.5
5.
Nuts: FS FF-N-836
6.
Washers: FS FF-W-92
7.
Lag Screws or Lag Bolts: FS FF-B-561
8.
Expansion Shields, Expansion Nails and Drive Screw Devices: FS FF-B-561
9.
Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588.
10. Bar or strap Anchors: ASTM A525 size coated steel, 18-gauge minimum.
11. Metal Framing Connectors: Teco, Simpson or Kant Sag.
Allowable design loads: Meet or exceed those indicated per manufacturers published values determined
from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis, and demonstrated by comprehensive testing
performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.3
WOOD PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT

A.
B.
2.4
Treat wood, including lumber and plywood, as specified herein to be treated, to comply with the
applicable requirements of the AWPA. All treated wood shown on the drawings shall be Grade No. 2 or
better lumber.
Pressure treat the following items with water borne preservatives for aboveground use, complying with
the requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber).
1.
Wood cants, nailers, blocking, stripping and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing,
vapor barriers and waterproofing (except plywood sheathing).
2.
Wood sills, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or
concrete or below grade. Foundation Grade redwood, grade marked, is acceptable for wood sills
in lieu of treated lumber.
FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT
A.
B.
For all wood members required by code to be fire retardant treated, comply with AWPA requirements
and provide pressure impregnation with Dricon fire retardant chemicals, in accordance with the
recommendations and quality control of Koppers Co., Inc. to provide a UL RFS Fire Hazard
classification.
All wood shall be identified with a UL label certifying this classification and the FM diamond.
PART 3 INSTALLATION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.2
Use only sound, thoroughly seasoned, well manufactured materials of the longest practical lengths and
sizes to minimize jointing.
Use materials free from warp, which cannot be easily corrected by anchoring and attachment.
1.
Sort out and discard warped material and material with other defects, which would impair the
quality of the work
Securely attach carpentry work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as indicated on the drawings,
and as required by applicable codes and standards.
1.
Provide washers under bolt heads and nuts in contact with wood.
Nail plywood to comply with AWPA recommendations.
Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines with members plumb and true and accurately
cut and fitted.
Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching
other construction.
Framing Standard: Comply with AF & PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless
Shim with metal or slate for full bearing on concrete or masonry substrates.
ATTACHMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Use common wire nails, except as otherwise shown or specified herein.

Do not wax or lubricate fasteners that depend on friction for holding power.
Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members.
Install fasteners without splitting wood. Pre-drill holes as required.
Do not drive threaded friction type fasteners. Turn into place.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
G.
H.
3.3
Tighten bolts and lag screws at installation, and retighten as required for tight connections prior to
closing in or at completion of work.
Counter sink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes, use finishing nails for finish work.
WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
3.4
Nail or spike members in accordance with code requirements.

All framing 16" o.c. unless otherwise noted.
Cut framing square on bearings, closely fit, accurately set to required lines and levels.
Secure rigidly in place at bearings and connections.
Do not use shims for leveling on wood or metal bearings.
Use steel shims with full bearing on masonry or concrete substrates.
Frame members for passage of pipes and ducts to avoid cutting structural members.
Do not cut, notch or bore framing members for passage of pipes or conduits without Architect's
permission.
Reinforce framing members as directed where damaged by cutting.
Provide Simpson NS nail stoppers over utilities that penetrate framing members, nailing with 8d nails.
WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS AND BLOCKING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
3.5
Provide wherever indicated on the drawings, and where required for screeding or attachment of other
work.
Form to shapes as indicated on the drawings, and cut as required for true line and level of work to be
attached.
Provide solid wood backing and wood blocking inside stud wall construction for all wall mounted
equipment and accessories, especially at toilet rooms.
Coordinate location with other work involved; refer to shop drawings of such work.
Attach to substrates securely with anchor bolts and other attachment devices as indicated on the
drawings, and as required to support applied loading.
Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown.
Set true to line, level, and plumb, with intersections true to required angle.
Build into masonry as work progresses, cutting to fit masonry unit size involved.
Anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
Provide grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-beveled lumber, not less than 1-1/2" wide and of
the thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved.
1.
Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
WOOD FURRING
A.
B.
3.6
Install plumb and level with closure strips at all edges and openings.
Shim with wood as required.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection,
inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate
solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all the finish carpentry and related items including doors, trim,
hardware, fasteners, metal accessories, coatings, testing, and finishing. Installation of architectural
woodwork and pre-finished fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP) panels is specified in this section.
install and deliver all finish carpentry, architectural woodwork, related hardware, and metal shapes
required for assembly and erection, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with local codes and
standards, or as specified herein. This work shall include but not be limited to cutting, gluing, fitting,
drilling, mitering, sealing, welding, reinforcing, support of other work, testing, protecting, cleaning and
painting.
1.
Related Sections:
a.
Section 06402, "Architectural Woodwork."
b.
Section 09720, Pre-finished FRP Panels."
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.3

Product Data:
1.
For each type of door, trim, hardware, coating, accessory, and fastener.
2.
For each type of factory-fabricated product and process indicated.
3.
Construction details, material descriptions, weights, dimensions of individual components, profiles
and finishes.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Clearly show layout, designs, connectors, sizes, name of manufacturer, lumber specifications,
handling and erection instructions.
Samples for review in accordance with Sections 01330 and 01600. As a minimum, 6 x 6 sample for
the following:
1.
Each type of finish required.
2.
Each type of paneling required.
3.
Each type of siding required.
material and mill test reports, substantiating compliance with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
similar to that required for this project, employing only workers who are skilled in finish carpentry, and
whose projects have a record of successful in-service performance.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
F.
G.
1.4
Warranty:
1.
Manufacturers Warranty: Submit for Owners acceptance, manufacturers standard warranty
2.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.5
not permitted.
1.
Store mortar, grout, and other moisture-sensitive materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry
location.
2.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Handle and store architectural woodwork and trim carefully, accepting delivery only after storage area
temperature is being permanently maintained above 62 deg F and area is sufficiently dry so woodwork
will not be damaged by excessive change in moisture content.
At delivery, average moisture content of woodwork shall not exceed 6% with maximum permitted of 10%.
Arrange for back priming of all concealed surfaces for materials scheduled to be painted under Section
09911 as soon after delivery as possible.
In general, woodwork shall be fabricated and assembled at the mill, and be ready for installation when
delivered.
Erect no woodwork until moisture content of grounds, furring, etc., is below 19% verified by moisture
meter.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
BARN FEATURE AND DCOR POPOUTS

A.
B.
C.
Wood shall be Rough Sawn Western Red Cedar, select knotty grade, or as noted on drawings. Apply
clear satin finish, Do Not Paint.
Trim shall be rough sawn Douglas fir. Paint as indicated on drawings.
4 deep grooved panels shall be Rough Sawn T1-11. Prime and Paint as indicated on the drawings.
PART 3 INSTALLATION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Install all work plumb, level, true to line and firmly secured to grounds or backing.
1.
Use concealed shims where required for alignment.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
2.
Refinish and seal cuts.
Scribe and fit accurately to adjacent work, taking care not to injure finished surfaces.
Distribute defects allowed in the quality grades specified to minimize their affect on the finished work.
Fit joints tight, flush, and even.
Ease all sharp edges.
FASTENERS
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
Attach all work to assure firm, secure support, with all fastenings concealed.
Nailing in wood trim and siding to be angled alternating pattern of up and down or side to side. Use nails
with small heads that will penetrate the surface of the wood.
1.
Surface nail plain casings, base, etc., in pairs on 24" centers.
2.
Blind nail where possible; where not possible, locate, drive and set surface nails for putty stopping
so as
Apply adhesives in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions, supplementing adhesives with
nailing as required.
Drill lead holes for all screws.
DOORS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.4
Hand and fit all doors plumb and accurately aligned with frames and stops.
Provide uniform 1/16" to 1/8" edge clearance at jambs and heads, and 1/8" bottom clearance above
finish flooring except at undercut doors.
Bevel lock stiles a standard 1/8" in 2", or as required to match hardware.
Ease all edges.
Install specified hardware to provide free swinging or sliding doors that close easily and latch securely,
free from rattling.
Make lock cutouts with proper templates or jigs, using manufacturer's recommended methods.
1.
Cut mortises accurately to size and depth, with minimum clearance.
2.
Patching will not be permitted, and doors and frames incorrectly prepared for hardware shall be
replaced by Contractor at no expense to Owner.
TRIM
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.5
Install standing trim in single lengths without splices, running trim in lengths as long as possible, joined
only where solid fastenings can be made. End joints shall be mitered; butt joints shall not be allowed.
End joints in built-up members shall be staggered and well distributed.
Miter external corners, cope internal corners.
Stagger joints in adjacent and related trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners.
FINISH HARDWARE INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Forward complete information as to details, sizes, shapes, levels, thickness, etc., of all items requiring
hardware to the hardware supplier, and review schedules to verify the inclusion of this information.
Notify hardware supplier immediately regarding changes and revisions, obtain confirmation through
revised hardware schedules, and expedite shipment to subcontractors, manufacturers and the job site.
Inspect immediately upon delivery, reordering missing items.
Store hardware at the site in a room designated for this purpose. Protect installed hardware until
building is complete, replacing all damaged and defective material.
At completion, deliver keys to Owner, properly labeled, sorted and arranged for easy filing.
The finish hardware shall be accurately fitted and installed on properly prepared surfaces in conformity
with the manufacturer's instructions and templates.
Upon completion, the finish hardware shall be in perfect condition and in perfect working order.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.6
PROTECTION OF WORK
A.
3.7
Protect all work after erection, repairing or replacing damaged work as directed, at Contractor's expense.
CLEAN-UP
A.
3.8
Cleanup shall be in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations, and as directed by Architect.
DEFECTIVE WORK
A.
B.
All work deemed defective or improperly installed by the Architect, shall be corrected as direct by the
Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner.
The following partial list constitutes possible defective work items:
1.
Non-adhered panels.
2.
Improperly installed trim.
3.
Out of plumb or uneven surfaces.
4.
Repair hollows, voids, scratches, and other surface imperfections on units. If Architect determines
the item cannot be corrected, the material shall be replaced in accordance with the Specifications
herein.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 06402 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all architectural woodwork, casework, and related items
including wood cabinets, trim, framing, laminate countertops, wood furring, blocking, shims, hanging
strips (unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation), hardware, finishing and
installation.
deliver, and install all architectural woodwork, casework, and related items as indicated on the Drawings,
in accordance with local codes and standards, or as specified herein. This work shall include but not be
limited to design and fabrication of woodwork, casework, trim, laminate countertops, and associated
cutting, fitting, aligning, fastening, coping, bracing, reinforcing, cleaning and finishing.
Field Dimensions: The architectural woodwork manufacturer is responsible for details and dimensions
not controlled by job conditions, and shall show on his shop drawings all required field measurements
beyond his control.
1.
The General Contractor and the woodwork manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and maintain
these field dimensions.
2.
Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Where
necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1.
Related Sections:
a.
Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
b.
c.
Section 06611, Solid Surface Countertops."
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Submittals shall be provided in accordance with Sections 01330 and 01600. Examples of submittals
required for the work in this section are outlined below.
Product Data: For each type of cabinet, hardware, trim, countertop, and product indicated.
1.
Brochures: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature of specialty items not manufactured by the
architectural woodwork manufacturer.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings on all items of architectural woodwork.
1.
Clearly show layout, materials, designation, number, type, location, dimensional plans and
elevations, large scale details, attachment devices, and other components required.
Submit samples for review in accordance with Sections 01330 and 01600.
1.
Submit samples of each wood species which is to receive transparent finish at job site.
2.
Submit finished samples of each finish to be applied at factory.
3.
Plastic-laminates, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.
4.
Thermoset decorative panels, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.
5.
Solid-surfacing materials.
06402 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.4
Installer Qualifications: The approved architectural woodwork manufacturer must have a reputation for
doing satisfactory work on time and shall have successfully completed comparable work. The Architect
reserves the right to approve the woodwork manufacturer selected to furnish all of the architectural
woodwork.
1.
The "Quality Standards" of the AWI shall apply, and by reference are hereby made a part of this
specification. Any reference to custom in this specification shall be as defined in the latest edition
of the AWI "Quality Standards".
1.
Any item not given a specified quality grade shall be Custom grade as defined in the AWI "Quality
Standards".
Tolerances shall conform to industry codes and standards, unless otherwise noted.
Warranty:
1.
2.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.5
not permitted.
humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. Some materials may need to be stored in dry
protected enclosures, and handled by methods which avoid exposure to moisture. Additional
requirements for product delivery, storage and handling are in Section 01600.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
The architectural woodwork manufacturer and the contractor shall be jointly responsible to make certain
that woodwork is not delivered until the building and storage areas are sufficiently dry so that the
woodwork will not be damaged by excessive changes in moisture content.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM

A.
AWI Quality Grade:

1.
Solid Wood: Custom.
06402 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.
3.
4.
2.2
For transparent-finished trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not
glue for width.
Back out or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except
for members with ends exposed in finished work.
Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field
assembly.
CASEWORK
A.
B.
2.3
Casework with High Pressure Laminate Finish:

1.
AWI Quality Grade: Custom
2.
Construction: Details shall conform to overlay design.
3.
Exposed Surfaces: NEMA LD -3, Grade GP-28 as scheduled or as selected.
4.
Backing Sheet: NEMA LD-3, Grade CL-20.
5.
Semi-Exposed Surfaces: As governed by selected AWI quality grade.
6.
Casework Hardware: All cabinet hardware shall be furnished and installed by the casework
manufacturer.
High Pressure Laminate Counter Tops:
1.
AWI Quality and Grade: Custom
2.
Laminate Selection: NEMA LD-3, Custom Grade GP-50, colors and patterns as selected.
HARDWARE
A.
2.4
Furnish and install all items of casework hardware as follows:

1.
Pulls: Stainless Steel "Stapel" Pulls 5" x 2-1/2" x 5/16".
2.
Drawer Guides: KV 1260
3.
Hinges: Concealed - self-closing
4.
Shelf Standards: KV Standard 255 support 256, KV Standard 87 support 186.
5.
Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141, Push-in magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9,
B03131, Roller catches, BHMA A156.9, B03071, Ball friction catches, BHMA A156.9, B03013.
6.
Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
7.
Drawer Locks: Where indicated on plans: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
B.
2.5
Provide size type, material and finish as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein, as recommended
by applicable standards, and complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws,
bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices.
Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for
each use including recommending nails.
FIRE RETARDANT TREATED MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process:

Comply with performance
requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use Exterior Type or Interior Type A.
Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
Kiln-dry material after treatment.
Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed
together at time of panel manufacture with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index
of 25 or less per ASTM E84.
Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2 medium-density fiberboard panels made from softwood fibers,
synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture with flamespread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E84.
06402 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
PART 3 INSTALLATION
3.1
WOODWORK
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
Exposed woodwork shall have a smooth finish free from machine and tool marks, abrasions, raised grain
or exposed surfaces.
All joints shall be tight.
Scribe and cope cabinets, shelving, trim, and partitions to fit abutting walls and other building surfaces.
Frames and trim shall have kerfed or hollow backs, and shall be in single lengths, except running trim
shall be in commercial long lengths, with no splicing pieces shorter than 3'-0".
1.
At internal corners, square members shall be butt jointed, and the moulding coped.
2.
At external corners, members shall be cut at a 45 deg angle to conceal shrinkage.
3.
Brace frames at mill with cross and diagonal strips before shipping to job.
Set wood finish straight, plumb and level, in true alignment, and rigidly fastened in place.
Nailing and fastening shall be concealed where possible, and exposed nail heads shall be set for
puttying.
Doors and other movable wood parts shall be accurately fitted with proper clearances and left in perfect
working order.
1.
All refitting necessary due to swelling, shrinking, faulty assembly, or installation shall be done by
the contractor, without cost to the Owner, for a period of one (1) year after completion and
acceptance of the building.
2.
When dressing or cutting has been done, these surfaces shall be repainted or varnished.
3.
The work shall be left clean and free from warp, twist, open joints, or other defects.
4.
Doors and other movable wood parts shall be set for puttying.
Provide stops as indicated on the Drawings, as directed by the Architect or as required.
Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.
Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of
packing and backpriming.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8" in 96". Shim as required with
concealed shims.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine
finishing nails (or finishing screws) for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork
and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
Standing and Running Trim:
1.
Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of
lumber available) to greatest extent possible.
2.
Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
3.
Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish
same as wood base if finished.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately
aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered
operation.
1.
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16" o.c. and as
06402 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.2
PLASTIC LAMINATE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.3
Core material shall be close grain hardwood veneered plywood.

Application of plastic shall be by pressure gluing using a water resistant glue.
Backing sheets shall be used to prevent bowing.
Shop joints shall be allowed only when the required length of plastic is regularly available.
Field joints shall be shop prepared and pre-fitted with bolt-type fasteners.
Counter tops, intermediate supports, and splash backs shall be self-edged, and plastic edges shall return
across all open ends.
Joints between tops and sides shall be square.
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into
underside of countertop.
Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
PROTECTION
A.
B.
3.4
All finished millwork shall be covered and protected from damage and discoloration prior to final cleanup.
Damaged material shall be completely replaced.
CLEAN UP
A.
B.
Remove all scrap and unused material from jobsite.

Leave in finished condition in accordance with the general conditions.
06402 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 06611 - SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all solid surface countertops, and related items including but
not limited to: sinks and bowls, wood cabinets, trim, framing, laminate countertops, wood furring,
blocking, shims, hanging strips (unless concealed within other construction before woodwork
installation), hardware, finishing and installation.
deliver, and install all solid surface countertops, and related items as indicated on the Drawings, in
accordance with local codes and standards, or as specified herein. This work shall include but not be
limited to design and fabrication of woodwork, casework, trim, laminate countertops, and associated
cutting, fitting, aligning, fastening, coping, bracing, reinforcing, cleaning and finishing.
Solid surface countertops shall be purchased from manufacturer / distributor, received and stored by
General Contractor, and installed by Contractor. Refer to Part 2 Products for contact Information.
Field Dimensions: The fabricator / installer is responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by
job conditions, and shall show on his shop drawings all required field measurements beyond his control.
1.
The General Contractor and the fabricator / installer shall cooperate to establish and maintain
these field dimensions.
2.
Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Where
necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1.
Related Sections:
a.
Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
b.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.

Product Data: For each type of cabinet, hardware, trim, countertop, and product indicated.
1.
Brochures: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature of:
a.
Solid surface sheet material
b.
Sinks and Bowls
c.
Include standard color chart showing full range of available colors for sheet material and
sinks.
d.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for products and accessories.
e.
Testing data and Code compliance information / reports.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Submit shop drawings on all items within the scope of work, or as necessary to perform the work.
2.
Clearly show layout, materials, designation, number, type, location, dimensional plans and
elevations, large scale details, attachment devices, and other components required.
1.
Solid-surfacing materials: 4" x 4" color samples shall be submitted for final color verification. Colors
shall match standard color chart.
Substitutions shall not be allowed, unless specifically requested by Sprouts.

06611 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.4
Installer Qualifications: The approved fabricator / installer must have a minimum of three (3) years
experience in fabrication and installation of solid surface materials, or certification by Distributor, and a
reputation for doing satisfactory work on time and shall have successfully completed comparable work.
The Architect, and or Owner reserves the right to approve the fabricator / installer selected to furnish all
of the work as outlined in this specification.
Tolerances shall conform to industry codes and standards, unless otherwise noted.
Warranty:
1.
2.
Warranty Period: Ten (10) years commencing on Date of Certificate of Occupancy.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.5
not permitted.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
The fabricator / installer and the contractor shall be jointly responsible to make certain that the
countertops, and related materials are not delivered until the building and storage areas are sufficiently
dry so that the materials will not be damaged by excessive changes in moisture content. Unless noted
otherwise by Manufacturers instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURER
A.
2.2
Samsung Chemical USA, Inc., 14251 E. Firestone Boulevard, Suite 101, La Mirada, CA 90683, Tel:
(800) 795-7177, Fax: (562) 926-9930, Website: www.staron.com
MATERIALS

06611 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
A.
B.
C.
2.3
Staron Sheet material: 1/2, 12.3 mm, thick homogenous sheet composed of a blend of natural minerals
and 100% acrylic resin (methyl methacrylate) complying with ANSI Z-124.3 and Z-124.6, Type 6.
1.
Color shall be Sanded Vermillion #SV430, or as indicated on the drawings.
2.
Finish shall be as indicated on the drawings, or as directed by Owner.
3.
Physical performance characteristics:
a.
Class A Test method NFPA 255
b.
Food Zone use NSF 51
Staron Sinks and Bowls: Homogenous casting composed of a blend of natural minerals and 100%
acrylic resin (methyl methacrylate) complying with ANSI Z-124.3 and Z-124.6, Type 6.
1.
Model number: as indicated in equipment schedule, or drawings.
2.
Color shall be Ivory White #1612 or as indicated on the drawings.
Countertop perimeter frame: 1/2", 12.3 mm, moisture resistant plywood, or 1/2", 12.3 mm, moisture
resistant MDF.
ACCESSORIES
A.
2.4
Furnish and install all items as follows:

1.
Joint and Laminating Adhesive for bonding Staron Sheet to Staron Sheet: Two component Staron
Joint Adhesive Drawer Guides: KV 1260.
2.
Adhesive for bonding Staron Sheet to other materials: 100% silicone sealant complying with ASTM
C920.
FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
B.
2.5
Provide size type, material and finish as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein, as recommended
by applicable standards, and complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws,
bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices.
Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for
each use including recommending nails.
FIRE RETARDANT TREATED MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
Fire Retardant Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance
requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use Exterior Type or Interior Type A.
Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
Kiln-dry material after treatment.
Fire Retardant Particleboard: Panels made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed
together at time of panel manufacture with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index
of 25 or less per ASTM E84.
Fire Retardant Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2 medium-density fiberboard panels made from softwood fibers,
synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture with flamespread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E84.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
Examine cabinets upon which countertops will be installed.

1.
Fabricator / Installer shall verify that cabinets are level to 1/8 in 10-0 (3mm in 3m)
2.
Fabricator / Installer shall review manufacturers Fabrication and Installation Checklist.
All unacceptable conditions shall be repaired, and or replaced prior to installation of countertops. No
additional charges for this work shall be charged to Owner. All costs for such work shall be the
responsibility of the General Contractor.

06611 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.
3.2
Commencement of work by Fabricator / Installer shall constitute acceptance of the cabinets.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
3.3
Install countertops and secure to cabinets in accordance with Manufacturers written instructions,
Fabrication and Installation Manual.
Install Sinks and Bowls:
1.
Mounting type shall be Seam Mount, unless otherwise noted on drawings.
2.
Secure Seam mounted sinks and bowls to Countertop with Staron Joint Adhesive.
3.
Secure under mount sinks and bowls to countertop with clip system as recommended by
manufacturers written instructions.
PROTECTION
A.
B.
C.
3.4
All finished work shall be covered and protected from damage and discoloration prior to final cleanup.
Severely damaged material shall be completely replaced in accordance with Manufacturers Fabrication
and Installation Manual.
Minor Repairs shall be accomplished per Manufacturers recommendations and in accordance with
Manufacturers Fabrication and Installation Manual.
CLEANUP
A.
B.
Remove all scrap and unused material from jobsite.

Clean surfaces of Countertop, sinks and bowls in accordance with Manufacturers Care and
Maintenance Instructions. Leave in finished condition in accordance with the general conditions.

06611 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 07115 MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING - TREMCO

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies all rubberized-asphalt sheet waterproofing membrane including installation of
primer mastic, waterproofing membrane, sheet metal, and protection material.
transport, a waterproof membrane of rubberized asphalt on areas indicated on the Drawings, in
limited to designing and installation of the waterproof liner system, and associated cleaning, priming,
sealing, cutting, splicing, fitting, sheet metal work, and fastening.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.3

Product Data: For each type of material and product indicated. Include manufacturers written
instruction for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and testing physical and
performance properties of waterproofing.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Clearly show layout, designation, number, thickness, type, and location and materials required.
2.
Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashing, penetrations, inside and outside
corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and termination conditions.
3.
Include published data, letters of certification, or certified test laboratory reports, that all materials
comply with the requirements and are intended for the applications shown.
4.
Provide guarantee, in writing, that waterproofing system will remain watertight for a period of two
(2) years.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.
Membrane shall be applied by an application approved by the manufacturer.
Manufacturers shall meet the industry standards and codes for the materials indentified on the Drawings
All work under this section shall conform to local code requirements. In case of conflict, the more
stringent requirements shall apply.

07115 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
H.
1.4
Warranty:
1.
2.
Warranty Period: Two (2) years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.5
not permitted.
Deliver all packaged materials in unopened, undamaged containers, with identification labels intact, and
bearing the name of the manufacturer and brand.
materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location. Store membrane where it will not exceed 90
deg F for extended periods.
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A.
Environmental Conditions: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
All materials shall be as manufactured by Tremco.

1.
Waterproofing Membrane:
Tremproof 150 (for Exterior Use Only).
2.
Hot Rubberized Asphalt:
Tremproof 150 (for Interior and Exterior Use).
3.
Liquid Membrane:
Tremproof 60, cold application
4.
Primer:
QD Primer.
5.
Elastomeric Mastic:
Elastomeric Sheeting, uncured neoprene
6.
Protection Material:
As recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A.
B.
C.
D.
All surfaces to receive membrane waterproofing shall be dry, smooth, rigid, clean, frost-free, and free of
voids, dirt, debris, sharp projections, grease, oil or other contaminants.
Dust shall be removed from the surface immediately before application of primer.
All surface defects shall be repaired prior to primer application.
Install all materials in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.

07115 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.2
WEATHER CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
3.3
All components of the membrane waterproofing system must be applied at surface and ambient
temperatures of 40 deg F of above with fair, dry weather conditions.
For any applications below 40 deg F, consult membrane waterproofing manufacturer.
Surface coatings and adhesives shall not be applied when rain is expected within twelve (12) hours.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
3.4
Install Tremco products in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and at required rate.
1.
Allow primer to dry until tack free.
2.
Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and
maintain uniform tap width and end laps per manufacturers instructions.
3.
Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.
4.
Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal couterflashings or ending in
reglets with mastic sealant.
5.
Prime only the area which will be covered with membrane in a working day.
6.
Areas not covered with membrane in four (4) hours must be reprimed.
7.
Dry, primed surfaces shall be covered immediately, where contaminants from the air are
accumulating on the surface.
8.
Metal or other dense surfaces shall not require priming but shall be clean, dry, free of loose paint,
rust or other contaminants.
If the use of nails is required, large head nails at 12 intervals must be covered with an 8 wide strip of
Tremproof membrane.
Apply a troweled bead of elastomeric mastic to all vertical and horizontal terminations.
1.
Liquid membrane can be used as an alternative method.
Patch tears and inadequately lapped seams with membrane.
1.
Slit fishmouths and repair with a patch extending 6 in all directions from the slit and seal edges of
the patch with mastic.
2.
Inspect membrane thoroughly before covering and make any corrections immediately.
Seal all daily terminations with a troweled bead of elastomeric membrane.
Membrane waterproofing shall not be applied to any areas permanently exposed to sunlight.
The specified products are incompatible with fresh tars, pitch, and certain liquid waterproofing products
and sealants containing tar or polysulfide polymer. Avoid direct contact of the adhesive layer of
membrane of elastomeric mastic with such products.
Specified products are a compatible system. Substitutes for individual components will not give
satisfactory results.
Do not apply elastomeric mastic where it will be covered with membrane.
Follow instructions on product labels.
Do not expose to flames, sparks or temperatures above 150 deg F.
SHEET METAL WORK
A.
B.
C.
3.5
Where metal edge occurs, flanges are to be set in a troweling of Elastomeric Mastic under the
membrane waterproofing, nailed in place with membrane extended at least 6 beyond the flange.
Metal flanges shall be 4 wide minimum.
The flanges shall be stagger-nailed 3 O.C., in lines 3/4 and 2-1/4 in from the gutter edge of the flange.
PROTECTION MATERIAL
A.
B.
The materials shall be installed the same day the membrane is applied. Protection material shall be
secured in place by an approved method until the fill material of backfill is placed. Nails or other
fasteners shall not penetrate through the membrane.
Do not put foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected horizontal membrane.
07115 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by the manufacturer of affected construction.

07115 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 07200 - MISCELLANEOUS BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of miscellaneous insulation work in walls and ceilings including
installation of blanket insulation, scrim sheeting, safing insulation, sound attenuation blankets at interior
partitions and ceilings, sub-floor thermal insulation, rigid insulation at exterior walls, anchors, and mastic.
Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to furnish, deliver, and
install insulation work, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with local codes and standards, or as
specified herein. This work shall include but not be limited to installing insulating materials and
associated cutting, fitting, fastening, taping, and cleaning.
1.
Extent of insulation work is shown on Drawings and indicated by provisions of this Section.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.3

Product Data: For each type of insulation and product indicated. Submit manufacturers technical
brochures and catalogs for product review and coordination.
Samples for review in accordance with Sections 01330 and 01600. 6 x 6 insulation samples are
required as a minimum.
Research/Evaluation Reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.
Fire Test Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire test
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E84 for
surface-burning characteristics and other methods indicated with product, by UL or another testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
Warranty:
1.
2.
3.
UPDATED: AUGUST 21, 2013

07200 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.4

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.5
not permitted.
materials on the site, off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location. Protect against exposure to
weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.
A.
Plenum Rating: Provide insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test performance is rated
as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per "Erosion Test" and "Mold
Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard
1.
Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling, or
delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 2500-fpm air velocity.
2.
Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth,
delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after inoculation with
Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100% relative humidity in the
dark.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATING MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
2.2
Provide insulation materials, which comply with requirements indicated on the drawings and as specified
herein for materials, compliance with referenced standards, and other characteristics.
Preformed Units: Size to fit applications indicated selected from manufacturers standard thicknesses,
widths and lengths.
Acceptable Products:
1.
Unfaced Fiberglass Batt Insulation Owens Corning, or Dow Chemical
2.
FSK-25 Insulation: CertainTeed (flame resistant foil) or approved equal
3.
PSK-25 Insulation: CertainTeed (paper faced) or approved equal
4.
Flame Spread-25 Fiberglass Insulation: Owens-Corning (fire safe) or approved equal
5.
TIW Thermafiber Blanket: by Owens-Corning, or equal by USG, CertainTeed
6.
700 Series Rigid Fiberglass (Owens-Corning) or approved equal
7.
700 Series FRK Rigid Fiberglass (Owens-Corning) or approved equal.
FIRE SAFING INSULATION
A.
USG Thermafiber mineral fiber fire safing insulation, regular color, unfaced, thickness where indicated or
required on the drawings and as specified herein.

07200 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
2.3
Provide fire safing insulation at all tilt-up concrete wall panel joints at building common walls (2-hour
rating).
See Section 07920 for sealant at exterior faces.
SOUND ATTENUATION
A.
B.
2.4
Sound Attenuation Blankets: Sound attenuation blankets shall be Noise barrier batts, Type 1, Unfaced
3-1/2" thick, as manufactured by United State Gypsum, Owens Corning, or approved equal.
Acoustical Sealant: United States Gypsum "Acoustical Sealant" or approved equal.
RIGID WALL AND CEILING INSULATION
A.
B.
2.5
Foamular extruded polystyrene rigid foam insulation 1-1/2 thick Insulpink Z insulation (R=7.5) as
manufactured by Owens Corning.
Styrofoam ZMate extruded polystyrene rigid foam insulation 1-1/2 (R=7.5) or 2 (R=10) thick with Z
furring as manufactured by Dow Chemical Company.
AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
2.6
Mechanical Anchors: Type and size indicated on the drawings or as recommended by insulation
manufacturer for type of application and substrate.
Insulation Mastic: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for securing batts to surfaces shown on
drawings.
Low voltage electrical wiring not in conduit shall meet the latest edition of the Energy Code (IECC) and
local code requirements: Provide Teflon coated wiring as required.
FACING COMPOSITION SCRIM / KRAFT VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
B.
Product: WMP-10 - White film

1.
The composite of fiberglass and facing shall have surface burning characteristics not to exceed 25
flame spread and 50 smoke developed when tested in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories
723 test method or ASTM E 84 test method. Facing shall be composed of 0.0015 white metallized
polypropylene film, a reinforcing layer, and 14# kraft paper. The product shall be reinforced with a
5x5 tri-directional scrim which has a blend of fiberglass and polyester yarns. The resulting facing
shall have a water vapor transmission rate of 0.02 US perm (ASTM E96, Procedure A), and a
mullen burst of 65 P.S.I. Tensile strength shall be 40# in the machine direction and 35# in the
cross-machine direction. The manufacturers name and product identification must be printed on
the tab area of the facing.
Manufacturer:
1.
Lamtec Corporation 5010 River Road, Mount Bethel, PA 18343 phone: (570) 897-8200 fax: (570)
897-6081 www.lamtec.com
a.
Meets ASTM C1136, Type II, IV and is paintable
b.
Permeance (WVTR) ASTM E96 (procedure A)
c.
Bursting Strength ASTM D774
d.
Puncture Resistance ASTM C1136
e.
Tensile Strength - ASTM C1136
f.
Mold Resistance ASTM C665 /C1338
g.
Dimensional Stability ASTM D1204
h.
Light Reflectance ASTM C523
i.
Flame Spread / Smoke Development ASTM E84 / UL 723
2.
Lamtec Corporation or approved equal

07200 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION AND PREPARATION

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
Installer shall examine substrates and conditions under which insulation work is to be performed. A
satisfactory substrate is one that complies with requirements of the section in which substrate and
related work is specified.
Obtain installers written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of work in this section.
Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removal of projections,
which might puncture vapor retarders.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.3
Comply with manufacturers instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. If printed
instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturers technical
representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with work.
Extend insulation full thickness over entire area to be insulated.
1.
Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation.
2.
Remove projections, which interfere with placement.
Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to make up
total thickness.
Install insulation that is new, undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any
time to ice, rain, and snow.
Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated.
Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location
of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.
For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from
manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to
produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total
thickness.
INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A.
B.
3.4
Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturers

recommendations.
If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical fasteners to
provide permanent placement and support of units.
INSTALLATION OF SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Place sealant under track.

Install acoustical insulation in between studs.
Stagger wall board joints.
Sound blankets shall be pressed firmly in place against back of gypsum board and stapled.
1.
Staples and method of installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2.
An air space shall be maintained between blankets and back surface of one partition face.
Continuity of blankets shall be maintained. Use full length strips where possible.
Contractor shall consult and cooperate with tradesmen whose work precedes and follows sound blanket
installation, to permit the orderly and expeditious procedure in executing work of this Section.
Upon completion, and at times when other contractors are covering work, correct loose, sagging or
damaged work.

07200 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.5
INSTALLATION OF WALL AND CEILING RIGID INSULATION

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.6
Install insulation tightly in between studs or Z furring.

All exposed surfaces of foam insulation must be covered with min 1/2 thick gypsum board or other
approved materials that meet the performance requirements of the model building codes.
Method of installation shall be in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
Kraft and standard foil vapor retarders used to face fiber insulation must not be left exposed.
Continuity of pieces shall be maintained. Use full-length strips where possible.
Contractor shall consult and cooperate with tradesmen whose work precedes and follows insulation
installation to permit the orderly and expeditious procedure in executing work of this Section.
Upon completion, and at times when other contractors are covering work, correct loose, sagged or
damaged work.
INSTALLATION OF SCRIM VAPOR RETARDER
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.7
Method of installation shall be in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

Scrim vapor retarders shall encase insulation. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate
with adhesive or use mechanical fasteners to provide permanent placement and support of units.
Continuity of pieces shall be maintained. Use full-length strips where possible.
Contractor shall consult and cooperate with tradesmen whose work precedes and follows insulation
installation to permit the orderly and expeditious procedure in executing work of this Section.
Upon completion, and at times when other contractors are covering work, correct loose, sagged or
damaged work.
GEOGRAPHICAL LOCATIONS
A.
B.
C.
3.8
Each project application shall be evaluated on an individual basis. Manufacturers guidelines shall be
adhered to with regard to insulation applicability.
General guidelines are as follows:
1.
No Freeze and Low Humidity Regions Use:
a.
Unfaced Fiberglass Batts (exposed application in a concealed space)
b.
Unfaced Thermafiber Blanket (exposed application in a concealed space)
c.
Unfaced 700 Series Rigid Fiberglass (exposed application in a concealed space)
d.
Kraft Paper Faced Fiberglass Batt (only at gypsum board covered application)
e.
Foil on Kraft Paper Faced Fiberglass Batt (only at gypsum board covered application)
2.
Freezing and / or High Humidity Regions Use:
a.
FSK-25 Flame Resistant Foil Fiberglass Batt (exposed application in a concealed space)
b.
Flame Spread-25 Fire Safe Fiberglass Batt (exposed application in a concealed space)
c.
700 Series FRK Faced Rigid Fiberglass (exposed application in a concealed space)
d.
Kraft Paper with Foil or Plastic Film Vapor Barrier Fiberglass Batt (only at gypsum board
covered application)
In freezing and/or high humidity regions tape all joints to provide a continuous vapor barrier.
1.
Patch all damaged areas of vapor barrier to provide a complete seal.
2.
At exposed applications in a concealed space tape shall be aluminum metal (no paper).
PROTECTION
A.
General: Protect installed insulation from possible physical abuses, where possible by non-delayed
installation of concealing work or where that is not possible, by temporary cover or enclosure.

07200 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 07214 - FOAMED IN PLACE MASONRY WALL INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the furnishing and installation of all masonry insulating fill material at unit masonry
walls including two component thermal insulation for thermal, sound, and fire resistance values.
deliver, and install all foamed in place masonry wall insulating work, as indicated on the Drawings, in
limited to furnishing and installing insulating materials and associated compressed air.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.3

Shop Drawings:
1.
Clearly show layout, designation, number, type, location and materials required.
2.
Product and technical presentation as provided by the manufacturer.
3.
Certified Test Reports: With product data, submit copies of certified test reports showing
compliance with specified performance values, including R-values, fire performance and sound
abatement characteristics.
4.
Material Safety Data Sheet: Submit Material Safety Data Sheet complying with OSHA Hazard
Communication Standard, 29 CRF 1910 1200.
Samples for review in accordance with Sections 01330 and 01600. 6 x 6 samples of each item
required.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.
Installer Qualifications for Foamed-In-Place Masonry Insulation: Engage an experienced installer
who has been trained and licensed by the product manufacturer, and who has at least three years
direct experience in the installation of the product used.
Manufacturing Standards: Provide insulation produced by a single and approved manufacturer. The
product must come from the manufacturer pre-mixed to ensure consistency.
Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials which are identical to those whose fire
performance characteristics, as listed for each material or assembly of which insulation is a part, have
been determined by testing, per methods indicated below, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
Product must be classified by Underwriters Laboratory (UL) as to Surface Burning Characteristics.
07214 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
I.
J.
1.4
1.
Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119
2.
Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84
3.
Thermal Resistance: ASTM C177 (R value not less than 4.0 per 1")
Warranty:
1.
Upon request, a two (2) year product and installation warranty will be issued by both the
manufacturer and installer, commencing on Date of Certificate of Occupancy.
2.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
not permitted.
Locate stacks or bins to avoid or protect material from heavy and unnecessary traffic.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS OF FOAMED IN PLACE MASONRY INSULATION

A.
B.
C.
2.2
NRG Foam, Inc. - (CORE-FILL 500) P.O. Box 40365, Mesa, AZ, Tel.: (480) 354-3530.
Jesco Incorporated - (Rapco) 235 E Industrial Park Blvd., Florence, SC 29504, Tel: (800) 874-5372.
Architect approved equal.
INSULATING MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
General: Provide insulating materials which comply with requirements indicated for materials,
compliance with referenced standards, and other characteristics.
Foamed-In-Place Masonry Insulation: Thermal insulation consisting of two components when properly
ratioed and mixed, together with compressed air or non HCFC propellant, produce a cold-setting foam
insulation in the hollow cores of hollow unit masonry walls.
Fire-Resistance Ratings:
1.
Minimum four (4) hour fire resistance wall rating (ASTM E119) for 8" and 12" concrete masonry
units when used in standard two (2) hour rated CMUs.
2.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread, smoke developed and fuel contributed of
0, 5 and 0 respectively.
3.
Combustion Characteristics: Must be noncombustible, Class A building material.
4.
Thermal Values: "R" Value of not less than 4.9" at 32 deg F mean; ASTM C177.
5.
Sound Abatement: Minimum Sound Transmission Class ("STC") rating of 53 and a minimum
Outdoor Indoor Transmission Class ("OITC") rating of 44 for 8" wall assembly (ASTM E90).
07214 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION AND PREPARATION

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
Application Assemblies:
1.
Block Walls: 6", 8", 10" or 12" concrete masonry units
2.
Cavity Walls: 2" cavity or greater
Install foamed-in-place insulation from interior, or as specified, prior to installation of interior finish work
and after all masonry and structural concrete work is in place.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections
in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance.
1.
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections
capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.
INSTALLATION OF FOAMED IN PLACE INSULATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.3
Install insulation in accordance with manufacturers written recommendations.

Fill all open cells and voids in hollow concrete masonry walls where shown on drawings.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice,
rain, or snow.
Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and electrical outlets in walls is
completed.
The foam insulation shall be pressure injected through a series of 5/8" to 7/8" holes drilled into every
vertical column of block cells beginning at an approximate height of 4'-0" from finished floor level.
1.
Repeat this procedure at an approximate height of 10'-0" above the first horizontal row of holes (or
as needed) until the void is completely filled.
Patch holes with mortar and score to resemble existing surface.
Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location
of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and that insulation completely
encapsulates piping.
RIGID PRE-FORMED MASONRY INSULATION
A.
B.
Contractor has the option to use rigid core preformed concrete masonry insulation inserts.
1.
For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from
manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
2.
Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are
otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
Insulation materials must meet or exceed the requirements of Section 1.3 herein.

07214 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 07241 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all rigid insulation assemblies and composite wall cladding of
rigid insulation and applied coatings at exterior walls including installation, flashing, paint, adhesives,
mesh, backer rod, and sealant.
deliver, and install all insulation assembly work, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with local
codes and standards, or as specified herein, to provide an Exterior Insulation and Finish System class
PB. This work shall include but not be limited to design and fabrication of insulation assemblies and
associated reinforcing, support of other work, culling, fitting, cleaning, finishing, and painting.
1.
Related Sections:
a.
Section 04810, Concrete Masonry Units
b.
Section 06100, Rough Carpentry
c.
Section 09250, Gypsum Wall Board Assemblies"
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.3

Product Data For each type of material and product indicated:
1.
Provide data on system materials, product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, and
complete installation specifications.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, penetrations, terminations, fasteners, and attachments
to other work.
3.
Maintenance data.
Mockups Provide 8-0" x 8-0" mock-ups as required by Section 01400.
Material certificates for each type of product indicated.
1.
Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements, standards, and
type designations within standards.
2.
Conform to applicable UL codes for system fire resistance ratings and flame/smoke ratings of
finish.
3.
Provide written ICC report to Architect, stating system is approved for installation over plywood
substrate for Type 5 buildings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
projects have a record of successful in-service performance, with a minimum of five (5) years
experience, and approved by manufacturer for type of warranty required.
and in the Specifications herein. Impact Resistance: Standard.
1.
Positive and Negative Wind-Load Performance: Capability to withstand wind loads indicated when
tested per ASTM E330.
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB
07241 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.4
2.
Water/Weather-Resistive-Barrier Coating: Comply with ICBO-ES AC24.
Certification: Product certificates, and test reports signed by manufacturer, certifying materials comply
with specified performance characteristics, criteria, and physical requirements.
1.
References:
a.
ASTM C578 - Preformed cellular polystyrene thermal insulation.
b.
ASTM D2842 - Water absorption of rigid cellular plastics.
c.
ASTM EM - Test method for surface burning characteristics of building materials.
d.
ICC-ESR-1794.
e.
NFPA 255 - Test of surface burning characteristics for building materials.
f.
UL 723 - Tests for surface burning characteristics of building materials.
Application Inspections and Warranty
1.
Provide manufacturers five (5) year warranty covering materials and labor in EIFS system.
2.
Warranty requirements include:
a.
Plan review by EIFS manufacturers engineering department with written copies to Architect,
applicator and general contractor.
b.
Written substrate inspection performed by manufacturers representative prior to installation
of EIFS system.
c.
Final written inspection at the completion of the EIFS system installation performed by
manufacturers representative.
d.
Copies of written inspections will be forwarded to Architect.
3.
Manufacturers warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have
under Contract Documents.
4.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.5
not permitted.
enclosures, and handled by methods which avoid exposure to moisture. Protect adhesives and finish
materials from freezing by storing in an environment recommended by the manufacturer. Additional
requirements for product delivery, storage and handling are in Section 01600.
PRODUCT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
1.
Cold Weather Requirements: Do not install finish when ambient temperature is below 40 deg F,
Maintain temperature during and 24 hours after installation of finish.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide EIFS and system components identical to
those of EIFS and system components tested per test method indicated below by UL or another testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.
Fire-Resistance Characteristics: ASTM E119.
2.
Full-Scale Fire Test: Tested mockup per ASTM E108.
07241 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.
4.
Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition of EIFS when tested according to NFPA 268.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Insulation board, adhesives, base coats, and finish coats with
flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 450 or less, per ASTM E84.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.2
Expanded polystyrene board insulation Type A, refer to drawings for thickness.

Insulation Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer.
Base Coat Material: Recommended by manufacturer.
Fiberglass Mesh: 4oz standard field mesh; 20oz, high impact mesh, refer to drawings for use of high
impact mesh.
Finish Coat: Factory mixed integrally colored 100% pure acrylic based material, texture and color as
indicated on the drawings (see exterior elevations). When required finish coat shall match that of the
adjacent buildings.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.3
Senergy, Inc., SenerFlex EIFS.

Sto Industries, Inc., Sto EIFS.
Dryvit, Outsulation.
Parex, Inc., Parexeifs.
Omega Products International, Akroflex
ACCESSORIES
A.
Backer rod and sealant: Recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 INSTALLATION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
Verify that substrate and adjacent materials are clean and dry.
Verify substrate surface is flat and free of irregularities.
INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
Install insulation in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

Place boards in a method to maximize tight joints.
Stagger vertical joints.
Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent board and to protrusions.
COATING INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
Install primer/adhesive base coat, coating and glass fiber mesh reinforcement in accordance with
manufacturers instructions.
Apply primer/adhesive base coat to a minimum thickness to fully embed reinforcement mesh wrinklefree.
Lap fiberglass mesh edges and ends 2-1/2 minimum.
Trowel-apply finish of approved color and texture to a total minimum thickness as recommended by
manufacturer.
07241 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
E.
F.
3.4
Finish to a uniform texture.

Apply sealant as perimeter in accordance with Section 07920.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Do not permit finish surface to become soiled or damaged.

07241 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 07411 - STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2

1.
"Structural Metal Roof Panels over steel deck, (when project utilizes steel deck). Depending on
roof type and construction, panels to be either mechanically seamed standing seam or panels with
an integrated batten. See Section 2.1.B-D for further clarification.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.3
The General Contractor and Sub-Contractor must execute the provided Conformance submittal for each
product specified.
Samples: For each exposed finish and for each color and texture required.
Provide two (2) copies of Maintenance Manuals for metal roofing describing Maintenance and Cleaning
Procedures. Include those manuals with the Project Closeout Documents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.4
A.
B.
1.5
Water Penetration: No water penetration of assembly per ASTM E1646 at a minimum differential
pressure of 20% of inward acting, wind-load design pressure of not less than 6.24 lb/sq. ft. and not more
than 12.0 lb/sq. ft.).
Wind-Uplift Resistance: UL 580, Class 90.
Air infiltration in accordance with ASTM E 1680.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide products identical to those tested for fire
resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or
from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.
2.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
Applicators qualifications: Three years minimum experience in applications of metal roofing.
WARRANTY
Special Weathertight Warranty:
1.
Furnish written warranty signed by installer for two (2) year period from the date of construction
completion of building covering repairs required to maintain roof and flashings in watertight
condition.
2.
Furnish written standard weather tightness warranty signed by manufacturer for twenty (20) year
period from the date of construction completion of building covering Weather Tightness repairs
required to maintain roof and flashings in watertight condition.
Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or
replace roof panels that show evidence of finish deterioration within 20 years from date of Final
Acceptance. Deterioration of finish includes, but is not limited to, color fade, chalking, cracking, peeling,
and loss of film integrity.
A.
B.
C.
Transport and handle all materials in such a manner as to prevent damage. Dumping on the Ground is
not permitted at any time.
Locate storage piles, stacks or bins to avoid or protect material from heavy and unnecessary traffic.
UPDATED: MAY 5, 2014

07411 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
intact, and bearing the name of the manufacturer and brand name, installation instructions and
identification of various items.
Damaged materials shall be replaced at roofing contractor's expense.
Store and protect all materials in a dry area, protected from water, exposure to harmful weather
conditions, and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.
1.
Store Moisture sensitive materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location. Insulation
must be on pallets, off the ground, and tightly covered with waterproof materials.
2.
Additional Requirements for product delivery, storage, and handling are in Section 01600.
All materials, except membrane, shall be stored between 60 deg F and 80 deg F, and protected from
water and direct sunlight.
1.
Keep all sealants and cleaning materials away from all ignition sources.
2.
Store materials containing solvents in dry, well ventilated spaces with proper fire and safety
precautions. Keep lids on tight. Use before expiration of their shelf life.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ROOF PANELS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Standing-Seam Assembly: Factory-formed, standing-seam roof panel assembly designed for concealed
mechanical attachment of panels to roof deck.
1.
Clips: Minimum 24 gauge (0.024 thick) galvalume panel clips designed to meet negative-load
requirements.
2.
Cleats: Mechanically seamed cleats formed from minimum 24 gauge, galvalume sheets.
Panels for Radius applications are to be mechanically seamed systems. Seam height to be a minimum
of 2. Panel widths to be 14-16: Uninsulated, fabricated from metal sheet type indicated.
1.
Manufacturers: Basis of Design: McElroy Metal. Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide products by, or equal to, the following:
a.
Span Lok by AEP-Span, Dallas, Texas
b.
UC 3 by Firestone Metal Products, Anoka, Minnesota.
c.
Maxima ADV by McElroy Metal. Shreveport, Louisiana.
d.
Curved Zee Lok by Berridge Manufacturing Company, Houston, Texas
Panels for Roof Slopes less than 3:12 are to be mechanically seamed systems. Seam height to be a
minimum height of 2. Panel widths to be 14-16 Uninsulated, fabricated from metal sheet type
indicated.
1.
a.
Span Lok by AEP-Span, Dallas, Texas
b.
c.
Maxima by McElroy Metal. Shreveport, Louisana.
d.
Zee Lok by Berridge Manufacturing Company, Houston, Texas
Panels for Roof Slopes 3:12 or greater are to be a snap together system with an integral batten. Seam
height to be a minimum of 1 : Uninsulated, fabricated from metal sheet type indicated.
1.
a.
Design Span by AEP-Span, Dallas, Texas
b.
c.
Medallion Lok by McElroy Metal. Shreveport, Louisiana.
d.
Cee Lok by Berridge Manufacturing Company, Houston, Texas

07411 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet coated by hot-dip process and prepainted by coil-coating
process to comply with ASTM A653 or ASTM A755/A755M with strippable protective film over
finish coat.
a.
Zinc coated sheet steel ASTM A653 G90 Grade A lock forming quality or Aluminum-Zinc
Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet (Galvalume): ASTM A792, Class AZ-50 coating, Grade 40;
structural quality.
b.
Thickness: 0.024", unless otherwise indicated.
c.
Organic Coating (Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000): Fluoropolymer, two-coat, thermocured system
with fluoropolymer coat containing not less than 70% polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight.
i.
Color: As indicated on the drawings.
ii.
Furnish appropriate long life air-drying system finish in matching color for touchup.
iii.
0.3 mil baked-on primer per manufacturers recommendations (no substitution).
Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible.
Panel Joints:
a.
Fabricate to form weathertight seals.
b.
Fabricate for installation in a manner that prevents metal-to-metal contact and minimizes
noise from movements within panel assembly.
UNDERLAYMENT AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A.
B.
C.
D.
Felts (if shown on drawings): ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts.
Accessories: Components required for complete roof panel assembly including fasteners, trim, copings,
fascia, mullions, sills, corner units, ridge closures, clips, seam covers, battens, flashings, gutters,
sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match materials and finishes of panels.
1.
Fasteners:
No. 10-1 x 1 AZ-55 A-point fastener, pancake head Phillips drive screws (as per
manufacturer requirements for structural roof panels).
2.
Closure Strips: Fabricate closures from metal and apply with sealant tape above and below. Cut
or premold to match configuration of panels. Provide closure strips necessary to ensure
weathertight construction.
3.
Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100% solids, polyisobutylene compound with release paper
backing; permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, and nonstaining.
4.
Elastomeric Joint Sealant:
ASTM C 920, of base polymer, type, grade, class, and use
classifications required to seal joints in panel roofing and remain weathertight and recommended
by panel manufacturer.
Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, cold-applied asphalt mastic compounded for 15-mil dry film
thickness per coat that is inert, noncorrosive, and free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other
deleterious impurities.
Expansion-Joint Sealant: Nonsetting, nonhardening, nonmigrating, heavy-bodied polyisobutylene
sealant for use at hooked-type expansion joints that must be free to move.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
General: Coordinate metal panel roofing with other adjoining work to provide leakproof, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
Panel Installation: Anchor securely in place with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1.
Field cutting exterior panels by torch is not permitted.
2.
Install panels with concealed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
Accessories: Install components required for complete roof panel assembly.
1.
Separate dissimilar metals by painting each metal surface in area of contact with a bituminous
coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each metal surface, or by other
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals.

07411 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
D.
E.
F.
Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants as required for weatherproof performance of
panel assemblies.
1.
Install weatherseal under ridge cap. Flash and seal panels at eave and rake with rubber,
neoprene, or other closures to exclude weather.
2.
Seal panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints
where recommended by panel manufacturer.
Standing-Seam Roof Panel Assembly: Fasten panels to supports with concealed clip.
1.
Install clips at each support with self-drilling/self-tapping fasteners.
2.
At end laps of panels, install sealant tape between panels.
3.
Factory applied sealant shall be installed in all non-curved panels.
Cleaning:
1.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as soon as each panel is
installed.
2.
After completing panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer
and maintain in clean condition during construction.
3.
Touch up minor scratches with matching touch-up paint.
4.
Replace damaged materials that cannot be cleaned, touched up, or restored to original factory
product condition.

07411 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 07540 - TPO MECHANICALLY FASTENED ROOFING SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all Mechanically Fastened Roofing components, consisting of
0.060 thick, white Thermoplastic Polyolefin Membrane System, including installation, membrane,
polyisocyanurate insulation, adhesive, sealant, edge sealant, flashing, cleaner, walkway pads, fasteners,
and testing.
deliver, and install all Mechanically Fastened Thermoplastic Polyolefin Membrane System work, as
indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with local codes and standards, or as specified herein,
whichever is more stringent. This work shall include but not be limited to design and procurement of
Mechanically Fastened Thermoplastic Polyolefin Membrane System, 0.060 thick white membrane,
related materials, and associated reinforcing, cutting, sealing, gluing, fastening, cleaning, insulating,
fitting and filling.
Related Work:
1.
Unless supplied by Manufacturer, metal work securement is not included in this specification and is
excluded from the Membrane Systems Warranty. Fastening of metal should prevent the metal
from pulling free or buckling. Metal work must be sealed to prevent moisture from entering the
roofing system or the building.
2.
Metal work is not included in the Warranty unless it is supplied by Manufacturer or designated as
part of a Total Roofing System and a Golden Seal Warranty is approved and purchased for the
project.
3.
Consult appropriate installation data for the proper securement of metal components supplied by
Manufacturer.
The Roofing System cannot be installed on:
1.
Projects which are higher than 50'-0".
2.
Projects which are located in areas requiring wind speed warranty greater than 55 MPH peak
gusts.
3.
Projects where fasteners exceed 12 in length.
4.
Air Pressurized Buildings, and cold Storage or Freezers.
5.
Projects where the Membrane is expected to come in direct contact with Petroleum based products
or other potentially destructive chemicals.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.

Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
Must be submitted to GAF for approval.
3.
Approved shop drawings are required for inspection of the roof and on projects where technical
assistance is requested.
4.
Shall be approved and assigned a number by GAF Roofing Materials Corporation.
5.
Shop drawings shall include:
a.
Outline of roof and size
b.
Location and type of all penetrations
c.
Perimeter and penetration details
d.
Membrane Sheet layout and sizes
e.
Number of Sure-Weld flashing roofs by width.
f.
Insulation manufacturer, brand and thickness
TPO MECHANICALLY FASTENED ROOFING SYSTEM

07540 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
1.3
g.
Fastener manufacturer, brand and length
h.
Warranty type and period (20-year Golden Seal Warranty)
i.
Completely executed Notice of Award
j.
Deck type
6.
When project conditions require, authorized applicators are to supply GAF Roofing Materials Corp.
with an as-built shop drawing. For inspection, as-built drawings must:
a.
Conform to most current published specifications and details at the time of installation.
b.
Be Approved and numbered by Manufacturer (GAF Roofing Materials Corporation).
Due to the fluted design of Steel Decks, the Decking may require overlayment of HP recovery board, or
exterior gypsum board, for adequate stability of the Membrane underlayment.
The minimum combined substrate for acceptable membrane fastening shall be 1/2 recovery board or
gypsum board.
When field conditions necessitate modifications to the originally approved Shop Drawings, a copy of the
Shop Drawings, outlining all modifications shall be submitted to GAF for approval.
Along with the project submittals (shop drawings and Request for Warranty), the roofing contractor must
include pullout tests when:
1.
Fasteners are used in conjunction with Plywood decking less than 5/8 in thickness.
2.
Fasteners are used in conjunction with Oriented Strand Board (OSB) decking. OSB IS NOT TO
BE USED ON HORIZONTAL APPLICATIONS.
For all projects (prior to inspection by Manufacturer) a final Shop Drawing must be approved by
Manufacturer.
Maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Installer Qualifications:
1.
Roofing System must be installed by a Manufacturer authorized roofing applicator to provide a
watertight/weathertight complete installation.
2.
Upon completion of the installation, an inspection shall be conducted by a technical representative
of the roofing manufacturer to ascertain that the roofing system has been installed according to the
System's most current published specifications and details.
3.
There shall be no deviations made from this specification or the approved shop drawings without
the PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL of the roofing system manufacturer listed above.
4.
Roofing Systems Installer shall comply with all applicable Building Codes. The Installer shall verify
and consult local jurisdictional codes for requirements, limitations, and restrictions.
and in the Specifications herein to provide a watertight/weathertight installation.
Testing and Inspections: As required by the latest industry codes and standards and / or the
Manufacturer, whichever is the most restrictive.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire-test-response
characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG,
or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E108, for application and roof slopes indicated.

07540 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
G.
H.
I.
1.4
Pre-installation Conference: Conduct on-site pre-installation conference. Attendees should include:

General Contractor, Owners Representative/Architect, Building Owner, Subcontractor, and
Manufacturers representative.
Warranty:
1.
A 20-year Total System Warranty is required. Manufacturer must be contacted for a project
specification, detail and wind design review during the design stage and PRIOR to project Bid and
installation. Information required for the wind design review shall be submitted on Manufacturer
Pre-Installation Wind design Review Form.
2.
Manufacturers Warranty: Submit for Owners acceptance, manufacturers standard warranty
document executed by an authorized Company Official. Manufacturers warranty is in addition to,
and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.
3.
Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years commencing upon the date of Substantial Completion.
4.
Additional requirements for Product Warranties are included in Section 01600.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.5
Transport and handle all materials in such a manner as to prevent damage. Dumping on the Ground is
not permitted at any time.
Locate storage piles, stacks or bins to avoid or protect material from heavy and unnecessary traffic.
intact, and bearing the name of the manufacturer and brand name, installation instructions and
identification of various items.
Damaged materials shall be replaced at roofing contractor's expense.
Store and protect all materials in a dry area, protected from water, exposure to harmful weather
conditions, and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.
1.
Store Moisture sensitive materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location. Insulation
must be on pallets, off the ground, and tightly covered with waterproof materials.
2.
Additional Requirements for product delivery, storage, and handling are in Section 01600.
All materials, except membrane, shall be stored between 60 deg F and 80 deg F, and protected from
water and direct sunlight.
1.
Keep all adhesives, sealants and cleaning materials away from all ignition sources.
2.
Do not store adhesive containers with opened lids.
3.
Store materials containing solvents in dry, well ventilated spaces with proper fire and safety
precautions. Keep lids on tight. Use before expiration of their shelf life.
4.
If exposed to lower temperatures, restore materials to 60 deg F minimum temperature, before
using product on project.
PRODUCT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
This system must not be applied on Projects where the roof slope exceeds 18 vertical in 12 horizontal,
a 1.5 to 1 slope. When the slope exceeds 5 vertical in 12 horizontal, use of an automatic welding
machine may be more difficult. A hand welder is recommended, and should be utilized.
Existing roofing material must be investigated by the specifier and all wet material must be removed.
Existing phenolic insulation and sprayed-in-place urethane roofs must be removed prior to installation of
this roofing system.
Coordination between the trades is essential to avoid unnecessary traffic over sections of the roof
system and to prevent damage to the membrane.
Cold Weather Requirements: See delivery and Storage requirements above.
Hot Weather Requirements: See delivery and Storage requirements above.

07540 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
G.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted Weather Conditions
permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturers written instructions and warranty
requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.2
This Specification Section includes the furnishing and installation of Mechanically Fastened, 0.060 thick
white Thermoplastic Polyolefin Membrane System as needed to provide a complete and watertight
roofing system.
The Components of this roofing system shall be products of GAF EverGuard TPO Plus or accepted as
compatible.
Approved equal systems are Carlisle Sure-Weld or Stevens/EP Systems.
1.
This system has 4'-0" or 5'-0" wide mechanically fastened perimeter sheets. Perimeter sheets are
5-0" wide (when used with 10-0" wide field sheets) or 4-0" wide (when used with 8-0" wide field
sheets).
2.
Mechanically fastened field membrane sheets are either 8'-0" or 10'-0" wide depending upon wind
load requirements or roof deck criteria. Membrane sheets shall be joined together by hot air welds.
3.
Furnish and install this 0.060 (60 mil) white surface Mechanically Fastened Roofing System in
strict accordance with drawings and specifications as approved by Manufacturer.
When applicable, insulation shall be installed in multiple layers. The first and second layers of insulation
shall be mechanically fastened to the substrate in accordance with the manufacturers written
specifications.
The roofing membrane shall conform to the minimum physical properties of ASTM D4434.
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
B.
2.3
All products shall be furnished by GAF and specifically formulated for the intended purpose.
1.
Flashing: Reinforced Membrane
2.
Walkways: Heat Weldable Walkway Rolls
3.
Bonding Adhesives: Per Manufacturer
4.
Edge Sealant: Cut Edge Sealant
5.
Sealer: Water cut-off Mastic, and PT 304 Sealant
6.
Pocket Sealant: TPO Molded Pocket Sealant
7.
Cleaner: Weathered Membrane Cleaner
8.
Brite-Ply Splicing Cement
9.
Membrane Cleaner
10. Pre-molded Inside / Outside Corners
11. Pipe Flashings and Sealant Pockets
12. Fasteners and Fastening Plates, as required by Manufacturer
13. Copings, Counterflashings, and other miscellaneous metal work not supplied by Manufacturer shall
be furnished and installed as recommended by the Manufacturer to prevent Metal from pulling free,
buckling, and sealed to prevent moisture from entering the Roofing System or Building.
PRIOR TO THE USE OF ANY PRODUCT, CONSULT MANUFACTURER'S SAFETY DATA BULLETIN
FOR APPLICABLE CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS.
ROOF DECK CRITERIA
A.
B.
Defects in the roof deck must be reported and, Documented to the Specifier, General Contractor and
Building Owner for assessment.
Acceptable decks and applicable Manufacturer Fasteners:

07540 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.
C.
2.4
Steel- 22 Gauge or heavier: Manufacturer Fasteners/ SXHD Plates are required with minimum pullout strength of 500 lbs per fastener.
2.
Lightweight Insulating Concrete, over steel: Manufacturer Fasteners/ SXHD Plates are required
with minimum pull-out strength of 360 lbs per fastener (into steel decking below the Concrete).
3.
Structural Concrete- 3,000 PSI or greater: Manufacturer Drill-Tec Concrete Spikes or HD 14-10
Fasteners (with SXHD Plates) are required with a minimum pull-out strength of 800 lbs per
fastener.
4.
Wood Plank or minimum 15/32 thick Plywood: Manufacturer Fasteners/ SXHD Plates are required
with minimum pull-out strength of 360 lbs per fastener. If the minimum pull-out cannot be achieved
in Plywood Decks, then the HD Woodie Fastener may be used, providing that the minimum pull-out
strength of 360 lbs per fastener can be achieved.
Oriented Strand Board (OSB): Shall be an acceptable roof deck only when OSB has prior approval, in
writing by roofing membrane manufacturer, and Roofing Installation Contractor, and only when
specifically requested by Building Owner.
1.
When required by Building Owner, the OSB shall be an approved Weyehauser or approved
Potlatch Board. No Substitutions.
2.
OSB shall be rated to comply with ICC Legacy Report number NER-108 (latest published edition)
and APA report PRP-108, shall be rated for exposure to the Exterior, Exposure I, and shall have a
span rating equal to or better than the Plywood it replaces, with an equal thickness as plywood.
FASTENERS
A.
B.
C.
General: For all projects, a test installation with the proposed membrane underlayment and fastener is
strongly recommended.
The Manufacturers Fastener is required to have minimum pull-out strength of 360 lbs per fastener,
unless noted otherwise within the Specifications. The thickness of insulation is limited to 1-1/2 when HD
Woodie Fasteners are used. Where OSB deck is used (minimum 5/8 thickness), Manufacturers
Fasteners / SXHD plates may be used, providing the pull-out strength meets minimum strength
requirements stated above.
The withdrawal resistance of fasteners will greatly depend on the physical condition of the respective
deck and the type of fastener used.
1.
Due to the fluted design of most steel decks, a specific effort is required to ensure 3/4" deck
penetration by every fastener. It is also recommended that the fasteners only be installed in the
top flutes of the metal deck. Pre-construction / bid / installation investigation of deck alignment,
physical conditions and rib depth shall be performed, along with the practice of making a test
installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
WORKMANSHIP
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Applicators installing new Roof, Flashing, and Related Work shall be factory trained and approved by the
Manufacturer they are representing.
All Work shall be of the highest quality and in strict accordance and compliance with the Manufacturers
written recommendations / Specifications.
The Roofing system shall be installed in accordance with approved Shop Drawings, and as approved by
the Manufacturer.
When loading Material onto the roof, the Manufacturer Authorized Roofing Applicator must comply with
the requirements of the Building Owner to prevent overloading and possible disturbance to the Building
structure.
Schedule and execute work to prevent leaks and excessive traffic on completed roof sections. Care
should be exercised to provide protection for the interior of the Building and to ensure water does not
flow beneath any completed sections of the Membrane System.

07540 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.2
PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
Shall convene one week prior to commencing the Work of this Section.
Attendees to this meeting shall include the General Contractor, Architectural Representative, Building
Owner, Roofing Sub-Contractor, and Materials Supplier.
The Conference is to confirm the Scope of work, and response of the various attendees.
The Roofing Contractor shall be responsible for all means and methods as they relate to safety, and
shall comply with all applicable Local, State, and Federal requirements as they relate to Safety. Safety
shall be the responsibility of the Roofing Contractor. All related personnel shall be instructed daily to be
mindful of the full time requirements to maintain a safe environment for the facilitys occupants including
Staff, Visitors, Customers, and the occurrence of the General Public on or near the Project Site.
SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
3.4
On retrofit- recover projects, cut and remove wet insulation, as identified by specifier, and fill all voids
with new insulation, so that the new insulation is relatively flush with the existing surface.
The surface on which the insulation or roofing membrane is to be applied shall be clean, smooth, dry,
and free of projections or contaminants that would prevent the proper application of or be incompatible
with the new installation, such as fins, sharp edges, foreign materials, oil, and grease. (For all Projects,
substrate must be even without noticeable high spots or depressions, and must be free of accumulated
water, ice or snow.)
Clear the substrate of debris and foreign material. Fresh bitumen based roof cement must be removed or
concealed under new construction.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
3.5
When feasible, Contractor shall begin the application at the highest point of the highest roof level and
work to the lowest point to prevent moisture infiltration and to minimize construction traffic on completed
Sections.
This will include the completion of all flashings, terminations, and daily seals.
Refer to the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets and Technical Data Bulletins for applicable cautions,
warnings and remedies.
INSULATION ATTACHMENT
A.
B.
C.
Manufacturer Insulation shall be mechanically fastened to the roof deck as follows:

1.
For Recovery Board or minimum 1-1/2 thick Polyisocyanurate, a minimum of 5 fasteners and
plates per 4-0" x 8-0" board are required.
2.
For Polyisocyanurate less than 1-1/2 thick a minimum of 6 fasteners and plates per 4-0" x 8-0"
board are required.
3.
Insulation Boards 4-0" x 4-0", regardless of thickness, must be fastened at the minimum rate of
one (1) fastener and plate every four (4) SF.
4.
Plates and fasteners shall be from one source. Piranha Plates or equal, Seam Fastening Plates (2
diameter) or Insulation Fastening Plates (3 diameter) must be used with appropriate Manufacturer
Fastener for Insulation attachment. Mixing Plates from one manufacturer and Fasteners from
another shall not be acceptable.
5.
Steel- 22 Gauge or heavier: Manufacturer Fasteners/ SXHD Plates are required with minimum pullout strength of 500 lbs per fastener.
Due to the fluted design of most steel decks, a specific effort is required to ensure 3/4" deck penetration
by every fastener. It is also recommended that the fasteners only be installed in the top flutes of the
metal deck. Pre-construction / bid / installation investigation of deck alignment, physical conditions and
rib depth shall be performed, along with the practice of making a test installation.
Decking Material heavier than 22 gauge may require pre-drilling.

07540 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.6
MEMBRANE PLACEMENT, ATTACHMENT AND HOT AIR WELDING

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.7
A minimum of one perimeter sheet shall be installed at edges of each roof level and either 10-0" or 8-0"
wide membrane shall be installed in the field of the roof.
Membrane sheets shall be mechanically fastened with the appropriate Manufacturer Fastening/
Fastening Plate spaced 6 to 12 On Center, depending on project criteria, within the membrane splice.
Refer to the Design Criteria section for required number of perimeter membrane sheets and fastener
spacing.
Overlap adjacent membrane sheets approximately 5-1/2 at those locations where Fastening Plates are
located (along the length of the membrane) and a minimum of 2 at end sections (width of membrane).
Hot Air Weld the membrane sheets a minimum of 1-1/2 with an automatic Hot Air Welding Machine.
Membrane that has been exposed to the elements for approximately 7 days must be prepared with
Membrane Cleaner, prior to seaming / welding.
Wipe the surface where Membrane Cleaner has been applied with a clean dry HP Splice Wipe or other
white rag to remove any cleaner residue prior to hot air welding.
Apply Cut Edge Sealant on all cut edges of reinforced membrane in accordance with Manufacturers
written recommendations / instructions.
ADDITIONAL MEMBRANE SECUREMENT
A.
3.8
The membrane must be secured at the perimeter of each roof level, roof section, expansion joint, curb,
skylight, interior wall, penthouse, etc., at any angle change which exceeds 2 in one horizontal foot and
at all other penetrations in accordance with Manufacturers Details as published with Manufacturers
Specifications.
MEMBRANE FLASHING
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.9
Flash all walls and curbs with reinforced membrane. Non-reinforced membrane shall be limited to inside
and outside corners, field fabricated pipe seals, scuppers, and sealant pockets where the use of premolded accessories are not feasible.
Terminate the flashing in accordance with the appropriate Manufacturer Termination Detail. Use the
longest pieces of material which are practicable.
On vertical surfaces, such as walls, curbs and pipes, bonding Adhesive is not required when the flashing
height is 12 or less, and the membrane is terminated under a metal counterflashing (nailed).
When a coping or termination bar is used for vertical terminations, Bonding Adhesive may be eliminated
for flashing heights of 18 or less.
ROOF DRAINS
A.
B.
3.10
A.
B.
C.
Manufacturer recommends the use of standard compression ring style drains.

Prepare the substrate around roof drains to prevent membrane bridging or distortion and to provide a
smooth transition from roof surfaces to drain clamping ring.
OTHER RELATED WORK
Heat Weldable Walkway Rolls are required when walkway pads are specified and are heat welded to the
Roofing Membrane.
When concrete Pavers are used, they shall be loose laid and installed in conjunction with a slip sheet of
reinforced membrane or two layers of protective mat material. Concrete pavers are not to be used when
the roof slope is greater than 2 vertical per 12 horizontal.
Interlocking Rubber Pavers, 24 x 24 x 2, weighing approximately 6 lbs per SF, may be loose laid
directly over the membrane. Installation instruction sheets are available from the Manufacturer.

07540 - 7

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
D.
3.11
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.12
A.
B.
C.
3.13
A.
3.14
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.15
A.
Copings, Counterflashing and other metal work, not supplied by Manufacturer, shall be fastened to
prevent the metal from pulling free or buckling. Metal work must be sealed to prevent moisture from
entering the roofing system or the building.
INSULATION
For energy efficiency, multiple layers of insulation are used, and joints shall be staggered between
layers, and in both directions.
Only use Manufacturers supplied insulation material for this system. The performance or integrity of
products by others is not covered by the Manufacturer Warranty.
Insulation:
1.
Polyisocyanurate (ASTM C578) II-b: 2 layers providing 4.0 minimum thickness and 5.0
thickness, maximum, total thickness shall have an R value of 30 (R-30).
EPS insulation cannot be installed directly over Coal-tar Pitch.
Composite Insulation shall be installed with the HP recovery Board side up, when Recovery Board is
required.
Recovery Board shall be installed dark side up when Recovery Board is required.
For all steel decking with ribs spaced wider than 1-3/4" apart, Contractor shall contact Manufacturer for
approval.
All insulation Board shall be butted together with no gaps greater than 1/4. Gaps greater than 1/4 shall
be filled with same and like material as insulation.
On Remodeling Projects, or on projects with an existing roof, batt insulation suspended below the roof
deck shall be installed. Thickness shall be such to achieve a value of R-30.
SPLASH BLOCKS
Splash Blocks: Splash blocks shall be required beneath all downspouts which drain from a higher roof
surface to a lower one.
Pre-fabricated splashguards or concrete paver blocks are acceptable.
Contractor shall use a protection board or slip sheet of reinforced membrane beneath the splash block
for protection of the deck membrane.
Immediately correct any identified defects in workmanship, or irregularities noticed as part of the
installation.
CLEANING
Perform daily cleanup to collect all wrappings, empty containers, paper, and other debris from the project
area / site. Upon completion, all debris must be disposed of in a legally approved / acceptable manner.
Remove bonding adhesive, bituminous markings and other contaminants from finished surfaces.
In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by asphalt or any source of soiling caused by the work of this
section, consult Manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to those instructions.
Prior to the Manufacturers inspection for Warranty, the applicator must perform a pre-inspection to
review all work and to verify all flashing has been completed as well as the application of all caulking and
sealants.
MAINTENANCE
Upon completion of the Roofing System, Contractor shall make arrangements for semi-annual inspection
and maintenance.

07540 - 8

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all flashing, sheet metal work, and related items
including but not limited to installation, flashing, trim, fasteners, expansion joints, nails, welding rods,
solder, caulk, sealants and roofing underlayment.
deliver, and install all flashing and sheet metal work, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with
local codes and standards, or as specified herein. This work shall include but not be limited to design
and fabrication of flashing and sheet metal, associated soldering, welding, cutting, cleaning, fitting,
mitering, fastening, and sealing.
Coordinate trade jurisdiction with respect to installing sheet metal items in conjunction with the roofing,
and exterior wall finished surfaces including face brick and EIFS.
Refer to membrane roofing section for installation procedures for roofing-related items.
Provide the sheet metal items in sufficient time to avoid delays to the construction progress.
1.
Section 07540 TPO Roofing System
2.
Section 07920, Caulking, Sealants and Joint Closures"
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.3

Submit fabrication and detailed shop drawings:
1.
Drawings shall indicate layouts, type of material, gauge, dimensions, and seams,
2.
Show details for fastening and anchoring methods, joints, supports, and provisions of expansion
and contraction.
Submit samples for each type of sheet metal flashing and trim for review in accordance with Sections
01330 and 01600.
1.
Submit three, 8" x 8 samples where exposed as finish surface.
material and test reports, substantiating compliance with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
1.
Standards: Quality, Procedures and Methods Recommended by SMACNA Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual, Latest edition.
2.
Investigate the requirements of the roofing manufacturer as related to sheet metal items. Quality
and installation shall conform to the roofing manufacturer's requirements, to permit the issuance of
the required guarantees.
07620 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.4
Warranty:
1.
2.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
not permitted.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Galvanized Sheet Metal: ASTM A653 gauge as indicated on the drawings or as specified (24 gauge
minimum) (22 gauge at copings).
Solder: ASTM B32, 50% tin and 50% lead, used with rosin flux.
Plastic Cement: FS SS-C-153, Type I.
Caulking: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, A, O.
Reglets and counterflashing: As manufactured by Fry Reglet Corporation, Type MA, ST.
Nails, Screws, Rivets: Same material as flashing sheet, or other as recommended by manufacturer of
flashing sheet.
Cleats: Same metal and gauge as sheets being anchored, 2" wide, punched for 2 anchors.
Underlayment: Grace Ice and Water shield- self-adhering roofing underlayment, black.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
WORKMANSHIP
A.
B.
C.
Surfaces to receive sheet metal shall be clean, dry, and free from projections or other defects that would
affect the application. Report any unsatisfactory surfaces to the Architect.
Where dissimilar materials abut, provide proper separation or protection to minimize the possibility of
galvanic action.
Provide for thermal expansion of running trim, flashing, expansion joints, and other items exposed for
more than 15'-0" continuous length.
1.
Maintain a watertight installation at expansion seams.
07620 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.
D.
E.
F.
3.2
Locate expansion seams as shown, or if not shown, at the following maximum spacing for each
general flashing use:
a.
Flashing, expansion joints, gravel stops, and trim: at 10'-0" intervals, and 24" on each side
of corners and intersections.
b.
Sealant-type expansion joints; where sealant-filled expansion joints are used, embed and
hooked flanges of the joint members not less than 1.0" into the sealant.
i.
Form joints to completely conceal the sealant.
ii.
When ambient temperature is moderate at the time of installation (40 deg to 70 deg
F), set joint members for 50% movement either way.
iii.
Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures.
iv.
Do not install sealant type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.
v.
Installation of sealant is specified in Section 07920.
Fabricate and install sheet metal with lines, arrows, and angles sharp and true, and plane surfaces free
from objectionable wave, warp or buckle.
Hem exposed edges to form a 1/2" wide hem on the side concealed from view.
Forming, anchoring, expansion and contraction details shall conform to the current edition of the
SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
SOLDERING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
Except where other methods of joining are indicated or specified, solder all joints, and connections of
sheet metal work.
Remove grease and dirt from metal surfaces to be joined.
Remove all flux residue by scrubbing, neutralizing with ammonia, or a 5-10% solution of washing soda
followed by a clear water rinse.
Assemble parts and solder using regular non-corrosive rosin flux.
Heat metal thoroughly to completely sweat solder through full contact area.
REGLETS
A.
3.4
Provide watertight reglets in masonry or stucco to receive cap flashings.

COUNTERFLASHING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.5
Provide metal counterflashing at top edges of built-up base flashings and at other location indicated.
Form flashing in 8'-0" or 10'-0" lengths, except where shorter pieces are required.
Lap end joints a minimum of 3".
1.
Do not solder or weld joints.
2.
Make flashing continuous at angles.
3.
Counterflashing shall overlap base flashing a minimum of 4" unless otherwise indicated.
Where counterflashing terminates in reglets, fasten flashing with lead wedges every 12".
1.
Fill reglets continuously with sealant compound.
2.
Sealing compound shall be synthetic rubber type as specified herein.
Where prefabricated counterflashing and reglet system is used, form the upper edge of counterflashing
with an approved snap lock flange to engage the reglet receiver and to provide a spring action at bottom
edge against the built-up flashing.
METAL EDGINGS
A.
B.
C.
Provide metal edgings at exposed edges of built-up roofs.

Fabricate from 24 gauge galvanized iron, profile as indicated on the drawings.
Form in 8'-0" or 10'-0" units.
1.
Form corner sections by mitering and spot welding or riveting the flange and seal with sealant.
07620 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.
D.
3.6
Form expansion joints between units with 6" wide back-up plate and cover plates formed to exact
profile of gravel stop.
3.
Fill space between units and plates with sealant.
Extend flanges of metal edges out on top of built-up roofing not less than 4".
1.
Set in full bed of plastic cement.
2.
Spread full bed of plastic cement between sheets at laps.
3.
Nail 1" from back edge at 6" o.c. into wood nailer.
4.
Use neoprene washers on nails.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORT FLASHING (Pitch Pans / Pitch Pockets)
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.7
The use of a pitch pan may be used to flash a small penetration through roofing where it is impossible to
use any other type of flashing.
Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment.
Pitch pans shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the latest SMACNA Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual and as specified herein.
1.
The flanges extend a minimum of 4" onto the roof, and are fastened over the roofing felts.
2.
Flashing shall be installed around roof penetration in a square or rectangular shape. Pitch pan
should be 2" longer, and 2" wider than the support it is flashing.
3.
The flange is stripped in by the roofer.
4.
Sides extend a minimum of 4" above the roof.
5.
All joints shall be seamed and sealed.
Weld or seal flashing with butyl sealant to equipment support member.
Pitch pan shall be filled by the roofer. Fill bottom of pan to a depth of 1" with asphaltic plastic cement.
Fill remainder of pan flush with the top with pitch.
Bonnet flashing should be used to cover a pitch pan.
Pitch pans require maintenance.
SCUPPERS, LEADER BOXES
A.
B.
3.8
Provide galvanized metal scuppers and leader boxes, as indicated on the drawings or as specified
herein.
Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, construct scuppers and leader boxes in parapet walls in
accordance with Figure 1-27-A and Figure 1-25C of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual (24 ga.
min.)
DOWNSPOUTS
A.
B.
C.
3.9
Downspouts shall be sized in accordance with Table 1-3 of the SMACNA Architectural Steel Metal
Manual.
Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, construct downspouts in accordance with Figure 1-32A and
Figure 1-31B-2 of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and as detailed (22 ga. min.). Gutter
straps shall be 18 ga. min.
Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, provide downspout hangers in accordance with Figure 135D of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and as detailed.
GUTTERS
A.
B.
C.
Gutters shall be sized in accordance with Table 1-5 of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, provide gutters in accordance with Figure 1-2, Style A of
SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, (20 ga. min.).
Construct downspout-gutter connections in accordance with a secured and sealed joint, as shown in
Figure 1-33D, of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
07620 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all roof hatch assemblies including installation, roof curbs,
covers, flanges, fasteners, insulation, safety posts, and finishing.
install all roof hatch and skylight assemblies, as indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein. This
work shall include but not be limited to design and fabrication of roof hatches and skylights, and
associated welding, reinforcing, support of other work, cutting, insulating, fitting, fastening, cleaning and
priming.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.3

Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
Submit product design drawings for review prior to fabrication.
3.
Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.
Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNAs Architectural Sheet Metal Manual details for
fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated.
Warranty:
1.
2.
Warranty Period:
a.
Roof Hatches: Two (2) years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.
3.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.4

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
not permitted.
Locate stacks or bins to avoid or protect material from heavy and unnecessary traffic.
enclosures, and handled by methods which avoid exposure to moisture, Store moisture-sensitive
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
This specification is based on roof hatches manufactured by the Bilco, Co., New Haven, CT., or
Babcock-Davis, Brooklyn Park, MN.
1.
Products equaling or exceeding this specification as manufactured by Babcock-Davis Associates,
Inc., or Inland Steel Products Company are acceptable for bidding.
Roof hatches shall be Bilco Model S-20, or Babcock-Davis Type B-RHG. Provide units with insulation.
No substitutions.
1.
Covers shall be galvanized steel, prime painted, 14-gauge with 3" beaded flange neatly welded.
2.
Insulation shall be glass fiber, 1" in thickness, fully covered and protected by a galvanized steel,
prime painted, 22-gauge metal liner.
3.
Curb shall be 12" high of galvanized steel, prime painted, 14-gauge, formed with a 3-1/2" flange
with holes provided for securing to roof deck.
4.
Equip curb with an integral metal cap flashing of the same gauge and material as the curb, full
welded at the corners for absolute weather tightness.
5.
Insulation on exterior of the curb shall be 1" thick rigid fiberboard.
Safety Posts: Bilco LadderUp Safety Post LU-1 at roof hatch, two posts shall be required. One on each
side of the ladder.
Provide roof hatch ladders as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with Section 05500,
Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications.
Padlock: Refer to Hardware schedule in Section 08710, Finish Hardware, for manufacturer and size.
Roof Hatch Railing: Bil-Guard Hatch Railing System, Model #RL-S by Bilco Co., or Standard Roof Hatch
Safety Railing, Model #RHSR-SS-3630 by Safety Rail Source.
Zinc-Coated Steel: Commercial quality with 0.20% copper, ASTM A525, G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill
phosphatized.
Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with water-borne preservatives for above ground use,
complying with AWPBLP-2; match roofing insulation total thickness.
Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other non-corrosive
metal.
Gaskets: Tubular or fingered design of neoprene or polyvinyl chloride, or block design of sponge
neoprene.
Bituminous Coating: FS TT-C-494 or SSPC-Paint 12, solvent type bituminous mastic, nominally free of
sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coating.
Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; non-hardening, non-skinning, non-drying, non-migrating sealant.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
M.
N.
Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer, which is compatible with joint
surfaces, comply with FS TT-S-0027, TT-S-00230, or TT-S-001543.
Roofing Cement: ASTM D2822, asphaltic.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
3.2
Furnish mechanical fasteners consistent with the roof requirements.

Coordinate installation of roof accessories with installation of deck, insulation, flashing, roofing
membranes, penetrations, other equipment, and construction involving roof accessories to ensure that
the combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor roof accessories securely so they are
capable of withstanding lateral, thermal, inward, and outward pressures.
Install roof accessory items according to construction details of NRCAs Roofing and Waterproofing
Manual, unless otherwise indicated.
Separation: Separate metal from incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by coating
concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or providing other permanent
separation.
Test unit operations for proper performance of operable components. Clean, lubricate and adjust joints
and hardware.
Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof
accessory installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling,
leaking, and fastener disengagement.
Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as
recommended by manufacturer.
Coat concealed side of roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous
metal, or cementitious construction.
1.
Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories directly on
cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet,
or install a course of polyethylene underlayment.
Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment,
excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
Seal joints with sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean surfaces according to manufacturers written instructions. Repair all damaged coatings.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 07920 - CAULKING, SEALANTS AND JOINT CLOSURES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the furnishing and installation of all caulking, general sealants, fire-rated sealants,
joint closures, and related materials including acrylic latex based, silicone based, non-elastomeric 2component polyurethane based, back-up material and joint filler, primer, polyethylene tape, solvents, and
cleaning agents.
Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to furnish and install all
sealant and joint work, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with local codes and standards, or
as specified herein. This work shall include but not be limited to cleaning, caulking, sealing, tooling,
taping, and priming.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.3

Shop Drawings:
1.
Clearly show layout, joint width, length, designation, number, type, location and materials required.
Submit samples of all materials herein, in quantity directed, for review in accordance with Sections
01330 and 01600.
1.
Sealant samples shall be of the color(s) proposed for use.
2.
Caulk a section of joint (at all job conditions requiring caulking) at least 7 days prior to start of
caulking, for review by the Owner Representative. When approved, the sample shall be used as a
standard of comparison for the remainder of the work.
3.
Closure samples shall be of the color proposed for use.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
All fire retardant sealants and related materials shall conform to the following applicable standards:
1.
ASTM E119 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
2.
ASTM E814 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
3.
UL 1479 Firestops, fire tests of through penetrations.
4.
All products shall have been tested and classified by UL. Refer to UL Building Materials Directory:
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ)", and "Fill, Void or Cavity Materials (XHHW)".
Comply with the latest local codes and standards, and the requirements of ASTM C920, ACI 301, ACI
302, ASTM C1193, and ASTM C1330 as applicable.
Installer Qualifications: Applicators to have five (5) years minimum experience in performing work of this
section, specializing in installation of work similar to that required for this project, employing workers who
are skilled in this area of work, and whose projects have a record of successful in-service performance,
and approved by sealant manufacturer if required.
Certification: Product certificates and test reports, signed by manufacturer, certifying materials comply
with specified performance characteristics, criteria, and physical requirements.
07920 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
H.
I.
1.4
Warranty:
1.
2.
Warranty Period: Five (5) years commencing on Date of Certificate of Occupancy.
3.
Guarantee shall be issued jointly by the General Contractor and applicators from the date of
Certificate of Occupancy.
4.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.5
not permitted.
intact, bearing the name of the manufacturer and brand, and product designation.
humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. Some materials may need to be stored indoors at
room temperature prior to installation, and handled by methods which avoid exposure to moisture. Store
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.6
Cold Weather Requirements: Do not apply sealants in temperatures or to material below 40 deg F.
Clean joints before installation.
Caulk joints before final coat of paint or before application of any clear or stain waterproofing
compounds.
Do not apply sealants to surfaces that are wet.
A.
B.
C.
Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint
seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
Compatibility and adhesion test reports.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
EXTERIOR SEALANTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
All sealants used on exterior of project are to be 2-component polyurethane base, including inside
surface of exterior joints.
Elastomeric Joint Sealant shall be 2-component base of liquid (or paste equal) polyurethane.
Sealant shall be in colors selected by Architect.
Sealants shall conform to the following:
1.
Traffic Joints: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T (Fast Drying)
07920 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.
3.
2.2
Horizontal Joints: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T (Fast Drying)
Other Joints: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, A, or O
INTERIOR SEALANTS
A.
B.
C.
2.3
All sealant used on interior of project are to be acrylic latex base, unless noted otherwise.
Sealant shall be acrylic latex base conforming to ASTM C834. Colors shall be as selected.
All sealants in toilets are to be silicone based.
1.
Sealant shall be silicone base conforming to FS TT-S-001543, Type II, Class A, as manufactured
by Dow Corning Corporation, Midland, MI, or General Electric Company, Waterford, NY.
2.
Color shall be selected by Architect.
SEMI-RIGID FLOOR JOINT FILLER
A.
2.4
Semi rigid floor joint filler shall be EUCO QWIKJoint 200, as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical
Company. Refer to Section 03300, Concrete.
NON-ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A.
2.5
At roof flashings and scuppers: As required by Roofing Manufacturer's Recommendations.

1.
Primer: Where required, shall be used as recommended, in writing, by the manufacturer. The
primer shall have been tested for non-staining characteristics and durability on samples of actual
surfaces to be sealed.
2.
Back-up materials and preformed joint fillers shall be non-staining, compatible with sealant and
primer, and of a resilient nature, such as closed cell polyethylene rod, closed cell urethane or
Neoprene rod, or elastomeric tubing or rod (Neoprene, butyl, or EPDM). Materials impregnated
with oil, bitumen or similar materials shall not be used. Size and shape shall be as indicated by
joint details on drawings and shall be as recommended by sealant manufacturer in writing.
Sealant shall not adhere to back up material.
3.
Bond Breakers: Where required, shall be polyethylene tape (or equal) as recommended by
manufacturer of sealant, in writing.
4.
Solvents, cleaning agents and other accessory materials shall be as recommended by sealant
manufacturer in writing.
FIRE RETARDANT SEALANT MATERIALS
A.
B.
2.6
This specification is based on products manufactured by 3M Brand Fire Protection Products, 3M Center,
Building 207-1s-02, St. Paul, MN 55144-1000, Tel: (888) 364-3577.
Products shall be 3M Brand Fire Barrier Penetrating Sealing Systems, one part composition, synthetic
elastomeric organic/inorganic intumescent material, as follows:
1.
CP-25 WB + (caulk)
2.
Mouldable Putty (putty)
3.
FS-195 + (wrap/strip)
4.
CS-195 + (composite sheet)
JOINT CLOSURE SYSTEMS
A.
Colorseal as manufactured by Emseal Joint Systems, LTD., 108 Milk St., Suite 3, Westborough, MA
01581, Tel: (800) 526-8365 or (508) 836-0280. (Local Representative: 21 Tech Company, 1121 W.
Honeysuckle Lane, Chandler, AZ 85248, Attn: Tony Valdez, Tel.: (480) 812-8800.)
1.
Colorseal: Cured silicone factory bellows facing on greyflex water-based acrylic impregnated
expanding polyurethane foam anchoring system.
a.
Color: As specified by Architect.
b.
Size: 3/4 up to 10 wide to meet application requirements.
07920 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
c.
Warranty: 5 year warranty
Solvents, cleaning agents and other accessory materials shall be as recommended by closure
manufacturer in writing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
WORKMANSHIP
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.2
General: Qualified applicators (5 year minimum successful experience in application of joint sealers
specified) shall apply sealants in conformance with manufacturer's written directions. Some products
must be applied by one of the Sealant Manufacturers Approved Applicators.
Examine all surfaces and report all conditions not acceptable.
Install all products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, ACI 302, ASTM C1193, ASTM
C1330, and other applicable codes and standards.
Apply sealant under pressure with hand or power actuated gun or other appropriate means. Gun shall
have nozzle of proper size and provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints as designed. All joint
surfaces shall be tooled to provide the contour as indicated.
Preparation:
1.
Thoroughly clean all joints, removing all foreign matter such as dust, oil, grease, water, surface dirt
and frost. Sealant must be applied to the base surface. Previously applied paint or primer must be
entirely removed.
2.
Porous materials such as concrete or masonry shall be cleaned where necessary by grinding,
blast-cleaning, mechanical abrading, acid washing to combination of these methods to provide a
clean, sound base surface for sealant adhesion.
3.
Laitance shall be removed by acid washing, grinding or mechanical abrading.
4.
Form oils shall be removed by blast cleaning.
5.
Lose articles present or resulting from grinding, abrading or blast cleaning shall be removed by
blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air (or vacuuming) prior to application of primer or
sealant.
6.
Non-porous surface, such as metal and glass, shall be cleaned either mechanically or chemically.
Protective coatings on metallic surfaces shall be removed by a solvent that leaves no residue.
Solvent shall be used with clean cloths or lintless paper towels. Do not allow solvent to air dry
without wiping. Wipe dry with clean, dry cloth or lintless paper towels.
7.
Joint areas to be protected with masking tape or strippable films shall be cleaned before application
of tape or film.
8.
All joints to receive sealant shall be as indicated on Shop or Project Drawings. Do not seal joints
until they are in compliance with Drawings or meet with the approval of the Architect.
Unless otherwise indicated, for joints in concrete or masonry: depth of the sealant may be equal to the
width in joints up to 1/4" wide. For joints 1/2" to 1" wide: depth shall be 1/2". For expansion and other
joints 1" to 2" wide: depth shall not be greater than half the applied sealant width. For joints exceeding
2" in width: depth shall be as directed by sealant manufacturer.
For joints in metal, glass and other non-porous surfaces: sealant depth shall be a minimum of half the
applied sealant width, and shall in no case exceed the applied sealant width.
Joints to receive sealant, back-up material or pre-formed joint filler shall be cleaned out, raked to full
width and depth as required.
Joints shall be of sufficient width and depth to accommodate specified back-up material or preformed
joint filler and sealant.
SEALANT APPLICATION
A.
Install back-up material or joint filler of type and size specified, at proper depth to provide sealant
dimensions as detailed.
07920 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.3
Back-up material shall be of suitable size and shape; and compressed 25-50% to fit joints as
required.
2.
Sealant shall not be applied without back-up material and/or bond breaker strip.
3.
When using back-up tube, avoid lengthwise stretching.
4.
Tube or rod shall not be twisted or braided.
Apply masking tape, where required, in continuous strips in alignment with joint edge.
Prime surfaces, where required, with primer as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
Follow sealant manufacturer's instructions regarding mixing (if required), surface preparation, priming,
application life, and application procedure.
Apply, tool and finish sealant as required. When tooling sealants, use tooling solution recommended by
sealant manufacturer. Remove masking tape immediately after joints have been tooled.
Clean adjacent surfaces of sealant as work progresses. Use solvent or cleaning agent as recommended
by sealant manufacturer. All finished work shall be left in a neat, clean condition.
FIRE RATED SEALANTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.4
Qualified applicators shall apply sealants in conformance with manufacturer's written directions.
Remove loose debris and oil from penetration surfaces.
1.
Install hangers or damming material if necessary.
2.
Place the required amount of firestopping material in the penetration to obtain the desired rating (1,
2, or 3 hour rating).
3.
If required, install top cap and smoke seal.
Methods:
1.
All depth requirements are the installed or "wet" depth.
2.
Precaution: During application of CP-25 and Putty 303, keep away from heat, open flame, sparks
or other sources of ignition until product cures.
a.
Use only with adequate ventilation.
3.
All joints to receive sealant shall be as indicated on Shop or Project Drawings.
4.
Do not seal joints until they are in compliance with Drawings; or meet with the approval of the
Architect.
5.
Clean adjacent surfaces of sealant as work progresses.
a.
Use solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
6.
All finished work shall be left in a neat, clean cond.
SEMI-RIGID JOINT FILLER
A.
B.
3.5
Contractor performing the installation must be one of the Manufacturers Approved Applicators.
Comply with recommendations of ACI 302 for use of joint fillers as applicable to the materials, and
conditions indicated. Do not use joint sealant backing if not recommended by manufacturer.
1.
Joints must be clean and dry.
2.
Remove all materials that may inhibit proper bonding.
3.
Follow manufacturers written instructions for installation of individual materials for each application.
JOINT CLOSURE INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
Qualified applicators (five (5) years minimum successful experience in application of joint closures
specified). Install closures in conformance with manufacturer's written directions.
Preparation:
1.
Thoroughly clean all joints, removing all foreign matter such as dust, oil, grease, water, surface dirt
and frost. Closure must be applied to the base surface. Previously applied paint or primer must be
entirely removed.
07920 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Porous materials such as concrete or masonry shall be cleaned where necessary by grinding,
blast-cleaning, mechanical abrading, acid washing to combination of these methods to provide a
clean, sound base surface for sealant adhesion.
3.
Laitance shall be removed by acid washing, grinding or mechanical abrading.
4.
Form oils shall be removed by blast cleaning.
5.
Lose articles present or resulting from grinding, abrading or blast cleaning shall be removed by
blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air (or vacuuming) prior to application of closure.
6.
Non-porous surface, such as metal and glass, shall be cleaned either mechanically or chemically.
Protective coatings on metallic surfaces shall be removed by a solvent that leaves no residue.
Solvent shall be used with clean cloths or lintless paper towels. Do not allow solvent to air dry
without wiping. Wipe dry with clean, dry cloth or lintless paper towels.
7.
NOTE: Unpainted metal and natural stone surfaces may require priming. See manufacturers
recommendations.
8.
Joint areas to be protected with masking tape or strippable films shall be cleaned before application
of tape or film.
All joints to receive closure shall be as indicated on Shop or Project Drawings.
Application:
1.
See manufacturers recommendations for joint closure size based on joint size. Follow
manufacturers recommendations for closure installation.
General Applications:
1.
Ensure material nominal size matches joint size.
2.
Remove shrink-wrap packaging, hardboard, and self-adhesive release paper.
3.
Wipe factory-applied release agent off silicone facing using clean, lint-free rag made damp with
toluene.
4.
Apply thin bead of silicone sealant along edge of bellows at end where the material will join with
next length.
5.
Insert material into joint with at least a 1/4 (6mm) recess and adhere to one side. Material
expands to contact other side of joint-gap. (Wedge larger sized material in place while it expands).
6.
Bend silicone at joints into the silicone bellows to create a consistent finished appearance being
sure not to restrict the folds of the bellows.
7.
Once material has equalized its expansion across the joint, gun and tool a 1/4 x 1/4 (4mm x 4mm)
corner bead at the substrate-to-bellows interface.
8.
Clean adjacent surfaces of sealant as work progresses.
Use solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by closure manufacturer.
All finished work shall be left in a neat, clean condition.
PART 4 - SCHEDULE
4.1
CAULKING
A.
B.
Provide caulking at the following locations. This schedule is not to be construed to be complete. Provide
caulking at other areas as required to provide a watertight building.
1.
Control joints in masonry surfaces, interior and exterior.
2.
Control joints and expansion in concrete surfaces, interior and exterior.
3.
Perimeter of door frames, interior and exterior.
4.
Perimeter of window frames, interior and exterior.
5.
Perimeter of louvers and grilles, interior and exterior.
6.
Perimeter of aluminum sections, interior and exterior.
7.
Top edge of all reglet/counterflashing assemblies.
At interior partitions caulking is required at all joints between dissimilar materials where the joint width
exceed 1/16".

07920 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
4.2
SANITARY CAULKING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
4.3
Caulk all joints, seams, cracks, etc., mech., janitor and toilets.
Typical joints to be caulked are as follows:
1.
Juncture of all wall panels with floor or base.
2.
Juncture of door jambs or jamb covers with walls.
3.
Juncture of fixture with floor and wall.
4.
Around plumbing fixtures.
5.
All other similar locations.
Sanitary caulking shall be completed in a neat and careful manner, suitable to receive approval of Health
Department.
General Contractor shall be responsible for acceptance of all caulking under this division by the Health
Department.
All caulking shall receive a written five (5) year guarantee.
FIRE RATED SEALANTS
A.
Provide fire-rated sealants at the following locations. This schedule is not to be construed to be
complete. Provide fire-rated sealant at other areas as indicated on the drawings.
1.
Fire seal all penetrations made by ducts, cable, power and/or telephone, conduit, pipe, (steel,
plastic, insulated or un-insulated)
2.
Thickness of sealant shall be appropriate to provide same fire-rating as the fire wall/floor assembly
it penetrates.

07920 - 7

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 08110 - INTERIOR STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all interior steel door frame assemblies including installation,
clips, hinges, reinforcement, hardware, paint, and finishing.
deliver, and install all interior steel door frame work, as indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein.
This work shall include but not be limited to design and fabrication of door frames and associated
welding, anchoring, aligning, inspecting, reinforcing, cutting, fitting, cleaning and painting.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.3

Shop Drawings:
1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.4
and in the Specifications herein:
1.
Provide door frames manufactured by Timely Industries or approved equal.
Testing: As required by the latest industry codes and standards
Warranty:
1.
2.
3.
A.
B.
Upon delivery to the job, store frames in manufacturer prepared packaging and in a vertical position covered to prevent moisture damage and damage from ongoing construction activities.
not permitted.
08110 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
enclosures, and handled by methods which avoid exposure to moisture. Additional requirements for
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
INTERIOR STEEL DOOR FRAMES

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Frames to be roll-form or break frames to standard profiles as indicated on the Drawings, and shall be
constructed from 18 gauge primed steel for all door installation conditions.
Frames shall be provided at all gypsum board door openings and at window openings as indicated on
documents or otherwise shown.
Frames shall be finished with factory applied primer paint.
All frames are to be in compliance with ASTM A568 and ASTM Al 008.
1.
Prepare frames for die formed, heat treated clips to assure tight casing fiT.
2.
Clips to be mechanically fastened to assure a secure and proper aligned installation.
Provide oval alignment slots to allow visual alignment of the frame in the rough opening. Slots to allow
for insertion of tool to move frame on the wall to avoid damage to wall finish.
All frames to 14 gauge hinge reinforcement plates applied to the frame and strikes for 2-3/4 T strike, or
as required, see Hardware Schedule Section 08710.
1.
Provide standard field applied reinforcement (i.e. TA-b and/or TA-12 as applicable reinforcement
bracket for door closers) for all surface mounted hardware as required.
2.
Verify locations where reinforcement must be applied prior to installation of frame over the wall.
Provide frames with UL labels as required or as indicated.
All window installation conditions provide 22 gauge prefinished steel.
1.
Frames shall be full bound and sized to match as indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein.
Frames shall have factory-applied primer paint.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION - DOOR FRAMES

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
Prior to installation, examine all openings to verify proper rough opening dimensions, wall thickness,
blocking or other requirements to assure proper performance. Frames to be installed over finished walls
and anchored through the faces into the structure in compliance with manufacturers requirements.
Use a prefit template door or actual door for the opening to assure alignment and clearance. Doors and
glass are to be prefit according to frame manufacturers requirements.
Anchor with drywall screws for frames at all locations. Recommended fasteners are 1-1/4 bugle head
drywall screws.
Verify all hardware requirements for each opening to provide proper reinforcement, preparation and
anchorage for adequate performance and long life.
Align all parts with proper clearance to assure proper fit, tight miters and desired performance.
INSPECTION

08110 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
A.
B.
C.
Installer must examine substrates and conditions under which prefinished steel frames are to be
installed, and notify the contractor in writing of any detrimental conditions for proper and timely
completion of work.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
installer.
Inspect each opening for proper operation, correct hardware, and general appearance upon completion.

08110 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 08111 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL
****ALL MATERIAL IN THIS SECTION TO BE PURCHASED THROUGH NATIONAL ACCOUNT DISTRIBUTOR,
GIRTMAN AND ASSOCIATES.
CONTACT KAREN BRADY (855) 447-8600 EXT 1538 OR AT
sprouts@girtman.com FOR NATIONAL ACCOUNT PRICING****
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all hollow metal doors, fire rated doors, and metal frame
assemblies including installation, clips, shims, hinges, reinforcement, hardware, paint, and finishing.
deliver, and install all hollow metal frame and door work, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance
design and fabrication of door frames and associated welding, anchoring, aligning, inspecting,
reinforcing, cutting, fitting, cleaning and painting.
1.
Section 08710, "Finish Hardware."
2.
Section 08800, Glass and Glazing."
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.3

Product Data: For each type of material and product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, core descriptions, label compliance, fire-resistance rating, and finishes for each type of
steel door and frame specified.
Shop Drawings: Clearly show layout, designation, number, type, location and materials required.
Welding Certificates
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Manufacture and install fire rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80.
and in the Specifications herein. All doors and frames shall meet specified requirements and SDI-100 for
unit welded frames and doors, and the NAAMM "Hollow Metal Technical and Design Manual".
Warranty:
1.
2.

08111 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
I.
J.
K.
1.4
3.
Fire-Rated Door Sidelight and Transom Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that
are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for
fire-protection ratings indicated.
1.
Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric (neutral) pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.
Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fireprotection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each individual
glazed light.
Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.5
Transport, handle, and store, doors and frames in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.
Store materials in a vertical position, covered and placed on 4 wood sills in a manner to prevent rust,
moisture damage, and damage from ongoing construction activities.
Provide wood slats between doors to avoid any metal-to-metal contact. Leave doors in stored position
until ready to hang.
Identify each door and frame per shop drawings.
Locate materials away from heavy and unnecessary traffic. Dumping on the ground is not permitted.
Store all packaged materials in original, unopened, undamaged containers, with identification labels
enclosures, and handled by methods which avoid exposure to moisture. Additional requirements for
Opening Force Requirements:
1.
Accessible Doors: Not more than 5 lbf.
EXISTING HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
All existing (to remain) hollow metal doors and frames are to be in a like new condition and shall meet a
two (2) year warranty (like new doors and frames). All doors and frames are to be void of rust, dents,
holes and scratches. Repair door and frame by sanding and filling as required to provide a smooth finish
that is not identifiable.
Both the door and the frame are to be hung and set true and plumb.
Fit existing hollow metal doors accurately in frames with clearances to match new doors and frames as
noted in this section.
All existing reused hardware is to be secured to the door and frame and is to be in a fully functional and
operational condition to meet a two (2) year warranty (like new hardware). All new hardware is to be
provided and installed as noted on construction documents. All existing hardware that is defective is to
be replaced with new hardware to match the quality and finish of hardware specified in Section 08710,
Finish Hardware.
Existing doors and frames that have been modified and/or repaired are to be fully primed on all exposed
surfaces and then painted as indicated on the construction documents.

08111 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.2
Frames shall be pressed steel to profile indicated on the Drawings, 16-gauge (unless otherwise noted)
cold rolled, pickled, annealed steel, unit type welded construction, with angles, modes, returns and
miters neatly welded and weld beads ground smooth.
Prepare frames to receive mortised type hardware.
1.
Spot-weld reinforcing plates to inner surface of jambs at hinge, lock, latch, and other hardware
locations. Hinge reinforcements shall be 10-gauge steel for lightweight core doors, 7-gauge steel
for others.
2.
All other hardware reinforcements shall conform to SDI-100.
3.
Spot-weld 24-gauge galvanized steel plaster guards over hardware from templates furnished to
frame manufacturer by hardware supplier.
4.
Provide suitable reinforcements for surface applied hardware.
5.
Punch door stops to receive rubber silencers as required.
Provide frames with fixed insert anchors welded to face and flange returns 12" down from top, then 24"
on center.
1.
Provide frames with minimum 14-gauge floor clips welded to each jamb, face and flanges punched
for anchoring to floor.
2.
All anchors to be suitable for wall conditions.
3.
At door openings wider than 42" and at multiple openings, reinforce head members full length with
12-gauge steel channel.
4.
Brace door frames with temporary wood or metal spreaders to insure maintaining square and true
shapes in shipping.
5.
Frames or doors damaged in any way shall not be installed.
Provide frames with UL labels as required or as indicated on the Drawings.
Provide frames with loose glazing beads with screws for flush countersunk installation to receive glass
per SDI-100.
PRIMING FOR FRAMES
A.
B.
2.3
Frames to receive one shop coat of light gray zinc chromate rust inhibitive primer, baked on.
Primer shall be smooth surface, ready to receive finish coats at time of delivery and when installed.
1.
No runs, overspray, dust or other defects will be allowed.
2.
Primer shall be bonded to metal sufficiently that upon aging it will not chip or flake when scraped
through.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Construct hollow metal doors, flush type, 1-3/4" thick, of 2 sheets of finest grade 18-gauge cold rolled
steel.
1.
Vertical stiffeners shall be 22 gauge steel "U" forms, spot welded to each inside face of the door full
height and not more than 6" apart.
2.
Reinforce top and bottom of doors horizontally by steel channels, full width spot welded to each
face at least 4" O.C. Joints at the edges of doors shall be continuously welded automatically by the
gas shielded method arc process.
3.
Arc welding and filling seams are not acceptable.
Doors shall have inorganic sound deadening material non-combustible batt-type applied to the interior
surface of panels. Sound deadening shall eliminate all metallic reverberations incidental to normal door
operation. Provide polystyrene U 0.39 core insulated door at exterior locations.
Provide double doors with one-piece astragals of 12-gauge steel.
Provide solid drip cap at top of all exterior out-swinging doors.

08111 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.4
Accurately mortise doors for locks and hinges. Provide adequate reinforcement in accordance with
Table IV SDI-100 and NAAMM CHM-1.
Provide louver doors as scheduled.
1.
Provide sight proof louvers either pierced into the panels of the doors or inserted into the panels.
2.
Form louver frames of minimum 20-gauge steel.
3.
Weld or tenon minimum 24-gauge blades to frame and fasten the entire assembly to the door with
moldings.
4.
The moldings, when used, shall be an integral part of the louver.
Provide for glazing in doors as scheduled:
1.
Non-removable minimum 20-gauge glazing stops shall occur on the outside of exterior doors and
on the reverse side of interior doors.
2.
Glazing beads on the inside of glass panels shall be removable.
Provide doors with UL labels as required or indicated.
Knob mounting height 38" A.F.F. (see Section 08710 for exterior handles or knobs).
PRIMING FOR DOORS
A.
B.
2.5
Doors to be thoroughly cleaned, bonderized and primed with shop coat of light gray zinc chromate rust
inhibitive primer, baked on.
Primer shall be smooth surface, ready to receive finish coats at time of delivery and when installed. No
runs, overspray, dust or other defects will be allowed. Primer shall be bonded to the metal sufficiently
that upon aging it will not chip or flake when scraped through.
STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A.
B.
C.
Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032" thick, fabricated from same material as door face
sheet in which they are installed.
Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with standard steel frames, minimum 5/8" high, unless
Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032" thick, fabricated from same material as frames
in which they are installed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
Contractor shall install steel doors, frames, finish hardware and appurtenances provided by the Owner
plumb, rigid, properly aligned, securely fastened in place, and as indicated on the Drawings, as specified
herein, and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
At fire-protection-rated openings, install doors and frames according to NFPA 80.
Install smoke control doors in accordance with NFPA 105.
Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and
masonry with mortar as specified in Division 4 Section "Concrete Masonry Unit Assemblies".
Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Install grout in lifts and take
precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout
forces.
FRAME INSTALLATION
A.
In concrete walls, provide adjustable T-strap type anchors, of not less than 16-gauge steel or 0.156"
diameter steel wire.
1.
Provide a minimum of four anchors per jamb for frames up to 8'-0" in height.
2.
For frames over 8'-0", provide one additional anchor for each 2'-0" or fraction thereof in height.

08111 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
D.
3.3
Frames in drywall partitions shall be equipped with anchors for both attachments through studs.
1.
Provide a minimum of 4 anchors at each jamb up to 9'-0" height fabricated from 18-gauge steel.
2.
Anchors shall be welded in the frame.
At each jamb of frames in masonry walls, provide at least three (3) "T" type loose masonry anchors
fabricated from 18-gauge steel up to 8'-0" high.
Floor anchor clips shall be fabricated from 14-gauge steel and shall be welded between the door frame
flanges.
1.
Anchor clips to floor with at least two power driven anchors or equivalent per clip to prevent twist
FRAME INSPECTION
A.
B.
3.4
Installer must examine substrates and conditions under which metal door and frames are to be installed
and must notify Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of
work.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
installer.
PLACING FRAMES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.5
Install metal doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with approved shop drawings, manufacturer's
data, and as specified herein
Except for frames located at in-place concrete or masonry and at drywall installations, place frames prior
to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings.
Set frames accurately in position, plumb, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set.
After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth
and undamaged.
Caulk frames to floor, typical.
DOOR INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames with clearances as follows:

1.
Between door and frame at head and jamb: 1/8"
2.
At door sill without threshold: 3/8" max.
3.
At door sill with threshold: 1/4" max.
4.
Between meet edges of pairs of doors: 1/8"
Note: No hardware is to be visible on hollow metal doors at building exterior.
Place fire-rated doors with clearance as specified in NFPA 80.
Install doors completely and accurately, complete with all finish hardware. Install finish hardware in a
neat workmanlike manner in accordance with the hardware schedule using only mechanics skilled in this
type of work.
1.
Do not install hardware until painting is completed.
2.
Keep all hardware free from scratches, dents or other defacements.
Adjust and Clean:
1.
Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer.
2.
Final Adjustments: Check and re-adjust operating finish hardware items, leaving metal doors and
frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective
work, including standard steel doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glass and Glazing" and with
standard steel door and frame manufacturer's written instructions.


08111 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 08210 - WOOD DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Provide complete wood doors

A.
1.2
Related Documents:
1.
Section 08111, "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames."
2.
Section 08710, "Finish Hardware."
3.
Section 09911, "Painting."
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.3

Shop Drawings:
1.
1.
Samples for each exposed finish provided.
Material and Equipment Submittals: Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330.
1.
Shop Drawings: Indicate elevations for each door type, location, size, fire ratings, swing,
undercuts, stile and rail reinforcement, internal blocking for hardware attachment, and cutouts for
glazing and louvers.
2.
Product Data: Submit product data for each type of door specified.
Closeout Submittals: Submit the following under provisions of Section 01770.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.4
Comply with requirements of the NWMA Industry Standard 1.S.1 Wood Flush Doors of the National
Woodwork Manufacturers Association.
Product Delivery, Storage and Handling: Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling.
Comply with the On-Site Care recommendations of NWMA pamphlet Care and Finishing of Wood
Doors and with manufacturers instructions.
Applicator: Company specializing in installing doors with three years documented experience.
Conform to requirements of AWI Quality Standards Section 1300, Architectural Flush Doors.
Fire Door Construction: Conform to ASTM E152.
Installed Doors: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class indicated.
All doors shall be provided by the same manufacturer to ensure uniformity of quality and appearance.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
C.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Construct fire rated doors and frames according to requirements of UL
10B. Each fire rated door and frame shall bear the appropriate UL labels.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Comply with positive pressure requirements of UL 10C and UBC 7-2. Door
assemblies shall bear the UL Label and supplemental S positive pressure fire label.
Furnish manufacturer's appropriate listed door to maintain rated assembly, including compatibility with
specified hardware.
WOOD DOORS
08210 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A.
1.6
Protect products under provisions of Section 01600.

1.
Do not deliver wood doors to jobsite until weatherproof storage is available. Store doors in a space
having controlled temperature and a relative humidity between 30 - 60%. Protect doors from direct
exposure to sunlight.
2.
Stack doors flat, off the floor and supported to prevent warpage. Do not walk or place other
material on top of stacked doors. Do not drag doors across one another.
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.7
Warranty: Provide written two (2) year warranty signed by door manufacturer, installer and Contractor
agreeing to replace defective doors. Door defects include, but are not limited to the following.
1.
De-lamination in any degree.
2.
Warp or twist of 1/4" or more in any 3'-0" x 7'-0" section of a door.
3.
Telegraphing of any part of core assembly through face veneer to cause surface variation of 1/100"
or more in a 3" span.
4.
Other defects which affect performance of door.
Warranty shall cover the cost of refinishing, installation of hardware and re-hanging defective doors.
Warranty shall be in effect for the following time periods.
1.
Provide manufacturers warranty for life of install on all solid core and hollow core wood doors.
EXISTING WOOD DOORS
A.
B.
C.
A.
All existing (to remain) wood doors are to be in a like new condition and shall meet a two (2) year
warranty (like new doors). All doors are to be void of holes and scratches. Repair door by sanding and
filling as required to provide a smooth finish that is not identifiable.
The door is to be hung and set true and plumb.
All existing reused hardware is to be secured to the door and frame and is to be in a fully functional and
operational condition to meet a two (2) year warranty (like new hardware). All new hardware is to be
provided and installed as noted on construction documents. All existing hardware that is defective is to
be replaced with new hardware to match the quality and finish of hardware specified in Section 08710,
Finish Hardware.
Existing doors that have been modified and/or repaired are to be fully primed on all exposed surfaces
and then painted as indicated on the construction documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
B.
2.2
It is the intention of the designers that the system meets the requirements of ADAAG.
Material and Equipment Submittals: Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330.
1.
Shop Drawings: Indicate elevations for each door type, location, size, fire ratings, swing, undercuts,
stile and rail reinforcement, internal blocking for hardware attachment, and cutouts for glazing and
louvers.
2.
Product Data: Submit product data for each type of door specified
FLUSH SOLID CORE INTERIOR WOOD DOORS AND 20 MINUTE FIRE-RATED DOORS
A.
Flush Solid Core Interior Doors: Flush min 5-ply with M.D.O. faces with solid particle core bonded to
stiles and rails using Type 1 waterproof glue; conforming to AWI Type PC-7.
1.
Quality Grade: AWI Custom
WOOD DOORS
08210 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.
B.
2.3
Stiles: Two-ply laminated stiles. Outer ply 1/4" hardwood to match veneer face; inner ply 1/4 " mill
option hardwood or softwood.
3.
Rails: 1-1/8" thick mill option hardwood or softwood. Thicker as required for hardware concealed
fastener.
4.
Door Thickness: 1-3/4" thick
Acceptable Manufacturers and Products.
1.
Algoma Hardwoods, Inc., Novodor Particle Core Doors.
2.
Eggers Industries, Master Flush-Particle.
3.
Lynden Door Co., CD200 Particle Board Core.
4.
VT Industries, Inc., Type 5502.
5.
Weyerhaeuser Company, Marshfield Series Timblend Particle Board Core DPC-1.
6.
Or equivalent with same performance and warranty. Sub-contractor takes responsibility for product.
OTHER FIRE-RATED DOORS
A.
2.4
Mineral core as required with M.D.O. faces to match non-rated doors- 1-3/4 flush construction.
ACCESSORIES
A.
2.5
Glass Stops:
1.
Non-Fire-Rated Doors:
a.
Algoma Hardwoods, Inc., Wood Beaded Lite W-4 Wood Bead.
b.
Eggers Industries, Wood Beaded Lite with No. 105 Wood Bead.
c.
Lynden Door Co.
d.
VT Industries, Inc., VT-1
e.
Weyerhaeuser Company, Marshfield Series, W-3 Wood Lite.
f.
Or equivalent with same performance and warranty. Sub-contractor takes responsibility for
product.
2.
20 Minute Fire Rated Doors:
a.
Algoma Hardwoods, Inc., 20 Minute Wood Beaded Lite with W-4 Wood Bead.
b.
Eggers Industries, 20 Minute Wood Beaded Lite with No.105 Wood Bead.
c.
Lynden Door Co.
d.
VT Industries, Inc., VT-1.
e.
Weyerhaeuser Company, Marshfield Series, W-3, 20 minute Wood Lite.
f.
Or equivalent with same performance and warranty. Sub-contractor takes responsibility for
product.
3.
Louvers: Manufacturer's standard matching wood inverted 'V' blade; sightproof.
FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
Fabricate non-rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements.

Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards and UL requirements. Permanently
attach fire rating label to door edge.
Provide non-rated and 20 minute rated flush doors with 1-3/8" thick minimum, 2-ply edge bands, with
outer ply 1/2" thick minimum edge strips of wood species compatible with to match face veneer.
Pre-fit and pre-machine doors for finish hardware, except for hardware items considered to be surface
mounted, as specified in Section 08710. Comply with AWI Section 01330 for factory pre-fitting and premachining.
WOOD DOORS
08210 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Examine door frames and verify that frames are correct type and have been installed for proper hanging
of corresponding doors.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.3
Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's requirements and AWI quality standards.
Install fire rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80.
Pilot drill screw and bolt holes for surface applied hardware items.
Prepare doors to receive surface mounted finish hardware in accordance with AWI requirements.
Conform to AWI requirements for fit tolerances.
Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.
Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging.
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A.
3.4
Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16" measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
D.
Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.

1.
Re-hang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely.
Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.
Job Site Finished Doors:
1.
See Painting Sections for requirements for finishing wood doors.
Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that doors will not be damaged after
installation.
WOOD DOORS
08210 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 08310 - IMPACT DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all impact doors and related items including installation,
hardware, and paint.
deliver, and install all impact doors and related work, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with
fabrication and installation of impact doors, and associated cutting, fitting, aligning, fastening, cleaning
and painting.
1.
Section 05500, "Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications."
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3

Shop Drawings:
1.
Submit complete detailed shop drawings prior to fabrication.
2.
Show, at large scale, the arrangement of pattern thickness, size or parts, size and location of
cutouts in doors, full size molding profiles, face veneers, core construction and door manufacturer's
name.
3.
4.
Schedule: Door and frame schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, construction details,
and other data pertinent to installation.
Substitutions shall be requested in accordance with Section 01230 and 01600 only if there is an
availability or lead time issue that will affect the construction schedule. If such a delay is found, General
Contractor is to contact Sprouts immediately.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.
Specifications based on impact doors manufactured by Mueller Door.
2.
The latest AWI Quality Standards, as modified below, and ANSI A-208.1, govern all work
hereunder.
Guarantee:
1.
Furnish manufacturer's standard "Life of the Installation" guarantee for all interior doors.
2.
Repair or replacement shall include reasonable cost for re-hanging and refinishing.
3.
Obtain detailed instructions on the limitations imposed on this guarantee by the door
manufacturer's recommendations with respect to storage, installation, and maintenance, and shall
notify all subcontractors of these requirements before any doors are delivered.
UPDATED: SEPTEMBER 5, 2014

08310 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
4.
5.
6.
1.4
Submit, for Owners acceptance, manufacturers standard warranty document executed by

authorized company official.
Manufacturers warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have
under Contract Documents, commencing on date of Certificate of Occupancy.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Do not deliver impact doors to the job site until a suitable storage room is provided to protect the doors
from elements.
1.
Examine doors for damage upon delivery. Verify proper shipping techniques were used.
2.
Store doors according to manufacturers instructions prior to hanging.
3.
Do not install doors until plaster and wallboard operations are completed and buildings are
protected from excessive temperature changes.
not permitted.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURER
A.
2.2
Impact doors shall be by one of the manufacturers listed, subject to all the detailed requirements of the
Specifications and Drawings:
1.
Mueller Door Corp.: 27750 W Concrete Dr., Ingleside, IL 60041, Tel.: (800) 981-2040 or (815) 3858550, Fax: (815) 385-8653. Email: Suzanne@MuellerDoor.com
Contact: Suzanne Miller Cell: (815) 385-8653
2.
Alternate Manufacturer (only if availability or lead time is an issue that will cause a construction
delay):
a.
Eliason Corporation: 9229 Shaver Road, Kalamazoo MI 49024, Tel.: (800) 828-3655, Fax:
(800) 828-3577.
Local Contact: Glen Oltmanns, Tel.: (714) 402-6265, Email: glenoltmanns@sbcglobal.net.
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Provide Impact Door as Manufactured by Mueller Door Co.

Single Doors to be Model Q250-500 as manufactured by Mueller Door co. Single Doors to be
construction of 1/2" total door thickness, Mueller proprietary FlexCore.
Pair Doors to be Model Q250-750 as manufactured by Mueller Door Co. Pair Doors to be constructed of
3/4 total door thickness, Mueller proprietary FlexCore.
Full perimeter gasket seals.
Window size: 10 wide by 22 high ADA Compliant, Patented Gasket Free
Window Glazing: Clear Polycarbonate

08310 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
G.
H.
I.
J.
Color: Black, verify with Architect prior to ordering.

Hinges: Double Action Q Series. Black Zinc Coated.
Jamb Guards: Integrated in the door beam.
Flat impact plates 36 high.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.2
Place frames prior to construction of enclosed walls and ceilings

Set frames according to manufacturers written instructions, accurately in position, plumb, aligned, and
braced securely until permanent anchors are set.
After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth
and undamaged.
Doors shall be accurately fit with proper clearances, and left in perfect working order.
All re-fitting necessary due to swelling, shrinking, faulty assembly or installation shall be done by the
contractor, without cost to the Owner, for a period of two (2) years after completion and acceptance of
the building.
When dressing or cutting has been done, these surfaces shall be repainted or varnished.
Provide standard pre-fit clearances of 1/8" at top, 1/8 each side, and minimum 3/8" at bottom; increase
bottom clearances over carpet and saddles. Verify gap requirements with local municipalities (health
department) prior to installing door or frame.
ADJUST AND CLEAN
A.
B.
C.
3.3
Final Adjustments: Check and re-adjust for proper operation.

Leave work in complete and proper operating condition.
Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise
damaged.
TOUCH UP
A.
Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rough or damaged areas and apply touch-up so that there
is no visual evidence of touch up.

08310 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 08311 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all impact doors and related items including installation,
hardware, and paint.
deliver, and install all access doors and related work, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with
procurement of access doors, and associated cuffing, fitting, cleaning and painting.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.3

Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
Schedule: Door and frame schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, construction details,
latching or locking provisions and other data pertinent to installation.
Samples for review in accordance with Sections 01330 and 01600. Submit samples for each type of
exposed finish.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.4
Warranty:
1.
2.
3.
A.
B.
not permitted.

08311 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
D.
E.
F.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL ACCESS DOORS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
2.2
Specification is based on access doors as manufactured by Karp Assoc., 54-54 43rd Street, Maspeth,
NY.
Comparable products equaling or exceeding specification requirements as manufactured by Bilco or
Milcor are acceptable for bidding.
Refer to drawings and mechanical/electrical sections of the specifications for locations and sizes.
Access doors in plaster surfaces shall be (30 x 20 Model DSC-214 PL).
Access doors in masonry or tile surfaces shall be recessed KRVB with optional anchor strap.
Access doors in wallboard surfaces shall be (14 x 14 Model KDW 30 x 24 at soffit) unless noted
otherwise.
Access doors in weather-protected masonry exterior walls shall be Type DSC-214 M.
Access doors fully exposed to weather (unprotected) exterior walls shall be Type "MX" or B-XT series as
manufactured by Babcock-Davis.
Access doors in suspended fire-rated wallboard surfaces shall be Type KRP-I5OFR.
Access doors in canopy ceilings of wallboard or densglas shall be 22 x 36 DSC-214M unless noted
otherwise.
Fire rated access doors shall be Karp fire rated access doors.
1.
Frame and panel assembly shall be manufactured under factory inspection service of UL and shall
bear a label reading Frame and Fire Door Assembly, Rating 1-1/2 hours (B), temperature rise 30
minutes, 250 deg F maximum
DESIGN
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Access Doors:
1.
Frames shall be 16-gauge steel; panels shall be 20-gauge steel, sandwich type.
2.
Panel shall be equipped with an automatic closing mechanism on doors over 144 sq. in. in size.
3.
Lock assembly shall be cylinder type, self-latching with key operated cylinder lock and shall have a
mechanism to release the latch bolt from the inside.
4.
Hinges shall be continuous, steel with stainless steel pin.
5.
Prime coat shall be factory-applied baked enamel over a protective phosphate coating on the steel.
6.
Where designated in masonry walls, attach masonry anchors to frame assemblies in the factory.
Styles KRVB, DSC-214M and DSC-214PL.
1.
Frame shall be 16-gauge; panel 14-gauge steel.
Style DSC 214M (Drywall) 16 gauge frame and 14 gauge door.
1.
Continuous piano hinge.
2.
Prime coat finish.
Style DSC-214PL casing bead of 22-gauge steel casing bead with metal lath shall surround the frame
(plaster).
Style KRVB flange shall be 16-gauge steel, 1 wide. (valve box).

08311 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
F.
1.
Prime coat shall be factory applied, baked-on enamel, chemically bonded to the steel.
2.
Hinges shall be concealed, continuous piano hinge.
3.
Locks shall be flush, key operated cylinder locks.
Style KRP-15OFR (fire rated).
1.
Frames shall be 16 gauge steel; panel 20 gauge.
2.
Prime coat shall be factory applied rust-inhibitive white paint.
3.
Hinge shall be continuous, continuous piano hinge.
4.
Locks shall be flush, key operated cylinder lock. Provide grommet for access to cam lock control.
5.
Panel shall be equipped with an automatic self closing mechanism with interior latch release.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and floor door
installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of
supports, inserts, and anchoring devices.
Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with
adjacent finish surfaces.
Install access doors with trim less frames and floor doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed
to receive finish material.
Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
At fully exposed to weather installation provide drip edge above top of frame and extend 4 either side of
frame (minimum). Seal all exposed edges of frame and make weather tight (full perimeter).
Louvers in door panels at fully exposed to weather installation are to be weather tight.

08311 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 08331 - OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.2
This is a National Account / Direct Buy unit.

This Section specifies the construction of all overhead sectional door assemblies and related items
including installation of doors, tracks, mounting hardware, operators, hinges, rollers, locks, testing, and
finishing.
deliver, and install all overhead door assemblies and related work, as indicated on the Drawings, in
limited to design and fabrication of overhead doors, and associated welding, insulating, reinforcing,
cutting, fitting, cleaning and finishing.
1.
Related Section: 08710, Finish Hardware".
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.3

Product Data: For each type of door, and accessory indicated.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.
3.
Contractor shall verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
Samples of all finishes for review in accordance with Sections 01330 and 01600.
Field quality control test and inspection reports,
Substitutions will not be permitted.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both
installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to
door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per UL 10b and NFPA 252, and
that are listed and labeled for fire ratings indicated by UL, FMG, ITS, or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Specification is based on products as manufactured by Rite Hite a division of Arbon Equipment
Corporation, Attn: Greg Suchovic, Tel: (480) 203-8561, Fax: (480) 907-2528.

08331 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
G.
1.4
Warranty:
1.
2.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.5
not permitted.
A.
B.
Structural Performance: Provide overhead door assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of
gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of door
components.
1.
Wind Load: as identified on the drawings.
2.
Impact Test for Flying Debris: Comply with ASTM E1996, tested according to ASTM E1886.
Operation-Cycle Requirements:
1.
Provide overhead door components capable of operating for not less than 10,000 cycles.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS

A.
B.
C.
Steel sectional, upward-acting doors shall be INSUL-RITE model No.GX5255 vertical lift type sectional
door manufactured by Rite-Hite. Steel door sections shall be fabricated from hot-dipped galvanized
structural steel/polyurethane/steel sandwich type construction to include a thermal break.
1.
Steel Sheet Thickness: 26 gauge hot-dipped galvanized.
2.
Exterior Section Face: White Stucco Finish Painted, see Drawings.
Door Panels: Fabricated from a single sheet with sections not more than 24" high. Roll horizontal
meeting edges to a continuous, interlocking, keyed, rabbeted, shiplap, or tongue-in-groove weathertight
seal, with a reinforcing flange return.
Door Sections: 2 sections model No. GX5255 constructed of solid polyurethane foam core sandwiched
between galvanized steel facings. Enclose open section with not less than 18 gauge galvanized steel
channel end stiles. Fabricate with not less than 18 gauge galvanized intermediate stiles, cut to door
section profile, spaced at not more than 48" O.C.
1.
One bottom door panel shall be the GX-4000. NOTE: Bottom GX-4000 panel shall not be painted.

08331 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.
D.
E.
Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement of galvanized steel bars,
struts, trusses or strip steel, formed to depth and bolted or welded in place to meet wind load
requirements.
3.
Reinforce for hardware attachment.
4.
Insulation: Insulate inner core of steel sections with 2 thick sandwich type CFC free and HCFC
free polyurethane.
a.
Insulated sections to be tested in accordance with ASTM E-84-91A and UBC 17-5 Corner
Burn.
b.
Insulation material to be tested in accordance with ASTM D 1929.
5.
Fabricate sections so finished door assembly is rigid and aligned, with tight hairline joints, and free
of warp, twist, and deformation.
6.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard factory applied polyester primer and white finish coat.
7.
Color: White unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
8.
Glazing: 24 x 6 vision panel on left hand side of inside face.
Tracks, supports, and accessories:
1.
Tracks: 2, 16 gauge hot dipped Galvanized steel track system complying with ASTM A653, G60
zinc coating, sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated.
a.
Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement for rigid
support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and size. Track rollers shall be
case hardened inner steel races with 10-ball rollers.
b.
Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or otherwise design to ensure tight closure at
jambs when door unit is closed.
c.
Weld or bolt to track supports.
d.
Provide maximum high lift or full vertical lift as clearance allows.
2.
Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized steel and support members, complying with
ASTM A36 and ASTM A123. Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as required for door size and
weight to provide strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing
of doors.
3.
Support and attach tracks to opening jambs with continuous angle welded to tracks and attached to
wall. Support horizontal (ceiling) tracks with continuous angle welded to track and supported by
laterally braced attachments to overhead structural members at curve and end of tracks.
4.
Trak-Saver plus sectional door guards. Flexible door guard brackets by Rite Hite.
a.
(2) 36 High sectional door guards.
b.
Safety Yellow painted.
c.
(4) Track Saver Flexible Brackets.
d.
2 Sectional Door Track 36.
5.
Weatherseals: Standard full perimeter seal: Section joint seals between sections, track-mounted
side seals, vinyl top seal and flexible vinyl astragal.
a.
3 perimeter brush seal for Food Grade Facility.
Hardware:
1.
General: Heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or
other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type.
2.
Hinges: Heavy-duty galvanized steel hinges, of not less than 14 gauge thick uncoated steel, at
each end stile and at each intermediate stile, per manufacturer's written recommendations for door
size.
a.
Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with bolts and lock nuts or lock
washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners where access to nuts is not possible.
b.
Use double-end hinges, where required, for doors exceeding 16'-0" in width, unless
otherwise recommended by door manufacturer.
3.
Rollers: Two Heavy-duty long stem rollers, with minimum 10 steel ball bearings in case-hardened
steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track.
4.
Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by
padlock, located on single-jamb side, operable from inside only.

08331 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
F.
Counterbalancing Mechanism:
1.
Torsion Spring: Operation by counterbalance mechanism with adjustable-tension torsion springs,
fabricated from oil-tempered-steel wire complying with ASTM A229, Class II, mounted on crossheader tube or steel shaft. Connect to door with galvanized aircraft-type lift cables with cable
safety factor of at least 5 to 1. Calibrate springs for 10,000 cycles.
G.
Miscellaneous:
1.
Lock is to be a slide bolt welded to the right-hand vertical track with padlock eye for locking to each
track; - no handle is to be projected to the outside.
2.
Provide foot push bar and hand pull at base with rope extension.
3.
Provide rope pull for operation.
2.2
FINISHES
A.
Galvanized-Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard thermoset finish, white finish coat.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.3
EXAMINATION
Verification of Conditions: Installer shall examine all dimensions and conditions under which the
equipment are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the
proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.
INSTALLATION
General: Manufacturers Representative shall install all equipment within this specification in accordance
with approved shop drawings and Manufacturer's recommendations.
Install doors in prepared openings. Set in their correct locations, level, plumb, square, at the proper
elevation, in alignment with all work. Installation shall be performed under the supervision of an
accredited or franchised representative of the manufacturer.
Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold strips,
anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports.
Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those
trades for interface with the work of this Section. Coordinate schedules for installation and orderly
progress of the total construction sequence.
Deviation of site conditions contrary to approved shop drawings shall be called to the attention of the
Architect.
Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion
and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter.
Brackets shall be attached to continuous wall angle with 5/16" bolts.
After installation is completed, Manufacturer's representative shall examine the installation and require
that all connections and adjustments necessary to assure proper operation of all equipment be made.
Before acceptance, a demonstration shall be conducted in the presence of an Owner/Tenant's
representative to guarantee that all equipment is operating properly in every respect. In addition, a
detailed user/operator training session shall be conducted at time and place agreed upon by
Owner/Tenant's representative and Manufacturer's representative.
ADJUSTING

08331 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
A.
B.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,

operate, and maintain doors.
Upon completion of the installation, put each operating components through at least 10 operating cycles.
Adjust to achieve optimum operation.
CLEANING
Upon completion of this portion of the work, promptly clean exposed portions and remove traces of dirt,
grease and foreign materials.
PROTECTION
Upon completion of the installation, visually check exposed surfaces of the work of this Section, and
touch up scratches and abrasives to be completely invisible to the unaided eye from a distance of 5'-0".

08331 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821

08331 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all aluminum doors, frame assemblies, hardware and other
related materials including installation, clips, shims, hinges, reinforcement, hardware, and finishing.
deliver, and install all aluminum frame and door work, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with
local codes and standards, or as specified herein. This work shall include but not be limited to design
and fabrication of door frames and associated welding, anchoring, aligning, inspecting, reinforcing,
cutting, fitting, and cleaning.
Coordination of Fabrication: Check the actual openings in the construction work by accurate field
measurement before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress as directed and avoid delays of the work.
All work shall be coordinated with other section including, but limited to :
1.
Section 08710 Finish Hardware
2.
Section 08800 Glass and Glazing
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Submittals shall be provided in accordance with sections 01330, and 01600.

Manufacturer's Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's written guarantee specifications,
recommendations and standard details for aluminum doors and frames and components of the work.
1.
Include all wall elevations at 1/2" scale, and full-size detailed sections of every typical composite
member.
2.
Show anchors, joint system, expansion provisions, and other components not included in
manufacturer's standard data. Include glazing details.
3.
Submit 2 copies of written guarantee signed by the manufacturer, installer and contractor,
agreeing to replace aluminum window wall units which fail in materials or workmanship within 2
years of the date of acceptance.
a.
Failure of materials or workmanship shall include (but not be limited to) excessive leakage
or air infiltration, excessive deflections, and deterioration of finish or metal in excess of
normal weathering and defects in accessories, weather stripping, and other components of
the work.
Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, label compliance, fire-resistance
rating, and finishes for each type of door and frame specified.
1.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
a.
Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
b.
For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types,
functions, quantities, and locations.
1.
In addition to the requirements of section 01600, submit 3 samples of each required aluminum
finish on 12" long extrusions or 6" square sheets of the alloys to be used for the work.
2.
Architect reserves the right to require samples of typical fabricated sections, showing joints,
exposed fastening (if any), quality of workmanship, hardware, and accessory items before
fabrication of the work proceeds.
UDATED JANUARY 21, 2015
ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES

08411 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
G.
H.
I.
1.3
3.
Samples will be reviewed by Architect for color and texture only.
Product test reports.
Field quality control test and inspection reports
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
1.4
Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, the requirements for aluminum doors and frames, and the
terminology used in this Section, are those of NAAMM, AAMA and AA and in particular, those of the
"Entrance Manual" by NAAMM.
1.
Specifications are based on products as manufactured by Arcadia, Inc., Vernon, Calif. Equal
products as manufactured by United States Aluminum, and Kawneer are acceptable subject to
approved substitution request.
2.
Manufacture and install fire rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80.
Warranty:
1.
2.
Warranty Period: two (2) years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.
3.
Manufacturer shall guarantee door closures for five (5) years from date of shipment.
4.
Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing
indicated.
Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1401, "Guide for Structural
Sealant Glazing."
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Transport, handle, and deliver to the job, doors and frames in manufacturer prepared packaging in a
vertical position, covered on 4 wood sills in a manner to prevent rust, moisture damage, and damage
from ongoing construction activities.
Provide wood slats between doors to avoid any metal-to-metal contact. Leave doors in stored position
until ready to hang.
Identify each door and frame per shop drawings.
Dumping on the ground is not permitted.

08411 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
H.
1.5
humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. Additional requirements for product delivery,
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A.
B.
C.
D.
System Performance: Provide manufacturer's stock system, adapted to application indicated, which has
been tested in accordance with ASTM E 330 to withstand at least the following loading:
1.
Minimum uniform pressure of 20 psf inward and 20 psf outward, or as required by local Municipal
Building Code (whichever is greater).
2.
Maximum deflection of framing members normal to wall plane shall be whichever has the least
deflection of the following:
a.
Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13-6.
b.
Limited to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4" for spans greater than 13-6.
c.
Or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4".
Manufacturer entrances and storefronts shall be designed in accordance with the following leakage
requirements:
1.
ASTM E 283 not to leak air more than .06 cm per sq. ft. wall area
2.
ASTM E 331 for water leakage.
Thermal movements.
Structural Loads:
1.
Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
2.
Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FRAME TYPES:
A.
Center Glazed Systems: AR450 Series (2 x 4-1/2) for 1/4" glass and AG451 Series (2 x 4-1/2) for 1
insulated glass, as indicated on Drawings.
B.
Offset Glazed System: AFG451 Series (2 x 4-1/2) for 1 insulated glass, as indicated on Drawings.
C.
Shadow box mural installations: Offset Glazed System AF175 Series (2 x 1-3/4) for 1/4 glass, as
indicated on drawings.
Storefront system: Install anodized frame members to receive flush glazing, 1/4" thick clear glass or 1
thick insulated glass see drawings for type and tint.
1.
Tempered glass - Safety tempered glass at panels located either side and between doors and as
scheduled on drawings.
2.
Materials: Frames - Extruded 6063-T6 Aluminum alloy not less than 0.125" thick.
3.
Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for strength, corrosion
resistance, and application of required finish; ASTM B221 for extrusions, ASTM B209 for
sheet/plate.
4.
Fasteners:
Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel, or other materials warranted by
manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum components.
5.
Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for application of hardware.
All
exposed fastener to match finish of adjoining metal finish.
6.
Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners.
7.
Concealed Flashing:
Dead-soft stainless steel, 26 gauge minimum, type selected by
manufacturer for compatibility.
8.
Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's high-strength aluminum units where feasible;
otherwise, non-magnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123.
D.

08411 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.2
Concrete/Masonry Inserts: Cast iron, malleable iron, or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A
153.
Bituminous Coatings: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-PS 12, compounded for 30-mil
thickness per coat.
Clear Protective Coatings: AAMA 602.2, compounded specifically for protection of aluminum finish
during construction.
Slip Header Track: Provide at all Storefront heads, at Frame Walls - color to match storefront.
Glass and glazing materials: Provide glass and glazing materials which comply with requirements of
"Glass and Glazing", Section 08800.
FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.3
General Sizes and Profiles:

1.
Required sizes for door and frame units, including profile requirements, are as indicated on the
drawings.
2.
Any variable dimensions are indicated together with maximum and minimum dimensions required
to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work.
Prefabrication: To the greatest extent possible, complete fabrication, assembly, finishing hardware
application, and other work before shipment to project site. Disassemble components only as necessary
for shipment and installation.
Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site.
Sequence: Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work prior to cleaning,
finishing, surface treatment, and application of finishes. Remove arises from cut edges and ease edges
and corners to radius of approximately 1/64".
Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations to avoid discoloration; grind exposed welds smooth and
restore mechanical finish.
Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as necessary for performance requirements; separate dissimilar metals
with bituminous paint or other separator which will prevent corrosion.
Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting members.
Fasteners: Concealed wherever possible.
STILE AND RAIL TYPE ALUMINUM DOORS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Acceptable manufacturers:
1.
Arcadia, Inc., MS362 Series
Or equal in the following manufacturers product lines:
2.
United States Aluminum Doors
3.
Kawneer (#350)
Frame: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with mechanical joint using heavy inserted reinforcing
plates and concealed tie-rods or j-bolts, or fabricate with structurally welded joints, at manufacturer's
option.
Style: Except as otherwise shown or scheduled, provide doors of medium stile, as described in AAMA
publications:
1.
1" Insulated safety glass, tinted to match building glass. See building elevations.
Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without disassembly of door stiles
and rails.
Provide snap-on extruded aluminum glazing stops, with exterior stops anchored for non-removal.

08411 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.4
FINISHES: Clear Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (min. thickness 0.4 mil.) unless noted otherwise (see
exterior elevations).
2.5
DOOR HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A.
If Exit Device is not required, use:

1.
Pair of Doors:
2 sets ea.
Pivot Hinges:
Arcadia top and bottom offset pivots single acting
2 ea.
Concealed Closers: Arcadia OHCC, single acting
1 ea.
Lockset:
Adams-Rite, #MS-1850S deadlock with Adams-Rite three-point
lock and exit indicator
2 ea.
Push / Pull:
Arcadia 1 radius push bar and 1 radius, 10 offset pull handle
1 set
Weatherstripping: Mfg. supplied / installed
2 ea.
Sweep:
Mfg. supplied / installed no exposed fasteners
1
Threshold:
1/2" x 4 aluminum threshold (full width) ADA Compliant
2.
Single Door:
1 set
1 ea.
1 ea.
1 ea.
1 set
1 set
1
Pivot Hinges:
Concealed Closer
Lockset:
Push / Pull:
Weatherstripping:
Sweep:
Threshold:
Arcadia top and bottom offset pivots single acting

Arcadia OHCC, single acting
Adams-Rite, #MS-1850S
Arcadia 1 radius push bar and 1 radius, 10 offset pull handle
Mfg. Supplied / installed
Mfg. Supplied / installed - no exposed fasteners
1/2" x 4 aluminum threshold (full width) ADA Compliant
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
B.
3.2
The storefront contractor must examine the supporting structure for the conditions under which the work
is to be erected, and notify the contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely
completion of the work.
Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable
to the storefront contractor.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Do not install component parts that are observed to be defective in any way, including warped, bowed,
dented, abraded and broken members and including glass with glass damage.
Remove and replace members that have been damaged during installation or thereafter before the time
of final acceptance.
Do not cut, trim, weld or braze component parts during erection, in any manner which would damage the
finish, decrease the strength, or result in a visual imperfection or a failure in performance of the
storefront.
Return component parts that require alteration to the shop for re-fabrication, if possible, or for
replacement by new parts.
Install component parts level, plumb, true to line and with uniform joints and reveals.
1.
Secure to structure with non-staining and non-corrosive shims, anchors, fasteners, spacers and
fillers.
2.
Use erection equipment that will not mar or stain finished surfaces and will not damage the
component parts in any way.
Frame installation
1.
General:

08411 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration.
b.
Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.
Metal Protection:
a.
Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting
contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape, or installing nonconductive
spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
b.
Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members,
and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 07920,
"Caulking, Sealants and Joint Closures" and to produce weathertight installation.
Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
a.
Exterior Entrances: Install to produce tight fit at weather stripping and weathertight
closure.
b.
G.
3.3
Field-Installed Hardware: Install surface-mounted hardware according to hardware

manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
Install doors completely and accurately, complete with all finish hardware.
1.
Install finish hardware in a neat workmanlike manner in accordance with the hardware schedule
using only mechanics skilled in this type of work.
2.
Do not install hardware until painting is completed.
3.
Keep all hardware free from scratches, dents or other defacements.
A.
B.
The storefront contractor shall advise the Contractor of proper and adequate means for protecting
portions of the work that are exposed to likely sources of damage during the remainder of the
construction period, including the probable areas of glass breakage or deterioration.
Immediately before the time of final acceptance, the storefront contractor shall clean the storefront
thoroughly, inside and out.
1.
Demonstrate proper cleaning methods to the Owner's maintenance personnel during this final
cleaning.
2.
Prepare a "Cleaning and Maintenance Manual" listing the types of cleaning compounds, cleaning
methods, and types of sealants and glazing materials to be used for cleaning, repair and
maintenance of the work.

08411 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 08461 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all automatic sliding entrance door packages and control
assemblies including installation, sliding door operator, breakaway sidelights, headers, operators,
sensors, controls, testing, and finishing.
deliver, and install automatic sliding entrance door packages, including but not limited to adjacent items,
and control assemblies as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with local codes and standards, or
as specified herein. This work shall include but not be limited to aligning, anchoring, cutting, fitting,
sealing, testing, cleaning and finishing.
Coordination and Tests:
1.
Coordinate accurately and fully with other trades affected by this work
2.
Thoroughly test and check all items and equipment.
3.
Make corrections and adjustments to produce a completely satisfactory and operative installation.
4.
Templates: Obtain and distribute, to the parties involved, templates for doors, frames, and other
work specified to be factory prepared for installing automatic entrance doors.
References:
1.
Section 07920, Caulking, Sealants and Joint Closures".
2.
Section 08710, "Finish Hardware".
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.

Shop Drawings:
1.
Clearly show layout, designation, number, type, and location required.
2.
Include plans, dimensions, elevations, sections, materials, details, profiles, joining methods,
location of components, anchor details, sidelites, operators, motion/presence sensors, hardware,
finish, hardware mounting heights, adjacent construction interfaces, options, accessories, and
attachments to other work.
a.
Include wiring diagrams and electrical requirements.
b.
c.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
d.
Maintenance Data: For door operators and control systems.
Sample finishes for review in accordance with Sections 01330 and 01600.
Operation and Maintenance manuals including spare parts.
Substitutions shall be requested in accordance with Section 01230 and 01600.

08461 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
1.4
1.
Approved manufacturers are:
a.
ASSA ABLOY Entrance Solutions
i.
Contact: Jessica Lesko Gorman, 300 Horizon Center, Suite 302, Hamilton, NJ 08691,
Cell: (732) 620-1464, Email: jessica.gorman@assaabloy.com.
2.
Specification is based on products manufactured by Besam (ASSA ABLOY)
3.
All equipment shall comply with BHMA/ ANSI A156.10, UL 325, NFPA, and AAADM.
1.
Comply with all OSHA Guidelines applicable to this work.
2.
Must be a manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation
and maintenance of units required for this Project.
3.
Installer to have minimum three (3) years of documented experience installing and maintaining
similar units in material, design and extent to this project.
Air infiltration requirements shall be in accordance with ASTM E283, and structural performance
requirements shall be in accordance with ASTM E330.
Warranty: The manufacturer shall warrant all equipment, including operators, controls, all
appurtenances, and the installation of the equipment for a period of Three (3) full years from date of
acceptance. The manufacturer and/or the manufacturer's distributor shall replace all defective equipment
at no cost to the Owner or Tenant during this Three (3) year warranty period. The manufacturer shall
have available on a local area level any parts and services required throughout the life of this equipment.
1.
authorized company official. Manufacturers warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other
rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.
2.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding CodeAluminum".
Power-Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
Emergency-Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for
automatic entrance doors serving as a required means of egress.
Coordination and tests: Coordinate accurately and fully with other trades affected by this work.
Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete floors if required for automatic entrance door
components.
A.
B.
C.
D.
not permitted.

08461 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
E.
F.
G.
1.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
General: Provide automatic entrance door assemblies capable of withstanding structural loads based on
testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
Structural Loads:
1.
Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
2.
Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
Operating Range: Minus 30 deg F to plus 120 deg F.
Opening-Force Requirements:
1.
Egress Doors: Not more than 50 lbf required to manually set door in motion if power fails, and not
more than 15 lbf required to open door to minimum required width.
Closing-Force Requirements:
1.
Not more than 30 lbf required to prevent door from closing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
Automatic sliding door system shall be Besam Entrance Solutions (Unislide Telescopic)
1.
System shall include sliding aluminum doors, sidelights, concealed headers, operators, controls,
and door position switch.
2.
Door operation shall be Bi-Part, two sliding doors, with bi-directional operation and movement
detection in compliance with NFPA 101.
3.
Sliding doors shall have breakout capability to the full open position in any point of travel. When in
a "breakout" mode (door system) shall disconnect automatic operation to allow for safe egress.
4.
Doors shall have an integral sweep on operational sections.
5.
Weatherstripping shall be finned pile type on active doors.
6.
There shall be no threshold (finish floor to be flush with exterior sidewalk, and slope exterior
surface away from door).
7.
Finish shall be clear anodized, or as indicated on the Drawings.
8.
Door manufacturer shall provide 2 point lock system including door cylinder as indicated in Section
08710, Finish Hardware.
9.
All decals shall conform to BHMA/ ANSI A156.10.
10. Provide alarm contacts for monitoring of door position from a remote location.
Glass and glazing: Glass shall be either 1/4 thick or 1 thick, as required by Section 08800 herein, and
as indicated on the drawings.
1.
1/4" thick glass, tempered, clear unless otherwise noted on drawings.
2.
1" thick insulating with 1/2" air space with (2) 1/4" clear polished plate glass, tempered, clear
unless otherwise noted on drawings.
3.
Clear or tinted glass as noted on drawings.
4.
Verify glass with Sprouts Representative prior to ordering.
5.
Exterior glazing shall be non-removable security type to prevent unauthorized entry.
6.
All glazing of doors to be of security type.
7.
Glass stops to be removable on interior only.

08461 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
D.
E.
8.
Doors and sidelites shall be provided to accommodate glass thickness required.
Door operator and controller shall be driven by an electro-mechanical operator and a regulated electronic
controller.
Combination Activation Motion Sensor/Safety Presence Sensor: Shall be a sliding door sensor combined
in a single housing surface mounted on each side of the header.
1.
Presence sensor shall remain active at all times.
2.
The sensor shall communicate with the automatic door operator through a self-monitoring
connection that allows the door to go into a fail safe mode preventing the door from closing in the
event of a sensor failure.
Safety Search Circuitry: recycles the doors when an object is encountered during the closing cycle.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Install all items and all appurtenances required providing a complete and fully functional automatic sliding
door assembly.
Verify that other trades are complete prior to beginning installation of the automatic sliding door system.
Install only new, undamaged components.
Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for the installation of automatic sliding
entrance door assemblies; including doors, frames, and operators, using only factory trained personnel.
1.
Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
2.
Rigidly secure non movement joints.
3.
Rigidly secure non movement joints.
FTI (Field Test Instrument) must be used by installer during initial phase of the installation.
Set units plumb, level, square, and true in line, without warp or rack of frames or doors.
1.
Anchor securely in place.
2.
Install automatic doors and sidelites to be weathertight in the closed position, and to drain water,
condensation, and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior.
3.
Set jamb members and head members in a bed of compound, or with joint fillers or gaskets to
provide weathertight construction.
a.
See Section 07920 for compounds, fillers and gaskets to be installed integrally with door and
frames.
4.
Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic
action at points of contact with other materials, with a bituminous coating of approx. 30-mil dry film
thickness or other prior approved suitable permanent separator.
Coordinate installation with the glass and glazing, and electrical work.
Install door operator system including control wiring. See Division 16 for connection to electrical power
source.
Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by
Architect.
The automatic door installer must examine the areas and conditions under which the automatic
entrances are to be installed and notify the General Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the
proper functioning of the entrance and the timely completion of the work.
1.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the installer.
The installer shall work with the General Contractor to coordinate all details pertinent to the door
assembly installation.
1.
Complete manufacturer's drawings and details shall be furnished for the installation of the
equipment.
2.
Final connections and adjustments shall be made by the installer, and the automatic entrances
shall be left in satisfactory operating condition.
3.
Manufacturers representatives shall be available when required by one of the associated trades.

08461 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
L.
M.
N.
O.
3.2
See Section 08800 for installation of glass shown to be glazed into doors and frames and not factoryassembled by manufacturer's special glazing system.
Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of frames and doors, exercising care to avoid
damage of the protective coating.
1.
Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances.
Where protective coating has been damaged, remove coating completely as soon as the completion of
construction activities no longer requires protection.
The installer/distributor will work with the General Contractor to coordinate all of those details necessary
pertinent to the installation of the electrical phases as outlined by the details of the manufacturer.
1.
Complete manufacturing drawings and details shall be furnished to the Owner for the installation of
the equipment.
2.
Final connections shall be made by the distributor/installer that will tune-in the equipment and leave
it in satisfactory operating condition.
3.
The manufacturer shall have a factory trained engineer available for job orientation when required
by any of the trades.
A.
B.
C.
3.3
Testing Services: Test and inspect each automatic entrance door to determine compliance of installed
systems with applicable BHMA standards.
Repair or remove work where inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
D.
Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation, for weathertight closure,
and compliance with code requirements.
Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts.
Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to
three (3) days use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles).
Clean all metal surfaces promptly after installation.

08461 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 08620 - UNIT SKYLIGHTS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.2
This is a National Account / Direct Buy unit. Sprouts will order the complete unit and curbs, and the
Contractor will receive and install skylights.
This Section includes the requirements for furnishing and installing factory-assembled unit skylights and
appurtenances to provide a watertight, weathertight system including but not limited to framing, glazing,
curbs, glass, fiberglass, or polycarbonate materials, fasteners, sealants, condensate control, thermal
break, venting, operators, gaskets, and inner frames that are capable of withstanding design load
requirements.
install all unit skylight framing, flashing, sealants, glass and glazing work, as indicated on the Drawings,
in accordance with local codes and standards, or as specified herein. This work shall include but not be
limited to procurement and installation of unit skylights, glazing, and associated cleaning, cutting, fitting,
sealing and painting.
Skylights and curbs shall be as identified herein and / or on the drawings. Sizes shall be as identified on
the drawings.
A.
B.
C.
1.3
Water tight and airtight installation of each skylight unit is required. Each installation must withstand
normal temperature changes, wind loading, impact loading (for operating doors) without failure of any
kind including loss or breakage of acrylic, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight,
deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work.
Protect skylights from edge damage at all times during handling, installation and operation of the
building. Skylight breakage during the guarantee period will be considered a form of faulty material or
workmanship (resulting from edge damage) unless known to result from vandalism or other causes not
related to materials and workmanship.
Examine the framing channel surfaces, backing, removable stop design, and the conditions under which
the skylight is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the
proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected in a manner acceptable.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
Submit manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for all
materials identified herein or on the drawings.
3.
Include installation details and wiring diagrams (if applicable).
4.
Provide 8 x 8" samples of each exposed finish material, colors, and skylight material for review, in
accordance with Sections 01330 and 01600.
UNIT SKYLIGHTS
08620 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
F.
G.
1.4

Substitutions will not be permitted.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.5
Fire-Test Response Characteristics of Plastic Glazing.
1.
Self-Ignition Temperature: 650 deg F or greater for plastic sheets in thickness indicated when
tested per ASTM D1929.
2.
Smoke Production Characteristics: Comply with either requirement below.
a.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less when tested per ASTM E84 on plastic sheets in
manner indicated for use.
b.
Smoke Density: 75 or less when tested per ASTM D 2843 on plastic sheets in thickness
indicated for use.
3.
Relative-Burning Characteristics: Tested per ASTM D635.
a.
Acrylic Glazing: Class CC2, burning rate of 2-1/2" per minute or less for nominal thickness
of 0.060" or thickness indicated for use.
b.
Polycarbonate Glazing: Class CC1, burning extent of 1" or less for nominal thickness of
0.060" or thickness indicated for use.
All work under this section shall conform to local code and standards requirements. In case of conflict,
the more stringent requirements shall apply.
Testing as required by latest codes and standards.
WARRANTY:
1.
Submit for Owners acceptance, Manufacturer's standard warranty document, in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of unit skylights that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
a.
Warranty Period: Five (5) years from Date of Substantial Completion.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
not permitted.
UNIT SKYLIGHTS
08620 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS - PLASTIC UNIT SKYLIGHTS

A.
B.
2.2
Acceptable Manufacturer: Sunoptics Prismatic Skylights, 6201 27th Street, Sacramento, CA 95822,
ASD. Toll Free Tel.: (800) 289-4700, Tel.: (916) 395-4700, Fax: (916) 395-9204, Email:
pure.energy@sunoptics.com, Web: www.sunoptics.com
Substitutions: Not permitted.
FIXED SKYLIGHT UNITS
A.
B.
2.3
Glazing Panels - Double Glazed:

1.
Configuration: Signature Series Done.
a.
Outer Lens: SR 40 - 100% impact modified clear prismatic acrylic of sufficient thickness
recommended to meet the specified performance requirements.
b.
Inner Lens: SR25 White Prismatic Acrylic Lens.
2.
Energy Requirements: Glazing material must have a maximum light distribution characteristic that
maximizes the shading factor. Per Addendum D of ASHRAE 90.1 - 2007, the diffusing qualities of
glazing must have a minimum haze factor of 90% or greater. The combined inner/outer lens target
values shall be as follows:
a.
Light Transmittance: 67.8% minimum. CLASS 3 ACRYLIC.
b.
Diffusion / Haze Factor: 100% minimum.
c.
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): 0.49 maximum. NFRC 200.
d.
"U" Value: 0.82 or lower (glazing and framing) in accordance with NFRC 100 or "unlabeled
skylight" default requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 - 2007.
3.
Hail Resistance Level: Class 3 as tested by certified engineering firm.
4.
High Wind / High Impact: Clear Armor Polycarbonate (LEXAN SLX) as tested by certified
engineering firm.
Frame:
1.
ASTM B221 alloy 6063-T5 extruded aluminum frame with extruded aluminum dome retaining
angle, insulated thermal break and integral condensate gutter.
2.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard mill finish.
3.
Provide pre-installed 1-1/2" (38mm) x 1/4" (6mm) foam rubber gasket between frame and curb.
4.
Provide weather sweep attached to frame.
5.
Curb Dimensions: Determined by skylight manufacturers inside dimension of extruded aluminum.
Recommend a 1/2" (13mm) surround around finished and final flashed curb.
6.
Curb to be 10" high wood frame, white lined, without safety security guards.
ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
2.4
Fasteners (for anchorage of skylight to roof curb): #12 x 1-1/2" (38mm) 300 series stainless steel screws
with washers. Provide fasteners in sufficient quantity for complete installation.
Washers: Neoprene / stainless steel bonded washers.
FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Skylights must be factory assembled and glazed ready for installation.

Fabricate skylights weather tight and free of visual distortions and defects.
Protect exterior drip / counter flashing and drainage ports from weather and airborne debris.
Miter and full penetration weld all corners of curb and retaining frames.
Retaining frames that secure the glazing panels along each side under spring tension need not be
welded and must be sealed with a silicone sealant along the full perimeter of the retaining frame.
Skylight frames must be predrilled for anchorage to roof curbs.
UNIT SKYLIGHTS
08620 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
F.
2.5
Seal glazing panels to base frame allowing for sufficient expansion and contraction. Provide exterior
weep hold arrangement.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Installation materials as recommended by manufacturer or as indicated below.

1.
Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur and
containing no asbestos fibers, formulated for 15-mil dry film thickness per coating.
2.
Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant.
3.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT, G, A, and (as
applicable to joint substrates indicated) O; recommended by unit skylight manufacturer and
compatible with joint surfaces.
4.
Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586, asbestos free asphalt cement, designed for trowel application or
other adhesive compatible with roofing system.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
3.2
Install unit skylights in accordance with manufacturers written instructions, as indicated on the Drawings,
and local codes and standards to provide a watertight, weathertight system.
Coordinate unit skylight installation with installation of substrates, vapor retarders, roof insulation,
roofing, and flashing as required to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly and that
combined elements are waterproof and weathertight.
1.
Unless otherwise indicated, install unit skylights according to construction details of NRCA's "The
NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual".
Where metal surfaces of units will contact incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood,
apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or provide other permanent separation
recommended in writing by unit skylight manufacturer.
A.
B.
Clean skylights and surrounding areas per manufacturer's instructions.

Immediately after installation, protect skylights from damage during construction.
UNIT SKYLIGHTS
08620 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL
****ALL MATERIAL IN THIS SECTION TO BE PURCHASED THROUGH NATIONAL ACCOUNT DISTRIBUTOR,
GIRTMAN AND ASSOCIATES.
CONTACT KAREN BRADY (855) 447-8600 EXT 1538 OR AT
sprouts@girtman.com FOR NATIONAL ACCOUNT PRICING****
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.2
This Section specifies the furnishing and installation of all hardware assemblies including fasteners,
templates, locks, latch sets, keys, strikes, push plates, pull plates, kick plates, signs, closers, stops,
weatherstripping, thresholds, paint, and testing.
install all hardware assemblies, as indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein. This work shall
include but not be limited to procurement and installation of hardware and associated cuffing, fitting,
fastening, cleaning and painting.
Installation shall be in compliance with Federal ADA Guidelines, Installation of all hardware (except that
noted by storefront supplier) is to be by General Contractor.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.3

Shop Drawings:
1.
The finish hardware supplier shall, prior to delivery, prepare and submit to Architect within 10 days after
award of the finish hardware contract, 6 copies of a complete hardware schedule for review.
1.
The schedule shall follow requirements and shall indicate door number and location, quantity,
manufacturers number, size and finish along with all pertinent information for manufacturing and
proper installation.
2.
Each item on the schedule shall have an item number.
3.
The schedule shall include complete keying instructions and symbols.
1.
Provide samples for each exposed finish provided.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
FINISH HARDWARE
08710 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
G.
1.4
Guarantee:
1.
Contractor shall guarantee all hardware for a period of two (2) years from date of acceptance of
work. Defects in materials and/or workmanship occurring during the guarantee period shall be
corrected at no expense to the Owner.
2.
Submit for Owners acceptance, manufacturers standard warranty document executed by
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.5
Package and deliver each item of hardware in original and individual containers, complete with all
necessary fastenings, keys, instructions, and templates for spotting mortising tools.
1.
Mark each container with an item number corresponding to the item number on the finish hardware
schedule.
2.
Containers holding keyed locks and cylinders shall show the following: heading number, door
number, hand of door (when required) and keying symbol; all corresponding to that shown on the
finish hardware schedule.
not permitted.
PRODUCT CONDITIONS:
A.
B.
General Requirements:
1.
Contractor shall be responsible for arranging all work and issuing all purchase orders to facilitate
securing delivery of all hardware and appurtenances, so all work shall progress without delay or
interruption.
2.
Upon delivery of the finish hardware to the job site, check in and sign for all material delivered, and
thereafter be responsible for same.
3.
Provide a room with sufficient space and shelving in which to lock and arrange the finish hardware.
This room shall be locked with a lock furnished for this project. Protect hardware from damage at
all times, both prior to and after installation.
4.
Tab and turn all keys over to the Owner upon completion of the work.
Specific Requirements:
1.
The following hardware schedule is intended to cover all doors and establish a type and standard
of quality. Where the size and shape of members to be equipped with hardware prevents or makes
unsuitable the use of exact types specified, Contractor shall furnish suitable types having as nearly
as practicable the same operation, function, style, and quality as that specified.
2.
Sizes shall in all instances be adequate for the service to which the individual items of hardware
will be subjected in the course of normal usage.
FINISH HARDWARE
08710 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.
C.
D.
E.
1.6
It shall be the specific duty and responsibility of the finish hardware supplier to examine the
Specifications, Drawings, and details, and furnish the proper hardware for all openings, whether
listed or not.
4.
If there are any omissions in the hardware groups in regard to regular doors, they shall be called to
the attention of the Architect for instructions, prior to bid opening; otherwise, the list will be
considered complete. No extras will be allowed.
Templates:
1.
The finish hardware supplier, upon receipt of reviewed finish hardware schedule, shall send an
approved schedule along with a complete template list for all items requiring template information
to the hollow metal manufacturer, aluminum door and frame supplier, or any other supplier
requiring this information.
2.
When hardware must be installed at the factory, the hardware supplier shall send all such needed
items to the respective supplier for their use in installation. The cost of this shipping requirement
shall be borne by the hardware supplier.
Template Hardware:
1.
All hardware supplied to metal doors or jambs shall be made to template and secured by machine
screws.
2.
Where cylindrical locks are used in hollow metal doors, the door manufacturer shall furnish lock
reinforcing in the door at the time of manufacture.
3.
Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory
prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate
provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated
requirements.
Fasteners:
1.
Furnish finish hardware with all necessary screws, bolts, or other fastenings of suitable size and
type to anchor the hardware in position for heavy use and long life, and to harmonize with the
hardware as to material and finish.
2.
Furnish fastenings where necessary with expansion shields, hex bolts, toggle bolts, and other
approved anchors according to the material to which it is applied, and as recommended by the
manufacturer.
3.
Furnish hardware fastened to concrete with machine screws and tap-ins.
4.
Fasteners for closers on wood or mineral core doors shall be hex bolts.
WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A.
Hardware for the following items will be furnished under other Sections of these Specifications.
1.
Casework
2.
Thresholds not listed in the hardware list.
3.
Hardware for aluminum doors, except as listed in the hardware list.
4.
Toilet compartments.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
BUTTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
All exterior out-swinging doors shall have butts with non-removable pins when the door is closed. Doors
with closers shall have ball bearing butts.
Doors 1-3/4 thick and up to 40 wide to have 4-1/2 butts.
Doors 1-3/4 thick; 41 to 48 wide to have 4-1/2" heavy duty butts.
All butts shall be sized in width to clear all trim.
Manufacturer: Ecco hinges by Hager.
FINISH HARDWARE
08710 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.2
LOCKS AND LATCHES

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.3
All locks shall have 7-pin removable core cylinders.

All lock and latch sets to have 2-3/4 backset unless otherwise noted.
Strikes shall be extended tips where required to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt.
Wrought boxes shall be furnished with all strikes.
Padlocks - To accept Best 7-pin removable core cylinders.
Manufacturer: Falcon.
KEYS, KEYING AND CORES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.4
Best 7-pin removable core cylinders.

Locksets and cylinders to be furnished by Sprouts Farmers Market.
All cylinders for this project shall be set to a new master key system.
All cylinders to be constructed master keyed prior to delivery to job site.
All grand master, master and change keys shall be properly tagged for easy identification and delivered
to the General Contractor for installation one (1) day prior to punch list walk-thru.
Master key sets and individual keying of locks will be determined by Owner.
PUSH PLATES
A.
2.5
All push plates shall be type and size as listed. Base manufacturer: Hager.
PULL PLATES
A.
2.6
All pull plates shall be type and size as listed. Base manufacturer: Hager.
KICK PLATES
A.
2.7
All kick plates shall be type and size as listed. Base manufacturer: Hager.
SIGNS
A.
2.8
All signs shall conform to Federal ADA Requirements. Mount all signs on wall adjacent to door servicing
room. Base manufacturer: BBW (B), Quality (Q), Baldwin (B1). No metal - plastic only. (Employees
Only and Emergency Exit Only signs shall be mounted on doors at 60 A.F.F. centerline.) Characters
and symbols shall contrast with their background, either light characters on a dark background or dark
characters on a light background.
EXIT DEVICES
A.
B.
2.9
All bolts shall be type as listed. Trim shall be as listed.

Manufacturer: Falcon.
CLOSERS
A.
B.
C.
2.10
A.
B.
Overhead: surface applied. (All closers are to be mounted as to be concealed from Sales Area).
Closers shall be as manufactured by: Falcon.
Finish: Sprayed to match adjacent hardware.
STOPS
All stops (other than overhead type) shall be wall types, all as manufactured by: Hager.
Overhead stops manufacture: Glynn Johnson.
FINISH HARDWARE
08710 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.11
A.
B.
C.
2.12
A.
B.
2.13
A.
B.
2.14
A.
B.
2.15
A.
2.16
A.
2.17
A.
2.18
A.
THRESHOLDS
Furnish all thresholds as indicated in the hardware groups.
Threshold shall be as manufactured by: Hager.
Type as specified on the drawings and as shown in hardware groups, sized to fit openings. Include
thresholds on drawings but not listed in the hardware list.
DOOR BOTTOMS
Exterior doors to have style as indicated in hardware groups.
Manufacturer: Hager.
WEATHERSTRIPPING
Exterior doors to have at frame head and jamb type, as indicated.
SILENCERS
Metal frames to have: Single doors to have 3, each jamb. Double doors to have 2, each head.
FLUSHBOLTS
As manufactured by: Hager.
ASTRAGALS
As manufactured by: Hager.
VIEWER
SPROUTS FARMERS MARKET PROTOTYPE HARDWARE SCHEDULE
See construction drawings for Hardware Schedule.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
Contractor shall install each door hardware item as indicated on the drawings, as Specified herein, and
in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions.
INSPECTION
A.
The General Contractor shall visually inspect the installation of all hardware at completion of all such
installations. All discrepancies or errors in installation and operation shall be noted and referred to the
architect. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are
later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted
items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
FINISH HARDWARE
08710 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Upon completion and before final inspection, the General Contractor shall certify to the architect that all
hardware is properly installed according to the manufacturers printed instructions, and is working
properly and construction cores have been replaced with final Owner cores and keys.
Forward letter of certification in duplicate to the Architect as soon as possible after installation of all
hardware.
Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated on Drawings or required to comply
with governing regulations.
1.
Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHIs Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames".
Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush
Doors".
Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper
operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust
door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to
comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1.
Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door leaf is allowed to close freely from an
open position of 30 deg.
2.
Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so
that, from an open position of 70 deg, the door will take at least three (3) seconds to move to a
point 3" from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.
FINISH HARDWARE
08710 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the requirements for furnishing and installing all glass, glazing, and related items
including spacers, and sealants.
install all glass and glazing work, as indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein. This work shall
include but not be limited to procurement and installation of glass, glazing, and associated cleaning,
cutting, fitting, sealing and painting.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.3

Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
Submit manufacturers specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for all
3.
4.
Submit manufacturer's product data sheet and glazing instructions.
Provide documentation required for LEED submittals including but not limited to Product Data and
Calculations for:
1.
Credit for EA 1: Energy Performance
2.
Credit EQ 4.1: Glazing sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, including printed
statement of VOC content.
3.
Credit for MR 5.1: Regional Materials
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
Specification is based on products as manufactured by PPG Industries, Pittsburgh, PA. Glass products
by other manufacturers may be submitted for approval by the Architect subject to their meeting
specification performance requirements.
References:
1.
ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety
Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.
2.
ASTM C162 - Standard Terminology of Glass and Glass Products.
3.
ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
4.
ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass -- Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and
Uncoated Glass.
5.
ASTM C1376 - Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Glass.
GLASS AND GLAZING

08800 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
6.
7.
8.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
ASTM E773 - Standard Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
ASTM E774 - Standard Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining the Minimum Thickness and Type of Glass
Required to Resist a Specified Load.
9.
ASTM E2188 - Standard Test Method for Insulating Glass Unit Performance.
10. ASTM E2189 - Standard Test Method for Testing Resistance to Fogging in Insulating Glass Units.
11. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation.
12. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.
13. Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (IGMA)- Glazing Guidelines.
14. GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America.
15. GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America.
Warranty:
1.
2.
Warranty Period: commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.
a.
Provide a written 10-year limited warranty from date of manufacture for insulating glass.
Warranty covers deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing,
protecting and maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions.
b.
Provide a two (2) year warranty for other glass products unless otherwise required.
3.
Provide glass products in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat-treated) required to meet or
exceed the following criteria based on project loads and in-service conditions per ASTM E1300.
1.
Minimum thickness of annealed or heat-treated glass products is selected, so the worst-case
probability of failure does not exceed the following:
a.
8 breaks per 1000 for glass installed vertically or not over 15 degrees from the vertical plane
and under wind action.
b.
1 break per 1000 for glass installed 15 degrees or more from the vertical plane and under
action of wind and/or snow.
Glazing for Fire-Rated Door and Window Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80
and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257.
Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and, for wired glass, ANSI
Z97.1.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and
organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for
glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1.
IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating
Glass Units".
GLASS AND GLAZING

08800 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.4

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.5
not permitted.
Where glass units will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating glass
fabricators recommendations for venting and sealing.
Deliver all packaged materials in original unopened, undamaged containers, with identification labels
materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.6
Water tight and airtight installation of each piece of glass is required. Each installation must withstand
normal temperature changes, wind loading, and impact loading (for operating doors) without failure of
any kind. Failure includes loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight
and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials, and other defects in the work.
Protect glass from edge damage at all times during handling, installation and operation of the building.
Glass breakage during the guarantee period will be considered a form of faulty material or workmanship
(resulting from edge damage) unless known to result from vandalism or other causes not related to
materials and workmanship.
Glazing channel dimensions as indicated on the drawings are intended to provide for necessary
minimum bite on the glass, minimum edge clearance and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerance. The glazier is responsible for correct glass size for each opening, within the tolerances and
necessary dimensions established.
Examine the framing or glazing channel surfaces, backing, removable stop design, and the conditions
under which the glazing is to be performed.
Notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the
work. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Architect.
Glass and glazing shall meet the requirements of the International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) as
required by the local jurisdiction for the applicable zone, including but not limited to:
1.
Winter and Summer U-Values
2.
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC)
3.
Shading Coefficient
4.
Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
Installation of glass products at ambient temperature below 40 degrees F is prohibited.

Field measurements: Field verify measurements with drawing dimensions prior to fabrication of glass
products.
GLASS AND GLAZING

08800 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS - Regular glass (where indicated on the drawings)

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.2
1/4" thick, as manufactured by P.P.G. Industries, complying with ASTM C1036, Type I, Class I, Quality
Q-8, plate or float. Clear or tinted as indicated on the drawings See elevations.
Tempered Glass, 1/4" thick P.P.G. glass, fully tempered glass complying with ASTM C-1048.
Permanently etch each light with manufacturer's name and his compliance with ANSI Z-97.1. Clear or as
indicated.
Interior Glazing Compound: Polymerized Butyl Rubber and inert Fillers (pigments), solvent based with
minimum 75% solids, non-sag consistency, tack-free time of 24 hours or less, paintable non-staining.
Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM, or other resilient blocks of 85 shore A durometer hardness, minimum
length 4".
Exterior glazing compound: Conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Use G.
Butt Glazing Sealant: GE 1200 Series Silicone. (where occurs).
INSULATING GLASS UNITS (where indicated on the drawings)
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Insulating glass units shall be 1 thick, sealed, insulating type, Low E, as manufactured by PPG
Industries, or Architect approved equal.
1.
Insulating glass units shall be as certified through the Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC)
to either ASTM E774 or ASTM E2190, or both.
2.
Annealed float glass shall comply with ASTM C1036, type I, Class I, Quality Q-3.
3.
Heat strengthened float glass shall comply with ASTM C1048, Type I Class I Quality Q3, Kind HS
4.
Tempered float glass shall comply with ASTM C1048, type I, Class I, Quality Q3, Kind FT.
Clear insulating units shall be fabricated as follows:
1.
Outboard units: glass with low E on the 2nd surface, air space, glass.
Tinted insulating units shall be fabricated as follows:
1.
Outboard Units: factory tinted glass, air space, glass with low E on the 3rd surface.
Glass type, tint, and gas fill (if other than air) shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
Glass shall be annealed, heat-strengthened or tempered as required by codes, or as required to meet
thermal stress and wind loads, whichever is most stringent. Refer to Drawings and Part 1 of this Section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of the glass.
Verify openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
Verify that a functioning weep system is present if required.
Verify that the minimum required face and edge clearances are being followed.
Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
B.
Protection
1.
Handle and store product according to manufacturers' recommendations.
Surface Preparation
1.
Clean and prepare glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass.
2.
Remove coatings and other harmful materials that will prevent glass and glazing installation
required to comply with performance criteria specified.
GLASS AND GLAZING

08800 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
3.4
Comply with combined recommendations of glass manufacturer and manufacturer of sealants and other
materials used in glazing, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, or where
manufacturers technical representatives direct otherwise.
Clean the glazing, channel, or other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to the substrate.
Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip or abrade glass that is tempered or heat strengthened.
Comply with Glazing Manual by FGMA, except as shown, and specified otherwise by the
manufacturers of the glass and glazing material.
Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, and eliminate any that have observable edge
damage or face imperfections.
Install setting blocks of proper size at quarter points of sill rabbet. Set blocks in this course of the heelhead compound, if any.
Provide spacers inside and out, and of proper size and spacing, for all glaze sizes larger than 50 united
inches. Provide 1/8" minimum bite of spacers on glass, and use thickness equal to sealant width.
At bull glazing; ground edges, provide 1/8" minimum space and fill with silicone sealant.
Unify appearance of each series of tights by setting each piece to match others as nearly as possible.
Inspect each piece and set with pattern, draw and bow oriented in the same direction as other piece.
Miter cut and bond ends together at corners where gaskets are used for channel glazing, so that gaskets
will not pull away from corners and result in voids or leaks in the glazing system.
Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by attachment of crossed streamers
to framing held away from glass.
Do not apply markers of any type to surfaces of glass.
Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in any other way
during the construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.
Final installation must be completely weather tight and clean both inside and out.
INSULATING GLASS UNIT INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Install products using the recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets and other
glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in the "GANA
Glazing Manual".
Verify that Insulating Glass (IG) Unit secondary seal is compatible with glazing sealants.
Install glass in prepared glazing channels and other framing members.
Install setting blocks in rabbets as recommended by referenced glazing standards in GANA Glazing
Manual and IGMA Glazing Guidelines.
Provide bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances and glazing material tolerances recommended
by GANA Glazing Manual.
Provide weep system as recommended by GANA Glazing Manual.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics.
Distribute the weight of the glass unit along the edge rather than at the corner.
Comply with manufacturers and referenced industry recommendations on expansion joints and anchors,
accommodating thermal movement, glass openings, use of setting blocks, edge, face and bite
clearances, use of glass spacers, edge blocks and installation of weep systems.
Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation.
Prevent glass from contact with contaminating substances that result from construction operations, such
as weld spatter, fireproofing or plaster.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked or damaged in any way.
GLASS AND GLAZING

08800 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.5
CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
Clean excess sealant or compound from glass and framing members immediately after application, using
solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers.
Glass to be cleaned according to:
1.
GANA Glass Informational Bulletin GANA 01-0300 - Proper Procedures for Cleaning Architectural
Glass Products.
2.
GANA Glass Information Bulletin GANA TD-02-0402 Heat-Treated Glass Surfaces Are Different.
Do not use scrapers or other metal tools to clean glass.
GLASS AND GLAZING

08800 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 08870 WINDOW FILM

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Sun Control window film.

RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Section 08800 Glass and Glazing; general glazing applications to receive architectural window film.
REFERENCES
ASHRAE - American Society for Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers; Handbook of
Fundamentals.
ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM D 882 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting.
2. ASTM D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers -Tension.
3. ASTM D 624 - Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers
4. ASTM D 1004 - Standard Test Method for Tear Resistance (Graves Tear) of Plastic Film and
Sheeting.
5. ASTM D 1044 - Standard Method of Test for Resistance of Transparent Plastics to Surface Abrasion
(Taber Abrader Test).
6. ASTM D 2240 - Standard Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness.
7. ASTM D 2582 - Standard Test Method for Puncture-Propagation Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and
Thin Sheeting.
8. ASTM D 5895 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Drying or Curing During Film Formation of
Organic Coatings Using Mechanical Recorders.
9. ASTM D 4830 - Standard Test Methods for Characterizing Thermoplastic Fabrics Used in Roofing
and Waterproofing.
10. ASTM E 84 - Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
11. ASTM E 308 - Standard Recommended Practice for Spectophotometry and Description of Color in
CIE 1931 System.
12. ASTM E 903 - Standard Methods of Test for Solar Absorbance, Reflectance and Transmittance of
Materials Using Integrating Spheres.
13. ASTM E 1886 - Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors,
and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials.
14. ASTM E 1996 - Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors
and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes.
15. ASTM F1642 - Standard Method of Test for Glazing and Glazing Systems Subject to Airblast
Loadings
16. ASTM F2912 - Standard Specification for Glazing and Glazing Systems Subject to Airblast Loadings.
17. NFRC 100/200 (Formerly ASTM E903) - Standard Methods of Test for Solar Absorbance,
Reflectance and Transmittance of Materials Using Integrating Spheres.
Window 5.2 - A Computer Tool for Analyzing Window Thermal Performance; Lawrence Berkeley
Laboratory.
ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety
Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.
Consumer Products Safety Commission 16 CFR, Part 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing
Materials.
GSA-TS01 - Standard Test for Glazing and Glazing Systems Subject to Airblast Loadings.
UPDATED: August 5, 2014
WINDOW FILM
08870 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
G.
H.
1.4
ISO 16933, International Standard for Glass in Building: Explosion-resistant security glazing - Test and
classification for arena air-blast testing.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): UL 972 - Burglary Resisting Glazing Material.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.5
A.
B.
1.6
Luminous Efficacy: The ratio of visible light transmission to shading coeffiecient.

Fire Performance: Surface burning characteristics when tested in accordance ASTM E 84:
1.
Flame Spread: 25, maximum.
2.
Smoke Developed: 450, maximum.
Abrasion Resistance: Film must have a surface coating that is resistant to abrasion such that, less than
5 percent increase of transmitted light haze will result in accordance with ASTM D 1044 using 50 cycles,
500 grams weight, and the CS10F Calbrase Wheel.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.7

Product Data: Manufacturers data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1.
2.
3.
Installation methods.
Selection Samples: For each film specified, submit two complete sets of color chips representing
manufacturers full range of available colors and patterns.
Verification Samples: for each film specified, two samples representing actual film color and pattern.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
1.8
Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be supplied by a single
manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience.
Installer Qualifications: All products listed in this section are to be installed by a single installer with a
minimum of five years demonstrated experience in installing products of the same type and scope as
specified.
1.
Provide documentation that the installer is authorized by the Manufacturer to perform Work
specified in this section.
2.
Provide a Glass Stress Analysis of the existing glass and proposed glass/film combination as
recommended by the film manufacturer.
Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application
workmanship.
1.
Finish areas designated by Architect.
2.
Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved by
Architect.
3.
Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
A.
B.
Store products in manufacturers unopened packaging until ready for installation.

Store and dispose of hazardous materials, and materials contamination by hazardous materials, in
accordance with requirement of local authorities having jurisdiction.
WINDOW FILM
08870 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.9
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.10
A.
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by
manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside
manufacturers recommended limits.
WARRANTY
At project closeout, provide to Owner or Owners Representative an executed current copy of the
manufacturers standard limited warranty against manufacturing defect, outlining its terms, conditions,
and exclusions from coverage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
A.
Acceptable Manufacturer: 3M Window Film, which is located at: 3M Center Bldg. 0235-02-S-27; St.
Paul, MN 55144-1000; Toll Free Tel: 800-480-1704; Tel: 651-736-1549; Fax: 651-737-3446; Email:
3Mrenewableenergy@mmm.com; Web:www.3m.com/windowfilm.
PRESTIGE SUN CONTROL FILM
Physical Properties:
1.
Composition: Optically clear polyester film containing at least 220 layers and incorporating
pressure sensitive adhesive on one side and an acrylic abrasion resistant coating on the other.
Nanotechnology represents a breakthrough in technology due to the enhanced heat, UV and IR
rejection, without the presence of any metals.
2.
Uniformity: No noticeable pin holes, streaks, thin spots, scratches, banding or other optical
defects.
3.
Variation in Total Transmission across the Width: Less than 2 percent over the average at any
portion along the length.
4.
Thickness: Nominal 2.0 mils (0.1 mm) with no evidence of coating voids.
5.
Identification: Labeled as to Manufacturer as listed in this Section.
B.
Performance, Prestige 70 Clear Film nanotechnology, no metal and at least 220 plus layers applied to
Inch (6.4 mm) Thick Clear Glass:
1.
Visible Light Transmission (NFRC 100/200, ASTM E 308): 69 percent.
2.
Visible Reflection Exterior (NFRC 100/200): 9 percent. Visible Reflection - Interior (NFRC
100/200): 9 percent.
3.
Ultraviolet Rejected (NFRC 100/200): 99.9 percent.
4.
Infrared Energy Rejected (NFRC 100/200): 97 percent; as measured between 900-1000 nm.
5.
Luminous Efficacy: 1.4.
6.
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (Normal Incidence) (NFRC 100/200): 0.50.
7.
Total Solar Energy Rejected (TSER) at 90 Degrees (Normal Incidence) (NFRC 100/200): 50
percent.
8.
Total Solar Energy Rejected (TSER) at 60 Degrees (NFRC 100/200): 59 percent.
C.
Performance, Prestige 60 - Clear Film, nanotechnology, no metal and at least 220 plus layers applied to
1/4 Inch (6.4 mm) Thick Clear Glass:
1.
Visible Light Transmission (ASTM E 84): 60 percent.
2.
Visible Reflection - Exterior (NFRC 100/200): 8 percent.
3.
Visible Reflection - Interior (NFRC 100/200): 8 percent.
4.
5.
6.
WINDOW FILM
08870 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
7.
8.
9.
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient at 90 Degrees (Normal Incidence) (NFRC 100/200): 0.47.
Total Solar Energy Rejected (TSER) at 90 Degrees (Normal Incidence) (NFRC 100/200):
percent.
53
D.
Performance, Prestige 50 - Lightly Tinted Film, nanotechnology, no metal and at least 220 plus layers
applied to 1/4 Inch (6.4 mm) Thick Clear Glass:
1.
Visible Light Transmission (ASTM E 84): 50 percent.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
percent.
9.
E.
Performance, Prestige 40 - Lightly Tinted Film, nanotechnology, no metal and at least 220 plus layers
applied to 1/4 Inch (6.4 mm) Thick Clear Glass:
1.
Visible Light Transmission (NFRC 100/200): 39 percent.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
percent.
9.
Black-Out Film
1.
3M Scotchcal
2.
Colors: Black or white (Verify with Sprouts.)
F.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Film Examination:
1.
If preparation of glass surfaces is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of
deviations from manufacturer's recommended installation tolerances and conditions.
a.
Glass surfaces receiving new film should first be examined to verify that they are free from
defects and imperfections, which will affect the final appearance.
2.
Do not proceed with installation until glass surfaces have been properly prepared and deviations
from manufacturer's recommended tolerances are corrected. Prepare surfaces using the methods
recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result under the project conditions.
3.
Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions.
B.
Impact Protection Adhesive Examination:

1.
If application of window film is/was the responsibility of another installer, notification in writing shall
be made of deviations from manufacturer's recommended installation tolerances and conditions.
2.
Filmed glass surfaces receiving new attachment shall be examined to verify that they are free from
defects and imperfections, and that the film edges extend sufficiently to the frame edges.
3.
Do not proceed with installation until film and frame surfaces have been properly prepared and
WINDOW FILM
08870 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
4.
C.
3.2
deviations from manufacturer's recommended tolerances are corrected. Prepare surfaces using the
methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result under the project
conditions.
Upon the customer's request, an adhesion test to the frame surface may be conducted by applying
a 4 - 6 inch long bead, approximately 0.5 - 1 inch in width, masking one side of the frame surface
underneath the strip with tape. Allow the Impact Protection Adhesive to cure for 7 days and test
adhesion by pulling up on the masked end and a 90 degree angle. If cohesive failure is observed
(adhesive residue left behind on the frame surface), adhesion is acceptable; if adhesive failure is
observed (clean peel from the frame), adhesion is unacceptable and product is not recommended.
Impact Protection Profile Examination:

1.
If application of window film is/was the responsibility of another installer, notification in writing shall
be made of deviations from manufacturer's recommended installation tolerances and conditions.
2.
Windows and frames must be examined to ensure that they are fit to receive the Impact Protection
Profile in a manner such that the two profile adhesive strips will be perpendicularly opposed to
each other and that they will not contact glazing stops or frame gaskets without stretching the
profile.
3.
Filmed glass surfaces receiving new attachment shall be examined to verify that they are free from
defects and imperfections, and that the film edges extend sufficiently to the frame edges.
4.
Do not proceed with installation until film and frame surfaces have been properly prepared and
deviations from manufacturer's recommended tolerances are corrected. Prepare surfaces using the
methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result under the project
conditions.
5.
Upon the customer's request, an adhesion test to the frame surface may be conducted by applying
a 4 - 6 inch long strip on the frame surface, using the sufficient pressure to achieve good adhesive
wet-out. Allow the Impact Protection Profile to cure for 1-2 days and test adhesion by removing the
test strip. If cohesive failure is observed (adhesive residue left behind on the frame surface),
adhesion is acceptable; if adhesive failure is observed (clean peel from the frame), adhesion is
unacceptable and product is either not recommended, or an adhesion promoter, such as 3M
Primer 94, must be used.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for
the substrate under the project conditions.
C.
Refer to Manufacturer's installation instructions for methods of preparation for Impact Protection
Adhesive or Impact Protection Profile film attachment systems.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Film Installation:
1.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2.
Cut film edges neatly and square at a uniform distance of 1/8 inch (3 mm) to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of
window sealant. Use new blade tips after 3 to 4 cuts.
3.
Spray the slip solution, composed of one capful of baby shampoo or dishwashing liquid to 1 gallon
of water, on window glass and adhesive to facilitate proper positioning of film.
4.
Apply film to glass and lightly spray film with slip solution.
5.
Squeegee from top to bottom of window. Spray slip solution to film and squeegee a second time.
6.
Bump film edge with lint-free towel wrapped around edge of a 5-way tool.
7.
Upon completion of film application, allow 30 days for moisture from film installation to dry
thoroughly, and to allow film to dry flat with no moisture dimples when viewed under normal viewing
conditions.
WINDOW FILM
08870 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
Impact Protection Adhesive Installation:

1.
The film attachment system shall be applied according to the specifications of the Manufacturer by
an Authorized Dealer/Applicator. Refer to 3M publication, 70-0709-0322-7, 3M Impact Protection
Adhesive Attachment System Installation Instructions.
a.
For blast mitigation: minimum 1/2 inch bead overlap on both frame and film (excluding
glazing stops or compression gaskets).
b.
For windborne debris protection: minimum 3/8 inch bead overlap on both frame and film
(excluding glazing stops or compression gaskets).
2.
To ensure a straight and consistent bead width is achieved, masking tape may be applied to film
and frame surfaces prior to application.
3.
With prior approval of the building owner or property manager, existing compression gaskets may
be partially removed or trimmed to allow for a thinner bead and stronger anchorage. If removing the
gaskets, sections shall be trimmed approximately 3 inches in length and inserted with appropriate
spacing along all sides of the window to help secure the glazing during application and curing of
the Impact Protection Adhesive.
4.
The Impact Protection Adhesive shall be dispensed with a caulk gun with nozzle opening diameter
sized to match the approximate size of the desired bead width.
5.
A plastic putty knife or other tool with a clean straight edge shall be used to trowel and smooth out
the adhesive. The completed adhesive bead shall be relatively triangular in shape.
6.
Any masking tape used shall be carefully removed within 10 minutes after applying the wet glaze.
C.
Impact Protection Profile Installation:

1.
The film attachment system shall be applied according to the specifications of the Manufacturer by
an Authorized Dealer/Applicator trained to install 3M Impact Protection Profile. Refer to 3M
publication, 70-0709-0323-5, 3M Impact Protection Profile Attachment System Installation
Instructions.
2.
Each profile piece must span continuously to both sides of the window, within 1/8 inch to the frame
edge. Splicing the profile between frame edges is prohibited.
3.
Profile must be aligned and applied by 3M recommended or approved methods and tools to ensure
a quality installation.
4.
Corner joints must be fabricated by 3M recommended and approved methods. No part of the
profile adhesive shall make contact with an adjacent profile.
5.
Sufficient pressure must be evenly applied along the entire length of the profile to ensure full
adhesion from both adhesive strips. A roller tool is required to minimize entrapment of air in the
adhesive.
3.4

A.
Remove left over material and debris from Work area. Use necessary means to protect film before,
during, and after installation.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
C.
After application of film, wash film using common window cleaning solutions, including ammonia
solutions, 30 days after application. Do not use abrasive type cleaning agents and bristle brushes to
avoid scratching film. Use synthetic sponges or soft cloths.
WINDOW FILM
08870 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 09215 - LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all light gauge framing and bracing assemblies for interior walls
and ceilings including installation, studs, bridging, connectors, runners, furring channels, wallboard, and
fasteners.
install all steel bracing and framing work, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with local codes
and standards, or as specified herein. This work shall include but not be limited to design and fabrication
of steel members, and associated reinforcing, support of other work, cutting, fitting, fastening, cleaning,
and painting.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.3

Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
Submit manufacturers specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for all
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
ASTM C754 and ASTM C645 govern installation of steel framing and furring work herein. In case of
conflicts, the more stringent requirements shall govern.
1.
Protective coatings shall comply with ASTM A653, with zinc coating on exterior applications.
Fire Test Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated according to ASTM E119 by a testing and inspection agency.
Sound Transmission Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by a testing and
inspection agency.
LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING
09215 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
K.
1.4
Warranty:
1.
2.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
not permitted. Locate stacks, or bins to avoid or protect material from heavy and unnecessary traffic.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURER
A.
2.2
Steel Stud Manufacturers Association, Dietrich light gage steel framing or approved equal, size and
strength as indicated on the drawings or as required by local codes and standards.
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Non-Load Bearing Steel Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C754 for conditions indicated.
Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.
Protective Coating: ASTM A653, G60Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of hot-dip galvanized,
Metal furring channels for walls shall be minimum 0.0188 thick electro-galvanized steel, conforming to
ASTM C645.
All metal stud members shall be roll formed C type studs from corrosion-resistant steel corresponding
to the requirements of ASTM A653, ASTM A924, and ASTM D3322, and shall be zinc coated or primed.
1.
Minimum yield strength shall be 33,000 PSI for all CR runners, all 0.0312" thick and 0.0451" thick
members.
2.
Minimum yield strength shall be 50,000 PSI for all 0.0566" thick, and 0.0713" thick studs.
3.
Properties shall be as manufactured by Steel Stud Manufacturers Associations per I.C.B.O. No.
4943, or approved equal.
Use minimum 20-gauge for walls to receive ceramic tile, for walls over 10-6 high, and at jambs of door
openings 36 or wider.
Studs shall be a minimum 0.0312" (20 Gauge) thick C shape. (0.0188" (25 gauge) thick studs may be
used at interior partitions maximum height of 10-6) of the depths and spacing shown on drawings.
Tracks shall have a minimum flange of 1-1/4. Runner tracks anchored to concrete shall be minimum
0.0566" thick, with 0.145" x 1-1/2" Hilti Fasteners per I.C.B.O. No. 2388, at 24 O.C. maximum, or equal.
Bridging shall be cold rolled channel, minimum 1-1/2 deep with 1/2 flange width. Space bridging at
4-0 maximum O.C. Vertically double-up studs at all jambs.
LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING
09215 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
2.3
All connections shall be per manufacturers recommendations. A splice in heavy gauge framing
members, other than runner track shall not be permitted.
Provide metal floor and ceiling runners designed to accommodate the specified studs.
Tie Wire: ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625" diameter wire, or double strand of
0.0475" diameter wire.
Wire Hangers: ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162" diameter.
Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, shall be minimum 1 x 3/16 by length indicated on the drawings unless
noted otherwise.
Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538" and
minimum 1/2" wide flanges.
1.
Depth: 1-1/2" minimum.
Furring Channels (Furring Members): As indicated on the Drawings.
STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.4
Steel Studs and tracks: ASTM C645.

1.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings or 0.0312".
2.
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
1.
Double-Runner System: ASTM C645 top runners, inside runner with 2" deep flanges in thickness
not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside
runner
2.
Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to
interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than
indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
a.
i.
Steel Network Inc.; VertiClip SLD/VertiTrack VTD Series
ii.
Metal-Lite Inc, slotted track.
Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with
movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
1.
a.
Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak (attached to studs with Fire Trak Slip Clip).
b.
Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
1.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312".
Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4" wall attachment flange of 7/8"
minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179" and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
B.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other
properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
1.
Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.
2.
Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration
without foam displacement, 1/8" thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING

09215 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
B.
3.2
Monolithic Concrete Substrates:

1.
Clean surfaces to remove dust, loose particles, grease, oil, incompatible curing compounds, formrelease agents, and other foreign matter and deposits that could impair bond with bonding
compound and plaster.
2.
Remove ridges and protrusions greater than 1/8" and fill all depressions greater than 1/4" with
portland cement mortar. Allow to set and dry.
3.
Apply bonding compound on dry and fully cured concrete substrates.
Masonry Substrates: Clean surfaces to remove dirt, grease, oil, and other foreign matter and deposits
that could impair bond with plaster.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Comply with ASTM C754, ASTM C844, and ASTM C645 requirements that apply to work identified
herein and as indicated on the drawings. In Case of conflict, most restrictive requirements shall govern.
Attach steel runners at floor and ceiling to structural elements with suitable fasteners located 2" from
each end and spaced 24" O.C., or to suspended ceilings with toggle or molly bolts spaced 16" O.C.
Position studs vertically, engaging floor and ceiling runners and spaced 16" or 24 O.C., as indicated on
the drawings.
1.
When necessary, splice studs with 8" nested lap and two screw attachment per stud flange.
2.
Place studs in direct contact with all door frame jambs, abutting partitions, partition corners and
existing construction elements.
3.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls and a possibility of water penetration
through walls exists, install asphalt felt isolation strips in accordance with ASTM D226 Type I,
unperforated, between studs and wall surfaces.
Anchor all studs adjacent to door and window frames, partition intersections, and corners to ceiling and
floor runner flanges with screws (crimping is not acceptable).
1.
Securely anchor studs to jamb and head anchor clips of door or borrowed-light frames by bolt or
screw attachment.
2.
Over metal door and borrowed light frames place a cut-to-length section of runner with a webflange bend at each end horizontally, and secure with one positive attachment per flange.
3.
Position a cut-to-length stud (extending to ceiling runner) at vertical panel joints over door frame
header.
Frame all door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturers applicable
written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
At all door openings 32 and over in width, install double studs at both jambs.
1.
Install additional stud back-to-back of stud at door jamb.
2.
Securely anchor by welding studs to each other.
At partition corners, install a stud so that it forms the outside corner.
Following application of a single layer of wallboard to this stud, install a second stud in the abutting
runner and screw attach the web through the wallboard into the flange of the first stud. A 3-stud
conventional corner is an acceptable alternative.
Bridge stud partitions at 4-0 O.C. max. vertically with 1-1/2" channels through studs secured in place.
Lap channels by nesting one inside the other to a depth of at least 8" and wire tie together.
Provide all braced framing of steel stud framing as detailed.
1.
Use only mechanical attachments.
2.
Extend studs to substrate as indicated.
LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING

09215 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.3
WALL FURRING INSTALLATION

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.4
Attach metal furring channels either vertically or horizontally spaced 16" O.C., to masonry or concrete
surfaces with hammer set or power driven fasteners, concrete stub nails or screws designed for masonry
attachment spaced and staggered at 24" O.C. on opposite flanges.
Nest channels 8" at splices and anchor with 2 fasteners in each wing.
For furring positioned horizontally, attach a furring member not more than 4" from both the floor and
ceiling lines.
Where furring channel is installed directly to exterior wall and a possibility of water penetration through
walls exists, install asphalt felt protection strip between furring channel and wall.
Z-FURRING
A.
Provide insulated furring system, including 24 wide rigid insulation.

identified in section 07200
Insulation requirements are
LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING

09215 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 09220 - STUCCO

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all stucco work including installation of wire lath, stucco mixture
(portland cement, hydrated lime and aggregate), metal expansion joints, drip screed mouldings, building
paper, fasteners, caulk and trim.
install all stucco work, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with local codes and standards, or as
specified herein. This work shall include but not be limited to mixing and application of stucco and
associated troweling, curing, patching, repairing, cleaning and sealing.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.3

Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
Submit manufacturer's certificate that materials meet Specification requirements.
3.
Submit manufacturers written recommendations, proportion mixes and installation instructions for
factory prepared finish materials.
Mockups: Provide 8'-0" x 8'-0" mockups as required by Section 01400.
1.
Provide one (1) mockup for each type or color of finish required unless directed to do otherwise in
writing by Architect.
1.
Provide (4) 12" x 12" samples (and manufacturer's literature) for each color and texture of finish
coat indicated in accordance with Section 01330 for all work under this Section.
2.
Samples shall be provided to the Architect on the job site, and when approved, shall become the
standard for all work.
3.
Samples shall show color, texture and workmanship (prepared on rigid backing) of finished work.
4.
Construct successive panels, if necessary, until approved.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
Comply with applicable requirements of ASTM C926; and Plaster, Metal Framing System, Lath Manual,
latest edition.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For stucco assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide
materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E119 by an
independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Allowable Tolerances: Maximum deviation from true plane of 1/8" in 10'-0" as measured by straight edge
placed at any location on surface.
STUCCO
09220 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.4
and in the Specifications herein. Comply with ASTM C1063, C645, A641, C933, C1032 and A653 as
applicable.
Warranty:
1.
2.
Warranty Period: Five (5) years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.5
Keep stucco and all other cementitious materials dry until ready for use, keeping them off the ground,
under cover, and away from damp walls or surfaces. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from
the premises.
not permitted.
Locate storage stacks, or bins to avoid or protect material from heavy and unnecessary traffic.
enclosures, and handled by methods which avoid exposure to moisture.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Where stucco is component of an assembly for which a fire resistive rating is shown or required, provide
stucco complying with UL design assemblies shown.
Cold Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials in stucco mixes. Do not apply stucco to
frozen surfaces or surfaces containing frost. Do not apply stucco when ambient temperature is less than
40 deg F.
Hot Weather Requirements: Protect stucco from uneven and excessive evaporation during hot, dry
weather.
Exercise extreme care and provide necessary forms of protection for protecting finish work of other
trades during stucco operation (in particular door and window units) from being stained, tarnished or
otherwise damaged for work under this Section. Mask materials to protect same.
Comply with ASTM C926 requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURER
A.
Ready Mixed Stucco: Mill-mixed portland cement, aggregates, coloring agents and proprietary
ingredients as manufactured by one of the following or Architect approved equal:
1.
California Stucco Products Corp - Conventional Portland Cement Stucco;
STUCCO
09220 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
2.2
2.
ChemRex-Thoro Stucco;
3.
United State Gypsum Co - Oriental Exterior Finish Stucco.
For factory prepared finish coat mixes, prepare mix in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II.

1.
Colorants for job-mixed finish coat shall be colorfast mineral pigments.
2.
Color for finish coat as indicated on the drawings and match Architect's approved sample.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
Sand aggregate: Clean, well graded sand or screenings from crushed stone or slag, and conforming to
ASTM C897 for fine aggregate except that it shall be graded within the following limits:
Passing No.
Passing No.
Passing No.
Passing No.
Passing No.
Passing No.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
2.3
4 sieve
8 sieve
16 sieve
30 sieve
50 sieve
100 sieve
100%
90%
60 - 90%
35 - 70%
10 - 30%
5%
Provide accessories in compliance with ASTM C1063, and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with
thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
Metal casing beads shall be 26 gauge zinc or zinc coated galvanized steel with expansion flange; No. 4,
No. 60 or No. 66, or as indicated on the drawings.
Metal expansion joints shall be 26 gauge galvanized steel with expansion flange; (No. 15) (No. 40) for
field; No. 30 for inside corners; or as indicated on the drawings.
Drip screed mouldings shall be as manufactured by Fry Reglet Corporation, Los Angeles, CA. Unit to be
made of extruded aluminum 0.50" thick, clear anodized finish.
Weather Resistive Grade D Building Paper (asphalt saturated felt) complying with UL Standard 55-A.
Metal Lath: Woven wire lath complying with ASTM C847 and ASTM C653, G60 hot dip galvanized zinc
coating and ICC-ESR listed.
1.
20 ga. 1" galvanized steel woven wire fabric lath applied over foam.
2.
Wire lath should be fastened with nails or staples that allow 1" of penetration into wood stud.
3.
Furring crimps to furr lath body 1/8" min. from face of substrate.
Fasteners for attaching metal lath to substrates: Comply with ASTM C1063.
Trims: Various trims are used as weeps, casing beads and expansion joints. Type of trim varies with
substrates and thickness of plaster. Refer to drawings and manufacturer's recommendations.
Water for mixing to be potable and free of substances capable of affecting stucco set or of damaging
stucco, lath or accessories.
Color and texture to be per Architect approved sample panel.
Bonding Agents to comply with ASTM C932 and as follows:
1.
Thorobond, Charger Corporation, Hamden, CT, Tel.: (800) 922-4623.
2.
Hornweld, Tamms Ind., Kirkland, IL, Tel.: (800) 862-2667.
PROPORTIONING AND MIXING
A.
B.
C.
D.
Mix ingredients in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

Mortar for all coats shall consist of one (part) by volume of portland cement to not less than 3 of more
than 4 (part) volumes of damp, loose aggregate.
Hydrated lime, hydrated lime putty, or slaked lime putty may be added as a plasticizing agent, but the
amount used shall not exceed 10% by weight or more than 25% by volume of the cement used.
Measurements of ingredients shall be accurate and successive batches proportioned exactly alike.
STUCCO
09220 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.
E.
Mix aggregate, cement and other dry ingredients until the mass is uniform in color and
homogenous before adding water.
2.
Determine the quantity of water necessary for the desired consistency by trial, and thereafter
measure in proper proportions
3.
Retempering of mortar will not be allowed.
Mix in bonding agent per manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Make a detailed inspection of all areas and surfaces to be enclosed or covered by the work of this
Section, and make arrangements for satisfactory correction of all defective workmanship or materials
that might affect the work herein.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused
by plastering.
METAL LATH AND TRIM
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.4
Install metal lath according to ASTM C1063. Comply with ASTM C754 for installation of items not
addressed in ASTM C1063.
Install reinforcement for external corners and supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing as required
to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, or other similar construction.
Where stucco terminates against dissimilar materials, install casing beads, provide continuous silicon
caulk.
Install expansion joints in the stucco field as indicated, or where not indicated, install joints to create
panels no larger than 144 SF with no dimension exceeding 18'-0", or a length to width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1.
Where expansion joints are placed parallel to framing members, install joints so that none is more than
4" away from a framing member.
STUCCO APPLICATION
A.
B.
C.
Apply stucco in compliance with ASTM C926. Finish to match Architect-approved samples.
Over Masonry:
1.
Where indicated over concrete or masonry, apply brown coat directly over concrete or masonry,
proportioned as specified above.
2.
Dampen surface evenly to obtain uniform suction.
3.
Apply to an approximate thickness of 3/8".
4.
Bring surface to a true, even surface by floating or rodding, and leave rough ready to receive finish
coat.
5.
Cure for 7 days by keeping moist.
Over Sheathing:
1.
Apply scratch cost over metal lath with sufficient pressure so that it is shoved through the metal
reinforcement against the backing to form full keys and embed completely the reinforcement.
a.
Apply to an approximate thickness of 3/8" from the face of the backing.
b.
Scratch to provide bond for succeeding coat.
c.
Cure with water for minimum of 72 hours.
2.
Apply brown coat no sooner than 72 hours after the application of the scratch coat.
a.
Dampen scratch coat evenly to obtain uniform suction.
b.
STUCCO
09220 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
c.
D.
3.5
Bring surface to a true, even surface by floating or rodding and leave rough ready to receive
finish coat.
d.
Cure with water for minimum of 7 days.
Over Masonry and Sheathing:
1.
Apply finish coat no sooner than 7 days after the application of the preceding coat.
2.
Before applying, dampen the surface of the preceding coat evenly to obtain uniform suction.
3.
The thickness of the finish coat shall be sufficient to secure the texture specified, but in no case,
less than 1/8", and the total thickness of the stucco shall be at least 1" from the face of the backing.
4.
Avoid excessive troweling.
5.
When applying the finish, plan work so that the entire wall can be completed at one time to
eliminate joining marks. If not practical, use a corner, door or window as a breaking point.
6.
Texture and color of finish coat shall match approved sample.
7.
Finish to be a Light Sand finish.
CURING
A.
3.6
Keep each coat of stucco damp for at least 72 hours (brown coat 7 days) after application. Moistening of
each coat shall begin as soon as the stucco has hardened sufficiently so as not to be injured. Apply
water in a fine fog spray. Avoid soaking the wall. Apply only as much water as can be readily absorbed.
Protect stucco from uneven and excessive evaporation during hot, dry weather and also from strong
blasts of wind.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Cut, patch, replace and repair stucco as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks,
dents and imperfections.
Stucco containing cracks, blisters, buckles, crazing, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar
defects, including pits or discoloration will not be acceptable. Stucco to substrate bond failure is not
acceptable.
1.
Remove such stucco and replace with stucco conforming to the requirements of this Specification.
Patching inherently defective work will be permitted only when approved by Architect, and such patching
shall match existing work in texture and colors.
Repair all defects after other trades have finished their work.
STUCCO
09220 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 09221 WESTERN ONE KOTE SYNTHETIC STUCCO

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all synthetic stucco work including installation of foam
sheathing, scratch coat, wire lath, synthetic stucco mixture, control joints, fiberboard, weather resistive
barrier building paper, fasteners, silicone caulking, drip screed moldings, flashing, and trim.
install all stucco work, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with local codes and standards, or as
specified herein. This work shall include but not be limited to mixing and application of synthetic stucco
and accessories, and associated troweling, curing, patching, repairing, cleaning, and sealing.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.3

1.
Submit catalog data which includes specification and installation details.
2.
Installation instructions and recommendation of manufacturer shall be specified for this application.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
Submit manufacturers certificate that materials meet Specification requirements.
3.
Submit manufacturers printed instructions for installation of synthetic stucco and associates
materials, proportion mixes, and installation instructions for factory prepared finish materials.
Mockups: Provide 8 x 8 mockups as required by Section 01400.
1.
Provide (4) 12 x 12 samples (and manufacturers literature) in accordance with Section 01330 for
all work under this Section.
2.
Samples shall be provided for Architects approval, and when approved, shall become the standard
for all work.
3.
Each sample shall show color, texture and workmanship of finished work.
4.
Construct successive panels, if necessary, until approved.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Comply with applicable requirements of ASTM C 926 as applicable; and Plaster, Metal Framing System,
Lath Manual, latest edition.
Comply with the material and installation requirements identified in ICC ESR-1607.
Building Department inspection is required on wire lath installation prior to application of the coating, and
per local code requirements.
Allowable Tolerances: Maximum deviation from true plane of 1/8 in 10'-0" as measured by straight edge
placed at any location on surface.
09221 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
G.
H.
I.
J.
1.4
Warranty:
1.
2.
Warranty Period: Five (5) years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.5
Deliver all products in their original, unopened, undamaged packages, containers or bundles, with
identification labels intact, and bearing the name of the manufacturer and the brand.
Keep stucco and all other cementitous materials dry until ready for use, keeping them off the ground,
under cover, and away from damp walls and surfaces. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from
the premises.
not permitted.
Locate stacks, or bins to avoid or protect material from heavy and unnecessary traffic.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Apply material (Western 1-Kote) when the ambient air temperature is between 40 deg F and 110 deg F.
If freezing temperatures are expected within 24 hours after application, precautions should be taken to
protect walls, (tenting, heaters) etc.
During periods of excessive heat and wind, additional curing must be provided.
Where stucco is a component of an assembly for which a fire resistive rating is shown or required,
provide stucco complying with UL design assemblies shown on Drawings.
1.
Do not use frozen materials in stucco mixes.
2.
Do not apply stucco to frozen surfaces or surfaces containing frost.
3.
Do not apply stucco when ambient temperature is less than 40 deg F.
Hot Weather Requirements:
1.
Protect stucco from uneven and excessive evaporation during hot, dry weather. See
manufacturer's recommendations.
Exercise extreme care and provide necessary forms of protection for protecting finish work of other
trades during stucco operation (in particular door and window units) from being stained, tarnished or
otherwise damaged for work under this Section. Mask materials to protect same.

09221 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Provide synthetic stucco materials as provided by one of the following manufacturers:

1.
Dryvit
2.
USG
3.
Senergy
4.
STO
5.
Architect approved equal.
ACCEPTABLE MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
Products must comply with the requirements identified in ICC ESR-1607, and as recommended by the
approved manufacturer.
Western 1-Kote or architect approved synthetic stucco materials shall be a portland cement mixture:
ASTM C150, Type I or II. Fiber reinforced modified portland cement plaster: ICC ESR-1607.
Sand: Must conform to requirements of ASTM C144 and ICC 1607 "Western 1-Kote".
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S, if required by stucco manufacturer.
Approved color pigments may be added to the stucco mix in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions.
1" Tongue and Groove Foam Board: must be ICC listed:
1.
(EPS) nominal 1.5 lbs per cubic foot, Class I flame spread classification, and smoke developed
rating not exceeding 450 density, or
2.
(XEPS) 1.6 lbs per cubic foot density Class I flame spread rating, and smoke developed rating not
exceeding 450.
Plywood: Minimum 5/8" thick exterior grade.
Weather Resistive Grade D Building Paper: (asphalt saturated felt) complying with UL Standard 55-A1983.
Gypsum Sheathing Board: comply with ASTM C79-92.
Lath: Woven wire or expanded metal lath with ICC listing.
1.
Minimum 20 ga. 1" galvanized steel woven-wire fabric. Lath must self furred with lath.
a.
Maximum total coating thickness is 1/2"
b.
Furring must be provided at maximum 6" intervals each way. The crimps must furr the body
of the lath a minimum of 1/8" from the substrate after installation.
c.
Wire lath should be fastened with nails or staples that allow 1" penetration into wood stud.
Fasteners: In accordance with stucco manufacturer's written recommendations.
Bonding agent: Required to be applied directly to the base coat as time requirements and manufacturer's
recommendations allow.
Trims: Various trims such as weeps, casing beads, and expansion joints. Type of trim varies with
application, substrate and thickness or plaster. Provide trim as recommended by manufacturer.
Acrylic Finish Coat and Primer: As recommended by the synthetic stucco manufacturer, such as 100%
pure acrylic copolymer with integral color and texture aggregate.
Color finish coat where applicable shall be factory mixed and applied in strict accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions. Color and texture to be per Architect approved sample panel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Make a detailed inspection or all areas and surfaces to be enclosed or covered by the work of this
Section, and make arrangements for satisfactory correction or all defective workmanship or materials
that might affect the work herein.
09221 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.2
STUCCO APPLICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction, and local codes and standards. Where
there is a conflict with the instructions included herein, the more stringent requirements shall be used.
Apply weather resistive barrier.
Where indicated over concrete or masonry, apply brown coat directly over concrete or masonry,
proportioned as specified below:
1.
Dampen surface evenly to obtain uniform suction.
2.
3.
Bring surface to a true, even surface by floating or rodding, and leave rough ready to receive finish
coat.
4.
Cure for seven (7) days by keeping moist.
Apply finish coat not sooner than seven (7) days after the application of the preceding coat.
1.
Before applying, dampen the surface of the preceding coat evenly to obtain uniform suction.
2.
When applying the finish, plan work so that the entire wall can be completed at one time to
eliminate joining marks.
3.
If not practical, use a corner, door or window as breaking point.
4.
The thickness of the finish coat shall be sufficient to secure the specified texture and total thickness
of stucco shall be at least 5/8" and maximum 3/4".
5.
Texture and color of finish shall match approved sample.
6.
Finish to be as scheduled on drawings.
CURING
A.
B.
C.
3.4
Keep each coat of stucco damp for at least 72 hours (brown coat seven (7) days) after application.
Moistening of each coat shall begin as soon as the stucco has hardened sufficiently so as not to be
injured.
Apply water in a fine spray.
1.
Avoid soaking the wall.
2.
Apply only as much water as can be readily absorbed.
3.
Protect stucco from uneven and excessive evaporation during hot, dry weather and also from
strong blasts of wind.
PATCHING
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.5
Stucco containing cracks, blisters, pits or discoloration will not be acceptable.

Remove such stucco and replace with stucco conforming to the requirements of this Specification.
Patching inherently defective work will be permitted only when approved and such patching shall match
existing work in texture and colors.
Repair all defects after other trades have finished their work.
ASSEMBLIES
A.
B.
1-1/2" weep screeds and casing beads shall be installed to match the thickness of the foam and plaster.
Weep screeds and plaster trims to protect exposed sheathing ends must be installed for all wall
assemblies.

09221 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.6
METAL TRIM
A.
B.
C.
3.7
Where stucco terminates against dissimilar materials, install casing beads, provide continuous silicon
caulk.
Install expansion joints in the stucco field as indicated, or, where not indicated, install joints to create
panels no larger than 144 sq. ft. with no dimension exceeding 18'-0" or a length to width ratio of 2-1/2 to
1.
Where expansion joints are placed parallel to framing members, install joints so that none are more than
4" away from a framing member.
FINISH COAT
A.
B.
C.
D.
The Dryvit finish (a ready-mixed, acrylic-based wall coating) is applied directly over the One Kote stucco
ONLY AFTER THE STUCCO COAT HAS THOROUGHLY DRIED. Dryvit finish shall be applied by
spraying, rolling, or toweling using a stainless steel trowel, depending on finish specified. General rules
for application of Dryvit finishes are as follows:
1.
Using a clean, rust free, high speed mixer, thoroughly stir the Dryvit finish to a uniform consistence
(small amounts of clean water may be added to aid workability).
2.
Avoid application in direct sunlight.
3.
Finish shall be applied in a continuous application, always working to a wet edge.
4.
Weather conditions will be a factor in the application of the finish, as well as drying time.
5.
Finish may be applied over caulk joints, but never over expansion joints.
All Dryvit Materials described should never be applied if ambient and surface temperatures cannot be
kept above 38 deg F during application and drying period.
Prior to installation, the wall shall be free of residual moisture.
The stored materials should be protected from sun and frost.

09221 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all gypsum wallboard assemblies including gypsum wallboard
installation, corner bead reinforcement, metal edge reinforcement, control joints, fasteners, adhesives,
suspended ceiling components, joint treatment products, finishing materials, and sealants.
Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to provide, furnish,
transport, and install all gypsum wallboard finishing work with related metal components, accessories,
and finish surfaces, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with local codes and standards, or as
specified herein. This work shall include but not be limited to design and furnishing of gypsum wallboard
and associated cutting, fitting, drilling, taping, fastening, sealing, and finishing.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
1.3

Shop Drawings:
1.
Test Reports:
1.
Submit copies of fire test report on fire rated wallboard assemblies.
2.
Submit copies of evidence of fire hazard classification for wallboard.
3.
Certified test reports of other acceptable testing agencies which perform testing in accordance with
ASTM E119, E84, and E90 are acceptable.
Provide samples of texture finishes for Architect's approval in accordance with Sections 01330 and
01600.
Mockups: Provide 8-0" x 8-0" mockups of interior exposed finishes including painting as required by
Architect and in accordance with Section 01400.
Certificates:
Furnish manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed specifications
requirements.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Furnish manufacturer's printed instructions for installation of assemblies.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
Contractor shall comply with the requirements of ANSI A108.11, Interior Installation of Cementitious
Backer Units, and ASTM C36, C79, C442, C475, C514, C630, C840, C931, C954, C1002, C1047,
C1178, C1280, C1395, C1396, and GA-214, as applicable. In cases of conflicts the more stringent
requirements shall govern.
1.
It is intended that all materials furnished be a part of a complete wall system, whether it be supplied
by one or several manufacturers.
GYPSUM WALLBOARD ASSEMBLIES

09250 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.4
1.
Fire-rated Impact Resistant Board: Provide boards with indicated impact resistance when tested in
accordance with ASTM D2394
Warranty:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Contractor shall provide a weathertight, waterproof exterior wall system by caulking the joints or
wrapping the building with Tyvek waterproof materials.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.5
Deliver all wallboard materials in unopened, undamaged containers, with identification labels intact, and
bearing the name of the manufacturer, type, grade and brand.
Deliver fire-rated materials bearing testing agency label and required fire classification number.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Establish and maintain application and finishing environment in accordance with ASTM C840.
Temperature and Humidity Conditions:
1.
Do not install wallboard unless installation areas comply with the minimum temperature and
ventilation requirements recommended by the manufacturer.
Protection:
1.
Protect work installed by other trades prior to work performed under this section.
2.
Replace any damaged work without added cost to the Owner.
Provide closures for exterior openings, where required.
1.
Room temperature during installation of wallboard shall not be less than 50 deg F. with adequate
ventilation maintained to eliminate excessive moisture until joint compound is completely dry.
2.
Protect wallboard from moisture, and replace all damaged material.
Provide ventilation during the following adhesives and joint treatment applications.
1.
Use temporary air circulators in enclosed areas lacking natural ventilation.
2.
Under slow drying conditions, allow additional drying time between coats of joint treatment.
3.
Protect installed materials from drafts during hot, dry weather.

09250 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
2.2
General: Products must comply with ASTM C1178 or ASTM C1396 as applicable to type of gypsum
board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following.
1.
American Gypsum Co.
2.
G-P Gypsum
3.
National Gypsum
4.
USG Corporation
GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.3
Regular Type Wallboard: Comply with ASTM C36; 5/8" and 1/2" thickness, tapered edge.
Fire Rated: Type X Wallboard: Comply with ASTM C36, C442, C630, and C931.
Water resistant wallboard: Comply with ASTM C630, Grade Type X, 5/8 thickness with tapered edges.
ASTM C1178, Grade Type X, 1/2" and 5/8" thickness, tapered edge for other applications.
Exterior Horizontal Wallboard: Provide U.S. Gypsum SHEETROCK exterior gypsum ceiling board for
soffit and carport ceilings protected from water exposure, 5/8" thickness, conforming to ASTM C931.
Exterior walls (used with EIFS or veneer such as brick): Provide Dens-glass Gold, 5/8 thick fireguard
sheathing, as manufactured by G-P Gypsum Corporation in accordance with ASTM C1178 with Glass
matts both sides and long edges, water resistant core. Provide 2 wide, 10 x 10 glass mesh joint tape
and water resistant joint compound Tufroc 90 as manufactured by G-P Gypsum Corporation on all joints,
or caulk all joints with GE Silpruf joint sealant to provide a moisture proof sheathing system.
Exterior sheathing for roof panels: Dens-Deck Gold, 1/2 thick, with GE Silpruf joint sealant on all joints.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
Interior Trim: ASTM C1047

1.
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet.
2.
Shapes:
a.
Cornerbead: Use on all vertical and horizontal exterior corners.
b.
Bullnose bead.
c.
LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d.
L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e.
U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f.
Expansion (control) Joint.
g.
Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
Exterior Trim: ASTM C1047
1.
Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc.
2.
Shapes:
a.
Cornerbead.
b.
LC-Bead: J-shaped; use at exposed panel edges. Long flange receives joint compound.
c.
Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip
covering slot opening.

09250 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
D.
2.4
Aluminum Trim:
1.
Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions as indicated on the drawings.
2.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a.
Fry Reglet Corp.
b.
Gordon, Inc.
c.
Pittcon Industries.
3.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of
ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5.
4.
Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified.
Control Joints:
1.
Control joint U.S.G. #093
2.
Spacing of control joints:
a.
Partitions and suspended wall panels, 30-0 O.C.
b.
Interior ceilings, 30-0 O.C.
c.
Exterior ceilings, 30-0 O.C.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
General: Comply with ASTM C475

Joint Tape:
1.
Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
2.
Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.
3.
Water resistant gypsum board: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
4.
Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10 x 10 glass mesh with water resistant joint compound, or
as recommended by panel manufacturer.
5.
Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with
other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1.
Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use
setting-type taping compound.
2.
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim
flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
a.
Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
3.
Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
4.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:
1.
Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sand able
topping compound.
2.
Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board requires water resistant joint compound: Tufroc 90 or as
recommended by sheathing board manufacturer.
Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1.
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type,
sand able topping compound.
2.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.
3.
Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
Control Joints:
1.
Leave continuous opening between gypsum board panels.
2.
Provide separate supports for each control joint flange.
3.
Remove plastic tape after finishing with joint compound.

09250 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.5
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.6
General:
Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
Steel Drill Screws: Per ASTM C954 or ASTM C1002, or both with heads, threads, points and finish as
recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
Nails: If indicated on the drawings, use as required by ASTM C514, with heads, lengths, configurations,
and finish as recommended by the panel manufacturer.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by
combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
1.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with local codes and standards, and mineral-fiber
requirements of assembly.
2.
Refer to section 07200 for additional information.
Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Joint Sealants".
Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Building Insulation".
Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Building Insulation".
Laminating adhesives shall meet the requirements of ASTM C557 if required.
TEXTURE FINISHES (if required on drawings)
A.
B.
2.7
Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.

Polystyrene Aggregate Ceiling Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, polystyrene aggregate finish with flamespread and smoke-developed indexes of not more than 25 when tested according to ASTM E84.
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.
a.
G-P Gypsum; Georgia-Pacific Regency Ceiling Textures/Polystyrene.
b.
National Gypsum Company; Perfect Spray.
c.
USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Ceiling Spray Texture, QT.
3.
Texture: Fine
SEALANTS
A.
Sealant (non-acoustical) shall be as indicated for the application or as specified under Section 07920 of
these Specifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLING PANELS, GENERAL

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Install all panels in compliance with local codes and standards, ASTM C840, ASTM C1280, GA-216, and
manufacturers written instructions.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged,
or otherwise unacceptable for use on this project.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except
floors. Provide 1/4" to 1/2" wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges
of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical
sealant.
Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do
not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and
headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control joints to counteract wood
shrinkage.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and
penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of

09250 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
F.
3.2
partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C919 and with manufacturer's
written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through
assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
Install interior and exterior gypsum board in locations as indicated on the Drawings and as follows:
1.
Regular Type, Type X, and Ceiling Type: As indicated on Drawings.
2.
Moisture and Mold Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings, on vertical surfaces only (not on
ceilings).
INSTALLING SUSPENDED CEILINGS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.3
Except where otherwise indicated, provide 1-1/2" main runner channels spaced on 4'-0" centers and
metal furring channels spaced on not over 16" centers.
1.
Neither main runners nor cross furring shall be let into or come in contact with abutting masonry
walls or partitions.
2.
Locate a main runner within 6" of the wall to support the ends of the furring channels, and locate
hangers to support the ends of the main runners.
Where main runners or furring channels are spliced, overlap the ends not less than 8", and securely tie
near each end of the splice with 2 loops of 16 gauge galvanized wire.
Suspend main runners from structure above with one No. 9 hanger wire for each 12 S.F. of ceiling area.
1.
All wire hangers shall be of such length so that the lower ends may be saddle tied or wrapped
around the main runners so as to prevent turning or twisting of the runners.
At steel beams, joists or other steel construction wrap hangers around, inset through, or clip or bolt to the
supports, so as to develop the full strength of the hangers.
For wood construction inset wire hangers in holes drilled a minimum of 3" above bottom of joists and with
the upper end of the hangers to (3) 12d nails, driven on a downward slant into sides of joists allowing
minimum 1-1/4" penetration into the wood, driving nails at least 5" from bottom edges and not over 36"
O.C. with the upper end of the hanger in each case twisted 3 times around itself, or use (4) 1-1/2" No. 9
gauge wire staples to secure hangers to the sides of the joists, driving staples horizontally or on a
downward slant, three (3) near the upper edge of the loop and the fourth to fasten the loose end.
Securely clip metal furring channels to main runners using furring channel clips or saddle tie with 2
strands of 16 gauge tie wire. Install furring channel clips on alternate sides of the main runner channel.
At lights or other openings that interrupt the main runner or furring channels reinforce grillage with 3/4"
cold rolled channels, wire tied atop and paralleled to the main runner channels.
Apply wallboard with long dimension at right angles to the furring channels, with all abutting ends and
edges occurring over the web surface of the furring channel.
1.
Use wallboard of maximum possible length to minimize end joints.
2.
Neatly fit and stagger end joints.
3.
Install wallboard with 1-5/8" screws spaced 8" O.C. in the field of the board, at all bearings, and
along abutting edges.
4.
Install control joints as specified below for walls.
INSTALLING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A.
B.
Install panels in accordance with manufacturers written instructions, and local codes and standards.
Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.
1.
Install with 1/4" open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations.
2.
Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.

09250 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.4
INSTALLATION - WALLS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Apply wallboard with long dimension at right angles to framing or furring members with all abutting ends
and edges occurring over stud flanges.
1.
Use wallboard of the maximum practical length to minimize end joints.
2.
Neatly fit and stagger end joints.
3.
Arrange joints on opposite sides of the partition as to occur on different studs.
4.
Cut wallboard neatly to fit around all openings.
5.
Wallboard to extend to within 1/4" of the floor.
Whenever wallboard terminates against dissimilar materials or where edges of wallboard are exposed,
install metal edge reinforcement as specified.
1.
At all outside corners install metal corner bead reinforcement as specified.
Install control joint over face of wallboard panels.
1.
Cut end joints square, butt together and align to provide neat fit.
2.
Attach control joint to wallboard with Bostitch 9/16" Type G staples spaced not over 6" on center in
each flange.
3.
Locate in accordance with USG Gypsum Construction Handbook, latest edition.
At metal studs apply wallboard using screws spaced a maximum of 12" O.C. in the field of the board and
12" on center along the abutting end joints; 8" O.C. each way at rated walls.
At wood framing apply wallboard with double nailing method.
1.
Apply first nails spaced 12" O.C. with the second nail in close proximity (2"+) installed after first
nails are in place.
2.
Nails shall not be staggered on adjoining edges or ends.
3.
While the nails are being driven, hold the wallboard in firm contact with the underlying support.
4.
Nail from central portion of the wallboard toward ends and edges.
5.
Nails shall be driven home with the heads slightly below the surface of the wallboard, in a dimple
form by the driving tool stubbing the last blow.
6.
A nail set shall not be used and care shall be taken to avoid breaking the paper face.
Where water-resistant wallboard is used, coat all cut edges and fastener heads with USG sheetrock
water-resistant sealant.
1.
Treat all cut edges, utility holes, and joints, including those at angle intersections prior to
installation.
2.
Treat fastener heads after installation.
At double stud partitions, such as at chases, install strips of wallboard 12" wide and of length to span the
partition depth by screwing to the webs of opposing studs.
1.
Space strips approximately 42" O.C.
At double layer walls install base layer as specified above except install vertically over framing members.
Install face layer with adhesive vertically and provide fasteners until adhesive sets.
1.
Stagger joints in face layer at least 10" from joints in base layer.
2.
At all vertical corners, provide "floating" corner installation per USG Gypsum Construction
Handbook, latest edition.
Provide perimeter relief where non-load-bearing wallboard partitions abut structural decks or ceilings of
vertical structural elements.
1.
Allow not less than 1/4", nor more than 1/2" gap between wallboard and structure.
2.
Finish edges of wallboard face layer with square-nose metal casing head and caulk space between
casing bead and structure with continuous sealant bead.
3.
Attach wallboard to studs not less than 1/2" below bottom edge of ceiling track flanges and to first
stud adjacent to vertical tracks.
4.
Do not attach wallboard directly to tracks.
Where wallboard partitions intersect masonry walls, provide control joint no less than 1/4"; nor more than
3/8" wide between wallboard and masonry.
1.
Finish exposed edges of wallboard with square-nose metal casing bead and caulk space between
casing bead and masonry with continuous sealant bead.

09250 - 7

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
K.
3.5
Install exterior ceiling board allowing 1/16" to 1/8" space between butt ends of board.
1.
Fasten to supports with screws spaced 12" O.C. or nails spaced 8" O.C.
a.
For metal framing use 1" Type S screws.
b.
For wood framing use 1-1/4" Type W Screws or 1-1/2" galvanized box or aluminum nails.
2.
Conceal panel joints by installing panels with ends installed into aluminum H moldings.
3.
Fasten H moldings to support with screws spaced 12" O.C. or nails spaced 8" O.C.
APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.6
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board:

1.
Install at showers, tubs, and where indicated.
2.
Install with 1/4" gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11 at locations indicated to receive tile.
Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat surface
except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels.
Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform
plane across panel surfaces.
Verify framing does not vary more than 1/4".
Use maximum lengths possible to minimizing joints.
Attach sheathing to framing with screws at 8 O.C. at perimeter and in field.
Apply joint tape over joints and embed in setting type joint compound.
Provide finish equal to Level 4 gypsum board finish.
EXTERIOR SHEATHING
A.
3.7
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel.

1.
Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to
receive brick or other veneer or E.I.F.S.
2.
Install with 1/4" gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
3.
Finish joints with 2 wide 10 x 10 glass mesh joint tape and water-resistant joint compound such as
Tufroc 90, or caulk all joints with GE Silpruf joint sealant to provide moisture-proof sheathing
system.
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
C.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used
for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Gypsum panel surfaces should be isolated with control joints or other means where:
1.
Partition, furring or column fireproofing abuts a structural element (except floor) or dissimilar wall or
ceiling.
2.
Ceiling or soffit abuts a structural element, dissimilar wall or partition or other vertical penetration.
3.
Construction changes within plane of partition or ceiling.
4.
Partition or furring run exceeds 30-0".
5.
Ceiling dimensions exceed 50-0" in either direction with perimeter relief, 30-0" without relief.
6.
Exterior soffit exceed 30-0" in either direction.
7.
Wings of L, U and T-shaped ceiling areas are joined.
8.
Expansion or control joints occur in the exterior wall.
Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, according to ASTM C840 and in
specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

09250 - 8

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
D.
E.
F.
3.8
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1.
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2.
Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners, and where indicated on the drawings.
3.
LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
4.
L-Bead: Use where indicated on the drawings.
5.
U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
6.
Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1.
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2.
LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
3.9
General: Finish in accordance with GA-214, as required herein, and as indicated on the drawings.
Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface
defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove
residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
Reinforce wall and ceiling angles and inside vertical corner angles with tape folded to conform to the
adjoining surface and to form a straight, true angle.
Apply a thin uniform layer of compound, approximately 3" wide, under and over the tape in the angle joint
to be reinforced.
1.
Center tape over all joints to be reinforced and seal into the compound, leaving sufficient
compound under the tape to provide proper bond.
2.
Apply a skim coat of compound immediately after embedding tape.
3.
Clean excess compound from the wallboard surface.
4.
After drying, cover embedding compounds with an additional coat of compound.
Allow joints to dry thoroughly (minimum of 24 hours) between each application of compound.
All joints shall have tape embedded, filled and finished using specified compound.
Cover fill coat with compound spread evenly over and slightly beyond the tapered edge of the board,
feathered at the edges, with a smooth uniform slight crown over the joint.
All dimples at fastener heads shall receive 3 coats of compound in succession as used in joints.
Conceal flanges of all metal corner and edge reinforcing by at least two (2) coats of compound. When
completed, the compound shall extend approximately 8" to 10" on either side of the exposed metal
nosing.
Sand all coats as necessary after each application of compound has dried. The final coat and
subsequent sanding shall leave all wallboard and treated areas uniformly smooth and ready to receive
decoration, to the extent that after painting of wallboard there shall be no distinguishable difference in
appearance between taped and untaped surface.
LEVELS OF GYPSUM BOARD FINISH
A.
B.
C.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels as indicated on the drawings, as outlined below,
and according to ASTM C840.
1.
Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.
Level 0: No taping, finishing, or accessories required.
Level 1: All joints and interior angels shall have tape set in joint compound.
1.
Surface shall be free of excess joint compound.
2.
Tool marks and ridges are acceptable.
3.
Provide at unfinished locations (i.e., above ceilings, in attics, and similar locations not exposed in
finished project).

09250 - 9

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
3.10
A.
B.
C.
Level 2: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with a joint
knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound over all joints and interior angles. (Water resistant gypsum
backing board scheduled to receive tile).
1.
Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with a coat of joint compound.
2.
Surface shall be free of excess joint compound.
3.
Tool marks and ridges are acceptable.
4.
Joint compound applied over the body of the tape at the time of tape embedment shall be
considered a separate coat of joint compound and shall satisfy the conditions of this level.
5.
Provide as substrate for wall paneling, tile, and where noted as unfinished in locations exposed in
finish project.
Level 3: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and one additional
coat of joint compound applied over all joints and interior angles.
1.
Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with two (2) separate coats of joint compound.
2.
All joint compounds shall be sanded smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
3.
Note: It is recommended that the prepared surface be coated with a drywall primer prior to the
application of final finishes. (See painting/wall covering specification in this regard).
4.
Provide at exposed locations receiving heavy textures.
Level 4: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two (2) separate
coats of joint compound applied over all flat joints and one separate coat of joint compound applied over
interior angles.
1.
Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with three separate coats of joint compound.
2.
All joint compounds shall be sanded smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
3.
application of final finishes. (See painting/wall covering specification in this regard).
4.
Provide at exposed locations receiving wall coverings, light textures, or flat paint.
Level 5: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two (2) separate
coats of joint compound applied over all flat joints and one separate coat of joint compound applied over
interior angles.
1.
Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with three separate coats of joint compound.
2.
A thin skim coat of joint compound, or a material manufactured especially for this purpose, shall be
applied to the entire surface.
3.
The surface shall be sanded smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
4.
application of finish paint. (See painting specification in this regard).
5.
Provide at sanitary rooms, open-food preparation/handling spaces meeting health regulations, and
all other gypsum board locations. NOTE: Provide Level 5 at critical or severe lighting locations.
Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as
exposed soffit board.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES (if required on drawings)
Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces
receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.
Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform
texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of
application patterns.
Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by
covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions,
texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage
according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations.

09250 - 10

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.11
A.
B.
PROTECTION
Protect installed products from damage and deterioration from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration,
sagging, or irregular shape.
2.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface
contamination and discoloration.

09250 - 11

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 09305 - MORTAR BED (Interior for Ceramic & Quarry Tile)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.2
This is a National Account Item. The Contractor shall order the listed materials from Sprouts contracted
supplier.
This Section specifies the construction of mortar bed work and protection of course work assemblies
including installation of mortar and related items, and finishing.
Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to furnish, transport,
receive, and install all mortar bed work, as indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein. This work
shall include but not be limited to furnishing all necessary material and incidental items for proper
installation of associated tile and masonry work, including cutting, fitting, cleaning and painting.
Related work:
1.
Interior Ceramic and Quarry Tile
All work shall be coordinated with other sections including, but not limited to:
1.
Section 03300 - "Cast-In-Place Concrete"
2.
Section 09310 - "Ceramic and Quarry Tile"
Sprouts contracted supplier: Barry Bryant, Haines, Jones & Cadbury (HJC), Tel.: (800) 459-7099,
E-Mail: barry.bryant@hjcinc.com, Website: www.hjcinc.com.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.3

1.
Submit catalog data which includes specification and installation details.
2.
Installation instructions and recommendation of manufacturer shall be specified for this application.
Shop Drawings:
1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
All work performed under this specification shall meet the current standard of care for the items as
specified and in conjunction with manufacturers specification and current Tile Council of America
guidelines.
Manufacturer of Mortar shall have been regularly engaged in the manufacture of Latex Mortars for the
past ten years and submit a list of at least five projects of equal complexity and scope.
1.
Installations submitted shall have been in place for the past five (5) years with no sign of failure.
2.
Mortar shall meet ANSI A118.4 requirements.
and in the Specifications herein. Acceptable Manufacturers.
1.
Laticrete International Inc.,1 Laticrete Park North, Bethany, CT 06524-3423, Tel: (800) 243-4788,
ext. 235, Fax: (203) 395-1684.
Use only materials from a single manufacturer to ensure compatibility or as approved in writing by the
membrane manufacturer.
Qualification of installers:
MORTAR BED (INTERIOR FOR CERAMIC & QUARRY TILE)

09305 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.
2.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.4
Use only pre-qualified and approved subcontractors employing skilled and experienced workers.
Helpers and apprentices used for such work shall be under full and constant supervision at all
times by thoroughly skilled installers.
3.
In the acceptance or rejection of installed worked, no allowance will be made for the lack of skill on
the part of the installer.
4.
Installer to be a member of NTMA.
1.
Warranty:
1.
Warranty material and workmanship to the owner guaranteeing performance of the system per
manufacturers specifications and that all work has been performed in accordance with applicable
industry standards. Warranty shall be five (5) years material and labor from the date of Substantial
Completion.
2.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.5
Ordering: Comply with Sprouts contracted suppliers ordering instructions and lead time requirements to
avoid construction delays.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
Environmental Conditions: Work shall be performed within the range of temperatures, and in climatic
conditions recommended by the manufacturer.
NTMA Standard: Comply with NTMA Guide Specification and written recommendations for tile type
indicated, unless more stringent requirements are specified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
For ceramic wall tile: Laticrete 255 Multimax.

For quarry tile: Laticrete 253 Gold.
Joint Backing: Closed cell polyethylene.
Sealant: Single or two component urethane per TCA requirements.
All waterproof/anti-fracture membranes shall be as manufactured by Manufacturer to ensure
compatibility. There shall be no substitutions to this requirement.

09305 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
VERIFYING SURFACE CONDITIONS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
Inspection:
1.
Prior to commencement of work, carefully inspect the installed work of other trades and verify that
all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.
2.
Verify that this work may be installed in accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the
original design, and the referenced standards.
Mortar Bed:
1.
Mortar bed shall be formed from Manufacturers Underlay System in accordance with
manufacturers specifications.
2.
Install Underlay material over lath as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with TCA
methods for the indicated materials.
3.
Verify slope with general contractor prior to installation.
4.
Install expansion joints as indicated on the drawings, and in accordance with the most current TCA
manual and method EJI71.
5.
Vertical application of mortar bed shall be in accordance with TCA method W201 with
Manufacturers Latex as additive to the bedding material.
6.
Use Manufacturers Bonding Coat in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
Grout: Grout color as selected by the Architect, gauged with Manufacturers Acrylic/Latex in accordance
with manufacturers specifications. See Section 09310 "Ceramic and Quarry Tile" for specific grout
requirements for specific grout materials and Architectural drawings for colors.
Discrepancies: In the event of a discrepancy, immediately notify the architect and General Contractor, or
his agent.
Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully
resolved.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
Installation of all tile shall be in accordance with TCA Section A-108.1A, 1B or 1C as required for the
proper installation of tile units.
Mixing: Shall be with a rotating blade type (plaster) mortar mixer. Pour in proper amounts of Latex and
filler powder. Thoroughly mix material into a creamy consistency. DO NOT OVER MIX or mix at high
speeds.
Install tile units using a notch trowel as recommended by the tile manufacturer.
For thin-set application, adhesive shall be by Manufacturer meeting ANSI A118.1, A118.3, A118.4 and
A118.5 standards.
All grout, mortar mixes and fillers shall be approved in writing by the manufacturer or as outlined in
manufacturers written recommendations.
PROTECTION
A.
The prime contractor shall protect the installation against damage or misuse by other trades until final
acceptance of the building.

09305 - 3

NEC LINCOLN AVE. & EISENHOWER BLVD.
LOVELAND, CO 80537
PROJECT #: 320103564
THIN-SET MORTAR
09305 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC AND QUARRY TILE (INTERIOR)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.2
This is a National Account Item. The Contractor shall order the listed materials from Sprouts contracted
supplier.
This Section specifies the construction of all ceramic tile, quarry tile, and related items including
installation of tile, grout, mortar, portland cement, underlayment, backer board, leveling compound, crack
suppression membrane, waterproofing, substrate repair materials, reinforcement, membranes,
expansion joints, adhesives, and sealants.
Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to furnish, transport,
receive, and install all ceramic and quarry tile and related work, as indicated on the Drawings, in
limited to design and procurement of tile and associated mortaring, grouting, floor preparation prior to
installation (including removal of existing flooring if required) cutting, sanding, grinding, priming, fitting,
cleaning, sealing and protection.
Inspect surfaces to receive tile before starting installation, Notify the Architect in writing of any defects or
conditions that will prevent satisfactory tile installation. Starting of work will imply acceptance of surfaces
to receive tile.
Close areas in which tile is being set to traffic and other work, Keep closed until tile is firmly set,
minimum time of 72 hours. Protect tile work from damage until acceptance.
All work shall be coordinated with other sections including, but not limited to:
1.
Section 03300 - "Cast-In-Place Concrete"
2.
Section 09300 - "Thin Set Mortar"
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.

Shop Drawings:
1.
Clearly show layout, colors, type of tile, trim units, base units, thresholds, tile size, thickness, grout
joint width, finish, tile pattern, location and materials required.
2.
Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints.
Submit samples for review in accordance with Sections 01330 and 01600, for all types, sizes,
composition, color, and finish of tile and grout specified herein and as indicated on the drawings.
Provide full scale mockup no less than 4-0" x 4-0" for each type of floor and wall tile installation,
showing pattern, layout, and grout joint color and width. Mockup may become permanent installation if
acceptable to Architect/Owner.
Provide one carton of each type of tile for Owners future use, with a minimum of 10 pieces of each trim
type.
Furnish Master Grade Certificate for all tile, before installation, bearing the certification mark of the TCA,
signed by the manufacturer stating the type and quantity of the material.
Furnish manufacturers printed instructions for all products.
Material certificates for each type of product indicated.

09310 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.4
All applicable portions of Referenced Specifications are considered a direct part of this Specification as
though repeated herein.
projects have a five (5) year past record of successful in-service performance.
1.
Installation of Ceramic Tile shall be with Latex Portland Cement Mortar in accordance with ANSI
A108.1 and A108.5.
2.
Installation of Ceramic Tile shall be with Organic Adhesive (interior applications only) in accordance
with ANSI A108.4.
3.
Installation of quarry tile shall be with epoxy portland cement mortar and adhesive in accordance
with ANSI A137.1, ANSI A118.3 and ANSI A118.5.
1.
Materials, preparation and installation shall conform to ANSI Standards as listed, and the detailed
installation instructions of the material manufacturer as applicable.
Warranty:
1.
2.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Deliver tile to the job in original sealed, undamaged, unopened cartons, with identification labels intact, a
grade seal bearing name of manufacturer and brand, and the words Standard Grade printed thereon.
Manufactured mortars and grouts shall contain hallmark certifying compliance with referenced standards
and be types recommended by tile manufacturer for specific applications.
Adhesives shall be in containers labeled with hallmark certifying compliance with referenced standards.
Organic adhesive containers to bear hallmark of either adhesive and sealant council or TCA certifying
compliance with ANSI A108.4 and ANSI A118.3.
Deliver mastic grout ready for use.
Deliver epoxy grout in new (unopened) sealed, moisture-proof containers / packages.
Deliver dry-set mortar in sealed, moisture proof containers.
not permitted.
Locate stacks, or bins to avoid or protect material from heavy and unnecessary traffic.

09310 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.

1.
Set and grout tile in epoxy or portland cement mortar when surface temperature is at least 50 deg
F and rising.
2.
Comply with minimum temperature recommendations of manufacturers for bonding and grouting
materials in other than portland cement mortar.
Protect adjoining work surfaces before tile work begins.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS and MATERIALS

A.
B.
C.
D.
All tile shall be of domestic manufacture, Standard Grade, meeting the requirements of SPR-R-61 of the
U.S. Department of Commerce, and in accordance with ANSI A137.1. TCA certification mark shall
appear on each carton label.
Provide tile materials and accessory materials in accordance with TCA standards and requirements.
Ceramic Tile: Color and Manufacturer on Drawings.
1.
Floor tile shall be Standard Grade, Unglazed Dust-Pressed Porcelain Type, not less than 1/4 thick,
with cushion edges and in nominal face sizes as noted on drawings in colors as selected. Tile shall
comply with Section 5.1 of ANSI A137.1. Provide all necessary shapes and trimmers of similar tile
as required.
2.
Wall tile shall be Standard Grade Glazed Tile not less than 5/16 thick with cushion edges, a
colored matt glazed finish and in nominal face sizes as noted on drawings. Provide spacer lugs or
other similar features on edges of tile. Tile shall comply with Section 6.1 of ANSI A137.1. Provide
A-3401 base member at junction of floor and at internal corners; ABL/R 3401 and ACL/4 3401 as
applicable. Provide non-sagging mortar for tile installations on walls.
3.
Latex Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I.
4.
Aggregate: ASTM C144 for mortar and grout.
5.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C206 or C207, Type S.
6.
Water: Potable.
7.
Reinforcing: 2 x 2 - 16/6 gauge welded wire mesh (where suggested by manufacturer or TCA).
8.
Membrane: (where suggested by tile manufacturer or TCA).
9.
Interior Glazed Tile Grout: Color and Manufacturer as indicated on Plans.
10. Latex Portland Cement Mortar meeting ANSI A118.4 and ISO 13007; C2E shall be Laticrete 255
Multimax, single component, factory blended, polymer modified, dry-set mortar.
11. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I.
12. Expansion Joints (includes control, contraction and isolation joints).
13. Back-Up: Flexible compressible type of closed-cell foam polyethylene or butyl rubber, rounded at
surface to contact sealant, as shown in TCA details, and as recommended by sealant
manufacturer. It shall fit neatly into the joint without compacting and to such a height to allow a
sealant depth of 1/2 the width of the joint. Sealant shall not bond to the back-up material.
Quarry Tile:
1.
Quarry Tile: Color and Manufacturer as indicated on Plans.
2.
Size of tiles shall be 6 x 6 x 3/8".
3.
Joints between tiles are to be 1/8" minimum to 1/4" maximum in width as recommended by
manufacturer.
4.
Base shall be 6 high, 3/8" coved base with square top, trims, inside base, corner coves, etc. as
indicated on Plans.

09310 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.2
Where shown, furnish tile with abrasive grain surface.

Grout material shall be Epoxy: Laticrete Spectralock 2000 IG, 100% solids, industrial grade epoxy
grout with high chemical and stain resistance, color as indicated on Plans.
Grout shall conform with ANSI A118.3 and ISO 13007; RG.
Provide flexible sealant at edges between tile and metal edge where it abuts concrete floor /
transition as detailed on plans.
Latex Portland Cement Mortar meeting ANSI A118.4 and ISO 13007; C2E shall be Laticrete 253
Gold, single component, factory blended, polymer modified, dry-set mortar.
Contractor shall provide quarry tile manufacturers recommended water based sealer for quarry tile
or other sealer as required by the Health Department having jurisdiction.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
E.
F.
G.
H.
Thresholds: Provide transition pieces (provide samples) between adjacent floor finishes. Bevel edges at
least 1:2 slope, limit height of bevel to 1/2" or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold.
Waterproof and crack suppression membranes for thin-set tile installation: Laticrete, as recommended by
manufacturer.
Cementitious Backer board:
1.
Per ANSI A118.9 in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end buff joints.
2.
Thickness: minimum 1/4", as indicated on drawings, or as required by tile manufacturer, codes,
and standards.
Sealant:
1.
One part, mildew resistant silicone complying with ASTM C920, Type M, Class 25, Grade NS for
Uses NT, G, and A, and as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated.
2.
Use two part pourable urethane sealant for Use T in accordance with ASTM C920, Type M, Grade
P, Class 25, Uses T, M, A, and as applicable to joint substrates indicated.
3.
Grout sealer shall not change color or appearance of grout.
PART 3 EXECUTION
CERAMIC TILE
3.1
CERAMIC TILE PREPARATION

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or
silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tilesetting material manufacturers written instructions.
Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before
installing.
Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout
from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary
protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
GENERAL
A.
B.
Comply with ANSI A108, Specification for Installation of Ceramic Tile and TCA Installation Guidelines:
1.
TCAs Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, for installation of ceramic tiles and accessories.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering
without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and
corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

09310 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.3
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible
surfaces. Grind cut edges of file abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets,
piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center
tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area to provide minimum half tile at inside and
outside corners. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds,
and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets concrete,
carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
Grout tile to comply with ANSI A108.6. At wet areas where indicated, install cementitious backer units
and treat joints to comply with ANSI A108.11. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13, and
waterproofing manufacturers instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded
securely to substrate.
Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer manufacturers
written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and
sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
Inspection of Tiles:
1.
Prior to installation, open all tile containers/boxes and hand select tiles to eliminate defects on the
face of tiles and insure there is a uniform finish on exposed edges of tiles. Unfinished (chattered)
edges that will not be embedded into the grout are unacceptable. All tile that have blemishes and
do not have uniform edges are to be returned to the supplier or manufacturer as unacceptable.
Any tiles that have been installed that have defects on the face of the tiles or unglazed exposed
edges will be unacceptable and are to be removed and replaced prior to building
acceptance/turnover.
Floors:
1.
Install floors using portland cement mortar in accordance with ANSI A108.1 and TCA methods F111-85 (over precast concrete) or F-112-85 (over cast-in-place concrete). Membrane is to be
furnished and installed as a part of the work of this Section (method F-111) just prior to tile
installation.
2.
Install floors using Latex Portland Cement mortar in accordance with ANSI A-108.1 and TCA
method F-113-85.
3.
Grout tile with specified grout, slightly depressed.
4.
Slope floors uniformly to floor drains where required.
5.
Provide expansion joints, control joints, contraction joints, and isolation joints in accordance with
TCA Method EJ-711-85.
Walls:
1.
Install wall tile in cement mortar in accordance with ANSI A-108.5 and TCA methods W-241-85
(metal studs) or W-212-85 (masonry or concrete). Metal lath and scratch coat over metal studs is
specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
2.
Install wall tile in organic adhesive in accordance with ANSI A-108.4 and TCA methods W-242-85
(metal studs) or W223-85 (masonry and concrete).
3.
Align all joints in wall tile vertically and horizontally.
4.
Grout all tile with specified grout.
5.
Provide expansion joints, control joints, contraction joints and isolation joints in accordance with
TCA Method EJ-711-85.
Preparation:
1.
Tile edges to which the sealant will bond must be clean and dry. Sand or grind as necessary to
obtain optimum sealant bond.
2.
Prime tile edges when recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Take care to keep primer off tile
faces.

09310 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
E.
F.
Installation:
1.
Set back-up when mortar is placed or utilize removable wood strip to provide space for back-up
after mortar has cured.
2.
Install sealant after tile work and grout are dry.
3.
Follow sealant manufacturers recommendations.
Cleaning and Protection:
1.
Clean tile after grouting and protect from other trades. Cure all ceramic tile floors for a minimum of
72 hours.
QUARRY TILE
3.4
QUARRY TILE PREPARATION

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.5
Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or
silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tilesetting material manufacturers written instructions.
Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before
installing.
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.6
Comply with ANSI A108, Specification for Installation of Ceramic Tile and TCA Installation Guidelines:
1.
TCAs Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, for installation of ceramic tiles and accessories.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering
without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and
corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible
surfaces. Grind cut edges of file abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets,
piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center
tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide
uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds,
and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets concrete,
carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
Grout tile to comply with ANSI A108.6. At wet areas where indicated, install cementitious backer units
and treat joints to comply with ANSI A108.11. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13, and
waterproofing manufacturers instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded
securely to substrate.
MIXING & APPLICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Use appropriate safety equipment. Refer to Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for more information.
Always mix complete units. Partial mixing will result in uncured grout. Do not add other materials to this
mixture.
In a clean container, mix all of Part A and all of Part B. Allow enough time for all the material in the Part
A and Part B containers to flow completely out. Mix using a low-speed mixer at about 300 rpm until a
homogenous, consistent color is obtained. Do not over mix.
Add Part C (powder) to the Part A and Part B mixture. Mix using a low-speed mixer at about 300 rpm.
Mix thoroughly until a homogenous, consistent color is obtained.
Avoid prolonged mixing, which may cause air entrapment and shorten the pot life.

09310 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
G.
H.
I.
J.
3.7
Do not place the lid on the container after material has been mixed.
The temperature of the tile work must be maintained at between 35 deg F and 90 deg F (2 deg C and 32
deg C) while grouting and until epoxy grout has hardened sufficiently (after 24 to 72 hours).
Application and cleanup procedures for an entire unit should be completed in about 45 minutes to 1 hour
at 73 deg F (23 deg C).
Be certain that all joints are well-compacted and are free of voids and gaps. Fill the joints with the
maximum amount of grout possible.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
3.8
Installation:
1.
Lay out floors so that no tile less than one-half size occurs.
2.
Align all joints in both directions.
Grout tile joints flush with face of tiles making a neatly finished smooth surface.
1.
Install specified grout in strict accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.
Provide expansion joints if required per manufacturers recommendations.
CLEANING & PROTECTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
Thoroughly remove excess epoxy grout from the face of the tile before the epoxy loses its plasticity or
begins to set. This is most easily accomplished by holding the rubber float at a 90 deg angle to the tile
surface and dragging the float across the tile surface diagonally to the grout line, leaving as little epoxy
on the tile surface as possible.
Clean tiles immediately after applying each unit of epoxy grout. Grout and clean in small areas. Do not
attempt to use more than one (1) unit before cleaning tiles. Do not allow epoxy grout to harden on the
tile surface. On large projects, working in teams of 2 to 3 people will simplify the installation.
Apply a liberal amount of cold water to the freshly grouted area and scrub the tile surface diagonally to
the joint line using a non-woven nylon white scouring pad (use a more aggressive pad if tile type is
abrasive). Apply enough pressure on the pad to loosen any film without removing grout from the joints.
Rinse pads frequently while cleaning. Note: be careful not to get any water in the ungrouted joints.
Remove the epoxy residue and water by using a "towel drag" method. Hold the towel by two corners
and drag it diagonally across the grout joints. Rinse the towel often and keeping changing water in the
buckets to avoid residue buildup.
Within 15 to 20 minutes - for best results - perform a second wash with clean water, a clean while scrub
pad and a neutral-pH liquid soap solution. This will help loosen any residue left on the tile from the first
wash.
Remove the soap, epoxy residue and water by again using a "towel drag" method. Do not allow excess
water to remain on the tile surface. This will allow a film to form on the surface that will be difficult to
remove once hardened.
Check the installation the same day before leaving the jobsite to make sure it is completely clean. If the
tile surface has any shiny or tacky residue, remove it with a neutral solution of liquid detergent and water.
Because propane gas heaters will yellow epoxy, refrain from using such heaters or properly vent all
exhaust.
Do not step on freshly cleaned tiles. Permanent damage to the grout could result.
Clean tile after grouting and protect from other trades.
Keep free from heavy traffic for at least 12 hours after grouting.
Cure all quarry tile floors for a minimum of 72 hours.
Keep steam cleaning wands 6" to 12" (15 to 30 cm) above tile surface.
Apply quarry tile sealer over entire quarry tile floor area in strict conformance with sealer manufacturers
written instructions.

09310 - 7

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.9
MAINTENANCE
A.
B.
Grout products are produced to the highest quality of standards. To maintain a clean tile surface, use a
neutral-pH cleaner for maintaining the floor, followed by a clean-water rinse.
Do not use harsh chemicals to maintain the tile surface. Before proceeding with cleaning, consult the
cleaner's manufacturer for compatibility, use and application instructions. Remove or rinse fatty acid
residue from the grout surface to avoid potential grout deterioration cause by prolonged exposure.

09310 - 8

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 09512 - ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT LAY-IN (NON-RATED)

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all acoustical treatment and related items including installation
of acoustical tiles, runners, cross tees, hangers, and appurtenances.
install all acoustical treatment work, as indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein. This work shall
include but not be limited to design and procurement of acoustical tile system components and
associated, reinforcing, support of other work, cutting, fitting, and cleaning.
Consult with Owner Representative as to layout and pattern.
Coordinate work with mechanical and electrical trades to incorporate ceiling light fixtures and air outlets
into the ceiling layout.
Protect finished work installed by other trades previous to acoustical treatment.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.3

Shop Drawings:
1.
Submit reflected ceiling plan drawn to scale showing all areas to receive acoustical panels, ceiling
mounted items, and all details of installation.
2.
Submit samples of each type of acoustical tile panel and suspension system specified, for each color
and texture and in accordance with Sections 01330 and 01600.
Provide the Owner with extra stock of each panel equal to 1% of installed tile with a minimum of one full
unopened carton of each type.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.
Seismic Standard: Comply with the following:
a.
Verify requirements of authorities having jurisdiction as to which of the five subparagraphs
below to reference, if any.
b.
ASTM E580.
c.
CISCAs Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel CeilingsSeismic Zones 0-2."
d.
CISCAs Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling AssembliesSeismic Zones 3 & 4."
ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT LAY IN (NON-RATED)

09512 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.4

Warranty:
1.
2.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.5
Store materials off the ground under watertight cover and away from sweating walls and other damp
surfaces until ready for use.
Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from the premises
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Installation of acoustical material shall not be made when the building is excessively cold and damp, or
hot and dry.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
All tile units shall conform to FS SS-S-118, Type III, Class 25 carrying UL label.
Standard Lay-in Units:
1.
Manufacturer:
Armstrong World Industries.
2.
Pattern:
769 Cortega Square Lay-in, Medium Texture.
3.
Finish:
Factory white paint.
4.
Size:
24 x 48 x 5/8 or 24" x 24 x 5/8
5.
Light Reflectance:
0.80
6.
NRC Rating
0.55
7.
CAC:
40
8.
Fire/Flame:
Class A
Special Lay-In Units:
1.
Manufacturer:
National Gypsum Gold Bond
2.
Type:
Gridstone fire-shield gypsum ceiling panels
(non-perforated) sheetrock lay-in panels USDA accepted.
3.
Finish:
2 mil. thick, white rigid vinyl facing in stipple pattern.
4.
Size:
24 x 48 x 1/2, or 24 x 24 x 1/2
5.
Fire Rating:
1 hour minimum

09512 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.2
SUSPENSION SYSTEMS (GENERAL)

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.3
As manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Prelude XL Suspension Systems.

Main runners shall conform to the ASTM Class: Heavy Duty.
Cross tees shall be XL7340 Heavy Duty.
Exposed Grid Systems: Prelude XL 15/16 Exposed Tee System.
Finish: White factory applied, paint finish.
Materials: Hot dipped steel per ASTM A653 baked polyester
Furnished in accordance with ASTM C635.
Seismic: Armstrong Seismic Rx Suspension System for Prelude XL Suspension System.
EXPOSED GRID
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.4
2-0" x 4-0" square grid pattern where indicated - See drawings.

All locking cross tees supporting other cross tees shall conform to the same classification as the main
runners.
Main runners and cross tees shall be of cold rolled electro-galvanized steel with finish as specified.
Angles: Wall angle moldings shall be of cold rolled electro-galvanized steel with finish as specified.
LIGHT FIXTURE INTEGRATION
A.
B.
C.
2.5
Lighting fixture types and locations do not require the normal grid spacing to be interrupted.
Light fixtures are specified in the electrical section of the specifications.
Provide all necessary materials, special fabrication, etc., necessary to provide proper spacing and
installation of lighting fixtures.
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Acoustical Tile Standard: Comply with ASTM E1264.

Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C635.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C635, Table 1, Direct Hung,
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A641/A641M, Class I zinc
coating, soft temper.
1.
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C635, Table 1,
Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106" diameter wire.
Seismic struts and seismic clips.
Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturers standard
moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical tile edge details and suspension systems
indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of
suspension system runners.
Seismic Rx Suspension System is to be provided per manufacturers requirements to meet municipality
seismic design/performance requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
Furnish and install acoustical materials and suspension systems of the types, sizes and designs as
specified herein and noted.
PREPARATION OF WORK

09512 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
Building shall be examined before beginning work to determine that it is properly enclosed and the
structure is in proper condition to receive acoustical materials as specified. Installation of acoustical
material shall not be made when the building is excessively cold and damp or hot and dry.
Temperature and humidity conditions closely approximating the interior conditions which will exist when
the building is occupied shall be maintained before, during and after installation of ceiling materials.
Area shall be broom cleaned and uninterrupted for free movement of scaffolding.
1.
Scaffolding shall be a type that will not scar or mar floor surfaces and will not damage other
construction.
Work not to proceed until satisfactory conditions described above preside.
INSPECTION
A.
B.
C.
3.4
Inspect locations to receive work, and check existing dimensions.

Ascertain, before proceeding with work, that all required inspections have been made.
Commencement of work constitutes acceptance of responsibility related to guarantee requirements.
COORDINATION
A.
B.
3.5
Contractor shall be responsible for coordination and compatibility of the acoustical ceiling treatment,
suspension system, and air distribution as specified in this section and indicated.
Coordinate work with mechanical and electrical trades to ensure proper compatibility and interfacing of
their related areas of responsibility.
EXPOSED GRID
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Install the ceiling suspension system per the recommendations of ASTM C636.
1.
Loading of any component may not cause deflection of more than 1/360 of the span.
Where ductwork prevents proper hanger wire spacing provide uni-strut trapeze supports as required.
1.
Hanger wires shall not penetrate or be suspended from ductwork or roof deck.
Provide additional hanger wires at applied beam ceilings as required by support for additional weight.
Install main runners 48 O.C., and directly suspend by not less than 12 gauge galvanized steel wire (prestretched) spaced 48 O.C. along the main runners.
Suspend ceiling hangers from buildings structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation
or other objects within ceiling plenum.
1.
Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss
obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally
effective means.
2.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that
interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices.
Install edge moldings and trim at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where necessary to conceal
edges of acoustical units.
1.
Screw attach moldings to substrate with concealed fasteners at intervals not more than 16" O.C.
and not more than 3" from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8" in
12'-0".
2.
Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
Interconnect main runners by locking cross tees 48 long to form 24 x 48 modules. Install proper length
locking cross tees adjacent to all side of recessed light fixtures not supported by a main runner.
Install two proper type hold down clips per locking cross tee. Wherever ceiling access panels are shown
on drawing documents, substitute two proper type accessible hold down dips.
Hanger wires shall be wrapped tightly at least 3 full turns.
Fully lock all grid members together including stabilizer bars and structural attachments capable of
supporting required toads.

09512 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
V.
3.6
Trapeze around obstructions and level accurately.

No vertical hanger wire shall be more than 1 in 6 out of plum without a counter-splayed wire. Splay wires
to be taut, not causing ceiling uplift (note: do not penetrate ducts) or roof deck.
Install vertical hanger wire 8 from wall to support each runner end at all terminal ends of main and cross
runners. At maximum of two adjacent walls, runners may be attached for alignment purposes to wall or
wall angle, but not elsewhere.
Hanger wire shall not be suspended from main roof deck (to avoid deck penetrations) but shall be
suspended from the bottom of joists with clip ties as required.
All splays shall be four (4) No. 12 gauge wire, in line with main runners and cross runners at 45 deg
angle maximum from horizontal plane of ceiling, connected with 2" of cross runner or stabilizer bar
intersection on main.
1.
Locate first splay locations within 4-0 maximum of all walls.
2.
Interior splays shall be maximum of 12-0 sq. ft. in both directions.
Install wall molding wherever suspension components meet vertical surfaces.
Attach all fixtures positively to grid system.
Attach hanger wires to grid within 3" of all fixture corners at intermediate duty suspension system.
Tandem fixtures may utilize common wires.
Heavy duty suspension systems do not require additional hanger wire attachment to the grid.
All fixtures over 20 lbs, but less than 56 lbs, require two (2) slack No. 12 gauge wires at opposite corners
attached directly to the structure with approved hangers
Install lay-in units in a clean, neat manner.
CLEANING
A.
B.
Upon completion of installation of acoustical material and suspension systems, clean dirty or discolored
surface of acoustical units and suspension components in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations and leave free from defects.
Components that are damaged or improperly installed shall be removed and replaced without additional
cost to the Owner.

09512 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 09720 - PREFINISHED FRP PANELS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all prefinished fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP) panel
systems for adhesive mounting, accessories and related items including installation of panels, trim,
adhesive, and sealant.
install all FRP panels and related items, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with local codes
and standards, or as specified herein. This work may include but not be limited to design and fabrication
of FRP panels and associated cutting, fitting, gluing, caulking, reinforcing, support of other work,
insulating, and cleaning.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.3

1.
Include construction details, material descriptions, weights, dimensions of individual components,
profiles of trim pieces, maintenance instructions, colors chips, and finishes.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Clearly show layout, seaming plan, coving details, designation, number, type, location and
materials required.
2.
Show profiles, thicknesses, embedded supports, and anchorage details for fabrications. Indicate
requirements for joint treatment, clearances, and attachment to supports.
Samples: For each texture, pattern and color specified, provide 6 x 6 samples of exposed panel and
trim, in each profile and size required.
LEED:
1.
Product certificates and laboratory test reports for LEED credit IEQ 4.1, for adhesives, sealants and
wall panels, including a printed statement of VOC content.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Testing: As required be the latest industry codes and standards.
Mock-ups. As required by Architect.
Warranty:

09720 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.
I.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
1.5

2.
intact, and bearing the name of the manufacturer and brand. Comply with ASTM D570.
Environmental Conditions:
1.
Comply with requirements in ASTM C1467.
2.
Do not deliver or install FRP fabrications until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and
HVAC system is operating and continuously maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels
intended for building occupants.
Conditioning: Acclimate FRP fabrications to ambient temperature and humidity of spaces in which they
will be installed. Remove packaging and move units into installation spaces not less than 48 hours
before installing them.
Field Measurements: Where FRP fabrications are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions
of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
All work herein requires coordination with trades whose work connects with, is affected or concealed by
drywall.
1.
Before proceeding with the work, make certain all required inspections have been made.
2.
Inspect surfaces to receive the prefinished panels before starting work and do not start until surfaces are
acceptable.
Starting work under this Section implies acceptance of surfaces.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP) water resistant, non-fire-rated, high strength panels and
accessories shall be as manufactured by the following manufacturers.
1.
Crane Composites, Inc. (Kemlite)
2.
Marlite
3.
Architect approved equivalent.

09720 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Panels shall be:

1.
3/32" nominal thickness FRP flat panels.
2.
Water absorption: 0.17 % when tested in accordance with ASTM D570.
3.
Factory prefinished:
a.
Style: Surfaseal
b.
Color: White
c.
Texture: Gently pebbled
d.
Pattern: Solid
Vinyl (PVC) molding shall be one piece caps (top, bottom and edges), division bars, inside and outside
corners as required to provide a finished appearance and a moisture-proof installation.
1.
Match FRP panel color.
Adhesive shall be as recommended by panel manufacturer.
Sealant shall be gunnable silicon rubber based construction grade as recommended by panel
manufacturer. Color as required by Architect.
Fabricate FRP units to comply with ASTM D5319, with pebbled embossed texture surfaces. Repair
hollows, and voids. Replace all FRP units that have scratches, or other surface imperfections. Fabricate
units in lengths and sizes that will minimize the number of joints between abutting units.
Trim: Extruded PVC of same color to match panels.
1.
Outside corners, inside corners, edge trim, base molding, borders and division molding.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1.
If backing materials are out of alignment, bowed, or warped, correct them to make true surfaces before
application of FRP and acrylic panels.
1.
Use method of correction approved by the Architect.
2.
Finished walls shall be made straight, plumb and level without ridges, bows, or warps.
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.3
Take panels out of cartons and allow to acclimate to room conditions for at least 48 hours prior to
installation.
Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface, free of flaking, unsound
coatings, cracks, and defects, using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the
best results for the substrate under the project conditions.
1.
Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply metal primer.
2.
Gypsum Board: Prime with primer recommended by wall-covering manufacturer.
3.
Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semi-gloss, and eggshell finish with fine
sandpaper.
Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar
items.
Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall-covering manufacturer.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
Protect existing surfaces from damage due to installation.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install panels and accessories where indicated on drawings, in accordance with manufacturers written
instructions.

09720 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
C.
D.
3.4
Use adhesive recommended by panel manufacturer unless prohibited by local regulations: obtain
manufacturers approval for alternative adhesives.
Apply FRP panels with the long dimension vertically from floor to ceiling.
1.
Install panels with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges and no visible shrinkage.
2.
Install with adhesive in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
3.
Fully bond wall panels to substrate. Adhere panels at 16 O.C. maximum.
4.
Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.
5.
Install continuous bead of silicone sealant in each joint, trim groove, and between trim and adjacent
construction, maintaining 1/8" expansion space.
6.
Cut and fit neatly around all outlets and switches.
7.
Caulk all seams, curb junctures, penetrations, and corners before installing panels and bed inside
corner trim in a bead of sealant.
8.
Panel installer is responsible for all caulking.
9.
Avoid contamination of panel faces with adhesives, solvents, or cleaners.
a.
Clean as necessary, and replace materials if not possible to repair to original condition.
10. Do not use button fasteners.
Erection techniques shall result in plumb, true, and straight surfaces without waves or buckles, free of
unevenness at joints, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where required for
alignment.
CLEAN-UP
A.
3.5
Cleanup shall be in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations, and as directed by Architect.
DEFECTIVE WORK
A.
B.
C.
D.
Touchup, repair or replace damaged products after Substantial Completion.

All work deemed defective by the Architect shall be corrected as direct by the Architect, at no additional
cost to the Owner.
The following partial list constitutes possible defective work items:
1.
Non-adhered panels.
2.
Improperly installed trim.
3.
Out of plumb and uneven surfaces.
4.
Hollows and voids.
Replace panels that have scratches and other surface imperfections.

09720 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 09831 - EPOXY COATINGS (Ceramic Carpet)

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the installation of epoxy floor coating for restrooms and epoxy threshold, including
labor, epoxy coating materials, applicators, cleaners, primers, conditioners, sealant, and topcoat
materials.
install all coating work, as indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein. This work shall include but
not be limited to design and procurement of coating components and associated cleaning, priming,
seating, patching, and painting.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.3

Product Data: For each type of material and product indicated, and for each epoxy coating system
specified.
1.
Manufacturers Information: Technical information including label analysis and instructions for
handling, storing, and applying each coating material.
2.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests by a qualified testing agency
for each epoxy coating material indicating compliance of epoxy coatings with requirements based
on comprehensive testing within the last two (2) years of current product formulation.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Prepare mock-up samples at the job site as required until colors and textures are acceptable to the
Architect.
1.
Colors shall be as specified by the Architect, prior to work being started, will furnish color chips and
a schedule showing the location of each coating color to be applied. Refer to contract drawings for
color selection.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
UPDATED: DECEMBER 4, 2014
EPOXY COATINGS (Ceramic Carpet)

09831 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
G.
1.4
Warranty:
1.
2.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.5
1.
Labels shall give manufacturers name, brand, type, batch number and pre-blended color.
2.
Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
3.
Application instructions.
4.
Color name and number.
5.
Handling instructions and precautions.
1.
Remove any oily rags, waste, etc., from the building every night and take every precaution to avoid
any danger of fire.
2.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 50 deg F minimum to 90 deg F maximum and maintain storage containers
in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
3.
In no case shall amount of materials stored exceed that permitted by local ordinances, state laws,
or fire underwriter regulations.
4.
Such storage place shall be kept clean.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Do not apply when temperature is below 50 deg F or above 90 deg F, and in accordance with
manufacturers recommendations.
All products must comply with local and state E.P.A restrictions.
Protect adjacent surfaces as required or directed.
1.
Any damage done shall be repaired by the applying contractor at his expense.
2.
A sufficient supply of clean drop cloths and other protective covering shall be properly distributed
and maintained.
Do not apply coatings in direct sunlight or when relative humidity exceeds 85% or at temperatures less
than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.
Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified before
starting or continuing coating operation.
Finishing of the following listed items and materials will not be required and shall be protected.
1.
Finished products such as ceramic tile, windows, glass, brick, resilient flooring, acoustical tiles
board and metal tees; other architectural features, such as finish hardware, furnished in

09831 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
aluminum, bronze or plated ferrous metal, prefinished panels, or other items that are installed
prefinished.
1.6
COLOR SCHEDULE
A.
Final confirmation of all colors by subcontractor with Architect/Owner is required prior to installation or
application. Draw down samples will be required and must be approved by Architect/Owner prior to
commencing work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
EPOXY COATINGS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Restroom flooring and epoxy threshold. General Polymers Ceramic Carpet #400 Decorative Broadcast
epoxy flooring system as manufactured by "The Sherwin-Williams Company".
1.
Products equaling or exceeding this specification as manufactured by Sherwin-Williams are
acceptable for bidding with Owner/Tenant approval.
1/8 Decorative Colored Quartz Aggregates with high solids epoxy resins, chemical resistant grout and
seal coats, or equal. Color as indicated on Architectural plans.
Consisting of 3579 Standard Primer, 3561 Ceramic Carpet #400 first base coat, 5900F (Medium)
Ceramic Granules, 3561 Second Coat, 5900F (Medium) Ceramic Granules, 3745 Grout Coat, and seal
with 3745 High Performance Coating.
Aggregate shall be clean, dry and free from contaminants, (application only by manufacturer
approved/Owner approved applicators). Verify exact product line with Sprouts representative prior to
order.
System Primer - 3579 Standard Primer.
Base and Seal Coat - 3561 Epoxy Resin, 5900F (Medium) Ceramic Granules.
Grout Coat 3745 High Performance Coating
Seal Coat - 3745 High Performance Coating
Threshold at Exterior Auto Doors:
1.
Thickness as indicated on drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
Floor System Thickness Verification:

1.
The Contractor shall visit the jobsite prior to the installation of the Epoxy System to evaluate
substrate condition, including substrate moisture transmission, quantity and severity of cracking,
and the extent of repairs needed. Substrate imperfections should be repaired only after mechanical
preparation of the substrate. Surface preparation reveals most imperfections requiring repair.
Concrete substrates shall be tested to verify that the moisture vapor transmission of the substrate
does not exceed the Epoxy System manufacturers recommendations. Cost associated with repair,
leveling and remediation of the substrate are the responsibility of the provider of the substrate.
2.
The Contractor should exercise care during surface preparation and system installation to protect
surrounding substrates and surfaces, as well as in-place equipment. The contractor shall prepare
the substrate to remove laitance and open the surface. This shall be achieved by tight brush grit
blasting. Surface profile achieved shall meet Concrete Surface Profile (CSP) 3 - 5 and be free from
bond-inhibiting contaminants. Costs incurred that are associated with damage from negligence or
inadequate protection shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
Sub floor tolerances are specified in Section 03300 (in accordance with ACI 302). Each drain in the
installation area must be working and have a finished elevation equal to that of the substrate. Contractor

09831 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
3.2
to provide 3/4 wide by 1/4 deep keyway around floor drains and at floor termination points if not
abutting an adjacent floor finish. This is to maintain thickness integrity of the flooring system. NO
FEATHERING WILL BE ALLOWED.
The finished flooring System must be protected by the General Contractor or, as a separate bid item, by
the installing contractor until it is inspected and turned over to the Owner.
The minimum slab temperature must be conditioned to 60 deg F before commencing installation, during
installation, and for at least 72 hours after installation is complete.
Maintain lighting at a minimum uniform level of 50 or more foot candles in areas where the Ceramic
Carpet #400 System is being installed. It is the recommendation of the manufacturer that the permanent
lighting be in place and working during the installation.
Leaks from pipes and other sources must be corrected prior to the installation of the Ceramic Carpet
#400 System.
Examine all surfaces to receive Epoxy and report any conditions detrimental to the finished product.
Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturers printed recommendations.
Apply each component of the Epoxy System in compliance with manufacturers written installation
instructions and strictly adhere to mixing and installation methods, recoat windows, cure times and
environmental restrictions. The Epoxy System is to be installed directly over non-moving control joints
and cracks which have been treated with 3555 EPO-FLEX crack suppression membrane with fiberglass
scrim as manufactured by The Sherwin Williams Company. Epoxy System will terminate at the edge of
isolation and expansion joints as designated by the Architect, Engineer or Design Professional. Integral
cove base shall be installed where specified in the drawings.
After preparation, evaluation of quantity and severity of cracks in concrete will determine the needed
repairs.
All expansion joints must be honored through the flooring system.
Mix ingredients in accordance with manufacturers printed directions using manufacturer approved
equipment.
Application shall be 1/8 thick minimum.
1.
Apply primer 3579 with sprayer, roller or brush to an even 5 to 8 MILs thickness with no puddles.
Wait until tacky before applying next coat (about one hour).
2.
Apply base coat 3561 with v-notched squeegee and cross roll with 3/8 nap roller. Allow to selflevel (10 to 15 minutes) and evenly seed apply Granules 5900 into wet resin. Spread by hand or
blower and allow to fall lightly into resin. Continue to broadcast until floor appears completely dry.
Allow to cure and sweep off excess granules. All imperfections to be smoothed prior to installing
second coat.
3.
Second coat to be same as base coat.
4.
Allow 24 hours for second coat to cure then sweep off excess granules with stiff bristled broom. All
imperfections should be smoothed before application of seal coat.
5.
Grout Coat 3745 to be applied with flat trowel or squeegee and backroll with a nap roller evenly
with no puddles. Two coats may be required. Allow to cure.
6.
Seal Coat 3745 to be applied like Grout Coat. Allow 24 hours to cure before opening to traffic.
7.
Form a 1/2 radius cove at the intersection of vertical surfaces and the floor unless indicated
otherwise.
Any repairs in the Epoxy System will need to be approved and coordinated by Sprouts representative.
WORKMANSHIP
A.
B.
C.
Perform all work using only experienced, competent painters in accordance with the best standards of
practice in the trade.
When completed, the coating shall represent a first-class workmanlike appearance.
Apply all materials under adequate illumination.

09831 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.3
APPLICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.4
General: Apply Ceramic Carpet coatings according to manufacturers written instructions. Use
applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1.
Colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in coating schedule and finish schedule on
construction plans.
Apply at temperatures between 50 deg. F and 90 deg. F. Do not reduce.
1.
Roller: Use a 3/8 nap synthetic roller cover. Avoid rapid rolling which causes bubbling.
2.
The substrate and its condition will determine the application procedure.
Do not apply ceramic carpet in direct sunlight.
Allow to cure for 24 hours at 50 to 90 deg. F temperature before opening to traffic. Epoxy materials will
appear to be cured and dry to touch prior to full chemicalcross linking. Allow epoxy to cure for 2-3 days
prior to exposure to water or other chemicals.
At completion, touch-up and restore finish where damaged and leave finish surfaces in good condition.
CLEANING
A.
3.5
Cleanup: At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
1.
After completing coating work, clean glass and spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by
washing, scraping, or other methods, being careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished
surfaces.
2.
Observe all fire and health precautions when handling or storing solvents.
PROTECTION
A.
B.
Protect work of other trades from damage whether being coated or not. Correct damage by cleaning,
repairing, replacing, and recoating as approved by Architect. Leave in an undamaged condition.
Provide Wet Paint signs to protect newly coated finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings
provided by others to protect their work after completing coating operations.
1.
After construction activities of other trades are complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
coated surfaces.

09831 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 09911 - PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.2
This Section specifies the work necessary to complete all surface preparation, painting, and finishing
required for interior and exterior surfaces including paint, varnish, stain, primers, tint, drop cloths, rags,
fillers cleaners, applicators, and finishing materials.
Contractor shall be responsible for the finish of all buildings and site components, and provide all labor,
materials, equipment, and services necessary to furnish, transport, and install all painting and finishing
work, as indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein. This work shall include but not be limited to
painting, finishing, and associated inspecting, cleaning, sanding, varnishing, priming, filling, and testing.
General Description of Interior Paint Finishes:
1.
Main Sales and Vestibules:
Eg-Shel finish
2.
Main Sales ceiling and exposed roof structure:
Dry Fall Gloss finish
3.
Main Sales structural columns:
Gloss finish
4.
Office, walls and ceilings:
Eg-Shel finish
5.
Public Halls, Break Room, Conference Room walls:
Eg-Shel finish
6.
Restroom ceilings:
Eg-Shel finish
7.
Interior Doors and Frames:
Gloss finish
8.
Entry Barn Feature:
Gloss finish trim with Clear Sealer
9.
Dairy Barn:
Gloss finish with applied faux finish
10. Safety Bollards:
Gloss finish
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.

1.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
Before supplying any materials to the site, painting subcontractor and the paint manufacturers
representative shall prepare a complete schedule showing the materials proposed to be used for
each treatment specified, and submit same to Architect for review/approval.
Prepare samples at the job site for each type of finish-coat material indicated as required until colors
meet with Architects approval. Paint colors and locations will be as specified by the Architect, General
Contractor and his subcontractor, before any work is done, will furnish actual paint color drawdown
samples and a schedule showing where the various colors are located on and with-in the building.
1.
LEED - 09 CI Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints, including printed statement of VOC
content and chemical components.
Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities
described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing
contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
PAINTING
09911 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.4
Certification: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified
Contractor is to ensure that all products used are completely compatible.
Warranty:
1.
2.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Deliver all packaged materials to the site in manufacturers original, sealed, undamaged containers, with
identification labels intact. Labels shall give manufacturers name, brand, type, batch number, color of
paint, and instructions for reducing. Thinning of materials is to be done only in accordance with written
recommendations of manufacturer.
1.
Remove any oily rags, waste, etc., from the building and project site every night and take every
precaution to avoid any danger of fire.
2.
ambient temperature of 45 deg F and maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
3.
4.
Such storage place shall be kept clean and free of foreign materials and residue.
5.
Correct all damage to surroundings in a timely manner.
6.
All products must comply with local and state E.P.A. restrictions.
PAINTING
09911 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.6
Apply paint only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and ambient are temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F.
Do not apply exterior paint in damp, rainy weather, or until the surface has dried thoroughly from the
effects of such weather.
Do not apply varnish or paint when temperature is below 50 deg F.
Avoid painting surfaces when exposed to hot sunlight.
Do not apply paint when relative humidity exceeds 85%; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the
dew point, or onto damp or wet surfaces.
PROTECTION
A.
B.
1.7
Before painting, remove hardware, accessories, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items, or provide
ample protection of such items.
1.
On completion of each space, replace above items.
2.
3.
Any damage done shall be repaired by the painting contractor at his expense.
4.
and maintained.
Finishing of the following listed items and materials will not be required and shall be protected.
1.
Stainless steel, brass, bronze, copper, chromium, anodized aluminum; specialty finished articles
such as porcelain enamel, plastic coated fabrics, and baked enamel.
2.
Finished products such as ceramic tile, windows, glass, brick, resilient flooring, acoustical tiles,
board and metal tees; other architectural features, such as finish hardware, furnished in
prefinished.
3.
All paint spots shall be removed from the above surfaces.
COLOR SCHEDULE
A.
B.
C.
D.
The Architect will provide a complete schedule of colors.

Colors may be selected from various manufacturers standards. The paint manufacturer supplying this
project shall match these colors.
Well in advance of commencing work, the painting Contractor shall obtain the schedule from the
Architect, and proceed to prepare a duplicate set of samples of treatments for all major surfaces.
application. Draw down samples (8" x 8") will be required and must be approved by Architect/Owner
prior to commencing work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
Brands of paint, varnish, and stains are specified herein.

Specification is based on Sherwin Williams.
1.
Glidden Professional is an approved equal and can be bid as an acceptable replacement to
Sherwin Williams.
2.
Frazee and Dunn Edwards are acceptable manufacturers and may be bid as an alternate if the
architect approves the color and equivalencies.
3.
Refer to Part 4 of this specification for equivalency chart.
PAINTING
09911 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.2
Basic painting materials such as linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, thinners, driers, etc., shall be highest
quality, made by reputable manufacturers as specified, having identifying labels on containers and shall
be approved by Architect.
All paint materials shall be factory fresh.
As part of the list of proposed subcontractors, the painting subcontractor shall indicate the name of the
manufacturer whose materials he purposes to use.
VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the
following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that
are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:
1.
Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
2.
Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
3.
Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
4.
Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more that 730 g/L.
5.
Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
6.
Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
7.
Flat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
8.
Nonflat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
9.
Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
10. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L.
11. Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC content of not more than 400 g/L.
12. Synthetic Interior Clear Sealers: VOC content of not more than 750 g/L
13. Opaque Wood Stain: VOC content of not more than 100 g/L
SCHEDULE OF FINISHES (SHERWIN WILLIAMS)
Unless noted otherwise, all building and site components are to receive finishes as noted below.
A.
Paint and Stain Schedule:

1.
Exterior Ferrous Metal (painted):
a.
1 coat Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer B66-310 Series
b.
2 coats Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic #B66 Series
2.
Exterior Galvanized Metal (painted):
a.
1 coat Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series
b.
2 coats Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-600 Series
3.
EIFS (painted):
a.
1 coat Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer A24W8300 Series
b.
2 coats A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6 Series
4.
Exterior Stucco (painted):
a.
If pH level is over 8, prime with Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer A24W08300 first
b.
5.
Exterior Top of Stucco Walls, Top and Back of Masonry Parapets (elastomeric):
a.
1 coat Sherwin-Williams ConFlex XL High Build Coating elastomeric sealant (wall to be dry
before application)
b.
See Section 09963. NO SUBSTITUTIONS
6.
Exterior Masonry with Block Filler (painted):
a.
1 coat PrepRite Block Filler B25W25
b.
7.
Exterior Masonry without Block Filler:
a.
1 coat Loxon Acrylic Primer A24W8300
b.
8.
Exterior Concrete (painted):
a.
1 coat Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer A24W8300
b.
2 coats Acrylux Exterior Latex Flat #6800 Series
PAINTING
09911 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
9.
B.
C.
2.3
Exterior Concrete (texture finish)

a.
1 coat Loxon Acrylic Primer A24W8300
b.
2 coats Ulta Crete Textured Masonry Topcoat (medium texture) A44W800 Series
10. Exterior Wood Stain (semi-transparent):
a.
2 coats WoodScapes Exterior Semi-Transparent Stain, A15T5
11. Exterior Wood Stain (opaque):
a.
Exterior Oil-Based Wood Primer, Y24W8020
b.
2 coats WoodScapes Exterior Solid Color Acrylic Latex, A15 series
12. Exterior Wood (painted):
a.
1 coat Exterior Latex Wood Primer, B42W8041
b.
13. Exterior Drywall (texture finish)
a.
1 coat exterior latex wood primer, B42W8041
b.
2 coats UltaCrete, A44W800
14. Interior Gypsum Board at Suspended Soffits (painted):
a.
1 coat ProMar 200 Zero VOC Primer, B28W02650
b.
2 coats ProMar 200 Zero VOC Eg-Shel, B20W02650
15. Interior Gypsum Wallboard at all areas unless otherwise noted (painted):
a.
1 coat ProMar 200 Zero VOC Primer, B28W02650
b.
2 coats ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel B20W02650
16. Interior Wood (painted):
a.
1 coat Premium Interior Wall and Wood Primer, B28W8111
b.
2 coats SOLO Gloss, A77W00051
17. Interior Wood (sealed):
a.
2 coats Wood Classics waterborne Polyurethane Varnish, A68 series.
18. Interior Ferrous Metal (painted):
a.
1 coat Pro Industrial ProCryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series
b.
2 coats SOLO Gloss, A77W00051
19. Interior CMU with Block Filler (painted):
a.
1 coat Prep Rite Interior/Exterior Block Filler, B25W25
b.
2 coats ProMar 200 Zero VOC Semi-Gloss B31W02650 Series
20. Interior Sales Floor Ceiling (dry fall):
a.
1 coat Kem Bond HS over steel or 1 coat PrepRite Wall and Wood Primer over wood
b.
2 coats Super Save-Lite Dry Fall B47WZ65 Gloss (VOC compliant)
c.
2 coats Pro Industrial Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall Semi-Gloss, B42W00083
Note: Block filler to be applied (back rolled) in such a manner as to fill all voids.
Refer to specification Section 09963 for elastomeric coatings.
MATERIALS NOT SPECIFIED

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Painting Subcontractor shall designate type of paint to be used on each portion of the work not itemized
above. Such material shall meet the Architects approval.
Paint finish (gloss. flat, etc.) shall be verified with the Architect or Owners representative prior to painting
on the job.
All graphic lines to be applied using easy-mask masking tape.
All cut lines to be true without overlaps or voids.
Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with
one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
PAINTING
09911 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Inspection of surfaces: Do not begin painting on any surface until it has been inspected and is in proper
condition to receive the paint as specified.
1.
Should any surface be found unsuitable to produce a proper paint finish, notify the General
Contractor in writing.
2.
Prior to painting, the painting contractor should determine dryness of all moisture-holding materials
by use of a reliable electronic moisture meter.
a.
Interior Finishes:
i.
Concrete:
12%
ii.
Masonry:
12%
iii.
Wood:
15%
iv.
Gypsum Board: 12%
v.
Plaster:
12%
3.
Prior to sealing, the painting contractor should determine dryness of all moisture-holding materials
by use of a reliable electronic moisture meter.
a.
Interior Finishes:
i.
Wood: 6 - 8%
4.
Apply no material until the unsuitable surfaces have been made satisfactory.
5.
After acceptance of surface, by application of first coat of paint, assume responsibility to rectify any
unsatisfactory finish results.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with manufacturers
written instructions for each particular substrate condition, as specified herein, and as indicated on the
Drawings.
1.
Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density.
1.
Stir as required during application.
2.
Do not stir surface film into material.
a.
If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.
i.
Tint all primers and undercoats to approximately the color of the finish coat with each
coat being sufficiently different from the work in place to permit easy identification.
Finish edges, tops and bottoms of all doors the same as door faces. Both sides and all edges of doors to
be finished simultaneously.
Wood:
1.
Use sandpaper to smooth and even each surface, and then dust off.
2.
After primer or stain coat has been applied, thoroughly fill all nail holes and other surface
imperfections with putty tinted with primer or stain to match wood color.
3.
Sand all woodwork between coats to provide a smooth surface.
4.
Cover knots and sap streaks with a thin coat of shellac, unless noted otherwise.
Steel and Iron:
1.
Remove grease, rust, and rust scale, then touch-up all chipped or abraded places on items that
have been shop coated.
2.
Where steel or iron have a heavy coating of scale, remove descaling, or wire brush as necessary,
to produce a satisfactory surface for painting.
3.
When area will be exposed to view, use sandpaper over the entire treated area to provide a
smooth surface.
4.
Feather the edges of surrounding undamaged prime coat, and spot prime in a manner to eliminate
evidence of repair.
Galvanized Metal: Thoroughly clean by wiping surfaces with surface conditioner and prime with
galvanized iron primer as recommended by paint manufacturer.
Concrete and Concrete Masonry:
PAINTING
09911 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.
I.
J.
3.2
Prepare surfaces to be painted or stained by removing all dirt, dust, oil, grease stains, and
efflorescence.
2.
The method of surface preparation shall be left to the discretion of the painter, provided the results
are satisfactory to the Owner and Architect.
3.
Before first paint coat or stain coat is applied, spot prime all nails and other exposed metal
occurring in the surfaces with an oil-base masonry primer, as recommended by paint manufacturer.
Stucco Surfaces:
1.
Fill cracks, holes or imperfections in plaster with patching plaster, and smooth off to match
adjoining surfaces.
2.
Before painting any plaster, surfaces shall be first tested for dryness with moisture testing device.
3.
Do not apply paint or sealer on plaster when the moisture content exceeds 12% as determined by
the testing device.
a.
Test sufficient areas in each space and as often as necessary to determine the proper
moisture content for painting.
b.
If the moisture content is between 8% and 12%, prime with alkali resistance primer.
c.
If moisture content is 8% or less, prime with specified primer.
4.
Remove the dry sand deposit from all plaster surfaces by brushing with stiff brush before painting.
5.
Test pH of stucco surfaces prior to painting.
a.
If pH level is not in compliance with paint manufacturers requirement, the entire surface is to
be primed with alkali resistance primer prior to specified paint installation.
EIFS Surfaces:
1.
Fill cracks; holes or imperfections in plaster with patching plaster and smooth off to match adjoining
surfaces.
2.
Before painting all EIFS, surfaces shall be first tested for dryness with moisture testing device.
3.
Do not apply paint or sealer on plaster when the moisture content exceeds 12%, as determined by
the testing device.
a.
Test sufficient areas in each space and as often as necessary to determine the proper
moisture content for painting.
b.
If the moisture content is between 8% and 12%, prime with alkali resistance primer.
c.
If 8% or less, prime with specified primer.
4.
Remove the dry sand deposit from all plaster surfaces by brushing with stiff brush before painting.
5.
Test pH of EIFS surface prior to painting.
a.
If pH level is not in compliance with paint manufacturers requirement, the entire EIFS
surface is be primed in accordance with EIFS, manufacturers recommendations.
WORKMANSHIP
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Perform all work using only experienced, competent painters, and in accordance with the best standards
of practice in the trade.
1.
Hand brush or roll work except where otherwise permitted or directed.
2.
When completed, the painting shall represent a first-class workmanlike appearance.
3.
Apply all paint materials under adequate illumination and with adequate ventilation.
Prime coats specified herein will not be required on items delivered with prime or shop coats already
applied, unless otherwise specified.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before
final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with a
prime coat and one finish coat minimum.
If undercoats or other conditions show through the topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a
uniform paint finish, color and appearance.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller
tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.
If, after treatment, the completed finish (or any portion thereof) blisters, checks, peels, or otherwise
shows indication of dampness or other irregular condition of surface, the painting contractor shall, at his
PAINTING
09911 - 7

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
3.3
own expense, remove the applied treatment and refinish the part affected to the satisfaction of the
Owner or Architect.
All exposed water, gas, waste piping, exposed conduits, lighting panels, telephone terminal boxes and
galvanized or insulated ducts, shall be painted in all sales areas and other areas openly visible by sales
floor, unless otherwise scheduled.
Grilles and registers shall be spray painted with enamel or lacquer to match walls and ceilings.
1.
Paint materials shall not sag, run, or bind movable parts of grilles or registers.
Duct throats behind all grilles, registers, louvers, baffles, etc., shall be given one coat of flat black oil
paint, wherever visibility of the interior of the ducts is allowed.
Paint exposed gas lines on roof with extra paint on threaded areas. Remove all rust, chipped and
pealing paint prior to final paint application.
Carefully examine the Mechanical Drawings, Electrical Drawings, and Specifications, to determine the
amount of exposed work to be painted.
APPLICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
Exposed surfaces: Contractor shall paint or finish all exposed surfaces on all buildings and site
components unless otherwise noted or indicated.
Finish edges, tops and bottoms of all doors the same as door faces. Both sides and all edges of doors to
be finished simultaneously.
All interior and exterior exposed metal shall be painted or have a manufactured final surface finish.
Provide uniform paint shades of the same color by mixing paint 1/3 from one bucket, 1/3 from second
bucket, and 1/3 from the third bucket (typical) into a separate 5 gallon bucket.
Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or prepared for painting, as soon as
practical after preparation and before surface deterioration is allowed to take place.
Stain or paint only when surfaces are clean, dry, smooth and adequately protected from dampness.
Each coat of paint shall be well brushed on, or sprayed and back roIled, worked out evenly, and allowed
to dry at least 24 hours before the subsequent coat is applied.
Finished work shall be uniform, of approved color, smooth and free from runs, sags, clogging or
excessive flooding.
Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors sharp and clean, without overlapping.
Where high gloss enamel is used, lightly sand undercoats to obtain a smooth finish coat.
Each coat of material applied must be inspected and approved by the Owner or Architect before the
application of the succeeding specified coat; otherwise no credit for the concealed coat will be given, and
the contractor shall assume the responsibility to recoat the work in question.
1.
Painting Contractor shall notify the Owner or Architect when each coat is completed.
At completion, touch-up and restore finish where damaged and leave finish surfaces in good condition.
Interior Gypsum Board Walls with Level 4 Finish:
1.
Spray-apply prime coat with no backroll using a low pressure spray to avoid texture of the prime
coat.
2.
Spray-finish coats over prime coat. If a roller is used move roller in one direction full height of the
wall and use the shortest knap roller possible so as not to leave a textured finish on the wall. Do
not backroll. If flashing occurs, sand wall finish smooth and repaint the area full height of wall.
Interior Gypsum Board Walls and Ceilings with Level 3 Finish:
1.
Spray and roll apply prime coat avoiding as much texture as possible.
2.
Roll-apply finish coats over prime coat. If a sprayer is used backroll with a dry roller to eliminate
spray overlaps and use the shortest knap roller possible so as not to leave a textured finish on the
wall. If flashing occurs, sand wall finish smooth and repaint the area full height of wall or full width
of ceiling.
Dry Fall Ceilings:
1.
Spray-apply prime coat for metals and wood as listed above.
2.
Spray-apply finish coats over prime coat using 50% overlap with each pass. Cross spray at right
angles to eliminate holidays and bare areas.
PAINTING
09911 - 8

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
P.
Q.
R.
S.
3.4
Minimum Coating Thickness:

1.
Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturers recommended spreading rate.
2.
Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.
Prime Coats:
1.
Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that
is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others.
2.
Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat
appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes:
1.
Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish,
color, appearance, and coverage.
2.
Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface
imperfections will not be acceptable.
3.
Do not reduce, thin or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is
specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
4.
Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many coats as necessary for complete hide and
uniform appearance.
5.
If final painting is delayed more than 2 weeks after installation of exterior wood, apply primer within
2 weeks and final coating within 2 weeks.
Transparent (Clear) Finishes:
1.
Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster.
2.
Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail
holes, or other surface imperfections.
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from
Project site.
Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
Provide Wet Paint signs to protect newly painted finishes.
After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to
protect their work.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing,
scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces.
PAINTING
09911 - 9

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PART 4 - COMPARATIVE PAINT PRODUCTS:

4.1 GLIDDEN PROFESSIONAL
Exterior Ferrous Metal (Painted)
1 coat Devoe Coatings Devflex 4020PF DTM Primer/Finish

2 coats Devoe Coatings Devflex 4216HP High Performance Acrylic
Exterior Galvanized Metal (Painted)

EIFS (Painted)
1 coat Hydrosealer Exterior Primer Sealer 6001-1200

2 coats Fortis 350 Exterior Flat Paint 2200V
Exterior Stucco (Painted)
1 coat Hydrosealer Exterior Primer Sealer 6001-1200

Exterior Masonry (Painted)

(CMU requiring block filler)
1 coat Concrete Coatings Block Filler 3010-1200

Exterior Wood Stain

(semi-transparent)
2 coats Flood TWF Semi-Transparent Stain
Interior Gypsum Board

At Suspended Soffits
1 coat PVA Interior Primer Sealer 1030-1200

2 coats Ultra-Hide No VOC Eg-Shel Paint 1411
Interior Gypsum Wallboard

At all other areas unless
Otherwise noted (Painted)
1 coat PVA Interior Primer Sealer 1030-1200

2 coats Ultra-Hide No VOC Eg-Shel Paint 1411
Enamel Interior wood (Painted)
1 coat Gripper Interior/Exterior 3210-1200

2 coats Ultra-Hide No VOC Gloss Paint 3028
Interior Ferrous Metal (Painted)

Interior CMU
With Block Filler (Painted)
1 coat Concrete Coatings Block Filler 3010-1200

2 coats Ultra-Hide No VOC Semi-Gloss Paint 1415
4.2 FRAZEE
Exterior Ferrous Metal (Painted)
1 coat #664 Rust Stop

2 coats #648 Aro-Plate II Gloss
Exterior Galvanized Metal (Painted)
1 coat #661 Metal Prime

2 coats #203 Duratec II
EIFS (Painted)
Exterior Masonry (Painted)
1 coat #262 Acrylic Block Filler

Exterior Stucco (Painted)
1 coat Eff-stop masonry primer

2 coats flat exterior acrylic
PAINTING
09911 - 10

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
Exterior Wood (Stain)
2 coats #385 Oil Stain - Madera (semi-transparent)

At Suspended Soffits
1 coat #061 Aqua-Seal

2 coats #022 Lo-Glo
Interior Gypsum Wallboard (Painted)

At all other areas unless
otherwise noted
1 coat #061 Aqua-Seal

2 coats #128 Satinglide II
Interior wood (Painted)
1 coat #367 Fraflo II

Interior Ferrous Metal (Painted)
1 coat #664 Rust Stop

2 coats #648 Aro-Plate II Gloss
Interior CMU
With Block Filler
1 coat #262 Acrylic Block Fill

4.3 DUNN EDWARDS

Exterior Ferrous Metal
1 coat Bloc-Rust Alkyd Emulsion Rust Preventative Primer - White

(BRPR00-1-WH) or Bloc-Rust Alkyd Emulsion Rust Preventative Primer Red Oxide (BRPR00-1-RO) and Syn-Lustro Rust Preventative Alkyd Gloss
Enamel (10 Series) or
2 coats Evershield Ext. 100% Acrylic Gloss Paint (EVSH60-1).
Exterior Galvanized Metal
1 coat Galv-Alum Premium Galvanized/Aluminum Primer (GAPR00) and

Syn-Lustro Rust Preventative Alkyd Gloss Enamel (10 Series) or,
2 coats Evershield Ext. 100% Acrylic Gloss Paint (EVSH60-1)
EIFS
2 coats Acri-Flat 100% Acrylic Exterior Flat Paint (W704); (New:

Spartashield (SSHL10)
Exterior Stucco
1 coat Acri-Loc Acrylic Masonry Primer/Sealer (W6232); (New: Eff-Stop

Select (ESSL00))
2 coats Acri-Flat 100% Acrylic Ext. Flat Paint (W704); (New: Spartashield
(SSHL10)
Exterior Masonry with Block Filler
PDCA Block Filler Standard Level 2 or 3.

Filler Coat(s) Smooth Blocfil Premium Concrete Block Filler (SBPR00)
2 coats Acri-Flat 100% Acrylic Ext. Flat Paint (W704): (New: Spartashield
(SSHL10)
Exterior Masonry without Block Filler

Select (ESSL00)) and 2 coats Acri-Flat 100% Acrylic Ext. Flat Paint (W704);
(New: Spartashield (SSHL10)
2 coats Graffiti Barrier Coat, by Zinsser/Okon
Exterior Masonry without Block Filler
(Painted/graffiti resistant coating)

Select (ESSL00)) and 2 coats Acri-Flat 100% Acrylic Ext. Flat Paint (W704);
(New: Spartashield (SSHL10).
2 coats Graffiti Barrier Coat, by Zinsser/Okon.
PAINTING
09911 - 11

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
Exterior Concrete (painted)

Select (ESSL00))
2 coats Acri-Flat 100% Acrylic Ext. Flat Paint (W704); (New: Spartashield
(SSHL10)
Exterior Wood
1 coat Zinsser/Okon Weather Pro Semi-Transparent Stain.
Suspended Soffits
1 coat Prep-Seal (W6324); (New: Vinylastic Plus (VNPL00)
2 coats Walltone Flat (W420V); (New: SWLL10)
Interior Gypsum Wallboard
All areas unless otherwise noted (painted).

1 coat Prep-Seal (W6324); (New: Vinylastic Plus (VNPL00)
2 coats Spartaglo Acrylic Semi-Gloss Paint (W7500V); (New: Spartawall Int.
S/G Paint (SWLL50)
Interior Wood (painted)
1 coat Inter-Kote (W6325); (New: Inter-Kote Plus (IKPL00)

S/G Paint (SWLL50)
Interior Wood (semi-transparent stain)
Satin Finish: 1 coat Stainseal Oil Stain

2 coats Cabot Int. Water-Borne Clear Satin Polyurethane (8082)
Semi-Gloss Finish: 1 coat Stainseal Oil Stain
2 coats Cabot Int. Water-Borne Clear Semi-Gloss Polyurethane (8087).
Interior Ferrous Metal (painted)
1 coat Bloc-Rust Alkyd Emulsion Rust Preventative Primer - White

(BRPR00-1-WH)
2 coats Syn-Lustro Rust Preventative Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel (9V)
Interior CMU with Block Filler (painted) PDCA Block Filler Standard Level 2 or 3.
Filler Coat(s) Concrete Block Filler Smooth (W6329): (New: Smooth Blocfil
Plus (SBPL00))
2 coats Spartasheen Acrylic Low Sheen Paint (W7300); (New: Spartawall
Int. E/S Paint (SWLL30) or,
2 coats Spartashell Acrylic Eggshell Paint (W7400); (New: Spartawall Int.
L/S Paint (SWLL40) or,
S/G Paint (SWLL50).
Note: Block filler to be applied (back rolled) in such a manner as to fill all voids. Refer to PDCA (P12-05) Standard
for Block Filler Levels.
PAINTING
09911 - 12

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 09963 - SPECIAL COATINGS - ELASTOMERIC

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
This Section specifies the installation of all painting and finishing required for surfaces specified,
including labor, elastomeric coating materials, applicators, cleaners, primers, conditioners, sealant, and
topcoat materials.
install all coating work, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with local codes and standards, or
as specified herein. This work shall include but not be limited to design and procurement of coating
components and associated cleaning, priming, sealing, patching, and painting.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.

Product Data:
1.
For each type of material and product indicated, and for each elastomeric coating system specified.
Include crack fillers, block fillers, and primers.
2.
Manufacturer's Information: Technical information including label analysis and instructions for
handling, storing, and applying each coating material.
3.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests by a qualified testing agency
for each elastomeric coating material indicating compliance of elastomeric coatings with
requirements based on comprehensive testing within the last two (2) years of current product
formulation
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
Before supplying any materials to the site, painting subcontractor and the paint manufacturers
representative shall prepare a complete schedule showing the materials proposed to be used for
each treatment specified, and submit same to Architect for review/approval.
Prepare samples at the job site for each type of finish-coat material indicated as required until colors
meet with Architects approval. Paint colors will be as specified by the Architect, who, before any work is
done, will furnish color chips and a schedule showing where the various colors are located on the
building.
Prior to supplying any material to the site, the painting subcontractor and the paint manufacturers
representative shall prepare a sample of Sherwin-Williams ConFlex XL Elastomeric Coating, and submit
same to Architect for review. Refer to contract drawings for color selection.
Furnish extra elastomeric coating materials from same production run as materials applied and in
quantities described below. Package materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage and
identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner at closeout.
1.
Quantity: Furnish Owner with 2 gal. of each color and finish of elastomeric coating materials
applied.
Substitutions: NO SUBSTITUTIONS.
SPECIAL COATINGS - ELASTOMERIC

09963 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.4
1.
Elastomeric coating is not for use on overhead horizontal surfaces (undersides of balconies, soffits,
etc.).
2.
Not for use on horizontal surfaces (floors, roofs, decks, etc.) where water will collect.
3.
Elastomeric coating is not for use below grade. Will not withstand hydrostatic pressure.
Warranty:
1.
2.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Deliver all packaged materials to the site in manufacturers original, sealed, undamaged containers, with
identification labels intact. Labels shall give manufacturers name, brand, type, batch number, color of
paint, and instructions for reducing. Thin only in accordance with written recommendations of
manufacturer. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. Thinning instructions (if
permitted). Application instructions, color name and number, handling instructions and precautions.
1.
Remove any oily rags, waste, etc., from the building and project site every night and take every
precaution to avoid any danger of fire.
2.
ambient temperature of 45 deg F and maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
3.
4.
Such storage place shall be kept clean and free of foreign materials and residue.
5.
Correct all damage to surroundings in a timely manner.
6.
All products must comply with local and state E.P.A. restrictions.

09963 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.6
Do not apply exterior paint in damp, rainy weather, or until the surface has dried thoroughly from the
effects of such weather.
Handling instructions and precautions.
Avoid painting surfaces when exposed to hot sunlight.
Use only with adequate ventilation.
1.
Any damage done shall be repaired by the painting contractor at his expense.
2.
and maintained.
Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85%; or at
temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.
Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified before
starting or continuing coating operation.
Finishing of the following listed items and materials will not be required and shall be protected:
1.
Finished products such as ceramic tile, windows, glass, brick, resilient flooring, acoustical tiles
board and metal tees; other architectural features, such as "finish" hardware, furnished in
prefinished.
COLOR SCHEDULE
A.
B.
C.
D.
The Architect will provide a complete schedule of colors.

Colors may be selected from various manufacturers standards. The paint manufacturer supplying this
project shall match these colors.
Well in advance of commencing work, the painting Contractor shall obtain the schedule from the
Architect, and proceed to prepare a duplicate set of samples of treatments for all major surfaces.
application. Draw down samples (6" x 6") will be required and must be approved by Architect/Owner
prior to commencing work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURER
A.
2.2
Elastomeric coating shall be ConFlex XL Elastomeric High Build coating A5-400 Series, as manufactured
by Sherwin Williams. NO SUBSTITUTIONS
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Specification is based on Sherwin Williams.

All paint materials shall be factory fresh.
As part of the list of proposed subcontractors, the painting subcontractor shall indicate the name of the
manufacturer whose materials he purposes to use.
Exterior Top of Stucco Walls, Top and Back of Masonry Parapets (elastomeric).
1.
1 coat S-W ConFlex XL High Build Coating, A5-400 Series (wall to be dry before application).
2.
A total dry film thickness of 12 - 15 mils and a surface with 10 or less pinholes per square foot is
required for a waterproofing system.

09963 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
E.
F.
G.
Concrete, Stucco:
1.
1 coat S-W Loxon Concrete and Masonry Primer, A24W08300
2.
S-W Loxon Conditioner, A24V00100
3.
2 coats S-W ConFlex XL High Build Coating, A5-400 Series
Concrete Block, CMU, Split-face Block:
1.
1 coat S-W Loxon Block Surfacer, A24W00200
2.
2 coats S-W ConFlex XL High Build Coating, A5-400 Series (2 coats are required due to the typical
porosity of these surfaces).
Previously Coated: After power washing, apply 1 coat of S-W Loxon Conditioner, A24V00100 to tie any
chalk to the surfaces.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, light fixtures, and
similar items already installed that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because
of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating.
1.
Remove all surface contamination by washing the ProClean Professional Prepwash Cleaner or
other manufacturer-approved cleaner, rinse thoroughly and allow to dry.
2.
Existing peeled or checked paint should be scraped and sanded to a sound surface.
3.
Glossy surfaces should be sanded dull.
4.
Stains from water, smoke, ink, pencil, grease, etc., should be sealed with PrepRite ProBlock Primer
Sealer, or other manufacturer-approved product.
5.
After completing coating operations, reinstall items removed, using workers skilled in trades
involved.
Concrete, Stucco:
1.
If needed, pressure clean with a minimum of 2100 psi to remove all dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose
particles, foreign material, peeling and defective coatings, chalk, form release agents, moisture
curing membranes, etc.
2.
Remove all mildew. Allow the surface to dry thoroughly.
3.
Scrape and sand existing peeled or checked paint to a sound surface. Sand glossy surfaces dull.
4.
Concrete and mortar must be cured at least 7 days at 75 deg F.
5.
On tilt-up and poured-in-place concrete, commercial detergents and sandblasting may be
necessary to remove sealers, release compounds, and to provide an anchor pattern.
6.
Fill bug-holes, air pockets and other voids with ConSeal Sealant or Patch, or other manufacturerapproved product.
Masonry surfaces must be dry, 15% or less of water, and within a pH range of 6 to 12.
1.
If the pH is above 12, prime the surface first with Loxon Primer, Loxon Conditioner, or Loxon
Surfacer.
Sealing and Patching:
1.
After cleaning the surface thoroughly, prime any bare surface with Loxon Acrylic Primer or Loxon
Conditioner, apply ConSeal Sealant or Patch, allow to dry, then topcoat.
To improve the performance in selected areas:
1.
Use caution when preparing the substrate to create a uniform surface.
2.
Cracks, crevices, and through-wall openings must be patched using ConSeal Sealant or Patch.
3.
Fill voids and openings around windows and doors using ConSeal Sealant or Patch.
4.
Stripe coat all inside and outside corners and edges with 1 coat of ConFlex XL High Build Coating.
To repair openings and cracks:
1.
No greater than 1/32 wide:
a.
Apply one (1) coat of Loxon Acrylic Primer and follow with 2 coats of ConFlex XL High Build
Coating.

09963 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.
3.
4.
3.2
From 1/32 up to 1/16 wide:

a.
Bridge over voids and small cracks up to 1/16 wide using ConSeal Sealant or Patch.
b.
The product must be feathered to zero at the edges using a brush, knife, or trowel, to
prevent the repaired area from telegraphing through the subsequent finishes.
c.
Do not apply more than 1/4 in depth in one application.
From 1/16 to 3/8 wide:
a.
Cracks and voids between 1/16 and 3/8 wide should be opened to a sound surface.
b.
Flush out the opening to remove all dust.
c.
If dust is still evident, seal the surface with Loxon Conditioner to bind the dust to the surface.
d.
Fill the opening with ConSeal Sealant or Patch, provide a small crest over the opening to
allow for shrinkage.
e.
The product must be feathered to zero at the edges using a brush, knife, or trowel, to
prevent the repaired area from telegraphing through the subsequent finishes.
f.
Do not apply more than 1/4 depth in one application.
g.
Allow this to cure 24 hours.
The depth of opening should be half the width of the joint, with a maximum depth of 1/2".
a.
In deep openings, the depth of the sealant should be controlled with a closed call, nongassing type backer rod.
b.
The backer rod should be about 1/8 wider than the opening.
c.
Do not apply more than 1/4 depth in one application.
d.
If the opening is 1/4 or greater, for maximum performance, prevent 3 point adhesion with
backer rods or bond breaker tape.
e.
Three point adhesion problems occur in cracks when the sealant adheres to the walls and
the bottom of a crack, and a significant amount of flexibility is lost.
f.
Two point adhesion wall to wall in a crack using backer rods or bond breaker tape offers
the maximum flexibility and performance.
WORKMANSHIP
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
Perform all work using only experienced, competent painters in accordance with the best standards of
practice in the trade.
Hand brush, spray with back-rolling, or roll work except where otherwise permitted or directed. When
completed, the coating shall represent a first-class workmanlike appearance.
Apply all materials under adequate illumination.
Tint all primers and undercoats to approximately the color of the finish coat with each coat being
sufficiently different from the work in place to permit easy identification.
APPLICATION
A.
B.
C.
General: Apply elastomeric coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators
and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1.
Colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in coating schedule.
2.
Do not paint over conditions detrimental to formation of a durable coating film, such as dirt, rust,
scale, grease, moisture, and scuffed surfaces.
3.
Provide finish coats compatible with primers used.
Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification,
performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
Apply at temperatures between 50 deg F and 100 deg F. Do not reduce.
1.
Brush: Use a nylon/polyester brush. Avoid over-brushing which causes air bubbles.
2.
Roller: Use a 1/2 to 1-1/2 nap synthetic roller cover. Avoid rapid rolling which causes bubbling.
3.
Spray-Airless:
a.
Pressure, minimum 2300 psi.
b.
Tip, minimum 0.21".
4.
Back-roll all spray applications.

09963 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
5.
6.
3.4
The substrate and its condition will determine the application procedure.
Minimize pinholes by:
a.
2 coat application with overnight drying between coats.
b.
Spray application with back-rolling.
c.
Power rolling.
CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.5
At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from
Project site.
1.
Remove spattered coatings by washing with soap and warm water, being careful not to scratch or
damage adjacent finished surfaces.
Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
Provide Wet Paint signs to protect newly painted finishes.
After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to
protect their work.
Clean spills and spatters immediately with soap and warm water.
1.
After completing coating work, clean hands and tools immediately after use with soap and warm
water.
2.
After cleaning, flush spray equipment with mineral spirits to prevent rusting of the equipment.
3.
Follow manufacturers safety recommendations when using mineral spirits.
PROTECTION
A.
B.
Protect work of other trades from damage whether being coated or not. Correct damage by cleaning,
repairing, replacing, and recoating as approved by Architect. Leave in an undamaged condition.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings
provided by others to protect their work after completing coating operations.
1.
After construction activities of other trades are complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
coated surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.

09963 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.2
This is a National Account Item. The Contractor shall order the listed accessories from Sprouts
contracted supplier.
This Section specifies the materials and installation of pre-finished steel toilet enclosures and urinal
screens.
Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to furnish, deliver,
transport, receive, and install all toilet compartment work, as indicated on the Drawings or as specified
herein. This work shall include but not be limited to design and fabrication of toilet compartments and
associated welding, reinforcing, support of other work, cuffing, fitting, fastening, cleaning and painting.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Submittals shall be provided in accordance with Sections 01330, and 01600. Examples of submittals
required for the work in this section are outlined below.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: For products having recycled content,
documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled
content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For particleboard, documentation indicating that product contains no
urea formaldehyde.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
Manufacturers certificate of compliance shall accompany shop drawings attesting that the steel to
be used conforms with Specifications requirements.
3.
Indicate plans, elevations, details of construction, sizes of openings and parts, anchoring devices,
leveling details, finish, color, hardware fittings and fastenings.
4.
devices.
Submit 6 x 6 samples of each required metal finish and color, for each type of unit indicated. Include
Samples of hardware and accessories involving material and color selection.
1.
Samples to be the same metal which will be used in the compartment assemblies.
2.
Mill test reports.
Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment, from manufacturer.
Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10155 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.4
Testing: As required to be the latest industry codes and standards.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation
Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities", ICC/ANSI A117.1 and California Building Code Title
24 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.
Warranty:
1.
2.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.5
Transport and handle all materials in such a manner as to prevent damage to finished surface. Dumping
on the ground is not permitted. Locate stacks, or bins to avoid or protect material from heavy and
unnecessary traffic.
1.
Store materials in original packaging to prevent soiling, physical damage or welling.
2.
3.
Store moisture-sensitive materials off the ground, undercover, and in a dry location.
4.
Store materials off the ground under watertight cover and away from sweating walls and other
damp surfaces until ready for use.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other
construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
Acceptable manufacturers of units specified herein are: Metpar.

Doors and partition panels shall be 1 thick, sound insulated.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10155 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
2.2
Panel plates shall consist of Two (2) sheets of galvanized/bonderized steel not less than 22 gauge
for doors, or 20 gauge for partitions, and shall have formed edges sealed with a continuous oval
crown locking strip.
2.
Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin-impregnated kraft
paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch for doors and panels and 1-1/4
inches for pilasters.
3.
Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on
units.
4.
Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations
where machine screws are used for attaching items to units.
5.
Locking strips on doors and partitions shall be mitered, welded, and finished at the corners.
Urinal-Screen Construction:
1.
Flat-Panel Urinal Screen: Matching panel construction. Thickness to match partitions.
2.
Urinal screens shall be 42 high x 36 long (24 minimum), wall hung, 1 thick, constructed of two
(2) sheets of 20 gauge galvanized/bonderized steel constructed as specified above for partitions.
Additionally, both vertical edges are to be supplied with additional reinforcement consisting of a
wood core 4 wide.
Pilasters shall be 1-1/4 thick, made of two (2) sheets of 18 gauge galvanized/bonderized steel welded
and finished as specified above.
1.
Bottom of pilasters shall have a jack-leveling screw to carry the weight of the compartment, and to
provide a secure mechanical anchorage to floor with adjustable floor fittings.
Pilaster connection to the floor shall be concealed with a one piece 3 polished stainless steel shoe.
When set in place, pilasters shall be securely braced with continuous 1 x 1-1/2 lock seam tubular steel
overhead bracing, attached through the top of the pilaster with metal screws applied through the pilaster
into the headrail, on the inside of the stall.
1.
Headrail shall extend the full length of the installation, over end compartments, and fastened into
the wall brackets.
2.
Exposed ends of headrail to be capped.
3.
Headrail to be of anti-grip type.
Dividing partitions and pilasters shall be attached to one another and to the walls with stirrup brackets.
Trim shall be installed with theft-proof one-way screws or bolts, held in place with concealed anchor clips
without the use of exposed fasteners.
Reinforcing: Internally reinforce compartment panels where specified toilet accessories are installed
through compartment panels.
Cutouts: Provide reinforced cutouts in compartment panels where specified toilet accessories are
installed through compartment panels.
Provide all necessary blocking in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Provide Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories.

Provide all necessary blocking in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
Provide stirrup brackets, two (2) for each screen, made of heat treated, polished and anodized extruded
aluminum alloy. Each stirrup bracket shall be 3 long and provided with 4 holes for attachment of screws
to the wall and two (2) thru-bolts through the screen.
Pilaster hinge brackets shall be factory mounted flush to the pilaster.
Use theft-proof or one-way screws or bolts throughout all construction. Provide sex-type bolts for
through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel.
Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any
angle up to 90 degrees. The door shall be adjustable to permit rest position at any angle with 270 deg
arc, and the weight at all times shall be carried by a thrust bearing with all moving parts concealed within
the door thickness.
Recessed latch-operating devices that are accessible to people with disabilities are available. Verify
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10155 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
H.
2.3
1. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard concealed latch unit designed for emergency access
and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory
requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible.
2. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent
in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
3. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory
requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as
accessible.
Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip
profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.
FABRICATION
A.
B.
2.4
Overhead-Braced Units:
Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling
mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal
supports and leveling mechanism.
Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch wide, in-swinging doors for standard
toilet compartments and 36-inch wide, swing doors as indicated on drawings with a minimum 32-inch
wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.
FINISH
A.
B.
C.
Finish of all toilet compartments and urinal screens to be baked enamel.

1.
Color shall be BLACK.
Hardware: Provide manufacturers standard design heavy duty operating hardware and accessories.
1.
Stainless steel No. 4 bright polish finish.
Pilaster connection to the floor.
1.
Type 302 polished stainless steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb.
Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
Install toilet compartments and urinal screens in strict accordance with manufacturers instructions, of
size, and at locations as indicated on the drawings.
Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less
than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions.
Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops
of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are
in closed position.
Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb,
rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.
Maximum Clearances:
1.
Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch.
2.
Panels and Walls: 1 inch.
3.
Vertical edges of doors shall be uniform from top to bottom, and shall not exceed 3/16 inch.
4.
Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than two brackets attached
near top and bottom of panel.
a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.
b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
All evidence of drilling cutting and fitting to room finish shall be concealed in the finish work.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10155 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.2
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A.
B.
Clean partitions and hardware;

1.
Clean surfaces and wash with mild soap. Do no use abrasives.
2.
Touch up as required and provide minimum one (1) pint of touch-up enamel paint to match panel
finish.
Hardware Adjustment:
1.
Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper
operation.
2.
Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position
when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10155 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 10265 - PROTECTIVE BUMPER SYSTEM AND WALL/CORNER GUARDS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all Protective Bumper System components, including but not
limited to wall and corner guards, boxrails, cart corrals, side walk cart corral, posts, loading dock door
protector, and related items including appurtenances, installation, blocking, fasteners, adhesives, and
sealants.
transport, and install all protective bumper system work, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance
design and fabrication/procurement of guards and associated fastening, cutting, fitting, and cleaning.
Some materials identified herein are National Account items purchased by Owner, received, and stored
by the General Contractor, and installed by Others.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.3

Product Data: For each type of material and product indicated, including installation methods and
details.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Clearly show layout, elevations, clearances required, designation, number, type, location and
materials required.
2.
Include sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Submit samples for review in accordance with Sections 01330 and 01600 for each type of unit and for
each color and texture required.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in performing work of this section, specializing in
installation of work similar to that required for this project, employing workers who are skilled in this area
of work, and whose projects have a record of successful in-service performance.
Unless noted otherwise, this Specification is based on products manufactured by McCue Corporation,
Tel: (800) 800-8503, www.mccuecorp.com.
All products shall be furnished by a single source.
UPDATED: DEC. 1, 2014

10265 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
I.
J.
1.4
Warranty:
1.
2.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.5
Store all items specified herein in a cool, dry, protected enclosure, in original, undamaged packaging, out
of direct sunlight, and exposure to the weather.
1.
Maintain minimum storage room temperature of 40 deg F, and maximum 100 deg F.
2.
Store moisture-sensitive materials off the ground, undercover, and in a dry location.
3.
Store materials off the ground under watertight cover and away from sweating walls and other
damp surfaces until ready for use.
4.
Materials must be stored flat, or in accordance with manufacturers written recommendations.
5.
Keep products free of corrosion, dents, or other damage. Furnish temporary protection for all
exposed corners and edges.
Replace or repair at the direction of Owners representative, all damaged items at no cost to the Owner.
Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from the premises.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Coordination: Coordinate with all other trades whose work relates to items specified herein for placing of
all required backing and furring, to ensure proper locations.
Verify all dimensions shown on drawings by taking field measurements. Proper fit and attachment of all
parts is required.
Materials must be acclimated in an environment of 65 deg F to 75 deg F for at least 24 hours prior to
beginning the installation.
Interior installation areas must be enclosed and weatherproof prior to starting installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
All Protective bumper system components shall be as follows and as manufactured by McCue
Corporation, with sizes, and locations as indicated on the Drawings.
1.
Wall corner guards shall be stainless steel, or galvanized as indicated on the drawings.
2.
Boxrail shall be CartStop BR, galvanized box rail with cast Aluminum components.
3.
Loading Dock Protector shall be CartStop LDP, in Safety Yellow.
4.
Leg Posts shall be CartStop SSLP, brushed Stainless Steel.
5.
Post covers shall be Cart Stop PC, color: Black or Yellow.
6.
Bollards color: Stainless steel, or galvanized as indicated on the drawings.
7.
Mezzanine Pipe guard rails.

10265 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
B.
Cart coral and components shall be as manufactured by National Cart Co. as indicated on Drawings 1.
Cart corral shall be 720 series as shown on Drawings, galvanized steel.
2.
Sidewalk unit shall be 720 series or 360 series as indicated on Drawings by width of unit,
galvanized steel.
C.
Attachment hardware shall be provided by the manufacturer and appropriate for wall construction.
2.2
STAINLESS STEEL
A.
B.
C.
Corner guards, column wraps and wainscots are to be as follows:

1.
Corner guards are to be 2" x 2" angles or channels to fit wall thickness with 2" flanges.
2.
Column wraps are to have seams on back side of column (round) or on each side of boxed column
(square).
3.
Wainscot is to be one piece material with snap lock seams where necessary; prefer no seams (one
piece) at janitor sink.
4.
Base is to be 6" high with 3/8" radius cove at floor. Seams are to be butt joint with silicone sealant.
Material:
1.
Stainless steel to be .030 gauge 304 series, polished #4 finish for guards and wainscot.
2.
Stainless steel to be .024 gauge 300 series, polished #4 finish for coved base.
Installation:
1.
Caulk top edge to wall or column. Caulk bottom to floor. Use clear silicone sealant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Verification of conditions:
1.
Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions
detrimental to proper or timely completion.
2.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
3.3
Surface preparation: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dirt, and loose particles.
Perform additional preparation procedures required by manufacturers instructions.
Protection: Take all necessary precautions to prevent damage to material during installation.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Install all items per manufacturer's published instructions and approved installation drawings, in locations
Complete finishing operations, including painting if required, before installing impact-resistant wallprotection system components.
Install impact-resistant wall-protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions.
Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished
Work.
Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete installation.
Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories.
Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.


10265 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 10802 - TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.2
This is a National Account Item. The Contractor shall order the listed accessories from Sprouts
contracted supplier.
This Section specifies the construction of all toilet accessories and related assemblies including
coordination, installation, shelves, bars, dispensers, receptacles, fasteners, templates, temporary
supports, reinforcing, grout, sealants, paint, testing, and finishing, and cleaning.
Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to deliver, transport,
receive, and install all Toilet Accessory work, as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with local
codes and standards, and as specified herein. This work shall include but not be limited to design and
fabrication/procurement of toilet accessories and associated fastening, coordinating, positioning,
welding, grouting, reinforcing, cutting, fitting, cleaning and painting.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.3

Product Data: For each type of material and product indicated, including installation methods and
details.
1.
Construction details and dimensions.
2.
Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and
substrate preparation.
Shop Drawings: Clearly show layout, designation, number, model, type, location and materials required.
Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required.
1.
Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings.
2.
Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.
Maintenance Data: Include maintenance manuals for toilet and bath accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
This Specification is based on Products as manufactured by Bobrick Dispensers, unless otherwise
noted.
TOILET ACCESSORIES
10802 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
H.
I.
1.4
Warranty:
1.
2.
3.
Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace
mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects, and that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.6
General Requirements:
1.
Review Drawings for locations of toilet accessories and verify dimensional requirements for
recessed units. Coordinate location of blocking and built-in anchorage devices.
2.
Notify Owners Representative of any conflicts with accessory locations and partition dimensions or
piping interference.
3.
Use concealed fastening wherever possible.
4.
Provide anchors, bolts and other necessary fasteners, and attach accessories securely to walls
and partitions in locations as shown or directed.
5.
Provide products of the same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed in
the same areas, wherever possible.
6.
Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of units will not be permitted, except where otherwise
specified.
COORDINATION
A.
B.
Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for
access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and
servicing of accessories.
Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the
Work.
TOILET ACCESSORIES
10802 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Products as manufactured by Bobrick, unless otherwise noted:

ACCESSORIES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Toilet Tissue Dispenser:

(without roll control)
Sanitary Napkin Disposal:
Partition Mounted:
Wall Mounted:
Napkin/Tampon Vendor
(surface mounted).
Soap Dispenser:
Mirror 48 x 36:
Towel Dispenser:
(surface mounted)
Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle
(recessed)
Grab Bars (18, 36" & 42" lengths)
Baby Changing Station:
Preferred:
BOBRICK
COMPASS (Mainline)
B-2740
B-354
B-270
B-2706-25
B-40
B-290-4836
B-262
B-3644
PB2312, PB2316, PB2317
Koala Kare Products Horizontal Baby Changing Station

Model #KB200-00
Design Color - Cream, U.N.O
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Verification of Conditions: Examine the areas and conditions under which the work of this Section will be
performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed
until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
General: Install the work of this Section in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations, anchoring components firmly into position for long life under hard use.
Coordination: Coordinate with other trades as required, to assure proper and adequate provisions in the
work of those trades, for interface with the work of this Section. Coordinate schedules for installation of
the orderly progress of the total construction sequence.
Deviation of site conditions contrary to approved shop drawings shall be called to the attention of the
Owner Representative.
Install all toilet accessories at locations indicated, in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions.
Install concealed mounting devices and fasteners fabricated of the same material as the accessories or
of galvanized steel.
Install exposed mounting devices and fasteners finished to match the accessories.
Provide theft-resistant fasteners for all accessory mountings.
Secure toilet room accessories to adjacent walls and partitions in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions for each item and each type of substrate construction.
Install grab bars in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions at locations indicated.
TOILET ACCESSORIES
10802 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.3
Install connectors or support angles between studs.

Attachment of support angles to studs must be sufficient to withstand a horizontal pull of 300
pounds.
Accurately position connector assemblies and tighten to the support angles before wall finish is
applied.
After wall surface is finished, secure concealed mounting plate to connector assembly using
stainless steel machine screws furnished by the manufacturer.
Where grab bars installed on toilet compartments make through-bolted connection with specified
anchors.
CLEANING
A.
3.4
Upon completion of this portion of the work, promptly clean exposed portions and remove traces of dirt,
grease and all other foreign materials in accordance with manufacturers written recommendations and
as directed by Architect.
PROTECTION
A.
B.
Upon completion of the installation, visually check exposed surfaces of the work of this Section, and
touch up scratches and abrasions so they are completely invisible to the unaided eye from a distance of
5'-0".
Protect toilet accessories from damage until acceptance of work.
TOILET ACCESSORIES
10802 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 11160 - DOCK FACILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of all dock assemblies and related accessories including
installation, ramp, platform, inserts, anchoring devices, seals, bumpers, levelers, controls, safety devices,
lips, painting, wheel chock, coolhead (lighting), Sprouts logo, dock door and testing.
transport, and install all dock facilities work, as indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein. This
work shall include but not be limited to design and fabrication of dock, and associated welding,
reinforcing, support of other work, fastening, fitting, cleaning, testing, and adjusting.
Equipment indicated herein are NATIONAL ACCOUNT items purchased, received, stored and installed
by the General Contractor. Refer to the end of this section for vendor contact information.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
1.3

Shop Drawings:
1.
Clearly show layout, designation, number, model, type, location and materials required.
2.
Provide setting, drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage
devices.
3.
4.
Include wiring diagrams.
5.
6.
Submit Shop Drawings showing but not limited to product (length, width and depth); hydraulic
leveler to include pit dimensions, anchorage of curb angle and embedded plates.
Maintenance Data: Include maintenance manuals.
Submit 3 copies of Rite Hites Owners Manual, Maintenance Manual to the Architect.
Substitutions: NO SUBSTITUTIONS, THIS IS A NATIONAL ACCOUNT ITEM.
For all proposals and questions contact:
Greg Suchovic
Arbon Equipment Corporation / Rite Hite Company
Tel.: (480) 203-8561
Fax: (480) 907-2528
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.
Manufacturers authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units
required for this Project.
and in the Specifications herein:
DOCK FACILITIES
11160 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
1.4
Inserts and anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete for
the installation of units.
2.
Field verify dimensions to insure that specified equipment properly conforms to the actual driveway
grades, equipment, dock height, and door size.
Conduct pre-installation Conference at Project site.
This Specification is based on Products as manufactured by Rite-Hite Corporation.
Warranty:
1.
2.
3.
Special Warranty for Dock Levelers: Manufacturers standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace dock-leveler components which fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1.
Warranty Period for Structural Assembly: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
2.
Warranty Period for Mechanical Parts: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.
3.
Warranty shall be for unlimited usage of the leveler for the specified rated capacity over the term of
the warranty.
4.
Warranty: Rite-Hite shall provide its standard warranty on all products.
Gross weight of fork lift and load shall not exceed 12,500 lbs.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Recessed Loading Dock Equipment Coordinate size and location of pits to ensure proper clearances and
operation of equipment.
DOCK FACILITIES
11160 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
1.6
EXISTING LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT

A.
B.
C.
All existing (to remain) Loading Dock Equipment is to be in a like new condition. All equipment is to be
void of rust, broken sections, holes and tears. Repair dock equipment as required and install all missing
bolted, welded fastenings to insure a safe, solid and secure installation of all equipment. Missing
equipment that is required as a part of the total loading dock package (as identified in this Section) is to
be provided by the General Contractor. All Loading Dock Equipment is to be inspected by Rite-Hite
Corporation representative prior to any work being done.
Existing Dock Leveler is to be in a like new condition. All equipment is to be void of rust, broken
assemblies, cracked or broken hydraulic systems, non functioning operators/fuses and the leveling unit
is to be structurally secured to the loading dock. Dock Leveler is to be inspected by Rite-Hite
Corporation representative prior to any work being done.
Existing Dock Leveler to be provided with at least the following:
1.
All items listed above for an operational and safe leveling unit.
2.
Dock leveler control box shall be UL-approved on power assisted leveling unit.
3.
Controls shall incorporate an Overhead Door Interlock. Overhead door must be opened before
leveler is operable.
4.
If any or all of these items are not provided with the existing leveler, General Contractor is to
provide them as a part of his scope of work to Sprouts at store turnover.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
DOCK LEVELER
A.
2.2
Mechanical Dock leveler (Model RHM4000), manufactured by Rite-Hite Corporation as follows:

1.
Recessed adjustable dock levelers shall be 7-0 W x 8-0 L, with an 18 lip and a (C) capacity
rating. Unit to have an operational range of 12 above and below dock level. Equip each unit with
two (2) 20 High x 4 steel faced dock bumpers. Field verify slope for proper bumper projection.
2.
Dock leveler shall meet ANSI MH30.1-2000 test load specifications with proper documentation
from a 3rd party.
3.
Platform shall have a minimum of (8) interior deck beams plus external working range toe guards.
4.
Positive acting Safe-T-Strut maintenance support system will support lip and deck. This system
must withstand a 10,000 lb. moving load and provide OSHA approved lock out/tag out capabilities.
5.
Provide safety stops to limit fall of platform to 3 and 7 below dock. Safety stops to be integral part
of manufacturers standard dock levelers.
6.
Toe guard thickness is 11 gauge (0.120 inch).
7.
Ramp control to have a 9 tooth pawl and ratchet bar for positive engagement through full working
range.
RITE HITE FDSP LOADING DOCK SEAL WITH HEAD PAD (manufactured by Rite-Hite as follows)
A.
B.
C.
D.
Dock seal to be compression style designed for 8 x 8 opening, 48 dock height, level approach, 4
cantilevered wall dock face, 4 bumper protection up to 3% dock slope and 6 bumper projection up to
4% dock slope.
Range of truck heights to be serviced shall be from 12-6 to 13-6".
Beveled side pads shall provide a tight seal between the back of the trailer and the building wall.
1.
Bottom of side pads shall have slit breathers.
2.
Side pads shall be mounted on specified backer. Alternate backers are available.
3.
Dock seal polyurethane foam shall be glued to wood backer.
4.
Fabric shall be wrapped and attached to back of wood backer.
Dock seal shall have a stationary head pad.
1.
Bottom of head pad shall have slit breathers.
DOCK FACILITIES
11160 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.
3.
4.
5.
Heat pad shall be mounted on construction grade lumber. Alternate backers are available.
Dock seal polyurethane foam shall be glued to wood backer.
Fabric shall be wrapped & attached to back of wood backer.
Dock seal shall have overlapping wear pleats on ends of head pad face.
E.
Side pad and head pad fabric shall be a vinyl base fabric.
1. Fabric for wear pleats on side pads shall be friction resistant Durathon pads by Rite Hite.
2. Fabric for wear pleats on head pad shall be friction resistant Durathon pads by Rite Hite.
3. There shall be 48 of Durathon reinforcing on the inside lower portion of the side pads.
4. There shall be a Sprouts logo centered on the head pad.
F.
Side pads shall have guide strips 24 high x 3.5 wide on side pad.
2.3
LOADING DOCK LIGHTS

A.
A.
B.
C.
2.4
COOLHEAD Incandescent FL-40 Dock Light with 40 flex arm manufactured by Rite-Hite.
Dock Light shall be painted safety Yellow and made from 1-1/2, 14 gauge steel square tube arms.
Dock Light shall have double-strut arm assembly with single-arm attachment head.
Dock Light shall have a 110-volt plug in connection with an on/off toggle switch on 16 cord connecting
head to arm.
WHEEL CHOCKS
A.
2.5
WHEEL CHOCK shall be 8 H x 8 W x 8 L rubber with 20-0 of corrosion-resistant chain supplied with
each chock. One per dock leveler, Rite Hite style 88-8, or equal.
DOCK LEVELER PIT FRAME
A.
B.
C.
Platform Frame: Heavy structural steel, welded and reinforced to meet specified performance
requirements and to provide rigid support for the unit.
Angle between side and rear, and side and front curb angles must be 90 degrees.
All curb angle joints to be welded securely.
Pit to be extended from face of building wall 4. Site specific conditions may require extension greater
than 4, review construction drawings to confirm.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Verification of Conditions: Examine the areas and conditions under which the work of this Section will be
performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed
until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
Installer shall examine all dimensions and conditions under which the equipment are to be installed and
notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the
work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the installer.
Rite-Hites Manufacturers Representative shall install all equipment within this specification in
accordance with approved shop drawings and Rite-Hites recommendations.
After installation is complete, a representative of Rite-Hite shall examine the installation and require that
all connections and adjustments necessary to assure proper operation of all equipment be made. Before
DOCK FACILITIES
11160 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
D.
acceptance, a demonstration shall be conducted in the presence of a Sprouts Farmers Market

representative to guarantee that all equipment is operating properly in every respect. In addition, a
detailed user/operator training session shall be conducted at time and place agreed upon by Sprouts
Farmers Market representative and Rite-Hites representative.
Provide closeout documents as required in Division 1.
DOCK FACILITIES
11160 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
DOCK FACILITIES
11160 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
SECTION 13915 - AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM (Performance Specification)

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.2
This Section specifies the construction of a complete and operational automatic wet pipe fire suppression
sprinkler system for the entire building and the site, including piping, drains, and sprinkler installation,
and related items such as valves, controls, instrumentation, indicators, hangers and supports, hoses,
portable fire extinguishers, hose valves, alarms, sprinklers, escutcheons, guards, hose stations, pumps,
control panels, monitors, and signs. Dry pipe sprinklers and boots for cooler/freezer areas (if required).
transport, and install all fire alarm and monitoring system work, in accordance with the latest local codes
and standards, as indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein, whichever is most stringent. This
work shall include but not be limited to design and procurement of fire protection system equipment,
shop drawings, calculations, material specifications, and associated earthwork, piping installation,
welding, reinforcing, support of other work, cutting, fitting, cleaning and testing.
Work shall begin at 6" blind flange provided by Developer and shall include but not be limited to the
following:
1.
Typical site work includes underground piping: 6" fire service main from blind flange to spigot inside
the building, thrust blocking, backfill and compaction, backflow preventer and cage.
2.
Typical interior work includes fire department connection, electrically supervised indicating control
valves, check valves, pressure gauges, flow switches, overhead pipe, fittings, hangers and
sprinklers, equipment, inspector's test connections, main drains and auxiliary drains and testing.
The intent of the drawings and specifications is to describe and provide guidance for a complete and
functional sprinkler system installation. Contractor shall provide all items necessary for a complete
installation in accordance with the latest codes and requirements whether or not specifically mentioned
herein or shown on the drawings.
Coordinate all work, deliveries, schedules, and trades in this section with work in the Fire Alarm
Monitoring section to provide a complete and functional system meeting all codes and standards
requirements. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with all other construction that penetrates
ceilings, including but not limited to, light fixtures, HVAC equipment, walls, and partition assemblies.
Related Documents: Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1, Specification Sections apply to this
section.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
Submittals shall be provided in accordance with sections 01330 and 01600.

Product Data: For each type of material and product indicated including piping materials, hangers and
supports, seismic restraints, valves, trim, pumps, sprinklers (including flow characteristics, mounting,
finish), escutcheons, guards, electrical diagrams, signal and control wiring.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Sprinkler plans and due diligence report are to be submitted to architect for review and approval
prior to submittal for permit review and approval process.
2.
Clearly show layout, designation, number, type, size, quantity, arrangement, location and materials
required.
3.
Working plans approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
4.
Two (2) reproducibles of each shop drawing. Submittal must be comprehensive of entire project,
complete in all detail and the same scale as the engineering documents.
5.
Four (4) sets of the manufacturer's literature on all system equipment.
6.
Four (4) sets of hydraulic calculations. Calculations shall include peaking information.
7.
Two (2) copies of the due diligence report as identified in paragraph 3.10.c below.
8.
Two (2) samples of each type of the automatic sprinklers for approval.
a.
The Engineer will review this submittal for consistency with the Contract Documents.

13915 - 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
b.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
1.3
After the satisfactory review of the Engineer, the sprinkler contractor shall provide submittals
to the authority having jurisdiction and the insurance underwriter for approval.
9.
The sprinkler contractor shall be responsible for responding, in writing, to any comments from the
authority having jurisdiction or the insurance underwriter within ten (10) working days after the
receipt of their comments. Copies of the response shall be sent to the General Contractor and
Engineer.
Operation and Maintenance Data: provide operating and maintenance instructions to the Owner in
accordance with requirements of the General Conditions of the Contract. Include specialty items for
emergency operation and maintenance manuals.
Project Record Documents: provide record documents in accordance with requirements of the General
Conditions of the Contract, Division 1.
Samples of each finish, style and color for review in accordance with Sections 01330 and 01600.
Field quality control test and inspection reports. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements and as described in applicable NFPA codes.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified for installation of components required
for this Project, and whose projects have a record of successful in-service performance.
1.
Installer's responsibilities include designing, municipality approval, fabricating, and installing firesuppression systems and providing professional engineering services (where needed) to assume
engineering responsibility.
2.
Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test performed less than one (1) year prior to initial
issue of shop drawings.
All work shall be installed in accordance with all applicable codes and referenced design standards. Firesuppression system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall include but not be
limited to compliance with the following.
1.
Current International Fire Code, (contractor to verify)
2.
NFPA 10, Portable Fire Extinguishers.
3.
NFPA 13, Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
4.
NFPA 14, Installation of Standpipe, Private Hydrant, and Hose Systems.
5.
NFPA 24, Private Fire Service Mains.
6.
NFPA 30, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
7.
NFPA 30B, Manufacture and Storage of Aerosol Products.
8.
NFPA 291, Recommended Practice for Fire Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants.
9.
Applicable AWWA codes including but not limited to: AWWA C110, C153, C151, C606.
10. Applicable ASTM codes including but not limited to: A53, A135, A795, A733, A865, A234.
11. Applicable ASME codes including but not limited to: B16.1, B16.3, B16.4.
12. Seismic performance: Fire suppression piping shall be capable of withstanding the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE 7, Minimum Design Loads for
Buildings and Other Structures.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose equipment specialties, and accessories are listed by product
name and manufacturer in ULs Fire Protection Equipment Directory or FMs Fire Protection Approval
Guide and that comply with other requirements herein. Equipment and components not specifically
identified shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. for fire protection systems installation.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a
qualified professional engineer. Design sprinkler piping to include minimum 10% margin of safety for
available water flow and pressure, or other safety margin as required by authority having jurisdiction,

13915 - 2

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
1.4
whichever is greater. Piping system design shall be 175 psig minimum working pressure rating, unless
otherwise indicated or required.
Warranty:
1.
Repair all defective workmanship or replace all defective materials for a period of two (2) years
from the date of Substantial Completion. Workmanship or equipment found to be defective during
that period shall be replaced without cost to the Owner.
2.
3.
4.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.5
not permitted.
PROJECT PERFORMANCE AND SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Design sprinkler systems according to local codes and standards, the criteria identified herein, and as
shown on the drawings, whichever is more stringent.
Provide standard piping system component working pressure listed for at least 175 psig. Margin of
safety for available water flow and pressure: 10% (or other safety margin as specified by authority having
jurisdiction, whichever is greater).
Obtain approval from the Authority having jurisdiction.
SPRINKLER SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA SHALL BE STRICTLY PER THIS SPECIFICATION.
Automatic sprinkler system shall provide fire protection for the entire building.
1.
Interface automatic sprinkler system with building fire and smoke alarm systems.
2.
Coordinate the sprinkler requirements with indications as shown on the documents.
STOCK AREA - CLASS III COMMODITIES, NON-ENCAPSULATED, SINGLE- OR DOUBLE-ROW
RACKS WITH MINIMUM 8-0 AISLES. MAXIMUM TOP-OF-STORAGE: 16-0. NFPA 13 (2007),
Table/Figure 16.2.1.3.2(c), Curve E with application of Figure 16.2.1.3.4.1 (0.37 x 76.5% = 0.25
gpm/ft2).
1.
Density - 0.25 gpm/S.F.
2.
Operating Area - 2000 S.F.
3.
Temperature Rating - 286 deg F.

13915 - 3

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
4.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
1.6
Hose Stream Allowance - 500 gpm.

NOTE: Storage of Commodities of Hazard Class and/or storage height greater than that detailed
above will require additional sprinkler protection.
SALES AREA (Other than rack storage higher than 12-0 above finished floor) - NFPA 13 Ordinary
Hazard Group 2 Occupancy.
1.
2.
Operating Area - 1500 S.F.
3.
4.
OFFICE AND PUBLIC AREAS - NFPA 13 Light Hazard Occupancy.
1.
2.
Operating Area - 1500S.F.
3.
4.
Coordinate with mechanical and electrical drawings.
A water flow test shall be conducted as near as possible to the site of this project, within one (1) year of
initial issue of shop drawings, to best represent the available public water supply to the site. Test results
shall be documented and shall indicate, at a minimum, the date and time, the location and elevation (with
respect to building floor elevation) of the residual and flow hydrants, size and location of the water main,
static pressure, and residual pressure and associated gpm flow. NFPA 291 provides detailed
instructions for the recommended method of performing and documenting water flow tests. General
Contractor to verify water flow test.
Provide fire department connection as indicated on drawing or required by local authority having
jurisdiction.
Provide all necessary offsets, raises or drops in main or branch line piping and auxiliary drains required
by building conditions whether or not shown on the drawings.
Examine the job conditions and verify all measurements, distances, elevations, clearances, pipe sizes,
etc.
It is understood, unless specifically indicated otherwise, that the pipe sizes (if shown on the bid
documents) will be used.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Contact regulatory agency (Municipality) for requirements prior to starting sprinkler design.
All work shall meet the requirements of the Owner and authority having jurisdiction. Submit plans for City
review as soon as possible.
The automatic sprinkler contractor shall not pursue any approvals or interpretations of the design
documents except through the office of the Engineer.
Sprinkler piping shall not be concealed where it is inaccessible unless inspected by a representative of
the authority having jurisdiction.
Work performed prior to the satisfactory review of the Engineer and approval by the authority having
jurisdiction and the insurance underwriter will be solely at the contractor's risk.
The system will not be acceptable until final testing and receipt of the Contractor's Material and Test
Certificate has been obtained.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Subject to compliance with local codes, provide products by the manufacturers specified or Architect
approved equal.

13915 - 4

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
2.2
PIPING
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.3
Underground Piping: Per local requirements and NFPA 13 and NFPA 24. Pipe shall have a minimum
rated working pressure of 175 psi.
Provide corrosion protection for underground piping to prevent leakage or failure.
Overhead Pipe: Per local requirements and NFPA 13. Schedule 40 piping shall be used for diameters
1-1/2" or smaller; Schedule 10 piping shall be used for diameters 2" or larger.
Provide wet pipe and/or dry pipe system as required by NFPA and local codes and standards, including
protection for cooler/freezer area.
JOINING OF PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.4
All pipe shall be joined in accordance with NFPA requirements including but not limited to NFPA 13 and
NFPA 24.
Fittings shall be 175 psi screwed or flanged black cast iron or approved equivalent such as mechanical,
grooved, plain end or welded connections. Where GROOVED FITTINGS AND COUPLINGS are used
together they shall be of the same manufacturer.
BUSHINGS SHALL NOT BE USED.
Refer to Division 15 for pipe-flange gasket materials and welding filler metals.
HANGERS AND SLEEVES
A.
B.
C.
2.5
Sleeves shall be provided for all pipes passing through concrete floors, foundations and masonry walls.
Provide chrome or primed escutcheon plates at all walls as indicated on the drawings.
All hangers shall be of approved materials, and spaced in accordance with NFPA 13 and 231C and the
piping manufacturer's specifications.
BACKFLOW PREVENTION
A.
2.6
Ames 2000SS or approved equivalent 6" double check backflow preventer with two supervised O.S. & Y.
valves and pressure gauges.
FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
A.
2.7
Potter-Roemer Figure No. 5023 or approved equivalent 4" x 2-1/2" two (2) way flush wall mount type;
polished brass finish; thread size to conform to the standards of the local fire department; threaded caps
and chains of same finish; identification plate lettered "Automatic Sprinkler" of same finish. Lowest fitting
on connection shall have an automatic ball drip.
VALVES
A.
B.
C.
Exterior Valves: None.

Interior Valves:
1.
Gate valve: rising stem, O.S. & Y.; 175 psi rated working pressure.
2.
Check valve: horizontal swing or wafer; 175 psi rated working pressure.
3.
Globe valve: bronze threaded; renewable composition disc; 175 psi rated working pressure.
Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following
requirements apply:
1.
Listed Fire-Protection Valves: UL listed and FMG approved for applications where required by
NFPA 13 and NFPA 14:
a.
Shutoff Duty: Use gate valves.
2.
Unlisted General-Duty Valves: For applications where UL-listed and FMG-approved valves are not
required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.

13915 - 5

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
a.
b.
2.8
Shutoff Duty: Use gate valves.

Throttling Duty: Use globe valves.
WATERFLOW SWITCH
A.
B.
2.9
Vane Type: Vane type water flow detector mounted in accordance with its listing and the manufacturer's
instructions; designed to signal any flow of water that equals or exceeds 10 gpm; detector switch
mechanism shall incorporate an instantly recycling mechanical retard element with an adjustable range
of 0 to 60 seconds; two single pole, double throw switches shall be provided suitable for operation on 24
volt D.C. or 110 volt A.C., dust tight construction, tamperproof detector switch enclosure.
The detector shall be furnished and installed by the sprinkler contractor and be wired complete by the fire
alarm contractor.
SUPERVISORY SWITCHES
A.
B.
C.
2.10
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.11
A.
B.
2.12
A.
B.
Switches shall be mounted so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve; adjust to operate
within two revolutions of the valve control or when the stem has moved no more than 1/5 of the distance
from its normal position.
Switches shall be provided as a two-single pole, double throw type suitable for operation on 110 volt A.C.
or 24 volt D.C.
The supervisory switch shall be furnished and installed by the sprinkler contractor and wired complete by
the fire alarm contractor.
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
UL listed or FM approved.
Water type: 2-1/2 gallon, stored pressure, rechargeable, 2A classification, with clip for wall or rack
mounting.
Multipurpose:
Dry chemical (ammonium phosphate), stored pressure, rechargeable, 4A:60B:C
classification, with clip for wall or rack mounting, for low temperature applications when mounted in
unheated spaces.
Instruction manual: Owners instructions for installation, use and maintenance, following NFPA 10
guidelines.
Signage: Fire Extinguisher placard for each extinguisher, as directed by authority having jurisdiction.
ALARM BELL
Furnish and install an electric alarm bell as indicated on drawings.
Wired complete by the fire alarm contractor.
SPRINKLERS
Provide only new sprinklers of current model and manufacture. Do not provide any sprinkler included in
a recall program. Do not provide any sprinkler with an O-ring seal.
Types:
1.
Pendent - These shall be equal to the Tyco Series TY-L Recessed Pendent Sprinkler (chrome).
2.
Upright - These shall be equal to the Tyco Series TY-L Upright Sprinkler (Brass). High temperature
sprinklers shall be used as indicated in Section 1.5 of this specification.
3.
Horizontal Sidewall (as applicable) - These shall be equal to the Tyco Series TY-L Horizontal
Sidewall Sprinkler (Brass in back room areas) (Chrome where exposed to sales floor). General
Contractor to verify with tenant sprinkler and escutcheon finish/color.
4.
Dry Pendent These shall be equal to Tyco Series DS-1 Dry Type Sprinkler. Recommend use of
Dry Sprinkler Boot equal to Tyco Model DSB-2 in conjunction with Dry Type Sprinklers at
freezer/cooler penetrations.

13915 - 6

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
C.
2.13
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.14
A.
B.
Provide at the riser a spare sprinkler cabinet stocked with the appropriate sprinkler wrenches and two (2)
recessed, two (2) upright, two (2) pendent and two (2) horizontal sidewall sprinklers.
SIGNS
Provide signs as required by NFPA 13.
Approved enameled metal signs shall be securely attached at all main drains, auxiliary drains,
inspector's test connections and control valves.
Provide labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping in accordance with NFPA requirements, and
Division 15, Mechanical Identification.
Provide a permanently attached placard indicating hydraulic design criteria placed at the riser.
TEST AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS
Provide combination inspector's test/main drain valve with pressure relief equal to the A.G.F.
Manufacturing Co. Model 1011, 2" size with 1/2" test orifice where indicated on drawings.
Auxiliary drains consisting of plugs, or globe valves and plugs where capacity of trapped pipe section
exceeds five (5) gallons, shall be provided to drain all points in the system that cannot be drained back to
main riser.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A.
3.2
Coordinate closely with all other trades to expedite construction and avoid interference.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
All trenches must be dug to a line and the bottom cleaned and shaped to provide support of the pipe
throughout its entire length.
Bracing shall be provided as necessary to maintain excavation.
As soon as underground work has been completely installed and tested, all excavation shall be backfilled
with gravel to 1'-0" of finished grade and with clean earth free from bricks, rocks, cinders, or any foreign
matter to grade.
Minimum depth of top to pipe shall be in accordance with NFPA 24 and local requirements.
Backfill below concrete or asphaltic slabs shall be gravel to paving base. (ALSO REFER TO GENERAL
CONDITIONS - COMPACTION).
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and
arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1.
Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having
jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans.
Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe
sizes.
Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. Unions are not required on flanged
devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.
Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger
connections.
Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, sized and
located according to NFPA 13.
Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

13915 - 7

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
3.4
Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when
sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
Install drain valves on standpipes.
Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves. Drain to
floor drain or outside building.
Install alarm devices in piping systems.
Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials.
1.
Install standpipe system piping according to NFPA 14.
2.
Install sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.
Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake damage.
Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each
standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft metal seated
globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and
install where they will not be subject to freezing.
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.5
Install listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, specialty valves and trim, dry sprinkler
boots, controls, and specialties according to manufacturers recommendations, NFPA 13, NFPA 14, and
Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water supply
except from fire department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of
system controlled by each valve.
Install check valve in each water-supply connection.
Alarm Check Valves: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including bypass check valve
and retarding chamber drain-line connection.
CONNECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
3.6
Drawings (where provided) indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
Connect water-supply piping to fire-suppression piping. Include backflow preventer between potablewater piping and fire-suppression piping. Refer to Division 15 for backflow preventers.
LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.7
Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13, NFPA
14, and Division 15, Mechanical Identification.
RESTORATION OF SITE
A.
3.8
Where sidewalks, curbs, and lawns are excavated by the automatic sprinkler contractor, these shall be
replaced equivalent to the original and to the satisfaction of the Architect, Owner and local authorities.
PAINTING AND PATCHING
A.
B.
C.
Painting of sprinkler piping is not included in this contract. All sprinkler piping shall be thoroughly
cleaned, removing all dirt, oil, etc. and made ready to receive paint in accordance with the General
Conditions of the Contract.
Holes in walls or floors cut during the performance of this work shall be patched if the holes cannot be
covered by standard escutcheon plates so as to completely conceal the cuts where they would otherwise
be exposed to view.
Firestop all penetrations of fire rated assemblies.

13915 - 8

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
3.9
SYSTEM TESTS AND FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.10
A.
B.
C.
Tests shall be performed in accordance with NFPA code requirements, and witnessed by the authority
having jurisdiction, and Owner's authorized agent.
Locate inspectors test station at rear of building.
Perform the following field tests and inspections (as applicable), and prepare test reports.
1.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
2.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.
Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
4.
Start and run excess-pressure pumps.
5.
Start and run air compressors.
6.
Flush piping in accordance with NFPA 13 to ensure all foreign matter has been purged from
underground pipe.
7.
Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter.
8.
Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14, "System Acceptance" Chapter.
9.
Preliminary testing procedures shall be conducted as mentioned above to assure proper operation
when the final testing is performed.
10. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
11. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.
12. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.
Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
The Contractor's Material and Test Certificate as shown in NFPA 13 must be completed and
submitted before final acceptance may be given.
CERTIFICATIONS
General Contractor/Fire Sprinkler Subcontractor to review the existing on-site conditions prior to
designing the sprinkler system.
General Contractor/Fire Sprinkler Subcontractor to meet with the local Fire Department for an update of
the current status of the building sprinkler system and requirements for modifications to the sprinkler
system for the proposed use. Following that meeting, a written report of the existing/current condition of
the fire suppression system as identified on NFPA 25, Chapter 5 and 13 is to be provided to Sprouts.
General Contractor/Fire Sprinkler Subcontractor is to provide a complete Due Diligence review and
report of the existing and proposed Sprinkler System based on a retail/grocery use.
1.
The report is to include at least the following:
a.
When the current approval of the system expires, what is required to keep the system
current? What is required for Certificate of Occupancy? What do the future requirements for
inspections entail?
b.
If the Annual yearly inspection is current, when was it last performed? When does the
current approval expire, and is it required prior to or as a part of the Certificate of
Occupancy?
c.
Is there a requirement for an Annual (5-year) Obstruction Investigation per NFPA 25,
Chapter 13? If so, when was it last performed? When does the current approval expire, and
is it required prior to or as a part of the Certificate of Occupancy?

13915 - 9

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.11
A.
B.
C.
3.12
A.
Definition of Certifications:
1.
Annual Fire Department Review and Approval of the System:
a.
Annual visual inspection shall be conducted yearly for signs of leakage, corrosion, foreign
materials, paint on sprinkler heads and physical damage per NFPA 25, Chapter 5.
2.
Obstruction Investigation:
a.
An investigation of piping and branch line conditions shall be conducted every (5) five years
for the presence of foreign organic and inorganic material in an attempt to prevent the
destruction of piping systems caused by microbiologically influenced corrosion per NFPA 25,
Chapter 13.
Fees:
1.
General Contractor is to incur all costs required for annual inspections noted above if they are
required prior to store turnover by the local Fire Department.
2.
Should the Fire Department perform an inspection of either the Annual Review and Approval of the
System or the Obstruction Investigation within the first year (after certificate of occupancy has been
issued) and finds items that are not in compliance and not the fault of the store, the remediation of
all items required to make the store compliant will be at the General Contractors expense and at no
cost to Sprouts if the Due Diligence review indicates that either of the certifications were not
required or was in compliance as it existed.
3.
If corrections are required to the systems are identified by the local Fire Department per NFPA 25
or Local Fire Code after the Certificate of Occupancy has been issued the General Contractor is
responsible for only the updates based on the code at the time of Certificate of Occupancy and
Owner will be responsible for the remaining corrections.
General Contractors obligation to request any inspections of the sprinkler systems ends with the
issuance of the Certificate of Occupancy and local Fire Department approvals have been received.
Sprouts will take over the inspection requirements after the General Contractor provides proof of all
approvals.
Upon completion of the fire sprinkler system, General Contractor is to provide Sprouts with all copies of
the written approvals (green tags and/or certificates) as a part of the close out package or as soon as
they are issued and released by the local Fire Department.
Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion.
DEMONSTRATION
operate, and maintain specialty valves. Refer to Division 1 Closeout Procedures.

13915 - 10
SECTION 15010
PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
This Division requires the furnishing and installing of complete functioning systems, and each
element thereof, as specified or indicated on the Drawings and Specifications or reasonably inferred;
including every article, device or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably
necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment
specified. Elements of the work include materials, labor, supervision, supplies, equipment,
transportation, and utilities.
B.
Division 15 of the Specifications and Drawings numbered with prefixes AC, P and M generally
describe these systems, but the scope of the Mechanical work includes all such work indicated in the
Contract Documents: Instructions to Bidders; Proposal Form; General Conditions; Supplementary
General Conditions; Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical Drawings and
Specifications; and Addenda.
C.
The Drawings have been prepared diagrammatically intended to convey the scope of work, indicating
the intended general arrangement of the equipment, fixtures, ductwork, piping, etc. without showing
all the exact details as to elevations, offsets, control lines, and other installation requirements. The
Contractor shall use the Drawings as a guide when laying out the work and shall verify that materials
and equipment will fit into the designated spaces, and which, when installed per manufacturers
requirements, will ensure a complete, coordinated, satisfactory and properly operating system.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.
All work under this division shall be executed in a thorough professional manner by competent and
experienced workmen licensed to perform the Work specified.
B.
All work shall be installed in strict conformance with manufacturers requirements and
recommendations. Equipment and materials shall be installed in a neat and professional manner and
shall be aligned, leveled, and adjusted for satisfactory operation.
C.
Material and equipment shall be new, shall be of the best quality and design, shall be current model
of the manufacturer, shall be free from defects and imperfections and shall have markings or a
nameplate identifying the manufacturer and providing sufficient reference to establish quality, size
and capacity. Material and equipment of the same type shall be made by the same manufacturer
whenever practicable.
D.
Unless specified otherwise, manufactured items shall have been installed and used, without
modification, renovation, or repair for not less than one year prior to date of bidding for this project.
1.3 CODES, REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A.
Execute Work in accordance with the National Fire Protection Association and all Local, State, and
National codes, ordinances and regulations in force governing the particular class of Work involved.
Obtain timely inspections by the constituted authorities, and upon final completion of the Work
obtain and deliver to the Owner executed final certificates of acceptance from the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
B.
Any conflict between these Specifications and accompanying Drawings and the applicable Local,
State and Federal codes, ordinances and regulations shall be reported to the Architect in sufficient
time, prior to the opening of Bids, to prepare the Supplementary Drawings and Specification Addenda
required to resolve the conflict.
C.
The governing codes are minimum requirements. Where these Drawings and Specifications exceed
the code requirements, these Drawings and Specification shall prevail.
D.
All material, manufacturing methods, handling, dimensions, method or installation and test procedure
shall conform to but not be limited to the following industry standards and codes:
IBC
IMC
IPC
IECC
IFC
IFGC
ADA
Sprouts Famers Market

Duluth, GA

International Mechanical Code
International Plumbing Code
International Energy Conservation Code
International Fire Code
International Fuel Gas Code
American Disabilities Act
15010-1
1550000803
01/05/10
ADC
AIA
AMCA
ANSI
ARI
ASHRAE
ASME
ASSE
ASTM
AWS
AWWA
CISPI
MSS
NBFU
NEC
NFPA
NEMA
OSHA
PDI
SMACNA
UL
Air Diffusion Council

Guidelines for Design and Construction of Hospital and Healthcare Facilities
Air Movement and Control Association, Inc.
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
American Society of Sanitary Engineering
American Society of Testing Materials
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry
National Fire Protection Association
National Electrical Manufactures' Association
Occupational Safety and Health Act
Plumbing and Drainage Institute
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.
Underwriter's Laboratories
E.
Contractor shall comply with rules and regulations of public utilities and municipal departments
affected by connections of services.
F.
All mechanical work shall be performed in compliance with applicable safety regulations, including
OSHA regulations. Safety lights, guards, shoring and warning signs required for the performance of
the mechanical work shall be provided by the Contractor.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Furnish: The term furnish is used to mean supply and deliver to the project site, ready for
unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and similar operations.
Install: The term install is used to describe operations at the project site including the actual
unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension,
finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
Provide: The term provide means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended
use.
Furnished by Owner or Furnished by Others: The item will be furnished by the Owner or
Others. It is to be installed and connected under the requirements of this Division, complete
and ready for operation, including items incidental to the Work, including services necessary for
proper installation and operation. The installation shall be included under the guarantee required
by this Division.
Engineer: Where referenced in this Division, Engineer is the Engineer of Record and the Design
Professional for the Work under this Division, and is a Consultant to, and an authorized
representative of, the Architect, as defined in the General and/or Supplementary Conditions.
When used in this Division, it means increased involvement by, and obligations to, the Engineer,
in addition to involvement by, and obligations to, the Architect.
AHJ: The local code and/or inspection agency (Authority) Having Jurisdiction over the Work.
NRTL: Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory, as defined and listed by OSHA in
29 CFR 1910.7 (e.g., UL, ETL, CSA, etc.), and acceptable to the Authority having Jurisdiction
(AHJ) over this project. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories and standards listed are
used only to represent the characteristics required and are not intended to restrict the use of
other listed Manufacturers and models that meet the specified criteria.
B.
The terms "approved equal", equivalent, or "equal" are used synonymously and shall mean
accepted by or acceptable to the Engineer as equivalent to the item or manufacturer specified.
The term "approved" shall mean labeled, listed, or both, by an NRTL, and acceptable to the AHJ over
this project.
C.
The following definitions apply to excavation operations:

1.
2.
Additional Excavation: Where excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, if unsuitable
bearing materials are encountered, continue excavation until suitable bearing materials are
reached. The Contract Sum may be adjusted by an appropriate Contract Modification.
Subbase: as used in this Section refers to the compacted soil layer used in pavement systems

Duluth, GA

15010-2
1550000803
01/05/10
3.
4.
between the subgrade and the pavement base course material.

Subgrade: as used in this Section refers to the compacted soil immediately below the slab or
pavement system.
Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations
or dimensions without specific direction from the Architect.
1.5 COORDINATION
A.
The Contractor shall visit the site and ascertain the conditions to be encountered while installing the
Work under this Division, verify all dimensions and locations before purchasing equipment or
commencing work, and make due provision for same in the bid. Failure to comply with this
requirement shall not be considered justification for omission, alteration, incorrect or faulty
installation of Work under this Division or for additional compensation for Work covered by this
Division.
B.
The Contractor shall refer to Drawings of the other disciplines and to relevant equipment drawings
and shop drawings to determine the extent of clear spaces. The Contractor shall make offsets
required to clear equipment, beams and other structural members; and to facilitate concealing piping
and ductwork in the manner anticipated in the design.
C.
The Contractor shall confirm and coordinate the final location and routing of all mechanical,
electrical, plumbing, fire protection, control and audio-visual systems with all architectural features,
structural components, and other trades. The contractor shall locate equipment, components,
ductwork, piping, conduit, and related accessories to maintain the desired ceiling heights as indicated
on the architectural drawings. The contractor shall inform the architect of any areas where conflicts
may prevent the indicated ceiling height from being maintained. The contractor shall not proceed
with any installation in such areas until the architect has given written approval to proceed or has
provided modified contract drawings or written instructions to resolve the apparent conflict.
D.
The contractor shall provide materials with trim which will fit properly the types of ceiling, wall, or
floor finishes actually installed.
E.
The Contractor shall maintain a foreman on the jobsite at all times to coordinate his work with other
contractors and subcontractors so that various components of the mechanical systems will be
installed at the proper time, will fit the available space, and will allow proper service access to the
equipment. Carry on the Work in such a manner that the Work of the other contractors and trades will
not be handicapped, hindered, or delayed at any time.
F.
Work of this Division shall progress according to the "Construction Schedule" as established by the
Prime Contractor and his subcontractors and as approved by the Architect. Cooperate in establishing
these schedules and perform the Work under this Division, in a timely manner in conformance with
the construction schedule so as to ensure successful achievement of schedule dates.
1.6 MEASUREMENTS AND LAYOUTS

A.
The drawings are schematic in nature, but show the various components of the systems
approximately to scale and attempt to indicate how they are to be integrated with other parts of the
building. Figured dimensions shall be taken in preference to scale dimensions. Determine exact
locations by job measurements, by checking the requirements of other trades, and by reviewing the
Contract Documents. The Contractor will be held responsible for errors which could have been
avoided by proper checking and inspection.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for submittal requirements.
B.
Submittals and shop drawings shall not contain HEIs firm name or logo, nor shall it contain the HEIs
engineers seal and signature. They shall not be copies of HEIs work product. If the contractor
desires to use elements of such product, the license agreement for transfer of information at the end
of this section must be used.
C.
Assemble and submit for review, manufacturers product literature for material and equipment to be
furnished and/or installed under this Division, to include shop drawings, manufacturer's product data
and performance sheets and submittals required by this Division as noted in Table 1 at the end of
this section. A set of electronic submittals, as described below, shall be submitted prior to ordering.
All equipment, fixtures, etc. ordered/installed prior to approved submittals that does not match the
approved submittal will be replaced by contractor at his/her own expense without any additional cost
to the owner. Submittals of similar kind such as plumbing fixtures, waste and vent fittings, hydronic
specialties, air devices, etc. shall be divided in an electronic file for clarity.
D.
Shop Drawings shall be submitted for systems and equipment as listed in Table 1 in sufficient detail
so as to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents and design concept. Highlight, mark,

Duluth, GA

15010-3
1550000803
01/05/10
list or indicate the materials, performance criteria and accessories that are being proposed.
E.
Refer to individual Sections for additional submittal requirements.
F.
Submit Shop Drawings as early as required to support the project schedule. Allow for two weeks
Engineer review time plus mailing time plus a duplication of this time for resubmittal if required.
Submittal of Shop Drawings as soon as possible before construction starts is preferred.
G.
Before submitting Shop Drawings and material lists, the Contractor shall verify that the equipment
submitted is mutually compatible and suitable for the intended use. He shall verify that the
equipment will fit the available space and allow ample room for maintenance. If the size of
equipment furnished makes necessary any change in location, or configuration, submit a shop
drawing showing the proposed layout.
H.
Shop Drawings submitted by the Contractor shall contain the following information. Submittals not
so identified will be returned to the Contractor without action:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The project name.

The applicable specification section and paragraph.
Equipment identification acronym as used on the drawings.
The submittal date.
The Contractor's stamp which shall certify that the stamped drawings have been checked by
the Contractor, comply with the Drawings and Specifications and have been coordinated with
other trades.
I.
Refer to Division 1 for acceptance of electronic submittals for this project. For electronic submittals,
Contractor shall submit the documents in accordance with the procedures specified in Division 1.
Contractor shall notify the Architect and Engineer that the shop drawings have been posted. If
electronic submittal procedures are not defined in Division 1, Contractor shall include the website,
user name and password information needed to access the submittals. For submittals sent by e-mail,
Contractor shall copy the Architect and Engineers designated representatives. Contractor shall
allow the Engineer review time as specified above in the construction schedule. Contractor shall
submit only the documents required to purchase the materials and/or equipment in the electronic
submittal and shall clearly indicate the materials, performance criteria and accessories being
proposed. General product catalog data not specifically noted to be part of the specified product will
be rejected and returned without review.
J.
The Architect and/or Engineers checking and subsequent acceptance of such drawings, schedules,
literature, or illustrations shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from
Drawings or Specifications unless he has, in writing, called the Engineers attention to such
deviations at the time of submission, and secured his written acceptance; nor shall it relieve him
from responsibility for errors in dimensions, details, size of members, or quantities; or omissions of
components or fittings; or for coordinating items with actual building conditions and adjacent work.
1.8 ELECTRONIC DRAWING FILES

A.
In preparation of shop drawings or record drawings, Contractor may, at his option, obtain electronic
drawing files in AutoCAD or DXF format from the Engineer for a shipping and handling fee of $200
for a drawing set up to 12 sheets and $15 per sheet for each additional sheet. Contact the
Architect for Architects written authorization. Contractor shall complete and send the form
attached at the end of this section along with a check made payable to Henderson Engineers, Inc.
Contractor shall indicate the desired shipping method and drawing format on the attached form. In
addition to payment, Architects written authorization and Engineers release agreement form must
be received before electronic drawing files will be sent.
1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for Substitutions
B.
Materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of
required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by the proposed substitution.
C.
No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval to bid
has been received by the Engineer at least ten calendar days prior to the date for receipt of Bids.
Each such request shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be
substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitute including drawings, cuts,
performance and test data and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting
forth changes in other materials, equipment or other Work that incorporation of the substitute would
require shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitute is upon the
proposer. The Engineer's decision of approval or disapproval to bid of a proposed substitution shall
be final.

Duluth, GA

15010-4
1550000803
01/05/10
D.
If the proposed substitution is approved prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be stated in an
Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. Verbal approval will
not be given.
E.
No substitutions will be considered after the Contract is awarded unless specifically provided in the
Contract Documents.
1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A.
Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for Operational and Maintenance Manuals.
B.
Submit manuals prior to requesting the final punch list.
C.
Instruct the Owner's permanent personnel in the proper operation of, startup and shutdown
procedures and maintenance of the equipment and components of the systems installed under this
Division.
D.
At the completion of the project furnish to the Architect for the Owner, four (4) copies of the
information listed in Table 5 in three-ring, loose-leaf, hard-back binders, divided and tabbed. Include
local contacts complete with address and telephone number, for equipment, apparatus, and system
components furnished and installed under this Division of the specifications.
1.11 SPARE PARTS

A.
Provide to the Owner the spare parts specified in the individual sections in Division 15 of this
specification. Refer to Table 2 at the end of this section for a list of specification sections in Division
15 that contain spare parts requirements.
B.
Owner or Owners representative shall initial and date each section line in Table 2 when the specified
spare parts for that section are received and shall sign at the bottom when all spare parts have been
received.
1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS

A.
A set of blueline prints shall be kept on the jobsite during construction for the purpose of noting
changes. During the course of construction, the Contractor shall indicate on these drawings,
changes made from the Contract Drawings. Particular attention shall be made to those items which
need to be located for servicing. Underground piping shall be located, by dimension, from column
lines.
B.
Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for Record Drawings
C.
At the completion of the project, the Contractor shall obtain at his expense, reproducible vellum
copies of the drawings and incorporate changes noted on the jobsite work prints onto these vellums.
These changes shall be done by a skilled drafter. Each sheet shall be marked "Record Drawing",
with date. These drawings shall be delivered to the Architect.
1.13 TRAINING
A.
Provide training as indicated in each specific section. Schedule training with the Owner at least 7
days in advance. Video tape the training sessions in format as agreed to with the Owner. Provide
three copies of each session to the Owner and obtain written receipt from the Owner.
1.14 PAINTING
A.
Exposed ferrous surfaces, including pipe, pipe hangers, equipment stands and supports and exposed
insulated piping shall be painted by the Contractor using materials and methods as specified under
Division 9 of the Specifications; colors shall be as selected by the Architect.
B.
Factory finishes, shop priming and special finishes are specified in the individual equipment
specification sections.
C.
Where factory finishes are provided and no additional field painting is specified, marred or damaged
surfaces shall be touched up or refinished so as to leave a smooth, uniform finish.
1.15 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.
Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for Delivery, Storage and Handling.
B.
Equipment and material shall be delivered to the job site in their original containers with labels intact,
fully identified with manufacturer's name, model, model number, type, size, capacity and
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. labels and other pertinent information necessary to identify the item.
C.
Deliver, receive, handle and store equipment and materials at the job site in the designated area and
in such a manner as to prevent equipment and materials from damage and loss. Store equipment
and materials delivered to the site on pallets and cover with waterproof, tear resistant tarp or plastic
or as required to keep equipment and materials dry. Follow manufacturer's recommendations, and at
all times, take every precaution to properly protect equipment and material from damage, to include
the erection of temporary shelters to adequately protect equipment and material stored at the Site.

Duluth, GA

15010-5
1550000803
01/05/10
Equipment and/or material which become rusted or damaged shall be replaced or restored by the
Contractor to a condition acceptable to the Architect.
D.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe storage of his own tools, material and equipment.
1.16 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES

A.
Each system and element thereof shall be warranted against defects due to faulty workmanship,
design or material for a period of 24 months from date of Substantial Completion, unless specific
items are noted to carry a longer warranty in the Construction Documents or manufacturer's
standard warranty. The Contractor shall remedy defects occurring within a period of two years
from the date of Substantial Completion or as stated in the General Conditions.
B.
The following additional items shall be guaranteed:

1.
2.
3.
Piping shall be free from obstructions, holes or breaks of any nature.

Insulation shall be effective.
Proper circulation of fluid in each piping system.
C.
The above guarantees shall include both labor and material; and repairs or replacements shall be
made without additional cost to the Owner.
D.
The remedial work shall be performed promptly, upon written notice from the Architect or Owner.
E.
At the time of Substantial Completion, deliver to the Owner warranties with terms extending beyond
the one year guarantee period, each warranty instrument being addressed to the Owner and stating
the commencement date and term. Refer to Table 3 at the end of this section for a list of
specification sections in Division 15 that contain special warranties.
1.17 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A.
Temporary Utilities: The types of services required include, but are not limited to, water, sewerage,
surface drainage and gas. When connecting to existing franchised utilities for required services,
comply with service companies recommendations on materials and methods, or engage service
companies to install services. Locate and relocate services (as necessary) to minimize interference
with construction operations.
1.
2.
B.
Provide the necessary backflow prevention devices where connecting to the potable water
system. Protect water service from freezing by draining system or by providing adequate heat.
Where non-potable water is used, mark each outlet with health hazard warning signs.
Sewer Sediment: Maintain sewers and temporary connecting sewers in a clean, nonclogged
condition during construction period.
Construction Facilities: Provide facilities reasonably required to perform construction operations

properly and adequately.
1.
2.
Enclosures: When temporary enclosures are required to ensure adequate workmanship,

weather protection and ambient conditions required for the work, provide fire-retardant treated
lumber and plywood; provide tarpaulins with UL label and flame spread of 15 or less; provide
translucent type (nylon reinforced polyethylene) where daylighting of enclosed space would be
beneficial for workmanship, and reduce use of temporary lighting.
Heating: Provide heat, as necessary, to protect work, materials and equipment from damage
due to dampness and cold. In areas where building is occupied, maintain a temperature not less
than 65 degrees Fahrenheit. Use steam, hot water, or gas from piped distribution system where
available. Where steam, hot water or piped gas are not available, heat with self-contained LP
gas or fuel oil heaters, bearing UL, FM or other approval labels appropriate for application. Vent
fuel-burning heaters, and equip units with individual-space thermostatic controls. Use electricresistance space heaters only where no other, more energy-efficient, type of heater is available
and allowable.
1.18 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.
Conditions Affecting Work In Existing Buildings: The following project conditions apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The Drawings describe the general nature of remodeling to the existing building. However, the
Contractor shall visit the Site prior to submitting his bid to determine the nature and extent of
work involved.
Work in the existing building shall be scheduled with the Owner.
Certain demolition work must be performed prior to the remodeling. The Mechanical Contractor
shall perform the demolition which involves Mechanical and Plumbing systems, fixtures,
equipment, piping, equipment supports or foundations and materials.
Mechanical Contractor shall remove articles which are not required for the new Work. Unless
otherwise indicated, each item removed by the Mechanical Contractor during this demolition

Duluth, GA

15010-6
1550000803
01/05/10
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
shall become his property and shall be removed by the Mechanical Contractor from the
premises and dispose of them in accordance with applicable federal, state and local regulations.
Mechanical Contractor shall relocate and reconnect Mechanical facilities that must be relocated
in order to accomplish the remodeling shown in the Drawings or indicated in the Specifications.
Where Mechanical equipment or materials are removed, the Mechanical Contractor shall cap
unused piping beyond the floor line or wall line to facilitate restoration of finish.
General Contractor shall install finish material.
Obtain permission from the Architect for channeling of floors or walls not specifically noted on
the Drawings.
Protect adjacent materials indicated to remain. Install and maintain dust and noise barriers to
keep dirt, dust, and noise from being transmitted to adjacent areas. Remove protection and
barriers after demolition operations are complete.
Locate, identify, and protect mechanical services passing through demolition area and serving
other areas outside the demolition limits. Maintain services to areas outside demolition limits.
When services must be interrupted, install temporary services for affected areas.
Conditions Affecting Excavations: The following project conditions apply:

1.
2.
Maintain and protect existing building services which transit the area affected by selective
demolition.
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by excavation
operations.
C.
Site Information: Subsurface conditions were investigated during the design of the Project. Reports
of these investigations are available for information only; data in the reports are not intended as
representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity of conditions. The Owner will not be
responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this information.
D.
Use of explosives is not permitted.
E.
Environmental Conditions: Apply joint sealers under temperature and humidity conditions within the
limits permitted by the joint sealer manufacturer. Do not apply joint sealers to wet substrates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A.
Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone,
crushed slag, or natural or crushed sand.
B.
Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, with
100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve, and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.
C.
Backfill and Fill Materials: Materials complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP,
GM, SM, SW, and SP; free of clay, rock, or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension; debris;
waste; frozen materials; and vegetable and other deleterious matter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PERMITS
A.
Secure and pay for permits required in connection with the installation of the Mechanical Work.
Arrange with the various utility companies for the installation and connection of required utilities for
this facility and pay charges associated therewith including connection charges and inspection fees,
except where these services or fees are designated to be provided by others.
3.2 EXISTING UTILITIES

A.
Schedule and coordinate with the Utility Company, Owner and with the Engineer connection to, or
relocation of, or discontinuation of normal utility services from existing utility lines. Premium time
required for any such work shall be included in the bid.
B.
Existing utilities damaged due to the operations of utility work for this project shall be repaired to the
satisfaction of the Owner or Utility Company without additional cost.
C.
Utilities shall not be left disconnected at the end of a work day or over a weekend unless authorized
by representatives of the Owner or Engineer.
D.
Repairs and restoration of utilities shall be made before workmen leave the project at the end of the
workday in which the interruption takes place.
E.
Contractor shall include in his bid the cost of furnishing temporary facilities to provide services during

Duluth, GA

15010-7
1550000803
01/05/10
interruption of normal utility service.

3.3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A.
Refer to Division 1, Division 2 and General Conditions for Selective Demolition requirements.
B.
General: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect abandoned mechanical materials and
equipment indicated to be removed and not indicated to be salvaged or saved.
C.
Materials and Equipment To Be Salvaged: Remove, demount, and disconnect existing mechanical
materials and equipment indicated to be removed and salvaged, and deliver materials and equipment
to the location designated for storage.
D.
Disposal and Cleanup: Remove from the site and legally dispose of demolished materials and
equipment not indicated to be salvaged.
E.
Mechanical Materials and Equipment: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect the following
items:
1.
F.
Inactive and obsolete piping, fittings and specialties, equipment, ductwork, controls, fixtures,
and insulation.
a.
Piping and ducts embedded in floors, walls, and ceilings may remain if such materials do
not interfere with new installations. Remove exposed materials and materials above
accessible ceilings. Drain and cap piping and ducts allowed to remain.
b. Perform cutting and patching required for demolition in accordance with Division 1,
General Conditions and "Cutting and Patching" portion of this Section in Division 15.
Provide schedules indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective demolition
prior to commencement of Work. Include coordination for shut-off of utility services and details for
dust and noise control.
1.
Coordinate sequencing with construction phasing and Owner occupancy specified in Division 1
Section "Summary of Work."
3.4 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

A.
Refer to Division 1, Division 2 and General Conditions for Excavation and Backfilling.
B.
Perform excavation of every description, of whatever substance encountered and to the depth
required in connection with the installation of the work under this Division. Excavation shall be in
conformance with applicable Division and section of the General Specifications.
C.
Roads, alleys, streets and sidewalks damaged during this work shall be restored to the satisfaction of
Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
D.
Trenches close to walks or columns shall not be excavated without prior consultation with the
Architect.
E.
The Contractor shall erect barricades around excavations, for safety, and shall place an adequate
number of amber lights on or near the work and shall keep them burning from dusk to dawn. The
Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage that any parties may sustain in consequence of
neglecting the necessary precautions in prosecuting the work.
F.
Slope sides of excavations to comply with local, state and federal codes and ordinances. Shore and
brace as required for stability of excavation.
G.
Shoring and Bracing: Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local,
state and federal codes and authorities. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of
time period excavations will be open.
1.
Remove shoring and bracing when no longer required. Where sheeting is allowed to remain, cut
top of sheeting at an elevation of 30 inches below finished grade elevation.
H.
Install sediment and erosion control measures in accordance with local codes and ordinances.
I.
Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations
and from flooding project site and surrounding area.
1.
2.
J.
Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of

bearing materials. Provide and maintain dewatering system components necessary to convey
water away from excavations.
Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits
to convey surface water to collecting or run-off areas. Do not use trench excavations as
temporary drainage ditches. In no case shall sewers be used as drains for such water.
Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill
or fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.

Duluth, GA

15010-8
1550000803
01/05/10
1.
2.
K.
Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical Structures: Conform to elevations and
dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot; plus a sufficient distance to permit
placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for
inspection.
1.
2.
L.
Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip-line of
trees indicated to remain.
Remove and legally dispose of excess excavated materials and materials not acceptable for use
as backfill or fill.
Excavate, by hand, areas within drip-line of large trees. Protect the root system from damage
and dry-out. Maintain moist conditions for root system and cover exposed roots with burlap.
Paint root cuts of 1 inch in diameter and larger with emulsified asphalt tree paint.
Take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before
concrete reinforcement is placed.
Trenching: Excavate trenches for mechanical installations as follows:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Excavate trenches to the uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a
minimum of 6 to 9 inches clearance on both sides of pipe and equipment.
Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required for piping to establish indicated slope and
invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to an elevation below frost line.
Limit the length of open trench to that in which pipe can be installed, tested, and the trench
backfilled within the same day.
Where rock is encountered, carry excavation below required elevation and backfill with a layer
of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe. Provide a minimum of 6 inches of stone
or gravel cushion between rock bearing surface and pipe.
Excavate trenches for piping and equipment with bottoms of trench to accurate elevations for
support of pipe and equipment on undisturbed soil.
a.
For pipes or equipment 6 inches or larger in nominal size, shape bottom of trench to fit
bottom 1/4 of the circumference. Fill unevenness with tamped sand backfill. At each pipe
joint over-excavate to relieve the bell or pipe joint of the pipe of loads, and to ensure
continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the bearing surface.
M.
Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric
temperature is less than 35F.
N.
Backfilling and Filling: Place soil materials in layers to required subgrade elevations for each area
classification listed below, using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
O.
Under walks and pavements, use a combination of subbase materials and excavated or
borrowed materials.
Under building slabs, use drainage fill materials.
Under piping and equipment, use subbase materials where required over rock bearing surface
and for correction of unauthorized excavation.
For piping less than 30 inches below surface of roadways, provide 4-inch-thick concrete base
slab support.
After installation and testing of piping, provide a 4-inch thick concrete
encasement (sides and top) prior to backfilling and placement of roadway subbase.
Other areas, use excavated or borrowed materials.
Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Inspection, testing, approval, and locations of underground utilities have been recorded.
Removal of concrete formwork.
Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids.
Removal of trash and debris.
P.
Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers of not more than 8 inches in
loose depth for material compacted by heavy equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth
for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
Q.
Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content.
Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each
area classification specified below. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy,
frozen, or contain frost or ice.
R.
Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, and equipment to required
elevations. Prevent displacement of piping and equipment by carrying material uniformly around
them to approximately same elevation in each lift.
S.
Compaction: Control soil compaction during construction, providing minimum percentage of density

Duluth, GA

15010-9
1550000803
01/05/10
specified for each area classification indicated below.

1.
2.
T.
Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following
percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture-density
relationship (cohesive soils), determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557 and not less than
the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for
soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship (cohesionless soils).
a.
Areas Under Structures, Building Slabs and Steps, Pavements: Compact top 12 inches of
subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum density for
cohesive material, or 95 percent relative density for cohesionless material.
b. Areas Under Walkways: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill
material to 90 percent maximum density for cohesive material, or 95 percent relative
density for cohesionless material.
c.
Other Areas: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to
85 percent maximum density for cohesive soils, and 90 percent relative density for
cohesionless soils.
Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before
compaction, uniformly apply water. Apply water in minimum quantity necessary to achieve
required moisture content and to prevent water appearing on surface during, or subsequent to,
compaction operations.
Subsidence: Where subsidence occurs at mechanical installation excavations during the period 12
months after Substantial Completion, remove surface treatment (i.e., pavement, lawn, or other
finish), add backfill material, compact to specified conditions, and replace surface treatment.
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent areas.
3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A.
The Contractor shall do necessary cutting of walls, floors, ceilings and roofs.
B.
No structural member shall be cut without permission from Architect.
C.
Patch around openings to match adjacent construction.
D.
After the final waterproofing membrane has been installed, roofs may be cut only with written
permission by the Architect.
3.6 CLEANING
A.
Dirt and refuse resulting from the performance of the work shall be removed from the premises as
required to prevent accumulation. The Mechanical Contractor shall cooperate in maintaining
reasonably clean premises at all times.
B.
Immediately prior to the final inspection, the Mechanical Contractor shall clean material and
equipment installed under the Mechanical Contract. Dirt, dust, plaster, stains, and foreign matter
shall be removed from surfaces including components internal to equipment. Damaged finishes shall
be touched-up and restored to their original condition.
3.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION REVIEW

A.
Prior to requesting inspection for "CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION", the Contractor

shall complete the following items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Submit complete Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

Submit complete Record Drawings.
Perform special inspections. Refer to Table 4 at the end of this section for a list of specification
sections in Division 15 that contain special inspection requirements.
Start-up testing of systems.
Removal of temporary facilities from the site.
Comply with requirements for Substantial Completion in the "General Conditions".
B.
The Contractor shall request in writing a review for Substantial Completion. The Contractor shall
give the Architect/Engineer at least seven (7) days notice prior to the review.
C.
The Contractor's written request shall state that the Contractor has complied with the requirements
for Substantial Completion.
D.
Upon receipt of a request for review, the Architect/Engineer will either proceed with the review or
advise the Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
E.
If the Contractor requests a site visit for Substantial Completion review prior to completing the above
mentioned items, He shall reimburse the Architect/Engineer for time and expenses incurred for the
visit.
F.
Upon completion of the review, the Architect/Engineer will prepare a "final list" of outstanding items

Duluth, GA

15010-10
1550000803
01/05/10
to be completed or corrected for final acceptance.

G.
Omissions on the "final list" shall not relieve the Contractor from the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
H.
Prior to requesting a final review, the Contractor shall submit a copy of the final list of items to be
completed or corrected. He shall state in writing that each item has been completed, resolved for
acceptance or the reason it has not been completed.

Duluth, GA

15010-11
1550000803
01/05/10
TABLE 1: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

SPECIFICATION NUMBER/TITLE
CODE DESIGNATION
15010
15030
15050
15055
15100
15135
15140
15170
15190
15200
15250
15400
15411
15412
15420
15440
15453
15460
15488
15782
15834
15850
15885
15891
15910
15932
15971
15990
17010
NONE
NONE
A, B, H, O
B, H
B
B, I
B, F, H, I
B
B, M, O
A, B, C, F, J
B, M
A, B, C, D, J, O
B, H, I
B, H, I
B
B, E
A, B, C, E
B, C, E, F, I, L
A, B, C, D, F, H
A, B, C, E, F, L, R
A, B, C, D, E, F, J, L, M, R
A, B, C, E, F, I, N
A, B, C, E, F, M, R
A, B, D, H
A, B, F, R,
A, B, C, F, N, O, R,
A, B, C, E, F, G, M, R,
I, K, M, S
A, B, C, E, F, M, R
General Mechanical Requirements

Electrical Coordination for Mechanical Equipment
Basic Mechanical Materials And Methods
Basic Piping Materials And Methods
Valves
Meters And Gauges
Supports And Anchors
Motors
Mechanical Identification
Mechanical Vibration Isolation
Mechanical Insulation
Seismic Protection For Mechanical And Electrical Equipment
Water Distribution Systems
Mechanically Joined Plumbing Piping Systems
Drainage And Vent Systems
Plumbing Fixtures
Plumbing Pumps
Water Heaters
Natural Gas Systems
Rooftop Heating And Cooling Units
Air Curtains
Fans
Air Cleaning
Metal Ductwork
Ductwork Accessories
Air Outlets And Inlets
Electric Control Systems
Testing, Adjusting And Balancing
Digital Control Equipment
CODED LEGEND
A
B
C
D
E
F
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Performance Data, Capacities, Curves and Certificates
Coordination Drawings
Wiring Diagrams
Installation Instructions
Welders Certificates
Certificates
Calculations
Test Reports
Special Warranties
Material Samples
Color Samples
Schedules
Equipment List
Material List
Recommended Spare Parts List

Duluth, GA

15010-12
1550000803
01/05/10
TABLE 2: SPARE PARTS REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

Section Number
15190
15411
15440
15453
15488
15782
15834
15850
15885
15910
15932
Received/Date/Initial
Plumbing Fixtures
Plumbing Pumps
Natural Gas Systems
Rooftop Heating and Cooling Units
Air Curtains
Fans
Air Cleaning
Air Outlets and Inlets
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________________________
Owners Signature

Duluth, GA

15010-13
1550000803
01/05/10
TABLE 3: SPECIAL WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

Section Number
15460
15782
15834
17010
Received/Date/Initial
Water Heaters
Rooftop Heating and Cooling Units
Air Curtains

Duluth, GA
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________

15010-14
1550000803
01/05/10
TABLE 4: SPECIAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

Section Number
15200
15400
Completed/Date/Initial

____________________
Seismic Protection for Mechanical & Electrical Equipment ____________________

Duluth, GA

15010-15
1550000803
01/05/10
TABLE 5: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

SPECIFICATION NUMBER/TITLE
CODE DESIGNATION
15050
15135
15140
15190
15200
15250
15400
15411
15412
15420
15440
15453
15460
15488
15782
15834
15850
15885
15891
15910
15932
15971
15990
17010
B
B, G, I
B
B
A, B, C
B
A, B, C
A, B, F, H, I
A, B, F, H, I
A, B, F
B, E, H, I
B, C, D, E, G, H, I
B, C, D, E, G, H, I
A, B, C, H
B, C, D, E, G, H, I
B, C, D, G, H, I
B, C, D, G, I
B, C, D, G, H, I
A, B
B, H
C, H
A, B, C, D, E, G, H, I
F
A, B, D, E, G, H, I
Basic Mechanical Materials And Methods (Fabrications)

Meters And Gauges
Supports And Anchors
Mechanical Insulation (Material Lists)
Seismic Protection For Mechanical And Electrical Equipment
Mechanically Joined Plumbing Piping Systems
Drainage and Vent Systems
Plumbing Fixtures (Valves)
Plumbing Pumps
Water Heaters
Natural Gas Systems (Meters and Specialty Valves)
Rooftop Heating And Cooling Units
Air Curtains
Fans
Air Cleaning
Metal Ductwork
Air Outlets And Inlets
Electric Control Systems
Testing, Adjusting And Balancing
CODED LEGEND
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
As-Built Drawings
Product Data
Performance Data, Capacities, Curves and Certificates
Wiring Diagrams
Operating Instructions
Test Reports
Warranties
Recommended Spare Parts List
Service and Maintenance Instructions

Duluth, GA

15010-16
1550000803
01/05/10
AGREEMENT FOR TRANSFER OF INFORMATION

MACHINE-READABLE FORMAT
PROJECT NAME: _____________________________________________________________________________________
PROJECT NO/PHASE: __________________________
Made this day, ______________________________________
By and Between Henderson Engineers, Inc., Lenexa, Kansas (hereinafter referred to as ENGINEER) and
_________________________________________________________________(hereinafter referred to as RECIPIENT).
The enclosed electronic media are provided pursuant to your request for the purpose of production of
shop drawings or record drawings. In using it, modifying it, or accessing information from it, you are
responsible for confirmation, accuracy, and checking of the data from the media. ENGINEER hereby disclaims
any and all responsibility from any results obtained in use of this electronic media and does not guarantee any
accuracy of the information.
RECIPIENT agrees that it shall not use the information provided by ENGINEER for any purpose other
than that described above without the express written consent of ENGINEER. RECIPIENT also hereby
acknowledges that the data delivered by ENGINEER is for use by RECIPIENT only, and is not to be released to
any other party without the written consent of the ENGINEER and does not transfer ownership of the
instruments of professional service.
RECIPIENT understands that the automated conversion of information and data from the system and
format used by ENGINEER to an alternate system or format cannot be accomplished without the possibility of
introduction of inexactitudes, anomalies, and errors. In the event project documentation provided to RECIPIENT
in machine readable form is so converted, RECIPIENT agrees to assume all risk associated therewith, and to the
fullest extent permitted by law, to hold harmless and indemnify ENGINEER from and against all claims,
liabilities, losses, damages, and costs, including but not limited to attorneys fees, arising therefrom or in
connection therewith.
RECIPIENT recognizes that changes or modifications to ENGINEERS instruments of professional
service introduced by anyone other than ENGINEER may result in adverse consequences that ENGINEER can
neither predict nor control. Therefore, and in consideration of ENGINEERS agreement to deliver its instruments
of professional service in machine readable format, RECIPIENT agrees, to the fullest extent permitted by law to
hold harmless and indemnify ENGINEER from and against all claim, liabilities, losses, damages, and costs,
including misuse or reuse by others of the machine readable information and data provided by ENGINEER under
this Agreement. The foregoing indemnification applies, without limitation, to any use of the project
documentation on another project, for additions to this project, or for completion of this project by others;
ENGINEER may authorize excepting only such use in writing.
Send a check for shipping and handling costs in the amount of $200 for an electronic drawing set up
to 12 sheets plus $15 per sheet in excess of 12 sheets payable to Henderson Engineers, Inc. along with
completed and signed agreement and Architects written authorization to receive electronic media. Be sure to
indicate below the desired shipping method, format type and media type.
Sheet numbers requested:________________________________________________________________________________
1-12 sheets @ $200 + ___________ sheet(s) @ $15 each = $________total due to Henderson Engineers, Inc.
Signature
Signature
RECIPIENT
Date
Date
Shipping Method
E-Mail
First Class Mail
FedEx Overnight (No P.O.Boxes)
Shipping or E-Mail Address:

Duluth, GA
Format
AutoCAD 2000/2002
AutoCAD 2004/2005
DXF
Media
CD-ROM
DVD
Phone:

15010-17
1550000803
01/05/10
SECTION 15030
ELECTRICAL COORDINATION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components which are an integral part of
packaged mechanical equipment. These components include, but are not limited to factory furnished
motors, starters, and disconnect switches furnished as an integral part of packaged mechanical
equipment.
B.
Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for mechanical
equipment are scheduled on the Drawings.
C.
System shall be complete and operational with power and control wiring provided to meet the design
intent shown on the drawings and specified within the specification sections.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.
No separate submittal is required. Submit product data for motors, starters, and other electrical
components with submittal data required for the equipment for which it serves, as required by the
individual equipment specification Sections.

A.
Electrical components and materials shall be UL labeled.
B.
All electrical equipment provided and the wiring and installation of electrical equipment shall be in
accordance with the requirements of this Section and Division 16.

2.1 GENERAL
A.
The Contractors shall provide all motors, starters, disconnects, wire, conduit, etc. as specified in the
Construction Documents. If, however, the Mechanical Contractor furnishes a piece of equipment
requiring a different motor, starter, disconnect, wire size, etc. than what is shown and/or intended
on the Construction Documents, the Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate the requirements with
any other Contractor and shall be responsible for any additional cost incurred by any other
Contractor that is associated with installing the different equipment and related accessories for
proper working condition.
B.
Refer to Division 16, "BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS" for specification of motor
connections
C.
Refer to Division 16, "POWER DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT (600 V)" for specification of disconnect
switches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, all motors, equipment, controls, etc. shall be furnished, set in place and
wired in accordance with Table 1. Any items not listed but shown on the drawings shall be
considered part of the Contract Documents and brought to the attention of the Architect.
B.
The General Contractor is the central authority governing the total responsibility of all trade
contractors. Therefore, deviations and clarifications of this schedule are permitted provided the
General Contractor assumes responsibility to coordinate the trade contractors different than as
indicated herein. If deviations or clarifications to this schedule are implemented, submit a record
copy to the Engineer.
Sprouts Famers Market ELECTRICAL COORDINATION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

Duluth, GA
15030-1
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
TABLE 1: ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

ITEM
FURN
BY
MC
SET
BY
MC
POWER
WIRING
EC
CONTROL
WIRING
---
Motor control centers
EC
EC
EC
RC
Factory furnished motor starters,
MC
MC
EC
RC
EC
EC
EC
RC
Manual operating multi-speed switches
MC
EC
EC
RC
Control relays and transformers
RC
RC
EC
RC
Thermostats (low voltage)
MF/PW
RC
---
RC
Thermostats (line voltage)
MC
MC
EC
---
Time switches (for mechanical equipment)
RC
RC
EC
RC
Temperature control panels
MC
TC
EC
RC
Motor and solenoid operated valves
MC
MC
RC
RC
Damper motors, PE & switches
RC
RC
RC
RC
Smoke dampers and combination
FC
MC
EC
FC
MF/FC
MC
EC
FC
Pushbutton stations and connections
MC
MC
EC
RC
Temporary heating connections
MC
MC
EC
MC
---
---
---
EC
Equipment motors
contactors and disconnects

Loose motor starters, disconnect
switches, thermal overloads and heaters.
fire/smoke dampers
Smoke detectors
Interlocks between kitchen exhaust hood(s)

and make-up air unit(s)
MC = Mechanical Contractor
MF = Manufacturer
RC = Refrigeration Contractor
PW = Powerwall Supplier
EC = Electrical Contractor
FC = Fire Alarm Contractor
Sprouts Famers Market ELECTRICAL COORDINATION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

Duluth, GA
15030-2
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
SECTION 15050
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes limited scope general construction materials and methods for application with
mechanical installations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Access panels and doors in walls, ceilings, and floors for access to mechanical materials and
equipment.
Mechanical equipment nameplate data.
Concrete for bases and housekeeping pads.
Non-shrink grout for equipment installations.
Sleeves for mechanical penetrations.
Miscellaneous metals for support of mechanical materials and equipment.
Wood grounds, nailers, blocking, fasteners, and anchorage for support of mechanical materials
and equipment.
Joint sealers for sealing around mechanical materials and equipment.
Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
Division 7 Section Penetration Firestopping for material and methods for firestopping systems.
Division 15 Section "Basic Piping Materials and Methods," for materials and methods for
mechanical sleeve seals.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with Division 1 and Division 15 Section General
Mechanical Requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Product data for the following products:

a.
Access panels and doors.
b. Joint sealers.
c.
Through and membrane penetration firestopping systems.
d. Plenum insulation.
Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal fabrications, and wood supports
and anchorage for mechanical materials and equipment.
Welder certificates, signed by Contractor, certifying that welders comply with requirements
specified under "Quality Assurance" article of this Section.
Through and Membrane Penetration Firestopping Systems Product Schedule: Provide UL listing,
location, wall or floor rating and installation drawing for each penetration fire stop system.
a.
Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting
agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration,
with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fireprotection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated
assembly.
Schedules indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective demolition
prior to commencement of Work. Include coordination for shut-off of utility services and details
for dust and noise control.
a.
Coordinate sequencing with construction phasing and Owner occupancy specified in
Division 1 Section "Summary of Work."

A.
Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding
Code - Steel."
1.
B.
Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where a fire-resistance classification is indicated, provide access door

assembly with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in the UL "Building
Materials Directory" for rating shown.
1.
Provide UL Label on each fire-rated access door.

Duluth, GA

15050-1
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
C.
Through and Membrane Penetration Firestopping Systems Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced
in installing penetration firestopping systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated
for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance.
Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's
products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping
system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer
qualification on buyer.

2.1 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT
A.
All control devices, specialties, valves, dampers, etc. shall be located so as to provide easy access
for operation, service inspection and maintenance.
B.
Access Doors:
1.
Provide access doors for all concealed equipment, except where above lay-in ceilings. Refer to
Section Mechanical Identification for labeling of access doors.
2. Access doors shall be adequately sized for the devices served with a minimum size of 18" x
18", furnished by the respective Contractor or Subcontractor and installed by the General
Contractor.
3. Access doors must be of the proper construction for type of construction where installed.
4. The exact location of all access doors shall be verified with the Architect prior to installation.
5. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Factory-fabricated and assembled units, complete with
attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation. Joints and seams shall be continuously
welded steel, with welds ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
6. Frames: 16-gauge steel, with a 1-inch-wide exposed perimeter flange for units installed in unit
masonry, pre-cast, or cast-in-place concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling.
a.
For installation in masonry, concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling: 1 inch-wide-exposed
perimeter flange and adjustable metal masonry anchors.
b. For gypsum wallboard or plaster: perforated flanges with wallboard bead.
c.
For full-bed plaster applications: galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead,
welded to perimeter of frame.
7. Flush Panel Doors: 14-gauge sheet steel, with concealed spring hinges or concealed continuous
piano hinge set to open 175 degrees; factory-applied prime paint.
a.
Fire-Rated Units: Insulated flush panel doors, with continuous piano hinge and self-closing
mechanism.
8. Locking Devices: Flush, screwdriver-operated cam locks.
9. Locking Devices: Where indicated on the drawings or where access panels are installed in
locations accessible to the public, provide 5-pin or 5-disc type cylinder locks, individually keyed;
provide 2 keys.
10. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Arrow United Industries.
b. Bar-Co., Inc.
c.
J.L Industries.
d. Karp Associates, Inc.
e.
Milcor Div. Inryco, Inc.
f.
Nystrom Building Products
g. Wade
h. Zurn
2.2 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA
A.
For each piece of power operated mechanical equipment, provide a permanent operational data
nameplate indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating
and power characteristics, labels of tested compliance's, and similar essential data. Locate
nameplates in an accessible location.
2.3 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT BASES/HOUSEKEEPING PADS

A.
Provide concrete equipment bases and housekeeping pads for various pieces of floor mounted
mechanical equipment. Concrete equipment bases/housekeeping pads shall generally conform to the

Duluth, GA

15050-2
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
shape of the piece of equipment it serves with a minimum 4" margin around the equipment and
supports.
B.
Form concrete equipment bases and housekeeping pads using framing lumber or steel channel with
form release agent. Chamfer top edges and corners. Trowel tops and sides of each base/pad to a
smooth finish, equal to that of the floors.
C.
Concrete equipment bases and housekeeping pads shall be made of a minimum 28 day, 4000 psi
concrete conforming to American Concrete Institute Standard Building Code for Reinforced Concrete
(ACI 318-99) and the latest applicable recommendations of the ACI standard practice manual.
Concrete shall be composed of cement conforming to ASTM C 150 Type I, aggregate conforming to
ASTM C33, and potable water. All exposed exterior concrete shall contain 5 to 7 percent air
entrainment.
D.
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the structural drawings, reinforce equipment bases and
housekeeping pads with No. 4 reinforcing bars conforming to ASTM A 615 or 6x6 W2.9 x W2.9
welded wire mesh conforming to ASTM A185. Reinforcing bars shall be placed 24 on center with a
minimum of two bars each direction.
E.
Provide galvanized anchor bolts for all equipment placed on concrete equipment bases and
housekeeping pads or on concrete slabs. Anchor bolts size, number and placement shall be as
recommended by the Manufacturer of the equipment.
F.
Concrete equipment bases and housekeeping pads shall have minimum heights in accordance with
the following table:
Equipment
Water Heaters
Minimum
Height
3-1/2
NOTES:
1. Height of equipment bases applies to equipment installed on slab-on-grade.
installed on floors above grade and/or roof, reference the drawings.
For equipment
2.4 GROUT
A.
Provide nonshrink, nonmetallic grout conforming to ASTM C 1107, Grade B, in premixed and
factory-packaged containers.
B.
Grout shall have post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous,

hydraulic-cement characteristics and shall be as recommended by manufacturer for interior and
exterior applications.
C.
Grout shall have 5,000 psi, 28-day compressive strength design mix.
2.5 PENETRATIONS
A.
Sleeves:
1.
2.
B.
Steel Sleeves: Schedule 40 galvanized, welded steel pipe, ASTM A-53 grade A or 12 gauge
(0.1084 inches) welded galvanized steel formed to a true circle concentric to the pipe.
Sheet-Metal Sleeves: 10 gauge (0.1382 inches), galvanized steel, round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
Frames for rectangular openings attached to forms and of a maximum dimension established by the
Architect. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than
16 inches, provide 18 gauge (0.052 inches) welded galvanized steel. For sleeve cross-section
rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater
than, 16 inches, provide 10 gauge (0.1382 inches) welded galvanized steel. Notify the General
Contractor or Architect before installing any box openings not shown on the Architectural or
Structural Drawings..
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS METALS

A.
Steel plates, shapes, bars, and bar grating: ASTM A 36.
B.
Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500.

Duluth, GA

15050-3
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
C.
Hot-Rolled Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
D.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded.
E.
Fasteners: Zinc-coated, type, grade, and class as required.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A.
Framing Materials: Standard Grade, light-framing-size lumber of any species. Number 3 Common or
Standard Grade boards complying with WCLIB or AWPA rules, or Number 3 boards complying with
SPIB rules. Lumber shall be preservative treated in accordance with AWPB LP-2, and kiln dried to a
moisture content of not more than 19 percent.
B.
Construction Panels: Plywood panels; APA C-D PLUGGED INT, with exterior glue; thickness as
indicated, or if not indicated, not less that 15/32 inches.
2.8 JOINT SEALERS

A.
General: Joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and with
joint substrates under conditions of service and application.
B.
Colors: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
C.
Elastomeric Joint Sealers: Provide the following types:

1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
One-part, nonacid-curing, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for masonry, glass, aluminum, and other substrates
recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
a.
One-Part, Nonacid-Curing, Silicone Sealant:
1) "Dow Corning 790," Dow Corning Corp.
2) "Silglaze II SCS 2801," General Electric Co.
3) "Silpruf SCS 2000," General Electric Co.
4) "864," Pecora Corp.
5) "Rhodia 5C," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc.
6) "Spectrem 1," Tremco, Inc.
9) "Rhodia 7B," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc.
10) "Rhodia 7S," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc.
11) "Omniseal," Sonneborn Building Products Div..
One-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for glass, aluminum, and nonporous joint substrates;
formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates; and
subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes.
a.
One-Part, Mildew-Resistant, Silicone Sealant:
2) "Sanitary 1700," General Electric Co.
3) "898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant," Pecora Corp.
4) "OmniPlus," Sonneborn Building Products Div.
Acrylic-Emulsion Sealants: One-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable complying with ASTM C

834 recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations involving joint
movement of not more than plus or minus 5 percent.
1.

a.
"Chem-Calk 600," Bostik Construction Products Div.
b. "AC-20," Pecora Corp.
c.
"Sonolac," Sonneborn Building Products Div.
d. "Tremflex 834," Tremco, Inc.
e.
CP 506, Hilti, Inc.
f.
CP 572, spray application, Hilti, Inc.

Duluth, GA

15050-4
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS
A.
Set frames accurately in position and securely attached to supports, with face panels plumb and
level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.
B.
Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.
3.2 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
B.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code."
3.3 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A.
Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage accurately in location, alignment,
and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
B.
Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood members.
C.
Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.4 PREPARATION FOR JOINT SEALERS

A.
Surface Cleaning for Joint Sealers: Clean surfaces of joints immediately before applying joint sealers
to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturer.
B.
Apply joint sealer primer to substrates as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer. Protect
adjacent areas from spillage and migration of primers, using masking tape. Remove tape immediately
after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.5 APPLICATION OF JOINT SEALERS

A.
General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
1.
2.
B.
Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of elastomeric joint sealants.
Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 790 for use of acrylic-emulsion joint sealants.
Tooling: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool
sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and
adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do
not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant
manufacturer.
3.6 PENETRATIONS:
A.
New Construction:
1.
B.
Coordinate with Divisions 03 and 04 for installation of sleeves and sleeve seals integrally in
cast-in-place, precast, and masonry walls and horizontal slabs where indicated on the Drawings
or as required to support piping or ductwork penetrations.
Construction in Existing Facilities:

1.
Saw cut or core drill existing walls and slabs to install sleeves and sleeve seals in existing
facilities. Do not cut or drill any walls or slabs without first coordinating with, and receiving
approval from, the Architect, Owner, or both. Seal sleeves and sleeve seals into concrete walls
or slabs with a waterproof non-shrink grout acceptable to the Architect.
C.
Provide sleeves and/or box frames for openings in all concrete and masonry construction and fire or
smoke partitions, for all mechanical work that passes through such construction; Coordinate with
other trades and Divisions to dimension and lay out all such openings.
D.
The General Contractor will provide only those openings specifically indicated on the Architectural or
Structural Drawings as being provided under the General Contractor's work.
E.
The cutting of new or existing construction shall not be permitted except by written approval of the

Duluth, GA

15050-5
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
Architect.
F.
Floor sleeves shall be fitted with means for attachment to forms and shall be of length to extend at
least two inches above the floor level.
G.
All sleeves shall be of ample size to allow for movement of conduit, duct or pipe and insulation
through the sleeves without damage to the insulation.
H.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
I.
Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.
J.
Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry.
K.
Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for penetrations of gypsum board
assemblies.
L.
All openings sleeved through underground exterior walls shall be sealed with mechanical sleeve seals
as specified in Division 15 Section Basic Piping Materials and Methods.

Duluth, GA

15050-6
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
SECTION 15055
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies piping materials and installation methods common to more than one Section of
Division 23 and includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Joining materials.
Piping specialties.
Roof curbs for pipe penetrations.
Pipe freeze protection system.
Basic piping installation instructions.
1.
2.
Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods," for materials and methods for
sleeve materials.
Division 16 Sections Basic Materials and Methods and "Motor Controlling Equipment" for
power-supply wiring including field-installed disconnects and required electrical devices.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Division 1 and General Mechanical Requirements for administrative and procedural
requirements for submittals.
B.
Product Data: Submit product data on the following items:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Quality Control Submittals:

1.
D.
Escutcheons
Dielectric Unions and Fittings
Mechanical Sleeve Seals
Strainers
Pipe Roof Curbs
Flexible Connectors
Pipe Freeze Protection System
Submit welders' certificates specified in Quality Assurance below.
Submit certification that specialties and fittings for domestic water service comply with NSF 61
Annex G.

A.
Welder's Qualifications: All welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
B.
Welding procedures and testing shall comply with ANSI Standard B31.9 - Standard Code for Building
Services Piping, and The American Welding Society, Welding Handbook.
C.
Soldering and Brazing procedures shall conform to ANSI B9.1 Standard Safety Code for Mechanical
Refrigeration.
D.
Pipe freeze protection system shall be listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for purpose intended.
E.
Pipe specialties and fittings shall be manufactured in plants located in the United States.
F.
Comply with NSF 61 Annex G for wetted surfaces of specialties and fittings containing no more than
0.25% lead by weight compliance for valves for domestic water service.

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

Duluth, GA

15055-1
1550000803
TODAY
A.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide piping materials and specialties from one of the
following:
1.
Pipe Escutcheons:
a.
Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co.
b. Tubular Brass Plumbing Products, Zurn Industries, Inc.
2. Dielectric Waterway Fittings:
a.
Epco Sales, Inc.
b. Victaulic Company of America
3. Dielectric Unions and Fittings:
a.
Eclipse, Inc.; Rockford-Eclipse Div.
b. Capital Mfg. Co.
c.
Watts Industries Inc.; Water Products Div.
d. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
e.
Calpico, Inc.
f.
Central Plastics Co.
4. Strainers:
a.
American Wheatley
b. Armstrong Machine Works.
c.
Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
d. MEPCO
e.
Metraflex Co.
f.
Mueller Steam Specialties.
g. Nicholson Steam
h. RP&C Valve, Division of Conbraco Ind.
i.
Spirax Sarco.
j.
Victaulic Co. of America (provide grooved systems for low pressure applications only).
k.
Watts Regulator Co.
5. Mechanical Sleeve Seals:
a.
Thunderline/Link Seal
b. Calpico, Inc.
c.
Metraflex Co.
6. Pipe Roof Curbs
a.
Custom Curb, Inc.
b. Pate Company.
c.
Thycurb.
7. Metal Flexible Connectors:
a.
American Wheatley
b. U. S. Hose Corp.
c.
Hyspan
d. Mason Industries, Inc.
e.
Mercer Rubber Co.
f.
Metraflex Co.
g. Proco Products, Inc.
h. Resistoflex
i.
Tyler Pipe; Gustin-Bacon Div.
8. Rubber Flexible Connectors:
a.
American Wheatley
b. General Rubber Corp.
c.
Mason Industries, Inc.
d. Mercer Rubber Co.
e.
Metraflex Co.
f.
Proco Products, Inc.
g. Uniflex, Inc.
9. Pipe Freeze Protection System
a.
Chromalox
b. Delta Therm Corporation
c.
Nextron
d. Nelson Heat Tracing System
e.
Tyco Thermal Controls/Raychem
10. Wall Pipes
Duluth, GA

15055-2
1550000803
TODAY
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Josam Mfg. Co.

Smith (Jay R) Mfg. Co.
Tyler Pipe/Wade Div.; Subs. of Tyler Corp.
Watts Industries, Inc.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.
2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A.
Refer to the individual piping system specification sections in Division 15 for specifications on piping
and fittings relative to that particular system.
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A.
Refer to individual Division 15 Piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B.
Welding Materials: AWS D10.12; Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being
welded.
C.
Brazing Materials: AWS A5.8; Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code for brazing filler metal materials appropriate for the materials being joined.
D.
Soldering Materials:
ASTM B32; Refer to individual piping system specifications for solder
appropriate for each respective system.
E.
Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ASME B16.21; Gasket material shall be full-faced for cast-iron flanges
and raised-face for steel flanges. Select materials to suit the service of the piping system in which
installed and which conform to their respective ANSI Standard (A21.11, B16.20, or B16.21).
Provide materials that will not be detrimentally affected by the chemical and thermal conditions of
the fluid being carried.
2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A.
Escutcheons: Chrome-plated, stamped steel, hinged, split-ring escutcheon, with set screw. Inside
diameter shall closely fit pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated.
Outside diameter shall completely cover the opening in floors, walls, or ceilings.
B.
Unions: Malleable-iron, Class 150 for low pressure service and class 250 for high pressure service;
hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joints, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces; female threaded
ends.
C.
Dielectric Unions and Fittings: Provide factory-fabricated dielectric unions and fittings with
appropriate end connections for the pipe materials in which installed (screwed, soldered, or flanged),
which effectively isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion.
D.
Dielectric Waterway Fittings: Provide electroplated steel or brass nipple, with an inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining. with appropriate end connections for the pipe materials in which
installed (screwed, soldered, or flanged), which effectively isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic
action, and stop corrosion.
E.
Y-Type Strainers: Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping
system materials. For water applications, screens shall be Type 304 stainless steel, 1/16
perforations for 4 and smaller. For strainers upstream of automatic flow control valves, screen
openings shall be 20 mesh. For steam applications, screens shall be Type 304 stainless steel,
0.045 perforations for 10 and smaller and 1/16 perforations for larger than 10.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
For low pressure applications, cast iron strainers shall have 125 psi working pressure rating and
cast bronze and carbon steel strainers shall have 150 psi working pressure rating.
Soldered Ends, 2 and Smaller For Domestic Water Applications: Cast bronze body, screwed
screen retainer with centered blowdown fitted with pipe plug.
Threaded Ends, 2" and Smaller: Cast-iron body, screwed screen retainer with centered
blowdown fitted with pipe plug.
Threaded Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer with off-center
Flanged Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer with off-center

Duluth, GA

15055-3
1550000803
TODAY
F.
Sleeves:
1.
G.
Pipe Roof Curbs: Provide factory-fabricated, pipe roof curbs with the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
H.
Sleeve: Refer to Division 15 Section Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods for sleeve
materials.
Factory installed treated wood nailer.
Welded, 18 gauge galvanized steel shell, base plate and flashing.
1-1/2 thick, 3 pound rigid insulation.
Fully mitered 3-inch raised cant.
Cover of weather-resistant, weather-proof material.
Pipe collar of weather-resistant material with stainless steel pipe clamps.
Flexible Connectors: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide flexible
pipe connections.
1.
Bronze-Hose, Flexible Connectors (Domestic Water Systems): Corrugated, bronze, inner tubing
covered with bronze wire braid. Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze welded
to hose.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes, and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris for both inside and outside of piping and fittings before
assembly.
3.2 INSTALLATIONS
A.
General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the
general location and arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping layout
take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design
considerations.
So far as practical, install piping as indicated. Refer to individual system
specifications for requirements for coordination drawing submittals.
B.
Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or
floors, unless indicated otherwise.
C.
Install piping free of sags and bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper
insulation applications.
D.
Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted,
unless expressly indicated on the Drawings.
E.
Install horizontal piping as high as possible allowing for specified slope and coordination with other
components. Install vertical piping tight to columns or walls. Provide space to permit insulation
applications, with 1" clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable
ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.
F.
Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and servicing
of valves.
G.
Support piping from structure. Do not support piping from ceilings, equipment, ductwork, conduit
and other non-structural elements.
H.
Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4" ball
valve, and short 3/4" threaded nipple and cap.
I.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing in.
3.3 PIPING PROTECTION

A.
Protect piping during construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and debris, and to prevent
damage from traffic and construction work.
B.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops.
3.4 PENETRATIONS

Duluth, GA

15055-4
1550000803
TODAY
A.
Mechanical penetrations occur when piping or ductwork penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or
masonry walls, or fire / smoke rated floor and wall assemblies.
B.
Above Grade Concrete or Masonry Penetrations

1.
2.
3.
C.
Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves. Size sleeves to
allow for 1-inch (or larger, if required by the mechanical sleeve manufacturer) annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve. Provide mechanical sleeve seal.
1.
2.
D.
Provide sleeves for pipes passing through above grade concrete or masonry walls, concrete
floor or roof slabs. Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes in existing masonry walls,
concrete floors or roofs. Provide sleeves as follows:
a.
Provide schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
b. Provide galvanized sheet metal for sleeves 6 inches in diameter and larger, thickness shall
be 10 gauge (0.1382 inches).
c.
Provide welded galvanized sheet metal for rectangular sleeves with the following minimum
metal thickness:
1) For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater
than 16 inches, thickness shall be 18 gauge (0.052 inches).
2) For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and
1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 10 gauge
(0.1382 inches).
d. Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves are acceptable for use in areas without return air plenums.
Extend pipe insulation for insulated pipe through floor, wall and roof penetrations, including fire
rated walls and floors. The vapor barrier shall be maintained. Size sleeve for a minimum of 1
annular clear space between inside of sleeve and outside of insulation.
Seal elevated floor, exterior wall and roof penetrations watertight and weathertight with nonshrink, non-hardening commercial sealant. Pack with mineral wool and seal both ends with
minimum of of sealant.
Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pipe material and
size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular
space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing
elements to expand and make watertight seal.
Inspect installed sleeve and sleeve-seal installations for damage and faulty work. Verify
watertight integrity of sleeves and seals installed below grade to seal against hydrostatic
pressure.
Elevated Floor Penetrations of Waterproof Membrane:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Provide cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves, extend top of wall pipe minimum 1 above finish floor.
Size wall pipe for minimum annular space between pipe and wall pipe.
Extend pipe insulation for insulated pipe through wall pipe. The vapor barrier shall be
maintained. Size wall pipe for a minimum of 1 annular clear space between inside of sleeve
and outside of insulation.
Pack with mineral wool and seal both ends with minimum of of waterproof sealant. Refer
to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
Secure waterproof membrane flashing between clamping flange and clamping ring. Comply
with requirements for flashing specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
Extend bottom of wall pipe below floor slab as required and secure underdeck clamp to hold
wall pipe rigidly in place.
E.
Interior Foundation Penetrations: Provide sleeves for horizontal pipe passing through or under
foundation. Sleeves shall be cast iron soil pipe two nominal pipe sizes larger than the pipe served.
F.
Concrete Slab on Grade Penetrations:

1.
2.
G.
Provide schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves for vertical pressure pipe passing through concrete slab
on grade. Sleeves shall be one nominal pipe size larger than the pipe served and two pipe sizes
larger than pipe served for ductile iron pipes with restraining rods. Seal water-tight with
silicone caulk.
Provide thick cellular foam insulation around perimeter of non-pressure pipe passing thru
concrete slab on grade. Insulation shall extend to 2 above and below the concrete slab.
Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls: Seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or duct,
using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Pack with mineral wool and seal
both ends with minimum of of sealant. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for

Duluth, GA

15055-5
1550000803
TODAY
materials and installation.

1.
H.
Extend pipe insulation for insulated pipe through sleeve. The vapor barrier shall be maintained.
Size sleeve for a minimum of 1 annular clear space between inside of sleeve and outside of
insulation.
Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or duct, using joint sealant
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Pack with mineral wool and seal both ends with
minimum of of waterproof sealant. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials
and installation.
1.
Extend pipe insulation for insulated pipe through sleeve. The vapor barrier shall be maintained.
Size sleeve for a minimum of 1 annular clear space between inside of sleeve and outside of
insulation.
I.
Fire / Smoke Rated Floor and Wall Assemblies: Seal around penetrations of fire rated assemblies to
maintain fire resistance rating of fire-rated assemblies. Coordinate fire ratings and locations with the
architectural drawings. Install sealants in compliance with the manufacturers UL listing. Refer to
Division 7 Section Penetrations Firestopping for firestoppings and materials.
J.
Acoustical Barrier Penetrations: Where a pipe passes through a wall, ceiling or floor slab of a noise
critical space, a steel sleeve shall be cast or grouted into the structure. Refer to Section Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods for noise critical spaces. The internal diameter of the sleeve
shall be a minimum of 2 inches larger than the external diameter of the pipe. After the piping is
installed, the Contractor shall check the clearance and correct it to within 1/2-inch. Contractor shall
pack the void full depth with glass/mineral fiber insulation and seal at both ends, 1-inch deep, with
sealant backed by foam rod.
1.
Penetration of sound isolating ceilings by sprinkler pipes and heads shall be sleeved and sealed
and shall have no rigid connections between them.
3.5 FITTINGS AND SPECIALTIES

A.
Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.
B.
Remake leaking joints using new materials.
C.
Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
D.
Install strainers on the supply side of each automatic flow control valve, pressure reducing or
regulating valve, solenoid valve, mixing valve, backflow preventer and elsewhere as indicated.
E.
Install unions adjacent to each valve, and at the final connection to each piece of equipment and
plumbing fixture having 2" and smaller connections, and elsewhere as indicated.
F.
Install Flanges in piping 2-1/2" and larger, where indicated, adjacent to each valve, and at the final
connection to each piece of equipment.
G.
Install dielectric unions to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in dry piping systems (gas,
compressed air, vacuum).
H.
Install dielectric waterway fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in wet piping
systems (water, steam).
3.6 JOINTS
A.
Steel Pipe Joints:

1.
2.
Pipe 2" and Smaller: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads in accordance with ANSI B2.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore
full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint lubricant or sealant suitable for the service for which the
pipe is intended on the male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3
threads exposed.
Pipe Larger Than 2":
a.
Weld pipe joints (except for exterior water service pipe) in accordance with ASME Code
for Pressure Piping, B31.
b. Weld pipe joints of exterior water service pipe in accordance with AWWA C206.
c.
Install flanges on all valves, apparatus, and equipment. Weld pipe flanges to pipe ends in
accordance with ASME B31.9 Code for Building Services Piping. Clean flange faces and
install gaskets. Tighten bolts to torque specified by manufacturer of flange and flange

Duluth, GA

15055-6
1550000803
TODAY
bolts, to provide uniform compression of gaskets.

B.
Non-ferrous Pipe Joints:

1.
2.
3.
C.
Brazed And Soldered Joints: For copper tube and fitting joints, braze joints in accordance with
ANSI B31.9 - Standard Code for Building Services Piping and ANSI B9.1 - Standard Safety Code
for Mechanical Refrigeration.
Thoroughly clean tube surface and inside surface of the cup of the fittings, using very fine
emory cloth, prior to making soldered or brazed joints. Wipe tube and fittings clean and apply
flux. Flux shall not be used as the sole means for cleaning tube and fitting surfaces.
Mechanical Joints: Flared compression fittings may be used for refrigerant lines 3/4" and
smaller.
Joints for other piping materials are specified within the respective piping system Sections.
3.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A.
Provide flexible connectors for piping system connections on equipment side of shutoff valves for all
pumps, mechanical equipment supported or suspended by spring isolators, and where indicated on
Drawings.
B.
Install connectors according to manufacturers recommendations.
3.8 PIPE FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Testing: Refer to individual piping system specification sections.
B.
Inspection Report Form: Refer to the inspection report form at the end of this section for inspection
data to be completed for each piping system. Submit completed forms to the Owner and Engineer.

Duluth, GA

15055-7
1550000803
TODAY
MECHANICAL & PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS

INSPECTION REPORT FORM
Project Name:
Project No:
Contractor Project No.
General Contractor:
Inspection Date:
Temperature:
System Inspected
Building:
Location/Description:
Service:
Inspection Results
Time of Inspection:
Approval to Insulate:
Approval to backfill
Approval to Cover in Wall:
Signatures
Witness:
Representing:
Witness:
Representing: ______________________________
Witness:
Representing: ______________________________
Remarks
Contractor Supervisors signature:

Duluth, GA

15055-8
1550000803
TODAY
SECTION 15100
VALVES
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes general duty valves common to most mechanical piping systems.
1.
B.
Special purpose valves are specified in individual piping system specifications.
Contractors Option:
1.
The Division 15 contractor may provide mechanically joined pipe couplings, fittings, valves and
related mechanically joined piping components as an option in lieu of, in whole or in part,
copper sweat, welded, threaded or flanged piping methods. Mechanically joined piping
systems, where used, must be provided in compliance with specification Section 15511
Mechanically Joined Piping Systems and 15412 Mechanically Joined Plumbing Piping
Systems and shall be of one manufacturer.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
1.
B.
Product data, including body material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification,
end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and
required clearances, and installation instructions.
Submit certification that valves, fittings and specialties comply with NSF 61 Annex G.

A.
Single Source Responsibility: Provide products specified in this section from the same manufacturer
where products are available and conform to the specification requirements.
B.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Compliance:

building services piping and ASME B31.1 for power piping.
C.
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) Compliance:
Comply with the various MSS Standard Practices referenced.
D.
Valves shall be manufactured in plants located in the United States or certified that they comply with
applicable ANSI, ASTM and MSS standards.
E.
Comply with NSF 61 Annex G for wetted surfaces of valves containing no more than 0.25% lead by
weight compliance for valves for domestic water service. Submit certification that valves comply
with NSF 61 Annex G.
Comply with ASME B31.9 for

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturer:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the
manufacturers listed in valve schedule.
2.2 VALVE FEATURES, GENERAL

A.
Valve Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems.
1.
Nonrising stem valves may be used where headroom prevents full extension of rising stems.
B.
Pressure and Temperature Ratings:

temperatures.
C.
Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Operators: Provide the following special operator features:

1.
2.
3.
As scheduled and required to suit system pressures and
Handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter turn.
Lever handles, on quarter-turn valves 6-inch and smaller.
Chain-wheel operators, for valves 2-1/2-inch and larger, installed 72 inches or higher above

Duluth, GA
VALVES
15100-1
1550000803
05/25/2015
4.
finished floor elevation. Extend chains to an elevation of 5'-0" above finished floor elevation.
Gear drive operators, on quarter-turn valves 8-inch and larger.
E.
Extended Stems and/or Lever Handles: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended
stems and/or lever handles so that valve operator extends a minimum of 1/2 outside of the
insulation.
F.
Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.
G.
End Connections: As indicated in the valve specifications.

1.
2.
3.
Threads: Comply with ANSI B1.20.1.

Flanges: Comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron, ANSI B16.5 for steel, and ANSI B16.24 for
bronze valves.
Solder-Joint: Comply with ANSI B16.18.
a.
Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point
below 840 deg F for gate, globe, and check valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.
2.3 GATE VALVES

A.
Gate Valves, 2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-70; Class 125, 200-psi CWP, iron body, bronze
mounted, with body and bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B; with flanged ends, nonasbestos composition packing, and two-piece packing gland assembly.
2.4 BALL VALVES

A.
Ball Valves, 2-1/2 Inch to 3 Inch: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 600-psi CWP; 3-piece construction; with
bronze body conforming to ASTM B 584, conventional port, chrome-plated brass [or stainless steel]
ball, replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel
handle. Provide solder ends for condenser water, chilled water, and domestic hot and cold water
service;. Provide threaded ends for heating hot water and low-pressure steam service.
A.
Lead Free Ball Valves, 2 Inch and Smaller: Meeting NSF 61 Annex G and MSS SP-110, Class150,
600-psi CWP; two-piece construction; with bronze body conforming to ASTM B 584 alloy C89833
bismuth red brass, regular port, blowout-proof stem and chrome-plated brass ball conforming to
ASTM B 283 alloy C46400 naval brass, with replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, solder
ends and vinyl-covered steel handle.
2.5 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A.
Butterfly Valves, 2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-67; Class 125/150; 200-psi CWP for low and
medium pressure service, 250 psi for high pressure service; lug-type body constructed of ductile iron
conforming to ASTM A 536. Provide valves with resilient EPDM seat and stem seals, aluminum
bronze disc, and 416 stainless steel stem. Provide lever operators (10 position minimum), with locks
and stops for sizes 2-1/2 through 6 inches and gear operators with position indicator for sizes 8 inch
and larger. Valves must be rated for bi-directional dead end service at full pressure rating of valve
with no downstream flange required.
2.6 CHECK VALVES

A.
Swing Check Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi CWP, cast-bronze body
and cap conforming to ASTM B 62; with horizontal swing, Y-pattern, and bronze disc; and having
threaded or solder ends. Provide valves capable of being reground while the valve remains in the
line. Provide Class 150, 300-psi CWP, valves meeting the above specifications, with threaded end
connections, where system pressure requires or where Class 125 valves are not available.
B.
Lead Free Swing Check Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: Meeting NSF 61 Annex G and MSS SP-80;
Class 125, 200-psi CWP, body and cap of ASTM B 584 alloy C89833 bismuth red brass; with
horizontal swing, Y-pattern, disc and disc holder of ASTM B 283 alloy C46400 naval brass; solder
ends. Provide valves capable of being reground while the valve remains in the line.
C.
Wafer Check Valves: Class 125, cast-iron body; with replaceable bronze seat, and non-slam design
lapped and balanced twin bronze flappers and stainless steel trim and torsion spring. Provide valves
designed to open and close at approximately one foot differential pressure.
D.
Lift Check Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: Class 125; cast-bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM B
62; horizontal or angle pattern, lift-type valve, with stainless steel spring, bronze disc holder with
renewable "Teflon" disc, and threaded ends. Provide valves capable of being refitted and ground

Duluth, GA
VALVES
15100-2
1550000803
05/25/2015
while the valve remains in the line.

E.
Lead Free Lift Check Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: Meeting NSF 61 Annex G and MSS SP-80; Class
125, 300-psi CWP, body, disc holder and cap of ASTM B 584 alloy C89833 bismuth red brass;
horizontal or angle pattern, lift-type valve, with stainless steel spring, renewable "Teflon" disc and
solder ends. Provide valves capable of being refitted and ground while the valve remains in the line.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 VALVE ENDS SELECTION
A.
Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Copper Tube Size, 2-Inch and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends for heating
hot water and steam and high pressure service.
Copper Tube Size, 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: flanged end.
Steel Pipe Sizes, 2-Inch and Smaller: threaded end.
Steel Pipe Sizes 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: flanged end.
3.2 VALVE PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE CLASSIFICATION SCHEDULES

A.
B.
VALVES, 2-INCH AND SMALLER

SERVICE
GATE
GLOBE
BALL
CHECK
Domestic Hot and Cold Water

Heating Hot Water
125
150
125
150
150
150
125
150
SERVICE
GATE
GLOBE
BALL
BUTTERFLY
CHECK
Dom. Hot & Cold Water

Heating Hot Water
125
125
125
125
150
150
200
200
125
125
VALVES, 2-1/2-INCH AND LARGER
3.3 VALVE SCHEDULE

A.
A.
B.
Gate Valves - 2-1/2 Inch and Larger, Class 125:

MANUFACTURER
OS&Y RS
NRS
Crane
Hammond
Jenkins
Milwaukee
Nibco
Stockham
Powell
465-1/2
IR1140
453J
F2885A
F617-O
G-623
1793
461
IR1138
451J
F-2882A
F-619
G-612
1787
Lead Free Gate Valves - 2 Inch and Smaller, Class 125:
MANUFACTURER
SOLDER
NRS
Hammond
Milwaukee
NIBCO
UP-668
UP668
S-113-LF
Ball Valves 2 inch and smaller, Class 150:

Duluth, GA
VALVES
15100-3
1550000803
05/25/2015
F.
G.
A.
B.
MANUFACTURER
THREADED ENDS
SOLDER ENDS
(Apollo) Conbraco
Hammond
Milwaukee
Nibco
Watts
70-100
8501
BA-100
T-580-70-66
B-6000
70-200
8511
BA-100S
S-580-70-66
B-6001
Ball Valves - 2-1/2 Inch to 3 Inch, Class 150:

MANUFACTURER
THREADED ENDS
SOLDER ENDS
(Apollo) Conbraco
Hammond
Milwaukee
Nibco
82-100
8604
BA350
T-595-Y
82-200
8614
BA350S
S-595-Y
Ball Valves 3 Inch and smaller, minimum 1000CWP:

MANUFACTURER
THREADED ENDS
Conbraco (Apollo)
Hammond
Stockham
Milwaukee
83A-100
BA260 P
T-3951 P
BA260
Lead Free Ball Valves 2 inch and smaller, Class 150: Full Port
MANUFACTURER
SOLDER ENDS
Apollo-(Conbraco)
Hammond
Milwaukee
NIBCO
77C-LF-200
UP8311A
UPBA-150
S-685-80-LF
Butterfly Valves - 2-1/2 Inch and Larger:

1.
The following are model numbers for 200 PSI, lug style valves. Furnish operator and disc
material as specified in Part 2.
MANUFACTURER
Apollo
Crane Center Line
Keystone
Nibco
Stockham
Watts
Milwaukee
Hammond
A.
LD141 Series
200 Series
322 Series
LD-2000 Series
LD-712 & 722 Series
BF-03 Series
ML Series
6411 Series
Lead Free Swing Check Valves 2 inch and smaller, Class 125:
MANUFACTURER
SOLDER ENDS
Hammond
UP968

Duluth, GA
VALVES
15100-4
1550000803
05/25/2015
Milwaukee
NIBCO
B.
C.
Swing Check Valves - 2-1/2 Inch and Larger:

MANUFACTURER
CLASS 125
CLASS 175
CLASS 250
Crane
Hammond
Jenkins
Kennedy
Milwaukee
Nibco
Powell
Stockham
373
IR1124
587J
NA
F2974
F-918
559
G-931
NA
NA
NA
Fig. 126
NA
NA
NA
G-940
39E
IR322
339RJ
NA
NA
F-968
NA
F-947
Wafer Check Valves:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
UP1509
S-413-Y-LF
Bell & Gossett: NS.

Center Line: Series 800
Crane DuoChek II: G12HMP.
Metraflex: CVXX.
Nibco W-910.
Stockham: WG970.
Victaulic: Series 710/711
Milwaukee 8800
Lead Free Lift Check Valves 2 inch and smaller, Class 150:
MANUFACTURER
SOLDER ENDS
Hammond
Milwaukee
NIBCO
UP947
UP1548T
S-480-Y-LF
3.4 APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A.
General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe, ball, and butterfly
for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve applications and
arrangements. Select pressure class or rating to suit application.
B.
Domestic Water Systems: Use the following valve types:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system.
Gate Valves: Class 125, NSF 61 Annex G bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system.
Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi CWP, with stem extension.
Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi CWP, with stem extension, NSF 61 Annex G Class.
Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and bronze or teflon
disc.
6. Globe Valves: Class 125, NSF 61 Annex G bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and
bronze or teflon disc.
7. Butterfly Valves: Aluminum bronze disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
8. Bronze Swing Check: Class 125, with rubber seat.
9. Bronze Swing Check: NSF 61 Annex G Class 125, with rubber seat.
10. Check Valves: Class 125, swing or wafer type as indicated.
C.
Heating Water System: Use the following valve types:

1.
2.
Gate Valves: Class 150 or 200 bronze or Class 125 or 250 cast-iron body to suit piping
system.
Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi CWP or 1000-psi CWP, with stainless steel ball and stem

Duluth, GA
VALVES
15100-5
1550000803
05/25/2015
3.
4.
5.
6.
extension and memory stop.

Globe Valves: Class 150 or 200 bronze or Class 125 or 250 cast-iron body to suit piping
system.
Butterfly Valves: Aluminum bronze disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
Bronze Swing Check: Class 150 or 200, with composition seat.
Check Valves: Iron swing, wafer, or lift type, as indicated. Swing check shall be Class 150 or
250 with bronze seat ring.
3.5 VALVE INSTALLATIONS

A.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. Provide access doors
and fire rated access doors as required.
B.
Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment arranged to allow equipment removal
without system shutdown. Unions are not required on flanged devices.
C.
Install three-valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling-type valves.
D.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.
E.
Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
F.
Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:

1.
2.
3.
Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.

Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Tests: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and
balancing, inspect valves for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks; replace valves if leak
persists.
3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A.
Cleaning: Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and prepare valves
to receive finish painting or insulation.
B.
Inspect valves for leaks after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final
adjusting and balancing. Adjust or replace packing, as required, on valves with leaks. Replace valve
if leak persists.

Duluth, GA
VALVES
15100-6
1550000803
05/25/2015
SECTION 15135
METERS AND GAUGES
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following types of meters and gauges:

1.
2.
Temperature gauges and fittings.

Pressure gauges and fittings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.
General:
Submit the following in accordance with conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
1.
2.
3.
Product data for each type of gauge. Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance
curves, certified where indicated. Submit gauge schedule showing manufacturer's figure
number, scale range, location, and accessories for each meter and gauge.
Product certificates signed by manufacturers of gauges certifying accuracy under specified
operating conditions and products' compliance with specified requirements.
Maintenance data for each type of gauge for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manuals
specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section "General Mechanical Requirements."

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Glass Tube Industrial Thermometers:

a.
H. O. Trerice Co.
b. Marshalltown Instruments, Inc.
c.
Miljoco Corporation
d. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
e.
Weksler Instruments Corp.
f.
Winters Instruments
Thermometer Wells: Same as for thermometers.
Insertion Dial Thermometers:
a.
Ashcroft Dresser Industries Instrument Div.
b. H. O. Trerice Co.
c.
Miljoco Corporation
d. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Co., Inc.
e.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
f.
g. Winters Instruments
Pressure Gauges:
a.
Ametek, U.S. Gauge Div.
b. Ashcroft Dresser Industries Instrument Div.
c.
Ernst Gage Co.
d. H. O. Trerice Co.
e.
Marsh Instrument Co., Unit of General Signal.
f.
Marshalltown Instruments, Inc.
g. Miljoco Corporation
h. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
i.
j.
WIKA Instruments Corp.
k.
Winters Instruments
Pressure Gauge Accessories: Same as for pressure gauges.
Test Plugs:
a.
Flow Design, Inc.
b. MG Piping Products Co.
c.
Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.

Duluth, GA
METERS AND GAUGES

15135-1
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
d.
e.
Sisco, A Spedco, Inc. Co.

Watts Regulator Co.
2.2 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL

A.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to maximum of
1.5 percent of range span.
B.
Scale range: Temperature ranges for services listed as follows:

1.
2.
Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 240 deg with 2-degree scale divisions (0 to 115 deg C with 1degree scale divisions).
Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions (minus 18 to 38 deg C
with 1-degree scale divisions).
2.3 GLASS TUBE INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETERS

A.
Case: Die cast, aluminum finished, in baked epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured, 9 inches
long.
B.
Adjustable Joint: Finished to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree
adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
C.
Tube: Non-red color reading, non-toxic organic spirit-filled glass tube, magnifying lens.
D.
Scale: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum, with permanently etched markings.
E.
Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum or brass, for separable socket, length to suit installation.
2.4 THERMOMETER WELLS

A.
Thermometer Wells: Brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system design pressure;
with 2-inch extension for insulated piping and threaded cap nut with chain permanently fastened to
well and cap.
2.5 PRESSURE GAUGES

A.
Type: General use, ASME B40.1, Grade A, phosphor bronze bourdon-tube type, bottom connection.
B.
Case: Cast aluminum or stainless steel case, glass lens, 4-1/2-inches diameter.
C.
Connector: Brass, 1/4-inch NPS.
D.
Scale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings.
E.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span.
F.
Range: Conform to the following:

1.
2.
G.
Vacuum: 30 inches Hg to 15 psi.

All fluids: 2 times operating pressure.
Liquid-Filled: Provide liquid filled gauges where specified in Part 3 of this section.
2.6 PRESSURE GAUGE ACCESSORIES

A.
Syphon: 1/4-inch NPS straight coil constructed of brass tubing with threads on each end.
B.
Snubber: 1/4-inch NPS brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous metal disc. Disc material shall
be suitable for fluid served and rated pressure.
C.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent between 20 and 80 percent of scale range.
2.7 TEST PLUGS

A.
Test Plugs shall be nickel-plated brass body, with 1/2-inch NPS fitting and 2 self-sealing valve-type
core inserts, suitable for inserting a 1/8-inch O.D. probe assembly from a dial-type thermometer or
pressure gauge. Test plug shall have gasketed and threaded cap with retention chain and body of
length to extend beyond insulation. Pressure rating shall be 500 psig.
B.
Core Material: Conform to the following for fluid and temperature range:
1.
2.
C.
Air, Water, Oil, and Gas, 20 to 200 deg F (minus 7 to 93 deg C): Neoprene.
Air and Water, minus 30 deg to 275 deg F (minus 35 to 136 deg C): EPDM.
Test Kit: Provide test kit consisting of 1 pressure gauge, gauge adapter with probe, 2 bimetal dial

Duluth, GA
METERS AND GAUGES

15135-2
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
thermometers, and carrying case.

D.
Ranges of pressure gauge and thermometers shall be approximately 2 times systems operating
conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 THERMOMETERS INSTALLATION
A.
Install in the following locations and elsewhere as indicated:

1.
B.
At inlet and outlet of each domestic hot water heater.
Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where thermometers are indicated, in vertical position. Fill
well with oil or graphite and secure cap.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES

A.
Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated:

1.
2.
3.
B.
Provide liquid-filled gauge at suction and discharge of each pump.

At discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.
At building water service entrance.
Pressure Gauge Needle Valves: Install in piping tee with snubber. Install syphon in lieu of snubber
for steam pressure gauges.

Duluth, GA
METERS AND GAUGES

15135-3
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
SECTION 15140
1.1 SUMMARY
A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Horizontal-piping hangers and supports

Vertical-piping clamps
Hanger-rod attachments
Building attachments
Saddles and shields
Spring hangers and supports
Miscellaneous materials
Equipment supports
Pre-engineered support strut systems
1.
2.
3.
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation," for high density insulation for protecting insulation
vapor barrier and materials and methods for piping hanger installations.
Division 15 Water Distribution Piping, for pipe hanger types and spacing for horizontal and
vertical domestic water distribution and heat traced piping of sizes and materials indicated.
Division 15 Drainage and Vent Systems, for pipe hanger types and spacing for horizontal and
vertical storm drainage, heat traced and cold sanitary piping of sizes and materials indicated.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A.
Terminology used in this Section is defined in MSS SP-90.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contract and Division 1 specification
Sections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Product data, including installation instructions for each type of support and anchor. Submit
pipe hanger and support schedule showing Manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and
features for each required pipe hanger and support.
Product certificates signed by the manufacturer of hangers and supports certifying that their
products meet the specified requirements.
Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements
specified under "Quality Assurance" Article.
Assembly-type shop drawings for each type of support and anchor, indicating dimensions,
weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.
Maintenance data for supports and anchors for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual

A.
Code - Steel."
1.
Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
B.
Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with ASME "Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable plumbing codes pertaining to product materials
and installation of supports and anchors.
D.
NFPA Compliance: Hangers and supports shall comply with NFPA standard No. 13 when used as a
component of a fire protection system.
E.
UL and FM Compliance: Hangers, supports, and components shall be listed and labeled by UL and
FM where used for fire protection piping systems.
F.
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL): Hangers, supports, and

Duluth, GA

15140-1
1550000803
*** Issue 08/19/05
components shall be listed and labeled by a NRTL where used for fire protection piping systems. The
term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Hangers and Supports

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Anvil International
B-Line
Halfen-DEHA
Hilti
ERICO\Michigan Hanger Co.
Midwest
National Pipe Hanger Corporation
Power-Strut.
Truscon
Unistrut
Pre-Engineered Roof Pipe Supports

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Airtec
B-Line
ERICO
MIRO
Roof Top Blox
Portable Pipe Hangers
2.2 SUPPORT MATERIALS

A.
Hangers and support components shall be factory fabricated of materials, design, and manufacturer
complying with MSS SP-58.
1.
2.
3.
Components shall have galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that will
not have factory-applied or field-applied finish.
Pipe attachments shall be copper-plated or have nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection
where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
Components as listed below shall be made of 304 stainless steel where indicated.
B.
Pipe Covering Protection Saddles: Sheet metal construction, meeting MSS SP-58 Type 39A or B,
100-psi average compressive strength, waterproofed calcium silicate, encased with a sheet metal
shield and center rib for pipes 12 and larger. Pipe covering protection saddles shall cover
approximately one sixth of the circumference of the pipe and shall be 12 long.
C.
Insulation Protection Shield: Sheet metal construction, meeting MSS SP-58 Type 40, of 18 gauge
for 5-1/2 inside dimension and smaller, 16 gauge for 6-1/2 to 10-3/4 inside dimension and 14
gauge for 11-3/4 to 17 inside dimension. Shield shall cover half of the circumference of the pipe
and shall be of length indicated by manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation.
D.
360 Insulation Protection Shield: Sheet metal construction, of 18 gauge for 5-1/2 inside dimension
and smaller. Shield shall cover all of the circumference of the pipe with two half circumference
sections held together with bolts and nuts and shall be of length indicated by manufacturer for pipe
size and thickness of insulation.
E.
Pre-engineered Support Strut Systems: Minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel with factory-punched
attachment holes. Two piece straps shall be captivated at the shoulder when attachment nut is
tightened and designed for use with strut system. Long or short pipe rollers designed for use with
strut system, where indicated, shall attach to the channel with brackets and nuts. Provide plastic
galvanic isolators for connecting bare copper pipe for use with pre-engineered support strut system
where indicated. All nuts, brackets and clamps shall have the same finish as the channels.
F.
Pre-Engineered Roof Pipe Supports: Nominal 10, 12, 16, or 24 long (as applicable) by nominal
4 thickness and minimum 4 width, closed cell polyethylene blocks with embedded pre-engineered
support strut or pre-engineered support struts with factory plastic bases. Two piece straps shall be
captivated at the shoulder when attachment nut is tightened and designed for use with strut system.
All nuts, brackets and clamps shall have the same finish as the channels.

Duluth, GA

15140-2
1550000803
*** Issue 08/19/05
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
B.
Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded,
natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix ratio shall be 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by
volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building
structure; do not attach to ceilings, equipment, ductwork, conduit and other non-structural elements
such as floor and roof decking.
B.
Hangers, supports, clamps and attachments shall comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of
parallel runs of horizontal piping supported together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers
where possible. Install supports with maximum spacing complying with MSS SP-58. Where piping
of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe as specified above for individual pipe hangers.
C.
Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Space attachments within
maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-58. Install additional attachments at concentrated
loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of
piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert to forms. Where concrete
with compressive strength less than 2,500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings
at top of inserts.
D.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other
accessories. Provide two nuts on threaded supports to securely fasten the support.
E.
Field-Fabricated, Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required;
weld steel in accordance with AWS D-1.1.
F.
Support fire protection systems piping independently from other piping systems.
G.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of
movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops,
expansion bends and similar units.
H.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
I.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping Code is not exceeded.
J.
Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements.

1.
2.
3.
Riser Clamps: Attach riser clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with riser clamps
projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. Do not use
riser clamps to support horizontal, insulated piping. Seal insulation for hot piping and protect
vapor barrier for cold piping as specified in Division 15 Section Mechanical Insulation.
Pipe Covering Protection Saddles: Install pipe covering protection saddles where insulation
without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match
adjoining pipe insulation.
Insulation Protection Shield: Install insulation protection shield and high density insulation
where vapor barrier is indicated, sized for the insulation thickness used as specified in Division
15 Section Insulation.
4.
a.
K.
Install a minimum 8 long section at each support point, top and bottom halves of the
pipe, of same thickness of insulation used.
Pre-engineered Support Strut Systems: Channel strut systems can be used at the Contractors option
in lieu of individual hangers for horizontal pipes. Space channel strut systems at the required
distance for the smallest pipe supported. Provide channel gauge and hanger rods per the
manufacturers recommendations for the piping supported. Where strut systems are attached to

Duluth, GA

15140-3
1550000803
*** Issue 08/19/05
walls, install anchor bolts per manufacturers recommendations.

1.
2.
L.
Un-insulated Copper Pipe: Install with plastic galvanic isolators

Insulated Tube or Pipe: Install with 360 insulation protection shields or pre-engineered thermal
hanger-shield inserts as specified in Division 15 Section Mechanical Insulation.
Pre-Engineered Roof Pipe Supports: Set supports on an 18 X 18 (up to 12 length support), 24 X

18 (16 length support), or 30 X 18 (24 length support) x 3/16 thick roof walkway material
compatible with the roof material.
3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A.
Fabricate structural steel supports to suspend equipment from structure above or support equipment
from floor.
B.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for piping and equipment.
3.3 METAL FABRICATION

A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe anchors and equipment supports. Install
and align fabricated anchors in indicated locations.
B.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop
welded because of shipping size limitations.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing, and so that
contours welded surfaces to match adjacent contours.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A.
Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B.
Touch-Up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 section "Painting" of these
specifications.
C.
For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing
repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

Duluth, GA

15140-4
1550000803
*** Issue 08/19/05
SECTION 15190
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
Extent of Mechanical work to be identified as required by this Section is indicated on drawings

and/or specified in other Division 15 Sections.
B.
Types of identification devices specified in this Section include the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Painted Identification Materials

Plastic Pipe Markers
Plastic Tape
Underground-Type Plastic Line Marker
Plastic Duct Markers
Valve Tags
Valve Schedule Frames
Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs
Plastic Equipment Markers
Plasticized Tags
1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS:

A.
ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and
viewing angles of identification devices.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each
identification material and device required.
B.
Samples: Submit samples of each color, lettering style and other graphic representation required for
each identification material or system.
C.
Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2" x
11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag),
location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are
intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule.
In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division
1.
D.
Maintenance Data: Include product data and schedules in Maintenance Manuals as specified in
Division 1 and Section General Mechanical Requirements.
1.4 SPARE PARTS

A.
Furnish minimum of 5% extra stock of each mechanical identification material required, including
additional numbered valve tags (not less than 3) for each piping system, additional piping system
identification markers, and additional plastic laminate engraving blanks of assorted sizes.
1.
Where stenciled markers are provided, clean and retain stencils after completion of stenciling
and include used stencils in extra stock, along with required stock of stenciling paints and
applicators.

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification materials

of one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Allen Systems, Inc.

Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div.
Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.
Seton Name Plate Corp.

Duluth, GA
15190-1
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
2.2 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each
application as referenced in other Division 15 sections. Where more than single type is specified for
application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category.
2.3 PAINTED IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A.
Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes generally
complying with recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping and similar applications. Minimum letter
height shall be 1-1/4" high letters for ductwork and 3/4" high letters for access door signs and
similar operational instructions.
B.
Stencil Paint: Stencil paint shall be exterior type, oil based, alkyd enamel; black, except as otherwise
indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade.
C.
Identification Paint: Identification paint shall be oil based, alkyd enamel of colors indicated or, if not
otherwise indicated for piping systems, comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors.
2.4 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS

A.
Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid snap-on, color-coded pipe
markers, complying with ANSI A13.1
B.
Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, colorcoded, pressure-sensitive vinyl pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1
C.
Insulation: Furnish 1" thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe marker to
be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 125 degrees F (52 degrees C) or
greater. Cut length to extend 2" beyond each end of plastic pipe marker.
D.
Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6" (including insulation if any), provide full-band pipe
markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following
methods:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.

Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap.
Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation).
Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4" wide;
full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2".
Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6" and larger (including insulation if any), provide either fullband or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times letter height (and of required length),
fastened by one of the following methods:
1.
2.
3.
Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation).

Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1-1/2" wide;
full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3".
Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's standard
stainless steel bands.
F.
Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes piping system in
each instance, as selected by Architect/Engineer in cases of variance with names as shown or
specified.
G.
Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled, or shown, and
abbreviate only as necessary for each application length.
1.
Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with
piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as a separate unit of
plastic.
2.5 PLASTIC TAPE

A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure-sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl tape,

not less than 3 mils thick.
B.
Width: Provide 1-1/2" wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including insulation, if
any) of less than 6", 2-1/2" wide tape for larger pipes.
C.
Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated.

Duluth, GA
15190-2
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
2.6 UNDERGROUND-TYPE PLASTIC LINE MARKER

A.
General:
Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape,
intended for direct-burial service; not less than 6" wide x 4 mils thick. Provide tape with printing
which most accurately indicates the type of service of buried pipe.
1.
Provide multi-ply tape consisting of solid aluminum foil core between 2-layers of plastic tape.
2.7 PLASTIC DUCT MARKERS

A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color coded duct markers. Conform to
the following color code:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Green: Cold air.

Yellow: Hot air.
Yellow/Green: Supply air.
Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air.
For hazardous exhausts, use colors and designs recommended by ANSI A13.1.
Nomenclature: Include the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Direction of air flow.

Duct service (supply, return, exhaust, etc.).
Duct origin (from).
Duct destination (to).
Design cfm.
2.8 VALVE TAGS

A.
Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19-gauge polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved piping system
abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2" high, and with 5/32" hole for
fastener.
1.
2.
B.
Plastic Laminate Valve Tags: Provide manufacturer's standard 3/32" thick engraved plastic laminate
valve tags, with piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2"
high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener.
1.
C.
Provide 1-1/2" diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated.

Fill tag engraving with black enamel.
Provide 1-1/2" sq. black tags with white lettering, except as otherwise indicated.
Plastic Valve Tags: Provide manufacturer's standard solid plastic valve tags with printed enamel
lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16" high letters and sequenced valve
numbers approximately 3/8" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener.
1.
Provide 1-1/8" sq. white tags with black lettering.
D.
Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type),
or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and
manufactured specifically for that purpose.
E.
Access Panel Markers: Provide manufacturer's standard 1/16" thick engraved plastic laminate
access panel markers, with abbreviations and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Include
1/8" center hole to allow attachment.
2.9 VALVE SCHEDULE FRAMES

A.
General: For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for removable
mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSBgrade sheet glass.
2.10 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS

A.
General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, in the sizes
and thickness indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording
indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical
fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate.
B.
Thickness: 1/16" for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8" length; 1/8" for larger units.
C.
Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where
screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.

Duluth, GA
15190-3
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
2.11 PLASTIC EQUIPMENT MARKERS

A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color coded equipment markers.
Conform to the following color code:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as possible:

1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Green: Cooling equipment and components.

Yellow: Heating equipment and components.
Yellow/Green: Combination cooling and heating equipment and components.
Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet any of the above criteria.
For hazardous equipment, use colors and designs recommended by ANSI A13.1.
Name and plan number.
Equipment service.
Design capacity.
Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, rpm, etc.
Size: Provide 2-1/2" x 4" markers for control devices, dampers, and valves; and 4-1/2" x 6" for
equipment.
2.12 PLASTICIZED TAGS

A.
General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention tags, of

plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing. Tags shall be minimum 3-1/4" x 5-5/8" in
size, provided with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording
including large-size primary wording (as examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE).
2.13 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS

A.
General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical identification
work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering
and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as
required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.
1.
Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified,
provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as service (as examples;
Boiler No. 3, Air Supply No. 1H, Standpipe F12).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or

other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after
completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings
and similar removable concealment.
3.2 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION

A.
General: Identify supply, return, exhaust, outdoor and relief air ductwork with duct markers; or
provide stenciled signs and arrows, showing ductwork service and direction of flow, in black or
white (whichever provides most contrast with ductwork color).
B.
Location: Provide duct markers where ductwork is exposed to view, concealed only by a removable
ceiling system, located in accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, etc), and located in
exterior non-concealed locations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Within 5 feet of each control damper or balancing damper, excluding balancing dampers
installed in duct take-offs to grilles, registers or diffusers that are less than 25 feet in lengths
and installed in the same space as the air device.
Within 5 feet of each branch duct, excluding branch ducts that are less than 25 feet in length
and located in the same space as the main duct.
Within 5 feet of locations where ducts pass through walls, floors or ceilings or enter nonaccessible enclosures. Provide identification on each side of the wall, floor and ceiling.
Spaced intermediately at a maximum spacing of 50 feet along each duct run, except reduce
spacing to 25 feet in congested areas when there are more than two types of ductwork
systems or more than three pieces of equipment.

Duluth, GA
15190-4
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
5.
Within 5 feet of equipment and other points of origin or termination.
C.
Access Doors: Provide duct markers or stenciled signs on each access door in ductwork and
housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment) and other maintenance and operating
instructions, and appropriate safety and procedural information.
D.
Concealed Doors:
Where access doors are concealed above acoustical ceilings or similar
concealment, plasticized tags may be installed for identification in lieu of specified signs, at
Installer's option.
3.3 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

A.
General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated to receive
identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow:
1.
B.
Application: Provide piping system identification for the following systems:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this section.
Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated pipes.
Domestic cold water piping.
Domestic hot water piping.
Domestic hot water recirculating piping.
Sanitary and waste piping.
Storm water piping.
Vent piping.
Insulated and non-insulated storm water piping.
Natural gas piping.
Location: Install pipe markers and color bands in the following locations where piping is exposed to
view, concealed only by a removable ceiling system, installed in machine rooms, installed in
accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Within 5 feet of each valve and control device.

Within 5 feet of each branch, excluding take-offs less than 25 feet in length for fixtures or
terminal heating and cooling units; mark flow direction of each pipe at branch connection.
Within 5 feet where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings or enter non-accessible
enclosures. Provide identification on each side of wall, floor or ceiling.
At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping.
Within 5 feet of major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing
to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment where there are more than two piping
systems or pieces of equipment.
3.4 UNDERGROUND PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A.
General:
During back-filling/top-soiling of each exterior underground piping systems, install
continuous underground-type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 6" to 8" below
finished grade. Where multiple small lines are buried in common trench and do not exceed overall
width of 16", install single line marker. For tile fields and similar installations, mark only edge pipe
lines of field.
B.
Underground Warning Tape: Underground warning tape shall be Marking Services Incorporated #
52205 for ferrous sewer pipe and # 52206 for domestic water pipe or equal by Brady Identoline and
Seton. Provide 4mil thick non-adhesive polyethylene type tape. Detectable underground warning
tape shall be Marking Services Incorporated # 52216 for plastic gas pipe and # 52218 for plastic
sewer pipe. Provide non-adhesive 4mil thick type tape with 18 AWG copper or aluminum tracer wire
suitable for detection up to 3-0 of burial.
3.5 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A.
General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude
check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture faucets,
convenience and lawn-watering hose bibs, and shut-off valves at plumbing fixtures, HVAC terminal
devices and similar rough-in connections of end-use fixtures and units.
B.
List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system. Mount valve schedule frames and
schedules in machine rooms where indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, where directed by
Architect/Engineer.

Duluth, GA
15190-5
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
1.
Where more than one major machine room is shown for project, install mounted valve schedule
in each major machine room, and repeat only main valves which are to be operated in
conjunction with operations of more than single machine room.
3.6 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A.
General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or near each major
item of mechanical equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if not otherwise
specified for each item or device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment
and operational devices:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas
outlets.
Meters, gauges, thermometers and similar units.
Fuel-burning units including duct furnaces..
Pumps
Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, mixing boxes and air terminal units.
Packaged HVAC central-station or zone-type units.
Electric heaters and terminal heating and cooling units.
Water heaters, tanks and pressure vessels.
Strainers, filters, water treatment systems and similar equipment.
B.
Optional Sign Types: Where lettering larger than 1" height is needed for proper identification,
because of distance from normal location of required identification, stenciled signs may be provided
in lieu of engraved plastic, at Installer's option.
C.
Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4" high lettering for name of unit where viewing distance is less than 2'0", 1/2" high for distances up to 6'-0", and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances.
Provide secondary lettering of 2/3 to 3/4 of size of the principal lettering.
D.
Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish between multiple
units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and
warn of hazards and improper operations.
1.
2.
Optional Use of Plasticized Tags: At Installer's option, where equipment to be identified is

concealed above acoustical ceilings or similar concealment, plasticized tags may be installed
within concealed space to reduce amount of text in exposed sign (outside concealment).
Operational valves and similar minor equipment items located in non-occupied spaces (including
machine rooms) may, at Installer's option, be identified by installation of plasticized tags in lieu
of engraved plastic signs.

Duluth, GA
15190-6
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
SECTION 15200
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
It is the intent of this specification to provide vibration isolation supports for all Mechanical,
Plumbing, Fire Protection and Electrical equipment as scheduled at the end of this Section.
B.
This work shall include all materials and labor required for the installation of the vibration isolation
devices.
C.
Vibration isolators shall be selected by the weight distribution to produce reasonably uniform
deflection. Deflections shall be as noted on the equipment schedule included at the end of this
Section.
D.
All vibration isolation equipment shall be furnished by one manufacturer unless specifically approved
otherwise in writing by the Engineer.
E.
All vibration isolation devices shall be treated for corrosion resistance using galvanization for exterior
applications and painting for interior applications.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A.
Provide complete vibration isolation systems as shown or specified and in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents. System shall be complete with:
1.
2.
Foundations, vibration isolation, and supports for rigidly supported equipment.

Vibration isolation for ductwork and piping.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A.
Consult all other Section to determine the extent of work specified elsewhere but related to this
Section. This work shall be properly coordinated to produce an installation satisfactory to the
Owner. This work includes, but is not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Fans
Piping
Ductwork
Plumbing Fixtures
Heating and Cooling Equipment
Concrete Housekeeping Pads
Vibration Control for Electrical Systems
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY

A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying the completeness of the isolation installation and the
overall suitability of the equipment to meet the intent of this specification. Any additional equipment
needed to meet the intent of this specification, even if not specifically mentioned herein or in the
Contract Documents, shall be supplied by the Contractor without claim for additional payment.
B.
Performance or waiving of inspection, testing or surveillance for any portion of the Work shall not
relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to conform strictly with the Contract Documents. The
Contractor shall not construe performance or waiving of inspection, testing or surveillance by the
Owner or Architects to relieve the Contractor from total responsibility to perform in strict accordance
with the Contract Documents.
1.5 MANUFACTURER'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A.
Manufacturer of vibration isolation equipment shall have the following responsibilities:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Determine vibration isolation for all equipment and systems in accordance with the local
governing code.
Provide piping and equipment isolation systems as scheduled or specified.
Guarantee specified isolation system deflection.
Provide installation instructions, drawings and field supervision to assure proper installation and
performance.
The vibration isolation systems shall be guaranteed to have deflection indicated on the schedule

Duluth, GA

15200-1
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
6.
on the drawings. Mounting sizes shall be determined by the mounting manufacturer, and the
sizes shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
The vibration isolator vendor shall ensure that all equipment to be isolated has sufficient support
structure to distribute equipment loads onto isolators. Where additional support structure is
required, this shall be provided by vibration isolator vendor.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittal data shall show type, size, and deflection of each isolator proposed.
outlined procedures for installing and adjusting the isolators.
B.
Submit a vibration isolation system schedule indicating the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Include clearly
Manufacturer, type, model number, size

Height when uncompressed and static deflection of each isolation element
Spring constant of each isolation element
Estimated imposed load on each isolation element
Spring o.d., free operating, and solid heights
Design of supplementary bases.
Layout of isolator hangers, mounts, and other elements shown on an outline of the isolated
equipment, including complete details of attachment to load-bearing structure or supplementary
framing.
Piping isolators shown and identified on piping layout drawings.
All concrete foundations and supports (and required reinforcing and forms) will be furnished and
installed by another trade. However, this trade shall furnish shop drawings showing adequate
concrete reinforcing steel details and templates for all concrete foundations and supports, and
all required hanger bolts and other appurtenances necessary for the proper installation of his
equipment. Although another trade will complete all concrete work, all such work shall be
shown in detail on the shop drawings, prepared by this trade which drawings shall be submitted
showing the complete details of all foundations including necessary concrete and steel work,
vibration isolation devices, etc.

A.
It is the objective of this Specification to provide for the control of vibration due to the operation of
machinery or equipment, and/or due to interconnected piping, ductwork or conduit.
B.
The installation of all vibration isolation systems shall be under the supervision of the manufacturer's
representative.

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
All vibration isolation equipment and materials shall be provided by a single manufacturer. The
following manufacturers are approved provided systems are in compliance with the specified design
and performance requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Amber Booth.
Caldyn, California Dynamics Corp.
Kinetics Noise Control.
Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
Vibration Mounting and Controls.
Vibro-Acoustics
2.2 GENERAL
A.
All equipment provided for vibration isolation shall be new and manufactured specifically for the
purpose intended.
2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A.
GENERAL
1.
2.
The static deflection of isolators shall be as given in the equipment schedule and specified
below. The isolator schedule shall take precedence.
Vibration isolator sizes and layout shall be determined by the vibration isolator supplier.

Duluth, GA

15200-2
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
ISOLATOR TYPE WP
1.
2.
3.
C.
2.
3.
Type MWP (Metal and Waffle Sandwich Pads) shall consist of two 5/16 inch thick ribbed or
waffle neoprene pads sandwiching a 16 gauge stainless steel shim plate. The pad shall be
manufactured with bridge bearing quality neoprene, and selected for a maximum durometer of
50 and designed for 15% strain.
If the isolator is bolted to the structure, a neoprene vibration isolation washer and sleeve
(Uniroyal Type 620/660, or as approved) shall be installed under the bolt head between the
steel washer and the base plate.
(Type MWP: Mason Industries Type WSW or as approved.)
ISOLATOR TYPE SPNM

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Type WP (Waffle Pads) shall be 5/16 inch thick neoprene pads ribbed or waffled on both sides.
The pads shall be manufactured with bridge bearing quality neoprene, and selected for a
maximum durometer of 50 and designed for 15% strain. Where required, steel load-spreading
plates shall be incorporated between the equipment and the neoprene pad.
If the isolator is bolted to the structure, a neoprene vibration isolation washer and sleeve
(Uniroyal Type 620/660 or as approved) shall be installed under the bolt head between the steel
washer and the base plate.
(Type WP: Mason Industries Type W or as approved.)
ISOLATOR TYPE MWP

1.
D.
All vibration isolators shall have either known undeflected heights or calibration markings so that,
after adjustment, the amount of deflection can be verified, thus determining that the load is within
the proper range of the device and that the correct degree of vibration isolation is being provided
according to the design.
All isolators shall operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curve. Load versus
deflection curves shall be furnished by the manufacturer, and must be linear over a deflection
range of not less than 50% above the design deflection.
The theoretical vertical natural frequency for each support point, based upon load per isolator and
isolator stiffness, shall not differ from the design objectives for the equipment as a whole by more
than 10%.
All neoprene mountings shall have a Shore hardness of 30 to 60 5, or as specified herein, after
minimum aging of 20 days or corresponding over-aging.
Housed or caged spring isolators are not acceptable.
Where steel spring isolation systems are described in the specifications, the mounting assemblies
shall utilize bare springs with the spring diameter not less than 0.8 of the loaded operating height
of the spring. Each spring isolator shall be designed and installed so that the ends of the spring
remain parallel during and after the spring installation. All isolators shall operate in the linear
portion of their load versus deflection curve and have 50% excess capacity without becoming coil
bound.
All mounting systems exposed to weather and other corrosive environments shall be protected
with factory corrosion resistance. All metal parts of mountings (except springs and hardware)
shall be hot dip galvanized. Springs shall be cadmium plated and neoprene coated. Nuts and
bolts shall be cadmium plated.
Type SPNM (Spring and Neoprene Mounts) shall have a free-standing and laterally stable steel
spring without any housing. Springs shall be designed so that the ratio of the horizontal to
vertical spring constant is between one and two. The spring diameter shall be not less than
80% of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Loaded springs shall have a
minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the specified static deflection.
Unless otherwise specified, the minimum static deflection of SPNM isolators for equipment
mounted on grade slabs shall be 1 inch, and the minimum static deflection for equipment
mounted above grade level shall be 2 inches.
Two Type WP isolation pads sandwiching a 16 gauge stainless or galvanized steel separator
plate shall be bonded to the isolator baseplate.
Unless otherwise specified, isolators need not be bolted to the floor for indoor installations. If
the base plates are bolted to the structure, a neoprene vibration isolation washer and sleeve
(Uniroyal Type 620/660 or as approved) shall be installed under the bolt head between the steel
washer and the base plate.
(Type SPNM: Mason Industries Type SLFH or as approved.)
ISOLATOR TYPE SPNH

Duluth, GA

15200-3
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
ISOLATOR TYPE CSNM

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G.
2.
3.
4.
Base Type CMB (Curb Mounted Base) for roof-mounted equipment shall be a structural steel
base mounted directly to the structure with an upper floating section on adjustable steel
springs. The upper frame shall provide continuous support for the equipment. Steel springs
shall rest on 1/4" min. thickness neoprene pads and shall have a minimum static deflection of
2 unless otherwise specified. All-directional snubber bushings shall be 1/4" minimum
thickness neoprene. All hardware shall be cadmium or zinc electroplated to provide a rust
resistant finish.
Weather proofing shall consist of a continuous galvanized flexible counterflashing nailed over
the lower curbs waterproofing and joined at the corners by EPDM bellows. All spring locations
shall have access ports with removable waterproof covers to allow for adjustment or
replacement of springs. Lower curbs shall have provision for 2 insulation.
Duct connections shall be made using a length of flexible duct dimensioned to match the
equipment opening, using a foam rubber gasket to seal against the unit bottom.
Base Type CMB: Mason Industries Type RSC, or as approved
NEOPRENE MOUNTING SLEEVES

1.
I.
Type CSNM (Constrained Spring and Neoprene Mounts) shall be a spring and neoprene mount
that incorporates a housing which incorporates unrestrained stable springs with built-in leveling
device and resilient vertical limit stops to prevent spring elongation when partial load is removed
and limits the movement of equipment when it is subjected to wind loading.
A minimum clearance of 1 inch shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the
housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring operation. Limit stops shall
provide minimum 1/4 clearance under normal operation, and a neoprene washer shall be
installed beneath the bolt head/ washer used to restrain the isolator.
In installations subject to wind load, provide tapped hole in top and bottom plates for bolting to
equipment and the roof or supporting structure with a neoprene mounting sleeve.
Provide minimum 1/4 inch thick neoprene acoustical base pad on underside of mount unless
designated otherwise.
Mount shall be capable of supporting equipment at a fixed elevation during equipment erection.
Installed and operating heights shall be identical.
Unless otherwise specified, the minimum static deflection for Type CSNM mounts shall be 2
inches.
(Type CSNM: Mason Industries Type SLR or as approved)
BASE TYPE CMB

1.
H.
Type SPNH (Spring and Neoprene Hangers) shall consist of a steel spring in series with a
neoprene isolating element. The spring shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to
50% of the specified deflection. The neoprene element shall have a static deflection of not less
than 0.3 inches with a strain not exceeding 15%.
Unless otherwise specified, the static deflection of SPNH hangers shall be 2 inches.
Spring diameter and hanger box hole size shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to
swing through a 30 degree arc. A neoprene sleeve shall be provided where the lower hanger
rod passes through the steel hanger box, such that the hanger rod cannot contact the steel
hanger. The diameter of the clear hole in the hanger box shall be at least 3/4 inch larger than
the diameter of the hanger rod. When installed, the spring element shall not be cocked, and the
hanger box shall be allowed to rotate through a full 360 degree arc without encountering any
obstructions.
(Type SPNH: Mason Industries Type 30N or as approved.)
Neoprene mounting sleeves for hold-down applications of equipment with vibration isolators
shall be Uniroyal Type 620/660 or as approved.
PIPE FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

1.
Refer to Section Basic Piping Materials and Methods for requirements for flexible pipe
connectors. Neoprene flexible connectors for pipes shall be Mason Type MFNC, MFTNC or as
approved. Do not use control rods.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL

Duluth, GA

15200-4
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
A.
All equipment, piping, etc. shall be mounted on or suspended from approved foundations and
supports, all as specified herein, or as shown on the drawings.
B.
All floor-mounted equipment shall be erected on concrete housekeeping pads over the complete floor
area of the equipment, unless otherwise specified herein. Refer to Section Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods for concrete housekeeping pad requirements. These pads shall be integrally
keyed to structural slab. Wherever vibration eliminating devices and/or concrete inertia blocks are
specified, these items shall, in all cases, be mounted on concrete housekeeping pads unless
otherwise specified herein.
C.
Furnish and install neoprene mounting sleeves for hold-down bolts to prevent any metal to metal
contact.
D.
All equipment shall be provided with lateral restraining isolators as required to limit horizontal motion
to 1/4" maximum, under all operating conditions. Lateral restraining isolators shall have the same
static deflection as the vertical isolators for the equipment being isolated.
E.
Unless otherwise indicated, all equipment mounted on vibration isolators shall have a minimum
operating clearance of 2 inches between the bottom of the equipment or inertia base (and
height-saving bracket) and the concrete housekeeping pad (or bolt heads) beneath the equipment.
The clearance shall be checked by the Contractor to ensure that no material has been left to shortcircuit the vibration isolators. There shall be a minimum 4 inch clearance between isolated equipment
and the walls, ceiling, floors, columns and any other equipment not installed on vibration isolators.
F.
Piping, ductwork, conduit or mechanical equipment shall be supported from building structure, not
hung from or supported on other equipment, pipes, or ductwork.
G.
Equipment connected to water or other fluid piping shall be erected on isolators or isolated
foundations at correct operating heights prior to connection of piping, and blocked-up with
temporary shims to final operating height. When the system is assembled and fluid is added, the
isolators shall be adjusted to allow removal of the shims.
H.
All mechanical equipment not specifically identified in this specification that contains rotating or
vibrating elements, and any associated electrical apparatus installed by this division that contains
transformers or inductors shall be installed on Type DDNM or RNM neoprene isolators as appropriate.
I.
All wiring connections to mechanical equipment on isolators shall be made with a minimum 18 inch
long flexible conduit in a U shaped loop.
J.
Elastomeric isolators that will be exposed to temperatures below 32 degrees F shall be fabricated
from natural rubber instead of neoprene.
K.
Springs shall be designed and installed so that ends of springs remain parallel and all springs installed
with adjustment bolts.
L.
Springs shall be sized to be non-resonant with equipment forcing frequencies or support structure
natural frequencies.
M.
Refer to Vibration Isolation Schedule at the end of this Section.
3.2 FAN ISOLATION - GENERAL

A.
Fans and air handlers shall be mounted on vibration isolators as described herein, as shown on the
equipment schedule and on the drawings.
B.
Fans and air handling units shall be leveled with the fans operating before the flexible connectors are
attached.
C.
All fan bases and isolators shall be sized so that thrust restraints (which would act against turning
moment caused by static pressure) are not required.
3.3 ROOF CURB MOUNTED FANS

A.
Downblast and Upblast Mushroom Style Fans installed on roof curbs shall be mounted on Type W
neoprene waffle pad cut to length and width and sealed to curb top rail to form a continuous support
between curb and fan base.
3.4 SUPPORT OF PIPING

Duluth, GA

15200-5
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
A.
The following water, steam and condensate piping shall be resiliently supported:
1.
2.
Piping within 50 feet of connected rotating equipment.

Piping installed below or adjacent to noise sensitive areas. Refer to Section Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods.
B.
Pipes connected to equipment installed on spring vibration isolators, except sprinkler piping, shall be
suspended or supported by Type SPNM or Type SPNH isolators. Provide vibration isolation anchors
and guides as specified elsewhere in this section. The first isolator both upstream and downstream
of equipment on springs shall have a static deflection equal to 1.5 times that of the equipment
isolators, up to a maximum of 2 inches. The static deflection of the remaining pipe isolators shall be
1 inch.
C.
Piping that is connected only to machinery installed on neoprene isolators shall be either supported
from the floor on Type DDNM mounts or suspended from the structure on Type DDNH hangers.
D.
Where a pipe run connects multiple items of equipment in the mechanical room the pipe isolators for
the entire run shall be chosen to suit the connected equipment of greatest static deflection.
E.
Resilient diagonal mountings or other approved devices shall be provided as required to limit piping
motion due to equipment startup or shut down, to a maximum of 1/8".
F.
Water piping hanger rod isolators shall contain a steel spring in series with a 1/4" acoustical
neoprene pad within a steel box retainer. The hanger rod isolator assembly shall be rigidly supported
from the spring sub-assembly and shall not contact the steel box retainer. Clearances in the isolator
design shall be capable of accepting a 15 degree misalignment in any direction from the vertical.
G.
The steel spring element of the assembly shall be designed to have a minimum surge frequency of
340 HZ and a minimum deflection of 3/4".
H.
Hanger rod isolators for steam and condensate piping including steam pressure reducing valve
stations shall be supported by means of neoprene-in-shear mountings providing a minimum static
deflection of 1/2".
I.
Where supplementary steel is required to support piping, the supplementary steel shall be sized so
that maximum deflection between supports does not exceed 0.08" and shall be resiliently supported
from the building structure with mountings as described above. Supported piping from the
supplementary steel shall be rigidly suspended or supported.
J.
Pre-compressed type hanger rod isolators shall be provided for all water piping greater than 12"
diameter and all supplementary steel supports. The pre-compression shall be factory set at 75% of
rated deflection.
K.
Where isolated water piping 8" and larger is supported directly below exposed steel beams,
attachment to the beam shall be made by means of welded channel beam attachments located
directly under the web of the beam. For piping 6" and smaller, beam clamps may be used in lieu of
welding subject to approval of beam clamp selection.
L.
Except as noted elsewhere in this section, all 2-inch and smaller domestic water piping that is
installed outside equipment rooms shall be isolated from the structure with sponge neoprene, felt or
glass/mineral fiber sleeves between the pipe and pipe clamp or with Type WP pads between the
clamp and the structure. The sleeve shall be not less than 1/8-inch in thickness when compressed.
3.5 PIPING ANCHORS, GUIDES AND SUPPORTS

A.
General: Pipe riser guides, anchors and supports including piping anchors in mechanical equipment
rooms or occupied spaces shall be isolated from the building structure such that there shall be no
direct metal to metal contact of the piping with the building structure.
B.
Piping Anchors and Guides

1.
2.
The all directional pipe anchor isolation mountings shall consist of a telescoping arrangement of
two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum of 1/2" thick heavy duty neoprene and
canvas duct isolation pad. Vertical restraints shall be provided by similar material arranged to
prevent vertical travel in either direction. The allowable load on the isolation material shall not
exceed 500 psi.
Steel guides shall be welded to the pipe at a maximum spacing of 90. The outside diameter
of the opposing guide bars shall be smaller than the inside diameter of the pipe riser clamp in

Duluth, GA

15200-6
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
3.
C.
accordance with standard field construction practice. Each end of the pipe guide shall be rigidly
attached to an all directional pipe anchor isolation mounting which in turn, shall be rigidly
fastened to the steel framing within the shaft.
Low temperature piping guides shall be constructed with a 360 degree 10 gauge metal sleeve
around the piping. The thermal insulation requirements for the piping shall be provided between
the piping and the sleeve. Heavy duty neoprene and canvas duct isolation pad of thickness
equal to thermal insulation requirements shall space the metal sleeve away from the piping with
urethane or other suitable thermal insulation provided in the voids between the pipe-sleeve and
isolation pan material. The metal sleeve outside diameter shall be smaller than the pipe riser
clamp inside diameter in accordance with standard field construction practice. The pipe riser
clamp shall be rigidly attached to the steel framing within the shaft.
Piping Supports:
1.
2.
Piping supports within shafts shall be provided with suitable bearing plates and two layers 1/4"
thick ribbed or waffled neoprene pad loaded for 50 psi maximum. The isolation pads shall be
separated with 1/4" steel plate. The isolation pads shall be Type WP or approved equal.
Piping isolation supports at the base of risers shall be two layers of 1/2" thick heavy duty
neoprene and canvas duct isolation pad separated by 1/4" thick steel plate. Suitable bearing
plates sized to provide a pad loading of 500 psi maximum shall be provided. The stanchion
between the pipe and isolation support shall be welded to the pipe and welded or bolted to the
isolation support. The isolation support shall be bolted to the floor slab with resilient sleeves
and washers. All pipe support resilient materials shall be HL Mason Industries, Inc., or as
approved.
3.6 FLEXIBLE PIPING CONNECTORS

A.
Provide flexible connectors for piping system connections on equipment side of shutoff valves for all
pumps, mechanical equipment supported or suspended by spring isolators, and where indicated on
Drawings.
3.7 PIPE RISER SUPPORTS

A.
Where pipes rise in a vertical chase and are supported from a structure with type SPNH or DDNH
isolators and require lateral bracing, neoprene riser guides shall be mounted around the pipe to limit
lateral movement and to prevent direct contact with the supporting structure.
B.
Support vertical pipe risers subjected to thermal expansion and/or contraction with spring isolators
and central anchors designed to ensure loading within design limits at support points. Perform
design calculations for sizing the riser supports incorporating the initial load, initial deflection, change
in deflection, final load and change in load at support locations. Design calculations must include
anchor loads when installed, cold filled and at operating temperature and pipe stress at end
connections and branch locations. Design system for an initial spring deflection of at least 4 times
the thermal movement. Design must be stamped and signed by a licensed professional engineer.
3.8 DUCT ISOLATION

A.
Ducts shall be connected to fans, fan casings and fan plenums by means of flexible connectors.
Flexible duct connectors shall not be used outside the mechanical room unless expressly shown on
the drawings. Refer to Section Ductwork Accessories for ductwork flexible connectors.
B.
Kitchen exhaust ducts shall be supported on SPNH and/or SPNM isolators as appropriate. Neoprene
riser guides shall be used if lateral restraint is required in shafts.
3.9 WIRING
A.
All wiring connections to mechanical equipment on vibration isolators (either spring or neoprene type)
shall be made with a minimum 18 inch long flexible conduit in a U shaped loop. This Contractor
shall coordinate wiring connections with the Electrical Contractor.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY

A.
Contractor shall work in accord with best trade practices, shall fabricate and install all items in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and Architect's directions, and shall consult with
trades doing adjoining work in order to provide an installation of first class quality.
3.11 ADJUSTMENT AND TESTING

Duluth, GA

15200-7
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
A.
Site Access: During installation of equipment, Contractor shall arrange for access as necessary for
inspection of isolation and noise control equipment by Architect and his representatives.
B.
Contractors Report: The vibration isolation vendor shall inspect and approve the installation of the
vibration isolators and shall submit a report to the Owner which verifies that all of the isolation
equipment has been properly installed and that the installation is in full conformance with the
specification. The report shall record the vibration isolator identification and model or type. For
isolators containing steel springs the report shall also record the size and uncompressed height,
design static deflection and measured static deflection of the isolators provided.
C.
Consultants Inspection: Upon completing installation and adjustment for suitable operation of all
work specified under this section, the Contractor shall notify the Architect in writing. The letter shall
certify that all work specified under this section is complete, operational and adjusted in every
respect, and that all work is ready for the completion checkout. The notification letter shall be
accompanied by a copy of the air balancing report and the vibration isolation report.
3.12 GUARANTEE
A.
If, in the actual installation, any equipment fails to meet the vibration control requirements specified
herein, that equipment shall be corrected or replaced without claim for additional payment, inclusive
of all labor and material costs. Such corrective measures shall be done within a time schedule
specified by the Owner.
3.13 SCHEDULE OF VIBRATION ISOLATORS

EQUIPMENT
BASE TYPE
ISOLATOR TYPE
STATIC
DEFLECTION
Roof-Mounted AC Units
without Internal Isolation
Steel
Dunnage (no
curb
mounting)
CSNM
Rooftop Units Where Shown

on Drawings (Up to 20 Feet
Structural Span)
Isolation Curb
CMB
0.75
Rooftop Units Where Shown

on Drawings (More than 20
Feet Structural Span)
Isolation Curb
CMB
Roof-Mounted Mushroom
Fans
Roof Curb
WP Continuous
on curb top rail
0.25
Domestic Booster Pumps

(Slab on Grade)
Housekeeping
Pad
MWP
0.25
Domestic Booster Pumps

(Suspended Slab)
Inertia Base
CIB
SPNM
Transformers (Floor
Mounted)
Housekeeping
Pad
WP Continuous
along support
0.25
Transformers (Suspended)
SPNH
0.75
Piping
Isolation as per
specification.

Duluth, GA

15200-8
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
SECTION 15250
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
Extent of Mechanical insulation required by this Section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and
by requirements of this Section.
B.
Types of Mechanical insulation specified in this Section include the following:

1.
2.
3.
C.
Piping Systems Insulation:

a.
Fiberglass
b. Cellular Glass
Ductwork System Insulation:
a.
Fiberglass
Equipment Insulation:
a.
Fiberglass
1.
Division 15 Section "Supports and Anchors," for insulation shields and pipe saddles for
protecting insulation vapor barrier and materials and methods for piping installations.

A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B.
Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings,

sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of
50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method.
1.
2.
Exception: Outdoor mechanical insulation may have flame spread index of 75 and smoke
developed index of 150.
Exception: Industrial mechanical insulation that will not affect life safety egress of building may
have flame spread index of 75 and smoke developed index of 150.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each
type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, k-value,
thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation.
B.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of
mechanical insulation. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual.
C.
Samples: Submit manufacturer's sample of each piping insulation type required, and of each duct
and equipment insulation type required. Affix label to sample completely describing product.

A.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Aeroflex USA, Inc.

Armacell LLC.
Babcock and Wilcox; Insulating Products Div.
CertainTeed Corp.
Knauf Insulation
Johns Manville
Nomaco K-Flex, LLC
Owens Corning
Pittsburgh Corning Corp.
The Dow Chemical Co., Building Materials Div.; Trymer 2000.

Duluth, GA
15250-1
1550000803
*** Issue 09/14/09
2.2 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS

A.
Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C 547-00, Class 1 unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Cellular Glass Piping Insulation: ASTM C 552-03, Type II, Class 2.
C.
Polyisocyanurate Piping Insulation: ASTM C 591-01. Provide vapor retardant film and tape of
thickness as recommended by the manufacturer for the installation.
D.
Jackets for Piping Insulation: ASTM C 1136, Type I for piping with temperatures below ambient,
Type II for piping with temperatures above ambient. Type I may be used for all piping at Installers
option.
1.
2.
3.
Encase pipe fittings insulation with one-piece pre-molded PVC fitting covers, fastened as per
manufacturer's recommendations. PVC fitting covers shall be John Manville Zeston 2000 PVC
or approved equal.
Encase exterior piping insulation with aluminum jacket with weather-proof construction. Jacket
shall be minimum 20 gauge corrugated aluminum with three aluminum attachment bands per
section and with aluminum fitting covers.
At contractors option, Alumaguard RG-2400 rubberized bitumen with 60 mil. UV barrier foil
faced membrane as manufactured by Polyguard Products, Inc. Alumaguard shall only be
applied when ambient temperature is above 50F..
E.
Staples, Bands, Wires, and Cement: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications
indicated.
F.
Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes:

applications indicated.
G.
Insulation Diameters:
insulation.
H.
Pipe, Valve and Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for fabrication of fitting covers for pipe,
valves and fittings.
I.
High Density Insulation:

1.
2.
J.
As recommended by insulation manufacturer for
Comply with ASTM C 585 for inner and outer diameters of rigid thermal
Calcium Silicate And Fiberglass: ASTM C 795 and MIL-I-24244.

Styrofoam Billets: ASTM C 518.
Pre-Engineered Thermal Hanger-Shield Inserts:

1.
2.
Calcium silicate insulation meeting ASTM C 795 and encased in steel insulation shield.
Flexible elastomeric piping insulation meeting ASTM C 534-01a, Type I with integral high
density pipe supports and encased in steel insulation shield.
a.
Manufacturer: Cooper B-Line / Armacell or approved equal
2.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS

A.
Rigid Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 612, Class 1, with density of 1.5 pounds per cubic
foot.
B.
Flexible Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation:

0.75pounds per cubic foot.
C.
Jackets for Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 921, Type I for ductwork with temperatures below
ambient; Type II for ductwork with temperatures above ambient. Protective jackets for ductwork
shall be Type III made of sheet aluminum in accordance with ASTM B 209, 3003 alloy, H-14 temper,
minimum 0.032 inch thick with a moisture barrier lining except where the protective jacket is applied
over a Type I vapor barrier jacket and with stainless steel draw bands.
D.
Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, pins with insulation retaining
washers, anchors, corner angles and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer
for applications indicated.
E.
Ductwork Insulation Compounds: Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective finishes
and similar compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.
F.
Protect insulation installed on exterior ductwork exposed to weather with one of the following
options:
1.
ASTM C 553, Type II, Class B-4, with density of
Encase insulation with aluminum jacket with weather-proof construction.

Duluth, GA
15250-2
Jacket shall be
1550000803
*** Issue 09/14/09
2.
3.
minimum 20 gauge corrugated aluminum with three aluminum attachment bands per section
and with aluminum fitting covers.
Provide Alumaguard RG-2400 rubberized bitumen with 60 mil. UV barrier foil faced membrane
as manufactured by Polyguard Products, Inc. Alumaguard shall only be applied when ambient
temperature is above 50F
Provide multi-ply, polymeric blend laminate jacketing of minimum 16 mils thickness, made with
a cold weather acrylic adhesive. Laminate shall be UV resistance with high puncture, tear
resistance and water vapor permeability of 0.0 perms.
a.
Armacell LLC [ArmaTuff PLUS II White][ArmaTuff PLUS II Silver] or comparable product.
2.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS

A.
Rigid Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 612, Class 2.
B.
Flexible Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 553, Type I, Class B-4.
C.
Jacketing Material for Equipment Insulation: Provide pre-sized glass cloth jacketing material, not less
than 7.8 ounces per square yard, or metal jacket at Installer's option, except as otherwise indicated.
D.
Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, cements, sealers, mastics and protective
finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.
E.
Equipment Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wire, wire netting, tape, corner angles,
anchors and stud pins as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION
A.
Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on chrome-plated exposed piping water hammer arrestors,
unions, strainers, check valves, balance cocks, flow regulators, drain lines from water coolers,
drainage piping located in crawl spaces or tunnels, buried piping, fire protection piping, and preinsulated equipment.
B.
Cold Piping:
1.
2.
C.
Hot Piping:
1.
2.
D.
Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold plumbing piping systems:

a.
Potable cold water piping.
b. Plumbing vents within 6 lineal feet of roof outlet.
c.
Horizontal interior above-ground storm drainage piping including overflow drain piping.
d. Horizontal and vertical interior above-ground storm drainage piping including overflow drain
piping.
e.
For storm drainage piping including overflow drain piping with horizontal run greater than
15 feet, insulate the vertical run of the piping from the roof drain body to the horizontal
run and all horizontal piping. For storm drainage piping including overflow storm drainage
piping with horizontal run less than 15 feet, insulate the vertical run of piping from the
roof drain body to the horizontal run, the horizontal run and the vertical run for a minimum
of 15 feet in total length of insulated piping. Insulate overflow storm drainage piping
within 15 feet of outlets.
f.
Condensate piping.
g. Auxiliary Condensate Piping.
Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of
insulation:
a.
Fiberglass: 1" thickness.
Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot plumbing piping systems:
a.
Potable hot water piping.
b. Potable hot water recirculation piping.
Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of
insulation:
a.
Fiberglass: 1" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 6", 1-1/2" thick for pipe sizes over
6".
P-traps:

Duluth, GA
15250-3
1550000803
*** Issue 09/14/09
1.
2.
E.
Piping In Masonry Wall Units:

1.
F.
Insulate P-traps receiving chilled water waste and P-traps of water coolers as described below:
a.
Flexible Unicellular: 1/2" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 2", 1 thick for pipe sizes
2 to 6 (largest size permitted).
Insulate P-traps receiving hot water waste above 140F as described below:
a.
Fiberglass: 1" thickness.
Insulate cold, hot and hot water recirculation piping installed inside of masonry wall units where
the piping needs to be insulated as the wall is constructed as described below:
a.
Flexible Unicellular: 1/2" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 2", 1 thick for pipe sizes
2 to 6 (largest size permitted).
Exterior piping:
1.
Encase cold, hot and hot water recirculation piping insulation with aluminum weather-proof
jackets.
3.2 DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION

A.
Insulation Omitted: Do not insulate fibrous glass ductwork, or lined ductwork. Refer to Section
Metal Ductwork for requirements for duct liner material.
B.
Application Requirements:
1.
2.
Insulate the following ductwork:

a.
Outdoor air intake ductwork between air entrance and fan inlet or HVAC unit inlet.
b. HVAC supply ductwork between fan discharge, or HVAC unit discharge, and room
terminal outlet.
1) Insulate neck and bells of supply diffusers.
c.
HVAC return ductwork between room terminal inlet and return fan inlet, or HVAC unit
inlet. Omit insulation on return ductwork located in return air ceiling plenums except
insulate all return air ductwork within 10 feet of exterior roof or wall penetrations.
d. HVAC plenums and unit housings not pre-insulated at factory or lined.
e.
Exhaust and relief air ductwork within 10 feet of exterior discharge outlets.
Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types and thickness
of insulation:
a.
Rigid Fiberglass: 2 thick, minimum R-8.0. Use 2" thick, minimum R-8 in machine, fan
and equipment rooms.
b.
C.
Exterior Ductwork:
1.
2.
D.
Flexible Fiberglass: 3 thick, minimum R-8.0 installed R-value, application limited to

concealed locations.
Application Requirements: Insulate the following exterior ductwork:

a.
HVAC supply, return, and outside air ductwork.
b. Plenums and unit housings not pre-insulated at factory or lined.
Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types and thickness
of insulation:
a.
Rigid Fiberglass: 2" thick, minimum R-8.0.
Range and hood grease exhaust ductwork: Refer to Section Ductwork Accessories for
requirements of fire-rated wrap insulation for grease exhaust duct.
3.3 EQUIPMENT INSULATION

A.
Cold Equipment (Below Ambient Temperature):

1.
2.
B.
Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold equipment unless pre-insulated at

factory:
a.
Roof drain bodies.
Insulate each item of equipment specified above with one of the following types and
thicknesses of insulation:
a.
Fiberglass: 2" thick for cold surfaces above 35 degrees F (2 degrees C) and 3" thick for
surfaces 35 degrees F (2 degrees C) and lower.
Hot Equipment (Above Ambient Temperature):

1.
Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot equipment unless pre-insulated at factory:
a.
Water heaters.

Duluth, GA
15250-4
1550000803
*** Issue 09/14/09
2.
b. Condensate pumps.
Insulate each item of equipment specified above with one of the following types and
thicknesses of insulation:
a.
Fiberglass: 2" thick, except 3" thick for low-pressure boilers and steam-jacketed heat
exchangers.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION

A.
General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose.
B.
Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting, testing, and
acceptance of tests.
C.
Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping
with full-length units of insulation, with a single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or
scraps abutting each other.
D.
Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure a
complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.
E.
Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on cold pipe insulation, and protect insulation with shields
or saddles to prevent puncture or other damage as specified in Section Supports and Anchors.
Provide high density insulation of material as specified herein and of length equivalent to pipe shield.
Provide pipe hangers sized for the pipe outside diameter plus insulation thickness. Seal butt joint
between insulation and high density insulation with wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement.
1.
Exception for vertical piping: Provide clamps sized for the outside diameter of the vertical pipe
and extend clamp through insulation. Seal penetrations of insulation and vapor barrier with wet
coat of vapor barrier lap cement.
F.
Provide pipe hangers for hot piping sized for the outside diameter of piping. Butt insulation to hanger
or riser clamp for vertical pipe. Seal exposed insulation with insulation sealer.
G.
Butt pipe insulation tightly at insulation joints. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide vapor barrier tape or
band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints
and seal joints with 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band.
H.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.
Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same
material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against
adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces
with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with
adjoining pipe insulation.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material,
density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less
than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts.
Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation
by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is
thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so
strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the
insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient
services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.
Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap
adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one
pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

Duluth, GA
15250-5
1550000803
*** Issue 09/14/09
7.
8.
9.
Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic.
Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for aboveambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a
smooth and well-shaped contour.
For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and
polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions.
Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using
PVC tape.
Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size
and color of pipe labels.
I.
Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test
connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation
at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish
with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
J.
Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness
as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.
When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from
flanges or union at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on
each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum
bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the
two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered
blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to
flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each
side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating
cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat
is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with
a metal jacket.
K.
Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations,
except where otherwise indicated.
L.
Exterior Piping: Provide aluminum weather-proof jackets over piping insulation, except flexible
elastomeric, on pipes installed exterior to the building.
M.
Exterior Flexible Elastomeric Piping: Provide multi-ply, polymeric blend laminate jacketing, 16 mils
thick with approved adhesive. Provide insulation shields so that the piping supports do not puncture,
cut or break the jacket. Seal all vertical joints with tape.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION

A.
General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its indented purpose.
B.
Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces.
C.
Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete
and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.
D.
Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent puncture and
other damage,
E.
Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar ductwork
penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.
F.
Lined Ductwork: Except as otherwise indicated, omit insulation on ductwork where internal
insulation or sound absorbing linings have been installed. At interface of lined and wrapped
ductwork, overlap lined ductwork by 2 feet (minimum) with wrapped insulation.
G.
Ductwork Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing outdoor
protective finish as recommended by manufacturer or protective jacket as specified. Install

Duluth, GA
15250-6
1550000803
*** Issue 09/14/09
protective jacket in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

H.
Corner Angles: Except for oven and hood exhaust duct insulation, install corner angles on external
corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering with jacketing.
I.
Where rectangular ducts are 24 (600mm) in width or greater, duct wrap shall be additionally
secured to the bottom of the duct with mechanical fasteners, spaced on 18 (425mm) centers
(maximum) to prevent sagging of insulation. Fasteners shall include 2-inch square self-sticking
galvanized carbon-steel base plates with minimum 0.106-inch diameter zinc-coated, low carbon
steel, fully annealed shank spindle, length to suit depth of insulation. Insulation shall be secured to
spindles with self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent cap
retention.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION

A.
General: Install equipment thermal insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves
intended purpose.
B.
Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clean and dry surfaces. Redo
poorly fitted joints. Do not use mastic or joint sealer as filler for gapping joints and excessive voids
resulting from poor workmanship.
C.
Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on equipment insulation and protect it to prevent puncture and
other damage.
D.
Do not apply insulation to equipment, breechings, or stacks while hot.
E.
Apply insulation using the staggered joint method for both single and double layer construction,
where feasible. Apply each layer of insulation separately.
F.
Coat insulated surfaces with layer of insulating cement, troweled in workmanlike manner, leaving a
smooth continuous surface. Fill in scored block, seams, chipped edges and depressions, and cover
over wire netting and joints with cement of sufficient thickness to remove surface irregularities.
G.
Cover insulated surfaces with all-service jacketing neatly fitted and firmly secured. Lap seams at
least 2". Apply over vapor barrier where applicable.
H.
Do not insulate boiler manholes, handholes, cleanouts, ASME stamp, and manufacturer's nameplate.
Provide neatly beveled edge at interruptions of insulation.
I.
Provide removable insulation sections to cover parts of equipment which must be opened periodically
for maintenance; include metal vessel covers, fasteners, flanges, frames and accessories.
J.
Equipment Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installation of weatherbarrier mastic protective finish, or jacketing, as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.7 EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR

A.
Repair existing mechanical insulation, that is damaged during this construction period. [Repair
existing insulation that is damaged where noted on the drawings.] Use insulation of same thickness
as existing insulation, install new jacket lapping and sealed over existing.
3.8 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT

A.
Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier
damage and moisture saturated units.
B.
Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work
during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration. Remove insulation that
has been damaged or gotten wet during shipping, storage or installation. Dry surfaces prior to
installation of new insulation that replaces the damaged or wet insulation.

Duluth, GA
15250-7
1550000803
*** Issue 09/14/09
SECTION 15400
SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
The requirements for seismic protection measures to be applied to mechanical/electrical equipment

and systems specified herein are in addition to any other items called for in other sections of these
specifications. All anchor connections to structure for support of mechanical/electrical equipment,
regardless of the need for seismic restraints, shall be shown on shop drawings and submitted for
review by the Engineer of Record.
B.
The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the type and location of seismic supports
required for the mechanical and electrical elements shown on the contract drawings based on the
Seismic Zone, the size and weight of the supported element and the distance from structure that the
element will be installed. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings as defined in Paragraph
Submittals showing the types and locations of required seismic supports.
C.
The Contractor may at his option, use pre-engineered seismic restraints produced by the
manufacturers specified in part 2.1 of this section. Spacing of seismic restraints may be modified in
these pre-engineered systems to meet Seismic Zone requirements when properly engineered and
documented.
D.
All seismic restraints, isolators, and isolation materials shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be
certified by the manufacturer.
E.
Seismic protection systems shall be installed in strict accordance with all applicable local, state,
and/or federal codes. Installation shall also be in strict accordance with component manufacturers
requirements and standards and with industry construction standards. Whenever conflicts occur
between codes or standards, the most stringent shall apply.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.
The manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic restraints shall provide submittals for products as
follows:
1.
B.
Descriptive Data:
a.
Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and specific restraints detailing
compliance with the specification.
b. Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing vibration isolators
and seismic restraints.
Shop Drawings:
engineer:
1.
The following items shall be signed and sealed by a registered professional
Shop drawings along with catalog cuts, templates, erection, and installation details, as
appropriate, for the items listed below shall be submitted for approval. Submittals shall be
complete in detail; shall indicate thickness, type, grade, class of metal, and dimensions; and
shall show construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation with relation to other
building systems and construction.
a.
Sway Braces
b. Flexible Couplings or Joints
c.
Resilient Type Vibration Devices
d. Equipment Anchor Connections
e.
Fabrication details for equipment bases including dimensions, structural member sizes and
support point locations.
f.
Details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment.
g. Where walls, floors, slabs or supplementary steel work are used for seismic restraint
locations, details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be
included and approved before the condition is accepted for installation. Restraint
manufacturers' submittals must include spacing, static loads and seismic loads at all
attachment and support points.
h. Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size and
locations for each piece of equipment.
Sprouts Famers MarketSEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 1550000803
Duluth, GA
15400-1
*** Issue 06/19/99
2.
C.
Seismic Certification and Analysis:

1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Layout drawings showing locations and types of seismic restraints for all equipment, ductwork,
piping and conduit shall be submitted. Locations for seismic restraints shall be coordinated with
the structure and with other mechanical and electrical components. Coordinate types of
restraints with the submitted schedule.
Seismic restraint calculations shall be provided for all connections of equipment to the
structure. Calculations shall be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five
years of seismic design experience, licensed in the state of the job location.
All restraining devices shall have a preapproval number from California OSHPD or some other
recognized government agency showing maximum restraint ratings. Preapprovals based on
independent testing are preferred to preapprovals based on calculations. Where preapproved
devices are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Testing and
calculations shall include shear and tensile loads as well as one test or analysis at 45 to the
weakest mode.
Analysis shall indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads and capacity of materials
utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods,
bolt diameter, embedment and/or welded length. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed
to accept, without failure, the forces detailed in section 3.9 acting through the equipment
center of gravity. Overturning moments may exceed forces at ground level.
Submit certification letter stating that the special inspector has received the factory training
necessary to perform the field inspection specified in Part 3 of this specification.

A.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: The professional engineer shall be legally qualified to practice in
the jurisdiction where the Project is located and shall be experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations
of vibration isolation bases and seismic restraints that are similar to those indicated for this Project in
material, design, and extent.
B.
Seismic Restraint Manual: A seismic restraint manual shall be prepared that contains the basis of the
design for the seismic support systems, product data, shop drawings and layout drawings. A copy
of the seismic restraint manual shall be kept on the jobsite for the duration of the project.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding
Code - Steel."
1.4 SPECIAL INSPECTION

A.
Requirements specified herein for special inspection of important aspects of the seismic design are in
addition to other requirements specified in other sections of this specification.
1.5 SEISMIC ZONES

A.
Seismic protection for seismic concerns of all mechanical and electric systems except fire protection
systems must meet minimum requirements of UBC Seismic Zone [1] [2A] [2B] [3] [4] with Seismic
Zone Factor Z of [0.075] [0.15] [0.20] [0.30] [0.40] and Occupancy Category of [I] [II] [III] [IV].
Seismic protection of water pipes for fire protection systems shall be installed in strict accordance
with the provisions of NFPA 13.
B.
Seismic protection for seismic concerns of all mechanical and electric systems except fire protection
systems must meet minimum requirements of [2000][2003][2006][2009] IBC for buildings classified
as Seismic Use Group [I], [II], [III] and Seismic Design Category [A][B][C][D][E][F]. Seismic protection
of water pipes for fire protection systems shall be installed in strict accordance with the provisions of
NFPA 13.
1.6 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A.
Mechanical/electrical equipment to be protected shall include the following items to the extent
required on the drawings or in other sections of these specifications:
Boilers
Water Heaters
Mechanical/Electrical Equipment Storage Racks

Water and Gas Piping
Duluth, GA
15400-2
*** Issue 06/19/99
Expansion Tanks
HVAC Sheet Metal Ducts
Transformers
Light Fixtures
Conduit
Drain, Waste and Vent Piping

Refrigerant Compressors
Control Panels
Switchboards (Floor Mounted)
Sprinkler Systems
1.7 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

A.
Mechanical systems shall include the following items to the extent required on the drawings or in
other sections of these specifications:
1.
2.
3.
Gas Distribution Systems

Water Supply Systems (Plumbing, Fire Protection)
Sanitary Sewer Systems
1.8 RELATED WORK

A.
Housekeeping Pads
1.
2.
B.
The restraint vendor shall prepare housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad
attachment to the structure details and design if not already indicated on the drawings.
Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with restraint vendor and sized to provide a minimum
edge distance of ten (10) bolt diameters all around the outermost anchor bolt to allow
development of full drill-in wedge anchor ratings. If cast-in anchors are to be used, the
housekeeping pads shall be sized to accommodate the ACI requirements for bolt coverage and
embedment.
Supplementary Support Steel

1.
Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all equipment, piping, ductwork, etc.
including roof mounted equipment, as required or specified.
1.9 ATTACHMENTS
A.
Contractor shall supply restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping pads, concrete inserts,
double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the requirements of the seismic vendor's
calculations.
1.10 PIPES, CONDUIT AND HVAC DUCTS THAT DO NOT REQUIRE SPECIAL SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A.
Seismic restraints may be omitted from the following installations:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
All piping, except gas, medical gas, high-hazard and fire suppression piping, suspended by
individual hangers 12 inches or less in length from the top of pipe to the bottom of the support
for the hanger.
All HVAC ducts suspended by hangers 12 inches or less in length from the top of the duct to
the bottom of the support for the hanger.
All conduit suspended by hangers 12 inches or less in length from the top of the conduit to the
bottom of the support for the hanger.
Gas piping less than or equal to 1 inch inside diameter.
All of the piping, except gas, medical gas, high-hazard and fire suppression piping, less than 21/2 inches inside diameter.
All electrical conduit less than 2-1/2 inches inside diameter.
All rectangular air handling ducts less than 6 square feet in cross sectional area.
All round air handling ducts less than 32 inches in diameter.

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Seismic Restraints: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include the following or approved equals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
Loos & Company, Inc.
Uni-Strut
Duluth, GA
15400-3
*** Issue 06/19/99
6.
B.
Vibro-Acoustics
Flexible Couplings: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include the following or approved equals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Flexonics, Inc.
Hyspan
Resistoflex
2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A.
Isolator Pads: Oil and water resistant and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of the
equipment supported.
1.
Rubber Isolator Pads: Elastomer (neoprene or silicone) arranged in single or multiple layers and
molded with a nonslip pattern and steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness to provide uniform
loading over the pad area.
1.
Fiberglass or Cork Isolator Pads: Molded cork or glass fiber not less than 1 inch thick and
precompressed through 10 compression cycles at 3 times the rated load.
2.
Load Range: From 10 to 50 psig and a deflection not less than 0.08 inch per 1 inch of
thickness. Do not exceed a loading of 50 psig.
B.
Rubber Isolator Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene
isolator elements, with encapsulated top- and baseplates. Factory-drilled and tapped top plate for
bolted equipment mounting. Factory-drilled baseplate for bolted connection to structure. Color-code
to indicate capacity range.
C.
Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring-type isolators.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at
rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 1.0 times the rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation
or failure.
Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to a 1/4-inch thick, rubber
isolator pad attached to the baseplate underside. Size baseplates to limit floor loading to the
structural design criteria. Contact the Engineer if design criteria is not shown on the drawings.
Top Plates: Provide threaded studs for fastening and leveling equipment.
Finishes: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.
Restrained Spring Isolators: Vertically restrained, freestanding, laterally stable, steel open-spring-type
isolators.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Housing: Welded steel with resilient vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind
loads or when weight is removed. Factory-drilled baseplate for bolting to structure and bonded
to a 1/4-inch thick, rubber isolator pad attached to the baseplate underside. Provide adjustable
equipment mounting and leveling bolt.
rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 0.8 times the rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation
or failure.
Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use. Hot-dip galvanized
for metal components on isolators for exterior use.
E.
Rubber Hangers: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene isolator
elements bonded to formed-steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code to
indicate capacity range.
F.
Spring Hangers: Combination spring and elastomeric hanger with coil spring and elastomeric insert in
compression.
1.
Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for 30 degrees of
angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
Duluth, GA
15400-4
*** Issue 06/19/99
2.
3.
4.
5.
rated load.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Install elastomeric grommet at
bottom connection for isolation between anchor bolt and base plate or housing.
Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate capacity range.
2.3 SEISMIC CONTROLS

A.
Thrust Restraints: Combination spring and elastomeric restraints with coil spring and elastomeric
insert in compression. Factory set for thrust.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Manufactured Seismic Snubbers: All-directional snubbers.

1.
C.
Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for 30 degrees of
angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
rated load.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate capacity range.
Construction: Interlocking steel members restrained by a 3/4-inch- thick, replaceable, shockabsorbing neoprene insert. Maintain 1/8-inch clearance in all directions between rigid and
resilient surfaces.
Fabricated Seismic Snubbers: Welded structural-steel shapes designed and fabricated to restrain
equipment or vibration isolation bases from excessive movement during a seismic event. Design to
resist gravity forces identified by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Construction: Welded steel shapes conforming to ASTM A 36.

Resilient Components: 3/4-inch thick, replaceable, shock-absorbing neoprene insert.
2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION BASES

A.
Fabricated Steel Bases: Structural-steel bases and rails designed and fabricated by the isolation
equipment manufacturer.
Include equipment static loadings, power transmission, component
misalignment, and cantilever loadings.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Fabricate bases to shapes required, with welded structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars
conforming to ASTM A 36. Include support brackets to anchor base to isolation units. Include
prelocated equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails.
Design and fabricate bases to result in the lowest possible mounting height with not less than
1-inch clearance above the floor.
Concrete-Filled Inertia Bases: Weld reinforcing bars to the structural frame. Pour concrete into
base with relocated equipment anchor bolts.
Weld steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation mountings, and provide for anchor bolts and
equipment support.
Configure inertia bases to accommodate equipment supported.
Pump Bases: Size to support pump and piping elbows.
Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.
2.5 VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF CURBS

A.
Description: Factory-assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb designed to
resiliently support roof-mounted equipment and to withstand 125-mph wind impinging laterally
against the side of the equipment. Design restraints to meet seismic requirements of authorities
B.
Components: Upper support frame; lower support assembly; freestanding, unhoused, laterally stable
steel springs; vertical and horizontal restraints.
1.
2.
Lower Support Assembly: Provide a means of attachment to the building structure and include
a wood nailer strip for attachment of roof material and 2 inches of rigid insulation on the inside
of the assembly.
Spring Isolators: As indicated or scheduled. Include adjustment bolt to permit leveling of
equipment after installation. Attach to lower assembly with a rubber isolation pad. Locate
spring isolators so they are accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of the
Duluth, GA
15400-5
*** Issue 06/19/99
3.
installation without interfering with the integrity of the roof.

Water Seal: Elastomeric seal conforming to UL Class A roofing materials, attached to the upper
support frame, extending down past the wood nailer of the lower support assembly, and
counterflashed over the roof materials.
2.6 MATERIALS
A.
Bolts and Nuts:

1.
2.
Squarehead bolts and heavy hexagon nuts, ANSI B18.2.1 and B18.2.2, and ASTM A307 or A
576.
Bolts, underground, ASTM A 325.
B.
Sway Brace: Except for pipes, material shall be structural steel conforming to ASTM A 36. Steel
pipes shall conform to ASTM A 501.
C.
Flexible Couplings: Flexible couplings shall have same pressure ratings as adjoining pipe. Where
required by these specifications, flexible couplings shall be one of the following:
1.
2.
D.
Flexible ball joints conforming to the following requirements may be employed on aboveground
piping. Joints shall have cast or wrought steel casing and ball parts capable of 360-degree
rotation plus not less than 15-degree angular movement. Joints shall be certified to be suitable
for the service intended by the manufacturer, based on not less than 2 years' satisfactory
operation in a similar application.
Flexible metal hose type joints may be used for aboveground or underground piping, up to 8"
pipe diameter. Where permitted in other sections of these specifications, joints utilizing splithalf couplings with grooved or shouldered pipe ends may be used.
Resilient Vibration Isolation Devices:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Selection of anchor bolts for vibration isolation devices and/or snubbers to equipment base and
foundations shall follow the same procedure as in paragraph "Anchor Bolts".
Multidirectional Seismic Snubbers: Multidirectional seismic snubbers employing elastomeric
pads shall be installed on all floor or slab-mounted equipment. Snubbers shall provide 0.25
inches vertical and horizontal clearances. Vertical forces shall be resisted by the snubber
medium. Provide additional structural steel supports/frame necessary for equipment to insure
proper restraint.
Seismically Restrained Vibration Isolators: As an option to multidirectional seismic snubbers, a
unitized adjustable open spring isolator and a welded steel housing designed to resist seismic
forces in all directions may be utilized. Restraint surfaces which engage under seismic motion
shall be cushioned with a resilient elastomer, neoprene or equal, to protect equipment.
Restraints shall allow a maximum of 1/4" movement before engaging and shall not interfere in
normal operation. Housing shall allow for visual inspection of the spring. The entire assembly
shall have a certified minimum rating of 1g. in all directions. Submit test data from independent
testing lab.
Isolator shall be stable spring with a minimum Ky/Ky of 1.0 and the spring shall be isolated from
the housing by an internal elastomeric pad on its base for sound absorption. Spring shall have a
combination leveling bolt and equipment fastening device. Nuts and bolts shall be zoneelectroplated to prevent corrosion. Adjusting bolt and equipment attachment shall have a
minimum rating of 1g. Bolting equipment to isolator with bolts smaller than main adjusting bolt
will not be allowed.
Baseplate shall have adequate means for bolting to the structure. If elastomeric pad for sound
absorption is on baseplate of housing, anchor bolts shall be isolated with elastomeric grommets.
2.7 CABLE RESTRAINT

A.
Restraint assembly for suspended equipment, piping and ductwork consisting of galvanized steel
aircraft cable attached to galvanized steel thimbles or steel assemblies with two clamping bolts.
Thimbles or assemblies shall be specifically designed for cable service, shall be able to swivel to final
installation angle and shall be securely fastened to the equipment or equipment base and the building
structure. Cables shall be sized for the force required per code with a minimum safety factor of 2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SWAY BRACES FOR PIPING AND DUCTS
Duluth, GA
15400-6
*** Issue 06/19/99
A.
Sway braces shall be installed on piping, conduit and HVAC ducts to preclude damage during seismic
activity. Provisions of this paragraph apply to all piping within a 5-foot line around outside of
building unless buried in the ground. Piping grouped for support on trapeze-type hangers shall be
braced at the same intervals as determined by the smallest diameter pipe of the group. No trapezetype hanger shall be secured with less than two 1/2 inch bolts. Bracing rigidly attached to pipe
flanges, or similar, shall not be used where is would interfere with thermal expansion of piping.
B.
Sway Braces for Piping and Conduit:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Horizontal Runs: Provide transverse and longitudinal sway bracing at intervals as required for
the pipe size and seismic zone.
Vertical Runs: Vertical runs of piping 1-1/2 or greater diameter shall be braced at not more
than 10-foot vertical intervals. For piping smaller than 1-1/2 diameter, bracing shall be
provided at no more than 4-foot spacing.
Anchor Rods, Angles, and Bars: Anchor rods, angles, and bars shall be bolted to either pipe
clamps or pipe flanges at one end and cast-in place concrete or masonry insert of clip angles
bolted to the steel structure on the other end. Rods shall be solid metal or pipe as specified
below. Anchor rods, angles, and bars shall not exceed lengths given in Table III.
Clamps: Clamps on uninsulated pipes shall be applied directly to pipe. Insulated piping shall
have clamps applied over insulation vapor barrier with high-density inserts and metal protection
shields under each clamp.
Bolts: Bolts used for attachment of anchors to pipe and structure shall be not less than 1/2
inch diameter.
Sway Braces for HVAC Ducts:

1.
2.
Transverse Sway Bracing: Transverse sway bracing shall be provided at each horizontal turn of
45 degrees or more, at the end of each duct run, and otherwise at intervals as required for duct
size and seismic zone. Walls which ducts penetrate may be considered transverse braces.
Longitudinal Sway Bracing: Longitudinal sway bracing shall be provided at intervals as required
for duct size and seismic zone. Transverse bracing for one duct section may also act as
longitudinal bracing for a duct section connected perpendicular to it, if the bracing is installed
within 4 feet of the intersection, and it is sized for the larger duct.
3.2 PIPING AND CONDUIT PENETRATION REQUIREMENTS

A.
All piping from 1 to 3-1/2 inches diameter shall be installed with 1" clearance on all sides and at
every floor, and masonry or concrete wall penetration. A 2" clearance is required for pipe sizes
larger than 3-1/2".
B.
Insulated and uninsulated pipes and conduit passing through walls and partitions (except smoke and
fire walls and partitions) shall be run through not less than No. 12 gauge steel pipe sleeves finishing
flush with the finished wall surfaces. Where covered pipes pass through the walls or partitions,
same shall be centered in steel pipe sleeves. All sleeves or thimbles shall be independent of the
pipes they enclose and centered in sleeves to insure free movement of the pipes without injury to
pipe insulation, wall or other finish. Caulk around all pipes and pipe sleeves passing through walls or
ceilings with untarred jute and make airtight and soundproof.
C.
Insulated and uninsulated pipes and conduit passing through fire, or fire and smoke walls and
partitions shall be run through rated wall sleeve assemblies sealed with Hilti CS-240 firestop sealant
or approved equal UL approved sealant meeting the approval of the authority having jurisdiction and
as indicated on details on drawings.
D.
Pipe sleeves through outside walls shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe sleeves with 1-1/2"collar welded
to center of sleeve and cast in wall. Caulk between sleeves and pipes and make watertight.
E.
Materials and equipment shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements
specified below:
3.3 SPREADERS
A. Provide spreaders between racked or adjacent piping runs to prevent contact during seismic activity
whenever pipe or insulated pipe surfaces are less than 4 inches apart or four times the maximum
displacement due to seismic force. Spreaders to be applied at same interval as sway braces.
Spreaders shall be applied to surface of bare or insulated hot pipe and over insulation utilizing highdensity inserts and pipe protection shields where vapor-barrier-type insulation is employed.
3.4 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS OR JOINTS
Duluth, GA
15400-7
*** Issue 06/19/99
A. Building Piping: Flexible couplings or joints in building piping shall be provided in the following
locations on pipe risers:
1. Within 24 inches of the top and bottom of all risers. This requirement may be deleted in risers
less than 3 ft. in length, and in risers 3 to 7 ft. in length, one flexible coupling is adequate.
2. Cast-iron waste and vent piping need only comply with if caulked joints are used. Flexible bell
and spigot pipe joints using rubber gaskets or no-hub fittings may be used at each branch
adjacent to tees and elbows for underground waste piping inside of building to comply with
these requirements.
B.
Underground Piping: All underground piping and 4-inch or larger conduit, except heat distribution
system, shall have flexible couplings installed adjacent to building. Additional flexible couplings shall
be provided as follows:
1.
2.
3.
On each side of the joints of demarcation between soils having widely differing degrees of
consolidation.
At all points that can be considered to act as anchors.
On every branch of a tee and each side of an elbow.
3.5 ANCHOR BOLTS

A.
All floor or pad mounted equipment required by any Section of these specifications shall use cast-inplace or female wedge type anchor bolts. Anchor bolts must conform to ASTM A 307. Female
wedge anchors shall have an evaluation report number from ICBA Evaluation Service. Anchor bolts
shall have an embedded straight length equal to at least twelve times nominal diameter of the bolt.
If the size and number of the anchor bolts are not shown on the drawings, then anchor bolts shall
conform to the applicable codes and standards for the various equipment weights or the
manufacturer's installation recommendations, whichever is the most stringent.
3.6 EQUIPMENT SWAY BRACING

A.
B.
C.
Provide for all items supported from overhead floor or roof structures with the following
requirements:
Braces shall consist of angles, rods, bars, or pipes secured at both ends with not less than 1/2 inch
bolts. Braces shall conform to all applicable codes and standards. Bracing shall be provided in two
planes of directions, 90 degrees apart, for each item of equipment. Sufficient braces shall be
provided for equipment to resist a horizontal force equal to 50 percent of the weight of equipment
without exceeding safe working stress of bracing components. Details of all equipment bracing shall
be submitted for approval.
In lieu of bracing with vertical supports, these items may be supported with hangers inclined at 45
degrees directed up and radially away from equipment and oriented symmetrically in 90 degree
intervals on the horizontal plane, bisecting the angles of each corner of the equipment, provided that
supporting members are properly sized to support operating weight of equipment when hangers are
included at a 45 degree angle.
3.7 LIGHTING FIXTURES IN BUILDINGS

A.
In addition to the requirements of the preceding paragraphs, lighting fixtures shall conform to the
following:
1. Fixture supports shall be malleable iron.
2. Loop and hook or swivel hanger assemblies for pendant fixtures shall be fitted with a restraining
device to hold the stem in the support position during earthquake motions. Pendant-supported
fluorescent fixtures shall also be provided with a flexible hanger device at the attachment to the
fixture channel to preclude breaking of the support. The motion of swivels or hinged joints shall
not cause sharp bends in conductors or damage to insulation.
3. All lighting fixtures installed in suspended ceilings shall be positively attached to the suspended
ceiling system. The attachment device shall have a capacity of 100 percent of the lighting
fixture weight acting in any direction. In addition, each fixture shall have a minimum of two 12
gauge safety hanger wires attached to the fixture and to the building structure above.
Authority having jurisdiction shall approve Method of attaching fixtures to ceiling system.
4. A supporting assembly that is intended to be mounted on an outlet box shall be designed to
accommodate mounting features on 4 inch boxes, 3 inch plaster rings, and fixture studs.
5. Surface-mounted fluorescent individual or continuous-row fixtures shall be attached to a
seismic-resistant ceiling support system. Fixture support devices for attaching to suspended
ceilings shall be a locking-type scissor clamp or a full loop band that will securely attach to the
ceiling support. Fixtures attached to underside of a structural slab shall be properly anchored to
Duluth, GA
15400-8
*** Issue 06/19/99
6.
the slab at each corner of the fixture.

Each wall-mounted emergency light unit shall be secured in a manner to hold the unit in place
during a seismic disturbance.
3.8 CEILING MOUNTED AIR TERMINALS OR SERVICES INSTALLED IN LAY-IN CEILINGS

A.
Positively attach to the ceiling suspension main runners or to cross runners with the same carrying
capacity as the main runners.
B.
Terminals or services weighing not more than 56 pounds, in addition to the above, shall have two
No. 12 gauge hangers connected from the terminal or service or to the structure above. These wires
may be slack.
C.
Terminals or services weighing more than 56 pounds shall be supported directly from the structure
above by approved hangers.
3.9 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

A.
The following specific items of equipment to be furnished under this contract shall be constructed
and assembled so as to be capable of withstanding the horizontal equivalent static force of 0.11
times the operating weight of the equipment, at vertical center of gravity of the equipment without
causing permanent deformation, dislocations, separation of components, or other damage, which
would render the equipment inoperative for significant periods of time following an earthquake.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Air Handling Units

Transformers
Switch Boards and Switch Gears
Motor Control Centers
Free Standing Electric Motors
3.10 EMERGENCY GAS SUPPLY CONNECTOR AND SERVICE INTERRUPTION

A.
Provide facilities, which are to be connected to natural gas distribution systems with an
aboveground, locked, valved and capped emergency gas supply connection. Make provision for
attachment of a portable, commercial-sized cylinder system to this connection. Locate connection
within 12 inches of the exterior wall and clearly mark with an appropriate metal sign mounted on the
wall above.
B.
Provide with an automatic device to safely interrupt the flow of gas to the building in case of an
earthquake.
3.11 INSTALLATION
A.
Install and anchor seismic-control products according to manufacturer's written instructions and
B.
Anchor interior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt isolator
baseplates to structural floors as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Anchor exterior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt isolator
baseplates to structural supports as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Fill concrete inertia bases, after installing base frame, with 3000-psig concrete, and trowel to a
smooth, hard finish.
E.
Install pipe connectors at connections for equipment supported on vibration isolators.
F.
Install cables to prevent excessive seismic motion and so arranged that they do not engage during
normal operation.
3.12 FLOOR MOUNTED EQUIPMENT SUPPORT

A.
Vibration Isolation Bases: Mount equipment on structural-steel bases or concrete inertia bases.
B.
Snubbers: Install the required number of seismic snubbers on each spring-mounted piece of
equipment. Locate snubbers as close as possible to the vibration isolators and bolt to supporting
structure.

A.
Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
Duluth, GA
15400-9
*** Issue 06/19/99
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal
operations.
B.
Adjust thrust restraints for a maximum of 1/4 inch of movement at start and stop.
3.14 SPECIAL INSPECTION

A.
Special Inspector: Employ a factory trained representative during construction to observe the work
specified and to ensure that it conforms to the Contract documents. Factory trained representative
shall be a qualified person who shall demonstrate competence and specialized experience, to the
satisfaction of the engineer of record, for inspection of the seismic protection of mechanical and
electrical equipment.
B.
Inspection Requirements: The factory trained representative shall periodically inspect the following
systems to verify conformance with the contract documents and the local code:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Anchorage of electrical equipment for emergency or standby power systems in structures

assigned to Seismic Design Category C, D, E or F.
Installation of anchorage of other electrical equipment in structures assigned to Seismic Design
Category E or F.
Installation of piping systems intended to carry flammable, combustible or highly toxic contents
and their associated mechanical units in structures assigned to Seismic Design Category C, D, E
or F.
Installation of HVAC ductwork that will contain hazardous materials in structures assigned to
Seismic Design Category C, D, E or F.
Installation of vibration isolation systems in structures assigned to Seismic Design Category C,
D, E or F where a nominal clearance of 0.25 inches or less between the equipment support
frame and restraint is required.
C.
Inspection Reports: Ensure that the inspection report is furnished from the special inspector to the
engineer of record. At the end of the work, ensure that a final, signed report is submitted by the
special inspector, stating whether the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of the
special inspectors knowledge, in conformance with the Contract documents.
D.
Discrepancies: Discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Contractor for
correction, and then, if uncorrected, to the architect and engineer of record.
Duluth, GA
15400-10
*** Issue 06/19/99
SECTION 15411
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes domestic cold water, hot water, and hot water recirculation piping, fittings,
and specialties within the building to a point 5 feet outside the building.
B.
Contractors Option:
1.
2.
C.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
D.
The Division 15 contractor may provide grooved, press to connect or push to connect
mechanical joints, couplings, fittings, valves and related components as an option in lieu of, in
whole or in part, copper sweat, brazing, threaded or flanged piping methods. Grooved, Press to
Fit or Push to Connect plumbing piping where used must be provided in compliance with
specification Section 15412 Mechanically Joined Plumbing Piping Systems.
a.
Grooved couplings may be used at equipment connections where specified for vibration
isolation control only.
Grooved, press to connect or push to connect mechanical joints, couplings, fittings, valves and
related components shall not be provided for natural gas piping in lieu of welded, threaded or
flanged piping methods.
Division 2 Section "Earthwork," for trenching and backfilling materials and methods for
underground piping installations.
Division 2 Section "Water Service Systems," for water service piping beginning from 5'-0"
outside the building.
Division 7 Section "Penetrations Firestopping," for materials and methods for fire barrier
penetrations.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers," for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations
through basement and foundation walls.
Division 11 Section Kitchen and Food Service Equipment, for faucets and valves furnished
with the food service and kitchen equipment.
Division 12 Section Laboratory Casework and Fixtures, for laboratory trim installed in the
casework.
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification," for labeling and identification of water
distribution piping.
wall and floor penetrations and equipment pads.
Division 15 Section "Basic Piping Material and Methods," for materials and methods for
strainers, flexible connectors and mechanical sleeve seals.
Division 15 Section "Valves," for materials and methods for installing water distribution piping
valves.
Division 15 Section "Supports and Anchors," for insulation shields, materials and methods for
hanging and supporting water distribution piping.
Division 15 Section "Insulation," for materials and methods for insulating water distribution
piping.
Division 15 Section Drainage and Vent Systems, for material and methods for trap primer
outlet piping.
Products installed but not furnished under this Section include water meters that will be provided by
the utility company to the site and ready for installation. Following is the name and address of the
utility company:
________________________________
________________________________
________________________________
1.2 DEFINITIONS

Duluth, GA

15411-1
1550000803
*** Issue 06/16/10
A.
Water Distribution Pipe: A pipe within the building or on the premises that conveys water from the
water service pipe or meter to the points of usage.
B.
Water Service Pipe: The pipe from the water main or other source of potable water supply to the
water distribution pipe of the building served.
C.
Pipe sizes used in this Specification are nominal pipe size (NPS).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
General:
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specifications Sections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Product data for each piping specialty and valve specified.

Welder Certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements
specified in Article "Quality Assurance" below.
Certification of Compliance with ASME and UL fabrication requirements specified in Article
"Quality Assurance" below.
Maintenance data for each piping specialty and valve specified for inclusion in Maintenance
Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section "General Mechanical Requirements."
Test reports specified in Part 3 of this Section.

A.
Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following codes:

1.
2.
3.
A.
ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves
and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications" for
Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators.
Comply with the provisions of the codes and reference standards in Section 15010.1.3.
Comply with the installation requirements for CPVC pipe and CPVC CTS tube per the Lubrizol
Flowguard Gold and CORZAN Design and Installation Manual.
1.5 SPARE PARTS

A.
Maintenance Stock: Furnish one valve key for each key-operated wall hydrant, hose bibb, fixture
supply, or faucet installed.

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Flow Control Valves:

a.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
b. Bell & Gosset, ITT
c.
NIBCO
Hose Bibbs with Vacuum Breaker:
a.
Chicago Faucet Co.
b. Eljer, A Household International Company
c.
T & S Brass & Bronze Works, Inc.
Hose Bibbs:
a.
Lee Brass Co.
b. Mansfield Plumbing Products
c.
Nibco, Inc.
d. Prier, Inc.
e.
Watts Regulator Co.
f.
Woodford Mfg. Co.
Wall/Yard Hydrants:
a.
Josam Co.
b. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co.
c.
Prier, Inc.

Duluth, GA

15411-2
1550000803
*** Issue 06/16/10
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
d. Tyler Pipe/Wade Div.; Subs. of Tyler Corp.

e.
Woodford Mfg. Co.
f.
Zurn Industries Inc., Hydromechanics Div.
Backflow Preventers:
a.
Cla-Val Co.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c.
Febco
d. Hersey Products, Inc.
e.
Watts Regulator Co.
f.
Zurn Industries Inc. Wilkins Regulator Div.
Self Contained Pressure-Reducing Valves:
a.
Cash (A. W.) Valve Mfg. Corp.
b. Cla-Val Co.
c.
Watts Regulator Co.
d. Zurn Industries Inc., Wilkins Regulator Div.
Pilot Operated Pressure-Reducing Valves:
a.
Cla-Val Co.
b. OCV
c.
Watts Regulator Co.
d. Zurn Industries Inc. Wilkins Regulator Div.
Water Meters:
a.
America Meter Company
b. Badger Meter, Inc.
c.
Hays Div., Romac Industries
d. Hersey Products, Inc.
e.
Neptune Water Meter Co.; Subs. Neptune Intl. Corp.
f.
Rockwell Intl.; Measurement & Flow Control Div.
Relief Valves:
a.
Cash (A. W.) Valve Mfg. Corp.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c.
Watts Regulator Co.
d. Zurn Industries, Inc. Wilkins Regulator Div.
Piston Type Water Hammer Arresters:
a.
Amtrol, Inc.
b. Josam Co.
c.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
d. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co.
e.
f.
Watts Regulator Co.
g. Zurn Industries, Inc. Wilkins Regulator Div.
Thermostatic Mixing Valves
a.
Bradley
b. Lawler Manufacturing Co., Inc.
c.
Leonard Valve Co.
d. Powers Process Controls
e.
Symmons Industries, Inc.
Trap Primers and Distribution Units
a.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
b. MIFAB
c.
Sioux Chief
Plumbing Pipe Support Brackets
a.
Holdrite
b. Sioux Chief
Tube Suspension Clamps
Sioux Chief or approved Equivalent
Stainless Steel Compression Fittings
a.
Swagelok by the Crawford fitting Company
b. Parker
2.2 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS, GENERAL

Duluth, GA

15411-3
1550000803
*** Issue 06/16/10
A.
Pipe and Tube: Refer to Part 3, Article "Pipe Applications", for identification of systems where the
materials listed below are used.
B.
Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L Water Tube, drawn temper.
C.
Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type K Water Tube, annealed temper.
D.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, schedule 40, Grade B, galvanized, threaded ends.
E.
Ductile-Iron Pipe:
mortar lining.
F.
PVC Pipe and Fittings: Schedule 40 pressure pipe meeting ASTM D1785 with solid wall PVC
meeting ASTM D1784 with cell class 12454.
1.
G.
AWWA C151 or AWWA C115 ductile-iron pipe, with AWWA C104 cement-
Solvent: ASTM D2564.
Polyethylene (PE): Tube and Bends: Tubing meeting ASTM F1282, AWWA C901, CSA B137.1.
Fittings meeting ASTM F1055, D2609, D2683, D3261, and CSA B137.1.
2.3 FITTINGS
A.
Wrought Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern.
B.
Galvanized Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern, for threaded
joints. Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1.
C.
Ductile-Iron Gasketed Fittings: AWWA C110 or AWWA C153, 150 psi rating, with cement mortar
lining and AWWA C111 rubber gaskets.
D.
PVC Pressure Fittings: Meeting ASTM D2466 with solvent cement socket joints.
E.
Brass Fittings: Chrome plated ANSI B16, Class 125 with threaded connections.
F.
Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 125, raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.
G.
Bronze Flanges: ANSI B16.24, Class 150, raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.
H.
Unions: ASME B16.39, malleable iron, Class 150, hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joints,
metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces, female threaded ends. Threads shall conform to ASME
B1.20.1.
I.
Dielectric Unions: Threaded, solder, or grooved-end connections as required to suit application;

constructed to isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and prevent corrosion.
J.
PVC to Ductile Iron Adapter Flanges: EBBA Iron, Inc. Series 2000PV or approved equivalent.

A.
Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B32, 95-5 Tin-Antimony.
B.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BAg Silver.
C.
Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and design
temperatures and pressures.
D.
Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
2.5 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

A.
General-duty valves (i.e., gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves) are specified in Division 15
Section "Valves." Special duty valves are specified below by their generic name; refer to Part 3,
Article "Valve Applications" for specific uses and applications for each valve specified.
2.6 SPECIAL DUTY VALVES

A.
Flow Control Valves: 400 PSI WOG, 2 piece, ball valve, handle, memory stop, with threaded-end
connections conforming to ASME B1.20.1.
B.
Flow Control Valves: 400 psi WOG, 2 piece bronze, ball valve, handle, memory stop, with solderend connections.

Duluth, GA

15411-4
1550000803
*** Issue 06/16/10
A.
Hose Connections: Hose connections shall have garden hose thread outlets conforming to ASME
B1.20.7.
B.
Hose Bibbs: Bronze body with chrome- or nickel-plated finish, with renewable composition disc,
integral vacuum breaker, wheel handle, 1/2- or 3/4-inch solder inlet, hose outlet.
C.
Recessed Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants: Cast-bronze box, with chrome-plated face, tee handle key,
vacuum breaker, hinged locking cover, 3/4-inch inlet, and hose outlet. Bronze casing shall be length
to suit wall thickness.
D.
Nonfreeze Post Hydrants: Cast-bronze hydrant, with tee-handle key, drain hole, vacuum breaker,
3/4-inch inlet, and hose outlet. Bronze casing with cast-iron casing guard shall be length to suit
depth of bury.
E.
Backflow Preventers: Comply with requirements of ASSE Standard 1013.

capacities shall be as scheduled and described below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
2.
3.
4.
High Capacity Self Contained Type: Bronze body with stainless steel trim, direct acting, springloaded diaphragm type, suitable for 300 psi inlet pressure. Provide factory supplied strainer
assembly.
Self Contained Type: Bronze body with stainless steel trim, integral strainer, direct acting,
spring loaded diaphragm type, suitable for 300 psi inlet pressure and 140F hot water.
Pilot Operated Diaphragm Type: Ductile or cast iron body with an internal and external fusion
epoxy coating, flanged or threaded connections, stainless steel spring and removable seat,
suitable for 300 psi inlet pressure.
Pilot Operated Diaphragm Pressure Sustaining Type: Ductile or cast iron body with an internal
and external fusion epoxy coating, flanged or threaded connections, stainless steel spring and
removable seat, suitable for 300 psi inlet pressure.
Water Meters: Provide water meters with registration in gallons.

1.
2.
H.
Reduced Pressure Zone Type: Provide with stainless steel working parts, air gap drain device,
strainer, spring loaded check valves, and test cocks. Provide ball valves for sizes 2 and smaller
and AWWA gate valves for sizes 2-1/2 and larger. Provide bronze body for sizes 2 and
smaller and iron body with fused epoxy coating for 2-1/2 and larger.
Double Check Type: Provide with stainless steel working parts, strainer, spring loaded check
valves, and test cocks. Provide ball valves for sizes 2 and smaller and AWWA gate valves for
sizes 2-1/2 and larger. Provide bronze body for sizes 2 and smaller and iron body with fused
epoxy coating for 2-1/2 and larger.
Pressure Vacuum Breaker Type: Bronze body, complete with check valve, spring-loaded float
disc, test cocks, atmospheric vent, and ball type shut off valves.
Atmospheric Vacuum Breaker Type: Chrome plated bronze body, complete with float disc and
atmospheric vent.
Vacuum Breakers: Hose connection vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE Standard 1011,
with finish to match hose connection.
Pressure Reducing Valves: Comply with requirements of ASSE Standard 1003. Types, sizes and
capacities shall be as scheduled and described below.
1.
G.
Types, sizes and
Water Meter - 2 Inches And Smaller: Disc type conforming to AWWA C700.
Remote Registration System: Utility company standards.
Relief Valves: Sizes for relief valves shall be in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Codes for indicated capacity of the appliance for which installed.
1.
Combined Pressure-Temperature Relief Valves: Bronze body, test lever, thermostat, complying
with ANSI Z21.22 listing requirements for temperature discharge capacity. Temperature relief
valves shall be factory set at 210 deg F, and pressure relief at 150 psi.
I.
Piston Type Water Hammer Arresters: Piston type, with casing of type L copper tube and spun
copper ends, nylon piston with two EPDM Orings pressure lubricated with FDA approved silicone,
pressure rated for 250 psi, tested and certified in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201 or ASSE
1010.
J.
Bellows Type Water Hammer Arresters: Bellows type, with 304 stainless steel casing construction,
threaded pipe connection, precharged upper chamber, sealed in stainless steel diaphragm, maximum
working pressure of 150 psi, maximum shock pressure of 300 psi, tested and certified in accordance
with PDI Standard WH-201 or ASSE 1010.

Duluth, GA

15411-5
1550000803
*** Issue 06/16/10
K.
Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Capacity as scheduled.

1.
Bronze body construction, non-corrosive parts, tamper resistant temperature adjustment, union
inlets with strainers, checks, stops, pressure reducing valve for larger mixing valves, and dial
thermometer. Valve shall be designed to fail to the cold side of the system. Maximum pressure
drop shall not be exceeded for the scheduled flow rate scheduled on the drawings.
L.
Trap Primers: Brass construction, line pressure operation, capacity to prime number of traps as
indicated with distribution units complying with requirements of ASSE Standard 1018.
M.
Pipe Support Brackets:

1.
2.
3.
N.
Sheet Stud Bracket: 20 gauge copper with nominal copper tube holes of on 2 centers and
holes of or 1 on 4 centers.
Pipe Mounted Bracket: 20 gauge copper or plastic bracket with clamps for securing copper
water tube and stainless steel hose clamp for securing bracket to vertical waste and vent pipe
in wall.
Carrier Bracket: 20 gauge copper bracket with 1 hole for supporting rough-in for flush valve
copper tube and bolt slot for attaching to chair carrier.
Tube Suspension Clamps

1.
Combination plastic supports and insulators for installing copper tube in stud walls with integral
bracket for securing to stud with screws.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION FOUNDATION FOR BELOW GROUND WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Grade trench bottoms to provide a smooth, firm, and stable foundation, free from rock, throughout
the length of the pipe.
B.
Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are to be laid and
backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated invert elevation.
C.
Pipe Beds:
1.
2.
3.
D.
PVC Pipe: Provide 6 thick sand pipe bed underneath and around sides of pipe, up to middle
half of the pipe, including fittings. Tamp bed with mechanical tamper to 85% to 95%
compaction. Provide first layer of sand backfill 6 above pipe, tamp backfill with mechanical
tamper to 85% to 95% compaction. Refer to ASTM D2321 Underground Installation of
Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Gravity-flow Applications for additional requirements.
Copper Tube: Provide 6 thick sand pipe bed underneath and around sides of pipe, up to
middle half of the pipe, including fittings. Tamp bed with mechanical tamper to 85% to 95%
compaction. Provide first layer of sand backfill 6 above pipe, tamp backfill with mechanical
tamper to 85% to 95% compaction.
Ductile Iron Pipe: Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe for 90-degrees (bottom 1/4 of
the circumference). Fill unevenness with tamped sand backfill. At each pipe joint dig bell holes
to relieve the bell of the pipe of all loads, and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on
the foundation. Provide first layer of pea gravel backfill 6 above pipe, tamp backfill with
mechanical tamper to 85% to 95% compaction. For piping with rock trench bottoms, provide
sand pipe bed 6 underneath and around sides of pipe up to middle half of the pipe, including
fittings.
Provide backfill above top of pipe bed as required for field conditions. Refer to Division 15 Section
"General Mechanical Requirements for materials and methods for backfill.
3.2 ABOVE GROUND WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE AND FITTINGS

A.
Install Type L, drawn copper tube with wrought copper fittings and solder joints for pipe sizes 4
inches and smaller, within the building.
B.
Install galvanized steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 5 inches and larger, within the
building.
C.
Install PVC schedule 40 pressure pipe with solvent cement fittings for deionized water inside the
building.
D.
Install chrome plated brass pipe and fittings for exposed water piping within the building where

Duluth, GA

15411-6
1550000803
*** Issue 06/16/10
indicated on the drawings.

3.3 BELOW GROUND WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Install Type K, soft annealed copper tube and brazed joints for pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller, with
minimum number of joints, inside and outside building.
B.
Install cement-lined ductile-iron pipe with rubber gasketed joints, inside and outside building, for pipe
3 and larger.
C.
Install PVC plastic pipe with solvent cemented joints within the building.
3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION

A.
take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design
considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.
B.
Use fittings for all changes in direction and branch connections.
C.
Install piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless
expressly indicated.
D.
Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation
applications.
E.
floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.
F.
Install horizontal piping as high as possible allowing for proper slope and coordination with other
applications, with 1-inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable
G.
Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and servicing
of valves.
H.
Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4-inch ball
valve, and short 3/4-inch threaded nipple and cap.
I.
Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass though fire-rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors,
maintain the fire-rated integrity. Refer to Division 7 Section Penetrations Firestopping for special
sealers and materials.
J.
Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior wall constructions with sleeves
packing, and sealant. Refer to Division 15 Section Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods for
additional information.
K.
Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through underground exterior walls
with sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Refer to Division 15 Section Basic Piping Materials and
Methods for additional information.
L.
Elevated Floor Penetrations of Waterproof Membrane, Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire Rated Walls
and Concrete Slab on Grade Penetrations: Provide sleeves and seal pipes that pass through
waterproof floors, non-fire rated walls, partitions and ceilings or concrete slab on grade. Refer to
Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods for special sealers and materials.
M.
Install piping with 1/32-inch-per-foot (1/4 percent) downward slope towards drain point.
1.
N.
Install piping level with no pitch.
Remove lubricating or cutting oils immediately from PVC pipe. PVC pie that shows staining or
surface deflection from absorbing lubricating or cutting oils shall be cut out and replaced.
3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A.
General: Hanger, support, insulation protection shield and anchor components and installation
procedures conforming to MSS SP-58 and SP-69 are specified in Division 15 Section "Supports and
Anchors. Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports.

Duluth, GA

15411-7
1550000803
*** Issue 06/16/10
B.
Pipe Attachments: Install the following:

1.
2.
Adjustable clevis hangers, MSS SP-69 Type 1, for individual horizontal runs.
Riser clamps, MSS SP-69 Type 8, for individual vertical runs. Provide copper coated riser
clamps when in contact with copper tube.
3. Insulation protection shields and high density insulation at each hanger for insulated pipe as
specified in Division 15 Sections Supports and Anchors and Insulation.
4. Copper coated extension split ring pipe clamp, MSS SP-69 Type 12, for individual vertical
exposed runs of copper tube 2 and smaller on walls and for securing 1-1/4 to 2 copper tube
inside walls and chases for battery fixtures. Secure clamp to the copper tube.
a.
Seal each joint with insulation and split ring pipe to maintain the insulation barrier. Refer
to Section Mechanical Insulation for requirement for maintenance of the vapor barrier
and vapor barrier seal method.
5. Extension split ring pipe clamp, MSS SP-69 Type 12, for individual vertical exposed runs of
stainless steel tube 2 and smaller on walls or for securing tube inside walls for connection to
faucets.
6. Support copper tube in chases and walls at plumbing fixtures with plastic or copper brackets
secured to structure and U-bolts sized to bare on the pipe.
7. Engineered strut support system may be provided, at the contractors option, in lieu of
individual hangers for horizontal pipes as specified in Division 15 Supports and Anchors.
Provide two piece straps for uninsulated pipe secured to the bare pipe and provide plastic
galvanic isolators for bare copper tube. Provide two piece straps and 360 insulation protection
shields sized for the insulation thickness used for the pipe for all insulated pipes.
8. Provide 304 stainless steel rods, nuts, washers, beam clamps, channels, insulation protection
shields, adjustable band hangers, MSS SP-69 Type 7, or clevis hangers, MSS SP-69 Type 1, for
piping located in Natatoriums and Pool Equipment Rooms.
9. Secure copper tube rough-in for individual fixtures with sheet stud brackets attached to the wall
studs or pipe mounting brackets attached to the fixture waste & vent pipe at each plumbing
fixture.
10. Secure 1 and smaller copper water tubing in stud walls at stud penetrations with tube
suspension clamps.
a.
Cut hole through non-supporting studs with a minimum 1/8 clearance around each
uninsulated copper tube or insulated copper tube.
b. Seal each joint of insulation and tube suspension clamp to maintain the insulation barrier.
Refer to Section Mechanical Insulation for requirement for maintenance of the vapor
barrier similar to insulation butted against insulation inserts and vapor barrier seal method.
11. Secure copper tubes for flush valve wall mounted water closets to the chair carrier with carrier
brackets.
12. Provide vinyl coated hangers and riser clamps for use with PVC or CPVC pipe.
C.
Install hangers for horizontal piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
Nom. Pipe
Size - In.
Steel Pipe
Max. Span - Ft.
Copper Tube
Max. Span - Ft.
Min. Rod
Dia. - In.
Up to 3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
7
7
7
9
10
11
12
5
6
7
8
8
9
10
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
Nom. Pipe
Size - In.
PVC Pipe
Max. Span - Ft.
Min. Rod
Dia. - In.
Up to 2
2-1/2
3
3-1/2
4
4
4
4
4
4
3/8
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2

Duluth, GA

15411-8
1550000803
*** Issue 06/16/10
Max Temperature
Max Temperature
to 73F
to 140F
Support vertical steel pipe at each floor.
1. Support vertical copper tube at each floor and in intervals not to exceed 10 feet.
2. Support vertical PVC pipe every four feet.
D.
Support water piping within 12 of each elbow or tee and for water piping 2-1/2 and larger at each
valve or strainer.
E.
Support water piping above the floor with pipe supports attached to the floor with anchor bolts
where indicated on the drawings. Conform to the table above for maximum spacing of supports.
F.
Provide vibration isolation for piping connected to rotating equipment.

specified in Division 15 specification Section Vibration Isolation.
Vibration isolators are
3.6 PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A.
Soldered Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Soldering Manual."
B.
Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual."
1.
2.
3.
C.
Threaded Joints: Conform to ASME B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field-cut threads. Join pipe
fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
CAUTION: Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves and accessible internal parts of piping
specialties before soldering and brazing.
Fill the tubing and fittings during soldering and brazing with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon
dioxide) to prevent formation of scale.
Heat joints to proper and uniform temperature.
Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or
wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
Align threads at point of assembly.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry seal
threading is specified).
Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is
being threaded.
a.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with corroded or damaged threads. If a weld opens
during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used.
Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to
make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on
bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.
3.7 SERVICE ENTRANCE

A.
Extend water distribution piping to connect to water service piping, of size and in location indicated
for service entrance to building. Water service piping is specified in a separate section of Division 2.
B.
Underground exterior water distribution piping to be a depth as required by local conditions, in

accordance with authority having jurisdictions requirements and at depth no less than 18 below
grade.
C.
Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal at penetrations through foundation wall for watertight
installation.
D.
Install sleeve and caulk at penetrations through building floor for watertight installation.
E.
Install shutoff valve at service entrance inside building; complete with strainer, pressure gauge, and
test tee with valve.
F.
Ductile-Iron Pipe: Install in accordance with AWWA C-600. Pipe below ground inside building and
to a point 5 feet outside of building shall have restrained joints.
G.
Copper Pipe: Install Type K, soft annealed copper tube and brazed joints, with minimum number of
joints, to a point 5 feet outside of building. Install changes of direction larger than the manufacturer
recommended minimum bend radius to prevent kinks in the line.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF WATER METER

Duluth, GA

15411-9
1550000803
*** Issue 06/16/10
A.
Install water meter in accordance with utility company's installation instructions and requirements.
1.
Provide three valve water meter by pass, sized per the authority having jurisdictions
requirements.
B.
Size meter and arrange piping and specialties to comply with utility company's requirements.
C.
Set meter on concrete pad as indicated. Refer to Division 3 for concrete, formwork, and reinforcing
requirements.
1.
Mount meter on wall brackets as indicated.
3.9 ROUGH-IN FOR WATER METER

A.
Install rough-in piping and specialties for water meter installation in accordance with utility
company's instructions and requirements.
3.10 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A.
General-Duty Valve Applications: The Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific
valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:
1.
B.
Shut-off duty: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves.
Throttling duty: Use globe, ball, and butterfly valves.
3.11 INSTALLATION OF VALVES

A.
Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or
riser serves 2 or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated. For
sectional valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves; for sectional valves 2-1/2 inches and
larger, use gate or butterfly valves.
B.
Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valves on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, on each supply to
each plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated. For shutoff valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate
or ball valves; for shutoff valves 2-1/2 inches and larger, use gate or butterfly valves.
C.
Drain Valves: Install drain valves on each plumbing equipment item, located to drain equipment
completely for service or repair. Install drain valves at the base of each riser, at low points of
horizontal runs, and elsewhere as required to drain distribution piping system completely. For drain
valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves; for drain valves 2-1/2 inches and larger, use
gate or butterfly valves.
D.
Check Valves:
indicated.
E.
Hose Bibbs: Install on exposed piping where indicated with vacuum breaker.
F.
Wall Hydrants: Install where indicated with vacuum breaker.
G.
Mixing Valves: Install on a sheet of plywood extending 6 beyond the physical boundary of the
mixing valve and firmly attach backboard to the wall. Connect hot water return piping per the
manufacturers published recommendations. Set temperature as scheduled on the drawings.
H.
Emergency Mixing Valves: Install where indicated on the plans with hot and cold water branch lines
connecting to the mains without any shutoff valves. No other fixtures shall connect to the branch
lines feeding the emergency mixing valve. Install ball valves with locking handles at the emergency
mixing valve as indicated on the plans.
Install swing check valves on discharge side of each pump and elsewhere as
3.12 INSTALLATION OF FLOW CONTROL VALVES

A.
Install balancing valves or automatic flow control valves in each hot water recirculating loop, and
elsewhere as indicated. Install a shutoff valve, strainer and check valve upstream and a union, check
valve and shutoff valve downstream of each balancing valve.
B.
Set balancing valve flow rate as follows:

1.
Preliminary Procedures For Hot Water Return System Balancing:

a.
Before operating the system perform these steps:
1) Open valves at recirculation pump and flow control or balancing valves to full open
position.
2) Remove and clean all strainers.

Duluth, GA

15411-10
1550000803
*** Issue 06/16/10
2.
C.
3) Check recirculation pump rotation.

4) Set water heater temperature as indicated on the drawings.
Procedures For Hot Water Return System Balancing
a.
Provide required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements. Instruments shall be
properly maintained and protected against damage.
b. Apply instrument as recommended by the manufacturer.
c.
Take readings with the eye at the level of the indicated value to prevent parallax.
d. Mark balancing valve setting with memory stop. Mark with paint or other suitable,
permanent identification materials.
e.
Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and
resubmit test results.
Reports: Prepare hot water return system balancing reports signed and submit to the Architect upon
completion of the project. Include the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Valve tag number and description of location

Valve body size
Differential pressure reading from instrument in psi
Actual flow rate derived from the manufacturers charts and tables for the valve size and
measured differential pressure.
3.13 TRAP PRIMERS

A.
Install trap primers where indicated and where required by local authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Connect trap primer supply line to the top of domestic cold water line no larger than 1 in
diameter.
C.
Provide trap primer distribution units for trap primers serving more than one trap.
D.
Install trap primer distribution level to insure even water distribution unit to each circuit.
E.
Where applicable, adjust the trap primer for proper flow.
F.
Install trap primers a minimum of 12 inches above finished floor for every 20 feet of horizontal outlet
piping to floor drains served.
G.
Install trap primers in an accessible location.
H.
Refer to Division 15 Section Drainage and Vent Systems for trap primer outlet pipe requirements.
3.14 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES

A.
Install backflow preventers at each connection to mechanical equipment and systems and in
compliance with the plumbing code and authority having jurisdiction. Locate in same room as
equipment being connected. Install air gap fitting and pipe relief outlet drain without valves to
nearest floor drain. Test backflow preventer per requirements of plumbing or division of cross
connection control official.
1.
B.
Reports: Prepare backflow preventer test reports signed by the plumbing or division of cross
connection control official and turn over to the Architect upon completion of the project.
Install pressure reducing valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance cock bypass. Install
pressure gauge on valve outlet.
3.15 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A.
Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping runouts to fixtures of sizes indicated,
but in no case smaller than required by plumbing code.
B.
Mechanical Equipment Connections: Connect hot and cold water piping system to mechanical
equipment as indicated. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection; provide drain valve on
drain connection. For connections 2-1/2 inches and larger, use flanges instead of unions.

A.
Inspections: Inspect water distribution piping as follows:

1.
2.
Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it has been
inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
During the progress of the installation, notify the plumbing official having jurisdiction at least 24

Duluth, GA

15411-11
1550000803
*** Issue 06/16/10
hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the
presence of the plumbing official.
a.
Rough-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before concealed or
closed in after system is roughed in and prior to setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to observe the
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with the requirements of the plumbing
code.
c.
Reinspections: Whenever the plumbing official finds that the piping system will not pass
the test or inspection, make the required corrections and arrange for reinspection by the
plumbing official.
d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports signed by the plumbing official and turn over to the
Architect upon completion of the project.
B.
Factory Start-up for Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service
representative to test and inspect unit installation, provide start-up service, and demonstrate
operation of equipment to the Owners maintenance personnel for a minimum time of 1 hour.
1.
C.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and required corrective action signed by the factoryauthorized service representative and turn over to the Architect upon completion of the project.
Piping System Test: Test water distribution systems in accordance with the procedures of the
authority having jurisdiction, or in the absence of a published procedure, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Test for leaks and defects all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing
systems that have been altered, extended or repaired. If testing is performed in segments,
submit a separate report for each test, complete with a diagram of the portion of the system
tested.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed all new, altered, extended, or replaced water distribution
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose all such work for testing that has been
covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.
Cap and subject the piping system to a static water pressure of 50 psig above the operating
pressure without exceeding the pressure rating of the piping system materials. Isolate the test
source and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that
must be repaired.
Repair all leaks and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and required corrective action signed by the plumbing
official and turn over to the Architect upon completion of the project.

A.
Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows:

1.
2.
3.
Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been
altered, extended, or repaired prior to use.
Use the purging and disinfecting procedure proscribed by the authority having jurisdiction or, in
case a method is not prescribed by that authority, the procedure described in either AWWA
C651, or AWWA C652, or as described below:
a.
Flush the piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at the
points of outlet.
b. Fill the system or part thereof with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts
per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system or part thereof and allow to stand for
24 hours.
c.
Drain the system or part thereof of the previous solution and refill with a water/chlorine
solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and isolate and allow to stand
for 3 hours.
d. Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean, potable water until
chlorine does not remain in the water coming from the system.
e.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the authority having jurisdiction. Repeat the
procedure if the biological examination made by the authority shows evidence of
contamination.
Reports: Prepare disinfection reports signed by the authority having jurisdiction and turn over to
the Architect upon completion of the project.
3.18 COMMISSIONING

Duluth, GA

15411-12
1550000803
*** Issue 06/16/10
A.
Fill the system. Check compression tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the
system is completely full of water.
B.
Before operating the system, perform these steps:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Close drain valve, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

Open valves to full open position.
Remove and clean strainers.
Check pumps for proper direction of rotation. Correct improper wiring.
Lubricate pump motors and bearings.

Duluth, GA

15411-13
1550000803
*** Issue 06/16/10
SECTION 15412
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section only applies to grooved or press to connect mechanical piping for Plumbing applications
as defined in Division Section 15 Water Distribution Systems.
B.
The Division 15 contractor may provide grooved or press to connect mechanical joints, couplings, fittings, valves and related components as an option in lieu of, in whole or in part, copper sweat, brazing, threaded or flanged piping methods. Grooved couplings may be used at equipment connections
where specified for vibration isolation control only.
C.
Grooved or press to fit mechanical joints, couplings, fittings, valves and related components shall not
be provided for natural gas piping in lieu of welded, threaded or flanged piping methods.
D.
This Section includes grooved mechanical pipe couplings, fittings, valves and other grooved components for use as an option to copper sweat, brazing, threading or flanged methods.
E.
All grooved or press to connect components shall be of one manufacturer.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:

A.
Reference Division 15 Section Water Distribution Systems for related sections.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit data for each type of coupling, fitting and special-duty valve indicated. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe support assemblies and
their attachment to the building structure.
C.
Maintenance data for each piping specialty and valve specified for inclusion in Maintenance Manual
D.
Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
Test procedures used.

Test results that comply with requirements.
Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.

A.
All grooved or press to connect components shall be of one manufacturer and conform to local code
approval.
B.
Grooved mechanical piping shall conform to local code approval and/or as listed by ANSI-B-31.1, B31.3, B-31.9, ASME, UL/ULC, FM, IAPMO or BOCA.
C.
Grooved or press to connect end product manufacturer shall be ISO certified.
D.
Grooved couplings shall meet the requirements of ASTM F-1476.
E.
Where required by local authorities, couplings, fittings and valves shall meet ANSI/NSF-61.
1.5 COORDINATION
A.
Reference Division 15 Section Water Distribution Systems for coordination.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Copper Grooved Copper Tubing System

1.
Victaulic

Duluth, GA

15412-1
1550000803
11/30/06
2.
B.
Grinnell Mechanical Products.
Press to Connect Copper Tubing System

1.
2.
3.
Viega, 17545 Daleview Dr., Lakewood, OH 44107, 877-620-0016; or Ridge Tool Company,
400 Clark Street, Elyria, OH 44035, 800-519-3456.
NIBCO, Inc. 1516 Middlebury Street Elkhart, IN 46516-4740, 800.234.0227574.295.3000.
Elkhart Products Corporation, XPRESS
2.2 COPPER GROOVED TUBING SYSTEM

A.
Copper Tube: ASTM B-88 Type K or L hard drawn with roll grooved per manufacturers current
listed standards. (Flaring of tube ends to IPS dimensions is not allowed.)
B.
Mechanical Couplings: 2" through 8" for connecting copper tube and fittings consisting of cast ductile iron housings meeting ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, coated with copper colored alkyd enamel,
plated nuts and bolts to secure unit together. Coupling gasket shall be Synthetic rubber elastomers
meeting ASTM D-2000 with a pressure-responsive seal design configuration conforming to the copper tube size (CTS) outside diameter and coupling housing.
C.
Fittings: 2 through 8 copper tube size with copper tube size grooves designed to accept grooved
end couplings of the same manufacturer, wrought copper, meeting ASTM B-75 alloy C12200 or
ASTM B-152 alloy C11000 per ANSI B16.22, or bronze sand castings meeting ASTM B-584-87
copper alloy CDA 836 (85-5-5-5) per ANSI B16.18. (Flaring of fitting ends to IPS dimensions is not
allowed.)
D.
Flange Adapters: 2 through 6 copper tube size for roll grooved copper tube and fittings directly to
ANSI Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel flanges consisting of cast ductile iron housing meeting
ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12 with copper colored alkyd enamel. (Flaring of fitting ends to IPS dimensions is not allowed.)
E.
Valves: 2" through 6" copper tube size butterfly type with copper tube size grooves designed to accept grooved end couplings of the same manufacturer, with 300 psi (2065 kPa) cast bronze body
meeting CDA-836 (85-5-5-5), elastomer encapsulated ductile iron disc meeting ASTM A-536, Grade
65-45-12, with integrally cast stem for bubble tight, dead-end or bi-directional service. Provide with
memory stop for throttling, metering or balancing service.
1.
2.
Victaulic #608
Grinnell # B680
2.3 PRESS TO CONNECT COPPER TUBING SYSTEM

A.
Copper Tube: ASTM B-88 Type K or L.
B.
Couplings: through 2 copper press to connect couplings with EPDM O-rings meeting ASME
B16.18 or ASME B16.22.
C.
Fittings: through 2 copper tube size fittings with copper press to connect couplings with EPDM
O-rings meeting ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22.
D.
Press to Connect Valves

1.
2.
Ball Valves
a.
Cast bronze body and end pieces with male or female press to connect ends meeting
ASTM B584 Alloy C84400, rated at 200 PSI CWP to 250 F maximum, RTFE seats, blow
out proof stem and chrome plated brass ball. Provide with 2 extended handles of nonthermal conductive material for insulated piping, ball valves shall be equipped with Handle to have extended sleeve to allow valve operation without disturbing the insulation and
with memory stop for throttling, metering or balancing service.
b. NIBCO PS585-70 series
c.
Cimberio 225 series
Gate Valves
a.
Cast bronze body, bonnet, wedge and end pieces with male or female press to connect
ends meeting ASTM B62, silicon bronze stems meeting ASTM B 371 or ASTM B 99, rated
at 200 PSI CWP to 250 F maximum, non-asbestos packing and malleable or ductile iron
hand-wheel. Valves shall be manufactured in accordance with MSS SP-80.
b. NIBCO PS111-Y or PS113-Y

Duluth, GA

15412-2
1550000803
11/30/06
3.
Check Valves
a.
Check Valves (Y pattern, swing type or in-line) with male or female press to connect ends
shall be shall be rated 200 PSI CWP to 250 F maximum. Valves shall be manufactured in
accordance with MSS SP 80. Body and cap to be manufactured of dezincification resistant cast bronze (ASTM B 62). Valves to have TFE seat disc.
b. NIBCO PS 413-Y, PS480-Y, or PCM480-Y
c.
Cimberio 80 series.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPE APPLICATIONS ABOVE GRADE
A.
Water piping in sizes 2 inches and smaller shall be Type L drawn copper tube with plain ends and
copper tube dimensioned press to connect or push to connect copper couplings and fittings.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A.
Water Distribution Systems installations shall be installed subject to Section 15411 Water distribution Systems in addition to those requirements specified in this Section.
B.
Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. Locations and arrangements of piping take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as
practical, install piping as indicated.

A.
Support of piping must account for expansion and contraction, vibration, and the dead load of the
piping and its contents.
B.
General: Hanger supports, and anchors devices are specified in Division 15 Section "SUPPORTS
AND ANCHORS." Reference Section 15411 Water Distribution Systems for pipe spacing limitations.
3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A.
Copper Grooved tubing System

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Verify gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) is suitable for the intended service as specified with latest published manufacturers product data.
Reference latest published manufacturers product data for additional pressure ratings and application information.
Reference latest published latest published manufacturers field installation instructions or other
included installation instruction prior to attempting assembly.
Ream, debur and clean tube ends and verify they are free from indentations, projections and roll
marks in the area from tube end to groove for proper gasket sealing.
All grooved components (couplings, fittings, valves, gaskets, bolts and nuts) and all grooving
tools shall be of one manufacturer; Victaulic or Grinnell.
Install gaskets with lubricant suitable for all piping services. Lubricant shall be by one manufacturer; Victaulic or Grinnell
Press to connect Copper Tubing System

1.
Ream, debur and clean tube ends and verify they are free from indentations, projections, burrs
and foreign matter.
2. Install permanent inspection mark on tube.
3. Clean tube and fittings of all dirt and oil. Verify O-ring is in place and free of oil, grease or dirt.
4. Push copper tube into fittings with twisting action to all the way to the fitting stop or shoulder.
5. Mark tube with permanent marker to indicate proper tube insertion depth.
6. Verify press tool has correct size jaw set for tube size used.
7. Complete one tool cycle with empty jaw to calibrate tool for each time new jaw is inserted into
tool.
8. Squeeze jaw arms to open tool jaws and place jaws around the contour of the fitting. Verify
tool is perpendicular to the fitting and depress tool switch.
9. Squeeze jaw open to remove the tool and observe witness mark.
10. Verify crimped fitting connection for misalignment of the copper tube, misalignment of the tool
Duluth, GA

15412-3
1550000803
11/30/06
or improper insertion of the tube. If any of these conditions are found cut out the joint and provide a new joint.
11. Maintain minimum distance between joints per the manufacturers published installation instructions.
A.
Reference Division 15 Section 15411 Water Distribution Systems for valve applications.
3.6 WATER DISTRIBUTION SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A.
Reference Division 15 Section 15411 Water Distribution Systems for water distribution specialties
and installation requirements.

A.
The following procedures are paraphrased from the ASME B-31.9, code for pressure piping, building
services piping.
B.
Installing contractor shall schedule training session at project site for all workers that will be installing
or handling the grooved, Press Fit or Push to connect piping systems. Submit certification letter
along with list of attendees to engineer of record within 30-days of mobilization. Include copy of
certification letter with closeout documents.
C.
Grooved or Press to connect piping supplier shall provide certification training to contractor without
cost and without additional cost to Owner.
D.
Provide testing procedures as defined in specification Division 15 Section 15411 Water Distribution
Piping and as specified in grooved mechanical piping manufacturers installation instructions.
E.
Installing contractor shall visually inspect couplings and repair or replace any misaligned couplings
and couplings with gaps prior to calling for inspection as defined in Division 15Section 15010 General Mechanical Requirements.
3.8 STARTUP
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section 15411 Water Distribution Systems for startup procedures.

Duluth, GA

15412-4
1550000803
11/30/06
SECTION 15420
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes building sanitary and storm drainage and vent piping systems, including drains
and drainage specialties.
B.
1.
Division 2 Section "Earthwork," for trenching and backfilling materials and methods for
underground piping installations.
2. Division 2 Section "Storm Sewage Systems," for storm drainage piping beginning from 5'-0"
outside the building.
3. Division 2 Section "Sanitary Sewage Systems," for sanitary drainage piping beginning from
5'-0" outside the building.
4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers," for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations
5. Division 11 Section Kitchen and Food Service Equipment, for drains and trim furnished with
the food service and kitchen equipment.
6. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification," for labeling and identification of drainage and
vent piping.
7. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods," for materials and methods for
fire barrier penetrations, wall and floor penetrations and equipment pads
8. Division 15 Section "Basic Piping Material and Methods," for materials and methods for
mechanical sleeve seals.
9. Division 15 Section "Supports and Anchors," for materials and methods for hanging and
supporting drainage and vent piping.
10. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation," for materials and methods for insulating drainage
piping.
11. Division 15 Section Water Distribution Piping, for material and methods for trap primers and
trap primer inlet piping.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A.
Building Drain: That part of the lowest piping of a drainage system which receives the discharge
from soil, waste, storm, and other drainage pipes inside the walls of the building and conveys it to
the building sewer.
B.
Building Sewer: That part of the drainage system which extends from the end of the building drain
and conveys its discharge to a public sewer, private sewer, individual sewage disposal system, or
other point of disposal.
C.
Drainage System: Includes all the piping within a public or private premises which conveys sewage,
storm water or other liquid wastes to a point of disposal. It does not include the mains of public
sewer systems or a private or public sewage treatment or disposal plant.
D.
Vent System: A pipe or pipes installed to provide a flow of air to or from a drainage system, or to
provide a circulation of air within such system to protect trap seals from siphonage and back
pressure.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
General:
Specifications Sections.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Drainage piping
Drainage piping specialties
Floor drains
Trench drains
Roof drains
Interceptors

Duluth, GA

15420-1
1550000803
*** Issue 05/01/09
C.
Test reports specified in Part 3 of this Section.

A.
Regulatory Requirements:
Section 15010.1.3.
Comply with the provisions of the codes and reference standards in

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Drainage Piping Specialties, including backwater valves, expansion joints, cleanouts, floor/roof
drains, cast-iron trench drains, downspout nozzles, trap guards and vandal-proof vent caps:
a.
b. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.
Freeze-proof vent caps:
a.
F.J. Moore Mfg. Co.
Non-Metallic Trench Drains:
a.
Smith (Jay R) Mfg. Co., ACO, Inc.
b. Zurn Industries, Inc.
Interceptors:
a.
Jensen Precast
b. Olson Precast
c.
Park USA
d. US Concrete Precast Group
Heavy Duty Hubless Couplings
a.
Anaco Husky SD-4000
b. Clamp-All 125in. lb.
Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
a.
AB & I Foundry
b. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company
c.
Tyler Pipe / Soil Pipe Division
Shielded Adapter Couplings
a.
FERNCO, Proflex 3000 Series
b. Mission Rubber Company, Flexseal MR56 Series
Adapter Couplings
a.
FERNCO, 1056 Series
b. Mission Rubber Company, Sewer Couplings
Hubless Couplings:
a.
Anaco
b. AB & I Foundry
c.
Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company
d. Ideal
e.
FERNCO
f.
Mission Rubber Company
g. Tyler Pipe / Soil Pipe Division
2.2 ABOVE GROUND DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS

A.
Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: CISPI 301 and ASTM A888, hubless pipe and fittings and bearing the trademark
of CIPSI and NSF.
1.
2.
B.
C.
Couplings and compression gaskets, domestically manufactured: ASTM C564 and CISPI 310.
Heavy duty couplings and compression gaskets: ASTM C1540 and meeting FM 1680.
PVC DWV Pipe and Fittings (Secondary Option in non-seismic areas when approved by the AHJ and
the Owner): Schedule 40 pipe meeting ASTM D1785 and ASTM D2665 with solid wall PVC
meeting ASTM D1784 with cell class 12454-B.
1.
Fittings: DWV pattern meeting ASTM D2665 with solvent cement socket joints.
2.
Copper Tube:

Duluth, GA
ASTM B306, Type DWV, hard drawn for pipe, and cast-bronze, drainage pattern
15420-2
1550000803
*** Issue 05/01/09
fittings with soldered joints.

1.
D.
1.
E.
Solder Filler Materials: ASTM B32, 95-5 tin-antimony solder.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, schedule 40, Grade B, galvanized, threaded ends.
1.
F.
Solder Filler Materials: ASTM B32, 95-5 tin-antimony solder.
Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type M, hard drawn for pipe and wrought copper fittings with soldered
joints.
Galvanized Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern, for
threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1.
Shielded Adapter Couplings: ASTM C1460 with neoprene adapter gasket with stainless steel Shield
and hose clamps.
2.3 UNDERGROUND BUILDING DRAIN AND VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS

A.
Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, Service weight, hub-and-spigot soil pipe and fittings and bearing the
trademark of CIPSI and NSF. Pipe and fittings shall have a heavy coating of coal tar varnish or
asphaltum on both inside and outside surfaces.
1.
Neoprene Compression Gaskets: ASTM C564.
B.
Adapter Couplings: ASTM C1173 with neoprene adapter gasket with stainless steel hose clamps.
C.
PVC DWV Pipe and Fittings(Secondary Option in non-seismic areas when approved by the AHJ and
the Owner): Schedule 40 pipe meeting ASTM D1785 and ASTM D2665 with solid wall PVC
meeting ASTM D1784 with cell class 12454-B.
D.
1.
2.
3.
PVC DWV Expansion Joints

a.
Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company #133
b. Spears Manufacturing Company #S119
ABS DWV Pipe and Fittings (Secondary Option in seismic areas when approved by the AHJ and the
Owner): Schedule 40 pipe meeting ASTM D 2661solid wall.
1.
2.
Solvent: VOC content of 325325 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
a.
3.
Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
PVC DWV Expansion Joints

a.
Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company #133
b. Spears Manufacturing Company #S119
2.4 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A.
Backwater Valves: Valve assembly shall be bronze fitted cast-iron, with bolted cover. Flapper shall
provide a maximum 1/4 inch clearance between flapper and seat for air circulation. Valve ends shall
suit piping material.
B.
Expansion Joints: Cast-iron body with adjustable bronze sleeve, bronze bolts with wing nuts.
C.
Cleanout Plugs: As specified on the drawings.
D.
Wall Cleanouts: As specified on the drawings.
E.
Floor Drains: As specified on the drawings.
F.
Roof Drains: As specified on the drawings.
G.
Trench Drains: As specified on the drawings.
a.
Floor Cleanouts: As specified on the drawings.

Duluth, GA

15420-3
1550000803
*** Issue 05/01/09
H.
Floor Troughs: As specified on the drawings.
I.
Vent Flashing Sleeves: Cast-iron caulking type roof coupling for cast-iron stacks, cast-iron threaded
type roof coupling for steel stacks, and cast-bronze stack flashing sleeve for copper tubing.
J.
Freeze-Proof Vent Caps: Construct of galvanized iron, copper, or lead-coated copper, sized to
provide 1 inch air space between outside of vent pipe and inside of flashing collar extension.
2.5 TRENCH DRAINS

A.
Trench drain type designations and sizes are indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Non-Metallic Trench Drains: Polyester resin and quartz aggregate, precast, interlocking design, with
bottom radius and 0.6 percent slope.
1.
2.
Precast Material: Load pressure of 14,500 psi, bending pressure of 2,900 psi, frost-proof, saltproof, inert under dilute acid and alkali conditions, and less than 1.0 percent water absorption
rate.
Grates: Cast iron or steel as indicated, for heavy-duty truck traffic, with openings designed to
prevent entry of bicycle or wheelchair tires.
2.6 INTERCEPTORS
A.
Interceptor type designations, flow rates, and capacities are indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Exterior Grease Interceptor: Reinforced precast concrete construction by local manufacturer or a

acceptable to the local authorities having jurisdiction with the following features:
1.
2.
3.
Access manholes with covers.

Concrete baffles.
Integral ladder.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION FOUNDATION FOR UNDERGROUND BUILDING DRAINS
A.
Grade trench bottoms to provide a smooth, firm, and stable foundation, free from rock, throughout
the length of the pipe.
B.
Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are to be laid and
backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated invert elevation.
C.
Pipe Beds:
1.
D.
Cast Iron Soil Pipe: Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe for 90-degrees (bottom 1/4 of
the circumference). Fill unevenness with tamped sand backfill. At each pipe joint dig bell holes
to relieve the bell of the pipe of all loads, and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on
the foundation.. For piping with rock trench bottoms, provide sand pipe bed 6 underneath and
around sides of pipe, including fittings.
Provide backfill above top of pipe bed as required for field conditions. Refer to Division 15 Section
"General Mechanical Requirements for materials and methods for backfill.
3.2 PIPE APPLICATIONS - ABOVE GROUND, WITHIN BUILDING

A.
Install hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for 15 and smaller soil, waste, and storm and vent
pipe.
B.
Install Type DWV copper tube with cast bronze Type DWV fittings for waste connections from
lavatories, sinks, water coolers, and kitchen equipment to cast iron drainage piping.
C.
Install Type M copper tube with wrought copper fittings, 1 and smaller, with minimum size or
install Type DWV copper tube with cast bronze Type DWV fittings for waste connections from
kitchen equipment and terminate over floor receptors with air gap.
D.
mechanical equipment inside the building and terminate over floor receptors with air gap. Provide
galvanic isolators as specified in Division 15 Basic Piping Materials and Methods.
E.

Duluth, GA

15420-4
1550000803
*** Issue 05/01/09
mechanical equipment outside the building and terminate as indicated on the plans. Provide galvanic
isolators as specified in Division 15 Basic Piping Materials and Methods.
F.
Install galvanized schedule 40 steel pipe and malleable iron fittings for sump pump discharge pipe.
G.
Install type L copper tube for trap primer outlet piping.
3.3 PIPE APPLICATIONS - BELOW GROUND, WITHIN BUILDING

A.
Install hub-and-spigot, service weight, cast-iron, soil pipe and fittings with gasketed joints for 15
inch and smaller for soil, waste, and storm and vent pipe.
B.
Install type K soft copper tube for trap primer outlet piping.
3.4 PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A.
Copper Tubing:
Manual."
B.
Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: Make hubless joints in accordance with the Cast-Iron Soil Pipe & Fittings
Handbook, Chapter IV. Install Couplings as followings:
a.
b.
c.
Solder joints in accordance with the procedures specified in AWS "Soldering
Install hubless couplings complying with CISPI 310 on soil, waste and vent piping.
Install hubless couplings complying with CISPI 310 on and soil and waste piping 3 and
smaller and all vent piping.
Install heavy duty hubless couplings on soil or waste stacks, soil and waste piping
connections to soil or waste stacks and all soil and waste piping 5 and larger.
C.
Install heavy duty hubless couplings on storm piping and connections to roof drains.
D.
Cast Iron to PVC Below Grade: Join cast iron to PVC with adapter couplings.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A.
take into consideration pipe sizing, slope, expansion, and other design considerations. So far as
practical, install piping as indicated.
B.
C.
Install piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless
expressly indicated.
D.
applications.
E.
F.
Install horizontal piping as high as possible allowing for proper slope and coordination with other
applications, with 1-inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable
G.
Paint exposed copper drain lines serving kitchen equipment with a minimum of two coats of
chromium-base paint or provide tubular chromium-plated brass piping.
H.
Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and sealer.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods for special sealers and
materials.
I.
Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through underground exterior walls
using sleeves and mechanical sleeve sealers. Refer to Division 15 Section Basic Piping Material and
J.
Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings and floors,
maintain the fire rated integrity. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods for special sealers and materials.

Duluth, GA

15420-5
1550000803
*** Issue 05/01/09
K.
Foundation Penetrations: Where pipes pass through foundation walls above strip footings or under
strip footings, protect pipes from building load with cast iron soil pipe sleeves two pipe sizes larger
than the pipe. Sleeves installed under the strip footing shall be encased in concrete.
L.
Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate 45 degree wyes,
combination wye and eight bend, or long sweep, quarter, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends. Sanitary
tees or quarter bends may be used on vertical stacks of drainage lines where the change in direction
of flow is from horizontal to vertical, except use long-turn pattern combination wye and eighth bends
where two fixtures are installed back to back and have a common drain. Straight tees, elbows, and
crosses may be used on vent lines. No change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees shall be
made. Where different sizes of drainage pipes and fittings are connected, use proper sized standard
increasers and reducers. Reduction of the size of drainage piping in the direction of flow is
prohibited.
M.
Install underground building drains to conform with the plumbing code, and in accordance with the
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Engineering Manual. Lay underground building drains beginning at low
point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place
bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements.
Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed.
N.
Install drainage piping pitched down at a minimum slope of 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent) for piping 3
inch and smaller, and 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent) for piping 4 inch and larger. Install vent piping
pitched to drain back by gravity to the sanitary piping system.
O.
Extend building drain to connect to service piping, of size and in location indicated for service
entrance to building. Sewer service piping is specified in a separate section of Division 2.
P.
Install 1 inch thick extruded polystyrene over underground building drain piping not under building.
Width of insulation shall extend minimum of 12" beyond each side of pipe. Install directly over, and
center on pipe center line.

A.
General: Hanger, support, insulation protection shields, and anchor components and installation
procedures conforming to MSS SP-58 and SP-69 are specified in Division 15 Section "Supports and
Anchors. Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports.
B.
Install the following pipe attachments:

1.
2.
3.
C.
Adjustable band hangers, MSS SP-69 Type 7, for cast iron pipe 2 and smaller for individual
horizontal runs.
Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS SP-69 Type 1, for cast iron pipe 3 and larger for
individual horizontal runs.
Steel riser clamps, MSS SP-69 Type 8, for individual vertical runs.
a.
Install high density insulation on insulated pipe.
Install hangers at the following intervals and provide rods of diameter as listed below:
1.
2.
Nom. Pipe
Size
Steel Pipe
Max. Span
Copper Tube
Max. Span.
Min. Rod
Dia. Inches
In Feet
Min. Rod
Dia. - Inches
Steel or
Cast Iron
In Inches
In Feet
Up to 3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
3-1/2
4
7
7
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
5
6
7
8
8
9
10
11
12
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
1/2
5/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
1/2
Copper or PVC
Support all sizes of horizontal cast iron piping every five feet.
Support all sizes of horizontal cast iron below slab every three feet.

Duluth, GA

15420-6
1550000803
*** Issue 05/01/09
3.
4.
D.
Support all sizes of vertical cast iron piping every ten feet.
Support piping within 12 of each elbow or tee.
Support condensate piping located on roof with pre-engineered roof supports, pre-engineered roof
supports are specified in Division 15 Section "Supports and Anchors. Conform to the table above
for maximum spacing of supports. Adjust pipe support to maintain minimum pipe slope.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES

A.
Above Ground Cleanouts: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and:
1.
2.
3.
4.
as required by plumbing code;

at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees;
at minimum intervals of 50' for piping 4" and smaller and 100' for larger piping;
at base of each vertical soil, waste, or storm water stack.
B.
Cleanout Covers: Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping, types as indicated.
C.
Floor Cleanouts: Install in below floor building drain piping at minimum intervals of 50' for piping 4"
and smaller and 75' for larger piping.
D.
Exterior Cleanouts: Install exterior cleanouts embedded in a 18" x 18" x 8" block of concrete, flush
with finished grade.
E.
Vent Flashing Sleeves: Install on stacks passing through roof, secure over stack flashing in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F.
Frost-Proof Vent Caps: Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.
Maintain 1 inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS, FLOOR SINKS AND FLOOR TROUGHS

A.
Install floor drains, floor sinks and floor troughs in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions and in locations indicated.
B.
Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops of drains
flush with finished floor. Set floor sinks and floor troughs flush with the level finish floor.
C.
Refer to architectural documents for floor slope requirements and set floor drain elevation to match.
Where architectural documents do not indicate the requirements, set the floor drain elevation
depressed below the finished slab elevation as listed below to provide proper slope to drain:
DEPRESSION IN INCHES
RADIUS OF AREA DRAINED - FEET
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
5
10
15
20
25
D.
Provide P-traps for drains connected to the sanitary sewer.
E.
Install floor drains, floor sinks and floor troughs in waterproof floors with waterproof membrane
securely flashed with drain flashing clamp so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining
flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.
F.
Position drains so that they are level, accessible and easy to maintain.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF TRAP PRIMERS

A.
Install trap primer outlet piping with 1/32 per foot slope towards drain trap where possible.
B.
Connect trap primer outlet piping only to factory installed taps on P-trap assembly or provide an
auxiliary inlet fitting with factory installed trap primer tap.
C.
Install trap primer outlet piping in elevated slabs or slabs on grade below concrete reinforcing bars.
Wrap with thick flexible unicellular insulation, attach to the reinforcing bars with plastic ties and
spacers every five feet to eliminate galvanic corrosion. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical
Insulation for flexible unicellular insulation.

Duluth, GA

15420-7
1550000803
*** Issue 05/01/09
D.
Where proper trap primer outlet piping slope can be maintained and the trap primer outlet
line would not be subject to freezing, trap primer outlet lines may be installed as follows:
1.
2.
Install below elevated floor slabs.

Install in the sub grade of slab on grade.
E.
Install sleeves and caulk at penetrations through building floor for watertight installation.
F.
Refer to Division 15 Section Water Distribution Systems for trap primer and trap primer inlet pipe
requirements.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF ROOF DRAINS

A.
Install roof drains at low points of roof areas, in accordance with the roof membrane manufacturer's
installation instructions.
B.
Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between roof drain and adjoining
roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.
C.
Position roof drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.
3.11 CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts to plumbing fixtures and
drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated; but in no case smaller than required by the plumbing
code.
B.
Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains.

A.
Inspections
1.
2.
B.
Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it has been
inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
During the progress of the installation, notify the plumbing official having jurisdiction, at least
24 hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the
presence of the plumbing official.
a.
Rough-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before concealed or
closed-in after system is roughed-in, and prior to setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to observe the
tests specified below and to insure compliance with the requirements of the plumbing
code.
c.
Reinspections: Whenever the piping system fails to pass the test or inspection, make the
required corrections, and arrange for reinspected by the plumbing official.
d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the plumbing official.
Piping System Test Test drainage and vent system in accordance with the procedures of the
authority having jurisdiction, or in the absence of a published procedure, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Test for leaks and defects all new drainage and vent piping systems and parts of existing
systems, which have been altered, extended or repaired. If testing is performed in segments,
submit a separate report for each test, complete with a diagram of the portion of the system
tested.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed all new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose all such work for testing, that has been
covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.
Rough Plumbing Test Procedure: Except for outside leaders and perforated or open jointed
drain tile, test the piping of plumbing drainage and venting systems upon completion of the
rough piping installation. Tightly close all openings in the piping system, and fill with water to
the point of overflow, but not less than 10 feet head of water. Water level shall not drop
during the period from 15 minutes before the inspection starts, through completion of the
inspection. Inspect all joints for leaks.
Final Plumbing Test Procedure: After the plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled
with water, their connections shall be tested and proved gas and water-tight. Plug the stack
openings on the roof and building drain where it leaves the building, and introduce air into the
system equal to a pressure of 1" water column. Use a "U" tube or manometer inserted in the
trap of a water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure shall remain constant without the

Duluth, GA

15420-8
1550000803
*** Issue 05/01/09
5.
6.
introduction of additional air throughout the period of inspection. Inspect all plumbing fixture
connections for gas and water leaks.
Repair all leaks and defects using new materials and retest system or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and required corrective action signed by the plumbing
official and turn over to the Architect upon completion of the project.

A.
Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B.
Clean drain strainers, domes, and traps. Remove dirt and debris.
3.14 PROTECTION
A.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and debris, and to
prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops.

Duluth, GA

15420-9
1550000803
*** Issue 05/01/09
SECTION 15440
PLUMBING FIXTURES
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, and accessories,
appurtenances, equipment, and supports associated with plumbing fixtures.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
C.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers," for materials and methods for sealing between plumbing
fixtures and interior walls.
Division 15 Section "Valves" for valves used as supply stops.
Products furnished but not installed under this Section include:

1.
2.
D.
appliances,
Plumbing fittings
appurtenances, and
Plumbing fittings
appurtenances, and
(including
equipment
(including
equipment
faucets) and piping indicated,

provided by Owner.
faucets) and piping indicated,
specified in other Sections.
for
fixtures,
appliances,
for
fixtures,
appliances,
Products installed but not furnished under this Section include:

1.
2.
Owner-supplied fixtures, as indicated.

Accessories, appliances, appurtenances, and equipment specified in other Sections, requiring
plumbing services or fixture-related devices, as indicated.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A.
Accessible:
Describes a plumbing fixture, building, facility, or portion thereof that can be
approached, entered, and used by physically handicapped people.
B.
Accessory: Device that adds effectiveness, convenience, or improved appearance to a fixture but is
not essential to its operation.
C.
Appliance: Device or machine designed and intended to perform a specific function.
D.
Appurtenance: Device or assembly designed to perform some useful function when attached to or
used with a fixture.
E.
Equipment: Device used with plumbing fixtures or plumbing systems to perform a certain function
for plumbing fixtures but that is not part of the fixture.
F.
Fitting: Fitting installed on or attached to a fixture to control the flow of water into or out of the
fixture.
G.
Fixture: Installed receptor connected to the water distribution system, that receives and makes
available potable water and discharges the used liquid or liquid-borne wastes directly or indirectly
into the drainage system. The term "Fixture" means the actual receptor, except when used in a
general application where terms "Fixture" and "Plumbing Fixture" include associated trim, fittings,
accessories, appliances, appurtenances, support, and equipment.
H.
Roughing-In: Installation of piping and support for the fixture prior to the actual installation of the
fixture.
I.
Support: Device normally concealed in building construction, for supporting and securing plumbing
fixtures to walls and structural members. Supports for urinals, lavatories, and sinks are made in
types suitable for fixture construction and the mounting required. Categories of supports are:
1.
2.
3.
J.
Chair Carrier: Support for wall-hung fixture, having steel pipe uprights that transfer weight to
the floor.
Chair Carrier, Heavy Duty: Support for wall-hung fixture, having rectangular steel uprights that
transfer weight to the floor.
Reinforcement: Wood blocking or steel plate built into wall construction, for securing fixture to
wall.
Trim: Hardware and miscellaneous parts, specific to a fixture and normally supplied with it required
to complete fixture assembly and installation.

Duluth, GA
PLUMBING FIXTURES
15440-1
1550000803
05/25/2015
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Product data for each type of plumbing fixture specified, including fixture and trim, fittings,
accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, supports, construction details, dimensions
of components, and finishes.
Wiring diagrams for field-installed wiring of electrically operated units.
Maintenance data for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and
Division 15 Section "General Mechanical Requirements."
Submit certification that faucets and trim comply with California AB 1953, Vermont S. 152 and NSF
61 Annex G.

A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of ANSI Standard A117.1, "Buildings and
Facilities -- Providing Accessibility and Useability for Physically Handicapped People," Public Law 90480, "Architectural Barriers Act, 1968," with respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically
handicapped and "Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings 1991" with
respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of ATBCB (Architectural and Transportation

Barriers Compliance Board) "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS) - 1985-494-187" with
respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped.
C.
Faucets and trim in contact with drinking water shall meet or exceed the Safe Water Drinking Act
(SWDA) lead free standards of ANSI/NSF Standard 61, section 9.
D.
Comply with California AB 1953, Vermont S.152 and NSF 61 Annex G (pending) for wetted
surfaces of faucets and trim containing no more than 0.25% lead by weight compliance for valves
for domestic water service.
E.
Design Concept: The drawings indicate types of plumbing fixtures and are based on the specific
descriptions, manufacturers, models, and numbers indicated. Plumbing fixtures having equal
performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered provided that deviations in
dimensions, operation, color or finish, or other characteristics are minor and do not change the
design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect. Burden of proof for equality of
plumbing fixtures is on the proposer.
1.5 SPARE PARTS

A.
Deliver spare parts to Owner. Furnish spare parts described below matching products installed,
packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels clearly describing contents.
B.
Faucet Washers and O-rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10 percent of amount
of each installed.
C.
Faucet Cartridges and O-rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of amount
of each installed.
D.
Flushometer Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10 percent of amount of
each flushometer installed.
E.
Provide individual metal boxes or a hinged-top wood or metal box having separate compartments for
each type and size of above extra materials.
F.
Water Closet Tank Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical flush valve units not less than 5 percent
of amount of each type installed.
G.
Toilet Seats: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of amount of each type toilet
seat installed.
H.
Filter Cartridges: Furnish quantity of identical filter cartridges not less than 50 percent of amount of
each type and size installed.

Duluth, GA
PLUMBING FIXTURES
15440-2
1550000803
05/25/2015
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products in each category, by one
of the following listed for that category:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Water Closets:
a.
Sloan Valve Co.
Urinals:
a.
Sloan Valve Co.
Lavatories:
a.
Samsung-Staron
Sinks:
a.
Elkay Manufacturing Co.
Janitor Sinks:
a. Zurn Industries, LTD.
Water Coolers:
a.
Oasis International
Toilet Seats:
a.
Church
Flushometers:
a.
Sloan Valve Co.
Commercial/Industrial Cast-Brass Faucets:
a.
Zurn Industries, LTD.
b. Sloan Valve Co.
c.
Elkay Manufacturing Co.
Thermostatic Mixing Valve Bath/Shower Faucets:
a.
Powers Process Controls; A Unit of Mark Controls Corp.
Sensor-Operated Faucets and Devices:
a.
Sloan Valve Co.
Stop Valves & Supplies:
a.
McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc.
P-traps, Drains & Miscellaneous Fittings:
a.
McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Supports:
a.
Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co.
b. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.
Water Filters:
a.
Cuno.
Insulation Kits
a.
Truebro, Inc.
2.2 PLUMBING FIXTURES, GENERAL

A.
Provide plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, other components, and supports as specified on the
drawings and below:
2.3 FAUCETS
A.
Faucets General: As described on the drawings.

1.
Electronic faucets shall be of the same manufacturer as the water closet and urinal flush valves.
2.4 STOP VALVES & SUPPLIES

A.
Supplies General: As described on the drawings.

1.
Exposed piping and parts shall be polished chrome plated.
2.5 P-TRAPS, DRAINS AND MISCELLLANEOUS FITTINGS:

A.
Fittings General: As described on the drawings, except as listed below.

1.
2.
B.
Exposed piping and fittings shall be polished chrome plated.

Fittings installed concealed inside a plumbing fixture or within wall construction may be without
chrome plate finish.
Sink Continuous Wastes: Polished chrome-plated, tubular brass, 1-1/2 inches, 17 gauge, with brass
nuts on slip inlets, and of configurations indicated.

Duluth, GA
PLUMBING FIXTURES
15440-3
1550000803
05/25/2015
C.
Skullery sink Continuous Wastes: Polished chrome-plated, tubular brass, 2 inches, 17 gauge, with
brass nuts on slip inlets, and of configurations indicated.
D.
Escutcheons: Polished chrome-plated, sheet steel wall flange with friction clips.
E.
Deep Pattern Escutcheons: Wall flange with set screw or sheet steel wall flange with friction clips,
of depth adequate to conceal protruding roughing-in fittings.
2.6 FLUSHOMETERS
A.
Provide flushometers compatible with fixtures, with features and of consumption indicated As
described on the drawings.
1.
2.
Exposed metal parts shall be polished chrome plated.

Flush valves installed within wall construction may be without chrome plate finish.
2.7 TOILET SEATS

A.
General: As described on the drawings.
2.8 WATER FILTERS

A.
Water Filters: Cartridge type, with stainless steel or plastic housing and mounting bracket.
Cartridges shall be replaceable, 10 inches long, activated carbon, wound fiber, or pleated, 10-micron
removal rating, and suitable for potable water.
2.9 PLUMBING FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A.
Supports: ASME A112.6.1M, categories and types as required for wall-hanging fixtures specified,
and wall reinforcement.
B.
Support categories are:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Carriers:
Supports for wall-hanging water closets and fixtures supported from wall
construction. Water closet carriers shall have an additional faceplate and coupling when used
for wide pipe spaces. Provide tiling frame or setting gauge with carriers for wall-hanging water
closets.
Chair Carriers: Supports with steel pipe uprights for wall-hanging fixtures. Urinal chair carriers
shall have bearing plates.
Chair Carriers, Heavy Duty: Supports with rectangular steel uprights for wall-hanging fixtures.
Reinforcement: 2-inch by 4-inch wood blocking between studs or 1/4-inch by 6-inch steel
plates attached to studs, in wall construction, to secure floor-mounted and special fixtures to
wall.
C.
Support Types: Provide support of category specified, of type having features required to match
fixture.
D.
Provide supports specified as part of fixture description, in lieu of category and type requirements
above.
2.10 INSULATION KITS

A.
Insulation kits for lavatory and sink waste and supplies of vinyl plastic with reusable fasteners and
openings for access to supply stop handles.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A.
Install plumbing fixtures and specified components, in accordance with designations and locations
indicated on Drawings.
B.
Install supports for plumbing fixtures in accordance with categories indicated, and of type required:
1.
2.
Carriers for following fixtures:

a.
Wall hanging lavatories
b. Wall hanging electric water coolers and drinking fountains.
c.
Wall-hanging fixtures supported from wall construction.
Chair carriers for the following fixtures:
a.
Wall-hanging urinals.

Duluth, GA
PLUMBING FIXTURES
15440-4
1550000803
05/25/2015
3.
4.
b. Wall-hanging lavatories and sinks.

c.
Wall-hanging drinking fountains and electric water coolers.
Heavy-duty chair carriers for the following fixtures:
a.
Accessible lavatories.
b. Fixtures where specified.
Reinforcement for the following fixtures:
a.
Floor-mounted sinks required to be secured to wall.
b. Recessed, box-mounted electric water coolers.
c.
Wall mounted and mop sink faucets.
d. Urinal flush valve solid pipe ring supports.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES

A.
Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturers' written
installation instructions, roughing-in drawings, and referenced standards.
B.
Install floor-mounted, floor-outlet water closets with closet flanges and gasket seals.
C.
Install wall-hanging, back-outlet urinals with gasket seals.
D.
Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate when
supports are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated.
E.
Fasten floor-mounted fixtures and special fixtures having holes for securing fixture to wall
construction, to reinforcement built into walls.
F.
Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls.
G.
Fasten counter-mounting-type plumbing fixtures to casework.
H.
Secure supplies behind wall or within wall pipe space, providing rigid installation.
I.
Install stop valve in an accessible location in each water supply to each fixture.
J.
Install trap on fixture outlet except for fixtures having integral trap.
K.
Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding
pipe fittings.
L.
Seal fixtures to walls, floors, and counters using a sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone
sealant in accordance with sealing requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
Match sealant color to fixture color.
M.
Install insulation kits on ADA compliant sink and lavatory waste, continuous wastes, hot and cold
water supplies where indicated on the drawings and as required by the ADA.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other sections of Division 15. The Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection
requirements:
1.
2.
Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing
equipment specified in other sections of Division 15.
Install piping connections indicated between appliances and equipment specified in other
sections, direct connected to plumbing piping systems.

A.
Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B.
Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are
water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure
until all units operate properly.

A.
Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and
controls.

Duluth, GA
PLUMBING FIXTURES
15440-5
1550000803
05/25/2015
B.
Adjust water pressure at electric water coolers, and faucets, and flushometers having controls, to
provide proper flow and stream.
C.
Replace washers of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
D.
Clean fixtures, fittings, and spout and drain strainers with manufacturers' recommended cleaning
methods and materials.
E.
Adjust faucet wrist blade handles perpendicular to the spout while in the closed position.
F.
Review the data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals.

Closeout."
Refer to Division 1 Section "Project
3.6 FIXTURE SCHEDULE

A.
Provide plumbing fixtures as specified on the drawings.
B.
Install rough-in for plumbing fixtures as scheduled on the drawings.

Duluth, GA
PLUMBING FIXTURES
15440-6
1550000803
05/25/2015
SECTION 15453
PLUMBING PUMPS
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following types of plumbing pumps:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Cartridge type inline circulators

Inline circulator pumps
Inline pumps
Close coupled inline pumps
Submersible sump pumps
Submersible sump pump high level alarms
Sewage ejectors
Packaged domestic booster pumps
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for specifications on concrete and reinforcing materials and
concrete placing requirements for equipment pads.
Division 15 Section Coordination for basic requirements for electrical components that are an
integral part of packaged system components.
Division 15 Section, Basic Piping Materials And Methods for rubber flexible connectors.
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Isolation" for inertia pads, isolation pads, spring
supports, and spring hangers.
Division 15 Section "HVAC Pumps" for hydronic system centrifugal pumps.
Division 16 Section "Electrical Connections for Equipment" for power-supply wiring including
field-installed disconnects and required electrical devices.
Division 16 Section "Motor Controllers" for field-installed, a.c. motor controllers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Product data including standard performance curves, weights (shipping, installed, and
operating), furnished specialties, and accessories, plus installation and start-up instructions.
Shop drawings showing layout and connections for plumbing pumps. Include setting drawings
with templates, and directions for installation of foundation bolts, anchor bolts, and other
anchorages.
Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal, and control systems; differentiating between
manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring.
Maintenance data for plumbing pumps, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manuals
Shop drawings showing basins with depth, inlet, outlet and vent locations, pit covers, float
switches, non-clog check valves and shutoff valves.
Submit certification that pumps, valves, fittings and specialties comply with California AB
1953, Vermont S. 152 and NSF 61 Annex G.

A.
Hydraulic Institute Compliance: Design, manufacture, and install plumbing pumps in accordance with
"Hydraulic Institute Standards."
B.
National Electrical Code Compliance: Components shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical
Code."
C.
UL Compliance: Plumbing pumps shall be listed and labeled by UL and comply UL Standard 778
"Motor Operated Water Pumps."
D.
UL Compliance: Control panels shall be listed and labeled by UL and comply with Standard 508A
Control Panels.
E.
NEMA Compliance: Electric motors and components shall be listed and labeled NEMA.

Duluth, GA
PLUMBING PUMPS
15453-1
1550000803
05/25/2015
F.
SSPMA Compliance: Test and rate sump and sewage pumps in accordance with the Sump and
Sewage Pump Manufacturers Association (SSPMA) Standards.
G.
Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain plumbing pumps of the same type from a single manufacturer.
H.
Design Criteria: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, connections, and dimensional requirements of
plumbing pumps and are based on the specific manufacturer types and models indicated. Pumps
having equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered, provided that
deviations in dimensions and profiles do not change the design concept or intended performance as
judged by the Architect. The burden of proof for equality of plumbing pumps is on the proposer.
I.
Comply with California AB 1953, Vermont S.152 and NSF 61 Annex G (pending) for wetted
surfaces of valves, fittings and specialties containing no more than 0.25% lead by weight
compliance for valves for domestic water service.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal for each pump.
1.5 WARRANTY
A.
Warranty on Pumps: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair,

within warranty period, pumps with inadequate or defective materials and workmanship, including
leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required; provided manufacturer's
instructions for handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining units have been adhered to during
warranty period. Replacement includes both parts and labor for removal and reinstallation.
1.
Warranty Period: One year from date of substantial completion.

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.

1.
Cartridge Type Inline Circulators:

a.
Grundfos Pumps, Corp.
2. Inline Circulator Pumps:
a.
Bell & Gossett, ITT.
b. Grundfos Pumps, Corp
3. Inline Pumps:
a.
4. Close Coupled Inline Pumps:
a.
5. Elevator Pit Sump Pumps:
a.
Weil Pump Company
6. Submersible Sump Pumps:
a.
Weil Pump Company
7. Submersible Sump Pump High Level Alarms:
a.
Weil Pump Company
8. Submersible Sewage Ejectors:
a.
Weil Pump Company
9. Packaged Domestic Booster Pumps:
a.
Goulds Pumps, ITT
b. Canariss Corp.
c.
d. Quantumflo, Inc.
e.
SyncroFlo, Inc.
10. Packaged Domestic Booster Pumps Variable Speed Multistage
a.
Goulds Pumps, ITT
b. Canariss Corp.
c.
d. Quantumflo, Inc.

Duluth, GA
PLUMBING PUMPS
15453-2
1550000803
05/25/2015
e.
SyncroFlo, Inc.
11. Non-Clog Check Valves:
a.
Series CVXXXC by Liberty Pumps
b. Series 30 Zoeller Pump Company
c.
Series CV-SE by Little Giant Pump Co.
12. Non-Clog Check Valves:
a.
Series 14-9455.051 by FLYGT
b. Series 240 by GW Industries, Inc.
13. Aquastats:
a.
Dayton
b. Honeywell
c.
Penn
d. White-Rodgers
14. Sump Basins
a.
Fiberbasin, Inc.
2.2 PUMPS, GENERAL
A.
Pumps and circulators: factory assembled and factory tested.
B.
Preparation for shipping: After assembly and testing, clean flanges and exposed machined metal
surfaces and treat with an anticorrosion compound. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with
wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
C.
Motors: Conform to NEMA standards; single, multiple, or variable speed with type of enclosure and
electrical characteristics as indicated; have built-in thermal-overload protection and grease-lubricated
ball bearings. Select motors that are nonoverloading within the full range of the pump performance
curve.
D.
Apply factory finish paint to assembled, tested units prior to shipping.
2.3 CARTRIDGE TYPE CIRCULATOR PUMPS

A.
General Description: Leakproof, inline, seamless, volute-type pump. Pump and motor shall be
assembled on a common shaft in a single hermetically sealed unit, without stuffing boxes or
mechanical seals. Accomplish sleeve bearings lubrication by circulating pumped liquid through the
motor section. Isolate motor section from the motor stator windings with a thin corrosion- resistant,
nonmagnetic, alloy liner. Pumps shall be rated for 125 psig working pressure and 225 deg F
continuous water temperature.
B.
Casings: Cast bronze, with stainless steel liner and static O-ring seal to separate motor section from
motor stator, and with union piping connections.
C.
Impeller: Overhung, single-suction, closed or open nonmetallic impeller.
D.
Pump Shaft and Sleeve: Stainless steel shaft with carbon steel bearing sleeve.
E.
Motors: 1750 RPM one piece sealed type.
2.4 INLINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS

A.
General Description: Circulators shall be horizontal inline, centrifugal, separately coupled, singlestage, all-bronze, radially split case design, with mechanical seals, permanently lubricated ball
bearings and rated for 125 psig working pressure and 225 deg F continuous water temperature.
B.
Casings: [lead free] Bronze, with threaded companion flanges for piping connections smaller than 21/2 inches, and threaded gauge tappings at inlet and outlet connections.
C.
Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed, overhung, single suction, fabricated from cast
bronze conforming to ASTM B 584, and keyed to shaft.
D.
Pump Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with oil-lubricated copper sleeve.
E.
Mechanical Seals: Carbon steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat, and flexible bellows
and gasket.
F.
Pump Bearings: Oil-lubricated, bronze journal and thrust bearings.
G.
Motor Bearings: Oil-lubricated sleeve bearings.

Duluth, GA
PLUMBING PUMPS
15453-3
1550000803
05/25/2015
H.
Shaft Couplings: Flexible; capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment.
I.
Motors: Resiliently mounted to the pump casing.
2.5 INLINE PUMPS

A.
General Description: Circulators shall be horizontal inline, centrifugal, separately coupled, singlestage, all-bronze, radially split case design, with mechanical seals, flexible coupling between pump
and motor and rated for 125 psig working pressure and 225 deg F continuous water temperature.
B.
Casings: Bronze, with threaded companion flanges for piping connections smaller than 2-1/2 inches,
and threaded gauge tappings at inlet and outlet connections.
C.
Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed, overhung, single suction, fabricated from
Rolled Temper brass conforming to ASTM B 36, and keyed to shaft.
D.
Pump Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with oil-lubricated copper sleeve.
E.
Mechanical Seals: Carbon steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat, and Buna-N bellows
and gasket.
F.
Pump Bearings: Oil-lubricated, bronze journal and thrust bearings.
G.
Motor Bearings: Oil-lubricated sleeve bearings.
H.
Shaft Couplings: Flexible; capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment.
I.
Motors: Resiliently mounted to the pump casing.
2.6 CLOSE COUPLED INLINE PUMPS

A.
General Description: Pumps shall be centrifugal, close-coupled, single-stage, all-bronze, radially split
case design, and rated for 175 psig working pressure and 225 deg F continuous water temperature.
B.
Casings: Iron, with threaded companion flanges for piping connections smaller than 2-1/2 inches,
and threaded gauge tappings at inlet and outlet connections.
C.
Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed, overhung, single suction, cast bronze,
conforming to ASTM B 584, and keyed to shaft.
D.
Wear Rings: Removable, bronze.
E.
Pump Shaft and Sleeve: Ground and polished steel shaft with bronze sleeve and integral thrust
bearing. Provide flinger on motor shaft between motor and seals to prevent liquid that leaks past
pump seals from entering the motor bearings.
F.
Seals: Carbon steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat, and Buna-N bellows and
gasket.
G.
Motor: 1750 or 3500 RPM open drip proof or totally enclosed fan cooled.General Description: Pumps
shall be horizontal inline, centrifugal, separately coupled, single-stage, all-bronze, radially split case
design, with mechanical seals, flexible coupling between pump and motor and rated for 125 psig
working pressure and 225 deg F continuous water temperature.
2.7 ELEVATOR PIT SUMP PUMPS

A.
General Description: Pumps shall be simplex centrifugal, direct connected, floor mounted, single
stage type with cast iron body, stainless steel shaft, cast iron impeller, mechanical seal, permanently
lubricated upper and lower ball bearings complete with integral inlet strainer, mechanical float
switch, and power cord with ground.
B.
Casing: Cast iron with integral cast-iron inlet strainer and legs to elevate the pump to permit flow
into the impeller. Discharge companion flange shall be arranged for vertical discharge and suitable
for plain-end pipe connection.
C.
Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, open or semiopen, overhung, single suction, fabricated
from cast iron, keyed to shaft and secured by a locking capscrew.
D.
Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory-sealed, upper and lower grease-lubricated ball
bearings.

Duluth, GA
PLUMBING PUMPS
15453-4
1550000803
05/25/2015
E.
gasket.
F.
Motor: NEMA 6 with class F insulation, hermetically sealed, 1750 rpm, capacitor start, air filled with
built-in overload protection, with 3-conductor, waterproof cable and grounding plug.
G.
Controls: NEMA 1, tethered float switch for on-off control with piggy back power cord
connection for sump pump power cord.
2.8 ELEVATOR PIT SUMP PUMP HIGH LEVEL ALARMS

A.
Alarm: Remote type 120V single phase with NEMA 4X enclosure, terminal block, 5 amp isolated
alarm contact, alarm horn, alarm light, test-automatic-silence switch and mechanical float switch.
2.9 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS

A.
General Description: Pumps shall be [simplex] [duplex] centrifugal, direct connected, floor mounted,
single stage type with cast iron body, stainless steel shaft, cast iron impeller, mechanical seal,
permanently lubricated upper and lower ball bearings complete, control panel, mechanical float
switch, and power cords with grounds.
B.
Casing: Cast iron with integral cast-iron inlet strainer and legs to elevate the pump to permit flow
into the impeller. Discharge companion flange shall be arranged for vertical discharge and suitable
for plain-end pipe connection.
C.
Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, open or semiopen, overhung, single suction, fabricated
from cast iron, keyed to shaft and secured by a locking capscrew.
D.
bearings.
E.
gasket.
F.
Motor: NEMA 6 with class F insulation, hermetically sealed, 1750 rpm, air filled, [explosion proof],
with 3-conductor, waterproof cable.
G.
Basin: Fiberglass reinforced plastic, PVC plastic is not acceptable, with a minimum wall thickness of
3/16, with 2 wide retaining ring at the basin bottom and every four feet and factory pipe
penetration connection kits with seals. Refer to the drawings for basin dimensions.
H.
Basin: Cast in place concrete or pre-cast concrete, refer to structural drawings.
I.
Rail Retrieval System: Provide with cast iron floor elbow, gasket, anchor bolts, yoke, pipe guides,
stainless steel rope, and upper guide bracket.
J.
Cover: Epoxy coated steel or aluminum gasketed round coverwith holes for discharge piping, vent
and conduits. [Access cover shall be completely flush for all for discharge piping, vent and conduits
entering or exiting the sump pit under the slab as indicated on the drawings.] [Provide integral or
separate cover for valves.] [Provide cover rated for AASHTO H-20 loading.]
K.
Controls: NEMA 4X fiberglass dead front door enclosure, complete with lockable combination circuit
breaker magnetic motor starter and 3 leg overload protection for each motor; internal test-offautomatic selector switches, overload relays and indicator lights, resets, 120V control circuit
transformer fused on primary and secondary, automatic alternator for alternating lead-lag pump
selection and to provide for both pumps to operate simultaneously under high level condition, hour
meter for each pump, high level alarm horn and light with test-off-automatic switch, [auxiliary alarm
contacts for each alarm condition] and terminal board for connection of lines, pumps, and level
sensors. Circuit breakers shall have minimum AIC rating as indicated on the Electrical Drawings.
Control panel shall have a unit short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the available short
circuit current as indicated on the electrical drawings. [Controls shall be configured for terminating
one incoming power feeder. Controls shall be configured for terminating two incoming power
feeders.] [Refer to control drawings for interlock of alarm contacts with the building automation
system.]
L.
Controls: NEMA 4 enclosure with double vandal resistant door with lockable through door [fusible]
disconnect, lockable combination circuit breaker magnetic motor starter and 3 leg overload
protection for each motor, internal test-off-automatic selector switches, overload relays and indicator

Duluth, GA
PLUMBING PUMPS
15453-5
1550000803
05/25/2015
lights, resets, 120V control circuit transformers fused on primary and secondary, automatic
alternator for alternating lead-lag pump selection and to provide for both pumps to operate
simultaneously under high level condition, hour meter for each pump, high level alarm horn and light
with test-off-automatic switch, lightening arrestor, [floor mounting stand] [auxiliary alarm contacts
for each alarm condition] and terminal board for connection of lines, pumps, and level sensors.
Circuit breakers shall have minimum AIC rating as indicated on the Electrical Drawings. Control
panel shall have a unit short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the available short circuit
current as indicated on the electrical drawings. [Controls shall be configured for terminating one
incoming power feeder.] [Controls shall be configured for terminating two incoming power feeders.]
[Refer to control drawings for interlock of alarm contacts with the building automation system.]
M.
Level Controls: Pole mounted tethered float switches with chord grips, pole mounting plate and
cover. Float switches shall be 120V 3 amp single pole normally open that closes on the rise for
pump off, first pump on second pump on and high level alarm.
N.
Remote Alarm Panel: NEMA 1 enclosure with individual 115v power source, alarm lights for high
water alarm, standby pump running and control power failure with alarm buzzer with silencing switch
and auxiliary alarm contacts for each alarm condition. Refer to control drawings for interlock of
alarm contacts with the building automation system.
O.
Junction Box: NEMA 6P enclose of fiberglass reinforced polyester with fully gasketed cover,
terminal strip and inlets and outlets for four control and two power connections.
P.
Disconnect: Disconnect is provided under Division 16.
2.10 SEWAGE EJECTORS

A.
General Description: Pumps shall be [simplex] [duplex] centrifugal, direct connected, floor mounted,
single stage [grinder] type with cast iron body, stainless steel shaft, cast iron impeller, mechanical
seal, permanently lubricated upper and lower ball bearings complete, control panel, mechanical float
switch, and power cords with grounds.
B.
Casing: Cast iron with integral cast-iron legs to elevate the pump to permit flow into the impeller.
Pump casing, volute and impeller shall pass a [2] [3/8] diameter sphere. Discharge companion
flange shall be arranged for horizontal discharge [and rail retrieval system].
C.
Rail Retrieval System: Provide with cast iron floor elbow, gasket, anchor bolts, yoke, pipe guides,
stainless steel rope, and upper guide bracket.
D.
Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, vortex, open or semiopen, overhung, single suction,
fabricated from cast iron, keyed to shaft and secured by a locking capscrew.
E.
Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced enclosed, overhung, single suction, fabricated from
bronze, keyed to shaft and secured by a locking capscrew. Grinder shall be a 440c stainless steel
rotating cutter attached to the motor shaft with stationary shredder ring attached to the pump inlet.
F.
bearings.
G.
Seals: Single mechanical seal with carbon steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat, and
Buna-N bellows and gasket.
H.
Motor: Hermetically sealed, with built-in overload protection, air filled, [explosion proof], [1750RPM]
[3500 RPM] NEMA class B insulation capable of a maximum continuous operating temperature of
120F, 3-conductor and waterproof cable.
I.
Basin: Fiberglass reinforced plastic, PVC plastic is not acceptable, with a minimum wall thickness of
3/16, 2 wide retainer ring at the basin bottom and every four feet and factory pipe penetration
connection kits. Refer to the drawings for basin dimensions.
J.
Basin: Cast in place concrete or pre-cast concrete, refer to structural drawings.
K.
Cover: Epoxy coated steel or aluminum gasketed round coverwith holes for discharge piping, vent
and conduits. [Access cover shall be completely flush for all for discharge piping, vent and conduits
entering or exiting the sump pit under the slab as indicated on the drawings.] [Provide integral or
separate cover for valves.] [Provide cover rated for AASHTO H-20 loading.]
L.
Controls: NEMA 4X fiberglass dead front door enclosure, complete with lockable combination circuit

Duluth, GA
PLUMBING PUMPS
15453-6
1550000803
05/25/2015
breaker magnetic motor starter and 3 leg overload protection for each motor; internal test-offautomatic selector switches, overload relays and indicator lights, resets, 120V control circuit
transformer fused on primary and secondary, automatic alternator for alternating lead-lag pump
selection and to provide for both pumps to operate simultaneously under high level condition, hour
meter for each pump, high level alarm horn and light with test-off-automatic switch, [auxiliary alarm
contacts for each alarm condition] and terminal board for connection of lines, pumps, and level
sensors. Circuit breakers shall have minimum AIC rating as indicated on the Electrical Drawings.
Control panel shall have a unit short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the available short
circuit current as indicated on the electrical drawings. [Controls shall be configured for terminating
one incoming power feeder. Controls shall be configured for terminating two incoming power
feeders.] [Refer to control drawings for interlock of alarm contacts with the building automation
system.]
M.
Controls: NEMA 4 enclosure with double vandal resistant door with lockable through door [fusible]
disconnect, lockable combination circuit breaker magnetic motor starter and 3 leg overload
protection for each motor, internal test-off-automatic selector switches, overload relays and indicator
lights, resets, 120V control circuit transformers fused on primary and secondary, automatic
alternator for alternating lead-lag pump selection and to provide for both pumps to operate
simultaneously under high level condition, hour meter for each pump, high level alarm horn and light
with test-off-automatic switch, lightening arrestor, [floor mounting stand] [auxiliary alarm contacts
for each alarm condition] and terminal board for connection of lines, pumps, and level sensors.
current as indicated on the electrical drawings. [Controls shall be configured for terminating one
incoming power feeder.] [Controls shall be configured for terminating two incoming power feeders.]
[Refer to control drawings for interlock of alarm contacts with the building automation system.]
N.
Level Controls: Pole mounted tethered float switches with chord grips, pole mounting plate and
cover. Float switches shall be 120V 3 amp single pole normally open that closes on the rise for
pump off, first pump on second pump on and high level alarm.
O.
Junction Box: NEMA 6P enclose of fiberglass reinforced polyester with fully gasketed cover,
terminal strip and inlets and outlets for four control and two power connections.
P.
Remote Alarm Panel: NEMA 1 enclosure with individual 115v power source, alarm lights for high
water alarm, standby pump running and control power failure with alarm buzzer with silencing switch
and auxiliary alarm contacts for each alarm condition. Refer to control drawings for interlock of
alarm contacts with the building automation system.
Q.
Disconnect: Disconnect is provided under Division 16.
2.11 SIMPLEX DOMESTIC BOOSTER

A.
Domestic Booster Pump shall be packaged constant speed type with simplex close coupled pump,
control panel, motor, gauges, ball type isolation valves, [pilot operated pressure reducing and] check
valve, remote accumulator tank and accessories. The packaged system, including all items listed
below, shall be factory assembled on a fabricated steel base plate with structural steel framework.
The completed package shall be factory tested, adjusted and certified for the specified flow
conditions, and shipped as unit ready for plumbing connections with remote control panel. Factory
personnel shall install control panel and provide wiring to the pump motor and controls. Factory
personnel shall provide start-up service for the pump.
B.
Pumps: Provide single stage end suction type with close-coupled motor, mechanical seal, and iron
body with bronze impeller.
C.
Motors: Provide constant speed open drip proof type, operate at 3500 rpm and shall not overload at
any point of the pump curve.
D.
Check Valves on discharge side of pump: Class 150, iron body wafer type; with replaceable Buna-N
bonded bronze seat, and non-slam design with bronze disc and stainless steel spring.
E.
Pressure Reducing Valves: Provide pressure reducing and non-slam check valves shall be angle pilot
operated type with iron body with fused epoxy coating, stainless steel seat ring and spring. Provide
one valve per pump. Manufactured by Cla-Val or Watts.
F.
Accumulator Tank: Provide tank size as scheduled on the drawings with a minimum pressure rating

Duluth, GA
PLUMBING PUMPS
15453-7
1550000803
05/25/2015
of 125psig; FDA approved elastomer bladder, tank bottom connection and air charge valve. Tank
shall be complete with check valves, isolation valves and pressure reducing valve for remote
installation.
G.
Piping: Suction and discharge headers shall be type L hard drawn copper tube with peak velocity
not exceed 10 feet per second.
H.
Controls and Instruments: Control panel shall be mounted on the pump package and shall include a
NEMA 12 enclosure, [fusible] disconnect with door interlock, thermomagnetic fuseless motor
protector, motor starter with 3 leg overload protection, control circuit transformer with primary and
secondary fuse protection, HOA selector switch, low pressure limit switch, low pressure shutdown
with light and manual reset, no flow shutdown via an aquastat with pilot light and low pressure
alarm light Controls shall be arranged for termination of 1 incoming power feeder. Circuit breakers
shall have minimum AIC rating as indicated on the Electrical Drawings. Control panel shall have a
unit short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the available short circuit current as indicated
on the electrical drawings.
2.12 PACKAGED DOMESTIC BOOSTER PUMPS CONSTANT SPEED

A.
Packaged, constant pressure type with [duplex] [triplex] close coupled pumps, control panel, motors,
control valves, gauges, ball or gate type isolation valves, [remote] accumulator tank, thermal bleed
aquastat and solenoid valve and accessories. The packaged system, including all items listed below,
shall be factory assembled on a fabricated steel base plate with structural steel framework. The
completed package shall be factory tested, adjusted and certified for the specified flow conditions,
and shipped as an integral unit ready for plumbing and electrical connections.
B.
Pumps: Provide single stage end suction type with close-coupled motors, mechanical seals, and iron
body with bronze impellers.
C.
Motors: Provide constant speed open drip proof type, operate at 3500 rpm and shall not overload at
D.
Pressure Reducing Valves: Provide pressure reducing and non-slam check valves shall be angle pilot
operated type with iron body with fused epoxy coating, stainless steel seat ring and spring. Provide
one valve per pump. Manufactured by Cla-Val or Watts.
E.
Piping: Suction and discharge headers shall be 304 stainless steel or cast iron with a fused epoxy
coating and a minimum ASME pressure rating of 125 psi. Peak velocity in headers shall not exceed
10 feet per second.
F.
installation.
G.
NEMA 12 enclosure, lockable through door [fusible] disconnect, lockable combination circuit breaker
magnetic motor starter and 3 leg overload protection for each motor, overload relays and indicator
lights, 120V control circuit transformer with primary and secondary fuse protection, test-offautomatic selector switch for each pump, low suction pressure limit switch and alarm light, high
system pressure limit switch and alarm horn, pump running lights, current sensing devices, and/or
pressure sensing devices, minimum run timers, hour meter for each pump and automatic alternator.
current as indicated on the electrical drawings. Controls shall be arranged for termination of 1
incoming power feeder.
H.
NEMA 12 enclosure, lockable through door [fusible] disconnect, lockable combination circuit breaker
magnetic motor starter and 3 leg overload protection for each motor, overload relays and indicator
lights, 120V control circuit transformer with primary and secondary fuse protection, test-offautomatic selector switch for each pump, low suction pressure limit switch and alarm light, high
system pressure limit switch and alarm horn, pump running lights, current sensing devices, and/or
pressure sensing devices, programmable logic controller capable of automatic pump alternating and
on-line field modified data entries for staging pumps, with software memory stored in non-volatile

Duluth, GA
PLUMBING PUMPS
15453-8
1550000803
05/25/2015
EPROM memory, furnish with user interface keypad with LED display. Circuit breakers shall have
minimum AIC rating as indicated on the Electrical Drawings. Control panel shall have a unit short
circuit current rating equal to or greater than the available short circuit current as indicated on the
electrical drawings. Controls shall be arranged for termination of 1 incoming power feeder.
2.13 PACKAGED DOMESTIC BOOSTER PUMPS VARIABLE SPEED
A.
Packaged, variable speed type with [duplex] [triplex] close coupled pumps, control panel, motors,
variable speed drives, gauges, ball or gate type isolation valves, [remote] accumulator tank, thermal
bleed aquastat and solenoid valve and accessories. The packaged system, including all items listed
below, shall be factory assembled on a fabricated steel base plate with structural steel framework.
The completed package shall be factory tested, adjusted and certified for the specified flow
conditions, and shipped as an integral unit ready for plumbing and electrical connections.
B.
Pumps: Provide single stage end suction type with close-coupled motors, mechanical seals, and iron
body with bronze impellers.
C.
Motors: Provide variable speed open drip proof type, operate at 3500 rpm and shall not overload at
D.
Check Valves on discharge side of pump: Class 150, iron body wafer type; with replaceable Buna-N
bonded bronze seat, and non-slam design with bronze disc and stainless steel spring.
E.
Piping: Suction and discharge headers shall be 304 stainless steel with ANSI class 150 pressure
rating and flanges welded to the headers. Peak velocity in headers shall not exceed 8 feet per
second. Furnish with the following valves:
a.
b.
c.
Ball Valves, 2 Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150 saturated steam pressure, 600psi CWP; two-piece construction; with bronze body conforming to ASTM B 584,
conventional port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals,
blowout-proof stem, solder ends and vinyl-covered steel handle.
Lift Check Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: Class 125; cast-bronze body and cap conforming
to ASTM B 62; horizontal or angle pattern, lift-type valve, with stainless steel spring,
bronze disc holder with renewable "Teflon" disc, and threaded ends.
Pressure relief valve: Pilot operated diaphragm type with class 300 ductile iron body with
fused epoxy coating to prevent over pressurization of the system during pump across the
line operation.
F.
installation.
G.
NEMA 12 enclosure, through door [fusible] disconnect for each pump, overload relays and indicator
lights, 120V control circuit transformer with primary and secondary fuse protection, virtual on-offautomatic selector switch for each pump, low pressure limit switch, low pressure alarm light, high
system pressure alarm light, pump running lights, hour meter for each pump, suction and discharge
header pressure sensors, [remote pressure sensor], [flow sensor device], programmable logic
controller and variable speed drives. Controls shall be arranged for termination of 1 incoming power
feeder. Control panel shall have a unit short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the
available short circuit current as indicated on the electrical drawings.
1.
2.
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC): Designed specifically for the control of pumps with
variable speed drives capable of receiving two analog pressure inputs, analog flow input,
automatic pump alternating and On-line field modified data entries for staging pumps, with
software memory stored in non-volatile EPROM memory, furnish with user interface keypad
with LED display.
Variable Speed Drive: The variable speed drives (VFD) shall be adjustable frequency which
employ a pulse width modulated inverter. The drive shall include built in diagnostics.
Diagnostics shall be annunciated through the alpha numeric keypad. The drive shall be listed
UL, ETL and/or CSA. To insure safety of the equipment, the VFD shall include these protective
features and options:
a.
Nema 12 enclosure.
b. Static instantaneous over-current and over-voltage trip.

Duluth, GA
PLUMBING PUMPS
15453-9
1550000803
05/25/2015
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
3.
4.
5.
6.
H.
Static over-speed (over-frequency) protection.

Line or fuse loss and under-voltage protection.
Power unit over-temperature protection.
Motor inverse time overload protection.
Input fused disconnect or circuit breaker.
Input line reactor. AC or DC sized for a minimum of 1-1/2% impedance.
Total voltage harmonic distortion from the VFD shall be less than 5% to meet IEEE
requirements.
j.
Ammeter.
k.
Speed meter.
l.
Automatic restart after power failure or minor drive fault. The drive shall attempt a
minimum of two restarts before a complete drive shut-down.
m. Power on light.
n. Manual speed potentiometer or control capability through the keypad.
o. Hand/Off/Automatic Switch or Manual/Automatic Switch with start/stop pushbutton.
p. Test switch
q. VFD fault light and reset.
r.
Output to the PLC and integral LED display
s.
The VFD shall be microprocessor based and utilize digital input for all parameter
adjustments. The VFD shall include a digital display for monitoring system parameters and
for first fault indication, and digital input programming capability on the main logic board.
t.
The VFD shall operate on a frequency range of 1 to 66 Hz with resolution of 0.1% of base
speed with analog input or 0.025% with digital input and have accuracy within 0.05% of
set point. VFD shall operate in environment of 0 to 40 degrees C, 3,300 feet altitude and
95% non-condensing humidity without derating.
u. All control circuit voltages shall be physically and electrically isolated from power circuit
voltages.
v.
All VFDs shall be tested/run in the equivalent of NEMA 12 enclosure and burned in at
rated ambient (40 C) with a fully loaded motor.
Pressure Sensors: NEMA 4 water tight enclosure with pressure rating of 2,000psi, stainless
steel wetted parts, 0.25 male NPT connection, calibration from 0 to 150 psi with 4-20mA DC
signal at 24 VDC. Refer to the floor plans for location of remote pressure sensor.
Flow Sensor: NEMA 4 water tight enclosure paddle wheel type with pressure rating of 200 psi,
stainless steel wetted parts, with 4-20mA DC signal at 24 VDC. Refer to the floor plans for
location of flow sensor.
Sequence of Operation: Each sensor/transmitter shall send a 4-20mA signal to the PLC,
indicative of process variable condition. The PLC shall compare each signal to the independent,
user determined set points. Single pump speed shall remain constant at optimum energy
consumption level when all set points are satisfied. [If input from the optional flow sensor
indicates the pump to be operating at the end of the pump curve, the controller shall
automatically stage on the lag pump.] The PLC shall continuously scan and process variable to
its individual set point and control to the least satisfied zone. The PLC shall send the
appropriate analog signal to the VSD to speed up or slow down the pump/motor as the worst
case zone deviates from set point. If the set point cannot be satisfied by the designated lead
pump, the PLC shall initiate a timed sequence of operation to stage a lag pump. The lag pump
shall accelerate resulting in the lead pump(s) decelerating until they equalize in speed. Further
change in process variable shall cause the pumps to change speed together. When the set
point (and end of curve criteria if supplied with optional flow meter) can be safely satisfied with
fewer pumps, the pump logic controller shall initiate a timed destage sequence and continue
variable speed operation.
Control Wire: Domestic booster pump manufacturer shall furnish the appropriate type and
amount of wire for interlock of the remote sensors with the domestic booster pump control
panel.
Startup Services: Domestic booster pump manufacturer shall provide factory start-up and check out
of the booster pump. He shall provide the Owners Representative with certification of proper
installation and system operation.
2.14 PACKAGED DOMESTIC BOOSTER PUMPS VARIABLE SPEED MULTISTAGE

A.
Packaged, constant pressure type with [duplex] [triplex] vertical multiple stage centrifugal pumps,
control panel, motors, variable frequency drives, gauges, ball type isolation valves, dielectric

Duluth, GA
PLUMBING PUMPS
15453-10
1550000803
05/25/2015
isolators, [remote] accumulator tank, thermal bleed aquastat and solenoid valve and accessories.
The packaged system, including all items listed below, shall be factory assembled on a fabricated
steel base plate with structural steel framework. The completed package shall be factory tested,
adjusted and certified for the specified flow conditions, and shipped as an integral unit ready for
plumbing and electrical connections.
B.
Pumps: Provide multiple stage vertical multiple stage centrifugal type with close-coupled motors,
cast iron suction / discharge chamber, motor stool and pump shaft couplings, mechanical seals, 304
stainless steel and impellers, chambers, straps, suction interconnector and neck rings, 431 stainless
steel pump shaft and 316 stainless steel bearings, neck rings retainers, split cones, split cone nuts,
wear and lock rings.
C.
Motors: Provide variable speed, totally enclosed fan cooled type, operate at 3500 rpm and shall not
overload at any point of the pump curve.
D.
Piping: Suction and discharge headers shall be 304 stainless steel with ANSI class 150 pressure
rating and flanges welded to the headers. Peak velocity in headers shall not exceed 8 feet per
second. Furnish with the following valves:
a.
b.
c.
Ball Valves, 2 Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150 saturated steam pressure, 600psi CWP; two-piece construction; with bronze body conforming to ASTM B 584,
conventional port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals,
blowout-proof stem, solder ends and vinyl-covered steel handle.
Lift Check Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: Class 125; cast-bronze body and cap conforming
to ASTM B 62; horizontal or angle pattern, lift-type valve, with stainless steel spring,
bronze disc holder with renewable "Teflon" disc, and threaded ends.
Pressure relief valve: Pilot operated diaphragm type with class 300 ductile iron body with
fused epoxy coating to prevent over pressurization of the system during pump across the
line operation.
E.
installation.
F.
NEMA 12 enclosure, through door [fusible] disconnect for each pump, overload relays and indicator
lights, 120V control circuit transformer with primary and secondary fuse protection, virtual on-offautomatic selector switch for each pump, low pressure limit switch, low pressure alarm light, high
system pressure alarm light, pump running lights, hour meter for each pump, suction and discharge
header pressure sensors, [remote pressure sensor], [flow sensor device], programmable logic
controller and variable speed drives. Controls shall be arranged for termination of 1 incoming power
feeder. Control panel shall have a unit short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the
available short circuit current as indicated on the electrical drawings.
1.
2.
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC): Designed specifically for the control of pumps with
variable speed drives capable of receiving two analog pressure inputs, analog flow input,
automatic pump alternating and On-line field modified data entries for staging pumps, with
software memory stored in non-volatile EPROM memory, furnish with user interface keypad
with LED display.
Variable Frequency Drive: The variable speed drives (VFD) shall be adjustable frequency type
which employs a pulse width modulated inverter. The drive shall include built in diagnostics.
Diagnostics shall be annunciated through the alpha numeric keypad. The drive shall be listed
UL, ETL and/or CSA. To insure safety of the equipment, the VFD shall include these protective
features and options:
a.
Nema 12 enclosure.
b. Static instantaneous over-current and over-voltage trip.
c.
Static over-speed (over-frequency) protection.
d. Line or fuse loss and under-voltage protection.
e.
Power unit over-temperature protection.
f.
Motor inverse time overload protection.
g. Input fused disconnect or circuit breaker.
h. Input line reactor. AC or DC sized for a minimum of 1-1/2% impedance.
i.
Total voltage harmonic distortion from the VFD shall be less than 5% to meet IEEE

Duluth, GA
PLUMBING PUMPS
15453-11
1550000803
05/25/2015
requirements.
Ammeter.
Speed meter.
Automatic restart after power failure or minor drive fault. The drive shall attempt a
minimum of two restarts before a complete drive shut-down.
m. Power on light.
n. Manual speed potentiometer or control capability through the keypad.
o. Hand/Off/Automatic Switch or Manual/Automatic Switch with start/stop pushbutton.
p. Test switch
q. VFD fault light and reset.
r.
Output to the PLC and integral LED display
s.
The VFD shall be microprocessor based and utilize digital input for all parameter
adjustments. The VFD shall include a digital display for monitoring system parameters and
for first fault indication, and digital input programming capability on the main logic board.
t.
The VFD shall operate on a frequency range of 1 to 66 Hz with resolution of 0.1% of base
speed with analog input or 0.025% with digital input and have accuracy within 0.05% of
set point. VFD shall operate in environment of 0 to 40 degrees C, 3,300 feet altitude and
95% non-condensing humidity without derating.
u. All control circuit voltages shall be physically and electrically isolated from power circuit
voltages.
v.
All VFDs shall be tested/run in the equivalent of NEMA 12 enclosure and burned in at
rated ambient (40 C) with a fully loaded motor.
w. Configured for mounting on top of motor or outside of control panel.
Pressure Sensors: NEMA 4 water tight enclosure with pressure rating of 2,000psi, stainless
steel wetted parts, 0.25 male NPT connection, calibration from 0 to 150 psi with 4-20mA DC
signal at 24 VDC. Refer to the floor plans for location of remote pressure sensor.
Sequence of Operation: Each sensor/transmitter shall send a 4-20mA signal to the PLC,
indicative of process variable condition. The PLC shall compare each signal to the independent,
user determined set points. Single pump speed shall remain constant at optimum energy
consumption level when all set points are satisfied. If input from the optional flow sensor
indicates the pump to be operating at the end of the pump curve, the controller shall
automatically stage on the lag pump. The PLC shall continuously scan and process variable to
its individual set point and control to the least satisfied zone. The PLC shall send the
appropriate analog signal to the VSD to speed up or slow down the pump/motor as the worst
case zone deviates from set point. If the set point cannot be satisfied by the designated lead
pump, the PLC shall initiate a timed sequence of operation to stage a lag pump. The lag pump
shall accelerate resulting in the lead pump(s) decelerating until they equalize in speed. Further
change in process variable shall cause the pumps to change speed together. When the set
point (and end of curve criteria if supplied with optional flow meter) can be safely satisfied with
fewer pumps, the pump logic controller shall initiate a timed destage sequence and continue
variable speed operation.
Control Wire: Domestic booster pump manufacturer shall furnish the appropriate type and
amount of wire for interlock of the remote sensors with the domestic booster pump control
panel.
j.
k.
l.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Startup Services: Domestic booster pump manufacturer shall provide factory start-up and check out
of the booster pump. He shall provide the Owners Representative with certification of proper
installation and system operation.
2.15 NON CLOG CHECK VALVES

A.
General Description: Flapper type with PVC Body, compression end fittings with Buna-N O ring
and Buna-N flapper with PVC shields.
2.16 NON CLOG CHECK VALVES

A.
General Descriptions: Sinking ball type with cast iron body, steel ball with hallow core and Buna-N
coating. Valve body shall be configured for unobstructed flow. Valves 2 and smaller shall have
threaded connections and valves 3 and larger shall have flanged connections.
2.17 AQUASTATS:
A.
Remote sensing bulb type, non-modulating, single pole double pole throw with surface mount
sensing bulb and mounting bracket, adjustable direct reading scale for set point with adjustable

Duluth, GA
PLUMBING PUMPS
15453-12
1550000803
05/25/2015
differential.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of plumbing pumps. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
Examine rough-in for plumbing piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to
installation.
3.2 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT BASES

A.
Refer to Section Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods for concrete equipment bases.
1.
2.
3.
Form concrete equipment bases by using framing lumber with form release compounds.
Chamfer top edge and corners of pad.
Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves using manufacturer's
installation template.
Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of pumps.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with the manufacturer's written installation and alignment instructions.
B.
Install pumps in locations and arrange to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removal
of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C.
Support pumps and piping separately so that the weight of the piping system does not rest on the
pump.
D.
Suspend inline pumps with althread hanger rod and vibration isolation hangers of sufficient size to
support the weight of the pump independent from the piping system.
E.
Basins: Install sump pump basins in indicated locations and connect to drainage lines. Brace interior
of basin in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to prevent distortion or collapse during
concrete placement. Refer to Division 3 for concrete work. Set cover over basin and fasten to top
flange of basin. Install so cover is flush with finished floor.
3.4 ALIGNMENT
A.
Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting on foundations, after grout has
been set and foundations bolts have been tightened, and after piping connections have been made.
1.
B.
Adjust alignment of pump and motor shafts for angular and parallel alignment by one of the two
methods specified in the Hydraulic Institute "Centrifugal Pumps - Instructions for Installation,
Operation and Maintenance."
After alignment is correct, tighten the foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Fill the base plate
completely with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, with metal blocks and shims or wedges in place.
After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
1.
Alignment tolerances shall meet manufacturers recommendations.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A.
General: Install valves that are same size as the piping connecting the pump.
B.
Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than the diameter of the pump nozzles.
C.
Install a nonslam check valve and shutoff valve on the discharge side of pumps.
D.
Install a non clog check valve in an accessible location or where indicated on the drawings. Install a
full port ball valve on the discharge side of sump pumps or sewage ejectors downstream of the
check valve.
E.
Install a gate valve and strainer on the suction side of inline pumps.
F.
Install pressure gauges on the suction and discharge of each pump at the integral pressure gauge
tappings provided.

Duluth, GA
PLUMBING PUMPS
15453-13
1550000803
05/25/2015
G.
Install pressure gauge connector plugs in suction and discharge piping around pump. Pressure gauge
connector plugs are specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gauges."
H.
Install surface mounted aquastat on bare metal pipe, fastened securely to pipe upstream of circulator
pump when indicated on the drawings.
I.
Interlock aquastat and or timer with hot water recirculation pump motor.
connections are specified in Division 16 sections.
J.
Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 sections.
K.
Control wiring and connections are specified in other Division 15 sections.
L.
Install sump pump or sewage ejector inlets or outlets to fiberglass sump basins in the field at the
required elevation. Cut inlet or outlet per the basin manufacturers instructions, as installation
requires with factory penetration kits at each penetration. See drawings for inlet and outlet
elevations.
M.
Install domestic booster pump remote pressure sensor as recommended by the manufacturer.
Provide conduit and install control wire furnished with the domestic booster pump for interlock with
the remote pressure sensor. Electrical conduit and connections are specified in Division 16 sections.
N.
Install metal flexible connectors at the header inlet and outlet of domestic booster pump, refer to
Division 15 Section Basic Piping Materials And Methods.
O.
Provide type MWP metal and waffle type vibration isolation pads at each anchor bolt connection of
each pump base to equipment pad, refer to Division 15 Section Vibration Isolation.
P.
Provide concrete inertia base connected to equipment pad of each air compressor and vacuum pump,
refer to Division 15 Section Vibration Isolation.
Q.
Coordinate interlock of domestic booster pump alarms for low suction pressure and high
discharge pressure with Division 15. Interlocks are specified in section 17010 Digital Control
Equipment.
R.
Coordinate interlock of elevator pit high level and sump pump high level alarms with Division 15.
Interlocks are specified in section 17010 Digital Control Equipment.
Electrical wiring and

A.
Check suction lines connections for tightness to avoid drawing air into the pump.
3.7 STARTUP
A.
Final Checks Before Start-Up: Perform the following preventative maintenance operations and checks
before start-up:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Lubricate oil-lubricated bearings.

Remove grease-lubricated bearing covers and flush the bearings with kerosene and thoroughly
clean. Fill with new lubricant in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Disconnect coupling and check motor for proper rotation. Rotation shall match direction of
rotation marked on pump casing.
Check that pump is free to rotate by hand. For pumps handling hot liquids, pump shall be free
to rotate with the pump hot and cold. If the pump is bound or even drags slightly, do not
operate the pump until the cause of the trouble is determined and corrected.
Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding the safe motor power:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Prime the pump, opening the suction valve, closing the drains, and prepare the pump for
operation.
Open the valve in the cooling water supply to the bearings where applicable.
Open the sealing liquid supply valve if the pump is so fitted.
Open the warm-up valve of a pump handling hot liquids if the pump is not normally kept at
operating temperature.
Open the recirculating line valve if the pump should not be operated against dead shutoff.
Start motor.
Open the discharge valve slowly.
Observe the leakage from the stuffing boxes and adjust the sealing liquid valve for proper flow
to ensure the lubrication of the packing. Do not tighten the gland immediately, but let the

Duluth, GA
PLUMBING PUMPS
15453-14
1550000803
05/25/2015
packing run in before reducing the leakage through the stuffing boxes.
9. Check the general mechanical operation of the pump and motor.
10. Close the recirculating line valve once there is sufficient flow through the pump to prevent
overheating.
C.
If the pump is to be started against a closed check valve with the discharge gate valve open, the
steps are the same except that the discharge gate valve is opened some time before the motor is
started.
D.
Start Up Services for Booster Pump:

1.
Certification: Prepare certificates for factory compliance of the installation and completion of
factory training signed by the factory-authorized service representative and turn over to the
Architect upon completion of the project.

Duluth, GA
PLUMBING PUMPS
15453-15
1550000803
05/25/2015
SECTION 15460
WATER HEATERS
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes commercial gas-fired water heaters.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Refer to Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for specifications on concrete and reinforcing
materials and concrete placing requirements for equipment pads.
Refer to Division 15 Section Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods for concrete equipment
pads.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks" for gas-fired and oil-fired
water heater vents.
Refer to Division 16 Section "Electrical Connections for Equipment" for power-supply wiring
including field-installed disconnects and required electrical devices.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Product data including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed, and
operating), furnished specialties, and accessories, and indicating dimensions, required
clearances, and methods of assembly of components, and piping and wiring connections.
Wiring diagrams from manufacturers detailing electrical requirements for electrical power supply
wiring to water heaters. Include ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring
required for final installation of water heaters and controls. Differentiate between portions of
wiring that are factory installed and portions that are to be field installed.
Certificates of shop inspection and data report as required by provisions of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
Maintenance data for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and
Division 15 Section "General Mechanical Requirements."

A.
UL Standards: Provide water heaters complying with the following:

1.
UL 1453, "Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters."
B.
NSF Standards: Provide water heaters complying with NSF No. 5, "Standard for Hot Water
Generating Equipment for Food Service Establishments using Spray Type Dishwashing Machines,"
and bearing NSF label.
C.
Electrical Component Standard: Provide components complying with NFPA 70 "National Electrical
Code."
D.
Listing and Labeling: Provide water heaters that are listed and labeled.
1.
2.
The terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory"
(NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
E.
AGA Standards: Provide water heaters that bear the label of the American Gas Association.
F.
ASHRAE Standards: Provide water heaters with performance efficiencies not less than prescribed in
ASHRAE 90.1b, "Energy Conservation in New Building Design."
G.
Design Concept: The drawings indicate types and capacities of water heaters and are based on
specific descriptions and manufacturers indicated.
Water heaters having equal performance
characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered provided that deviations in capacities,
dimensions, operation, or other characteristics are minor and do not change the design concept or
intended performance as judged by the Architect. Burden of proof for equality of water heaters is on
the proposer.
1.4 WARRANTY

Duluth, GA
WATER HEATERS
15460-1
1550000803
01/13/10
A.
Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by manufacturer, agreeing to repair
or replace water heater units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty
period. Failures include, but are not limited to controls, tanks, coils, heat exchangers, and burners.
This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have
against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.
1.
Commercial, Gas Fired, Storage Water Heaters:

a.
Storage Tank: Three years.
b. Controls and Other Components: One year.

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1.
2.
Commercial Atmospheric Gas-Fired Water Heaters:

a.
A.O. Smith.
Thermal Expansion Tanks
a.
Amtrol, Inc.
2.2 ATMOSPHERIC GAS-FIRED WATER HEATERS

A.
Description: Automatic, commercial, gas-fired; with vertical, 150-psig-rated storage tank, gas
burner, integral controls, draft diverter, drain valve, gas regulator, and relief valve.
1.
Fuel: Natural gas.
B.
Insulation: Fiberglass, surrounding tank.
C.
Jacket: Steel, with baked-on enamel finish.
D.
Tank: Glass-lined steel, with anode rods and drain valve.
E.
Safety Controls: Automatic gas shutoff device to shut off entire gas supply in event of excessive
temperature in tank.
F.
Controls: Adjustable surface mounted thermostat, intermittent electronic ignition and flue damper
control.
G.
Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: ASME rated and labeled.
H.
Vacuum Relief Valve: ANSI Z21.22.
2.3 THERMAL EXPANSION TANKS

A.
Thermal Expansion Tanks: Provide size and number as indicated; construct of welded carbon steel
listed for 150 psig working pressure, 375 deg F maximum operating temperature. Separate air
charge from system water to maintain design expansion capacity, by means of a FDA approved butyl
rubber diaphragm securely sealed into tank. Provide taps for pressure gauge and air charging fitting,
and drain fitting. Support vertical tanks with steel legs or base.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT BASES
A.
Construct concrete equipment bases in accordance with Section Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods for setting of equipment.
3.2 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A.
General: Install water heaters on concrete equipment bases. Set and connect units in accordance
with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in
locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Orient so controls and
devices needing servicing are accessible.
B.
Install thermometers on water heater inlet and outlet piping. Thermometers are specified in Division
15 Section "Meters and Gages."
C.
NFPA Compliance: Install gas-fired water heaters in compliance with NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas

Duluth, GA
WATER HEATERS
15460-2
1550000803
01/13/10
Code."
3.3 EXPANSION TANK INSTALLATION
A.
Support expansion tank from structure. Do not hang expansion tank from piping.
B.
Charge expansion tank bladder with air to a pressure equal to the domestic water static pressure.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections of Division 15. The Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection
requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16.
1.
C.
Install piping adjacent to equipment arranged to allow servicing and maintenance.

Connect hot and cold water piping to units with shutoff valves and unions. Connect hot water
circulating piping to unit with shutoff valve, check valve, and union. Extend relief valve
discharge to closest floor drain/sink.
a.
Where water heater piping connections are dissimilar metals, make connections with
dielectric fittings or dielectric unions specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Piping
Materials and Methods."
b. Install vacuum relief valve in cold water inlet piping.
Connect gas supply piping to burner with drip leg, tee, gas cock, and union; minimum size same
as inlet connection. Arrange piping to allow unit servicing.
a.
Install vent piping from gas train pressure regulators and valves to outside the building.
Terminate vent piping with brass screened vent cap fitting. Do not combine vents except
with approval of local authority.
b. Install gas pressure regulators where indicated.
Install drain as indirect waste to spill into open drain or over floor drain.
a.
Install drain valve at low point in water piping, for water heaters not having tank drain.
Grounding:
Code.
Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National Electrical
Vent Connections: Connect gas-fired water heater draft hood to the vent system. Unless otherwise
indicated provide vent same size as outlet on heater. Comply with gas utility requirements.
1.
Vents are specified in Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks."

A.
General: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect unit
installation, provide start-up service, and demonstrate operation of equipment as specified below.
1.
Test and adjust operating and safety controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A.
Perform the following before start-up final checks:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Fill water heaters with water.

Piping systems test complete.
Check for piping connections leaks.
Check for adequate combustion air.
Check for clear vent.
Test operation of safety controls and devices.
Perform the following start-up procedures:

1.
2.
3.
Energize circuits.
Adjust operating controls.
Adjust hot water outlet temperature setting.
3.1 FACTORY STARTUP

A.
Provide factory start-up of gas water heating system installation by a trained factory representative.
Provide the architect with a certificate of a properly installed and functioning water heating system.
3.2 TRAINING

Duluth, GA
WATER HEATERS
15460-3
1550000803
01/13/10
A.
General: At a time mutually agreed upon between the Owner and Contractor, provide the services of
a factory trained and authorized representative to train Owner's designated personnel for a minimum
of two four eight hours on the operation and maintenance of the equipment provided under this
section.
B.
Content: Training shall include but not be limited to:

1.
2.
3.
Overview of the system and/or equipment as it relates to the facility as a whole.

Operation and maintenance procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown,
troubleshooting, servicing, preventive maintenance and appropriate operator intervention.
Review data included in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Operating and Maintenance Data."
C.
Certification: Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a certification letter stating that the Owners
designated representative has been trained as specified herein. Letter shall include date, time,
attendees and subject of training. The certification letter shall be signed by the Contractor and the
Owners representative indicating agreement that the training has been provided.
D.
Schedule: Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice.
3.3 FACTORY START-UP FOR INSTANTANEOUS GAS FIRED WATER HEATERS

A.
Provide factory start-up of water heating system installation by a trained factory representative.
B.
Provide the architect with a certificate of a properly installed and functioning water heating system.

Duluth, GA
WATER HEATERS
15460-4
1550000803
01/13/10
SECTION 15488
NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes distribution piping systems for natural gas extending from the point of delivery
to the connections with gas utilization devices. Piping materials and equipment specified in this
Section include:
1.
2.
Pipes, fittings, and specialties.

Special duty valves.
B.
This Section does not apply to liquid petroleum piping; industrial gas applications using such gases
as acetylene and acetylenic compounds, hydrogen, ammonia, carbon monoxide, oxygen and
nitrogen; gas piping, meters, gas pressure regulators and other appurtenances used by the serving
gas supplier in distribution of gas.
C.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers," for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations
Division 9 Section "Painting," for materials and methods for painting pipe.
fire barrier penetrations and wall and floor penetrations.
Division 15 Section "Basic Piping Material and Methods," for materials and methods for
strainers and mechanical sleeve seals.
Division 15 Section "Supports and Anchors," for materials and methods for hanging and
supporting gas distribution piping.
Division 16 Section "Electrical Connections for Equipment" for power-supply wiring including
field-installed disconnects and required electrical devices.
D.
Gas pressures for systems specified in this Section are limited to 5 psig.
E.
Products installed but not furnished under this Section include gas meters which will be provided by
the utility company, to the site, ready for installation.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A.
Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS).
B.
Gas Distribution Piping: A pipe within the building which conveys gas from the point of delivery to
the points of usage.
C.
Gas Service Piping: The pipe from the gas main or other source of supply including the meter,
regulating valve, or service valve to the gas distribution system of the building served.
D.
Point of Delivery: The outlet of the service meter assembly, or the outlet of the service regulator
(service shutoff valve when no meter is provided).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product data for each gas piping specialty and special duty valves. Include rated capacities of
selected models, furnished specialties and accessories, and installation instructions.
B.
Shop drawings detailing dimensions, required clearances, for connections to gas meter.
C.
Coordination drawings for gas distribution piping systems in accordance with Division 15 Section
"General Mechanical Requirements."
D.
Maintenance data for gas specialties and special duty valves, for inclusion in operating and
maintenance manual specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section "General Mechanical
Requirements."
E.
Welders' qualification certificates, certifying that welders comply with the quality requirements
specified under "Quality Assurance" below.

Duluth, GA
NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS

15488-1
1550000803
*** Issue 09/21/09
F.
Test reports specified in Part 3 below.

A.
Installer Qualifications: Installation and replacement of gas piping, gas utilization equipment or
accessories, and repair and servicing of equipment shall be performed only by a qualified installer.
The term qualified is defined as experienced in such work (experienced shall mean having a minimum
of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this project), familiar with precautions required,
and has complied with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Upon request, submit
evidence of such qualifications to the Architect.
B.
Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators: Comply with the requirements of ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, "Welding and Brazing Qualification."
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the requirements of the following codes:

1.
2.
3.
D.
NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code, for gas piping materials and components, gas piping
installations, and inspection, testing, and purging of gas piping systems.
20__ International Fuel Gas Code
20__ Uniform Plumbing Code
Pipe, pipe fittings and pipe specialties shall be manufactured in plants located in the United States or
certified to meet the specified ASTM and ANSI standards.
1.5 SPARE PARTS

A.
Valve Wrenches: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, 2 valve wrenches for each type of gas valve
installed, requiring same.

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide gas piping system products from
one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Gas Ball Valves 1 and Smaller:

a.
Conbraco Industries, Inc. #80-100-YRPV
b. Grinnell GF-171-N
c.
NIBCO # T-585-70-UL-YRPV
Gas Cocks 2 and Smaller:
a.
Homestead # 611
b. Flowserve-Nordstrom # 142
c.
RM Energy Systems Hercules # H142
Gas Cocks 2-1/2 and Larger:
a.
Homestead # 612
b. Flowserve -Nordstrom # 143
c.
RM Energy Systems Hercules # H143
Gas Pressure Regulators
a.
American Meter Company
b. Fisher
c.
Itron
d. Sensus
e.
Maxitrol
Seismic Gas Valves
a.
California Valves
b. Little Fire Fighter Gas Safety Products
c.
Pacific Seismic Products
2.2 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS

A.
General: Refer to Part 3, Article "PIPE APPLICATIONS" for identification of systems where the
specified pipe and fitting materials listed below are used.
B.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade B, Schedule 40, Type E electric-resistance welded or Type S
seamless, black steel pipe, beveled ends.

Duluth, GA
NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS

15488-2
1550000803
*** Issue 09/21/09
C.
Copper Tubing - Drawn Temper: ASTM B88, Type L.
2.3 FITTINGS
A.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, for threaded joints.
Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.
B.
Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234, seamless or welded, for welded joints.

1.
2.
1-1/4 and smaller shall be socket type

1-1/2 and larger shall be butt weld type.
C.
Wrought-Copper Fittings: ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern.
D.
Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following
material group, end connection and facing:
1.
2.
3.
Material Group: 1.1.

End Connections: Butt Welding.
Facings: Raised face.

A.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (Silver).
B.
Joint Compound: Suitable for the gas being handled.
C.
Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for gas to be handled, and for design
temperatures and pressures.

A.
Seismic Gas Valves: Sinking ball or swing type for vertical or horizontal installation, UL listed, tested
to ASCE 25-97 and ANSI Z71.70 with iron body, site guage, threaded ends for 2 inch and smaller,
flanged ends for 2-1/2 inch and larger with a 60 psig maximum operating pressure.
B.
Unions: ANSI B16.39, Class 150, black malleable iron; female pattern; brass to iron seat; ground
joint.
C.
Dielectric Unions: ANSI B16.39, Class 250; malleable iron and cast bronze; with threaded or
soldered end connections suitable for pipe to be joined; designed to isolate galvanic and stray current
corrosion.
D.
Protective Coating: When piping will be in contact with material or atmosphere exerting a corrosive
action, pipe and fittings shall be factory-coated with polyethylene tape, having the following
properties:
1.
2.
3.
4.
overall thickness; 20 mils;

synthetic adhesive;
water vapor transmission rate, gallons per 100 square inch: 0.10 or less.
water absorption, percent: 0.02 or less.
E.
Prime pipe and fittings with a compatible primer prior to application of tape.
F.
Strike Plates: 16 gauge carbon steel, tested and listed by CSA International.
G.
In wall Strike Protection Hose: UL listed spiral wound interlocking galvanized steel reduced wall
flexible conduit.
2.6 VALVES
A.
Gas Ball Valves 1 and smaller: Standard port brass body with chrome-plated brass ball, TFE
seats, threaded ends 150psi steam, 600 WOG, UL listed for natural gas service.
B.
Gas Cocks 2 Inch and Smaller: 175 psi, lubricated plug type, ASTM A126 Grade B semi-steel body,
brass or semi-steel plug with rectangular port, straightaway pattern, square head, threaded ends.
C.
Gas Line Pressure Regulators:

Single stage, steel jacketed, corrosion-resistant gas pressure
regulators; with atmospheric vent, elevation compensator; internal relief vent, with threaded ends for
2 inch and smaller, flanged ends for 2-1/2 inch and larger; for inlet and outlet gas pressures, specific
gravity, and volume flow as indicated on the drawings.

Duluth, GA
NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS

15488-3
1550000803
*** Issue 09/21/09
D.
Gas Line Pressure Regulators:

Single stage, steel jacketed, corrosion-resistant gas pressure
regulators; with atmospheric vent, elevation compensator; internal relief vent, with threaded ends for
2 inch and smaller, flanged ends for 2-1/2 inch and larger; for inlet and outlet gas pressures, specific
gravity, and volume flow as indicated on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPE APPLICATIONS
A.
Install steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 2 inch and smaller, and with welded joints for
2-1/2 inch and larger.
B.
Install Type L, hard-drawn copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and brazed joints for 2 inch
and smaller, above ground, within building.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A.
General: Conform to the requirements of NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.
B.
Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general
location and arrangement of piping systems. Design locations and arrangements of piping take into
consideration pipe sizing, flow direction, slope of pipe, expansion, and other design considerations.
So far as practical, install piping as indicated.
C.
Concealed Locations: As specified below:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Inaccessible Above-Ceiling Locations: Install concealed gas piping in inaccessible above-ceiling

spaces without valves or unions.
Accessible Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible above-ceiling
spaces (subject to the approval of the authority having jurisdiction), whether or not such spaces
are used as a plenum. Valves and unions shall not be located in such spaces used as a plenum.
In Floors: Install concealed gas piping in concrete floor slabs in an air-tight conduit constructed
of Schedule 40 PVC with socket weld joints two pipe sizes larger than the gas pipe served.
Extend conduit a minimum of 12 above finish floor and cap air tight at both ends. Vent
conduit to the outside with a minimum 2 pipe and terminate with a screened vent cap.
Piping In Partitions: Install concealed gas piping in hollow partitions with welded joint (subject
to the approval of the authority having jurisdiction) and protect gas piping against physical
damage. Install gas piping passing through partitions with no joints or unions inside the
partition.
Concrete or Masonry Walls: Do not install gas piping in masonry or concrete walls.
Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through a circulating air duct, clothes
chute, chimney or gas vent, ventilating duct, dumbwaiter or elevator shaft. This does not apply
to accessible above-ceiling space specified above.
D.
Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass though fire-rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors,
maintain the fire-rated integrity. Refer to Division 15 Section Basic Mechanical Materials and
E.
Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior wall constructions with sleeves,
F.
Dirt legs and Sediment Traps: Install a dirt leg at points where condensate and impurities may
collect, at the outlet of the gas meter, as close to the inlet of each gas appliance as possible, and in
a location readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying.
1.
Construct dirt legs and sediment traps using a tee fitting with the bottom outlet plugged or
capped. Use a minimum of 3 pipe diameters in length for the dirt leg. Use same size pipe for
dirt leg as the connected pipe.
G.
H.
Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted,
unless expressly indicated.
I.
applications.

Duluth, GA
NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS

15488-4
1550000803
*** Issue 09/21/09
J.
K.
Install horizontal piping as high as possible allowing for specified slope and coordination with other
components. Install vertical piping tight to columns or walls. Allow sufficient space above
removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.
L.
Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of
valves.
M.
Install gas piping at a uniform grade of 1/4 inch in 15 feet, upward to risers, and from the risers to
the meter, or service regulator when meter is not provided, or the equipment.
N.
Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with the level side down.
O.
Connect branch outlet pipes from the top or sides of horizontal lines, not from the bottom.
P.
Install unions in pipes 2 inch and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections each piece of
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.
Q.
Install dielectric unions where piping of dissimilar metals are joined.
R.
Install flanges on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 inch and larger connections.
S.
Install strainers on the supply side of each control valve, pressure reducing valve, pressure regulating
valve, solenoid valve, and elsewhere as indicated.
T.
Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction. Install expansion loops and
joints as indicated on the Drawings and specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods."
U.
Paint Exposed Outdoor Gas Piping: Cleaning and painting of exposed outdoor gas piping is specified
in Division 9 Section "Painting".
1.
Final color per the architect.

A.
General: Hanger, support, and anchor components and installation procedures conforming to MSS
SP-58 and SP-69 are specified in Division 15 Section "Supports and Anchors. Conform to the table
below for maximum spacing of supports.
B.
Pipe Attachments: Install the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Adjustable band hangers, MSS SP-69 Type 7, for steel pipe 2 and smaller for individual
horizontal runs.
Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS SP-69 Type 1, for steel pipe 2-1/2 and larger for
individual horizontal runs.
Steel riser clamps, MSS SP-69 Type 8, for individual vertical runs.
Extension split ring pipe clamp, MSS SP-69 Type 12, for individual exposed runs on walls.
Engineered strut support system may be provided, at the contractors option, in lieu of
individual hangers for horizontal pipes as specified in Division 15 Supports and Anchors.
Provide two piece straps for uninsulated pipe secured to the bare pipe and provide plastic
galvanic isolators for bare copper tube.
Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes:
SIZE (NPS)
1/2 to 1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
4
6

Duluth, GA
SPACING IN
FEET
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
16
NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS

15488-5
MIN. ROD
SIZE IN
INCHES
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
5/8
3/4
1550000803
*** Issue 09/21/09
C.
Support vertical piping at every floor.
D.
Support gas piping within 12 of each elbow or tee and for gas piping 2-1/2 and larger at each
valve or pressure regulator.
E.
Support gas piping located on roof with pre-engineered roof supports, pre-engineered roof supports
are specified in Division 15 Section "Supports and Anchors. Conform to the table above for
maximum spacing of supports. Support pipe at a minimum 7 above the roof.
3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A.
Welded Joints: Comply with the requirements in ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.
B.
Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual."
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds which produce highly toxic fumes when
heated. Avoid breathing fumes. Provide adequate ventilation.
CAUTION: Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of piping
specialties before brazing.
Fill the tubing and fittings during brazing with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) to
prevent formation of scale.
Heat joints to proper and uniform temperature.
Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe,
fittings, and valves as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or
wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. Refer to NFPA 54, for guide for
number and length of threads for field threading steel pipe.
Align threads at point of assembly.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads.
Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth. When using a wrench on valves place the wrench
on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded, or damaged. If a weld
opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used.
D.
Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to
make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on
bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt
manufacturer.
E.
Fusion Welded: Joints shall be made by a qualified and approved operator in accordance with Title
49, CFR, Part 192.283 and be made in accordance with pipe manufacturers recommendations.

A.
General: The Drawings indicate valve types, locations, and arrangements.
B.
Shut-off duty: Use gas cocks specified in Part 2 above.
3.6 VALVE INSTALLATIONS

A.
Install valves in accessible locations, protected from physical damage. Tag valves with a metal tag
attached with a metal chain indicating the piping systems supplied.
B.
Install a gas cock upstream of each gas pressure regulator. Where two gas pressure regulators are
installed in series in a single gas line, a manual valve is not required at the second regulator.
C.
Install line pressure regulators a minimum of 40 pipe diameters upstream of each equipment
connection.
D.
Install pressure relief or pressure limiting devices so they can be readily operated to determine if the
valve is free; so they can be tested to determine the pressure at which they will operate; and
examined for leakage when in the closed position.
E.
Install pressure relief lines vented to the outside for pressure regulating valves located inside the
building. Relief lines shall be black steel pipe one pipe size larger than the outlet with malleable iron
fittings. Provide turn down with 40 mesh insect screen on outside of the building.

Duluth, GA
NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS

15488-6
1550000803
*** Issue 09/21/09
3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A.
Install gas cock upstream and within 6 feet of gas appliance. Install a union or flanged connection
downstream from the gas cock to permit removal of controls.
B.
Install stainless steel flexible gas pipe connector, of size and length as required to complete
equipment hook-up of foodservice equipment. Verify appropriate length of flexible gas pipe
connector for movement of the foodservice equipment for cleaning.
3.8 ELECTRICAL BONDING AND GROUNDING

A.
Install above ground portions of gas piping systems, upstream from equipment shutoff valves
electrically continuous and bonded to a grounding electrode in accordance with NFPA 70 - "National
Electrical Code."
B.
Do not use gas piping as a grounding electrode.
C.
Conform to NFPA 70 - "National Electrical Code," for electrical connections between wiring and
electrically operated control devices.

A.
Piping Tests: Inspect, test, and purge natural gas systems in accordance with NFPA 54, and local
utility requirements.

Duluth, GA
NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS

15488-7
1550000803
*** Issue 09/21/09
SECTION 15782
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
Section includes package rooftop heating and cooling units.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of selected
model clearly indicated, dimensions, required clearances, weights, furnished specialties and
accessories; and installation and start-up instructions.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions, required

clearances, and methods of assembly of components
Submit shop drawings detailing the mounting, securing, and flashing of the roof curb to the
roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.
C.
Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams detailing the manufacturer's electrical requirements for
power supply wiring for rooftop heating and cooling units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring
diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are
factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each rooftop unit,
including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide, servicing guide and preventative maintenance
schedule and procedures. Include this data in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements
of Division 1.

A.
Codes and Standards:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Gas-fired furnace section construction shall be in accordance with AGA safety standards.
Furnace section shall bear the AGA label.
Testing and rating of rooftop units of 135,000 btu/hr capacity or over shall be in accordance
with ARI 360 "Standard for Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment".
Testing and rating of rooftop units under 135,000 btu/hr capacity shall be in accordance with
ARI 210 "Standard for Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment", and provide Certified Rating Seal.
Sound testing and rating of units shall be in accordance with ARI 270 "Standard for Sound
Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment". Units shall bear Certified Rating Seal.
Refrigerating system construction of rooftop units shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 15
"Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration".
Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) of rooftop units shall be equal to or greater than prescribed by
ASHRAE 90.1-2004 "Energy Standard For Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings".
Rooftop units shall be listed by UL and have UL label as a unit.
Rooftop units shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL requirements.
1.4 SPARE PARTS

A.
General: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts for each rooftop heating and
cooling unit.
1.
2.
3.
One set of matched fan belts for each belt driven fan.
One set of spare filters of each type required for each unit. Obtain receipt from Owner that
spare filters have been provided. In addition to the spare set of filters, install new filters at
completion of installation work, and prior to testing, adjusting, and balancing work.
If HVAC equipment is used during the construction period, Contractor shall provide one set of
filters (if system is designed to include pre-filters and after-filters, provide only pre-filters) when
the unit is started and replace filters when needed, but not less than every month. On the day
of substantial completion, the Contractor shall clean the unit and provide a new set of filters at
each location in the unit.

Duluth, GA

15782-1
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
1.5 WARRANTIES
A.
Each rooftop unit shall have a manufacturers standard warranty of 90 days from date of substantial
completion. The Contractor shall remedy defects occurring within a period of two years after the 90
day manufacturers warranty has concluded.
B.
C.
D.
The above guarantees and warranties shall be provided on all rooftop units either purchased by
Sprouts Farmers Market or by the Contractor for either new build to suits (NBTS, BTS) or existing
tenant improvements (ETI, TI).
1.6 SPECIAL WARRANTY

A.
Warranty on Motor/Compressor: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to

replace/repair, within warranty period, motors/compressors with inadequate and defective materials
and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required;
provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining units have
been adhered to during warranty period. Replacement is limited to component replacement only, and
does not include labor for removal and reinstallation.
1.
Warranty Period: 5 years from Date of Substantial Completion.

2.1 ROOFTOP UNITS LESS THAN 20 TONS
A.
Manufacturers: Contractor shall contact Lennox representative, Cody Jackson, directly at (801)7368904 to coordinate ordering of rooftop units.
B.
General Description: Units shall be factory-assembled and tested, designed for roof or slab
installation, and consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator
fans, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers.
Capacities and electrical
characteristics shall be as scheduled on the Drawings.
C.
Casing: Provide manufacturer's standard casing construction, having corrosion protection coating,
and exterior finish. Casings shall have removable panels or access doors for inspection and access
to internal parts, a minimum of 1/2 thick, 1.0 pound density thermal insulation, knockouts for
electrical and piping connections and an exterior condensate drain connection and lifting lugs.
D.
Roof Curbs: Provide manufacturer's standard construction, insulated and having corrosive protective
coating, complete with factory-installed wood nailer and drain nipple. Construction shall be in
accordance with NRCA Standards. Curb shall be sloped to match roof structure to enable the
rooftop unit to be installed level.
1.
Overall Roof Curb Height: Minimum 14 inches for roofs with no insulation, 14 for roofs with
insulation or as scheduled on the drawings.
E.
Compressors: Provide serviceable, semi-hermetic, or fully hermetic compressors, complete with

integral vibration isolators and crankcase heaters.
F.
Evaporator Fans: Provide forward-curved, centrifugal, belt-driven fans with adjustable sheaves or
direct-driven fans; and permanently lubricated motor bearings.
G.
Condenser Fans: Provide propeller-type, direct-driven fans with permanently lubricated bearings.
H.
Coils:
1.
2.
General: Aluminum plate fin and seamless copper tube type. Fins shall have collars drawn,
belled and firmly bonded to the tubes by means of mechanical expansion of the tubes. No
soldering or tinning shall be used in the bonding process. Coils shall have a galvanized steel
casing. Coils shall be mounted in the coil casing with same end connections accessible for
service. Coils shall be removable from the unit through the roof or through the piping
enclosure. Coil section shall be completely insulated.
Steam heating coils: Provide non-freeze steam coils, pitched in unit casing for proper drainage.

Duluth, GA

15782-2
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
3.
4.
5.
6.
Coils shall be double tube type having accurately sized steam distributor tubes and evenly
spaced orifices. Orifices shall discharge steam in the direction of condensate flow to ensure
even distribution of steam over full length of each tube. Coils shall be designed for 100 psig
working pressure at 400 F and pressure tested at 300 psig.
Water heating coils: Pitch coil in the unit casing for proper drainage. Coils shall have metering
orifices and a supply header to ensure distribution of hot water to each tube. Coils shall be
designed for 200 psig working pressure at 325 F and pressure tested at 300 psig.
Water heating coil: Pitch coil in the unit casing for proper drainage. Coils shall be continuous
tube type. Coils shall be designed for 200 psig working pressure at 325 F and pressure tested
at 300 psig.
Refrigerant cooling coils: Refrigerant coils shall have an equalizing type vertical distributor to
ensure each coil circuit receives the same amount of refrigerant. Coils shall be designed for
300 psig working pressure and pressure tested at 450 psig., then cleaned, dehydrated, and
sealed with a holding charge of refrigerant.
Hot Gas Reheat Coil: Provide hot gas reheat coil with staged or modulating control for reheat
during dehumidification operation. Hot gas reheat coil shall maintain space temperature when
unit is operating in the dehumidification mode. Refer to sequence of operations.
I.
Condensate Drain Pan: Provide galvanized or stainless steel condensate drain pan sloped to drain
connection.
J.
Heat Exchangers: Provide manufacturer's standard construction for gas-fired heat exchangers and
burners. Minimum efficiency for heat exchangers shall be 80 percent.
1.
Controls: Provide the following controls for the gas-fired heat exchangers:
a.
Redundant gas valve;
b. Intermittent pilot ignition;
c.
Electronic spark ignition system;
d. High limit cutout;
e.
Forced draft proving switch.
K.
Electric Heat Sections: Provide electric heat coils, of manufacturer's standard construction, factorywired for single point wiring connection, complete with over-current and over-heat protection
devices.
L.
Filters Section: Provide 2 thick fiberglass throwaway pleated filters in filter rack, with maximum
face velocity of 400 fpm and minimum MERV rating per ASHRAE 52.2 of MERV 7.
M.
Energy Recovery Section: Provide a factory mounted, wired, and tested energy recovery wheel. The
energy recovery wheel shall have latent and sensible recovery capacities as required to meet or
exceed the capacities scheduled on the drawings.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mount the energy recovery wheel in a rigid frame containing the wheel drive motor, redundant
drive belts, wheel seals, and bearings.
Provide an energy recovery wheel constructed of a light weight polymer material with
permanently bonded desiccant coating. The wheel shall be removable from the cabinet and
cleanable using hot water or light detergent without degrading the latent efficiency.
Provide a forward curved exhaust fan(s) with adjustable V-belt drive and a backdraft damper.
Provide a filter bank on the upstream side of each air stream with 2" thick fiberglass throwaway
filters in filter rack, with maximum face velocity of 400 fpm and minimum MERV rating per
ASHRAE 52.2 of MERV 7.
The energy recovery section shall contain bypass dampers around the wheel for full economizer
operation.
N.
Outdoor Air Damper: Provide outside air damper constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core,
airfoil blades with rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven
and designed to have no more than 25 cfm of leakage per square foot when subjected to 2 wg air
pressure differential across the damper. Refer to schedules on the drawings for capacity and control
method for the outdoor air damper of each unit.
O.
Safety Controls: Provide manual reset type safety controls for:

1.
2.
3.
P.
Low pressure cutout;

High pressure cutout;
Compressor motor overload protection.
Unit Controls: Solid-state control board and components contain at least the following features:

Duluth, GA

15782-3
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Indoor fan on/off delay.

Default control to ensure proper operation after power interruption.
Service relay output.
Unit diagnostics and diagnostic code storage.
Field-adjustable control parameters.
Dehumidification control with humidistat.
Gas valve delay between first- and second-stage firing.
Minimum run time.
Night setback mode.
Return-air temperature limit.
Fan-proving switch to lock out unit if fan fails.
Dirty-filter switch.
Smoke alarm with smoke detector installed in ductwork as noted on the drawings.
Q.
DDC Interface: Install stand-alone control module providing link between unit controls and DDC
system. Control module shall be compatible with temperature-control system specified in Division
15 Section "Digital Control Equipment."
R.
Temperature Sensors capable of:

1.
2.
3.
Automatic switching.
Hour/day programming.
Manual override capability (Office rooftop unit only).
S.
Electrical: Provide a 125 VAC, 20 amp duplex convenience receptacle mounted to unit ready for
field wiring through the curb with a cover UL listed for wet and damp locations when in use. Unit
power connection shall be either through unit cabinet or within roof curb perimeter. Rooftop units
shall be designed to meet a minimum short-circuit withstand rating of 5,000 kA or as scheduled on
the drawings.
T.
Refrigerant Type: Provide rooftop units designed to operate with R-410 refrigerant.
U.
Accessories: Units shall include the following accessories as indicated or scheduled:

1.
2.
3.
Low ambient control: Head pressure control, designed to operate at temperatures down to 0
deg F (-18 deg C).
Provide guards to protect the condenser coil from hail or other damage.
Temperature Sensor: Assembly shall provide for staged heating and cooling with automatic
changeover.
2.2 ROOFTOP UNITS 20 TONS AND LARGER

A.
Manufacturers: Contractor shall contact Lennox representative, Cody Jackson, directly at (801)7368904 to coordinate ordering of rooftop units.
B.
General Description: Rooftop unit shall be factory-assembled and tested, designed for roof or slab
installation and, consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator
fans, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers.
Capacities and electrical
characteristics shall be as scheduled on the Drawings.
C.
Casing: Provide manufacturer's standard casing construction, having corrosion protection coating,
and exterior finish. Casings shall have removable panels or access doors for inspection and access
to internal parts, a minimum of 1" thick, 1.5 pound density thermal insulation, knockouts for
electrical and piping connections, and an exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs.
D.
Roof Curbs: Provide AES Industries insulated roof curb, contractor shall contact AES Industries
representative Paul Ledbetter at (800)786-0402 EXT. 309. Curb shall be sloped to match roof
structure to enable the rooftop unit to be installed level.
1.
E.
Overall Roof Curb Height: Minimum 14 inches for roofs with no insulation, 14 for roofs with
insulation or as scheduled on the drawings.
Compressors: Provide serviceable, semi-hermetic, or hermetic compressors with integral vibration

isolators, and crankcase heaters which de- energize during compressor operation. Units shall also
have:
1.
2.
3.
Cylinder unloaders for capacity control, with minimum steps as scheduled;

Hot-gas bypass valve and piping on one compressor for variable air volume systems;
Thermal expansion valves, filter dryers, sight glasses, compressor service valves, liquid line

Duluth, GA

15782-4
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
service valves; minimum of 2 refrigerant circuits for units having 2 or more compressors; and
fan-cycling control for low ambient control to 35 deg F (2 deg C).
F.
Evaporator Fans: Provide forward-curved, centrifugal, belt-driven fans with adjustable sheaves; and
permanently lubricated motor bearings.
G.
Condenser Fans: Provide propeller-type, direct-driven fans with permanently lubricated bearings.
H.
Coils:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
General: Aluminum plate fin and seamless copper tube type. Fins shall have collars drawn,
belled and firmly bonded to the tubes by means of mechanical expansion of the tubes. No
soldering or tinning shall be used in the bonding process. Coils shall have a galvanized steel
casing. Coils shall be mounted in the coil casing with same end connections accessible for
service. Coils shall be removable from the unit through the roof or through the piping
enclosure. Coil section shall be completely insulated.
Steam heating coils: Provide non-freeze steam coils, pitched in unit casing for proper drainage.
Coils shall be double tube type having accurately sized steam distributor tubes and evenly
spaced orifices. Orifices shall discharge steam in the direction of condensate flow to ensure
even distribution of steam over full length of each tube. Coils shall be proof (150 psig) and leak
(100 psig) tested with air pressure under water.
Water heating coils: Pitch coils in the unit casing for proper drainage. Coils shall have metering
orifices and a supply header to ensure distribution of hot water to each tube. Coils shall be
proof (300 psig) and leak (200 psig) tested with air pressure under water.
Water heating coils: Pitch coils in the unit casing for proper drainage. Coil shall be continuous
tube type, and proof (300 psig) and leak (200 psig) tested with air pressure under water.
Refrigerant cooling coils: Refrigerant coils shall have an equalizing type vertical distributor to
ensure each coil circuit receives the same amount of refrigerant. Coils shall be proof (450 psig)
and leak (300 psig) tested with air pressure under water, then cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed
with a holding charge of refrigerant.
Hot Gas Reheat Coil: Provide hot gas reheat coil with staged or modulating control for reheat
during dehumidification operation. Hot gas reheat coil shall maintain space temperature when
unit is operating in the dehumidification mode. Refer to sequence of operations.
I.
Condensate Drain Pan: Provide galvanized or stainless steel condensate drain pan sloped to drain
connection.
J.
Heat exchangers: Provide manufacturer's standard construction for gas-fired heat exchangers and
burners, designed for minimum of 2-stage operation with minimum efficiency of 80 percent. Provide
single gas connection.
1.
Operating Controls: Provide the following controls for the gas-fired heat exchangers:
a.
Redundant gas valves;
b. Intermittent pilot ignition;
c.
Electronic spark ignition system;
d. High limit cutout;
e.
Forced draft proving switch;
f.
Flame roll-out switch.
K.
Electric Heat Sections: Provide manufacturer's standard construction electric heat coils, factorywired for single point wiring connection. Complete with over-current and over-heat protection
devices.
L.
Filters Section: Provide 2" thick fiberglass throwaway pleated filters in filter rack, with maximum
face velocity of 400 fpm and minimum MERV rating per ASHRAE 52.2 of MERV 7.
M.
Energy Recovery Section: Provide a factory mounted, wired, and tested energy recovery wheel. The
energy recovery wheel shall have latent and sensible recovery capacities as required to meet or
exceed the capacities scheduled on the drawings.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mount the energy recovery wheel in a rigid frame containing the wheel drive motor, redundant
drive belts, wheel seals, and bearings.
Provide an energy recovery wheel constructed of a light weight polymer material with
permanently bonded desiccant coating. The wheel shall be removable from the cabinet and
cleanable using hot water or light detergent without degrading the latent efficiency.
Provide a forward curved exhaust fan(s) with adjustable V-belt drive and a backdraft damper.
Provide a filter bank on the upstream side of each air stream with 2" thick fiberglass throwaway

Duluth, GA

15782-5
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
5.
N.
filters in filter rack, with maximum face velocity of 400 fpm and minimum MERV rating per
ASHRAE 52.2 of MERV 7.
The energy recovery section shall contain bypass dampers around the wheel for full economizer
operation.
Safety Controls: Provide safety controls for:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Low pressure cutout, manual reset type;

High pressure cutout, manual reset type;
Compressor motor overload protection, manual reset type;
Anti-recycling timing device;
Adjustable low-ambient lockout;
Oil pressure switch.
O.
Outdoor Air Damper: Provide outside air damper constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core,
airfoil blades with rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven
and designed to have no more than 25 cfm of leakage per square foot when subjected to 2 wg air
pressure differential across the damper. Refer to schedules on the drawings for capacity and control
method of the outdoor air damper of each unit.
P.
Economizer Control: Provide economizer system complete with return and outside air dampers,
outside air filter, fully modulating electric control system with dry bulb or enthalpy economizer
control as scheduled on the drawings, and adjustable mixed-air thermostat. System shall have 100
percent outside air capability. Provide automatic changeover through adjustable control device.
Q.
Unit Controls: Solid-state control board and components contain at least the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Indoor fan on/off delay.

Default control to ensure proper operation after power interruption.
Service relay output.
Unit diagnostics and diagnostic code storage.
Field-adjustable control parameters.
Dehumidification control with humidistat.
Economizer control.
Electric heat staging.
Gas valve delay between first- and second-stage firing.
Indoor-air quality control with carbon dioxide sensor.
Minimum run time.
Night setback mode.
Return-air temperature limit.
Fan-proving switch to lock out unit if fan fails.
Dirty-filter switch.
Smoke alarm with smoke detector installed in ductwork as noted on the drawings.
R.
DDC Interface: Install stand-alone control module providing link between unit controls and DDC
system. Control module shall be compatible with temperature-control system specified in Division
15 Section "Digital Control Equipment."
S.
Thermostat: Programmable, electronic; with heating setback and cooling setup with seven-day
programming; and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
T.
Touch sensitive keyboard.

Automatic switching.
Degree F readout.
LED indicators.
Hour/day programming.
Manual override capability.
Time and operational mode readout.
Status indicator.
Battery backup.
Subbase with manual system switch (on-heat-auto-cool) and fan switch (auto-on).
Electrical: Provide a 125 VAC, 20 amp duplex convenience receptacle mounted to unit ready for
field wiring through the curb with a cover UL listed for wet and damp locations when in use. Unit
power connection shall be either through unit cabinet or within roof curb perimeter. Rooftop units
shall be designed to meet a minimum short-circuit withstand rating of 10,000 kA or as scheduled on
the drawings.

Duluth, GA

15782-6
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
U.
Refrigerant Type: Provide rooftop units designed to operate with R-410 refrigerant.
V.
Accessories: Units shall include the following accessories as indicated or scheduled:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remote Control Panel: Furnish panel for remote mounting containing control of heating,
cooling, evaporator fan, and outdoor damper; and indicator lights for up to 6 unit functions.
Anti-recycling control to automatically prevent compressor restart for 5-minutes after
shutdown.
Low ambient control head pressure control, designed to operate at temperatures down to 0 deg
F (-18 deg C).
Provide guards to protect the condenser coil from hail or other damage.
Thermostat: Assembly shall provide for staged heating and cooling with manual or automatic
changeover on standard subbase.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions under which rooftop units are to be installed. Do not proceed with
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS

A.
General: Install rooftop units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install
units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's
recommended clearances.
B.
Support: Support rooftop units on roof curb.
C.
Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factorymounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to electrical installer.
1.
Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements of Division-16 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until
wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer.
D.
Ductwork: Refer to Division-15 section "Metal Ductwork". Connect supply and return ducts to unit
with flexible duct connections. Provide transitions to exactly match unit duct connection size.
E.
Piping: Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 sections. The Drawings
indicate the general arrangement of piping, valves, fittings, and specialties. The following are
specific connection requirements:
1.
Condensate Drain Piping: Route condensate drain to nearest roof drain or to location shown on
the drawings. Provide trap, minimum of 1" deeper than fan pressure in inches of water, at
drain pan connection and install cleanouts at changes in direction (refer to manufacturers
recommendations for any additional requirements). Size condensate drain piping in accordance
with local code and the following:
Piping Length
Size
Less than 10 feet
Same size as unit connection
More than 10 feet
One pipe size larger than unit connection
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING

A.
Adjust fan for required airflow in accordance with Section Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
Tighten belts as required for proper operation.
B.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
C.
Clean the entire unit including cabinet interiors just prior to substantial completion to remove foreign
material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheel, fan cabinet, intake plenum
cabinet, heat exchange surfaces, cooling/heating coil sections, filter sections, access sections, etc.
3.4 STARTUP
A.
Final Checks Before Start-Up: Perform the following operations and checks before start-up:
1.
2.
Remove shipping, blocking, and bracing.

Verify unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for piping,
ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify proper thermal overload protection is installed in

Duluth, GA

15782-7
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
motors, starters, and disconnects.

Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
Disconnect fan drive from motor and verify proper motor rotation direction and verify fan wheel
free rotation and smooth bearings operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and
install belt guards.
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended lubricants.
6. Set outside-air and return-air mixing dampers to minimum outside-air setting.
7. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
8. Install clean filters. Do not operate air handling unit without pre-filters installed.
9. Verify manual and automatic volume control, and fire and smoke dampers in connected
ductwork systems are in the full-open position.
10. Disable automatic temperature control operators.
3.
4.
B.
Start-Up Services: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to start-up

rooftop units in accordance with manufacturer's written start-up instructions. Do not operate units
without filters installed. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace
damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
1.
Energize motor, verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to
indicated RPM.
a.
Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.
b. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
c.
Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature control operators.
d. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for system
testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.5 TRAINING
A.
of two hours on the operation and maintenance of the equipment provided under this section.
B.

1.
2.
3.

C.
D.

Duluth, GA

15782-8
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
SECTION 15834
AIR CURTAINS
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes air curtains.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories for each unit.
B.
Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

1.
2.
3.
Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic
restraints.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4 COORDINATION DRAWINGS:

A.
Submit plans and details drawn to scale and coordinated with penetrations of walls.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For air curtains to include in maintenance manuals.
D.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

A.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in

jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the
kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of air curtains
that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
B.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air curtains and
are based on the specific product indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
C.
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D.
Comply with AMCA 220, "Test Methods for Air Curtain Units," for airflow, outlet velocity, and
power consumption.
E.
Comply with ARI 410, "Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils," for components,
construction, and rating.
1.
F.
Certify coils according to ARI 410.
Comply with NSF 37, "Air Curtains for Entranceways in Food and Food Service Establishments."
1.6 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of air curtains and suspension system components with other
construction, including light fixtures, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B.
Coordinate installation of wall penetrations and louvers.
1.7 WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of air curtains that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period (Nonheating Units): Five years

Duluth, GA
AIR CURTAINS
15834-1
1550000803
06/19/99
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A.
Furnish extra materials described below, before construction begins, that match products installed
and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
Furnish one set of filters and fan belts for each unit.

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
1.
2.
3.
Berner International Corp.

Mars Air Products; Mars Air Door Division.
Powered Aire, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A.
Housing Materials: Galvanized steel with electrostatically applied epoxy enamel finish over powdered
mirror.
B.
Anodized Finish: Match finish and color of adjacent architectural metals. Comply with NAAMM's
"Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
C.
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association
for designating aluminum finishes.
1.
2.
D.
Air Adjustment: Provide one of the following options to reduce air volume and outlet velocity to
meet the installation requirements:
1.
2.
E.
Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated;
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating
0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
Mounting Brackets: Steel, for wall mounting.
Multi-speed motors with minimum of 3 speed adjustments.

Intake louvers that are an integral part of the housing, mechanically field adjustable and capable
of reducing air-outlet velocity by 60percent with louver in totally closed position.
Discharge Nozzle: Integral part of the housing, containing adjustable air-directional vanes with 40degree sweep front to back.
2.3 FANS
A.
Fans: Centrifugal, forward curved, double width, double inlet; statically and dynamically balanced.
B.
Fan Drives: Direct.
2.4 MOTORS
A.
Motor Type: Single speed, resiliently mounted, continuous duty, [totally enclosed, air over] [totally
enclosed, fan cooled] [open, drip-proof] [explosion proof] [all single phase motors with integral
thermal-overload protection].
B.
Bearings: Permanently sealed, lifetime, prelubricated, ball bearings.
C.
Disconnect: Internal power cord with plug and receptacle.
2.5 FILTERS
A.
Disposable Panel Filters: Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel-type, disposable air filters

with glass-fiber media sprayed with nonflammable adhesive in [cardboard] [galvanized-steel] frame.
B.
Washable Panel Filters: Removable, aluminum media, minimum 0.5 thick, aluminum or steel filter
frame.
C.
Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners and suitable for bolting
together into built-up filter banks.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
Duluth, GA
AIR CURTAINS
15834-2
1550000803
06/19/99
A.
Automatic Door Switch: roller type installed in door area to activate air curtain when door opens and
to deactivate air curtain when door closes.
B.
Start-Stop, Push-Button Switch: Manually activates and deactivates air curtain.
C.
Time-Delay Relay: Factory installed and adjustable to allow air curtain to operate from 0.5 seconds
to 10 hours.
D.
Motor-Control Panel: Complete with motor starter, 115-V ac transformer with primary and
secondary fuses, terminal strip, and NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
E.
Mounting Brackets: Provide mounting brackets and other mounting accessories as required to permit
installation and functioning of air curtain to meet project installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions where air curtains will be installed for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
Install air curtains with clearance for equipment service and maintenance.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.

general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Drawings indicate
B.
Install piping adjacent to air curtain to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Breaching: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section, "Breechings, Chimneys, and
Stacks." Connect breaching to full size at flue outlet.
D.
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
E.
Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
After installing air curtains completely, perform visual and mechanical check of individual
components.
After electrical circuitry has been energized, start unit to confirm motor rotation and unit
operation. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Test gas train and verify that there are no gas leaks.
equipment.
Repair or replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust belt tension.
B.
Adjust motor and fan speed to achieve specified airflow.
C.
Adjust discharge louver and dampers to regulate airflow.
D.
Adjust air-directional vanes.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A.

operate, and maintain air curtains on the following:
1.
Procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing,

preventative maintenance, and how to obtain replacement parts.

Duluth, GA
AIR CURTAINS
15834-3
1550000803
06/19/99
2.
B.
Familiarization with contents of Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division 1

Section "Project Closeout" and Division 15 Section "General Mechanical Requirements."
Schedule training with at least 7 days' advance notice.

Duluth, GA
AIR CURTAINS
15834-4
1550000803
06/19/99
SECTION 15850
FANS
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following types of fans:
B.
Products furnished but not installed under this Section include roof curbs for roof-mounted exhaust
fans.
1.
Power ventilators: roof-mounted exhausters
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.
General:
Specification Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Product data for selected models, including specialties, accessories, and the following:
a.
Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
b. Certified fan sound power ratings.
c.
Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories.
d. Materials gages and finishes, including color charts.
e.
Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions,
weights, required clearances, components, and location and size of field connections.
Wiring diagrams that detail power, signal, and control wiring.
Differentiate between
Product certificates, signed by manufacturers of air-handling units, certifying that their
products comply with specified requirements.
Maintenance data for fans, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in
Division 1 and Division 15 Section "General Mechanical Requirements."

A.
AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are licensed to use
the AMCA Seal.
B.
UL Compliance: Fans and fan motors shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance
with UL 705 "Power Ventilators."
C.
UL Compliance: Fans and components shall be UL listed and labeled.
D.
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL): Fans and components
shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
E.
NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
F.
Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National
Electrical Code."
1.4 SPARE PARTS

A.
Furnish one additional complete set of belts for each belt-driven fan.

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
1.
Centrifugal Roof Ventilators:

a.
Greasemaster
b. Greenheck Fan Corp
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required:

1.
Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for Calculating Fan

Duluth, GA
FANS
15850-1
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
2.
Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans in accordance with AMCA Standard
300 "Test Code for Sound Rating." Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Sound
Ratings Seal.
Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation,
and efficiency by factory tests and ratings in accordance with AMCA Standard 210/ASHRAE
Standard 51 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.
2.3 FANS, GENERAL

A.
General: Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished
with indicated capacities and characteristics.
B.
Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at the
maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower.
1.
C.
Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than 70
percent of the first critical speed at the top of the speed range of the fan's class.
Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
1.
Service Factor: 1.4.
D.
Belts: Oil-resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic.
E.
Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 15 HP; fixed pitch for
use with motors larger than 15 HP. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at the middle of the
adjustment range at fan design conditions.
1.
Belt Guards: Provide steel belt guards for motors mounted on the outside of the fan cabinet.
F.
Shaft Bearings: Provide type indicated, having a median life "Rating Life" (AFBMA L(50)) of
200,000, calculated in accordance with AFBMA Standard 9 for ball bearings and AFBMA Standard
11 for roller bearings.
G.
Factory Finish: The following finishes are required on housings constructed of steel:
1.
2.
Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coating prior to final assembly.

Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
2.4 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS

A.
General Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive as indicated, centrifugal consisting of housing, wheel,

fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.
B.
Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece,
hinged, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
1.
2.
Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward, with
rain and snow drains.
Provide quick release latches to facilitate removal of scroll housing for access into the motor
compartment.
C.
Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
D.
Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch.

Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.
Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.
Fan and motor isolated from exhaust air stream.
E.
Grease Exhaust: Exhaust fans serving Type I kitchen exhaust hoods shall discharge a minimum of
40 above the roof surface, shall have hinged access including access for blade inspection and
cleaning per NFPA 96, grease drain trough with cup and insulated curb and shall be installed in
accordance with NFPA 96 and local codes.
F.
Accessories: Provide the following items where indicated:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal overload protection mounted inside fan
housing, factory-wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
Bird Screens: Maximum 1/2-inch mesh, 16-gage, aluminum or brass wire.
Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base, factory
set to close when fan stops.
Dampers: Motor-operated, parallel-blade, volume control dampers mounted in curb base.

Duluth, GA
FANS
15850-2
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
a.
Blades: Die-formed sheet aluminum.
b. Frame: Extruded aluminum, with waterproof, felt blade seals.
c.
Linkage: Nonferrous metals, connecting blades to counter weight or operator.
d. Operators: Manufacturer's standard electric motor.
e.
Operators: Manufacturer's standard pneumatic motor.
5. Roof Curbs: Prefabricated, heavy-gage, galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2inch-thick, 3 pound density, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; built-in cant
and mounting flange for flat roof decks; and 2-inch treated wood nailer. Size as required to
suit roof opening and fan base. For sloped roofs, slope curb as required to install fan level.
a.
Overall Roof Curb Height: Minimum 12 inches for roofs with no insulation, 15 for roofs
with insulation or as scheduled on the drawings.
2.5 MOTORS
A.
Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate the driven loads satisfactorily.
B.
Motor Sizes: Minimum sizes and electrical characteristics as indicated. If not indicated, large
enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to operate in the service factor range.
C.
Temperature Rating: 50 deg C maximum temperature rise at 40 deg C ambient for continuous duty
at full load (Class A Insulation).
D.
Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.
E.
Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B. Provide
permanent-split capacitor classification motors for shaft-mounted fans and capacitor start
classification for belted fans.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F.
Bases: Adjustable.
Bearings: The following features are required:
a.
Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.
b. Grease lubricated.
c.
Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral or axial
thrust in motor.
Enclosure Type: The following features are required:
a.
Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation.
b. Guarded dripproof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants.
Overload protection: Built-in, automatic reset, thermal overload protection.
Noise rating: Quiet.
Efficiency:
Energy-efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled in
accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. If efficiency not specified, motors shall
have a higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors" in accordance with IEEE
Standard 112, Test Method B.
Nameplate:
Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics,
construction, and special features.
Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Starters, electrical devices and connections are specified in
Division 16.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install fans level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Support units
as described below, using the vibration control devices indicated. Vibration control devices are
specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Isolation."
1.
Support floor-mounted units on concrete equipment bases using neoprene pads. Secure units
to anchor bolts installed in concrete equipment base.
2. Support floor-mounted units on concrete equipment bases using housed spring isolators.
Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete equipment base.
3. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware.
a.
Installation of roof curbs is specified in Division 7.
4. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods
and vibration isolation springs.

Duluth, GA
FANS
15850-3
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
B.
Arrange installation of units to provide access space around fans for service and maintenance.
3.2 EQUIPMENT BASES

A.
Construct concrete equipment pads in accordance with Division 15 Section Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods.

A.
B.
material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet.
3.4 STARTUP
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Remove shipping blocking and bracing.

Verify fan assembly is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for
ductwork and electrical are complete. Verify proper thermal overload protection is installed in
Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel
Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended
lubricants.
Verify manual and automatic volume control and that fire and smoke dampers in connected
Disable automatic temperature control operators.
Starting procedures for fans:

1.
Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to
indicated RPM.
a.
c.
d. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for airhandling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A.
Demonstration Services: Arrange and pay for a factory-authorized service representative to train
Owner's maintenance personnel on the following:
1.
2.
B.
Procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing,

preventative maintenance, and how to obtain replacement parts.
Familiarization with contents of Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division 1
Section "Project Closeout" and Division 15 Section "General Mechanical Requirements."
Schedule training with at least 7 days' advance notice.

Duluth, GA
FANS
15850-4
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
SECTION 15857
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes desiccant wheel air-handling units with coils for outdoor installations.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Product data for each desiccant wheel unit indicated, including the following:
a.
Fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
b. Fan sound power ratings.
c.
Coil performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.
d. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories.
e.
Provide short circuit current rating of units with factory mounted starter or variable
frequency drive.
f.
Materials gages and finishes.
g. Filters with performance characteristics.
h. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing dimensions, weights, required clearances,
components, and location and size of each field connection.
Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and controls and differentiating between
Product certificates signed by manufacturers of desiccant wheel units certifying that their
products comply with specified requirements.
Field quality control test reports specified in Part 3 of this Section.
Maintenance data and recommended spare parts list for desiccant wheel units for inclusion in
Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section "General
Mechanical Requirements."

A.
NFPA Compliance: Desiccant wheel units and components shall be designed, fabricated, and
installed in compliance with NFPA Standard 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems."
B.
AHRI Certification: Desiccant wheel units and their components shall be factory tested in accordance
with the applicable portions of AHRI 430 - Standard for Air-Handling Units.
1.4 SPARE PARTS

A.
General: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts for each packaged heating and
cooling unit.
1.
2.
3.
4.
One set of matched fan belts for each belt driven fan and desiccant wheel unit.
One set of spare filters of each type required for each unit. Obtain receipt from Owner that
spare filters have been provided. In addition to the spare set of filters, install new filters at
completion of installation work, and prior to testing, adjusting, and balancing work.
If HVAC equipment is used during the construction period, Contractor shall provide one set of
filters (if system is designed to include pre-filters and after-filters, provide only pre-filters) when
the unit is started and replace filters when needed, but not less than every month. On the day
of substantial completion, the Contractor shall clean the unit and provide a new set of filters at
each location in the unit.
Furnish one additional gasket for each sectional joint of each desiccant wheel unit.
1.5 WARRANTIES
A.
Each dehumidification unit shall have a manufacturers standard warranty of 90 days from date of
substantial completion. The Contractor shall remedy defects occurring within a period of two years

Duluth, GA

15857-1
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
after the 90 day manufacturers warranty has concluded.

B.
C.
D.
The above guarantees and warranties shall be provided on all rooftop units either purchased by
Sprouts Farmers Market or by the Contractor for either new build to suits (NBTS, BTS) or existing
tenant improvements (ETI, TI).
1.6 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY

A.
Warranty on Motor/Compressor: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to

replace/repair, within warranty period, motors/compressors with inadequate and defective materials
and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required;
provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining units have
been adhered to during warranty period. Replacement is limited to component replacement only, and
does not include labor for removal and reinstallation.
1.
Warranty Period: 5 years from Date of Substantial Completion.

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
1.
Munters DryCool
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A.
General Description: Factory assembled, consisting of fans, motor and drive assembly, coils,
compressors, condensers, desiccant wheel, damper, plenums, filters, and drip pans.
B.
Types: Desiccant wheel units included in this project are of the following types:
1.
C.
DX coils with compressors and condenser sections.
Motor and Electrical Components:

Mechanical Equipment."
Refer to Division 15 Section "Electrical Requirements for
2.3 UNIT BASE AND CABINET

A.
Provide unit base of all steel construction with formed 2 inch by 8 inch 12-gage galvanized steel
channel around outside perimeter and reinforced with 2 inch by 6 inch 12-gage galvanized channel
on centers not exceeding 24 inches. Provide completed base constructed with G90 galvanized
materials.
B.
Floor Construction: Floor panels shall be minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel with airtight seams and
2 of fiberglass insulation. There shall be no exposed insulation underneath unit.
C.
Exterior Housing Construction:

1.
2.
D.
Construct unit housing of 2 thick urethane foam double wall construction, with galvalume
exterior and galvanized interior wall skins.
Provide access to service areas by means of full size service doors located to allow periodic
maintenance and inspections. Construct doors with continuous aluminum hinge, compression
type latches, and resilient gaskets. Door openings shall be flush with the floor to allow for ease
of cleaning and washdown. Fabricate access doors with minimum of 2 inch urathane board
insulation.
Double-Wall Drain Pans: Formed sections of 304 stainless steel. Fabricate pans in sizes and shapes
to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections and return bends) when
units are operating at the maximum cataloged face velocity across the cooling coil. Fill space
between double-wall construction with fibergalss or mineral wool insulation and seal moisturetight.
1.
Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan or a drain trough to collect
condensate from top coil.

Duluth, GA

15857-2
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
E.
Provide bird screen on all outdoor air inlets.
F.
Service Vestibule: Provide unit with built-in service vestibule that provides access to electrical panel,
dehumidifier components, controls, variable frequency drive, and compressors while providing
protection from weather. Construct service vestibule with synthetic rubber floor matting that
provides electrical insulation to 20,000 volts RMS/AC, main unit disconnect switch, and service light
and ground fault duplex receptacle powered independently from main unit power supply.
2.4 DEHUMIDIFIER AND CONTROL COMPONENTS

A.
Provide dehumidifier of design and construction proven in field by minimum of five years operating
performance.
B.
Dehumidifier: Non-cyclic sorption type with single desiccant rotary structure designed for continuous
operation. Construction arrangement shall provide counter flow of process and reactivation air
streams with full face pressure seals to prevent cross leakage with static pressure differentials up to
8 inches water gage.
C.
Provide rotary structure consisting of 100 percent inert silicates impregnated with an inorganic, nongranular, crystalline desiccant which transfers water in vapor phase or of non-crystalline form of
silicon dioxide (titanium silica gel). The design shall assure laminar air flow through the structure for
minimum pressure loss with maximum transfer surface.
D.
Dehumidifier shall include honeycomb desiccant wheel and drive system, propane gas direct-fired
reactivation heater, fan and motor assemblies for reactivation and process air flow, reactivation and
process air flow indicating gages, inlet filters for reactivation and process air, reactivation energy
control system, and overheat, rotation, and heater proving fault circuitry.
E.
Heat pipe located in process air stream.
F.
Provide three (3) sets of humidistats for each unit.
2.5 FAN SECTION

A.
Testing Requirements: Units fans performance ratings for flow rate, pressure, power, air density,
speed of rotation, and efficiency shall be factory tested.
B.
Fan Section Construction: Fan sections shall be equipped with a formed steel channel base for
integral mounting of fan, motor, and casing panels. The fan scroll, wheel, shaft, bearings, and motor
shall be mounted on a structural steel frame with frame mounted on base with spring vibration
isolators with an isolation efficiency of not less than 90%. Supply fan shall be belt driven with an
adjustable pitch sheave.
C.
Equip units with process air and reactivation air fans to provide scheduled air flows against static
pressures indicated. Process air fan shall be single width, single inlet with backward inclined airfoil
blades. Process fan shall be direct drive. Reactivation air fan shall be single width, single inlet with
backward inclined airfoil blades. Reactivation air fan shall be direct drive with a ODP motor. Motors
shall be open drip proof NEMA Design B with Class B insulation and 1.15 service factor.
D.
Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at the
maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. Supply fan wheel shall be double or single-width,
double or single-inlet type with backward-curved airfoil section blades as indicated. Airfoil wheels
shall be steel painted with zinc chromate primer and an enamel finish coat. Fan shaft shall be solid
steel, turned, ground, and polished. Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft.
E.
Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings selected for 200,000 hours' average life, with grease
fittings extended to an accessible location outside the fan section.
F.
Fan Drives: Designed for a 1.4 service factor and factory mounted with final alignment and belt
adjustment made after installation.
1.
2.
Belt Drive: Motors and fan wheel pulleys shall be adjustable pitch for use with motors up to
and including 15 HP and fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 15 HP.
Motors shall have steel belt guards.
2.6 FAN MOTORS

Duluth, GA

15857-3
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
A.
Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate the driven loads satisfactorily.
B.
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so that the driven load will
not require the motor to operate in the service factor range.
C.
Temperature Rating: 50 deg C maximum temperature rise at 40 deg C ambient for continuous duty
at full load (Class A Insulation).
D.
Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.
E.
Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B. Refer to
Section Motors for additional requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Bases: Adjustable.
Bearings: The following features are required:
a.
Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.
b. Grease lubricated.
c.
Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral or axial
thrust in motor.
Enclosure Type: The following features are required:
a.
Open drip-proof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation.
b. Guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants.
Overload protection: Built-in, automatic reset, thermal overload protection.
Noise rating: Quiet.
Efficiency: Energy-efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled in accordance
with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. If efficiency not specified, motors shall have a higher
efficiency than "average standard industry motors" in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test
Method B.
Nameplate:
Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics,
construction, and special features.
F.
Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in Division
16.
G.
Variable Frequency Drive manufacturer shall be same as fan motor manufacturer.
2.7 COMPRESSORS
A.
Provide unit with minimum of four semi-hermetic compressors. Install each compressor with its own
independent refrigeration circuit. Each compressor shall be 25 HP maximum.
B.
Compressors shall be high efficiency, refrigerant cooled, Carlyle compressors.

1.
2.
Compressors shall be R-410A type with suction cooled motor windings.

Provide compressors with suction and discharge service valves, oil sight glass, positive
displacement reversible oil pump, liquid line solenoid valve for one time pumpdown off cycle.
3. Each compressor circuit shall include liquid line solenoid valve, sight glass, filter/drier, and
discharge line vibration absorbers.
4. Compressors shall be mounted inside service vestibule.
5. Power connection shall be located at main control panel in air handler service vestibule.
6. Standard controls for each circuit shall include high pressure switch, low pressure cut-out, oil
failure switch, manual off/run/pumpdown switch, and fan cycling to 50F.
7. Mount compressors on rubber-in-shear isolators with discharge line vibrabsorbers.
8. Provide compressors with crankcase heaters that are independently fused to remain energized
at all times unless unit is disconnected at main power source. Crank case heaters shall be 115
volt, interlocked with the compressor contactor.
9. Provide inherent thermal overload protection in all three phases.
10. Compressors shall have solid state motor sensors to protect windings from over heating.
C.
Provide hot-gas bypass valve and piping on two compressors (for both coil circuits) for variable air
volume system.
D.
Provide four (4) year extended compressor warranty.
2.8 CONDENSER SECTION

A.
Condensing unit shall be attached to air handler to form complete system on single base. Plate fin

Duluth, GA

15857-4
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
condenser coil shall have seamless copper tubes and .006 inch rippled aluminum fins.
B.
Condenser fans shall be propeller type, direct drive fans discharging upwards through formed venturi.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fan motors shall be 3 phase, 1140 RPM, 1.5 HP maximum motors with inherent overload
protection.
Motors shall feature permanently lubricated ball bearings, and be specifically designed for
vertical shaft, direct drive specification.
Fan guards shall be constructed of heavy gage close mesh steel wire with PVC coating.
Cycle condenser fans by pressure.
C.
Condenser coils being installed within a minimum of 50 lineal miles from any salt water coast line to
be coated against corrosion (specification of coating material to be submitted with quotation).
D.
Provide guards or louvered panels to protect the condenser coil from hail or other damage as
scheduled.
2.9 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT

A.
Refrigerant Piping: ACR copper with silver alloy brazed connections properly supported and provided
with heavy duty pipe clamps and isolation grommets where pipes pass through metal bulkheads.
B.
Complete system shall be factory evacuated, pressure tested and completely charged with R-410A.
System shall have moisture indicating sight glass, liquid line filter drier, and high pressure relief valve.
Provide refrigerant circuit with liquid line shut-off valve at condenser outlet to allow pumpdown of
refrigerant.
C.
Circuits provided with system access connections for service gage connection. Refrigeration circuit
shall have a receiver. Refrigerant piping at compressor shall be trapped.
2.10 EVAPORATOR COIL SECTION (DX)

A.
Size direct expansion refrigerant coils to provide full capacity scheduled while operating in dry
condition. Arrange coils to condition full volume of supply air with no bypass or balancing dampers.
B.
Construct coils with 5/8 inch O.D. seamless copper tubes mechanically expanded for permanent
bond to aluminum fins.
C.
Coils shall include pressure type distributor, externally equalized expansion valve, liquid solenoid
valve and shall be approved for a maximum working pressure of 250 PSIG.
D.
Coil assemblies shall include 16-gage galvanized steel casings with a support mounting structure that
permits coil removal through side access.
E.
Coils shall include a heavy gage stainless steel drain pan to provide for condensate removal when coil
operates under a start-up condition.
2.11 FILTERS SECTION

A.
Air Filters: Refer to Division 15 Section "Air Cleaning" for air filters required for desiccant wheel
units.
B.
General: Filters shall comply with NFPA Standard 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
C.
Filter Section: Process air inlet, reactivation air inlet, and return air inlet plenums shall be equipped
with heavy gage galvanized steel racks to provide for slide out removal of filters, with filter media
holding frames arranged for flat orientation.
2.12 ELECTRICAL SECTION

A.
The main electrical control panel shall be located in a service vestibule that includes a vaporproof
service light and ground fault receptacle powered independently from the main unit power supply.
B.
All electrical controls shall be UL listed, and the entire unit factory wired in accordance with National
Electrical Code standards and either ETL or UL listed.
C.
The unit shall be supplied with a non-fused main power disconnect which is mounted in the service
vestibule. A single point power connection shall be provided for all units.

Duluth, GA

15857-5
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
D.
Provide phase loss and low voltage shutdown protection.
2.13 AUXILIARY GAS HEAT SECTION

A.
Propane/Air gas fired heaters shall be sized to provide capacities scheduled for auxiliary supply air
heat and auxiliary reactivation air heat.
B.
Propane/Air gas heaters shall be of power vented type and shall be AGA or ETL certified. Heat
transfer surface shall be constructed of type 400 series stainless steel or aluminized steel and shall
be suitable for use downstream from a cooling coil.
C.
Heaters shall be complete with all operational controls including an integral induced draft fan,
combination gas valve with manual shutoff, temperature limit control, and automatic spark or hot
surface ignited pilot with electronic flame supervision.
D.
Heaters shall include a stainless steel drain pan to encompass entire heater.
2.14 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

A.
Provide variable frequency drive where indicated on the drawings. Locate variable frequency drive in
service vestibule of unit.
B.
Variable frequency drive shall comply with all the requirements in specification Section 15880.
C.
Variable frequency drive shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer as the supply fan motor.
2.15 DAMPERS
A.
General: Leakage rate when tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 - Test Method for
Louvers, Dampers and Shutters, shall not exceed 2 percent of air quantity calculated at 2,000 fpm
face velocity through damper and 4.0 inches w.g. pressure differential.
1.
Damper operators are specified in Division 17 Section "Control Systems."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions under which desiccant wheel units are to be installed. Do not proceed
with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A.
General: Install desiccant wheel units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's
recommended clearances.
B.
Support roof-mounted units on roof curbs provided by General Contractor. Secure units to roof curb
with anchor bolts. Refer to schedule on the drawings for minimum roof curb height.
C.
Arrange installation of units to provide access space around desiccant wheel units for service and
maintenance.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. The Drawings indicate
the general arrangement of piping, valves, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific
connection requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Arrange piping installations adjacent to units to allow unit servicing and maintenance.
Connection piping to air-handling units with flexible connectors.
Connect water supply piping to the air leaving side of water coils.
Condensate Drain Piping: Route condensate drain to nearest roof or equipment drain or to
location shown on the drawings. Provide trap, minimum of 1" deeper than fan pressure in
inches of water, at drain pan connection and install cleanouts at changes in direction (refer to
manufacturers recommendations for any additional requirements). Size condensate drain piping
in accordance with local code and the following:
Piping Length
Size
Less than 10 feet
Same size as unit connection

Duluth, GA

15857-6
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
More than 10 feet
One pipe size larger than unit connection
B.
Duct installations and connections are specified in other Division 15 Sections.

connections with flexible connections.
Make final duct
C.
Electrical Connections: Electrical power wiring is specified in Division 16.
D.
Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National Electrical Code.

A.
B.
material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheel, fan cabinet, intake plenum
cabinet, heat exchange surfaces, desiccant wheel, cooling/heating coil sections, filter sections,
access sections, etc.
3.5 STARTUP
A.
Supervision of start-up of equipment shall be provided by factory trained personnel.
B.
1.
2.
Remove shipping, blocking, and bracing.

Verify unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for piping,
ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify proper thermal overload protection is installed in
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor and verify proper motor rotation direction and verify fan wheel
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended lubricants.
6. Set face-and-bypass dampers to full face flow.
7. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
8. Install clean filters. Do not operate unit without filters.
9. Verify manual and automatic volume control, and fire and smoke dampers in connected
10. Disable automatic temperature control operators.
C.
Starting procedures for desiccant wheel units:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Manufacturer shall provide factory trained personnel to perform start up and testing of
equipment.
Energize motor, verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to
indicated RPM.
a.
c.
d. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for airhandling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
Energize compressors, condensing units section, and condenser fans.
a.
Verify refrigerant charge, temperature controls, and expansion valve operation.
Energize dehumidifier, desiccant wheel, blowers, and auxiliary heaters.
a.
c.
3.6 TRAINING
A.
of four hours on the operation and maintenance of the equipment provided under this section.
B.

1.

Duluth, GA

15857-7
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
2.
3.
C.
D.

Duluth, GA

15857-8
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
SECTION 15885
AIR CLEANING
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
Extent of air cleaning work required by this Section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by
requirements of this Section.
B.
Types of air cleaning equipment specified in this Section include the following:
1.
C.
Air Filters
a.
Replaceable (throwaway) panel and pleated
Filter sections of packaged air handling units are work of this section.

A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NFPA 90A and 90B, and NEC pertaining
to installation of air filters and associated electric wiring and equipment.
UL Compliance: Comply with UL Standards pertaining to safety performance of air filter units.
ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE Standard 52 for method of testing,
and for recording and calculating air flow rates.
ARI Compliance: Comply with provisions of ARI Standard 850 pertaining to test and
performance of air filter units.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data including, dimensions, weights,
required clearances and access, flow capacity including initial and final pressure drop at rated air
flow, efficiency and test method, fire classification, and installation instructions.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for filter rack assemblies
indicating dimensions, materials, and methods of assembly of components.
C.
Samples: Submit one sample filter cartridge for each type of filter required; in accordance with
requirements of Division 1.
D.
Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to air filter
units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagram for control wiring. Clearly differentiate
between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.
E.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of filter and rack
required. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance
manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
1.4 SPARE PARTS

A.
Provide one complete spare set of filters of each type required for each air handling system. Obtain
receipt from Owner that spare filters have been provided. In addition to the spare set of filters,
install new filters at completion of air handling system work, and prior to testing, adjusting, and
balancing work.
B.
If HVAC equipment is used during the construction period, Contractor shall provide one set of filters
(if system is designed to include pre-filters and after-filters, provide only pre-filters) when the unit is
started and replace filters when needed, but not less than every month. On the day of substantial
completion, the Contractor shall clean the unit and provide a new set of filters at each location in the
unit.

A.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air cleaning equipment of one of
the following:

Duluth, GA
AIR CLEANING
15885-1
1550000803
*** Issue 11/19/09
1.
Air Filters
a.
AAF International.
b. Bioclimatic Air Systems
c.
Columbus Industries, Inc..
d. Camfil Farr.
e.
Koch Filter Corp.
f.
Research Products Corp.
2.2 AIR FILTERS

A.
Replaceable (Throwaway) Pleated Filters: Provide factory-fabricated, pleated type, replaceable air
filters with holding frames; as indicated, in sizes indicated or sized for maximum velocity indicated,
with 2" thick UL Class 2 throwaway media material. Construct media of a non-woven cotton and
synthetic fabric, framed in throwaway fiberboard casings with diagonal bracing bonded to the
entering and exiting side of each pleat. Provide media support grid of welded wire construction
coated with rust inhibitor. Construct ductwork-holding frames of 20-ga galvanized steel, capable of
holding media and media frame in place, and gasketed to prevent unfiltered air by-passing between
media frames and holding members. Provide 1 filters with rated face velocity of 350 fpm, 2 filters
with rated velocity of 500 fpm, initial resistance of not greater than 0.30" w.g., final rated
resistance of 0.90" w.g., average efficiency of 30 percent and average arrestance of 90 percent.
The minimum MERV when tested under ASHRAE 52.2 shall be no less than MERV 7.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with installation requirements as specified elsewhere in these specifications

pertaining to air filters housing/casings, and associated supporting devices.
B.
Install air filters and holding devices of types indicated, and where shown; in accordance with air
filter manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices; to ensure that filters
comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
C.
Locate each filter unit accurately in position indicated, in relation to other work. Position unit with
sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter holding frames securely to
substrate.
D.
Coordinate with other work including ductwork and air handling unit work, as necessary to interface
installation of filters properly with other work.
E.
Install filters in proper position to prevent passage of unfiltered air.
F.
Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish
copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.
1.
2.
Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements of Division 16 Sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until
wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer.
Install air filter gage pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters to indicate air pressure
drop through air filter. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum, in
accessible position. Adjust and level inclined gages if any, for proper readings.

Duluth, GA
AIR CLEANING
15885-2
1550000803
*** Issue 11/19/09
SECTION 15891
METAL DUCTWORK
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes rectangular, round, and flat-oval metal ducts and plenums for heating,
ventilating, and air conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2 inches to plus 10 inches
water gauge.
B.
1.
2.
3.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers," for materials and methods for sealing duct penetrations
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification," for labeling and identification of metal
ductwork.
fire barrier penetrations and wall penetrations.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A.
Sealing Requirements Definitions: For the purposes of duct systems sealing requirements specified in
this Section, the following definitions apply:
1.
2.
Seams: A seam is defined as joining of two longitudinally (in the direction of airflow) oriented
edges of duct surface material occurring between two joints.
All other duct surface
connections made on the perimeter are deemed to be joints.
Joints: Joints include girth joints; branch and subbranch intersections; so-called duct collar tapins; fitting subsections; louver and air terminal connections to ducts; access door and access
panel frames and jambs; duct, plenum, and casing abutments to building structures.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A.
The duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air moving and distribution
equipment and other components of the air system. Changes or alterations to the layout or
configuration of the duct system must be specifically approved in writing. Accompany requests for
layout modifications with calculations showing that the proposed layout will provide the original
design results without increasing the system total pressure.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product data including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual

components, profiles, and finishes for the following items:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Duct Liner.
Sealing Materials.
Fire-Stopping Materials.
Shop drawings from duct fabrication shop, drawn to a scale not smaller than 1/4 inch equals 1 foot,
on drawing sheets same size as the Contract Drawings, detailing:
1.
Fabrication, assembly, and installation details, including plans, elevations, sections, details of
components, and attachments to other work.
2. Duct layout, indicating pressure classifications, duct gauge and sizes in plan view. For exhaust
ducts systems, indicate the classification of the materials handled as defined in this Section.
3. Fittings.
4. Reinforcing details and spacing.
5. Seam and joint construction details.
6. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
7. Terminal heating and cooling unit, coil, humidifier and duct silencer installations.
8. Locations of fire and fire/smoke dampers and associated duct access doors.
9. Location of manual balancing dampers.
10. Duct smoke detector locations.
Refer to electrical drawings for general locations and
coordinate locations with the electrical contractor.
11. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation, and duct
attachment.

Duluth, GA
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-1
1550000803
*** Issue 09/24/09
C.
Coordination drawings for ductwork installation in accordance with Division 15 Section "General
Mechanical Requirements." In addition to the requirements specified in "General Mechanical
Requirements" show the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Coordination with ceiling suspension members.

Spatial coordination with other systems installed in the same space with the duct systems.
Coordination of ceiling- and wall-mounted access doors and panels required to provide access
to dampers and other operating devices.
Coordination with ceiling-mounted lighting fixtures and air outlets and inlets.
D.
Record drawings including duct systems routing, fittings details, reinforcing, support, and installed
accessories and devices, in accordance with Division 15 Section "General Mechanical Requirements"
and Division 1.
E.
Welding certificates including welding procedures specifications, welding procedures qualifications

test records, and welders' qualifications test records complying with requirements specified in
"Quality Assurance" below.
F.
Leak test report for ducts specified to be leak tested in Part 3.
A.
Leak Test certificate for all grease duct joints and fittings in compliance with locally adopted IMC.
B.
Leak Test certificate for all smoke control duct joints and fittings in compliance with locally adopted
IMC.

A.
Code - Steel" for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1 "Sheet Metal Welding Code."
B.
Qualify each welder in accordance with AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved.
Certify that their qualification is current.
C.
NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA Standards:

1.
2.
3.
NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," except
as indicated otherwise.
NFPA 90B, Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
NFPA 96, "Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and GreaseLaden Vapors for Commercial Cooking Equipment," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for kitchen hood
duct systems, except as indicated otherwise.
D.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA): Provide
ductwork systems in conformance with HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible,
latest edition.
E.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL): Provide mastic and tapes that are listed and labeled in accordance
with UL 181A and marked according to type.
F.
National Air Duct Cleaners Association, Inc. (NADCA): Clean ductwork systems in accordance with
the standard Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems (ACR 2002).
G.
Field-Constructed Mock-Up: Prior to installation of duct systems erect mock-ups representing duct
systems pressure classifications greater than 2 inches. Build mock-ups to comply with the following
requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work.
1.
2.
3.
Construct mock-ups for the following duct systems:

a.
Supply ducts for hospital operating rooms.
b. Supply and exhaust ducts for hospital isolation rooms.
c.
Laboratory supply and exhaust duct systems.
d. Clean room supply and exhaust duct systems.
Locate mock-ups on the site. Mock-up may be a representative section of the actual duct
system.
Include the minimum number of each of the following features and fittings:
a.
Five transverse joints.
b. One access door.
c.
Two typical branch connections each with at least one elbow.
d. Two typical flexible duct or flexible connector connections for each type duct and

Duluth, GA
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-2
1550000803
*** Issue 09/24/09
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
apparatus.
Perform tests specified in "Field Quality Control." Modify mock-up construction and perform
additional tests as required to achieve specified minimum acceptable results.
Obtain approval of mock-ups before beginning final fabrication.
Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging completed unit of Work.
Demolish and remove mock-ups from Project site when directed.
Accepted mock-ups that form a part of the actual duct system may remain and become part of
completed unit of Work.
1.6 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT

A.
Protect ductwork during shipping and storage from dirt, debris and moisture damage. Provide plastic
covers over ends of ductwork during shipping, storage and installation.
B.
Replace duct liner that is damaged and cannot be repaired satisfactorily. Replace duct liner that has
gotten wet during shipping, storage or installation. Dry surfaces prior to installing new duct liner.

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A.
Sheet Metal, General: Provide sheet metal in thickness indicated (minimum 26 gauge), packaged and
marked as specified in ASTM A 700.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality, ASTM A 653, Coating Designation G 90. Provide mill
phosphatized or galvanealed finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view that is to be field painted.
C.
PVC-Coated Galvanized Steel: UL-181 Class 1 Listing. Lock-forming quality galvanized sheet steel
with ASTM A 653, Coating Designation G 90. Provide with factory-applied, 4-mil, PVC coating on
the exposed surfaces of ducts and fittings (exterior of ducts and fittings for underground
applications, and the interior of ducts and fittings for fume-handing applications) and 2-mil PVC
coating on the reverse side of the ducts and fittings.
D.
Carbon Steel Sheets:

matte finish.
E.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480, Type 316, sheet form, with No. 4 finish on exposed surface for ducts
exposed to view; Type 304, sheet form, with No. 1 finish for concealed ducts.
F.
Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form; with standard, one-side
bright finish where ducts are exposed to view, and mill finish for concealed ducts.
G.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Unless otherwise indicated, provide galvanized steel reinforcing
where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts. For aluminum and stainless steel ducts provide
reinforcing of compatible materials.
H.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8-inch minimum
diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
ASTM A 366, cold-rolled sheets, commercial quality, with oiled, exposed
2.2 DUCT LINER

A.
General: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A and Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association
(TIMA) Standard AHC-101.
B.
Application: Provide duct liner on interior, rectangular supply and return air ducts.
C.
Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type [I][II], long textile fiber (no thermosetting resin allowed) insulation
with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of glass fibers. Liner surface shall serve
as a barrier against infiltration of dust and dirt, shall meet ASTM C 1338 for fungi resistance and
shall be cleanable using duct cleaning methods and equipment outlined by North American Insulation
Manufacturers Association (NAIMA) Duct Cleaning Guide.
1.
2.
Thickness: 2 inch.
Density: 1-1/2 pounds.
3.
Thermal Performance: "K-Factor" equal to .125 or better, at a mean temperature of 75F and
rated in installed condition in accordance with ASTM C 518.

Duluth, GA
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-3
1550000803
*** Issue 09/24/09
4.
5.
6.
Fire Hazard Classification: Flame spread rating of not more than 25 without evidence of
continued progressive combustion and a smoke developed rating of no higher than 50, when
tested in accordance with ASTM C 411.
Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A /UL 181 classified with flame spread/smoke
development less than 25/50 and ASTM C 916. Adhesive shall be a minimum 50% solid
content, water-based, non-oxidizing and have a service temperature of 20 to 200 F or shall be
solvent-based, non-chlorinated. Water-based adhesive shall be Armacell LLC Armsflex 520 BLV
low VOC, Design Polymerics DP 2502, Duro Dyne WIT, Hardcast 951, or United McGill UniTack.
Mechanical Fasteners:
Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical
attachment, or welding attachment to duct. Provide fasteners that do not damage the liner
when applied as recommended by the manufacturer, that do not cause leakage in the duct, and
will indefinitely sustain a 50-pound tensile dead load test perpendicular to the duct wall.
a.
Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation, and without projecting more
than 1/8 inch into the airstream.
b. Adhesive For Attachment of Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with the "Fire Hazard
Classification" of duct liner system.
D.
Duct sizes on mechanical plans indicate clear inside airflow dimensions. Sheet metal sizes for
ductwork with duct liner shall be increased accordingly to account for liner thickness.
E.
Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner: Insulation material shall be a flexible, closed cell, elastomeric
insulation in sheet form that complies with ASTM C534. Insulation shall have a flame spread rating
of 25 or less and smoke developed rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
Material shall have a minimum thermal conductivity of 0.27 Btu-in/h-sf-F and a minimum water
vapor transmission of 0.08 perm-inches. Liner shall be 1 thick or greater to meet local code
requirements. Liner shall be fully adhered to clean, oil-free sheet metal surfaces with adhesive as
recommended by the liner manufacturer. All seams shall be sealed with adhesive and shall have
compression joints installed in accordance with manufacturers instruction. Flexible elastomeric
insulation shall be Armacell LLC Armaflex SA duct liner or approved equal.
F.
Flexible elastomeric ccoustical and conformable duct liner: Flexible elastomeric thermal, acoustical
and conformable insulation. Compliance with ASTM C 534 Grade 1, Type II or ASTM C 1534, NFPA
90A or NFPA 90B, Thickness: and 1, Thermal Conductivity: 0.25 BTU-in/hr sq ft F at 75 F
mean temp, ASTM C 518, Noise Reduction Coefficient: 0.6, ASTM C 423, Sound Transmission
Class (STC) 25, ASTM E 90, Flame Spread less than 25 and Smoke Developed Index less than 50,
ASTM E 84, EPA registered anti-microbial additive to inhibit mold and mildew, ASTM G21, Basis of
Design: Armacell LLC AP Coilflex or approved equal.
2.3 SEALING MATERIALS

A.
Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term sealant used here is not limited to materials of adhesive
or mastic nature, but also includes tapes and combinations of open weave fabric strips and mastics.
Duct tape shall not be used as a sealant on any ducts.
B.
Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide, glass-fiber-reinforced fabric.
C.
Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral compound and a
modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with the tape to form a hard, durable,
airtight seal.
D.
Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, non-sag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl
sealant complying with FS TT-S-001657, Type I; formulated with a minimum of 70 percent solids.
E.
Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: UL 181 Listed and UL 723 classified with flame spread/smoke
development of less than 25/50. Sealant shall be rated to 15 inches w.g. Sealant shall have a
service temperature of 25 to 200 F and be freeze/thaw stable through 5 cycles.
Approved
products: Design Polymerics DP 1010, Ductmate Proseal/Fiberseal, Duro Dyne Duroseal, United Duct
Sealer (Water Based) and Hardcast 601.
F.
Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone elastomeric joint sealants, complying with
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
G.
Flanged Gasket Tapes:

Butyl gasket shall be UL 181 classified with flame spread/smoke
development of 10/10. Gasket size shall be minimum 5/8 x 3/16 and have nominal 100% solid

Duluth, GA
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-4
1550000803
*** Issue 09/24/09
content. It shall be non-oxidizing, non-skinning and have a service temperature of 25 to 180 F.

Approved products: Design Polymerics DP 1040, Ductmate 440 and Hardcast 1902.
A.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder actuated fasteners, or structural steel fasteners
appropriate for building materials. Do not use powder actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight
aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
B.
Hangers: Galvanized sheet steel, or round, uncoated steel, threaded rod.

1.
2.
Hangers Installed In Corrosive Atmospheres: Electro-galvanized, all-thread rod or hot-dippedgalvanized rods with threads painted after installation.
Straps and Rod Sizes: Conform with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 2005
Edition, for sheet steel width and gauge and steel rod diameters.
C.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with
duct materials.
D.
Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes conforming to ASTM A 36.

1.
2.
3.
Where galvanized steel ducts are installed, provide hot-dipped-galvanized steel shapes and
plates.
For stainless steel ducts, provide stainless steel support materials.
For aluminum ducts, provide aluminum support materials, except where materials are
electrolytically separated from ductwork.
2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate rectangular ducts with galvanized sheet steel, in
accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," 2005 Edition, Tables 2-1 through
2-28, including their associated details. Conform to the requirements in the referenced standard for
metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie rod applications, and joint types and intervals.
1.
2.
3.
Fabricate rectangular ductwork of minimum 26 gauge sheet metal.

Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for
pressure classification.
Provide materials that are free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stains, and discolorations.
B.
Crossbreaking or Cross Beading: Crossbreak or bead duct sides that are 19 inches and larger and are
20 gauge or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of unbraced panel area, as indicated in SMACNA "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards," 2005 Edition, Figure 2-9, unless they are lined or are externally
insulated.
C.
Exterior Ductwork: Ductwork installed exterior to the building shall be minimum #18 gauge with
longitudinal and transverse joints welded or sealed airtight as specified under Paragraph Seam and
Joint Sealing.
D.
Field Painted Ductwork: Provide mill phosphatized finish on exposed surfaces of rectangular
ductwork and duct fittings to be field painted.
2.6 RECTANGULAR DUCT FITTINGS

A.
Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other duct construction in accordance
with SMACNA "HVAC Metal Duct Construction Standard," 2005 Edition, Figures 4-1 through 4-8.
Unless otherwise noted on drawings, provide prefabricated 45 degree, high efficiency,
rectangular/round branch duct takeoff fittings with manual balancing damper and locking quadrant
for branch duct connections and take-offs to individual diffusers, registers and grilles.
B.
Provide radius elbows, turns, and offsets with a minimum centerline radius of 1-1/2 times the duct
width. Where space does not permit full radius elbows, provide short radius elbows with a minimum
of two continuous splitter vanes. Vanes shall be the entire length of the bend.
C.
Provide mitered elbows where space does not permit radius elbows, where shown on the drawings,
or at the option of the contractor with the engineers approval. The contractor shall obtain approval
to substitute mitered elbows in lieu of radius elbows prior to fitting fabrication. Mitered elbows less
than 45 degrees shall not require turning vanes. Mitered elbows 45-degrees and greater shall have
single thickness turning vanes of same material and gauge as ductwork, rigidly fastened with guide

Duluth, GA
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-5
1550000803
*** Issue 09/24/09
strips in ductwork. Vanes for mitered elbows shall be provided in all supply and exhaust ductwork
and in return and outside air ductwork that has an air velocity exceeding 1000 fpm. Do not install
vanes in grease ductwork. Refer to Section Ductwork Accessories for turning vane construction
and mounting.
2.7 SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A.
Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of adhesive at
liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated thickness is prohibited.
B.
Apply a coat of adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.
C.
Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D.
Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to assure butted edge
overlapping.
E.
Longitudinal joints in rectangular ducts shall not occur except at corners of ducts, unless the size of
the duct and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
1.
Apply an adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts exceeding 2,500 FPM air velocity.
F.
Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12
inches transversely around perimeter; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not
exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.
G.
Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that are either
channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from the duct wall at the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
Fan discharge.
Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where duct velocity is greater than 2,500 FPM.
H.
Secure insulation liner with perforated sheet metal liner of the same gauge specified for the duct,
secured to ducts with mechanical fasteners that maintain metal liner distance from duct without
compressing insulation. Provide 3/32-inch-diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23
percent.
I.
Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning vane assemblies,
and other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional;
when used, secure buildouts to the duct wall with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. Terminate liner at
fire dampers at connection to fire damper sleeve through fire separation.
2.8 ROUND AND FLAT OVAL DUCT FABRICATION

A.
General: "Basic Round Diameter" as used in this article is the diameter of the size of round duct that
has a circumference equal to the perimeter of a given sized of flat oval duct. Except where
interrupted by fittings, provide round and flat oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet.
1.
Fabricate round and flat oval ductwork of minimum 26 gauge sheet metal.
B.
Round Ducts: Fabricate round supply ducts using seam types identified in SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards," 2005 Edition, Figure 3-2, RL-1, RL-4, or RL-5 except where diameters
exceed 72 inches. Seam Types RL-2 or RL-3 may be used for ducts smaller than 72 inches in
diameter if spot-welded on 1-inch intervals. Fabricate ducts having diameters greater than 72 inches
with longitudinal butt-welded seams. Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards,"
2005 Edition, Table 3-5 through 3-13 for galvanized steel gauges. For round duct with static
pressure classification of 2 inches water gauge or lower, round supply ducts may be fabricated using
snaplock seam types identified in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," 2005 Edition,
Figure 3-2, RL-6A, RL-6B, RL-7 or RL-8.
C.
Flat Oval Ducts:

Fabricate flat oval supply ducts with standard spiral lockseams (without
intermediate ribs) or with butt-welded longitudinal seams in gauges listed in SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards," 2005 Edition, Table 3-15.
D.
Double-Wall (Insulated) Ducts: Fabricate double-wall insulated ducts with an outer shell, insulation,
and an inner liner as specified below. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are nominal
inside dimensions.
1.
Outer Shell: Base outer shell gauge on actual outer shell dimensions. Provide outer shell
lengths 2 inches longer than inner shell and insulation, and in gauges specified above for single-

Duluth, GA
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-6
1550000803
*** Issue 09/24/09
2.
3.
4.
E.
wall duct.
Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1-inch-thick fiber-glass insulation with thermal
conductivity performance of 0.27 Btu/sq.ft./F/inch-thickness at 75F mean temperature.
Provide insulation ends where internally insulated duct connects to single-wall duct or noninsulated components. The insulation end shall terminate the insulation and reduce the outer
shell diameter to the inner liner diameter.
Perforated Inner Liner: Construct round and flat oval inner liners with perforated sheet metal of
the gauges listed below. Provide 3/32-inch-diameter perforations, with an overall open area of
23 percent. For flat oval ducts, the diameter indicated below is the "basic round diameter."
a.
3 to 8 inches: 28 gauge with standard spiral construction.
b. 9 to 42 inches: 28 gauge with single-rib spiral construction.
c.
44 to 60 inches: 26 gauge with single-rib spiral construction.
d. 62 to 88 inches: 22 gauge with standard spiral construction.
Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain insulation from
dislocation by mechanical means.
Field Painted Ductwork: All round and flat oval ductwork and duct fittings to be field painted shall
have galvanized metal primer applied in the shop after fabrication and prior to shipping.
2.9 ROUND AND FLAT OVAL SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FITTINGS FABRICATION
A.
90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to conform to SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards," 2005 Edition, Figures 3-5, 3-6 and 3-7 and with metal thickness specified
for longitudinal seam straight duct.
B.
Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess material
projecting from the body onto branch tap entrance.
C.
Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate the bend radius
of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows 1.5 times the elbow diameter. Unless elbow construction
type is indicated, provide elbows meeting the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Mitered Elbows: Fabricate mitered elbows with welded construction in gauges specified below.
a.
Mitered Elbows Radius and Number of Pieces: Unless otherwise indicated, construct
elbow to comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," 2005 Edition,
Table 3-1.
b. Round Mitered Elbows: Solid welded and with metal thickness listed below for pressure
classes from minus 2 inches to plus 2 inches:
1) 3 to 26 inches: 24 gauge.
c.
Round Mitered Elbows: Solid welded and with metal thickness listed below for pressure
classes from 2 inches to 10 inches:
d. Flat Oval Mitered Elbows: Solid welded and with the same metal thickness as longitudinal
seam flat oval duct.
e.
90-Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems, or exhaust systems for
material handling classes A and B; and only where space restrictions do not permit the use
of 1.5 bend radius elbows. Fabricate with a single-thickness turning vane.
Round Elbows - 8 Inches and Smaller: Die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows and
pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend angle
configurations or 1/2-inch-diameter (e.g. 3-1/2- and 4-1/2-inch) elbows with gored
construction.
Round Elbows - 9 Through 14 Inches: Gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90
degrees, except where space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate nonstandard bend
angle configurations or 1/2-inch-diameter (e.g. 9-1/2- and 10-1/2-inch) elbows with gored
construction.

Duluth, GA
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-7
1550000803
*** Issue 09/24/09
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Round Elbows - Larger Than 14 Inches and All Flat Oval Elbows: Gored elbows, except where
space restrictions require a mitered elbow.
Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes Through 8 Inches and All Pressures: 20 gauge with 2-piece
welded construction.
Round Gored Elbows Gauges: Same as for non-elbow fittings specified above.
Flat Oval Elbows Gauges: Same as longitudinal seam flat oval duct.
Pleated Elbows Sizes Through 14 Inches and Pressures Through 10 Inches: 26 gauge.
2.10 FACTORY-MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK

A.
General: At the Contractors option, factory-manufactured ductwork can be provided instead of

fabricated ductwork for round and oval ductwork. All factory-manufactured round and oval supply,
return and exhaust ductwork shall be Lindab Inc SPIROsafe, Lewis & Lambert, Wesco or approved
equal. The round duct system shall consist of fittings that are factory fitted with a sealing gasket
and spiral duct which, when installed according to the manufacturer's instructions, will seal the duct
joints without the use of duct sealer. The oval duct system shall be sealed with duct sealer as
specified in this section.
B.
Duct Construction
1.
Unless otherwise noted, all duct and fittings shall be constructed per SMACNA's Duct
Construction Standards (+l0 in W.G.) shown in the following tables:
Single Wall Round Duct:
Diameter
Galvanized
(Inches)
Spiral Duct
3 - 14
26
16 - 26
24
28 - 36
22
38 - 50
20
Galvanized
Fittings
24
22
20
20
Double Wall Round Duct:

Diameter
Galvanized
(Inches)
Spiral Duct
Inner Outer
3-12
26
26
14-24
24
24
26-34
24
22
36-48
22
20
50-58
20
18
Galvanized
Fittings
Inner Outer
24
24
24
22
22
20
22
20
20
18
Oval Duct:
Major axis
(inches)
3-24
25-38
37-48
49-60
61-70
71 and large
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Galvanized
Galvanized
Spiral Duct (ga) Fittings (ga)
24
20
22
20
22
18
20
18
20
16
18
16
Duct shall be calibrated to manufacturer's published dimensional tolerance standard.

All duct 14" diameter and larger shall be corrugated for added strength and rigidity.
Spiral seam slippage shall be prevented by means of a flat seam and a mechanically formed
indentation evenly spaced along the spiral seam.
Ducts shall be constructed using spiral lock seam sheet metal construction.
Ductwork to be installed in exposed locations shall have the surface prepared in the factory for
field painting.
Fittings:
1.
All fitting ends for round duct and transitions and divided flow fittings smaller than 50
diameter that convert oval duct to round duct shall come factory equipped with a double lipped,
U-profile, EPDM rubber gasket. Gasket shall be manufactured to gauge and flexibility so as to
insure that system will meet all of the performance criteria set forth in the manufacturer's

Duluth, GA
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-8
1550000803
*** Issue 09/24/09
literature. Gasket shall be classified by Underwriter's Laboratories to conform to ASTM E84-91a

and NFPA 90A flame spread and smoke developed ratings of 25/50.
2. All fittings shall be calibrated to manufacturer's published dimensional tolerance standard and
associated spiral duct.
3. All fitting ends from 5" to 60" diameter shall have rolled over edges for added strength and
rigidity.
4. All elbows from 5" to 12" diameter shall be 2 piece die stamped and continuously stitch
welded. All elbows 14" diameter and larger shall be standing seam gorelock construction and
internally sealed.
5. The radius of all 90 and 45 elbows shall be 1.5 times the elbow diameter, unless otherwise
noted on the contract documents to be 1.0. The radius of all 15, 30 and 60 elbows shall be
1.0 times the elbow diameter.
6. All fittings that are of either spot welded or button punched construction shall be internally
sealed. When contract documents require divided flow fittings, only full body fittings will be
accepted. The use of duct taps is unacceptable except for retrofit installations.
7. Double wall duct and fittings shall consist of a perforated or solid inner liner, a 1 inch, 1.50
lb/ft3 (unless otherwise specified) layer of fiberglass insulation and a solid outer pressure shell.
Perforated inner liner shall have a retaining fabric wrapped between the perforated inner and the
fiberglass insulation. This fabric shall provide fiberglass tear retention while maintaining the
desired acoustical properties. For 1 inch thick insulation, the outer pressure shell diameter shall
be 2 inches larger than the inner liner.
8. All double wall fittings for round duct shall be furnished with the SPIROsafe gasket on the outer
shell. The inner shell on all double wall fittings shall extend a minimum of 1 inch past the outer
shell.
9. Double wall to single wall transitions shall be provided where insulated duct connects to noninsulated, single wall duct. Transitions shall also act as insulation ends reducing the double wall
outer shell diameter to the inner shell diameter.
10. All double wall duct and fittings shall be furnished with both an inner liner and an outer pressure
shell coupling. The inner liners shall not be fastened tighter to allow for expansion and
contraction.
11. All volume dampers shall be SPIROsafe type DRU, DSU or DTU or approved equal. Damper shall
be fitting sized to slip into spiral duct. Damper shall have the following features:
a.
Locking quadrant with blade position indicator.
b. 2" sheet metal insulation stand-off.
c.
Integral shaft/blade assembly.
d. Shaft mounted, load bearing bushings.
e.
Gasketed shaft penetrations to minimize leakage.
2.11 SNAP-LOCK DUCT SYSTEM
A.
General: At Contractors option, snap-lock round ductwork can be provided instead of fabricated
ductwork for round ductwork up to 14 in diameter in air systems with pressures between negative
1 and positive 2 w.c.. Snap-lock round ductwork shall be Ductmate Green Seam or approved
equal.
B.
Duct Construction: Snap-Lock round ductwork shall be galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A653
and A924 with G-60 galvanized coating conforming to ASTM A653 and ASTM A90 Ductwork and
fittings shall be minimum 26 gauge.
C.
Gaskets: Snap-lock round ductwork shall have gaskets along the longitudinal seams and around
each transverse joint to provide a system that meets SMACNA Seal Class A. Gasket shall be made
of butyl and EPDM rubber that meets flame spread index of 25 and smoke spread index of 50
according to ASTM E84.
2.12 CONCENTRIC DUCT FOR GREASE EXHAUST

A.
General: At Contractors option, in lieu of welded carbon steel grease exhaust duct, a pre-fabricated
concentric duct package similar to Metal-Fab G Series or Metalbestos PSI C series may be used
subject to local code authority approval. Provide fire rating and clearance to combustibles listing as
applicable for the installation.
B.
Code Compliance: Material and installation shall comply with UL 1978, ASTM E119, ASTM E814,
and NFPA 96. [Zero clearance applications shall also comply with UL 2221, and BOCA ER 96-37 or
ICBO ER 5301 Zero Clearance to Combustibles Report].

Duluth, GA
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-9
1550000803
*** Issue 09/24/09
C.
Product Description:
1.
Grease duct shall be factory prefabricated, double wall type, listed for venting of grease laden
air from Type 1 kitchen hoods serving commercial cooking appliances.
2. Material and installation shall be rated for continuous operation at 500 F and intermittent
operation at 2000 F.
3. All grease duct system components shall be by manufacturer to maintain approval agency
ratings including supports, guides, fittings, cleanouts, and expansion joints.
4. Grease duct system shall meet ASTM E119 2-hour fire resistance rating and 3-hour fire
engulfment rating and ASTM E814 3-hour Fire Stop Test.
5. Grease duct system shall be SBCCI tested as an alternate to a 2-hour fire rated shaft and SBCCI
classified as a 2-hour fire rated enclosure.
6. The grease duct system shall be constructed of inner and outer walls with ceramic fiber
insulation between the walls.
7. The inner wall shall be constructed of stainless steel, minimum 0.035 inch thickness.
8. The outer wall shall be constructed of aluminized steel or Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel,
minimum 0.024 inch thickness.
9. The insulation shall be minimum [2-inch][3-inch][4-inch] thickness soluble ceramic fiber.
10. The grease duct assembly shall be rated for 1-inch clearance to combustibles up to 18 inch
diameter, and 2-inch clearance to combustibles up to 32 inch diameter.
11. The grease duct assembly shall be rated for zero clearance to combustibles.
2.13 WIRE ROPE HANGING SYSTEMS
A.
General: At Contractors option, provide wire rope mechanical system hangers with easy lightweight
mechanical adjustment system for hanging ductwork. Wire rope systems shall be as manufactured
by Ductmate, Duro Dyne, Gripple or approved equivalent.
B.
Wire rope shall be 7 x 7 or 7 x 19 aircraft quality zinc coated cable by Ductmate or galvanized steel
wire rope by Duro Dyne or Gripple of size appropriate for working load being supported, including a
5:1 safety factor. Provide Ductmate WR10 through 40, Duro Dyne WC2 through WC6 or Gripple No.
1 through No. 5 wire rope for duct hanging application.
C.
Secure wire rope to duct using Ductmate Clutcher, Duro Dyne Cable Lock or Gripple Hang Fast easily
adjustable attachment. Locking devices shall be constructed of cast zinc housings with stainless
steel springs. For seismic applications, hangers shall be seismic tested, conforming to GR 63, level 4
seismic, with UL and SMACNA seismic approvals.
D.
Upper hanger attachment shall be compatible with wire rope hanger system and shall be by same
manufacturer as wire rope duct attachment. Provide Ductmate EZ-Lock Wire rope beam clamp
mechanical hanger with locking nut for easy adjustment or Duro Dyne or Gripple ceiling, beam or
purlin clip as applicable for the structure to which it is attached.
E.
Wire rope, duct attachment, and upper end attachment to structure shall each have minimum 5 to 1
safety factor based upon the weight being supported.
F.
Wire rope hanging systems used for seismic sway bracing shall be attached on two opposite sides
each at 45-degrees from vertical. Locking devices shall have a secondary lock down feature to lock
the internal wedge in place.
G.
Where approved by local code authority, the loop system may be swaged directly on to a seismic
approved bracket or appropriate end fixing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS
A.
All ducts shall be galvanized steel except as follows:

1.
Grease Hood Exhaust Ducts: Comply with NFPA 96.

a.
Concealed: Carbon-steel sheet, minimum 16 gauge.
b. Exposed: Type 304, stainless steel, minimum 18 gauge, with finish to match kitchen
equipment and range hood.
c.
Weld and flange seams and joints.
d. At Contractor's option, a UL listed concentric ductwork package manufactured by MetalFab, Metalbestos or approved equal may be used in lieu of the welded carbon steel duct

Duluth, GA
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-10
1550000803
*** Issue 09/24/09
for connecting hood to exhaust fan. Provide manufacturers UL listing number and
verification certificate as a part of the shop drawing submittal. Install duct package in
strict conformance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
3.2 DUCT LINER APPLICATION
A.
Application: Provide duct liner on all sales floor ductwork within 10-0 of HVAC unit.
3.3 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A.
Duct System Pressure Class: Construct and install each duct system except factory-manufactured
ductwork for the specific duct pressure classification indicated. For factory-manufactured ductwork,
refer to Paragraph Factory-Manufactured Ductwork.
1.
2.
3.
Supply Air Ducts: 3 inches water gauge.

Return Air Ducts: 2 inches water gauge, negative pressure.
Exhaust Air Ducts: 2 inches water gauge, negative pressure.
B.
Install ducts with the fewest possible joints.
C.
Use fabricated fittings for all changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.
D.
Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with projections into duct at connections kept to a
minimum.
E.
Locate ducts, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to
building lines; avoid diagonal runs. Install duct systems in shortest route that does not obstruct
useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment.
F.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
G.
Cover ducts openings during construction with duct caps or three-mil plastic to protect inside of
(installed and delivered) ductwork from exposure to dust, dirt, paint and moisture. Do not use duct
tape on ducts that will be exposed or painted.
H.
Provide clearance of 1 inch where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, plus
allowance for insulation thickness, if any.
I.
Install insulated ducts with 1-inch clearance outside of insulation.
J.
Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow
wall construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions,
except as specifically shown.
K.
Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.
L.
Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults and
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
M.
Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass interior partitions and exterior walls, and
are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with
sheet metal flanges of same gauge as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
3.4 KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCT INSTALLATIONS

A.
Provide for thermal expansion of ductwork through 2,000F temperature range.
B.
Install without dips or traps that may collect residues, except where dips or traps have drain
openings for continuous or automatic residue removal.
C.
Horizontal Ducts: Provide at least one opening that is minimum size of 20 inches by 20 inches for
personnel entry. Where an opening of this size is not possible, provide access openings at each
change in direction and at 12-foot intervals. Locate openings on sides of duct 1-1/2 inches minimum
from bottom, and fit with grease-tight covers of same material as duct. Support systems for ducts
24 inch and larger in any dimension shall be designed for the weight of the duct plus 800 pounds at
any point in the duct system.
D.
Vertical Ducts: For ducts larger than 24 inches by 24 inches, provide a 20 inch by 20 inch access
opening for personnel entry at the top of the vertical riser. For ducts smaller than 24 inches by 24
inches, provide an access opening at each floor level. Supports for ducts large enough for personnel

Duluth, GA
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-11
1550000803
*** Issue 09/24/09
entry shall be designed for the weight of the duct plus 800 lbs at any point in the duct system.
E.
Provide transition at connection to fan with opening size equal to or greater than the venturi opening
of the fan inlet. Provide gasket at flanged connection to fan rated for 1500 F and grease
applications.
F.
Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies.
3.5 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A.
General: Seal duct seams and joints as follows:

1.
2.
3.
Pressure Classifications Greater Than 3 Inches Water Gauge: All transverse joints, longitudinal
seams, and duct penetrations to meet SMACNA Seal Class A.
Pressure Classification Greater than 2 and equal to 3 Inches Water Gauge: All transverse joints
and longitudinal seams to meet SMACNA Seal Class B.
Pressure Classification Less than or equal to 2 Inches Water Gauge: Transverse joints only to
meet SMANCA Seal Class C.
B.
Seal externally insulated ducts prior to insulation installation.
C.
Ductwork installed exterior to the building shall have longitudinal and transverse joints welded or
sealed airtight with weatherproof heavy liquid sealant applied according to manufacturer's
instructions.
D.
Exhaust air ducts serving critical spaces or functions such as fume hoods in laboratories and isolation
rooms in healthcare facilities shall be sealed to meet SMACNA Seal Class A.
3.6 HANGING AND SUPPORTING

A.
Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat oval metal duct with support systems indicated in Chapter 5
of the SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards."
B.
The use of wire rope hanging systems is an acceptable alternate hanging methods when installed in
strict accordance with manufacturers instructions. Wire rope hanger spacing shall not exceed 8 feet.
Supported load shall not exceed manufacturers recommended load rating.
C.
Support horizontal ducts within 2 feet of each elbow and within 4 feet of each branch intersection.
D.
Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor.
E.
Upper attachments to structures shall have an allowable load not exceeding 1/4 of the failure (proof
test) load but are not limited to the specific methods indicated.
Hangers and supports shall be
fastened to building joists or beams. Do not attach hangers and supports to the above floor slab or
roof with sheet metal screws.
F.
Install concrete insert prior to placing concrete.
G.
Install powder actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
3.7 PENETRATIONS
A.
Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where ducts pass though fire-rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors,
maintain the fire-rated integrity. Refer to Division 15 Section Basic Mechanical Materials and
B.
Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal duct penetrations through exterior wall constructions with sleeves,
C.
Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal duct penetrations through underground exterior walls
with sleeves, packing, and sealant. Refer to Division 15 Section Basic Piping Materials and
A.
Elevated Floor Penetrations of Waterproof Membrane, Interior Penetrations of No-Fire Rated Walls
and Concrete Slab on Grade Penetrations: Seal ducts that pass through waterproof floors, non-fire
rated walls, partitions and ceilings or concrete slab on grade. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods for special sealers and materials.
3.8 CONNECTIONS

Duluth, GA
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-12
1550000803
*** Issue 09/24/09
A.
Equipment Connections: Connect equipment with flexible connectors in accordance with Division 15
Section "Duct Accessories."
B.
Branch Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," 2005 Edition,
Figures 4-5 and 4-6.
C.
Outlet and Inlet Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," 2005
Edition, Figures 7-6 and 7-7. Where a 90-degree elbow is required at the connection to air devices,
provide a rigid duct elbow or, at Contractors option, a flexible elbow assembly as specified in this
section.
D.
Fan Connections:
Figure 7-8.
Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," 2005 Edition,

A.
Refer to Paragraph Field Constructed Mock-Ups in Part 1 for duct systems to be leak tested.
B.
The Owner will contract with an independent testing agency to perform, record, and report leakage
tests.
C.
Remake leaking joints as required and apply sealants to achieve specified maximum allowable
leakage.

A.
Refer to Paragraph Field Constructed Mock-Ups in Part 1 for duct systems to be leak tested.
B.
Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of the systems as required to accommodate leakage
testing, and as required for compliance with test requirements.
C.
Conduct tests, in the presence of the Architect, at static pressures equal to the maximum design
pressure of the system or the section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test
entire system at the maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above the
maximum design operating pressure. Give 7 days' advanced notice for testing. Submit a letter
report to the Owner and Engineer summarizing the test procedures followed, systems tested and the
results of the leakage tests.
D.
Determine leakage from entire system or section of the system by relating leakage to the surface
area of the test section.
E.
Maximum Allowable Leakage: As described in ASHRAE 2005 Handbook, "Fundamentals" Volume,

Chapter 35, Table 9 and Figure 13. Comply with requirements for leakage classification 3 for round
and flat oval ducts, leakage classification 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classifications less
than and equal to 2 inches water gauge (both positive and negative pressures), and leakage
classification 6 for pressure classifications greater than 2 inches water gauge and less than and equal
to 10 inches water gauge.
F.
Remake leaking joints as required and apply sealants to achieve specified maximum allowable
leakage.
G.
Leakage Test: Perform volumetric measurements and adjust air systems as described in ASHRAE
2003 "HVAC Applications" Volume, Chapter 37 and ASHRAE 2005 "Fundamentals" Volume,
Chapter 14, and Division 15 Section "TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING.
H.
Grease Duct Leakage Test: All portions of grease duct systems shall be tested for leakage in
accordance with Chapter 5, Section 506 of the locally adopted IMC. Leakage tests shall be by light
or other equivalent test methods as approved by the local code official to verify that all joints are
liquid tight. Tests shall be performed in the presence of the local code official. Any joints found
defective shall be repaired and retested until satisfactory results are obtained. The contractor shall
submit a copy of the grease duct leakage test report to the Architect and Engineer complete with the
approval signature of the local code official.

A.
Adjust volume control devices as required by the testing and balancing procedures to achieve
required air flow. Refer to Division 15 Section "TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING" for
requirements and procedures for adjusting and balancing air systems.

Duluth, GA
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-13
1550000803
*** Issue 09/24/09
B.
Vacuum duct systems prior to final acceptance to remove dust and debris.
3.12 CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS

A.
Contractor shall clean the HVAC systems in accordance with NADCA.
B.
Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and perform
cleaning before air balancing.
C.
Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.
1.
2.
3.
Create other openings to comply with duct standards.

Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process.
D.
Vent vacuuming system to the outside. Provide filtration and/or containment systems to keep debris
removed from HVAC systems from contaminating other spaces. Locate exhaust down wind and
away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.
E.
Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).

Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and
return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.
Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash
systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and
filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
Coils and related components.
Return air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment
rooms.
Supply and outdoor air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from
within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect
vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative
pressure.
Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging
integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment while the system is under
negative pressure; do not permit duct liner to get wet.
Clean coils and coil drain pans according to ACR 2002. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils
with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.
G.
Disposal: Debris collected from the HVAC system shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable
federal, state and local requirements.
H.
Cleanliness Verification:
1.
2.
Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants.

Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and re-inspect ducts.
3.13 CLEANING EXISTING SYSTEMS

A.
Contractor shall clean the HVAC systems in accordance with NADCA.
B.
Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Use existing service openings where possible.

Create other openings to comply with duct standards.
Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
Reseal rigid fiberglass duct systems according to NAIMA recommended practices.
Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process.
C.
Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and restore to their
marked position on completion.
D.
Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1.
When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent

Duluth, GA
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-14
1550000803
*** Issue 09/24/09
2.
E.
Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F.
collection efficiency for 0.3-micron size (or larger) particles.

When venting vacuuming system to the outside, use filtration to contain debris removed from
HVAC system, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and other points of
entry into building.
Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).
Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and
return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.
Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash
systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and
filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
Coils and related components.
Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment
rooms.
Supply and outdoor air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.
Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from
within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect
vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative
pressure.
Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging
integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment while the system is under
negative pressure; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is
damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.
Clean coils and coil drain pans according to ACR 2002. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils
with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.
Provide operative drainage system for wash down procedures.
Biocidal Agents and Coatings: Apply biocidal agents, Design Polymer DP 2545, Foster 40-20 or
approved equal, if fungus is present. Apply biocidal agents according to manufacturer's written
instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.
G.
Disposal: Debris collected from the HVAC system shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable
federal, state and local requirements.
H.
Cleanliness Verification:
1.
2.
3.
I.
Gravimetric Analysis: At discretion and expense of Owner, sections of metal duct system, chosen
randomly by Owner, may be tested for cleanliness according to NADCA vacuum test gravimetric
analysis.
1.
2.
J.
Verify cleanliness after mechanical cleaning and before application of treatment, including
biocidal agents and protective coatings.
Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants.
Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and re-inspect ducts.
If analysis determines that levels of debris are equal to or lower than suitable levels, system
shall have passed cleanliness verification.
If analysis determines that levels of debris exceed suitable levels, system cleanliness verification
will have failed and metal duct system shall be re-cleaned and re-verified.
Verification of Coil Cleaning: Cleaning must restore coil pressure drop to within 10 percent of
pressure drop measured when coil was first installed. If original pressure drop is not known, coil will
be considered clean only if it is free of foreign matter and chemical residue, based on thorough visual
inspection.

Duluth, GA
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-15
1550000803
*** Issue 09/24/09
SECTION 15895 - COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOODS

PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes Type I commercial kitchen hood.
B.
Related Sections include the following:

1.
2.
Division 15 Section "Power Ventilators" for exhaust fans.

Division 17 Section "Digital Control Equipment" for automatic controls for exhaust fans,
makeup air heaters, and fire alarm systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A.
Listed Hood: A hood tested according to UL 710 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Standard Hood: A hood that complies with design, construction, and performance criteria of applicable national and local codes.
C.
Type I Hood: A hood designed for grease exhaust applications.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Hoods.
Grease removal devices.
Fire-suppression systems.
Lighting fixtures.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Show plan view, elevation view, sections, roughing-in dimensions, service requirements, duct
connection sizes, and attachments to other work.
2. Show cooking equipment plan and elevation to confirm minimum code-required overhang.
3. Indicate performance, exhaust and makeup air airflow and pressure loss, at actual Project-site
elevation.
4. Indicate method of attaching hangers to building structure.
5. Show exhaust and makeup air ducts, and fittings connecting to hoods.
6. Show water-supply and drain piping.
7. Show control cabinets.
8. Show fire-protection piping, actuation devices, and manual control devices.
9. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances,
method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
10. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.
11. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Piping Diagrams: Detail fire-suppression piping and components and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed piping. Include roughing-in requirements for drain connections.
Show cooking equipment plan and elevation to illustrate fire-suppression nozzle locations.
D.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and
ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Relative location of ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings to hoods and accessory equipment.
Roof framing and support members for duct penetrations.
Ceiling suspension assembly members.
Size and location of initial access panels for acoustical tile.
E.
F.
Field test reports.

Duluth, GA
COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOODS

15895-1
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99

A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-Steel," for hangers and supports; and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for joint and seam
welding.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
C.
NSF Compliance: Fabricate hoods according to NSF 2, "Food Equipment."
D.
SMACNA Compliance:
1.
2.
Comply with SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines," Appendix 1, "Guidelines

for Seismic Restraints of Kitchen Equipment."
Fabricate hoods to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards: Metal and
Flexible," second edition.

A.
Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of food service equipment installation areas by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.7 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate equipment layout and installation with other Work, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and fire-suppression system components.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A.
1. Furnish one complete set of grease removal devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
1.
2.
Commercial Kitchen Hoods:

a.
Grease Master.
b. Captive-Aire Systems.
c.
Greenheck (Accurex).
Wet-Chemical Fire-Suppression Systems:
a.
Ansul Incorporated; a Tyco International Ltd. Company.
b. Fenwall Safety Systems, Inc.; Div. of Kidde Technologies, Inc.
c.
Pyro Chem, Inc.
2.2 HOOD MATERIALS

A.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Minimum Thickness: 0.03 inch.

General: Comply with SSINA's "Finishes for Stainless Steel" for recommendations for applying
and designating finishes.
Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. Grind and polish surfaces to
produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run
grain with long dimension of each piece.
Concealed Stainless-Steel Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 2B finish (bright, cold-rolled,
unpolished finish).
Exposed Surfaces: ASTMA 480/A480M, No. 4 finish (bright, directional polish).
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter
and leave surfaces chemically clean.
B.
Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with oiled, exposed matte finish.
C.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designa-

Duluth, GA

15895-2
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
tion; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.

1.
Minimum Thickness: 0.03 inch .
D.
Zinc-Coated Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated according to ASTM A 123/A 123M requirements.
E.
Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. Elastomeric sealant shall be NSF certified for commercial kitchen hood application. Sealants, when cured and washed, shall comply with
requirements in 21 CFR, Section 177.2600, for use in areas that come in contact with food.
1.
2.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene, in diameter larger than joint width.
F.
Sound Dampening: NSF-certified, nonabsorbent, hard-drying, sound-deadening compound for permanent adhesion to metal in minimum 1/8-inch thickness that does not chip, flake, or blister.
G.
Gaskets: NSF certified for end-use application indicated; of resilient rubber, neoprene, or PVC that is
nontoxic, stable, odorless, nonabsorbent, and unaffected by exposure to foods and cleaning compounds, and passes testing according to UL 710.
2.3 HOOD FABRICATION, GENERAL

A.
Welding: Use welding rod of same composition as metal being welded. Use methods that minimize
distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metal. Make ductile welds free of
mechanical imperfections such as gas holes, pits, or cracks.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Welded Butt Joints: Full-penetration welds for full-joint length. Make joints flat, continuous,
and homogenous with hood material without relying on straps under seams, filling in with
solder, or spot welding.
Grind exposed welded joints flush with adjoining material and polish to match adjoining
surfaces.
Where fasteners are welded to underside of equipment, finish reverse side of weld smooth and
flush.
Coat concealed stainless-steel welded joints with metallic-based paint to prevent corrosion.
After zinc-coated steel is welded, clean welds and abraded areas and apply SSPC-Paint 20,
high-zinc-dust-content, galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
B.
For metal butt joints, comply with SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines."
C.
Where stainless steel is joined to a dissimilar metal, use stainless-steel welding material or fastening
devices.
D.
Form metal with break bends that are not flaky, scaly, or cracked in appearance; where breaks mar
uniform surface appearance of material, remove marks by grinding, polishing, and finishing.
E.
Sheared Metal Edges: Finish free of burrs, fins, and irregular projections.
F.
In food zones, as defined in NSF, fabricate surfaces free from exposed fasteners.
G.
Cap exposed fastener threads, including those inside cabinets, with stainless-steel lock washers and
stainless-steel cap (acorn) nuts.
H.
Fabricate pipe slots on equipment with turned-up edges sized to accommodate service and utility
lines and mechanical connections.
I.
Fabricate enclosures, including panels, housings, and skirts, to conceal service lines, operating components, and mechanical and electrical devices including those inside cabinets, unless otherwise indicated.
J.
Fabricate seismic restraints according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines,"

Appendix 1, "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Kitchen Equipment."
K.
Fabricate equipment edges and backsplashes according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines."
L.
Fabricate enclosure panels to ceiling and wall as follows:

1.
2.
3.
Fabricate panels on all exposed side[s] with same material as hood, and extend from ceiling to
top of hood canopy and from canopy to wall.
Wall Offset Spacer: Minimum of 3 inches.
Wall Shelves and Overshelves:
Fabricate according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment
Fabrication Guidelines," with minimum 0.0625-inch thick, stainless-steel shelf tops.

Duluth, GA

15895-3
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
2.4 TYPE I EXHAUST HOOD FABRICATION

A.
Weld joints exposed to grease with continuous welds and make grease removal devices and makeup
air diffusers easily accessible for cleaning.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hood[s] shall be listed and labeled, according to UL 710, by a testing agency acceptable to
Include access panels as required for access to fire dampers and fusible links.
Fire Dampers: Labeled, according to UL 555, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
a.
Fire Rating: One and one-half hours.
b. Frame: SMACNA Type B, with blades out of airstream; fabricated with roll-formed,
0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
c.
Mounting Sleeve: Galvanized steel sheet, with a minimum thickness of 0.052 or 0.138
inch and length to suit application.
d. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
e.
Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized steel sheet. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized steel blade connectors.
f.
Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless-steel negator closure spring.
g. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 212 deg F rated.
Exhaust-Duct Collars: Minimum 0.0625-inch- thick stainless steel at least 3 inches long,
continuously welded to top of hood and at corners. Fabricate a collar with a 0.5-inch- wide duct
flange.
B.
Hood Style: Wall-mounted canopy
C.
Grease Removal Devices: Removable, stainless-steel, filter/baffle grease filters with spring-loaded
fastening. Fabricate with minimum 0.0781-inch- thick stainless steel for filter frame and removable
collection cup and trough. Exposed surfaces shall be pitched to drain to collection cup. Filters/baffles shall comply with UL 1046, "Grease Filters for Exhaust Ducts."
D.
Removable Grease Extractor: Removable, stainless-steel extractor, at least 0.0781 inch thick. Hood
with extractor must be tested according to UL 710.
E.
Stationary Water-Wash Grease Extractor: Integral, automatically self-cleaning, spraying hot water
and detergent over the entire length of exhaust plenum. Fabricate to supply a minimum of 140
deg F water at 1 gpm per foot of hood length, at 40- to 60-psig inlet pressure.
1.
2.
3.
F.
Water-mist option shall supply a maximum of 1 gpm per foot of hood length through stainless-steel
piping and nozzles.
1.
G.
Water Piping: ASTM A 270, Type 304 stainless steel with "R" surface finish.
Light Fixtures: UL-listed, surface-mounted, fluorescent fixtures and lamps with lenses sealed vaportight. Wiring shall be installed in stainless-steel conduit on hood exterior. Number and location of
fixtures shall provide a minimum of 70 fc on cooking surface below hood.
1.
2.
H.
Water Piping: ASTM A 270, Type 304 stainless steel with "R" surface finish.
Fabricate to drain water and detergent to a collection trough having stainless-steel drain fittings.
Single, hood-mounting control panel with a solid-state, programmable controller shall control all
hoods on Project. Wash cycle shall be factory set to operate for 10 minutes after fans stop.
a.
Detergent shall be supplied by an adjustable-flow, 120-V ac injection pump from a reservoir with a minimum capacity of 2.5 gal.
Switches shall be mounted on [front panel of hood canopy] [wall adjacent to hood].
Incandescent Lighting Fixtures: Comply with UL 1571.
Hood Controls: Single, hood-mounting control cabinet shall control groups of adjacent hoods and
shall be fabricated of stainless steel.
1.
2.
3.
Exhaust Fan: On-off switches shall start and stop the exhaust fan. Interlock exhaust fan with
[RTU] [DHU] (as noted on schedule) to operate simultaneously. Interlock exhaust fan with firesuppression system to operate fan[s] during fire-suppression-agent release and to remain in
operation until manually stopped. Motor starters shall comply with Division 16 Section
"Enclosed Controllers."
Temperature Control: Cycle exhaust and makeup air fans on and off, based on temperature at
hood discharge. Interlock fan control with fire-suppression system to operate during firesuppression-agent release and to remain in operation until manually stopped.
High-Temperature Control: Alarm shall sound and cooking equipment shall shut down before
hood discharge temperature rises to actuation temperature of fire-suppression system.

Duluth, GA

15895-4
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
2.5 WET-CHEMICAL FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

A.
Description: Provide a preengineered distribution piping designed for automatic detection and release
or manual release of fire-suppression agent by hood operator. Fire-suppression system shall be listed
and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Steel Pipe, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade A, Schedule 40,
plain ends.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.
Pipe Covers: Chrome-plated aluminum tubing.
Piping, fusible links and release mechanism, tank containing the suppression agent, and controls
shall be factory installed. Controls shall be in stainless-steel control cabinet mounted on [hood]
[or] [wall]. Furnish manual pull station for wall mounting adjacent to hood. Exposed piping
shall be covered with stainless-steel sleeves. Exposed fittings shall be chrome plated.
Liquid Extinguishing Agent: Noncorrosive, low-pH liquid.
Furnish an electric-operated, gas shutoff valve with clearly marked open and closed indicator for
field installation.
Fire-suppression system controls shall be integrated with controls for fans, lights, and fuel
supply and located in a single cabinet for each group of hoods immediately adjacent.
Wiring shall have color-coded, numbered terminal blocks and grounding bar. Spare terminals for
fire alarm, optional wiring to start fan with fire alarm, red pilot light to indicate fan operation,
and control switches shall all be factory wired in control cabinet with relays or starters.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation.
B.
Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before
equipment installation.
C.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
Install hoods level and plumb.
B.
Complete field assembly of hoods where required.

1.
2.
Make closed butt and contact joints that do not require filler.
Grind field welds on stainless-steel equipment smooth, and polish to match adjacent finish.
Comply with welding requirements in Part 2 "General Hood Fabrication" Article.
C.
Install hoods and associated services with clearances and access for maintaining, cleaning, and servicing hoods, grease removal devices, and fire-suppression systems according to manufacturer's
written instructions and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Make cutouts in hoods where required to run service lines and to make final connections.
E.
Securely anchor and attach items and accessories to walls, floors, or bases with stainless-steel fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Install hoods to operate free from vibration.
G.
Install seismic restraints according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines," Appendix 1, "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints for Kitchen Equipment."
H.
Install trim strips and similar items requiring fasteners in a bed of sealant. Fasten with stainless-steel
fasteners at 48 inches o.c. maximum.
I.
Install sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous joint backing, unless otherwise indicated. Provide airtight, watertight, vermin-proof, sanitary joints.
J.
Install lamps, with maximum recommended wattage, in equipment with integral lighting.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate gen-

Duluth, GA

15895-5
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
eral arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B.
Install piping adjacent to machine with clearance to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Install reduced-pressure backflow preventer on washer-water supply. Backflow preventer is specified

in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."
D.
Install washer-water drain piping full size of hood connection to an adjacent floor drain or floor sink.
E.
Makeup Water Connection: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section "Domestic
Water Piping" for valves and accessories on piping connections to water-cooled units.
F.
Duct Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories"
for flexible connectors on makeup air supply duct. Weld exhaust-duct connections.
G.
Fire-Suppression Piping: Install piping connections for remote-mounted suppression systems according to NFPA 17, "Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems."
H.
Ground equipment.
I.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening

values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and
UL 486B.

A.
Testing: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control
testing:
B.
Testing: See Division 15 Section, "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing."
C.
Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing:
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect fieldassembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing.
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Test each equipment item for proper operation. Repair or replace equipment that is defective,
including units that operate below required capacity or that operate with excessive noise or
vibration.
equipment.
Test motors and rotating equipment for proper rotation and lubricate moving parts according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
Test liquid-carrying and water, drain, and gas components for leaks. Repair or replace leaking
components.
Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A.
Set initial temperatures, and calibrate sensors.
B.
Set field-adjustable switches.
3.6 CLEANING
A.
Remove protective coverings and clean and sanitize hoods and associated services, both inside and
out, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A.

operate, and maintain hoods. Refer to Division 1 and Division 15 Section General Mechanical
Requirements.

Duluth, GA

15895-6
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
SECTION 15910
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
Extent of ductwork accessories work is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements
of this Section.
B.
Types of ductwork accessories required for project include the following:

1.
Dampers.
a.
Low pressure manual dampers.
b. Control dampers.
c.
Counterbalanced relief dampers.
2. Cable Operated Damper Systems.
3. Electronic Zone Pulse Damper Systems.
4. Fire and smoke dampers.
5. Turning vanes.
6. Duct hardware.
7. Duct access doors.
8. Flexible ductwork.
9. Flexible connections.
10. Grease exhaust duct wrap.
C.
Refer to other Division 15 Sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of ductwork accessories; not
work of this Section.

A.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork accessories, of

types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 3 years.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards, Metal and Flexible", 2005 Edition.
Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction of
ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated.
UL Compliance:
a.
Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with current edition of UL Standard
555 "Fire Dampers". Construct, test, and label smoke dampers in accordance with current
edition of UL Standard 555S "Smoke Dampers".
b. Construct flexible ductwork in compliance with UL Standard 181 Factory-Made Air Ducts
and Connections.
c.
Duct tape shall be labeled in accordance with UL Standard 181B and marked 181B-FX.
Non-metallic duct clamps shall be labeled in accordance with UL Standard 181B and
marked 181B-C.
d. Grease exhaust duct wrap shall meet the fire protection requirements defined by UL
Standard 1978 Internal Grease Duct Fire Test and UL Standard 1479 Grease Duct
Through Penetration. Grease exhaust duct wrap that is provided to meet the requirements
of 2006 IMC or newer shall comply with UL Standard 2221.
NFPA Compliance:
a.
Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems", pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories. Comply with NFPA 90B
Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems.
b. Comply with NFPA 96 Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations for fire-rated grease exhaust ducts.
ASTM Compliance: Products shall have flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 Surface Burning Characteristics (NFPA 255)
method.
a.
Duct silencers shall be tested for performance in accordance with ASTM E477 Test

Duluth, GA
15910-1
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
b.
Method for Measuring Acoustical and Airflow Performance of Duct Liner Materials and
Prefabricated Silencers.
Grease exhaust duct wrap that is provided to meet the requirements of 2006 IMC or
newer shall be tested for performance in accordance with ASTM E 2336.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork accessory
including dimensions, capacities and materials of construction; and installation instructions. Submit
performance data for duct silencers including insertion loss performance in octave bands from 63 Hz
to 8,000 Hz and pressure drop at specified airflow.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of ductwork
accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, method of fastening or support, and
methods of assembly of components.
C.
Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each type of
duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in
accordance with requirements of Division 1.
1.4 SPARE PARTS

A.
Furnish extra fusible links to Owner, one link for every 10 installed of each temperature range; obtain
receipt.

2.1 DAMPERS
A.
Low Pressure Manual Dampers:

Provide dampers of single blade type or multiblade type,
constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".
B.
Control Dampers: Provide dampers with parallel blades for 2-position control, or opposed blades for
modulating control. Construct blades of 16-ga steel, provide heavy-duty molded self- lubricating
nylon bearings, 1/2" diameter steel axles spaced on 9" centers. Construct frame of 2" x 1/2" x 1/8"
steel channel for face areas 25 sq. ft. and under; 4" x 1-1/4" x 16-ga channel for face areas over 25
sq. ft. Provide galvanized steel finish with aluminum touch-up.
C.
Counterbalanced Relief Dampers: Provide dampers with parallel blades, counterbalanced and factoryset to relieve at indicated static pressure. Construct frames and blades of minimum 16-ga aluminum.
Provide minimum 1/2" diameter, corrosion-resistant bearings and 1/2" diameter, galvanized or
stainless steel axles. Blade edge seals shall be mechanically locked into blade edge.
D.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide dampers of one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Air Balance, Inc.

Arrow United Industries.
Cesco
Greenheck
Louvers & Dampers, Inc.
Nailor Industries, Inc.
Pottorff
Ruskin Mfg. Co.
Vent Products
2.2 CABLE OPERATED DAMPER SYSTEMS

A.
General: Where access to dampers through a hard ceiling is required, provide a concealed, cable
operated volume damper with remote operator.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Damper shall be adjustable through the diffuser face or frame with standard 1/4 nutdriver or
flat screwdriver.
Cable assembly shall attach to damper as one piece with no linkage adjustment.
Positive, direct, two-way damper control shall be provided with no sleeves, springs or screw
adjustments to come loose after installation.
Provide cable length as required to span the distance from the damper to the remote operator
location.

Duluth, GA
15910-2
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
5.
Support cable assembly to avoid bends and kinks in cable.
B.
Where approved by Architect, a ceiling cup with cover plate can be used for access to cable
operator.
C.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cable operated damper systems of
one of the following:
1.
2.
Metropolitan Air Technology, Inc. (Reference model number is RT-250).

Young Regulator Co..
2.3 ELECTRONIC ZONE PULSE DAMPER SYSTEM

A.
General: Where access to dampers is hard to reach or inaccessible, provide an electronic zone pulse
damper with a remote operator.
B.
Remote Controlled Balancing Damper: Damper shall be Ruskin ZPD25 or equivalent for round branch
or diffuser neck installation. Frame and blade shall be 20 gauge (minimum) galvanized steel on 3/8
axle and molded synthetic bearings. Damper shall be rated for maximum 2 water column static
pressure and maximum 2000 FPM velocity. Actuator shall be gear drive, fail in place motor.
C.
Remote Damper Control: Provide Ruskin ZRC020 or equivalent remote controller complete with wall
box mounting kit, power control cable and RJ11 connectors. Power shall be supplied by 9 volt
battery. Switch shall be DPDT-CO (Open Off Closed).
D.
Balancing: Controller shall be permanently connected for intermittent balancing by owner-user.

Controller shall be used to adjust position of damper during building air balance or commissioning and
disconnected from control cable when set point is established.
2.4 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

A.
General: Provide fire, smoke, and fire/smoke dampers at locations indicated on the drawings.
Damper ratings shall be as required to maintain the fire and/or smoke ratings noted on the
architectural drawings. Provide duct access door for inspection and service to each fire, smoke, and
fire/smoke damper and fusible link as required. Provide sleeves of length as required to meet the
installed location.
B.
Fabricated Fire Dampers: Provide dampers constructed in accordance with SMACNA "Fire Dampers
and Heat Stop Guide".
C.
Fire Dampers: Provide fire dampers, of types and sizes indicated. Construct casings of minimum 22ga galvanized steel or as required in order to maintain applicable UL classification. Construct casings
of 20 gauge stainless steel where installed in corrosive or moisture laden airstreams or where noted
on the drawings. Fire dampers shall be dynamic-rated for closure under pressure. Provide fusible link
rated at 160 to 165 degrees F (71 to 74 degrees C) unless otherwise indicated. Provide damper
with positive lock in closed position, and with the following additional features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Damper Blade Assembly: Single-blade type.

Damper Blade Assembly: Multi-blade type.
Damper Blade Assembly: Curtain type with blades out of the airstream.
Blade Material: Steel, match casing.
Blade Material: Stainless steel, match casing.
Fire/Smoke Dampers: Provide fire/smoke dampers, of types and sizes indicated, and with actuator as
specified herein.
1.
Dampers: Dampers shall be UL555 (current edition) classified fire damper of rating required for
location installed, UL555S (current edition) classified smoke damper for leakage class II and
rated for dual directional airflow. Fire/smoke dampers shall be rated for minimum velocity of
2,000 fpm and pressure of 4 w.g. Construct casings of 16-ga galvanized steel. Construct
casings of 16 gauge stainless steel where installed in corrosive or moisture laden airstreams or
where noted on the drawings. Construct blades of minimum 22 gauge thickness with
longitudinal grooves for strength. Bearings shall be self-lubricating, turning in extruded hole in
the frame. Jamb seals shall be flexible, stainless steel. Blade seals shall be extruded or
mechanically fastened to the blades of material suitable for temperature rating. Linkage shall be
concealed in the frame. Provide resettable temperature device rated at 160 to 165 degrees F
(71 to 74 degrees C) unless otherwise indicated. Provide stainless steel spring loaded leakage
seals in sides of casing, and terminal block for connection to the building fire alarm system and
the following additional features:

Duluth, GA
15910-3
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
2.
3.
E.
a.
b. Damper Blade Assembly: Multi-blade type.
c.
Blade Material: Galvanized steel, match casing.
d. Blade Material: Stainless steel, match casing.
e.
Open-closed indication switches.
f.
Temperature Limited Override.
g. Test Switch.
h. Smoke Detector.
Motor-Driven Actuators: Actuators shall be factory installed. All actuators shall open in 15
seconds or less and close in 15 seconds or less after alarm or smoke detection has occurred.
Actuators shall be rated for a minimum of 20,000 cycles of operation. Provide motor-driven
fire/smoke dampers in types and sizes indicated, with 120 Volt, two-position, fail close, electric
motor designed to close and/or open damper between 7 and 15 seconds, stainless steel cable
damper blade linkage, motor mounting bracket, and with the following construction features:
a.
Unit Assembly: Motor mounted outside air stream.
b. Unit Assembly: Motor mounted inside air stream.
c.
Motor shall be designed for power return open/spring closed operation.
d. Provide automatic reset of damper upon cessation of detector (test or actual smoke
detection), and normalization of duct air temperature.
Pneumatic Actuators: Appropriate pneumatic actuator shall be installed by the damper
manufacturer at the time of damper fabrication. Damper and actuator shall be supplied as a
single entity which meets all applicable UL555 and UL555S qualifications. Electric-pneumatic
switch to be provided by damper manufacturer; coordinate. Provide air bleed orifice to limit
closing time of damper to greater than five seconds, but not more than 15 seconds.
a.
Unit Assembly: Actuator mounted outside air stream.
b. Unit Assembly: Actuator mounted inside air stream.
c.
Actuator shall be designed for power return open/spring closed operation.
Smoke Dampers:
specified herein.
1.
2.
Provide Smoke dampers, of types and sizes indicated, and with actuator as
Dampers: Dampers shall be UL555S (current edition) classified smoke damper for leakage class
II and rated for dual directional airflow. Smoke dampers shall be rated for a minimum velocity
of 2,000 fpm and pressure of 4 w.g. Construct casings of 16-ga galvanized steel. Construct
casings of 16 gauge stainless steel where installed in corrosive or moisture laden airstreams or
where noted on the drawings. Construct blades of minimum 22 gauge thickness with
longitudinal grooves for strength. Bearings shall be self-lubricating, turning in extruded hole in
the frame. Jamb seals shall be flexible, stainless steel. Blade seals shall be extruded or
mechanically fastened to the blades of material suitable for temperature rating. Linkage shall be
concealed in the frame. Provide stainless steel spring loaded leakage seals in sides of casing,
and terminal block for connection to the building fire alarm system and the following additional
features:
a.
b. Damper Blade Assembly: Multi-blade type.
c.
Blade Material: Galvanized steel, match casing.
d. Blade Material: Stainless steel, match casing.
e.
Open closed indication switches.
f.
Test switch.
g. Smoke Detector.
Motor-Driven Actuators: Actuators shall be factory installed. All actuators shall open in 15
seconds or less and close in 15 seconds or less after alarm or smoke detection has occurred.
Actuators shall be rated for a minimum of 20,000 cycles of operation. Provide motor-driven
smoke dampers in types and sizes indicated, with 120 Volt, two-position, fail close, 24 volt,
two position, fail close, 24 volt, modulating, electric motor designed to close and/or open
damper between 7 and 15 seconds, stainless steel cable damper blade linkage, motor mounting
bracket, and with the following construction features:
a.
Unit Assembly: Motor mounted outside air stream.
b. Unit Assembly: Motor mounted inside air stream.
c.
Motor shall be designed for power return open/spring closed operation.

Duluth, GA
15910-4
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
3.
F.

Pneumatic Actuators: Appropriate fail close pneumatic actuator shall be installed by the
damper manufacturer at the time of damper fabrication. Damper and actuator shall be supplied
as a single entity which meets all applicable UL555S qualifications. Electric-pneumatic switch
to be provided by damper manufacturer; coordinate. Provide air bleed orifice to limit closing
time of damper to greater than five seconds, but not more than 15 seconds.
a.
Unit Assembly: Actuator mounted outside air stream.
b. Unit Assembly: Actuator mounted inside air stream.
c.
Actuator shall be designed for power return open/spring closed operation.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire and smoke dampers of one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Air Balance, Inc.

Cesco Products.
Greenheck
Louvers & Dampers, Inc.
Nailor Industries, Inc.
Pottorff
Prefco Products, Inc.
Ruskin Mfg. Co.
2.5 TURNING VANES

A.
Manufactured Turning Vanes: Provide turning vanes and runners fabricated from galvanized sheet
metal, lock-forming quality, ASTM A 653, minimum Coating Designation G 60, of the same gauge
thickness or greater as the ductwork in which they are installed. Vanes shall be rigidly fastened with
guide strips to minimize noise and vibration. Vanes in ductwork over 30" deep shall be installed in
multiple sections with vanes not over 30" long and shall be rigidly fastened. Turning vanes shall be
constructed per SMACNA Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible 2005 Edition, Figure 43 and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ductwork.
A.
Acoustical Turning Vanes: Provide acoustical turning vanes constructed of airfoil shaped aluminum
extrusion with perforated faces and fiberglass fill in systems serving noise critical spaces. Refer to
Section Common Work Results for HVAC.
B.
Manufacturer:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide turning vanes of one of the
Aero Dyne Co.

Anemostat Products Div.; Dynamics Corp. of America.
Ductmate, Ind.
Duro Dyne Corp.
Elgen Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Hart & Cooley Mfg. Co.
Register & Grille Mfg. Co., Inc.
Sheet Metal connectors, Inc.
2.6 DUCT HARDWARE

A.
General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project, for the
following:
1.
2.
B.
Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated, duct test
holes, consisting of slot and cover, for instrument tests.
Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft; and end
bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12". Provide extended quadrant locks and
end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork.
Manufacturer:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct hardware of one of the
Ductmate, Ind.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
Young Regulator Co.

Duluth, GA
15910-5
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
2.7 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A.
General: Provide, where indicated on the drawings or where specified in Part 3 of this section, duct
access doors of size allowable by duct dimensions with, unless otherwise noted on the drawings,
minimum size of 10 by 10 and maximum size of 24 by 24. Provide removable section of duct
where duct size is too small for a 10 by 10 access door. Construct access doors in accordance
with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible and as specified herein.
Label access doors for fire and smoke dampers as specified in Paragraph Installation of Ductwork
Accessories.
B.
Construction: Construct of same or greater gage as ductwork served, provide insulated doors for
insulated ductwork. Provide flush frames for uninsulated ductwork, extended frames for externally
insulated duct. Provide one size hinged, other side with one handle-type latch for doors 12" high
and smaller, 2 handle-type latches for larger doors.
C.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct access doors of one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Air Balance Inc.

Ductmate, Ind.
Duro Dyne Corp.
Register & Grille Mfg. Co., Inc.
Ruskin Mfg. Co.
Ventifabrics, Inc.
Vent Products
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Air Systems Div.
2.8 FLEXIBLE DUCT.

A.
Construction: Provide flexible ductwork conforming to UL 181-Class I, NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B
and as follows. Duct types of manufacturers are indicated for reference in regards to required quality
of construction and materials.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Low pressure (duct pressure class up to and including 2 w.g.) and medium pressure (duct
pressure class 2.1 to 6 w.g.) flexible duct shall have fire retardant polyethylene (Flexmaster
Type 8B, Thermaflex Type G-KM) or reinforced metalized (Flexmaster Type 8M, Thermaflex
Type M-KE) protective vapor barrier. High pressure (duct pressure class over 6 w.g.) flexible
duct shall have fire retardant polyethylene (Flexmaster Type 4B) or reinforced metalized
(Flexmaster Type 4M, Thermaflex Type M-KC) protective vapor barrier.
Flexible ductwork shall have CPE liner with steel wire helix mechanically locked or permanently
bonded to the liner.
Provide acoustical, fiberglass insulated duct with minimum R-value of R-8.0.
Flexible duct runs shall not exceed 5 feet in length.
Flexible ductwork shall be installed straight as possible avoiding tight turns with a maximum of
one 90 degree bend in any length.
Provide continuous length with no intermediate joints.
Connect each end with duct clamps and duct tape as specified in Part 3.
Support clear of the ceiling tile, light fixtures and air terminals. Support for maximum sag of
1/2-inch per foot.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flexible ductwork of one of the
following or an approved equal:
1.
2.
Flexmaster.
Thermaflex.
2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A.
General: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated
equipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct
flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide adequate joint flexibility
to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of absorbing
vibration of connected equipment.
B.
Flexible connectors shall have flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or
less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method.
C.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flexible connections of one of the

Duluth, GA
15910-6
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
American/Elgen Co.; Energy Div.

ATCO Rubber Products, Inc.
Duro Dyne Corp.
Flexaust (The) Co.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
2.10 GREASE EXHAUST DUCT WRAP

A.
General: Provide minimum two-hour rated duct wrap insulation for Type I hood grease exhaust duct
applications. Insulation shall be flexible wrap enclosure rated for minimum 2000 F and for zero
clearance to combustibles. Insulation shall be non-mineral wool, passive, low biopersistant fiber
totally encapsulated on all sides with aluminum foil. For ducts smaller than 24 by 24 in size,
provide stainless steel bands at insulation seams to hold the outer layer of the blanket enclosure in
place. Fire-rated grease duct wrap material and installation shall conform with ASTM E2336 where
the installation is required to be in compliance with 2006 IMC or newer. For ducts smaller than 24
by 24 in size, provide stainless steel bands at insulation seams to hold the outer layer of the blanket
enclosure in place. For ducts larger than 24 by 24 in size, provide pins to hold the outer layer in
place. Insulation shall be tested for intended use in accordance with all applicable codes and shall be
approved by the local code official. Provide access doors by same manufacturer as fabricated for
use specifically with the insulation system.
B.
Access Doors: Access cover shall be minimum 16 gauge steel and shall be provided with insulation
pins, speed clips and threaded rods for installation and access. Access doors shall have steel angle
opening frame welded to the duct.
C.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grease exhaust duct wrap of one of
the following or approved equal:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3M.
CertainTeed
Thermal Ceramics
Unifrax Corporation
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A.
Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not proceed
with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

A.
Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with

applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance
with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.
B.
Provide balancing dampers at branch takeoffs from main ducts. Unless otherwise noted on
drawings, provide prefabricated 45 degree, high efficiency, rectangular/round branch duct takeoff
fittings with manual balancing damper and locking quadrant for branch duct connections and takeoffs to individual diffusers, registers and grilles.
C.
Provide turning vanes, of same gauge as ductwork, rigidly fastened with guide strips in ductwork
having an offset of 45 degrees or more. Vanes shall be provided in all supply and exhaust ductwork
and in return and outside air ductwork that has an air velocity exceeding 1000 fpm. Do not install
vanes in grease ductwork.
D.
Provide duct access doors to maintain and/or clean components internal to ductwork including, but
not limited to, coils, airflow stations, motorized and backdraft dampers, humidifiers, etc. Install
access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side, except
outside only where duct is too small for person to enter.
E.
Provide duct access door(s) as scheduled below, at each fire and smoke damper within 12 inches of
the device to allow for testing and maintenance. Label each door (with minimum 1 lettering)

Duluth, GA
15910-7
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
indicating which damper type is served. Door should be capable of being fully opened or provide
removable door.
DUCT ACCESS DOOR SCHEDULE
Duct Width/Depth
Door Size
Quantity
10 TO 12
10 X 10
1
14 TO 18
12 X 12
1
20 TO 36
14 X 14
1
38 TO 54
18 X 18
1
56 TO 72
18 X 18
2 (1 EACH END)
74 TO 96
20 X 20
2 (1 EACH END)
F.
Install flexible duct in accordance with manufacturers instructions. At a minimum, install two wraps
of duct tape around the inner core connection and a metallic or non-metallic clamp over the tape and
two wraps of duct tape or a clamp over the outer jacket.
G.
Install grease exhaust duct wrap in accordance with manufacturers instructions to provide the fire
rating of the material as tested per UL requirements. Overlap seams, install stainless steel bands
and/or pins to secure wrap to duct and fill annular spaces in floor and wall penetrations with UL
rated forming materials and/or putty to maintain the integrity of the system.
H.
Install duct silencers at locations indicated on the drawings with straight sections of upstream and
downstream ductwork as recommended by the manufacturer.
I.
Install acoustical plenums in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.

Support
acoustical plenums from the floor or above structure as required for the location shown on the
drawings.
J.
Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of ductwork
accessories properly with other work.

A.
Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air
leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper
operation and leakproof performance.

A.
Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fire dampers and
adjust for proper action.
B.
Label access doors in accordance with Division-15 section "Mechanical Identification".
C.
Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division-15 section "Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing".
D.
Cleaning:
Clean factory-finished surfaces.
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with

Duluth, GA
15910-8
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
SECTION 15932
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
Extent of air outlets and inlets work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by requirements of
this Section.
B.
Types of outlets and inlets required for project include the following:
1.
2.
Ceiling air diffusers.

Wall registers and grilles.
C.
Refer to other Division 15 sections for ductwork and duct accessories required in conjunction with
air outlets and inlets; not work of this Section.
D.
Refer to other Division 15 sections for balancing of air outlets and inlets; not work of this Section.

A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650 "Standard for
Air Outlets and Inlets".
ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70
"Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets".
ADC Compliance:
Test and rate air outlets and inlets in certified laboratories under
requirements of ADC 1062 "Certification, Rating and Test Manual".
ADC Seal: Provide air outlets and inlets bearing ADC Certified Rating Seal.
AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 "Test Method for
Louvers, Dampers and Shutters".
AMCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A "Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets including the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, room location, number
furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating
construction, finish, and mounting details.
Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration ability,
temperature and velocity traverses; throw and drop; and noise criteria ratings at specified
airflows. Indicate selections on data.
Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for each type of air outlet
and inlet, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes, and
spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals;
in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
B.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and wall elevations drawn to scale to show locations
and coordination of diffusers, registers, and grilles with other items installed in ceilings and walls.
C.
Color Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturers color charts showing the full range of colors
available for diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color finishes.
D.
Samples for Verification: Provide samples of diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturers
standard sizes, showing the full range of colors. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used
for the Work.
1.4 SPARE PARTS

A.
Furnish to Owner, with receipt, 3 operating keys for each type of air outlet and inlet that require
them.

Duluth, GA

15932-1
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99

2.1 CEILING AIR DIFFUSERS
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard ceiling air diffusers where
shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as
indicated, and provided with accessories as required for a complete installation.
B.
Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity
traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's
current data.
C.
Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling
systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and
adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling
systems which will contain each type of ceiling air diffuser.
D.
Types: Provide ceiling diffusers of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as scheduled on
the drawings.
E.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide diffusers of one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.H. Price Industries.

Krueger Mfg. Co.
Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc.
2.2 REGISTERS AND GRILLES

A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard registers and grilles where
shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as
indicated, and provided with accessories as required for a complete installation.
B.
Performance: Provide wall registers and grilles that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity
traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device and listed in manufacturer's
current data.
C.
Wall Compatibility: Provide registers and grilles with border styles that are compatible with adjacent
wall systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into wall construction with accurate fit
and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of wall
construction which will contain each type of wall register and grille.
D.
Types: Provide registers and grilles of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as scheduled
on the drawings.
E.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide registers and grilles of one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
E.H. Price Industries.

Krueger Mfg. Co.
Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A.
Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed for compliance
with installation tolerances and conditions that would affect the performance of the equipment. Do
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, design
drawings, referenced standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that
products serve intended function.
B.
Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, to interface installation of air
outlets and inlets with other work.
C.
Where a 90-degree elbow is required at the connection to air devices, provide a rigid duct elbow or,

Duluth, GA

15932-2
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
at Contractors option, a flexible elbow assembly as specified in Section Metal Ductwork.

D.
Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction "Reflected
Ceiling Plans". Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling module.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A.
After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before beginning air balance.
3.4 CLEANING
A.
After installation of air outlets and inlets, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove
dirt and smudges. Replace any air outlet or inlet that has damaged finishes.

Duluth, GA

15932-3
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
SECTION 15971
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
Extent of electric control systems work required by this Section is indicated on drawings and
schedules, and by requirements of this Section.
B.
Control sequences are specified in Division 15 Section Sequence of Operation.
C.
Control sequences are specified in this section or on the drawings
D.
Refer to other Division 15 Sections for installation of instrument wells, valve bodies, and dampers in
mechanical systems; not work of this Section.
E.
Refer to Division 16 Sections for the following work; not work of this Section.
F.
Power supply wiring for power source to power connection on controls and/or unit control panels.
Include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or
factory-installed, by manufacturer.
G.
Interlock wiring between electrically-operated equipment units; and between equipment and fieldinstalled control devices.
H.
Interlock wiring specified as factory-installed is work of this section.
I.
Provide the following electrical work as work of this Section, complying with requirements of
Division 16 Sections.
1.
Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and unit control panels.

A.
Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electric control equipment,

of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than 5 years.
B.
Installers Qualifications: Firms specializing and experienced in electric control system installations for
not less than 5 years.
C.

1.
2.
3.
Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products which have been tested, listed and labeled by
UL and comply with NEMA standards.
NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to components and devices for
electric control systems
NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems where applicable to controls and control sequences.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical product data for each control device furnished,
indicating dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes of
materials, and including installation instructions and start-up instructions.
B.
Control Drawings: Submit control drawings for each electric control system, containing the
following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Schematic flow diagram of system showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control
devices.
Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control.
Indicate all required electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are
factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.
Provide details of faces of control panels, including controls, instruments, and labeling.
Include verbal description of sequence of operation.
Samples:
Submit sample of each type of furnished thermostat cover, in accordance with

Duluth, GA

15971-1
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
requirements of Division 1.
D.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts lists. Include this data, product
data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.
Provide factory shipping cartons for each piece of equipment, and control device. Maintain cartons
through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent equipment damage, and to eliminate
dirt and moisture from equipment. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from
weather.

A.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide electric control systems of one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Automated Logic Corp.

Honeywell, Inc.
Johnson Controls, Inc.
Siebe Environmental Controls.
Siemens Building Technologies.
The Trane Co.
2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A.
General: Provide electric control products in sizes and capacities indicated, consisting of valves,
dampers, thermostats, clocks, sensors, controllers, and other components as required for a complete
installation.
Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturers standard control system
components as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as
recommended by manufacturer. Provide electric control systems with following functional and
construction features as indicated.
B.
Dampers: Provide automatic control dampers as indicated, with damper frames not less than formed
13-ga galvanized steel. Provide mounting holes for enclosed duct mounting. Provide damper blades
not less than formed 16-ga galvanized steel, with maximum blade width of 8. Equip dampers with
motors, with proper rating for each application.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Secure blades to 1/2 diameter zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware. Seal off against
spring stainless steel blade bearings. Provide blade bearings of nylon and provide thrust
bearings at each end of every blade. Construct blade linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and
brass. Submit leakage and flow characteristics, plus size schedule for controlled dampers.
Operating Temperature Range: From -20 degrees to 200 degrees F (-29 degrees to 93 degrees
C).
For standard applications as indicated, provide parallel or opposed blade design (as selected by
manufacturers sizing techniques) with optional closed-cell neoprene edging.
For low-leakage applications as indicated, provide parallel or opposed blade design (as selected
by manufacturers sizing techniques) with inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber
seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4
w.g. when damper is being held by toque of 50 inch-pounds.
Provide unit ventilator outside air dampers with adjustable minimum settings so that ventilation
can be adjusted for each space or room.
Damper and Valve Motors: Size each motor to operate dampers or valves with sufficient reserve
power to provide smooth modulating action or 2-position action as specified.
1.
2.
Provide permanent split-capacitor or shaded pole type motors with gear trains completely oilimmersed and sealed.
Equip spring-return motors, where indicated on drawings or in
operational sequence, with integral spiral-spring mechanism. Furnish entire spring mechanism in
housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary
switches, or feedback potentiometer.
Equip motors for outdoor locations and for outside air intakes with O ring gaskets designed to
make motors completely weatherproof, and equip with internal heaters to permit normal

Duluth, GA

15971-2
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
3.
D.
operation at -40 degrees F (-40 degrees C).

Furnish non-spring return motors for dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., and for valves larger than
2-1/2, sized for running torque rating of 150 inch-pounds, and breakaway torque rating of 300
inch-pounds. Size spring-return motors for running torque rating of 150 inch-pounds, and
breakaway torque rating of 150 inch-pounds.
Room Thermostats: Provide room thermostats with locking covers, and with concealed or readilyaccessible adjustment devices and dead band, as indicated.
1.
2.
Provide thermostats with red-reading glass or spiral bi-metallic thermometers.

Where indicated, provide heavy-duty asylum type, clear plastic, or wire tamper-proof guards
E.
Line-Voltage On-Off Thermostats: Provide thermostats of bi-metal actuated open contact, or bellows
actuated enclosed snap-switch type, or equivalent solid-state type; UL-listed at electrical rating
comparable with application. Provide bimetal thermostats which employ heat anticipation. Equip
thermostats which control electric heating loads directly, with Off position on dial wired to break
ungrounded conductors.
F.
Combination Thermostat and Fan Switches: Comply with requirements for line-voltage thermostats.
In addition, include as integral part of each thermostat, 2-, 3-, or 4-position push-button or lever
operated manual switch for control of fan in each unit with type of control as indicated.
1.
Label switches fan on-off, fan high-low-off, fan high-med-low-off.

fabricated unit, capable of being mounted on 2-gang switch box or mud ring.
Provide factory-
G.
Low Voltage On-Off Thermostats: Comply with general requirement indicated for line-voltage
thermostats. Provide thermostats of bimetal operated mercury-switch type, with either adjustable or
fixed universal anticipation heater.
H.
Low-Voltage Modulating Thermostats: Provide potentiometer type, operated by vapor-filled bellows.
I.
Remote-Bulb Thermostats: Provide remote-bulb thermostats of on-off or modulating type, as

required by sequence of operation. Provide liquid-filled units designed to compensate for changes in
ambient temperature at instrument case. Provide capillary and bulb of copper unless otherwise
indicated. Equip bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb. Support bulbs
installed in air ducts securely, to prevent damage and noise from vibrations. Provide averaging bulbs
where shown or specified in operational sequence, consisting of copper tubing not less than 8-0 in
length with either single or multiple-unit elements. Extend tubing to cover full width of duct or unit,
and support adequately.
J.
Provide modulating remote-bulb thermostats with precision snap switches, and with electrical rating
as required by application.
1.
2.
K.
Equip on-off remote-bulb thermostats with precision snap switches, and with electrical rating as
required by application.
Provide modulating remote-bulb thermostats of potentiometer type constructed so that
complete potentiometer coil and wiper assembly is removable for inspection or replacement
without disturbing calibration of instrument.
Fire Protection Thermostats: Provide UL-listed fire protection thermostats where indicated in main
supply and return air ducts of air handling units which are rated 2,000 cfm and greater. Connect
thermostats which are capable of stopping fans in event of excessive temperatures in fan control
circuits. Provide thermostats with fixed or adjustable settings to operate at not less than 75 degrees
F (42 degrees C) above normal maximum temperature at their location in air handling system.
Comply with requirements of NFPA 90A. Provide thermostats with the following operating features:
1.
2.
Provide manual reset type thermostats.

Provide automatic reset type thermostats, with control circuit arranged to require manual reset
at central control panel. Provide pilot light and reset switch on panel, clearly labeled to indicate
operation of fire protection thermostat.
L.
Low-Temperature Protection Thermostats:

Provide low-temperature protection thermostats of
manual-reset type, with sensing elements 8-0 or 20-0 in length. Provide thermostat designed to
operate in response to coldest 1-0 length of sensing element, regardless of temperature at other
parts of element.
Support element properly to cover entire duct width. Provide separate
thermostats for each 25 sq. ft. of coil face area or fraction thereof.
M.
Differential Pressure Switches:

Duluth, GA
Provide diaphragm type electric differential pressure switches

15971-3
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
designed for 200 percent overpressure and full vacuum underpressure without damage or accuracy
impairment. Switches shall have tamperproof adjustable setpoint and differential settings, a single
pole, double throw contact and taps for sensing line connections and shall be provided with the
following characteristics:
1.
2.
Differential Pressure Switch for water shall have range of 8 to 60 psig, UL rated 6 amperes at
120 volts, 100 psig design and automatic reset. Each switch shall be provided with isolation
and drain valves. Switch shall be Johnson Controls Series P74 or equivalent.
Differential Pressure Switch for air shall have range of 0.05 to 5 and shall be UL rated 9.8
amperes at 120 volts. Switch shall be Johnson Controls Series P32 or equivalent.
N.
Pressure Sensor/Transmitter: Sensor span shall be not less than 150 percent and not more than 300
percent of the working pressure. Accuracy shall be 0.5 percent of calibrated span. Static pressure
and differential pressure analog sensors shall be diaphragm type with solid state pre-amplifier.
Transmitter shall produce a linear 4 to 20 ma or 0 to 10 V dc output corresponding to the sensed
pressure measurement. Transmitter shall have offset and span adjustments. Unless otherwise noted
or shown, locate static pressure sensors for variable air volume air handling units 2/3 of the duct
distance downstream of the supply fan
O.
Duct Mounted Smoke Detector: Photoelectric detector along with a standard, relay or isolator
detector mounting base. Provide for variations in duct air velocity between 300 and 4000 feet per
minute. Protect the measuring chamber from damage and insects. Provide an air exhaust tube and
an air sampling inlet tube that extends into the duct air stream up to ten feet. Provide drilling
templates and gaskets to facilitate locating and mounting the housing. Provide remote alarm LEDs
and remote test stations as shown on the plans.
P.
Clocks: Provide time clocks specified as part of temperature control sequences, of 7-day, 24-hour
type, with weekend or skip-a-day features. Equip time clocks with 10-hour spring carryover to
maintain clock movement in case of power failure.
Q.
Step Controllers: Provide step controllers for control sequencing or for control of electric heat power
loads, of 6- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads, UL-listed and
operated by electric motors of quality specified for valve and damper actuation.
R.
Electronic Sensors: Provide electronic temperature and relative humidity sensors of supersensitive
resistance type, which are vibration and corrosion-resistant, and of wall mounted immersion, duct
mounting, averaging or bulb type as required for application.
S.
Electronic Controllers: Provide electronic controllers of wheatstone Bridge: amplifier type, designed
as individual components and fully protected by steel enclosures. Provide individual controllers of
multiple-input type with provisions for remote resistance type readjustment Identify adjustments
clearly on controllers, including proportional band, authority, etc.
1.
2.
Where single electronic controller is required for specific application, it can be built-in as integral
part of control motor, but only where provided with easily accessible control readjustment
potentiometer
Provide 2-position of proportional electric controller power output as required by specified
sequence of operations.
T.
Electric Heat Current Controllers: Accomplish switching of load current by semiconductor devices
located in load circuit of operation controller, and not by mechanical or mercury relays. Provide
controllers which operate on zero-voltage switching principle, to minimize radio frequency
interference; do not substitute devices incorporating phase control firing. Arrange power controllers,
for loads of 10-kw or larger, for 3-phase operation. Incorporate a solid-state switch for loads of 48amps per phase or larger, in each ungrounded line of load circuit.
U.
Refer to heating equipment specifications for integral high temperature limit controllers.
V.
Electric Contactors: Provide contactors for operating or limit-control of electric heating loads which
are UL-listed for 100,000 cycles of resistive loads. Equip with replaceable molded coils and
replaceable silver cadmium oxide contacts. Coat core laminations with heat-resistant inorganic film
to reduce core losses. Provide line and load terminals on contactors with higher-than-35-amp rating,
or provide one-piece formed-and-welded pressure type. Provide screw-type contactors for 35-ampor-lower rating. Equip field-mounted contactors with suitable steel enclosures; and provide opentype mounting for those installed in factory-fabricated panels.

Duluth, GA

15971-4
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
W.
Local Control Panels: Provide control panels with suitable brackets for either wall or floor mounting,
for each supply fan and miscellaneous control system. Locate panel adjacent to systems served.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
X.
Fabricate panels of 14-ga furniture-quality steel, or 6063-T5 extruded aluminum alloy, totally
enclosed, with hinged doors and keyed lock, with manufacturers standard shop-painted finish
and color. Provide UL-listed cabinets for use with line voltage devices.
Panel Mounted Equipment: Include temperature and humidity controllers, relays and automatic
switches, except exclude low-temperature protection thermostats, firestats, and other devices
excluded in sequence of operation. Fasten devices with adjustments accessible through front
of panels
Door-Mounted Equipment: Flush-mount (on hinged door) manual switches, including damper
minimum-off positioning switches, summer-winter switches, and manual-automatic
switches; and including dial thermometers.
Graphics: Where specified, provide color-coded graphic laminated plastic displays on doors, to
schematically show system being controlled. Provide protective sheet of clear plastic bonded to
entire door to prevent damage to symbols.
Provide standard steel cabinets as required to contain temperature controllers, relays, switches,
and similar devices, except limit controllers and other devices excluded in sequence of
operations. Provide fullenclosure cabinets, with painted gray finish.
Central (Master) Control Panels: Provide central control panels of fully-enclosed steel cubical type,
with locking doors and/or locking removable backs. Match finish of panels and provide multi-color
graphic displays, schematically showing system being controlled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A.
Examine areas and conditions under which electric control systems are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEMS

A.
General: Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions and roughingin drawings, and details on drawings. Install electrical components and use electrical products
complying with requirements of applicable Division 16 sections of these specifications. Mount
controllers at convenient locations and heights.
B.
Space Sensors: Install space sensors, thermostats and humidistats at 48 above finished floor to
meet ADA requirements unless otherwise noted on the plans.
C.
Control Wiring: The term control wiring is defined to include providing of wire, conduit and
miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connecting electric control devices.
D.
Wiring System: Install complete control wiring system for electric control systems. Conceal wiring
except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. Provide multiconductor instrument harness (bundle) in place of single conductors where number of conductors
can be run along common path. Fasten flexible conductors bridging cabinets and doors, neatly along
hinge side, and protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors neatly.
E.
Number-code or color-code conductors, excluding those used for local individual room controls,
appropriately for future identification and servicing of control system.
F.
Reset Limit Controls: Install manual-reset limit controls to be independent of power controllers;
automatic duct heater resets may, at Contractors option, be installed interlock circuit of power
controllers.
G.
Unit-Mounted Equipment: Where control devices are indicated to be unit-mounted, ship electric
relays, electric switches, valves, dampers, and damper motors to unit manufacturer for mounting and
wiring at factory.

A.
Start-Up:
Start-up, test, and adjust electric control systems in presence of manufacturers

Duluth, GA

15971-5
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
authorized representative. Demonstrate compliance with requirements.

malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Replace damaged or
B.
Cleaning:
Clean factory-finished surfaces.
manufacturers touch-up paint.
Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
C.
Final Adjustment: After completion of installation, adjust thermostats, control valves, motors and
similar equipment provided as work of this section.
D.
Final adjustment shall be performed by specially trained personnel in direct employ of manufacturer
of primary temperature control system.
3.4 TRAINING
A.
of eight hours on the operation and maintenance of the equipment provided under this section.
B.
The temperature controls contractor will provide 2 factory training courses as selected from the
supplier's catalogue. The temperature controls contractor will provide with this all expenses
including air fare if required, travel expenses to and from the airport to the motel, motel expenses,
and meal expenses.
C.

1.
2.
3.

D.
E.

Duluth, GA

15971-6
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
SECTION 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies the requirements and procedures total mechanical systems testing, adjusting,
and balancing. Requirements include measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the
mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the
results. Coordinate all testing, adjusting, and balancing contracts, scheduling, performing, etc. with
Enreps LLC. No contractor, Landlord, or Developer shall use a testing, adjusting, and balancing
contractor not first approved and contracted by Enreps LLC. All testing, adjusting, and balancing
performed without a contract through Enreps LLC will be at the cost of the contactor, Landlord, or
Developer and no cost will be given to Sprouts.
B.
Test, adjust, and balance the following mechanical systems:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Supply air systems;

Return air systems;
Exhaust air systems;
Domestic water systems;
Verify temperature control system operation.
C.
Test systems for proper sound and vibration levels.
D.
This Section does not include:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Testing pressure vessels for compliance with safety codes;

Specifications for materials for patching mechanical systems;
Specifications for materials and installation of adjusting and balancing devices. If devices must
be added to achieve proper adjusting and balancing, refer to the respective system sections for
materials and installation requirements.
Requirements and procedures for piping and ductwork systems leakage tests.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A.
Systems testing, adjusting, and balancing is the process of checking and adjusting all the building
environmental systems to produce the design objectives. It includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Balance of air and water distribution;

Adjustment of total system to provide design quantities;
Electrical measurement;
Verification of performance of all equipment and automatic controls;
Sound and vibration measurement.
B.
Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment.
C.
Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment (e.g.,
reduce fan speed, throttling).
D.
Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system (submains, branches, and terminals)
according to specified design quantities.
E.
Procedure:
Standardized approach and execution of sequence of work operations to yield
reproducible results.
F.
Report forms: Test data sheets arranged for collecting test data in logical order for submission and
review. These data should also form the permanent record to be used as the basis for required
future testing, adjusting, and balancing.
G.
Terminal: The point where the controlled fluid enters or leaves the distribution system. These are
supply inlets on water terminals, supply outlets on air terminals, return outlets on water terminals,
and exhaust or return inlets on air terminals such as registers, grilles, diffusers, louvers, and hoods.
H.
Main: Duct or pipe containing the system's major or entire fluid flow.
I.
Submain: Duct or pipe containing part of the systems' capacity and serving two or more branch
mains.

Duluth, GA

15990-1
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
J.
Branch main: Duct or pipe serving two or more terminals.
K.
Branch: Duct or pipe serving a single terminal.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Agency Data:
1.
B.
Submit proof that the proposed testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meets the
qualifications specified below.
Engineer and Technicians Data:

1.
Submit proof that the Test and Balance Engineer assigned to supervise the procedures, and the
technicians proposed to perform the procedures meet the qualifications specified below.
C.
Procedures and Agenda: Submit a synopsis of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures and
agenda proposed to be used for this project.
D.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance and operating data that include how to test, adjust, and
balance the building systems. Include this information in maintenance data specified in Division 1
and Section General Mechanical Requirements.
E.
Sample Forms: Submit sample forms, if other than those standard forms prepared by the NEBB
,AABC, or TABB are proposed.
F.
Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal and signature of
the Test and Balance Engineer. The reports shall be certified proof that the systems have been
tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with the referenced standards; are an accurate
representation of how the systems have been installed; are a true representation of how the systems
are operating at the completion of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures; and are an
accurate record of all final quantities measured, to establish normal operating values of the systems.
Follow the procedures and format specified below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Draft reports: Upon completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures, prepare draft
reports on the approved forms. Draft reports may be hand written, but must be complete,
factual, accurate, and legible. Organize and format draft reports in the same manner specified
for the final reports. Submit 2 complete sets of draft reports. Only 1 complete set of draft
reports will be returned.
Final Report: Upon verification and approval of draft reports, prepare final reports, type written,
and organized and formatted as specified below. Submit 2 complete sets of final reports.
Report Format: Report forms shall be those standard forms prepared by the referenced
standard for each respective item and system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced. Bind report
forms complete with schematic systems diagrams and other data in reinforced, vinyl, three-ring
binders. Provide binding edge labels with the project identification and a title descriptive of the
contents. Divide the contents of the binder into the below listed divisions, separated by divider
tabs:
a.
General Information and Summary
b. Air Systems
c.
Temperature Control Systems
d. Sound and Vibration Systems
e.
Domestic Water Systems
Report Contents: Provide the following minimum information, forms and data:
a.
General Information and Summary: Inside cover sheet to identify testing, adjusting, and
balancing agency, Contractor, Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Project. Include addresses,
and contact names and telephone numbers. Also include a certification sheet containing
the seal and name address, telephone number, and signature of the Certified Test and
Balance Engineer. Include in this division a listing of the instrumentations used for the
procedures along with the proof of calibration.
b. The remainder of the report shall contain the appropriate forms containing as a minimum,
the information indicated on the standard report forms prepared by the NEBB, AABC OR
TABB, for each respective item and system. Prepare a schematic diagram for each item of
equipment and system to accompany each respective report form.
G.
Calibration Reports: Submit proof that all required instrumentation has been calibrated to tolerances
specified in the referenced standards, within a period of six months prior to starting the project.
H.
Additional Reports: Include with the testing, adjusting and balancing reports a copy of the following:

Duluth, GA

15990-2
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
a.
b.
Balancing report for the domestic hot water recirculating systems as described in Section
Water Distribution Systems. Obtain a copy of this report from the General and/or
Plumbing Contractor.
Piping test reports for each piping system included in this project. Obtain copies of the
test reports from the General, Mechanical and/or Plumbing Contractor.

A.
Test and Balance Engineer's Qualifications: A Professional Engineer on staff and having at least 3years of successful testing, adjusting, and balancing experience on projects with testing and
balancing requirements similar to those required for this project.
B.
Agency Qualifications:
1.
2.
3.
C.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
NEBB: "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."
AABC: "National Standards For Total System Balance".
TABB: SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, 2003 Applications Volume, Chapter 37, Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing.
ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, 2007 HVAC Applications Volume, Chapter 47, Sound and
Vibration Control.
NEBB: "Procedural Standards for the Measurement and Assessment of Sound and Vibration."
Balancing Tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Employ the services of an independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meeting the
qualifications specified below, to be the single source of responsibility to test, adjust, and
balance the building mechanical systems identified above, to produce the design objectives.
Services shall include checking installations for conformity to design, measurement and
establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design
specifications, and recording and reporting the results.
The independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency shall be certified by National
Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or Testing
Adjusting and Balancing Bureau (TABB) in those testing and balancing disciplines required for
this project. Agency shall have at least one Professional Engineer performed, certified by NEBB
or AABC or TABB as a Test and Balance Engineer. The project shall be staffed at all times by
qualified personnel.
Approved Contractors: The following are approved test and balancing contractors.
a.
Refer to Enrep LLC. 602-404-6535.
Air Systems: Balance individual terminal devices and branch lines to 10 percent and main
ducts and air handling equipment to 5 percent of specified airflow.
Hydronic Systems: Balance water systems to 5 percent of specified flow.
For applications where differential pressure needs to be maintained, balance air systems to
specified airflow as follows:
a.
Positive Zones: Balance supply air to 0 to +10 percent and exhaust and return air to 0 to
-10 percent.
b. Negative Zones: Balance supply air to 0 to -10 percent and exhaust and return air to 0 to
+10 percent.
Pre-Balancing Conference: Prior to beginning of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures,
schedule and conduct a conference with the Architect/Engineer and representatives of installers of
the mechanical systems. The objective of the conference is final coordination and verification of
system operation and readiness for testing, adjusting, and balancing.

A.
Systems Operation: Systems shall be fully operational prior to beginning procedures.
1.6 COORDINATION OF WORK

A.
Coordinate mechanical work including ductwork, piping and controls to provide complete, properly
tested, adjusted and balanced systems. Division 15 Contractor shall submit progress reports to
communicate status of work so that the testing, adjusting and balancing work is completed in a

Duluth, GA

15990-3
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
timely manner. Division 15 Contractor shall ensure that duct systems are sealed, piping systems
have been tested for leaks and equipment is operational and capable of producing the scheduled
capacity requirements.
B.
Coordinate with the Division 16 Contractor to verify that electrical work for mechanical equipment is
complete, properly tested and operational prior to beginning procedures.
C.
Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support
and assist TAB activities.
D.
Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.
E.
Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A.
Test, adjust, and balance the air systems before hydronic, steam, and refrigerant systems.
B.
Test, adjust and balance air conditioning systems during summer season and heating systems during
winter season, including at least a period of operation at outside conditions within 5 deg. F wet bulb
temperature of maximum summer design condition, and within 10 deg. F dry bulb temperature of
minimum winter design condition. Take final temperature readings during seasonal operation.

(Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR AIR SYSTEM BALANCING
A.
Before operating the system, perform these steps:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Obtain design drawings and specifications and become thoroughly acquainted with the design
intent.
Obtain copies of approved shop drawings of air handling equipment, outlets (supply, return, and
exhaust) and temperature control diagrams.
Compare design to installed equipment and field installations.
Walk the system from the system air handling equipment to terminal units to determine
variations of installation from design.
Check filters for cleanliness.
Check dampers (both volume and fire) for correct and locked position, and temperature control
for completeness of installation before starting fans.
Verify volume dampers are installed at locations needed for balancing the air systems.
Prepare report test sheets for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended procedures for testing. Prepare a summation of required outlet volumes to
permit a crosscheck with required fan volumes.
Determine best locations in main and branch ductwork for most accurate duct traverses.
Place outlet dampers in the full open position.
Prepare schematic diagrams of system "as-built" ductwork and piping layouts to facilitate
reporting.
Lubricate all motors and bearings.
Check fan belt tension.
Check fan rotation.
3.2 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR DOMESTIC HOT WATER RETURN SYSTEM BALANCING
A.
Before operating the system perform these steps:

1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Open valves at recirculation pump and flow control or balancing valves to full open position.
Remove and clean all strainers.
Check recirculation pump rotation.
Set water heater temperature as indicated on the drawings.
Procedures For Hot Water Return System Balancing

Duluth, GA

15990-4
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Provide required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements. Instruments shall be properly

maintained and protected against damage.
Apply instrument as recommended by the manufacturer.
Take readings with the eye at the level of the indicated value to prevent parallax.
Mark balancing valve setting with memory stop. Mark with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification materials.
Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and
resubmit test results.
Reports:
Prepare hot water return system balancing reports signed and submit to the
Architect/Engineer upon completion of the project. Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Valve tag number and description of location

Valve body size
Differential pressure reading from instrument in psi
Actual flow rate derived from the manufacturers charts and tables for the valve size and
measured differential pressure.
3.3 MEASUREMENTS
A.
Provide all required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements, calibrated to the tolerances
specified in the referenced standards. Instruments shall be properly maintained and protected
against damage.
B.
Provide instruments meeting the specifications of the referenced standards.
C.
Use only those instruments which have the maximum field measuring accuracy and are best suited
to the function being measured.
D.
Apply instrument as recommended by the manufacturer.
E.
Use instruments with minimum scale and maximum subdivisions and with scale ranges proper for the
value being measured.
F.
When averaging values, take a sufficient quantity of readings which will result in a repeatability error
of less than 5 percent. When measuring a single point, repeat readings until 2 consecutive identical
values are obtained.
G.
Take all reading with the eye at the level of the indicated value to prevent parallax.
H.
Use pulsation dampeners where necessary to eliminate error involved in estimating average of rapidly
fluctuation readings.
I.
Take measurements in the system where best suited to the task.
3.4 PERFORMING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

A.
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system identified, in accordance with the detailed
procedures outlined in the referenced standards.
B.
Cut insulation, ductwork, and piping for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary
to allow adequate performance of procedures.
C.
Patch insulation, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical to those removed.
D.
Seal ducts and piping, and test for and repair leaks.
E.
Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier.
F.
Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control
levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. Mark with paint or other suitable,
permanent identification materials.
1.
G.
Energize fan motors, verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan
to indicated RPM.
a.
Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and resubmit
test results.
3.5 TESTING FOR SOUND AND VIBRATION

Duluth, GA

15990-5
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
A.
Test and adjust mechanical systems for sound and vibration in accordance with the detailed
instructions of the referenced standards.
3.6 RECORD AND REPORT DATA

A.
Record data regarding design conditions from contract documents and installed conditions from shop
drawings including equipment identification number, model number, location, area served,
manufacturer, model number, serial number, motor nameplate horsepower and rpm, fan rpm,
capacity and electrical voltage, amps and phases
B.
Record data obtained during testing, adjusting, and balancing including sound and vibration
measurements in accordance with, and on the forms recommended by the referenced standards, and
as approved on the sample report forms.
C.
Prepare and submit report of recommendations for correcting

performances when system cannot be successfully balanced.
D.
Prepare and submit report of recommendations for correcting any sound or vibration levels that are
outside of manufacturers tolerances, ASHRAE standards and/or values specified in the contract
documents.
unsatisfactory
mechanical

Duluth, GA

15990-6
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
SECTION 16010
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section and to all following sections within
Division 16.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.
This Division requires providing complete functioning systems, and each element thereof, as
specified, indicated, or reasonably inferred, on the Drawings and in these Specifications, including
every article, device, or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably
necessary to facilitate each systems functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment
specified. Elements of the work include, but are not limited to, materials, labor, supervision,
supplies, tools, equipment, transportation and utilities.
B.
Division 16 of these Specifications, and Drawings numbered with prefixes E, generally describe these
systems, but the scope of the electrical Work includes all such Work indicated in all of the Contract
Documents, including, but not limited to: Instructions to Bidders; Proposal Form; General Conditions;
Supplementary General Conditions; Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical
Drawings and Specifications; and Addenda.
C.
Drawings are graphic representations of the Work upon which the Contract is based. They show the
materials and their relationship to one another, including sizes, shapes, locations, and connections.
They also convey the scope of Work, indicating the intended general arrangement of the equipment,
fixtures, outlets and circuits without showing all of the exact details as to elevations, offsets, control
lines, and other installation requirements. Use the Drawings as a guide when laying out the Work
and to verify that materials and equipment will fit into the designated spaces, and which, when
installed per manufacturers' requirements, will ensure a complete, coordinated, satisfactory and
properly operating system.
D.
Specifications define the qualitative requirements for products, materials, and workmanship upon
which the Contract is based.

A.
Execute all Work under this Division in a thorough and professional manner by competent and
experienced workmen duly trained to perform the Work specified.
B.
Install all Work in strict conformance with all manufacturers' requirements and recommendations,
unless these Documents exceed those requirements. Install all equipment and materials in a neat
and professional manner, aligned, leveled, and adjusted for satisfactory operation, in accordance with
NECA guidelines.
C.
Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, provide all material and equipment new, of the best
quality and design, free from defects and imperfections and with markings or a nameplate identifying
the manufacturer and providing sufficient reference to establish quality, size and capacity. Provide
all material and equipment of the same type from the same manufacturer whenever practicable.
D.
Unless specified otherwise, manufactured items of the same types specified within this Division shall
have been installed and used, without modification, renovation, or repair for not less than one year
prior to date of bidding for this Project.
1.4 CODES, REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A.
Execute all Work in accordance with, and comply at a minimum with, National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) codes, state and local building codes, and all other applicable codes and
ordinances in force, governing the particular class of Work involved, for performance, workmanship,
equipment, and materials. Additionally, comply with rules and regulations of public utilities and
municipal departments affected by connection of services. Where conflicts between various codes,
ordinances, rules, and regulations exist, comply with the most stringent. Wherever requirements of
these Specifications, Drawings, or both, exceed those of the above items, the requirements of these
Specifications, Drawings, or both, shall govern. Code compliance, at a minimum, is mandatory.
Construe nothing in these Construction Documents as permitting work not in compliance, at a
minimum, with these codes. Bring all conflicts observed between codes, ordinances, rules,

Duluth, GA

16010-1
1550000803
*** Issue 08/19/2003
regulations and these documents to the Architects and Engineers attention in sufficient time, prior
to the opening of Bids, to prepare the Supplementary Drawings and Specifications Addenda required
to resolve the conflict.
B.
If the conflict is not reported timely, prior to the opening of bids, resolve the conflict and provide the
installation in accordance with the governing codes and to the satisfaction of the Architect and
Engineer, without additional compensation. Contractor will be held responsible for any violation of
the law.
C.
Obtain timely inspections by the constituted authorities having jurisdiction; and, upon final
completion of the Work, obtain and deliver to the Owner executed final certificates of acceptance
from these authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
All material, manufacturing methods, handling, dimensions, and methods of installation and test
procedures shall conform to industry standards, acts, and codes, including, but not limited to the
following, except where these Drawings and Specifications exceed them:
BOCA
CBC
Building Officials Code Administration

California Building Code
IBC
NBC
SBC
UBC

National Building Code
Standard Southern Building Code
Uniform Building Code
ADA
Americans with Disabilities Act
AEIC
ANSI
ASTM
AWS
AWWA
CSA/USA
ICEA
IEEE
IES
NBFU
NEC
NECA
NEMA
NETA
NFPA
OSHA
UL
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies

American Society of Testing Materials
Canadian Standards Association/USA
Insulated Conductors Engineers Association
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
Illuminating Engineering Society
National Electrical Code, NFPA 70
National Electrical Contractors Association
National Electrical Manufactures' Association
InterNational Electrical Testing Association
National Fire Protection Association
Occupational Safety and Health Act
Underwriter's Laboratories
E.
Comply with rules and regulations of public utilities and municipal departments affected by
connections of services.
F.
Perform all electrical work in compliance with applicable safety regulations, including OSHA
regulations. All safety lights, guards, and warning signs required for the performance of the
electrical work shall be provided by the Contractor.
G.
Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses and fees that are required by the governing authorities for the
performance of the electrical work.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A.
Whenever used in these Specifications or Drawings, the following terms shall have the indicated
meanings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Furnish: To supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembling,
installing, and similar operations.
Install: To perform all operations at the project site, including, but not limited to, and as
required: unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to
dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, testing, commissioning, starting up and
similar operations, complete, and ready for the intended use.
Provide: To furnish and install complete, and ready for the intended use.
Furnished by Owner (or Owner-Furnished) or Furnished by Others: An item furnished by the
Owner or under other Divisions or Contracts, and installed under the requirements of this

Duluth, GA

16010-2
1550000803
*** Issue 08/19/2003
5.
6.
7.
8.
Division, complete, and ready for the intended use, including all items and services incidental to
the Work necessary for proper installation and operation. Include the installation under the
warranty required by this Division.
Engineer: Where referenced in this Division, Engineer is the Engineer of Record and the Design
Professional for the Work under this Division, and is a Consultant to, and an authorized
representative of, the Architect, as defined in the General and/or Supplementary Conditions.
When used in this Division, it means increased involvement by, and obligations to, the Engineer,
in addition to involvement by, and obligations to, the Architect.
AHJ: The local code and/or inspection agency (Authority) Having Jurisdiction over the Work.
NRTL: Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory, as defined and listed by OSHA in
29 CFR 1910.7 (e.g., UL, ETL, CSA, etc.), and acceptable to the Authority having Jurisdiction
(AHJ) over this project. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories and standards listed are
used only to represent the characteristics required and are not intended to restrict the use of
other NRTLs that are acceptable to the AHJ, and standards that meet the specified criteria.
HOMERUN: That portion of an electrical circuit originating at a junction box, termination box,
receptacle or switch with termination at an electrical panelboard. Note: Where MC Cable is
utilized for receptacle and/or lighting branch circuiting loads, the originating point of the
homerun shall be at the first load in the circuit or at a junction box in an accessible ceiling space
immediately above the first load.
B.
The terms "approved equal", equivalent, or "equal" are used synonymously and shall mean
accepted by or acceptable to the Engineer as equivalent to the item or manufacturer specified.
The term "approved" shall mean labeled, listed, or both, by an NRTL, and acceptable to the AHJ over
this project.
C.
Manufacturers: The listing of specific manufacturers does not imply acceptance of their products
that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed are not relieved
from meeting these specifications in their entirety.
D.
The following definitions apply to excavation operations:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Additional Excavation: Where excavation has reached indicated sub-grade elevations, if

unsuitable bearing materials are encountered, continue excavation until suitable bearing
materials are reached. The Contract Sum may be adjusted by an appropriate Contract
Modification.
Sub-base: as used in this Section refers to the compacted soil layer used in pavement systems
between the sub-grade and the pavement base course material.
Sub-grade: as used in this Section refers to the compacted soil immediately below the slab or
pavement system.
Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated sub-grade elevations
or dimensions without specific direction from the Architect.
1.6 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate with other Divisions for electrical work included in them but not listed in Division 16 or
indicated on electrical Drawings.
B.
Visit the site and ascertain the conditions to be encountered in installing the Work under this
Division, verify all dimensions and locations before purchasing equipment or commencing work, and
make due provisions for same in the bid. Failure to comply with this requirement shall not be
considered justification for omission, alteration, and incorrect or faulty installation of any of the Work
under this Division or for additional compensation for any Work covered by this Division.
C.
Refer to Drawings and Divisions of the other trades and to relevant equipment drawings and shop
drawings to determine the extent of clear spaces. Make all offsets required to clear equipment,
beams and other structural members, and to facilitate concealing conduit in the manner anticipated
in the design.
D.
Provide materials with trim that will fit properly the types of ceiling, wall, or floor finishes actually
installed.
E.
Maintain an electrical foreman on the jobsite at all times to coordinate this Work with other trades so
that various components of the electrical systems is installed at the proper time, fits the available
space, and allows proper service access to all equipment. Carry on the Work in such a manner that
the Work of the other trades will not be handicapped, hindered, or delayed at any time.
F.
Work of this Division shall progress according to the "Construction Schedule" as described in
Division 1 and as approved by the Architect. Cooperate in establishing these schedules and perform
the Work under this Division, in a timely manner in conformance with the construction schedule so

Duluth, GA

16010-3
1550000803
*** Issue 08/19/2003
as to ensure successful achievement of all schedule dates.

1.7 MEASUREMENTS AND LAYOUTS
A.
The Drawings are schematic in nature, but show the various components of the systems
approximately to scale and attempt to indicate how they are to be integrated with other parts of the
Work. Figured dimensions take precedence to scaled dimensions. Determine exact locations by job
measurements, by checking the requirements of other trades, and by reviewing all Contract
Documents. Correct, at no additional costs to the Owner, errors that could have been avoided by
proper checking and inspection.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for submittal requirements.
B.
Submittals and shop drawings shall not contain HEIs firm name or logo, nor shall it contain the HEIs
engineers seal and signature. They shall not be copies of HEIs work product. If the contractor
desires to use elements of such product, the license agreement for transfer of information at the end
of this section must be used.
C.
Assemble and submit for review, manufacturers product literature for material and equipment to be
furnished, installed, or both, under this Division, including shop drawings, manufacturers product
data and performance sheets, samples, and other submittals required by this Division as noted in
Table 1 at the end of this Section. Provide the number of submittals required by Division 1;
however, at a minimum, submit seven (7) sets.
D.
Provide submittals in sufficient detail so as to demonstrate compliance with these Contract

Documents and the design concept. Highlight, mark, list or indicate the materials, performance
criteria and accessories that are being proposed.
E.
Refer to individual Sections for additional submittal requirements.
F.
Transmit submittals as early as required to support the project schedule. Allow for two weeks
Engineer review time, plus to/from mailing time via the Architect, plus a duplication of this time for
resubmittals, if required. Transmit submittals as soon as possible after Notice to Proceed and before
construction starts.
G.
Before transmitting submittals and material lists, verify that the equipment submitted is mutually
compatible with and suitable for the intended use. Verify that the equipment will fit the available
space and allow ample room for maintenance. If the size of equipment furnished makes necessary
any change in location, or configuration, submit a shop drawing showing the proposed layout.
H.
Submittals shall contain the following information. Submittals not so identified will be returned to the
Contractor without action:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The project name.

The applicable Specification Section and paragraph.
The submittal date.
The Contractor's stamp, which shall certify that the stamped drawings have been checked by
the Contractor, comply with the Drawings and Specifications, and have been coordinated with
other trades.
I.
Refer to Division 1 for acceptance of electronic submittals for this project. For electronic submittals,
Contractor shall submit the documents in accordance with the procedures specified in Division 1.
Contractor shall notify the Architect and Engineer that the shop drawings have been posted. If
electronic submittal procedures are not defined in Division 1, Contractor shall include the website,
user name and password information needed to access the submittals. For submittals sent by e-mail,
Contractor shall copy the Architect and Engineers designated representatives. Contractor shall
allow the Engineer review time as specified above in the construction schedule. Contractor shall
submit only the documents required to purchase the materials and/or equipment in the electronic
submittal and shall clearly indicate the materials, performance criteria and accessories being
proposed. General product catalog data not specifically noted to be part of the specified product will
be rejected and returned without review.
J.
The Engineers checking and subsequent acceptance of such submittals shall not relieve the
Contractor from responsibility for deviations from Drawings or Specifications unless he has, in
writing, called the Engineers and Architects attention to such deviations at the time of submission,
and secured written acceptance; nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors in dimensions,
details, sizes of members, or quantities; or for omissions of components or fittings; or for not
coordinating items with actual building conditions and adjacent work.

Duluth, GA

16010-4
1550000803
*** Issue 08/19/2003
1.9 ELECTRONIC DRAWING FILES

A.
In preparation of shop drawings or record drawings, Contractor may, at his option, obtain electronic
drawing files in AutoCAD or DXF format from the Engineer for a shipping and handling fee of $200
for a drawing set up to 12 sheets and $15 per sheet for each additional sheet. Contact the
Architect for Architects written authorization. Contractor shall complete and send the form
attached at the end of this section along with a check made payable to Henderson Engineers, Inc.
Contractor shall indicate the desired shipping method and drawing format on the attached form. In
addition to payment, Architects written authorization and Engineers release agreement form must
be received before electronic drawing files will be sent.
1.10 SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Refer to Bid documents, General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections
for limitations and restrictions on substitutions.
B.
Materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of
required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by the proposed substitution.
C.
No substitutions will be considered with receipt of Bids, unless the Architect and Engineer have
received from the Bidder a written request for approval to bid a substitution at least ten calendar
days prior to the date for receipt of Bids, and have approved the substitution request. Include, with
each such request, the name of the material or equipment for which substitution is being requested,
and a complete description of the proposed substitution, including drawings, cut sheets, performance
and test data, and all other information necessary for an evaluation. Include also a statement setting
forth changes in other materials, equipment or other work that would be required to incorporate the
substitution. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitute is upon the proposer. The
Architect's or Engineers decision to approve or disapprove a substitution in a Bid is final.
D.
If the proposed substitution is approved prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be stated in an
Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner, including verbal.
E.
No substitutions will be considered after receipt of Bids and before award of the Contract.
F.
No substitutions will be considered after the Contract is awarded unless specifically provided in the
Contract Documents.
1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A.
Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for Operation and Maintenance Data.
B.
Submit data prior to requesting the final punch list and before all requests for Substantial
Completion.
C.
Instruct the Owner's permanent personnel in the proper operation of, startup and shutdown
procedures and maintenance of the equipment and components of the systems installed under this
Division.
D.
Prior to Substantial Completion of the project, furnish to the Architect, for Engineers review, and for
the Owners use, four (4) copies of brochures in three-ring, loose-leaf, hard-back notebook form,
divided and tabbed, containing equipment data, approved submittals, shop drawings, diagrams,
capacities, spare part numbers, manufacturers service and maintenance data, warranties,
guarantees, etc. Include local contacts complete with address and telephone number, for equipment,
apparatus, and system components furnished and installed under this Division of the specifications.
1.12 SPARE PARTS

A.
Provide to the Owner the spare parts specified in the individual sections of this Division.
1.13 RECORD DRAWINGS

A.
Keep a set of jobsite work prints of the Issued for Construction Drawings on the jobsite during
construction, for the purpose of annotating changes. During the course of construction, indicate on
these Documents, changes made from the Conformed Contract Documents. Pay particular attention
to those items that require locating for servicing.
B.
Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for Record Drawings
C.
At the completion of the project, obtain reproducible vellum copies of the final Drawings and
incorporate changes noted on the jobsite work prints onto these vellums. These changes shall be
done by a skilled drafter. Mark each sheet "Record Drawing", along with the date, and deliver these
Record Drawings to the Architect.

Duluth, GA

16010-5
1550000803
*** Issue 08/19/2003
D.
At the completion of the project, obtain reproducible Mylar copies of the final Drawings and
incorporate changes noted on the jobsite work prints onto these mylars. These changes shall be
done by a skilled drafter. Mark each sheet "Record Drawing", along with the date, and deliver these
Record Drawings to the Architect.
1.14 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.
Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for Delivery, Storage and Handling.
B.
Deliver equipment and material to the job site in their original containers with labels intact, fully
identified with manufacturer's name, make, model, model number, type, size, capacity and
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. labels and other pertinent information necessary to identify the item.
C.
Deliver, receive, handle and store equipment and materials at the job site in the designated area and
in such a manner as to prevent equipment and materials from damage and loss. Store equipment
and materials delivered to the site on pallets and cover with waterproof, tear resistant tarp or plastic
or as required to keep equipment and materials dry. Follow manufacturer's recommendations, and at
all times, take every precaution to properly protect equipment and material from damage, including
the erection of temporary shelters to adequately protect equipment and material stored at the Site.
Equipment and/or material which becomes rusted or damaged shall be replaced or restored by the
Contractor to a condition acceptable to the Architect and Engineer.
D.
Be responsible for the safe storage of tools, material and equipment.
1.15 WARRANTIES
A.
Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for Warranties.
B.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project
Manual.
C.
Warrant each system and each element thereof against all defects due to faulty workmanship, design
or material for a period of 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, unless specific items are
noted to carry a longer warranty in these Construction Documents or manufacturers standard
warranty exceeds 12 months. Remedy all defects, occurring within the warranty period(s), as stated
in the General Conditions and Division 1.
D.
Also warrant the following additional items:

1.
2.
3.
All raceways are free from obstructions, holes, crushing, or breaks of any nature.
All raceway seals are effective.
The entire electrical system is free from all short circuits and unwanted open circuits and
grounds.
E.
The above warranties shall include labor and material. Make repairs or replacements without any
additional costs to the Owner.
F.
Perform the remedial work promptly, upon written notice from the Architect or Owner.
G.
At the time of Substantial Completion, deliver to the Owner all warranties, in writing and properly
executed, including term limits for warranties extending beyond the one year period, each warranty
instrument being addressed to the Owner and stating the commencement date and term.
1.16 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A.
Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for Temporary Facilities requirements.
B.
Temporary Utilities: The types of services required include, but are not limited to, electricity,
telephone, and internet. When connecting to existing franchised utilities for required services,
comply with service companies recommendations on materials and methods, or engage service
companies to install services. Locate and relocate services (as necessary) to minimize interference
with construction operations.
C.
Construction Facilities: Provide facilities reasonably required to perform construction operations

properly and adequately.
1.
2.
Enclosures: When temporary enclosures are required to ensure adequate workmanship, weather
protection and ambient conditions required for the work, provide fire-retardant treated lumber
and plywood; provide tarpaulins with UL label and flame spread of 15 or less; provide
translucent type (nylon reinforced polyethylene) where daylighting of enclosed space would be
beneficial for workmanship, and reduce use of temporary lighting.
Heating: Provide heat, as necessary, to protect work, materials and equipment from damage
due to dampness and cold. In areas where building is occupied, maintain a temperature not less

Duluth, GA

16010-6
1550000803
*** Issue 08/19/2003
than 65 degrees F. Use steam, hot water, or gas from piped distribution system where
available. Where steam, hot water or piped gas are not available, heat with self-contained LP
gas or fuel oil heaters, bearing UL, FM or other approval labels appropriate for application. Vent
fuel-burning heaters, and equip units with individual-space thermostatic controls. Use electricresistance space heaters only where no other, more energy-efficient, type of heater is available
and allowable.
A.
Conditions Affecting Work In Existing Buildings: The following project conditions apply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
The Drawings describe the general nature of remodeling to the existing building; however, visit
the Site prior to submitting bid to determine the nature and extent of work involved.
Schedule Work in the existing building with the Owner.
Perform certain demolition work prior to the remodeling. Perform the demolition that involves
electrical systems, Light fixtures, equipment, raceways, equipment supports or foundations and
materials.
Remove articles that are not required for the new Work. Unless otherwise indicated, remove
each item removed during this demolition from the premises and dispose in accordance with
applicable federal, state and local regulations.
Relocate and reconnect electrical facilities that must be relocated in order to accomplish the
remodeling shown in the Drawings or indicated in the Specifications. Where electrical
equipment or materials are removed, cap unused raceways below the floor line or behind the
wall line to facilitate restoration of finish.
Finish material will be installed under other Divisions.
Obtain permission from the Architect for channeling of floors or walls not specifically noted on
the Drawings.
Protect adjacent materials indicated to remain. For Work specific to this Division, install and
maintain dust and noise barriers to keep dirt, dust, and noise from being transmitted to adjacent
areas. Remove protection and barriers after demolition operations are complete.
Locate, identify, and protect electrical services passing through demolition area and serving
other areas outside the demolition limits. Maintain services to areas outside demolition limits.
When services must be interrupted, provide temporary services for affected areas.
Conditions Affecting Excavations: The following project conditions apply:

1.
2.
Maintain and protect existing building services that transit the area affected by selective
demolition.
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by excavation
operations.
C.
Site Information: Subsurface conditions were investigated during the design of the Project. Reports
of these investigations are available for information only; data in the reports are not intended as
representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity of conditions. The Owner will not be
responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this information.
D.
Use of explosives is not permitted.
E.
Environmental Conditions: Apply joint sealers under temperature and humidity conditions within the
limits specified by the joint sealer manufacturer. Do not apply joint sealers to wet substrates.

2.1
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
Sub base Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone,
crushed slag, or natural or crushed sand.
B.
Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, with
100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve, and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.
C.
Backfill and Fill Materials: Materials complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP,
GM, SM, SW, and SP; free of clay, rock, or gravel larger than two inches in any dimension; debris;
waste; frozen materials; and vegetable and other deleterious matter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Duluth, GA

16010-7
1550000803
*** Issue 08/19/2003
3.1 PERMITS
A.
Secure and pay for all permits required in connection with the installation of the Electrical Work.
Arrange with the various utility companies for the installation and connection of all required utilities
for this facility and pay all charges associated therewith including connection charges and inspection
fees, except where these services or fees are designated to be provided by others.
3.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND WIRING

A.
Provide 208Y/120 volt, three-phase, four-wire, temporary electrical service and temporary lighting
system to facilitate construction.
B.
In existing facilities, with Owners approval, Contractor may utilize the existing electrical system as
the source of temporary power. Coordinate the point of connection and method of connection to
the existing system with the Owners Representative.
C.
Pay all charges made by the Electric Utility, with respect to installation and energy charges for
temporary services.
D.
Work for the temporary power shall consist of all labor and materials, including, but not limited to
conduit, wiring, panelboards, fuse blocks, fused disconnecting switches, fuses, pigtails, receptacles,
wood panel switch supports, and other miscellaneous materials required to complete the power
system.
E.
Install all temporary wiring in accordance with applicable codes, and maintain in an OSHA-approved
manner.
F.
Provide an adequate number of GFCI type power distribution centers, rated 208Y/120V, four-wire,
and not less than 60A, with sufficient fuse blocks or breakers for lighting and hand tool circuits, 60A
four-wire feeders, all mounted within pre-fabricated enclosures UL listed for this application or on
suitable wood panels bolted to columns or upright wood supports as required.
G.
Install circuits to points on each level of each building so that service outlets can be reached by a
50-foot extension cord for 120V power and a 100-foot extension cord for 208V power (or as
required by OSHA or local authorities).
H.
Provide one lighting outlet per 30 linear feet of corridor and at least one light in each room and for
every 800 square feet of floor area. Temporary lighting shall comply with OSHA requirements.
I.
If additional service is required for cranes, electrical welders or for electric motors over 1/2 HP per
unit, such additional service shall become the responsibility of the trade involved.
J.
When the permanent wiring for lighting and power is installed, with approval of the Architect and
Owner, the permanent system may be used, provided the Contractor assumes full responsibility for
all electrical material, equipment, and devices contained in the systems and provided that roof
drainage system and roofing are complete.
K.
When directed by the Architect, remove all temporary services, lighting, wiring and devices from the
property.
3.3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A.
Refer to Division 1, Division 2, and General Conditions for Selective Demolition requirements.
B.
General: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect abandoned electrical materials and equipment
indicated to be removed and not indicated to be salvaged or saved.
C.
Materials and Equipment to Be Salvaged: Remove, demount, and disconnect existing electrical
materials and equipment indicated to be removed and salvaged, and deliver materials and equipment
to the location designated for storage.
D.
Disposal and Cleanup: Remove from the site and legally dispose of demolished materials and
equipment not indicated to be salvaged.
E.
Electrical Materials and Equipment: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect the following items:
1.
Inactive and obsolete raceways, fittings, supports and specialties, equipment, wiring, controls,
fixtures, and insulation:
a.
Raceways and outlets embedded in floors, walls, and ceilings may remain if such materials
do not interfere with new installations. Cut embedded raceways to below finished
surfaces, seal, and refinish surfaces as specified or as indicated on the Architectural finish
Drawings. Remove materials above accessible ceilings. Cap raceways allowed to remain.
b. Perform cutting and patching required for demolition in accordance with Division 1,

Duluth, GA

16010-8
1550000803
*** Issue 08/19/2003
General Conditions and "Cutting and Patching" portion of this Section in Division 16.
3.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A.
Existing conditions indicated on the Drawings are taken from the best information available from the
Owner, existing record drawings, and from limited, in-situ, visual site observations; and, they are not
to be construed as "AS BUILT" conditions. The information is shown to help establish the extent of
the new Work.
B.
Verify all actual existing conditions at the project site and perform the Work as required to meet the
existing conditions and the intent of the Work indicated.
3.5 EXISTING UTILITIES

A.
Schedule and coordinate with the Utility Company, Owner and with the Architect all connections to,
relocation of, or discontinuation of normal utility services from any existing utility line. Include all
premium time required for all such work in the Bid.
B.
Repair all existing utilities damaged due to construction operations to the satisfaction of the Owner
or Utility Company without additional cost.
C.
Do not leave utilities disconnected at the end of a workday or over a weekend unless authorized by
representatives of the Owner or Architect.
D.
Make repairs and restoration of utilities before workmen leave the project at the end of the workday
in which the interruption takes place.
E.
Include in Bid the cost of furnishing temporary facilities to provide all services during interruption of
normal utility service.
3.6 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

A.
Refer to Division 1, Division 2 and General Conditions for Excavation and Backfilling.
B.
Perform excavation of every description, of whatever substance encountered and to the depth
required in connection with the installation of the work under this Division. Excavation shall be in
conformance with applicable Divisions and sections of the Specifications.
C.
Restore roads, alleys, streets and sidewalks damaged during this Work to the satisfaction of
Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
D.
Do not excavate trenches close to walks or columns without prior consultation with the Architect.
E.
Erect barricades around excavations, for safety, and place an adequate number of amber lights on or
near the work and keep them burning from dusk to dawn. Be responsible for all damage that any
parties may sustain in consequence of neglecting the necessary precautions in prosecuting the work.
F.
Slope sides of excavations to comply with local, state and federal codes and ordinances. Shore and
brace as required for stability of excavation.
G.
Shoring and Bracing: Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local,
state and federal codes and authorities. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of
time period excavations will be open.
1.
Remove shoring and bracing when no longer required. Where sheeting is allowed to remain, cut
top of sheeting at an elevation of 30 inches below finished grade elevation.
H.
Install sediment and erosion control measures in accordance with local codes and ordinances.
I.
Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations
and from flooding project site and surrounding area.
1.
2.
J.
Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of

bearing materials. Provide and maintain dewatering system components necessary to convey
water away from excavations.
Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits
to convey surface water to collecting or run-off areas. Do not use trench excavations as
temporary drainage ditches. In no case shall sewers be used as drains for such water.
Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill
or fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.
1.
2.
Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip-line of
trees indicated to remain.
Remove and legally dispose of excess excavated materials and materials not acceptable for use

Duluth, GA

16010-9
1550000803
*** Issue 08/19/2003
as backfill or fill.
K.
Excavation for Underground Tanks and Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions shown
within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot; plus a sufficient distance to permit placing and
removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for inspection.
1.
2.
L.
Excavate, by hand, areas within drip-line of large trees. Protect the root system from damage
and dry-out. Maintain moist conditions for root system and cover exposed roots with burlap.
Paint root cuts of one inch in diameter and larger with emulsified asphalt tree paint.
Take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before
concrete reinforcement is placed.
Trenching: Excavate trenches for electrical installations as follows:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Excavate trenches to the uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a
minimum of six to nine inches clearance on both sides of raceway and cables.
Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required for raceway and cables to establish slope,
away from buildings and indicated elevations. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to
an elevation below frost line.
Limit the length of open trench to that in which raceway and cables can be installed, tested,
and the trench backfilled within the same day.
Where rock is encountered, carry excavation below required elevation and backfill with a layer
of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of raceway and cables. Provide a minimum of six
inches of stone or gravel cushion between rock bearing surface and raceway and cables.
Excavate trenches for raceway and cables and equipment with bottoms of trench to accurate
elevations for support of raceway and cables on undisturbed soil.
M.
Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric
temperature is less than 35 degrees F.
N.
Backfilling and Filling: Place soil materials in layers to required subgrade elevations for each area
classification listed below, using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
O.
Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
P.
Under walks and pavements, use a combination of subbase materials and excavated or
borrowed materials.
Under building slabs, use drainage fill materials.
Under raceway and cables, use subbase materials where required over rock bearing surface and
for correction of unauthorized excavation.
For raceway and cables less than 30 inches below surface of roadways, provide 4-inch-thick
concrete base slab support. After installation and testing of raceway and cables, provide a 4inch thick concrete encasement (sides and top) prior to backfilling and placement of roadway
subbase.
Other areas use excavated or borrowed materials.
Inspection, testing, approval, and locations of underground utilities have been recorded.
Removal of concrete formwork.
Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids.
Removal of trash and debris.
Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers of not more than 8 inches in
loose depth for material compacted by heavy equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth
for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
1.
For vertical and diagonal raceway installations, thoroughly support raceways from permanent
structures or undisturbed earth at no less that 10-foot intervals, while placing backfill materials,
so that raceways are not deflected, crushed, broken, or otherwise damaged by the backfill
placement.
Q.
Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content.
Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each
area classification specified below. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy,
frozen, or contain frost or ice.
R.
Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, and equipment to required
elevations. Prevent displacement of raceways and equipment by carrying material uniformly around
them to approximately same elevation in each lift.
S.
Compaction: Control soil compaction during construction, providing minimum percentage of density
specified for each area classification indicated below:
1.
Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following

Duluth, GA

16010-10
1550000803
*** Issue 08/19/2003
2.
T.
percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture-density

relationship (cohesive soils), determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557 and not less than
the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for
soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship (cohesionless soils).
a.
Areas under Structures, Building Slabs and Steps, Pavements: Compact top 12 inches of
subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum density for
cohesive material, or 95 percent relative density for cohesionless material.
b. Areas Under Walkways: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill
material to 90 percent maximum density for cohesive material, or 95 percent relative
density for cohesionless material.
c.
Other Areas: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to
85 percent maximum density for cohesive soils, and 90 percent relative density for
cohesionless soils.
Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before
compaction, uniformly apply water. Apply water in minimum quantity necessary to achieve
required moisture content and to prevent water appearing on surface during, or subsequent to,
compaction operations.
Subsidence: Where subsidence occurs at mechanical installation excavations during the period 12
months after Substantial Completion, remove surface treatment (i.e., pavement, lawn, or other
finish), add backfill material, compact to specified conditions, and replace surface treatment.
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent areas.
3.7 WORK IN EXISTING FACILITIES

A.
The Drawings describe the general nature of remodeling to the existing facilities; however, visit the
Site prior to submitting a Bid, to determine the nature and extent of Work involved.
B.
Schedule Work in the existing facility with the Owner.
C.
Certain demolition work shall be performed prior to the remodeling. Perform the demolition that
involves electrical systems, fixtures, conduit, wiring, equipment, equipment supports or foundations
and materials.
D.
Remove all of these articles that are not required for the new Work. Unless otherwise indicated,
each item removed during this demolition shall be removed from the premises and disposed of in
accordance with all state and local regulations.
E.
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of
electrical service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Architect's written permission.
F.
Relocate and reconnect all electrical facilities that must be relocated in order to accomplish the
remodeling shown in the Drawings or indicated in the Specifications. Where electrical fixtures or
equipment are removed, cap all unused raceways behind the floor line or wall line to facilitate
restoration of finish, and, remove all existing wiring from abandoned raceways.
G.
Finish materials are specified in other Divisions.
H.
Where removal of existing wiring interrupts electrical continuity of circuits that are to remain in use,
provide necessary wiring, raceways, junction boxes, etc., to ensure continued electrical continuity.
I.
Channel walls and floors as required to produce the desired result; however, obtain permission from
the Architect or Owner for all channeling not specifically noted on the Drawings.
3.8 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT

A.
Locate all pull boxes, junction boxes and controls so as to provide easy access for operation, service
inspection and maintenance. Provide an access door where equipment or devices are located above
inaccessible ceilings. Refer to Division 16 Section Basic Electrical Materials And Methods.
B.
Maintain all code required clearances and clearances required by manufacturers.
3.9 PENETRATIONS
A.
Unless otherwise noted as being provided under other Divisions, provide sleeves, box frames, or
both, for openings in floors, walls, partitions and ceilings for all electrical work that passes through
construction. Refer to Division 16 Section Basic Electrical Materials And Methods.

Duluth, GA

16010-11
1550000803
*** Issue 08/19/2003
B.
Provide sleeves, box frames, or both, for all conduit, cable, and busways that pass through masonry,
concrete or block walls.
C.
The cutting of new and/or existing construction will not be permitted except by written approval of
the Architect.
3.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A.
Provide all necessary cutting of walls, floors, ceilings and roofs for work under this Division.
B.
Cut no structural member without permission from Architect.
C.
Patch around all openings to match adjacent construction.
D.
After the final waterproofing membrane has been installed, roofs may be cut only with written
permission by the Architect.
3.11 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS

A.
Refer to structural specifications for all seismic requirements.
3.12 PAINTING
A.
Refer to Architectural Section Painting for painting requirements.
B.
Paint exposed ferrous surfaces, including, but not limited to, hangers, equipment stands and
supports using materials and methods as specified under Architectural Specifications; colors shall be
as selected by the Architect.
C.
Re-finish all field-threaded ends of galvanized conduits and field-cut ends of galvanized supports with
a cold-galvanizing compound approved for use on conductive surfaces.
Follow closely
manufacturers instructions for pre-cleaning surfaces and application.
D.
Factory finishes and shop priming and special finishes are specified in the individual equipment
Specification sections.
E.
Where factory finishes are provided and no additional field painting is specified, touch up or refinish,
as required by, and to the acceptance of, the Architect and Engineer, marred or damaged surfaces so
as to leave a smooth, uniform finish. If, in the opinion of the Architect or Engineer, the finish is too
badly damaged to be properly re-finished, replace the damaged equipment or materials at no
additional costs to the Owner.
3.13 CLEANING
A.
Remove dirt and refuse, resulting from the performance of the Work, from the premises as required
to prevent accumulation. Cooperate in maintaining reasonably clean premises at all times.
B.
Immediately prior to final inspection, make a final cleanup of dirt and refuse resulting from Work and
assist in making the premises broom clean. Clean all material and equipment installed under this
Division.
C.
Remove dirt, dust, plaster, stains, and foreign matter from all surfaces.
D.
Touch up and restore damaged finishes to their original condition.
3.14 ADJUSTING, ALIGNING AND TESTING

A.
Adjust, align and test all electrical equipment furnished and/or installed under this Division.
B.
Check motors for alignment with drive and proper rotation, and adjust as required.
C.
Check and test protective devices for specified and required application, and adjust as required.
D.
Check, test and adjust adjustable parts of all light fixtures and electrical equipment as required to
produce the intended performance.
E.
Verify that completed wiring system is free from short circuits, unintentional grounds, low insulation
impedances, and unintentional open circuits.
F.
After completion, perform tests for continuity, unwanted grounds, and insulation resistance in
accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70 and NETA.
G.
Be responsible for the operation, service and maintenance of all new electrical equipment during
construction and prior to acceptance by the Owner of the complete project under this Contract.
Maintain all electrical equipment in the best operating condition including proper lubrication.

Duluth, GA

16010-12
1550000803
*** Issue 08/19/2003
H.
Notify the Architect immediately of all operational failures caused by defective material, labor or
both.
I.
Maintain service and equipment for all testing of electrical equipment and systems until all Work is
approved and accepted by the Owner.
J.
Keep a calibrated voltmeter and ammeter (true RMS type) available at all times. Provide service for
test readings when and as required.
K.
Refer to individual Sections for additional and specific requirements.
3.15 START-UP OF SYSTEMS

A.
Prior to start-up of electrical systems, check all components and devices, lubricate items
appropriately, and tighten all screwed and bolted connections to manufacturers recommended
torque values using appropriate torque tools.
B.
Each power, lighting and control circuit shall be energized, tested and proved free of breaks, shortcircuits and unwanted grounds.
C.
Adjust taps on each transformer for rated secondary voltages.
D.
Balance all single phase loads at each panelboard, redistributing branch circuit connections until
balance is achieved to plus or minus 10 percent.
E.
Replace all burned-out lamps. Replace the lamps of all light fixtures that use incandescent, halogen
or quartz lamp sources that are installed as part of the finished building, but are used by the
Contractor during construction, with new lamps of appropriate type and wattage prior to turning the
facility over to the Owner or Tenant.
F.
After all systems have been inspected and adjusted, confirm all operating features required by the
Drawings and Specifications and make final adjustments as necessary.
G.
Demonstrate that all equipment and systems perform properly as designed per Drawings and
Specifications.
H.
At the time of final review and tests of the power and lighting systems, all equipment and system
components shall be in place and all connections at panelboards, switches, circuit breakers, and the
like, shall be complete. All fuses shall be in place, and all circuits shall be continuous from point of
service connections to all switches, receptacles, outlets, and the like.
3.16 TEST REPORTS

A.
Perform tests as required by these Specifications and submit the results in the operations and
maintenance manuals. The tests shall establish the adequacy, quality, safety, and reliability for each
electrical system installed. Notify the Architect and Engineer two working days prior to each test.
B.
For specific testing requirements of special systems, refer to the Specification section that describes
that system.
C.
Upon completing each test, record the results, date and time of each test and the conditions under
which the test was conducted. Submit to the Architect, for Engineers review, in duplicate, the test
results for the following electrical items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Building service entrance voltage and amperes at each phase.

Electrical service grounding conditions and grounding resistance.
Proper phasing throughout the entire system.
Voltages (phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral) and amperes at each phase for each panelboard,
switchboard, and the like.
Phase voltages and amperes at each three-phase motor.
Test all wiring devices for electrical continuity and proper polarity of connections.
Promptly correct all failures or deficiencies revealed by these tests as determined by the Engineer.
3.17 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION REVIEW

A.
Prior to requesting a site observation for "CERTIFICATION OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION",

complete the following items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Submit complete Operation and Maintenance Data.

Submit complete Record Drawings.
Perform all required training of Owners personnel.
Turn over all spares and extra materials to the Owner, along with a complete inventory of
spares and extra materials being turned over.

Duluth, GA

16010-13
1550000803
*** Issue 08/19/2003
5.
6.
7.
Perform start-up tests of all systems.

Remove all temporary facilities from the site.
Comply with all requirements for Substantial Completion in the Division 1 and General
Conditions.
B.
Request in writing a review for Substantial Completion. Give the Architect at least seven (7) days
notice prior to the review.
C.
State in the written request that the Contractor has complied with the requirements for Substantial
Completion.
D.
Upon receipt of a request for review, the Architect will either proceed with the review or advise the
Contractor of unfilled requirements.
E.
If the Contractor requests a site visit for Substantial Completion review prior to completing the
above-mentioned items, he shall reimburse the Architect and Engineer for time and expenses incurred
for the visit.
F.
Upon completion of the review, the Architect and Engineer will prepare a final list of outstanding
items to be completed or corrected for final acceptance.
G.
Omissions on the final list shall not relieve the Contractor from the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
H.
Prior to requesting a final review, submit a copy of the final list of items to be completed or
corrected. State in writing that each item has been completed, resolved for acceptance or the
reason it has not been completed.

Duluth, GA

16010-14
1550000803
*** Issue 08/19/2003
AGREEMENT FOR TRANSFER OF INFORMATION

MACHINE-READABLE FORMAT
PROJECT NAME: ___________________________________
Made this day, ______________________________________
PROJECT NO/PHASE: ______________________
By and Between Henderson Engineers, Inc., Lenexa, Kansas (hereinafter referred to as ENGINEER) and
(hereinafter referred to as RECIPIENT).
The enclosed electronic media are provided pursuant to your request for the purpose of production of
shop drawings or record drawings. In using it, modifying it, or accessing information from it, you are
responsible for confirmation, accuracy, and checking of the data from the media. ENGINEER hereby disclaims
any and all responsibility from any results obtained in use of this electronic media and does not guarantee any
accuracy of the information.
RECIPIENT agrees that it shall not use the information provided by ENGINEER for any purpose other
than that described above without the express written consent of ENGINEER. RECIPIENT also hereby
acknowledges that the data delivered by ENGINEER is for use by RECIPIENT only, and is not to be released to
any other party without the written consent of the ENGINEER and does not transfer ownership of the
instruments of professional service.
RECIPIENT understands that the automated conversion of information and data from the system and
format used by ENGINEER to an alternate system or format cannot be accomplished without the possibility of
introduction of inexactitudes, anomalies, and errors. In the event project documentation provided to
RECIPIENT in machine readable form is so converted, RECIPIENT agrees to assume all risk associated
therewith, and to the fullest extent permitted by law, to hold harmless and indemnify ENGINEER from and
against all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, and costs, including but not limited to attorneys fees, arising
therefrom or in connection therewith.
RECIPIENT recognizes that changes or modifications to ENGINEERS instruments of professional
service introduced by anyone other than ENGINEER may result in adverse consequences that ENGINEER can
neither predict nor control. Therefore, and in consideration of ENGINEERS agreement to deliver its instruments
of professional service in machine readable format, RECIPIENT agrees, to the fullest extent permitted by law to
hold harmless and indemnify ENGINEER from and against all claim, liabilities, losses, damages, and costs,
including misuse or reuse by others of the machine readable information and data provided by ENGINEER under
this Agreement. The foregoing indemnification applies, without limitation, to any use of the project
documentation on another project, for additions to this project, or for completion of this project by others;
ENGINEER may authorize excepting only such use in writing.
Send a check for shipping and handling costs in the amount of $200 for an electronic drawing set up
to 12 sheets plus $15 per sheet in excess of 12 sheets payable to Henderson Engineers, Inc. along with
completed and signed agreement and Architects written authorization to receive electronic media. Be sure to
indicate below the desired shipping method, format type and media type.
Sheet numbers requested:_______________________________________________________________________________
1-12 sheets @ $200 +__________ sheet(s) @ $15 each = $_________ total due to Henderson Engineers, Inc.
Signature
Signature
RECIPIENT
Date
Date
Shipping Method
E-Mail
First Class Mail
FedEx Overnight (No P.O.Boxes)
Shipping or E-Mail Address:

Duluth, GA
Format
AutoCAD 2000/2002
AutoCAD 2004/2005
DXF
Media
CD-ROM
DVD
Phone:

16010-15
1550000803
*** Issue 08/19/2003
SECTION 16050
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes limited scope general construction materials and methods, electrical equipment
coordination, and common electrical installation requirements as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Access doors in walls, ceilings, and floors for access to electrical materials and equipment.
Electrical equipment nameplate data.
Sleeves and seals for electrical penetrations.
Joint sealers for sealing around electrical materials and equipment.
Sealing penetrations through noise critical spaces.
This Section also includes:

1.
Raceways, fittings, conductors, cables, cords, connectors, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for
electrical wiring.

A.
Division 7 Section Through-Penetration Firestop Systems for fire stopping materials and installation
at penetrations through walls, ceilings, and other fire-rated elements.
B.
Division 16 Section General Electrical Requirements for general requirements and related
documents that apply to this Section.
C.
Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes, power poles, and multi-outlet
assemblies.
D.
Division 16 Section Grounding and Bonding for conductors and connectors for grounding systems.
E.
Division 16 Section Equipment Wiring Systems for electrical connections to equipment specified
under other Sections, Divisions, or furnished by the Owner.
F.
Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints" for supports, anchors, concrete
bases, seismic restraints and bracing of raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
G.
Division 16 Section Fire Alarm Systems for fire alarm wiring.
H.
Division 17 Section Digital Control Equipment for temperature control wiring.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Electrical Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

a.
Surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and
cabinets.
b. Metal Clad (MC) cable and fittings.
c.
Through and membrane penetration firestopping systems
Shop drawings for:
a.
Detailing fabrication and installation for custom enclosures.
Detailed list of proposed nameplates for Owner/Engineer review and acceptance before
fabrication and attachment.
Schedules indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective demolition
prior to commencement of Work. Include coordination for shut-off of utility services and details
for dust and noise control.
a.
Coordinate sequencing with construction phasing and Owner occupancy specified in
Division 1 Section "Summary of Work."
Through and Membrane Penetration Firestopping Systems Product Schedule: Provide UL listing,
location, wall or floor rating and installation drawing for each penetration fire stop system.
a.
Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's
illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with
modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection
engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.
B.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
C.
Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by

Duluth, GA

16050-1
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
Contractor.
D.
Record Drawings: Submit Record Drawings as required by Division 1 and Division 16 Section
General Electrical Requirements:
1.
Accurately record actual routing of all exterior buried raceway and all interior raceways three
inches and larger. Indicate dimensions from fixed structural elements.
1.4 ABREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

A.
The following abbreviations apply to this and other Sections of these Specifications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
B.
AFF:
AHJ:
ATS:
EMT:
ENT:
EPDM:
FMC:
GRS:
IMC:
LFMC:
LFNC:
MC:
MC-HCF:
MFR:
N/A:
NBR:
NRTL:
PCF:
RAC:
RMC:
RNC:
Above Finished Floor

Authority(ies) having Jurisdiction
Acceptance Testing Specifications
Electrical Metallic Tubing
Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing
Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber
Flexible Metal Conduit
Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit
Intermediate Metal Conduit
Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit
Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit
Metal Clad
Metal Clad Health Care Facility
Manufacturer
Not Available or Not Applicable
Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory
Pounds per Cubic Foot
Rigid Aluminum Conduit
Rigid Metal Conduit
Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
The following definitions apply to this and other Sections of these Specifications:
1.
HOMERUN: That portion of an electrical circuit at a junction box, termination box, receptacle or
switch with termination at an electrical panelboard. Note: Where MC Cable is utilized for
receptacle and/or lighting branch circuiting loads, the originating point of the homerun shall be
at the first load in the circuit or at a junction box in an accessible ceiling space immediately
above the first load.

A.
Materials shall be manufactured by companies that have been specializing in the products specified
in this Section, for a minimum of 3 years.
B.
Test Equipment Suitability and Calibration: Comply with NETA ATS, "Suitability of Test Equipment"
and "Test Instrument Calibration."
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing
Association or is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to AHJ.
1.
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:

1.
2.
E.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical
Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to
supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by an NRTL as defined by OSHA in
29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to AHJ.
Marked for intended use.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1.
2.
To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom
are indicated.
To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other

Duluth, GA

16050-2
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
3.
4.
installations.
To allow right of way for piping, ducts, and other systems installed at required slopes and/or
elevations.
So connecting raceways, cables, and wireways will be clear of obstructions and of the working
and access space of other equipment.
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete,
masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
C.
Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces
or otherwise concealed.
D.
Coordinate electrical testing of electrical, mechanical, and architectural items, so equipment and
systems that are functionally interdependent are tested to demonstrate successful interoperability.
1.7 NOISE CRITICAL SPACES

A.
Many areas of the building, referred to as "noise-critical spaces", require special attention (special
acoustical provisions and restrictions). The table below designates the noise-critical spaces that will
require application of sound attenuating measures and acoustical sealants.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Sound/Lighting Control Rooms

A/V Spaces
Teleconference Rooms
Meeting/Banquet Rooms
Conference Rooms

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1.
2.
B.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
Where a list is provided, manufacturers are listed alphabetically and not in accordance with any
ranking or preference.
2.2 ACCESS PANELS

A.
Available Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Bar-Co., Inc.
J.L Industries.
Karp Associates, Inc.
Milcor Div. Inryco, Inc.
Nystrom Building Products
Wade
Zurn
Access Doors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Steel Access Doors and Frames: Factory-fabricated and assembled units, complete with
attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation.
Joints and seams: continuously welded steel, with welds ground smooth and flush with
adjacent surfaces.
Frames: 16-gauge steel, with a 1-inch-wide exposed perimeter flange for units installed in unit
masonry, pre-cast, or cast-in-place concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling:
a.
For installation in masonry, concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling: 1-inch-wide-exposed
perimeter flange and adjustable metal masonry anchors.
b. For gypsum wallboard or plaster: perforated flanges with wallboard bead.
c.
For full-bed plaster applications: galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead,
welded to perimeter of frame.
Flush Panel Doors: 14-gauge sheet steel, with concealed spring hinges or concealed continuous

Duluth, GA

16050-3
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
5.
6.
piano hinge set to open 175 degrees; factory-applied prime paint.

a.
Fire-Rated Units: Insulated flush panel doors, with continuous piano hinge and self-closing
mechanism.
Locking Devices: Flush, screwdriver-operated cam locks.
Locking Devices: Where indicated, provide 5-pin or 5-disc type cylinder locks, individually
keyed; provide 2 keys.
2.3 NAMEPLATES
A.
Engraved, contrasting color, three-layer, laminated plastic. Nameplates shall indicate the name of the
equipment, load, or circuit as designated on the Drawings and in the Specifications. Nameplates for
all electrical distribution equipment shall also indicate that source feeding thee equipment. For
example: NHDP1 FED FROM MSB1.
B.
Self-adhering, with a permanent, weatherproof adhesive. Attachment method shall be acceptable to

the manufacturers of the equipment to which the nameplates are being applied.
C.
Color: black background with white letters for Normal Power; red background with white letters for
Emergency Power. Letter height: 1/4-inch minimum.
2.4 STEEL SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends
and drip rings.
2.5 CAST IRON WALL PIPE SLEEVS FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES
A.
Manufacturers
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Josam Mfg. Co.

Watts Industries, Inc.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.
Cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange with clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane
flashing.
1.
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.
C.
Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.138-inch thickness as
indicated and of length to suit application.
D.
Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in
Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
2.6 SLEEVE SEALS

A.
Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between
sleeve and raceway or cable.
1.
2.
3.
4.
a.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c.
Metraflex Co.
d. O-Z/Gedney
e.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking or solid sealing links shaped or pre-drilled to fit surface of
cable or raceway. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element. For multi-phase circuits, use
slotted pressure plates if metal.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to
sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.7 JOINT SEALERS

A.
General: Joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and with
joint substrates under conditions of service and application.
B.
Colors: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
C.
Elastomeric Joint Sealers: Provide the following types:

1.
One-part, nonacid-curing, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for masonry, glass, aluminum, and other substrates

Duluth, GA

16050-4
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
2.
3.
D.
recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

One-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for glass, aluminum, and nonporous joint substrates;
formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates; and
subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes.
a.
One-Part, Nonacid-Curing, Silicone Sealant:
3) "Silglaze N SCS 2801," General Electric Co.
4) "Silpruf SCS 2000," General Electric Co.
5) "864," Pecora Corp.
6) "Rhodia 5C," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc.
7) "Rhodia 7B," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc.
8) "Rhodia 7S," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc.
9) ."Omniseal," Sonneborn Building Products Div
b. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant, Silicone Sealant:
2) "Sanitary 1700," General Electric Co.
3) "898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant," Pecora Corp.
4) "Rhodia 7B White," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc.
5) "OmniPlus," Sonneborn Building Products Div.
6) "Tremsil 600 White," Tremco Corp.
Acrylic-Emulsion Sealants: One-part, non-sagging, mildew-resistant, paintable complying with ASTM

C 834 recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations involving
joint movement of not more than plus or minus 5 percent.
1.

a.
"Chem-Calk 600," Bostik Construction Products Div.
b. "AC-20," Pecora Corp.
c.
"Sonolac," Sonneborn Building Products Div.
d. "Tremflex 834," Tremco, Inc.
2.8 FIRESTOPPING
A.
Sealants and accessories shall have fire-resistance ratings indicated, as established by testing
identical assemblies in accordance with UL 2079 or ASTM E 814, by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,
or other NRTL acceptable to AHJ.
1.
a.
Hilti, Inc.
b. RectorSeal.
c.
Specify Technology Inc.
d. 3M corp.
e.
United States Gypsum Company.
2.9 ACOUSTICAL SEALANTS

A.
Foam Backer Rod: Closed cell polyethylene suitable for use as a backing for non-hardening sealant.
B.
Non-Hardening Penetration Sealant:

Non-hardening polysulphide type.
Permanently flexible,
approved firestop putty may be used in lieu of the sealant on foam rod in noise critical walls that are
also fire rated.
C.
Packing Material: Mineral fiber; non-combustible; resistant to water, mildew and vermin. Expanding
resilient foams manufactured for this purpose are an acceptable alternative only if the material
density is at least 15 PCF (40 kg/m3).
2.10 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS

A.
Metal Raceway and Tubing

1.
a.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
b. Alflex Corporation, a Southwire Company
c.
Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.

Duluth, GA

16050-5
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Nonmetallic Raceway and Tubing

1.
2.
C.
d. Electri-Flex Co.
e.
Indalex
f.
Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex
g. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal (Fittings)
h. Republic Raceway
i.
Tyco International; Allied Tube & Conduit Div.
j.
Wheatland Tube Co.
RMC:
a.
GRS: Hot-dip galvanized: ANSI C80.1, UL 6.
b. RAC: ANSI C80.5, UL6A.
IMC: ANSI C80.6, UL 1242.
Plastic-Coated GRS and Fittings: NEMA RN 1, UL-listed.
Plastic-Coated IMC and Fittings: NEMA RN 1, UL-listed.
EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3, UL 797.
a.
Fittings: Set-screw or compression type.
FMC: Aluminum or Zinc-coated steel: UL 1.
LFMC: Flexible steel raceway with PVC jacket: UL 360.
Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with raceway and tubing materials.
a.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc. (Tubing)
b. American International.
c.
Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
d. Arnco Corp.
e.
Cantex Inc.
f.
Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.
g. Condux International.
h. ElecSYS, Inc.
i.
Electri-Flex Co.
j.
Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
k.
Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
l.
Prime Conduit (formerly Carlon)
m. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.
n. Spiralduct, Inc./AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
o. Superflex Ltd.
p. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
RNC: Schedule 40 and 80 PVC: NEMA TC 2, UL 651.
a.
Fittings: match to raceway type and material: NEMA TC 3, NEMA TC 6, UL 651, as
applicable.
Metal Wireways
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
a.
Cooper B-Line
b. EPI-Electrical Enclosures
c.
Hoffman.
d. Square D.
Material and Construction: 14 gauge (minimum) sheet steel, sized and shaped as indicated,
NEMA 1.
Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring
system and to comply with NFPA 70. Where indicated, provide a barrier to divide wireway into
compartments.
NEMA 1
a.
Used for indoor and dry applications only
b. Flat Cover provide keyhole screw slots
c.
Hinged cover
NEMA 3R
Wireways used for electrical service entrances:
a.
Wireways used for interior electrical service entrances shall have hinged type covers with

Duluth, GA

16050-6
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
padlock hasps.
Wireways used for exterior electrical service entrances shall have hinged type flanged and
gasketed covers with padlock hasps.
Wireways for non-service entrance uses:
a.
Interior covers shall be Screw-cover type.
b. Exterior covers shall be hinged flanged-and-gasketed type.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard phosphate pre-treatment and baked enamel finish.
b.
7.
8.
D.
Nonmetallic Wireways
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Surface Metal Raceways

1.
2.
3.
F.
a.
Enduro Composite Systems
b. Hoffman.
c.
Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
Description: Fiberglass reinforced polyester, extruded and fabricated to size and shape
indicated, with no holes or knockouts. Gasketed cover with oil-resistant gasket material and
fastened with stainless steel captive screws; flanged connections, with stainless-steel screws
and oil-resistant gaskets.
Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on cover and
mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.
Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to
comply with NFPA 70.
a.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
b. Walker Systems, Inc.
c.
Wiremold Company
Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Finish with manufacturer's
standard prime coating.
Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that
match and mate with raceways.
Surface Nonmetallic Raceways

1.
2.
3.
a.
Butler Manufacturing Co.; Walker Division.
b. Enduro Composite Systems.
c.
Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Device Division.
d. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
e.
Panduit Corp.
f.
Walker Systems, Inc.
g. Wiremold Company
Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC compound with matte texture and
manufacturer's standard color.
Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that
match and mate with raceways.
2.11 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A.
General
1.
a.
Advance Wire and Cable
b. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
c.
Alan Wire
d. Alcan Aluminum Corporation; Alcan Cable Div
e.
ALFLEX Corporation, a Southwire Company
f.
American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company
g. Encore Wire Corporation
h. General Cable (Flexible Cords)
i.
Northern Cables Inc.
j.
Okonite Company

Duluth, GA

16050-7
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Metal Clad Cable, Type MC (USED ONLY AS INDICATED ON PLANS)

1.
2.
C.
k.
Southwire Company
Conductor Material: Annealed (soft) copper complying with ICEA S-95-658/NEMA WC70 and
UL Standards 44 or 83, as applicable; solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller; concentric,
compressed stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger and stranded for all flexible cords, cables, and
control wiring.
[Compact stranded, aluminum alloy (AA-8000 Series), complying with ICEA S-95658/NEMA WC70; No. 2 AWG or larger only.
Conductor
Insulation
Types:
Type THHN/THWN-2
complying
with
ICEA
S-95658/NEMA WC70.
Sizes of conductors and cables indicated or specified are American Wire Gage (Brown and
Sharpe).
Unless indicated otherwise, special purpose conductors and cables, such as low voltage control
and shielded instrument wiring, shall be as recommended by the system equipment
manufacturer.
Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable
construction, and ratings.
MC Cable (with insulated green grounding conductor, no bonding conductor):

a. Manufacturers:
1)
AFC Cable Systems, Inc (MC Lite)
2) Encore Wire Corporation (MC)
3) Kaf-Tech
4) Southwire Company (Amorlite)
b. 600V, Unjacketed and/or PVC-jacketed UL Standard 83, UL Standard 1569 for Type MC,
UL Standard 1685, Federal Specification A-A59544, IEEE 1202 Vertical Cable Tray Flame
Test and the NEC. Type MC Cable shall be listed for use in UL 1, 2, and 3 Hour ThroughPenetration Firestop Systems.
c.
Armor Assembly: Aluminum interlocked armor (aluminum color).
d. Phase Conductors: Solid soft-drawn copper, THHN-insulated single conductors, color
code: ICEA Method 1.
e.
Grounding Conductor: Solid soft-drawn copper, THHN/THWN green insulated grounding
conductor sized per NEC Table 250.122.
f.
Marking: Cable markings shall comply with the requirements on NEC Art. 310.11(1).
MC Cable Fittings:
a.
Manufacturer & Model:
1) Arlington (4010 AST snap-in type): (SG38 saddle type)
2) Crouse-Hinds (QLK Quick-Lok Series, saddle type); ACB Series; set-screw, saddle
type).
3) O-Z Gedney (AMC-50 speed-lock, saddle type).
4) Thomas & Betts (XC-730 Series cable-lok, saddle type); 3110 Series Tite-Bite).
b. Fittings used for connecting Type MC cable to boxes, cabinets, or other equipment shall be
UL listed and identified for such use with an MCIA marking on the fitting carton or
package.
c.
Fittings shall be insulated throat type not requiring the use of anti-short bushings.
d. Romex style, clamp type fittings are not acceptable.
Nonmetallic Sheathed Cable

1.
2.
3.
NM or NMC cable:
a.
600V, THHN- or XHHW-insulated conductors (2, 3 or 4 as indicated on Drawings or as
required); color code: ICEA Method 1, with green insulated or bare grounding conductor;
color-coded PVC-jacket for quick identification of conductor size; UL Standards 44 or 83
(as applicable), and 719, NFPA 70 Article 334.
UF Cable:
a.
600V, THHN/THWN- or XHHW-insulated copper conductors (2 or 3 as indicated on
Drawings or as required); color code: ICEA Method 1, with grounding conductor; Jacketed
with sunlight, moisture and fungus resistant gray PVC; UL Standards 44 or 83 (as
applicable), and 493, NFPA 70 Article 340.
USE Cable:

Duluth, GA

16050-8
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
a.
600V, CU conductors (2 or 3 as indicated on Drawings or as required); THHN/THWN- or

XHHW-2 insulation; cable assembly; concentrically applied un-insulated (neutral) conductor
and reinforcement tape, jacketed with sunlight resistant gray polyvinyl chloride (PVC); UL
Standards 44 or 83 (as applicable), and 854, NFPA 70 Article 338.
b.
D.
Single Conductors
1.
2.
E.
2.
120/240V
240/120V
208Y/120V
480Y/277V
A
B
C
Neutral
Equipment Ground
Isolated Ground
Black
Red
N/A
White
Green
N/A
Black
Orange
Red
White
Green
N/A
Black
Red
Blue
White
Green
Green/Yellow
Stripe
Brown
Orange
Yellow
Gray**
Green
N/A
**Except as provided in NFPA 70.

Conductors shall not be smaller than No. 12 AWG, except that wiring for signal and pilot
control circuits and pre-manufactured whips for light fixtures may be No. 14 AWG.
600V, multi-conductor (2, 3, or 4 as indicated on the Drawings), oil-resistant black jacket,

extra-hard-usage; Type SEO, SO, or STO for indoor dry and damp locations; SEOW, SOW, or
STOW for damp, wet, and outdoor locations; or as required by the manufacturer of the
equipment to which the cords are connected.
300V, multi-conductor (2, 3, or 4 as indicated on the Drawings), oil-resistant black jacket, hardusage; Type SJEO, SJO, or SJTO for indoor dry locations; SJEOW, SJOW, or SJTOW for
damp, wet, and outdoor locations; or as required by the manufacturer of the equipment to
which the cords are connected.
Control Wiring
1.
2.
G.
PHASE
Flexible Cords
1.
F.
600V, THHN/THWN-insulated conductors, color-coded as follows:
[Refer to Division 17 Section Digital Control Equipment]

Unless otherwise noted, all control wiring will be the responsibility of the Section or Division in
which the control system is specified.
Connectors
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
a.
AMP; Tyco
b. FCI-Burndy
c.
Gould
d. Ideal Industries, Inc.
e.
Ilsco
f.
O-Z/Gedney
g. NSi Industries, Inc.
h. Thomas and Betts
i.
3-M Electrical Products Division
Compression connectors for conductors No. 8 AWG and larger: Long-barreled, UL 486-listed,
bare copper, compression type (Burndy "Hylug, or equal), insulated with clamp-on, cold-shrink,
or molded covers, or wrapped with multiple over-lapping layers of 3-M Scotch electrical tape.
a.
Termination fittings: 1- or 2-hole pad and inspection port.
Mechanical connections for conductors No. 8 AWG and larger: UL-listed, bare copper , dualrated, mechanical type, insulated with clamp-on, cold-shrink, or molded covers, or wrapped
with multiple over-lapping layers of 3-M Scotch electrical tape.
a.
Termination fittings: 1- or 2-hole pad and inspection port.
Connectors for solid conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller: Insulated winged wire nuts. Colorcoded for size, except use green only for grounding connections.
Connectors for stranded conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller: Tinned copper, insulated-sleeve,
compression type, UL-listed, with wire insulation grip. Terminations: ring-tongue type.

Duluth, GA

16050-9
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
6.
Connectors and terminations for aluminum conductors and cables No. 2 and larger: UL 486B
listed and marked AL7CU for 75 deg C rated conductors and AL9CU for 90 deg C rated
conductors.
2.12 BOXES, ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS

A.
General
1.
B.
a.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.
b. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company.
c.
Erickson Electrical Equipment Co.
d. Hoffman.
e.
Hubbell, Inc.
f.
Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.
g. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal.
h. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.
i.
Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.
j.
Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM Division.
k.
Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
l.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
m. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
n. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary
Outlet Boxes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1; UL514A.

Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2
Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified in the
following paragraphs. Manufacturers and model numbers listed are used only to represent the
characteristics required and are not intended to restrict the use of other Available Manufacturers
listed above and models that meet the specified criteria.
a.
Boxes for exposed work: deep drawn type with raised covers:
1) Appleton 4S 1/2-DR; 8300 series cover.
2) RACO 190 series; 800 series cover.
3) Steel City 52150 series; RS series cover.
b. Concealed and exposed boxes for lighting:
1) Appleton 40-3/4.
2) RACO 160 series.
3) Steel City 54170 series.
c.
Boxes imbedded in concrete for lighting:
1) Appleton OCR
2) RACO 270 or 280 series.
3) Steel City 54500 series.
d. Boxes for flush switches, receptacles, telephone, data or other general devices:
1) Appleton 4SVB series; 8400 series cover.
2) RACO 198 series; 770 series cover.
3) Steel City CWV series; 52-C-00 series cover.
e.
Boxes for flush switches, receptacles, telephone, data or other general devices installed in
masonry construction:
1) Appleton MI-250 series or MI-350 series.
2) RACO 690 series or 960 series.
3) Steel City GW series.
f.
Exposed weatherproof boxes for general devices: cast aluminum with mounting lugs and
neoprene gasket:
1) Appleton FDB series.
2) RACO 5300 series.
3) Steel City T100L or LT100L series.
g. Exposed weatherproof boxes for general devices: cast aluminum with neoprene gasket:
1) Appleton FS series.
2) RACO 5300 series.
3) Steel City T100 or LT100 series.

Duluth, GA

16050-10
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
C.
Junction and Pull Boxes

1.
2.
D.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
Floor Boxes
1.
General:
a.
Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified in the
tables below. Manufacturers and model numbers listed are used only to represent the
characteristics required and are not intended to restrict the use of other Available
Manufacturers listed above and models that meet the specified criteria.
b. Floor boxes used for power: Include a minimum of one normal 20A, 125V NEMA 5-20R
duplex receptacle unless noted or scheduled otherwise on the Drawings. Wiring device
color: Refer to Division 16 Section Wiring Devices, or as indicated on the Drawings.
c.
Floor boxes utilized for telephone, data, or both: Include provisions for mounting
telephone/data outlets in accordance with the requirements of the telephone/data systems
provider.
d. UL514A listed for scrub water exclusion for all floor types.
2.
Box Type A: For slab on grade: round-faced, watertight, Class 1, fully adjustable cast iron box.
For slab above grade: round-faced, concrete-tight, fully adjustable, stamped galvanized steel
box. Brass cover plate and brass carpet ring. Provide aluminum cover plate and trim in lieu of
brass when directed by Architect. Provide shallow boxes where necessitated by slab depth.
MFR
Steel City
Walker
CAST IRON
BOX
602
887
STAMPED
STEEL BOX
68D
886
COVER PLATE
(POWER)
P60-DS
895T
COVER PLATE
(TEL/DATA)
P60-3/4-2
896TCK
Hubbell
B2536
B2527
S3925
S2525
3.
P60-CP
895(pwr), 896CK
(tel/data)
S3082
Box Type B: For slab on grade: single-gang, rectangular, watertight, Class 1, fully adjustable,
cast iron box. For slab above grade: single-gang, rectangular, concrete-tight, fully adjustable,
stamped galvanized steel box. Brass cover plate and brass carpet ring. Provide aluminum cover
plate and trim in lieu of brass when directed by Architect. Provide shallow boxes where
necessitated by slab depth.
MFR
Steel City
Walker
Hubbell
4.
CARPET TRIM
CAST IRON
BOX
641
880CS1
B2436
STAMPED
STEEL BOX
N/A
880S1
B2431
COVER PLATE
(POWER)
P64-DS
828R
S3825
COVER PLATE
(TEL/DATA)
P64-3/4-2
829CK-3/4
S2425
CARPET TRIM
P64-CP
817C, 817T (for tile)
SB-3083
Box Type C: For slab on grade: two-gang, rectangular, watertight, Class 1, fully adjustable,
cast iron box with removable partition. For slab above grade: two-gang, rectangular, concretetight, fully adjustable, stamped galvanized steel box. Brass cover plate and brass carpet ring.
Provide aluminum cover plate and trim in lieu of brass when directed by Architect. Provide
shallow boxes where necessitated by slab depth.
MFR
Steel City
Walker
Hubbell

Duluth, GA
CAST IRON
BOX
642
880CS2
B4233
STAMPED
STEEL BOX
N/A
880S2
B2432
COVER PLATE
(POWER)
P64-DS
828R
S3825
COVER PLATE
(TEL/DATA)
P64-3/4-2
829CK-3/4
S2425

16050-11
CARPET TRIM
P64-2G-CP
SB-3084
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
5.
Box Type D: For slab on grade: three-gang, rectangular, watertight, Class 1, fully adjustable,
cast iron box with removable partition. For slab above grade: three-gang, rectangular, concretetight, fully adjustable, stamped galvanized steel box. Brass cover plate and brass carpet ring.
Provide aluminum cover plate and trim in lieu of brass when directed by Architect. Provide
shallow boxes where necessitated by slab depth.
MFR
CAST IRON
BOX
643
880CS3
B4333
Steel City
Walker
Hubbell
6.
CAST IRON
BOX
664-CI
3SFBC
Steel City
Hubbell
Steel City
Walker
Hubbell (six gang)
9.
COVER PLATE
(TEL/DATA)
P64-3/4-2
829CK-3/4
S2425
CARPET TRIM
P64-3G-CP
SB-3085
STAMPED
STEEL BOX
664
3SFBSS
COVER
664-CST Series
3SFBA Series
Box Type F - Multi-Service (3 or 4 compartment): For slab on grade: watertight, Class 1, fully
adjustable, cast iron. For slab above grade: concrete-tight, Class 2, fully adjustable, stamped
galvanized steel. Three to four compartments, with full width tunneling between opposite
compartments, 3-1/2-inch maximum overall depth, and provisions for power receptacles and
telephone/data services as scheduled or noted on the Drawings. Furnish hinged cover and
nylon or polycarbonate flanged trim with standard color as directed by Architect.
MFR
8.
COVER PLATE
(POWER)
P64-DS
828R
S3825
Box Type E - Multi-Service (2 compartment): For slab on grade: watertight, Class 1, fully
adjustable, cast iron. For slab above grade: concrete-tight, Class 2, fully adjustable, stamped
galvanized steel. Two compartments - one side plate with knockouts for data and telephone
jacks; one side plate with provisions for one duplex receptacle. Furnish polycarbonate or nylon
cover and flange piece with standard color as directed by Architect. Provide shallow boxes
where necessitated by slab depth.
MFR
7.
STAMPED
STEEL BOX
N/A
880S3
B2433
CAST IRON
BOX
GAB-4/AFM-4
RFB4-CI
LCFBCA
STAMPED
STEEL BOX
665
RFB4
LCFBSSA
COVER
665-CST (for steel box)
RAKM2
LCFBCA Series
Box Type G - Access Floor Small Service Module: Nominal 8-inch x 8-inch drop-in service
module for installation in raised access floors. Galvanized steel or cast aluminum construction,
hinged outer cover with flip-lid for cable egress, and nylon or polycarbonate trim with standard
color as directed by Architect. Minimum of two (2) compartments with provisions for power
receptacles and telephone/data services as scheduled or noted on the Drawings.
MFR
BOX AND COVER
Steel City
Walker
Hubbell
AFM-4
WAF1
HBLAFB401 (Base)/HBLTCGNT (Cover)
Box Type H - Access Floor Large Service Module: Nominal 8-inch x 10-inch drop-in service
module for installation in raised access floors. Galvanized steel or cast aluminum construction,
hinged outer cover with flip-lid for cable egress, and nylon or polycarbonate trim with standard
color as directed by Architect. Minimum of two (2) compartments with provisions for power
receptacles and telephone/data services as scheduled or noted on the Drawings.
MFR

Duluth, GA
BOX AND COVER

16050-12
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
Steel City
Walker
Hubbell
E.
Fire-Rated Poke-Through Outlets

1.
2.
3.
F.
AFM-6
WF3
AFB301 (Base)/HBLTCGNT (Cover)
UL listed and UL Fire Classified, flush type, with one- to four-hour fire rating, as required by
floor rating and type.
Flush type:
a.
Multi-service type: Capable of supporting, at a minimum, a duplex 20A/125V receptacle (or
equivalent), pre-wired to a junction box, and up to four communication/data jacks.
b. Furniture-feed type: Single- or three-service type as indicated on the Drawings.
c.
Cover plate, with individual device covers, and tile and/or terrazzo floor flange, UL514A
listed for scrub water exclusion.
d. ColorBrassor as directed by the Architect.
Service Pedestal type:
a.
Multi-service type: two-, four-, six-, or eight-gang, with quantities and types of devices as
b. Housing: Brushed cast aluminumor as directed by the Architect.
Cabinets and Enclosures

1.
General:
a.
Compliance: NEMA 250; UL 50 and 508A, as applicable.
b. NEMA Type 1: Code-gauge phosphatized steel with continuously welded seams;
manufacturer's standard ANSI 61 gray polyester powder finish inside and out; nongasketed removable hinged front cover, with flush keyed latch and concealed hinge; collar
studs.
c.
NEMA Type 3R: Code-gauge galvanized steel with drip shield top, seam-free front, side,
and back; manufacturer's standard ANSI 61 gray polyester powder finish inside and out;
non-gasketed continuous-hinged door, with stainless steel pin; captive, plated steel cover
screws; hasp and staple for padlocking; collar studs.
d. Removable painted steel interior panel mounted on standoffs; metal barriers to separate
wiring of different systems and voltages.
e.
Where keyed locks are indicated, provide 2 keys for each enclosure, with all locks keyed
alike.
f.
Provide enclosures wider than 36 inches with double doors; removable center posts;
internal bracing, supports, or both, as required to maintain their structural integrity; and,
accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
g. Provide clamps, grids, slotted wireways, or similar devices to which or by which wiring
may be secured. Provide DIN-rail mounted terminal strips for terminating all incoming and
outgoing control wiring, and power terminal blocks for incoming/outgoing power wiring.
h. Provide metal barriers to separate compartments containing control wiring operating at less
than 50 volts from power and higher-voltage control wiring.
2.13 FACTORY FINISHES

A.
Finish: For metal wireway and surface raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide
manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B.
Finish: For metal wireway and surface raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide
manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled metal wireway and surface raceways,
enclosures, and cabinets before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for
wall-mounting items, unless indicated otherwise.
C.
Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and
install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these

Duluth, GA

16050-13
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
requirements.
D.
Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of

both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate
future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
E.
Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2 ACCESS DOORS

A.
Furnish adequately sized access doors for the devices served, with a minimum size of 18 inches x 18
inches, for installation under Division Finishes.
B.
Furnish access doors of the proper construction for type of ceiling or wall construction where
installed.
C.
Verify the exact location, sizes, and types of all access doors with the Architect prior to purchase.
D.
Provide access doors for all concealed electrical equipment, except where above lay-in ceilings.
E.
Coordinate with architectural finishes to set frames accurately in position and securely attached to
supports, with face panels plumb and level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.
F.
Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.
G.
Label all access doors per Division 16 Section Electrical Identification.
3.3 NAMEPLATES
A.
Provide nameplates for the following items:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Switchboards
Panelboards
Disconnect switches
Enclosed circuit breakers
Starters
Miscellaneous cabinets
Access panels
Feeder devices in switchboards, distribution panelboards, and motor control centers
Attach nameplates securely and permanently to the equipment, and in a manner acceptable to the
equipment manufacturer.
3.4 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS

A.
Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate
concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
B.
Provide all sleeves for required openings in all concrete and masonry construction and fire, smoke, or
both, partitions, for all electrical Work that passes through such construction. Coordinate with all
other trades and Divisions to dimension and lay out all such openings.
C.
Only those openings specifically indicated on the Architectural or Structural Drawings will be
provided under other Divisions.
D.
New Construction:
1.
E.
Coordinate with Divisions 3 and 4 for installation of sleeves and sleeve seals integrally in castin-place, precast, and masonry walls and horizontal slabs where indicated on the Drawings or as
required to support raceway penetrations.
Construction in Existing Facilities:

1.
Saw cut or core drill existing walls and slabs to install sleeves and sleeve seals in existing
facilities. Do not cut or drill any walls or slabs without first coordinating with, and receiving
approval from, the Architect, Owner, or both. Seal sleeves and sleeve seals into concrete walls
or slabs with a waterproof non-shrink grout acceptable to the Architect.
F.
Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in
Division 7 Section.
G.
Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed
openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. Do not cut or core drill new
construction without written approval from the Architect and Structural Engineer.
H.
Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
I.
Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1.
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16

Duluth, GA

16050-14
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
2.
inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more
sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
J.
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless
openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.
K.
Install pipe and rectangular sleeves in above-grade walls and slabs, where penetrations are not
subject to hydrostatic water pressures. Ensure that drip ring is fully encased and sealed within the
wall or slab.
L.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
M.
Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.
N.
Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable
unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require a different clearance; in which
case, size sleeves as recommended by the seal manufacturer.
O.
Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with
approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
P.
Above Grade Concrete or Masonry Penetrations

1.
2.
Q.
Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves. Size sleeves to
allow for 1-inch (or larger, if required by the mechanical sleeve manufacturer) annular clear space
between sleeve and cable or raceway. Provide mechanical sleeve seal.
1.
2.
R.
Provide sleeves for cables or raceways passing through above grade concrete or masonry walls,
concrete floor or roof slabs. Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes in existing masonry
walls, concrete floors or roofs. Provide sleeves as follows:
a.
Install schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
b. Install galvanized sheet metal for sleeves 6 inches in diameter and larger, thickness shall
be 0.138 inches.
c.
Install galvanized sheet metal for rectangular sleeves with the following minimum metal
thickness:
1) For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater
than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.
2) For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and
1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
d. Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves are acceptable for use in areas without return air plenums.
Seal elevated floor, exterior wall and roof penetrations watertight and weathertight with nonshrink, non-hardening commercial sealant. Pack with mineral wool and seal both ends with
minimum of of sealant.
Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pipe material and
size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular
space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing
elements to expand and make watertight seal.
Inspect installed sleeve and sleeve-seal installations for damage and faulty work. Verify
watertight integrity of sleeves and seals installed below grade to seal against hydrostatic
pressure.
Elevated Floor Penetrations of Waterproof Membrane:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Provide cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves, extend top of wall pipe minimum 1 above finish floor.
Size wall pipe for minimum annular space between wall pipe and cable or raceway.
Pack with mineral wool and seal both ends with minimum of of waterproof sealant. Refer
to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
Secure waterproof membrane flashing between clamping flange and clamping ring. Comply
with requirements for flashing specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
Extend bottom of wall pipe below floor slab as required and secure underdeck clamp to hold
wall pipe rigidly in place.
S.
Interior Foundation Penetrations: Provide sleeves for horizontal raceway passing through or under
foundation. Sleeves shall be cast iron soil pipe two nominal pipe sizes larger than the pipe served.
T.
Concrete Slab on Grade Penetrations:

1.
Provide thick cellular foam insulation around perimeter of raceway passing thru concrete
slab on grade. Insulation shall extend to 2 above and below the concrete slab.

Duluth, GA

16050-15
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
U.
Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable or
raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Pack with mineral
wool and seal both ends with minimum of of sealant. Refer to Division 07 Section for materials
and installation.
V.
Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or duct, using joint
sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Pack with mineral wool and seal both ends
with minimum of of waterproof sealant. Refer to Division 07 Section for materials and
installation.
W.
Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type
flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
X.
SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Y.
Install sleeve seals for all underground raceway penetrations through walls at elevations below
finished grade. Additionally, install seals inside raceways, after conductors or cables have been
installed, in all raceway penetrations through walls at elevations below finished grade.
Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable
material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve
seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against
pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
Inspect installed sleeve and sleeve-seal installations for damage and faulty work. Verify watertight
integrity of sleeves and seals installed below grade and above grade where installed to seal against
hydrostatic pressure.
3.5 FIRESTOPPING
A.
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire/smoke rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are
specified in Division 7 Section.
3.6 JOINT SEALERS

A.
Preparation for Joint Sealers

1.
2.
B.
Application of Joint Sealers

1.
2.
C.
Clean surfaces of penetrations, sleeves, or both, immediately before applying joint sealers, to
comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturer.
Apply joint sealer primer to substrates as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer. Protect
adjacent areas from spillage and migration of primers, using masking tape. Remove tape
immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
a.
Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of elastomeric joint sealants.
b. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 790 for use of acrylic-emulsion joint sealants.
Tooling: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool
sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and
adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by
sealant manufacturer.
Installation of Fire-Stopping Sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing, and other accessory
materials, to fill openings around electrical raceways penetrating floors and walls, to provide firestops with fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which penetration occurs.
Comply with installation requirements established by testing and inspecting agency.
3.7 ACOUSTICAL PENETRATIONS

A.
Do not allow direct contact of raceways with shaft walls, floor slabs and/or partitions. Sleeve, pack
and seal airtight with foam rod, non-hardening sealant and/or packing material, as described herein,
for all penetrations by raceway, through surfaces that encompass or are between noise critical
spaces. Seal and pack with caulking for the full depth of the penetration all openings around
raceways in the structure surrounding the electrical equipment and surrounding noise-critical spaces.
This includes all slab penetrations and penetrations of noise critical walls.
B.
Where a raceway passes through a wall, ceiling or floor slab of a noise critical space, cast or grout a
metal sleeve into the structure. The internal diameter or dimensions of the sleeve shall be 2 inches
larger than the external diameter or dimensions of the raceway passing through it. After all of the

Duluth, GA

16050-16
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
raceways are installed in that area, check the clearances and correct, if necessary, to within 1/2inch. Pack the voids full depth with packing material sealed at both ends, 1-inch deep, with nonhardening sealant backed by foam rod.
3.8 RACEWAYS
A.
General
1.
Provide sizes and types of raceways as indicated on the Drawings. Sizes are based on THWN
insulated copper conductors, except where noted otherwise. Where sizes are not shown on the
Drawings or in the Specifications, size raceways in accordance with NFPA 70 requirements for
the number, size and type of conductors installed. Minimum raceway size: 1/2 inch (concealed
and exposed); 1 inch (underground and underslab).
2. Provide all raceways, fittings, supports, and miscellaneous hardware required for a complete
electrical system as described by the Drawings and Specifications.
3. Install a green-insulated, equipment-grounding conductor, which is bonded to the electrical
system ground, in all raceways, with the exception of Service Entrance raceways.
4. Install raceways concealed in walls or above suspended ceilings in finished areas. When
approved by the Architect, raceways may be installed concealed in elevated floor slabs. Do not
install raceways horizontally within slabs on grade.
5. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved
portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
6. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
7. Make bends and offsets so inside diameters are not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same
plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.
8. Install raceways:
a.
To meet the requirements of the structure and the requirements of all other Work on the
Project.
b. To clear all openings, depressions, ducts, pipes, reinforcing steel, and so on.
c.
Within or passing through the concrete structure in such a manner so as not to adversely
affect the integrity of the structure. Become familiar with the Architectural and the
Structural Drawings and their requirements affecting the raceway installation.
If
necessary, consult with the Architect.
d. Parallel or perpendicular to building lines or column lines.
e.
When concealed, with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance, considering
type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.
9. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and leave
at least 2 inches of concrete cover.
a.
Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete
placement.
b. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete.
c.
Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement.
Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.
d. Change from RNC to coated GRS or IMC before rising above the floor.
10. Where masonry walls are left unfinished, coordinate raceway installations with other trades so
that the raceways and boxes are concealed and the wall will have a neat and smooth
appearance.
11. Support raceways from structural elements of the building as required by NFPA 70 and per
Division 16 Section Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints. Do not support raceways by
hangers used for any other systems foreign to the electrical systems; and, do not attach to
other foreign systems. Do not lay raceways on top of the ceiling system.
12. Provide support spacing in accordance with NFPA 70 requirements, and at a minimum in
accordance with NEMA standards. Support by the following methods:
a.
Attach single raceway directly to structural steel with beam clamps.
b. Attach single raceway directly to concrete with one-hole clamps or clips and anchors.
Outdoors and wherever subject to dampness or moisture, offset raceways from the surface
by using galvanized clamps and clamp backs, to mitigate moisture entrapment between
raceways and surfaces.
c.
Attach groups of raceway to structural steel with slotted support system attached with
beam clamps. Attach raceway to slotted channel with approved raceway clamps.
d. Attach groups of raceway to concrete with cast-in-place steel slotted channel fabricated

Duluth, GA

16050-17
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
B.
specifically for concrete embedment. Attach raceway to steel slotted channel with
approved raceway clamps.
e.
Hang plumb horizontally suspended single raceway using a threaded rod. Attach threaded
rods to concrete with anchors and to structural steel with beam clamps. Attach raceway
to threaded rod with approved raceway clamps.
f.
Hang horizontally suspended groups of raceway using steel slotted support system
suspended from threaded rods. Attach threaded rods to concrete with anchors and to
structural steel with beam clamps. Attach raceway to steel slotted channel with approved
raceway clamps.
g. Support conductors in vertical raceway in accordance with NFPA 70 requirements.
h. Cross-brace suspended raceway to prevent lateral movement during seismic activity.
i.
Use pre-fabricated non-metallic spacers for parallel runs of underground or under-slab
conduits, either direct buried or encased in concrete.
Install electrically- and physically-continuous raceways between connections to outlets, boxes,
panelboards, cabinets, and other electrical equipment with a minimum possible number of bends
and not more than the equivalent of four 90-degree bends between boxes. Make bends smooth
and even, without flattening raceway or flaking the finish.
Protect all electrical Work against damage during construction. Repair all Work damaged or
moved out of line after rough-in, to meet the Architects approval, without additional cost to
the Owner. Cover or temporarily plug openings in boxes or raceways to keep raceways clean
during construction. Clean all raceways prior to pulling conductors or cables.
Align and install raceway terminations true and plumb.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
Install a pull cord in each empty raceway that is left empty for installation of wires or cables by
other trades or under separate contracts. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with
not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull cord.
Install approved expansion/deflection fittings where raceways pass through or over building
expansion joints.
Route raceway through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through roof seals approved
by the Architect, the roofing contractor, or both. Obtain approval for all roof penetrations and
seal types from the Architect, Owner, roofing contractor, or all three as required to maintain
new or existing roofing warranties.
Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with
UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box
with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install
raceway sealing fittings at the following points:
a.
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
b. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding
equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with
finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with EMT; FMC may be used 6 inches above
the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment
connections.
RMC
1.
2.
Use
a.
b.
c.
IMC in the following areas:

Where indicated.
Exterior applications where above grade and exposed.
Below grade when concrete-encased, plastic-coated, or provided with a corrosion resistant
approved mastic coating.
d. All raceways penetrating transitioning from below grade to above grade or through slabs
on grade (use plastic-coated raceway or provide with a corrosion resistant approved mastic
coating). This shall include the 90-degree elbow below grade and the entire vertical
transition to above grade.
e.
All branch-circuit raceways embedded in and routed into concrete light pole foundations,
including elbows (use plastic-coated raceway or provide with a corrosion resistant
approved mastic coating where raceways penetrate concrete surfaces).
Use RAC in the following areas:
a.
Only where specifically indicated on the Drawings.

Duluth, GA

16050-18
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
b.
c.
d.
3.
C.
EMT
1.
2.
D.
2.
3.
Use FMC or LFMC:

a.
For the final 24 inches of raceway to all motors, transformers, and other equipment subject
to vibration or movement.
b. From outlet boxes (attached to building structure) to recessed light fixtures. Install
sufficient length to allow for relocating each light fixture within a 5-foot radius of its
installed location.
Do not use FMC or LFMC:
a.
For branch circuits, homeruns or feeders.
b. In lengths exceeding 6 feet.
Use FMC only in dry locations; use LFMC in damp, wet, corrosive, and outdoor locations, and
food service and kitchen areas.
RNC
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Use EMT in the following areas:

a.
Where indicated.
b. Interior concealed locations for:
1) Branch and feeder circuits.
2) Low-voltage control, security, and fire alarm circuits
Do not use EMT:
a.
Below grade.
b. In exterior applications when exposed.
FMC and LFMC

1.
E.
Indoors above grade.

Interior wet or damp locations.
For circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such
circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.
Do not use RAC:
a.
Below grade.
b. Imbedded in concrete or other areas corrosive to RAC.
Solvent-weld RNC fittings and raceway couplings per the manufacturers instructions and make
all connections watertight. Use solvent of the same manufacturer as the raceway.
Where installed exposed outdoors or other areas subject to temperature variations, install
expansion fittings per Article 352.44 of NFPA 70, to accommodate thermal expansion in
straight runs.
Use RNC in the following locations:
a.
Only where specifically indicated, and then only as specified below.
b. Underground, single and grouped, in lieu of GRS or IMC, when indicated.
1) Direct buried (use approved rigid PVC interlocking spacers, selected to provide
minimum duct spacing and cover depths indicated while supporting ducts during
backfilling; produced by the same manufacturer as the ducts).
2) Concrete-encased (use approved rigid PVC interlocking spacers, selected to provide
minimum duct spacing and cover depths indicated while supporting ducts during
concreting and backfilling; produced by the same manufacturer as the ducts).
3) At a minimum, spacing between conduits shall be equal to the diameter of the largest
conduit where multiple conduits are adjacent to each other. Additional spacing
distance may be required by NEMA, NECA or elsewhere in the construction
documents.
Do not use RNC:
a.
Exposed indoors
b. In occupied spaces.
c.
In return air plenums.
d. Where subject to physical damage.
e.
Where not permitted by codes.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1.
2.
RMC and IMC: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.
PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings and installation tools approved
by the manufacturer for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after
installing conduits. Replace all fittings and conduits that have any portion of the coating

Duluth, GA

16050-19
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
3.
4.
scraped off to bare metal, at no additional cost to the Owner.

Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight.
Use insulating bushings to protect conductors at raceway terminations:
a.
Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter
squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside
and one outside box.
b. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into
hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align
raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed.
G.
Telephone and Signal/Data System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to above
requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply
with these requirements.
H.
Wireways
1.
2.
3.
I.
Use flat head screws, clips and straps to fasten wireways to surfaces. Mount plumb and level.
Use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings.
Close ends of wireway and unused raceway openings.
Surface Raceways
1.
2.
3.
Use flat head screws, clips and straps to fasten surface raceways to surfaces. Mount plumb
and level.
Use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings.
Close ends of surface raceway.
3.9 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A.
General:
1.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings on in other Sections, install all conductors in
raceway. Install continuous conductors between outlets, devices and boxes without splices or
taps. Do not pull connections into raceways. Leave at least 8 inches of conductor at outlets for
fixture or device connections.
2. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
shall not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
3. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave conductor/cable grips
that will not damage conductors/cables or raceway.
4. Electrical conductor and cable work is schematically represented on the Drawings. Unless
otherwise indicated, conductor sizes shown on the Drawings are based on not more than three
single current-carrying conductors in a raceway in free air. Current ratings are based on copper
at 75 degrees C temperature rating for all power circuits. Modify raceway and conductor sizing
as may be necessitated by any deviation from these conditions. Do not decrease the indicated
conductor size due to the use of conductors having a temperature rating of 90 degrees C.
5. Conductor sizes shown are minimum based on code requirements, voltage drop, and/or other
considerations. Where approved by the Engineer and at no extra cost to the Owner, larger
conductor sizes may be installed at Contractor's option in order to utilize stock sizes, provided
raceway sizes are increased where necessary to conform with NFPA 70 (determine the effect of
the use of larger conductors on the short circuit current ratings of the electrical equipment, and
provide increased short circuit current rated equipment as required).
6. Where parallel conductors are shown, install each set of conductors in separate raceways of
essentially the same length.
7. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Division 7 Section.
8. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section Electrical
Identification".
9. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductors at each outlet with at least 12 inches of slack.
10. Multi-wire branch circuits (i.e., shared neutral) shall be provided with a means that will
simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors at the point the branch circuit originates.
Multi-pole breakers or 3 single pole breakers with a handle tie are two example
11. When multiple home runs are combined into a single raceway such that the number of
conductors exceeds four (conductor count is made up of any combination of phase and neutral
conductors), the following restrictions apply, which are in addition to those in NFPA 70:
a.
Emergency Power Circuits includes all circuits covered under Articles 700, 701 and 702.
Duluth, GA

16050-20
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
1)
Maximum of eight conductors in a single raceway. Minimum raceway size: -inch.

Do not install any other type of circuit in this raceway.
Only 15A and 20A branch circuit homeruns may be combined into one raceway.
2)
3)
b. Normal or Non-Essential circuits.
1) Maximum of 16 conductors in a single raceway. For up to eight conductors in a
raceway, minimum raceway size: 3/4 inch. For greater than eight conductors,
minimum raceway size: 1 inch. Do not install any other type of circuit in this
raceway.
2) The minimum wire size for all conductors in this raceway: No. 10 AWG.
3) Only 15A and 20A branch circuit homeruns may be combined into one raceway.
c.
GFCI-protected circuits.
1) Do not use multi-conductor circuits, with a shared neutral, for any GFCI circuit
breaker or receptacle circuit.
d. Isolated Ground (IG) Circuits:
1) Do not use multi-conductor or MC cables.
2) Do not share neutrals between separate circuits.
3) Do not share the isolated grounding conductor with more than one device (i.e., each
device on an IG circuit shall have its own dedicated IG conductor back to the branch
panelboard IG bus).
4) The equipment grounding conductor may be shared between IG circuits sharing a
common raceway.
12. For branch circuits fed from GFCI circuit breakers, limit the one-way conductor length to 100
feet between the panelboard and the most remote receptacle or load on the GFCI circuit.
13. Where the number of conductors for branch circuits is not shown on the Drawings, determine
the number of conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. Provide adequate conductors so as to
allow performance of all functions of the device.
14. Provide all conductors with 600V insulation of the following types, unless otherwise noted on
the Drawings or in these Specifications:
a.
Wet or dry locations, in raceways:
1) Service entrance: Type THWN, THWN/THHN, or XHHW.
2) Feeders and branch circuits: Type THWN, THWN/THHN, or XHHW.
3) Conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller: Types THWN or THWN/THHN.
b. Direct buried:
1) Service entrance: USE.
2) Feeders and branch circuits: UF or USE.
c.
Fluorescent light fixtures or conductors within three feet of high temperature equipment
such as heaters: Type THHN, XHHW, or higher temperature insulation as required for the
use.
B.
Aluminum Conductor Option:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Terminations: Tinned, compression type only; UL-listed for copper and aluminum conductors at
75 degrees C minimum.
Increase the raceway size as required, at no additional cost to the Owner, to accommodate the
increased size of the aluminum conductors.
Aluminum conductor size shall meet or exceed the ampere rating of the scheduled copper
conductors at 75 degrees C.
Option applies only for feeders or services No. 2 AWG and larger (based on copper conductors):
a.
Service entrance conductors
b. Feeders to switchboards
c.
Feeders to panelboards
1) Exception: Apartment unit load center feeder conductors shall be copper; aluminum is
not acceptable.
d. Feeders to motor control centers
e.
Feeders to transformers
f.
Circuits supplying individual motors having a running load current larger than 100 amperes.
Apply a zinc based, anti-oxidizing compound to connections. Where aluminum conductors
terminate in main lugs in panelboards or switchboards, use hydraulic-compression type
connectors with a zinc base, anti-oxidizing compound. Use compression tools of the type that

Duluth, GA

16050-21
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
6.
7.
C.
Metal Clad Type MC Cable:

1.
2.
3.
D.
Refer to Division 16 Section, Equipment Wiring Systems, for electrical connections to

equipment.
Control Wiring
1.
2.
G.
When permitted for use by these documents, do not install NM or MNC cables above
suspended ceilings in commercial facilities.
Flexible Cords
1.
F.
Securing and Supporting:

a.
Support per Art 330 for MC cable.
b. Secure cable within 12 inches of every box or fitting.
c.
Secure/supporting intervals shall not exceed six (6) feet for MC cable.
d. Utilize steel cable hangers, Arlington SMC series or equivalent, for MC cable support
wherever possible so as to provide for cable routing in a neat and workmanship like
manner.
Type MC cable may only be used:
a.
In lieu of flexible conduit and wiring from light fixtures in accessible ceilings to junction
boxes (attached to building structure) above the ceiling. Provide cable whips of sufficient
lengths to allow for relocating each light fixture within a 5-foot radius of its installed
location, but not exceeding 6 feet in unsupported lengths.]
b. For vertical drops in stud walls.
Do not use MC Cable for the following:
a.
In locations not permitted by the NEC.
b. When specifically not allowed by the local AHJ and/or Owner/Landlord.
c.
Home runs to panelboards. Note: where metal clad cable is utilized for receptacle, lighting,
and/or miscellaneous load branch circuiting, the originating point of the homerun shall be at
the first (most upstream) load in the circuit or at a junction box located in the accessible
ceiling space immediately above the first (most-upstream) load. Reference definitions in
Section 16010 for definition on Homerun.
d. Where exposed to view.
e.
Where subject to physical damage.
f.
Corrosive or Hazardous locations.
g. Wet locations.
h.
Emergency circuits covered by NFPA Art 700 Emergency Systems.
Type NM or NMC Cables:

1.
E.
will not release unless the correct pressure has been applied.
Measure the temperature of all aluminum conductors at all splices and terminations. Make each
test under typical building load conditions after the building is occupied and in operation for a
minimum of two weeks. Replace all joints or splices indicating excessive heating.
Take measurements with a non-contact type infrared thermometer, with target size not
exceeding one inch at five feet and an accuracy of two percent or better. Submit the meter
specifications and calibration date with the test results.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in other sections, install all control wiring in
raceway, regardless of voltage. A qualified Electrician shall install all control wire operating at
120V nominal and above. Control wiring operating at less than 120V (e.g., 12V and 24V) may
be installed under the Division furnishing it.
Open wiring in air-handling plenums: UL listed and classified for use in air plenums without
raceway. Where indicated on the Drawings or specified, and permitted by local codes, only
cable for communication or fire alarm systems and low voltage control wiring may be installed
without raceways.
Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.
Use only resin pressure splices and splicing kits that totally encapsulate the splice for splices in

Duluth, GA

16050-22
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
5.
6.
underground junction boxes. Arrange the splicing kit to minimize the effects of moisture.
Connect conductors No. 6 AWG and larger to panelboards and apparatus by means of approved
mechanical lugs or compression connectors.
Do not use terminals on wiring devices to feed through to the next device.
3.10 BOXES
A.
General
1.
2.
Verify locations of device boxes prior to rough in.

Set boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as specified or indicated on the
Drawings.
3. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust
box locations to accommodate intended purpose.
4. Install boxes to preserve fire ratings of walls, floors, and ceilings.
5. Install flush wall-mounted boxes without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
6. Support boxes independently of raceway.
7. Clean the interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. Clean exposed surfaces
and restore finish.
8. Adjust flush-mounted boxes to make front edges flush with finished wall material.
9. Provide boxes of the depth required for the service, device and the application, and with raised
covers set flush with the finished wall surface for boxes concealed in plaster finishes. Select
covers with the proper openings for the devices being installed in the boxes. Install boxes flush
10. Install outlet boxes in firewalls complying with UL requirements, with box surface area not
exceeding 16 square inches; and, when installed on opposite sides of the wall, separate by a
distance of at least 24 inches.
B.
Outlet Boxes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Junction and Pull Boxes

1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Install all electrical devices, such as plug receptacles, lamp receptacles, light switches, and light
fixtures in or on outlet boxes.
Locations of outlets on Drawings are approximate; and, except where dimensions are shown,
determine exact dimensions for locations of outlets from plans, details, sections, or elevations
on Drawings, or as directed by Architect. Locate outlets generally from column centers and
finish wall lines or to centers or joints of wall or ceiling panels.
Locate outlet boxes so they are not placed back-to-back in the same wall, and in metal stud
walls, so they are separated by at least one stud space, to limit sound transmission from room
to room. Install outlet boxes in accessible locations and do not install outlets above ducts or
behind furring.
Install extension and plaster rings as required by NFPA 70.
Carefully set outlet boxes concealed in non-plastered block walls so as to line up with wall
joints. Coordinate the box and raceway installation with the wall construction as required for a
flush and neat appearing installation. Outlet box extensions may be used where necessary.
Do not exceed allowable fill per NFPA 70.
Where multiple devices are shown grouped together, gang mount with a common cover plate.
Install junction and pull boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas.
Provide boxes set flush in painted walls or ceilings with primer coated cover.
Where junction and pull boxes are installed above an inaccessible ceiling, locate so as to be
easily accessible from a ceiling access panel.
Boxes for exterior use shall be:
a.
PVC with a UV-stabilized PVC cover sealed and gasketed watertight.
b. Cast aluminum with a cast aluminum cover sealed and gasketed watertight.
c.
Cast iron with cast iron cover sealed and gasketed watertight in vehicular traffic areas.
Provide box and cover UL listed for use in vehicular traffic areas.
d. Install buried boxes so that box covers are flush with grade, unless indicated otherwise.
Floor Boxes
1.
2.
3.
Use cast or non-metallic floor boxes for installations in slab on grade. Unless otherwise
indicated, formed steel boxes are acceptable for slabs above grade.
Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
Set non-metallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

Duluth, GA

16050-23
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
3.11 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES

A.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide NEMA 1 construction for indoor, dry locations;
NEMA 12 for indoor, damp and dusty locations; NEMA 3R for outdoor locations.
B.
Install flush mounted in the wall in finished spaces, with the top 78 inches above finished floor. The
front shall be approximately 3/4-inch larger than the box all around.
C.
Install surface mounted in unfinished spaces, with the top 78 inches above finished floor. The front
shall be the same height and width as the box.
D.
Electrically ground all metallic cabinets and enclosures. Where wiring to cabinet or enclosure
includes a grounding conductor, provide a grounding lug in the interior of the cabinet or enclosure.
Cabinets and enclosures specified in this Section are intended to house miscellaneous electrical
components assembled in a custom arrangement, such as contactors and relays.
E.
All components that are specified or indicated for assembly in cabinets and enclosures shall each be
individually UL listed and labeled. Arrange wiring so that it can be readily identified. Support wiring
no less than every 3 inches. Install gauges, meters, pilot lights and controls on the face of the door.
F.
Do not provide cabinets and enclosures smaller than the sizes indicated. Where sizes and types are
not indicated, provide cabinets and enclosures of the size, type and classes appropriate for the use
and location. Provide all items complete with covers and accessories required for the intended use.

A.
testing:
B.
C.
Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1.
2.
D.
After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements. Test all wiring prior to energizing to ensure that it is free from
unintentional grounds and shorts, is properly phased, and that all connectors are tight.
Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS,
Section 7. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1.
2.
3.

Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.

Duluth, GA

16050-24
1550000803
*** Issue 04/23/04
SECTION 16055
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes computer-based, fault-current and overcurrent protective device coordination
studies, and the setting of these devices.
1.
2.
Include coordination of series-rated devices where series rating is specified in other sections and
where indicated on Drawings.
The AIC ratings indicated on the Drawings are preliminary and will be finalized based on the
results of the fault current study. Device ratings for furnished equipment shall be as required by
the results of the fault current study at no additional cost.

A.
documents that apply to this section.
B.
Division 16 Section "Overcurrent Protection" for devices requiring inclusion in the coordination study.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.
B.
Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software programs,

certifying compliance with IEEE 399.
C.
Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.
D.
Other Action Submittals:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.
Coordination-study report.
Equipment evaluation report.
Setting report.
E.
For coordination purposes and to ensure that equipment with the correct AIC ratings are provided,
the fault current study shall be submitted prior to, or in combination with, the electrical distribution
system equipment submittals. AIC ratings of equipment and devices shall reflect the results of the
study.
F.
1.
G.
Accurately record on the One-Line Diagram actual ratings and settings for all overcurrent
devices, both adjustable and non-adjustable, including all changes made during construction,
due to the study, or both.
Electronic files, in an SKM-compatible format, of the time-current characteristic curves for every
different overcurrent device used in the reports.

A.
Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software
algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual
calculations are not acceptable.
B.
Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An organization experienced in the application of

computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on
electrical distribution systems using similar devices.
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association.
1.
Testing Association to supervise testing specified in Part 3.
D.
Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.
E.
Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.

Duluth, GA

16055-1
1550000803
*** Issue 07/19/2003
F.
Comply with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E for arc-flash hazard calculations.

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
A.
Available Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, companies

offering computer software programs that may be used in the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
B.
Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide computer

software programs developed by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
CYME International, Inc.

EDSA Micro Corporation.
Electrical Systems Analysis, Inc.
SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.
Computer Software Developer:

software program by.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide computer
2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A.
Comply with IEEE 399.
B.
Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include "mandatory,"

"very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399, Table 7-4.
C.
Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic

curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of
all overcurrent protective devices.
1.
2.
Zero-Sequence current.
Arcing faults.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribution
system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Devices to be
coordinated are indicated on Drawings.
B.
Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled.
Overcurrent protective devices not submitted for approval with coordination study may not be used
in study.
3.2 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY

A.
Source Impedance: Utility company's fault-current contribution as indicated.
B.
Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical
distribution system for Project and use approved computer software program to calculate values.
Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in
maximum fault conditions.
C.
Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current.
D.
Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with the
following:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.50.

Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.
Circuit Breakers: IEEE C37.13.
Study Report: Enter calculated X/R ratios and interrupting (5-cycle) fault currents on electrical
distribution system diagram of the report. List other output values from computer analysis, including
momentary (1/2-cycle), interrupting (5-cycle), and 30-cycle fault-current values for 3-phase, 2-phase,
and phase-to-ground faults.

Duluth, GA

16055-2
1550000803
*** Issue 07/19/2003
F.
Equipment Evaluation Report: Prepare a report on the adequacy of overcurrent protective devices
and conductors by comparing fault-current ratings of these devices with calculated fault-current
momentary and interrupting duties.
3.3 COORDINATION STUDY

A.
Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 16 Sections and
involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags
that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device
submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.
Impedance of utility service entrance.
Electrical distribution system diagram showing the following:
a.
Load current that is the basis for sizing continuous ratings of circuits for cables and
equipment.
b. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types.
c.
Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios.
d. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,
impedance, and X/R ratios.
e.
Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance.
f.
Cables. Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor insulation, and length.
g. Busway ampacity and impedance.
h. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.
Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tag
numbers on diagram:
a.
Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting and
stopping.
b. Magnetic inrush current overload capabilities of transformers.
c.
Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of start,
and thermal-damage curve.
d. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.
e.
Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility company.
f.
Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.
g. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere or
current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and
instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.
h. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range,
instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent
relays.
i.
Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting ratings in
amperes rms symmetrical.
B.
Perform coordination study and prepare a written report using the results of fault-current study and
approved computer software program. Comply with IEEE 399.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70 for overcurrent protection of circuit elements and devices.
D.
Comply with IEEE 141 and IEEE 242 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals.
E.
Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:

1.
2.
Device shall not operate in response to the following:

a.
Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is specified
for that transformer.
b. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by unusual loading
or emergency conditions.
Device shall protect transformer according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents.
F.
Motors served by voltages more than 600 V shall be protected according to IEEE 620.
G.
Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Verify adequacy of phase
conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents, equipment grounding conductors, and
grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents.

Duluth, GA

16055-3
1550000803
*** Issue 07/19/2003
H.
Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of coordination
study:
1.
2.
3.
Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:

a.
Device tag.
b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-pickup values.
c.
Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous settings.
d. Fuse-current rating and type.
e.
Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.
Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to
achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists
between series devices, including power utility company's upstream devices. Show the
following specific information:
a.
Device tag.
b. Voltage and current ratio for curves.
c.
Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer.
d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses.
e.
Cable damage curves.
f.
Transformer inrush points.
g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point.
Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.
3.4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SETTING

A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative, of electrical

distribution equipment being set and adjusted, to set overcurrent protective devices within
equipment.
B.
Testing: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform device setting.
C.
Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following device setting and to prepare
test reports.
D.
Testing: Perform the following device setting and prepare reports:

1.
After installing overcurrent protective devices and during energizing process of electrical
distribution system, perform the following:
a.
Verify that overcurrent protective devices meet parameters used in studies.
b. Adjust devices to values listed in study results.
c.
Adjust devices according to recommendations in Chapter 7, "Inspection and Test
Procedures," and Tables 10.7 and 10.8 in NETA ATS.
3.5 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

A.
Determine arc-flash incident energy levels and flash protection boundary distances based on the
results of the Short-Circuit and Coordination studies. Perform the analysis under worst-case arc-flash
conditions for all modes of operation.
B.
Indentify all locations and equipment to be included in the arc-flash hazard analysis:
1.
2.
Include a copy of the facility one-line in the report.

Indentify the possible system operating modes including tie-breaker positions, and parallel
generation.
3. Calculate the arcing fault current flowing through each branch for each fault location.
4. Determine the time required to clear the arcing fault current using the protective device settings
and associated trip curves.
5. Select the working distances based on system voltage and equipment class.
6. Calculate the incident energy at each fault location at the prescribed working distance.
7. Determine the hazard/risk category (HRC) for the estimated incident energy.
8. Calculate the flash protection boundary at each fault location.
9. Document the assessment in reports and one-line diagrams.
10. Provide labels to be placed on each piece of equipment analyzed. Label shall show the
calculated incident energy and hazard/risk category for the calculated incident energy.
C.
Results of the arc-flash study shall be summarized in a final report containing the following:
1.
2.
Basis, method of hazard assessment, description, purpose, scope, and date of the study.
Tabulations of the data used to model the system components and a corresponding one-line

Duluth, GA

16055-4
1550000803
*** Issue 07/19/2003
3.
4.
5.
6.
diagram.
Descriptions of the scenarios evaluated and identification of the scenario used to evaluate
equipment ratings.
Tabulations of equipment incident energies, hazard risk categories, and flash protection
boundaries. The tabulation shall identify and clearly note equipment that exceeds allowable
incident energy ratings.
Required arc-flash labeling and placement of labels.
Conclusions and recommendations.

Duluth, GA

16055-5
1550000803
*** Issue 07/19/2003
SECTION 16072
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.

1.
2.
3.
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

Seismic restraints for electrical equipment and systems.
Construction requirements for concrete bases.

A.
B.
Division 16 Section Provisions for Electric Utility Service for concrete pads for pad-mounted service
transformers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each
type and size of electrical support and seismic-restraint component used.
1.
2.
B.
Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength
in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service member of the ICC Evaluation
Program, the ICBO Evaluation Service, California OSHPD and/or an agency acceptable to
Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.
Shop Drawings: Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and
anchorage devices, signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Professional engineer
qualification requirements are specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." Include the
following:
1.
2.
Fabricated Supports: Representations of field-fabricated supports not detailed on Drawings.

Seismic Restraints: Detail anchorage and bracing not defined by details or charts on Drawings.
Include the following:
a.
Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include
calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
b. Details: Detail fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the
restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings.
Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces
transmitted to the structure during seismic events.
c.
Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an evaluation service member of the ICC
Evaluation Program, the ICBO Evaluation Service, California OSHPD and/or an agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction showing maximum ratings of restraint items
and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).
C.
Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other
systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.
D.
Seismic Restraint Manual: Prepare a Seismic Restraint Manual that contains the basis of the design
for the seismic support systems, product data, shop drawings,and layout and coordination drawings.
E.
F.
G.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A.
IBC: International Building Code.
B.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
C.
NBC: National Building Code.

Duluth, GA

16072-1
1550000803
*** Issue 07/19/2003
D.
OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development.
E.
SBC: Standard Building Code.
F.
UBC: Uniform Building Code.
G.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
H.
RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
I.
PSI:
J.
Seismic Restraint: A structural support element such as a metal framing member, a cable, an anchor
bolt or stud, a fastening device, or an assembly of these items used to transmit seismic forces from
an item of equipment or system to building structure and to limit movement of item during a seismic
event.
Pounds-per-Square-Inch

A.
Seismic Restraint Manual:

duration of the Project.
Keep a copy of the Seismic Restraint Manual on the jobsite for the
B.
Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the California Building Code, Code of Regulations of
OSHPD, IBC, NBC, SBC, or UBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.
C.
Testing of Seismic Anchorage Devices: Comply with testing requirements in Part 3 and in
Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
D.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding
Code - Steel."
1.6 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom
are indicated.
To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other
installations.
To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of
obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete,
masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

A.
Refer to Structural Engineered plans for specific building Seimic zone and classification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
selection:
1.
2.

specified.
2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A.
Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or
imposed under this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.
B.
Steel Slotted Support Systems (Slotted Channel):

components for field assembly.
1.
Comply with MFMA-3, factory-fabricated

Duluth, GA

16072-2
1550000803
*** Issue 07/19/2003
2.
3.
a.
Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries.
b. ERICO International Corporation.
c.
Allied Support Systems; Power-Strut Unit.
d. GS Metals Corp.
e.
Hilti, Inc.
f.
Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div.
g. National Pipe Hanger Corp.
h. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
i.
Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
j.
Wesanco, Inc.
Finishes:
a.
Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-3.
b. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating
applied according to MFMA-3.
c.
Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-3.
d. Stainless Steel: Type 304, per ASTM A240.
e.
Aluminum (Extruded): Type 6063-T6, per ASTM B221
Channel Dimensions: Selected for structural loading and applicable seismic forces.
C.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1.
D.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Plated steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated
fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
E.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body
and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser
conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit
individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
F.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes,
and bars; black and galvanized.
G.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components:

supports to building surfaces include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Items for fastening electrical items or their
Power-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete,
steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
a.
1) Hilti, Inc.
2) ITW Construction Products.
3) MKT Fastening, LLC.
4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co. Inc.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened portland
cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials in which used.
a.
1) Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries.
2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc
3) Hilti, Inc.
4) ITW Construction Products.
5) MKT Fastening, LLC.
6) Powers Fasteners.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron slotted-support-system units similar to MSS Type 18;
complying with MFMA-3 or MSS SP-58.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached
structural element.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT COMPONENTS

A.
Rated Strength, Features, and Application Requirements for Restraint Components: As defined in
reports by an evaluation service member of the ICC Evaluation Program, the ICBO Evaluation Service,

Duluth, GA

16072-3
1550000803
*** Issue 07/19/2003
California OSHPD and/or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.
Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components used shall
be at least five times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.
B.
Angle and Channel-Type Brace Assemblies:

Steel angles or steel slotted-support-system
components; with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building
structure at the other end.
C.
Cable Restraints: ASTM A 603, zinc-coated, steel wire rope attached to steel or stainless-steel
thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
a.
Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
b. Loos & Co., Inc.
c.
Seismic Mountings, Anchors, and Attachments: Devices as specified in Part 2 "Support,
Anchorage, and Attachment Components" Article, selected to resist seismic forces.
Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted
connections to hanger rod, of design recognized by an evaluation service member of the ICC
Evaluation Program, the ICBO Evaluation Service, California OSHPD and/or an agency
Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Neoprene units designed for seismically rated
rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs used.
Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements
and steel sleeves designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to
type and size of attachment devices used.
2.4 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A.
Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of
supported equipment.
B.
Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and
plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems,
except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT,
IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
C.
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support
system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding
specified design load limits.
1.
2.
D.
Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an
evaluation service member of the ICC Evaluation Program, the ICBO Evaluation Service,
California OSHPD and/or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring
friction action for retention in support channel.
Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch
and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings
and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
3.2 SUPPORT AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

A.
Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements, except as specified in this Article.
B.
Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may
be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C.
Install seismic-restraint components using methods approved by the evaluation service providing
required submittals for component.

Duluth, GA

16072-4
1550000803
*** Issue 07/19/2003
D.
Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within
specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight
of supported components plus 200 lb.
E.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless
otherwise indicated by code:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
F.
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
Instead of expansion anchors, power-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock
washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater.
Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches
thick.
To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and
nuts.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers,
and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismicrestraint strength and anchorage requirements.
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A.
Comply with installation requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated
metal supports.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to
support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A.
Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete bases according to equipment manufacturers

written instructions and seismic criteria at Project location.
B.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or as required so expansion anchors will be a

minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base; but, in no case, not less than 4 inches larger in
both directions than supported unit.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of the base.
Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base,
and anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices.
Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and
placement requirements are specified in Division.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF SEISMIC-RESTRAINT COMPONENTS

A.
Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient
media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
B.
Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.
C.
Restraint Cables: Provide slack within maximums recommended by manufacturer.

Duluth, GA

16072-5
1550000803
*** Issue 07/19/2003
D.
Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at

flanges of beams, upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
3.6 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A.
Make flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where
they cross expansion and seismic-control joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported
by different structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to electrical equipment
that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach
equipment.

A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests
and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Testing: Test pullout resistance of seismic anchorage devices.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to

Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained
component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days'
advance notice.
Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary loadspreading members.
Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.
Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are
achieved.
Record test results.

Duluth, GA

16072-6
1550000803
*** Issue 07/19/2003
SECTION 16075
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Identification for raceways and metal-clad cable.

Identification for conductors and communication and control cable.
Underground-line warning tape.
Warning labels and signs.
Instruction signs.
Equipment identification labels.
Miscellaneous identification products.

A.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit the following in accordance with Division 1 and Division 16 Section General
Electrical Requirements for each electrical identification product indicated:
1.
2.
Identification Schedule:
An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system
components used in identification signs and labels.
Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting
provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

A.

1.
2.
29 CFR 1910.7, and that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2.
C.
D.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
1.5 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the
Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and
Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use
consistent designations throughout Project.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces
where devices are to be applied.
C.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

2.1 RACEWAY AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field
for each raceway and cable size.
B.
Color for Printed Legend:

1.
2.
C.
Power Circuits: Black letters on an orange field.

Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage, if applicable.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-

Duluth, GA
16075-1
1550000803
*** Issue 07/10/2003
resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
D.
Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with
diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping
action.
E.
Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches
(50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in
place by gripping action.
F.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide;
compounded for outdoor use.
2.2 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A.
Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick
by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.
B.
Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend
machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
C.
Self-laminating Computer Printable Labels: Clear over-laminate to protect legend for permanent, clean
identification. Self-laminating Polyester material with white print-on area.
D.
Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels: Cut from 0.014-inch- (0.35-mm-) thick aluminum sheet, with
stamped, embossed, or scribed legend, and fitted with tabs and matching slots for permanently
securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors.
E.
Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend,
punched for use with self-locking nylon tie fastener.
F.
Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and
polyester or nylon tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1.
Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.
2.3 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A.
Description: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, polyethylene tape.

1.
2.
3.
4.
Not less than 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mils (0.102 mm) thick.
Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.
Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line.
2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A.
Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. Attachment method shall be acceptable to the
manufacturers of the equipment to which the nameplates are being applied and shall not compromise
any NRTL listing or labeling criteria.
B.
Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,

configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with
colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for
mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).
D.
Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate

butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size
required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by
14 inches (250 by 360 mm).
E.
Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1.
2.
Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS
MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)."
2.5 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A.
Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to
20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.
1.
Engraved legend with [black letters on white face] <Insert colors>.

Duluth, GA
16075-2
1550000803
*** Issue 07/10/2003
2.
3.
Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.

Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.
2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A.
Attachment method shall be acceptable to the manufacturers of the equipment to which the
nameplates are being applied and shall not compromise any NRTL listing or labeling criteria.
B.
Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum
letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
C.
Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or
equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a
weatherproof and ultraviolet-resistant seal for label.
D.
Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters
on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
E.
Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting.
letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
F.
Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1
inch (25 mm).
White
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A.
Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).

Tensile Strength: 50 lb (22.6 kg), minimum.
Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C).
Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.
Paint: Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Exterior Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):
a.
Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat(s) over a primer.
1) Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer.
2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.
Exterior Concrete Unit Masonry:
a.
Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat(s) over a block filler.
1) Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.
Exterior Ferrous Metal:
a.
Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: One finish coat(s) over a primer.
1) Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer.
2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss alkyd enamel.
Exterior Zinc-Coated Metal (except Raceways):
a.
1) Primer: Exterior zinc-coated metal primer.
2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss alkyd enamel.
Interior Concrete and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):
a.
1) Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer.
2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel.
Interior Concrete Unit Masonry:
a.
Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat(s) over a block filler.
1) Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
Interior Gypsum Board:
a.
1) Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
Interior Ferrous Metal:
a.
1) Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer.

Duluth, GA
16075-3
1550000803
*** Issue 07/10/2003
9.
C.
Interior Zinc-Coated Metal (except Raceways):

a.
1) Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer.
Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A.
Raceways and Duct Banks More Than 600 V Concealed within Buildings: 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide
black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers over orange background that extends full length of
raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH
VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-) high black letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers. Stop
stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces:
1.
2.
3.
Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches (300 mm) of a floor
that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.
Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in the
building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
B.
Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables More Than 600 V: Identify with "DANGER-HIGH
VOLTAGE" in black letters at least 2 inches (50 mm) high, with self-adhesive vinyl labels. Repeat
legend at 10-foot (3-m) maximum intervals.
C.
Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits
More Than 30 A: Identify with orange self-adhesive vinyl label.
D.
Accessible Raceways and Cables of Auxiliary Systems: Identify the following systems with colorcoded, self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Fire Alarm System: Red.

Fire-Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow.
Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue.
Security System: Blue and yellow.
Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue.
Telecommunication System: Green and yellow.
Control Wiring: Green and red.
E.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For primary and secondary conductors No. 1/0 AWG and
larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use color-coding conductor tape
and marker tape. Identify source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor
cables, identify phase in addition to the above.
F.
Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three branch
circuits in the same junction or pull box, use color-coding conductor tape. Identify each ungrounded
conductor according to source and circuit number.
G.
Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source and
circuit number.
H.
Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, signal,
sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections.
1.
2.
3.
Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull
points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by
manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and Operation
and Maintenance Manual.
I.
Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting,
communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Install underground-line warning tape for
both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.
J.
Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with

Duluth, GA
16075-4
1550000803
*** Issue 07/10/2003
29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels. Identify system voltage with black letters
on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
1.
2.
K.
Instruction Signs:
1.
L.
Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment
including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
Power transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated,
apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in
finished spaces.
Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance
of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved
legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is
consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to
disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control
stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control,
communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own
identification.
1.
2.
Labeling Instructions:
a.
Indoor Equipment: [Adhesive film label] [Adhesive film label with clear protective overlay]
[Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label] [Engraved, laminated acrylic
or melamine label]. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch(13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where 2 lines of text are
required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: [Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label] [Stenciled legend 4
inches (100 mm) high].
c.
Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing
from the floor.
Label the following equipment:
a.
Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.
b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
c.
Electrical switchgear and switchboards.
d. Transformers.
e.
Electrical substations.
f.
Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
g. Motor-control centers.
h. Disconnect switches.
i.
Enclosed circuit breakers.
j.
Motor starters.
k.
Push-button stations.
l.
Power transfer equipment.
m. Contactors.
n. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
o. Battery inverter units.
p. Battery racks.
q. Power-generating units.
r.
Voice and data cable terminal equipment.
s.
Master clock and program equipment.
t.
Intercommunication and call system master and staff stations.
u. Television/audio components, racks, and controls.
v.
Fire-alarm control panel and annunciators.
w. Security and intrusion-detection control stations, control panels, terminal cabinets, and
racks.
x.
Monitoring and control equipment.
y.
Uninterruptible power supply equipment.
z.
Terminals, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and for signal and

Duluth, GA
16075-5
1550000803
*** Issue 07/10/2003
control functions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B.
Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C.
Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D.
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and
methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E.
Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the
location and substrate.
F.
System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall completely
encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side.
Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum
intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.
G.
Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below
for service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Color shall be [factory applied] [factory applied or, for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG if
authorities having jurisdiction permit, field applied].
Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
a.
Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Red.
c.
Phase C: Blue
d. Neutral: White
e.
Ground: Green
f.
Isolated Ground: Green, with Yellow stripe
Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
a.
Phase A: Brown.
b. Phase B: Orange.
c.
Phase C: Yellow
d. Neutral: White (Except as provided in paragraph 200.6 of NFPA 70)
e.
Ground: Green
Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance
of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply
last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid
obscuring factory cable markings.
H.
Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable
at a location with high visibility and accessibility. DO NOT install metal tags, or tags with metal
edges, or tags with metal tie-wraps in any enclosure with exposed energized terminals, busses, or
similar parts, where the tags could come into accidental contact with the exposed parts.
I.
Non-metallic Marker Tags and Tape: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable with non-metallic
tie wraps or adhesive, as specified, at a location with high visibility and accessibility; and, in all
enclosures with exposed energized parts.
J.
Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line

warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use
multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench exceeds 16 inches (400
mm) overall.
K.
Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 9 painting Sections.

Duluth, GA
16075-6
1550000803
*** Issue 07/10/2003
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Verify items listed below are included in project specifications or delete item. List below only those
items for products and equipment that are required for the applicable project. Add specialty devices
(e.g., pin-and-sleeve, DC switches, etc.) as required by the Project; or, if limited in quantity, consider
scheduling them on the Drawings by type, make, NEMA configuration (if applicable) and model
(similar to the Luminaire Schedule).
B. This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Receptacles: Single, duplex, quad/4-plex, twist-lock, ground-fault circuit interrupters (GFCI),

transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS), and isolated ground (IG).
AC Wall Switches: Single- and double-pole, three- and four-way, maintained and momentary,
pilot light and lighted toggle, and dimmer
AC Wall Occupancy Sensors.
Emergency Shunt Relays.
Device Wall Plates.
Service/Power Poles and Multi-Outlet Assemblies.

A. Verify Sections listed below are included in project specifications or delete item. List below only
those sections for products and equipment that the reader might expect to find in this Section but
are specified elsewhere. Always keep the next paragraph, if it is retained in the Project to
supplement Division 1.
B. Division 16 Section General Electrical Requirements for general requirements and related
C. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for outlet boxes, floor service outlets,
and poke-through assemblies used to support wiring devices.
D. Division 16 Section Electrical Identification for device and circuit labels.
E. Division 16 Section Equipment Wiring Systems for cords and caps.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
B. IG:
Isolated Ground
C. PIR:
Passive Infrared.
D. RFI:
Radio Frequency Interference
E. TVSS: Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Edit, as appropriate, to limit submittals and shop drawings to those really needed dont ask for
basic things that dont require review, unless there is a real concern over unacceptable substitutions,
etc. Coordinate with other articles and delete/add as required to match.
B. General: Submit the following in accordance with Division 1 and Division 16 Section General
Electrical Requirements.
C. Edit the product data to request information only for items required for the applicable project. Omit
items not used in this Section.
D.

1.
Provide manufacturers catalog information specifically marked to indicate which devices are
being furnished, and showing dimensions, colors, and configurations for all devices, including,
but not limited to: Receptacles, AC wall switches, emergency shunt relays, cover plates, power

Duluth, GA
WIRING DEVICES
16140-1
1550000803
*** Issue 06/24/03
poles, and multi-outlet assemblies.

E. Request shop drawings only for items requiring additional detail, such as large amounts of multioutlet raceways with multiple bends, etc. and for occupancy sensor layouts. Typically, product data
will suffice and shop drawings will not be required. Omit subparagraph if not required.
F. Shop drawings for:
G. List of legends and description of materials and process used for pre-marking wall plates.
H. Include sample review below if products may have critical features needing hands-on appraisal.
I. Samples:
J. One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.
K. Samples will be returned after review, and, if accepted by the Architect and Engineer, may be
installed on the Project.
L. Retain below if Contractor is responsible for field quality-control testing.
M. Field quality-control test reports.
N. Edit following paragraph, as required, to match the request of devices in this Section.
O. Operations and Maintenance Data:
P. Provide operating instructions for each type of dimmer.
Q. Provide operating and adjusting instructions for each type occupancy sensor.
R. Retain the following paragraph if you have specified TVSS receptacles with replaceable surge
modules.
S. Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Section.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated cover plate from a single
manufacturer and through one source. Where practical and possible, obtain all wiring devices and
associated cover plates from a single manufacturer and one source.
B. Materials shall be manufactured by companies that have been specializing in the products specified
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:
1.
2.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Retain paragraph below if receptacles for Owner-furnished equipment with plugs have unknown
configurations (e.g., kitchen equipment).
B. Receptacles for Equipment Furnished by Owner or Under Other Divisions or Contracts: Match plug
configurations.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Coordinate with Division 1 and the Owner re: spares and extra materials many times, they are not
required/desired. Be realistic in the number of spares/extra materials you specify, especially if you
have only a couple of very specific items, if you have specified materials that seldom break, discolor,
or scratch (e.g., nylon cover plates), or if the Client is a tenant that may only occupy the space for a
limited time. Add more paragraphs if it is appropriate to specify different quantities of different
items. For a Client-owned/occupied building (i.e., extended occupancy), you might want to include
spare general switches and receptacles and other high-usage devices.
B. Extra materials, spares, or both, may not be allowed for publicly funded projects.
C. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
Duluth, GA
WIRING DEVICES
16140-2
1550000803
*** Issue 06/24/03
1.
2.
Wall Plates: One for every 10 of each type (i.e., style, size, and finish) installed, but no fewer
than two of each type.
Service/Power Poles: One for every 10 of each type installed, but no fewer than one of each
type.
1.8 SPARES
A. Furnish spare parts described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
1.
2.
Wall Plates: One for every 10 of each type (i.e., style, size, and finish) installed, but no fewer
than two of each type.
Service/Power Poles: One for every 10 of each type installed, but no fewer than one of each
type.

2.1 GENERAL
A. Wiring devices are defined as single discrete units of electrical distribution systems, such as
convenience receptacles, switches, special purpose receptacles, and similar, which are intended to
carry, but not use electrical energy. Install wiring devices as required by the Specifications and
where indicated on the Drawings.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. See Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming manufacturers and
products.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
C. Retain above for nonproprietary or below (HEI preference) for semi-proprietary specification. Refer
to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Receptacles and Switches:

a.
Cooper Wiring Devices.
b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
c.
Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.
AC Wall Occupancy Sensors:
a.
Cooper Wiring Devices.
b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
c.
Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.
Multioutlet Assemblies:
a.
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
b. Wiremold Company (The).
Service/Power Poles:
a.
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
b. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.
c.
Square D/Groupe Schneider NA.
d. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
e.
Wiremold Company (The).
E. In other Part 2 articles below, where lists of manufacturers and device catalog numbers are included,
the following additional requirements apply to product selection:
1.
Additional Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include manufacturers listed in individual
articles below, in addition to those listed in Paragraph Available Manufacturers above.
2.3 FINISHES
A.
Duluth, GA
WIRING DEVICES
16140-3
Color:
1550000803
*** Issue 06/24/03
1.
2.
B.
Wiring devices connected to normal power systems: As selected by Architect, unless otherwise
indicated or required by NFPA 70. Cover plates: The same as the wiring device.
Isolated-Ground receptacles: Orange, with an orange triangle on its face. Cover plates: As
selected by the Architect and engraved with ISOLATED GROUND at the top with white filler
in the engraving.
Manufacturer's model numbers listed are to establish the quality of the wiring devices. Coordinate
the proper suffixes in order to provide the correct color as specified above.
2.4 CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLE:
A. The catalog numbers listed below are generally for 20A rated devices. Where 15A rated devices are
indicated on the Drawings or required for circuit rating limitations, provide receptacles equivalent to
those specified for 20A, but rated for 15A.
B.
Duplex convenience receptacles: Specification grade, NEMA 5-20R, 125V, 20A, grounding type, UL
listed and labeled, nylon face, side and back wired, self-grounding.
Manufacturer
Cooper
Hubbell
Leviton
Pass & Seymour
Duplex
5352
CR5352
5352
5352
Single
5351
HBL5361
5891
5361
C. Twist-Locking type receptacles: NEMA L5-20R, 125V, 20A, grounding type, UL listed and labeled,
nylon face, side and back wired, self-grounding.
Manufacturer
Cooper
Hubbell
Leviton
Pass & Seymour
Single
L520R
HBL2310
2310
L520-R
2.5 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Ground fault circuit interrupter type receptacles: Specification Grade UL listed and labeled complying
with UL 943, Class A and NEMA WD-1-1.10, 125V, 20A, trip at 4-6mA within 0.25 second, and
feed-thru type with integral heavy duty NEMA 5-20R receptacle arranged to protect receptacles
down stream on the same circuit.
Manufacturer
Cooper
Hubbell
Leviton
Pass & Seymour
Specification Grade
GF20
GF5352C
6898
2091-S
2.6 ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLES

A. Isolated ground receptacles: NEMA 5-20R, 125V, 20A, grounding type, UL listed and labeled, nylon
face, side and back wired, furnished with a green pigtail connected to the grounding contact, and
grounding contacts electrically isolated from the mounting strap.
Manufacturer
Cooper
Hubbell
Leviton
Pass & Seymour
Straight Blade
CR5352IG
5362-IG
IG6300
2.7 SPECIAL/MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES

A. Special purpose receptacles: Grounding type, UL listed with NEMA configurations as indicated below

Duluth, GA
WIRING DEVICES
16140-4
1550000803
*** Issue 06/24/03
or on the Drawings.
Manufacturer
Cooper
Hubbell
Leviton
Pass & Seymour
Dryer
14-30R
1257
HBL9430A
278
3864
Range
14-50R
1258
HBL9450A
279
3894
Switch/
Receptacle
5225
671
Clock
5-15R
93632
HBL5235
5261-CH
S3733-SS
2.8 SWITCHES
A. The catalog numbers listed below are generally for 20A rated devices. Where 15A rated devices are
indicated on the Drawings or required for circuit rating limitations, provide switches equivalent to
those specified for 20A, but rated for 15A.
B.
Switches: Specification grade, rated for 120/277V, 20A, back and side wired, and UL listed and
labeled.
Manufacturer
Cooper
Hubbell
Leviton
Pass & Seymour
1 Pole
2221
CS1221
1221-2
20AC1
2 Pole
2222
CS1222
1222-2
20AC2
3 Way
2223
CS1223
1223-2
20AC3
4 Pole
2224
CS1224
1224-2
20AC4
C. Pilot Light toggle illuminates when the load is ON and requires a neutral; Lighted Handle type
illuminates when the load is OFF and does not require a neutral. Make sure to use the correct
one, and show a neutral in the switch leg if you use the Pilot Light type. Replace the X with the
appropriate letter for the color of neon desired.
D. Pilot Light switches: 20A, single pole switch with cleared neon lighted handle.
illuminated when the switch is in the "ON" position.
Manufacturer
Cooper
Hubbell
Leviton
Pass & Seymour
1 Pole
2221PL
HPL1221PL
1221-PLX (120V)
1221-7PLX (277V)
PS20AC1-XPL
(120V only)
2 Pole
3 Way
HBL1222PL
HBL1223PL
Toggle shall be
2.9 DUAL VOLTAGE SWITCH RELAY

A. A normally-open, electrically-held relay that allows a single-pole switch to control loads operating at
two different voltages (e.g., 120V and 277V); listed to UL Standard 916; installed in a 2-gang outlet
box, with a voltage-separating barrier and plaster ring.
Manufacturer
Lighting Controls and Design
Model Number
GR 2001 DV X
2.10 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. The following wall switch occupancy sensors have different capabilities as to the maximum wattage
for incandescent and fluorescent type lighting loads. Coordinate with the manufacturer for the
lighting design circuit layout. Adaptive technology includes the ability to sense and memorize usage
patterns in the space and help eliminate false-offs use these in offices and other rooms that would
have consistent patterns of usage; use the passive infrared for most public areas, where there would
most likely not have any defined usage patterns. Choose 20-minute time delay for passive infrared
and 30 minutes for adaptive technology. Other types of wall- and ceiling-mount occupancy sensors
will be specified in Section 16500.
B.
As indicated on sheet E0. No exceptions taken.

Duluth, GA
WIRING DEVICES
16140-5
1550000803
*** Issue 06/24/03
2.11 COVER PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices and manufacturer of wiring
devices specified herein.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Plate securing screws: Metal with head color to match finish plate.
Material for Finished Spaces: Brushed stainless steel Type 302 or Smooth plastic, minimum
0.10-inch thick. Refer to Finishes above for color.][High impact nylon, minimum 0.10-inch
thick. Refer to Finishes above for color.
Material for Unfinished Spaces and surface mounted wiring devices: Galvanized steel.
Masonry walls and oversized wall openings: Jumbo size plates with same material as indicated
above.
The following weatherproof cover should be specified ONLY for DAMP locations (i.e., outdoors in
a location protected from the weather or in other damp locations i.e., not subject to hosing,
beating rain or runoff) for 125V, 15A or 20A receptacles (refer to NEC 406.8(A)) and for other
receptacle ratings where the product intended to be plugged into it will be attended while in use
(e.g., portable tools, and so forth see NEC 406.8(B)(2)(b)). It is only weatherproof when the
receptacle is covered (attachment plug not inserted and receptacle covers closed). Omit the
appropriate column in the table to coordinate with the orientation indicated.
C. Damp Location Weatherproof Receptacle Cover Plates: UL-listed Wet Location (cover closed, not in
use); die-cast, gasketed (factory-installed) self-closing covers, for vertical mounting:
Manufacturer
Cooper
Hubbell
Leviton
Pass & Seymour
Vertical
966
WP26
4978
4504
D. The following weatherproof cover MUST be specified for WET locations to ensure the
weatherproof integrity of the cord-and-plug connection to a receptacle located in an outdoor wet
location - it has a weatherproof enclosure at all times; and, it is not contingent on the anticipated
use of the receptacle. This requirement applies to all 15A and 20A, 125 and 250V receptacles that
are installed in outdoor wet locations, including those receptacle outlets at dwelling units. It also
applies when receptacles, other than 15A and 20A, for cord and plug connected equipment are
likely to be used for long periods of time such as for vending machines, pump motors, etc. This
cover allows the receptacle to remain weatherproof with the plug inserted. Omit the appropriate
column in the table to coordinate with the orientation indicated. Clear polycarbonate cover
preferred.
E.
Wet Location Weatherproof Receptacle Cover Plates: NEMA 3R weather resistant recessed or flush
mount, clear high impact ultraviolet stabilized polycarbonate thermoplastic lockable cover. Configure
cover for vertical mounting of receptacle. Back box must be suitable for conduit connections.
Coordinate back box with wall depth.
Manufacturer
Intermatic
Cooper
F.
Vertical
WP1000RC
Weatherproof switch cover plates: Fabricated of cast aluminum or cast zinc, sealed water-tight and
UL listed for wet locations.
Manufacturer
Appleton
Raco
Steel City
1 Gang
FSK
5100 Series
SW Series
2 Gang
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Duluth, GA
WIRING DEVICES
16140-6
1550000803
*** Issue 06/24/03
3.1 GENERAL
A. Outlets are only approximately located on the small scale Drawings. Use great care in the actual
location by consulting the various large scale detailed Drawings used by other Division trades, and
by securing definite locations from the Architect.
B.
Do not use multi-conductor circuits, with a shared neutral, for any GFCI receptacle circuit. Provide a
separate neutral conductor with all GFCI receptacle circuits.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
B.
Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height and are flush with the finished surface.
C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
D. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly and are flush with the finished surface.
E.
Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring
devices.
F.
Verify that openings in access floor are in proper locations.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. If required, provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B.
Clean debris from in and around outlet boxes.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install all wiring devices plumb, level, and square with building lines. Wiring device bodies shall
extend to the finished surface of the walls, ceiling or floor, as applicable, without projecting beyond
them.
B.
Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductors around screw terminals. Tighten electrical
connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If
manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
C. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and bond
to metal outlet box. Exception: Do not bond grounding terminals of isolated ground receptacles to
the outlet box.
D. Install devices shown on wood trim, cases or other fixtures symmetrically and, where necessary, set
with the long dimensions of the plate horizontal, or ganged in tandem.
E.
Unless dimensioned otherwise, install wiring devices a minimum of 24 inches from the closest edge
of any sink.
F.
Install switches with OFF position down.
G. Omit the 3 subparagraphs below if dimmers are not used for the applicable project.
H. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after de-rating for ganging as
instructed by manufacturer.
I.
Where dimmer switches are shown adjacent to standard switches, install both in separate back
boxes with adequate space between so that neither cover plate requires cutting. Dimmers shall not
require de-rating. Do not remove fins.
J.
Provide a separate grounded conductor (neutral) for each circuit controlled by a dimmer. Do not
share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
K.
Omit the subparagraph below if emergency shunt relays are not used for the applicable project.
L.
Install emergency shunt relay in separate enclosure adjacent to associated light switch.
M. Install cover plates on all switches, receptacles, and blank outlets.

N. Locate wiring devices so that the cover plate does not have to be cut to be installed.
O. Where devices are shown near wall openings, coordinate location if corner guards are to be installed
Duluth, GA
WIRING DEVICES
16140-7
1550000803
*** Issue 06/24/03
so that cover plates do not require cutting.

P.
Install cover plates after the wall has been finished (painted, wall paper, etc).
Q. Install device boxes in brick or block walls such that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the
joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
R.
Edit/delete the following 3 subparagraphs to suit the applicable project.
S.
Provide Hospital Grade receptacles in, patient rooms, surgery rooms, special procedure rooms, exam
rooms, treatment rooms, radiology rooms and other patient care and treatment areas. Provide
specification grade receptacles in all other areas unless otherwise noted.
T.
Frequently, tamper-resistant receptacles are used in other than medical facilities, where young
children can access receptacles, e.g., childrens play areas in banks and retail stores, kindergarten
and day care facilities, etc. Keep the following paragraph, and edit as required, to match Project
scope.
U. Provide safety-type, tamper-resistant receptacles in all pediatric areas accessible to pediatric

patients.
V. Provide safety-type, tamper-resistant receptacles in psychiatric patient rooms. Provide tamperproof
screws on faceplates of all wiring devices in psychiatric patient rooms.
3.5 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Division 16 Section Basic Electrical Materials
And Methods.
B.
Unless noted otherwise, install wiring devices as indicated below (NOTE: All dimensions are to the
BOTTOM of the outlet box unless noted otherwise):
1.
2.
3.
Receptacles:
a.
General:
1) Vertically with the ground slot mounted at the top: 16 inches above finished floor.
b. Above counters:
1) For 36-inch high counter tops: 44 inches above finished floor, vertically.
2) For 34-inch high counter tops: 40 inches above finished floor, vertically.
c.
Mechanical and electrical equipment rooms and janitors closets: 44 inches above finished
floor, vertically.
d. Weatherproof exterior receptacles: 24 inches above finished grade, vertically.
e.
GFCI receptacles: Same as general receptacles.
f.
Isolated ground receptacles: Same as general receptacles.
Switches:
a.
General: 44 inches above finished floor.
b. Above counters: Same as for receptacles.
c.
Concrete Block Walls: 40 inches above finished floor (dimension may be adjusted slightly,
as required to compensate for variable joint dimensions, such that bottom of boxes are at
block joints).
d. Walls with wainscoting: 6 inches minimum above wainscoting, but not exceeding 48
inches above finished floor.
Telephone/Data Outlet Boxes:
a.
General: Match mounting height of adjacent wiring device listed above.
b. Wall-mounted telephone: 40 inches above finished floor.
3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Label all devices fed down stream of GFCI protected receptacles as GFCI PROTECTED.
B.
Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

1.
Receptacles and Switches: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served, using:
a.
Hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with white-filled lettering on face of plate.
b. Durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
c.
Permanent-ink marker, hand-printed legibly, inside outlet boxes.
d. Adhesive film label, but with letter/number height of 1/4 inch, on face of plate.
e.
Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay, but with letter/number height of 1/4

Duluth, GA
WIRING DEVICES
16140-8
1550000803
*** Issue 06/24/03
inch, on face of plate, for exterior and damp/wet locations.

A. Inspect each wiring device for defects.
B.
Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. After installing wiring devices and after electrical
circuitry has been energized, test for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with
requirements.
D. Test all wiring devices for electrical continuity and proper polarity of connections.
E.
Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.
F.
Correct wiring devices incorrectly installed.
G. Repair or replace all damaged items or damaged finishes at no expense to the Owner.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.

Duluth, GA
WIRING DEVICES
16140-9
1550000803
*** Issue 06/24/03
SECTION 16170
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A.
This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements
specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other
Sections.
B.
This Section includes:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Grounding Conductors
Connector Products
Grounding Electrodes
Ground Bars
Equipotential Grounding System
Miscellaneous Grounding Materials and Products

A.
B.
Division 16 Section " Basic Electrical Materials and Methods for insulated conductors, raceways.
C.
Division 16 Section "Lightning Protection Systems" for additional grounding and bonding materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
1.
2.

a.
Electrodes, mechanical and compression connectors, and exothermic connectors .
b.
Shop drawings for:
a.
Equipotential Grounding System.
B.
Qualification Data: For a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Contractor.
C.
Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by
Contractor.
1.
2.
3.
D.

Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
1.
Accurately record actual locations of all exterior buried electrodes and all buried ground rings.
Indicate dimensions from fixed structural elements.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A.
The following apply to this and other Sections of these Specifications:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
EMT:
ENT:
FMC:
IMC:
LFMC:
LFNC:
RMC:
GRS:
RAC:
RNC:

Duluth, GA
Electrical metallic tubing.

Electrical nonmetallic tubing.
Flexible metal conduit.
Intermediate metal conduit.
Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.
Rigid Metal Conduit
Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit
Rigid Aluminum Conduit
Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

16170-1
1550000803
*** Issue 05/28/2004
11. PSF:
Pounds per Square Foot

A.
Materials shall be manufactured by companies that have been specializing in the products specified
B.
Test Equipment Suitability and Calibration: Comply with NETA ATS (current version), "Suitability of
Test Equipment" and "Test Instrument Calibration."
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing
Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in
29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
D.
Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to
supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

1.
2.
3.
Comply with UL 467.
E.
Comply with NFPA 70; for overhead-line construction and medium-voltage underground construction,
comply with IEEE C2.
F.
Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system.
G.

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
selection:
1.
2.
B.

specified.
2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS, CONNECTORS, AND ELECTRODES:

A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Apache Grounding/Erico Inc.

Boggs, Inc.
Chance/Hubbell.
Copperweld Corp.
Dossert Corp.
Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group.
FCI/Burndy Electrical.
Galvan Industries, Inc.
Harger Lightning Protection, Inc.
Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc.
Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co.
Ideal Industries, Inc.
ILSCO.
Kearney/Cooper Power Systems.
Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries.
Lightning Master Corp.

Duluth, GA

16170-2
1550000803
*** Issue 05/28/2004
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
Lyncole XIT Grounding.

O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group.
Panduit, Inc.
Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell.
Robbins Lightning, Inc.
Salisbury: W. H. Salisbury & Co.
Superior Grounding Systems, Inc.
Thomas & Betts, Electrical.
2.3 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A.
For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B.
Material: Aluminum, copper-clad aluminum, and copper.
C.
Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.
D.
Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe. On feeders
with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to provide a
minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow.
E.
Grounding Electrode Conductors: Bare, stranded, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Underground Conductors:
G.
Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following:

1.
2.
3.
H.
4.
Bonding Cable: 10 strands of No. 14 AWG aluminum conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.
Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded aluminum conductor.
Bonding Jumper:
Aluminum tape, braided bare aluminum conductors, terminated with
aluminum ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
Ground Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles: As follows:

1.
2.
K.
Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.
Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor.
Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with copper
ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (wide and 1/16 inch thick.
Aluminum Bonding Conductors: As follows:

1.
2.
3.
J.
Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows:

1.
2.
3.
I.
Bare-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum stranded, unless
No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper conductor.

Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC or wood molding. If wood, use pressure-treated fir, or
cypress or cedar.
Grounding Bus: UL & cUL Listed to UL467 & C22.2 respectively, pre-drilled per TIA/EIA Standard
607, bare, 1/4 inch thick, electrolytic, tough pitch copper bar, length and width as indicated on the
Drawings; insulators and standoffs as specified in Paragraph Ground Bars below.
2.4 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS

A.
Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of
conductors and connected items.
B.
Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors

1.
Compression Connectors: Burndy Hyground, or equal, permanent, pure, wrought copper,

meeting ASTM 8 1 87, essentially the same as the conductors being connected; clearly and
permanently marked with the information listed below:
a.
Company symbol and/or logo.
b. Catalog number.
c.
Conductors accommodated.
d. Installation die index number or die catalog number is required.

Duluth, GA

16170-3
1550000803
*** Issue 05/28/2004
e.
f.
2.
C.
Underwriters Laboratories Listing Mark:.

The words Suitable for Direct Burial or, where space is limited, Direct Burial or
Burial per UL Standard ANSI/UL467 (latest revision).
Cast connectors: copper base alloy according to ASTM B 30 (latest revision).
Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written
instructions.
2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A.
Ground Rods: UL-listed:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Copper-clad steel; bonded copper electrolytically-applied to minimum thickness of 13 mils.

Hot-dip galvanized steel; minimum zinc thickness specified per ASTM A-123
Stainless steel; Type 304
Size: 3/4 inch by 10 feet. Provide sectional types when longer rods are indicated.
B.
Chemical Electrodes: Copper tube, straight or L-shaped, filled with nonhazardous chemical salts,
terminated with a bare conductor sized, at a minimum, for the size of the connecting grounding
electrode conductor.
C.
Ground Plates: UL-listed, rectangular, bare solid copper plate; minimum 0.032-inch thick.
2.6 GROUND BARS

A.
Rectangular Ground Bars: UL & cUL Listed to UL467 & C22.2 respectively, pre-drilled per TIA/EIA
Standard 607, bare, 1/4 inch thick, electrolytic, tough pitch copper bar, length and width as
B.
Supports: Minimum of two each 1-1/2-inch insulators and 1-inch stainless steel offset mounting
brackets.
2.7 EQUIPOTENTIAL GROUNDING SYSTEM

A.
Operating and Delivery room ground modules: Post-Glover #RRP4-26 with 6 ground jacks, 2 twist
locks receptacles and ground bus in a single housing with stainless steel trim.
B.
Ground modules in locations, other than Operating and Delivery rooms: Post-Glover #GJP-3-06 with
6 ground jacks and a ground bus in a single housing with stainless steel trim.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS
A.
Test Wells:
1.
2.
B.
Traffic Areas: Polymer concrete reinforced with heavy weave fiberglass; H-20 load rating;
minimum 24 inches deep.
Non-traffic Areas: High density polyethylene; 350 PSF minimum load rating; minimum 10.25
inches deep.
Ground Enhancing Backfill: Provide low-resistivity, ground-enhancing backfill material recommended

by the electrode manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A.
Examine areas and conditions under which electrical grounding connections are to be made and
notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.
Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
Provide all materials, labor and equipment for an electrical grounding system in accordance with
applicable portions of the NEC and NECA. Coordinate electrical work as necessary to interface
installation of electrical grounding systems with other work.
C.
Accomplish grounding and bonding of electrical installations and specific requirements for systems,
circuits and equipment required to be grounded for both temporary and permanent construction.
3.2 APPLICATION
A.
Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with
earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.

Duluth, GA

16170-4
1550000803
*** Issue 05/28/2004
B.
In branch circuit and feeder raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.
C.
Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings.
1.
2.
D.
Use insulated spacers and mounting brackets, and support from wall 8 feet above finished floor,
At doors, route the bus up to the top of the door frame, across the top of the doorway, and
down to the specified height above the floor.
Underground Grounding Conductors: Bury at least 24 inches below grade, or 6 inches below the
official frost line, whichever is greater, or bury 12 inches above duct bank when installed as part of
the duct bank.
3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A.
Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding
conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are
indicated.
B.
Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and branch circuits.
C.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the following items, in
addition to those required by NFPA 70:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Feeders and branch circuits.

Lighting circuits.
Receptacle circuits.
Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
Flexible raceway runs.
Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
Feeders and branch circuits installed in non-metallic raceways.
D.
Separately Derived Systems: Bond the derived neutral (grounded) conductor of all separately derived
system (e.g., transformers, generators, UPS) to the nearest available grounding electrode, or back to
the service grounding electrode if no approved electrodes are readily available. Size the grounding
electrode conductor and bonding jumpers as indicated on the Drawings or as required by NFPA 70
Table 250.66, whichever is larger.
E.
Busway Supply Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor from the grounding bus
in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panelboard to the equipment grounding bar terminal
on the busway, if a direct bus-to-bus connection is not factory provided.
F.
Computer Outlet Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs
from computer-area power panelboards or power-distribution units.
G.
Isolated Ground (IG) Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor
connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor from raceway and from
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the
applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not use multi-conductor or MC cables.

Do not share neutrals between separate circuits.
Do not share the isolated grounding conductor with more than one device (i.e., each device on
an IG circuit shall have its own dedicated IG conductor back to the branch panelboard IG bus).
The equipment grounding conductor may be shared between IG circuits sharing a common
raceway
H.
Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or
feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for
the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate equipment
grounding conductor. Isolate equipment grounding conductor from raceway and from panelboard
grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived
system or service, unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless

they are designated for telephone or data cables.

Duluth, GA

16170-5
1550000803
*** Issue 05/28/2004
J.
Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical

devices operating at 120V and more, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond conductor to each
unit and to air duct.
K.
Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate equipment grounding
conductor to each electric water heater, heat-tracing, and antifrost heating cable. Bond conductor to
heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. On water heaters, bond metal hot and
cold water pipes together, across the heater tank.
L.
Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication
systems, provide No. 6 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding
electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment
location.
1.
2.
Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor
on a ground bar. Size: 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch.
Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
M.
Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Luminaires: Provide a grounding electrode in addition to installing a
separate equipment grounding conductor with supply branch-circuit conductors.
N.
Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Bond electrical power system ground
directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service
grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor,
and install in PVC conduit.
3.4 COUNTERPOISE
A.
Ground the steel framework of the building with a buried electrode at the base of every corner
column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart. Provide a
grounding conductor (counterpoise), electrically connected to each ground rod and to each steel
column, extending around the perimeter of the building. Use tinned-copper conductor not less than
No.2/0 AWG for counterpoise and for tap to building steel. Bury counterpoise not less than 18
inches below grade, or 6 inches below the official frost line, whichever is greater, and 24 inches
from building foundation.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A.
Ground Rods: Install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length, and no more than 2 rod
lengths, from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes.
1.
2.
3.
Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise
indicated.
Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds, except
at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging
copper coating.
Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.
B.
Grounding Conductors: Where the size of the grounding conductors are not shown, size in
accordance with NEC Table 250.122 Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless
otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected
to strain, impact, or damage.
C.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation
hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded
connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a bolted
clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.
Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.
D.
Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from
building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to
building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp
connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street
side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
E.
Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect
to pipe with grounding clamp connectors.

Duluth, GA

16170-6
1550000803
*** Issue 05/28/2004
F.
Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Use braided-type bonding straps.
G.
Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system upstream from equipment shutoff valve.
H.
Install one test well for each service at the ground rod electrically closest to the service entrance and
in a readily accessible location. Set top of well flush with finished grade or pavement. Test well
shall be exterior to the building.
I.
Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70, using a
minimum of 20 feet of bare, tinned copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. If concrete
foundation is less than 20 feet long, coil excess conductor within the base of the foundation. Bond
grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend
grounding conductor above footer and foundation and connect to building structural steel or other
grounding electrode external to concrete.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A.
General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select

connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact
will be galvanically compatible. Provide electrical bonding plates, connectors, terminals, lugs and
clamps as recommended by the manufacturers for indicated applications. Provide electrical insulating
tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials, and bonding straps as recommended by
the manufacturers for types of service indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Replace welds

that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning. Use exothermic
welded connections for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Connecting
Connecting
Connecting
Connecting
conductors
conductors
conductors
conductors
together.
to ground rods, except at test wells.
to building steel.
to plates.
Compression Fittings: Permanent compression-type fittings may be used for the following rather than
exothermic connections:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact
points closer to order of galvanic series.
Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps.
Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical
clamps.
Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future
penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
Connecting conductors together.

Connecting conductors to building steel.
Connecting conductors to ground rods, except at test wells.
Mechanical Pressure Fittings: Use bolted mechanical (removable) pressure-type clamps for the
following:
1.
2.
Connecting conductors to ground rods at test wells.

Connecting conductors to pipes.
E.
Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type
grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged
pressure-type connectors.
F.
Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without
mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing.
Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in
housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings
and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Connections at Test Wells: Use compression-type connectors on conductors and make bolted- and
clamped-type connections between conductors and ground rods.
H.
Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to

Duluth, GA

16170-7
1550000803
*** Issue 05/28/2004
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,
use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
I.
Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential

pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer.
Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector
has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.
J.
Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding
buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and
cable.
3.7 EQUIPOTENTIAL GROUNDING SYSTEM

A.
Equipotential grounding system shall consist of No. 10 AWG stranded copper conductors connecting
all exposed metal objects and metal building surfaces (within 6-0 beyond the reach of the patient)
to the patient grounding point or room bonding point and ultimately to the reference grounding point.
B.
The grounding connection between patient grounding points, room bonding points, reference
grounding point, isolation power centers, panelboards, etc. shall be a stranded copper conductor
sized as indicated on the Drawings. The system shall conform to NFPA 70, Article 517.
C.
Provide an equipotential grounding system in the following areas:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Operating Rooms
Delivery Rooms
Emergency Treatment Rooms
Intensive Care Areas
Cardiac Care Areas Recovery Rooms
Dialysis Units
Connect conductive flooring to the room bonding point by means of a No. 10 AWG bare copper
conductor extending a minimum of 3-0 into the room under the flooring.
3.8 OVERHEAD-LINE GROUNDING

A.
Comply with IEEE C2 requirements. Use two or more parallel ground rods if a single ground rod
electrode resistance to ground exceeds 25 ohms.
B.
Drive ground rods to a depth of 12 inches below finished grade in undisturbed earth.
C.
Ground Rod Connections: Use clamp-type connectors listed for the purpose for underground
connections and connections to rods.
D.
Lightning Arresters: Separate arrester grounds from other grounding conductors.
E.
Secondary Neutral and Tank of Transformer: Interconnect and connect to grounding conductor.
F.
Protect grounding conductors running on surface of wood poles with molding extended from grade
level up to and through communication service and transformer spaces.
3.9 UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GROUNDING

A.
Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod close to wall and set rod depth so 4 inches will
extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide a
No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof
sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping
of pressure-sensitive tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below
concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.
B.
Connections to Manhole Components: Connect exposed-metal parts, such as inserts, cable racks,
pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding
conductor. Make connections with No. 6 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper conductor.
Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable
armor and cable shields as recommended by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.
C.
Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and counterpoise encircling the
pad.
Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with
substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Use tinned-copper

Duluth, GA

16170-8
1550000803
*** Issue 05/28/2004
conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for counterpoise and for taps to equipment ground pad. Bury
counterpoise not less than 18 inches below grade, or 6 inches below the official frost line, whichever
is greater, and 6 inches from the foundation.
A.
testing:
B.
C.
Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been energized,
test for compliance with requirements.
Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is
specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells.
Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of precipitation, and
without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and
without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.
Perform tests by the fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
Provide drawings locating each ground rod and ground rod assembly and other grounding
electrodes, identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and
observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and include
observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures
taken to improve test results.
Test Values:
a.
The resistance between the main grounding electrode and earth ground shall be no greater
than 10 ohms.
b. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
c.
Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
d. Equipment Rated More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
e.
Substations and Pad-Mounted Switching Equipment: 5 ohms.
f.
Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.
Perform pointtopoint megohmmeter tests to determine the resistance between the main
grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, system neutral, and/or derived
neutral points.
Minimum system neutralto-ground insulation resistance: one megohm.
Investigate point-to-point resistance values that exceed 0.5 ohms.
a.
Check for loose connections.
b. Check for absent or broken connections.
c.
Check for poor quality welds.
d. Consider other reasons.
Excessive Grounding Electrode Resistance: If measured resistance to earth ground value
exceeds specified values, add grounding electrodes and additional conductors as required to
obtain the specified value.
3.11 GRADING AND PLANTING

A.
Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this Section.
Reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been removed, replace it as soon
as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable
laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include application of topsoil, fertilizer, lime,
seed, sod, sprig, and mulch. Comply with Division 2 Section "Landscaping." Maintain restored
surfaces. Restore disturbed paving as indicated.

Duluth, GA

16170-9
1550000803
*** Issue 05/28/2004
SECTION 16180
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This Section includes limited scope for electrical connections to equipment specified under other Sections or
Divisions, or furnished under separate contracts or by the Owner.
A.
Related Sections include the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Division 17 Section Digital Control Equipment for temperature control wiring.

Division 16 Section Basic Electrical Materials and Methods for raceways, conductors, cables,
and cords.
Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box service
fittings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.
1.
2.
Product data for the following products for:

Shop drawings for:
a.
Detailing electrical characteristics, wiring diagrams, fabrication and installation for wiring
systems.

A.

1.
2.
B.
1.4 COORDINATION
A.
Unless otherwise noted, perform all electrical Work required for the proper installation and operation
of equipment, furnishings, devices and systems specified in other Divisions of these Specifications,
furnished under other contracts, and/or furnished by the Owner for installation under this Contract.
B.
Coordinate work with Division 15 Section, Coordination.
C.
Coordinate with work described in Division 17 Section Digital Control Equipment.
D.
Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment
furnished under other sections.
E.
Determine connection locations and rough-in requirements based on Shop Drawings.
F.
Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation schedule for equipment.
G.
Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up schedule for equipment.

2.1 CORDS AND CAPS
A.
Attachment Plugs: Conform to NEMA WD 1.
B.
Configuration: NEMA WD 6, matching receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment, or

as required by the equipment manufacturer.
C.
Cord: See Paragraph Flexible Cords in Division 16 Section Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods.
D.
Provide cord size suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch

Duluth, GA

16180-1
1550000803
*** Issue 07/10/2003
circuit overcurrent protection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify conditions of equipment and installation prior to beginning work.
B.
Verify that equipment is ready for connecting, wiring, and energizing.
3.2 ELECTRICAL DEVICES

A.
Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices (other than temperature
control devices) as indicated.
B.
Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices (other than temperature
control devices) specified in other Divisions of these Specifications, furnished under other contracts,
and/or furnished by the Owner for installation under this Contract.
3.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A.
Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturers instructions.
B.
Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquid tight flexible conduit with
watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.
C.
Make wiring connections using conductors and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures
encountered in heat producing equipment.
D.
Provide receptacle outlet where connection with attachment plug is indicated. Provide cord and cap
where field-supplied attachment plug is indicated on the Drawings.
E.
Provide suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment
connection boxes.
F.
Provide interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment where indicated on the
Drawings.
3.4 HVAC EQUIPMENT

A.
When equipment is delivered in separate parts and field assembled, internal wiring, indicated on Shop
Drawings as field wiring, will be provided by the equipment supplier, unless otherwise noted.
3.5 COOLERS AND FREEZERS

A.
Cut conduit openings in freezer and cooler walls, floor, and ceilings, in accordance with
manufacturers instructions, when openings are not provided by the manufacturers. Seal around
conduit penetrations air tight with an approved pliable material suitable for low temperatures.
Effectively seal interiors of conduits, by installing a conduit fitting at the boundary of the two
spaces, and filling it with an approved pliable material, after conductors or cables have been installed
and tested.

Duluth, GA

16180-2
1550000803
*** Issue 07/10/2003
SECTION 16421
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.

1.
B.
Provisions for Underground Secondary Electrical Service.
Utility service voltage:

1.
480Y/277 volts, three-phase, four-wire, 60Hz.
C.
Utility service ampacity: As indicated on the Drawings.
D.
The extent of Work for the secondary electrical service includes providing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Raceways
Provisions for Metering
Grounding and Bonding
Concrete pad for service transformer
Service lateral
Utility coordination.

A.
B.
Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for raceways, fittings, conductors,
connectors, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical service.
C.
Division 16 Section Electrical Identification for raceway identification materials to use for marking
or tagging service raceways and boxes.
D.
Division 16 Section Grounding and Bonding for conductors, connectors, and electrodes for
electrical service grounding systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
1.
2.

a.
Meter bases
b. Current transformer cabinets
c.
Wood poles
d. Service weatherheads and risers
Shop drawings for:
a.
Utility Company prepared installation drawings
b. Cast-in-place concrete pads
B.
Where equipment or materials are specified to comply with utility standards and are listed above as
required submittals, obtain approval from the serving utility before submitting to the Architect.
C.
1.
Accurately record actual routing of all exterior buried raceway and all interior conduits two

A.
Perform all work in accordance with Utility Company installation drawings and service standards.
B.
Maintain one copy of Utility Company installation drawings and service standards at the site.
C.
Prior to commencing work in this Section, meet with the Utility Company representative to review
service entrance requirements and details.
D.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Utility Company drawings.

Duluth, GA

16421-1
1550000803
*** Issue 07/10/2003
E.

1.
2.
F.

(Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SECONDARY SERVICE ENTRANCE UNDERGROUND
A.
Provide an underground secondary service lateral from the pad mounted transformer in accordance
with NFPA 70 Article 230 and the Utility Company standards. Reference the Drawings for service
lateral conductor and raceway quantities, sizes, and types.
B.
The Utility Company will provide the service transformer.
C.
Provide a concrete pad, complying with the Utility Company standards, for transformer mounting,
and set coated GRS conduit elbows and riser(s), with grounding bushing(s), to receive primary and
secondary raceways. Where direct burial primary is used, set coated GRS conduit elbow(s) and
riser(s), with grounding bushing(s), to receive primary cables.
D.
Make connections to the secondary terminals of the transformer as required and in conformance with
Utility Company requirements. Utility Company will provide primary conductors and terminal
connections unless otherwise directed by the Utility Company.
E.
Provide underground raceways for primary cables from the transformer pad to the property line, and
provide pull cord, per Utility Company standards, for the Utility Companys use in pulling primary
conductors. Install raceways a minimum of 24 inches below finished grade line unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings or directed by the Utility Company. Provide excavation and backfill as
required to accomplish the installation. Contractor shall coordinate with the local utility company for
all utility requirements including number of conduits required to be installed per utility standards.
3.2 METERING
A.
Provide a meter base complying with the Utility Company standards.
B.
The Utility Company will provide the meter and meter wiring.
3.3 UTILITY SERVICE CHARGES

A.
Pay all Utility Company charges for providing electric service, including all charges for bringing
primary service conductors to the site.

Duluth, GA

16421-2
1550000803
*** Issue 07/10/2003
SECTION 16425
POWER DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT (600V) CD CONTROLS
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:
A.
Switchboards (CD Controls)
B.
Panelboards (CD Controls)
C.
Enclosed Circuit Breakers
D.
Disconnect Switches
1.2 SUMMARY
A.
This section of the specification covers the installation of pre-manufactured electrical PowerWalls,
and the distribution equipment external to the pre-manufactured products.
B.
Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to receive, and install
products, as indicated on the drawings or as specified herein.
C.

sections.
D.
Equipment indicated herein are NATIONAL ACCOUNT items purchased by the Owner or General
Contractor as determined by the Owner prior to bid call, and received, stored and installed by the
General Contractor.
E.
The pre-manufactured electrical products shall be purchased from the approved supplier:
1.
a.
All work shall be coordinated with other
Power Wall is supplied by:

Custom Designed Controls (CD Controls), 55 Gateway Drive, Lavonia, GA 30553, Tel.:
(706) 356-0325, Fax: (760) 356-0329
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Reference Division 1 for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Where applicable, product submittals shall include equipment voltage, bus ampacities, bus
bracing ratings, fault current withstand ratings, switch ampere ratings, breaker frame size and
trip ratings and time-current curves of all equipment and components.
Submittals for Fully Rated and Series Combination Rated (when allowed) equipment shall clearly
indicate that the equipment submitted has integrated equipment ratings sufficient for the
available short circuit current at the equipment.
Product data shall include drawings indicating outline and support point dimensions of
enclosures and accessories, weights, overcurrent and short circuit protective devices
arrangement and sizes and nameplate legends.
CD Controls Process and Procedure manual for Contractors review and use.
Provide one-line diagram drawings showing switchboard bussing ,feeder configurations and
sizing, grounding requirements, ground fault protection (where applicable) and switchboard
instrument requirements.
Include with the product data submittals, drawings showing the layout of equipment in each
electrical room and closet. Dimensioned, 1/4 scale drawings shall show actual equipment
sizes and locations in plan and elevation, and shall verify compliance with NEC clearances and
working spaces. Drawings shall also show feeder conduit, raceway and/or busway routing
within electrical room or closet. Failure to submit these layout drawings may result in rejection
of the entire power distribution equipment submittal.
Provide dimensioned, scaled layout drawings of all feeder and plug-in busways. Also provide
busway installation details and locations of supports, fittings, firestops and weatherseals.
Include details of wall and floor penetrations.
Manufacturers Instructions:

Duluth, GA

16425-1
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency.
Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and
starting of Product.
The Contractor shall contact CD Controls in writing as soon as possible after receiving notices
to proceed.
a.
Contact notification shall include the job name, customer job number, job street address,
the exact date equipment is needed on site, a 24-hour before shipment on-site phone
number for the carrier to call prior to leaving the factory and the Customer Contact name
and phone number.
The Contractor shall obtain CD Controls information drawings, lifting examples and equipment
specifications to ensure receipt and installation of equipment without damage to components or
adjacent work. Note: PowerWalls are not weather tight and Contractor must have weather tight
location ready for prior to delivery.
The responsibility of Work under this Section includes, but is not limited to the following:
a.
Contact CD Controls to coordinate and schedule delivery to site.
b. Work under this section is also intended for use as temporary power. Ensure provisions for
operation is provided in conjunction with construction schedule.
c.
Ensure preparation for installation of this work is provided. Preparation shall include, but is
not limited to the following:
1) Site grading before installation of primary power and site transformer.
2) Installation and preparation of structural support for PowerWall; that is, slabs,
material/labor required etc.
3) Grounding requirements for PowerWall.
4) Receipt and placement of PowerWall within building structure as outlined per contract
documents.
5) Provisions for incoming electrical service, service grounding, house ground, system
grounds, large conduit/feeders to equipment panels, transformers, etc. external to
PowerWall and branch circuit entrances. All required provisions conduits/conductors
shall be coordinated with CD Controls before installation occurs.
d. Secure lockable room to store equipment.
Examine surfaces and adjacent areas in which work under this Section is to be performed.
a.
Report in writing to the Construction Manager prevailing conditions that may adversely
affect satisfactory execution of Work.
b. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
c.
Starting work constitutes acceptance of the existing conditions and this Contractor shall
then, at Contractors expense, be responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and
defective Work encountered.
The Contractor shall receive the PowerWall equipment at the site, review order for
completeness and inspect the unit(s) for damage and correct labeling. Shortages and/or
damaged materials shall be replaced by CD Controls. The Electrical Contractor must submit
supplementary orders for replacement materials to CD Controls within 10 days of the
PowerWall delivery date.
The Contractor shall mark shortages and/or damaged materials on the receiving bill, and attach
a copy with the supplemental order to CD Controls. The Electrical Contractor shall attach a
copy of the receiving bill to a claim document from the carrier and submit to the General
Contractor to forward to the customers project manager.
Changes to materials (revisions) after receiving of shipment shall be coordinated by the
Electrical Contractor or with CD Controls, immediately upon receipt of revised plans. The
associated change in materials and additional labor costs shall be submitted by the Electrical
Contractor to the General Contractor to be forwarded to the customers project manager for
approval.
It is the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to store and protect all materials furnished by
CD Controls to the Electrical Contractor for installation
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A.
Conform to the requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or other testing firm
acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

Duluth, GA

16425-2
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
A.
Provide installation, operation and maintenance instructions for each type of electrical equipment.

2.1 GENERAL
A.
Division of Responsibility
1.
2.
3.
CD Controls:
a.
Furnish complete PowerWall including shipping to site.
b. Construct PowerWall to dimensions shown on the drawings or otherwise agreed to by the
customer.
c.
Repair or replace all damage or deficiencies resulting from manufacture or shipping (when
properly documented).
d. Furnish job specific chase drawings to check electrical stub-up locations at PowerWall
prior to installation of floor slabs to ensure correct locations.
e.
Coordinate, at the direction of the A/E of Record, and furnish from the electrical gear
manufacturer the following:
1) Submittal book with vendor cut sheets and drawings.
On-Site Contractor:
a.
Furnish required delivery dates to CD Controls.
b. Receive and install PowerWall. Set PowerWall on prepared base, plumb and level. Provide
equipment for lifting and moving PowerWall as required and secure in place.
c.
Coordinate and provide all underground rough-ins to PowerWall prior to delivery.
d. Furnish and install feeder and branch circuit wiring from PowerWall to equipment and
areas external to PowerWall.
e.
Coordinate installation of footings and slabs under PowerWall so they are completed and
cured prior to delivery.
f.
Re-torque all wiring connections to assure that connections, which may have become
loose during shipping, are secure to manufacturers specification.
g. Set up local utility company for providing site electrical transformer and metering.
h. Site grading in the preparation of running primary power from off-site to on-site electrical
transformer.
i.
Ensure grounding electrodes have been provided and coordinated with PowerWall
installation.
Distribution Equipment PowerWall:
a.
CD Controls shall provide to the Contractor for installation all remaining panelboards as
called out on customer drawings and CD Controls Quote. Note: All remaining electrical
equipment required for the completion of the project (i.e. equipment disconnects and
fuses, starters, relays, light switches, receptacles, wireways, etc., shall be provided and
installed by the Electrical Contractor.
1) Contractor may submit this final equipment list to CD Controls for a quotation. All
equipment provided, where possible, shall be one and the same manufacturer as
provided by CD Controls including all electrical distribution equipment external to the
PowerWall. This equipment shall include, but not limited to, panelboards, all
disconnect/safety switches (including fuses), contactors, starters, relays, telephone
boards, wireways, etc.
b. CD Controls will confirm the order and return to the Electrical Contractor a completed
takeoff indicating all materials to be shipped. The Electrical Contractor is then responsible
for confirming those materials and quantities submitted by CD Controls with the electrical
plans and specifications. A return confirmation must be sent back by the Electrical
Contractor to CD Controls for final coordination of the package contents. CD Controls is
solely responsible for correctness of shipped materials and quantities per final coordinated
package.
c.
The Electrical Contractor shall check all materials in cartons or other containers for
concealed damage or missing parts and note on carriers Bill of Lading any issues.
Supplemental orders for replacement of concealed damaged or missing materials must be
made within 10 days of the date the shipment arrived at the customer or job site.
d. Once received, the Electrical Contractor shall take full responsibility for the storage and
protection of all materials furnished by CD Controls.
2.2 SWITCHBOARDS

Duluth, GA

16425-3
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
A.
Powerwall:
1.
The only acceptable manufacturer of panelboards and main distribution panels contained in the
Electrical Powerwall and SES (if required) is General Electric Co. Spectra Series for SES, MDP
and GE A-Series Type AE or AQ for panel boards.
2. Short Circuit Current Rating:
a.
Main Distribution Panel (MDP) of the Powerwall and Panelboard M shall be fully rated at a
short circuit rating of 65KAIC. Panelboard A shall be series rated back to MDP at 65KAIC
per manufacturers specifications. Appropriate labels shall be included in the equipment.
Panelboards B, C, and D on T1 secondary shall be 10KAIC unless otherwise noted on
prints.
3. The Powerwall shall consist of required MDP, Transformer, Panelboards and the Environmental
Control Panel Section. The MDP Section shall be GE Spectra Series feeding a group mounted
distribution section. The MDP Section shall be front accessible. Each section shall contain
grounding lugs per service requirements.
4. The Panel Sections shall include pre-wired distribution panelboards. Lighting contactors (GE
type CR463L80AJA) prewired to appropriate circuit breaker. The Powerwall manufacturer shall
be responsible for integrating and pre-wiring the Environmental Controls Section. Powerwall
manufacturer is to purchase the required EMS components from Emerson Climate Technologies
/ CPC.
5. Standards
a.
The Powerwall shall be designed, built and tested in accordance with NEMA PB-2 and
Underwriters Laboratories No. UL 891 and the latest requirements of the National
Electrical Code. All sections and devices shall be UL 891 listed and labeled.
6. Structure
a.
The Powerwall dimensions be a complete self-supporting structure with 84 inch high
vertical sections bolted together to form the required arrangement. All sections shall be
rear aligned and may be rolled, moved, or lifted into the installation position and bolted
directly to the floor without the addition of floor sills. All sections shall contain appropriate
plates for lifting. The structure frame shall be 12 gauge galvanized per UL891. This
enclosure shall have a front accessible lift-off hinged galvanized door. Distribution
panelboards shall be individually accessible by lift-off hinged doors with handles.
b. Between each stacked panelboard within the Powerwall there shall be a protective barrier.
The contractor shall completely install the Powerwall as shown on the drawings and
described in these specifications.
1) New ground up buildings the powerwall is provided the electrical contractor.
2) Existing remodeled facilities the powerwall is provided by Sprouts.
7. Bus bars shall be aluminum having a cross-section current density not exceeding 1000 amperes
per square inch. They shall be mounted on supports of high impact non-tracking insulating
material, and shall be braced to withstand the mechanical force exerted during short circuit
conditions. Short circuit bracing shall be 65,000 amperes RMS Symmetrical minimum. A
ground bus is secured to each vertical section.
8. A-B-C type bus arrangement (left-to-right, top-to-bottom, front-to-rear) shall be used throughout
to assure convenient and safe testing and maintenance.
9. All lugs shall be UL listed for use with copper or aluminum cable with ampacity based on 75
degree C conductor temperature ratings.
10. Powerwall current ratings including devices shall be based on operation in a 25 degree C room
ambient, per UL 891.
B.
OUTDOOR UTILITY SES SERVICE ENTRANCE

1.
2.
3.
4.
The only acceptable manufacturer of the SES is General Electric Co. Spectra Series.
Short Circuit Current Rating:
a.
SES shall be fully rated at a short circuit rating of 65KAIC.
The main circuit breaker shall be 80% rated current and braced for 65,000 AIC unless
otherwise noted. The utility requirements will be as noted on the drawings.
Standards
a.
The SES shall be designed, built and tested in accordance with NEMA PB-2 and
Electrical Code. All sections and devices shall be UL 891 listed and labeled. This unit will

Duluth, GA

16425-4
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
5.
6.
7.
be Nema 3R.
Structure
a.
Bus bars shall be tin plated aluminum having a cross-section current density not exceeding
750 amperes per square inch. They shall be mounted on supports of high impact nontracking insulating material, and shall be braced to withstand the mechanical force exerted
during short circuit conditions. Short circuit bracing shall be 65,000 amperes RMS
Symmetrical. A ground bus is secured to each vertical section.
b. A-B-C type bus arrangement (left-to-right, top-to-bottom, front-to-rear) shall be used
throughout to assure convenient and safe testing and maintenance.
All lugs shall be UL listed for use with copper or aluminum cable with ampacity based on 75
When utility standards do not require EUSERC provisions, a service entrance rated enclosed
circuit breaker shall be acceptable with prior approval from the governing utility company. CD
Controls shall be responsible for contacting the local utility service planner prior to releasing
submittals and confirm design standards are met.
2.3 PANELBOARDS
A.
General:
1.
Refer to Powerwall Section above for further information.
2.4 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A.
References:
1.
2.
3.
B.
UL489 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures.

UL50 - Cabinets and Boxes.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Provide enclosed circuit breakers where indicated on the Drawings and as required by the
specifications.
Circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal magnetic type unless indicated otherwise on the
Drawings.
Circuit breakers enclosures shall have an integrated equipment rating suitable for the available
fault current.
NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosures shall be used for interior dry locations unless
NEMA Type 3R raintight enclosures shall be used for exterior locations unless otherwise
indicated.
Circuit breaker enclosures identified for use as service equipment are to be labeled for Service
Entrance application.
Circuit breaker operating handles shall be operable from outside of enclosures and shall be
capable of being locked in the open position.
Reference DIVISION 16 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTION for circuit breaker specifications.
2.5 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A.
Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Furnish and install all disconnect switches required for full code compliance except where
switches are furnished with equipment specified in other DIVISIONS of the specifications in
which case, install only.
Fusible Switch Assemblies: Shall be NEMA KS 1, Type HD (Heavy Duty) horsepower rated,
load interrupter switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front
cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse clips shall
accommodate Class R unless indicated otherwise. Fusible switches shall be UL rated 200,000
AIC with Class R,J or L fuses.
Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: Shall be NEMA KS 1, Type HD (Heavy Duty) load interrupter
switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in
ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position.

Duluth, GA

16425-5
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
5.
indicated.
6. Switches controlling or disconnecting motor loads shall be horsepower rated and approved for
motor control service except where NEC 430-109 exceptions apply.
7. All disconnect switches shall be capable of being locked open.
8. Controller disconnect switches shall be within sight of the controller. If the disconnect switch
of any controller is out of site of, or more than 50 feet from, its related motor, then a
disconnecting switch shall be added within sight of the motor. The switch at the motor may be
deleted only where allowed by the NEC and where approved by the Engineer.
9. Install fuses specified in DIVISION 16 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTION in all fusible switches.
10. Provide adhesive label on inside door of each switch indicating UL fuse class and size for
replacement.
11. Switches used for service entrance shall have a UL Service Entrance Label.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION:
A.
Examine area to receive electrical equipment to provide adequate clearance for equipment
installation.
B.
Provide 4 high concrete housekeeping pads for all floor mounted equipment that are level and free
of irregularities.
C.
Start work only after unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
D.
Examine area to receive switchboard to provide adequate clearance for Powerwall installation.
E.
Check that concrete pads are level, and free from irregularities.
F.
The Electrical Contractor shall notify the General Contractor and Manufacturer in writing as to any
deficiencies found and shall wait for said deficiencies to be corrected. The Electrical Contractor shall
note on the Bill of Lading (receiving document) any shortages and/or damaged material signed by the
driver to be used in conjunction with claim filing. The commencing of work in any area indicates
acceptance of existing conditions and any future deficiencies found are the responsibility of the
Electrical contractor.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A.
Install all electrical equipment in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.
B.
Set all equipment plumb and level except as otherwise required by manufacturers requirements.
C.
Properly support all equipment and anchor to structure.
D.
Coordinate all equipment AIC ratings with the available fault current.
E.
Provide engraved plastic nameplates on all equipment and devices as required by the specifications.
F.
Transformers:
1.
2.
3.
Use flexible conduit under the provisions of DIVISION 16 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
for connections to transformer case. Minimum flexible conduit length shall be two (2) feet.
Mount transformers on vibration isolating pads suitable for isolating the transformer noise from
the building structure.
Provide seismic restraints as required by code.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A.
Switchboards:
1.
2.
3.
Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and
grounding.
Measure, using a Megger, the insulation resistance of each bus section phase to phase and
phase to ground for one minute each, at minimum test voltage of 1000 volts DC; minimum
acceptable value for insulation resistance is 1 megohms. NOTE: Refer to manufacturers
literature for specific testing procedures.
Check tightness of accessible bolted bus joints, bolted connections and circuit breaker

Duluth, GA

16425-6
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
connections using calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturers written
specifications and torque values.
Physically test key interlock systems to check for proper functionality.
Test ground fault systems by operating push-to-test button.
Adjust all operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement per manufacturers
specifications.
Tighten bolted bus connections in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
Adjust circuit breaker trip and time delay settings to values as required by coordination study.
Panelboards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
grounding.
Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the
panelboard to balance the phase loads within 20% of each other. Maintain proper phasing for
multi-wire branch circuits.
Check tightness of bolted connections, and circuit breaker connections using calibrated torque
wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturers written specification.
specifications.
3.4 CLEANING:
A.
Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.

Duluth, GA

16425-7
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
SECTION 16425
POWER DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT (600V) HILL PHOENIX
A.
Switchboards (Hill Phoenix)
B.
Panelboards (Hill Phoenix)
C.
Enclosed Circuit Breakers
D.
Disconnect Switches
1.2 SUMMARY
A.
This section of the specification covers the installation of pre-manufactured electrical PowerWalls,
and the distribution equipment external to the pre-manufactured products.
B.
Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to receive, and install
products, as indicated on the drawings or as specified herein.
C.

sections.
D.
Equipment indicated herein are NATIONAL ACCOUNT items purchased by the Owner or General
Contractor as determined by the Owner prior to bid call, and received, stored and installed by the
General Contractor.
E.
The pre-manufactured electrical products shall be purchased from the approved supplier:
1.
a.
All work shall be coordinated with other
Power Wall is supplied by:

Hill Phoenix, 709 Sigman Rd., Conyers, GA 30013, Tel.: (770) 285-31005, Fax: (770)
285-3076
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Reference Division 1 for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Where applicable, product submittals shall include equipment voltage, bus ampacities, bus
bracing ratings, fault current withstand ratings, switch ampere ratings, breaker frame size and
trip ratings and time-current curves of all equipment and components.
Submittals for Fully Rated and Series Combination Rated (when allowed) equipment shall clearly
indicate that the equipment submitted has integrated equipment ratings sufficient for the
available short circuit current at the equipment.
Product data shall include drawings indicating outline and support point dimensions of
enclosures and accessories, weights, overcurrent and short circuit protective devices
arrangement and sizes and nameplate legends.
Hill Phoenix Process and Procedure manual for Contractors review and use.
Provide one-line diagram drawings showing switchboard bussing ,feeder configurations and
sizing, grounding requirements, ground fault protection (where applicable) and switchboard
instrument requirements.
Include with the product data submittals, drawings showing the layout of equipment in each
electrical room and closet. Dimensioned, 1/4 scale drawings shall show actual equipment
sizes and locations in plan and elevation, and shall verify compliance with NEC clearances and
working spaces. Drawings shall also show feeder conduit, raceway and/or busway routing
within electrical room or closet. Failure to submit these layout drawings may result in rejection
of the entire power distribution equipment submittal.
Provide dimensioned, scaled layout drawings of all feeder and plug-in busways. Also provide
busway installation details and locations of supports, fittings, firestops and weatherseals.
Include details of wall and floor penetrations.
Manufacturers Instructions:

Duluth, GA

16425-1
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency.
Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and
starting of Product.
The Contractor shall contact Hill Phoenix in writing as soon as possible after receiving notices
to proceed.
a.
Contact notification shall include the job name, customer job number, job street address,
the exact date equipment is needed on site, a 24-hour before shipment on-site phone
number for the carrier to call prior to leaving the factory and the Customer Contact name
and phone number.
The Contractor shall obtain Hill Phoenix information drawings, lifting examples and equipment
specifications to ensure receipt and installation of equipment without damage to components or
adjacent work. Note: PowerWalls are not weather tight and Contractor must have weather tight
location ready for prior to delivery.
The responsibility of Work under this Section includes, but is not limited to the following:
a.
Contact Hill Phoenix to coordinate and schedule delivery to site.
b. Work under this section is also intended for use as temporary power. Ensure provisions for
operation is provided in conjunction with construction schedule.
c.
Ensure preparation for installation of this work is provided. Preparation shall include, but is
not limited to the following:
1) Site grading before installation of primary power and site transformer.
2) Installation and preparation of structural support for PowerWall; that is, slabs,
material/labor required etc.
3) Grounding requirements for PowerWall.
4) Receipt and placement of PowerWall within building structure as outlined per contract
documents.
5) Provisions for incoming electrical service, service grounding, house ground, system
grounds, large conduit/feeders to equipment panels, transformers, etc. external to
PowerWall and branch circuit entrances. All required provisions conduits/conductors
shall be coordinated with Hill Phoenix before installation occurs.
d. Secure lockable room to store equipment.
Examine surfaces and adjacent areas in which work under this Section is to be performed.
a.
Report in writing to the Construction Manager prevailing conditions that may adversely
affect satisfactory execution of Work.
b. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
c.
Starting work constitutes acceptance of the existing conditions and this Contractor shall
then, at Contractors expense, be responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and
defective Work encountered.
The Contractor shall receive the PowerWall equipment at the site, review order for
completeness and inspect the unit(s) for damage and correct labeling. Shortages and/or
damaged materials shall be replaced by Hill Phoenix. The Electrical Contractor must submit
supplementary orders for replacement materials to Hill Phoenix within 10 days of the PowerWall
delivery date.
The Contractor shall mark shortages and/or damaged materials on the receiving bill, and attach
a copy with the supplemental order to Hill Phoenix. The Electrical Contractor shall attach a copy
of the receiving bill to a claim document from the carrier and submit to the General Contractor
to forward to the customers project manager.
Changes to materials (revisions) after receiving of shipment shall be coordinated by the
Electrical Contractor or with Hill Phoenix, immediately upon receipt of revised plans. The
associated change in materials and additional labor costs shall be submitted by the Electrical
Contractor to the General Contractor to be forwarded to the customers project manager for
approval.
It is the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to store and protect all materials furnished by
Hill Phoenix to the Electrical Contractor for installation

A.
Conform to the requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or other testing firm
acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

Duluth, GA

16425-2
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
A.
Provide installation, operation and maintenance instructions for each type of electrical equipment.

2.1 GENERAL
A.
Division of Responsibility
1.
2.
3.
Hill Phoenix:
a.
Furnish complete PowerWall including shipping to site.
b. Construct PowerWall to dimensions shown on the drawings or otherwise agreed to by the
customer.
c.
Repair or replace all damage or deficiencies resulting from manufacture or shipping (when
properly documented).
d. Furnish job specific chase drawings to check electrical stub-up locations at PowerWall
prior to installation of floor slabs to ensure correct locations.
e.
Coordinate, at the direction of the A/E of Record, and furnish from the electrical gear
manufacturer the following:
1) Submittal book with vendor cut sheets and drawings.
On-Site Contractor:
a.
Furnish required delivery dates to Hill Phoenix.
b. Receive and install PowerWall. Set PowerWall on prepared base, plumb and level. Provide
equipment for lifting and moving PowerWall as required and secure in place.
c.
Coordinate and provide all underground rough-ins to PowerWall prior to delivery.
d. Furnish and install feeder and branch circuit wiring from PowerWall to equipment and
areas external to PowerWall.
e.
Coordinate installation of footings and slabs under PowerWall so they are completed and
cured prior to delivery.
f.
Re-torque all wiring connections to assure that connections, which may have become
loose during shipping, are secure to manufacturers specification.
g. Set up local utility company for providing site electrical transformer and metering.
h. Site grading in the preparation of running primary power from off-site to on-site electrical
transformer.
i.
Ensure grounding electrodes have been provided and coordinated with PowerWall
installation.
Distribution Equipment PowerWall:
a.
Hill Phoenix shall provide to the Contractor for installation all remaining panelboards as
called out on customer drawings and Hill Phoenix Quote. Note: All remaining electrical
equipment required for the completion of the project (i.e. equipment disconnects and
fuses, starters, relays, light switches, receptacles, wireways, etc., shall be provided and
installed by the Electrical Contractor.
1) Contractor may submit this final equipment list to Hill Phoenix for a quotation. All
equipment provided, where possible, shall be one and the same manufacturer as
provided by Hill Phoenix including all electrical distribution equipment external to the
PowerWall. This equipment shall include, but not limited to, panelboards, all
disconnect/safety switches (including fuses), contactors, starters, relays, telephone
boards, wireways, etc.
b. Hill Phoenix will confirm the order and return to the Electrical Contractor a completed
takeoff indicating all materials to be shipped. The Electrical Contractor is then responsible
for confirming those materials and quantities submitted by Hill Phoenix with the electrical
plans and specifications. A return confirmation must be sent back by the Electrical
Contractor to Hill Phoenix for final coordination of the package contents. Hill Phoenix is
solely responsible for correctness of shipped materials and quantities per final coordinated
package.
c.
The Electrical Contractor shall check all materials in cartons or other containers for
concealed damage or missing parts and note on carriers Bill of Lading any issues.
Supplemental orders for replacement of concealed damaged or missing materials must be
made within 10 days of the date the shipment arrived at the customer or job site.
d. Once received, the Electrical Contractor shall take full responsibility for the storage and
protection of all materials furnished by Hill Phoenix.
2.2 SWITCHBOARDS

Duluth, GA

16425-3
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
A.
Powerwall:
1.
The only acceptable manufacturer of panelboards and main distribution panels contained in the
Electrical Powerwall and SES (if required) is General Electric Co. Spectra Series for SES, MDP
and GE A-Series Type AE or AQ for panel boards.
2. Short Circuit Current Rating:
a.
Main Distribution Panel (MDP) of the Powerwall and Panelboard M shall be fully rated at a
short circuit rating of 65KAIC. Panelboard A shall be series rated back to MDP at 65KAIC
per manufacturers specifications. Appropriate labels shall be included in the equipment.
Panelboards B, C, and D on T1 secondary shall be 10KAIC unless otherwise noted on
prints.
3. The Powerwall shall consist of required MDP, Transformer, Panelboards and the Environmental
Control Panel Section. The MDP Section shall be GE Spectra Series feeding a group mounted
distribution section. The MDP Section shall be front accessible. Each section shall contain
grounding lugs per service requirements.
4. The Panel Sections shall include pre-wired distribution panelboards. Lighting contactors (GE
type CR463L80AJA) prewired to appropriate circuit breaker. The Powerwall manufacturer shall
be responsible for integrating and pre-wiring the Environmental Controls Section. Powerwall
manufacturer is to purchase the required EMS components from Emerson Climate Technologies
/ CPC.
5. Standards
a.
The Powerwall shall be designed, built and tested in accordance with NEMA PB-2 and
Electrical Code. All sections and devices shall be UL 891 listed and labeled.
6. Structure
a.
The Powerwall dimensions be a complete self-supporting structure with 84 inch high
vertical sections bolted together to form the required arrangement. All sections shall be
rear aligned and may be rolled, moved, or lifted into the installation position and bolted
directly to the floor without the addition of floor sills. All sections shall contain appropriate
plates for lifting. The structure frame shall be 12 gauge galvanized per UL891. This
enclosure shall have a front accessible lift-off hinged galvanized door. Distribution
panelboards shall be individually accessible by lift-off hinged doors with handles.
b. Between each stacked panelboard within the Powerwall there shall be a protective barrier.
The contractor shall completely install the Powerwall as shown on the drawings and
described in these specifications.
1) New ground up buildings (built to suit projects) the powerwall is provided the general
contractor / developer.
2) Existing remodeled facilities (tenant improvement projects) the powerwall is provided
by Sprouts.
7. Bus bars shall be aluminum having a cross-section current density not exceeding 1000 amperes
per square inch. They shall be mounted on supports of high impact non-tracking insulating
material, and shall be braced to withstand the mechanical force exerted during short circuit
conditions. Short circuit bracing shall be 65,000 amperes RMS Symmetrical minimum. A
ground bus is secured to each vertical section.
8. A-B-C type bus arrangement (left-to-right, top-to-bottom, front-to-rear) shall be used throughout
to assure convenient and safe testing and maintenance.
9. All lugs shall be UL listed for use with copper or aluminum cable with ampacity based on 75
10. Powerwall current ratings including devices shall be based on operation in a 25 degree C room
ambient, per UL 891.
B.
OUTDOOR UTILITY SES SERVICE ENTRANCE

1.
2.
3.
4.
The only acceptable manufacturer of the SES is General Electric Co. Spectra Series.
Short Circuit Current Rating:
a.
SES shall be fully rated at a short circuit rating of 65KAIC.
The main circuit breaker shall be 80% rated current and braced for 65,000 AIC unless
otherwise noted. The utility requirements will be as noted on the drawings.
Standards
a.
The SES shall be designed, built and tested in accordance with NEMA PB-2 and

Duluth, GA

16425-4
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
5.
6.
7.
Electrical Code. All sections and devices shall be UL 891 listed and labeled. This unit will
be Nema 3R.
Structure
a.
Bus bars shall be tin plated aluminum having a cross-section current density not exceeding
750 amperes per square inch. They shall be mounted on supports of high impact nontracking insulating material, and shall be braced to withstand the mechanical force exerted
during short circuit conditions. Short circuit bracing shall be 65,000 amperes RMS
Symmetrical. A ground bus is secured to each vertical section.
b. A-B-C type bus arrangement (left-to-right, top-to-bottom, front-to-rear) shall be used
throughout to assure convenient and safe testing and maintenance.
All lugs shall be UL listed for use with copper or aluminum cable with ampacity based on 75
When utility standards do not require EUSERC provisions, a service entrance rated enclosed
circuit breaker shall be acceptable with prior approval from the governing utility company. Hill
Phoenix shall be responsible for contacting the local utility service planner prior to releasing
submittals and confirm design standards are met.
2.3 PANELBOARDS
A.
General:
1.
Refer to Powerwall Section above for further information.
2.4 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A.
References:
1.
2.
3.
B.
UL489 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures.

UL50 - Cabinets and Boxes.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Provide enclosed circuit breakers where indicated on the Drawings and as required by the
specifications.
Circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal magnetic type unless indicated otherwise on the
Drawings.
Circuit breakers enclosures shall have an integrated equipment rating suitable for the available
fault current.
indicated.
Circuit breaker enclosures identified for use as service equipment are to be labeled for Service
Entrance application.
Circuit breaker operating handles shall be operable from outside of enclosures and shall be
capable of being locked in the open position.
Reference DIVISION 16 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTION for circuit breaker specifications.
2.5 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A.
Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Furnish and install all disconnect switches required for full code compliance except where
switches are furnished with equipment specified in other DIVISIONS of the specifications in
which case, install only.
Fusible Switch Assemblies: Shall be NEMA KS 1, Type HD (Heavy Duty) horsepower rated,
load interrupter switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front
cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse clips shall
accommodate Class R unless indicated otherwise. Fusible switches shall be UL rated 200,000
AIC with Class R,J or L fuses.
Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: Shall be NEMA KS 1, Type HD (Heavy Duty) load interrupter
switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in
ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position.

Duluth, GA

16425-5
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
4.
5. NEMA Type 3R raintight enclosures shall be used for exterior locations unless otherwise
indicated.
6. Switches controlling or disconnecting motor loads shall be horsepower rated and approved for
motor control service except where NEC 430-109 exceptions apply.
7. All disconnect switches shall be capable of being locked open.
8. Controller disconnect switches shall be within sight of the controller. If the disconnect switch
of any controller is out of site of, or more than 50 feet from, its related motor, then a
disconnecting switch shall be added within sight of the motor. The switch at the motor may be
deleted only where allowed by the NEC and where approved by the Engineer.
9. Install fuses specified in DIVISION 16 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTION in all fusible switches.
10. Provide adhesive label on inside door of each switch indicating UL fuse class and size for
replacement.
11. Switches used for service entrance shall have a UL Service Entrance Label.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION:
A.
Examine area to receive electrical equipment to provide adequate clearance for equipment
installation.
B.
Provide 4 high concrete housekeeping pads for all floor mounted equipment that are level and free
of irregularities.
C.
Start work only after unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
D.
Examine area to receive switchboard to provide adequate clearance for Powerwall installation.
E.
Check that concrete pads are level, and free from irregularities.
F.
The Electrical Contractor shall notify the General Contractor and Manufacturer in writing as to any
deficiencies found and shall wait for said deficiencies to be corrected. The Electrical Contractor shall
note on the Bill of Lading (receiving document) any shortages and/or damaged material signed by the
driver to be used in conjunction with claim filing. The commencing of work in any area indicates
acceptance of existing conditions and any future deficiencies found are the responsibility of the
Electrical contractor.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A.
Install all electrical equipment in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.
B.
Set all equipment plumb and level except as otherwise required by manufacturers requirements.
C.
Properly support all equipment and anchor to structure.
D.
Coordinate all equipment AIC ratings with the available fault current.
E.
Provide engraved plastic nameplates on all equipment and devices as required by the specifications.
F.
Transformers:
1.
2.
3.
Use flexible conduit under the provisions of DIVISION 16 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
for connections to transformer case. Minimum flexible conduit length shall be two (2) feet.
Mount transformers on vibration isolating pads suitable for isolating the transformer noise from
the building structure.
Provide seismic restraints as required by code.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A.
Switchboards:
1.
2.
grounding.
Measure, using a Megger, the insulation resistance of each bus section phase to phase and
phase to ground for one minute each, at minimum test voltage of 1000 volts DC; minimum
acceptable value for insulation resistance is 1 megohms. NOTE: Refer to manufacturers

Duluth, GA

16425-6
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
literature for specific testing procedures.

Check tightness of accessible bolted bus joints, bolted connections and circuit breaker
connections using calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturers written
specifications and torque values.
Physically test key interlock systems to check for proper functionality.
specifications.
Tighten bolted bus connections in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
Adjust circuit breaker trip and time delay settings to values as required by coordination study.
Panelboards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
grounding.
Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the
panelboard to balance the phase loads within 20% of each other. Maintain proper phasing for
multi-wire branch circuits.
Check tightness of bolted connections, and circuit breaker connections using calibrated torque
wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturers written specification.
specifications.
3.4 CLEANING:
A.
Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.

Duluth, GA

16425-7
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
SECTION 16450
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1500 kVA:
1.
Distribution transformers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances,
installed devices and features, technical certification sheets and performance for each type and size
of transformer indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
1.
2.
C.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

Transformer ratings including:
a.
kVA
b. Primary and secondary voltage
c.
Taps
d. Design impedance
e.
Insulation class and temperature rise
f.
Sound level.
Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformers, accessories,

and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and
Seismic Constraints." Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
a.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully
operational after the seismic event."
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
The following minimum mounting and installation guidelines shall be met, unless specifically
modified by the above referenced standards.
a.
The Contractor shall provide equipment anchorage details, coordinated with the equipment
mounting provision, prepared and stamped by a licensed civil engineer in the state. Mounting recommendations shall be provided by the manufacturer based upon approved shake
table tests used to verify the seismic design of the equipment.
b. The equipment manufacturer shall certify that the equipment can withstand, that is, function following the seismic event, including both vertical and lateral required response spectra as specified in above codes.
c.
The equipment manufacturer shall document the requirements necessary for proper seismic
mounting of the equipment. Seismic qualification shall be considered achieved when the
capability of the equipment, meets or exceeds the specified response spectra.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and
their installation requirements.
D.
E.
Source quality-control test reports.
F.
G.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and mainte-

Duluth, GA
16450-1
1550000803
TODAY
nance manuals.
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7,
and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
D.
Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."
E.
Transformers shall meet the requirements of federal law 10 CFR Part 431 "Energy Efficiency Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial Equipment"
F.
All transformers shall be UL listed and bear the UL label.
G.
All transformers shall be rated 220 insulation class.

A.
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within
the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.
1.5 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-bolt
inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
B.
Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products

that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
1.
C.
General Electric Company.
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A.
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
B.
Cores: One leg per phase. Cores shall be constructed of high grade, non-aging silicon steel. The
core and coil assembly shall be impregnated with non-hydroscopic, thermosetting varnish and cured
to reduce hot spots and seal out moisture. The completed core and coil shall be bolted to the base
of the enclosure but isolated by means of rubber, vibration-absorbing mounts. There shall be no
metal-to-metal contact between the core and coil and the enclosure. The core of the transformer
shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by means of a flexible grounding conductor or strap sized
in accordance with UL and NEC requirements. The neutral shall be brought to a stud to facilitate the
required external grounding of the secondary

Duluth, GA
16450-2
1550000803
TODAY
C.
Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1.
2.
Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.

Coil Material: Aluminum.
D.
Connections to transformers shall be by flexible metal conduit and using flexible couplings.
E.
Transformers shall be designed for continuous operation at rated kVA, for 24 hours a day, 365 days
a year operation, with normal life expectancy as defined in ANSI C57.96.
F.
Wiring/Terminations:
1.
2.
3.
Recommended external cable shall be rated 90 degrees C (sized at 75 degrees C ampacity) for
encapsulated and 75 degrees C for ventilated designs.
Connectors should be selected on the basis of the type and cable size used to wire the specific
transformer.
Lug kits shall be provided by the Manufacturer of the transformer.
2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A.
Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B.
Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Constraints."
C.
Enclosures: Unless otherwise specified, transformer enclosures shall be ventilated and be fabricated
of heavy gauge, sheet steel construction. Enclosures shall have a baked polyester powder coat finish-gray in color and suitable for interior or exterior applications. Enclosures shall be constructed so
that there are no exposed live parts. Enclosures shall have a removable front cover to allow access
to internal parts and wiring terminations
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.
Transformer locations:
a.
Dry locations:
1) Ventilated
2) NEMA 250, Type 2.
b. Damp or wet:
1) Ventilated. Provide weather shields over ventilation openings.
2) NEMA 250, Type 3R.
The maximum temperature of the enclosure shall not exceed 90 degrees C.
The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 50C rise above a 40C
ambient.
Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.

1.
Finish Color: ANSI 49 gray.
E.
Taps for Three-phase Transformers smaller than 24 kVA and all single phase transformers: One 5
percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below normal full capacity.
F.
Taps for Transformers 25 kVA through 500 kVA: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent
taps below normal full capacity.
G.
Insulation Class for transformers less than 15 kVA: 185 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation
system with a maximum of 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.
H.
Insulation Class for transformers 15 kVA and larger: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature
I.
Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:

1.
2.
J.
Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels.

Tested according to NEMA TP 2.
K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by designated Kfactor.
1.
Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion corresponding to

Duluth, GA
16450-3
1550000803
TODAY
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
K.
Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize inter-winding capacitance.
1.
2.
3.
L.
Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and output
terminals.
Include special terminal for grounding the shield.
Shield Effectiveness:
a.
Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings: Not to exceed 33 picofarads over
a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz.
b. Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 120 dBA at 0.5 to 1.5 kHz; minimum of minus 65 dBA at 1.5 to 100 kHz; minimum of minus 40 dBA at 100 kHz to 1MHz.
c.
Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 52 dBA at 1.5 to 10 kHz; minimum of
minus 30 dBA at 10 kHz to 1MHz.
Motor Drive Isolation

1.
2.
M.
designated K-factor.
Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.
K-Factor rated transformers shall have an impedance range of 3% to 5%, and shall have a minimum reactance of 2% in order to prevent excessive neutral current when supplying loads with
large amounts of third harmonic.
115 degree C temperature rise.
All cores to be constructed with low hysteresis and eddy current losses. The core flux density
shall be well below the saturation point to prevent core overheating and excessive sound level
caused by harmonic voltage distortion.
Transformers shall be common core construction. Transformers utilizing more than one core, or
Scott-T connections, shall not be acceptable.
Three-phase transformer secondary neutral terminals shall be sized for 200% of the secondary
phase current.
The transformer shall be mounted on vibration absorbing pads.
Where shown on the drawings, provide motor drive isolation transformers

Motor drive isolation transformers shall be designed for use with three-phase ac adjustable frequency drives 600 volts and below to provide isolation between the incoming line and drive circuitry. These drives minimize the line disturbances caused by SCR firing within the drive unit.
Thermoguards shall be included in all motor drive isolation transformers to provide additional
protection for the transformer from increased heating due to the non-sinusoidal characteristics
of drive currents. The transformer shall provide reduced short-circuit currents and voltage line
transients. The transformer shall be specifically sized to the drive kVA requirements dictated by
the horsepower of the motor and, as such, will be mechanically braced to withstand the stress
of current reversals and short-circuit currents associated with the specific drive kVA rating.
Transformers shall be low loss type with minimum efficiencies per NEMA TP-1 when operated
at 35% of full load capacity
Mounting Methods.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Transformers 75 KVA and larger shall be floor mounted unless indicated otherwise and approved by the structural engineer. Transformers 45 KVA and smaller may be wall mounted
where wall construction is suitable for the load. Floor mounted transformers shall be securely
bolted to a 4 inch house keeping pad with vibration isolation pads. Wall mounted or suspended
transformers shall have a means of isolating vibration from the support.
Transformers up through 1000 KVA shall be mounted on elastomeric vibration isolation pads.
Pad shall be constructed of neoprene, rubber, glass fiber, or a combination thereof. Pads shall
be ribbed or waffled in texture. Pads shall be selected for smallest durometer (hardness),
preferably less than 50. Deflection of pad shall be .25 static minimum. Stack pads until the
desired deflection is achieved.
Wall Mounting: Manufacturer's standard brackets.
Suspended Mounting: See transformer mounting detail on plans.
N.
Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil and core.
O.
Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound levels
when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91.

Duluth, GA
16450-4
1550000803
TODAY
P.
Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Maximum sound levels (NEMA ST 20), when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
9 kVA and Less:

30 to 50 kVA:
51 to 150 kVA:
151 to 300 kVA:
40
45
50
55
dBA
dBA
dBA
dBA
2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A.
Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each transformer, mounted with
corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Test and inspect transformers according to ANSI C57.12.01 and IEEE C57.12.91.
B.
Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment for this Project.
2.6 FACTORY TESTING

A.
The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Ratio tests at the rated voltage connection and at all tap connections
Polarity and phase relation tests on the rated voltage connection
Applied potential tests
Induced potential test
No-load and excitation current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each
transformer.
B.
Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70
and manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers
will be installed.
D.
Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and
Bonding" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.
E.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer
manufacturer.
1.
Brace wall-mounting transformers as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and

Seismic Constraints."
B.
Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions, seismic codes applicable to Project, and requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Constraints."
C.
Use flexible conduit under the provisions of DIVISION 16 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS for
connections to transformer case. Minimum flexible conduit length shall be two (2) feet.
D.
Mount transformers on vibration isolating pads suitable for isolating the transformer noise from the
building structure.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

Duluth, GA
16450-5
1550000803
TODAY
A.
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
B.
Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test
reports.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.
C.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
Tests and Inspections:

1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance
Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
E.
Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.
F.
Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of transformer connections.
1.
2.
3.
G.
Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.
Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at 4 months and the other at 11
months after Substantial Completion.
Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of scanning.
Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action.
Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A.
Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period.
Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is
defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate
voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.
B.
Connect buck-boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being served, plus or
minus 5 percent, at secondary terminals.
C.
Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.
3.6 CLEANING
A.
Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.

Duluth, GA
16450-6
1550000803
TODAY
SECTION 16511
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
Interior light fixtures, lamps, and ballasts (includes exterior light fixtures normally installed on
exterior surfaces of buildings).
Emergency lighting units.
Exit signs.
Light fixture supports.

A.
B.
Division 16 Section Basic Electrical Materials and Methods for raceways, conductors, cables, and
cords.
C.
Division 16 Section "Exterior Lighting for exterior light fixtures, except those normally mounted on
exterior surfaces of buildings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Packaging of light fixtures will not be allowed. Only those light fixtures listed in the Light
Fixture Schedule on the Drawings will be accepted. All light fixtures shall be a direct buy by
the General Contractor through Nesco Inc. Sprouts National Account. Contact: Nancy
Ramdon-Connolly, Tel.: (415) 307-8579.
Submit all light fixtures, specified for use on this Project, in a single submittal package of
portfolios, so that all light fixtures can be reviewed at one time.
Prepare portfolios from manufacturer's standard specification sheets, and include the number
indicated on the Light Fixture Schedule to identify each light fixture. Do not combine more than
one light fixture type on a single sheet.
Product Data: For each type of light fixture, collated and bound in sets, and arranged in order of
fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Descriptive cut sheets providing physical description of light fixture including dimensions and
weights.
Battery and charger information for emergency lighting units and exit signs.
Fixture efficiency.
Coefficient of utilization tables.
Light fixture voltage.
The number, type and wattage of the light fixture lamps (including cutsheet).
Lens type (if applicable).
Light fixture options that are to be provided.
Light fixture mounting details, including non-standard outlet boxes.
Construction of light fixture housing and door (if applicable).
Light fixture ballast manufacturer, number and type per light fixture.
Light fixture finish and color (as approved by architect).
Descriptive cut sheets providing physical description of lamps, including voltage, wattage,
efficacy, CCT, CRI, lumens, and life expectancy.
Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each light fixture type,
outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the light fixture
as applied in this Project.
a.
For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing
agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by the manufacturer.
b. Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current
accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for

Duluth, GA
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511-1
1550000803
*** Issue 5/29/2015
Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

16. Descriptive cut sheets providing physical description of emergency ballasts for use in normal
light fixtures, including complete battery information, lumens, and method for testing per NFPA
101.
C.
Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom light fixtures.

weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.
1.
D.
Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the
items involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Indicate dimensions,
Light fixtures.
Suspended ceiling components.
Structural members to which suspension systems for light fixtures will be attached.
Other items in finished ceiling including the following:
a.
Occupancy sensors.
Perimeter moldings.
Samples for Verification: Interior light fixtures designated for sample submission in Light Fixture
Schedule. Each sample shall include the following:
1.
2.
3.
Lamps: Specified units installed.

Accessories: Cords and plugs.
Scheduled finish and lens, as applicable.
F.
Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by
product manufacturer.
G.
Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for light fixtures.
H.
I.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
J.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
B.
Refer to Division 16 Section General Electrical Requirements.

1.5 DEFINITIONS
A.
BF: Ballast factor.
B.
CCT: Correlated color temperature
C.
CRI: Color-rendering index.
D.
CU: Coefficient of utilization.
E.
HID: High-intensity discharge.
F.
LER: Light fixture (Luminaire) efficiency rating.
G.
Light Fixture: Complete light fixture, including ballast housing if provided.
H.
RCR: Room cavity ratio.

A.

1.
2.
B.
C.
Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications:

Duluth, GA
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511-2
Provided by manufacturers'
1550000803
*** Issue 5/29/2015
laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for
D.
Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency,

with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by
OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.
E.
intended use.
F.
FMG Compliance: Light fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class
and division of hazard by FMG.
G.
Mockups: Provide interior light fixtures for room or module mockups, complete with power and
control connections.
1.
2.
3.
Obtain Architect's approval of fixtures for mockups before starting installations.

Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the
completed Work.
Approved fixtures in mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time
of Substantial Completion.
1.7 COORDINATION
A.
B.
Coordinate layout and installation of light fixtures and suspension system with other construction
that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression
system, and partition assemblies.
1.8 WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries:

Manufacturer's standard form in which
manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of
rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
2.
B.
Special Warranty for Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
2.
C.
Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of Substantial
Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining
nine years.
Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven
years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated
warranty for the remaining six years.
Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period for Electromagnetic Ballasts: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Warranty for T5 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to
Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or
workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period
indicated below.
1.
Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A.
1.
B.
Additional light fixtures and accessories as scheduled on the Drawings.
Where light fixtures are specified with tamper proof hardware, provide the Owner with three tools
for each different type of hardware.
1.10 SPARES
A.
Furnish spare materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with

Duluth, GA
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511-3
1550000803
*** Issue 5/29/2015
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
Battery and Charger Data: One for each emergency lighting unit.
Ballasts: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
Globes and Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
In Light Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the
following requirements apply to product selection:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Only those listed in the light fixture schedule and sensor schedule will
be accepted.
2.2 LIGHT FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A.
Provide light fixtures as shown on the drawings and/or specified. This shall include all lamps,
material and labor to securely hang light fixtures, clean them and make them completely ready for
use. Provide all hangers, supports, and miscellaneous hardware required to install light fixtures.
Provide additional tie wires connected to structure to conform to applicable seismic requirements
where required.
B.
Light fixture models scheduled on the Drawings are to show the manufacturer, grade and style of
light fixtures required. Regardless of the manufacturer's catalog number suffixes indicated, provide
all options and features as described in the Light Fixture Schedule.
C.
Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.
D.
Incandescent Fixtures:
NEMA LE 5A.
E.
Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5
and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
F.
HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.
G.
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
H.
Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping
and sagging.
I.
Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating
conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors,
frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when
secured in operating position.
J.
Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
K.
Where LER is specified, test according to
White Surfaces: 85 percent.

Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.
Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:

1.
2.
L.
Comply with UL 1598.
Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and
other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
a.
Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness is indicated.
b. UV stabilized.
Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.
Electromagnetic-Interference Filters:
Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagneticinterference as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate light fixtures with one filter on each ballast
indicated to require a filter.

Duluth, GA
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511-4
1550000803
*** Issue 5/29/2015
2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A.
Electronic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.11; instant-start type, unless otherwise indicated, and
designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless
dimmer or bi-level control is indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Sound Rating: A.
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
BF: 0.85 or higher.
Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.
Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C 82.11 and shall be
connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.
Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor, Class P, and
having automatic-reset thermal protection.
1.
Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.
C.
Single Ballasts for Multiple Light Fixtures: Factory-wired with ballast arrangements and bundled
extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in the field.
D.
Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:

1.
2.
Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher: Electronic or electromagnetic type rated for 0 deg F starting
and operating temperature with indicated lamp types.
Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with
indicated lamp types.
E.
Ballasts for Low Electromagnetic-Interference Environments: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1,

Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for consumer
equipment.
F.
Ballasts for Bi-Level Controlled Light Fixtures: Electronic type.

1.
2.
3.
Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output of the
associated lamp between high- and low-level and off.
a.
High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens.
b. Low-Level Operation: 50 percent of rated lamp lumens.
Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode.
Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and lamp
type indicated.
G.
Ballasts in indoor locations shall have a disconnecting means either internal or external to each
luminaire.
H.
Approved Linear Fluorescent Ballast Manufacturers

1.
2.
3.
4.
Advance
Osram
Universal
G.E.
2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A.
Description: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying with ANSI C 82.11, designed for
type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or
bi-level control is indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.

Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
Sound Rating: A.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated.
Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.

Duluth, GA
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511-5
1550000803
*** Issue 5/29/2015
10. Interference:
Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
11. Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum.
B.
Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Light Fixtures: Electronic type.

1.
2.
3.
Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens.

Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal.
Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and lamp
type indicated.
2.5 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT

A.
Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within light fixture
body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Emergency Connection: Lumen output shall be equal to or greater than that indicated in the
Light Fixture Schedule (No exceptions will be taken). Connect unswitched circuit to batteryinverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.
Night-Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously.
Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering
ceiling space.
a.
Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and
demonstrates unit operability.
b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;
bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. The batteries shall be of suitable
rating and capacity to supply and maintain at not less than 87 1/ 2 percent of the nominal
battery voltage for the total lamp load associated with the unit for a period of at least 1 1/ 2
hours, or the unit equipment shall supply and maintain not less than 60 percent of the initial
emergency illumination for a period of at least 1 1/ 2 hours.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer relay.
Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates
coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit
triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either
proper or failed emergency response.
Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test
of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral
audible alarm and flashing red LED.
External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering one or more
fluorescent lamps, remote mounted from light fixture. Comply with UL 924.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Emergency Connection: Lumen output shall be equal to or greater than that indicated in the
Light Fixture Schedule (No exceptions will be taken). Connect unswitched circuit to batteryinverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.
Night-Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp in a remote fixture continuously.
battery voltage for the total lamp load associated with the unit for a period of at least 1 1/ 2
hours, or the unit equipment shall supply and maintain not less than 60 percent of the initial
emergency illumination for a period of at least 1 1/ 2 hours.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type.
Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and
LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright
glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

Duluth, GA
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511-6
1550000803
*** Issue 5/29/2015
2.6 EXIT SIGNS

A.
Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply
with authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Internally Lighted Signs:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Lamps for AC Operation: Fluorescent, 2 for each fixture, 20,000 hours of rated lamp life.
Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power
pack.
a.
battery voltage for the total lamp load associated with the unit for a period of at least 1 1/
2 hours, or the unit equipment shall supply and maintain not less than 60 percent of the
initial emergency illumination for a period of at least 1 1/ 2 hours.
b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
c.
Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to
80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay
disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on
charger.
d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and
e.
LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;
bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
f.
triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of
either proper or failed emergency response.
g. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required
test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an
integral audible alarm and flashing red LED.
Master/Remote Sign Configurations:
a.
Master Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, and provide
additional capacity in LED power supply for power connection to remote unit.
b. Remote Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, except omit
power supply, battery and test features. Arrange to receive full power requirements from
master unit. Connect for testing concurrently with master unit as a unified system.
2.7 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A.
Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. The batteries shall be of suitable rating and
capacity to supply and maintain at not less than 87 1/ 2 percent of the nominal battery voltage
for the total lamp load associated with the unit for a period of at least 1 1/ 2 hours, or the unit
equipment shall supply and maintain not less than 60 percent of the initial emergency
illumination for a period of at least 1 1/ 2 hours.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops to 80
percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when
voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects
lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.
Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and
LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright
glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures.
Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when power is
restored after an outage.

Duluth, GA
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511-7
1550000803
*** Issue 5/29/2015
9.

2.8 LAMPS GENERAL

A.
Unless specific manufacturers and lamp types are called for in the Light Fixture Schedule, all lamps
provided for this project shall be by the same manufacturer. Lamps shall be manufactured by:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Osram/Sylvania
Philips
General Electric
Venture
All lamps shall be new and shall be delivered to the project in manufacturer's original sealed package.
2.9 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A.
T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial
lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000
hours, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1300 initial
lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000
hours, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, low mercury, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K,
average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
13
18
26
32
42
55
W:
W:
W:
W:
W:
W:
T4,
T4,
T4,
T4,
T4,
T4,
double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum).

triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum).
2.10 LIGHT FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A.
Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints" for channel- and angleiron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B.
Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same
as fixture.
C.
Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single
fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D.
Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.
E.
Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel,
12 gage.
F.
Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
G.
Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded
attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
Light Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture.
B.
Support for Light Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a support element.
1.
Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for

Duluth, GA
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511-8
1550000803
*** Issue 5/29/2015
2.
3.
4.
C.
each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from light fixture corners.
Support Clips: Fasten to light fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner
with clips that are UL listed for the application.
Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center
in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal
channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on light fixture.
Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.
Suspended Light Fixture Support:

1.
2.
3.
Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.
Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension
for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. Provide suitable connectors
or collars to connect adjoining units to appear as a continuous unit.
D.
Air-Handling Light Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.
E.
Adjust aimable light fixtures to provide required light intensities.
F.
Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
G.
Through wiring of recessed light fixtures, in suspended ceilings, is not permitted. Connect each light
fixture by a whip to a junction box. The whip shall be of sufficient length to allow the light fixture to
be relocated within a 6-foot radius.
H.
Wall Mounted Light fixtures

1.
Unless otherwise noted, conceal all raceways and back boxes for wall mounted light fixtures.
3.3 MULTI-LEVEL SWITCHING

A.
The lighting design for this project has included multi-level (inboard/outboard) switching. Where
indicated, 3-lamp light fixtures shall have the center lamp switched from the switch nearest the door
and the outer 2 lamps switched from the other switch.
B.
Where indicated, 4-lamp light fixtures shall have the outer 2 lamps switched from one switch and
the center 2 lamps shall be switched from the other switch.
C.
A similar multi-level lighting arrangement shall be provided where 4- and 3-way switches are shown.
Where only one switch is shown at the alternate location it shall control the center lamp. Light
fixtures indicated to have multi-level switching shall be furnished with the proper number of ballasts.
3.4 COORDINATION
A.
Light fixtures shown on the Electrical Drawings represent general arrangements only.
Architectural Drawings for exact locations.
B.
Coordinate the installation and location of light fixtures with other work and all other trades before
installation to avoid conflicts. Coordinate light fixture locations in mechanical rooms with final
installed piping and ductwork layouts.
C.
Verify all ceiling systems and coordinate light fixture type and accessories prior to ordering light
fixtures. Coordinate and cooperate with ceiling installer in regards to the location and installation of
light fixtures.
D.
Wall-Mounted Light fixtures

1.
Refer to
Coordinate all wall-mounted light fixtures with the architectural features of the building. Where
specific elevations or dimensions are not indicated, verify the correct location with the Architect
prior to beginning any work.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust all light fixture sockets to match the lamp specified and aim all adjustable light fixtures as
directed by the Architect.
B.
At the time of substantial completion, aim all track lights, flood lights, spot lights, and other fixtures
requiring aiming per the Architects direction. Provide all scaffolds, lifts, and other tools and
equipment as required.

Duluth, GA
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511-9
1550000803
*** Issue 5/29/2015

A.
Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.
transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.
Verify
B.
Clean light fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of the installation.
fixtures from damage during the remainder of the construction period.
C.
Upon completion of the installation of light fixtures, and after building circuits have been energized,
energize lighting branch circuits to demonstrate capability and compliance with the requirements.
Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at the site, then retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.
D.
At the time of final acceptance of this project by the Owner, ensure that all lamps are in working
order and all light fixtures are fully lamped.
E.
Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance
with standards
Protect installed light

Duluth, GA
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511-10
1550000803
*** Issue 5/29/2015
SECTION 16521
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.

1.
2.
3.
Exterior light fixtures with lamps and ballasts.

Light-fixture-mounted photoelectric relays.
Poles and accessories.

A.
B.
Division 16 Section Basic Electrical Materials and Methods for raceways, conductors, cables, and
cords.
C.
Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in poles.
D.
Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior light fixtures normally mounted on exterior
surfaces of buildings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Packaging of light fixtures will not be allowed. Only those light fixtures listed in the Light
Fixture Schedule on the Drawings will be accepted. All light fixtures shall be a direct buy by
the General Contractor through Nesco Inc. Sprouts National Account. Contact: Nancy
Ramdon-Connolly, Tel.: (415) 307-8579.
Submit all light fixtures, specified for use on this Project, in a single submittal package of
portfolios, so that all light fixtures can be reviewed at one time.
Prepare portfolios from manufacturer's standard specification sheets, and include the number
indicated on the Light Fixture Schedule to identify each light fixture. Do not combine more than
one light fixture type on a single sheet.
Product Data: For each light fixture, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit
designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Descriptive cut sheets providing physical description of light fixture, including materials,
dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters.
Fixture effacacy.
Coefficient of utilization tables.
Light fixture voltage.
The number, type and wattage of the light fixture lamps (including cutsheet).
Lens type.
Light fixture options that are to be provided.
Light fixture mounting details.
Construction of light fixture housing and door (if applicable).
Light fixture ballast manufacturer, number and type per light fixture.
Light fixture finish and color (as determined by architect).
Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps.
Details of attaching light fixtures and accessories.
Details of installation and construction.
Light fixture materials.
Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each light fixture type, complete with indicated
lamps, ballasts, and accessories.
a.
For indicated light fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent
testing agency. Photometric data for remaining light fixtures shall be certified by
manufacturer.
b. Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current
accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy

Duluth, GA
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
16521-1
1550000803
*** Issue 5/29/2015
Efficient Lighting Products.

Photoelectric relays.
Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data.
Lamps, including life, output, and energy-efficiency data.
Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles.
Means of attaching light fixtures to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for
components involved.
23. Anchor bolts for poles.
24. Manufactured pole foundations.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
C.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Show details of nonstandard or custom light fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods
of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.
a.
Pole foundations:
a.
Structural design drawings of the foundations, including installation instructions, signed
and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State in which the Project is being
constructed.
b. Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer.
Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer.
Design calculations, certified by a qualified professional engineer, indicating strength of screw
foundations and soil conditions on which they are based.
D.
Samples for Verification: For products designated for sample submission in Light Fixture Schedule.
Each sample shall include lamps and ballasts.
E.
Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles, certifying that
products are designed for indicated load requirements in AASHTO LTS-4 and that loads imposed by
light fixtures have been included in design.
F.
Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.
G.
H.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For light fixtures, poles and light fixture lowering devices to
include in operation and maintenance manuals.
I.
Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Refer to Division 16 Section General Electrical Requirements.
B.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A.
BF: Ballast factor.
B.
CRI: Color-rendering index.
C.
CU: Coefficient of utilization.
D.
HID: High-intensity discharge.
E.
LER: Light fixture efficacy rating.
F.
Light fixture: Complete light fixture, including ballast housing if provided.
G.
Pole: Light fixture support structure, including tower used for large area illumination.
H.
Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above.
1.6 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION

A.
Dead Load: Weight of light fixture and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and
supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.
B.
Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf, distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

Duluth, GA
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
16521-2
1550000803
*** Issue 5/29/2015
C.
Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft., applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.
D.
Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and light fixture, calculated and applied as stated in
AASHTO LTS-4.
1.
2.
Wind speed for calculating wind load for poles exceeding 50 feet in height is 110 mph.
Wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet or less in height is 110 mph.

A.
Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications:

Provided by manufacturers'
laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for
B.
Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency,

with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by
OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.
C.
intended use.
D.
Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."
E.
1.8 COORDINATION
A.
B.
Coordinate layout and installation of light fixtures, poles, foundations, and underground raceway
system with other above- and below-grade site construction and utilities. Notify Architect/Engineer
of conflicts before proceeding with the Work.
1.9 WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or
chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer
may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations
from special warranty coverage.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Warranty Period for Light fixtures: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period for Lamps: Replace lamps and fuses that fail within 12 months from date of
Substantial Completion; furnish replacement lamps and fuses that fail within the second 12
months from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace light poles and standards that fail in finish,
materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but not less than
three years from date of Substantial Completion.

A.
Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660.
B.
Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation. Support
poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.
C.
Handle wood poles so they will not be damaged. Do not use pointed tools that can indent pole
surface more than 1/4 inch deep. Do not apply tools to section of pole to be installed below ground
line.
D.
Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on fiberglass and laminated wood poles until right before pole
installation. Handle poles with web fabric straps.
E.
Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For poles
with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.

Duluth, GA
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
16521-3
1550000803
*** Issue 5/29/2015
1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

A.
1.
B.
Additional light fixtures, poles, and accessories as scheduled on the Drawings.
Where light fixtures are specified with tamper proof hardware, provide the Owner with three tools
for each different type of hardware.
1.12 SPARES
A.
Furnish spare materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
1.
2.
3.
4.
Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: 10 for every 100 of each type and
rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
Ballasts: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
Globes and Guards: 10 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
In Light Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the
following requirements apply to product selection:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Only those listed in the light fixture schedule and sensor schedule will
be accepted.
2.2 LIGHT FIXTURES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A.
Light fixtures shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by
an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for light
fixtures.
C.
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
D.
Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated.

support to prevent warping and sagging.
E.
Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in
use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed light fixtures.
F.
Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating
conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors,
frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when
secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed
to disconnect ballast when door opens.
G.
Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.
H.
Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and
UV radiation.
I.
Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution
to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.
J.
Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
Form and
White Surfaces: 85 percent.

Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
K.
Gaskets for Lenses and Refractors: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and
cushion lenses and refractors in light fixture doors.
L.
Light Fixture Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested light

Duluth, GA
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
16521-4
1550000803
*** Issue 5/29/2015
fixture before shipping.

materials.
M.
Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Light Fixtures: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1.
2.
N.
Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove
dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish
surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel,
complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8,
"Pickling."
Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and
two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.
a.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Light Fixtures: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual
for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying
with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.
Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical
Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm
or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
Class I, Color Anodic Finish:
AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish:
medium satin;
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally
colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with
AAMA 611.
a.
Color: [Light bronze] [Medium bronze] [Dark bronze] [Black].
2.3 LIGHT FIXTURE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS

A.
Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.
B.
Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory set
to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc and off at 4.5 to 10 fc with 15-second minimum time
delay. Relay shall have directional lens in front of photocell to prevent artificial light sources from
causing false turnoff.
1.
2.
Relay with locking-type receptacle shall comply with NEMA C136.10.

Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points.
2.4 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS AND LAMPS

A.
Low-Temperature Ballast Capability: Rated by its manufacturer for reliable starting and operation of
indicated lamp(s) at temperatures minus 20 deg F and higher.
B.
Ballast Characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.

Sound Rating: A.
Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1, energy-saving, high power factor, Class P,
automatic-reset thermal protection.
Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum.
Transient-Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 Category A or better.
C.
Low-Temperature Lamp Capability: Rated for reliable starting and operation with ballast provided at
temperatures minus 20 deg F and higher.
D.
Fluorescent Lamps: Low-mercury type. Comply with the EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching
procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to
NEMA LL 1.
2.5 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS

A.
Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction of
average lamp life. Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:

Duluth, GA
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
16521-5
1550000803
*** Issue 5/29/2015
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type.

Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F.
Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F.
Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current ratings
as recommended by ballast manufacturer.
B.
Auxiliary, Instant-On, Quartz System: Factory-installed feature automatically switches quartz lamp
on when fixture is initially energized and when momentary power outages occur. System
automatically turns quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent of light output.
C.
High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type with solid-state igniter/starter and capable of
open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Igniter/starter shall have an average
life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 deg C.
1.
2.
Instant-Restrike Device: Integral with ballast, or solid-state potted module, factory installed
within fixture and compatible with lamps, ballasts, and mogul sockets up to 150 W.
a.
Restrike Range: 105- to 130-V ac.
b. Maximum Voltage: 250-V peak or 150-V ac RMS.
Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F.
2.6 HID LAMPS

A.
High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), color temperature 1900 K, and
average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum.
1.
Dual-Arc Tube Lamp: Arranged so only one of two arc tubes is lighted at one time and, when
power is restored after an outage, the cooler arc tube, with lower internal pressure, lights
instantly, providing an immediate 8 to 15 percent of normal light output.
B.
Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, with a minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.
C.
Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.
D.
Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000 K.
2.7 POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A.
Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4.

1.
2.
Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure,
permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in Part 1 "Structural
Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article, with a gust factor of 1.3.
Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of light fixtures
and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole
selection strength analysis.
B.
Light Fixture Attachment Provisions:

Comply with light fixture manufacturers' mounting
requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances:

components.
1.
2.
3.
Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support
Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points.

Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication,
unless stainless-steel items are indicated.
Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.
D.
Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
E.
Power-Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with structural steel
complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M; and
with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole base flange and strength required to support pole,
light fixture, and accessories.
F.
Breakaway Supports: Frangible breakaway supports, tested by an independent testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, according to AASHTO LTS-4.
2.8 STEEL POLES

A.
Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig; 1piece construction up to 40 feet in height with access handhole in pole wall.

Duluth, GA
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
16521-6
1550000803
*** Issue 5/29/2015
1.
2.
Shape: [Round, tapered] [Round, straight] [Square, tapered] [Square, straight].

Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway support.
B.
Steel Mast Arms: Single-arm type, continuously welded to pole attachment plate.
finish same as pole.
C.
Brackets for Light Fixtures: Detachable, cantilever, without underbrace.

1.
2.
3.
Material and
Adapter fitting welded to pole and bracket, then bolted together with stainless-steel bolts.
Cross Section: Tapered oval, with straight tubular end section to accommodate light fixture.
Match pole material and finish.
D.
Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support light fixture or light fixtures and brackets indicated, and
securely fastened to pole top.
E.
Steps: Fixed steel, with nonslip treads, positioned for 15-inch vertical spacing, alternating on
opposite sides of pole; first step at elevation 10 feet above finished grade.
F.
Intermediate Handhole and Cable Support: Weathertight, 3-by-5-inch handhole located at midpoint
of pole with cover for access to internal welded attachment lug for electric cable support grip.
G.
Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in
Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors
of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.
H.
Cable Support Grip: Wire-mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable and
rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported cable times a 5.0 safety factor.
I.
Platform for Lamp and Ballast Servicing: Factory fabricated of steel with finish matching that of
pole.
J.
Prime-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
K.
Galvanized Finish: After fabrication, hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M.
L.
Factory-Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1.
2.
3.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove
dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish
surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel,
complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8,
"Pickling."
Interior Surfaces of Pole: One coat of bituminous paint, or otherwise treat for equal corrosion
protection.
Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and
two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.
a.
Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As
selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].
2.9 ALUMINUM POLES

A.
Poles: Seamless, extruded structural tube complying with ASTM B 429, Alloy 6063-T6 with access
handhole in pole wall.
B.
Poles: ASTM B 209, 5052-H34 marine sheet alloy with access handhole in pole wall.
1.
2.
Shape: Square, straight.

Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway support.
C.
Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support light fixture or light fixtures and brackets indicated, and
securely fastened to pole top.
D.
Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in
Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors
of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.
E.
Brackets for Light fixtures: Detachable, with pole and adapter fittings of cast aluminum. Adapter
fitting welded to pole and bracket, then bolted together with stainless-steel bolts.
1.
2.
Tapered oval cross section, with straight tubular end section to accommodate light fixture.
Finish: Same as pole light fixture.

Duluth, GA
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
16521-7
1550000803
*** Issue 5/29/2015
F.
Prime-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
G.
Aluminum Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying
with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.
Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical
Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm
or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
Class I, Color Anodic Finish:
AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish:
medium satin;
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally
colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with
AAMA 611.
5.
2.10 POLE ACCESSORIES
A.
Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting bolts and
nuts. Finish same as pole.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2 LIGHT FIXTURE INSTALLATION

A.
Install lamps in each light fixture.
B.
Fasten light fixture to indicated structural supports.

1.
C.
Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the
application and approved by manufacturer.
Adjust light fixtures that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric
device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources.
3.3 POLE INSTALLATION

A.
Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of light fixtures and their
mounting provisions on the pole.
B.
Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and
underground features, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches.

Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet.
Trees: 15 feet.
3.4 CORROSION PREVENTION

A.
Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar
metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.
B.
Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes", including use of coated
conduits in concrete foundations.
3.5 GROUNDING
A.
Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and
Bonding."
1.
2.
B.
Install grounding electrode for each pole, unless otherwise indicated.

Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting light fixture to grounding system.
Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and

Duluth, GA
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
16521-8
1550000803
*** Issue 5/29/2015
Bonding."
1.
2.
3.
Install grounding electrode for each pole.

Install grounding conductor and conductor protector.
Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations.

A.
Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B.
Adjust all light fixture sockets to match the lamp specified and aim all adjustable light fixtures as
directed by the Architect.
C.
Upon completion of the installation of light fixtures, and after building circuits have been energized,
apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with the requirements. Where
possible, correct malfunctioning units at the site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise,
remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.
D.
Clean light fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of the installation.
fixtures from damage during the remainder of the construction period.
E.
At the time of Substantial Completion, aim all adjustable fixtures, such as flood and spot lights, per
the Architects direction. Provide all necessary equipment to support this effort, such as scaffolds
and lifts, as required.
F.
At the time of Final Acceptance of this Project by the Owner, all lamps shall be in working order and
all light fixtures shall be fully lamped.
G.
Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing light fixtures and
energizing circuits with normal power source.
1.
H.
Verify operation of photoelectric controls.
Illumination Tests:
1.
I.
Protect installed light
Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST
standards. Comply with the following IESNA testing guide(s):
a.
IESNA LM-5, "Photometric Measurements of Area and Sports Lighting."
b. IESNA LM-50, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Lighting Installations."
c.
IESNA LM-52, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Sign Installations."
d. IESNA LM-64, "Photometric Measurements of Parking Areas."
e.
IESNA LM-72, "Directional Positioning of Photometric Data."
Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance
with standards.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A.

operate, and maintain light fixture lowering devices. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and
Training."

Duluth, GA
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
16521-9
1550000803
*** Issue 5/29/2015
SECTION 16720
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all labor, equipment, and material
as herein specified.
B.
This section requires the Contractor to furnish all materials required to install the fire alarm system. The
Contractor shall be responsible for installing, testing, and start-up of a complete functioning fire alarm system, and
each element thereof, as specified or indicated on the Drawings or reasonably inferred, including every article,
device or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably necessary to facilitate each
system's function as indicated by the design and the equipment specified. Elements of the work include materials,
labor, supervision, supplies, equipment, transportation and utilities. Installation of devices shall be performed or
supervised by a National Institute for Certification of Engineering Technologies (NICET) Level 3 or higher Fire Alarm
Technician. Submit copies of the certification for employees through shop drawing submittals.
C. All fire alarm system components shall include addressable field devices, and multiplexed, programmable, operator
interface panels.
D. The scope of work in this section includes:
1. Fire alarm control panels.
2. Remote annunciator panels.
3. Manual fire alarm pull stations.
4. Automatic smoke and heat detectors.
5. Fire alarm notification appliances.
6. Auxiliary fire alarm equipment.
7. Sprinkler system water flow and valve tamper alarms.
8. Air handling unit shutdown.
9. Battery stand-by power.
E.
Provide an integrated fire alarm system, which meets the current versions of the codes and standards cited below
and all local building and fire codes. All fire alarm equipment shall be Underwriters Laboratory (UL) or Factory
Mutual (FM) approved for the type and class of service performed.
1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, 2014 Edition
2. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code, 2013 Edition
3. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, 1999 Edition
4. CBC 2008 Edition with local amendments
5. CFC 2008 Edition with local amendments.
F.
The fire alarm system shall be a non-coded manual and automatic fire alarm system with connections to a remote
supervising station. Control panel shall be micro-processor based, with fully addressable alarm devices.
1.2 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Submit a Description of Operation that explains in detail the specific methods the submitted fire alarm system
functions. Pre-printed, generic material will not be accepted and will be rejected.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1. The fire alarm system equipment vendor shall provide shop drawings showing fire alarm floor plans and a full
building riser diagram. Fire alarm floor plans and riser diagram shall show fire alarm control panel,
annunciator, all fire alarm initiating devices and notification appliances. Show typical wiring diagrams of
control panel/s, annunciator and each device and wiring connections required. Show all interfaces to other
systems, such as temperature control systems, and security systems.
2. Shop drawing scale shall match the Engineers drawings where possible. Scale shall not be less than 1/8" =
1-0".
3. The fire alarm floor plans and riser diagram shall show wiring to all fire alarm devices/appliances, indicating
wire sizes and quantities as well as conduit/raceway sizes and locations of end-of-line (EOL) resistors. The fire
alarm floor plans and riser diagram shall clearly show the routing of all fire alarm system wiring, including all
Sprouts
Duluth GA
SECTION 02221 DEMOLITION AND REPAIR

-1
1550000803
*** Issue 04/30/15
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
horizontal routing and vertical routing (in chases). Routing of all fire alarm wiring shall comply with the
Survivability requirements of NFPA 72.
The fire alarm floor plans shall also contain a Bill of Materials and a Sequence of Operations Matrix that
explains how the submitted fire alarm system functions.
Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
Test Reports: Indicate satisfactory completion of required tests and inspections.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by
Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,
installation, and starting of products.
The manufacturers listed in the sections below are Owner required. Alternatives will not be accepted under
any circumstance without prior written approval from the Owners Construction project manager. Without
prior written approval from the owner, shop drawings with alternate equipment will be rejected.
C. The manufacturer shall be a company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience. The installer shall be a company specializing in installing the
products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. Shall be bondable and
licensed Contractor and Merchant of Electronic Automated Fire Alarm Systems and employ full-time factory-trained
installers and technicians. The equipment manufacturer's service department shall be fully stocked in standard
parts and components and engaged in the maintenance of fire alarm systems. On-the-premises service shall be
available within 4 hours of notification, 7 days a week, 24 hours a day. Furnish service and maintenance of fire
alarm system for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.
D. The Engineer will review (2) separate shop drawing review submittals. If multiple reviews are made after the initial
2 reviews, the contractor will be required to pay the engineers hourly rate for each additional review.
1.3 SERVICE AND GUARANTEE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of fire alarm system including wiring and raceways for one year from date of
substantial completion.
B.
All components, system software, parts and assemblies shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and
workmanship for the one-year period stated above.
C. Labor (including travel expenses) to trouble-shoot, repair, reprogram, or replace components shall be furnished by
this contractor at no charge during the warranty period.
D. All corrective software modifications made during warranty periods shall be updated on all user documentation and
on user and manufacturer archived software disks.
E.
Contractor shall be responsible for contacting the local Authority Having Jurisdiction and confirm whether they will
require a 2 year or a 5 year certification on the Fire Alarm system. This shall be done by the installing contractor
prior to bid submittal.
F.
Any equipment listed in these specifications or located on the drawings determined by the manufacturer to be
obsolete or unavailable at the time of construction shall be presented to the Engineer and Architect along with
manufacturers alternate equipment selections for approval prior to bid. The owner shall not be responsible for any
additional compensation due to notification of obsolete products after the original bid date, if that product is
determined to have been obsolete prior to the schedule bid date.
Sprouts
Duluth GA

-2
1550000803
*** Issue 04/30/15
PART 2 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The supervising system agency shall be: Guardian Home Technologies.
B.
Equipment list shall be as follows:

1. Fire Alarm Control Panel
2. Bell Supervision Module
3. Annunciator Panel
4. Popit Interface Module
5. Powersonic 12v 7ah Battery
6. Addressable Single Point Expander Module
7. Multiplex Expansion Module
8. Multiplex Single-Input Module
9. Multiplex Input-Output Module
10. Weatherproof Back-Box
11. Outdoor Horn/Strobe
12. Exterior Alarm Bell
13. Indoor Horn/Strobe
14. Ceiling Mount Horn/Strobe
15. Indoor Strobe
16. Manual Pullstation
17. Smoke Detector
18. Duct Smoke Detector*
19. Duct Smoke Detector Enclosure*
20. Remote Test Station*
21. Power Booster
22. NAC Power Extender
23. Waterflow Alarm Switch
24. Control Valve Tamper Switch
* If not factory provided
Bosch FPD 7024

Bosch D192C
Bosch FMR-7033
Bosch D8125
PS-1270F2
D9127U
Bosch D7039 (ADDED)
Bosch D7044M (ADDED)
Bosch D7053 (ADDED)
System Sensor WPBB-R
System Sensor P2RK
System Sensor SSM24-10
System Sensor P2W
System Sensor PC2W
System Sensor SW
Bosch FMM 7045-D
Bosch D7050
Bosch D7050-DH
Bosch D341
Bosch D344-RT
Bosch FPP-RNAC-8A-4C
AL802
System Sensor WFD
System Sensor
2.2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL
A.
The Fire Alarm System shall be a microprocessor-based system designed specifically for Fire applications. The
System shall be shall be UL listed under Standards 864 (Control Units for Fire-Protective Signaling Systems).
Modular construction with a surface mounted enclosure.
B.
Remote Annunciator: Provide supervised remote annunciator(s) where shown on the plans, including audible
and visible indication of fire alarm by address, and audible and visible indication of system trouble and
supervisory. Install in flush mounted enclosure.
C.
Power supply: Provide two separate and reliable power supplies. The control panel shall receive 120 VAC
power via a dedicated fused disconnect circuit of the buildings electrical system. Each shall have adequate
capacity for the system. The fire alarm contractor shall submit battery calculations for review and approval.
The calculations shall indicate each device and the load required in stand-by and alarm mode. The secondary
power system shall be a battery-operated emergency power supply and charger with capacity for operating
system in standby mode for 24 hours followed by alarm mode for 5 minutes.
D.
System Supervision: Automatically detects and reports open circuits, shorts, and grounds of wiring for
initiating device, signaling line, and notification appliance circuits. Alarm, supervisory and trouble signals shall
be monitored by the supervising station over a Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT), or other
approved method.
E.
Initiating Device Circuits: Provide circuitry, which meets the performance requirements during abnormal
conditions, based upon the style and class of the circuitry selected. Initiating device circuits shall be Class B.
Sprouts
Duluth GA

-3
1550000803
*** Issue 04/30/15
F.
Notification Appliance Circuits: Provide circuitry, which meets the performance requirements during abnormal
conditions, based upon the style and class of the circuitry selected. Notification appliance circuits shall be
Class B.
G.
Signaling Line Circuits: Provide circuitry, which meets the performance requirements during abnormal
conditions, based upon the style and class of the circuitry selected. Signaling line circuitry shall be Class B.
H.
Auxiliary Relays: Provide sufficient SPDT auxiliary relay contacts to provide accessory functions specified.
I.
Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter: Electrically supervised, capable of transmitting alarm, supervisory
and trouble signals over telephone lines to remote station receiver.
J.
Provide TROUBLE ACKNOWLEDGE, DRILL, and ALARM SILENCE switch.
K.
Control Panel: The control panel and remote annunciator panel shall have dedicated alarm, supervisory and
trouble LEDs and dedicated alarm, supervisory and trouble acknowledge switches.
L.
Lamp Test: Manual lamp test function causes each LED to function at fire alarm control panel.
M.
Drill Sequence of Operation: Manual drill function causes alarm mode operation as described above.
N.
Addressable systems shall have Silent Walk Test, History logging for a minimum of 400 events, 80 character
LCD display.
2.3 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

A. Trouble Sequence of Operation: System or circuit trouble places system in trouble mode, which causes the
following system operations:
1. Visible and audible trouble alarm indicated at fire alarm control panel.
2. Visible and audible trouble alarm indicated at remote annunciator panel.
3. Trouble signal transmitted to supervising station.
4. Manual acknowledge function at fire alarm control panel silences audible trouble alarm; visible alarm is
displayed until initiating failure or circuit trouble is cleared.
B.
Supervisory Sequence of Operation: The activation of any sprinkler valve tamper switch or duct-mounted smoke
detector places system in supervisory mode, which causes the following system operations:
1. Visible and audible supervisory alarm indicated by address at fire alarm control panel.
2. Visible and audible supervisory alarm indicated by address at remote annunciator panel.
3. Supervisory signal transmitted to supervising station.
4. Duct-mounted smoke detectors shall shutdown their respective unit upon detection of smoke and remain
down until manually reset.
5. Manual acknowledge function at fire alarm control panel and remote annunciator panel silences audible
supervisory alarm; visible alarm is displayed until device is returned to its normal position/supervisory condition
is cleared.
C. Alarm Sequence of Operation: Actuation of an alarm initiating device places circuit in alarm mode, which causes
the following system operations.
1. Audible notification appliances shall sound until silenced by the alarm silence switch at the control panel.
2. All visible alarm notification appliances shall display a continuous synchronized pattern until reset by the Alarm
Reset Switch.
3. Alarm signal transmitted to supervising station.
4. All air-handling systems that are monitored shall shutdown and remain down until the fire alarm control panel
is reset.
5. The alarm LED shall flash on the control panel and remote annunciator panel until the alarm has been
acknowledged at the control panel/remote annunciator panel. Once acknowledged, this same LED shall latch
on and the custom label for the address in alarm shall be displayed on the alphanumeric LCD readout. A
subsequent alarm received from another address after acknowledged shall flash the alarm LED on the control
panel showing the new alarm information.
6. A pulsing alarm tone shall occur within the control panel until acknowledged.
Sprouts
Duluth GA

-4
1550000803
*** Issue 04/30/15
2.4 INITIATING DEVICES

A. Manual Pull Station: Provide semi-flush, non-coded type, double action manual pull station.
B.
Spot Smoke Detector (Photoelectric type): Device shall have visible indication of detector actuation, self-restoring,
plug-in with an integral addressable module indicating the detector status. Photoelectric detectors shall have
sensitivity between 0.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration.
C. Duct Mounted Smoke Detector: Photoelectric detector along with a standard, relay or isolator detector mounting
base. Provide for variations in duct air velocity between 100 and 4000 feet per minute. Protect the measuring
chamber from damage and insects. Provide an air exhaust tube and an air sampling inlet tube that extends into
the duct air stream up to ten feet. Provide drilling templates and gaskets to facilitate locating and mounting the
housing. Provide remote alarm LEDs and remote test stations as shown on the plans.
D. Waterflow Alarm Switches: Shall be provided by the Fire Sprinkler Installer and shall be wired complete and ready
for use by the Fire Alarm System Installer. Switch shall have an adjustable delay to minimize false alarms due to
fluctuations in water pressure.
E.
Gate Valve (Tamper) Switches: Shall be provided by the Fire Sprinkler Installer and shall be wired complete and
ready for use by the Fire Alarm System Installer.
F.
Control Relay Module: Provide intelligent control relay modules. The Control Relay Module shall provide one form
C dry relay contact rated at 2 amps @ 24 VDC to control external appliances or equipment shutdown. The
control relay shall be rated for pilot duty and releasing systems. The position of the relay contact shall be
confirmed by the system firmware.
2.5 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Exterior Alarm Bells: Electric vibrating, 10" bell with operating mechanism behind dome and weatherproof bell kit.
Sound Rating: 80 dB at 10'-0".
B.
Alarm Horn: Surface type fire alarm horn. Sound rating: 90 dB at 10'-0".
C. Visible Alarm Notification Appliances (Strobes): Strobes shall be xenon or equivalent, unfiltered or clear filtered
white light, a minimum intensity candela as indicated on drawings, flash rate range from 1 to 3 Hz, a maximum
pulse duration of 0.2 sec with a maximum duty cycle of 40%. Strobe shall meet all requirements of the
Americans with Disabilities Act (minimum 75 cd as tested per UL 1971). Strobes shall be white.
D. Audible/Visible Alarm Notification Appliances (Horn/Strobes): Combination units shall provide a common enclosure
for the fire alarm audible and visible alarm appliances and be UL listed for its purpose. Minimum audible level and
strobe intensity shall meet all requirements for separate appliances. Horn/strobes shall be white.
E.
Provide flush or recessed mounted devices unless otherwise noted.
2.6. FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE

A. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: Building wire as specified in Division 16.
B.
Signaling Line, Initiating Device and Notification Appliance Circuits: Power limited fire-protective signaling cable,
solid copper conductor, 300 volts insulation, suitable for temperature, conditions and location installed. Minimum
wire size for initiating device circuits, control circuits and notification appliance circuits shall be determined by
calculations and manufacturers requirements or recommendations. Wire and cable shall be twisted and shielded if
recommended by the system manufacturer. Initiating, notification, and control circuits shall be sized based on
20% additional power consuming devices. The conductors shall meet the requirements of NEC article 760.
C. The type of cable chosen should be based on fire alarm system requirements, specification requirements and
applicable code requirements. Consideration should also be given to the length of cable runs and potential
interference.
D. All wiring provided on this project shall be UL listed for the intended use. All wiring including wiring to existing
modified devices and appliances shall be new.
Sprouts
Duluth GA

-5
1550000803
*** Issue 04/30/15
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A.
The Contractor shall install, program and test all new equipment identified in this contract and revise existing
equipment as noted.
B.
The installation supervisor shall be on the job site during the entire installation. The installation supervisor
shall maintain marked up copies of the drawings at the job site showing as-built conditions. These drawings
shall be updated daily and available for Owner review.
C.
The Contractor shall provide all required conduit and all associated hardware, and shall install (pull), connect,
and test all cable for a complete fire alarm system. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with the
guidelines of these specifications and documents as well as the NFPA codes and standards listed in these
specifications.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. All wiring shall be installed in conduit. Minimum allowable conduit size shall be 3/4". The conduit shall be sized
so that conduit fill does not exceed 75% of NFPA 70 maximum fill requirements. Cables in vertical risers shall not
exceed 50% of NFPA 70 maximum fill requirements. Conduit installation shall be as required by the Contractor's
layout and as described in these specifications. All conduit field routing shall be acceptable to the Owner. Routing
not acceptable shall be rerouted and replaced without expense to the Owner.
B.
All wire, cable, conduit and raceways shall be concealed in walls, ceiling spaces, electrical shafts or closets in
finished areas except as specifically noted otherwise. Conduit and raceways may be exposed in unfinished areas
or where specifically approved by the Owner.
C. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings, all conduit shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to
dominant surfaces with right angle turns made of symmetrical bends or fittings. Except where prevented by the
location of other work, a single conduit or a conduit group shall be centered on structural members.
D. Conduit shall be located at least 6" from hot water or steam pipes, and from other hot surfaces. Conduit shall not
block access to any existing equipment or fixtures.
E.
All conduits and junction boxes shall be labeled as specified in Division 16 (red).
F.
All wiring shall be terminated at devices or panels using terminal connectors for screw type terminals. All terminal
connectors for conductors shall be pre-insulated ring type or pre-insulated spade type. Pre-insulated terminal
connectors shall include a vinyl sleeve, color coded to indicate conductor size. Pre-insulated terminal connectors
shall include a metallic support sleeve bonded to the vinyl-insulating sleeve and designed to grip the conductor
insulation.
G. Mount end-of-line device in box with last device or separate box adjacent to last device in circuit for conventional
hardwired class B initiating and notification appliance circuits.
H. Conduit shall be securely fastened to all boxes and cabinets. Threads on metallic conduit shall project through the
wall of the box to allow the bushing to butt against the end of the conduit. The locknuts both inside and outside
shall then be tightened sufficiently to bond the conduit securely to the box. Conduit shall enter cabinets from the
bottom and sides only.
I.
Install manual station with operating handle 48" above floor unless noted otherwise on drawings.
J.
Install ceiling mounted initiating devices in areas with exposed structure tight to underside of floor/roof deck.
K.
Install ceiling mounted visible and audible/visible notification appliances in areas with exposed structure to bottom
of floor/roof structure or at 30'-0" AFF, whichever is lower.
Sprouts
Duluth GA

-6
1550000803
*** Issue 04/30/15
L.
Install ceiling mounted visible and audible/visible notification appliances in areas with finished ceilings flush with
bottom of ceiling or at 30'-0" AFF, whichever is lower.
M. Install wall mounted visible and audible/visible notification appliances with visible element (strobe) between 80"
and 96" above finished floor unless noted otherwise on drawings.
N. Install wall mounted audible devices with the top of the device at least 90" above finished floor or 6" below the
ceiling, whichever is lower, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. If combination devices are installed, they shall
be installed per the visible signal device requirements.
O. Make conduit and wiring connections to equipment provided by others.
P.
Provide strobe synchronization as required per NFPA 72.

A. Systems shall be checked and tested in accordance with the instructions provided by the manufacturer to insure
that the system functions as required and is free of grounds, opens, and shorts. Each device shall be tested.
Smoke detectors shall be tested with products of combustion.
B.
Upon completion of the system installation and before the Date of Final Acceptance, a factory-trained technician
shall perform all necessary tests and adjustments and shall then file a Letter of Certification and a Certificate of
Completion (NFPA 72) with the Owner indicating that the system functions and conforms to the Fire Alarm
System Specifications.
C. Test in accordance with NFPA 72 and local fire department requirements.

3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Include services of factory trained and certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections,
and system testing as performed by the fire alarm contractors factory-trained technicians.
3.5 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. Upon completion of the system installation, a factory-trained technician shall perform all necessary tests and
adjustments in the presence of the Owners designated personnel.
Sprouts
Duluth GA

-7
1550000803
*** Issue 04/30/15
SECTION 16740
A.
Telephone System Service Entrance Raceway
B.
Terminal Back Boards and Cabinets
C.
Boxes and Raceways
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A.
The extent of work for the telephone system includes providing conduit, outlet boxes, and terminal
back boards for a telephone cabling system which is to be provided and installed by the telephone
equipment installer.
B.
General Contractor shall contact Sprouts IT team and approved network installer C-3is prior to work
to ensure proper telephone service is ordered and to ensure all necessary infrastructure is in place for
a turn key delivery.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit Shop Drawings as required by Division 1.
B.
Submit product data for:

1.
2.
Cabinets
Submittals for boxes and raceway shall be as required by DIVISION 16 - BASIC MATERIALS
AND METHODS.

A.
Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose
intended.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND RECORD DRAWINGS

A.
Submit Record Drawings as required by Division 1.

1.
Accurately record actual routing of all exterior buried conduit and all interior conduit 2 and
larger.

2.1 MAIN TELEPHONE BOARD
A.
Securely anchor a fire resistant plywood back board 96 inches tall x 48 inches wide x 3/4 inches
thick and 6 inches above finished floor. Surface mount a four plex receptacle on the board 12
inches above finished floor.
B.
Mount a grounding bus bar on the board 12 inches above finished floor. Route 1-#6AWG grounding
conductor in 3/4 inch PVC conduit and tie it to the Electrical Service ground.
2.2 TELEPHONE BOARDS

A.
In each telephone closet, securely anchor a fire resistant plywood backboard 48 inches tall x 24
inches wide x 3/4 inches thick and the top 72 inches above finished floor.
B.
Telephone boards mounted on individual floors shall be ITE or equal telephone cabinet. It shall be
recessed or surface mounted as indicated on the Drawings.
C.
Enclosures shall be fabricated from galvanized steel with welded corners. The front shall be
fabricated from cold rolled steel, shall have concealed hinges and a baked enamel painted finish.
Enclosure shall be 30 inches wide x 48 inches tall x 4 inches deep with 3/4 inch plywood mounted
inside cabinet. Furnish with a grounding bus bar. Route 1-#6AWG grounding conductor in 3/4 inch
PVC conduit from grounding bus to grounding bus at main telephone board.
2.3 CONDUIT
Duluth, GA

16740-1
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
A.
Provide conduit as indicated on the Drawings or required by this Specification. Minimum conduit size
shall be 1 inch. Provide a nylon pull wire in each empty conduit. Permanently mark or tag each
conduit or junction box, identifying it as telephone, at intervals of not more than 75 feet. Each
conduit that is stubbed into the ceiling space from an outlet box shall be permanently marked or
tagged.
B.
Route a 3/4" empty conduit from each outlet box into the ceiling space above and terminate with a
nylon bushing. In rooms with a non-accessible ceiling, route conduits to the nearest accessible
corridor ceiling or electrical equipment room.
2.4 OUTLET BOXES

A.
Where indicated on the Drawings, provide outlet boxes as specified in Section DIVISION 16 - BASIC
MATERIALS AND METHODS.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TELEPHONE SERVICE
A.
The Drawings indicate the general location of the provisions for the telephone service to the building.
Coordinate the requirements with the local Telephone Company.
B.
Underground telephone service shall be installed in conduit a minimum of 24 inches deep (top of
conduit). The conduit shall be clear and free from debris. Provide a heavy nylon pull wire for the
telephone installer's use.
C.
Stub service conduit up 6 inches above finished floor, directly in front of the terminal board and
terminate it with a bushing.

Duluth, GA

16740-2
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
SECTION 16745
PROVISIONS FOR DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.

1.
2.
Data system service entrance and interior distribution raceway requirements.

Terminal Boards and Cabinets for data service.
B.
The extent of Work for the data system includes providing raceways, outlets, terminal boards, and/or
cabinets for a data cabling system that is provided by the data system equipment installer.
C.
General Contractor shall contact Sprouts IT team and approved network installer C-3is prior to work
to ensure proper telephone service is ordered and to ensure all necessary infrastructure is in place for
a turn key delivery.

A.
B.
Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for raceways, outlet boxes, and floor
boxes for use with the data service.
C.
Division 16 Section Electrical Identification for raceway identification materials to use for marking
or tagging data raceways and boxes.
D.
Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices for required receptacles for use with the data service.
E.
Division 16 Section Grounding and Bonding for conductors and connectors for grounding systems
for use with the data service.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
1.
2.
B.

a.
Terminal boards
b. Cabinets
c.
Ground bus
Shop drawings for:
a.
Detailing fabrication and installation for custom cabinets.
1.
Accurately record actual routing of all exterior buried raceway and all interior conduits two

A.

1.
2.
B.

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
selection:
1.

Duluth, GA
Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

PROVISIONS FOR DATA
16745-1
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
2.
B.
specified.
2.2 MAIN TELEPHONE TERMINAL BOARD (TTB)

A.
Fire-retardant-treated and stamped FRT plywood board, -inch thick; dimensions as indicated on the
Drawings.
2.3 GROUND BUS

A.
As called out on plans.
2.4 RACEWAYS AND OUTLETS

A.
Where indicated on the Drawings, provide raceways and outlets as specified in Division 16 Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DATA SERVICE
A.
The Drawings indicate the general location of the provisions for the data service to the building.
Coordinate the requirements with the Data Service Provider.
B.
For underground data service, provide PVC conduit a minimum of 24 inches deep (top of conduit), or
as indicated on the Drawings. Minimum conduit size: two inches for the service entrance, or as
required by the Data Service Provider. Swab installed conduit and verify it is clear and free from
debris, and obtain written acceptance of the installation from the Data Service Provider. Provide a
heavy nylon pull cord (minimum 200-pound rating) for the Data Service Providers use.
C.
Stub service conduit up through slab to six inches above finished floor and directly in front of the
TTB, using a PVC-coated or mastic-covered galvanized rigid steel (GRS) conduit elbow and
extension, and terminate it with a grounding-type bushing.
3.2 TELEPHONE TERMINAL BOARD (TTB)

A.
Securely anchor the TTB to the wall, with anchors approved by the Architect for the type of wall
encountered, with the bottom of the TTB six inches above finished floor. Surface mount on the TTB
the type and quantity of receptacles as indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Install the grounding bus bar on the TTB 12 inches above finished floor and bond to the Service
Entrance main grounding electrode as indicated on the Drawings.
3.3 RACEWAYS AND OUTLETS

A.
Provide raceways and outlets as indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Minimum raceway size: 3/4-inch. Provide a nylon pull cord in each empty conduit.
C.
Provide an empty EMT raceway from each outlet box into the ceiling space above and terminate with
a nylon bushing. In rooms with a non-accessible ceiling, install raceways to the nearest accessible
corridor ceiling or as indicated on the Drawings.
Permanently mark or tag each raceway at intervals of not more than 75 feet, and each junction box and pull
box. Permanently mark or tag each raceway that is stubbed into the ceiling space from an outlet box.
Identifying them as Data.

Duluth, GA
PROVISIONS FOR DATA

16745-2
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99
SECTION 16900
BUILDING SYSTEMS CONTROL
1.2
BUILDING EMS PANEL (ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL PANEL)SUBMITTALS REQUIRED FOR REVIEW

A.
Submit Shop Drawings as required by Division 1.
B.
Submit product data for:

1.
2.
Materials
Connectors

A.
Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc as suitable for purpose
indicated.
1.4 RECORD DRAWINGS

A.
Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes.
1.5 DESCRIPTION
A.
This section generally describes miscellaneous building controls. Provide all parts as required to
achieve the operation indicated on the Drawings, whether or not specifically called for. Where
separate components are to be assembled to form a system they shall be installed in a cabinet or an
enclosure.

2.1 BUILDING EMS PANEL (ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL PANEL)
A.
General
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 The building EMS panel (environmental control panel) shall be a direct buy by the general contractor and
shall be through sprouts national account CD Controls or Hill Phoenix. Manufacturer shall be noted on the
electrical prints. No exceptions will be taken.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
Enclosures for time switches and contactors shall have a schedule inside the cover that identifies the
control circuit and the circuits being controlled.
B.
Contactor enclosures shall insulated from the wall so as to minimize sound transmission.

Duluth, GA
BUILDING SYSTEMS CONTROL

16900-1
1550000803
*** Issue 06/19/99

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
APPENDIX 'A'
SOILS REPORT

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
Subsurface Exploration and

Geotechnical Engineering Evaluation
Sugarloaf Shopping Center
Duluth, Georgia
PGC Project No. 114233
Prepared For:
Fuqua Development, LLC.

Eleven Piedmont Center
3495 Piedmont Road
Suite 905
Atlanta, Georgia 30305
Prepared By:
3000 Northfield Place, Suite 1100

Roswell, Georgia 30076
September 8, 2014
PIEDMONT
GEOTECHNICAL CONSULTANTS, INC.
3000 Northfield Place * Suite 1100 * Roswell, GA 30076
(770) 752-9205 * FAX (770) 752-0890
September 8, 2014
Fuqua Development, LLC.

Eleven Piedmont Center
3495 Piedmont Road
Suite 905
Atlanta, Georgia 30305
Attention:
Mr. Greer Scoggins
Subject:
Report of Subsurface Exploration and

Geotechnical Engineering Evaluation
Sugarloaf Shopping Center
Duluth, Georgia
PGC Project No. 114233
Dear Mr. Scoggins:

Piedmont Geotechnical Consultants, Inc. is pleased to provide this report of our subsurface
exploration and geotechnical engineering evaluation for the referenced project. The field study and
this report were accomplished in general accordance with PGC Proposal No. P14149(Revised), dated
August 7, 20.
The following report will present a brief summary of our pertinent findings and recommendations
followed by our understanding of the proposed construction, methods of exploration employed, site
and subsurface conditions encountered, and conclusions and recommendations regarding the
geotechnical aspects of the project. Should you have any question regarding items discussed in this
report, please do not hesitate to contact the undersigned.
Sincerely,
Piedmont Geotechnical Consultants, Inc.
Martin M. Maldonado, P.E.

Senior Registered Engineer
W. Michael Ballard, P.E.

Senior Registered Engineer
P I E D M O N T G E O T E C H N I C A L C O N S U L T A N T S, I N C.
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE NUMBER
1.0 SUMMARY ............................................................................................................................. 1

2.0 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................... 2
3.0 METHODS OF EXPLORATION ......................................................................................... 2
4.0 SITE DESCRIPTION, GEOLOGY AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS ...................... 3
4.1 Site Description ................................................................................................................... 3
4.2 Geology................................................................................................................................. 3
4.3 Subsurface Conditions ........................................................................................................ 3
4.3.1 Topsoil ........................................................................................................................... 3
4.3.2 Previously Placed Fill................................................................................................... 4
4.3.3 Residuum ...................................................................................................................... 4
4.3.4 Partially Weathered Rock (PWR)/Refusal ................................................................ 4
4.3.5 Groundwater ................................................................................................................ 4
5.0 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS ................................................................ 5
5.1 Site Preparation .................................................................................................................. 5
5.2 Earthwork............................................................................................................................ 6
5.3 Difficult Excavations........................................................................................................... 7
5.3.1 Partially Weathered Rock ........................................................................................... 8
5.3.2 Rock ............................................................................................................................... 9
5.4 Groundwater Control ......................................................................................................... 9
5.5 Preliminary Foundation Recommendations ................................................................... 10
5.6 Soil Supported Slabs ......................................................................................................... 10
5.7 Temporary and Permanent Slopes .................................................................................. 10
5.8 Pavement Recommendations ........................................................................................... 10
6.0 QUALIFICATIONS OF RECOMMENDATIONS ........................................................... 12
APPENDIX
Soil Test Boring Procedures
Correlation with Standard Penetration Test Results
Figure 1: Site and Boring Location Plan
Soil Classification Chart
Soil Test Boring Records (36)
iii
1.0 SUMMARY
The following is a brief summary of our pertinent findings and recommendations. The reader is
referred to the remaining text of this report for elaboration on these items.
1.
The property appears generally suitable for the proposed construction, from a geotechnical
standpoint.
2.
General subsurface conditions consist of medium dense to dense residual soils. Previously
placed fill was encountered in borings B-2, B-3, B-5, B-23, and B-33 at the surface to depths
of 3 to as much as 50 feet below existing grades. Partially weathered rock (PWR) was
initially encountered in borings B-17 thru B-21, B-26 thru B-33, and B-35 at the ground
surface to depths of 22 feet below existing grades. Refusal was encountered in borings B-3
and B-17 thru B-19 at depths of 22 to 50 feet below the surface. No groundwater was
encountered to the depths drilled.
3.
The majority of the site was found to be undeveloped exception for grading activities
associated with the old roadway that bisects the site east to west. Borings B-2, B-3, and B-5
were performed in the old roadway in which as much as 17 to 50 feet of fill was encountered.
The fill was generally found to be well compacted. However, the slopes associated with the
road embankment can be expected to be poorly compacted and could contain organic debris
as topsoil and other unsuitable material are normally wasted in these areas. The fills
associated with the slopes should be evaluated at the time of construction by a geotechnical
engineer to determine its suitability.
Mixed organic debris was also encountered near the base of the fill in boring B-3 at depths of
42 feet below the surface. During the evaluation of the slope fill, this area should also be
further evaluated to determine the degree of organic material within the fill and whether it
may be left in place or should be removed.
4.
Various structures are planned for the project. The subsurface conditions are generally
suitable for support of typical one to two story retail buildings using a net allowable bearing
pressure of 3000 psf.
5.
The on-site previously placed fills, less organics, and residual soils are visually suitable for
reuse as structural fill. Reuse of partially weathered rock as fill is more problematic and will
require heavy compaction equipment to break down the excavated PWR chunks into a soillike material. Where PWR cannot be broken down it should be considered rock fill. Rock
fill should be placed in non-structural areas or areas designated by the geotechnical engineer.
6.
Excavations into partially weathered rock and rock will require difficult excavation
techniques like ripping, pneumatic hammering, and/or blasting to facilitate its removal.
Loosening dense residual soils (SPT of 30+) with a dozer with a single tooth attachment may
be required if pans are used to transport soils.
2.0 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION

It is our understanding that you are planning the design and construction of a new retail development
located on a tract of land at the intersection of Peachtree Industrial Boulevard and Sugarloaf Parkway
in Norcross, Georgia. At present a conceptual site and building layout plan depicts a 29,254 SF
anchor store with a 5,000 SF Shop A building and a 9,160 SF Shop B building, an 11,954 retail
building, a 2,789 SF restaurant, a 2,800 SF restaurant, a 9,800 SF Shops building, a 2,720 SF
restaurant and a 5,928 SF gas station and pump island area as well as parking and drives that disturb
the majority of the site. The new buildings are expected to be single story with slab-on-grade
supported on a system of shallow foundations. Based on our review of the topographic information
supplied it appears that the site will have cuts from approximately 10 feet to 40 feet to reach the
proposed final grade.
No other details of the proposed construction were available at the time this report was prepared.
3.0 METHODS OF EXPLORATION

To evaluate the subsurface conditions, the property was explored by a combination of a visual site
reconnaissance and drilling 36 soil test borings to depths ranging from 10 to 50 feet below the
existing grade. The borings were located in the field by measuring distances and estimating
directions from identifiable site features. Therefore, their locations as shown on the Site and Boring
Location Plan in the Appendix should be considered approximate.
The borings were advanced by twisting continuous hollow stem auger flights into the ground. At
selected intervals, Standard Penetration Resistance Testing (SPT) was performed in general
accordance with ASTM standard D-1586, and soil samples were collected for visual classification.
The results of the penetration tests, when properly evaluated, provide an indication of the relative
consistency of the soil being sampled, the potential for difficult excavation, and the soil's ability to
support loads. A more detailed description of the drilling and sampling process is included in the
Appendix of this report.
Soil samples recovered during the drilling process were returned to the office where they were
classified in general accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS). Detailed
descriptions of the materials encountered at each boring location, along with a graphical
representation of the Standard Penetration Test results, are shown on the Soil Boring Records in the
Appendix.
4.0 SITE DESCRIPTION, GEOLOGY AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

4.1 Site Description
The site is located on a parcel of land in Duluth, Georgia that is south of Peachtree Industrial
Boulevard and is bounded by Sugarloaf Parkway on the east and Chattahoochee Drive on the west.
The property is generally undeveloped exception an old road that bisects the site east to west, part of
which was the old Peachtree Industrial Road. The road has fill slopes that appear steeper than a
1H:1V slope with as much 50 feet of fill in areas. The topography of the site generally slopes
downward to the north and south from a ridgeline near the central portion of the property that runs
east to west with as much as 50 feet of topographic relief. The vegetation across the site mainly
consists of small to large hardwoods and pines.
4.2 Geology
The site is located in the Brevard Zone of the Piedmont Physiographic Province of Georgia. The
residual soils in the Piedmont are the result of the chemical and physical weathering of the
underlying parent rock. The weathering profile usually results in fine grained clayey silts and silty
clays near the surface, where weathering is more advanced. With depth, sandy silts and silty sands
are found, often containing mica. Below the residual soils, partially weathered rock is often found as
a transition above relatively unweathered rock. In local practice, partially weathered rock is
arbitrarily defined as residual soils with Standard Penetration Resistances in excess of 100 blows per
foot ( 50 blows per 6 inches), and which can be penetrated by a power auger.
The Brevard is an inactive fault zone characterized by narrow ridges and highly variable subsurface
conditions. This area has undergone numerous ancient seismic events which have caused extensive
folding, faulting and fracturing of the native bedrock. Within the Brevard, the rock and residual soils
generally dip downward to the southeast.
4.3 Subsurface Conditions
4.3.1 Topsoil
Borings B-1, B-2,B-4, B-5, B-7 thru B-12, B-15 thru B-18, B-23, B-24, and B-31 initially
encountered 3 to 5 inches of topsoil and associated root zone. The borings were drilled in areas
cleared for drill rig access and some of the topsoil may have been removed by others. Topsoil depths
can be expected to be thicker.
4.3.2 Previously Placed Fill

Borings B-2, B-3, B-5, B-23, and B-33 encountered previously placed fill to depths extending from 3
to 50 feet below the existing grades. The fill was generally classified as silty sand, with Standard
Penetration Test (SPT) results ranging from 11 to 55 blows per foot (bpf). Based on the SPT results,
the soil represented by these samples would be considered well compacted. Some of the blow counts
may be inflated due to rock pieces within the fill. Near the base of the fill in boring B-3, the sample
recovered included some organics.
4.3.3 Residuum
Exception for borings B-3 and B-32, typical residual soils was encountered at all remaining boring
locations. The residuum was generally classified as a sandy silt or silty sand and was of moderate to
high consistency. Standard Penetration Test results ranged from 8 to 80 blows per foot, with over 20
bpf being typical.
4.3.4 Partially Weathered Rock (PWR)/Refusal
Partially weathered rock (PWR) was initially encountered in borings B-17 thru B-21, B-26 thru B-33,
and B-35 with the initial contact ranging from the ground surface to depths of 22 feet below existing
grades. The PWR was generally classified as a silty sand.
Refusal to the drilling process was encountered in borings B-3 and B-17 thru B-19 at depths of 22 to
50 feet below the surface. The nature of the refusal material can only be determined by advancing
the hole below the refusal depth by using rock coring techniques, which were beyond the scope of
this work. Refusal to the drilling process was encountered at the base of the fill in boring B-3 at a
depth of 50 feet below existing grades. It is unknown if refusal was caused by competent rock or if
refusal was caused by rock in the fill.
4.3.5 Groundwater
No groundwater was encountered to the depths drilled. Groundwater fluctuations of 5 feet or more
are common in this geology.
The conditions described in the preceding paragraphs, and those shown in the Appendix, have been
based on interpolation of the results of the previously described data using generally accepted
principles and practices of geotechnical engineering. However, conditions in this geology may vary
intermediate of the tested locations, and even more so on previously developed property.
Although individual soil test borings are representative of the subsurface conditions at the precise
boring locations on the day drilled, they are not necessarily indicative of the subsurface conditions at
other locations or other times. The nature and extent of variation between the borings may not
become evident until the course of construction. If such variations are then noted, it will be
necessary to reevaluate the recommendations of this report after on-site observation of the
conditions.
5.0 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

The following conclusions and recommendations are based on the data gathered during this
exploration, our understanding of the proposed construction, our experience with similar site and
subsurface conditions and generally accepted principles and practices of geotechnical engineering.
Should the proposed construction change significantly from that described in this report, we request
that we be advised so that we may amend these recommendations accordingly. This report and the
conclusions and recommendations provided herein are provided exclusively for the use of Fuqua
Development, LLC and are intended solely for design of the referenced project.
5.1 Site Preparation
As an initial step in site preparation, all trees and unwanted vegetation should be removed, stumps
grubbed and organic topsoil stripped.
The majority of the site was found to be undeveloped, exception for the grading activities associated
with the old roadway that bisects the site east to west, and we expect the majority of the subgrades
will be acceptable for fill placement. Borings B-2, B-3, and B-5 were performed in the old roadway
in which as much as 17 to 50 feet of fill was encountered. The fill was generally found to be well
compacted. However, the slopes associated with the road embankment can be expected to be poorly
compacted and could contain organic debris as topsoil and other unsuitable material is normally
wasted in these areas. The fills associated with the slopes should be evaluated at the time of
construction by a geotechnical engineer to determine its suitability and/or whether it can remain in
place or if it should be removed.
Mixed organic debris was also encountered near the base of the fill in boring B-3 at depths of 42 feet
below the surface. During the evaluation of the slope fill, this area should also be further evaluated
by the geotechnical engineer to determine the degree of organic material within the fill and whether it
may be left in place or should be removed.
All areas to receive fill should be evaluated prior to fill placement. The approval process should
include proofrolling the subgrade with a fully loaded tandem axle dump truck (20 tons) during a
period of dry weather and under the observation of the geotechnical engineer. Any areas which
"pump" or "rut" excessively under the weight of the proofrolling vehicle should be further evaluated,
and may require undercutting or other remediation. The proofrolling can occasionally detect pits
where stumps or other debris may have been buried, or other areas where weak surface conditions
exist.
5.2 Earthwork
The previously placed fills, less organics, and residual soils on the property visually appear suitable
for reuse as structural fill. We expect the dense residual soils and partially weathered rock to be dry
of optimum moisture conditions. The addition of water to these soils should be expected and
budgeted to achieve the required compaction.
It is our opinion that the on-site soils are generally suitable for use as fill. However, use of Piedmont
Geology residual soils as backfill may not be accepted by all designers of mechanically stabilized
earth walls (modular block walls) if any are proposed for this site. While these soils generally meet
weight and strength characteristics used by most retaining wall designers for soil backfill, they may
not meet the gradation criteria for all wall designers. One nationally accepted retaining wall design
standard does not permit use of soil as backfill which have more than 30% of their volume classified
as clays, silts or fine sands. There are local wall designers who recognize the difficulty of meeting
that gradation criterion in the Piedmont Geology and whom are willing to accommodate these soil
types in their design. Without knowledge of which retaining wall designer may be selected for the
project we can only advise you that some local designers will severely restrict their definition of
suitable soils for retaining wall backfill. In those cases, the on-site soils may not be judged suitable
by them for their purpose. As such, we recommend the retaining wall contractor discuss their ability
to utilize the on-site soils as described on the boring records in the Appendix of this report prior to
their selection.
Use of rock and partially weathered rock as fill should be restricted. Where partially weathered rock
can be broken down by heavy compaction equipment, it may be placed routinely as a soil fill. Heavy
compaction equipment such as the Caterpillar 815 is often successful in this regard. Where partially
weathered rock cannot be adequately broken down, based on the opinion of the geotechnical
engineer, it should be considered rock fill.
Rock may be excavated on-site and these materials should be used in deep fill areas, below
pavements only. Rock should not be used beneath and extending 10 feet outside of building
footprints. Where soils are mixed with rock during grading, the soils should be at or very near their
optimum moisture content. Heavy compaction equipment will be required to adequately compact the
soil matrix to its required density and to break down the partially weathered rock boulders. Since fill
which contains substantial rock cannot be adequately tested, its placement and compaction should be
observed on a full time basis by an engineering technician. The technician will note the stability of
the rock fill based on observation of proofrolling performed with heavy equipment, such as fully
loaded pans. The surface of the rock fill should be choked off using crusher run or a suitable
engineering fabric prior to placement of soil fill. This is not necessary if a fully soil choked soil/rock
mixture is placed. In the upper three (3) feet of fill below at-grade parking, rock sizes should be
limited to a 4 inch maximum size. Below these depths, rock sizes should be limited to a maximum
dimension of 1 feet. Individual rocks larger than 1 feet in size should be separated in the
bottom of deeper fills, after the prior approval of the geotechnical engineer.
Where deep fills, in excess of 20 feet, are required in building areas, the fill mass should be allowed
to settle under its own weight prior to initiation of building construction. This settlement generally
will occur within a 1 to 2 month period. If you desire to initiate building construction prior to the
end of 2 months following the completion of filling, we recommend that settlement of the fill mass
be monitored. This is normally accomplished by placing several monuments at the top of the fill
pad, with the elevation of the monuments established several times a week by survey. The
geotechnical engineer should evaluate these data and provide recommendations to the contractor
when it appears that the significant portion of the settlement has ceased and the contractor can
proceed with building construction.
Where fill is placed against slopes steeper than 5H:1V, it will be necessary to "bench" the new fill
into the existing soils to insure an adequate bonding of the fill with the existing material. Inadequate
benching may create a predefined plane of weakness and adversely affect slope stability.
All structural fill should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the soil's standard Proctor maximum
dry density, as determined by ASTM standard D-698. The upper foot of fill which will support
pavements or slabs should be compacted to at least 98 percent of the soil's standard Proctor
maximum dry density for improved support. In areas which are at or above the finished grade, and
which will support pavements or slabs, the upper 8 inches immediately below these systems should
be scarified and recompacted to the 98 percent criteria. Structural fill should be free of organic
material, have a plasticity index (PI) less than 20 and contain rock sizes no larger than 4 inches.
Density testing should be performed by a soils technician to determine the degree of compaction and
verify compliance with the project specifications. For underfloor areas, at least one field density test
should be made per 5000 square feet of fill area for each two foot lift. Testing frequency should be
increased in confined areas. Areas which do not meet the compaction specifications should be
recompacted to achieve compliance. In confined areas, such as utility trenches, the use of portable
compaction equipment and thin lifts of 3 to 4 inches may be required to achieve compaction.
5.3 Difficult Excavations
Several of our borings encountered partially weathered rock (PWR) and some encountered refusal
material. These will require difficult excavation techniques to facilitate its removal. Difficult
excavation techniques may consist of ripping, pneumatic hammering, and/or blasting. The following
chart summarizes the boring locations and the depth where ripping or blasting is anticipated.
Depth to
Depth to
Ripping
Blasting
Boring #
(ft.)
(ft.)
B-1
NE to 10
NE to 10
B-13
B-2
NE to 30
NE to 30
B-14
B-3
50
50
B-15
B-4
NE to 10
NE to 10
B-16
B-5
NE to 20
NE to 20
B-17
B-6
NE to 15
NE to 15
B-18
B-7
NE to 15
NE to 15
B-19
B-8
NE to 15
NE to 15
B-20
B-9
NE to 15
NE to 15
B-21
B-10
NE to 15
NE to 15
B-22
B-11
NE to 15
NE to 15
B-23
B-12
NE to 15
NE to 15
B-24
NE Not Encountered
* Dense lense was penetrated and may be ripped.
** Lense penetrated
Boring #
Depth to
Ripping
(ft.)
NE to 15
NE to 15
NE to 15
NE to 45
18
0
8
3
22
6
NE to 15
NE to 40
Depth to
Blasting
(ft.)
NE to 15
NE to 15
NE to 15
NE to 45
18
7*
23
23
28
NE to 10
NE to 15
NE to 40
Boring #
B-25
B-26
B-27
B-28
B-29
B-30
B-31
B-32
B-33
B-34
B-35
B-36
Depth to
Ripping
(ft.)
NE to 15
8
3**
3
3
3
3
0
8
NE to 15
12
NE to 15
Depth to
Blasting
(ft.)
NE to 15
NE to 15
NE to 15
NE to 25
NE to 15
NE to 15
NE to 15
NE to 25
NE to 25
NE to 15
NE to 15
NE to 15
Loosening dense residual soils (SPT of 30+) with a dozer with a single tooth attachment may
also be required if pans are used to transport soils. The following sections summarize how PWR
and rock is classified and managed during construction.
5.3.1 Partially Weathered Rock
In mass excavations, partially weathered rock generally requires loosening prior to its removal with
conventional earthmoving equipment. Loosening generally consists of pulling a large single tooth
hydraulic ripper attached to a Caterpillar D-8K dozer, or equivalent equipment. In general, partially
weathered rock with penetration resistances of 50 blows for more than 2 inches of penetration should
be considered rippable for planning purposes. Partially weathered rock with penetration resistances
of 50 blows for 2 inches or less penetration may require blasting to aid in removal.
The ability of the contractor to rip partially weathered rock is dependent upon the consistency of the
material encountered, the number and direction of existing joints and fractures, the equipment used
and the degree of effort employed. Partially weathered rock may be loosened while pulling the
ripper in one direction but ripping in another direction may be ineffective due to the direction of dip
of the material. The specifications should include requirements to the effect that the contractor
should attempt to rip in several directions before the claim of hard rock will be honored. However,
in some cases, it may be more advantageous for the contractor to loosen extensive profiles of
partially weathered rock by blasting.
In confined excavations, such as utility trenches and footings, excavation of partially weathered rock
will require large backhoes, pneumatic spades or light blasting.
5.3.2 Rock
At the base of partially weathered rock, or in some cases residual soil, relatively unweathered rock
will be encountered. Some of this rock may be ripped if sufficient joints and fractures are present.
However, for planning purposes, we would anticipate that all partially weathered rock with SPT
results of 50 blows per 2 inches or less penetration, and unweathered rock, will require blasting to
facilitate removal.
The definition of rock for excavation purposes can be a source of conflict during construction. The
following definitions have been successfully incorporated into specifications on other projects and
are provided for your general guidance.
GENERAL EXCAVATION
Rip Rock: Any material that cannot be removed by scrapers, loaders, pans, dozers, or graders; and
requires loosening by using a single-tooth ripper mounted on a crawler tractor having a minimum
draw bar pull rated at not less than 56,000 pounds.
Blast Rock: Any material which cannot be excavated after loosening with a single-tooth ripper
mounted on a crawler tractor having a minimum draw bar pull rated at not less than 56,000 pounds
(Caterpillar D-8K or equivalent) or by a Caterpillar 973 front-end loader or equivalent; and
occupying an original volume of at least one (1) cubic yard.
TRENCH EXCAVATION
Blast Rock: Any material which cannot be excavated with a backhoe having a bucket curling force
rated at not less than 25,700 pounds (Caterpillar Model 225 or equivalent) and occupying an original
volume of at least cubic yard.
The contractor should exercise extreme caution when blasting near the proposed finished grade or in
localized blasting for individual footings. If blasting damages soil, partially weathered rock, or rock
which is to support foundations or slabs, the damaged material should be removed.
5.4 Groundwater Control
Groundwater was not encountered at any of the boring locations. We do not anticipate temporary or
permanent dewatering.
5.5 Preliminary Foundation Recommendations

We understand that several structures will be planned for the shopping center. The subsurface
conditions encountered are generally suitable for support of one to two-story structures using a
design bearing pressure of 3000 psf. Once loading is available for the structures we should be
allowed to review our recommendations and revise them if necessary.
5.6 Soil Supported Slabs
Typical retail floor slabs may be soil supported, subject to the subgrade preparation and earthwork
recommendations contained in this report. Crushed stone is not needed to support the slab loads and
is considered optional.
5.7 Temporary and Permanent Slopes
Permanent and temporary slopes may be used to accommodate grade changes. If temporary slopes
are used, they should be constructed no steeper than 1.5H: 1V for slopes less than 15 feet high.
Permanent slopes should be constructed no steeper than 2H: 1V. These recommendations are based
on our experience with similar conditions and no detailed slope stability analyses have been
performed. All finished slopes should be suitably protected from erosion.
Buildings should be set back at least 10 feet from the top of slopes; a minimum 5 foot setback is
considered sufficient for pavement areas. Note that the International Building Code (IBC) also
mandates that all structures be set back behind a 3H: 1V line as drawn upward from the toe of slope,
unless otherwise approved by both the geotechnical engineer and the building official responsible
for the building code enforcement in any particular jurisdiction.
Brevard Slope stability may be adversely impacted by the dip and numerous jointing and fracture
planes of the parent rock. If the slope is cut in the general direction of the primary dip of the rock,
local instabilities are more likely to occur. Generally, the rock dips down to the southeast on the
Brevard Zone, and the most undesirable direction of cut is for the slope to face in that direction.
5.8 Pavement Recommendations
The life of the flexible pavement is dependent on many factors, which include proper maintenance,
asphalt aging characteristics, actual traffic loadings, and proper drainage. The pavement will and
should be expected to deteriorate with time. Therefore, periodic maintenance of the pavement will
be required during its design life. Some cracks may develop in the first five years. These cracks
should be filled to prevent the intrusion of surface water which can deteriorate the subgrade. These
cracks left untreated could result in holes and general deterioration of the pavement gradually with
time and result in the requirement of a new pavement system by the end or prior to the end of the
design period. The life of the rigid pavement is also dependent on many factors, which include
proper maintenance, proper sealing of joints, and actual traffic loadings. Pavements should be
10
sloped to provide positive drainage.

At the time this report was prepared we did not have pavement loading information. Based on our
experience we have developed the following pavement design for typical shopping center traffic.
The following design section was calculated using the AASHTO pavement design method, a
coefficient of terminal serviceability Pt of 2.5, a regional factor of 1.6, and a design life of 20 years.
Pavement Type
Graded Aggregate Base
Asphaltic Concrete Binder
Asphaltic Concrete Topping
Heavy Duty
Car Parking
8
3
1.5
6
2
1
The subgrade soils should be compacted to a minimum density of 98% of the soils standard Proctor
maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698 and tested in accordance with the
recommendations presented in Section 5.2 of this report. The soil subgrade for the pavement should
be proofrolled using a fully loaded tandem axle dump truck in the presence of a geotechnical
engineer. Any areas that show movement, pumping, cracking or rutting should be repaired in
accordance with the recommendations of the geotechnical engineer.
The graded aggregate base (GAB) crushed stone should be compacted to at least 100% of the
materials modified Proctor maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557. A proofroll of
the pavement area should also be performed after the placement and compaction of the GAB to
identify and repair any soft zones as recommended by the geotechnical engineer. The GAB should
be primed prior to asphalt placement to assure adequate bonding between the asphalt and GAB and
also to seal the moisture into the base stone.
Another option would be to construct a rigid pavement with a design life of 20 years. For the heavy
duty areas the rigid pavement should be unreinforced Portland Cement concrete with a minimum
thickness of 6 inches. The concrete should have a minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi. The
Portland Cement concrete pavement should be placed on a minimum 4 inch thick layer of compacted
GAB and should be properly jointed to provide predetermined areas for the slab to crack. We
recommend maximum joint spacing of 15 to 20 feet. Saw cut control joints should be adequate for
this purpose. Further, we recommend that all construction joints be constructed with a vertical edge.
It is our opinion that special load transfer mechanisms such as deformed bars, smooth dowel bars or
shear keys are not necessary for the pavement. Given the proposed pavement thickness, these load
transfer mechanisms would most likely create higher areas of stress concentration at the joints and
cause more distress cracking. Steel reinforcing such as welded wire mesh should be considered
optional provided the concrete is placed with a relatively low slump and the pavement is properly
jointed. Pavements in dumpster area should be thickened to at least 8 inches.
A Portland Cement concrete pavement thickness of 4 inches minimum could be used for the car
parking spaces if desired. Evaluations of the soil and GAB beneath rigid pavements should be
similar to those recommended for flexible pavements.
We recommend that all subgrades, base, asphalt and concrete materials and construction procedures
conform to Georgia DOT "Standard Specifications for Construction of Roads and Bridges". In
11
particular, sections 800, 801, 815, 828, 830 for materials and sections 310, 400, and 430 for
construction procedures.
6.0 QUALIFICATIONS OF RECOMMENDATIONS

This evaluation of the geotechnical aspects of the proposed design and construction has been based
on our understanding of the project and the data obtained during this study. The general subsurface
conditions used in our evaluation were based on interpolation of the subsurface data between the
borings. Regardless of the thoroughness of a subsurface exploration, there is the possibility that
conditions will differ between boring locations, that conditions are not as anticipated by the
designers, or that the construction process has modified the soil conditions. Therefore, experienced
soil engineers and technicians should evaluate earthwork and foundation construction to verify that
the conditions anticipated in design actually exist. Otherwise, we assume no responsibility for
construction compliance with the design concepts, specifications or recommendations.
The recommendations contained in this report have been developed on the basis of the previously
described project characteristics and subsurface conditions. If project criteria change, we should be
permitted to determine if the recommendations should be modified. The findings of such a review
will be presented in a supplemental report. Even after completion of a subsurface study, the nature
and extent of variation between borings may not become evident until the course of construction. If
such variations then become evident, it will be necessary to reevaluate the recommendations of this
report after on-site observations of the conditions.
These professional services have been performed, the findings derived, and recommendations
prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering principles and practices.
This warranty is in lieu of all warranties either expressed or implied. This company is not
responsible for the conclusions, opinions or recommendations of others based on these data.
The scope of services does not include any environmental assessment for the presence or absence of
hazardous or toxic materials in the soil, groundwater, or surface water within or beyond the site.
Any statements in this report or on the test boring records regarding odors, staining of soils, or other
unusual conditions observed are strictly for general information only.
12
APPENDIX
E:\GEOTECHNICAL PROJECTS\Attachments\ATTACHMENTS.RPTS (3).doc
SOIL TEST BORING PROCEDURES (ASTM D-1586)

The soil test borings were advanced by twisting continuous auger flights into the ground.
At selected intervals, soil samples were obtained by driving a standard 1.4 inch I.D., 2.0
inch O.D., split tube sampler into the ground. The sampler was initially seated six inches
to penetrate any loose cuttings created in the boring process. The sampler is then driven
an additional 12 inches by blows of a 140 pound "hammer" falling 30 inches. The
number of blows required to drive the sampler the final foot is designated the Standard
Penetration Resistance.
The samples recovered were sealed in glass jars and were transported to the office where
they were classified by an engineer in general accordance with the Unified Soil
Classification System (USCS).
CORRELATION OF STANDARD PENETRATION RESISTANCE

WITH RELATIVE COMPACTNESS AND CONSISTENCY
Sand and Gravel

-----------------------Standard Penetration Resistance
Blows / Foot
--------------------
Relative Compactness
---------------------------------
0-4
5 - 10
11 - 30
31 - 50
Over 50
Very Loose
Loose
Medium Dense
Dense
Very Dense
Silt and Clay

--------------------Standard Penetration Resistance
Blows / Foot
------------------0-1
2-4
5-8
9 - 15
16 - 30
31 - 50
Over 50
Relative Compactness
---------------------------------Very Soft
Soft
Firm
Stiff
Very Stiff
Hard
Very Hard
FIGURE 1: SITE AND BORING LOCATION PLAN

LEGEND:
BORING LOCATION
SCALE: NTS
PIEDMONT
GEOTECHNICAL CONSULTANTS, INC.

P.O. BOX 1997
ROSWELL, GA 30077
PHONE (770) 752-9205; FAX (770) 752-0890
SUGARLOAF SHOPPING CENTER DEVELOPMENT

DULUTH, GA
PGC PROJECT NO. 114233
SOIL CLASSIFICATION CHART

MAJOR DIVISIONS
MORE THAN 50%

OF MATERIAL IS
LARGER THAN
NO. 200 SIEVE
SIZE
GW
WELL-GRADED GRAVELS, GRAVEL

- SAND MIXTURES, LITTLE OR NO
FINES
(LITTLE OR NO FINES)
GP
POORLY-GRADED GRAVELS,
GRAVEL - SAND MIXTURES, LITTLE
OR NO FINES
GRAVELS
WITH FINES
GM
SILTY GRAVELS, GRAVEL - SAND SILT MIXTURES
(APPRECIABLE
AMOUNT OF FINES)
GC
CLAYEY GRAVELS, GRAVEL - SAND

- CLAY MIXTURES
CLEAN SANDS
SW
WELL-GRADED SANDS, GRAVELLY

SANDS, LITTLE OR NO FINES
(LITTLE OR NO FINES)
SP
POORLY-GRADED SANDS,
GRAVELLY SAND, LITTLE OR NO
FINES
SANDS WITH
FINES
SM
SILTY SANDS, SAND - SILT

MIXTURES
(APPRECIABLE
AMOUNT OF FINES)
SC
CLAYEY SANDS, SAND - CLAY

MIXTURES
ML
INORGANIC SILTS AND VERY FINE

SANDS, ROCK FLOUR, SILTY OR
CLAYEY FINE SANDS OR CLAYEY
SILTS WITH SLIGHT PLASTICITY
CL
INORGANIC CLAYS OF LOW TO

MEDIUM PLASTICITY, GRAVELLY
CLAYS, SANDY CLAYS, SILTY
CLAYS, LEAN CLAYS
OL
ORGANIC SILTS AND ORGANIC

SILTY CLAYS OF LOW PLASTICITY
MH
INORGANIC SILTS, MICACEOUS OR

DIATOMACEOUS FINE SAND OR
SILTY SOILS
CH
INORGANIC CLAYS OF HIGH

PLASTICITY
OH
ORGANIC CLAYS OF MEDIUM TO

HIGH PLASTICITY, ORGANIC SILTS
ALLUVIUM
PT
ALLUVIUM, PEAT, HUMUS, SWAMP

SOILS WITH HIGH ORGANIC
CONTENTS
FILL
FILL
MORE THAN 50%

OF COARSE
FRACTION
RETAINED ON
NO. 4 SIEVE
SAND
AND
SANDY
SOILS
MORE THAN 50%

OF COARSE
FRACTION
PASSING ON NO.
4 SIEVE
FINE
GRAINED
SOILS
MORE THAN 50%

OF MATERIAL IS
SMALLER THAN
NO. 200 SIEVE
SIZE
GRAPH LETTER
TYPICAL
DESCRIPTIONS
CLEAN
GRAVELS
GRAVEL
AND
GRAVELLY
SOILS
COARSE
GRAINED
SOILS
SYMBOLS
SILTS
AND
CLAYS
SILTS
AND
CLAYS
LIQUID LIMIT
LESS THAN 50
LIQUID LIMIT
GREATER THAN 50
NOTE: DUAL SYMBOLS ARE USED TO INDICATE BORDERLINE SOIL CLASSIFICATIONS
MATERIAL PLACED BY MAN
Sugarloaf Shopping Center Development

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
TOPSOIL: 3 inches
RESIDUUM: Medium dense brown red clayey silty
medium to fine SAND (SM), micaceous
PENETRATION (BLOWS PER FOOT)

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
15
18
20
Medium dense gray brown silty medium to fine SAND
(SM), micaceous
10
19
Boring terminated at 10 feet
15
SOIL BORING RECORD 114233 SUGARLOAF RETAIL -FUGUA.GPJ PIEDMONT GEO.GDT 9/8/14
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Groundwater level at time of boring
Caved depth - 24 hrs
Groundwater level - 24 hrs
Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-1
8/22/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
TOPSOIL: 2 inches
FILL: Medium dense to dense brown gray silty medium
to fine SAND (SM), blow counts possibly inflated by
rock fragments

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
34
24
11
13
10
16
15
25
20

medium to fine SAND (SM)
26
25
Dense white brown silty medium to fine SAND (SM)
30
39
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-2
8/21/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
to fine SAND (SM), blow counts may be inflated due to
rock fragments

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
32
30
15
16
10
27
15
21
20
26
25
14
30
22
35
20
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-3
8/21/2014
114233
1 of 2

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
to fine SAND (SM), blow counts may be inflated due to
rock fragments (continued)
Medium dense gray brown silty medium to fine SAND
(SM), mixed organics

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
11
45
POSSIBLE FILL: Very dense gray brown silty medium

to fine SAND (SM)
50
>>
50/1"
Auger refusal at 50 feet
55
60
65
70
75
80
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-3
8/21/2014
114233
2 of 2

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
TOPSOIL: 4 inches
RESIDUUM: Medium dense brown red silty medium to
fine SAND (SM)

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
13
Stiff red brown tan fine sandy SILT (ML), slightly

micaceous
13
Firm white brown red fine sandy SILT (ML)
10
8
15
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-4
8/22/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
TOPSOIL: 3 inches
FILL: Dense to very dense brown gray silty medium to
fine SAND (SM), rocky. Blow counts may be inflated
due to rock pieces.

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
53
37
34
34
10
44
15
RESIDUUM: Dense brown red clayey silty medium to

fine SAND (SM)
20
37
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-5
8/22/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
RESIDUUM: Medium dense red brown silty medium to
fine SAND (SM)

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
15
11
12
Very stiff brown fine sandy SILT (ML)
21
10
Medium dense tan black white silty medium to fine

SAND (SM)
15
18
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-6
8/26/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
TOPSOIL: 4 inches
RESIDUUM: Loose red brown silty medium to fine
SAND (SM), slightly micaceous

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
7
Medium dense to dense tan red brown silty medium to

fine SAND (SM), micaceous
35
35
15
10
15
15
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-7
8/25/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
TOPSOIL: 4 inches
RESIDUUM: Medium dense brown red silty medium to
fine SAND (SM), micaceous

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
11
Medium dense red brown silty medium to fine SAND

(SM), micaceous
17
17
20
10
15
28
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-8
8/25/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
TOPSOIL: 4 inches
medium to fine SAND (SC), micaceous

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
18
25
26
Medium dense brown silty medium to fine SAND (SM),
micaceous
20
10
15
21
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-9
8/25/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
TOPSOIL: 4 inches
fine SAND (SM)

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
12
17
5
Loose to medium dense red tan white silty medium to
fine SAND (SM)
22
10

(SM)
15
13
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-10
8/25/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
TOPSOIL: 4 inches
fine SAND (SM)

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
14
20
21
13
10
Medium dense tan white silty medium to fine SAND

(SM)
15
12
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-11
8/25/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
TOPSOIL: 4 inches
RESIDUUM: Loose to medium dense brown red clayey
silty medium to fine SAND (SM), micaceous

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
7
13
14
Medium dense brown silty medium to fine SAND (SM)
13
10
15
13
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-12
8/25/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
medium to fine SAND (SM), micaceous

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
11
18
16
Medium dense brown white silty medium to fine SAND
(SM), micaceous
11
10
15
13
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-13
8/25/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
RESIDUUM: Medium dense tan red brown silty

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
7
13
13
Very stiff tan black white fine sandy SILT (ML)
15
10
Very stiff brown fine sandy SILT (ML), slightly

micaceous
15
16
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-14
8/25/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
TOPSOIL: 5 inches
fine SAND (SM), slightly micaceous

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
13
14
5
Stiff brown fine sandy SILT (ML), slightly micaceous
13
11
10
Medium dense brown silty medium to fine SAND (SM)
15
20
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-15
8/25/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
TOPSOIL: 4 inches

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
12

(SM)
16
20
17
10
15
15
13
20
21
25
24
30
Very dense red brown silty medium to fine SAND (SM)

59
35
80
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-16
8/25/2014
114233
1 of 2

DEPTH
(FT)
45
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
Very dense red brown silty medium to fine SAND (SM)
(continued)

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
64
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-16
8/25/2014
114233
2 of 2

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
TOPSOIL: 3 inches
fine SAND (SM), micaceous from 6 feet to 8 feet

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
25
21
27
22
10
21
15
PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: Very dense tan

brown silty medium to fine SAND (SM)
>>
20
50/2"
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-17
8/25/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
TOPSOIL: 3 inches
PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK LENSE: Very
dense tan black brown silty medium to fine SAND (SM)

10
20
30 40
60
10
15
20
25
30
35
80 100
>>
50/4"
>>
50/5"
>>
50/2"
>>
50/4"
>>
50/3"
>>
50/5"
>>
50/4"
>>
50/3"
>>
50/4"
RESIDUUM: Very dense tan brown silty medium to

fine SAND (SM)
58
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-18
7/25/2014
114233
1 of 2

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
RESIDUUM: Very dense tan brown silty medium to
fine SAND (SM) (continued)

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
55
45

50
55
60
65
70
75
80
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-18
7/25/2014
114233
2 of 2

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
RESIDUUM: Medium dense to dense red brown silty

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
21
46
36
dense red brown silty medium to fine SAND (SM)
>>
10
50/4"
RESIDUUM: Dense red brown silty medium to fine

SAND (SM)
38
15
PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: Very dense gray

20
25
>>
50/3"
>>
50/1"

30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-19
8/26/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
RESIDUUM: Very dense brown gray silty medium to
fine SAND (SM)

10
20
30 40
60
60
PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: Very dense

brown gray silty medium to fine SAND (SM)
10
15
20
80 100
25
30
35
40
>>
50/5"
>>
50/5"
>>
50/4"
>>
50/5"
>>
50/5"
>>
50/2"
>>
50/4"
>>
50/4"
>>
50/2"
45
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-20
8/26/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
fine SAND (SM)

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
20
Dense to very dense tan red brown silty medium to fine

SAND (SM), slightly micaceous
76
46
Very stiff to hard medium to fine sandy SILT (ML)
23
10
27
15
31
20

red brown silty medium to fine SAND (SM)
25
30
>>
50/5"
>>
50/2"
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-21
8/25/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
RESIDUUM: Very stiff red brown medium to fine
sandy SILT (ML)

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
18
Medium dense brown red silty medium to fine SAND

(SM)
22
5
PARTIALLY WEATHERED ROCK: Very dense red
10
>>
50/3"
>>
50/3"
15
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-22
8/25/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
TOPSOIL: 3 inches
FILL: Medium dense brown gray silty medium to fine
SAND (SM), blow counts possibly inflated due to rock
fragments

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
20
RESIDUUM: Stiff to very stiff brown fine sandy SILT

(ML), micaceous
14
22
Medium dense tan brown silty medium to fine SAND
(SM)
22
10
15
26
Boring terminatd at 15 feet
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-23
8/21/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
TOPSOIL: 3 inches
RESIDUUM: Loose to medium dense white red brown
silty medium to fine SAND (SM)

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
15
20
18
10
11
15
20
20
15
25
15
30
15
35
19
40
45
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-24
8/22/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
RESIDUUM: Medium dense tan brown silty medium to
fine SAND (SM)

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
20
Very dense red brown silty medium to fine SAND (SM),

micaceous
63
54
Medium dense brown red silty medium to fine SAND
(SM)
19
10
Dense tan white brown silty medium to fine SAND

(SM), rock fragments
15
34
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-25
8/22/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
RESIDUUM: Dense gray brown silty medium to fine
SAND (SM)

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
34
Very dense tan brown silty medium to fine SAND (SM)

66
64
10
15
>>
50/5"
>>
50/5"
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-26
8/26/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
fine SAND (SM)

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
71

dense brown gray silty medium to fine SAND (SM)
>>
5
RESIDUUM: Dense to very dense tan gray brown silty
53
36
10
15
50/5"
39
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-27
8/26/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
fine SAND (SM)

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
61

dense brown gray silty medium to fine SAND (SM)
5
10
>>
50/5"
>>
50/5"
>>
50/5"
RESIDUUM: Dense to very dense gray brown silty

56
15
44
20

25
>>
50/5"
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-28
8/26/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
TOPSOIL: 4 inches
RESIDUUM: Dense brown gray silty medium to fine
SAND (SM)

10
20
30 40
60
38

gray silty medium to fine SAND (SM)
5
10
15
80 100
>>
50/5"
>>
50/5"
>>
50/4"
>>
50/5"
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-29
8/26/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
TOPSOIL: 3 inches
RESIDUUM: Very dense gray brown silty medium to
fine SAND (SM)

10
20
30 40
60
53

5
10
15
80 100
>>
50/3"
>>
50/5"
>>
50/5"
>>
50/5"
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-30
8/26/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
TOPSOIL: 4 inches
RESIDUUM: Medium dense brown gray silty medium
to fine SAND (SM)

10
20
30 40
60
17

5
10
15
80 100
>>
50/5"
>>
50/4"
>>
50/5"
>>
50/3"
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-31
8/26/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION

10
20
30 40
60
10
15
20
25
80 100
>>
50/4"
>>
50/4"
>>
50/5"
>>
50/3"
>>
50/5"
>>
50/6"
>>
50/5"
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-32
8/26/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
FILL: Medium dense brown gray silty medium to fine
SAND (SM)

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
12
RESIDUUM: Dense gray silty medium to fine SAND

(SM)
33
46
gray brown silty medium to fine SAND (SM)
10
15
20
25
>>
50/4"
>>
50/2"
>>
50/3"
>>
50/4"
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-33
8/26/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
RESIDUUM: Medium dense red brown clayey silty

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
15
19
22
Dense red brown silty medium to fine SAND (SM)
37
10
15
37
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-34
8/26/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
RESIDUUM: Medium dense brown silty medium to
fine SAND (SM), slightly micaceous

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
17
20
20
Very dense brown silty medium to fine SAND (SM)
53
10

brown gray silty medium to fine SAND (SM), trace clay
15
>>
50/5"
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-35
8/26/2014
114233
1 of 1

DEPTH
(FT)
ELEV.
DESCRIPTION
RESIDUUM: Loose to medium dense black red brown
silty medium to fine SAND (SM), micaceous

10
20
30 40
60
80 100
13
10
13
10
15
11
20
25
30
35
40
SOIL BORING RECORD

Undisturbed sample
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PAGE
B-36
8/26/2014
114233
1 of 1

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
APPENDIX 'B'
SPROUTS REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS

Duluth, GA 30097
PROJECT #: 320103821
REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT
SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITION OF TERMS
A. The work shall mean the complete refrigeration unit engineering design, store drawing
package, manufacturing, and delivery of all equipment and devices in accordance with
these Specifications and as described in the Plans, Details, Refrigeration Schedule,
and Request for Bids, and Purchase Orders.
B. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer or REM shall mean the company
awarded the bid to supply the Refrigeration System.
C. The "Refrigeration Installation Contractor" shall mean the company selected by Sprouts
Farmers Market to perform the installation of all equipment and devices manufactured
under these specifications for this project.
D. Sprouts Farmers Market or Owner shall mean Sprouts Farmers Market authorized
representative who is the Construction Project Manager or his designated
representative.
1.2 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Drawings and Specifications are complimentary and what is called for by one shall
be as binding as if called for by both. Should the drawings and specifications be
contradictory or should there be any apparent errors, discrepancies, or omissions or
should there be any doubt as to the meaning of either, the REM shall refer the matter to
Sprouts Farmers Market, whose decision shall be binding on all parties.
B. Figures shall take precedence over sealed measurements and details over general
drawings.
C. All addenda, corrections, or letters issued during the time of bidding shall take
precedence over the drawings and specifications as written.
1.3 LAWS AND ORDINANCES
A. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall comply with all Federal, State, and
Local laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations bearing on the work within the drawings
and specifications that he shall perform under this contract.
B. All refrigeration equipment shall be U.L. and/or E.T.L. listed.
~1~
PART 2 - GENERAL COMPONENTS

2.1 REFRIGERANT PIPING MATERIAL
A. Unless otherwise specified, all refrigeration piping shall be refrigeration grade Type L or
Type K hard drawn, degreased sealed copper tubing. Fittings shall be wrought copper
or forged brass and only long radius elbows shall be used. All changes in line size and
direction shall be accomplished with fittings or factory bent tubing through an approved
industry process warranted by the copper manufacturer. Absolutely no "stab-ins" or
formed long sweep elbows are permitted.
B. Where the clamps are applied directly onto copper lines, hydra-zorb cushion clamp
assemblies shall be used. Steel clamp parts must not touch or rub the copper pipe.
C. Cadmium plated or galvanized nuts and bolts with self locking type nuts shall be used
on all pipe clamps.
D. All piping to be installed in such a manner as to completely prevent any type of rubbing
against other pipes or any other object.
E. All piping shall be installed so that normal servicing of the compressors, suction filters,
ball valves, Schrader valves, liquid line solenoid valves, pressure control valves and
related equipment is not hindered.
F. Do not obstruct the views of the crankcase oil sight glass or run piping so it interferes
with removal of the compressor, cylinder heads, end bells, access plates, fans, fan
motors, coil, filters, etc.
G. Branch liquid lines shall exit a main liquid header manifold from the bottom of the
manifold. Branch suction lines shall enter a main suction header manifold at the top of
the manifold.
H. Main and branch liquid hot gas discharge refrigerant lines shall be sized in accordance
with good industry practice to avoid excessive pressure drops.
I. Main and branch suction lines shall be sized to maintain adequate velocities, to
properly return oil to the compressor under minimum load conditions at the lowest
saturated suction pressure expected.
J. Joints in the piping shall be brazed as follows:
1. Discharge -Copper to Copper - 15% silver (StaySilv 15) brazing alloy with no
flux
2. Discharge - Copper to Brass - 45% silver, cadmium free alloy with StaySilv
white paste flux
3. Suction -Copper to copper - StaySilv 6 brazing alloy with no flux
4. Suction - Copper to brass - Staybrite 8 (6% silver) with liquid flux
K. During the brazing operation, dry nitrogen must be bled through the piping at very low
pressure to prevent oxidation and scaling.
L. In order to avoid damage to the internal Silfos joints in vibration eliminators, line
connections to vibration eliminators are to made with a silver solder alloy such as EasyFlo having a melt temperature of 900F to 1,200F (well below the 1,300F melting
point of Silfos).
M. To prevent contamination of the line internally, limit the soldering paste or flux to the
minimum required. Flux only the male portion of the connection, never the female.
N. Manufacturer shall ensure that all equipment supplied has proper pressure relief
protection, and that relief ports are directed downward or piped to relieve downward
and pipe to the outdoors.
~2~
2.2 REFRIGERATION INSULATION

A. Insulation shall be Armstrong Arma-flex II, Rubatex R-180-FS, or Aeroflex Aerocell. All
low temp suction lines shall be insulated with wall thickness insulation. All medium
temp suction lines shall be insulated with wall thickness insulation. All subcooled
liquid lines shall be insulated with wall thickness insulation.
B. All low temp suction header manifolds shall be entirely insulated with insulation. All
medium temp suction header manifolds shall be entirely insulated with insulation.
This includes insulating each suction line from the manifold back to the compressor,
including the suction filers.
C. Mechanically subcooled direct expansion refrigeration liquid line header manifolds shall
be entirely insulated with 1/2" insulation as specified.
D. All insulation joints shall be sealed with rubber cement to ensure a "drip-tight" seal.
Insulation shall be slipped on tubing prior to joint brazing where possible, as an
alternative to splitting and then sealing the joint.
E. Insulation shall be mitered, pre-adhered and longitudinally slit to fit over all tees and
elbows and bends.
2.3 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
A. The mechanical connections to all pressure controlled devices, including individual
compressor low pressure controllers, pressure regulated valves, etc., shall be
connected with Johnson ultra cap metallic sheathed hose for non-oil flow applications
and Ritchie Yellow jacket superhose for oil flow applications that are rated for the
pressures and refrigerant which it shall be used.
B. All valve caps shall be brass without exception. Steel and plastic valve caps shall not
be accepted.
C. Angle service valves with brass caps shall be placed at a minimum on the discharge
header manifold, liquid header manifold, suction header manifold, and condenser
return line.
D. Schreader valves with brass caps shall be placed on both side of all
adjustable/solenoid controlled devices in order to check the pressure drop across these
devices during start-up and normal maintenance operations unless otherwise noted.
E. All ball valves shall be unitized brass assemblies manufactured by Mueller or Superior.
No flange style ball valves will be accepted.
F. All check valves without a specified pressure differential shall be unitized spun copper
assemblies (Magni-Chek) manufactured by A-1 Components or equal. No take-apart
style check valves will be accepted for this purpose.
G. All check valves with a specified pressure differential shall be spring loaded take-apart
brass assemblies with brass or stainless steel bolts manufactured by Mueller or
Superior.
2.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
A. All electrical components shall be UL listed.
B. All electrical components and internal wiring shall be sized per latest version of NEC.
C. All circuit breakers and contactors shall be manufactured by Siemens(or approved
equal), and all compressor motor contactors must be definite purpose rated.
D. Electrical panel shall have a minimum SCCR rating of 65,000.
~3~
PART 3 - REPRESENTATION AND WARRANTY PERIOD

3.1 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER REPRESENTATION
A. The Refrigeration Installation Contractor shall provide a representative on site during
the delivery of the refrigeration system containing the parallel compressor racks,
condensers, evaporators and field parts. He shall review the equipment and verify
compliance with these specifications. Any discrepancies, defects, physical damage or
part shortages of this equipment in fabrication, construction, or delivery by the
Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer or damage in installation by the Refrigeration
Installation Contractor shall be addressed at this time and noted in writing to Sprouts
Farmers Market within 5 working days.
3.2 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT WARRANTY PERIOD
A. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall warrant all parts for a period of one (1)
year from date of store Grand Opening. All defective parts shall be provided at no cost
to Sprouts Farmers Market during this Refrigeration Equipment Warranty Period.
B. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall assign and furnish to Sprouts Farmers
Market, a copy of all "warranties" for equipment or manufactured components supplied
for this project. It is the responsibility of the Refrigeration Installation Contractor to
process all "warranty" claims that occur during the Refrigeration Equipment Warranty
Period described above. All Terms and Conditions stated on the manufacturer's
warranties shall apply to Sprouts Farmers Market.
END OF SECTION 1
~4~
SECTION 2 PARALLEL COMPRESSOR RACK

PART 1 - SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall be required to furnish and deliver to
the site two (2) parallel compressor racks (identified as Rack 1 & 2 here within) to
provide the stores refrigeration capacities. These parallel compressor racks shall be
fabricated for field installation on top of the walk in boxes.
B. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall furnish all compressors, manifolds,
valves, piping, panels, breakers, contactors, transformers, wiring, and controls as
required to provide complete and operating mechanical systems. All sizing of these
components shall adhere to these specifications, the refrigerant mass flow for the each
individual parallel compressor rack, and the electrical power requirements for each
component.
C. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall note that the parallel compressor Rack
1 and Rack 2 shall utilize HFC-407f refrigerant with P.O.E oil and all the equipment
shall be manufactured to operate as such.
D. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall assure that all parallel compressor
rack valve caps have been wrench tight before the unit has been charged with a
holding charge of dry nitrogen and shipped. Each rack shall be properly and
conspicuously tagged as to the holding charge amount charged at the factory and the
type of oil and refrigerant the equipment has been designed for.
E. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall ship each parallel compressor rack
free of oil and refrigerants and shall provide the necessary types and quantities of oil
shipped loose for use in these racks by the Refrigeration Installation Contractor. All
HFC refrigerants necessary for the proper operation of these racks shall be provided by
others.
F. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall provide a refrigeration equipment
manual at the time of refrigeration system delivery to the Refrigeration Installation
Contractor. The manual shall include, but not be limited to, detailed service instructions
and information with regards to the installation and operation of the parallel compressor
racks, condensers and evaporators. As a minimum, the manual shall include the
following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Complete refrigeration schedules and piping drawings.

Parallel Compressor Rack wiring diagrams.
Automated control system board assignment configurations.
Automated control system manufacturer operational instructions.
Condenser installation and operations manuals.
Evaporator and unit cooler installation and operations manuals.
All Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer's warranties.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 EQUIPMENT SELECTION/DESIGN PARAMETERS
A. General Requirements:
1. Each parallel compressor rack shall be fabricated on a welded steel frame and
be mounted and shipped as one unit. All steel framing and welds shall be
factory coated with a rust resistant coating.
~5~
2. Each parallel compressor rack shall incorporate all of the compressor and
ancillary systems as indicated within these specifications and on the
refrigeration schedules, and shall be completely pre-piped and pre-wired to the
maximum possible extent.
3. Each rack shall have both low temp and medium temp subcooled to 50 deg F.
A liquid pressure regulating valve shall be installed to maintain a maximum
liquid pressure equivalent to 70 deg F. The valve shall be sized so that the
head pressure can be floated 70 deg F or lower.
4. Each parallel compressor rack shall be configured to accommodate the
conventional piping configuration as indicated on the refrigeration schedules.
This shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
a. Primary discharge, liquid, and suction manifolds.
b. A series of ball valves to enable complete isolation for pump-down
purposes.
c. Main suction, discharge, drain and liquid ball valves installed on rack.
5. The parallel compressor racks shall have electrical connections with separate
MCA and MOPD listings. This power feed shall be connected to a phase loss
monitor that shall shut down power to the compressors in the event of a loss of
any of the three phases. This connection shall provide operational power to the
automated controls system and all solenoid and contactor/component controls.
These racks shall be pre-wired with the automated controls system controller,
I/O boards, and the specified pre-wired sensors to the maximum possible
extent. The main panel feeds shall include thru the door disconnect switches
(460v Fused, 208v Non Fused). There shall be two panels, a 460v compressor
control panel and a 208v defrost/fan/light/anti-sweat panel. Each rack shall
include a lighting contactor with 24v coil for the case lights. Each rack shall
include the 120v breakers (20A) for the case lights, case fans, case anti-sweats,
box coils, freezer door heaters, freezer air vents and heat tape (freezer(s)/meat
cooler. Each rack shall include a 120v - 20A GFI service outlet.
6. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall provide isolation pads for the
parallel compressor rack to dampen the transmitted vibration. These isolation
pads shall be of adequate quantity and sized to accommodate the parallel
compressor rack weight.
7. Each rack shall have insulated panels on top and sides to reduce sound
transmission. Panels to be louvered for airflow as needed. Side panels are to
be easily removed to provide service access.
2.2 COMPRESSORS
A. The two (2) parallel compressor racks shall consist of Bitzer compressors per the
refrigeration schedules.
B. The compressors shall each be individually mounted to the welded steel frame with
vibratory isolation connections and shall adhere to all manufacturers requirements.
C. These compressors shall incorporate the following conventional safety controls.
1. Low Suction Pressure with automatic reset.
~6~
2. High Discharge Pressure with automatic reset, minimum 395 psig setpoint,
SPDT.
3. Oil Pressure Switch with manual reset
D. Each suction group shall have a single brass replaceable core suction filter with brass
or stainless steel bolts manufactured by Emerson Flow Control or equal. The
Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall size this suction filter for minimal pressure
drop. All suction filter bodies shall be insulated with a removable insulated cover over
the suction filter core cover. Provide additional set of suction filters.
E. All low temp compressors must incorporate an auxiliary head cooling fan, designed to
operate whenever the compressor is energized, which shall be separately fused from
the compressor relay contacts.
F. The compressors shall each have their compressor heads painted as to the universally
designated refrigerant color code.
G. The compressors shall be shipped dry, free of oil and refrigerants. The Refrigeration
Equipment Manufacturer shall furnish the necessary P.O.E. oil to be shipped
separately.
H. These compressors shall be individually controlled through the automated controls
system for capacity control.
2.3 OIL SEPARATION, EQUALIZATION, AND FILTRATION
A. Each parallel compressor rack shall each incorporate a low pressure oil system
consisting of a centrifugal oil separator manufactured by Westermeyer or equal
installed after the compressor discharge manifold and a 2 gallon reservoir with a check
valve to suction.
B. The oil distribution to compressors for each parallel compressor rack shall be
accomplished via electronic oil level floats manufactured by Emerson Flow Controls.
There shall be NO oil equalization lines installed between the compressors.
C. An oil filter/drier system shall be incorporated for each parallel compressor rack to
clean and dry the oils as the oil is returned to the oil reservoir and compressor
crankshaft. These components shall include an Emerson AOF-023S take apart oil
filter.
D. One additional set of oil filters will be shipped loose.
2.4 HEAD PRESSURE CONTROL - CONDENSERS
A. A variable speed drive will control the condenser fans utilizing a TD strategy with
individual fan cycling control back up.
B. The REM will provide a Danfoss AKD102 (131G0536) variable speed drive with a VFD
bypass panel. This panel and drive will be located adjacent to the compressor rack.
C. The air cooled condenser will come prewired with a CPC Multi-flex 88 board and
transformer to control each fan individually.
2.5 LIQUID RECEIVERS, RECEIVER PRESSURIZATION, AND LIQUID DRIERS
A. Each parallel compressor rack shall incorporate a 12 x 48 flow-through vertical
receiver mounted directly to the racks structural framing.
B. The receiver shall be rated at 450 psig.
C. The receiver shall incorporate sight glasses with floats and a Hansen liquid level
sensor.
D. The receiver shall each be equipped with pressure relief valves manufactured by Henry
or Mueller.
~7~
E. The receiver shall each incorporate a vent consisting of a ball valve and check valve
that will be field piped up to the condenser drain line.
F. Provide additional set of liquid driers.
2.6 RACK LIQUID CONNECTION
A. Each parallel compressor rack shall incorporate a single subcooled liquid field
connection with isolation ball valve.
2.7 RACK SUCTION CONNECTION
A. Each parallel compressor rack shall incorporate two suction field connections (one per
suction group) with isolation ball valve.
2.8 FIELD PARTS
A. REM to provide field installed isolation ball valves, SPORT valves and CDS valves.
END OF SECTION 2
~8~
SECTION 3 AIR-COOLED CONDENSERS

PART 1 - SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall furnish and deliver to the site two (2)
remote air-cooled condensers in accordance with the following specifications.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
A. General Requirements:
1. See refrigeration schedule for Condenser manufacturer and model numbers.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Type: Vertical airflow remote air-cooled.

Fans: 4) Direct drive fans 1140 RPM.
Two Point Connection: 460/3/60 power, 208/1/60 control
Fin Spacing: 10 Maximum
15 deg TD maximum
Corrosion Protection: None.
2. Fan Control: The condenser fans shall be variable speed during normal
operation and cycled individually during bypass operation. Condensers shall be
factory pre-wired to control the fans as specified. A CPC MF88 board with
transformer shall be factory installed.
3. Contactors: Each condenser fan shall include a separate fan contactor.
4. Fusing: Each condenser fan shall be separately fused.
5. Control panel shall incorporate a thru the door disconnect switch.
6. Condenser power will come from the inverter bypass panel up to the line side of
the condenser main disconnect. The load side of the condenser main
disconnect will go back down to the inverter bypass panel and then back up to
the condenser power terminal block.
END OF SECTION 3
~9~
SECTION 4 EVAPORATOR COILS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall furnish and deliver to the site Bohn or
approved equivalent walk-in cooler, walk-in freezer, and refrigerated prep area
evaporator coils.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
A. See refrigeration schedules for evaporator model numbers. Factory install the following
items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Sporlan thermostatic expansion valves.

Fan delay thermostat (Electric defrost only)
Defrost termination thermostat (Electric defrost only)
ECM motors
END OF SECTION 4
~ 10 ~
SECTION 5 AUTOMATED CONTROLS SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall be required to furnish and deliver to
the site two parallel compressor racks (identified as Rack 1 and Rack 2 here within)
and two (2) air cooled condensers with a factory wired CPC E2 RX-300 controller
(Rack 1), CPC E2 RX-300 controller (Rack 2), CPC Multi-flex I/O boards, and the
specified prewired CPC sensors and transducers to the maximum possible extent for
the purposes of primary suction pressure, discharge pressure, system temperature,
system defrost, and ancillary function controls for this equipment.
B. 2) AI Panels (one per rack) with CPC Multi-flex ESR boards, shipped loose.
C. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall furnish all transformers, wiring,
controllers, CPC Multi-flex I/O boards, CPC Multi-flex ESR boards and CPC
sensors/transducers as required to provide complete and operating systems control.
All sizing of these components shall adhere to these specifications and the electrical
power requirements for each component.
D. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall provide all loose components
specified for the installation of the refrigeration controls system including all
temperature sensors.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
A. Refrigeration System Controllers:
1. Each parallel compressor rack shall be factory wired with a CPC E2 RX-300
controller for the control of the corresponding parallel compressor rack, aircooled condenser and remote CPC Multi-flex I/O boards. All low voltage field
wiring from each controller to the parallel compressor rack, air-cooled
condensers shall be installed and terminated by the Refrigeration Installation
Contractor.
2. The basic control functions of the CPC E2 RX-300 controller shall be as follows:
a. Maintain the optimum design suction pressures through modulation of
the compressors based on MBH capacities, through selection of the best
compressor combination to satisfy the current and predicted load for the
parallel compressor rack. This shall be performed while maintaining the
compressor operational integrity, and with a strategy designed to
minimize power consumption (floating suction, etc).
b. Maintain the preselected discharge pressures through variable speed
control of the condenser fans in response to ambient temperature and
head pressure (floating head, etc).
c. Control and monitoring of the individual refrigeration circuits in
refrigeration and defrost modes via interface with the liquid line solenoid
(where applicable), suction CDS or EPR valves.
~ 11 ~
3. The basic programming of the controllers shall be by the REM based upon
parameters established by the Owner. Final programming will be done by the
Refrigeration Installation Contractor.
2.2 INPUT/OUTPUT BOARDS
A.
The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall be required to factory install and
prewire the necessary CPC Multi-flex input and output boards with necessary
transformers in the parallel compressor racks and the air-cooled condensers for
systems control purposes by the corresponding controllers. These boards shall
consist of the necessary CPC Multi-flex 168, Multi-flex 168 AO, Multi-flex 88, Multiflex 88AO, Multi-flex 16, 8RO and ESR boards to control all functions of this
equipment described here within. The selection and layout of these boards within
this equipment shall be the responsibility of the Refrigeration Equipment
Manufacturer. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall prewire all power,
control, and communications wiring within this equipment to the maximum possible
extent. A terminal strip shall be prewired within this equipment for all input and
output field wiring terminations.
B.
The parallel compressor racks shall each be designed to have a minimum total of
four spare digital outputs and six spare analog/digital inputs for each refrigeration
system.
2.3 SENSOR/DIGITAL CONTROL INPUTS
A. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall be required to factory install and
prewire the necessary CPC sensor/digital inputs in the parallel compressor racks and
air-cooled condensers for monitoring by the corresponding controllers. The sensors,
transducers, and relays required for all sensors/digital inputs not noted as Field
Installed shall be provided and factory installed by the Refrigeration Equipment
Manufacturer. The following is a summary for each type of equipment of the minimum
sensor/digital inputs required:
1. Each Parallel Compressor Rack:
a. One suction pressure transducer per suction group.
b. One discharge pressure transducer per rack.
c. One receiver level transducer (vertical).
d. One refrigerant leak detection transducer (MRLDS) for the specified
refrigerant.
e. One subcooler inlet temperature sensor.
f. One subcooler outlet temperature sensor.
g. One compressor proof digital input for each compressor.
h. One phase loss monitor digital input.
i. One rack failure digital input. Each compressor oil failure switch and
high pressure switch wired to provide single input.
j. One digital input (SPST switch) per CDS valve for service shutdown.
k. Pressure transducer on the drop leg.
2. Each Air Cooled Condenser:
a. One outdoor ambient temperature sensor, tie into air cooled condenser
control panel. FIELD INSTALLED.
b. One digital input each for VFD Run, VFD Bypass and VFD Fault located
in VFD Bypass Panel.
~ 12 ~
3. AI Panel, Typical of 2:
a. The specified temperature sensors for the specified individual
refrigeration circuits as shown on the Refrigeration plans by REM(walkin coolers, walk-in freezers and refrigerated prep areas only). FIELD
INSTALLED.
b. The specified door switch digital inputs for the specified individual
refrigeration circuits as shown on the Refrigeration plans by REM(all
walk-ins only). FIELD INSTALLED.
B. All factory installed CPC temperature sensors shall be mechanically fastened to the
appropriate copper pipe, and wrapped in a permanent insulated cover.
C. All factory installed transducers must be strategically located to prevent damage and
inaccurate readings due to pressure surges.
2.4 CONTROL OUTPUTS
A. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall be required to factory install and
prewire the necessary CPC outputs in the parallel compressor racks and air-cooled
condensers for systems control purposes by the corresponding controllers. The control
outputs not noted as Field Installed shall be provided and factory installed by the
Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer with the noted failsafe wiring for controller failure
(NC-normally closed; NO-normally open). The following is a summary for each type of
equipment of the minimum control outputs required:
1. Each Parallel Compressor Rack:
a. One output for each compressor (NC).
b. One output for each individual refrigeration circuit for Parker Sport
suction EPR valve (where applicable) as specified on the Refrigeration
Controls plans (NC)
c. One output for defrost mode (Electric defrost circuits only). (NO)
d. One analog output for each individual refrigeration circuit from the CPC
Multi-flex ESR board to the corresponding circuit Sporlan CDS electronic
evaporator control valve. (12V)
e. One output for evap cooler fans, electrical defrost only. (NO)
f. Two ouputs for subcooler control with DPDT switch.
2. Air-cooled Condensers:
a. One output for each condenser fan in condenser control panel. (NC).
b. One output each for VFD Run (NC) and VFD Bypass (NC) located in
VFD Bypass Panel.
c. One 0-10v Analog Output for inverter speed signal.
3. AI Panel, Typical of 2:
a. One ESR output per CDS valve
b. One output per door alarm light/strobe.
B. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall wire all specified wiring through the
two-pole toggle control switches as specified in the General Conditions section of this
specification unless otherwise noted above.
~ 13 ~
2.5 LOOSE COMPONENTS: REFRIGERATION (FIELD)

A. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall be required to supply the following
loose CPC components for field installation as shown on the Energy Management (EM)
plans:
1. Two CPC temperature sensor for ambient temperature (located at condenser),
501-1121.
2. One CPC temperature sensor for each walk-in cooler, walk-in freezer, and
refrigerated prep area, 201-2112.
3. One CPC E2 alarm panel, 851-0361.
4. Seven magnetic door switches, GE 2202AU-L.
5. Seven door alarm light/strobe, Potter CSH-1224W-GW.
6. Seven 4 x 6 blue on white engraved plastic tags, Door Alarm.
7. 1/18/2012All loose components shall be shipped with the rack.
END OF SECTION 5
~ 14 ~
SECTION 6 - STORE DRAWING PACKAGE

A. The Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturer shall be responsible for a complete set of
refrigeration/EMS(HVAC, lighting & Refrigeration) construction and requirement
drawings.
B. A 90% set of refrigeration drawings are due to the architect 10 working days after
receipt of the fixture floor plan and/or the initial A&E kickoff meeting.
C. The drawing package will include the following items
1. Complete refrigeration schedule with line sizing.
2. Refrigeration fixture plan with case dimensioning.
3. Refrigeration plumbing plan with dimensioned case floor sinks and walk in box
floor sink locations.
4. Refrigeration electrical plan with dimensioned electrical stub ups, refrigeration
system electrical requirements and refrigeration/HVAC EMS requirements.
5. Refrigeration piping plan with dimensioned stub ups and pipe routing.
6. Refrigerated equipment cuts for cases, coils, racks and condensers.
7. Refrigeration rack layout on top of box and condenser layout on roof.
D. The REM is responsible to incorporate all floor plan updates into the drawings and
deliver to architect within 5 working days or sooner if required.
E. The REM is responsible for coordinating the refrigeration plans with the architect,
structural engineer, plumbing engineer, electrical engineer and HVAC engineer.
F. The REM is responsible for responding to all applicable plan check corrections.
G. The REM shall provide PE stamped and signed drawings for city submittal as required.
H. The REM will respond to any contractor RFIs in a timely manner.
I. The REM is responsible for due diligences with the Authorities Having Jurisdiction
concerning the need for leak detection and coordinate with the A&E team.
END OF SECTION 6
~ 15 ~

Project Manual - Building 200 - Sugarloaf Market

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Project Manual - Building 200 - Sugarloaf Market

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

PEACHTREE INDUSTRIAL BLVD. & SUGARLOAF PKWY.

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

PEACHTREE INDUSTRIAL BLVD. & SUGARLOAF PKWY.

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SPROUTS FARMERS MARKET

SPROUTS FARMERS MARKET #522

DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 02 CIVIL SITE WORK

EROSION & SEDIMENT CONTROL

SPROUTS FARMERS MARKET #522

DIVISION 02 CIVIL SITE WORK (continued)

ARCHITECTURAL STONE VENEER

DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTIC

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING - TREMCO

SPROUTS FARMERS MARKET #522

DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE (continued)

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

DIVISION 08 DOORS AND WINDOWS

INTERIOR STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING

DIVISION 12 NOT USED

AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM

DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT USED

SPROUTS FARMERS MARKET #522

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

SPROUTS FARMERS MARKET #522

END TABLE OF CONTENTS

SPROUTS FARMERS MARKET #522

SPROUTS FARMERS MARKET #522

FUQUA DEVELOPMENT LLC

SPROUTS FARMERS MARKET

A.V. SCHWAN & ASSOCIATES, INC.

HENDERSON ENGINEERS, INC.

HENDERSON ENGINEERS, INC.

SPROUTS FARMERS MARKET

WATER & SEWER:

WATER RESOURCES DEPARTMENT

GWINNETT COUNTY FIRE MARSHALL

GWINNETT COUNTY DEPT. OF PLANNING/DEVELOPMENT

GEORIGA NATURAL GAS

SPROUTS FARMERS MARKET #522

LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

SITE PLAN (REFERENCE)

FIXTURE PLAN - SCHEME 1F DATED 3-23-15

LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

SPROUTS FARMERS MARKET #522

GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES

ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS, LEGENDS AND NOTES

MECHANICAL NOTES AND SYMBOLS

FIRE ALARM GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS, AND SEQUENCE OF

LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

SPROUTS FARMERS MARKET #522

PLUMBING SCHEDULES, NOTES AND SYMBOLS

LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

This page intentionally left blank

SPROUTS FARMERS MARKET #522

SECTION 01230 SUBSTITUTIONS

This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

SPROUTS FARMERS MARKET #522

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM